Untitled

NSCP C101-15
EIJ(!_/Op
I AL
U L
E F
ILl I E
2015
VOLUME I
BUILDINGS, TOWERS AND
OTHER VERTICAL STRUCTURES
SEVENTH EDITION
First Printing, 2016
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.

Suite 713, Future Point Plaza Condominium 1
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@gmail.com
Website: http://www.aseponline.org
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 1st Printing, 2016
i
PREFACE TO THE NSCP VOLUME 1, SEVENTH EDITION, 2015
1. Introduction
ASEP recognizes the need for an up-to-date structural code addressing the design and installation of structural systems
through requirements emphasizing performance. The new National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP Volume I) is
designed to meet these needs through various model codes/regulations, generally from the United States, to safeguard the
public health and safety nationwide.
This' updated Structural Code establishes muumum requirements for structural systems using prescriptive and
performance-based provisions. It is founded on broad-based principles that make possible the use of new materials and
new building designs. Also, this code reflects the latest seismic design practice for earthquake-resistant structures.
2. Changes and Developments
In its drive to upgrade and update the NSCP, the ASEP Codes and Standards Committee initially wanted to adopt the latest
editions of American code counterparts. However, for cases where available local data is limited to support the upgrade,
then some provisions and procedures of the NSCP 71h edition were retained.
This NSCP 7th edition is referenced from the following:

a. Uniform Building Code UBC-1997
b. International Building Code rsC-2009
c. American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI 7-10
d. American Concrete Institute AC131S-l4M
e. American Institute for Steel Construction AISC-05 with Supplementary Seismic Provisions
f. American Iron and Steel Institute AISI S 100-2007
g. Reinforced Masonry Engineering Handbook of America
h. Concrete Masonry Handbook, 6th Edition
1. American National Standard Institute ANSI EIArrIA-222-G-I-2007
j. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards
Significant revisions are summarized as follows:

a. Chapter I - General Requirements
The changes made in this chapter are the following:
a.I Section 102 - Definition of Failure
a.2 Section 103 - Classification of Structures
School buildings of more than one story, hospitals, designated evacuation centers, structures
are under the essential facilities category. Section 104 - Design Requirements
Churches, Mosque and other related religious structures are under the special occupancy
category Section 104-Design Requirements.
The provision lor deflection of any structural member under the serviceability requirement is
deleted. This requirement for concrete and steel is specified in Chapters 4 and 5 respectively.
New requirements are added to the design review section.
a.3 Section \05 - Posting and Instrumentation
ASSOCiationof Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

iv
The provision of installed recording accelerograph is adjusted.
a.4 Inclusion of Appendix I-A: Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of
Structures 20 IS
a.5 Inclusion of Appendix 1-8: Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording
Instrumentation for Buildings
b. Chapter 2 - Minimum Design Loads
The changes made in this chapter are the following:
b.1 Section 203 - Combination of Loads
The load factors and load combinations are revised particularly the load combinations
including wind load.
b.2 Section 205 - Live Loads
Additional loads are incorporated in the table for minimum uniform and concentrated loads
particularly the parking garage and ramp live load.
b.3 Section 207 - Wind Loads
Wind load provisions, which were previously based on ASCE7-0S, are updated based on
ASCE7-10. In this edition, three different wind contour maps for the entire Philippine
archipelago are generated and provided for determining the basic wind speeds for different
categories of building occupancies as defined in Table 103-1. These maps provide basic wind
speeds that are directly applicable for determining pressures for design strength. Strength
design wind load factor is 1.0; whereas, allowable stress design wind load factor is 0.6.
Generally, basic wind speeds correspond to 3%, 7% and 15% probability of exceedance in 50
years (MRI = 1700,700 and 300 years, respectively). Four (4) permitted procedures in
determining the design wind loads for main wind-force resisting systems (MWFRS), for other
structures and building appurtenances and for components and cladding (C&C) are provided
such as;
• directional procedure for buildings of all heights,

• envelope procedure for low-rise buildings,
• directional procedure for other structures and building appurtenances and
analytical procedure for components & cladding, and
o wind tunnel procedure
The ANSI EIAITIA-222-G-200S and ANSI EIAITIA-222G-J-2007 are now fully referenced
for computing wind loads on steel antenna towers and antenna supporting structures.
bA Section 208 - Earthquake Loads
The near-source factors for 2-km distance from a causative fault is included in addition to 5-
km, l C-krn, l S-km distance and beyond IS-km distance.
ASCE/SEI 7-10, using spectral acceleration, is recognized as an alternative procedure in the

determination of the earthquake loads.
c. Chapter 3- Earthworks and Foundations
The revisions made in this chapter are the following:
c.1 Provisions pertaining to the conduct and interpretation of foundation investigations for cases
involving liquefiable, expansive or questionable soils are adopted;
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 1s1 Printing, 2016
v
c.2 The section on footings is amended to incorporate provisions for differential settlement,
design loads and vibratory loads;
c.3 The section on pile foundations is amended to incorporate new provisions on splicing of
concrete piles; and
cA The section on special foundations, slope stabilization and materials of construction are added.
c.5 Provisions for construction in Zone 4 pertaining to reinforcement of Precast Prestressed Piles
have been revised to ensure consistency with ACI 31S.
c.G The figure for cut slopes has been amended for clarity;
c.7 The figure for fill slopes has been amended for clarity and some provisions have been
modified;
c.S A table on the minimum required number of boreholes has been added to the section on
foundation investigation;
c.9 Provisions pertaining to minimum dimensions of ditches have been modified;

c.IO The section on excavations and fills has been amended to incorporate provisions for scouring
and erosion protection as well as support of excavations and open cuts;
c.ll Provision pertaining to general pile requirements have been expand to include design of piles
and pile groups subjected to lateral loads.
c.12 A Section on MSE Structures and Similar Reinforced Embankments and Fills has been added.
d. Chapter 4 - Structural Concrete
To reflect the reorganization of ACI 318-14 which contained a number of significant technical changes, the
ASEP adopted similar changes in the NSCP 2015 7th Edition. The latest ACI 318 was reorganized as a member-
based document, i. e., particular member type, such as beam, column, or slab will have separate sub-sections for
all requirements to design that particular member type. This will eliminate the need to flip through several
Sections to comply with all the necessary design requirements for a particular structural member, as was
necessary with the old organization format.
d.l Section 40 I: General
General information regarding the scope and applicability of NSCP 2015, Vol. I is provided. Additional sub-
section on interpretation is included to help users better understand Chapter 4, Structural Concrete.
d.2 Section 402: Notation and Terminology
The definition for hoops has been modified becanse the use of interlocking headed bars is a concern regarding
the possibility that it will not be adequately interlocked and because the heads could become disengaged under
complex loadings well into the non-linear range of response. It is now defined as a closed tie or continuously
wound tie, made up of one or several reinforcement elements, each having seismic hooks at both ends.
A definition for special seismic systems, a term used in Sections 418 and 419, has been added.
d.3 Section 403: Referenced Standards
The following referenced specifications have been added to Section 403.2.4:
• ASTM A370-14, Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
• ASTM Al085-13, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow
Structural Sections (HSS)
• ASTM CI73ICI73M-14, Standard Test Method for Air- Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
Volumetric Method
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

vi
• ASTM CI582/CI582M-ll, Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-
Induced Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
A new referenced specification from Australia and New Zealand, Section 403.2.6 is added. These
standards were included as ACI 318 has no provisions related to Qualifications on the Use of Quenched
Tempered QTlThermo-Mechanically Treated Reinforcement, which are the type manufactured, sold,
and commonly used for building construction in the Philippines:
• AS/NZS 4671: 2001, Steel Reinforcing Materials

o NZS 3101: 2006, Part 1 and Part 2, Concrete Structures Standard, and Design of
Concrete Structures
• NZS 3109, Amendment 2, Welding of Reinforcing Steel
• AS/NZS 1554.3: 2008, Part 3, Structural Steel Welding of Reinforcing Steel
The following referenced specifications have been deleted:
o ASTM CI 09/C 109M-08, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 50 mm Cube Specimens)
• ASTM C I92/C192M-07 , Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Laboratory
Several referenced standards and specifications have been updated, as in most cases with every edition
of the NSCP. Note that the edition of every referenced standard is important. The NSCP does not
necessarily adopt new editions of referenced standards unless they are vetted before the publication of
each edition of the standard.
d.4 Section 404: Structural System Requirements
This new Section has been added to Chapter 4 to introduce structural system requirements.
This Section contains Sub-sections on Materials, Design Loads, Structural System and Load
Paths, Structural Analysis, Strength, Serviceability, Durability, Sustainability, Structural
Integrity, Fire Resistance, Requirements for Specific Types of Construction, Construction and
Inspection, and Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures. Most of these Sub-sections refer to
the other Sections in the NSCP. The Sub-section on construction and inspection, for instance,
refers to Section 426. In the areas for Sustainability and Fire Resistance, the NSCP does not
have specific requirements. This Sub-section on Sustainability allows the licensed design
professional to specify in the construction documents, sustainability requirements in addition
to the strength, serviceability, and durability requirements of the NSCP. The strength,
serviceability, and durability requirements are required to take precedence over sustainability
considerations, though these requirements are generally in harmony with sustainable
structures. In the Sub-section on Fire Resistance, the NSCP refers to the fire-protection
requirements of the NSCP Chapter 4, Sub-section 420.6.1. However, if the National Building
Code of the Philippines requires a greater concrete cover, such greater thickness shall govern.
d.5 Section 405: Loads
The following modification has been made in the provision for live load reduction because
there are stiIlunincorporated areas where there may not be included in the previous editions of
the NSCP. The 7'h Edition, Sub-section 405.2.3 - Live load reductions shall be permitted in
accordance with the National Building Code of the Philippines, or in its absence, in
accordance with ASCE/SEJ 7.
For many Code revision cycles, ACI 318 retained provisions for service-level earthquake
forces in the design load combinations. In 1993, ASCE/SEI 7 converted earthquake forces to
strength-level forces and reduced the earthquake load factor to 1.0, and the model building
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, r" Printing. 2016
vii
....
~...
- ....
-,,----=""'"""'~;:;~,~-.-.,.-.~, ....
,...
".--..
-----.- -..,--,--.-.-----~---
codes followed suit. In modern building codes around the world, earthquake loads are now
strength-level forces. Any references to service-level earthquake forces have been deleted.
d.6 Section 406: Structural Analysis
The following new item has been added in Sub-section 406.6.2.3:

(b) For frames or continuous construction, it shall be permitted to assume the intersecting member
regions are rigid.
Previous NSCP 61h Edition has been silent on the use of finite element analysis (FEA), though it is now
frequently used. Sub-section 406.9 now has provisions that are intended to explicitly allow the use of
FEA and to provide a framework for the future expansion of FE A provisions, but not as a guide toward
the selection and use of FEA software. The new Sub-section on diaphragms and collectors makes
explicit reference to the use of FEA, which makes it imperative that the NSCP 7'11 Edition recognize the
acceptability of its use.
d.7 Section 40S: Two-Way Slabs
Sub-section 4IS.10.1 (corresponding to ACI 318M-II, Section 18.9.1), says that a minimum
area of bonded reinforcement shall be provided in all flexural members with unbonded
prestressing tendons. The purpose of the minimum unbonded reinforcement over the tops of
columns is to distribute cracking caused by high local flexural tensile stresses in areas of peak
negative moments. However, the high local flexural tensile stresses are not unique to slabs
with unbonded tendons. The new reorganized Sub-section 408.6.2.3 (corresponding to ACI
318M-14 Section 8.6.2.3) requires the same minimum reinforcement in slabs with unbonded
or bonded tendons, except that the area of bonded tendons is considered effective in
controlling cracking.
It was also decided by the ACI 318 Committee, that if the same bonded reinforcement were
required for both bonded and unbonded post-tensioned two-way systems, the structural
integrity requirements for both systems should also be the same. The structural integrity
requirements in ACI 3 ISM- 11, Section 18.12.6 applied to two-way post-tensioned slab
systems with unbonded tendons only. The structural integrity requirements in ACI 3l8M-14
Section 8.7.5.6 (corresponding to the NSCP 2015, Sub-section 408.7.5.6) now apply to two-
way post-tensioned slab systems with bonded as well as unbonded tendons.
d.S Section 409: Beams

The use of open web reinforcement for torsion and shear in slender spandrel beams by the
precast concrete industry as an alternative to the closed stirrups traditionally mandated by this
Code. Eliminating closed stirrups is desirable because they cause reinforcement congestion;
production costs also increase significantly because pre-tensioning strand must be threaded
through the closed stirrups.
A new relevant Sub-section 409.5.4.7 for solid precast sections is added to the NSCP 7'''
Edition.
d.9 Section 412: Diaphragms
For the first time, a new Section 412, added design provisions for diaphragms in buildings
constructed in areas of low seismicity (Zone 2) The new Section applies "to the design of non-
prestressed and prestressed diaphragms, including:
(a). Diaphragms that are cast-in-place slabs
(b). Diaphragms that comprise a cast-in-place topping slab on precast elements

viii
(c). Diaphragms that comprise precast elements with end strips formed by either a east-
in-place concrete topping slab or edge beams
(d). Diaphragms of interconnected precast elements without cast-in-place concrete

topping
d.IO Section 418: Earthquake-Resistant Structures

There are a number of significant and substantive changes to this Section.
Column confinement - The ability of the concrete core of a concrete reinforced column to sustain compressive
strains tends to increase with confinement pressure. Confinement requirements for columns of special moment
frames, and for columns not designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting system in structures assigned to
seismic zone 4 (similar to ASCE 7-10 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F), with high axial load or high
concrete compressive strength are significantly different.
Transverse reinforcement - One important new requirement for special moment frame columns are included in
Sub-sections 418.7.5.2 and 418.7 .5A. There are new restrictions on the use of headed reinforcement to make up
hoops.
Special moment frame beam-column joints - For beam-column joints of special moment frames, clarification of
the development length of the beam longitudinal reinforcement that is hooked, requirements for joints with
headed longitudinal reinforcement, and restrictions on joint aspect ratio are new. For beam-column joints of
special moment frames, clarification of development length of beam longitudinal reinforcement that is hooked,
requirements for joints with headed longitudinal reinforcement, and restrictions on joint aspect ratio are new.
Special shear walls - Subsection 418.10 (equivalent to AC1 3IS-14M-14 Section 18.10, previously
ACI 318M-II Section 21. 9), has been extensively revised in view of the performance of buildings in the Chile
earthquake of 2010 and the Christchurch, New Zealand, earthquakes of 2011, as wells as full-scale reinforced
concrete building tests. In these earthquakes and laboratory tests, concrete spalling and vertical reinforcement
buckling were at times observed at wall boundaries.
For ASTM A6l5 Grade 420 bars used as longitudinal reinforcement in special moment frames and special shear
walls, the NSCP 7'h Edition now requires the same minimum elongation as ASTM A706 reinforcement.
d.ll Section 419: Concrete: Design and Durability Requirements

Quite a few changes have been made in concrete durability requirements, which are now located in this Section.
d.12 Section 420: Steel Reinforcement Propertles, Durability and Embedments
The definition of yield strength of high-strength reinforcement for Grade 420 (Grade 60) in this Section is now,
for the first time, the same as that in ASTM specifications, except for bars with less than 420 MPa, the yield
strength shall be taken as the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 percent.
Deformed and plain stainless steel wire and welded wire conforming to ASTM AI022 is now permitted to be
used as concrete reinforcement.
Sub-section 420.2.2.5 requires "Deformed non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcement resistmg earthquake

moment, axial force, or both, in special moment frames, special structural walls, and all the components of
special structural walls including coupling beams and wall piers" to be ASTM A706 Grade 420 (Grade 60),
ASTM 615 Grade 275 (Grade 40) or Grade 420 (Grade 60) reinforcement is permitted if two supplementary
requirements are met, which are already part of the ASTM A 706 specification. A third supplementary
requirement is now added for ASTM A615 (Grade 60) reinforcement to be permitted for use in special moment
frames, special structural walls. The minimum elongation in 200 111m(8") must now be the same as that ASTM
A6l5 (Grade 60) reinforcement.
One aspect of the Code compliance that the Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines is cautioning
Designers and Constructors alike, is the introduction of ASTM 615 Grade 520 (Grade 75) in the Philippine
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 1$1 Printing. 2016
ix
market. Since this was not covered by previous editions of the NSCP Vol. 1, it creates an impression of an
unregulated use of a new high-strength reinforcement grade. NSCP ill Edition.
To put it clearly, Sub-section 420.2.2.5, corresponding to ACI 318M-14 Section 20.2.2.5, specifies the
use of deformed non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced moment,
axial force, or both, in special moment frames, special structural walls, and all components of special
structural walls, including coupling beams, and wall piers which shall be in accordance with (a) or (b):
(a). ASTM A 706M, Grade 420
(b). ASTM A615M, Grade 280
There was no mention that ASTM A615M, Grade 520, was allowed, although the use of micro-alloyed
high-strength reinforcement may be allowed in the future through the issuance of a new ASTM or
updated standard, and with proper validation by the Department of Trade and Industry's Bureau of
Standards. It will be premature to allow its use for special moment frames, special structural walls, and
all components of special structural walls, including coupling beams, and wall piers for Buildings
located in areas of high seismicity (zone 4). The same restrictions indicated in Sub-section 420.7.6, on
the use of quenched-tempered thermo-mechanically treated (QTITMT) reinforcing bars in structures
located in seismic zone 4 for Grade 420 reinforcement, shall also be applied to Grade 520, unless
proven in subsequent studies and tests.
d.13 Section 422: Sectional Strength
The following are the changes in Section 422:
For prestressed members, a new equation for the nominal axial strength at zero eccentricity has been
introduced in Sub-section 422.4.2.3.
New Sub-section 422.4.3.1, which requires that the nominal axial tensile strength of a non-prestressed,
composite, or prestressed member, not to be taken greater than the maximum nominal axial tensile
strength of member.
d.14 Section 425: Reinforcement Details
Two changes shown in Table 7 (part of Table 425.3.2) are made to eliminate the differences between
the required tail extension of a 90-degree or 135- degree standard hook, subject to a minimum of 75
rnm (3").
Mechanical or welded splices with strengths below 125% of the yield strength of the spliced reinforcing
bars are no longer permitted. The associated stagger requirements have been deleted. Thus there is no
longer a need to specify "full" mechanical or "full" welded splices.
d.LS Section 426: Construction Documents and Inspection
In this section, the user will probably require some time to get used to, it starts with the following:
426.1.1 This Sub-section addresses (a) through (c):
(a) Design information that the licensed design professional shall specify in the construction
documents,
(b) Compliance requirements that the licensed design professional shall specify in the
construction documents,
(c) Inspection requirements that the licensed design professional shall specify in the
construction documents,
Thus, construction and inspection requirements have been consolidated, and they are now related to
construction documents. The construction requirements are designated either as "design information" or
"compliance requirements." These are largely existing material that has been rearranged. The

x
inspection requirements in Sub-section 426.13 are taken from Chapter 17 of the 2015 international
Building Code (!BC) and were previously not part of ACI 318.
Provisions in ACI 318-11 and earlier editions, which explained basic statistical considerations
in mixture proportioning, are no longer found in ACI 318-14. Instead, ACI 301-10,
Specifications for Structural Concrete, is referenced.
These are some other changes in the makeup ofNSCP 2016 7~1Edition that should be noted:
I. There are two new Sections: Section 404, Structural System Requirements and
Section 412, Diaphragms.
2. Section 422, Structural Plain Concrete, now Section 414.
3. Section 423, Anchoring to Concrete, is now Section 417, with no significant

changes.
4. Section 421, Earthquake-Resistant Structures, now Section 418.
5. Section 427, Strut-and-Tie Models is now Section 423, with no significant

changes.
6. Section 420, Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures, is now Section 427.
7. Section 419, Shells and Folded Plates, is now Section 428.
8. Section 424, Alternative Design Method, now Section 429, is adapted from
earlier editions of the NSCP.
9. Section 425, Alternative Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete

Flexural and Compression Members, and Section 426, Alternative Load and
Strength Reduction Factors, have been discontinued.
10. On the other hand, Section 416, Precast Concrete, and Section 418, Prestressed
Concrete, no longer exist as separate entities. The provisions of these Sections
are now spread over several of the new Sections.
Sub-section 418.18, Requirements for post-tensioning ducts and grouting have also been removed as
being outdated. The Commentary now provides specification guidance.
e. Chapter 5: Structural Steel.
ASEP adapted the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 14th Edition in this updated
Structural Steel code. The revisions made in this chapter are the following:
e.1 The entire Structural Steel chapters are streamlined placing all chapter definitions under one
Definition heading, tables are immediately shown where they are first mentioned, figures drawn
larger, equation are all in boldface, extraneous user notes are removed, essential in-text definitions
italicized and in-text equation terms are written in boldface for easy reference.
e.2 Change of headings and terms.
501.3.5 Filler Metal and Flux for Welding to 501.3.5 Consumables for Welding
510.10.3 Web Crippling to Web Local Crippling
557.5 Special Fabrication Requirements. Weld tabs changed to Run-off tabs under
Exception.
A-6.3 Beams changed to Beams Bracing
e.3 Creation of new subtopic.

APPENDIX A-4
xi
STRUCTURAL FIRE
A-4.2.3.1 Thermal Elongation is created under A-4.2.3 Material Strengths at Elevated
Temperatures
APPENDIX A-6
STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS
A-6.4 Beam-Column Bracing
SECTION 529 BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF)

A section 529.3 was created as heading for 529.3.1 and 529.3.2
e.4 Revision in load factor
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
2010: ~c =O.60(LRFD) o, =2.s(ASD)
2015: C/Jc = O.65(LRFD) n, = 2. 31 (ASD)

e.5 Revision in equations
B-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES
511.2.2c Branches with Axial Loads in K-Connections
(511.2.7)
(m.2·7)
2010: ; 2015:
APPENDIX A-3 - DESIGN FOR FATIGUE
A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts

7r
At = -4 (db - O. 938ZP)Z
; 2015:
f. Chapter 6: Wood.
The revisions made in this Chapter are the following:
f. I Section 616 - Design Provisions and Equations: The NDS 2015 Chapter 3 is adopted
almost in its entirety;
f.2 Section 617 - Sawn Lumber: The NDS 2015 Chapter 4 is adopted almost in its entirety;
f.3 Section 618 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber: The NDS 2015 Chapter 5 is adopted
almost in its entirety;
fA Tables 619. I-3 and 619.1-4 are revised based on NDS 2015; and
[.5 Other Sections affected are adjusted accordingly.
g. Chapter 7: Masonry
The revisions made in this chapter are the following:
g.1 The specified yield strength of steel reinforcement is 420MPa instead of 413 MPa / 415 MPa;

xii
g.2 Section 710.6.3 and Section 710.7.1
l Ornm diameter instead of No.9 gage wire
g.3 Section 713.9.1

20mm diameter instead of 19-9age
25ml1ldiameter instead of24-gage
3. Acknowledgment
The ASEP Codes and Standards Committee are indebted to Pbilippine Institute of Volcanology and Seismology
(PHIVOLCS) and to Dir. Renato V. Solidum, Ph. D. for his unselfish contribution specifically on Section 208 of
this code.
ASEP acknowledges the contribution of Dr. Teresito C. Bacoleol and Ms. Madeline Cabologan of PHIVOLCS for
the seismic maps used in this code.
ASEP acknowledges the contribution of Engr. Carlos M. Villaraza for his unselfish contribution on Chapter 2
Seismic/Earthquake Chapter.
The contributions of ASEP members and other users of this code who have suggested improvements, identified
errors and recommended items are recognized.
ASEP also acknowledges the contribution of the industry partners, companies and individuals, who continue to
support ASEP's numerous undertakings.
The ASEP Codes and Standards Committee also acknowledge Arch. Avigaile Genota Riola who designs the covers
of the NSCP Volume 1,2010 Edition and NSCP Volume 1,2015 Edition.
xiii
NSCP C101-15
NATIONAL STRUCTURAL CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES

VOLUME I
OTHER. VERTICAL STRUCTURES
SEVENTH EDITION, 2015

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Website:bttp:/lwww.aseponline.org
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume J, 7th Edition, 2015

CHAPTER 1 - General Requirements 1-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 101 2
TITLE, PURPOSE AND SCOPE 2
101.1 Special Foundation Systems 2
I01.2 Purpose 2
101.3 Scope 2
101.4 Alternative Systems 2
SECTION 102 3
DEFINITIONS 3
SECTION 103 6
CLASSIFICATION 6
OF STRUCTURES 6
103.1 Nature ofOccupancy 6
SECTION 104 7
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 7
104. I Strength Requirement. 7
104.2 Serviceability Requirement 7
I 04.3 Analysis 7
J 04.4 Foundation Investigation 8
J04.5 Design Review 8
SECTION 105 9
POSTING AND INST.RUMENTATION 9
105.1 Posting of Live Loads 9
105.2 Earthquake-Recording Instrumentation 9
SECTION 106 9
SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS 9
106.1 General 9
106.2 Specifications 9
106.3 Design Drawings 9
SECTION 107 10
STRUCTURAL INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS 10
107.1 General 10
107.2 Definitions 10
107.3 Structural Inspector 10
107.4 Inspection Program 11
.107.5 Types of Work for Inspection 11
107.6 Approved Fabricators 13
107.7 Prefabricated Construction 13
107.8 Non-Destructive Testing 14
107.9 Structural Observation 15
APPENDICES
I-A - Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of Structures 2015 IA-l
I-A - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings IB-J
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

1-2 CHAPTER 1 - General Requirements
101.4 Alternative Systems
The provisions of this code are not intended to prevent the

use of any material, alternate design or method of
10}.1 Special Foundation Systems construction not specifically prescribed by this code,
provided any alternate has been permitted and its use
These regulations shall be known as the National authorized by the Building Official (see Section 102).
Structural Code of the Philippines 2015, Volume I, 7th
Edition, and may be cited as such and will be referred to Sponsors of any system of design or construction not
herein as "this code." within the scope of this code, the adequacy of which had
been shown by successful use and by analysis and test,
101.2 Purpose shall have the right to present the data on which their
design is based to the Building Official or to a board of
The purpose of this code is to provide minimum examiners appointed by the Building Official or the project
requirements for the design of buildings, towers and other owner/developer. This board shall be composed of
vertical structures, and minimum standards and guidelines competent structural engineers and shall have authority to
to safeguard life or limb, property and public welfare by investigate the data so submitted, to require tests if any, and
regulating and controlling the design, construction, to formulate rules governing design and construction of
quality of materials pertaining to the structural aspects of such systems to meet the intent of this code. These rules,
all buildings and structures within this jurisdiction. when approved and promulgated by the Building Official,
shall be of the same force and effect as the provisions of
101.3 Scope this code
The provisions of this code shall apply to the construction,

alteration, moving, demolition, repair, maintenance and use
of buildings, towers and other vertical structures within this
jurisdiction.
Special structures such as but not limited to single family

dwellings, storage silos, liquid product tanks and
hydraulic flood control structures, should be referred to
special state of practice literature but shall refer to
provisions of this code as a minimum wherever
applicable.
For additions, alterations, maintenance, and change in use

of buildings and structures, see Section 108.
Where, in any specific case, different sections of this code

specify different materials, methods of construction or
other requirements, the most restrictive provisions shall
govern except in the case of single family dwellings. Where
there is a conflict between a general requirement and a
specific requirement, the specific requirement shall be
applicable.
~~---.--.----- -.- -.- ._-

CHAPTER 1 - General Requirement 1-3
BUILDING OFFICIAL is the officer or other designated

authority charged with the administration and enforcement
of this code, or the Building Official's duly authorized
representative.
For the purpose of this code, certain terms, phrases, words
and their derivatives shall be construed as specified in this CIVIL ENGINEER is a professional engineer licensed to
chapter and elsewhere in this code where specific practice in the field of civil engineering.
definitions are provided. Terms, phrases and words used in
the singular include the plural and vice versa. Terms, CIVIL ENGINEERING is the science or profession in
phrases and words used in the masculine gender include the which a knowledge of the mathematical and physical
feminine and vice versa. sciences gained by study and practice is applied with
judgement to utilize natural and man-made resources and
The following terms are defined for use in this code: forces in the planning, design, management, construction,
and maintenance of buildings, structures, facilities, and
ALTER or AL TERA TION is any change, addition or utilities in their totality, for the progressive well-being and
modification in construction or occupancy. for the benefit of mankind, enhancing the environment,
community living, industry, and transportation, taking into
APPROVAL shall mean that the proposed work or consideration such aspects as functionality, efficiency,
completed work conforms to this code in the opinion of the economy, safety, and environmental quality.
Building Official.
COMPACTION is the densification of a fill by
APPROVED as to materials and types of construction, mechanical or chemical means.
refers to approval by the Building Official as the result of
investigation and tests conducted by the Building Official, CONSTRUCTION FAILURE is a failure that occurs
or by reason of accepted principles or tests by recognized during construction and they are considered to be either a
authorities, technical or scientific organizations. collapse or distress, of a structural system to such a degree
that it cannot safely serve its intended purpose. I
AS GRADED is the extent of surface conditions on
completion of grading. CONTINUOUS STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
structural inspection where the structural inspector is on the
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION is the site at all times observing the work requiring structural
organization, political subdivision, office or individual inspection.
charged with the responsibility of administering and
enforcing the provisions of this code. EARTH MATERIAL is any rock, natural soil or fill or
any combination thereof.
BEDROCK is in-place solid or altered rock.
ENGINEER-OF-RECORD is a civil engineer responsible
BENCH is a relatively level step excavated into earth for the structural design.
material on which fill is to be placed.
EROSION is the wearing away of the ground surface as a
BORROW is earth material acquired from an off-site result of the movement of wind or water.
location for use in grading on a site.
EXCA VATlON is the mechanical removal of earth
BUILDING is any structure usually enclosed by walls material.
and a roof, constructed to provide support or shelter for an
intended use or occupancy. EXISTING GRADE is the grade prior to grading.
BUILDING, EXISTING is a building erected prior to the FAILURE is defined as an unacceptable difference
adoption of this code, or one for which a legal between expected and observed performance. This
building permit has been issued. definition includes catastrophic structural collapse, but also
includes performance problems that are not necessarily
catastrophic or life-threatening, including "serviceability
problems such as distress, excessive deformation,
premature deterioration of materials, leaking roofs and
facades, and inadequate interior environmental control
systems." In the event of a significant failure, the parties
typically retain experts to determine the cause of the
perceived failure. Occasionally a failure results from a
single condition, but typically, failures result from a LIMITED LOCAL COLLAPSE is a failure of a
combination of mistakes, oversights, miscommunications, structural member without affecting the adjacent members
misunderstandings, ignorance, lapses, slips, incompetence, (e.g. destruction of one or two columns in a multi-bay
intentional violations or non-compliance, and inadequate structure) ..,
quality assurance. The causes for these conditions vary, but
may include simple mistakes (such as sending information OCCUPANCY is the purpose for which a building or
to a structural engineer when it should have been sent to the other structures or part thereof, is used or intended to be
architect), conclusions based on faulty assumptions, an used.
employee's "laziness, ignorance, or malevolent urge,"
fatigue from excessive workload, inadequate training, "time PERIODIC STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is a
boxing" practices used to minimize fees to a client, structural inspection where the inspections are made on a
overreliance on computer-aided design and drafting periodic basis and satisfy the requirements of continuous
(CADD), failure to understand and deliver client inspection, provided this periodic scheduled inspection is
requirements, time pressures to a deliver a project by performed as outlined in the inspection program prepared
certain deadlines, and ineffective coordination and by the structural engineer.
integration of the design team. 2
PREFABRICATED ASSEMBLY is a structural unit, the
FILL is a deposit of earth material placed by artificial integral parts of which have been built up or assembled
means. prior to incorporation in the building.
FINISH GRADE is the final grade of the site that PROFESSiONAL INSPECTION is the inspection
conforms to the approved plan. required by this code to be performed by the civil engineer.
Such inspections include that performed by persons
FORENSIC ENGINEERING is the application of the art supervised by such engineer and shall be sufficient to form
and science of engineering in the jurisprudence system, an opinion relating to the conduct of the work.
requiring the services of legally qualified engineers.
Forensic engineering may include investigation of the PROGRESSIVE COLLAPSE is the spread of an initial
physical causes of accidents and other sources of claims local failure from element to element, eventually resulting
and litigation, preparation of engineering reports, testimony in the collapse of an entire structure or disproportionately
at hearings and trials in administrative or judicial large part of it. "
proceedings, and the rendition of advisory opinions to
assist the resolution of disputes affecting life or property. J ROBUSTNESS is the insensibility of a structure to local
failure. From this definition, it 101l0ws that the robustness
GENERAL COLLAPSE is the immediate, deliberate is a property of the structure:'
demolition of an entire structure by a triggering event (e.g.
explosion). " ROUGH GRADE is the stage at which the grade
approximately conforms to the approved plan.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER is a registered Civil
Engineer with special qualification in the practice of SITE is any lot or parcel of land or contiguous combination
Geotechnical Engineering as recognized by the Board of thereof, under the same ownership, where grading is
Civil Engineering of the Professional Regulation performed or permitted.
Commission as endorsed by the Specialty Division of
Geotechnical Engineering of the Philippine Institute of SLOPE is an inclined ground surface the inclination of
Civil Engineers (PICE). which is expressed as a ratio of vertical distance to
horizontal distance.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING is the application of
the principles of soil and rock mechanics in the SOIL is naturally occurring superficial deposits overlying
investigation, evaluation and design of civil works bedrock.
involving the use of earth materials and foundations and the
inspection or testing of the construction thereof. SOILS ENGINEER See Geotechnical Engineer.
GRADE is the vertical location of the ground surface. SOILS ENGINEERING See Geotechnical Engineering.
GRADING is an excavation or till or combination thereof. STRUCTURE is that which is built or constructed, an
edifice or building of any kind, or any piece of work
KEY is a designed compacted fill placed in a trench artificially built up or composed of parts joined together in
excavated in earth material beneath the toe of a slope. some definite manner.

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER is a registered Civil

Engineer with special qualification in the practice of
Structural Engineering as recognized by the Board of Civil
Engineering of the Professional Regulation Commission or
by the Specialty Division of the Philippine Institute of Civil
Engineers (PICE) together with the Association of
Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP) and
Institution of Specialist Structural Engineers of the
Philippines (ISSEP).
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING is a discipline of civil

engineering dealing with the analysis and design of
structures that support or resist loads insuring the safety of
the structures against natural forces.
STRUCTURAL FAILURE is the reduction of capability

of a structural system or component to such a degree that it
cannot safely serve its intended purpose. 5
Structural failures can be divided into various categories

based on consequential damages to include: Catastrophic
Failure with Loss of Life, Catastrophic Failure in which No
Human Lives are Endangered, Failure Resulting in
Extensive Property Damage, and Failure Resulting in
Reduced Serviceability.'
STRUCTURAL INSPECTION is the visual observation

by a structural inspector of a particular type of construction
work or operation for the purpose of ensuring its general
compliance to the approved plans and specifications and
the applicable workmanship provisions of this code as well
as overall construction safety at various stages of
construction.
STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION is the visual

observation of the structural system by the structural
observer as provided for in Section 107.9.2, for its general
conformance to the approved plans and specifications, at
significant construction stages and at completion of the
structural system. Structural observation does not include
or waive the responsibility for the structural inspections
required by Section 107.1 or other sections of this code.
TERRACE is a relatively level step constructed in the

face of a graded slope surface for drainage and maintenance
purposes.
/ Guide 10 Investigation of Structural Failures, ASCE. /986.

2 The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Technical Council 011
Forensic Engineering.
3 Forensic Engineering .. 2'''' Edition, Keneth L. Carper, Editor, 2001.
4 Robustness a/Buildings ill Structural Codes, Dimitris Diamantidis,
2009
5 Structural Failures ill Buildin s. ASCE. 1981.

Table 103-1 Occupancy Category
OCCUPANCY OCCUPANCY OR .FUNCTION OF

CATEGORY STRUCTURE
Occupancies having surgery and emergency

treatment areas,
103.1 Nature of Occupancy
Fire and police stations,
Buildings and other structures shall be classified, based on Garages and shelters lor emergency vehicles and
the nature of occupancy, according to Table 103-1 for cmergency aircrafl,
purposes of applying wind and earthquake loads in Chapter Structures and shelters in emergency preparedness
2. Each building or other structures shall be assigned to the centers,
highest applicable occupancy category or categories.
Aviation control towers,
Assignment of the same structure to multiple occupancy
categories based on use and the type of loading condition Structures and equipment in communication
centers and other facilities required for emergency
being evaluated (e.g. wind or seismic) shall be permissible. I Essential response,
Facilities
When buildings or other structures have multiple uses Facilities for standby power-generating equipment
lor Category Istructures,
(occupancies), the relationship between the uses of various
parts of the building or other structure and the Tanks or other structures containing housing or
supporting water or other fire-suppression material
independence of the structural system for those various
or equipment required lor the protection of
parts shall be examined. The classification for each Category I, II or I1I,IV and V structres
independent structural system of a multiple-use building or
Public school buildings.
other structure shall be that of the highest usage group in
any part of the building or other structure that is dependent Hospitals,
on that basic structural system. Designated evacuation centers and
Power and communication transmission lines,
Occupancies and structures housing or supporting

toxic or explosive chemicals or substances,
II Hazardous
Facilities Non-building structures storing, supporting or
containing quantities of toxic or explosive
substances.

Table 103-1 (cont'd)Occupancy Category
OCCUPANCY OCCUPANCY OR FUNCTION OF

CATEGORY STRUCTURE
Buildings with an assembly room with an 104.1 Strength Requirement

occupant cupncity of 1,000 or more,
Educational buildings such as museums.
Buildings, towers and other vertical structures and all
libraries. auditorium with a capacity of 300 or portions thereof shall be designed and constructed to
more occupants. sustain, within the limitations specified in this code, all
Buildings used for college or adult education loads set forth in Chapter 2 and elsewhere in this code,
with a capacity of 500 or more occupants. combined in accordance with Section 203.
Institutional buildings with 50 or more
incapacitated patients. but not included in Design shall be in accordance with Strength Design, Load
III Special
Category I. and Resistance Factor Design and Allowable Strength
Occupancy
Structures Mental hospitals, sanitariums, jails, prisons Design methods, as permitted by the applicable material
and other buildings where personal liberties of chapters.
inmates arc similarly restrained,
Churches, Mosques, and other Religion .104.2 Serviceability Requirement

Facilities,
All structures with an occupancy of 5,000 or 104.2.1 General
more persons,
Structures and equipment in power-generating Structural systems and members thereof shall be designed
stations, and other public utility facilities not to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections, lateral drifts,
included in Category I or Category II, and vibration, or any other deformations that adversely affect
required for continued operation.
the intended use and performance of buildings, towers and
other vertical structures. The design shall also consider
IV Standard All structures housing occupancies or durability, resistance to exposure to weather or aggressive
Occupancy havingfunctionsnotlistedinf.ategory I, II
Structures
environment, crack control, and other conditions that affect
orlllandCategoryV.
the intended use and performance of buildings, towers and
other vertical structures.
V Miscellaneous Privategarages.carports,shedsandfences
Structures over 1.5mhigh.
104.3 Analysis
Any system or method of construction to be used shall be

based on a rational analysis in accordance with well-
established principles of mechanics that take into account
equilibrium, general stability, geometric compatibility and
both short-term and long-term material properties.
Members that tend to accumulate residual deformations
under repeated service loads shall have included in their
analysis the added eccentricities expected to occur during
their service life. Such analysis shall result in a system
that provides a complete load path capable of transferring
all loads and forces from their point of origin to the
load- resisting elements. The analysis shall include, but not
be limited to, the provisions of Sections 104.3.1
throughI04.3.3.
104.3.1 Stability against Overturning
Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning

effects caused by the lateral forces specified with adequate
Factor of Safety (FOS). See Section 206.6 for retaining
walls, Section 207 for wind loading and Section 208 for
earthquake loading.

104.3.2 Self-Straining Forces The following may also be verified, that there are no major
errors in pertinent calculations, drawings and specifications
Provisions shall be made for anticipated self-straining and may also ensure that the structure as reviewed, meet
forces arising from differential settlement of foundations minimum standards for safety, adequacy and acceptable
and from restrained dimensional changes due to standard design practice.
temperature, moisture, shrinkage, heave, creep and similar
effects. The engineer-of-record shall submit the plans and
specifications, a signed and sealed statement by the
104.3.3 Anchorage structural engineer doing the review that the above review
has been performed and that minimum standards have been
Anchorage of the roof to walls and columns, and of walls met.
and columns to foundations shall be provided and
adequately detailed to resist the uplift and sliding forces See Section 208.5.3.6.3.2 for design review requirements
that result from the application of the prescribed forces. when nonlinear time-history analysis is used for earthquake
design.
Concrete and masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors,
roofs and other structural elements that provide lateral In keeping with the ethical standards of the profession, the
support for the wall. Such anchorage shall provide a reviewer or reviewers shall not supplant the engineer-of-
positive direct connection capable of resisting the record as engineer-of-record for the project. The design
horizontal forces specified in Chapter 2 but not less than review shall not in any way transfer or diminish the
the minimum forces in Section 206.4. responsibility of the engineer-of-record.
104.4 Foundation Investigation
Soil explorations shall be required for buildings, towers and

other vertical structures falling under Categories I, II,I1I
and IV in accordance with Table 103-1 or as required by
the Building Official or if the site specific conditions
make the foundation investigation necessary.
Detailed requirements for foundation investigations shall be

in accordance with Chapter 3 of this code.
104.5 Design Review
The design calculations, drawings, specifications and

other design-related documents for buildings, towers and
other vertical structures with irregular configuration in
Occupancy Categories I, II or HI within Seismic Zone 4,
structures under Alternative Systems in Section 10 lA, and
Undefined Structural Systems not listed in Table
208-11, shall be subject to a review by an independent
recognized structural engineer or engineers to be employed
by the owner in accordance with the ASEP Design Peer
Review Guidelines. The structural engineer or structural
engineers performing the review shall have comparable
qualifications and experience as the structural engineer
responsible for the design. The reviewer or reviewers shall
obtain a professional waiver from the engineer-of-record
who shall be expected to grant such waiver in keeping with
ethical standards of the profession as adopted in ASEP
guidelines for peer review (Appendix I-A).
The design review shall, as a minimum, verify the general

compliance with this code which shall include, but not be
limited to, the review of the design load criteria, the
design concept, mathematical model and techniques.

105.1 Posting of Live Loads

106.1 General
The live loads for which each floor or portion t~1ereofof a
commercial or industrial building has been designed shall
have such design live loads conspicuously posted by ~he Copies of design calculations, reports, plans,
owner in that part of each story in which they apply, using specifications and inspection program for all
durable metal signs. It shall not be allowed to remove or constructions shall bear the signature and seal of the
engineer-of-record,
deface such notices. The occupant of the building shall be
responsible for keeping the actual load below the allowable
limits. 106.2 Specifications
105.2 Earthquake-Recording Instrumentation The specifications shall contain information covering the
material and construction requirements. The materials and
105.2.1 General construction requirements shall conform to the
specifications referred to in Chapters I to 7 of this code.
Unless waived by the Building Official, every building in
Seismic Zone 4 over 50 m in height shall be provided with 106.3 Design Drawings
not less than three approved Earthquake Recording
Instruments (ERI). The ERI shall be interconnected for 106.3.1 General
common start and common timing. Please refer to HASEP
Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake The design drawings shall be drawn to scale on durable
Recording Instrumentation for Buildings (Appendix I-B). paper or cloth using permanent ink and shall be of
sufficient clarity to indicate the location, nature and extent
105.2.2 Location of the work proposed.The drawings shall show a complete
design with sizes, sections, relative locations and
The instruments shall be located in the basement, connection details of the various members. Floor levels,
midportion, and near the top of the building. Each column centers and offsets shall be dimensioned. Where
instrument shall be located so that access is maintained at available and feasible, archive copies shall be maintained in
all times and is unobstructed by room contents. A sign durable medium such as compact disc (CD) and digital
stating "MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS versatile disc (DVD).
INSTRUMENT" shall be posted in a conspicuous
location. 106.3.2 Required Information
105.2.3 Maintenance The design drawings shall contain, but shall not be limited
to the general information listed in Section 106.3.2.1 and
Maintenance and service of the instruments shall be material specific information listed in Sections 106.3.2.2
provided by the owner of the building, subject to the and 106.3.2.3, as applicable.
monitoring of the Building Official. Data produced by the
instruments shall be made available to the Building Official 106.3.2.1 General Information
or any authorized agency upon request.
I. Name and date of issue of building code and
105.2.4 Instrumentation of Selected Buildings supplements, if any, to which the design conforms.
All owners of existing structures selected by the 2. Strengths or designations of materials to be used.
authorities having jurisdiction shall provide accessible
space for the installation of appropriate earthquake- 3. Design strengths of underlying soil or rock. The soil
recording instruments, determined by a Structural Engineer. or rock profile, when available, shall be provided.
4. Live loads and other loads used in design and clearly

indicated in the floor plans.

5. Seismic design basis including the total base shear

coefficient; a description of the lateral load resisting
system; and the fundamental natural period in the
design in each direction under consideration.
6. Provisions for dimensionalchanges resulting from

creep, shrinkage, heave and temperature.
107.1 General
7. Camber of trusses, beams and girders, if required.
All construction or work for which a permit is required
shall be subject to inspection throughout the various work
8. Explanation or definition of symbols and
stages. One or more structural inspectors who are registered
abbreviations used in the drawings.
civil engineers with experience in structural construction,
who shall undertake competent inspection during
9. Engineer-of-Record's professional license number
construction on the types of work listed under Section
and expiration date of the current Professional
107.5, shall be employed by the owner or the engineer-of-
Regulation Commission registration (PRC).
record acting as the owner's agent.
106.3.2.2 Structural Concrete
Exception:
I. Specified compressive strength (t~) of concrete at The Building Official may waive the requirement for the
stated ages or stages of construction for which eachpart employment of a structural inspector if the construction is
of structure designed. The 28-day compressive strength of a minor nature.
(t~) shall be the basis of design in service condition.
In addition to structural inspections, structural observations
2. Anchorage embedment lengths or cut-off points of shall be performed when required by Section 107.9.
steel reinforcement and location and length of lap
splices. 107.2 Definitions
3. Type and location of welded splices and mechanical See Section 102 for definitions.
connections of reinforcement.
107.3 Structural Inspector
4. Magnitude and location of prestressing forces
including prestressed cable layout 107.3.1 Qualifications
5. Minimum concrete compressive strength (tel' )at time The structural inspector shall be a registered civil engineer
of post-tensioning. who shall demonstrate competence for inspection of the
particular type of construction or operation requiring
6. Stressing sequence for post-tensioned tendons. structural inspection.
7. Details and location of all contraction or isolation 107.3.2 Duties and Responsibilities
joints specified for plain concrete in Chapter 4.
The structural inspector shall observe the work assigned for
8. Statement if concrete slab is designed as a structural conformance to the approved design drawings and
diaphragm, as specified in Sections 421.9.4 and specifications. Any discrepancy observed shall be brought
421.9.5. to the immediate attention of the constructor for correction,
then, if uncorrected, to the owner, engineer-of-record
and/or to the Building Official.
The structural inspector shall verify that the as-built

drawings (see Section 106.5) pertammg to the work
assigned reflect the condition as constructed.

The structural inspector shall also submit a final report duly 107.5.3 Special Moment-Resisting Concrete Frame
signed and sealed stating whether the work requiring
structural inspection was, to the best of the inspector's For special moment-resisting concrete frame design seismic
knowledge, in conformance to the approved plans and load in structures within Seismic Zone 4, the structural
specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions inspector shall provide reports to the engineer-of-record
of this code. and shall provide continuous inspection of the placement of
the reinforcement and concrete.
107.4 Inspection Program
107.5.4 Reinforcing Steel and Prestressing Steel
The structural inspector shall prepare an appropriate testing Tendons
and inspection program that shall be submitted to the
owner, engineer-of-record and/or to the Building Official. 107.5.4.1 During all stressing and grouting of tendons in
He shall designate the portions of the work that requires prestressed concrete.
structural inspections.
107.5.4.2 During placing of reinforcing steel and
When structural observation is required by Section 107.9, prestressing tendons for all concrete required to
the inspection program shall describe the stages of have structural inspection by Section 107.5.1.
construction at which structural observation is to occur.
Exception:
The inspection program shall include samples of inspection
The structural inspector need not be present c.'oiltiflliOllSly
reports and provide time limits for submission of reports.
during placing" of reinforcing steel and pf.estressing
tendons. provided the structural inspector has insJlectedJor
107.5 Types of Work for Inspection
conformance to the approved plans prior to the dosing of
forms or the delivery of concrete to thejobsite.
Except as provided in Section 107. I, the types of work
listed below shall be inspected by a structural inspector.
107.5.5 Structural Welding
107.5.1 Concrete
107.5.5.1 General
During the taking of test specimens and placing of
During the welding of any member or connection that is
concrete. See Section 107.5.12 for shotcrete.
designed to resist loads and forces required by this code.
Exceptions:
Exceptions:
1. Concrete for' foundations ~f resi(/ential buil~/ings
1..'. Welding done: in; an approved fabricator's; sliojji in
accommodating 10 or fewer persons, or buildings
accordance withSediof1107.6. . ;;, .
falling under Category V.of TableI 03 c 1, provided the
Building Official finds that a. structural hazard does 2. The structuraiLnspector ;t'eed not
1I0t exist. . ::;. . present dll;:iiig· welding 'of the
provided the materials,
2. For !oliTldaiioii 'concrete, dilier \ lh(Hz' cast-in-place
procedures and welders are vet 1II.'''U.·
.drilled piles or 'dlissohs; where tli'e'Sihictliral design is
of work; periodic inspectilins
based on anf~not greater than 17 MPa.
progress; 'and. ayislial' .' .
3. NOli-structural slabs on grade. including prestressed '. prior to completion
slabs all grade when effective prestress in concrete is .. welding: (',.\;< :....
less than 10 MPa. .. .
'aj~iniIJ-p(J~sfill~tlV~ld~"':
4. Site work concrete fully .supported all earth and
b) Floor and roof deck wetatno= ....
concrete where no special hazard exists.
c) Welded stilds when
107.5.2 Bolts Installed in Concrete or composites .
Prior to and during the placement of concrete around bolts

when stress increases permitted by Section 426 are utilized.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition. 2015

107.5.5.2 Special Moment-Resisting Steel Frames 107.5.7.2 For fully grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry
during preparation and taking of any required prisms or test
During the non-destructive testing (NDT) of welds specimens, at the start of laying units, after the placement
specified in Section 107.8 of this code, the use of certified of reinforcing steel, grout space prior to each grouting
welders shall be required for welding structural steel operation, and during all grouting operations.
connections for this type of frame. Critical joint
connections shall be subjected to non-destructive testing Exception:
using certified NDT technicians.
Structural inspection as required in Sections 107.5.7.1 and
107.5.7.2 need not be provided when design stresses have
107.5.5.3 Welding of Reinforcing Steel
been adjusted as specified in Chapter 7 to permit
noncontinuous inspection.
During the non-destructive testing of welds.
107.5.8 Reinforced Gypsum Concrete
107.5.6 High-Strength Bolts
When cast-in-place Class B gypsum concrete is being
The inspection of high-strength A325 and A490 bolts shall
mixed and placed.
be in accordance with approved internationally recognized
standards and the requirements of this section. While the
107.5.9 Insulating Concrete Fill
work is in progress, the structural inspector shall determine
that the requirements for bolts, nuts, washers and paint;
During the application of insulating concrete fill when used
bolted parts; and installation and tightening in such
as part of a structural system.
standards are met. Such inspections may be performed on
a periodic basis as defined in Section 107.
Exception:
The structural inspector shall observe the calibration The structural inspections may be limited to an initial
procedures when such procedures are required by the plans inspection to check the deck surface and placement of
or specifications. He shall monitor the installation of bolts reinforcing steel. The structural inspector shall monitor the
to determine that all layers of connected materials have preparation of compression lest specimens during this
been drawn together and that the selected procedure is initial inspection
properly used to tighten all bolts.
107.5.10 Spray-Applied Fire-Resistive Materials

107.5.7 Structural Masonry
During the application of spray-applied fire-resistive

107.5.7.1 For masonry, other than fully grouted open-end
materials.
hollow-unit masonry, during preparation and taking of any
required prisms or test specimens, placing of all masonry
units, placement of reinforcement, inspection of grout 107.5.11 Piling, Drilled Piers and Caissons
space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during
all grouting operations. During driving and load testing of piles and construction of
cast-in-place drilled piles or caissons. See Sections 107.5.1
Exception: and 107.5.4 for concrete and reinforcing steel inspection.
fo/holldw-unit masonry where thelm is no more than 10

'MPiifor concrete units or 18 Mra for clay units, structural
!11.'iprXlion may be performed as required for fully grouted
:op~i~~ef!d hollow-unit; masonry specified in Section
:(Q7f7.2.' . .. . .

2. Verification of the fabricator's quality control

capabilities, plant and personnel as outlined in the
taking of test specimens and placing of all fabrication procedural manual shall be by an approved
inspection or quality control agency.
3. Periodic plant inspections shall be conducted by an

approved inspection or quality control agency to
.. . . .rlllll~llppo/'fed dfl ~al.:iii,i~nlnd~repairs and
monitor the effectiveness of the quality control
opinion of'the Building official, no special
program.
107.7 Prefabricated Construction

107.5.13 Special Grading, Excavation and Filling
107.7.1 General
During earthwork excavations, grading and filling
operations inspection to satisfy requirements of Chapter 3
107.7.1.1 Purpose
and Section 109.5.
The purpose of this section is to regulate materials and
107.5.14 Special Cases
establish methods of safe construction where any structure
or portion thereof is wholly or partially prefabricated.
Work that, in the opinion of the structural engineer,
involves unusual hazards or conditions.
107.7.1.2 Scope
107.5.15 Non-Destructive Testing
Unless otherwise specifically stated in this section, all
prefabricated construction and all materials used therein
In-situ non-destructive testing program, in addition to the
shall conform to all the requirements of this code.
requirements of Section 107.8 that in the opinion of the
structural engineer may supplement or replace conventional
107.7.1.3 Definition
tests on concrete or other materials and assemblies.
See Section 102 for Definitions.

107.6 Approved Fabricators
107.7.2 Tests of Materials

Structural inspections required by this section and
elsewhere in this code are not required where the work is
done On the premises of a fabricator approved by the Every approval of a material not specifically mentioned in
structural engineer to perform such work without structural this code shall incorporate as a proviso the kind and
inspection. The approved fabricator shall submit a number of tests to be made during prefabrication.
certificate of compliance that the work was performed in
accordance with the approved plans and specifications to 107.7.3 Tests of Assemblies
the Building Official and to the engineer or architect-of-
record. The approved fabricator's qualifications shall be The Building Official may require special tests to be made
contingent on compliance with the following: on assemblies to determine their structural adequacy,
durability and weather resistance.
I. The fabricator has developed and submitted a detailed
fabrication procedural manual reflecting key quality 107.7.4 Connections
control procedures that will provide a basis for
inspection control of workmanship and the fabricator Every device used to connect prefabricated assemblies shall
plant. be designed as required by this code and shall be capable of
developing the strength of the largest member connected,
except in the case of members forming part of a structural
frame designed as specified in Chapter 2. Connections
shall be capable of withstanding uplift forces as specified in
Chapter 2.
107.7.5 Pipes and Conduits
In structural design, due allowance shall be made for any

material to be removed or displaced for the installation of
pipes, conduits or other equipment.

107.7.6 Certificate and Inspection 107.8.2 Testing Program
107.7.6.1 Materials As a minimum, the testing program shall include the

following:
Materials and the assembly thereof shall be inspected to
determine compliance with this code. Every material shall 107.8.2.1 All complete penetration groove welds
be graded, marked or labeled where required elsewhere in contained in joints and splices shall be tested
this code. 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by
radiography.
107.7.6.2 Certificate
Exceptions:
A certificate of acceptance shall be furnished with every
1. When approved. the non-destructive testing rate for an
prefabricated assembly, except where the assembly is
individual welder or welding operator may be reduced
readily accessible to inspection at the site. The certificate
to 25 percent, provided the reject rate is demonstrated
of acceptance shall certify that the assembly in question has
to be 5 percent or less of the welds tested for the
been inspected and meets all the requirements of this code.
welder or welding operator. A sampling of at least 40
completed welds for a job shall be made for such
107.7.6.3 Certifying Agency reduction evaluation. Reject rate is defined as the
number of welds containing rejectable defects divided
To be acceptable under this code, every certificate of
by the number of welds completed For evaluating the
approval shall be made by a nationally or internationally reject rate of continuous welds over 900 mm in length
recognized certifying body or agency. where the effective throat thickness is 25 tnm or less,
each 300 min increment or fraction thereof shall be
107.7.6.4 Field Erection considered as one weld. For evaluating the reject rate
on continuous welds over 900 tnm in length where the
Placement of prefabricated assemblies at the building site effective throat thickness is greater than 25 mm, each
shall be inspected to determine compliance with this code. 150 mm of length or Faction thereof shall be
considered one weld.
107.7.6.5 Continuous Inspection
2. For complete penetration groove welds on materials
If continuous inspection is required for certain materials less than 8 mm thick, non-destructive testing is not
where construction takes place on the site, it shall also be required; for this welding. continuous inspection is
required where the same materials are used in prefabricated required.
construction.
3. When approved by the Building Official and outlined
in the project plans and specifications, this non-
Exception:
destructive ultrasonic testing may be performed in the
Continuous inspection will not be required during shop of an approvedfabricator utilizing qualified test
prefabrication !f the approved agency certifies to the techniques in the employment (~(the fabricator.
construction and furnishes evidence of compliance.
107.8.2.2 Partial penetration groove welds when used in
107.8 Non-Destructive Testing column splices shall be tested either by ultrasonic testing or
radiography when required by the plans and specifications.
107.8.1 General For partial penetration groove welds when used in column
splices, with an effective throat less than 20 mm thick,
In Seismic Zone 4, welded, fully-restrained connections nondestructive testing is not required; for this welding,
between the primary members of special moment-resisting continuous structural inspection is required.
frames shall be tested by nondestructive methods
performed by certified NDT technicians for compliance 107.8.2.3 Base metal thicker than 40 mm, when subjected
with approved standards and job specifications. This testing to through-thickness weld shrinkage strains, shall be
shall be a part of the structural inspection requirements of ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind
Section 107.5. A program for this testing shall be such welds after joint completion.
established by the person responsible for structural design
and as shown on plans and specifications. Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected
on the basis of the defect rating in accordance with the
(larger reflector) criteria of approved national standards.

107.8.3 Others
The structural engineer may accept or require in place non-

destructive testing of concrete or other materials and
assemblies to supplement or replace conventional tests.
107.9 Structural Observation
107.9.1 General
Structural observation shall be provided in Seismic Zone 4

when one of the following conditions exists:
1. The structure is defined in Table 103-1 as Occupancy

Category 1, II, III and IV.;
2. The structure is in Seismic Zone 4, Naas set forth in

Table 208-4 is greater than 1.0, and a lateral design is
required for the entire structure;
3. When so designated by the structural engineer, or
4. When such observation is specifically required by the

Building Official.
107.9.2 Structural Observer
The owner shall employ the engineer-of-record or another

civil engineer to perform structural observation as defined
in Section 107.
Observed deficiencies shall be reported in writing to the

owner's representative, structural inspector, constructor and
the Building Official. If not resolved, the structural
observer shall submit to the Building Official a written
statement duly signed and sealed, identifying any
deficiency.
107.9.3 Construction Stages for Observations
The structural observations shall be performed at the

construction stages prescribed by the inspection program
prepared as required by Section 107.4.
It shall be the duty of the engineer-in-charge of

construction, as authorized in the Building Permit, to notify
the structural observer that the described construction
stages have been reached, and to provide access to and
means for observing the components of the structural
system.

NSCP C101-15
APP I 1-A
RECOMMENDED GUIDELINES ON
STRUCTURAL DESIGN PEER REVIEW
OF STRUCTURES 2015

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@gmail.eom
Website:http://www.aseponline.org

IA-l
R.ecommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of Structures 2015

Published by Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.
Copyright© 2015
Suite 713 Future Point Plaza Condominium 1,
112 Panay Avenue, Quezon City,
1tOOPhilippines
Telephone Nos. +63 (2) 410-0483

Facsimile +63 (2) 411-8606
E-mail Address aseponline@gmail.com
Website http://www.aseponiine.org
About ASEP
The Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP) is the recognized organization of Structural
Engineers of the Philippines. Established in 1961, ASEP has been in existence for more than 50 solid years.
Print History
2000
2015

lA-S
CONTENTS
ABBREVIA TIONS I-A6

INTRO.DUCTION I-A7
BACKGROUND I-A8
OBJECTIVES OF THE DESIGN PEER REVIEW I-A9
APPLICATION OF ASEP PEER REVIEW GUIDELINES I-A9
EXPECTED RESULTS OF DESIGN REVIEW: I-AIO
STRUCTURES TO BE REVIEWED I-AlO
REVIEWER'S QUALlFICATION I-All
SCOPE OF REVIEW I-All
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED TO PEER REVIEWER I-All
ITEMS TO BE REVlEWED I-A 12
lVIETHODOLOGY AND DETAILS OF REVIEW I-A15
Design Basis Review I-AI 5
Foundation Review I-A I 6
Pre-Tender Design Review I-A16
MINIMUM REPORT REQUIREMENTS I-A16
Content I-A 16
Terms of Review Procedure and Methodology to be Used I-AI7
Language to be Used I-AI7
Mark-up and Comments I-AI 7
Examples oj Reviewer's Comments/Wordings I-A 18
REFERENCES I-AlB
Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design

Peer Review of Structures 2015
IA-6
Abbreviations
A&D Analysis and Design
ACr American Concrete Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASEP Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.
BIM Buildinglnformation Model
CE Civil Engineer
CTBUH Council on Tall Buildings and Urban Habitat

DPWH Department of Public Works and Highways
EOR Engineer-of-Record
tAl International Alliance for lnteroperability
lBC International Building Code
IFC Industry Foundation Classes
NSCP National Structural Code of the Philippines
PAGASA Philippine Atmospheric, Geophysical & Astronomical Services Administration

PHIVOLCS Philippine Institute ofVolcanolo_gy and Seismology
PR Peer Reviewer
PRC Professional Regulations Commission
SE Structural Engineer
SEC Security and Exchange Commissions
UBC Uniform Building Code

IA-7
Introduction
Design review is incorporated in most building codes to provide the means for professional discussion and evaluation of
structural design of projects. Thus, these reviews are the eye openers for the resolution of problems encountered before a critical
phase of the construction project. Design review truly enhances the ideas for public safety overall and quality assurance.
Furthermore, it disseminates innovation through sharing of information.
Earthquake for instance is a phenomenon that man has been trying to study for centuries but up to present time is still
unpredictable. We, as structural engineers, are faced with the greatest challenge of formulating procedures on how to lessen if
not eliminate destruction and casualties due to this. We want to make sure that the intent of our design is carefully followed
and carried out in the most professional manner. The burden of setting up and observing rules on how to achieve what has been
planned rest upon our shoulders. Design review can be a valuable tool faced with this challenge.
This document establishes the guidelines for peer review. Since protecting lives and properties are the paramount goals of the
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines (ASEP), the only way perhaps to realise these goals is to establish ground
rules for all our practicing civil engineers, structural engineers and consultants to follow strictly the Code provisions and
standards parameters.
It is essential to good engineering practice to conduct independent peer review to achieve a concept of structural system and
design tolerant to the crudeness in seismological predictions. The independent review of structures shall be deemed as the
means to promote life safety, achieve excellence in structural design and front of quality, improvement/advancement and
dissemination of structural engineering knowledge in the country.

IA-8
Background
To accomplish the objectives of ASEP, the Board of Directors for 1999-2000 has continued the program of the ASEP Board
of Directors for 1998-1999 by creating several committees as shown below. These objectives, as stated in its by-laws, shall be
the protection of the public welfare and the welfare of its constituents through the:
• Maintenance of highly ethical and professional standards in the practice of engineering
• Advancement of structural engineering knowledge;
• Promotion of good public and private clientele relationships, development of fellowships among CE and SE and
encouragement of professional relations with other allied technical and scientific organizations.
These objectives are focused on these three major areas:
• Codes and Standards
• Fellowships and Linkages
• Technical Advancement
One of the committees created for the Codes and Standards is the Committee on Design Peer Review. The National Structural
Code of the Philippines (NSCP) 1992 Edition touches on independent design review under the section "A Design and
Construction Review", which defines the structures required for the review considering seismic zones and occupancy
categories. However, the scope, procedures and documentation of the review process are not mentioned. Thus, this paper will
include guidelines on the implementation of the design peer review.
The same committee was revived by the President of the Board of Directors for 2009-20 I0, Adam C. Abinales, from the point
of view of engineering practitioners, to improve and expand the guidelines to incorporate additional parameters and ethical
rules as well as enhance the practice of peer review. The committee's activities have continued under the administration of the
following ASEP Presidents:
• Anthony Vladimir Pimentel (20 I0-2011)

• Vinci Nicholas R. Villasenor (2011-2012)
• Miriam L. Tamayo (2013)
• Carlos M. Villaraza (2015)
The Committee on Design Peer Review is composed of the following:
Chairman
Ernesto F. Cruz
Co-Chairman
Gabriel Ursus L. Eusebio
Members
Alden C. Ong
Marie Christine G. Danao
Edmondo D. San Jose

IA-9
Objectives of the Design Peer Review

The current trend in the local construction industry is the development of many high-rise buildings. On account of this, it is the
objective of this peer review to improve section 104.5 ofNSCP 2010, to ensure the aim for life safety, to observe economy in
design and to protect the investment of clients.
The Peer Review aims to carry out positive results in the following areas:
o To comply structural engineering design, drawings and specification with the minimum requirements ofNSCP and other
acceptable established codes and standards;
o To maintain the quality of projects;
o To improve and maintain the high standards in the practice of structural engineering;
• To promote exchange of information and innovative ideas between the designers and reviewers;
o To inform the Owner-Client on the benefits of this exercise and any possible cost implications resulting from the review;
o To define implementing matrix of all structures subject to practical independent review; and
o To promote professional ethics in the conduct of independent or peer review.
Application of ASEP Peer Review Guidelines

These ASEP guidelines are intended specifically for the mandatory conduct of a Design Review as per the National Structural
Code of the Philippines (NSCP Volume 1, 2010 Edition).
As stipulated in NSCP Section 104.5, Design Review is required for the following:
1. Structures with irregular configuration in Occupancy Categories I (Essential Facilities), II (Hazardous Facilities) or III
(Special Occupancy Structures) in Zone 4;
2. Structures under Alternative Systems in Section 101.4; and,
3. Undefined Structural Systems (those not listed in Table 208-11).
For structures covered by the mandatory Design Review, all related works shall be deemed as included in the Engineer-of-
Record's scope of works, unless explicitly excluded in his work agreement.
For structures not included above but which are to be subjected to a Design Review as an additional requirement by the Owner,
the coverage, extent, and procedures shall be as mutually agreed upon by the Owner/Peer Reviewer, and the Engineer-of-
Record (EOR) and may not be as recommended in these Guidelines. Additionally, since works connected or related to such
Design Review are not covered by the basic structural services of the EOR, these shall be subject to a separate scope and
compensation for the EOR.

IA-1O
Expected Results of Design Review:

• As professionals, independent design reviewers and EOR shall not engage in unfair practices. Both shall
observe fairness and professionalism in the practice of independent review. This shall not by any means be a
channel to conduct criticism nor be a means to discredit the reviewer or the EOR, and disenfranchise them of
the contract service they are awarded.
• There will be good understanding of the structures and relationships between the Owner-Client and the
structural engineering community resulting to enhanced programs of future developments and projects.
• There will be good relationships between designers and reviewers by improving the design through constructive
reporting.
o The review will be conducted smoothly in the light of fairness and professionalism, without unfair practice and
criticism to neither discredit nor disenfranchise any of the reviewer or EOR.
• The review will bring assurance to the Owner-Client of compliance to codes and standards, assurance of better
engineering of the proposed structure, the improvement in design and safety as well as improvement in
construction implementation and program, elimination of unsafe design and possible work delays from
unwanted and costly repairs, among others.
Structures to be Reviewed
Structures to be reviewed shall consist of all proposed new structures and addition to structures which shall be deemed crucial
to life safety and/or health of the public and peace if such structures or buildings would incur damage or failure or both.
The structures to be reviewed shall be as follows:
1. All structures more than 75-meter high (whichever is higher) from the exterior ground level.
2. Buildings, towers and other vertical structures with irregularity in configuration (vertical and horizontal irregularity) under
occupancy Category I, II, and III (as per section 103.1 NSCP VI edition) within the seismic zone 4.
3. Structures designed under alternative system (as per section 101.4 NSCP VI Edition) that intends to use other structural
materials, design approach and construction methodology not prescribed by the latest existing structural Code (NSCP VI
Edition, 2010) or by other recognized international codes and standards.
4. Buildings, towers and other structures with undefined structural system not listed in Table 208-1 J ofNSCP VI Edition.
5. Essential facilities such as hospitals fire & police stations, emergency vehicle and equipment shelters and garages,
structures and equipment in communication center, aviation control towers, private and public school buildings, water
supported structures and designated evacuation center, also buildings and structures for national defense.
6. Hazardous Facilities and the like structures housing, supporting or containing sufficient quantities of toxic or explosive
substances dangerous to the safety of the general public ifreleased due to damage or excessive deformation.

IA-JI
Reviewer's Qualification
The independent PR shall be nominated by the Owner-Client. The independent PR shall not be the design EOR or engineer
appointed by Builder/Contractor. In the case of Turnkey or Design and Build projects whose design is initiated by the
Contractor or Developer, the Contractor at his own expense shall appoint an independent recognized structural engineer to
conduct the services of design peer review.
The independent PR shall have the following qualifications:
I. Civil engineer registered with the Professional Regulation Commission of the Philippines with more than 20 years of
related structural engineering experience similar to the structure to be reviewed.
2. He must be a REGULAR ASEP Member in good standing.
3. Structural Engineers with comparable qualification and experience as the EOR responsible for the design (as per latest
NSCP).
4. Knowledgeable in current design software, tools, and other acceptable current computer programs.
5. Have competitive knowledge or experience in actual structural construction.
Scope of Review
The PR must review all items agreed to be reviewed with the Owner-Client and EOR per relevant/recommended items listed
in this Guide. The PR shall refer regularly to check for completeness of the review per applicable items listed in these guidelines.
The quantity of elements to be reviewed shall be in accordance with the second paragraph of the subsection Methodology of
Review below.
Information to be Furnished to Peer Reviewer

The review documents should be checked for completeness and timeliness of the design documents submitted per relevant
items recommended in this guide. The PR should assess the review documents received and report immediately to the Owner-
Client and/or his duly appointed representative for the following:
If any of the design documents submitted are not sufficient for him to proceed with the review such that an entire document
is missing, for example the design criteria document is not included and the drawings do not reflect the design
parameters/information completely; or
The documents given and received may enable him to start and work immediately but the PR have to stop soon for some
items of works as some documents are given as partial only; or
• The documents given and submitted are irrelevant to the project; or
• The documents received are of poor quality such as illegible, faintly printed, blurred, torn, and or unacceptably dirty or
laced with hazardous materials.

IA-12
• The PR shall also report if the items received were not delivered in good condition that may not enable him to proceed at
all; e.g. the documents are wet due to improper handling, incomplete or inadequate protection from packaging materials,
among others.
The following items are to be furnished by the Owner-Client as applicable:

C Printed copies or PDF/DWFx format of complete set of architectural and structural drawings;
D General building narrative (number of stories, gross building area, estimated construction cost, unique features, among
others);
[] Geotechnical engineering report;
[J Wind Tunnel Test report (if any);
[J Site-specific spectra and ground-motion time histories (if any);
l] Major equipment or special loadings;
[] Existing building drawings/data if impacted by or impacting the threshold structure;
[J Analysis models including User's Guide of software used by EOR(e.g. STAAD, ETABS, SAP, SAFE and midasGen).
It is recommended to include also interoperable files such as .$ET, .ANL, .S2]( and .F2K to facilitate conversion of
data.;
[] 3D model/BIMI file or * .ifc? file (if any);
[J Design basis;
[] Design criteria;
[J Structural systems design narrative (including wind and seismic design parameters);
C] Structural elements design calculations; and
[) Structural specifications.
Items to be Reviewed
The PR may include as appropriate/applicable any or all of the following:
Table 1: Checklist of Items to be Reviewed
Item
Design
Basis/Criteria
Description of the operational language and/or algorithms, capability and source of the software used,
includin the roof of ood com arison with results of known and acce ted method of anal sis.
I Building Information Model (BIM) is a digital representation of physical and functional characteristics of a structure. As such it serves as
a shared knowledge resource for information about a structure forming a reliable basis for decisions during its life cycle from inception
onward.
Industry Foundation Classes (.ifc) - A file format developed by the IAI. IFC provides an interoperability solution between.lFC-compatible
software applications in the construction and facilities management industry. The format has established, international standards to import
and export building objects and their properties.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc. (ASEP)

IA-13
Input and output data including geometry, material constants, properties, loadings, assignments and
parameters used in software used.
Appropriate values of dead, live, wind and seismic loads used.
. Lateral Load The presence in the structural framing of any plan and/or vertical irregularities mentioned in NSCP or
Resisting codes.
Framing Limitations of lateral load . ng framing systems by NSCP, or by the Owner-Client preferred code and
..Systems as standards and or from local ordinance and in the . .. of the structure.
assumed in the Details of seismic-resistant concrete structure were checked.
Design Basis/
Criteria
Slender
Columns
Columns
supporting Designed for bending moment due to frame action including effects of special load combination per code.
transfer beams

IA-14
Item Specific Design Checks to be Carried Out

Columns
supporting long Designed for bending moment due to frame action.
sQ-'lnbeams
Columns
supporting Designed for bending moment due to frame action.
cantilever
beams
Columns in a Designed for horizontal load and moment acting on columns due to arched or pitched roof.
two column Designed for bending_ moment and shear at the column base including connections.
frame system Designed for bending moment due to frame action.
Cantilever Cantilever support has been designed to resist bending moment and shear including minimum uplift loads
beams from wind and seismic loads.
Designed for lateral stability of beam.
Designed to meet allowable span depth ratio; else deflection against allowable limit per code including long-
term effects.
Long span Torsional rigidity_ of beam has been checked.

beams Designed for lateral restraint of beams.
Designed for support and member connections.
Designed to meet allowable span depth ratio; else deflection against allowable limit per code including long-
term effects.
Transfer beams Designed for torsional capacity.
Designed for shear capacity.
Designed for all relevant upper floor loads on the beam including effects of special load combinations per
code.
Designed for lateral restraint of beam.
Flat slabs/plates Appropriate model used for analysis.
Span/depth ratio of slab has been checked.
Adequacyof topand bottom reinforcement throughout slabQ_anel has been checked.
Designed to resist punching shear from columns.
Openings in slabs, especially near columns, have been designed for.
Torsional rigidity at slab edges has been checked.
Effects of construction loads have been checked.
Engineering Clarity and consistency with the design intent of the architect and consultants, design bases and calculations,
drawings site survey_s and investigations.
Complete sections and details.
Consistency with and conformance to the specifications.
Consistency of the revisions and/or amendments to the design basis and criteria and their compliance with
the design intent and Client requirement.
Structural Consistency of design loading with the criteria and the equipment supplier/vendors data, finishes, plus the
calculations possible construction method requirements, effects of foreseen temporary works and activities during
construction, among others.
Usage of correct wind/seismic load parameters for analysis and design with regards to the structures lateral
load resisting framing system, seismic zone, material type and structural framing plan or vertical irregularity.
Seismic load analysis if requiring P-delta effects and/or dynamic method as to height limitations and
irregularities.
Load combinations and special load combinations as required and prescribed by the code.
Structural geometric model for completeness of the structures vertical load carrying elements and for
consistency with the basis and criteria.

lA-IS
Hem
Member and element checks such as minimum reinforcements and strength requirements,
slenderness effects, joints forces checks and connection requirements.
Structural
deformation
and
displacement Deformation compatibility on non-lateral load resisting elements.
checks
Stability/factors
of safety check
Earth retaining failure.
structures
Frame
Methodology and Details of Review

The PR should agree with the Owner-Client and the EOR on the methodology of review. The review shall cover for
completeness and timeliness of the design documents submitted per relevant items listed in this Guide.
The PR should assess the review documents with regards to the agreed number of elements to be checked with the Owner-
Client and/or his representative, if at random, selected or full review of the structure and any limited procedure.
Review may be agreed also for each phase or entirely on the final detailed design phase of the structure for review. While a
final detailed design review is basically economical, a phased review from the beginning may be better in order to avoid the
errors from the beginning and save also valuable time in re-work.
Design Basis Review
The PR should do the following:

I. Review design criteria to verify compliance with the building code;
2. Assess assumptions made by the EOR; and
3. Review the proposed frame system/s and load path for vertical load-carrying elements.

IA-16
Foundation Review
The PR should do the following:

1. Establishes foundation loads via independent analysis. Alternatively, obtain foundation loads from EOR contingent upon
subsequent verification. The PR should obtain soil design parameters from geotechnical engineering report.
2. Perform independent analysis of representative foundation elements including spread footings, pile caps, foundation walis,
grade beams and piles, among others. Review of foundation elements is recommended, depending on the relative nature
or complexity of the project.
3. Review specification sections pertaining to foundation system including earthwork, piles, concrete work, among others.
4. Review performance criteria for contractor-designed components such as slope protection systems, mini piles, tie-down
anchors, among others.
Pre-Tender Design Review
The PR should carry out the following:

I. Review structural framing connections which are part of the primary system including shear connections, braced frame
connections, moment-resisting connections, among others. When connections are not detailed on the design drawings,
verify adequacy of the cited connection design loads/procedures.
2. Perform general review of design to evaluate presence of any conditions which might precipitate instability or structural
overstress.
3. Review specification sections pertaining to Primary Structural Support System.
4. Review performance criteria for contractor-designed components such as pre-cast concrete elements, shear connections,
braced frame connections, moment-resisting connections, cold-formed metal framing components (primary framing
components, not cladding), pre-engineered metal building systems, among others.
Minimum Report Requirements

Prior to the issuance of the final peer review report, the PR is encouraged to exchange review comments with the EOR in the
presence of the Owner and/or his representative in order to resolve as many issues as possible.
Content
The following items shall be included in the final peer review report:
1. List of the documents on which the review was based;
2. Building Codes and Standards on which the peer review was based;
3. Methodology and assumptions of the review;
4. List of software/analysis tools used with descriptive statements about software, tools and other computer programs used
in the review;
5. Items to be subsequently reviewed by others (e.g. contractor-designed items);
6. Exclusions/limitations (e.g. peer review was limited to primary structural support systems);
7. Outstanding items/unresolved issues; and

IA-17
8. Results, findings, conclusions and recommendations of the review.
9. The final peer review report shall be addressed to the Owner-Client/representative and the EOR. Upon completion of the
review, the PR shall issue a certificate stating that the peer review has been successfully completed
Terms of Review Procedure and Methodology to be Used
The review analysis and design criteria must meet the requirement of the Owner-Client as defined in his design brief including
any applicable item in the Terms of Reference which form part of their agreement with the EOR.
Preferably, the PR shall use the same design criteria and standards specified by the EOR. Deviations from the said criteria and
standards must be done only with the permission of the EOR.
Software to be used in the review should preferably be the same software used by the EOR (e.g. the same editions or versions).
The difference of versions should be agreed upon but a difference of one level may be considered acceptable unless the more
recent versions employ a different analysis procedures or features that are almost entirely different to the EOR's software
procedures or features.
Language to be Used
The manner of reporting shall always be factual. Numerical values and status to be presented must be taken purely from the
final design review documents submitted and from the results of the independent review's analysis and assessments per
applicable codes and standards.
The terms and phrases to be included in reporting any issue arising from the design review must be written carefully and reflect
professionalism. The PR must not use offensive nor malicious words or phrases. Thus, the report must be factual and
enlightening for the EOR and PRo
The assessment of each part of the report should avoid terms like erroneous, in error and misses, among others. Reporting
should preferably be neutral, for example, statement for bars needing additional quantity may be stated "underestimated" and
bars in element with quantities that maybe reduced may be stated that "bars are overestimated by as much as 25%".
The PR shall make comments that are clear, legible and complete so that the EOR will easily understand it. Clear comments
will eliminate confusion and reduce time spent in back-check.
Mark-up and Comments
Generally, comments should be complete, clear and legible.
Ifpossible, the PR should use words which would apply to numerous drawings so that the comments do not need to be repeated
on each drawing.
When the PR makes the same specific comments at many different details, the comments should be identified by either creating
a standard, numbered list of comments with the comment numbers referenced at each detail, or by marking the comments on
each detail.
The PR may use 'paste-on' comments where applicable to save time and to maintain uniformity of comments.

IA-18
Examples of Reviewer's Comments/Wordings
., Use specific comments such as: "Show complete details in accordance with your calculation in pages 17 to 24. "
., Do not use vague comments such as: "Clarify welding. "
., Avoid personalized wording such as: "Your calculations for this connection is in error. "
., Provide code references for comments whenever possible: "Provide additional lath support at horizontal soffits per ... "
., If the properties of an element were improperly used in calculations and the element is overstressed, the PR should write
a comment on the sheet where the overstressed element is shown such as: "W18 x 36 overstressed. Recheck Section
Modulus used in calculation. See AISC page .... and your calculation sheet F-19. "
., The PR can make independent calculations when portions of the design professional's calculations are difficult to follow
or interpret: "Shear wall is overstressed along Gridline-A, wall shears is in excess to allowable by 13 kN/m. "
., If the PR does extensive independent calculations, then he or she must number the calculations in sequence and mark the
calculation page number on the comment to facilitate the back-check: Composite beam overstressed, recheck design loads.
See page 28 .• r
References
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., Recommended Guidelines on Structural Design Peer Review of
Structures. ASEP Committee on Design Peer Review 1999-2000
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., National Structural Code of the Philippines 1992, Volume L
Fourth Edition
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., National Structural Code of the Philippines 2001, Volume I, Fifth
Edition
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc., National Structural Code of the Philippines 2010, Volume 1, Sixth
Edition
American Council of Engineering Companies of Connecticut - Structural Engineers Coalition. Recommended Guidelines for
Performing an Independent Structural Engineering Review in the State of Connecticut. Document SEC/CT30 1-08.
American Concrete Institute, ACI 3 J 8 (2008). Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (AC! 318-08) and
Commentary.
American Society of Civil Engineers, ASCE 7 (2005), Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE/SEI
7-05).
American Society of Civil Engineers, Ethics: Guidelines for Professional Conduct for Civil Engineers. January 2008
Autodesk, Inc., Revit Structure 2011 User's Guide.
CTBUH 81h World Congress 2008, The Role of PR in the Foundation Design of the World's Tallest Buildings, Baker, Kiefer,
Nicoson and Fahoum.
D. Matthew Stuart, Project Specific Peer Review Guidelines - A Professor Odyssey, Structure Magazine August 2010.
International Code Council, Uniform Building Code 1997.
IPENZ Practice Note 02, Peer Review - Reviewing the work of another Engineer.
Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center Report No. 2010/05, Guidelines for Performance-Based Seismic Design of
Tall Buildings, Version 1.0, November 2010.

NSCP C101~15
p I 1-
GUIDELINES AND IMPl.EMENTING RULES ON

EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION FOR
BUILDINGS

112 Pansy Avenue, Quezon City, Philippines 1100
Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@!!mail.com

APPENDIX I-B - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings I-B1
L adequate earthquake records have been obtained for

various types of buildings or relevant provisions in the
Technology on building instrumentation for seismic NSCP have been amended, the waiver stated above is
monitoring has improved tremendously in the past decade. temporarily suspended and buildings indicated in Table 1
The purpose of this Guidelines and Implementing Rules on shall be provided with earthquake recording instruments.
Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings is to
provide information on the specifications and uses of ASEP therefore deemed it necessary to improve our
earthquake recording instruments or buildings as provided understanding of the building response based on real
in Section 105.2 of the National Structural Code of the seismic event from local earthquake generators by
Philippines 2010 Volume 1, Sixth Edition [NSCP 2010]. promoting earthquake recording instrumentation for
buildings as the NSCP provision was reiterated in the 200 I
The Guidelines and Implementing Ruleson Earthquake and 2010 Editions. Due to more recent developments in
Recording Instrumentation for Buildings provide building instrumentation technology, a number of
earthquake instrumentation schemes for certain buildings instrumentations are available to obtain the building
to record building response during major seismic events for response, and satisfy and comply with the objective of the
subsequent analysis. Adequate analysis of building NSCP Section 105 provisions. Hence, the requirement for
response during earthquake is an important parameter in three (3) accelerographs is further enhanced and modified
building safety evaluation in the confirmation and to consider the latest and economical building instruments,
resumption of operations. thus, the combination or combinations of accelerographs,
accelerometers, velocity meters and data loggers are
Installation of earthquake recording instruments first considered. To measure building response due to long
appeared in the National Structural Code ofthe Philippines period earthquakes and distant sources normally critical to
1992 Edition. At that period, structural engineers were tall buildings, the addition ofvelocimeters is necessary.
mostly interested in the strength design capacity of the
buildings based on seismic parameters provided in the To further address the disaster management effort in the
Uniform Building Code (UEC) of the United States, a country, essential facilities such as hospitals and some
referral standard of the NSCP. This provision in the 1992 government buildings, which are important facilities in
NSCP, however, was not enforced. Code developers disaster response, are recommended to be instrumented. In
started to recognize the importance of not only strength but addition, with this new provision, building response from
serviceability in buildings as well. The experiences from low-rise structures can be obtained to determine building
the 1994 Northridge Earthquake in the US and the 1995 behavior due to near source or short period earthquakes.
Kobe Earthquake in Japan gave credence to these
considerations.
The NSCP 2010 states that "Unless waived by the building

official, eve,y building in Seismic Zone 4 over fifty (50)
meters in height shall be provided with not less than three
(3) approved recording accelerograph. The accelerograph
shall be interconnected for common start and common
timing." Due to recent earthquakes and proliferation of
high-rise buildings, the Philippines needs to have its own
earthquake records for validating the seismic design
parameters used, in order to support earthquake disaster
mitigation / remedial efforts; thus, there is the need to
implement the requirements for the earthquake recording
instrumentation. Until such time that considerable sets of
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7tl1 Edition, 2015

I-B2 APPENDIX I-B - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings
III. OBJECTIVES OF THESE GUIDELINES IV. DEFINITION OF TERMS
Section 102 of the National Building Code of the ACCELEROGRAPH are accelerograph records the
Philippines (PD lO96) states that "It is hereby declared to acceleration of particles on the surface of the earth as a
be the policy of the Stale 10 safeguard We, health, property, function of time, which is called an accelerogram. The
and public welfare. consistent with the principles of sound accelerograph generally records three mutually
environmental management and control; and 10 this end, perpendicular components of motion in the vertical and
make it the purpose of this Code to provide for all buildings two orthogonal horizontal directions.
and structures, a framework of minimum standards and
requirements to regulate and control their location, site, ACCELERATION is the rate at which the velocity of a
design, quality of materials', construction, lise, occupancy, particle changes with time.
and maintenance,"
ACCELEROMETER is an instrument used to measure
In conformance thereto and as provided in the NSCP 2010, acceleration in the vertical and two orthogonal horizontal
these Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake directions. An accelerometer has no built-in data recording
Recording Instrumentation for Buildings is developed to capacity and is attached to a multi-channel data logger or
improve the understanding of the actual dynamic behavior an accelerograph to record measured acceleration.
of buildings under earthquake loading and confirm the
design according to the NSCP. The recorded data can be ACCREDITED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER (ASE) is
used to improve the structural code thereby reducing loss a civil engineer with special qualifications to practice
of lives and limbs as well as properties during future structural engineering with special training in earthquake
damaging earthquakes. The response data from several engineering and certified by ASEP.
buildings in a particular area or several areas will also be
used as basis for the government's earthquake disaster ACTIONS (GROUND MOTION) is a general term
mitigation/remedial and rehabilitation strategies including including all aspects of ground motion, namely
its emergency response and relief operations programs. acceleration, velocity, or displacement from an earthquake
The instruments may also be used to set off alarms at or other energy source.
specified intensity levels. They may also be used to trigger
BANDWIDTH is the frequency range that the sensor
automatic switching off utilities such as gas lines, electric
operates, measured in hertz. (Hz)
power lines and elevators as may be prudent in case of high
intensity earthquake. The recorded data are important
CHANNEL is a path along which information (as data or
parameters for building safety re-evaluation and
voice) in the form of electrical signal, passes; a band of
resumption of operations including post-earthquake
frequencies of sufficient width for a single radio or
evaluation of buildings.
television communication.
CLUSTERED BUILDINGS is a group of buildings built

close together on a sizable tract of land in order to preserve
open spaces larger than the individual yard for common
recreation.
DAMPING is the energy dissipation properties of a

material or system under cyclic stress.
DATA LOGGER is a data logger is an electronic device

that records data over time or in relation to location either
with a built in instrument or sensor or via external
instruments and sensors.

APPENDIX I-B - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings I-B3
DISPLACEMENT is the measured distance travelled by NATURAL FREQUENCY is the number of wave cycles
a particle from an initial position. per second which a system tends to oscillate in the absence
of any driving or damping force.
ENVIRONMENT is the aggregate of surrounding things,
conditions, or influences that may affect the operability of PEAK GROUND ACCELERATION IPGAI is the
an instrumentation device such as accelerograph, maximum ground acceleration at a specific location for the
velocimeter, etc. time interval.
ERI. Earthquake Recording Instrumentations. PERIOD is the time interval required for one full cycle of
a wave.
FFT. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) is a numerical
algorithm to compute the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) REFUGE AREA is an area inside a building where people
and it's inverse. Fourier analysis converts time to evacuate or assemble during a disaster or emergency i.e.
frequency and vice versa; an FFT rapidly computes such fire, but not for earthquake.
transformations by factorizing the DFT matrix into a
product of sparse factors. RESPONSE SPECTRUM is a plot of the peak or
amplitude of steady-state response (displacement, velocity
GALS is the unit measure of acceleration equivalent to or acceleration) of a series of oscillators of varying natural
(1I1000)*g. Note that 1000 gals = 19. frequency that are forced into motion by the same base
vibration or shock.
g is acceleration due to gravity equals to 9.81 m/s' or 32.2
ftJs" . SIR. Seismic Instrumentation Room.
INTENSITY is a number (written as a Roman numeral) STRONG MOTION is a ground motion of sufficient
describing the severity of an earthquake in terms of its amplitude to be of interest in evaluating the damage caused
effects on the earth's surface and on humans and their by earthquakes or nuclear explosions.
structures.
TIME HISTORY is the sequence of values of any time-
INTENSITY METER is an intensity meter records and varying quantity (such as a ground motion measurement)
stores the various data that are associated with the reckoned at a set of [usually] equal time intervals.
earthquake and that it can notify those data to host system
as it equips data communication function. In addition, it VELOCIMETER is an instrument used to measure
makes the "Earthquake Early Warning System" workable velocity of a particle.
with creating a system network by making use of optional
"earthquake early detecting function." VELOCITY is a measure of the rate of motion ofa particle
expressed as the rate of change of its position in a particular
IP67. The Ingress Protection rating system is a direction with time.
classification system showing the degrees of protection of
the instrumentation device from solid objects and liquids.
The first number refers to the protection against solid
objects, normally dust. If the first number is 0, there is no
protection provided. A number 5 refers to limited
protection against dust. The number 6 is for total protection
against dust. The second number of the IP rating system
refers to protection against liquids. A "0" indicates no
protection, while a "7" refers to protection against
immersion between 15 cm to 1 m for 30 minutes.

V. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
The requirements ofNSCP Section 105.2 shall apply to all

existing buildings listed in Table 1, located in Seismic
Zone 4 (entire Philippines except Palawan and Tawi-
Tawi), for which certificates of occupancies were issued.
Building permits shall only be issued for buildings
qualified for seismic instrumentation when site or location
of SIR has been indicated or incorporated in the plan.
TABLE 1. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
TYPE AND HEIGHT OF LOCATION REQUIREMENTS

BUILDING
GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS
A. Hospitals, schools and I. Three (3) accelerographs at 1. Accelerograph for

other buildings fifty Ground Floor / Lowest recording waveform and
(50) meters high and Basement; Middle Floor; transformed to FFT.
above and Floor Below Roof, or
2. Data output to include
2. One (1) accelerograph at acceleration response
Ground Floor / Lowest spectra and pseudo
Basement interphased with acceleration response.
two (2) accelerometers at
3. With GPS capability.
Middle Floor and Floor
Below Roof, or 4. Capability to send data to
data center of the
3. Three (3) accelerometers
government.
with common data logger
at Ground Floor / Lowest
Basement; Middle Floor;
and Floor Below Roof
B. Hospitals with 50-bed One (1) accelerograph or one

capacity or more and (1) accelerometer connected to
Schools with twenty a data logger, at Ground Floor /
(20) classrooms or more Lowest Basement
but not less than three
(3) storey high
C. Provincial/City / One (I) accelerograph or one

Municipal Halls and (I) accelerometer connected to
Buildings a data logger, at Ground Floor
Level/Lowest Basement

/),PPENDIX 1-8 - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings 1-85
TABLE 1. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS (continued)
TYPE AND HEIGHT OF
I
LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
BUILDING
PRIV ATE BUILDINGS
A. Buildings fifty (50) meters 1. Three (3) accelerographs at 1. Accelerograph for recording
high and above Ground Floor /
Floor Below Roof, or
2. One
Lowest
Basement; Middle Floor; and
(1) accelerograph at
2.
waveform and transformed to
FFT.
Data output to include
acceleration response spectra
II
Ground Floor / Lowest and pseudo acceleration
Basement interphase with two response.
I
(2) accelerometers at Middle
3. For buildings above ninety
Floor and Floor Below Roof, or
(90) meters or thirty (30)
3. Three (3) accelerometers with storeys in height, additional
~
common data logger at Ground velocity meter at ground floor ~
Floor / Lowest Basement; / lowest basement shall be
I
Middle Floor; and Floor Below installed. Output data to
Roof include velocity response
spectra and pseudo velocity
B. Hospitals with 50-bed One (I) accelerograph or one (I) response spectra. Data logger I
capacity or more and accelerometer connected to a data to be part of the system.
Schools with 20 classrooms logger at Ground Floor / Lowest
4. With GPS capability.
or more but not less than Basement
three (3) storey high
C. Commercial Buildings with One (I) accelerograph or one (I)

occupancy of at least one accelerometer connected to a data
thousand (1,000) persons or logger at Ground Floor I Lowest
gross floor area of at least Basement
ten thousand (l0,000)
square meters
I shows the types of buildings required to be

with earthquake recording instrumentation. The
requirements for installation of accelerograph are for
buildings located in cities and municipalities within a 200
km radius from a Type A faults as specified in the NSCP
2010 and as indicated from the active fault maps issued by
the Philippine Institute of Seismology and Volcanology
(PHIVOLCS).

For clustered buildings with completely similar design and For new buildings, the installation ofthese instruments
construction, it shall have a minimum of eighteen (18) shall form part of the requirements for Certificate of
channels with a common data logger. The location of the Occupancy issued by the Building Official.
instruments shall be determined by an Accredited
4. Additional Requisite Information of Buildings to be
Structural Engineer.
instrumented. It is necessary to establish a baseline
data to make effective use of the records to be
I. Maintenance. Earthquake Recording Instruments shall collected from the acceJerograph(s) installed in the
be maintained in proper working condition. The building. The following information are required:
installation, servicing or removal of the instruments
shall be done by qualified technical personnel of the .. As-built blueprints,
supplier whose product complies with the minimum .. Structural design calculations,
specifications as specified in these Guidelines and
Implementing Rules. .. Dynamic analysis (mode shapes and
frequencies) as used in the design
Maintenance of the instruments shall be by the owner calculations, if available, forced-vibration
of the building subject to the monitoring of the test results, and ambient-vibration test
Building Official or its designated representative. results, and
.. Comprehensive subsurface soil exploration
2. Service Period. The maximum service interval is one
and investigation report.
(I) year. If the instrument is inoperative at two
consecutive service inspections, then are-inspection
VI. DATA PROCESSING
and servicing shall be required at a maximum service
interval of six (6) months until the instrument is
Modem strong motion instruments have capabilities to
rendered fully operative. When the instrument
continuously requires repair for a period of four (4) store and transmit digital data through telecommunications
consecutive years, or inoperative repeatedly for at links and other media, including the internet.
least three (3) times in a four (4)-year period, the
instrument shall be replaced. I. The data from digital recordings are passed through a
correction algorithm that applies a high-frequency
3. Instrumentation of Selected Building. All owners of filter (50 Hz typical: I Hz=1 cycle per second). Plots
existing buildings listed in Table 1 shall provide of the corrected acceleration, velocity, and
accessible space for the installation of appropriate displacements for each channel of recording are
earthquake recording instruments. Location of said prepared.
instruments shall be determined by an Accredited
Structural Engineer. 2. Response spectra are calculated for periods up to about
half of the long-period limit. Linear plots of relative-
For proposed buildings, the Accredited Structural acceleration response spectra and plots of pseudo-
Engineer shall include the layout, instrument acceleration response are prepared if specified to the
specifications, installation requirements, and location instrument supplier.
of the instrument in the structural plans submitted for
building permit purposes. 3. Fourier amplitude spectra, calculated by Fast Fourier
Transform (FFT), are presented on linear axes and log-
The actual installation of the instruments shall be log axes. These sets of processed data are then
verified by the Building Official. provided to the user for evaluation, assessment of
facilities and structures, and research.
For existing buildings without ERI, the installation of
these instruments shall form part of the requirements
of the Annual Certificate of Inspection issued by the
Building Official.
For existing buildings with ERI, the building owner

shall be required to submit a certification from ASE
that the existing ERI conform to these guidelines. If
the existing ERI do not conform to these guidelines,
the building owner shall upgrade such ERr.

APPENDIX 1-8 - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings I-B7
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS I o Continuous Monitoring: Capable for

REQUIREMENTS FOR EARTHQUAKE continuous recording by minimum one (1)
RECORDING INSTRUMENTS year
o AD converter: 24 bit or better.

The following are the minimum specifications for
Ealthquake Recording Instruments to be used for
buildings listed in Table 1. D. Timing.
Accelerographsl Accelerometers: o Interval: Half second or less.
o Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 second per 100

o Minimum design life: Ten (10) years and seconds.
should be demonstrated and certified to have
a 40,000-hour mean time (minimum) o Type: GPS or NTP server.
between failures.
E. Triggering.
o Minimum of three (3) components - Vertical,
Longitudinal and Transverse o Method: Pendulum or other device using
o Natural frequency: Above 50 Hz. earthquake motion as exciting force.
o Damping: Approximately 60 to 70 percent o Level: Accelerograph: 0.5 to 100 gals,

critical. nominal I Velocimeter: 0.005 rnrn/s to I
mrn/s
o Sensitivity: ±2000 gals or ±2g (full scalelV)
o Time: Full operation of accelerograph I
o Bandwidth: DC to 100 Hz velocimeter in not over 0.1 second after
o Environment: IP67 or better activation.
o Input Range: ±2g - ±6g F. Power.
VeJocimeters • Battery maintained by trickle charger from

AC power and capable of powering the
o Minimum of three (3) components - Vertical, accelerograph and velocimeter for two (2)
Longitudinal and Transverse days after loss of power.
o Natural frequency: Above 50 Hz.
G. Communication
o Damping: Approximately 60 to 70 percent
critical. o Ethernet: 10 base-Tor 100 base- TX
o Sensitivity: ±2 m/s • Protocol: TCP/IP FTP/SFTP
o Bandwidth: 0.1 Hz to 100 Hz
2. Records. When media is used for recording, a
o Environment: [P67 or better new media load shall be placed in the instruments
when the media remaining is less than )/3 of
Data Logger I Recording. (Common for original load. For instruments, memory should be
Accelerographs/Accelerometers and Velocimeters ) copied out and emptied when the remaining
amount is less than 113of the original capacity.
o Sampling Frequency: A minimum of 100
samples per second. 3. Refurbishing and Replacement. When the
instrument supplier finds that the instrument must
o Time: From at least 20 seconds before the be removed from the building for repair, the
ground shaking begins until 30 seconds after instrument shall be replaced by a temporary
the last triggering level motion. identical instrument, and the permanent
o RMS Noise: System noise shall be less than instrument shall be returned and made operative
40 ug's measured over 0 - 30 Hz. within 60 days from the removal date.
o Media: Digital storage media (minimum of

32 GB)

4. Battery Inspection. The instrument shall be tested IX. DAT A RETRIEVAL AND
with any charge device disconnected from an INTERPRETATION
electric power source.
Immediately after the occurrence of an Intensity VI
VIII. LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF THE earthquake or greater in the locality as determined by
INSTRUMENTS the Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (PHIVOLCS), the Building Official shall
1. General. issue a written notice to the building owner to retrieve
the data and to have the data interpreted by an
The instrument shall be located so that access by Accredited Structural Engineer. The retrieval and
qualified technical personnel is maintained at all times interpretation of the data shall be performed by an
and is unobstructed by room contents. A sign stating Accredited Structural Engineer. The data and
"MAINTAIN CLEAR ACCESS TO THIS interpretation of the building shall be submitted by the
fNSTRUMENT" shall be posted in a conspicuous Owner to the DPWH for storage, post-earthquake
location. No instruments shall be located in refuge safety evaluation of the building, and for emergency
area. response.
The preferred locations of the instruments are in small, X. DATA STORAGE AND ARCHIVING
seldom-used rooms or closets near a column (in a
vertically aligned stack), with adequate space to Data storage and archiving shall be at the DPWH
securely mount the instrument and an approved Central Office or other data centers designated by the
protective enclosure attached securely to the floor. The DPWH. The ASEP, upon written request to the
locations shall be marked on the submitted structural DPWH, shall be provided the said data.
and architectural floor plans, and properly approved.
XI. CERTIFICATE OF INSTAL.LATION OF
2. Buildings with three (3) or more instruments. EARTHQUAKE RECORDING
INSTRUMENTA nON
Buildings with three (3) or more
accelerographs/accelerometers shall be located in the Upon compliance of building owners of these
ground floor/lowest basement, middle floor, and the Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake
topmost floor of the building. When applicable, Recording Instrumentation, the Building Official shall
velocimeter shall be located in the lowest basement or issue a Certificate of Installation of Earthquake
ground floor level. The locations of the instruments are Recording Instrumentation. The Certificate must be
selected to provide the maximum information of the posted at the roorn/s where the instrument is located
building response from a major earthquake. Such and in a conspicuous place, properly
information would form part of the valuable data in protected/secured, in the ground floor lobby of the
understanding the building's behavior during major building.
seismic event.
XII. TESTING, INSPECTION AND
3. Orientation of the Instruments. COMMISSIONING
All instruments shall be installed with the same Building Owner, Building Official, and Supplier shall
orientation relative to the building, with the orientation inspect, test, and commission the seismic monitoring
chosen such that the reference or long dimension of system together to ensure that the systems are in
the instrument is aligned with a major axis of the proper operational condition and comply with the
building. The orientation of the instrument shall be requirements of these guidelines. The Supplier must
clearly marked on the submitted structural plans. The submit a certificate from the manufacturer that the
supplier-instalJer shall certify that the instruments are instrument is in good working condition.
oriented as per plan.
The Building Owner shall be responsible for the
protection and maintenance of the site of the ERI as
prescribed in these guidelines.

APPENDIX 1-8 - Guidelines and Implementing Rules on Earthquake Recording Instrumentation for Buildings 1-89
XIII. SUPPORT AND MAINTENANCE
The seismic monitoring system shall have a

maintenance clearance as per the requirement of the
National Structural Code of the Philippines under
Section 105.2. "Maintenance and service shall be
provided by the owner of the building."
"The supplier shall provide guarantee that the system

shall have a maintenance period for at least 10 years.
For the service period, the maximum service interval
is one year. The equipment obsolescence shall not
hinder the proper continuous operation of the
equipment throughout the 10 years duration. When the
equipment's supplier finds that the instrument must be
removed from the building for repair, there must be a
service unit as a temporary replacement to continue
the collection of data, if and when there is an
occurrence of an earthquake during the duration of the
repair.
XIV. REFERENCES
D Skolniket. al. A Quantitative Basis Jor BUilding

Instrumentation Specifications, NSF CMMI Research
and Innovation Conference, 2009 (Hawaii).
M. Celebi. Seismic Instrumentation of Buildings:

Special GSNUSGS PROJECT (2002).
Guideline for ANSS Seismic Monitoring of

Engineered Civil Systems - Version 1.0.
National Building Code of the Philippines, PD 1096.
National Structural Code of the Philippines (NSCP),

Volume I, Buildings, Towers and Other Vertical
Structures, Sixth Edition, 2010.

NSCP C101-15
a ter
I I I L

VOLUME I

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@gmai1.com

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-1
Table of Contents
201 4
u,,~" ~ REQUIREMENTS 4
Scope 4
TIONS 4
~""H T 203 , 10
TIONS OF LOADS 10
General 10
Symbols and Notations 10
Load Combinations using Strength Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design ]1
Load Combinations Using Allowable Stress or Allowable Strength Design 11
Special Seismic Load Combinations 11
CTION 204 12
LOADS 12
General 12
Weights of Materials and Constructions 12
Partition Loads 12
205 15
E LOADS 15
General 15
Critical Distribution of Live Loads 15
Floor Live Loads 15
Roof Live Loads 19
Reduction of Live Loads 19
Alternate Floor Live Load Reduction 20
ON 206 21
JVIINIMUM LOADS 21
General 21
Other Loads 21
Impact Loads 21
Anchorage of COilcrete and Masonry Walls 21
Interior Wall Loads 21
Retaining Walls 21
Water Accumulation 2I
Uplift on Floors and Foundations 22
Crane Loads 22
Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas 22
207 23
LOADS 23
Specifications 23
General Requirements 23
Procedures 23
Definitions 25
A.3 Symbols and Notations 29

2-2 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
207 AA General 31
207 A.S Wind Hazard Map 32
207A.6 Wind Directionality 35
207A.7 Exposure 36
207 A.8 Topographic Effects 46
207 A.9 Gust Effects 49
207 A.9.1 Gust Effect Factor 55
207A.I0 Enclosure Classification 57
207 A.II Internal Pressure Coefficient 60
207B Wind Loads On Buildings-MWFRS (Directional Procedure) 61
207B.l Scope 61
Part 1: Enclosed, Partially Enclosed, and Open Buildings of All Heights 62
207B.2 General Requirements 62
207B.3 Velocity Pressure 62
207BA Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting System 68
Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings with h = 48 m 82
207B.S General Requirements , 82
2078.6 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting System 84
207C Wind Loads On Buildings-MWFRS (Envelope Procedure) ] 04
Part 1: Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Low-Rise Buildings 104
207C.2 General Requirements 104
207C.3 Velocity Pressure 105
207CA Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Resisting System 109
Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Low-Rise Buildings 112
207C.5 General Requirements 113
207C.6 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Resisting System 114
207D Wind Loads on Other Structures and Building Appurtenances - MWFRS 119
2070.2 General Requirements 119
207D.3 Velocity Pressure 119
207DA Design Wind Loads - Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid Signs 122
2070.5 Design Wind Loads-Other Structures 122
2070.6 Parapets 123
207D.8 Minimum Design Wind Loading 126
207E Wind Loads - Components and Cladding (C&C) 130
207E.l Scope 130
207E.2 General Requirements 132
207E.3 Velocity Pressure 133
Part I: Low-Rise Buildings 136
207EA Building Types 136
Part 2: Low-Rise Buildings (Simplified) 137
207E.5 Building Types 137
Part 3: Buildings with h > 18 In 139
Part 4: Buildings with h ::; 48111 (Simplified) [40
Part 5: Open Buildings 155
Part 6: Building Appurtenances and Rooftop Structures and Equipment 156
207E.9 Parapets 156
207E.I0 Roof Overhangs 157
207E.ll Rooftop Structures and Equipment for Buildings with h s 18 m 158
207F Wind Tunnel Procedure 180
SECTION 208 184
EARTHQUAKE LOADS 184
208.1 General 184

-, c: Definitions 184
., Symbols and Notations 184
Basis for Design 185
Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related Effects 212
Earthquake Loads and Modeling Requirements 219
Detailed Systems Design Requirements 221
Non-Building Structures 229
Lateral Force on Elements of Structures, Nonstructural Components and Equipment Supported by Structures 231
Alternative Earthquake Load Procedure 236
ON 209 236
. LATERAL LOADS 236
General 236
N 210 238
LOADS 238
Roof Drainage 238
Design Rain Loads 238
Ponding Instability 238
Controlled Drainage 238
211 238
LOADS 238
General 238
Definitions 238
Design Requirements 239
Loads During Flooding 240
Establishment of Flood Hazard Areas 242
Design and Construction 242
Flood Hazard Documentation 242
Consensus Standards and Other Referenced Documents 243
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition. 2015

201.1 Scope The following terms are defined for use in this section:
This chapter provides minimum design load requirements ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM is an assembly consisting of
for the design of buildings, towers and other vertical panels mounted on pedestals to provide an under-floor
structures. Loads and appropriate load combinations which space for the installation of mechanical, electrical,
have been developed to be used together for strength communication or similar systems or to serve as an air-
design and allowable stress design are set forth. supply or return-air plenum.
AGRICULTURAL BUILDING is a structure designed

and constructed to house farm implements, hay, grain,
poultry, livestock or other horticultural products. The
structure shall not be a place of human habitation or a place
of employment where agricultural products are processed,
treated, or packaged, nor shall it be a place used by the
public.
ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD) is a method of

proportioning and designing structural members such that
elastically computed stresses produced in the members by
nominal loads do not exceed specified allowable stresses
(also called working stress design).
ASSEMBLY BUILDING is a building or portion of a

building for the gathering together of 50 or more persons
for such purposes as deliberation, education, instruction,
worship, entertainment, amusement, drinking or dining, or
awaiting transportation.
A WNING is an architectural projection that provides

weather protection, identity, or decoration and is wholly
supported by the building to which it is attached.
BALCONY, EXTERIOR, is an exterior floor system

projecting from and supported by a structure without
additional independent supports.
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motions are

considered to be imparted to the structure or the level at
which the structure, as a dynamic vibrator, is supported.
BASE SHEAR is the total design lateral force or shear at

the base of a structure.
BASIC WIND SPEED is a three-second gust speed at 10

m above the ground in Exposure C (see Section 207 A.7.3)
as determined in accordance with Section 207 A.5.1 and
associated with an annual probability of 0.02, (i.e. 50-year
mean recurrence interval).
BEARING WALL SYSTEM is a structural system that :

does not have a complete vertical load-carrying space,
frame. See Section 208.4.6.1.
~ .....
UNDARY ELEMENT is an element at edges of percentage of openings in the balance of the building
..
·...;.. or at perimeters of shear walls or diaphragms.
••~""'(7C envelope does not exceed 20 percent.
These conditions are expressed by the following equations:
I. Ao> 1.10Aoi
lNG FRAME SYSTEM is essentially a complete 2. Ao > smaller of (0.5 m2 or O. 01Ag)

frame that provides support for gravity loads. See
tion 208.4.6.2 .
..' BRACED WALL LINE is a series of braced wall panels

See symbols and notations.
a single storey that meets the requirements of Section
10.3.
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE, REGULAR-
SHAPED refers to a building or other structure having no
RACED WALL PANEL is a section of wall braced in
unusual geometrical irregularity in spatial form.
__,,~~,.o with Section 620.10.3.
BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURES, RIGID refer

ENCLOSED is a building that does not
to a building or other structure whose fundamental
with the requirements for open or partially
frequency is greater than or equal to 1.0 Hz.
""".Vv._~ buildings.
BUILDING, SIMPLE DIAPHRAGM refers to a
LDlNG ENVELOPE refers to cladding, roofing,
building in which both windward and leeward wind loads
wall, glazing, door assemblies. window
are transmitted through floor and roof diaphragms to the
··,,""_····,·Iies, skylight assemblies, and other components
same vertical MWFRS (e.g., no structural separations).
"v'"V"""", the building.
CANTILEVERED COLUMN ELEMENT is a column

UILDING, FLEXIBLE refers to slender buildings that
element in a lateral-force-resisting system that cantilevers
a fundamental natural frequency less than 1.0 Hz.
from a fixed base and has minimal moment capacity at the
top, with lateral forces applied essentially at the top.
ILDING, LOW-RISE is an enclosed or partially
losed building that complies with the following
COLLECTOR is a member 01' element provided to
transfer lateral forces from a portion of a structure to
vertical elements ofthe lateral-force-resisting system.
Mean roof height, h, less than or equal to 18m. and
COMPONENT is a part or element of an architectural,
Mean roof height, h, does not exceed least horizontal electrical, mechanical or structural system.
dimension.
COMPONENT, EQUIPMENT is a mechanical or
G, OPEN refers to a building having each wall electrical component or element that is part of a mechanical
..'least 80 percent open. This condition is expressed for
and/or electrical system.
wall by the equation Ao ~ O. BAg. See symbols and
COMPONENT, FLEXIBLE is a component, including
its attachments, having a fundamental period greater than
PARTIALLY ENCLOSED is a building 0.06 s.
complies with both of the following conditions:
COMPONENT, RIGID is a component, including its
the total area of openings in a wall that receives attachments. having a fundamental period less than or
.... positive external pressure exceeds the sum of the areas equal to 0.06s.
of openings in the balance of the building envelope
(walls and roof) by more than 10%; and COMPONENTS AND CLADDING refers to elements of
the building envelope that do not qualify as part of the
... The total area of openings in a wall that receives MWFRS.
, positive external pressure exceeds 0.5 m2 or 1 percent
of the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, and the

CONCENTRICALLY-BRACED FRAME is a braced DIAPHRAGM CHORD or SHEAR WALL CHORD is

frame in which the members are subjected primarily to the boundary element of a diaphragm or shear wall that is
axial forces. assumed to take axial stresses analogous to the flanges of a
beam.
CONVENTIONAL LIGHT -FRAME
CONSTRUCTION is a type of construction in which the DIAPHRAGM STRUT (drag strut, tie, and collector) is
primary structural elements are formed by a system of the element of a diaphragm parallel to the applied load that
repetitive wood framing members. collects and transfers diaphragm shear to the vertical
resisting elements or distributes loads within the
COVERING, IMPACT-RESISTANT is a covering diaphragm. Such members may take axial tension or
designed to protect impact-resistant glazing. compression.
CRIPPLE WALL is a framed stud wall extending from DIAPHRAGM, UNBLOCKED is a diaphragm that has
the top of the foundation to the underside of floor framing edge nailing at supporting members only. Blocking
for the lowest occupied level. between supporting structural members at panel edges is
not included.
DEAD LOADS consist of the weight of all materials and
fixed equipment incorporated into the building or other DRIFT 0'· STOREY DRIFT is the lateral displacement of
structure. one level relative to the level above or below.
DECK is an exterior floor system supported on at least two DUAL SYSTEM is a combination of moment-resisting
opposing sides by an adjacent structure and/or posts, piers, frames and shear walls or braced frames designed
or other independent supports. accordance with the criteria of Section 208.4.6.4.
DESIGN BASIS GROUND MOTION is that ground EA VE HEIGHT is the distance from the ground surface
motion that has a 10 percent chance of being exceeded in adjacent to the building to the roof eave line at a particular
50 years as determined by a site-specific hazard analysis or wall. If the height of the eave varies along the wall, the
may be determined from a hazard map. average height shall be used.
DESIGN FORCE is the equivalent static force to be used ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a
in the determination of wind loads Jar open buildings and steel-braced frame designed in conformance with Section
other structures. 528.
DESIGN RESPONSE SPECTRUM is an elastic EFFECTIVE WIND AREA is the area used to determine
response spectrum for 5 percent equivalent viscous GCp. For cladding fasteners, the effective wind area shall
damping used to represent the dynamic effects of the not be greater than the area that is tributary to an individual
Design Basis Ground Motion for the design of structures in fastener.
accordance with Sections 208.5 and 208.5.3.
ELASTIC RESPONSE PARAMETERS are forces and
DESIGN SEISMIC FORCE is the minimum total deformations determined from an elastic dynamic analysis
strength design base shear. factored and distributed in using an unreduced ground motion representation, in
accordance with Section 208.5. accordance with Section 208.5.3.
DESIGN PRESSURE is the equivalent static pressure to ESCARPMENT, also known as scarp, with respect to
be used in the determination of wind loads for buildings. topographic effect in Section 207 A.8, is a cliff or steep
.slope generally separating two levels or gently sloping
DIAPHRAGM is a horizontal or nearly horizontal system areas (see Figure 207A-8-1).
acting to transmit lateral forces to the vertical resisting
elements. The term "diaphragm" includes horizontal ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are buildings, towers and
bracing systems. other vertical structures that are intended to remain
operational in the event of extreme environmental loading
DIAPHRAGM, BLOCKED is a diaphragm in which all from wind or earthquakes.
sheathing edges not occurring on framing members are
supported on and connected to blocking. FACTORED LOAD is the product of a load specified in
Sections 204 through 208 and a load factor. See Section
203.3 for combinations of factored loads.
-~---."'~>--
-.,--.---.-
,.-
..-
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Desiqn Loads 2-7
HARDBOARD is a fibrous-felted, homogeneous panel

made from lignocellulosic fibers consolidated under heat
and pressure in a hot press to a density not less than
50kg/m3.
ELEMENT or SYSTEM is one whose HILL, with respect to topographic effects in Section
on under lateral load is significantly larger than 207A.8, is a land surface characterized by strong relief in
parts of the system. Limiting ratios for defining any horizontal direction (Figure 207A.8-2).
ic flexible elements are set forth in Section 20S.5.1.3.
HORIZONTAL BRACING SYSTEM is a horizontal
PRODUCTS RESEARCH AND truss system that serves the same function as a diaphragm.
ELOPMENT INSTITUTE (FPRDI) is the
of Science and Technology's (DOST's) IMPACT-RESISTANT COVERING, is a covering
and development arm on forest products designed to protect glazing, which has been shown by
ization. It is mandated to conduct basic and applied testing in accordance with ASTM EIS86 and ASTM
to help the wood-using industries disseminate E 1996 of other approved test methods to withstand the
and technologies on forest products to end impact or wind-borne debris missiles likely to be generated
in wind-borne debris regions during design winds.
ROOF is a roof with a configuration generally IMPORTANCE FACTOR is a factor that accounts for
conforming to those shown in Figures 207B.4-4 through the degree of hazard to human life and damage to property .
.4-6 (monoslope, pitched, or troughed) in an open
Iding with no enclosing walls underneath the roof INTERMEDIATE MOMENT RESISTING FRAME
(IMRF) is a concrete frame designed in accordance with
Section 412.
GE is a building or portion thereof in which motor
containing flammable or combustible liquids or gas LATERAL-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is that part
its tank is stored, repaired or kept. of the structural system designed to resist the Design
Seismic Forces.
'UJ'"u",-..",E, PRJV ATE, is a building or a portion of a
lding, 110t more than 90m2 in area, in which only motor LIMIT STATE is a condition beyond which a structure or
. used by the tenants of the building or buildings on member becomes unfit for service and is judged to be no
the premises are kept or stored. longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit
state) or to be unsafe (strength limit state).
GLAZING is a glass or transparent or translucent plastic
sheet used in windows, doors, skylights, or curtain walls. LIVE LOADS are those loads produced by the use and
occupancy of the building or other structure and do not
GLAZING, IMPACT-RESISTANT is a glazing that has include dead load, construction load, or environmental
been tested in accordance with ASTM E IS86 and ASTM loads.
El996 or other approved test methods to withstand the
impact of wind-borne missiles likely to be generated in LOADS are forces or other actions that result from the
wind-borne debris regions during design winds. weight of all building materials, occupants and their
possessions, environmental effects, differential
GLUED BUILT-UP MEMBERS are structural elements, movements, and restrained dimensional changes.
the section of which is composed of built-up lumber, wood Permanent loads are those loads in which variations over
structural panels or wood structural panels in combination time are rare or of small magnitude. All other loads are
with lumber, all parts bonded together with structural variable loads.
adhesives.
LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN
GRADE (LUMBER) is the classification of lumber in (LRFD) METHOD is a method of proportioning and
regard to strength and utility in accordance with the designing structural elements using load and resistance
grading rules of an approved lumber grading agency. factors such that no applicable limit state is reached when
the structure is subjected to all appropriate load
combinations. The term "LRFD" is used in the design of
steel structures.

MACHINE-GRADED LUMBER (MGL) is a lumber ORDINARY MOMENT-RESiSTING FRAM

evaluated by a machine using a non-destructive test and (OMRF) is a moment-resisting frame not meeting spec
sorted into different stress grades. detailing requirements for ductile behavior.
MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM ORTHOGONAL EFFECTS are the earthquake

(MWFRS) is an assemblage of structural elements effects on structural elements simultaneously occurring
assigned to provide support and stability for the overall the lateral-force-resisting systems along two
structure. The system generally receives wind loading from axes.
more than one surface.
OVERSTRENGTH is a characteristic of structures
MARQUEE is a permanent roofed structure attached to the actual strength is larger than the design strength.
and supported by the building and projecting over public degree of over-strength is material-and system oecencenu
right-of-way.
PARTICLEBOARD is a manufactured panel
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT is the average of the roof eave consisting of particles of wood or combinations of
height and the height to the highest point on the roof particles and wood fibers bonded together with "vrlT,,,>t,
surface, except that, for roof angles of less than or equal to resins or other suitable bonding system by a
10°, the mean roof height shall be the roof eave height. process, in accordance with approved
recognized standard.
MOISTURE CONTENT (MC) is the amount of moisture
in wood, usually measured as the percentage of water to the PLYWOOD is a panel of laminated veneers
oven dry weight of the wood. to Philippine National Standards (PNS 196)
Specifications".
MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME is a frame in which
members and joints are capable of resisting forces PI1 EFFECT is the secondary effect on shears, axial
primarily by flexure. and moments of frame members inducedby the hori
displacement of vertical loads from various loading,
MOMENT-RESISTING WALL FRAME (MRWF) is a a structure is subjected to lateral forces.
masonry wall frame especially detailed to provide ductile
behavior and designed in conformance with Section RECOGNIZED LITERATURE are published
708.2.6. findings and technical papers that are approved.
NOMINAL LOADING is a design load that stressed a RIDGE, with respect to topographic effects in Secti
member or fastening to the full allowable stress tabulated 207 A.8, is an elongated crest of a hill characterized
in this chapter. This loading may be applied for strong relief in two directions (see Figure 207A.8-1).
approximately 10 years, either continuously or
cumulatively, and 90 percent of this load may be applied ROTATION is the torsional movement of a
for the remainder of the life of the member or fastening. about a vertical axis.
NOMINAL SIZE (Lumber) refers to the commercial size SHEAR WALL is a wall designed to resist lateral
designation of width and depth, in standard sawn lumber parallel to the plane of the wall (sometimes referred to
and glued laminated lumber grades; somewhat larger than vertical diaphragm or structural wail).
the standard net size of dressed lumber.
SHEAR WALL-FRAME INTERACTIVE
OPENINGS are apertures or holes in the building uses combinations of shear walls and frames designed
envelope that allow air to flow through the building resist lateral forces in proportion to their relative .
envelope and that are designed as "open" during design considering interaction between shear walls and frames
winds as defined by these provisions. all levels.
ORDINARY BRACED FRAME (OBF) is a steel-braced

frame designed in accordance with the provisions of
Section 527 or 528 or concrete-braced frame designed in
accordance with Section 421.

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2·9
THING is a layer of boards or of other wood or fiber STRUCTURE is an assemblage of framing members
s applied to the outer studs, joists, and rafters of a designed to support gravity loads and resist lateral forces.
ilding to strengthen structures and serve as a base for an Structures may be categorized as building structures or
or weatherproof cladding. non building structures.
THING, WALL is a layer of boards or of other STRENGTH DESIGN is a method of proportioning and
wood or fiber materials used to cover the wall studding. designing structural members such that the computed
forces produced in the members by the factored load do not
STRUCTURAL GLUED~LAMINATED TIMBER is exceed the member design strength. The term strength
. any member comprising an assembly of laminations of design is used in the design of concrete structures .
lumber in which the grain of all laminations is
approximately parallel longitudinally, in which the TOWERS AND OTHER STRUCTURES are
laminations are bonded with adhesives. nonbuilding structures including poles, masts and
billboards that are not typically occupied by persons but are
SUBDIAPHRAGM is a portion of a diaphragm used to also covered by this code.
transfer wall anchorage forces to diaphragm cross ties. It
also refers to a portion of a larger wood diaphragm TREATED WOOD is wood treated with an approved
designed to anchor and transfer local forces to primary preservative under treating and quality control procedures.
diaphragm struts and the main diaphragm.
VERTICAL LOAD-CARRYING FRAME is a space
SOFT STOREY is one in which the lateral stiffness is less frame designed to carry vertical gravity loads.
than 70 percent of the stiffness of the storey above. See
Table 208-9. WALL ANCHORAGE SYSTEM is the system of
elements anchoring the wall to the diaphragm and those
SPACE FRAME is a three-dimensional structural system, elements within the diaphragm required to develop the
without bearing walls, composed of members anchorage forces, including sub-diaphragms and
..•.
interconnected so as to function as a complete self- continuous ties, as specified in Sections 208.7.2.7 and
contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal 208.7.2.8.
diaphragms or floor-bracing systems.
WALL, BEARING is any wall meeting either of the
CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME following classifications:
I. Any metal or wood stud wall that supports more than

1.45 kN/m of vertical load in addition to its own
"'"Jln.lJ MOMENT-RESISTING FRAME (SMRF) weight.
a moment-resisting frame specially detailed to provide
ductile behavior and comply with the requirements given 2. Any masonry or concrete wall that supports more than
,in Chapter 4 or 5. 2.90 kN/m of vertical load in addition to its own
weight.
SPECIAL TRUSS~MOMENT FRAME (STMF) is a
frame specially detailed to provide WALL, EXTERIOR is any wall or element of a wall, or
behavior and comply with the provisions of Section any member or group of members, that defines the exterior
boundaries or courts of a building and that has a slope of
60 degrees or greater with the horizontal plane.
between levels. Storey x is the
WALL, NONBEARING is any wall that is not a bearing
wall.
STOREY DRIFT RATIO is the storey drift divided by
•the storey height. WALL, PARAPET is that part of any wall entirely above
the roof line.
STOREY SHEAR, V x' is the summation of design lateral
..forces above the storey under consideration. W ALL, RETAINING is a wall designed to resist the
lateral displacement of soil or other materials .
.•.•..
STRENGTH is the capacity of an element or a member to
resist factored load as specified in Chapters 2, 3, 4, 5 and WEAK STOREY is one in which the storey strength is
7. less than 80 percent of the storey above. See Table 208-9.

WIND-BORNE DEBRIS REGIONS are areas within

typhoon prone regions located at:
I. Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high water line 203.1 General
where the basic wind speed is equal to or greater than
200 kph, or Buildings, towers and other vertical structures and all ..
portions thereof shall be designed to resist the load
2. In areas where the basic wind speed is equal to or combinations specified in Section 203.3, 203.4 and 203.5.
greater than 250 kph.
The most critical effect can occur when one or more of the .
WOOD OF NATURAL RESISTANCE TO DECAY contributing loads are not acting. All applicable loads shall
OR TERMITES is the heartwood of the species set forth be considered, including both earthquake and wind,
below. Corner sapwood is permitted on 5 percent of the accordance with the specified load combinations.
pieces provided 90 percent or more of the width of each
side on which it occurs is heartwood. Recognized species 203.2 Symbols and Notations
are:
D dead load
.. Decay resistant: Narra, Kamagong, Dao, Tangile. E earthquake load set forth in Section 208.6.1
estimated maximum earthquake force that
o Termite resistant: Narra, Kamagong. can be developed in the structure as set forth
in Section 208.6.1
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL is a structural panel load due to fluids with well-defined
F
product composed primarily of wood and meeting the UBC pressures and maximum heights
Standard 23-2 and 23-3 or equivalent requirements of H load due to lateral pressure of soil and water
Philippine National Standards (PNS). Wood structural in soil
panels include all-veneer plywood, composite panels L live load, except roof live load, including
containing a combination of veneer and wood-based any permitted live load reduction
material, and mat-formed panel such as oriented stranded roof live load, including any permitted live
board and wafer board. load reduction
p pending load
WYTHE is the portion of a wall which is one masonry unit R rain load on the un deflected roof
in thickness. A collar joint is not considered a wythe. T self-straining force and effects arising from
contraction or expansion resulting from
temperature change, shrinkage, moisture
change, creep in component materials,
movement due to differential settlement, or
combinations thereof
W load due to wind pressure

'Load Combinations using Strength Design or No increase in allowable stresses shall be used with these
and Resistance Factor Design load combinations except as specifically permitted by
Section 203.4.2.
203.4.2 Alternate Basic Load Combinations

design or load and resistance factor design
'structures and all portions thereof shall resist the In lieu of the basic load combinations specified in Section
tical effects from the following combinations of 203.4.1, structures and portions thereof shall be permitted
loads: to be designed for the most critical effects resulting from
the following load combinations. When using these
alternate basic load combinations, a one-third increase
(203-1 )
shall be permitted in allowable stresses for all
-:.
combinations, including W or E.
CD + F + T) + 1. 6(L + H) (203-2)
+ O. 5(Lr or R)
D+H + F + 0.75 [L _!_)-
+ t; (0. 6W or 1.4 _ (203-13)
+ 1. 6(Lr or R) + (flL or O. 5W) (203-3 )
O. 6D + O. 6W + H (203-14)
+ 1.OW + flL + 0.5(Lr or R) (203-4) E

0.6D+-+H (203-15)
1.4
(203-5)
D + L + (Lr or R) (203-16)
+ 1.0W + 1.6H (203-6)
D+L + 0.6W (203-17)
+ 1.0E + 1.6H (203-7) E

D+L+- (203-18)
1.4
1.0 for floors in places of public assembly, Exception:

for live loads in excess of 4.8 kPa, and for
garage live load, or Crane hook loads need not be combined with roof live load
0.5 for other live loads or with more than one-half of the wind load.
Other Loads 203.4.3 Other Loads
P is to be considered in design, the applicable load Where P is to be considered in design, each applicable load
added to Section 203.3.1 factored as 1. 2P. shall be added to the combinations specified in Sections
203.4.1 and 203.4.2.
Load Combinations Using Allowable Stress or
Strength Design 203.5 Special Seismic Load Combinations
Basic Load Combinations For both allowable stress design and strength design for
concrete, and Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
allowable stress or allowable strength design is and Allowable Strength Design (ASD) for steel, the
and all portions thereof shall resist the most following special load combinations for seismic design
effects resulting from the following combinations shall be used as specifically required by Section 208, or by
Chapters 3 through 7.
(203-8) 1. 2D + f lL + 1. OEm (203-19)
+H+F+L+T (203-9) 0.9D ± 1.0E 111

(203-20)
+ H + F + (L or R)
1. (203-10)
+ If + F + O. 75[L + T(Lr 01' R)] (203-11)
H +F + (0. 6W !!._)
1.4
01' (203-12)
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l. 7th Edition, 2015

where
f1 1.0 for floors in places of public assembly,
for live loads in excess of 4.8 kPa, and for
204.1 General
garage live load, or
0.5 for other live loads
Dead loads consist of the weight of all materials
Em the maximum effect of horizontal and
construction incorporated into the building or
vertical forces as set forth in Section 208.6.1
structure, including but not limited to walls, floors,
ceilings, stairways, built-in partitions, finishes, claddi
and other similarly incorporated architectural
structural items, and fixed service equipment, including
weight of cranes.
204.2 Weights of Materials and Constructions
The actual weights of materials and constructions shall

used in determining dead loads for purposes of design.
the absence of definite information, it shall be permitted .
use the minimum values in Tables 204-1 and 204-2.
204.3 Partition Loads
Floors in office buildings and other buildings

partition locations are subject to change shall be ~~'"!4'''''
to support, in addition to all other loads,
distributed dead load equal to 1.0 kPa.
Exception:
Access floor systems shall be designed to

addition to all other loads, a uniformly distributed
load 110t less than 0.5 kPa.

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design loads 2-13
26.7 Lime
Hydrated. loose 5.0
12.7 Hydrated. compacted 7.1
21.2 Masonry. Ashlar Stone
8.8 Granite 25.9
~Petroleum. crude .. 8.6 Limestone, crystalline 25.9
Petroleum. refined .. 7.9 Limestone, oolitic 21.2
·Petroleum. benzine .. 7.2 Marble 27.2
Petroleum. gasoline .. 6.6 Sandstone 22.6
:l'itch . 10.8 Masonry, Brick
Tor .. 11.8 Hard, low absorption 20.4
,., , . 82.6 Medium. medium absorption 18.1
86.7 Soft, high absorption 15.7
masonry (cement. stone. sand) . 22.6 Masonry, Concrete (solid portion)
portland. loose . 14.1 Lightweight units 16.5
tile . 23.6 Medium weight units 19.6
1.9 Normal weight units 21.2
9.0
7.1 Masonry grout 22.0
Masonry. Rubble Stone
piled . 8.2 Granite 24.0
turnmou piled
S, . 7.4 Limestone. crystalline 23.1
piled . 7.4 Limestone. oolitic 21.7
dry. piled .. 3.6 Marble 24.5
Sandstone 21.5
Mortar, cement or lime 20.4
................................................................................ 17.0
-slag aggregate 15.7 Particle board 7.1
ite. burned-clay aggregate 14.1 Plywood 5.7
.................................................................................... 20.7 Riprap, not submerged
·Slone 22.6 Limestone 13.0
Vermiculite and perlite aggregate. nonload-bearing 3.9-7.9 Sandstone 14.1
· light aggregate. load bearing 11.0-16.5 Sand
Clean and dry 14.1
................................................................................ 17.4 River. dry 16.7
.................................................................................... 21.7 Slag
including gravel 23.6 Bank .. 11.0
87.3 Bank screenings . 17.0
2.2 Machine .. 15.1
.. not submerged Sand . 8.2
· Clay, dry 9.9 Slate . 27.0
Clay, damp 17.3 Steel, cold-drawn . 77.3
· Clay and gravel. dry 15.7
Stone, quarried. piled
.Sih, moist, loose 12.3
Basalt. granite. gneiss . 15.1
:,'Silt. moist. packed 15.1 Limestone, marble. quartz . 14.9
· Silt. flowing 17.0
Sandstone . 12.9
Sand and gravel, dry. loose 15.7
Shale .. 14.5
Sand and grave I. dry, packed...... 17.3 Greenstone. hornb lende 16.8
Sand and gravel. wet 18.9
.' submerged
Tcrracotta, arch itectural
Voids filled 18.9
Clay 12.6
Voids unfilled , 11.3
Soil 11.0
River mud 14.1 Tin 72.1
Sand or gravel.............. 9.4 Water
Sand or gravel and clay 10.2 Fresh 9.8
........................................................................................... 25.1 Sea 10.1
dry 16.3 Wood (see Chapter 6 for relative densities for Philippine wood)
loose 11.0 Zinc. rolled sheet 70.5
wallboard 7.9
........................................................................................... 9.0
Cast 70.7
Wrought 75.4
.......................................................................................... 111.5
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, 2015

2-·14 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
Table 204-2 Minimum Design Dead Loads (kPa)
Component Load Component Load Component Load

CEILINGS FLOOR FILL FRAME WALLS
Acoustical fiber board 0.05 Cinder concrete, per 111111 0.0 17 Exterior stud walls:
Gypsum board (per mm Lightweight concrete, per mm ..0.015 50xlOO@400n1l11, 15 mrn
thickness) 0.008 Sand, per rum O.OI 5 gypsum, insulated, 10 rnm
Mechanical duct allowance 0.20 Stone concrete, per mm 0.023 siding 0.53
Plaster on tile or concrete 0.24 FLOOR AND FLOOR FINISHES SOx150 @ 400111m, 15 rnm
Plaster on wood lath 0.38 gypsum, insulated, 10 rnm
Asphalt block (50 rnm), 13 mm siding 0.57
Suspended steel channel
mortar 1.44 Exterior stud wall with brick
system 0.10
Cement finish (25 mm) on stone- veneer .. 2.30
Suspended metal lath and cement
concrete fill 1.53
plaster 0.72 Windows, glass, frame and
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 mm) 0.38
Suspended metal lath and sash ..
on 13 rnm mortar bed 0.77
gypsum plaster 0.48 Clay brick wythes:
Ceramic or quarry tile (20 rnm) 100111m .. 1.87
Wood furring suspension
on 25 mm mortar bed I.10 3.74
system 0.12 200 mm
Concrete fill finish (per mm 300 111m 5.51
COVERINGS, Roof and Wall thickness) 0.023
400mm 7.48
Asphalt shingles 0.10 Hardwood flooring, 22 mm 0.19
Cement tile 0.77 Linoleum or asphalt tile, 601111 0.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
Clay tile (for mortar add 0.48 kPa) Marble and mortar on stone- Hollow Concrete Masonry Units
Book tile, 50 mm 0.57 concrete fill... 1.58 Unplastered. Add 0.24 kPa for
Book tile, 75 111m 0.96 Slate (per mm thickness) 0.028 each face plastered
Ludowici 0.48 Solid flat tile on 25-m01 mortar Grout I Wythe thickness (111m)
Roman 0.57 base I.IO Spacing ! 100 1 150 i 200
Spanish 0.91 Subtlooring, 19 mm 0.14
Composition: Terrazzo (38 111m)directly on
Three-ply ready roofing 0.05 slab 0.91
Four-ply felt and gravel 0.26 Terrazzos (25 rnm) on stone-
Five-ply felt and gravel 0.29 concrete fill... 1.53
Copper or tin 0.05 Terrazzo (25 rnm) on 50-111mstone
Corrugated asbestos-cement concrete 1.53
roofing 0.19 Wood block (75 mm) on mastic,
No grout I 1.24 I1.34 ! 1.72
Deck, metal 20 gage
Deck, metal, 18 gage
0 .12
0.14
no fill
Wood block (75 mm) on l3-mm
0.48
800 '1.59! 1.72 ! 2.25_
Fiberboard, 13mm 0.04 mortar base O.77 600 ,1.69 j 1.87 L~ii_
Gypsum sheathing. 13 mrn 0.1 0
400 i 1.98 2.11 l 2.82
Insulation, roof boards (per mm
FRAME PARTITIONS Full i 2.69 I 2.82 l 3.88
Movable partitions 0.24 21.2-kN/mJ Density of Unit
thickness)
Cellular glass 0.0013
Movable partitions (steel) 0.19 No grout I 1.39 ! 1.44 f1~
Fibrous glass 0.0021
Wood or steel studs, 13 mm gypsum 800 I 1.74 !l.82! 2.39
.Fiberboard 0.0028
board each side 0.38 600 i 1.83 Il.96 L...?~
Wood studs, 50 x 100, unplastered ..... ~__j 2.13 i 2.2 1 2.92
Perlite 0.0015
0.19
Polystyrene foam 0.0004 Full I 2.84 ! 2.97 ! 3.97
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered one
Urethane foam with skin 0.0009
side 0.57
Plywood (per mm thickness) 0.0060
Wood studs 50 x 100, plastered two
Rigid insulation, 13 mm 0.04
side 0.96
Skylight, metal frame,
l Omrn wire glass 0.38
Slate,S mm 0.34
SIate,6 mm 0.48
Waterproofing membranes:
Bituminous, gravel-covered. 0.26
Bituminous, smooth surface .. 0.07
Liquid, applied 0.05
Single-ply, sheet 0.03
Wood sheathing (per mm
thickness) 0.0057
Wood shingles 0.14

205.3.3 Concentrated Loads
Floors shall be designed to support safely the uniformly

distributed live loads prescribed in this section or the
concentrated load given in Table 205-1 whichever
I be the maximum loads expected by the produces the greatest load effects. Unless otherwise
occupancy but in no case shall be less than specified the indicated concentration shall be assumed to
red by this section. be uniformly distributed over an area 750-mm square and
shall be located so as to produce the maximum load effects
Distribution of Live Loads in the structural member.
members are arranged to create Provision shall be made in areas where vehicles are used or
... members shall be designed using the loading stored for concentrated loads, L, consisting of two or more
. which would cause maximum shear and loads spaced 1.5m nominally on center without uniform
This requirement may be satisfied in live loads. Each load shall be 40 percent ofthe gross weight
with the provisions of Section 205.3.2 or of the maximum size vehicle to be accommodated. Parking
applicable. garages for the storage of private or pleasure-type motor
vehicles with no repair or refueling shall have a floor
system designed for a concentrated load of not less than
9 kN acting on an area of 0.015 m2 without uniform live
loads. The condition of concentrated or uniform live load,
combined in accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4 as
11 be designed for the unit live loads as set forth appropriate, producing the greatest stresses shall govern.
I. These loads shall be taken as the minimum
....... of horizontal projection to be used in the design 205.3.4 Special Loads
. ings for the occupancies listed, and loads at least
be assumed for uses not listed in this section but Provision shall be made for the special vertical and lateral
or accommodates similar loadings . loads as set forth in Table 205-2.
-. it can be determined in designing floors that the

dive load will be greater than the value shown in
-.'.' 1, the actual live load shall be used in the design
buildings or portions thereof. Special provisions
made for machine and apparatus loads.
Distribution of Uniform Floor Loads
uniform floor loads are involved, consideration may

to full dead load on all spans in combination with
load on adjacent spans and alternate spans.

Table 205-1 Minimum Uniform and Concentrated Live Loads
Use or Occupancy Uniform Load J Concentrated Load

Category Description kPa kN
Office use 2.4 9.02

I. Access floor systems
Computer use 4.8 9.02
2. Armories -- 7.2 a
Fixed seats 2.9 a
3. Theaters,
Movable seats 4.8 0
assembly
areas 3 and Lobbies and platforms 4.8 0
auditoriums
Stage areas 7.2 0
4. Bowling alleys, poolrooms
and similar recreational -- 3.6 0
areas
5. Catwalk for maintenance
access -- 1.9 1.3
6. Cornices and marquees -- 3.64 0
7. Dining rooms and restaurants -- 4.8 0
8. Exit facilities 5 -- 4.8 06
General storage and/or repair 4.8 -- 7
9. Parking Garages and Ramps Public parking and ramps 4.8 -- 7
Private (residential) or pleasure-

type motor vehicle storage
2.4 -- 7
Wards and r00111S 1.9 4.52
10. Hospitals Laboratories and operating rooms 2.9 4.52
Corridors above ground floor 3.8 4.5
Reading rooms 2.9 4.52
11. Libraries Stack rooms 7.2 4.52
Light 6.0 9.02
12. Manufacturing Heavy 12.0 13.4 2
Building corridors above ground

3.8 9.0
floor

Table 205-1 Minimum Uniform and Concentrated Live Loads (continued)
Use or Occupancy Uniform Load I Concentrated Load
Category Description kPa kN

Call centers and business processing
2.9 9.0
offices
Lobbies and ground floor corridors 4.8 9.0
Other offices 2.4 9.01
Press rooms 7.2 11.02

Printing plants
Composing and linotype rooms 4.8 9.02
Basic floor area 1.9 06
Exterior balconies 2.94 0
Decks 1.94 0
Storage 1.9 0
Reviewing stands,
grandstands, bleachers, and 4.8 0
and seati
Same as area served or occupancy
Classrooms 1.9 4.52
Ground floor corridors 4.8 4.5
Sidewalks and driveways Public access 12.0
Light 6.0
Heavy 12.0
Retail 4.8 4.52
Wholesale 6.0 13.4 2

bridges and
4.8
I See Section 205.5for live load reductions. 6 Individual stair treads shall be designed /0 support a 1.3 N
concentrated load placed ill a position that would cause
See Section 205.3.3. first paragraph, for area of load maximum stress. Stair stringers may be designed for the
application. uniform load set forth in the table.
J Assentblv areas include such occupancies as dance halls, drill See Section 205.3.3. second paragraph. for concentrated
rooms, gymnasiums, playgrounds, plazas, terraces and similar loads. See Table 205-2for vehicle barriers,
occupancies that are generally accessible 10 the public.
B Residential occupancies include private dwellings, apartments
~ For special-purpose roofs. see Section 205.4.4, and hotel guest rooms.
J Exit [acilities shall include such uses as corridors serving an 9 Restroom loads shall not be less than the load for the
occupant load of 1a or more persons, exterior exit balconies, occupancy with which they are associated. but need 1I0texceed
stail1l'ays,jire escapes and similar uses, 2.4 kPa,

Table 205-2 Special Loads I
Use or Occupancy Vertical Load Lateral Load

Category Description kPa kPa
1. Construction, public access at site (live Walkway 7.2 -

load) Canopy 7.2 -
2. Grandstands, reviewing stands,

bleachers, and folding and telescoping Seats and footboards 1.752 See Note 3
seating (live load)
Catwalks 1.9 -
3. Stage accessories (live load) Follow spot, projection
and control rooms
2.4 -
Over stages 1.0 -
4. Ceiling framing (live load) All uses except over
stages
0.5" -
5. Partitions and interior walls, - - 0.25
6. Elevators and dumbwaiters (dead and
- 2*total load -
live loads)
Total load including
7. Cranes (dead and live loads) 1.25*totalload5 0.10*total load"
impact increase
Exit facilities serving an
occupant load greater - 0.75 kN/m 7
8. Balcony railings and guardrails than 50_Qersons

Other than exit facilities - 0.30 kN/m 7
Components - 1.28
9. Vehicle barriers - - 27kW
10. Handrails - See Note 10 See Note 10
11. Storage racks Over 2.4 111 high Total loads" See Table 208-13
1.1kN plus weight of
12. Fire sprinkler structural support - See Table 208-13
water-filled pipe"
NOles for Table 205-2
1 The tabulated loads are mininnun loads. When' other vertical load, required by the design would cause greater stresses, they shall be used. Loads arc ill kPa unless
otherwts« indicated ill the table.
Units Is kN/m.
J l.ateral s\I'ay bracing loads 0/350 N/III P(II'(II/(,1and 145 NIIJIl'e'1J<'lIdiclIlar 10seal and footboards.
, Does 110t{lPP~I'10 ceilings that have sufflciont access FUIII below, such that ac('('s.' is 1I0t required within tile Space lIIJO"" tht: ceiling. Does 1101(JI'PZl'to ceilings if the attic
areas above the ceiliflg arc 1101 provided with access. This tiv« load need not be considered as acting simultaneously with other thy! loads imposed upon/he! ceiling framing
or its supporting structure .
.' 77w impact factors includod arefor cram'S with steel wheels rtding all steel rails. Tiley lIIay be modified if substantiating teclnucai data acceptable 10 the building official
is submitted. Lire loads 011 crane support girders (T1ll1their connections shall be taken as the maximum cralli' wheel loads. For pendant-operated traveling crane support
girders and their connections, the impact factors shall be J. 10.
• This applies in the direction parallot to the rttnwav rails (longitndinol). The factorforforces perpendicularto the rail is O.:!O • Iii,' IrWISI','ne traveling loads (trolley, cab,
hooks and lifted loads). Forces .1",,11[I" applied at top a/rail and lIlay be dtstributcd among rails of nntlttplc rail cranes £1",1shall be distributed with due regard forlatera!
stiffness of the structures supporting these rails.
A load per lineal meter (kN/Ill) 10 be applied horizontatty cu rightangles 10 the lop mil .
., lntermcdiate rails, panelfillers and their cO/l/leCI;OI/.;,,1101/be capable o/wil/lSlalldlllg a load 0/ 1.2 kPa applied IIori=(1Il10/~\'at right angles over the entire tributary orea,
including openings and spaces between mils. Reactions due to this loading need 1101be combined with those of Noll' 7.
• A horizontal load applied 111rtgh) angles 10 the vehicle barrier 01 a height 0/450 mm above the parking surfoco. Theforce //Jay be distributed over (1300-111111
square.
I'! The mounting 0/ handrails 5//(/1/ be such that the completed handrai! and supporting structure are capable of withstanding a load 0/ (If le{lsl890 N opplicd ill allY direction
at any point Oil the rail. These load. • shall not be assumed to act cumnlotivcly witlt Note 9.
/1 Vertical members of storage racks shall be protected from impact forces of operating equipment, or racks shall be designed so that failure of one vertical member will not
call.,ecol/apse 0/1I1O/'(' than II,,' bay or bays directly supported by that member.
ASSOCiation of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-'19
The 1./-kN Iliad is 10 be applied 10 any single lire sprinkler support point but not simultaneously 10 all support joints.
Roof Live Loads 205.4.4 Special Roof Loads
General Roofs to be used for special purposes shall be designed for

appropriate loads as approved by the building official.
shall be designed for the unit live loads, L,., set forth Greenhouse roof bars, purl ins and rafters shall be designed
Table 205-3. The live loads shall be assumed to act to carry a 0.45 kN concentrated load, Ln in addition to the
ieally upon the area projected on a horizontal plane. uniform live load
Distribution of Loads 205.5 Reduction of Live Loads
uniform roof loads are involved in the design of The design live load determined using the unit live loads as
members arranged to create continuity, set forth in Table 205-1 for floors and Table 205-3, Method
may be limited to full dead loads on all spans 2, for roofs may be reduced on any member supporting
combination with full rooflive loads on adjacent spans more than 15 1112, including flat slabs, except for floors in
,. 011 alternate spans. places of public assembly and for live loads greater than
4.8 kPa, in accordance with the following equation:
R = rCA -15) (205-1 )

span loading need 110t be considered where the
'" 'roof live load is 1.0 /cPa or more.
The reduction shall not exceed 40 percent for members
those conditions where light-gage metal preformed receiving load from one level only, 60 percent for other
sheets serve as the support and finish of roofs, members or R, as determined by the following equation:
'. structural members arranged to create continuity shall
. considered adequate if designed for full dead loads on
spans in combination with the most critical one of the R = 23.1(1 + DIL) (205-2)
ing superimposed loads:
where
The uniform roof live load, Lr, set forth in Table 205-
3 on all spans. A = area of floor or roof supported by the member, nr'
D = dead load per square meter of area supported by the
A concentrated gravity load, L,., of9 kN placed on any member, kPa
span supporting a tributary area greater than 18 rrr' to L = unit live load per square meter of area supported by
create maximum stresses in the member, whenever the member, kPa
this loading creates greater stresses than those caused R = reduction in percentage,
by the uniform live load. The concentrated load shall 1" = rate of reduction equal to 0.08 for floors. See Table
be placed on the member over a length of 0.75 m along 205-3 for roofs
the span. The concentrated load need not be applied to
more than one span simultaneously. For storage loads exceeding 4.8 kPa, no reduction shall be
made, except that design live loads on columns may be
Water accumulation as prescribed in Section 206.7. reduced 20 percent.
Unbalanced Loading The live load reduction shall not exceed 40 percent in
garages for the storage of private pleasure cars having a
"mlUlI'''''U loads shall be used where such loading will capacity of not more than nine passengers per vehicle.
in larger members or connections. Trusses and
shall be designed to resist the stresses caused by unit
loads on one-half of the span if such loading results in
stresses, or stresses greater in any portion than the
produced by the required unit live load on the
span. For roofs whose structures are composed of a
shell, framed or solid, wherein stresses caused by
point loading are distributed throughout the area of the
1, the requirements for unbalanced unit live load design
be reduced 50 percent.

205.6 Alternate Floor Live Load Reduction Lo = unreduced design live load per square meter of area
supported by the member (Table 205-1)
As an alternate to Equation 205-1, the unit live loads set
forth in Table 205-1 may be reduced in accordance with The influence area AI is four times the tributary area for
Equation 205-3 on any member, including flat slabs, a column, two times the tributary area for a beam, equal to
having an influence area of 40 m2 or more. the panel area for a two-way slab, and equal to the product
of the span and the full flange width for a precast T'-beam.
L = Lo [0.25 + 4. 57 (k)] (205-3) The reduced live load shall not be less than 50 percent of
the unit live load Lo for members receiving load from one ;
level only, nor less than 40 percent of the unit live load Lo
where
for other members.
A, = influence area, 1112
L = reduced design live load per square meter of area
supported by the member
Table 205-3 Minimum Roof Live Loads I
Method .I Method 2
Maximum
Over 60 Uniform Rate of Reduction
ROOF SLOPE
Load 2 Reduction, R
Uniform Load (kPa) (kPa) r (percentage
)
I. Flat 3 or rise less than l-unit vertical in
3-unit horizontal (33.3% slope). Arch 1.00 0.75 0.60 1.00 0.08 40
and dome with rise less than 1/8 of span.
2. Rise I-unit vertical to less than 3-unit

vertical in 3-unit horizontal (33.3% to
less than I00% slope). Arch and dome 0.75 0.70 0.60 0.75 0.06 25
with rise 1/8 of span to less than 3/8 of
span.
3. Rise I-unit vertical in I-unit horizontal
(100% slope) and greater. Arch or 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
dome with rise 3/8 of span or greater.
No reduction permitted
4. Awnings except cloth covered. 4 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
5. Greenhouses, lath houses and

0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
agricultural buildings. 5
J For special-purpose roofs, see Section 205.4.4.

2 See Sections 205.5 and 205. 6 for live-load reductions. The rate of reduction r ill Equation 205-i shall be as indicated
in the table. The maximum reduction, R, shall not exceed the value indicated ill the table.
3 Ajlat roof is any roof with a slope less than I-unit vertical in 48-lInit horizontal (2% slope). The live loadfor flat roofs
is in addition to the pending load required by Section 206.7.
0( See definition in Section 202.
5 See Section 205.4.4 for concentrated load requirements/or greenhouse roo/members .
••• ~.fr••• ]!a.~.BL,.,..~iltll~

206.4 Anchorage of Concrete and Masonry Walls
Concrete and masonry walls shall be anchored as required

by Section 104.3.3. Such anchorage shall be capable of
resisting the load combinations of Section 203.3 or 203.4
to the other design loads specified in this using the greater of the wind or earthquake loads required
, structures shall be designed to resist the loads by this chapter or a minimum horizontal force of 4 kN/1l1
tied in this section and the special loads set forth in of wall, substituted for E.
205-2. See Section 207 for design wind loads and
208 for design earthquake loads. 206.5 Interior Wall Loads
Interior walls, permanent partitions and temporary

partitions that exceed 1.8 m in height shall be designed to
and other structures and portions thereof shall be resist all loads to which they are subjected but not less than
to resist all loads due to applicable fluid a load, L, of 0.25 kPa applied perpendicular to the walls.
F, lateral soil pressures, H, ponding loads, P, The 0.25 kPa load need not be applied simultaneously with
f-straining forces, T. See Section 206.7 for ponding wind or seismic loads. The deflection of such walls under
for roofs. a load of 0.25 kPa shall not exceed 11240 of the span for
walls with brittle finishes and 1/120 of the span for walls
Impact Loads with flexible finishes. See Table 208-13 for earthquake
design requirements where such requirements are more
live loads specified in Sections 205.3 shall be assumed restrictive.
allowance for ordinary impact conditions.
shall be made in the structural design for uses Exception:
that involve unusual vibration and impact forces.
Section 206.9.3 for impact loads for cranes, and Flexible, folding or portable partitions are not required to
206.10 for heliport and helistop landing areas. meet the load and deflection criteria but 11111st
be anchored
10 the supporting structure to meet the provisions of this
Elevators code.
loads shall be increased by 100% for impact. 206.6 Retaining Walls
Machinery Retaining walls shall be designed to resist loads due to the

lateral pressure of retained material in accordance with
the purpose of design, the weight of machinery and accepted engineering practice. Walls retaining drained soil,
. loads shall be increased as follows to allow for where the surface of the retained soil is level, shall be
designed for a load, H, equivalent to that exerted by a fluid
weighing not less than 4.7 kPa per meter of depth and
Elevator machinery 100% having a depth equal to that of the retained soil. Any
surcharge shall be in addition to the equivalent fluid
Light machinery, shaft- or motor-driven 20% pressure.
Reciprocating machinery or power-driven units 50% Retaining walls shall be designed to resist sliding by at
least 1.5 times the lateral force and overturning by at least
Hangers for floors and balconies 33% 1.5 times the overturning moment, using allowable stress
design loads.
percentages shall be increased where specified by the
206.7 Water Accumulation
All roofs shall be designed with sufficient slope or camber

to ensure adequate drainage after the long-term deflection
from dead load or shall be designed to resist ponding load,
P, combined in accordance with Section 203.3 or 203.4.
Ponding load shall include water accumulation from any
source due to deflection.

206.8 Uplift on Floors and Foundations 206.9.4 Lateral Force
In the design of basement floors and similar approximately The lateral force on crane runway beams with e
horizontal elements below grade, the upward pressure of powered trolleys shall be calculated as 20% of the sum
water, where applicable, shall be taken as the full the rated capacity of the crane and the weight of the
hydrostatic pressure applied over the entire area. The and trolley. The lateral force shall be assumed to
hydrostatic load shall be measured from the underside of horizontally at the traction surface of a runway beam,
the construction. Any other upward loads shall be included either direction perpendicular to the beam, and shall
in the design. distributed with due regard to the lateral stiffness of
runway beam and supporting structure.
Where expansive soils are present under foundations or
slabs-on-ground, the foundations, slabs, and other 206.9.5 Longitudinal Forces
components shall be designed to tolerate the movement or
resist the upward loads caused by the expansive soils, or The longitudinal force on crane runway beams, except
the expansive soil shall be removed or stabilized around bridge cranes with hand-geared bridges, shall be calcul
and beneath the structure. as 10% of the maximum wheel loads of the crane.
longitudinal force shall be assumed to act horizontally
206.9 Crane Loads the traction surface of a runway beam, in either \,""_","VJ
parallel to the beam.
206.9.1 General
206.1 0 Heliport and Helistop Landing Areas
The crane load shall be the rated capacity of the crane.
Design loads for the runway beams, including connections In addition to other design requirements of this
and support brackets of moving bridge cranes and monorail heliport and helistop landing or touchdown areas shall
cranes shall include the maximum wheel loads of the crane designed for the following loads, combined in
and the vertical impact, lateral, and longitudinal forces with Section 203.3 or 203.4:
induced by the moving crane.
I. Dead load plus actual weight of the helicopter.
206.9.2 Maximum Wheel Load
2. Dead load plus a single concentrated impact load,
The maximum wheel loads shall be the wheel loads covering 0.10 m2 of 0.75 times the fully loaded
produced by the weight of the bridge, as applicable, plus of the helicopter if it is equipped with
the sum of the rated capacity and the weight of the trolley shock absorbers, or 1.5 times the fully loaded
with the trolley positioned on its runway where the of the helicopter if it is equipped with a rigid or ski
resulting load effect is maximum. type landing gear.
206.9.3 Vertical Impact Force The dead load plus a uniform live load, L, of 4.8 kPa.
required live load may be reduced in accordance
The maximum wheel loads of the crane shall be increased Section 205.5 or 205.6.
by the percentages shown below to determine the induced
vertical impact or vibration force:
1. Monorail cranes (powered) 25%
2. Cab-operated or remotely operated bridge

cranes (powered) 25%
3. Pendant-operated bridge cranes (powered) 10%
4. Bridge cranes or monorail cranes with

hand-geared ridge, trolley and hoist 0%

enclosed simple diaphragm. buildingsJess than 18 m

in height; .. ".' ;,,:,/, ,{ c.s.: ~ •...'., '
." _-: ": .: .:::'~.:
..: .
II
Section 207D discusses Other Structures and Building
Appurtenances: A single. section is dedicated to
< and other vertical structures shall be designed determining wind loads ..on non-building structures
to resist wind loads as specified and . such. as signs, rooftop structures, and towel's;;;,,·,
in Sections 207 A through 207F.
.. ' .. Section..207K discusses: about Components' and
. > towers and antenna supporting structures shall be Cladding. This code addresses the determination of
and constructed to resist wind loads as specified component. and cladding loads in a single section.
in ANSIITIA-222-G-2005, entitled as Analytical and simplified methods are provided based
Standards for Steel Antenna Towers and on the building height. Provisions for open buildings
Supporting Structures and ANSI/TIA-222-G-l- and building appurtenances are also addressed.
as "Structural Standards for Steel Antenna
and Antenna Supporting Structures - Addendum 1. • Section 207F discusses about Wind Tunnel Procedure.
207A.I Procedures
207A.l.l Scope
of the wind load provisions in this Buildings and other structures, including the Main Wind-
..' . . revised from NSCP2001 and Force Resisting System (MWFRS) and all components and
The goal lvai:: to improve the
ICU''''''·I.\ . cladding (C&C) thereof, shall be designed and constructed
and lise of the wind load-provisions to resist the wind loads determined in accordance with
sub-sections organizedaccording to
1J1EJ'1l'101f,'JI Section 207 A through 207F. The provisions of this section
major subject areas .....The wind load define basic wind parameters for use with other provisions
........ nOlv presented. in. Sections 207A through contained in this code.
. fa -prior editions, 'r,;he're.the provisions
in a single' section. .' ..' > Commentary: .
7A·..··.·1,·hvides. the .. baste•..•• :}Vind ... ·.·...·cle~.ign

.. ··.·p,·()~ide ...
r:h¢·.•·.pl·ocedures ...specified ...in .. thi~i {ode .. wind
1r11l"17"II·'r\· that ..are applicable to the variousiwind pressul'esand foh:esjorthedes(gli of MWFRS and for the
·methodologies outlined inSectfo.ilS
i07K.lieltISCove'red'in·Section207A ~~~¥r~r{;j~pl~M1I1Hi~s;"I.~,ft.(1~~Jt~ifE~;j~,f£~j~~db;f:
,.'"t,."'''' .....
"", ~basic wind speed, e"{:p~~~i,;e ciei~;:j;lination_.o/~il~4di~·ectlonalityafld velocity pressure,
internal: pressures, enclosure the seieCiI01i (n' l(~ie?'rillnation of(J~ appropriate g~ls'teffect
gust-effects, .and topographicfactors, factor,. and the se(ettio'nofajJp/;opj;idte presslir~or.force
. ..... A geile.r-aldescription of each section .is coefficients .. TbE!. procedure allows, for the:' level, of
be/ow.;·J.':<·,,'.c:.· ..· .... '.' -,'":.:: :<', .". '. .;..... "" -,'....' s th/dlHal reliabiiitjFreqitiFed, i!1(/eJjecis 6/ti!(f~/'iflg wind
exposures, ..the spef!d~lIp ejrect~'(i5[cel;taiJl' !oprYiraphic
i07E discllss'cs about iJii:~ctional Proced~tre jeatu;'es such as. hills and. e~CaIPlJ'lents, 0I1~th~.·~i:;S.(lf1d
»rt
nrJn.~·, Pal'ljallyBnclosed,.aild Open 'BIllldings geoinetlY '"of th« building ..... ol~" 6tliei' . sit·dctiihi under
'.. . . isthe former "buildings consideration. The procedure differentiates betl\ieenrigid
...... - 2.0'!() (,4SCE7-95), andf!eiible' bilildiiigsajidotJui"i;'SlriICtiil:es;'an'r:(ili~iVe~~itlts
trnrn rt t orr pr~cedi,,;e;·'l/ased ..'o:'i· llie ien~;~(.;INenvelop iJi~ /k()sicl~itic'aiioad cOI{dijj/j;j.~fl){ii1e
pr~v/dedJo/buildings up to desigl10fMWFR$a~~veli asC&C. . .... iin;.
-: 'presslll.;"'~fl~'force coejfiii:rli.~··Pr().~iJed:M:~~4tiq;ls
vt:(;u(Jw20 7C' discusses abouttn~~l~ke;l:oc~,fw:~jor 207 B, 207C, 207 D; and 207E have been Cti(el/ij;ilid/ro/n
and pa;·ifaitj; EJ/closedij)i;~Rise BiiiiJings:
<' .•
.. ,
:) '.
.. .... ...... . . i~ t~e former' "iolf~rise buildings
inNSCP'20io (ASCE.7c05) Method 2.T'his
~;~;ij~~lbj~;1~:~f;v;JJffJili1!:';i7ffj'lJn~~:~~
()l1i~i~1eg
boimdarv-l aver." lvl nd- tunnel. '.resl/lts ll!(!~;~
• for
; < . also incorpordtes NSCP (.4.SCE 7-05) ]oio
. Method 1 for MWFRS applicable to the MWFRS of ru~t~~t_rf:Jb~~j;r~~~I;;2~jn~{ttgim2l~~~.\"W~Wf~~iift~

framing systems, the designer is cautioned against 207C, Part 2) and the Analytical Procedure
indiscriminate interchange of values among the figures Components and Cladding (Section 207E).
and tables.
Limitations. The provisions given under
207A.1.2 Permitted Procedures 207A.1.2 apply to the majority of site locations
buildings and structures, but for some projects,
The design wind loads for buildings and other structures, provisions may be inadequate. Examples of
including the MWFRS and C&C elements thereof, shall be locations and buildings and structures (or
determined using one of the procedures as specified in this thereof) that may require other approved d"nrt"yw;
article. An outline of the overall process for the special studies using applicable recognized
determination of the wind loads, including section pertaining to wind effects, 0)' using the wind
references, is provided in Figure 207 A.I-I. procedure of Section 207F include:
1. Site locations that have channeling effects or

Commentary:
from upwind obstructions. Channeling effects
be caused by topographic features (e.g., a mountrni
The design wind loads for buildings and other
gorge) or buildings (e.g., a neighboring
structures, including the MWFRS and C&C elements
building or a cluster of tall buildings). Wakes
thereof, shall be determined using one of the procedures
be caused by hills or by buildings or
as specified in this article. An outline of the overall
structures.
process for the determination of the wind loads,
including section references, is provided in Figure
2. BUildings with unusual or irregular
207A. I-I.
shape, including barrel vaults, and other nuuatno
whose shape (in plan or vertical
This version of the wind load standard provides several
differs Significantly from the shapes in
procedures (as illustrated in Table 207A.I-I) from
207B.4-1, 207B.4-2, 207B.4-7, 207C.4-1,
which the designer can choose.
207E.4-I to 207E.4-7. Unusual or
geometric shapes include buildings with
For MWFRS:
setbacks, curved facades, or irregular
resulting from significant indentations
1. Directional Procedurefor Buildings of All Heights projections, openings through the building,
(Section 207B)
multi-tower buildings connected by bridges.
2. Envelope Procedure for Low-Rise Buildings 3. BUildings with response characteristics that
(Section 207C)
in substantial vortex-induced and/or
dynamic effects, or dynamic effects resulting
3. Directional Procedure for Building Appurtenances aero-elastic instabilities such as flutter
and Other Structures (Section 207D) gal/oping. Such dynamic effects are difficult
anticipate, being dependent on many factors,
4. Wind Tunnel Procedure for All Buildings and Other should be considered when (Iny one or more
Structures (Section 207F) following apply:
For Components and Cladding: i. The height of the building is over 120 m.
I. Analytical Procedure for Buildings and BUilding u. The height of the building is greater than
Appurtenances (Section 207E) times its minimum effective width Bmilv
defined below.
2. Wind Tunnel Procedurefor All Buildings and Other iii. The lowest natura/frequency of the hrrilriinc
Structures (Section 207F) is less than nl :::::
0.25 Hz.
A "simplified method "for which the designer can select iv. The reduced velocity
wind pressures directly from a table without any Vz
calculation, when the building meets all the _....:;_-> 5
requirements for application of the method, is provided n1Bmin
for designing buildings using the Directional Procedure
(Section 207B, Part 2), the Envelope Procedure (Section

CH/\PTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-25
4. Wind Tunnel Procedure for all buildings and all other

structures as specified in Section 207F.
the meal! hourly velocity at height z 207A.1.2.2 Components and Cladding
effective width Bmin is defined as the Wind loads on components and cladding on all buildings
. value of 2: hiB J2:iii' cO'lsidehhi all wind and other structures shall be designed using one of the
The summations are pelf armed over the following procedures:
building for each wind direction, hi, is the
grade of level i, and B i is the width at level 1. Analytical Procedures provided in Parts 1 through 6,
to the wind direction. as appropriate, of Section 207E; or
cranes, electrical transmission lines, 2. Wind Tunnel Procedure as specified in Section 207F.
masts, highway signs and lighting structures.
p{p'rmrnlTlllti'IC£llltm· to:"';el's.l7n(jjlagpole~: ... 207A.2 Definitions
.. '.,'. ,"
. .
....undertaking detailed studies of the dynamic The following definitions apply to the provisions of
to wind forces, .the jzmqan{el1tal!requencies of Section 207:
in each direction under consideration
be established using the structural properties APPROVED is an acceptable to the authority having
characteristics ali the resisting jurisdiction.
in a properly substantiated analysis, and not
approximate equations based on height;' BASIC WIND SPEED, V is a three-second gust speed at
10m above the ground in Exposure C (see Section
Due to the- lack of reliable analytical 207 A. 7.3) as determined in accordance with Section
for predicting the effects of shielding 207A.5.1.
by buildings and other structures or by
m',,,,n,,r' features, reductions hi velocity pressure BUILDING, ENCLOSED is a building that does not
shielding are not permittedunder the provisions comply with the requirements for open or partially
chapter, However, this does not preclude the enclosed buildings.
ination of shielding effects and the corresponding
in velocity pressure by means of the wind BUILDING ENVELOPE is a cladding, roofing, exterior
procedure ill Section 207F. walls, glazing, door assemblies, window assemblies,
skylight assemblies, and other components enclosing the
Main Wind-Force Resisting System building.
(MWFRS)
BUILDING AND OTHER STRUCTURE, FLEXIBLE
loads for MWFRS shall be determined using one of are slender buildings and other structures that have a
.. following procedures: fundamental natural frequency less than 1 Hz.
Directional Procedure for buildings of all heights as BUILDING, LOW-RISE are enclosed or partially
specified in Section 207B for buildings meeting the enclosed buildings that comply with the following
requirements specified therein; conditions:
Envelope Procedure for low-rise buildings as specified I. Mean roof height h less than or equal to 18m.
in Section 207C for buildings meeting the
requirements specified therein; 2. Mean roof height h does not exceed least horizontal
dimension.
Directional Procedure for Building Appurtenances
(rooftop structures and rooftop equipment) and Other BUILDING, OPEN is a building having each wall at least
Structures (such as solid freestanding walls and solid 80 percent open. This condition is expressed for each wall
freestanding signs, chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice by the equation Au ~ O.8Ag.
frameworks, and trussed towers) as specified in
Section207D; or

where: the gross area of that wall in which Ao is

identified, in m2
Ao total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure, in m2
Section 207A - General Requlrements; u~~'io"d~t~nni~~tl~'e'-b~;i~'p'~;~te~-'r~~--

determining wind Ioads on both MWFRS and C&C. These basic parameters arc:
'" Basic Wind Speed, V, sec Figure 207A.5-1A, Bar C
;.. Wind directionality factor, Kd• see Section 207A.6
)- Exposure category, see Section 207A.7
'" Topographic factor, KZI> sec Section207A.8
;;.. Gust Effect Factor, see Section 207 A.9
;;.. Enclosure classification, see Section 207 A.I 0
~ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpJ), see Section 207 A-II
Wind loads on the MWFRS may be

determined by:
Section 207E:
- Envelope procedure in Parts 1 and 2, or
- Directional procedure in Parts 3, 4 and 5
Section 207C: Envelope procedure for low rise - Building appurtenances (roof overhangs
buildings and parapets) in Part 6
Section 207D: Directional procedure for

building appurtemances (roof overhangs and parapets)
and other structures Section 207F: Wind tunnel procedure
for any building or other structure
Section 207F: Wind tunnel procedure for any

building or other structure
Figure 207 A.I-I

Outline of Process for Determining Wind Loads. Additional Outlines and User Notes are Provided at the Beginning of each
Chapter for more Detailed Step-By-Step Procedures for Determining the Wind Loads
These conditions are expressed by the following equations: .

BUILDING, PARTIALLY ENCLOSED is a building
that complies with both of the following conditions:
I. Ao> 1.10Aoi
I. The total area of openings in a wall that receives
2. Ao > 0.37 m2 or O.OlAg, whichever is smaller,
positive external pressure exceeds the sum of the areas
of openings in the balance of the building envelope AodAgi s 0.20
(walls and root) by more than 10 percent.
where:
2. The total area of openings in a wall that receives
positive external pressure exceeds 0.37 1112. are as defined for Open Building
the sum of the areas of openings in
or 1 percent of the area of that wall, whichever is smaller, building envelope (walls and root) not
and the percentage of openings in the balance of the including Ao, in 1112
building envelope does 110t exceed 20 percent. the sum of the gross surface areas of the
building envelope (walls and root) not
including Ag, in m?

......
be part of the MWFRS when they act as For typical door and window systems supported on three
diaphragms, but they may also be or more sides, the effective wind area is the area of the door
components. The engineer needs to or window under consideration. For simple spanning doors
for design of components, which (e.g., horizontal spanning section doors or coiling doors),
components to be designed for more large specialty constructed doors (e.g., aircraft hangar
loading, for example, long-span roof doors), and specialty constructed glazing systems, the
be designed for loads associated with effective wind area of each structural component
idual members of trusses should also be composing the door or window system should be used in
cornp{)Oelntand cladding loads (Mehta and calculating the design wind pressure.
Examples of cladding include wall
n walls, roof coverings, exterior windows MAIN WIND-FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM
) and doors, and overhead doors. (MWFRS) can consist of a structural frame or an
assemblage of structural elements that work together to
in wind load applications has been added transfer wind loads acting on the entire structure to the
.. O. This definition, for the case of untopped ground. Structural elements such as cross-bracing, shear
iffers somewhat from the definition used in walls, roof trusses, and roof diaphragms are part of the
... of ASCE 7-10 because diaphragms under Main Wind-Force Resisting System (MWFRS) when they
expected to remain essentially elastic. assist in transferring overall loads (Mehta and Marshall
1998).
WIND AREA, A is an effective wind area
the building surface used to determine (GCp). WIND-BORNE DEBRIS REGIONS are defined to alert
not necessarily correspond to the area of the the designer to areas requiring consideration of missi·le
contributing to the force being considered. impact design. These areas are located within tropical
. arise. In the usual case, the effective wind area cyclone prone regions where there is a high risk of glazing
to the area tributary to the force failure due to the impact of wind-borne debris.
being considered. For example, for a cladding
ffective wind area may be equal to the total area 207 A.3 Symbols and Notations
; For a cladding fastener, the effective wind
area of cladding secured by a single fastener. A The following symbols and notation apply only to the
receive wind from several cladding panels. In provisions of Section 207 A through 207F:
effective wind area is the area associated with
that is transferred to the mullion. effective wind area, in 1112
area of open buildings and other
case arises where components such as roofing structures either normal to the wind
I studs, or roof trusses are spaced closely direction or projected on a plane
...The area served by the component may become normal to the wind direction, in m2
narrow. To better approximate the actual load the gross area of that wall in which Ao
in such cases, the width of the effective wind is identified, in m2
to evaluate (GCp) need not be taken as less than the sum of the gross surface areas of
the length of the area. This increase in effective the building envelope (walls and roof)
. . has the effect of reducing the average wind not including Ag, in 1112
... acting on the component. Note, however, that this total area of openings in a wall that
.• wind area should only be used in determining the receives positive external pressure, in
...Figures 207EA-l through 207EA-6 and 207EA- 1112
IIJU.U",;U wind load should be applied over the actual the sum of the areas of openings in the
to the component being considered. building envelope (walls and roof) not
including Ao, in m2
,mtl1·m,p roof systems, the effective wind area is the total area of openings in the building
insulation board (or deck panel if insulation is envelope in 1112
if the boards are fully adhered (or the membrane gross area of the solid freestanding
directly to the deck). If the insulation boards or wall or solid sign, in m2
are mechanically attached or partially adhered, a width of pressure coefficient zone, in
wind area is the area of the board or membrane 111
by a single fastener or individual spot or row of

B horizontal dimension of building h mean roof height of a building

measured normal to wind direction, in height of other structure, except
m eave height shall be used for
mean hourly wind speed factor in angle fJ less than or equal to 10°, in 111
Equation 207 A.9-16 from Table roof eave height at a particular wall, .
207A.9-1 the average height if the eave
3-s gust speed factor from Table along the wall
207A.9-1 height to top of parapet in
force coefficient to be used in 207B.6-4 and 207E.7-1
determination of wind loads for other intensity of turbulence
structures Equation 207 A.9-7
net pressure coefficient to be used in multipliers in Figure 207 A.8-1
determination of wind loads for open obtain l(zt
buildings wind directionality factor
external pressure coefficient to be Table 207 A.6-1
used in determination of wind loads velocity pressure exposure coeffic
for buildings evaluated at height z = It
c turbulence intensity factor in velocity pressure exposure
Equation 207 A.9-7 from Table evaluated at height z
207A.9-1 topographic factor as defined
D diameter of a circular structure or Section 207 A.8
member, in m L horizontal dimension of a
D' depth of protruding elements such as measured parallel to the
ribs and spoilers, in m direction, in m
F design wind force for other structures, distance upwind of crest of hill
inN escarpment in Figure 207 A.8-1
gust-effect factor where the difference in
gust-effect factor for MWFRS of elevation is half the height of the hi
flexible buildings and other structures or escarpment, in m
product of external pressure horizontal dimension of return
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be for a solid freestanding wall or sol.
used in determination of wind loads sign from Figure 207D.4-1, in m
for rooftop structures integral length scale of turbulence,
product of external pressure m
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be e integral length scale factor
used in determination of wind loads Table 207A.9-1, m
for buildings reduced frequency
product of the equivalent external Equation 207 A.9-14
pressure coefficient and gust-effect approximate lower
factor to be used in determination of frequency (Hz) from
wind loads for MWFRS of low-rise 207A.9.2
buildings fundamental natural frequency, Hz .•
product of internal pressure design pressure to be used
coefficient and gust-effect factor to be determination of wind loads
used in determination of wind loads buildings, in N/m2
for buildings wind pressure acting on leeward
combined net pressure coefficient for in Figure 207B.4-8, in N/m2
a parapet Pnet net design wind pressure
peak factor for background response Equation 207E.5-1, in N/m2
in Equations 207 A.9-6 and 207 A.9-1 0 PnetlO net design wind pressure for '-'AIIJV"W~
peak factor for resonant response in B at h == 10 m and I = 1.0
Equation 207 A.9-1 0 Figure 207E.5-1, in N/m2
peak factor for wind response in Pp combined net pressure on a
Equations 207 A. 9-6 and 207 A. 9-10 from Equation 207B.4-5, in N/m2
H height of hill or escarpment in Ps net design wind pressure
Figure 207 A.8-1, in 111 Equation 207C.6-1, in N/m2

simplified design wind pressure for p damping ratio, percent critical for
Exposure B at h = 10 m and buildings or other structures
J = 1.0 from Figure 207C.6-1, in € ratio of solid area to gross area for
N/m2 solid freestanding wall, solid sign,
wind pressure acting on windward open sign, face of a trussed tower, or
face in Figure 207Bo4-8, in N/m2 lattice structure
background response factor from integral length scale power law
Equation 207 A.9-8 exponent in Equation 207 A.9-9 from
velocity pressure, in N/1112 Table 207 A.9-1
velocity pressure evaluated at height adjustment factor for building height
z = h, in N/m2 and exposure from Figures. 207C.6-1
velocity pressure for internal pressure and 207E.5-1
determination, in N/m2 value used in Equation 207 A. 9-15
velocity pressure at top of parapet, in (see Section 207A.904)
N/m2 () angle of plane of roof from horizontal,
velocity pressure evaluated at height z in degrees
above ground, in N/m2
resonant response factor from 207A.4 General
Equation 207A.9-12
values from Equations 207A.9-15 207A.4.1 Sign Convention
reduction factor from
Equation 207 A.II-l Positive pressure acts toward the surface and negative
value from Equation 207A.9-13 pressure acts away from the surface.
vertical dimension of the solid
freestanding wall or solid sign from 207A.4.2 Critical Load Condition
Figure 207D.4-1, in m
rise-to-span ratio for arched roofs Values of external and internal pressures shall be combined
height-to-width ratio for solid sign algebraically to determine the most critical load.
basic wind speed obtained from
Figure 207A.5-1A through 207A.5- 207A.4.3 Wind Pressures Acting on Opposite Faces of
IC, in m/s. The basic wind speed Each Building Surface
corresponds to a 3-s gust speed at 10
m above the ground in Exposure In the calculation of design wind loads for the MWFRS and
Category C for components and cladding for buildings, the algebraic
unpartitioned internal volume, m3 sum of the pressures acting on opposite faces of each
mean hourly wind speed at height z building surface shall be taken into account.
m/s
width of building in Figures 207Eo4-3 Commentary: .
and 207Eo4-SA and 207Eo4-5B and
width of span in Figures 207Eo4-4 and Section 20U.4.3: :i;
included in the code to ensure that
207EA-6, in m internal and external pressures acting on a building
distance upwind or downwind of crest surface are taken info account by determining a net
in Figure 207 A.8-1, in 111 pressure from the. algebraic sum of those pressures. For
height above ground level, in m additional information on the. application of the net
equivalent height of structure, in 111 components and cladding wind/pressure acting across a
nominal height of the atmospheric multilayered building envelope system" including
boundary layer used in this code. air-permeable cladding, refer to Section C207E.l.5.
Values appear in Table 207A.9-1
exposure constant from Table
207A.9-1
3-s gust-speed power law exponent
from Table 207A.9-J
reciprocal of a from Table 207 A. 9-1
mean hourly wind-speed power law
exponent in Equation 207 A.9-16 from
Table 207A.9-1
207A.5 Wind Hazard Map

2. Multiple maps remove inconsistencies in the use
207A.5.1 Basic Wind Speed importance factors that actually should vm:v
location and between tropical cyclone-prone
The basic wind speed, V, used in the determination of non-tropical cyclone-prone regions for
design wind loads on buildings and other structures shall Category 111,IVand V structures and
be determined from Figure 207 A.5-1 as follows, except as that the demarcation between tropical cyclone
provided in Section 207 A.52 and 207 A.5.3: non-tropical cyclone winds change with
recurrence interval.
For Occupancy Category III, IV and V buildings and other
structures - use Figure 207 A.5-1 A. 3. The new maps establish uniformity in the
period for the design-basis winds,
For Occupancy Category II buildings and other structures clearly convey that information.
- use Figure 207A.5-1B.
4. The nell' maps, by providing the design wind
For Occupancy Category I buildings and other structures directly, more clearly inform owners and
- use Figure 207 A.5-J C. consultants about the storm intensities for
designs are IN/formed.
The wind shall be assumed to come from any horizontal
direction. The basic wind speed shall be increased where Selection of Return Periods. In the development of
records or experience indicate that the wind speeds are design wind speed map used in Section 207 NSCP 201
higher than those reflected in Figure 207 A.5-1. the Wind Load Subcommittee evaluated the
importance factor, flY' that had been in lise since 1
Commentary: The task committee recognized that using a
value of the wind importance factor probably was
This edition of NSCP departs from prior editions by appropriate because risk varies with location along
providing wind maps that are directly applicable for coast.
determining pressures for strength design approaches.
Rathel' than using a single map with importance factors To determine the return periods to be used in the
and a loadfactorfor each building occupancy category, mapping approach, the task committee needed to
in this edition there are different maps for different with PAGASA scientists, gather historical records
categories of building occupancies. The updated maps evaluate representative return periods for wind
are based on a new and more complete analysis of determined in accordance with Section 207 NSCP 201
tropical cyclone characteristics (Vickery et al. 20080. and earlier, wherein determination of pres
2008b and 2009) performed over the past 10 years. appropriate for strength design started with
wind speeds, but involved multiplication by ir.""'~J'f,,,,,""'J
The decision to move to multiple-strength design maps factors and a wind load factor (0 achieve pressures
in conjunction with a wind load factor of 1.0 instead of were appropriate for strength design. Furthermore,
using a single map used with an importance and a load was assumed that the variability of the wind
factor of J. 6 relied Oil several factors important to an dominates the calculation of the wind load factor.
accurate wind specification: strength design wind load, W T, is given as:
Wr = CF(VsOI)2WLF
1. A strength design wind speed map brings the wind
loading approach in Line with that used for seismic
loads in that they both essentially eliminate the lise
of a load factor for strength design.
~-~~-""---- " ....•. ---

-
I
~
:mit "-
~ ~
!
" ~ ......... DURST

,~
<,
~
"'- ~ .....
~ t-....
I
1 10 100 1000 10000

GUST DURATION. sec
Figure C207 A.S-I

Maximum Speed Averaged over t s to Hourly Mean Speed
; is a building, component, or structure specific

. that includes the effects of things like and from Equation C207A.5-4, the return period T
height, building geometry, terrain, and gust associated with the strength design wind speed is:
. . .' .
computed using the procedures outlined ill
10. Vso is the 50-year return period design T = 0.00228 exp( 10.JW iF} (C207A.5-5)
W LF is the wind load factor, and I is the
factor.
Using the wind load factor of 1.6 as specified in Section
207 NSCP )O]O;:iC)]l1 Equation C207A.5-5 we get
the nominal return period of 50 years, ·the
T. d,]()9yed,;, ~~;tlthel'~tbi'eVd~si9n = V7~9/.JWLF ~
wind speed for any return period to the 50-
period wind speed can be computed from V 700/.)W LF~ . Thus for Occupancy Category IV
Shahid (1998): structures, the basic wind speed is associated with a
return period of lOO years, or an annual exceedance
. [0.36 + O.lln(12T)] (C207A.5-2) probability of 0.0014 .
the return period in years and V T is the T- The importance factor used in Section 207 NSCP 2010
........ period wind speed. The strength design wind and earlier for the computation of wind loads for the
....occurs when: design of Occupancy Category I and If structures is
defined so that the nominal 50-year return period non-
(C207A.5-3) tropical cyclone wind speed is increased to be
representative of a lOO-year return period value.
Following the approach used above to estimate the
resulting effective strength design return period
associated with a 50-year basic design speed, in the case
• = [0.36 + 0.lln(12T)] (C207A.5-4) of the lOO-year.return period basic wind speed in the
=.)WLF non-tropical cyclone-prone regions. we find that:
T = 00228 exp[ 10(VlOO/VSO).)WL.F 1 (C207A.5-6)

where for V 100/V 50 computed from Equation C207 A.5- Similarly, if a wind speed is based upon P a "'"0.00143
4 with WLF = 1.6, we find T = 1,697 years. In the (700-year mean recurrence interval), there exists a
development of Equation C207A.S-6, the term 3.5% probability that this speed will be equaled
(Vl00 jVso )WLF replaces the WLF used in exceeded during a 25-year period, and a 6.9%
Equation C207A.S-S, effectively resulting in a higher probability of being equaled or exceeded in a 50-year
load factor for Occupancy Category 1, 11 and !II period.
structures equal to W LF(V 100/V 50)2. Thlls for
Occupancy Category I and II structures, the basic 'wind Some products have been evaluated and test methods
speed is associated with a return period of 1,700 years, have been developed based on design wind speeds that
or an annual exceedance probability of 0.000588. are consistent with the unfactored load effects typically
Similarly. the 25-year return period wind speed used in Allowable Stress Design. Table C207 A.5-6
associated with Occupancy Category III. IV and V provides conversion from the strength design-based
buildings equates to a 300-year return period wind design wind speeds used in the ASCE 7-10 design
speed with a wind loadfactor of 1.0. speed maps and the Section 207 NSCP 2010 design wind
speeds used in these product evaluation reports and test
Wind Speeds. The wind speed maps of Figure 207A.5-1 methods. A column of values is also provided to allow
present basic wind speedsfor the entire archipelago of coordination with ASCE 7-93 design wind speeds.
the Philippines. The wind speeds correspond to 3-sec
gust speeds at 10111above groundfor exposure category 207A.5.2 Special Wind Regions
C
Mountainous terrain, gorges, and special wind regions
Serviceability Wind Speeds. For applications of shown in Figure 207 A.S-I shall be examined for unusual
serviceability, design using maximum likely events. or wind conditions. The authority having jurisdiction shall, if
other applications, it may be desired to use wind speeds necessary, adjust the values given in Figure 207 A.S-l to
associated with mean recurrence intervals other than account for higher local wind speeds. Such adjustment
those given in Figures 207A.5-1A to 207A.5-1C. To shall be based on meteorological information and an
accomplish this, previous editions of NSCP 2010 estimate of the basic wind speed obtained in accordance
provided tables with factors that enabled the user to with the provisions of Section 207 A.S.3.
adjust the basic design wind speed (previously having a
return period of 50 years to wind speeds associated with Commentary:
other return periods.
Although the wind speed map of Figure 207.4.5-1 is
For applications of serviceability, design using for most regions of the COlll1tJ:V, there are special rv.nlJlI'
maximum likely events. or other applications, Appendix in wh ich wind speed anomalies are known to exist.
Cpresents maps of peak gust wind speeds at 10 III above these special regions are noted in Figure 207A.5-1.
ground in Exposure C conditions for return periods of blowing over mountain ranges or through gorges or
10, 25, 50, and 100 years. valleys in these special regions can develop speed, that
substantially higher than the values indicated 011 the
The probability Pit that the wind speed associated with When selecting basic wind speeds in these special !,['!TJ(J,'IS;,'
a certain annual probabllity P a will be equaled or use of regional climatic data and consultation with a
exceeded at least once during an exposure period of 11 engineer or meteorologist is advised.
years is given by:
It is also possible that anomalies in wind speeds exist on
(C207A.5-7) micrometeorological scale. For example, wind speed-
over hills and escarpments is addressed
Section 207 A.8. Wind speeds over complex terrain may
As an example, if a wind speed is based upon P a "" 0.02 better determined by wind-tunnel studies as described
(50-year mean recurrence interval), there exists a Section 207F. Adjustments of wind speeds should be
probability of 0.40 that this speed will be equaled 01' at the micrometeorological scale 011 the basis of
exceeded during a 25-year period, and a 0.64 engineering 01' meteorological advice and used
probability of being equaled or exceeded in a 50-veal' accordance with the provisions of Section 207A.5.3
period. . such adjustments are warranted Due to the complexity
mountainous terrain and valley gorges in Hawaii,
are topographic wind speed-up effects that cannot

Figure 207A.8-1 (Applied Research If meteorological data are used to jllstifj' a windspeed
lower than 177-lan/1! 700-yr peak gust at 10 111, an analysis
of sampling error is required to demonstrate that the wind
Speeds from record could not . occur by chance. This can be
accomplished by showing that the difference between
predicted speed and 177 km/h contains. two to three
tropical cyclone-prone regions, regional standard deviations of sampling error (Simiu and Scanlan
shall only be used in lieu of the basic wind 1996). Other equivalent methods may be used···· .
in Figure 207 A.S-l when (1) approved
statistical-analysis procedures have been 207A.5.4 Limitation
in reducing the data; and (2) the length of record,
error, averaging time, anemometer height, data Tornadoes have not been considered in developing the
terrain exposure of the anemometer have been basic wind-speed distributions,
account. Reduction in basic wind speed below
207 A.S-I shall be permitted. 207 A.6 Wind Directionality
cyclone-prone regions, wind speeds derived The wind directionality factor, Kd, shall be determined
lation techniques shall only be used in lieu of the fi:om Table 207 A.6-1. This directionality factor shall only
speeds given in Figure 207 A.5-l when be included in determining wind loads when the load
simulation and extreme value statistical analysis combinations specified in Sections 2.3 and 2.4 are used for
are used. the design. The effect of wind directionality in determining
wind loads in accordance with Section 207F shall be based
.. outside tropical cyclone-prone regions, when the on an analysis for wind speeds that conforms to the
speed is estimated from regional climatic data, requirements of Section 207 A.S.3.
wind speed shall not be less than the wind speed
with the specified mean recurrence interval, and Commentary:
shall be adjusted for equivalence to a 3-s gust
at 10m above ground in Exposure C. The data The wind loadjact~r).3 in ASCE 7-95bl~lz/d~~id ,."wind
~~g&~~~~~f't~l
shall be performed in accordance with this section.
reotonat climatic data in accordance with the pi;obabilit.)l.Oj·tlleljl(];~;11Ul;tp/'essu/;e; c(Je.tIJcier7~occllr'·ing

207".1.5.3 and in lieu ofthe basicwind for any givenlvlflddi':7Stiofl. ThewinqdirectionalityJactor
207 A.5-1, the user is cautioned that {Identified asKdinlliecoClejlstabulatec(i!tTabie 207 A.6-
pressure exposure coefficients, 1 for different sth{c~ll!;e types. Asnelt't'I?Seprch.becomes
'Tn'''Tn,,'~· . pressure - coefficients,' and force available, this fcictOf~ callbe directlynlodified 'Valuesfor
. are intended jor use with the 3-s the factor were e;;pblfs/zedjroJr! refe,.en~~s·i'llfze ii{erature
. . . ground in open country. It is and collective cOi;i,iiiiieeji/({gnieliLTke Kd iJaiilejoi'i;Olind
nm·PTI"··O·· . that regional climatic data based on chimneys, ianj(s,'ofidsiinilarsu;lIctllresls giY~11 a~(J.p5.in
time, for example, hourly mean or recognition of the fact that the wind load I'-esistclnce may
U<I<'ll.''''U to reflect peak gust speeds at 10m n()t be exactly the ~{m~~in all directions CIS implied by a
value of 1. O. A yalzie 010.85 Ttlighfbe more appropriate if
a
a triangular trussedfih,ne is shrouded in round cover. A
'-"''','.IL,flU,)t should be emphasized that sampling value 0/1.0 nlig~t.}d ..rnore appropri(.l(ejor a round
uncertaintiesin specificationofthe chimney having a· /(zte.1:atload reslslaiice· equal' irial!
:"_.,,,'., »r:r ," ...... errors are the errors associated with directions -. The designer is cautioned bytJI~ footnote to
.. climatological data samples (years Table·j07A..6~ 1andtlle'sttltelnelu it~SeCtion 207AJi; }vhere
extremes). It is possible to have a /9
reference is ll1t7c{e thefaCt.thatthis.factQi~ is. ()1i~ylObe
speed at an individualstation. with a used inconjll1tciioliwjlh: the load.colllbiHaiipHs specified
. . ,ye(!rs.JVhile local records of limited in Sections2.3 cmdi4ofASCE7-/0:· .. . .
...... .pe used to,define wind speeds in special
...011dconservatism should be.exercised. in

207A.7 Exposure coefficient actually decreases (i.e., the sea surface

becomes aerodynamically smoother) as the wind speed
For each wind direction considered, the upwind exposure increases further (Powell et of. 2003) or as the tropical
shall be based on ground surface roughness that is cyclone radius decreases (Vickery et al. 2008b). The
determined from natural topography, vegetation, and consequences of these studies are that the surface
constructed facilities. roughness over the ocean ill a tropical cyclone is
consistent with that of exposure D rather than exposure
Commentary:
C. Consequently, the lise of exposure D along the
tropical cyclone coastline is now required.
The descriptions of the surface roughness categories
and exposure categories in Section 207 A. 7 have been
For Exposure B the tabulated values of Kz correspond
expressed as for as possible in easily understood verbal
to Zo = 0.2111.which is below the typical value o.fO.3 m,
terms that are sufficiently precise for most practical
whereas for Exposures C and D they correspond /0 the
applications. Upwind surface roughness conditions
typical value of zoo The reason for the difference in
required for Exposures Band D are shown
Exposure B is that this category of terrain. which is
schematically in Figures C207A.7-I and C207A.7-2.
applicable to suburban areas. often contains open
respectively. For cases where the designer wishes to
patches. such as highways. parking /OIS. and playing
make a more detailed assessment of the surface
fields. These cause local increases in the wind speeds at
roughness category and exposure category, the
their edges. By using an exposure coefficient
following more mathematical description is offeredfor
corresponding to a lower than typical value ofzo. some
guidance (Irwin 2006). The ground surface roughness is
allowance is made for this. The alternative would be to
best measured in terms of a roughness length parameter
introduce a number of exceptions to use of Exposure B
called zoo Each of the surface roughness categories B
in suburban areas. which would add an undesirable
through D correspond to a range of values of this
level of complexity.
parameter. as does the even rougher category A used in
previous versions of the code in heavily built-up urban
The value ofzofor a particular terrain can be estimated
areas but removed in the present edition. The range of
from the typical dimensions of surface roughness
Zo in meters (m) for each terrain category is given in
elements and their spacing on the ground area using an
Table C207A.7-I. Exposure A has been included ill
empirical relationship, due to Lettau (1969). which is:
Table C207A. 7-1 as a reference that may be useful when
using the Wind Tunnel Procedure. Further information
on values ofzo in different types of terrain can befound (C207A.7-I)
in Simiu and Scanlan (1996) and Table C207A.7-2
based on Davenport et al. (2000) and Wieringa et al.
(2001). The roughness classifications in Table C207A. 7- Hob the average height of the roughness in
2 are not intended to rep/ace the use of exposure the upwind terrain
categories as required ill the code/or structural design Sob the average vertical frontal area per
purposes. However. the terrain roughness obstruction presented to the wind
classifications ill Table C207 A. 7-2 may be related to Aob the average area of ground occupied by
ASCE 7 exposure categories by comparing Zo values each obstruction. including the open
between Table C207A. 7-1 and C207A.7-2. For example. area surrounding it
the zo values for Classes 3 and 4 ill Table C207 .1.7-2
fall within the range of Zo values for Exposure C in Vertical frontal area is defined as the area of the
Table C207A. 7-1. Similarly. the Zo values/or Classes 5 projection of the obstruction onto a vertical plane
and 6 in Table C207 A. 7-2 fall within the range of Zo normal to the wind direction. The area Sob may be
values for Exposure B in Table C207 .1.7-1. estimated by Slimming the approximate vertical frontal
areas of all obstructions within a selected area oj
Research described in Powell et al. (2003). Donelan et upwind fetch and dividing the slim by the number of
al. (2004), and Vickery et al. (2008b) showed that the obstructions in the area. The average height Hob may
drag coefficient over the ocean in high winds in tropical be estimated in a similar way by averaging the
cyclones did not continue to increase with increasing individual heights rather than using the frontal areas.
wind speed as previously believed (e.g.. Powell 1980). Likewise Aob may be estimated by dividing the size of
These studies showed that the sea surface drag the selected area of upwind fetch by the number of
coefficient, and hence the aerodynamic roughness of the obstructions in it.
ocean. reached a maximum at mean wind speeds of
about 30m/s. There is some evidence that the drag

determination is defined as an "open patch ... An open

an example, if the upwind fetch consists primarily of patch is defined as an opening greater than or equal to
. family homes with typical height Hob = 6111, approximately 50 rn on each side (i.e., greater than
. frontal area (including some trees on each lot) 50 m by 50 11/). Openings smaller than this need not be
.. 1001112a, nd ground area per home of l,OOOm2, then considered in the determination of the exposure
.....is calculated to be Zo =:: 0.5 x 20 x 10011,000 = category.
. which falls into exposure category B according to
C207A.7-1. The effect of open patches of surface roughness Cor D
on the use of exposure category B is shown pictorially
and bushes are porous and are deformed by in Figures C207 A. 7-3 and C207A. 7-4. Note that the plan
winds, which reduce their effective frontal areas location of any open patch may have a different effect
, 1993). For conifers and other evergreens no for different wind directions.
than 50 percent of their gross frontal area can be
to be effective in obstructing the wind For Aerial photographs. representative of each exposure
trees and bushes no more than 15 percent of type, are included in the commentary to aid the user in
......gross frontal area can be taken to be effective in establishing the proper exposure for a given site.
.. the wind Gross frontal area is defined in Obviously, the proper assessment of exposure is a
as the projection onto a vertical plane matter of good engineering judgment. This fact is
to the wind) of the area enclosed by the . particularly true in light of the possibility that the
of the tree Or bush. exposure could change in one or more wind directions
due to future demolition andlor development.
estimated that the majority of buildings
as much as 60 percent to 80 percent) have an
category corresponding 10 Exposure B. While 207A.7.1 Wind Directions and Sectors
•. -r.. vely simple definition in the code willnormally
...for most practical applications, oftentimes the For each selected wind direction at which the wind loads
.. is in need of additional information, are to be determined, the exposure of the building or
with regard to the effect of large openiIigs structure shall be determined for the two upwind sectors
(e.g., large parking lots, freeways, or 'tree extending 45° either side of the selected wind direction.
in the otherwise "normal" gj;otmdsU/:i'ac.e The exposure in these two sectors shall be determined in
B. The following is offered (1~ilIi4ali#e/or accordance with Sections 207A.7.2 and 207A.7.3, and the
exposure whose use would result in the highest wind loads
shall be used to represent the winds from that direction.
definition ofExposl:reB giVeninthe'i~~Y~f
using the 'surface 'roughness ,cptegolY
.. is shown picfo,;iitllyifi Figure C207A:7-1.
.. . appliesfor the. siaface roughness B
vailing 800 111 upwind with insufficient
.. as defined in the following te.xt: to
.. lise of ExposureB. .
.. '," ,. _. , . -.:
.................
in the swfaceroughness~lllrge enough to
.ificant effect on the exposure category

,~
Noles:
1. Values are nominal design 3-second gust wind speeds in kilometers per hour at 10m above ground for Exposure C category. 1.
2. Linear interpolation between contours is permitted. 2.
3. Islands and coastal areas outside the last contour shall use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area. 3.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions. 4.
5. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 15% probability of exceedance in 50 years (Annual Exceedance Probability = 0.00333, MRl = 300 years). 5.
6.
6. Results are from PAGASA.
Figure 207A.5-1A Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category III, IV and V Buildings and Other Structures

,~
Notes:
I. Values are nominal design 3-second gust wind speeds in kilometers per hour at 10m above ground for Exposure C category.
2. Linear interpolation between contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas outside the last contour shall use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area.
). 4. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions.
5. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 7% probability ofexceedance in 50 years (Annual Exceedance Probability = 0.00143, MRI = 700 years).
Figure 207 A.S-lB Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category II Buildings and Other Structures
.-
Notes:
1. Values are nominal design 3-second gust wind speeds in kilometers per hour at 10m above ground for Exposure C category.
2. Linear interpolation between contours is permitted.
3. Islands and coastal areas outside the last contour shall use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area.
4. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions.
5. Wind speeds correspond to approximately a 3% probability of exceedance in 50 years (Annual Exceedance Probability = 0.000588, MRJ = 1700
years).
Figure 207A.5-1C Basic Wind Speeds for Occupancy Category I Buildings and Other Structures
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc: (ASEP)

BUILDING OR
WIND F h s 18m, d1 ~ 450 m OTHER STRUCTURE
ANY ROUGHNESS
For h > 18m, d, ~ greater of 790 m or 20h
ROUGHNESS B
-:
r h ANY ROUGHNESS
Figure C2ulA.7-1
Upwind Surface Roughness Conditions Requires for Exposure B.
BUILDING OR
WIN 0 d1 ~ greater of 1500 m or 20h OTHER STRUCTURE
ANY ROUGHNESS ROUGHNESS 0 ANY ROUGHNESS
(a)
BUILDING OR
d1 ~ greater of 790 m or 20h, and OTHER STRUCTURE
WIND
d2 s greater of 180 m or 20h
ANY ROUGHNESS ROUGHNESS 0 ROUGHNESS BAND/OR C ANY ROUGHNESS

h
(b)
Figure C207A.7-2
Upwind Surface Roughness Conditions Required for Exposure D, for the Cases with
(a) Surface Roughness D Immediately Upwind of the Building, and (b) Surface Roughness Band/or C Immediately
Upwind of the Building

Table 207 A.6-1

Wind Directionality Factor, /(d
Structure Type Directionality Factor Kd'~
Buildings
Main Wind Force Resisting System 0.85
Components and Cladding 0.85
Arched Roofs 0.85
Chimneys, Tanks, and Similar Structures

Square 0.90
Hexagonal 0.95
Round 0.95
Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid

0.85
Freestanding and Attached Signs
Open Signs and Lattice Framework 0.85
Trussed Towers
Triangular, square, rectangular 0.85
All other cross sections 0.95
"Directionaluy Factor Kd has been calibrated with combinations of loads

specified in Section 203. This factor shall only be applied when used in
conjunction with load combinations specified in Sections 203.3 and 203.4.
207A.7.2 Surface Roughness Categories 207 A. 7.3 Exposure Categories
A ground Surface Roughness within each 45° sector shall Exposure B: For buildings with a mean roof height of less
be determined for a distance upwind of the site as defined than or equal to 9 m, Exposure B shall apply where the
in Section 207A.7.3 from the categories defined in the ground surface roughness, as defined by Surface
following text, for the purpose of assigning an exposure Roughness B, prevails in the upwind direction for a
category as defined in Section 207A.7.3. distance greater than 450 m. For buildings with a mean roof
height greater than 9 m, Exposure B shall apply where
Surface Roughness B: Urban and suburban areas, wooded Surface Roughness B prevails in the upwind direction for
areas, or other terrain with numerous closely spaced a distance greater than 790 m or 20 times the height of the
obstructions having the size of single-family dwellings or building, whichever is greater.
larger.
Exposure C: Exposure C shall apply for all cases where
Surface Roughness C: Open terrain with scattered Exposures B or 0 do not apply.
obstructions having heights generally less than 9 m, This
category includes flat open country and grasslands. Exposure D: Exposure D shall apply where the ground
surface roughness, as defined by Surface Roughness D,
Surface Roughness D: Flat, unobstructed areas and water prevails in the upwind direction for a distance greater than
surfaces. This category includes smooth mud flats, salt 1500 m or 20 times the building height, whichever is
flats, and unbroken ice. greater. Exposure D shall also apply where the ground
surface roughness immediately upwind of the site is
exposure B or C, and the site is within a distance of 180 m
or 20 times the building height, whichever is greater, from

D condition as defined 1I1 the previous of sectors one or two is used to de/ermine full x a:~dy
loading individually, and then 75 percent of these/oildv
are to be applied in each direction at the same lilne
site located in the transition zone between exposure according to the requirements of Section 207B.4.6 and
the category resulting in the largest wind forces Figure 207B.4-8. The procedure defined in this section
used. for determining wind loads in each design direction is
not to be confused with the determination of the wind
directionality factor K d. The /( dfactor determined from
Section 207A.6 and Table 207A.6-l applies for all
design wind directions. See Section C207A.6.
Wind loads for cladding and low-rise buildings elements

are determined using the upwind exposure for the single
surface roughness in one of the eight sectors of
Figure C207 A. 7-5 that gives the highest cladding
pressures.
Y NORTH I NORTHEAST
in Section 207 A.5.l requires that a

be designed for winds from all directions. A
oroceaure to determine directional wind loads
Wind load for buildings using Section
and Figures 207B.4-I, 207B.4-2 or 207B.4-3 EAST
for eight wind directions at 45°
.with four falling along primary building axes BUILDING OR
'. ".in Figure C207 A. 7-5. For each of the eight OTHER STRUCTURE
upwind exposure is determined for each of
one on each side of the wind direction
with the exposure giving highest loads
to define wind loads for that direction. For
..... winds from the north, the exposure from Figure C207 A.7-5
.,. or eight, whichever gives the higher load. is Determination of Wind Loads
. from the east, the exposure from sector from Different Directions
whichever gives the highest load, is used.
coming from the northeast, the most exposed

BUILDING OR OTHER
STRUCTURE
WIND
SURFACE ROUGHNESS
q
TYPES
B CorD B CorD B Cor D B
LENGTH OF OPEN
PATCHES
x= 1000 m
"OPEN PATCHES" - OPENINGS ~ 50 m x 50 m

dv dz, _, d, ~ 50 m
d1 + dz + _+ d, ~ 200 m
TOTAL LENGTH OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS B ~ 800 m
WITHIN 1000 m OF UPWIND FETCH DISTANCE
Figure C207 A.7-3

Exposure B with Upwind Open Patches

BUILDING OR OTHER STRUCTURE
OPEN PATCHES NOT

QUALIFYING FOR
WIND DIRECTION
CONSIDERED.
QUALIFYING OPEN
PATCHES FOR
WIND DIRECTION
SHOWN.
:530m I
NOTE: ALL OPENINGS

SHOWN ARE "OPEN
PATCHES" (OPENINGS
~ 50 m x 50 m) WITH
SURFACE
ROUGHNESS C OR D.
50 m WIDE RADIAL LINE

IN DIRECTION OF WIND
WIND DIRECTION
BEING CONSIDERED
Figure C207A.7-4
Exposure B with Open Patches

207A.7.4.1 Directional Procedure (Section 207B) mean sea level (30.5 m -I- [3.22 x 10.7 ml) within the 3.22-
km radius specified.
For each wind direction considered, wind loads for the
design of the MWFRS of enclosed and partially enclosed A wind tunnel study by Means et al. (1996) and observation
buildings using the Directional Procedure of Section 207B ofactual wind damage has shown that the affected height
shall be based on the exposures as defined in Section H is less than previously specified. Accordingly, Condition
207 A.7.3. Wind loads for the design of open buildings with (5) was changed to 4.5 111 in Exposure C.
monos lope, pitched, or troughed free roofs shall be based
on the exposures, as defined in Section 207A.7.3, resulting Buildings sited on the upper half of an isolated hill or
in the highest wind loads for any wind direction at the site. escarpment may experience significantly higher wind
speeds than buildings situated on level ground. To account
207A.7.4.2 Envelope Procedure (Section 207C) for these higher wind speeds, the velocity pressure
exposure coefficients in Tables 207B.3-1, 207C.3-I,
Wind loads for the design of the MWFRS for all low-rise 207D.3-I, and 207E.3-I are multiplied by a topographic
buildings designed using the Envelope Procedure of factor, Kzt, determined by Equation 207A.8-I. The
Section 207C shall be based on the exposure category topographic feature (2-D ridge or escarpment, or 3-D
resulting in the highest wind loads for any wind direction axisymmetrical hill) is described by two parameters, Hand
at the site. LIt" H is the height of the hill or difference in elevation
between the crest and that of the upwind terrain. Lit is the
207 A. 7.4.3 Directional Procedure for Building distance upwind of the crest to where the ground elevation
Appurtenances and Other Structures is equal to half the height of the hill. /(zt is determinedfrom
(Section 207D) three multipliers, K 1, /(2, and K3, which are obtained from
Figure 207A.8-I, respectively. /(1 is related to the shape
Wind loads for the design of building appurtenances (such of the topographic feature and the maximum speed-up near
as rooftop structures and equipment) and other structures the crest, /(2 accounts for the reduction in speed-up with
(such as solid freestanding walls and freestanding signs, distance upwind or downwind of the crest, and K3
chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice frameworks, and accounts for the reduction ill speed-up with height above
trussed towers) as specified in Section 207D shall be based the local ground surface.
on the appropriate exposure for each wind direction
considered. The multipliers listed in Figure 207A.8-I are based on the
assumption that the wind approaches the hill along the
207A.7.4,4 Components and Cladding (Section 207E) direction of maximum slope, causing the greatest speed-up
near the crest. The average maximum upwind slope of the
Design wind pressures for components and cladding shall hill is approximately H /2LII' and measurements have
be based on the exposure category resulting in the highest shown that hills lVU!? slopes of less than about
wind loads for any wind direction at the site. O.10 (H/ Lit < 0.20) are unlikely to produce significant
speed-up of the wind. For vollies of H / Lit > 0.5 the
207 A.8 Topographic Effects speed-up effect is assumed to be independent of slope. The
speed-up principally affects the mean wind speed rather
Commentary: than the amplitude of the turbulent fluctuations, and this
fact has been accounted/or in the values of K1, K2, and
As an aid to the designer, this section was rewritten in K3 given in Figure 207 A.8-1. Therefore, values of Kzt
ASCE 7-9810 specify when topographic effects need to be obtained from Figure 207A.8-J are intended for use with
applied to a particular structure rather than when they do velocity pressure exposure coefficients, Kit and Kz, which
not as in the previous version. In GIl effort to exclude are based on gust speeds.
situations where little or no topographic effect exists,
Condition (2) Ivas added to include the fact that the It is not the intent of Section 207A.8 to address the general
topographic feature should protrude significantly above case of wind/low over hilly or complex terrain for which
(by afactor of two or more) upwind terrain features before engineering judgment, expert advice. or the Wind Tunnel
it becomes a factor. For example, if a significant upwind Procedure as described in Section 207F may be required.
terrain feature has a height of 10m above its base elevation Background material on topographic speed-up effects may
and has a lop elevation of 30 m above mean sea level then be found in the literature (Jackson and Hunt 1975, Lemelin
the topographic feature (hill, ridge, or escarpment) must et al. 1988, and Walmsley et al. 1986).
have at least the H specified and extend 10 elevation 52 m

designer is cautioned that, at present, the code 2. The hill, ridge, or escarpment protrudes above the
no provision for vertical wind speed-lip because height of upwind terrain features within a 3.2-km
Innrlm'nnf71l" effect, even though this phenomenon is radius in any quadrant by a factor of two or more.
...... to exist and can cause additional uplift on roofs.
. .. research is required to quantify this effect 3. The structure is located as shown in Figure 207A.8-J
. ·it can be incorporated into the code. in the upper one-half of a hill or ridge or near the crest
of an escarpment.
Wind Speed-Up over Hills, Ridges, and
Escarpments 4. nu; ~ 0.2.
speed-up effects at isolated hills, ridges, and 5. H is greater than or equal to 4.5 m for Exposure C and
·;';'~~<lrn,mp'nt"constituting abrupt changes in the general D and 18 111 for Exposure B.
, located in any exposure category, shall be
In the design when buildings and other site 207 A.8.2 Topographic Factor
and locations of structures meet all of the
The wind speed-up effect shall be included in the
calculation of design wind loads by using the factor Kzt:
The hill, ridge, or escarpment is isolated and
unobstructed upwind by other similar topographic
features of comparable height for 100 times the height (207A.8-1)
of the topographic feature (100H) or 3.2 km,
whichever is less. This distance shall be measured where K 1, K 2, and K 3 are given in Figure 207 A.8- I.
horizontally from the point at which the height H of If site conditions and locations of structures do not meet all
the hill, ridge, or escarpment is determined. the conditions specified in Section 207 A.8.l then
Kzt = 1. O.
ESCARPMENT 2~D RIDGE OR 3·D AXISYMMETRICAL HILL
Figure 207 A.8-1

Topographic Factor, /(zt
"-"---'---~ ~-~--~.-~ "

Table 207 A.8-J

Topographic Multipliers for Exposure C
K 1 Multiplier K 2 Multiplier K"'I Multiplier

3-D All 3-D
HILII 2-D 2-D x/LII 2-D zlLI! 2-D 2-D
Axisym. Other Axisym.
Ridge Escarp. Escarp, Ridge Escarp.
Hill Cases Hill
0.20 0.29 0.17 0.2] 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.25 0.36 0.21 0.26 0.50 0.88 0.67 0.10 0.74 0.78 0.67
0.30 0.43 0.26 0.32 1.00 0.75 0.33 0.20 0.55 0.61 0045
0.35 0.51 0.30 0.37 1.50 0.63 0.00 0.30 0041 0047 0.30
0040 0.58 0.34 0042 2.00 0.50 0.00 0040 0.30 0.37 0.20
0045 0.65 0.38 0047 2.50 0.38 0.00 0.50 0.22 0.29 0.14
0.50 0.72 0.43 0.53 3.00 0.25 0.00 0.60 0.17 0.22 0.09
3.50 0.13 0.00 0.70 0.12 0.17 0.06
4.00 0.00 0.00 0.80 0.09 0.14 0.04
0.90 0.07 0.11 0.03
l.00 0.05 0.08 0.02
1.50 0.Ql 0.02 0.00
2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Notes:
1. For values of HI LIL• xl LI• and zj LII other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
2. For!!'"
LII
> 0.50, assume {i- = 0.50 for evaluating K1 and substitute
LII
ZH for LII for evaluating K2 and K3.
3. Multipliers arc based on the assumption that wind approaches the hill or escarpment along the direction of maximum slope.
4. Notation:
Height of hill or escarpment relative to the upwind terrain, in meters.

Distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment, in meters,
Factor to account for shape of topographic feature and maximum speed-up effect.
Factor to account for reduction in speed-up with distance upwind or downwind of crest.
Factor to account for reduction in speed-up with height above local terrain.
Distance (upwind or downwind) from the crest to the building site, in meters.
Height above ground surface at building site, in meters.
f1 Horizontal attenuation factor.
Y Height attenuation factor.
Equations:
Kzr = (1 + /(1 + /(2 + /(3)2
K 1 determined from table below
/(2 = (1--ItLl!I~I)
/(3 = e-yz/L"
Hill Shape y Upwind Downwind

B D of Crest of Crest
2-dimensional ridges
(or valleys with negative) 1.30 1045 1.55 3.00 1.50 1.50
H in K1/(HILh)
2-dimensional escarpments 0.75 0.85 0.95 2.50 1.50 4.00
3-dimensional axisymmetrical hill 0.95 1.05 1.15 4.00 1.50 1.50
Figure 207 A.8-2

Parameters for Speed-Up Over Hills and Escarpments
-~-------
..- , ..
A.9 Gust Effects 4>(Z) the fundamental model shape

(z/h){
{ the mode exponent
p air density
1 contains a single-gust effect factor of 0.85 C[x mean along-wind force coefficient
buildings. As an option, the designer can 1111 modal mass
specific features of the wind environment
fl1JI'UJI"7Vsize to more accurately calculate a gust
. One such procedure is located in the body
f t
J.L(Z)4>2 (z)dz
errt nrrrrrrr (Solari 1993a and 1993b). A procedure

J.L(z) mass per unit height
included for calculating the gust effect factorfor K (1.65)a/(a+{+1)
structures. The rigid structure gust factor is 0
to 10 percent lower than the simple, but and V z is the 3-s gust speed at height z. This can be
"~~"'1!I'J/"W. value of 0.85 permitted in the code without evaluated by Vz =
b(z/33)CiV, where V is the 3-s gust
The procedures for both rigid and flexible speed in Exposure C at the reference height (obtained
(1) provide a superior model for flexible from Figure 207A.5-1); b and a
are given in
that displays the peak factors gQ and gR and Table 207A.9-1.
the flexible structure value to match the rigid
as resonance is removed A designer isfree to RMS Along-Wind Acceleration. The rms along-wind
any other rational procedure in the approved acceleration <1x(z) as a function of height above the
, as stated in Section 207A.9.5 . ground surface is given by:
....gust effect factor accounts for the loading effects in

along-wind direction due to wind turbulence-
interaction. It also accounts for along-Wind
effects due to dynamic amplification forflexible
UHtIlr,I"''' and structures. It does not include allowances (C207A.9-2)
loading effects, vortex shedding,
due to galloping or flutter, or dynamic where Vz isthe mea,] 'hourly wind speed at height z, fills:
.- . - // "..·:t ~ :.. ...
effects. For structures susceptible to loading
that are not accounted for in the gust effect
information should be obtained from recognized
(Kareem 1992 and 1985, Gurley and Kareem
'V.J i(3 3)" v Z
(C207A.9-3)
Solari 1993a and 1993b, and Kareem and Smith where b 'and a are defined in Table 207A.9-1.
Maximum Along-Wind Acceleration. The maximum

Response. Based on the preceding
along-Wind acceleration as a function of height above
of the gust effect factor, predictions of along
the ground surface is given by:
response, for example, maximum displacement,
(rms), and peak acceleration, can be
(C207A.9-4)
These response components are needed for
and serviceability limit states. In the
expressions for evaluating these along-Wind (C207 A.9-5)
components are given.
uxunum Along-Wind Displacement. The maximum

where T = the length of time over which the minimum
displacement X1;wx(z)" as a function of
acceleration is computed. usually taken to be 3,600 s to
above the ground surface is given by:
represent 1hour.'
Approximate Fundamental Frequency. To estimate the

(C207A.9-1) dynamic response of structures. knowledge. oj the
fundamental }i'equency (lowest natural freqlieJ1~Y) Ojthe
structure is essential. This value would 0/.'06·,(is!dstbl
determining if the dynamic response esti;ii:aN~
ere
necessary. Most computer codes used in the olia(vsis of
structures would provide estimates of the natural of the building is most important; hence the
frequencies of the structure being analyzed. However. weighted average is appropriate. This method is
for the preliminary design stages some empirical appropriate first-order equation for address
relationships for building period Ta (Ta = lint) are buildings with setbacks. Explicit calculation of
available in the earthquake chapters of ASCE 7. effect factor per the other methods given in
However, it is noteworthy that these expressions are 207 A. 9 call still be performed.
based on recommendations for earthquake design with
inherent bias toward higher estimates offundamental Observation from wind tunnel testing of buildings
frequencies (Goel and Chopra 1997 and 1998). For frequency is calculated using analysis software
wind design applications these values may be the following expression forfrequency. appropriate
unconservative because an estimated frequency higher buildings less than about 120 111 in height, applicable
than the actual frequency would yield lower values of all buildings ill steel or concrete:
the gust effect factor and concomitantly a lower design
wind pressure. However, Goel and Chopra (1997 and
1998) also cite lower bound estimates of frequency that nl = 100/H (m) average value
are more suited for use in wind applications. These
lower-bound expressions are now given in Section
207A.9.2; graphs of these expressions are shown ill nl = 75/ H (/1/) lower bound value
Figure C207 A. 9-1. Because these expressions are based
on regular buildings, limitations based on height and
slenderness are required. The effective length Lett' uses
a height-weighted average of the along-wind length of
the building for slenderness evaluation. The top portion
100
'~
75 -
,
l
60
\\ \
- -Equation 207A.9-2:22.2IHAO.S
----Equ:ltion 207A.9-3:43.S/HAO.9
,-.
S
'-'
.... '\ -Equ:ltioIl207A.9-4:75/H
,,
..c 45
Ql)
.a> \ ~\
:t:
bD
I:: ~
§
.:; 30
~
, r>,
CQ
\ .. ~..
~
I ....
, ~ i'o,_ i'o r--
15 ... r-. "1-.. .... ....
I'" ... ~- r--I-.
-I-.
o
T-
0.000 0.500 1.000 1.500 2.000 2.500
Approximate Natural Frequency (hertz)
Figure C207 A.9-1

Equations for Approximate Natural Frequency vs, Building Height
-----,._ .._ , ..
, ' ..
, '
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-5-1
is
.:·'··.·.··(C'2dfl.BiiEji/ }
where h is the height,.alld E,l,and m are~alcujated
for the cross-section at the base. A depends on the wall
thicknesses at the tip and base, ei andei; and external
diameter at the tip and base, d,and db, according to the
I
following formula:
A [1.
= gexp (-;:') ]+ [0 9 +6(~t"
(C207A.9-13J
Equation C207A.9-12 reduces to Equation C207A.9-11

for uniform. masts. For free-standing lattice towers
(without added ancillaries such as antennas or lighting
frames) (Standards Australia 1994):
in Japan involving a suite of buildings (C207 A.9~14)

ow-amnu excitations have' led to the
for natural frequencies of
'.Vl1-ruU7 et al. 2003): where wa is the average width of the structure in mand
h is tower height, An alternative formula for lattice
(C207A.9-9) towers (lvithaddedalICillai"ies) (Wyatt 1984) is>
(C207A.9-JO) ". (C207A.9-15)
·-f'.\"_·"'JlIX basedonJapaneSn"'~in~,:esultin
.trernienc» estimates than those obtained from the
~,,,W~~t;~!{I~Yrrg~~ :2i~i
l~'§lk(~"di~
squm;e basefolvers, 01,230 mj01' triangular base towers.
fb'
ion given in. Equations C2(J7A~9.-6
,.-,,,..,"'_'_',.. A.9-8, particularly since the Japanese itructllJ.at.·bd1JIPillk.StJ.u2tul.al·.'tamPingis ..·.a·meaSUI'e
limited observations for the more flexible of ellergydissipation ina vibratingstructurethatresults
. . .... to wind effects and Japanese in bringing. the.s,,·uctureto.a quiescent state. The
tends to be stiffer. damping is definedas the. ratio of the energy dissipated
in one' oscillation. cycle to the' maximum amount' of
energy in the structure in that cycle. .Thereare as. many
structural damping Inechc:nisms as there are modes of
convert ing ..niec hanical energy into heat The mos t
important". mechcmisms.· are ...material '.damping and
interfacial damping ... ' .'. ... ....
> i'···· " .'.•.,.,.............. . ...
...."." bending stijJnessojtlte section and m is In·····engineering··.·practice,...
·.·.the·.··.·.damking·.n,echahlsin.·..·.·.lS
'(lY';'(UI'7it heigh). (This.formula may be used/or oftenapproximatedasviscous damping becausei; ..Wlds
. .taper, using average value olE I and to a linear.equation of lila/ion. This' dan/ping 111ia~llre,
in terms of the dampingtatio, is usuall)!asslgn~c! basic!
",:,_,'
on the construCtiolllnatel·ial,. for. exq/nple, stee/i%
" ,.,.:.,.:: -: -
OrC1Xl1.l1al'e·
.....
formula for cal1tilew~red; . tapered, concrete; ..The·.· ·.cCtlculation.,o/.dynanligloaC[ e.ffects
. (ECCS1978) is:' requires dampiFig. ratio as· an ..· input. ln~vjrJd
applications, dampingTatio~ 0/1 percetifQ}l~illJCf~·c:HfJt.
(vpically .:i/sedl?.the· ..Ullitec!SUltes Jqr' ste.~ka,@
are ....
concrete buildings.af serviceabllityleyels,"esp¢ctiyetj"

while ISO (1997) suggests 1 percent and 1.5 percent for earthquake engineering, is used for the ..vind loads, as it
steel and concrete. respectively. Damping values for is less sensitive to deviations from a lineal' mode shape
steel support structures for signs. chimneys, and tOl-t'CI'S while still providing a gust effect factor generally equal
may be much lower than buildings and may fall in the to the gust factor calculated by the Section 207 NSCP
range of 0.15 percent to 0.5 percent. Damping values of 2010 standard. This equivalence occurs only for
special structures like steel stacks call be as low as 0.2 structures with linear mode shape and uniform mass
percent to 0.6 percent and 0.3 percent to 1.0 percent for distribution. assumptions tacitly implied in the previous
unlined and lined steel chimneys, respectively (ASME formulation of the gust effectfactor, and thereby permits
1992 and CIC1ND 1999). These values may provide a smooth transitionfrom the existing procedure to the
some guidancefor design. Damping levels used in wind formulation suggested here. For a more detailed
load applications are smaller than the 5 percent discussion on this wind loading procedure. see ISO
damping ratios common in seismic applications because (1997) and Sataka et al. (2003).
buildings subjected to wind loads respond essentially
elastically whereas buildings subjected to design level Along-Wind Equivalent Static Wind Loading.
earthquakes respond inelastically at higher damping The equivalent static wind loading for the mean.
levels. background, and resonant components is obtained using
the procedure outlined in the following text.
Because the level of structural response in the
serviceability and survivability states is different, the Mean wind load component Pj at the til floor level is
damping values associated with these stales may differ. given by:
Further. due to the number of mechanisms responsible
for damping, the limited full-scale data manifest a (C207A.9-16)
dependence on factors such as material, height. and type
of structural system and foundation. The Committee on where
Damping of the Architectural Institute of Japan suggests
j floor level
different damping values for these slates based on a
Zj height of the til floor above the ground
large damping database described in Sataka et al.
(2003).
level
= velocity pressure at height Zj
In addition to structural damping. aerodynamic external pressure coefficient
damping may be experienced by a structure oscillating 0.925(1 + 1.7Bv1z)-1 is the gus!
ill air. In general, the aerodynamic damping velocity factor
contribution is quite small compared to the structural
damping. and it is positive in low to moderate wind
Peak background wind load component P OJ at the ph
floor level is given similarly by:
speeds. Depending on the structural shape. at some
wind velocities, the aerodynamic damping may become
negative. which can lead to unstable oscillations. In
these cases, reference should be made to recognized (C207A.9-17)
literature or a wind tunnel study.
Alternate Procedure to Calculate Wind Loads. where

The concept of the gust effect factor implies that the
effect of gusts can be adequately accounted for by 1.7IzgQQ)
0.925 (
multiplying the mean wind load distribution 'with height 1 + 1.ts-t«
by CI single factor. This is an approximation. If a more
is the background component of the gust
accurate representation of gust effects is required, the
effect factor.
alternative procedure in this section can be used. II
takes account of the fact that the inertial forces created Peak resonant wind load component PRj a/ the ph floor
by the building's mass, as it moves under wind action. level is obtained by distributing the resonant base
have a different distribution with heigh! than the mean bending moment response to each level
wind loads or the loads due to the direct actions of gusts
(ISO 1997 and Sataka et al. 2003). The alternate
formulation of the equivalent static load distribution (C207A ..9-I8)
utilizes the peak base bending moment and expresses it
in terms of inertial forces at different building levels. A
base bending moment, instead of the base shear as in

the building height. Additional backgroundcan befound

in ISO (1997) and SaJq/coet a((?,Q03). . ..

Table C207A.9-2 Rn 0.610
Calculated Values 11 5.113
V 40.23111ls Rh 0.176
Z 109.73 In 11 2.853
lz 0.201 RL 0.289
Lz 216.75 m R2 0.813
Q2 0.616 GJ 1.062
Vz 32.95111ls K 0.501
Vz 47.59 m/s ml 10.88x106

kg
Nl 1.31
BR 3.787
Rn 0.113
11 0.852
Table 207A.9-3
Along-wind Response - Example
Floor Zj (m) C/>j Xmaxj
RMSAcc.* RMSAcc.* Max Acc. * Max Ace. *
(m/s2) (mg) (mfs2) (mg)
0 0 a 0 0 0 a 0
5 18.29 0.10 0.03 0.00 0.41 0.02 1.6
10 36.58 0.20 0.06 0.01 0.83 0.03 3.1
15 54.86 0.30 0.09 0.01 1.24 0.05 4.7
20 73.15 0.40 0.13 0.02 1.66 0.06 6.3
25 91.44 0.50 0.16 0.02 2.07 0.08 7.8
30 109.73 0.60 0.19 0.02 2.49 0.09 9.4
35 128.02 0.70 0.22 0.03 2.90 0.1 f 11.0
40 146.3 0.80 0.25 0.03 3.32 0.12 12.6
45 164.59 0.80 0.28 0.04 3.73 0.14 14.1
50 182.88 1.00 0.31 0.04 4.14 0.15 15.7
Aerodynamic Loads 011 Tall Bll;[(fillgS-AIl across-wind and torsional responses in the early design
Interactive Database. Under the action of wind. tall stages. The database consists of high frequency base
buildings oscillate simultaneously in the along-wind, balance measurements involving seven rectangular
across-wind, and torsional directions. While the along- building models, with side ratio D/ B, where D is the
wind loads have been successfully treated in terms of depth of the building section along the oncoming wind ..
gust loading factors based on quasi-steady and strip direction) FOIn 113 to 3. three aspect ratios for each.'
theories, the across-wind and torsional loads cannot be building model in two approach flows, namely,'
treated in this manner, as these loads cannot be related BLl CCi = 0.16) and BLz(a = 0.35) corresponding to
in a straightforward manner to fluctuations in the an open and an urban environment. The data are
approach jIow. As a result, most current codes and accessible with a user-friendly Java-based applet
standards provide little guidance for the across-wind through the worldwide Internet community at
and torsional response ISO (1997) and Sataka et al. httpc//aerodata. ceo nd. edu/interface/in terface. IItm I.
(2003).
Through the use of this interactive portal, users can
To provide some guidance at the preliminary design select the geometry and dimensions of a model building
stages of buildings, an interactive aerodynamic loads from the available choices and specify an urban or
database for assessing dynamic wind-induced loads on suburban condition. Upon doing so, the aerodynamic
a suite of generic isolated buildings is introduced. load spectra for the along-wind, across-wind, or
Although the analysis based on this experimental torsional directions is displayed with a Java interface
database is not intended to replace wind tunnel testing permitting users to specify a reduced frequency
in the final design stages, it provides users a (building frequency x building dimension/ wind
methodology to approximate the previously untreated velocity) of interest and automatically obtain the

spectral value. When coupled with the Low-Rise Buildings, as defined in 207 A.2, are permitted to
Web documentation. examples. and concise
..,nr ....t t rnr be considered rigid .
procedure, the database provides a
Mn,'WP'fIp.I'Isive
tool for computation of wind-induced 207A.9.2.1Limitations for Approximate Natural
of tall buildings, suitable as a design guide in Frequency
stages.
As an alternative to performing an analysis to determine
An example tail building is used to nt, the approximate building natural frequency, n1, shall
the analysis using the database. The be permitted to be calculated in accordance with Section
is a square steel fall building with size H x W 1 207A.9.3 for structural steel, concrete, or masonry
= 200 x 40 x 40 m and an average radius of buildings meeting the following requirements:
1. The building height is less than or equal to 91 m, and

three fundamental mode frequencies, f 1. are 0.2.
and 0.35 Hz in X; Y. and Z directions s respectively; 2. The building height is less than 4 times its effective
.. mode shapes are all linear. or {J is equal to J.O, and length, Leff .
... is no modal coupling. The building density is equal
kg/ m', This building is located in Exposure A or The effective length, Leff, in the direction under
to the BLz test condition of the Internet-based consideration shall be determined from the following
(Zhou et 01. 2002). In this location equation:
""'''/H'II,-c'A),the reference 3-sec design gust speed at a
recurrence interval is 63 m/s [ASCE 7-98],
is equal to 18.9 m/s upon conversion to 1-11mean
(207A.9-1)
speed with 50-yr MRI (207 x 0.30 = 62 m/s). For
requirements, /-11 mean wind speed with
lvfRl is equal to 14 m/s (207 x 0.30 x 0.74 = 46). The summations are over the height of the building
the sake of illustration only, the first mode critical
damping ratio. {1. is to be 0.01 for both where
iwrrrnrrrvs and serviceability design. hi is the height above grade of level i
L, is the building length at level i parallel to the
these aerodynamic data and the procedures wind direction
on the Web and in ISO (1997), the wind load
are evaluated and the results are presented in 207A.9.3 Approximate Natural Frequency
C207 A. 9-4. This table includes base moments and
response in the along-wind direction The approximate lower-bound natural frequency (na), in
by the procedure in ASCE 7-02. Also the Hertz, of concrete or structural steel buildings meeting the
experiences much higher across-wind load conditions of Section 207A.9.2.1, is permitted to be
when compared to the along-wind response for determined from one of the following equations:
which reiterates the significance of wind
and their effects in the across-wind direction. For structural steel moment-resisting-frame buildings:
A.9.1 Gust Effect Factor na = 22. 2/ho.B (207A.9-2)
gust-effect factor for a rigid building or other structure For concrete moment-resisting frame buildings:
permitted to be taken as 0.85.
A.9.2 Frequency Determination (207A.9-3)
determine whether a building or structure is rigid or

For structural steel and concrete buildings with other
as defined in Section 207 A.2, the fundamental
lateral-foree-resisting systems:
frequency, n1, shall be established using the
properties and deformational characteristics of
resisting elements in a properly substantiated analysis. na = 75/h (207A.9-4)

For concrete Of masonry shear wall buildings, it is also

1
permitted to use: Q== (207 A.9-8)
1 + O. 63 (B + h)O.63
Lz
(207A.9-5)
~here Band h are defined in Section 207 A.3 and Lz is the wI

where integral length scale of turbulence at the equivalent heizht as
given by: I:>
in
= 100 f (!!_)2 Ai
elY A
8
L
i=l
h.
I
[
1+ 0.83 (~:)
2] L- ==
Z
e (Z33 )E (207A.9-9)
In SI:
where
h mean roof height (rn)

n number of shear walls in the building
In which f and € are constants listed in Table 207 A. 9-1.
effective in resisting lateral forces in the
direction under consideration
207A.9.S Flexible or Dynamically Sensitive Buildings
base area of the structure (rrr')
or Other Structures
horizontal cross-section area of shear wall
-r (rrr') For flexible or dynamically sensitive buildings or other
length of shear wall "i" (m)
structures as defined in Section 207 A.2, the gust-effect
height of shear wall "I" (rn)
factor shall be calculated by:
\\
207A.9.4 Rigid Buildings or Other Structures
V
For rigid buildings or other structures as defined in Section
2
207 A.2, the gust-effect factor shall be taken as 0.85 or (207 A. 9-10)
calculated by the formula:
II
2
n
(207A.9-6)
gQ and gv shall be taken as 3.4 and gn is given by: p
gn == .JZln(3600nl) 2
(207A.9-7)
0.577 (207 A. 9-11 )
+ -:.Jr=Z=ln=(=36=0=0=nl=)
,
c
In SI:
R, the resonant response factor, is given by:
t, = c Cz O
) 1/6
(207A.9-12)
where I z is the intensity of turbulence at height z
where z is the equivalent height of the structure defined as
R == 7.47Ni
O.6ft, but not less than Zmill for all building heights h. Zmill (207A.9-13)
II (1 + 10. 3Ni)5/3
and c are listed for each exposure in Table 207 A. 9-1; gQ
and gv shall be taken as 3.4. The background response Q
is given by: (207A.9-14)

. 1 1 207A.I0 Enclosure Classification

R
.. e
= -11 - -2112 (1 - 21j)
e- for 11 > 0 (207A.9-1Sa)
Commentary:
." .;
Rf == 1 for 11 =0 (207A.9-1Sb) Accordingly, the code requires that ~ determination be

made of (he amount of openings in the envelope to assess
the subscript f in Equation 207A.9-1S shall be taken enclosure classijication (enclosed, partially enclosed, or
. , B, and L, respectively, where h; B, and L are defined open). "Openings" are specifically defined in this version
.. Section 207A.3. of the code as "apertures or holes in the building envelope
;: fundamental natural frequency which allow air to flow through the building envelope and
which are designed as "open" during design winds."
Rh setting TJ = 4. 6nl hlV z
Examples include doors, operable windows, air intake
R B setting TJ = 4. 6nl B IV z
exhausts for air conditioning and or ventilation systems,
RL setting TJ = lS.4nlLIVz
gaps around doors, deliberate gaps in cladding, and
damping ratio, percent of critical (i.e. for 2%
flexible and operable louvers. Once the enclosure
lise 0.02 in the equation)
mean hourly wind speed (m/s) at height z classification is known, the designer enters Table 207 A. J J-
J to select the appropriate internal pressure coefficient.
determined from Equation 207A.9-16:
_V = _(b 33Z)ii (88)

z 60 V
(207 A.9-) 6)
This version of the code has four terms applicable to
enclosure: wind-borne debris regions, glazing, impact-
resistant glazing, and impact protective system. "Wind-
borne debris regions" are specified to alert'tlle designer to
areas requiring consideration of missile impact design and
potential openings in the building envelope. "Glazing" is
defined as "any glass or transparent or translucent plastic
sheet used in windows, doors, skylights, 01' curtain. walls, "
"Impact resistant glazing" is specifically defined as
b and a are constants listed in Table 207 A. 9-1 and
"glazing that has been shown by testing to withstand the
is the basic wind speed in km/h.
impact of test missiles. " "Impact protective systems" over
glazing can be shutters 01'. screens designed to withstand
A.9.6 Rational Analysis
wind-borne debris impact: •.InliulJt'~esistanceofglaziflg
lieu of the procedure defined in Sections 207 A.9.3 and
!.i~i.l1itJ!q·test method
and pr()tective,sJ:;s'te_i!I~'C(llll?¢t~~'!I!4:
specijiedUn I§TNp,§ltJ86f?005/:i(2005)/ withiiiissiles,
determination of the gust-effect factor by any
analysis defined in the recognized literature is
impact-speeds, (!11(f jja~s/Jail:: c/ij~i/a (spectfted in ASTM
E1996~?9q9/(?(JPP)i}\Q!Mb app.i.;o..~¢.4."t~s.t"ie/hods are
acceptable. ()i-igin(o/.pliisile.iiripact provisions cO~ltained
in these standards are summarized ill Minor. (1994) and
Twisdale etaL(l996);· ; '
combined gust-effect factors and pressure

Attention is drawn to Section 207A.IO.3, which requires
. nts (GCp),
(GCpi), and (GCpf) are given in
glazing in Category 1, II, IJI, and IV buildings in wind-
and tables, the gust-effect factor shall not be borne debris regions to be protected with em impact
separately. protective system or to be made of impact resistant glazing.
The option of unprotected glazing was eltmtnated for most
buildings ill the 2005 edition of the standard to reduce the
amount of wind and water damage to buildingsrduring
design wind storm events, .: < i >

Table 207A.9-1
Terrain Exposure Constants
Exposure a zf1. a b a b c fCm) € ZminCm)*

B 7.0 365.76 1/7 0.84 1/4.0 0.45 0.30 97.54 1/3.0 9.14
C 9.5 274.32 1/9.5 1.00 116.5 0.65 0.20 152.4 1/5.0 4.57
D 11.5 213.36 1111.5 1.07 119.0 0.80 0.15 198.12 1/8.0 2.13
* zmin = minimum height used to ensure that the equivalent height Z is greater of O. 6h 01" zmilt" For buildings with
h:s: Zmilv Z shall be taken as zmin'
other cases. potential sources of debris may be present,

Prior to the 2002 edition of the standard, glazing in the but extenuating conditions can lower the risk. These
lower 18 m of Category II. III. or IV buildings sited in extenuating conditions include the type of materials and
wind-borne debris regions .vas required to be protected surrounding construction. the level of protection offered
with an impact protective system. or to be made of by surrounding exposure conditions, and the design
impact-resistant glazing. 01' the area of the glazing was wind speed. Therefore. the risk ofimpact /}lay differfrom
assumed to be open. Recognizing that glazing higher those postulated as a result of the conditions specifically
than 18 111 above grade may be broken by wind-borne enumerated in the code and the referenced impact
debris when a debris source is present. a new provision standards. The committee recognizes that there are
was added in 2002. With that new provision. aggregate vastly differing opinions. even within the standards
surfaced roofs on buildings within 450 m of the new committee. regarding the significance of these
building need to be evaluated. For example. roof parameters that are not ful~v considered in developing
aggregate. including gravel or stone used as ballast that standardized debris regions or referenced impact
is not protected by a sufficiently high parapet should be criteria.
considered as a debris source. Accordingly, the glazing
in the new building, from 9 m above the source building Recognizing that the definition of the wind-borne debris
to grade would need to be protected with an impact regions given in NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-98) through
protective system or be made of impact-resistant NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-05) was largely based On
glazing. If loose roof aggregate is proposed for the new engineering judgment rather than a risk and reliability
building, it lao should be considered as a debris source analysis, the definition of the wind-borne debris regions
because aggregate can be blown off the roof and be in ASCE 7-10 for Occupancy Category III and IV
propelled into glazing 011 the leeward side of the buildings and structures has been chosen such that the
building. Although other types of wind-borne debris can coastal areas included in the wind-borne debris regions
impact glazing higher than 18 III above grade, at these defined with the new wind speed maps are
higher elevations. loose roof aggregate has been the approximately consistent with those given in the prior
predominate debris source in previous wind events. The editions for this risk category. Thus. the new wind speed
requirement/or protection 9 m above the debris source contours that define the wind-borne debris regions in
is to account for debris that can be lifted during flight. Section 207 A.I 0.3.1 are not direct conversions of the
The following references provide further information wind speed contours that are defined in NSCP 2010
regarding debris damage to glazing: Beason et 01. (ASCE 7-05) as shown in Table C207A.5-6. As a result
(1984), Minor (1985 and 1994), Kareem (1986). and of this shift. adjustments are needed to the Wind Zone
Behr lind Minor (1994). designations in ASTM E 1996 for the determination of
the appropriate missile size for the impact test because
Although wind-borne debris can occur in just about any the Wind Zones are based on the NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-
condition, the level of risk in comparison to the 05) wind speed maps. Chapter 6.2.2 of ASTM E 1996
postulated debris regions and impact criteria may also should be asfollows:
be lower than that determined for the purpose of
standardization. For example, individual buildings may 6.2.2 Unless otherwise specified. select the wind
be sited away from likely debris sources that would zone based on the basic wind speed asfollows:
generate significant risk of impacts similar in magnitude
to pea gravel (i.e.. as simulated by 2 gram steel balls in 6.2.2.1 Wind Zone 1 - 210 kph :5 basic wind speed <
impact tests) or butt-on 2 x 4 impacts as required in 225 kph.
impact testing criteria. This situation describes a
condition of low vulnerability 011~Y as a result of limited
debris sources within the vicinity of the building. In

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2059
207 A.IO.3 Protection of Glazed Openings
2.2 Wind Zone 2 - 225 kph ::s basic wind speed < 240 Glazed openings in Occupancy Category 1, II, III or IV
at greater Iii an 1.6 km .1i'Ol12 the coastline. The buildings located in tropical cyclone-prone regions shall be
jj'iro,"f1Sl1111e shall be measured from the mean high water protected as specified in this Section.
207A.I0.3.1 Wind-borne Debris Regions

,2.2.3 Wind Zone 3 - basic 'wind speed 2: 240 kph, or
. wind speed 2: 225 kph and within 1.6 km of the Glazed openings shall be protected in accordance with
The coastline shall be measured from the Section 207 A.l 0.3.2 in the following locations:
high water mark.
I. Within 1.6 km of the coastal mean high water line
wever, While the coastal areas included ill the wind- where the basic wind speed is equal to or greater than
debris regions defined in the new wind speed 58 mis, or
for Risk Category II are approximately consistent
those given in NSCP 2010 (ASCE 7-05), significant 2. In areas where the basic wind speed is equal to or
rV(lJICII.(J,r(" in the wind-borne debris regions for this risk greater than 63 m/s,
';,'i,·,·t!o,,,n,'"\, occur in the area around Jacksonville. Florida,
the Florida Panhandle. and inland from the coast of For Occupancy Category III and IV buildings and
Carolina, structures, except health care facilities, the wind-borne
debris region shall be based on Figure 207 A.5-IA. For
introduction of separate risk-based maps for Occupancy Category III health care facilities and
risk categories provides a means for achieving Occupancy Category II buildings and structures, the wind-
more risk-consistent approach for defining wind- borne debris region shall be based on Figure 207A.S-l B.
debris regions. The approach selected l)!{lS to link Occupancy Categories shall be determined in accordance
, geographical definition of the wind-borne debris with Section 103.
to the wind speed contours in the maps that
,",'",""0"'''''''''-' to the particular risk category. The resulting
of the wind-borne debris region for
Category I and II buildings and structures
W1l1l.1-IJQ,''fIe debris regions in Figure 207A.5-IC that
not part of the wind-borne debris regions defined in
. 207 A.5-1 B) was considered appropriate for the
of buildings included in Occupancy Category 1
Il. A review of the types of buildings and structures 207 A.I 0.3.2 Protection Requirements for Glazed
included in Occupancy Category III suggests Openings
life safety issues would be most important, in the
,~'e;rlJr:lI1a'eri. wind-borne debris region. for health care Glazing in buildings requiring protection shall be protected
Ti'1("'"''''O. Consequently, the committee chose to apply with an impact-protective system or shall be impact-
expanded wind-borne debris protection requirement resistant glazing.
. this type of Occupancy Category Ill facilities and not
'to all Occupancy Category III buildings and structures. Impact-protective systems and impact-resistant glazing
shall be subjected to missile test and cyclic pressure
207A.IO.l General differential tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 as
applicable. Testing to demonstrate compliance with ASTM
For the purpose of determining internal pressure E1996 shall be in accordance with ASTM E1886. Impact-
coefficients, all buildings shall be classified as enclosed, resistant glazing and impact protective systems shall
partially enclosed, or open as defined in Section 207 A.2. comply with the passlfail criteria of Section 7 of ASTM
E1996 based on the missile required by Table 3 or Table 4
207 A.I 0.2 Openings of ASTM E1996.
A determination shall be made of the amount of openings

in the building envelope for use in determining the
enclosure classification.
'~---'---.~-
.. ~,~ .. ------------
o CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design loads
.zing and impact-protective systems in buildings and pressure coefficients call reach values of ±O.8 (or possibly
ictures classified as Occupancy Category I in even higher on the negative side).
ordance with Section 103 shall comply with the
hanced protection" requirements of Table 3 of ASTM For partially enclosed buildings containing a hllge
)96. Glazing and impact-protective systems in all other unpartitioned space, the response time of the internal ~
ictures shall comply with the "basic protection"
uirements of Table 3 of ASTM E1996.
pressure is increased, and this increase reduces the ability.
of (he illt(!1'I101pressure 10 respond to rapid changes in I~ Enclo
pressure at all opening. The gustfactor applicable to the
internal pressure is there/ore reduced. Equation 207A.II~
ser Note: 1, which is based 011 Vickery and Bloxham (1992) and
Irwin and Dunn (1994), is provided as a means of adjusting
'te wind zones that are specified in ASTM E 1996 for {he gust factor for this effect 011 structures with huge P:
te ill determining the applicable missile size for the internal spaces, such as stadiums and arenas. .
tpact test, have to be adjusted/or use with the wind
reed maps 0/ this code and the corresponding wind- Because of the nature 0/ tropical cyclone winds and
irne debris regions, see Section C2()7A.IO.3.2. exposure to debris hazards (Minor and Behr1993j, glazing Notes:
located below 18 111 above the ground level of buildings
sited in wind-borne debris regions has a widely Haying l. PI
and comparatively higher vulnerability 10 breakage from at'
1A.I 0.4 Multiple Classifications
missiles, unless the glazing can withstand reasonable 2. V
l building by definition complies with both the "open" missile loads and subsequent wind loading, or the glazing 51
I "partially enclosed" definitions, it shall be classified as is protected by suitable shu tiers. (See Section C207A.l 0 for
'"j. T
"open" building. A building that does not comply with discussion of glazing above 18 111. When glazing- is'
I<
ier the "open" or "partially enclosed" definitions shall breached by missiles, development 0/ higher internal
classified as an "enclosed" building. pressure may result, which COIl overload the claddinsz 0/'
structure if ihe higher pressure was not (/cco/lI1tedj;~' in
;A.II Internal Pressure Coefficient the design. Breaching of glazing can also result ill a
significant amount of water infiltration. which typically
inmentary: results ill considerable damage 10 the buildine and its
contents (Surry et al. 1977, Rei~II/Old1982, and S%,bbs all~l 207J.
Perry 1993).
internal pressure coefficient values ill
ble 207A.II-I were obtained from wind tunnel tests
-uhopoulos et al. 1979} and full-scale data (Yeatts Gild The influence ofcompartmentalization 011 the distribution For
hta 1993). Even though the wind tunnel tests were of increased internal pressure has 110tbeen researched. If' unp:
iducted primarily /01' low-rise buildings, the internal the space behind breached glazing is separatedfrom the coel
-ssure coefficient values are assumed 10 be valid for remainder of the building by a sufficiently strong and redi
'ldings of any height. The values (GCpi) = +0.18 and reasonably airtight compartment, the increased internal
pressure would likely be confined to that compartment.
18 are for enclosed buildings. It is assumed that the
However. if the compartment is breached (e.g., by an open
'lding has no dominant opening 01' openings and that the
corridor door 01' by collapse of the compartment wall), the
all leakage paths that do exist arc essentiallv uniformlv
increased internal pressure will spread beyond the initial
tributed over the building's envelope. The internal
compartment quite rapidly. The next compartment may
issure coefficient valuesfor partially enclosed buildings
contain the higher pressure. or it too could be breached.
'lime that the building has a dominant opening or
thereby allowing the high internal pressure to continue to
rnings. For such a building, the internal pressure is
propagate. Because of the great amount of air leakage that
-tated by the exterior pressure at the opening and is
often occurs at large hangar doors, designers of hangars
-ically increased substantially as a result. Net loads, that
should consider utilizing the internal pressure coefficients
the combination of the internal and exterior pressures,
for partially enclosed buildings in Table 207A.II-1.
, therefore also significantly increased on the building
faces that do not contain the opening. Therefore, higher
207A.l1.1 Internal Pressure Coefficients
Cpi) values of +0.55 and -0.55 are applicable to this
se. These values include (I reduction factor fa account
Internal pressure coefficients, (GCpi), shall be determined
. the lack of perfect correlation between the internal
tssure and the external pressures on the building from Table 207 A.ll-l based on building enclosure
-faces not containing the opening (Irwin 1987 and Best~ classifications determined from Section 207 A.I O.
d Cermak 1996). Taken ill isolation, the internal

Table 207 A.II-1 207B Wind Loads On Buildings-MWFRS

Internal Pressure Coefficient, (GCpi) (Directional Procedure)
":,
i·"
Main Wind Force Resisting Commentary:
System and Components and All Heights
Claddin The Directional Procedure is the former" buildings of all
heights" provision in Method 2 of NSCP 2010 (.4SCE 7-
Walls & Roofs 05) for MWFRS. A simplified method based on this
(GC D Directional Procedure is providedfor buildings up to 49111
in height. The Directional Procedure is considered the
Open Buildings 0.00
traditional approach in that the pressure coefficients
+0.55
Partially Enclosed Buildings reflect the actual loading 011 each surface of the building
-0.55
as a function of wind direction. namely, winds
+0.18
Enclosed Buildings perpendicular or parallel to the ridge line.
-0.18
207B.1 Scope
Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward

207B.l.l Building Types
and away from the internal surfaces, respectively.
Values of (GCpi) shall be used with qz or qh as This chapter applies to the determination ofMWFRS wind
specified. loads on enclosed, partially enclosed, and open buildings
Two cases shall be considered to determine the critical of all heights using the Directional Procedure.
load requirements for the appropriate condition:
1. a positive value of (GCpD applied to all internal
I. Part 1 applies to buildings of all heights where it is
necessary to separate applied wind loads onto the
surfaces
windward, leeward, and side walls of the building to
11. a negative value of (GCpD applied to all properly assess the internal forces in the MWFRS
internal surfaces members.
207 A.ll.l.1 Reduction Factor for Large Volume 2. Part 2 applies to a special class of buildings designated
Buildings, R, as enclosed simple diaphragm buildings, as defined in
Section 207 A,2, with h ~ 48 m.
For a partially enclosed building contaimng a single,
unpartitioned large volume, the internal pressure 207B.1.2 Conditions
coefficient, (GC11 a,
shall be multiplied by the following
reduction factor, Ri: A building whose design wind loads are determined in
accordance with this chapter shall comply with all of the
following conditions:
Ri = 1.0 or
I. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
as defined in Section 207A.2.
1
R, = 0.5
1+~ < 1.0 (207 A.ll-l) 2. The building does not have response characteristics
~~.~ making it subject to across-wind loading, vortex

shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter; or it
does not have a site location for which channeling
effects or buffeting in the wake of upwind obstructions
where warrant special consideration.
Aog total area of openings in the building
envelope (walls and roof), in m2
Vi unpartitioned internal volume, in m3
~·'.··I,"""",.,."", •..•.-.-.-,.-,."-~-,~-""."~""",-,,,,,,,~""""
207B.1.3 Limitations Part 1: Enclosed, Partially Enclosed, and Open

Buildings of All Heights
The provisions of this chapter take into consideration the
load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with 207B.2 General Requirements
along-wind vibrations of flexible buildings. Buildings not
meeting the requirements of Section 207B.I.2, or having The steps to determine the wind loads on the MWFRS for
unusual shapes or response characteristics shall be enclosed, partially enclosed and open buildings of all
designed using recognized literature documenting such heights are provided in Table 207B.2-I.
wind load effects or shall use the wind tunnel procedure
specified in Section 207F.
User Note:
207B.1.4 Shielding
Use Part J of Section 207B to determine wind pressures
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to all the MWFRS of enclosed, partially enclosed 01' an
apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other open building with any general plan shape, building
structures or terrain features. height or roof geometry that matches the figures
provided. These provisions utilize the traditional "all
heights" method (Directional Procedure) by calculating
wind pressures using specific wind pressure equations
applicable to each building surface.
207B.2.1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section

207A
The following wind load parameters shall be determined in

accordance with Section 207 A:
o Basic Wind Speed, V (Section 207 A5)
o Wind directionality factor, K d (Section 207 A.6)
o Exposure category (Section 207 A.7)
Oil Topographic factor, Kzt (Section 207 A.S)
o Gust-effect factor (Section 207 A.9)
o Enclosure classification (Section 207 A.I 0)
o Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpL)

(Section 207 A.lI)
207B.3 Velocity Pressure
207B.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefflclent
Based on the exposure category determined in Section

207A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz or
Kit, as applicable, shall be determined from Table 207B.3-
I. For a site located in a transition zone between exposure
categories that is near to a change in ground surface
roughness, intermediate values of K; or KII, between those
shown in Table 207B.3-1 are permitted provided that they
are determined by a rational analysis method defined in the
recognized literature.

Table 207B.2-1
Steps to Determine MWFRS Wind Commentary:
for Enclosed, Partially Enclosed and Open
Buildi of All The velocity pressure exposure coefficient 1(z can be
obtained using the equation:
Determine risk category of building or other
structure, see Table 103- I
2/U
For 4.57m s (C207B.
Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5- 2.01 ( :c:
) Z::;; Zg 3-1)
lA, B or C
=
Determine wind load parameters: 4
2.01 ( ~K
57)21 For Z < 4.57 m
(C207B.
3-2)
;r. Wind directionality factor, Kd , see
Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
;r. Exposure category, see Section 207A.7 in which values ofa and Zg are given in Table 207A.9-/.
J;- Topographic factor, Kzt, see
These equations are flOW given in Tables 207B.3-1,
Section 207 A.8 and Table 207 A.8-J
207C.3-1, 207D.3-1. and 207E.3-1 to aid the user.
J;- Gust Effect Factor, G, see Section 207 A. 9
J;- Enclosure classification, see
Changes were implemented ill NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-98),
Section 207 A.I 0
including truncation of Kz values for Exposures A and B
>- Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpi), see below heights of 30 III and 9 m, respectively, applicable to
Section 207 A. 11 and Table 207 A.II-J Components and Cladding and the Envelope Procedure.
Determine velocity pressure exposure Exposure A was eliminated in the 2002 edition ofASCE 7.
coefficient, «, or Kfl, see Table 207B.3-1
Determine velocity pressure qz or qh In the NSCP 2010 (4.SCE 7-(5) standard, the tc,
Equation 207B.3-1 expressions were unchanged from NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-
98). However, the possibility of interpolating between the
Determine external pressure coefficient, Cp or standard exposures using a rational method 11108 added ill
CN the NSC'P 2010 (ASCE 7-(5) edition. One rational method
is provided in the following texi. r , ••• •
);;- Figure 207B.4-1 for walls and flat, gable,
hip, monoslope or mansard roofs
>- Figure 207B.4-2 for domed roofs To a reasonable ;ppro.':in;otion, the empirical exponent a.
? Figure 207B.4-3 for arched roofs and ·gradif!nthi!lght z~.
6; '. th'e··pi·ece(liiig·· expressions
>- Figure 207B.4-4 for monos lope roof, (Equations C207B.3-L anti C207B.3-2) for exposure
open building coefficient K~ jilay Hii;;e_iCiied ic)·ihe roughness length Zo
;r. Figure 207B.4-5 for pitched roof, open (where Zo is defined in Section C207 A. 7) by the relations
building
? Figure 207B.4-6 for troughed roof, open =
IX C1Zo -0.133 (C207B.3-3)
building
? Figure 207B.4-7 for along-ridge/valley
and
wind load case for monoslope, pitched or
troughed roof, open building
ze :- c2 Z 0 0.125 (C207B3-4j
Calculate wind pressure, p, on each building
surface
where
>- Equation 207B.4-1 for rigid buildings
? Equation 207B.4-2 for flexible buildings
>- Equation 207B.4-3 for open buildings 'Cz
... 450
111
The preceding relationships are bQs~don l,n~tilling the

ESDU boundary layer model (Harris (m,IDea~'es 128[aild
ESDU 1990 and 199~) empil'ical~YJvith the law power
relationship in Equations C2071J3~j a/iit C207B:3~2, the
ESDU model being applied at latitude 35° with a gradient
2-64 CHAPTER 2 - Mimrnurn Design Loads
wind (?/75 m/s. If Zo has been determined for a particular

upwind fetch Equations C207B.3-1 through C207B.3-4
() forx z- x,
can be used to evaluate I(z. The correspondence between
111 the preceding relationships
Zo and the parameters a and Zg implied by these
relationships does not align exactly with that described in
the commentary to ASCE 7-95 and 7-98. However, the
differences are relatively small and not of practical
consequence. The ESDU boundary layer model has also The constant C3 = 1.0 kill. The length Xl
been used to derive thefollowing simplified method (Irwin 1(33,d < 1(33,u (wind going from smoother terrain
2()06) of evaluating I(z following a transition front one to rougher terrain downwind) or Xl = 100 kmtfor I( 33.d
surface roughness to another. For more precise estimates 1(33,lL (wind going /i'O/JI rougher terrain upwind
tile reader is referred to the original ESDU model (Harris smoother terrain downwind).
and Deaves 1981 and ESDU 1990 and 1993).
The above description is ill terms of a single rouennes
In 1l1l({OI'lIl terrain, the wind travels a sufficient distance change. The method COIl be extended to multiple .
over the terrain for the planetary boundary layer to reach changes. The extension of the method is best described
01/ equilibrium state. The exposure coefficient values in an example. Figure C207B.3-1 shows wind with an
Table 207B.3-1 are intended for this condition. Suppose profile characteristic of Exposure D encountering
that the site is a distance x miles downwind ofa change in expanse of B roughness. followed by a further expanse
terrain. The equilibrium value of the exposure coefficient D roughness and then some more B roughness
at height Z for the terrain roughness downwind of the before it arrives at the building site. This situation
change will be denoted by Kzd' and the equilibrium value representative ofwindfrom the seaflowing over an
for the terrain roughness upwind of the change will be strip of land, then a coastal lva/envoy, and then
denoted by Kzu. The effect ofthc change in terrain suburban roughness before arriving at the building
roughness on the exposure coefficient at the site can be The above methodfor a single roughness change is
represented by adjusting Kzd by an increment ilK. thus used to compute the profile of Kz at station 1 in F
arriving at a corrected value Kz.(i.)r the site. C207B.3-1. Call this profile l(~1). The value qljjJ(/or
transition between stations 1 and 2 is then fl,'"7J·"',·'W,
using the equilibrium value 0.( 1(33,11for the l'nHrr/1Il,"<
(C207B.3-5) immediately upwind 0/ station I, i.e.. as though
roughness upwind ofstation I extended to infinity.
value 01' Lll( is then added to the equilibrium value I(~Z)
In this expression jjK is calculated using: the exposure coefficientfor the roughness between s
1 and 2 to obtain the profile ofK; a/ station 2, which
will call K~2). Note however, that the value of I(~Z) in
(1) ..
(C207B.3-6) way cannot he any lower than 1(7; . The process IS then.
repeated/or the transition between stations 2 and 3. Thus.•
jjl( for the transition from station 2 10 station 3
calculated using the value of K33,tl for the f.'rJ7III""·17I.1T1
profile 0.1' the roughness immediately upwind of station 2, ••
and the value of K 33,dlor the equilibrium profile of the
where K33,d and 1(33,u are respectively the downwind and roughness downwind ofstation 2. This value or
Lll( is then
upwind equilibrium values of exposure coefficient at 10111 ad(kd to 1(;2) to obtai~1 the profile K~3) at st;rtion 3, with
height, and thefunction F l.1l((X) is given by: the limitation that the value of 1(~3) cannot be any higher
(2)
than I(z .
Fllf((X) = [Og10(:1)/ log 10(::) (C207B.3-7)
Forx., < x < Xl

1 for X < Xo

CD CD Building
0.621 XI0-(o.62-1.00)2-2.3
d A./ Site = 0.00241 mi

~~.!f----,2,,--~+i---'~~~ At'"
From Equation C207B.3-1
(6.21)/ (6.21)
F LI/(X) = IOglO 0.36 IOglO 0.00241 = 0.36
. Figure C207B.3-1
. Multiple Roughness Changes Due to Thereforefrom Equation C207B.3-6
Coastal Waterway
0.82
Suppose the bu ildi ng
J._,_1!1~~QJl;;gm1f,j~'J1£j'l!2g;. ilK = (1.00 - 0.67) O.67 O.36 = 0.15
and its local surroundings are suburban with
length Zo = 0.3 lII. However. the site is 0.6 kill
Note that because lilKI is 0.15. which is less than the 0.38
of the edge of the suburbs. beyond which the
value of 1/(33.1£- K33,dl. 0.15 is retained. Finally, from
is characteristic of open cOIIIWY with Zo =
;.Frolll Equations C201B.3-1, C207B.3-3. and Equation C207B.3-5. the value of f(z is:
:.4.}Or the open terrain
Kz = /(zd + ill( = 0.82 + 0.15 = 0.97
6.62 9.5
xO.066-0.133
Because the value O.97.for Kz lies between the values 0.88
1,273 276m and 1.16, which would be derived/rom Table 207B.3-1 for
xO.0660125 Exposures Band C respectively, it is an acceptable
interpolation. If it falls below the Exposure B value, then
applying Equation C207B.3-/ at 20 m and 1(} the Exposure B value of K z is to be used. The value K z '"
0.97 may be compared with the value 1.16 that would be
required by the simple 792 If! fetch length requirement of
Ll o and
Section 207..1.7.3. i
I
The most common case of a Single roughness change where I
33 2/9.5
1.0
an interpolated value of K z is needed is for the transition
from Exposure C to Exposure B, as in the example just
i~
/(33.1' = 2.01 (906)
described. For this particular transition. using the typical
values q{zo of O.02 /}/ and 0.3111.the preceding formulae
I
i
for the suburban terrain
I
.'~}I,
can be simplified to:
6. 62x1. 0-0.133 6.62
388/11 tc, = K.:d (1 + O.1461og10 (6.:1)) (C207B.3-9;

II
6 19
_ (66 );/./ .
Kztl - 2.01 1,273 0.77 and where X is in miles. and Kzd is computed using a == 6.62.
I( zB and Kzc are the exposure coefficients in the standard
0.67
Exposures C and B. Figure C207B.3-2 illustrates the
transition from terrain roughness C to terrain roughness B
II
from this expression. Note that it is acceptable to lise the
typical Zo rather than the lower limit for Exposure B in
!
Equation C207B.3-8 deriving this formula because the rate of transition of the
wind profiles is dependent on average roughness over
Xo significant distances. not local roughness anomalies, The
potential effects of focal roughness anomalies. such as
National Structural Code of the Phthppines Volume l, 7th Edition. 2015

parking lots and playing fields, are covered by using the where the exposure coefficient is required at the
standard Exposure B value of exposure coefficient, K zB, as height. The exposure coefficient at station 3 at 15 1/1
a lower limit to the calculated value of K z- is calculated as shown in Table C207B.3-/.
Examnle 2: Multiple Roughness Change Suppose we have The value of the exposure coefficient at 15 III at station
a coastal waterway situation as illustrated in Figure seen from the table to be 1.067. This is above that
C207B.3-1, where the wind comes from open sea with Exposure B. which would be 0.81, but 'well below that
roughness type D, for which lve assume Zo 0.003 m, = Exposure D, which would be 1.27, and similar to that
and passes over a strip of land 1.61 kill wide. which is Exposure C. which would be 1.09.
covered in buildings that produce typical B type roughness.
i.e. Zo= 0.3 m. It then passes over a 3.22-klll wide strip
of coastal wate/'lv~v where the roughness is again
characterized hy the open water value Zo = 0.003 m. It
cali
then travels over 0.16 km of roughness type B (Zo = 0.3111
1'014
before arriving at the site. station 3 in Figure C207B.3-1.
hel.
Fa
300 ~
- TRANSITION FROM
. < "
;;
~
EXP. C, x = 0 km
207'
..- z, = 0.02 mTO -".I:? I

-- Vel-
calc
-, Zo = O.30m '7
/' ./
x = 0.08 km
V' .;:2~
E
~ ~ ~~
v: ~I x
- = 0.32 km
q
w
W
Cl
«
30
-
ea
-,- i-
j- --=
=t~-
/l"/ ./
n::: j'
_1 x 0.80 krn
(.!)
w //, / I
> . ,*fi;(.:
0
aJ
« A 0, 'IIi
I x = 1.60 km
l-
x
(.!)
ill
x
3 .
d~
~l I
--,- EXP.S
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Figure C207B.3-2
Transition from Terrain Roughness C to Terrain Roughness B, Equation C207B.3./-9 T
SI
o
a

Table C207B.3-1
Tabulated Exposure Coefficients
iTransitionjrom sea to station 1 KlO,l[ KI0,d K15,d ..1K15 K(1)

z
1.215 0.667 O. 758 O. 137 0.895
i'Transitionjrom sea to station 2 K(2)
fj.:.:-..
K10,u
0.667
KlO.d
1.215
K15,d
1.215 li~tf%rj9.~ 1.111
z
,Transition from sea to station 3 ](3)

K10,u K1O,d J( 15,d FAlf.· /4[(;15, z
1.215 0.667 0.667 O.498i> . iiPd'{O." 1.067
.' ,!fNote: The equilibrium values of the exposure coefficients, KlO•uo K10•d and K15,d (dO\vl1l1"{f14~~1!ll#;'8J;Kiat15 m), were
KcalclIlated from Equation: C207B-l using a and Zg values obtained from Equation! qg!jj2,3.2?/~~i;9.~{)7B-4 with the
'.:)ii'oughness values given. Then F s« is calculated using Equations C207B-7 and C207B~8, andll1~ir"lij~[~'fi{i;%ioffK at 15 m
. iheight, ..1K15, is calculatedjrom Equation C207B-6. Finally, the exposure coefficient at 15 tn at;Tcimhf'i,ky~,/isobtained
. 1/;'0171
Equation C207 B-5. . ..U /
. " /\,.:,,::
~~t~:~~i2;:]tl!~:~ii~{1::/~'
-:~:i)/'::~.::';'. :~~
207B.3.2 Velocity Pressure Commentary:
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be The basic wind speed is convertlJii/iX&Y&loci~vj;/e~~sure
calculated by the following equation: qz in (NIIllJ) at height Z by the ii~~6.tE:qijatiqFi?07B.3-
1.·. ..'.", %{ii!.j~t::Pf < j i' .••..
.:-,:\~::~':.:~'
;~f..~:~~::.;;:···~'
i~:~-~~-:~~.~~~_;'[):~~:~~~:ig~
..)·~):·~.::·
The constant 0.613 reflects thei;(cX~.s;(/~fl,Hjf!.fY'ilrfor
where the standard atmosphere, thai.is; ..tef11j)~I·alur·~.bj;15°C
and sea level pressure oI10r.325)(gcl'afld4ilneil.~ions
wind directionality factor, see associated with wind speed in'iiii!si.il1'ei[/f[flshiiii is
Section 207 A.6 obtained asfollows: .... -';-:>:._ :~:::,i::;;::(-:'-:: ~:::-:-·(.)~{t:·:':'::··:·
"~:':~'~'":.~'" '_' .
:"_
Kz velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see
Section 207B.3.1
topographic factor defined, see
constant 112[(1.225
[(mls)p [9.81 NlkgJ
kgI11!3;;;9:~j
i '.
)f;/~vi x
Section 207 A.8.2

0.613
V basic wind speed, see Section 207A.5
qz velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207B.3-l at height z
qzt velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207B.3-1 at mean roof height h.
The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except where

sufficient climatic data are available to justify the selection
of a different value of this coefficient for a design
application.

207B.4 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting Table 207B.3-1

System Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, Kit and Kz
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Part 1
207B.4.1 Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Rigid
Exposure
Buildings
B C D
Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of buildings of all
057 0.85 1.03
heights shall be determined by the following equation:
0.62 0.90 1.08
7.5 0.66 0.94 1.12
(207B.4-I) 9.0 0.70 0.98 1.16
12.0 0.76 1.04 1.22
where 0.81 1.09 1.27
15.0
q qz for windward walls evaluated at 18.0 0.85 1.13 1.31
height Z above the ground 21.0 0.89 1.17 1.34
q qll for leeward walls, side walls, and 24.0 0.93 1.21 1.38
roofs, evaluated at height h 27.0 0.96 1.24 1.40
qi qh for windward walls, side walls, 30.0 0.99 1.26 1.43
leeward walls, and roofs of enclosed 36.0 1.04 1.31 1.48
buildings and for negative internal 42.0 1.09 1.36 1.52
pressure evaluation in partially enclosed 48.0 1.13 1.39 1.55
buildings 54.0 1.17 1.43 1.58
qi qz for positive internal pressure 60.0 1.20 1.46 1.61
evaluation in partially enclosed buildings 75.0 1.28 1.53 1.68
where height Z is defined as the level of 90.0 1.35 1.59 1.73
the highest opening in the building that 1.41 1.64 1.78
105.0
could affect the positive internal
120.0 1.47 1.69 1.82
pressure. For buildings sited in wind-
135.0 1.52 1.73 1.86
borne debris regions, glazing that is not
150.0 1.56 1.77 1.89
impact resistant or protected with an
impact resistant covering shall be treated Notes:
as an opening in accordance with Section
207A.IO.3. I. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz, may be
determined from the following formula:
For positive internal pressure evaluation,
q{ may conservatively be evaluated at For 4.5 m ~ Z ~ Zg For Z < 4.5 m
height h(q{ = qll)
G
Cp
gust-effect factor, see Section 207A.9
external pressure coefficient from K; = 2.01 z/Zg( r: «, = 2.01 ( 4.5/zg )2/a
Figures 207B.4-1, 207B.4-2 and 207B.4-
3 2. a and Zg are tabulated in Table 207 A.9.1.
internal pressure coefficient from
3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height
Table 207A.II-1
Z is acceptable.
q and qi shall be evaluated using exposure defined in
4. Exposure categories are defined Section 207 A. 7.
Section 207 A.7.3. Pressure shall be applied simultaneously
on windward and leeward walls and on roof surfaces as
Commentary:
defined in Figures 207B.4-1, 207B.4-2 and 207B.4-3.
Loads on Main Wind-Force Resisting Systems: In

The numerical constant of 0.613 should be used except
Equations 207B.4-J and 207B.4-2, a velocity pressure
\~here sufficient weather data are available to justify a
term qi appears that is defined as the "velocity pressure
dlffe.ren~ value of this constant for a specific design
for internal pressure determination." The positive
application. The mass density of air will vary as a function
internal pressure is dictated by the positive exterior
of altitude, latitude, temperature, weather, and season.
pressure on the windward face at the point where there
Average and extreme values of air density are given in
is an opening. The positive exterior pressure at the
Table C207B.3-2.
opening is governed by the value ofq at the level of the

not q/t. For positive internal pressure and judgment from wind tunnel studies have been used
qi may conservatively be evaluated at height to specify either zero or slightly negative pressures
For low buildings this does not make milch (-0.18) depending all the negative pressure coefficient.
but for the example of a 90-m tall building in These values require the designer to consider a zero or
'B with a highest opening at 18 m, the slightly positive net wind pressure in the load
between q90 and q18 represents a 59 percent combinations of Section 203.
in internal pressure. This difference is
and represents an unnecessary degree of Table C207B.3-2
Accordingly, qi = qIL for positive Ambient Air Density Values for Various Altitudes
, 'pressure evaluation in partially enclosed
where height z is defined as the level of the
Altitude Ambient Air Temperature
in the building that could affect the
internal pressure. For buildings sited in wind-
, regions, with glazing that is not impact Minimum Average Maximum
Meters
or protected with an impact protective system, (kg/lIll) (kg/lIll) (kg/ml)
be treated on the assumption there will be an
0 1.1392 1.2240 1.3152
305 1.1088 1.1872 1.2720
The pressure coefficients for 610 1.0800 1.1520 1.2288
are separated into two categories: 914 1.0512 1.1184 1.1888
1000 1.0432 1.1088 1.1776
Procedure for buildings of all heights 1219 1.0240 1.0848 1.1488
207B.4-1) as specified in Section 207Bfor 1524 0.9984 1.0544 1.1120
meeting the requirements specified 1829 0.9728 1.0224 1.0752
2000 0.9584 1.0064 1.0560
2134 0.9472 0.9920 1.0400
~"lIf'/()T'PProcedure for low-rise buildings having 2438 0.9232 0.9632 1.0048
less than or equal to 18 III (Figure 207C.4- 2743 0.8976 0.9344 0.9712
specified in Section 207C for buildings 3000 0.8784 0.9104 0.9456
the requirements specified therein. 3048 0.8752 0.9072 0.9408
,
these coefficients, two distinctly different

were used. For the pressure coefficients
207B.4-1, the more tradltionalapproach
and the pressure coefficients reflect the
on each, surface of the bUilding as a
wind direction; namely, winds perpendicular
to the ridge line. Observations in wind tunnel
that areas ofvery low negative pressure and
positive pressure can occur in all roof
particularly as the distance from the
edge increases and the wind streams reattach
These' pressures ':can occur even for
, flat or low slope roof structures. Experience

Figure C207BA-1
Application of Minimum Wind Load
Figure 207B.4-2. Frame loads on dome roofs are adapted Figure 207B.4-3. The press lire and force coefficient values
from the Eurocode (1995). The loads are based on data in these tables are unchangedfrom ANSI A 58. 1-/972. The
obtained in a modeled atmospheric boundary-layer flow coefficients specified in these tables are based 011 wind-
that does not fully comply with requirements for wind- tunnel tests conducted under conditions of uniform flow
tunnel testing specified in this code (Blessman 1971). and low turbulence. and their validity ill turbulent
Loads for three domes (hDID = O.5,fID = O.5),(hDI boundary-layerflows has yet to be completely established
=
D O,{ID = 0.5). and (hDID = OJID = 0.33) are Additional pressure coefficients for conditions not
roughly consistent with data of Taylor (1991). who used an specified herein may be found in SIA (1956) and ASCE
atmospheric boundary layer as required in this code. Two (1961).
load cases are defined. one ofwhich has a linear variation
of press lire from A to B as in the Eurocode (1995) and one 207B.4.2 Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Flexible
in which the pressure at A is held constant from 0° to 25°; Buildings
these two cases are based on comparison of the Eurocode
provisions with Taylor (1991). Case A (the Eurocode Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of flexible
calculation) is necessary ill many cases to define maximum buildings shall be determined from the following equation:
uplift. Case B is necessary to properly define positive
pressures for some cases. which cannot he isolated with
current information. and which result in maximum base (207B.4-2)
shear. For domes larger than 60 m in diameter the
designer should consider use of wind-tunnel testing. where q, qj, Cp, and (GCpi) are as defined in Section
Resonant response is not considered ill these provisions. 207B.4.1 and Gf (gust-effect factor) is determined in
Wind-tunnel testing should be used to consider resonant accordance with Section 207 A.9.5.
response. Local bending moments in the dome shell may be
larger than predicted by this method due to the difference
between instantaneous local pressure distributions and
those predicted by Figure 207B.4-2. if the dome is
supported on vertical walls directly below, it is appropriate
to consider the walls as a "chimney+using Figure 207D.5-
I.

Open Buildings with Monoslope, Pitched, or under the roof and restrict the windjlow.,Restricii~gdH~'j
Troughed Free Roofs jlow call introduce substantial upward acting presSli'riH/
on the bottom surface of the roof, thus increasing the .
net design pressure for the MWFRS of open buildings resultant uplift load 011 the roof Figures 207B.I/-4<.
monoslope, pitched, or troughed roofs shall be through 207BA-6 and 207E.8-1 through 207E.8-3 o..i!el:.
-.+,,,-n"lt'rtpn by the following equation: the designer two options. Option 1 (clear wind jlOHY
implies little (less than 50 percent) or 110 portion of the
cross-section below the roof is blocked. Option 2
(207B.4-3)
(obstructed wind flow) implies that a significant poriio~
(more than 75 percent is typically referenced in the
literature) of the cross-section is blocked by goodsoC
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof materials below the roof Clearly, values would c:hange.
height h using the exposure as defined in from one set of coefficients to the otherfollowing .some
Section 207 A.7.3 that results in the highest sort of smooth. but as yet unknown. relationship. in
wind loads for any wind direction at the developing the provisions included in this code, the
site 50 percent blockage value was selected for Option 1.
G gust-effect factor from Section 207A.9 with the expectation that it represents a somewhat
eN net pressure coefficient determined from conservative transition. If the designer is not clear about
Figures 207B.4-4 through 207B.4- 7 usage of the space below the roof Of' if the usage could
change to restrict free air flow, then design loads for
pressure coefficients, eN, include contributions from both options should be used.
and bottom surfaces. All load cases shown for each roof
shall be investigated. Plus and minus signs signify
acting toward and away from the top surface of 207B.4.4 Roof Overhangs
roof, respectively.
The positive external pressure on the bottom surface of
For free roofs with an angle of plane of roof from windward roof overhangs shall be determined using
.horizontal () less than or equal to 5° and containing fascia Cp = 0.8 and combined with the top surface pressures
panels, the fascia panel shall be considered an inverted determined using Figure 207B.4-1.
parapet. The contribution of loads on the fascia to the
MWFRS loads shall be determined using Section 207B.4.5 207B.4.5 Parapets
qp equal to qh.
The design wind pressure for the effect of parapets on
MWFRS of rigid or flexible buildings with flat, gable, or
hip roofs shall be determined by the following equation:
through 207BA-6 and 207E.8-1
207E.8-3 are presented for wind loads on
207B.4-4
and components and cladding of open
with roofs as shown, respectively. This work is
. the Australian Standard ASl170.2-2000. Part where
Actions, with modifications to the MWFRS Pp combined net pressure on the parapet due
coefficients based on recent studies (Altman to the combination of the net pressures
"",·,rmm and Stathopoulos 2003)_ from the front and back parapet surfaces.
Plus (and minus) signs signify net
cases, A and B, are given in Figures 207B.4-4 pressure acting toward (and away from)
207B.4~6. These pressure disf"ibutiol/s provide the front (exterior) side of the parapet
envelop the results from detailed wind-tunnel velocity pressure evaluated at the top of
of simultaneous normal forces and the parapet
. Application of both load cases is required to combined net pressure coefficient
the combinations of maximum normal forces + 1.5 for windward parapet
1Il()'1I1""".' that are appropriate for the particular -1.0 for leeward parapet
and blockage configuration. . .. : .
loading on open building-roofs is highly

uenenaent upon whether goods or materials are stored

207B.4.6 Design Wind Load Cases more under full (not reduced) base shear. The designer
may wish to apply this level of eccentricity at full wind
The MWFRS of buildings of all heights, whose wind loads loading for certain more critical buildings even though it:
have been determined under the provisions of this chapter, is not required by the code. The present more moderate:
shall be designed for the wind load cases as defined in torsional load requirements can in part be justified by the
Figure 207BA-S. fact that the design wind forces tend to be upper-bound for
most common building shapes.
Exception:
In buildings with some structural systems, more severe
Buildings meeting the requirements (if Section DJ.l of loading can occur when the resultant wind load acts
Appendix D. ASCE 7-JO need only be designedfor Case 1 diagonally to the building. To account for this effect and
and Case 3 of Figure 207 B.4-8. the fact that many buildings exhibit maximum response in
the across-wind direction (the standard currently has 110
The eccentricity e for rigid structures shall be measured analytical procedure for this case). a structure should be
from the geometric center of the building face and shall be capable of resisting 75 percent of the design wind load
considered for each principal axis (ex, ey). The applied simultaneously along each principal axis as
eccentricity e for flexible structures shall be determined required by Case 3 in Figure 207B.4-8.
from the following equation and shall be considered for
each principal axis (ex, ey): For flexible buildings, dynamic effects can increase
torsional loading. Additional torsional loading can OCClIl'
because of eccentricity between the elastic shear center
and the center of mass at each level of the structure.
eQ + 1.71lzjCgQQeQ)2 + (yRReR)2 Equation 207B.4-5 accountsfor this effect.
e = ------;=========-
1. 71IzjCgQQeQ)2 + (uRReR)2 It is important to note that Significant torsion can occur on
low-rise buildings also (Isyumov and Case 2000) and,
207BA-5
therefore, the wind loading requirements of Section
where 207B.4.6 are now applicable to buildings of all heights.
eQ eccentricity e as determined for rigid As discussed in Section 207F, the wind tunnel procedure
structures in Figure 207BA-S should always be considered for buildings with unusual
eR distance between the elastic shear center shapes, rectangular buildings with larger aspect ratios,
and center of mass of each floor and dynamically sensitive buildings. The effects of tors ion
[z, gQ' Q, gR, and R shall be as defined in Section can more accurately be determined for these cases and/or
207A.9 the more normal building shapes using the wind tunnel
procedure.
The sign of the eccentricity e shall be plus or minus,
whichever causes the more severe load effect. 207B.4.7 Minimum Design Wind Loads
COf11l/1entGlY: The wind load to be used in the design of the MWFRS for
an enclosed or partially enclosed building shall not be less
Wind tunnel research (!sYUlnOV 1983, Boggs et al. 2000, than 0.77 kN/m2 multiplied by the wall area of tile building
!:;YllIJ10Vand Case 2000, and Xie and Irwin 2000) has and 0.38 kN/m2 multiplied by the roof area of the building
shown that torsional load is caused by lion-uniform projected onto a vertical plane normal to the assumed wind
pressure on the different faces of the building from wind direction. Wall and roof loads shall be applied
flow around the building. interference effects of nearby simultaneously. The design wind force for open buildings
buildings and terrain, and by dynamic effects on more shall be not less than 0.77 kN/m2 multiplied by the area At.
flexible buildings. Load Cases 2 and 4 in Figure 207B.4-8
specifies the torsional loading to 15 percent eccentricity Commentary:
under 75 percent of the maximum wind shear for Load
Case 2. Although this is more in line with wind tunnel
This section specifies a minimum wind load to be applied
experience on square and rectangular buildings with
horizontally on the entire vertical projection of the building
aspect ratios up to about 2.5, it may not cover all cases,
as shown in Figure C207BA-l. This load case is to be
even for symmetric and common building shapes where
applied as a separate load case in addition to the normal
larger torsions have been observed. For example, wind
load cases specified in other portions of this chapter.
tunnel studies often show an eccentricity of 5 percent 01'

ELEVATION
GABLE, HIP ROOF
fZGCp
'kGC,
'-'oo+r"i"'l"'l"'M"'i"'l'"'I"'I"'I"I-"J
PLAN ELEVATION ELEVATION
MONOSLOPE ROOF (NOTE 4)
t----- /;~--.....-j t---------h~-----~

PLAN ELEVATION
MANSARD ROOF (NOTE 8)

Figure 207B.4-1
External Pressure Coefficients, Cp, Walls and Roofs Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

Windward Wall All values 0.8
Leeward Wall
Side Wall All values -0.7
Wind
Direction
Normal
to ::;0.25 0.0* 0.4 0.019
Ridge -0.9 -0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.2 0.0*
-0.5 -0.5 -0.6
e
for 2:: 0.5 -0.18 -0.18 0.0* 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.018
10° -1.3** -1.0 -0.7 -0.5 -0.3 -0.2 0.0*
-0.7 -0.6 -0.6
2:: I 0 -0.18 -0.18 -0.18 0.0* 0.2 0.2 0.3 O.OIB
Normal Horizontal distance from
to windward "Value is provided for interpolation purposes
Ridge
::;0.5
forB < **Yalue can be reduced linearly with area over which
10° and it is applicable as follows
Parallel
to ridge
for all e o to hl2 -1.3**, -0.18
2:: 1.0
> h/2 -0.7, -0.18
Notes:
I. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
2. Linear interpolation is permitted for values of LIB, hlL and B other than shown. Interpolation shall only be carried out
between values of the same sign. Where no value of the same sign is given, assume 0.0 for interpolation purposes.
3. Where two values of Cp are listed, this indicates that the windward roof slope is subjected to either positive or negative
pressures and the roof structure shall be designed for both conditions. Interpolation for intermediate ratios of hi L in this
case shall only be carried out between Cp values of like sign.
4. For monos lope roofs, entire roof surface is either a windward or leeward surface.
5. For flexible buildings use appropriate Gf as determined by Section 207B.9.4.
6. Refer to Figure 207B.4-2 for domes and Figure 207B.4-3 for arched roofs.
7. Notation:
B horizontal dimension of building, m, measured normal to wind direction.
L horizontal dimension of building, m, measured parallel to wind direction.
h. mean roof height in meters, except that eave height shall be used for () ::; 100
z height above ground, m
G gust effect factor.
qz' ql! velocity pressure, (N/m2), evaluated at respective height.
8 Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
8. For mansard roofs, the top horizontal surface and leeward inclined surface shall be treated as leeward surfaces from the
table.
9. Except for MWFRS at the roof consisting of moment resisting frames, the total horizontal shear shall not be less than that
determined by neglecting wind forces on roof surfaces.
10. For roof slopes greater than 80°, use Cp "" 0.8

AI- __ -_-_-_-
-J.oIIl
C
1~~(~)
~I.--~o~--~~I B
-10.11
-10,6
-lOA
8" -10.2
I
0.0
.02
.0.4
~
.1).6
I
E
.0.&
-1.0
·1.2
~
.1.4
.1.6
.1.6
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
Ratio of Rise to DIameter, flO
External Pressure Coefficients for Domes with a Circular Base

(Adaptedfrom Eurocode, 1995)
Notes:
I. Two load cases shall be considered:
Case A: CII values between A and B and between Band C shall be determined by linear interpolation along arcs on the dome parallel to the wind
direction;
Case B: Cp shall be the constant value of A for 8 :::; 25°, and shall be determined by linear interpolation from 25° to B and from B to C.
2. Values denote Cp to be used with q(IID+f) where ItO + f is the height at the lop of the dome.
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Cp is constant on the dome surface for arcs of circles perpendicular to the wind direction; for example, the arc passing through B-B-B and all arcs parallel
to B-B-B.
5. For values of hl) / D between those listed on the graph curves, linear interpolation shall be permitted.
6. 8 = 0° all dome spring line,e :::::90° at dome center top point. f is measured from spring line to top.
7. The total horizontal shear shall not be less than that determined by neglecting wind forces on roof surfaces.
8. For f /0 values less than 0.05, use Figure 207B.4-1.
Figure 207B.4-2
External Pressure Coefficients, Cp, Domed Roofs Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l. 7th Edition, 2015

Conditions Rise-to-span
ratio, r Windward
Roof on elevated
structure
ng from
0< r:::; 0.6 1.4r
*lVhen the rise-to-span ratio is O.2 ~ r ~ 0.3. alternate coefficients given by 6r - 2.1 shall also be used for
the windward quarter.
Notes:
I. Values listed arc for the determination of average loads on main wind force resisting systems.
3. For wind directed parallel to the axis of the arch, use pressure coefficients from Figure 207B.4-1 with wind directed parallel to ridge.
4. For components and cladding: (I) At roof perimeter, use the external pressure coefficients in Figure 207E.4-2A, Band C with () based on spring-line
slope and (2) for remaining roof areas, use external pressure coefficients of this table multiplied by 0.87.
Figure 207BA-3
External Pressure Coefficients, c;
Arched Roofs, 0.25 s hi L s 1.0
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings

L L
O.SL O.SL O.SL O.SL
t4 .. .. III
Wind
Wind
, Direction..-- _ Direction
¢:
=>
y=O°
h v= 180 0
Load
Case Flow Flow
and CNt denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind Ilow with blockage less than or equal to 50%. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof
. wind flow (> 50% blockage).
of 8 between 7.50 and 45°, linear interpolation is permitted. For values of (J less than 7.5", use load coefficients for 0".
and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
'load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, m

It mean roofhcight, m
y direction of wind, 0
(J angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 2078.4-4
Net Pressure Coefficient, eN Monoslope Free Roofs e :s; 45°, Y = 0°, 180°
0.25 s hi L s 1.0 Open Buildings

Wind
Direction
=>
'Y == 00
h
Roof Wind Direction, y =

0°, 180°
Angle Load Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
e Case CNW CNL CNW CNL
A l.l -0.3 -1.6 -1
7.5°
B 0.2 -1.2 -0.9 -1.7
A 1.1 -0.4 -1.2 -1
15°
B 0.1 - 1.1 -0.6 -1.6
A 1.1 0.1 -1.2 -1.2
22.5°
B -0.1 -0.8 -0.8 -1.7
A 1.3 0.3 -0.7 -0.7
30°
B -0.1 -0.9 -0.2 -1.1
A 1.3 0.6 -0.6 -0.6
37.5°
B -0.2 -0.6 -0.3 -0.9
A 1.1 0.9 -0.5 -0.5
45°
B -0.3 -0.5 -0.3 -0.7
Notes:
l. CNIY and CNL denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and leeward half of'roof surfaces, respectively.
2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%. Obstructed wind flow denotes objects below roof
inhibiting wind flow (> 50% blockage).
3. For values of 0 between 7.5" and 45", linear interpolation is permitted. For values of 0 less than 7.5", lise monoslopc roof load coefficients.
4. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
S. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
6. Notation:
L horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, m
It mean roof height, 111
Figure 207B.4-5
Net Pressure Coefficient, eN Pitched Free Roofs e ~ 45°, Y = 00, 1800
0.25 s hi L ~ 1.0 Open Buildings
_. --~-.~
... --..
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design loads
Wind
Direction
=>
'Y = 00 h
Roof Wind Direction, y == 0°, 1800

Angle Load Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
8 Case CNW CNL CNW CNL
A -l.l 0.3 -1.6 -0.5

7.50
B -0.2 1.2 -0.9 -0.8
A -1.1 0.4 -1.2 -0.5
15°
B 0.1 1.1 -0.6 -0.8
A -1.1 -0.1 -1.2 -0.6
22.50
B -0.1 0.8 -0.8 -0.8
A -1.3 -0.3 -1.4 -0.4
30°
B -0.1 0.9 -0.2 -0.5
A -1.3 -0.6 -1.4 -0.3
37.5°
B 0.2 0.6 -0.3 -0.4
A -1.1 -0.9 -1.2 -0.3
45°
B 0.3 0.5 -0.3 -0.4
Notes:
1. CNIV and CNt denote net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces) for windward and leeward half of roof surfaces, respectively.
3. For values of (J between 7.5" and 45", linear interpolation is permitted. For values of (J less than 7.5", use monoslope roof load coefficients.
5. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
6. Notation:
L horizontal dimension of roof, measured in the along wind direction, III
h mean roof height, m
(} angle of plane ofraof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207B.4-6
Net Pressure Coefficient, eN Troughed Free Roofs e ~ 450, Y == 00, 1800
0.25 s hi L s 1.0 Open Buildings
....... ,,"";if..........
Distance
from
Windward
Edge
11 Wind Direction
'Y "'" 90°
11 Wind Direction
'Y = 90°
Horizontal
Distance Clear Wind Obstructed
from Roof Angle Flow Wind Flow
Load Case
Windward e
Edge CNW CNL
All Shapes A -0.8 1.2
5,h
(J ~ 45° B 0.8 0.5
All Shapes A -0.6 -0.9
> h, s 2h e < 45° B 0.5 0.5
All Shapes A -0.3 -0.6
> 2h < 45° 0.3
(J B 0.3
Notes:
I. eN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).

2. Clear wind flow denotes relatively unobstructed wind flow with blockage less than or equal to 50%. Obstructed wind Ilow denotes objects below roof
4. All load cases shown for each roof angle shall be investigated.
5. For monos lope roofs with theta less than 5 degrees, eN values shown apply also for cases where gamma = 0 degrees and 0.05 less than or equal to hf l.
less than or equal to 0.25. See Figure 207B.4-4 for other hI L values.
6. Notation:
L horizontal dimension of 1'0 of, measured in the along wind direction, 111
It mean roof height, m. See Figures 207B.4-4, 207B.4-5 or 207B.4-6 for a graphical depiction of this dimension.
y direction of wind, c
(] angle of plane of roof from horizontal, o
Figure 207B.4-7
Net Pressure Coefficient, eN Free Roofs e 5, 45°, y = 90 ,270
0 0
0.25 ~ hi L '5, 1.0 Open Buildings

CASE 1 CASE 3
By
9. 75PLY
e..563 PLY
MT= 0.75 (PWX+Pu}Bxex MT = 0.75 (Pwr+PLY)Byey MT = 0.563 (Pwx+Pr...JBxex + 0.563 (Pwr+P[.'()Byey
ex=:J:0.15Bx ey= ± 0./5 Dr ex = :J: 0.15 Ex ey = ± 0.15 Dr
CASE 2 CASE 4
Full design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the structure, considered
separately along each principal axis.
Case 2: Three quarters of the design wind pressure acting on the projected area perpendicular to each principal axis of the
structure in conjunction with a torsional moment as shown, considered separately for each principal axis.
Wind loading as defined in Case 1, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified value.
Wind loading as defined in Case 2, but considered to act simultaneously at 75% of the specified value.
Design wind pressures for windward and leeward faces shall be determined in accordance with the provisions o1'207BA.1 and 207B.4.2 as applicable
for building of all heights.
Diagrams show plan views of building.
Notation:
PIVX,PWY Windward face design pressure acting in the x, y principal axis, respectively.
PLX,PLY Leeward face design pressure acting in the x, y principal axis, respectively.
e{ex,ey) Eccentricity for the x, y principal axis of tile structure, respectively.
Mr Torsional moment per unit height acting about a vertical axis of the building.
Figure 207BA-8
Design Wind Load Cases All Heights

Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings with 207B.5 General Requirements

h=48m
207B.S.l Design Procedure
This section has been added to ASCE 7-10 to covel' the
common practical cases of enclosed simple diaphragm The procedure specified herein applies to the determination
buildings lip to height It = 48 m. Two classes of buildings of MWFRS wind loads of enclosed simpJe diaphragm
are covered by this method. Class 1 buildings have h ~ buildings, as defined in Section 207 A.2, with a mean roof
18m with plan aspect ratios LjB between 0.2 and 5.0. height h $; 48 m. The steps required for the determination
Cases A through Fare described in Appendix D. ASCE 7- of MWFRS wind loads on enclosed simple diaphragm
10 to allow the designer to establish the lines of resistance buildings are shown in Table 207B.5-1.
of the MWFRS in each direction so that the torsional load
cases of Figure 207B.4-8 need not be considered. Class 2
buildings have 18m < h $; 48 m with plan aspect ratios User Note:
(~f L] B between 0.5 and 2.0. Cases A through E of
Appendix D. ASCE 7-10 are described to allow the Part 2 of Section 207B is a simplified method for
designer to establish the lines of resistance of the iWWFRS determining the wind pressures for the MWFRS of
so that the torsional load cases of Figure 207B.4-8 need enclosed. simple diaphragm buildings whose height
110tbe considered. h is :S 4 111. The wind pressures are obtained directly
from a table. The building may be of any general plan
For the type of buildings covered in this method. the shape and roof geometry that matches the specified
internal building pressure cancels out and need not be figures. This method is a simplification of the traditional
consideredfor the design of the /vflYFRS. Design net wind "all heights" method (Directional Procedure)
pressures for roofs and walls are tabulated directly in contained ill Part 1 of Section 207B.
Tables 207B.6-1 and 207B.6-2 using the Directional
Procedure as described in Part 1. Guidelines for
determining the exterior pressures Oil windward. leeward,
and side walls are provided in footnotes to Table 207B.6-
1.
The requirements in Class 2 buildings for natural building

frequency (75jh) and structural damping (fJ =
l.SOA>crHical) are necessary to ensure that the Gust Effect
Factor. Gr. which has been calculated and built into the
design procedure. is consistent with the tabulated
pressures. The frequency of75jlz represents a reasonable
lower bound to values found in practice. If calculated
frequencies are found to be lower. then consideration
should be given to stiffening the building. A structural
damping value of 1.5 %. applicable at the ultimate wind
speeds as defined in the new wind speed maps, is
conservative for most common building types and is
consistent with a damping value of 1% for the ultimate
wind speeds divided by 1.6 as contained in the NSCP 2010
(ASCE 7-05) wind speed map. Because Class 1buildings
are limited to h: $; 18m, the building can be assumed to
be rigid as defined in the glossary, and the Gust Effect
Factor can be assumed 10 be 0.85. For this class of
buildings frequency and damping need not be considered

Table 207B.5-1 4. The topographic effect factor Kzt = 1.0 or the wind
Steps to Determine MWFRS Wind pressures determined from this section shall be
Loads Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings multiplied by Kzt at each height z as determined from
( h :$48 m) Section 207A8. It shall be permitted to use one value
of /(zt for the building calculated at 0.33ft.
Determine risk category of building or other Alternatively it shall be permitted to enter the pressure
structure, see Table 103-1 table with a wind velocity equal to V.jK;; where Kzt
Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the is determined at a height of O. 33h.
applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
lAo B or C Class 2 Buildings:
Determine wind load parameters:
I. The building shall be an enclosed simple diaphragm
? Wind directionality factor, Kd, see building as defined in Section 207 A.2.
Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-J
y Exposure category B, C or .D, see 2. The building shall have a mean roof height 18 m
Section 207 A. 7 (18 m < h s 48 m).
y Topographic factor, /(zt, see 3. The ratio of LIB shall not be less than 0.5 nor more
Section 207A.8 and Figure 207A8-J than 2.0 (0.5 s LIB s 2.0).
);- Enclosure classification, see
Section 207 Al 0 4. The fundamental natural frequency (Hertz) of the
building shall not be less 751h where h is in meters.
Enter table to determine net pressures on
walls at top and base of building respectively,
Ph, Po, Table 207B.6-1
5. The topographic effect factor !(zt = 1.0 or the wind
pressures determined from this section shall be
Enter table to determine net roof pressures, multiplied by Kzt at each height z as determined from
pz, Table 2078.6-2 Section 207 A.8. It shall be permitted to use one value
of Kzt for the building calculated at 0.33h.
Determine topographic factor, Kzt, and apply Alternatively it shall be permitted to enter the pressure
factor to wall and roof pressures (if
table with a wind velocity equal to V.jK;; where /(zt
applicable), see Section 207A.8
is determined at a height of O. 33h.
Apply loads to walls and roofs
simultaneously. 207B.5.3 Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section
207A
Refer to Section 207A for determination of Basic Wind

Conditions
Speed V (Section 207A5) and exposure category
(Section 207 A 7) and topographic factor K zt (Section
ition to the requirements in Section 2078.1.2, a
207A.8).
whose design wind loads are determined in
'V"'U"'." with this section shall meet all of the following
itions for either a Class I or Class 2 building (see Z07B.5.4 Diaphragm Flexibility
207B.5-1):
The design procedure specified herein applies to buildings
having either rigid or flexible diaphragms. The structural
1 Buildings:
analysis shall consider the relative stiffness of diaphragms
and the vertical elements of the MWFRS.
The building shall be an enclosed simple diaphragm
building as defined in Section 207 A.2.
Diaphragms constructed of wood panels can be idealized
as flexible. Diaphragms constructed of untopped metal
The building shall have a mean roof height h:$ 18 m.
decks, concrete filled metal decks, and concrete slabs, each
having a span-to-depth ratio of 2 or less, are permitted to
The ratio of LIB shall not be less than 0.2 nor more
be idealized as rigid for consideration of wind loading.
than 5.0 (0.2 s LIB s 5.0).

2-84 CHAPTER 2 - Mlnimum Design Loads
207B.6 Wind Loads-Main Wind Force-Resisting wall surface is required, internal pressure must
System included as defined in Part 1 of Section 2078.
207B.6.1 Wall and Roof Surfaces-Class 1 and 2 The distribution of wall pressures between windward amZ "
Buildings leeward wall surfaces is useful for the design offloor an4
roof diaphragm elements like drag strut collector beamsli
Net wind pressures for the walls and roof surfaces shall be as well as (or MWFRS wall elements. The values defined iii;'
determined from Tables 207B.6-1 and 207B.6-2, Note 4 qf Table 2078.6-1 are obtained as follows: ThqI
respectively, for the applicable exposure category as external pressure coefficient for all windward walls i:{
determined by Section 207 A. 7. c, = O.8jor all L/B values. The leeward wall Cp value i,~:,
(-0.5) for L/ B valuesfront 0.5 to 1.0 and is (-0.3) for L/ Ii,
For Class 1 building with L/ B values less than 0.5, use = 2. O. Noting that the leeward wall press lire is constant fhl;
wind pressures tabulated for L/ B = 0.5. For Class 1 the ful! height of the building, the leeward wall p,.es.l'ur~
building with L/ B values greater than 2.0, use wind call be calculated as a percentage of the Pit value in th&:
pressures tabulated for L/B =
Z. O. table. The percentage is 0.5/(0.8 + 0.5) x 100 = 38%fol;' ,
L/ B = 0.5 to 1.0. The percentage is 0.3/(0.8+0.3) x 100 ~ ,
Net wall pressures shall be applied to the projected area of 27% for L/ B = 2.0. Interpolation between these twq-
the building walls in the direction of the wind, and exterior percentages can be used for L/ B ratios between 1.0 antI;;
side wall pressures shall be applied to the projected area of 2.0. The windward wall pressure is then calculated as tfi«,;'
the building walls normal to the direction of the wind difference between the total net pressure from the tabltfJ '
acting outward according to Note 3 of Table 207B.6-1, using the Ph and Po values and the constant leeward lvaili
simultaneously with the roof pressures from Table 207B.6- pressure.
2 as shown in Figure 2078.6-1. .(
Sidewall pressures can he calculated in a similar mall/let.

Where two load cases are shown in the table of roof to the windward and leeward wall pressures by taking a,
pressures, the effects of each load case shall be investigated percentage of the net wall pressures. The Cp value fo~
separately. The MWFRS in each direction shall be sidewalls is (-0.7). Thus, for L/B = 0.5 to I.(), the
designed for the wind load cases as defined in Figure percentage is O.7/(0.8 -l- 0.5) x 100 = 54%. For L/ B = 2.0'
207B.4-8. the percentage is 0.7/(0.8 -l- 0.3) x I ()O = 64~·'O.Note that;
the sidewall pressures are constant up the/IIII height C!lth~
Exception: building. ,
The torsional load cas~ in Figure 2078.4-8 (Case 2 and The pressures tabulated jar this method are .
Case 4) need not be considered for buildings which meet simplifying conservative assumptions made to the different]
the requirements ofAppendix D. ASCE 7-10. pressure coefficient (GCp) cases tabulated in Figur~
207B.4-1. which is the basis for the traditional all height,vi
Commentary: building procedure (defined as the Directional Procedure;
in this code) that has been a part of the standard sinc~
Wall and roofnet pressures are shown in Tables 207B.6-1 /972. The external pressure coefficients Cpjar roofs have,
and 207B.6-2 and are calculated using the external been multiplied by 0.85, a reasonable gust elleClfactorfo~',
pressure coefficients in Figure 207B.4-1. Along wind net
wall pressures are applied to the projected area of the
most common roof framing, and then combined with a~l
internal pressure coefficientfor enclosed buildings (plus Oft
building walls in the direction of the wind, and exterior minus 0.18) to obtain a net pressure coefficient to serve a,~'
sidewall pressures are applied to the projected area of the the basisforpressure calculation. The linear wall pressure
building walls normal to the direction of the wind acting diagram has been conceived so that the applied pressures
outward, simultaneously with the roof pressures from from the table produce the sallie overturning moment as lh&,
Table 207B.6-2. Distribution of the net wall pressures more exact pressures from Part 1 of Section 207B. Far
between windward and leeward wall surfaces is defined in determination of the wall pressures tabulated. the aClucllj-:
Note 4 of Table 207B.6-1. The magnitude of exterior gust effect factor has been calculated from Equatio!i;"
sidewall pressure is determined from Note 2 of Table 207 A. 9-10 based on building height, wind speed, exposures
207B.6-1. It is fa be noted that aLI tabulated pressures are frequency. and the assumed damping value.
defined without consideration of internal pressures
because internal pressures cancel out when considering
the net effect on the l\.{WFRS of; simple diaphragm
buildings. Where the net wind pressure on any individual

Commentary:
effect of horizontal wind loads applied to all vertical The effect of vertical wind loading on a windward roof
of roof parapets for the design of the MWFRS overhang is specified in Section 207B.4.4 of Part 1. A
be based on the application of an additional net positive pressure coefficient of +0.8 is specified. This
~~"mnml wind pressure applied to the projected area of compares to a net pressure coefficient tabulated for the
parapet surface equal to 2.25 times the wall pressures windward edge zone 3 of -1.06 (derived from
lated in Table 207B.6-1 for L/B = 1. O. The net 0.85 x - 1.3 x 0.8 - 0.18). The 0.85 factor represents the
re specified accounts for both the windward and gust factor G, the (J.8 multiplier accounts for the effective
parapet loading on both the windward and leeward wind area reduction to the 1.3 value of Cp specified in
ing surface. The parapet pressure shall be applied Figure 207B.4-1 of Part 1, and the -0.18 is the internal
y with the specified wall and roof pressures pressure contribution. The ratio of coefficients is 0.8/1.06
in the table as shown in Figure 207B.6-2. The height = 0.755. Thus, a multiplier of 0.75 on the tabulated
used to enter Table 207B.6-1 to determine the parapet pressure for zone 3 in Table 207B.6-2 is specified.
ure shall be the height to the top of the parapet as
in Figure 207B.6-2 (use It = hp).
effect of parapet loading on the MWFRS is specified in

207B.4.5 of Part 1. The net pressure coefficientfor
windward parapet is + 1.5 and for the leeward parapet
.0. The combined effect of both produces a net
of +2.5 applied to the windward surface to
for the cumulative effect on the MWFRS in a
diaphragm building. This pressure coefficient
to a net pressure coefficient of 1. 3Gf for the
horizontal wall pressure Ph at the top of the
Assuming a lower-bound gust factor
0.85, the ratio of the parapet pressure to the wall
is 2.5/(0.85 x1.3) = 2.25. Thus, a value of 2.25 is
as a reasonable constant to apPZ)Ito the tabulated
pressure Ph to account for the additional parapet
Oll the lvfWFRS.
Roof Overhangs
effect of vertical wind loads on any roof overhangs

be based on the application of a positive wind
on the underside of the windward overhang equal
75% of the roof edge pressure from Table 207B.6-2 for
I or Zone 3 as applicable. This pressure shall be
ied to the windward roof overhang only and shall be
ied simultaneously with other tabulated wall and roof
as shown in Figure 207B.6-3.
.!
0.2L::; B::; 5L
14
0' f
L
__i.
PLAN
CLASS 1 BUILDING
It= 18m
ELEVATION
WAI
0.5L::; B::; 2L
IQ ~l SEE
D~ PLAN
CLASS 2 BUILDING
It = 18to48 m
ELEVATION
Note: Roo/ form may be flat, gable. mansard or hip
Figure 207B.5-J
Building Geometry Requirements Building Class, h ::;48 m
Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Buildings

seE FIGURE 207B.6·2 FOR

PARAPET WIND PRESSURES ROOF PRESSURES
SEE TABLE 207B.6·2
MEAN ROOF HEIGHT h
H
WALL PRESSURES
WIND f
B
SEE TABLE 207B.6·1
h
PLAN
ELEVATION
Figure 207B.6- J
Application of Wind Pressures Wind Pressures - Walls and Roof, h ~ 48 m
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l, 7th Edition, 2015

,----
I
Pp ------;1-------------- ADDITIONAL LOAD ON MWFRS FROM
ALL PARAPETS AND PARAPET
I
I
I SURFAC ES
I
I
,
I
-
I
I
I MEAN ROOF HEIGHT It
I '"
I ~ I
I
I
.. I
I
I
I
L
---- I
..
Ph WALL
PRESSURE FROM
TABLE 207 B.6-1 ..
....
AT HEIGHT h 1'"
.
.. Pp = 2.25 TIMES THE PRES SURE
DETERMINED FROM TABLE 2 07B.6-1
....
--p
FOR A HEIGHT MEASURED T OTHE

TOP OF THE PAPARET, hp
'"
Figure 207B.6-2
Application of Parapet Wind Loads Parapet Wind Loads, h ::;48 111

ROOF EDGE PRESSURE FROM TABLE

ZONES 1 OR 3 AS APPLICABLE
Pi ORp3
WIND DIRECTION
Ie Povh = O. 75pl OR O. 75P3 AS APPLICABLE, APPLIED AS

POVII
AN ADDITIONAL UPWARD LOADING (POSITIVE PRESSURE)
TO ROOF NEGATIVE EDGE PRESSURES SHOWN
Figure 207B.6-3
Application of Roof Overhang Roof Overhang Wind Loads, h:5 48 m
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l, 7tl1 Edition, 2015

h
Po
PLAN WIND PRESSURE ELEVATION
Notes to Wall Pressure Table 2078.6-1;

I. From table for each Exposure (8, C or D), V, LIB and h, determine Ph (top number) and Po (bottom number) horizontal along-wind net wall pressures.
2. Side wall external pressures shall be uniform over the wall surface acting outward and shall be taken as 54% of the tabulated Ph pressure for 0.2 :5
LIB :5 1.0 and 64% of the tabulated PI, pressure for 2.0 :5 LIB :5 5. O. Linear interpolation shall apply for 1.0 < LIB < 2.0. Side wall external
pressures do not include effect of internal pressure.
3. Apply along-wind net wall pressures as shown above to the projected area of the building walls in the direction of the wind and apply external side wall
pressures to the projected area of the building walls normal to the direction wind, simultaneously with the roof pressures from Table 207B.6·2.
4. Distribution of tabulated net wall pressures between windward and leeward wall faces shall be based on the linear distribution of total net pressure with
building height as shown above and the leeward external wall pressures assumed uniformly distributed over the leeward wall surface acting outward at
38% of Ph for 0.2 :5 LIB :5 1.0 and 27% of PI, for 2.0 :5 LIB :5 5. O. Linear interpolation shall be used for 1.0 < LIB < 2.0. The remaining net
pressure shall be applied to the windward walls as an external wall pressure acting towards the wall surface. Windward and leeward wall pressures so
determined do not include effect of internal pressure.
5. Interpolation between values orv, h and LIB is permitted.
Notation:
L building plan dimension parallel to wind direction, m

B building plan dimension perpendicular to wind direction, m
II mean roof height, 111
PI .. Pa along-wind net wall pressure at top and base or building respectively, Pa
Figure 207B.6-1
Application of Wall Pressures Wind Pressures - Walls, h :S 48 III

Table 207B.6-1
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Walls (kN/m1)
Exposure B
V (kph) 150 200 250 300 350

h (m),
0.5 1 2 0.5 I 2 0.5 1 2 0.5 1 2 0.5 1 2
LIB
1.24 1.22 1.09 2.39 2.36 2.15 4.03 3.96 3.63 6.25 6.11 5.61 9.14 8.90 8.17
48
0.83 0.82 0.67 1.61 1.59 1.33 2.72 2.67 2.24 4.22 4.12 3.47 6.17 6.00 5.09
1.20 1.19 1.06 2.31 2.29 2.08 3.88 3.82 3.50 6.00 5.88 5.40 8.76 8.57 7.86
45
0.82 0.81 0.66 1.58 1.56 1.30 2.65 2.61 2.19 4.09 4.01 3.39 5.96 5.81 4.96
1.16 1.15 1.03 2.23 2.21 2.00 3.73 3.68 3.37 5.75 5.64 5.19 8.38 8.17 7.51
42
0.79 0.80 0.65 1.54 1.53 1.27 2.57 2.54 2.14 3.97 3.89 3.30 5.83 5.64 4.79
1.13 1.12 1.00 2.14 2.13 1.93 3.57 3.53 3.23 5.49 5.40 4.97 7.97 7.82 7.22
39
0.78 0.79 0.64 1.50 1.49 1.25 2.50 2.47 2.09 3.84 3.78 3.21 5.58 5.47 4.66
1.08 1.09 0.96 2.06 2.05 1.85 3.42 3.38 3.09 5.23 5.15 4.74 7.56 7.43 6.86
36
0.77 0.77 0.64 1.46 1.45 1.22 2.42 2.40 2.03 3.71 3.66 3.12 5.39 5.27 4.54
1.04 1.05 0.93 1.98 1.97 1.77 3.26 3.23 2.94 4.97 4.90 4.51 7.20 7.05 6.55
33
0.76 0.76 0.63 1.43 1.42 1.19 2.35 2.33 1.98 3.58 3.54 3.03 5.18 5.10 4.37
1.01 1.00 0.89 1.90 1.88 1.69 3.10 3.08 2.80 4.70 4.65 4.27 6.79 6.64 6.15
30
0.73 0.74 0.61 1.39 1.38 1.16 2.27 2.26 1.92 3.45 3.41 2.93 5.0] 4.86 4.23
0.97 0.96 0.86 1.85 1.80 1.60 2.94 2.92 2.65 4.43 4.39 4.02 6.51 6.28 5.72
27
0.73 0.72 0.60 1.35 1.34 1.13 2.20 2.19 1.86 3.32 3.28 2.83 4.75 4.62 4.08
0.93 0.92 0.81 1.71 1.71 1.52 2.77 2.76 2.49 4.16 4.13 3.77 5.93 5.88 5.41
24
0.71 0.72 0.60 1.31 1.31 1.10 2.12 2.11 1.80 3.18 3.16 2.72 4.53 4.50 3.88
0.88 0.89 0.77 1.62 1.61 1.43 2.60 2.59 2.33 3.88 3.86 3.50 5.52 5.45 4.97
21
0.69 0.69 0.57 1.27 1.27 1.07 2.04 2.04 1.74 3.05 3.03 2.61 4.35 4.27 3.71
0.83 0.85 0.73 1.52 1.52 1.34 2.43 2.42 2.16 3.60 3.58 3.23 5.07 5.03 4.59
18
0.68 0.68 0.55 1.23 1.23 1.03 1.97 1.96 1.67 2.91 2.90 2.50 4.06 4.08 3.55
0.78 0.78 0.69 1.41 1.41 1.24 2.25 2.25 1.99 3.31 3.30 2.95 4.60 4.56 4.13
15
0.65 0.65 0.56 1.19 I.l9 1.00 1.89 1.89 1.61 2.78 2.77 2.39 3.89 3.85 3.34
0.74 0.74 0.63 1.31 1.31 1.14 2.07 2.07 1.82 3.03 3.03 2.69 4.20 4.20 3.77
12
0.65 0.63 0.52 1.15 1.15 0.97 1.82 1.82 1.55 2.66 2.66 2.29 3.67 3.69 3.22
0.67 0.67 0.57 1.19 1.19 1.03 1.88 1.88 1.64 2.74 2.74 2.40 3.77 3.77 3.31
9
0.62 0.62 0.53 1.10 1.10 0.94 1.74 1.74 1.49 2.53 2.53 2.19 3.46 3.46 3.05
0.59 0.59 0.51 1.07 1.07 0.93 1.68 1.68 1.46 2.43 2.43 2.12 3.33 3.33 2.93
6
0.59 0.59 0051 1.05 1.05 0.91 1.65 1.65 1.43 2.39 2.39 2.08 3.27 3.27 2.87
0.38 0.38 0.33 0.67 0.67 0.58 1.05 1.05 0.91 1.51 1.51 1.33 2.04 2.04 1.85
3
0.38 0.38 0.33 0.67 0.67 0.58 1.05 1.05 0.91 1.51 1.51 1.33 2.04 2.04 1.85

Table 2078.6-1
Exposure C
V (kph) ISO 200 250 300 350

hem),
0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2
LIB
1.58 1.58 1.42 3.10 3.06 2.75 5.21 5.11 4.62 8.04 7.85 7.10 11.72 11.40 7.10
48
1.16 1.16 0.97 2.28 2.25 1.89 3.83 3.76 3.19 5.92 5.77 4.89 8.66 8.36 4.89
1.56 1.55 1.38 3.01 2.97 2.68 5.06 5.04 4.49 7.79 7.61 6.89 11.28 10.53 6.89
45
0.68 1.160.962.242.21 1.873.753.743.135.785.654.81 8.907.844.81
1.56 1.51 1.33 2.92 2.89 2.60 4.90 4.87 4.36 7.53 7.37 6.68 10.84 10.31 6.68
42
1.18 1.13 0.94 2.19 2.17 1.85 3.67 3.65 3.07 5.65 5.53 4.71 8.16 7.77 4.71
1.48 1.48 1.29 2.83 2.81 2.52 4.73 4.66 4.22 7.26 7.12 6.46 10.5 10.28 6.46
39
1.13 1.12 0.94 2.15 2.13 1.81 3.59 3.53 3.01 5.50 5.39 4.62 7.93 7.78 4.62
1.43 1.43 1.27 2.74 2.72 2.44 4.56 4.50 4.07 6.98 6.85 6.23 10.09 9.85 6.23
36
1.10 1.10 0.92 2.10 2.09 1.83 3.50 3.45 2.95 5.35 5.25 4.51 7.70 7.56 4.51
1.39 1.39 1.23 2.65 2.63 2.36 4.39 4.33 3.92 6.69 6.59 5.98 9.63 9.51 5.98
33
),08 1.09 0.90 2.06 2.04 1.97 3.41 3.37 2.89 5.20 5.11 4.41 7.50 7.29 4.41
1.37 1.36 1.20 2.55 2.44 2.27 4.21 4.17 3.76 6.40 6.31 5.73 9.17 8.62 5.73
30
1.08 1.06 0.89 2.01 2.00 1.70 3.31 3.28 2.82 5.04 4.97 4.30 7.26 7.14 4.30
1.32 1.31 1.16 2.45 1.90 2.18 4.02 3.99 3.60 6.09 6.02 5.47 8.72 6.43 5.47
27
1.06 1.06 0.87 1.96 1.95 1.67 3.22 3.19 2.75 4.87 4.82 4.18 6.94 6.88 4.18
1.26 1.27 1.11 2.35 2.34 2.08 3.83 3.81 3.42 5.78 5.72 5.19 8.28 8.11 5.19
24
1.04 1.070.871.92 1.91 1.633.123.102.674.704.664.056.72 6.61 4.05
1.23 1.21 1.06 2.24 2.24 1.98 3.63 3.62 3.24 5.45 5.41 4.89 7.75 7.67 4.89
21
1.02 1.26 0.84 1.90 1.86 1.59 3.02 2.99 2.59 4.53 4.34 3.92 6.58 5.60 3.92
1.16 1.16 1.01 2.13 2.13 1.88 3.43 3.42 3.05 5.12 5.08 4.58 7.26 7.16 4.58
18
0.99 1.00 0.83 2.07 1.81 1.55 2.92 2.75 2.51 4.36 3.05 3.77 7.21 1.94 3.77
1.10 1.07 0.99 2.0] 2.01 1.76 3.22 3.21 2.85 4.77 4.75 4.25 6.70 6.71 4.25
15
0.980.960.81 1.76 1.76 1.502.822.81 2.434.174.163.635.825.863.63
1.05 0.56 0.91 1.89 1.89 1.64 3.01 2.99 2.63 4.41 4.39 3.90 6.09 6.62 3.90
12
0.94 0.94 0.80 1.71 1.71 1.46 2.71 2.71 2.34 3.99 3.98 3.47 5.60 5.56 3A7
0.98 0.97 0.83 1.75 1.75 1.51 2.87 2.76 2.41 4.02 4.02 3.53 4.88 5.55 3.53
9
0.92 0.92 0.78 1.65 1.65 lAI 2.60 2.60 2.25 3.80 3.79 3.30 5.28 5.24 3.30
1.01 0.90 0.78 1.60 1.60 1.38 2.55 2.53 2.40 3.65 3.65 3.18 4.69 4.92 3.18
6
0.87 0.87 0.76 1.58 1.58 1.36 2.49 2.48 2.37 3.60 3.60 3.13 4.91 4.97 3.13
0.56 0.56 0.49 1.01 1.01 0.88 1.59 1.59 1.38 2.30 2.30 2.00 3.14 3.14 2.00
3
0.56 0.56 0.49 1.01 1.01 0.88 1.59 1.59 1.38 2.30 2.30 2.00 3.14 3.14 2.00

Table 207B.6-1
Exposure D
V (kph) 150 200 250 300 350

h (111),
0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2 0.5 2
LIB
1.80 1.80 1.59 3.50 3.45 3.08 5.87 5.75 5.15 9.00 8.79 7.86 12.98 12.66 11.27
48
1.39 1.36 1.16 2.70 2.66 2.25 4.52 4.43 3.76 6.93 6.77 5.74 10.01 9.78 8.24
1.77 1.76 1.56 3.42 3.37 3.01 5.72 5.61 5.02 8.76 8.56 7.67 12.63 12.30 11.04
45
1.37 1.37 1.15 2.66 2.62 2.22 4.44 4.36 3.70 6.80 6.65 5.65 9.83 9.55 8.13
1.74 1.73 1.53 3.33 3.29 2.94 5.56 5.46 4.89 8.51 8.33 7.46 12.26 11.99 10.73
42
1.36 1.36 1.1 3 2.61 2.58 2.19 4.36 4.28 3.65 6.66 6.52 5.56 9.56 9.36 7.97
1.69 1.69 1.49 3.24 3.21 2.86 5.40 5.31 4.76 8.24 8.08 7.25 11.83 11.61 10.39
39
1.34 1.29 1.12 2.57 2.54 2.16 4.27 4.20 3.59 6.52 6.39 5.46 9.4 9.23 7.82
1.64 1.65 1.45 3.15 3.12 2.78 5.23 5.15 4.62 7.97 7.82 7.03 11.46 11.21 10.07
36
1.31 1.17 1.13 2.52 2.49 2.12 4.18 4.12 3.52 6.37 6.25 5.36 9.17 9.07 7.67
1.87 1.61 1.41 3.06 3.03 2.70 5.05 4.99 4.47 7.69 7.55 6.80 10.83 10.77 9.77
33
1.31 1.29 1.16 2.47 2.45 2.08 4.08 4.03 3.46 6.21 6.10 5.26 8.93 8.73 7.44
2.78 1.57 1.38 2.96 2.94 2.62 4.87 4.82 4.32 7.39 7.28 6.55 9.40 10.39 9.38
30
1.29 1.28 1.07 2.41 2.40 2.05 3.98 3.94 3.39 6.04 5.95 5.14 8.63 8.48 7.35
1.53 1.52 1.34 2.86 2.84 2.52 4.68 4.64 4.16 7.08 6.99 6.29 10.15 9.96 8.94
27
1.25 1.26 1.06 2.35 2.35 2.01 3.88 3.84 3.32 5.87 5.79 5.02 8.35 8.26 7.14
1.48 1.47 1.282.752.742.434.494.453.986.766.686.01 9.629.51 8.60
24
1.25 1.24 1.05 2.31 2.30 1.97 3.78 3.75 3.24 5.69 5.62 4.89 8.07 7.94 6.95
1.43 1.43 1.24 2.64 2.63 2.32 4.28 4.26 3.80 6.42 6.36 5.72 9.13 8.97 8.12
21
1.22 1.22 1.03 2.26 2.25 1.93 3.67 3.65 3.15 5.50 5.45 4.75 7.80 7.68 6.79
1.37 1.39 1.20 2.52 2.52 2.22 4.07 4.05 3.60 6.07 6.03 5.40 8.57 8.51 7.68
18
1.20 1.19 1.00 2.21 2.20 1.88 3.56 3.54 3.06 5.31 5.27 4.60 7.52 7.45 6.56
1.31 1.32 1.142.402.402.103.853.833.395.705.675.067.997.987.16
15
1.19 1.17 1.00 2.15 2.14 1.84 3.44 3.43 2.97 5.10 5.08 4.43 7.17 7.13 6.26
1.26 1.24 1.08 2.27 2.27 1.97 3.61 3.61 3.16 5.31 5.30 4.69 7.40 7.38 6.60
12
1.16 1.14 0.98 2.09 2.09 1.79 3.36 3.32 2.87 4.89 4.88 4.26 6.60 6.82 6.00
1.19 1.17 1.02 2.12 2.12 1.83 3.36 3.35 2.92 4.91 4.90 4.30 6.77 6.81 5.98
9
1.13 1.13 0.96 2.02 2.02 1.73 3.20 3.20 2.76 4.68 4.67 4.07 6.47 6.43 5.68
1.10 1.09 0.93 1.97 1.97 1.69 3.09 3.09 2.68 4.49 4.49 3.91 6.20 6.21 5.39
6
1.09 1.09 0.93 1.95 1.95 1.67 3.06 3.06 2.65 4.45 4.44 3.86 6.15 6.11 5.29
0.70 0.70 0.60 1.25 1.25 1.08 1.96 1.96 1.70 2.83 2.83 2.47 3.86 3.86 3.40
3
0.70 0.70 0.60 1.25 1.25 1.08 1.96 1.96 1.70 2.83 2.83 2.47 3.86 3.86 3.40

Roof Pressure - MWFRS

Exposure Adjustment Factor
60
48 0.80&
50
45 0.&04 1.114
42 0.300 1.116
-.5 40
39
36
0.795
0.791
1.118
1.123
..:::
~ 33 0.785 1.125
J:
(.!) 30 0.780 1.128
~ 30 27 0.774
(.!)
z 24 0.767 1.136
C 21 0.759 1.141
....I
~ 20 18 0.750 1.148
15 0.740 1.152
12 0.728 1.160
9 0.712 1.166
10
6 0.691 1.189
3 0.662
0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT FACTOR
Notes to Roof Pressure Table 207B.6-2:
I. From table for Exposure C, V, It and roof slope. determine roof pressurc PI, for each roof zone shown in the figures for the applicable roof form. For
other exposures B or D, multiply pressures from table by appropriate exposure adjustment factor as determined from figure below.
2. Where two load cases are shown, both load cases shall be investigated. Load case 2 is required to investigate maximum overturning on the building from
roof pressures shown.
3. Apply along-wind net wall pressures to the projected area of the building walls in the direction of the wind and apply exterior side wall pressures to the
projected urea of the building walls normal to the direction of the wind acting outward, simultaneously with the roof pressures from Table 207B.6-2.
4. Where a value of zero is shown in the tables for the flat roof case, it is provided for the purpose of interpolation.
5. Interpolation between V, It and roof slope is permitted.
Figure 207B.6-2
Application ofRoofPressnres Wind Pressures - Roofs, h ::;48 m

Flat Roof
I (9< 10 deg)
Hip Roof
Monoslope
Roof
Mansard Roof
Figure 207B.6-2
Application of Roof Pressures Wind Pressures - Roofs, h ::; 48 111

Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/m2)
MWFRS - Roof, V = 150 - 250 kph, h = 3 - 12 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 150 200 250

Load Zone Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope Case I 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4 5 t 2 3 4 5
I NA NA -1.00 -0.89 -0.23 NA NA -1.78 -1.58 -l.30 NA NA -2.77 -2.47 -2m
Flat" 2: 12 (9.46°) 2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.99 -0,48 -1.00 -0.89 -0.73 -1.76 ·1.18 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -2.72 -1.91 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
3:12(14.0°) 0.14 -0.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.25 -0.35 D.DD 0.00 0.00 0.39 -0.55 0.00 0.00 o.on
2
I -0.80 -0.66 -1.00 -0.89 -0.73 -1.43 -1.16 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -2.24 -1.81 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
4:12(18.4°) ? 0,43 -0.09 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.50 -0,49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.77 -0.79 0.00 0.00 OJ)(J
1 -0.64 -0.66 ·1.00 -0.S9 -0.73 -1.15 -1.16 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -1.80 -1.81 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
12 5:12 (12.6°) 2 0.37 -3.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.03 -0.86 0.00 0.00 o.oo
I -052 -0.66 -1.14 -0.S9 -0.73 -0.92 -1.16 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -1.44 -1.81 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
6:12 (26.6°) 2 0,41 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.73 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.14 -0.86 0.00 0.00 (I.UO
1 2.87 -0.(,6 -0.98 -0.S9 -0.73 -0.07 -1.16 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -0.83 -1.81 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
9:12 (36.9°) 2 0.49 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -n.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.86 0.00 0.00 0.0(1
I -0.16 -0.66 -1.00 -0.89 -0.73 -0.30 -1.16 -1.78 -1.58 -1.30 -0.47 -I.S1 -2.77 -2.47 -2.03
12: 12 (45.0°) :; 0.59 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -0.55 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.36 -0.86 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -0.93 -0.83 6.55 NA Nt\ -1.67 -1.49 -1.21 NA NA -2.61 -2.32 -1.9{)
Flat" 2: 12 (9.46°) :: NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 O.DO
1 -0.92 -0.45 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -1.64 -1.11 -1.67 -1.49 -1.22 -2.56 -I.S0 -2.61 -2.32 -1.9()
3:12 (14.0°) 2 0.14 -0.19 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.37 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.75 -0.60 -0.'13 -0.83 -0.68 -1.34 -1.08 -1.67 -1.49 -1.22 -2.ln -1.66 -2.61 -2.32 -1.90
4: 12(18.4°) 2 2.55 2.56 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.47 -0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.73 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.60 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -1.08 -1.08 -1.67 -1,49 ·1.22 -1.(19 -1.70 -2.61 -2.32 -]_Il{I
9 5:12 (22.6°) 2 0.36 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.62 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.97 -O.SI 0.00 D.OO 0.00
I -0,49 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.68 -0.87 -1.08 -1.67 -1.49 -1.22 -1.35 -1.70 -2.61 -2.32 -1.9n
6: 12 (2(>.00) 0.39 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
2
1 -0.29 -0.60 -0,93 -0.83 -O.(,S -0.50 -1.08 -1.67 -1.49 -1.22 -0.78 .1.70 -2.1>1 -2.32 -1.90
9:12 (36.9°) 0 0,45 -0.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.82 -0.52 0.00 0.00 0,00 O.C)O -0.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.17 -0.60 -0.93 -0.83 -0.6~ -0.27 -1.08 -1.67 -1.49 -1.12 -0.44 -1.67 -2,61 -2.32 -1.90
12:12 (45.0°) 2 1.81 -IP9 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.82 -0.52 0.00 O.Of) 0.00 1.28 -0.84 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 NA NA -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 NA NA -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
Flat < 2:12 (9.46°) 2 NA NA 0,00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.(1)
1 -0.85 -0.43 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -1.50 -1.02 -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 -2.35 -l.65 -2.40 -2.14 -l.63
3:12 (14.0°) 2 0.13 -0.17 0.(1) 0.00 0.00 0.22 -0.31 0.00 (l.00 0.00 0.34 -0.48 (l.00 O.OIl 0.00
I -0.6'1 -0.5(, -(l.87 -0.76 -0.63 -1.24 -0,94 -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 -1.93 -l.OO -2.40 -2.14 -l.63
4: 12(18.4°) 0.23 -0.24 0.00 0.00 (J.OO 0.43 -OA4 0.00 0.00 0.01l 0.1>7 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
2
I -0.56 -0.56 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -0.9<) -l.00 -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 -l.55 -1.56 -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
6 5:12 (22.6°) 2 0.33 -0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.57 -0048 (l.OO 0.00 0.00 O.B9 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0,45 -0.56 -0.87 -0.76 -0.63 -(l.BO -l.00 -1.54 -1.37 -LIZ -1.25 -1.56 -2.40 -2.14 -l.63
(" 12 (26.0°) 2 0.35 -0 '6 0.00 0.00 OJ)O 0.63 -0.48 0.00 (1.00 0.00 0.98 -0.75 D.OO 0.00 0.00
I -0.26 -0.5(. -0.S7 -0.76 -0.63 -0.46 -LOn -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 -0.72 -1.56 -2.4U -2.14 -1.(,)
9:12 (36.')°) 0.41 -0.26 0.00 tJ.OO 0.00 0.75 -0.48 O.UO 0.00 0.00 0.83 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
2
I -0.15 -0.56 -0.S7 -().7(. -0.63 -0.04 -1.00 -1.54 -1.37 -1.12 -OAI) -1.13 -2.40 -2.14 -1.63
12: 12 (45.0°) 0,41 -0.26 0.00 O.()() 0.00 0.75 -OAS 0.00 O.(lO 0.00 1.18 -1.18 0.00 0.00 1).00
2
I NA NA -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 NA NA -1.35 -1.21 -0.99 NA NA -2.12 -1.89 2.22
Flnt '" 2: 12 (9.46°) 2 NA NA U.OO 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.73 -0.36 .0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -1.33 -0.91 -1.35 -1.21 -0.99 -2.0S -1.46 -2.12 -1.89 2.21
3: 12 (l~.00)
2 ().II -0.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.19 -D.27 o.oo 0.00 o.oo 0.30 -0.42 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.61 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.5(. -LOt) 0.88 -1.35 -1.21 -0.99 -1.70 -2.(6 -2.12 -1.89 2.22
4: 12 (1804°) 2 0.22 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.38 -0.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.59 -0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0,47 -0047 -0,76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.87 -0.88 -1.35 -1.21 -0.99 -1.37 -1.38 -2.12 -1.89 2.22
3 5:12 (22.6") 2 0.28 -0.25 0,00 0.00 0.00 0.51 -0.42 0.00 D.OO (l.00 0.79 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.38 -0,47 -0.76 -1).07 -0.56 -0.71 -0.88 -1.35 -1.21 -0.<)9 -1.10 -1.38 -2.12 -1.89 2.22
6:12 (26.6") 2 0.32 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.56 -0042 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.87 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.21 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.41 -0.88 -1.35 -1.21 -().'l<) -0.63 -1.38 -2.12 -1.89 7.22
9: 12 (36.90) 2 0.38 -0.25 0.00 (J.OO 0.00 0.66 -OA2 0.00 D.OO 0.00 0.73 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0,00
1 -0.12 -0.47 -0.76 -0.67 -0.56 -0.48 -0.88 -1.35 -1.21 -0.99 -0.36 -1.85 -2.12 -1.89 2.22
12:12 (45.0°) 2 0.38 -0.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -D.42 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.04 -0.18 O.O() 0.00 0.00

,':
CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-97 ii
jI
II
Table 2078.6-2 Ii
II
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/m2) IIh
MWFRS - Roof, V =
300 - 350 kph, h 3 - 12 m = Ii
Exposure C
II
V (I.ph) 300 350 !
h(m) Roof Slope
Load Zone Zone !
Case I 2 3 4 5 I 2 3 4 5
1 NA NA -3.99 ·3.56 .2.92 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
Flat < 2: 12 (9.46°)
I
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 ·3.92 -2.66 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -2.33 ·1.58 -?,38 .?12 -1.74
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.56 -0.79 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -3.22 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.12 -1.14 o.oo 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.58 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.<)2 ·1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12 5: 12 (22.6°)
2 1.48 -1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
6: 12 (26.6°)
2
I -2.07
1.64
-2.60
-1.24
-3.99
0.00
-3.56
0.00
-2.92
0.00
-1.23
0.98
-1.55
-0.74
·2.38
0.00
-2.12
0.00
-1.74
0.00
I
9:12 (36.9°)
2
I -1.20
1.96
-2.60
-1.24
-3.9<)
0.00
-3.56
0.00
-2.92
0.00
-0.72
1.07
-1.55
-0.68
-2.38
0.00
-2.12
0.00
-1.74
0.00
j
I
I -0.68 -2.60 -3.99 -3.56 -2.92 -0.40 .1.55 .2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12:12 (45.0°) !
2 1.96 -1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA ·3.75 -3.34 -2.74 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
Flat < 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.68 -2.50 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -2.30 -1.56 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
3:12 (14.00)
2 0.53 -0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.03 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -1.89 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -UI
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.05 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.43 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -1.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
9 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.40 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.73
0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.95 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
6:12 (26.6°)
2 1.54 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.13 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -0.71 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
9:12 (36.9°)
2 1.84 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0,00 0,00
I -0.64 -2.44 -3.75 -3.34 -2.74 -DAD -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 1.B4 -1.17 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 NA NA -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
Flat -c 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0,00 NA NA 0.00 0,00 0.00
I -3.38 -2.30 ·3.45 -3,08 -2.52 -2.27 -1.54 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
3:12 (14.0')
2 0.49 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0,00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.78 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 .2.52 -1.86 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 0.96 -0.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.23 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -1.49 .1.50 .2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.28 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 ·0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.79 -2.25 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -1.20 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6:12 (26.6')
2 1.42 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 ().OO 0.00
I -1.04 -2.25 -3,45 ·3.08 -2.52 -0.70 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
9: 12 (36.9°)
2 1.69 -1.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.58 -2.20 -3.45 -3.08 -2.52 -0.39 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12:12 (45.0')
2 1.69 -1.07 0.00 (l.OO 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
Flat < 2:12 (9.46')
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0,00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.99 -2.03 -3.05 ·2.72 ·2.23 -2.23 -1.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.43 -0.61 0.00 0.00 o.oo 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.46 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -1.83 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
4: 12(18.4°)
2 0.85 -0.87 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 .0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -1.98 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -1.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.13 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.59 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -1.18 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.25 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.92 -1.98 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -0.68 -1,48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
9: 12 (36.9°)
2 1.49 -0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 ·0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I ·0.52 -0.44 -3.05 -2.72 -2.23 -0.39 -1,48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12:12 (45.0")
2 1.49 .0.95 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
2-9B
Table 207B.6-2
MWFRS - Part 2: Wind Loads - Roof (kN/1112)
MWFRS - Roof, V =
150 - 250 kph, h 15 - 24 m =
Exposure C
V [kph) 150 200 250

Load Zone Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope I 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
elise 2 3 5 4 5
I NA NA ·1.16 ·1.03 ·0.84 NA NA -2.05 ·1.83 -1.50 NA NA -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
Flal < 2: 12 (9.46°) NA NA NA NA NA
2 NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0(1
1 -1.14 -0.57 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -2.02 -1.37 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -3.15 -2.21 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
3:12 (14.00) 0.17 -0.23 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.29 -0.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.45 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.(10
2
I -8.45 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -1.66 -1.34 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -2.59 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
4: 12 (18.4°) -0.59
2. 0.32 -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.90 -0.92 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.75 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -1.33 -1.34 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -2.08 -2.09 -3.21 ·2.86 -2..14
24 5: 12 ( 22.6°) 0.00 0.76 -0.64 0.00
2 0.42 ·0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.19 -1.00 0.00 0.00 0.0(1
1 -0.60 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -1.00 -1.34 .2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -1.67 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
6:12 (26.6°) 0.47 -0.36 0.00 0.84 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0(1
2 0.00 0.00 1.32 -1.00
I -0.34 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -0.02 -1.34 -2.05 -1.83 -1.50 -0.97 -2.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
9:12 (36.'l°) NA -0.36 0.00 0.00 1.01 -0.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 !.II -1.00 0.00
2 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.19 -0.74 -1.16 -1.03 -0.84 -0.35 -1.34 -2.05 -l.g3 -1.50 -0.54 -Z.09 -3.21 -2.86 -2.34
12:12 (45.0°) -0.64 O.O()
2 0.56 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.01 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.57 -1.00 0.00 0.0(1
1 NA Ni\ -1.13 -1.00 -0.S3 NA NA -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 NA NA -3.12 -2.78 -2.2S
Flat < 2:12 ('1.46°) Ni\ NA
2 NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 O.O[) 0.00
1 -J.IO -0.55 ·1.13 -1.00 -0.83 -1.96 -1.33 -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 -3.06 -2.15 -3.12 -2.78 -2.2K
3:12 (14.00)
2 0.15 -0.22 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.28 -0040 0.00 0.00 0.00 OA4 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.90 -0.73 -1.13 -1.00 -0.83 -1.61 ·1.30 -2.00 -1.71l -1,46 -2.51 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 -2.21(
4; 12 (18.4°)
2 0'7.o -0.33 0.00 0.00 0.00 o.so -0.57 0.00 uoo 0.00 0.S7 -0.S9 o.oo 0.00 0.00
I -0.72 -0.73 -1.13 -LOO -0.S3 -1.29 -1.30 -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 -2.02 -2.03 ..3.12 -2.78 M;!.2X
21 5:12 (22.6") 0.42 -0.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.74 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.97 O.Of)
2 !.I 6 0.00 0.00
I -0.58 -0.73 -1.13 -1.00 -0.83 -0.59 -1.30 -2.00 -1.78 -1.46 -1.62 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 ~2,1H
6; 12 (26.60)
2 0.45 -0.36 0.00 (J.OO 0.00 O.S2 -0.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.28 -0.97 0.00 0.00 o.ou
I -0.34 -0.73 -1.13 -1.00 -0.83 -0.60 -1.30 -2.00 -1.7K -1.46 -0.94 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 -2.2H
9:12 (36.9°) -0.62
J 0.55 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.97 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.19 -0.73 -1.13 -1.00 -0.S3 -0.34 -1.30 -l.OO -US -1.46 -0.53 -2.03 -3.12 -2.78 ~2,~~
12: 12 (45.0°) 0.98 -0.62 0.00
2 0.55 -0.36 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.53 -0.97 0.00 0.00 O.OD
1 NA NA -1.08 -0.97 -0.80 NA NA -1.93 -1.72 -1041 NA NA -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
Flal -:;2: 12 (9.46°) NA Ni\
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -1.07 -0.53 -LOS -0.97 -O.SO -1.90 -1.29 -1.93 -1.72 -1.41 -2.% -2.08 -3.()2 -2.69 -2.21
3:12 (14.0°) 0.16 -0.22 0.00 0.27 -0.38 0.00 0.00
2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.43 -0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.S7 -0.70 -1.08 -0.')7 -0.80 -1.56 -1.26 -1.93 -1.72 -1.41 -2.44 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
4: 12 (18.4°) -0.55
2 0.31 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.84 -0.S6 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.70 -0.70 -1.08 -0.97 -0.80 -1.25 -1.26 -1.93 -1.72 -1.41 -1.95 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
18 5: 11 ( 22.6°)
2 0.40 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.72 -0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.57 -0.70 -1.08 -0.97 -0.80 -1.00 -1.26 -1.93 -I.n -1.41 -1.57 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
6: 12 (26.6°) 0.01) -0.(,0 0.00
2 0.45 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.79 0.00 0.00 1.24 -0.94 0.00 0.01l O.OIl
I -0.32 ·0.70 -1.08 -0.<)7 -O.l~O -0.58 -1.26 -1.1)3 -1.72 -1.41 -0.90 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
9:12 (36.9°) 0.95 -0.60 0.00
2 054 -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.04 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00
I 0.01 -0.70 -1.08 -0.1)7 -O.SO -0.33 -1.26 -1.'13 -I.n -1041 -0.51 -1.97 -3.02 -2.69 -2.21
I~: 12 (45.0·)
:2 O.5>! -0.34 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 ·0.60 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.48 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -I.U4 -0.94 -0.76 NA NA -Ul(, -1.66 -1.36 NA NA -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
Flat < 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA CI.OO o.oo 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA Ni\ 0.00 0.00 0.00
I ·),04 ·0.51 -1.04 -().94 -0.76 ·1.S2 -1.24 -I.K6 -1.66 -1.36 -2.85 -2.00 -2.1)1 -2.59 -2.12
3:12 (14.0·)
:2 0.15 -0.22 o.oo o.oo 0.00 0.26 -0.37 0.00 0.(10 0.00 0041 -0.58 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.S4 -0.69 ·1.04 -().94 -0.76 -1.50 -UI -I.S6 -1.66 -1.36 -".34 -1.89 -2.1)1 -2.59 -2.12
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 0.29 -0.30 0.00 f).OO 0.00 0.52 -0.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.81 -0.83 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.68 ·0.69 -1.04 -0.94 -0.76 -1.20 -1.21 -I.gr, -1.66 -1.36 -1.88 -1.89 -2.91 -2.5'! -2.12
15 5:12 (22.6°) NA
2 0.38 -Om 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.5~ 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.08 -0.1)1 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.56 -0.69 -1.05 -0.94 -0.76 -0.97 -1.21 ·1.86 -1.66 -1.36 -1.51 -1.89 -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
6: 12 (26.6°) 0.42 -0.32 0.00 0.76 -0.58 0.00 1.11)
2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -0.91 0.00 0.00 0.00
! -0.05 -0.6<) -1.04 -0.94 -().76 -().52 -1.2! -1.86 -1.66 -1.36 -0.87 -1.89 -2.91 -2.59 -2.12
9:12 (36.'1°) -0.58
2 0.51 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.91 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 -0.91 0.00 0.00 0.00
I 1.67 -0.69 -1.04 -0.94 -0.76 -0.32 -1.21 -1.86 -1.66 -1.36 -0.49 -1.89 ·2.91 -2.59 -2.12
12:12 (45.0°)
2 0.51 -0.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.91 -o.ss o.co 0.00 0.00 1.42 -0.91 0.00 0.00 0.00

Table 207B.6-2
MWFRS - Roof, V = 300 - 350 kph, h = 15 - 24 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 300 350
Load Zone Zone
/t(m) Roof Slope
Case I 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 NA NA -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
Flat < 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.53 -3.08 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -2.33 -1.58 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.65 -0.92 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.73 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
4: 12 (1 S.4°)
2 1.29 -1.32 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.99 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 ·1.74
24 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.72 ·1.37 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 ·0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.44 ·3.01 -4.62 -4.12 ·3.38 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 ·1.74
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.89 -1.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.39 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.27 -1.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -0.78 -3.01 -4.62 -4.12 -3.38 -0040 -1.55 ·2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.27 -1.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 NA NA -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 NA NA -2.34 ·2.09 -1.71
Flat -c 2:12 (9,46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.41 -2.99 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -2.30 -1.56 ·2.34 -2.09 ·1.71
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.63 -0.90 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.62 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -1.89 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 ·1.71
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.25 -1.29 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.91 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -1.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
21 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.67 -1.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.63 -2.92 -4,49 -4.00 -3.29 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 ·2.09 -1.7J
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.84 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.35 ·2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -0.71 -1.53 ·2.34 ·2.09 -1.71
9: 12 (36.9°)
2 2.20 ·1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.76 -2.92 -4.49 -4.00 -3.29 -0,40 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 ·1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.20 -1.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA ·4.35 -3.88 -3.18 NA NA ·2.31 -2.06 -1.69
Flal < 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.26 -2.90 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -2.27 -1.54 -2.31 -2.06 ·1.69
3:12 (14.00)
2 0.61 -0.87 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.01l 0.00 0.00
1 -3.51 -2.83 -4.35 ·3.88 -3.18 -1.86 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.21 ·1.24 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 0,00 0.00 0.00
) ·2.82 -2.83 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -1.49 .1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
18 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.62 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 .0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.26 -2.83 -4.35 ·3.88 -3.18 -1.20 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 ·1.69
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.78 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.31 -2.83 -4.35 -3.S8 -3.18 -0.70 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
9: 12 (36.9°)
2 2.13 ·1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.74 -2.83 -4.35 -3.88 -3.18 -0.39 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 ·1.69
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.13 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -4.18 ·3.73 ·3.06 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
Flat < 2:12 (9,46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.10 -2.79 -4.18 ·3.73 -3.06 -2.23 -1.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.59 -0.83 (l.OO 0.00 0.00 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.37 -2.72 -4.18 ·3.73 ·3.06 ·1.83 -1.48 ·2.27 -2.03 -1.66
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.17 -1.20 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -2.71 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -1.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 ·1.66
15 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.56 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.18 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 -1.18 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 ·1.66
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.72 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.26 -2.72 -4.18 -3.73 -3.06 ·0.68 ·1,48 -2.27 -2.03 ·1.66
9:12 (36.9·)
2 2.05 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.71 -2.72 -4.18 ·3.73 ·3.06 -0.39 -1,48 ·2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.05 -1.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

2-'100 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
Table 207B.6-2
MWFRS - Roof, V == 150 - 250 kph, h =
27- 36 m
Exposure C
h(m)
3:12 (14.0')
4: 12 (ISA')
36 5: 12 ( 22.6 Q
)
9: 12 (36.9')
12:12 (45.0°,
3:12 (14.0°)
4: 12 (18.4°)
6: 12 (26.6°)
9: 12 (%.,>0)
12:12 (45.0°)
3:12 (14.0')
4: 12 (18.4°)
30 5:12(22.6')
9:12 (36.9°)
12: 12 (4S.00)
3: 12 (14.0')
4: 12 (18A')
27 5: 12 (22.6°)
6:12 (26.6°)
9:12 (36.9°)
12:12 (45.0')

Table 2078.6-2
MWFRS - Roof, V =
300 - 350 kph, h 27 - 36 = 111
Exposure C
V (kph) 300 350
LOlld Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Slope
4
elise 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 4 5
I NA NA -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
Flat < 2: 12 (9.46")
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.94 -3.36 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -2.33 -1.58 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.71 -1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.06 -3.28 -5.03 -4,49 -3.68 -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
4: 12 (18.4")
2 1.40 ·1.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.26 -3.28 -5.03 ·4.49 -3.68 -1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
36 5: I2 ( 22.6°) ? 1.87 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.62 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
6: 12 (26,60)
2 2.06 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.51 -3.28 -5.0J -4.49 -3.68 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
9: 12 (36.9°)
2 2.47 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.85 -3.28 -5.03 -4.49 -3.68 -DAD -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12:12 (45.0")
2 2.47 -1.57 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
Flat < 2: 12 (9,460)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.85 -3.30 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -2.30 -1.56 -2.34 -2.09 -J.71
3:12 (14.0')
2 0.70 -0.98 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -3.98 -3.22 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -1.89 -1.53 ·2.34 ·2.09 -1.71
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.38 -1.41 0.00 0.00 0.00 0,65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.20 -3.'11 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -1.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
33 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.84 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.57 -3.22 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 2.03 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -1,49 -3.22 -4.94 -4.40 -3.61 -0.71 -1.53 -2.34 .2.09 -1.71
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.42 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.84 ·3.22 -4.94 ·4.40 .3.61 -0.40 -1.53 .2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.42 -1.54 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 NA NA -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 NA NA ·2.31 -2.06 -1.69
Flat < 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.75 -3.23 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 ·2.27 -1.54 ·2.3 I -2.06 -1.69
3:12 (14.00)
2 0.69 -0.96 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.91 -3.15 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -1.86 -1.50 ·2.31 -2.06 -1.69
4: 12 (18.40)
2 1.35 -1.38 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.66 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.13 -3.14 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -1.49 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
30 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.80 - 1.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.52 -3.15 -4.84 ·4.32 -3.54 -1.20 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 1.99 ·1.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I ·1.46 -3.15 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -0.70 -1.50 ·2.31 -2.06 ·1.69
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.38 -1.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.82 -3.15 -4.84 -4.32 -3.54 -0.39 -1.50 ·2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.38 -1.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
Flat -c 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.65 -3.16 -4.74 ·4.22 -3.46 -2.23 -1.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3: 12 (14.0°)
2 0.67 -0.94 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.82 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -1.83 ·1.48 -2.27 -2.03 ·1.66
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.32 -1.35 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.07 -3.08 -4.74 ·4.22 -3.46 -1.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
27 5:12 (22.6")
2 1.76 ·1.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I ·2.46 -3.08 -4.74 ·4.22 -3.46 -1.18 -1.48 ·2.27 -2.03 ·1.66
6: I2 (26.6")
2 1.94 -1.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 o.oo 0.00
I -1.42 -3.08 ·4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -0.68 ·1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
9: 12 (36.9°) ? 2.32 -1.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.80 -3.08 -4.74 -4.22 -3.46 -0.39 -1,48 -2.27 ·2.03 -1.66
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.32 ·1.47 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

Table 207B.6-2
MWFRS - Roof, V = 150 - 250 kph, h = 39 - 48 111
Exposure C
Load
h(m) RoofSlopc
Flal < 2:12 (9.46°)
3:12 (14.0°)
4: 12 (18.4°)
48 5:12 (22.6°)
6: 12 (26.6°)
9:12 (36.9°)
12:12 (45.0°)
Flnl < 2:12 (9.46°)
3:12 (14.0°)
4: 12 (18.4°)
45 5:12 (22.6°)
6:12 (26.6°)
9:12 (36.9°)
12:12 (45.0°)
Flal" 2: 12 (9.46°)
3: 12 (14.0°)
4:12(18.4°)
42 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
6:12 (26.6°)
9: 12 (36.9°)
12:12 (45.0°)
Flal" 2:12 (9.46°)
3:12 (14.00)
4: 12 (18.4°)
39 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
6:12 (26.6°)
9: 12 (36.'1°)
12: 12 (45.0°)

Table 207B.6-2
MWFRS - Roof, V =
300 - 350 kph, h 39 - 48 m =
Exposure C
V (knit) 300 350
Load Zone Zone
/t(m) Roof Slope
Case 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
I NA NA -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 NA NA -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
Flal < 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -5.25 -3.56 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -2.33 -1.58 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.76 -1.06 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.34 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.31 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -1.91 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -l.74
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.49 -1.53 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.66 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3A6 -3.43 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -1.54 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
48 5:12 (22.6°)
2 1.99 - 1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.88 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.78 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -1.23 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 2.20 -1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.98 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.61 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -0.72 -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
9: 12 (36.9·)
2 2.62 -1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.07 -0.68 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.91 -3.48 -5.35 -4.77 -3.91 -DAD -1.55 -2.38 -2.12 -1.74
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.62 -1.66 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.17 -0.74 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 NA NA -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
Flat < 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -5.18 -3.52 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -2.30 -1.56 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.75 -1.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.47 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.25 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -1.89 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
4; 12 (18.4·)
2 1.47 -1.51 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -0.67 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.41 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -1.52 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
45 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.96 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.68 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.74 -3A3 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -1.22 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
6: 12 (26.6·)
2 2.17 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.96 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.59 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -0.71 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
9:! 2 (36.9°)
2 2.59 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.90 -3.43 -5.27 -4.70 -3.86 -0.40 -1.53 -2.34 -2.09 -1.71
12:12 (45.0°)
2 2.59 -1.64 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.15 -0.73 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 NA NA -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
Flat <: 2: 12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0,00 0.00
I -5.10 -3.47 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -2.27 -1.54 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.74 -1.03 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.33 -0.35 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -4.19 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -1.86 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
4: 12 (18.4°)
2 1.45 -J .49 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.65 -O.M 0.00 0.00 0.00
1 -3.36 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -1.49 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
42 5:J2 (22.6°)
2 1.93 -1.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.24 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.70 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -1.20 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
6:12 (26.6°)
2 2.13 -1.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.95 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.57 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -0.70 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.55 -1.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.13 -0.72 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.88 -3.38 -5.20 -4.63 -3.80 -0.39 -1.50 -2.31 -2.06 -1.69
12: 12 (45.0°)
2 2.55 -1.62 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.09 -0.69 0.00 0.00 0.00
I NA NA -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 NA NA -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
Flut -c 2:12 (9.46°)
2 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00 NA NA 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -5.02 -3.41 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -2.23 -1.52 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
3:12 (14.0°)
2 0.72 -1.02 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.32 -0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -4.13 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -1.83 -1.48 -?27 -2.03 -1.66
4; 12 (18.4°)
2 1.43 -1.46 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.64 -0.65 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -3.31 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -1.47 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
39 5: 12 ( 22.6°)
2 1.90 -1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.85 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -2.66 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -1.18 -IA8 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
6: 12 (26.6°)
2 2.10 -1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.93 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -1.54 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -0.68 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
9:12 (36.9°)
2 2.51 -1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.12 -0.71 0.00 0.00 0.00
I -0.87 -3.33 -5.12 -4.56 -3.74 -0.39 -1.48 -2.27 -2.03 -1.66
12: 12 (45.0·)
2 2.51 -1.59 0.00 0.00 0.00 19.8 -12.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

207C.3 Velocity Pressure Table 207C.2-1

Steps to Determine Wind Loads on MWFRS
207C.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient Low-Rise Buildings
Based on the Exposure Category determined in Section

Step I: Determine occupancy category of building or
207A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient K; or
other structure, see Table 103-1
Kh, as applicable, shall be determined from
Table 207C.3-1. Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
For a site located in a transition zone between exposure lA, B or C
'I
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
roughness, intermediate values of K; or Kh, between those
shown in Table 207C.3-1, are permitted, provided that they Y Wind directionality factor, Kd, see
are determined by a rational analysis method defined in the Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
Y Exposure category B, C or D, see
Section 207 A. 7
y Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
Y Enclosure classification, see
Section 207 A.I 0
Y Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpJ, see

Section 207 A.II and Table 207 A.II-I
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure
coefficient, K; or Kh, see Tables 207C.3-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qz or qh, see

Equation 207C.3'-1
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient,
(GCp), using Figure 207CA-I for flat and
gable roofs.
User Note:
See Commentary Figure C207C.4-1 for guidance On hip
roofs.
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, from
Equation 207CA-I
National Structural Code of the Philipp;' Jolume I, 7th Edition, 2015

2-106 CH/\PTER 2 Minimum Design Loads
t,
Commentary: (~endi.ng moment, shear, thrust) independent of wind

direction. To capture all appropriate structural actio
See commentary to Section C207B.3.1. the building must be designed for all wind directions ~'
co.nsidering in turn each corner of the building as t?e
207C.3.2 Velocity Pressure wm~ward or reference corner shown in the eight sketches
of Figure 207C4-1. At each corner, two load patterns are
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be applied, one for each wind direction range. The end zone
calculated by the following equation: creates the required structural actions in the endframe or
bracing. Note also that for all roof slopes, all eight load
cases must be considered individually to determine the
critical loading for a given structural assemblage or
component thereof Special attention should be given to
where roof members, such as trusses, which meet the definition oj
Kd wind directionality factor, see Section MWFRS but are not part of the lateral resisting system.
207A.6 When such members span at leastfrom the eave to the ridge
Kz velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see or support members spanning at least from eave to ridge,
Section 207C.3.1 they are not required to be designed for the higher end zone
K zt topographic factor defined, see Section loads under MWFRS. The interior zone loads should be
207A.8.2 applied. This is due to the enveloped nature of the loads for
V basic wind speed, see Section 207 A.S.l roofmembers.
qz velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207C.3-1 at mean roof height h To develop the appropriate "pseudo" values of (GCp/),
investigators at the University of Western Ontario
The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except where (Davenport et al. 1978) used an approach that consisted
sufficient climatic data are available to justify the selection essentially of permitting the building model to rotate in the
of a different value of this factor for a design application. wind tunnel through a full 3600 while simultaneously
monitoring the loading conditions on each of the surfaces
Commentary: (Figure C207C4-I). Both Exposures Band C were
considered. Using influence coefficients for rigid frames, it
See commentary to Section C207B.3.2. was possible to spatially average and time average the
surface pressures to ascertain the maximum induced
Loads on Main Wind-Force Resisting Systems: external force components to be resisted. More
specifically, the following structural actions were
evaluated: .
The pressure coefficients for MWFRS are basically
separated into two categories:
1. Total uplift.
1. Directional Procedure for buildings of all heights 2. Total horizontal shear.
(Figure 207B.4-l) as specified in Section 207B for
buildings meeting the requirements specified therein. 3. Bending moment at knees (two-hinged frame).
4. Bending moment at knees (three-hinged frame),
2. Envelope Procedure for low-rise buildings
(Figure 207C4-1) as specified in Section 207C for 5. Bending moment at ridge (two-hinged frame).
buildings meeting the requirements specified therein.
The next step involved developing sets of "pseudo"
In generating these coefficients, two distinctly different pressure coefficients to generate loading conditions that
approaches were used. For the pressure coefficients given would envelop the maximum induced force components to
in Figure 207B.4-1, the more traditional approach was be resistedfor all possible wind directions and exposures.
followed and the pressure coefficients reflect the actual Note, for example, that the wind azimuth producing the
loading on each surface of the building as a function of maximum bending moment at the knee would not
wind direction, namely, winds perpendicular or parallel to necessarily produce the maximum total uplift. The
maximum induced external force components determined
the ridge line.
for each of the preceding jive categories were used to
develop the coefficients. The end result was a set of
For low-rise buildings, however, the values of (GCp/)
coefficients that represent jictitious loading conditions but
represent "pseudo" loading conditions that, when applied
that conservatively envelop the maximum induced force
to the building, envelop the desired structural actions

I.
components (bending moment, shear, and thrust) to be seem to indicate that some reduction in pressures for
resisted independent of wind direction. buildings located in Exposure B is justified. The ASCE
Task Committee on Wind Loads believes it is desirable to
The original set of coefficients was generated for the design buildings for the exposure conditions consistent
framing of conventional pre-engineered buildings, that is, with the exposure designations defined in the standard. In
single-storey moment-resisting frames in one of the the case of low buildings, the effect of the increased
principal directions and bracing in the other principal intensity of turbulence in rougher terrain (i.e., Exposure A
direction. The approach was later extended to single- or B vs. C) increases the local pressure coefficients.
storey moment-resisting frames with interior columns Beginning in NSCP 2001 (ASCE 7-98) the effect of the
(Kavanagh et al. 1983). increased turbulence intensity on the loads is treated with
the truncated profile. Using this approach, the actual
Subsequent wind tunnel studies (Isyumov and Case 1995) building exposure is used and the profile truncation
have shown that the (GCpf) values of Figure 207C4-1 are corrects for the underestimate in the loads thaI would be
also applicable to low-rise buildings with structural obtained otherwise.
systems other than moment-resisting frames. That work
examined the instantaneous wind pressures on a low-rise Figure 207C 4-1 is most appropriatefor low buildings with
building with a 4: 12 pitched gable roof and the resulting width greater than twice their height and a mean roof
wind-induced forces on its MWFRS. Two different MWFRS height that does not exceed 10m. The original databas~
were evaluated. One consisted = of shear walls and roof included low buildings with width no greater than five
trusses at different spacing. The other had moment- times their eave height, and eave height did not exceed
resisting frames in one direction, positioned at the same 10m. In the absence of more appropriate data,
spacing as the roof trusses, and diagonal wind bracing in Figure 207C4-1 may also be usedfor buildings with mean
the other direction. Wind tunnel tests were conducted for roof height that does not exceed the least horizontal
both Exposures Band C The findings of this study showed dimension and is less than or equal to 18m. Beyond these
that the (GCpf) values of Figure 207C4-1 provided extended limits, Figure 207B.4-1 should be used.
satisfactory estimates of the wind forces for both types of
structural systems. This work confirms the validity of All the research used to develop and refine the low-rise
Figure 207C4-1, which reflects the combined action of building method for MWFRS loads was done on gable-
wind pressures on different external surfaces of a building roofed buildings. In the absence of research on hip-roofed
and thus takes advantage of spatial averaging. buildings, the ASCE committee has developed a rational
method of applying Figure 207C4-1 to hip roofs based on
In the original wind tunnel experiments, both Band C its collective experience, intuition, and judgment. This
exposure terrains were checked. In these early suggested method is presented in Figure C207C4-2.
experiments, Exposure B did not include nearby buildings.
In general, the force components, bending moments, and Research (Isyumov 1982 and Isyumov and Case 2000)
so forth were found comparable in both exposures, indicated that the low-rise method alone underestimates
although (GCpf) values associated with Exposure B the amount of torsion caused by wind loads. In
terrain would be higher than that for Exposure C terrain ASCE 7-02, Note 5 was added to Figure 207C4-1 to
because of reduced velocity pressure in Exposure B account for this torsional effect and has been carried
terrain. The (GCpf) values given in Figures 207C4-1, forward through subsequent editions. The reduction in
loading on only 50 percent of the building results in a
207E.4-1, 207E.4-2A, 27E.4-2B, 27E.4-2C, 27E.4-3,
torsional load case without an increase in the predicted
27E.4-4, 27E.4-5A, 27E.4-5B, and 27E.4-6 are derived
base shear for the building. The provision will have little
from wind tunnel studies modeled with Exposure C terrain.
or no effect on the design of MWFRS that have weI/-
However, they may also be used in other exposures when
distributed resistance. However, it will impact the design
the velocity pressure representing the appropriate
of systems with centralized resistance; such as a single core
exposure is used.
in the center of the building. An illustration of the intent of
the note on two of the eight load patterns is shown in
In comprehensive wind tunnel studies conducted by Ho at
Figure 207C4-1. All eight patterns should be modified in
the University of Western Ontario (1992), it was
this way as a separate set of load conditions in addition to
determined that when low buildings (h < 18 m) are
the eight basic patterns.
embedded in suburban terrain (Exposure B, which
included nearby buildings), the pressures in most cases are
Internal pressure coefficients (GCpi) to be used for loads
lower than those currently used in existing standards and
codes, although the values show a very large scatter on MWFRS are given in Table 207A.1J-1. The internal
pressure load can be critical in one-storey moment-
because ofhigh turbulence and many variables. The results
resisting frames and in the top storey of a building where

the MWFRS consists of moment resisting frames. Loading
cases with positive and negative internal pressures should
be considered. The internal pressure load cancels out in
the determination of total lateral load and base shear. The
designer can use judgment in the use of internal pressure
loadingfor the MWFRS of high-rise buildings.
Figure C207C.4-l
Unsteady Wind Loads on Low Buildings for Given Wind Direction (After Ellingwood 1982)

t.
Z07C.4 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force Resisting 207C.4.2 Parapets

System
The design wind pressure for the effect of parapets on
Z07C.4.1 Design Wind Pressure for Low-Rise MWFRS oflow-rise buildings with flat, gable, or hip roofs
Buildings shall be determined by the following equation:
Design wind pressures for the MWFRS of low-rise

buildings shall be determined by the following equation: (207CA-2)
where
(207CA-I)
combined net pressure on the parapet due
to the combination of the net pressures
where
from the front and back parapet surfaces.
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof Plus (and minus) signs signify net
height h as defined in Section 207 A.3 pressure acting toward (and away from)
external pressure coefficient from the front (exterior) side of the parapet
Figure 207CA-I velocity pressure evaluated at the top of
internal pressure coefficient from the
Table 207A.ll-1 parapet
combined net pressure coefficient
207C.4.1.1 External Pressure Coefficients (GCpf) + 1.5 for windward parapet
-1.0 for leeward parapet
The combined gust effect factor and external pressure
coefficients for low-rise buildings, (GCpf), are not
permitted to be separated.
Commentary:
Load Case A
Figure C207CA-2
Hip Roofed Low-Rise Buildings
Notes:
I. Adapt the loadings shown in Figure 207C.4-l for hip roofed buildings as shown above. For a given hip roof pitch use the roof coefficients from the Case A table for both
Load Case A and Load Case B.
2. The total horizontal shear shall not be less than that determined by neglecting the wind forces on roof surfaces.

""" ...
1Ii~_
\II ..... ~'
.....
(
LOAD CASE A
w~ ...
Oil'ClC1i(lfl
\\'''lII'ilnl
C... "
LOADCASEB
Basic Load Cases
Figure 207C.4-1
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Part 1 External Pressure Coefficients (CCp!)
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings, h ::::;18 m Low-rise Walls and Roofs

CHAPTE'R 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-111
Roof LOAD CASE A

Angle (J Building Surface
(degrees) 1 2 3 4 IE 2E 3E 4E
0-5 0.40 -0.69 -0.37 -0.29 0.61 -l.07 -0.53 -0.43
20 0.53 -0.69 -0.48 -0.43 0.80 -l.07 -0.69 -0.64
30-45 0.56 0.21 -0.43 -0.37 0.69 0.27 -0.53 -0.48
90 0.56 0.56 -0.37 -0.37 0.69 0.69 -0.48 -0.48
Roof LOADCASEB
Angle (J Building Surface
(degrees) 1 2 3 4 5 6 IE 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E
0-90 - - - - 0.4 - - - - - 0.61

-
0.45 0.69 0.37 0.45 0 0.29 0.48 l.07 0.53 0.48 0.43
Notes:
I. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively.
2. For values of (} other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted ..
3. The building must be designed for all wind directions using the 8 loading patterns shown. The load patterns are applied to each building
corner in turn as the Windward Corner.
4. Combinations of external and internal pressures (see Table 207 A.II-I) shall be evaluated as required to obtain the most severe loadings.
5. For the torsional load cases shown below, the pressures in zones designated with a "T" (IT, 2T, 3T, 4T, 5T, 6T) shall be 25% of the full
design wind pressures (zones 1,2, 3,4, 5, 6).
Exception: One storey buildings with h less than or equal to 9 m, buildings two storeys or less framed with light frame
construction, and buildings two storeys or less designed with flexible diaphragms need to be designedfor the torsional load cases.
Torsional loading shall apply to all eight basic load patterns using the figures below applied at each Windward Corner.
6. For purposes of designing a building's MWFRS, the total horizontal shear shall not be less than that determined by neglecting the wind
forces on the roof.
Exception: This provision does not apply to buildings using moment frames for the MWFRS.
7. For flat roofs, use (} = 00 and locate the zone 2/3 and zone 2E/3E boundary at the mid-width of the building.
8. The pressure coefficient (GCp{), when negative in Zone 2 and 2E, shall be applied in Zone 2/2E for a distance from the edge of the roof
equal 0.5 times the horizontal dimension of the building parallel to the direction of MWFRS being designed or 2.5 times the eave height
at the windward wall, whichever is less; the remainder of Zone 2/2E extending to the ridge line shall use the pressure coefficient (GCp{)
for zone 3/3E.
9. Notation:
a: 10% of least horizontal dimension or . 4h , whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m
h: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for (} ~ 100.
B: Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees
Transverse Direction
Figure 207C.4-1 (continued)

Main Wind Force Resisting System - Part l.Extemal Pressure Coefficients (GCpf )
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings, h:S 18m Low-rise Walls and Roofs

2-112 CHAPTeR 2 - Minimum Dosiqn Lauds
••
207C.4.3 Roof Overhangs Part 2: Enclosed Simple Diaphragm Low-Rise

Buildings
The positive external pressure on the bottom surface of
windward roof overhangs shall be determined using Commentary:
Cp = 0.7 in combination with the top surface pressures
determined using Figure 207CA-l. This simplified approach of the Envelope Procedure is
for the relatively common low-rise (h :S 18m) regular
207C.4.4 Minimum Design Wind Loads shaped, simple diaphragm building case (see definitions
for "simple diaphragm building" and "regular-shaped
The wind load to be used in the design of the MWFRS for building ") where pressures for the roof and walls can
an enclosed or partially enclosed building shall not be less be selected directly from a table. Figure 207C.6-1
than 0.77 kN/m2 multiplied by the wall area of the building provides the design pressures for MWFRS for the
and 0.38 kN/m2 multiplied by the roof area of the building specified conditions. Values are provided for enclosed
projected onto a vertical plane normal to the assumed wind buildings only ((GCpa = ±O.18).
direction.
Table 207C.3-1 Horizontal wall pressures are the net sum of the
Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, Kh and Kz windward and leeward pressures on vertical projection
of the wall. Horizontal roofpressures are the net sum of
Height above
~round level, Z
m B
Exposure
C D
l
1
the windward and leeward pressures on vertical
projection of the roof Vertical roof pressures are the net
sum of the external and internal pressures on the
0-4.6 0.70 0.85 1.03 ,I horizontal projection of the roof
6.1 0.70 0.90 1.08
7.6 0.70 0.94 l.l2 Note that for the MWFRS in a diaphragm building, the
9.1 0.70 0.98 l.l6 internal pressure cancels for loads on the walls and for
12.2 0.76 1.04 1.22 the horizontal component of loads on the roof This is
15.2 0.81 1.09 1.27 true because when wind forces are transferred by
horizontal diaphragms (e.g., floors and roofs) to the
18 0.85 1.13 1.31
vertical elements of the MWFRS (e.g., shear walls, X-
bracing, or moment frames), the collection of wind
Notes:
forces/rom windward and leeward sides of the building
occurs in the horizontal diaphragms. Once transferred
1. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient K; may be
into the horizontal diaphragms by the vertically
determined from the following formula:
spanning wall systems, the wind forces become a net
For 4.57 m.::; Z s Zg For Z < 4.57 m horizontal wind force that is delivered to the lateral
force resisting elements of the MWFRS. There should be
K, = 2.01 ( r:
z/Zg
Kz
= 2.01 ( 4. 57/zg )
z/a
no structural separations in the diaphragms.
Additionally, there should be no girts or other horizontal
members that transmit significant wind loads directly to
vertical frame members of the MWFRS in the direction
Note: Z shall not be taken less than 9 m in exposure B. under consideration. The equal and opposite internal
2. a and Zg are tabulated in Table 207 A.9-1. pressures on the walls cancel each other in the
horizontal diaphragm. This simplified approach of the
3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height
Envelope Procedure combines the windward and
Z is acceptable.
leeward pressures into a net horizontal Wind pressure,
4. Exposure categories are defined in Section 207 A. 7.
with the internal pressures canceled. The user is
cautioned to consider the precise application of
Commentary
windward and leeward wall loads to members of the
roof diaphragm where openings may exist and where
This section specifies a minimum wind load to be applied
particular members, such as drag struts, are designed.
horizontally on the entire vertical projection of the building
The design of the roof members of the MWFRS for
as shown in Figure C207E.4-1. This load case is to be
vertical loads is influenced by internal pressures. The
applied as a separate load case in addition to the normal
maximum uplift, which is controlled by Load Case E, is
load cases specified in other portions of this chapter.
produced by a positive internal pressure. At a roofslope

of 4Pp/,oxima/(t!y 28° and above the windward roof Kz 0.70

pre.fSl/l'e become' positive and a negative internal «; 1.0
p",•.1·sllf'e used in Load Case 2 in the table may produce Pressure coefficients are from Figure 207C.4-l.
a CCinil'o/ling case. From 25° to 45°, both positive and
negative internal pressure cases (Load Cases 1 and 2, Wall elements resisting two or more simultaneous wind-
respectively) must be checked for the roof induced structural actions (e.g., bending, uplift, or
shear) should be designedfor the interaction of the wind
For the designer to use this methodfor the design of the loads as part of the MWFRS. The horizontal loads in
MWFRS, the building must conform to all of the Figure 207C.6-l are the sum of the windward and
requirements listed in Section 207A.8.2; otherwise the leeward pressures and are therefore not applicable as
Directional Procedure, Part 1 of the Envelope individual wall pressures for the interaction load cases.
Procedure, or the Wind Tunnel Procedure must be used. Design wind pressures, psfor zones A and C, should be
This method is based on Part 1 of the Envelope multiplied by +0.85 for use on windward walls and by-
procedure, as shown in Figure 207C. 4-1, for a specific 0.70 for use on leeward walls (the plus sign signifies
group of buildings (simple diaphragm buildings). pressures acting toward the wall surface). For side
However, the torsional loading from Figure 207C.4-1 is walls, psfor zone C multiplied by -0.65 should be used.
deemed to be too complicatedfor a simplified method. These wall elements must also be checked for the
The last requirement in Section 207C.6.2 prevents the various separately acting (not simultaneous) component
use of this methodfor buildings with lateral systems that and cladding load cases.
are sensitive to torsional wind loading.
Main wind-force resisting roof members spanning at
Note 5 of Figure 207C.4-1 identifies several building least from the eave to the ridge or supporting members
types that are known to be insensitive to torsion and may spanning at least from eave to ridge are not required to
therefore be designed using the provisions of be designed for the higher end zone loads. The interior
Section 207C.6. Additionally, buildings whose lateral zone loads should be applied. This is due to the
resistance in each principal direction is provided by two enveloped nature of the loads for roof members.
shear walls, braced frames, or moment frames that are
spaced apart a distance not less than 75 percent of the 207C.5 General Requirements
width of the building measured normal to the orthogonal
wind direction, and other building types and element The steps required for the determination of MWFRS wind
arrangements described in Section 207B.6.1 or loads on enclosed simple diaphragm buildings are shown
207B.6.2 are also insensitive to torsion. This property in Table 207C.S-l.
could be demonstrated by designing the building using
Part 1of Section 207C, Figure 207C.4-1, and showing
that the torsion load cases defined in Note 5 do not User Note:
govern the design of any of the lateral resisting
elements. Alternatively, it can be demonstrated within Part 2 of Section 207C is a simplified method to
the context of Part 2 of Section 207C by defining torsion determine the wind pressure on the MWFRS of enclosed
load cases based on the loads in Figure 207C.6-1 and simple diaphragm low-rise buildings having a fiat,
reducing the pressures on one-half of the building by 75 gable or hip roof The wind pressures are obtained
percent, as described in Figure 207C.4-1, Note 5. If directly from a table and applied on horizontal and
none of the lateral elements are governed by these vertical projected surfaces of the building. This method
torsion cases, then the building can be designed using is a simplification of the Envelope Procedure contained
Part 2 of Section 207C; otherwise the building must be in Part 1of Section 207C.
designed using Part 1 of Section 207B or Part 1 of
Section 207C.
207C.5.1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section
Values are tabulatedfor Exposure B at h = 9.0 m, and
207A
Kzt = 1.0. Multiplying factors are provided for other
exposures and heights. The following values have been
The following wind load parameters are specified in
used in preparation of the figures:
Section 207 A:
Exposure B
(GCpi) ± 0.18 (enclosed building) • Basic Wind Speed V (Section 207 A.S)
h 9.0m • Exposure category (Section 207 A. 7)
0.85
0,
• Topographic factor Kzt (Section 207 A.S) 207C.6 Wind Loads - Main Wind-Force R,·I!S1Sthlg
System
• Enclosure classification (Section 207 A.I 0)
Table 207C.5-1 207C.6.1 Scope
Steps to Determine Wind Loads on MWFRS Simple
Diaphragm Low-Rise Buildings A building whose design wind loads are determined if
accordance with this section shall meet all the condilion;
of Section 207C.6.2. If a building does not meet all of the
Step I: Determine occupancy category of building or conditions of Section 207C.6.2, then its MWFRS ",It,d
other structure, see Table 103-1 loads shall be determined by Part I of this chapter, bY.lhe
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the Directional Procedure of Section 207B, or by the Wind
applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5- Tunnel Procedure of Section 207F.
lA, B or C
207C.6.2 Conditions
~ Exposure category B, C or D, see For the design of MWFRS the building shall comply with
Section 207 A.7 all of the following conditions:
~ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section !. The building is a simple diaphragm building as
207A.8 and Figure 207A.S-I defined in Section 207 A.2.
Step 4: Enter figure to determine wind pressures for
h = 9 m, PS30, see Figure 207C.6-1 2. The building is a low-rise building as defined in
Section 207 A.2.
Step 5: Enter figure to determine adjustment for
building height and exposure, 1, see 3. The building is enclosed as defined in Section 207 A.2
Figure 207C.6-1 and conforms to the wind-borne debris provisions of
Step 6: Determine adjusted wind pressures, Ps, see Section 207 A.I 0.3.
Equation 207C.6-I
4. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
as defined in Section 207 A.2.
5. The building is not classified as a flexible building as

defined in Section 207 A.2.
6. The building does not have response characteristics

making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding, instability due to galloping or flutter; and it
warrant special consideration.
7. The building has an approximately symmetrical cross-

section in each direction with either a flat roof or a
0
gable or hip roof with 8 ::;45 •
8. The building is exempted from torsional load cases as

indicated in Note 5 of Figure 207C.4-I, or the torsional
load cases defined in Note 5 do not control the design
of any of the MWFRS of the building.

Z07C.6.3 Design Wind Loads 207C.6.4 Minimum Design Wind Loads
Simplified design wind pressures, Ps, for the MWFRS of The load effects of the design wind pressures from Section
low-rise simple diaphragm buildings represent the net 207C.6.3 shall not be less than a minimum load defined by
pressures (sum of internal and external) to be applied to the assuming the pressures, Ps' for zones A and C equal to
horizontal and vertical projections of building surfaces as +766 Pa, Zones Band D equal to +383 Pa, while assuming
shown in Figure 207C.6-1. For the horizontal pressures Ps for Zones E, F, G, and H are equal to 0.0 Pa.
(Zones A, B, C, D), Ps is the combination of the windward
and leeward net pressures. Ps shall be determined by the
following equation:
Ps = .lKztPS30 (207C.6-1)
where
.l adjustment factor for building height and
exposure from Figure 207C.6-1
K zt topographic factor as defined m
Section 207 A.8 evaluated at mean roof
height, h
PS30 simplified design wind pressure for
Exposure B, at h = 9 m from Figure 207C.6-
1

2-116 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Desiqn Loads
I.
EII,eJ
H<i~
Windward
corner
CASE CASE
A B
Notes:
I. Pressures shown are applied to the horizontal and vertical projections, for exposure B, at h = 9 m. Adjust to other exposures and height
with adjustment factor A.
2. The load patterns show shall be applied to each comer of the building in turn as the reference comer. (See Figure 207CA-I)
3. For Case B use 8 = 0°.
4. Load cases I and 2 must be checked for 25° < 8 :s; 45°. Load case 2 at 25° is provided only for interpolation between 25° and 30°.
5. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the projected surfaces, respectively.
6. For roof slopes other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
7. The total horizontal load shall not be less than that determined by assuming Ps = 0 in zones Band D.
8. Where zone E or G falls on a roof overhang on the windward side of the building, use EOH and GOH for the pressure on the horizontal
projection of the overhang. Overhangs on the leeward and side edges shall have the basic zone pressure applied.
9. Notation:
a: 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4", whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m
II: Mean roof height, in meters, except that eave height shall be used for roof angles < 10°.
(): Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, in degrees.
Figure 207C.6-1
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Method 2.Design Wind Pressure
Enclosed Buildings h ~ 18 m Walls and Roofs

CHAPTER 2 -, Minimum Design Loads 2-117
,Bll>~'C Zones
Wind Roof
Load Horizontal Pressures Vertical Pressures Overhangs
speed Angle
(lillll) (degrees) Case A B C D E F G H EOH GOU
~ o to 50 I 0.66 -0.34 0.44 -0.2 -0.79 -0.45 -0.55 -0.35 -1.11 -0.87 ,
100 1 0.74 -0.31 0.49 -0.18 -0.79 -0.48 -0.55 -0.37 -1.11 -0.87 I
150 1 0.83 'I -0.27 0.55 -0.16 -0.79 -0.52 -0.55 -0.39 I -1.11 -0.87
I
200 1 0.91 -0.24 0.61 -0.13 -0.79 -0.55 -0.55 -0.42 -1.11 -0.87
150
1 0.83 0.13 0.6 0.14 -0.37 -0.5 -0.27 -0.41 -0.68 -0.58
250 i
2 0 0 0 0 -0.14 -0.27 -0.04 -0.18 0 0
1 0.74 0.51 0.59 0.41 0.06 -0.45 0.02 -0.39 -0.26 -0.3
30 to 450
2 0.74 0.51 0.59 0.41 0.29 -0.22 0.25 -0.16 -0.26 -0.3
o to 50 1 1.17 -0.61 0.78 -0.36 -1.41 -0.8 -0.98 -0.62 -1.97 -1.54
100 1 1.32 -0.55 0.88 -0.32 -1.41 -0.86 -0.98 -0.67 -1.97 -1.54
150 1 1.48 -0.48 0.98 -0.28 -1.41 -0.92 -0.98 -0.7 -1.97 -1.54
200 1 1.62 -0.43 1.08 -0.23 -1.41 -0.98 -0.98 -0.74 -1.97 -1.54
200
1 1.48 0.23 1.07 0.25 -0.65 -0.89 -0.47 -0.72 -1.22 -1.03
250
2 0 0 0 0 -0.25 -0.48 -0.07 -0.32 0 0
1 1.32 0.9 1.05 0.72 0.1 -0.8 0.03 -0.68 -0.46 -0.53
30 to 450
2 1.32 0.9 1.05 0.72 0,51 -0.39 0.44 -0.28 -0.46 -0.53
o to 50 1 1.83 -0.95 1.22 -0,57 -2.2 -1.25 -1.53 -0.97 -3.08 -2.41
100 1 2.06 -0.86 1.37 -0.49 -2.2 -1.34 -1.53 -1.04 -3.08 -2.41
150 1 2.31 -0.76 1.53 -0.44 -2.2 -1.44 -1.53 -1.09 -3.08 -2.41
200 1 2.53 -0.67 1.69 -0.37 -2.2 -1.53 -1.53 -1.16 -3.08 -2.41
250
1 2.31 0.37 1.67 0.39 -1.02 -1.39 -0.74 -1.13 -1.9 -1.62
250
2 0 0 0 0 -0.39 -0.76 ,. -0.11 -0.49 0 0
1 2.06 1.41 1.64 1.13 0.16 -1.25 0.05 -1.07 -0.72 -0.83
30 to 450
2 2.06 1.41 1.64 1.13 0.79 -0.62 0.68 -0.44 -0.72 -0.83
Figure 207C.6-1
Main Wind Force Resisting System - Method 2 Design Wind Pressure
Enclosed Buildings h:::; 18 m Walls and Roofs, Simplified Design Wind Pressure, PS9.0 (Pa)
(Exposure Bat h = 9.0 m with 1= 1.0

-.
Basic
Wind
Speed
Roof
Angle Load
Horizontal Pressures
Zones
Vertical Pressures Overhal12S --
--
(kph) (degrees) Case A B C D E F G H EOH GOJ.1
o to 5° 1 2.63 -1.37 1.75 -0.81 -3.17 -1.8 -2.2 -1.39 -4.44 -3.47
10° 1 2.97 -1.24 1.98 -0.71 -3.17 -1.93 -2.2 -1.49 -4.44 -3.47
15° 1 3.32 -1.09 2.2 -0.63 -3.17 -2.08 -2.2 -1.57 -4.44 -3.47
-
20° 1 3.65 -0.96 2.43 -0.53 -3.17 -2.2 -2.2 -1.67 -4.44 -3.47
300
1 3.32 0.53 2.41 0.56 -1.47 -2 -1.06 -1.62 -2.74 -2.33
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.56 -1.09 -0.15 -0.71 0 0
1 2.97 2.03 2.36 1.62 0.23 -1.8 0.08 -1.55 -1.04 -1.19
30 to 45°
2 2.97 2.03 2.36 1.62 1.14 -0.89 0.99 -0.63 -1.04 -1.19
o to 5° 1 3.59 -1.86 2.38 -1.11 -4.32 -2.45 -3 -1.9 -6.04 -4.73
10° 1 4.04 -1.69 2.69 -0.97 -4.32 -2.62 -3 -2.04 -6.04 -4.73
15° 1 4.52 -1.48 3 -0.86 -4.32 -2.83 -3 -2.14 -6.04 -4.73
20° 1 4.97 -1.31 3.31 -0.72 -4.32 -3 -3 -2.28 -6.04 -4.73
350
1 4.52 0.72 3.28 0.76 -2 -2.73 -1.45 -2.21 -3.73 -3.18
25°
2 0 0 0 0 -0.76 -1.48 -0.21 -0.97 0 0
1 4.04 2.76 3.21 2.21 0.31 -2.45 0.11 -2.1 -1.41 -1.62
30 to 45°
2 4.04 2.76 3.21 2.21 1.55 -1.21 1.35 -0.86 -1.41 -1.62
Adjustment Factor for Building Height and Exposure, .iI.
'Mean Roof Exposure

Height (m) B C D
0-5 1.0 1.21 1.47
6 1.0 1.29 1.55
8 1.0 1.35 1.61 .
9 1.0 1.40 1.66
11 1.05 1.45 1.70
12 1.09 1.49 1.74
14 1.12 1.53 1.78
15 1.16 1.56 1.81
17 1.19 1.59 1.84
18 1.22 1.62 1.87
Figure 207C.6-1 (continued)

Main Wind Force Resisting System - Method 2 Design Wind Pressure
Enclosed Buildings h:S 18 m Walls and Roofs, Simplified Design Wind Pressure, PS9.0 (Pa)
(Exposure B at h = 9.0 m with I = 1.0

CHAPT ER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-119
207D Wind Loads on Other Structures and Building designed using recognized literature documenting such
Appurtenances - MWFRS wind load effects or shall use the Wind Tunnel Procedure
specified in Section 207F.
207D.l Scope
207D.1.4 Shielding
207D.1.1 Structure Types
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to
This section applies to the determination of wind loads on apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other
building appurtenances (such as rooftop structures and structures or terrain features.
rooftop equipment) and other structures of all heights (such
as solid freestanding walls and freestanding solid signs, 207D.2 General Requirements
chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice frameworks, and
trussed towers) using the Directional Procedure. 207D.2.1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in
Section 207 A
The steps required for the determination of wind loads on
building appurtenances and other structures are shown in The following wind load parameters shall be determined in
Table 207D.I-I. accordance with Section 207 A:
• Basic Wind Speed V (Section 207 A.S)

User Note:
• Wind directionality Factor Kd (Section 207 A.6)
Use Section 207D to determine wind pressures on the
MWFRS of solid freestanding walls, freestanding solid • Exposure category (Section 207 A. 7)
signs, chimneys, tanks, open signs, lattice frameworks
and trussed towers. Wind loads on rooftop structures • Topographic factor Kzt (Section 207 A.8)
and equipment may be determined from the provisions
of this chapter. The wind pressures are calculated using
specific equations based upon the Directional
Procedure.
207D.3 Velocity Pressure
207D.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient

207D.1.2 Conditions
Based on the exposure category determined in
A structure whose design wind loads are determined in
Section 207A.7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient
accordance with this section shall comply with all of the
K; or Kh, as applicable, shall be determined from
following conditions:
Table 207D.3-1.
1. The structure is a regular-shaped structure as defined

For a site located in a transition zone between exposure
in Section 207A.2.
roughness, intermediate values of K; or Kh, between those
2. The structure does not have response characteristics
shown in Table 207D.3-I, are permitted, provided that they
making it subject to across-wind loading, vortex
are determined by a rational analysis method defined in the
shedding, or instability due to galloping or flutter; or it
Commentary:
warrant special consideration.
See commentary, Section C207B.3J.
207D.1.3 Limitations

load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with
along-wind vibrations of flexible structures. Structures not
meeting the requirements of Section 207D.I.2, or having
unusual shapes or response characteristics, shall be
207D.3.2 Velocity Pressure Table 207D.I-l

Steps to Determine Wind Loads on MWFRS Rooftop
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be Equipment and Other Structures
calculated by the following equation:
Step I: Determine occupancy category of building or

(207D.3-
other structure, see Table 103-1
1)
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
where
wind directionality factor, see lA, B orC
Section 207 A.6
velocity pressure exposure
coefficient, see Section 207D.3.1 » Wind directionality factor, Kd, see
topographic factor defined, see Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
Section 207 A.8.2
basic wind speed, see Section 207 A.5
» Exposure category B, C or D, see
Section 207 A. 7
velocity pressure calculated using
Equation 207D.3-1 at height h » Topographic factor, Kzt, see
Section 207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except
where sufficient climatic data are available to justify the
» Gust Effect Factor, G, see Section 207 A.9
selection of a different value of this factor for a design Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure
application. coefficient, K; or Kh, see Table 207D.2-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure qz or qh, see

Equation 207D.3-1
Step 6: Determine force coefficient, Cf:
~ Solid freestanding signs or solid

freestanding walls, Figure 207DA-l
» Chimneys, tanks, rooftop equipment
Figure 207D.5-1
~ Open signs, lattice frameworks
Figure 207D.5-2
» Trussed towers Figure 207DA-3
Step 7: Calculate wind force, F:
» Equation 207DA-l for signs and walls
» Equation 207D.6-1 and Equation 207D.6-
2 for rooftop structures and equipment
» Equation 207D.5-1 for other structures

CHAPTFR;:> - Minimum Design Loads 2-121
Commentary: the local mean net pressure coefficient data (for wind
direction 45°) from the referenced wind tunnel studies
See commentary, Section C207B.3.2. to generateforce coefficientsfor square regions starting
at the windward edge. Pressures near this edge increase
Figure 207D.4-1. The force coefficients for solid significantly as the length of the structure increases. No
freestanding walls and signs in Figure 207D.4-1 date data were available on the spatial distribution of
back to ANSI A58.1-1972. It was shown by Letchford pressures for structures with low aspect ratios (B/ s <
(2001) that these data originated from wind tunnel 2).
studies performed by Flachsbart in the early 1930s in
smooth uniform flow. The current values in Figure The sample illustration for Case C at the top of
207D.4-1 are based on the results of boundary layer Figure 207D.4-1 is for a sign with an aspect ratio
wind tunnel studies (Letchford 1985, 2001, Holmes B /s = 4. For signs of differing B [s ratios, the number
1986, Letchford and Holmes 1994, Ginger et al. 1998a of regions is equal to the number of force coefficient
and 1998b, and Letchford and Robertson 1999). entries located below each B / s column heading.
A surface curve fit to Letchford's (2001) and Holmes's For oblique wind directions (Case C), increased force
(1986) area averaged mean netpressure coefficient data coefficients have been observed on aboveground signs
(equivalent to mean force coefficients in this case) is compared to the same aspect ratio walls on ground
given by thefollowing equation (Letchford 1985, 2001 and Ginger et al. 1998a). The
ratio of force coefficients between above-ground and
1. 563 + O.0042In(x) - O.06148Y} on-ground signs (i.e., sfh. = 0.8 and 1.0, respectively)
c, = {
+0. 009011[ln(x)]Z - O.2603y2 / 0.8 is 1.25, which is the same ratio used in the Australian /
-0.08393y[ln(x)] New Zealand Standard (Standards Australia 2002).
Note 5 of Figure 207D.4-1 provides for linear
where X = Bis and y = slh interpolation between these two cases.
The 0.85 term in the denominator modifies the wind For walls and signs on the ground (sfh. = 1), the mean
tunnel-derivedforce coefficients into aformat where the vertical center of pressure ranged from O. 5h to 0.6h
gust effect factor as defined in Section 207A.9 can be (Holmes 1986, Letchford 1989, Letchford and Holmes
used. 1994, Robertson et al. 1995, 1996, and Ginger et al.
1998a) with 0.55h being the average value. For
Force coefficients for Cases A and B were generated above-ground walls and signs, the geometric center best
from the preceding equation, then rounded off to the represents the.expected vertical center of pressure.
nearest 0.05. That equation is only valid within the
range of B / sand s / h ratios given in thefigure for Case The reduction in C, due to porosity (Note 2) follows a
A andB. recommendation (Letchford 2001). Both wind tunnel
and full-scale data have shown that return corners
Of all the pertinent studies, only Letchford (2001) significantly reduce the net pressures in the region near
specifically addressed eccentricity (i.e., Case B). the windward edge of the wall or sign (Letchford and
Letchford reported that his data provided a reasonable Robertson 1999).
match to Cook's (1990) recommendation for using an
eccentricity of 0.25 times the average width of the sign.
However, the data were too limited in scope to justify
changing the existing eccentricity value of 0.2 times the
average width of the sign, which is also used in the latest
Australian / New Zealand Standard (Standards
Australia 2002).
Case C was added to account for the higher pressures

observed in both wind tunnel (Letchford 1985, 2001,
Holmes 1986, Letchford and Holmes 1994, Ginger et al.
1998a and 1998b, and Letchford and Robertson 1999)
and foll-scale studies (Robertson et al. 1997) near the
windward edge of afreestanding wall or signfor oblique
wind directions. Linear regression equations werefit to
207D.4 Design Wind Loads - Solid Freestanding Walls turbulent boundary-layer flows has yet to be completely
and Solid Signs established. Additional pressure coefficients for conditions
not specified herein may be found in two references (SIA
207D.4.1 Solid Freestanding Walls and Solid 1956 and ASCE 1961).
Freestanding Signs
With regard to Figure 207D.5-3, the farce c()e//!cielll,\' (We
The design wind force for solid freestanding walls and a refinement of the coefficients specified ill liNSI A58.1-
solid freestanding signs shall be determined by the 1982 and in ASCE 7-93. The fOrOll coeffiCients specified
following formula: are offered as a simplified procedure that may be used for
trussed towers and are consistent with force coefficients
given ln ANSIIEfAITIA-222-£-/99!, Str~{('(to·tt!Stol1d.er/·cb
(207DA-l) for '(eel Antenna TD.1,!,el'sand Antemt« Supporting
Struamres, and fbrce coefficients recommended by
where Wo,.killg Group No. 4 (Recommel1d&llloll fOr Guyeq
qh velocity pressure evaluated at height h Masts), lnternational Assoctatton /01' She!' and Spatial
(defined in Figure 207DA-l) as determined Structures (1981).
in accordance with Section 207D.3.2
G gust-effect factor from Section 207 A.9 It is not the intent of this code to exclude the use of other
Cf net force coefficient from Figure 207DA-l recognized literature for the design of special structures,
such as transmission and telecommunications towers.
As the gross area of the solid freestanding wall
or freestanding solid sign, m2
Recommendatkms lor 'wind loads on tower guys {we 1101
p"olljc/~d·(IJ; in previon» editions of the code.. Recogpiized
llterature sh(}ulfl be referenced for the design of these
207D.4.2 Solid Attached Signs
l,pec;i(ll srl'll/cli/res as is noted in Section 2{).7D.I ..J. For th«
desig» of flt1gpole~', see ANSlfNAAMiW F'P](JOJ'-97, 41h
The design wind pressure on a solid sign attached to the
Ed; Guide Spec;i/icotions/or Desdgn of Melal FIClgpofes.
wall. or a, building where the plane of the sign is parallel to
and in contact with rJ1.cplane of the wall and the sign does
207D.5 Design Wind Loads-Other Structures
not extend beyond the side er top edges of the wall, shall
be determined using procedures for wind pressures on
The design wind force [or other structures (chimneys,
walls in accordance with Section 207E, and setting the
tanks, rooftop equipment for h > 60
0
and similar
,
internal pressure coefficient (GCpi) equal to O.
structures, open signs, lattice frameworks, and trussed
towers) shall be determined by the following equation:
This procedure shall also be applicable to solid signs
attached to but not in direct contact with the wall, provided
the gap between the sign and wall is no more than 0.9 m (207D.S-l)
and the edge of the sign is at least 0.9 m in from free edges
of the wall, i.e., side and top edges and bottom edges of where
elevated walls.
velocity pressure evaluated at height z as
Commentary: defined in Section 207D.3, of the centroid
ofareaAf
Signs attached to walls and subject to the geometric gust-effect factor from Section 207 A.9
limitations of Section 207D.4.2 should experience wind force coefficients from Figures 207D.S-l
pressures approximately equal to the external pressures on through 207D.S-3
the wall to which they are attached. The dimension projected area normal to the wind except
requirements for signs supported by frameworks, where where Cf is specified for the actual surface
there is a small gap between the sign and the wall, are area, m2
based on the collective judgment of the committee.
Figures 207D.5-1, 207D.5-2 and 207D.5-3. With the

exception of Figure 207D.5-3, the pressure and force
coefficient values in these tables are unchangedfrom ANSI
A58.1-1972. The coefficients $pecifi~d ItI these tables are
based on wind-tunnel tests conducted under conditions of
uniform flow and low turbulence, and their validity in
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc, (ASEP)

CHAPTER 2 . Minimum Design Loads 2-123
..
207D.5.1 Rooftop Structures and Equipment for areas thai are relatively small with respect to that of the
Buildings with h ::;18 m buildings they are on. Because Ger is expected to
approach 1.0 as At or Ar approaches that of the building
The lateral force F h on rooftop structures and equipment (Bh or BL), a linear interpolation is included as a way to
located on buildings with a mean roof height h ::;18 m avoid a step function in load if the designer wants to treat
shall be determined from Equation 2070.5-2. other sizes. The research in Hosoya et al (2001) only
treated one value of At (0. 04Bh). The research in Kopp
(2070.5-2)
and Traczuk (2008) treated values of At =O. 02Bh and
0.03Bh, and values of A; = 0.0067BL.
where
In both cases the research also showed high uplifts on the
1.9 for rooftop structures and equipment top of rooftop. Hence uplift load should also be considered
with At less than (0. 1Bh). (Ger) shall be by the designer and is addressed in Section 207D. 6.
permitted to be reduced linearly from 1.9
to 1.0 as the value of At is increased from 207D.6 Parapets
(0. 1Bh) to (Bh)
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof Wind loads on parapets are specified in Section 207B.4.5
height of the building for buildings of all heights designed using the Directional
vertical projected area of the rooftop Procedure and in Section 207C.4.2 for low-rise buildings
structure or equipment on a plane normal designed using the Envelope Procedure.
to the direction of wind, rrr'
Commentary:
The vertical uplift force, F v, on rooftop structures and
equipment shall be determined from Equation 207D.5-3. Prior to the 2002 edition of the standard, no provisionsfor
the design of parapets had been included due to the lack of
(207D.5-3) direct research. In the 2002 edition of this standard. a
rational method was added based on the committee's
Where collective experience, intuition, andjudgment. In the 2005
edition, the parapet provisions were updated as a result of
1.5 for rooftop structures and equipment research performed at the University of Western Ontario
with Ar less than (0.1BL). (Ger) shall be (Mans et al. 2000, 2001) and at Concordia University
permitted to be reduced linearly from 1.5 (Stathopoulos et at. 2002a, 2002b).
to 1.0 as the value of Ar is increased from
(0.1BL) to (BL) Wind pressures on a parapet are a combination of wall and
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof roof pressures, depending on the location of the parapet
height of the building and the direction of the wind (Figure C207D.7-1). A
horizontal projected area of rooftop windward parapet will experience the positive wall
structure or equipment, rrr' pressure on its front surface (exterior side of the building)
and the negative roof edge zone pressure on its back
Commentary: surface (roof side). This behavior is based on the concept
that the zone of suction caused by the wind stream
This code requires the use of Figure 207D.5-1 for the separation at the roof eave moves up to the top of the
determination of the wind force on small structures and parapet when one is present. Thus the same suction that
equipment located on a rooftop. Because of the small size acts on the roof edge will also act on the back of the
of the structures in comparison to the building, it is parapet.
expected that the wind force will be higher than predicted
by Equation 207D.6-1 due to higher correlation of The leeward parapet will experience a positive wall
pressures across the structure surface, higher turbulence pressure on its back surface (roof side) and a negative wall
on the building roof, and accelerated wind speed on the pressure on its front surface (exterior side of the building).
roof There should be no reduction in the positive wall pressure
to the leeward parapet due to shielding by the windward
A limited amount of research is available to provide better parapet because, typically, they are too far apart to
guidance for the increased force (Hosoya et al. 2001 and experience this effect. Because all parapets would be
Kopp and Traczuk 2008). Based on this research, the force designed for all wind directions, each parapet would in
of Equation 207D.6-1 should be increased for units with

turn be the windward and leeward parapet and, therefore, The internal pressure that may be present inside a parapet
must be designedfor both sets of pressures. is highly dependent on the porosity of the parapet envelope.
In other words, it depends on the likelihood of the wall
For the design of the MWFRS, the pressures used describe surface materials to leak air pressure into the internal
the contribution of the parapet to the overall wind loads on cavities of the parapet. For solid parapets, such as
that system. For simplicity, the front and back pressures on concrete or masonry, the internal pressure is zero because
the parapet have been combined into one coefficient for there is no internal cavity. Certain wall materials may be
MWFRS design. The designer should not typically need the impervious to air leakage, and as such have little or no
separate front and back pressures for MWFRS design. The internal pressure or suction, so using the value ofGCptior
internal pressures inside the parapet cancel out in the an enclosed building may be appropriate. However,
determination of the combined coefficient. The summation certain materials and systems used to construct parapets
of these external and internal, front and back pressure containing cavities are more porous, thus justifying the use
coefficients is a new term GCpn' the Combined Net of the GCpi values for partially enclosed buildings, or
Pressure Coefficient for a parapet. higher. Another factor in the internal pressure
determination is whether the parapet cavity connects to the
For the design of the components and cladding, a similar internal space of the building, allowing the building's
approach was used. However, it is not possible to simplify internal pressure to propagate into the parapet. Selection
the coefficients due to the increased complexity of the of the appropriate internal pressure coefficient is left to the
components and cladding pressure coefficients. In judgment of the design professional.
addition, the front and back pressures are not combined
because the designer may be designing separate elements
on each lace of the parapet. 'l'he' internal pressure is
required to determine the nee pressures on the windward
and lemvard surfaces ofth« parapet. The provisions guide
the designer to the correct GCp and velocity pressure to
use for each surface, as illustrated in Figure C207D.7-1.
Interior walls that protrude through the roof, such as party
walls and fire walls, should be designed as windward
parapets for both MWFRS and components and cladding.

f+}. H.
Figure C207D.7-1
Design Wind Pressures on Parapets

207D.7 Roof Overhangs Commentary:
Wind loads on roof overhangs are specified in This section specifies a minimum wind load to be OJ)pfir::c1
Section 207BAA for buildings of all heights designed horizontally on the entire vertical projection of the b/IUdlllg
using the Directional Procedure and in Section 207CA.3 or other structure, as shown in Figure C207B.4-J. 'Fhi.~
for low-rise buildings designed using the Envelope load case is to be applied as a separate load case it,
Procedure. addition to the normal load cases specified in Qlhel'
portions of this chapter.
207D.8 Minimum Design Wind Loading
The design wind force for other structures shall be not less
than 0.77 kN/m2 multiplied by the area At.
Table 2070.3-1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, K, and K,
Height above ground Ex osure

level, z (meters) B C D
0-4.5 0.572 0.846 1.027
6.0 0.621 0.899 1.080
7.5 0.662 0.942 1.123
9.0 0.697 0.979 1.159
12.0 0.757 1.040 1.218
15.0 0.807 1.090 1.267
18.0 0.850 1.133 1.307
21.0 0.888 1.170 1.343
24.0 0.923 1.204 1.375
27.0 0.955 1.234 lA03
30.0 0.984 1.261 lA29
36.0 1.036 1.311 1.475
42.0 1.083 1.354 1.515
48.0 1.125 1.393 1.551
54.0 1.164 lA28 1.583
60.0 1.199 1.460 1.612
75.0 1.278 1.530 1.676
90.0 l.347 1.590 1.730
105.0 lA07 1.642 1.777
120.0 lA62 1.689 1.819
135.0 1.512 1.731 1.856
150.0 1.558 l.770 1.891
Notes:
I. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient K, may be determined from the following formula:
For4.5 m~ Z s Zg For Z <4.5 m
2/« 2/a
K, = 2.01 ( z/Zg ) K, = 2.01 ( 4. 57/zg )
2. The constants a and Zg are tabulated in Table 207A.9-1.

3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height Z is permitted.
4. Exposure categories are defined in Section 207 A. 7.

~ I
I
[ ..._- rr
--
I
~ CtolIIEA
F
f
I II
.:::'F
~
F
CMEC
F F
B.l¥ATOI_
~j k.••
- I·-·j.--~~I-"-·I
F~I-'
- I=tf-¥-
IIl!.l *-1
CMEI
...... 1
I
I
t:-~ ftM __
-
~
-... .'"
CAOIUIEC11OII VIEW
C._A • ..,
111:11
,"
, ..,
~
U
,
0.7
tI..S
D~
~~
1.111
I.!II
us
195
1115
,
II.
t.
,j'U
,.
_05
'!ill
UO
112
I.M
' ..tII
t'llS
1:a:J
I.
US
'116
1.711
us
till
I.
1,lii5
,.- .
LtO
1.&Ii
I.If
1.75"
1811
Uo
.~
IAIl
HO
1m
1,111
I.IIl
I.•
1..:16
US
r,m
1.70
LID
1.10
-~
lliIi
lAS
15
VII
i,1D
I.
Iii
I.JIJ
1,410
Uii
1.'111
,,eo
I-
I~
I.CI
l_
Uti
l'lll
I.•
~
UO
Ui
uu
:l/(J
it!!;
I~
~1IIi
.JIl
Uti
Ilili
I.n.
I.
115
<:0,11 I- UD UI6
..
' UD l11!i US leE Uo LII) IJIi
--- ---...
1it.,1iMI:"
~ ~RIIa.'" ~ ~AIIID,"
.... 3 , 7
• a 13 us
0 ...
2
2.111 2.111 "
3.1D'
8
3.40' 3.56" ~
10
0..1 4m
,.
U& 3.30' 3.-'1'5' '.30'
IID2a
21"~
!lID 101
UII UII
I.•
Ull
UD
1.10 _r_
2.00
Uli
Uli
;l.IS
1M
1.l11i
2.2S
1.86
Hili
2..ilO
1.111
Ulli
2.35
1,15
lDO
2.016
o.
Uli
IID2I
2I1D!I
310 ....
2.10
2..00
ViII
;UIi
Uli
t.•
-.-
.. IDSI 116
::!',............. II
'~ IftM,?.;.::ua::-' !il,1D'0. , 0.110 1.10
_io,"""",",
~,
I~ 0.:.-
~ /.
...
·1 11
~10. oBi 11.&6
Noles:
1. The term "signs" in notes below also applies to "freestanding walls".
2. Signs with openings comprising less than 30% of the gross area are classified as solid signs. Force coefficients for solid signs with
openings shall be permitted to be multiplied by the reduction factor (1 - (1 - E)1.5). •
). To allow for both normal and oblique wind directions, the following cases shall be considered:
For slh < 1:
CASE A: resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign through the geometric center.
CASE B: resultant force acts normal to the face of the sign at a distance from the geometric center toward the windward
edge equal to 0.2 times the average width of the sign.
For His;::: 2, CASE C must also be considered:
CASE C: resultant forces act normal to the face of the sign through the geometric centers of each region.
For s th. = 1:
The same cases as above except that the vertical locations of the resultant forces occur at a distance above the geometric
center equal to 0.05 times the average height of the sign.
4. For CASE C where sth. > 0.8, force coefficients shall be multiplied by the reduction factor (1.8 - slh),
5. Linear interpolation is permitted for values of sfh, His and LTls other than shown.
6. Notation:
H: horizontal dimension of sign, m; E: ratio of solid area to gross area;
h: height of the sign, m LT: horizontal dimension of return comer, m
s : vertical dimension of the sign, m;
Figure 207D.4-1
Design Wind Loads Force Coefficients (Cf) Other Structures
All Heights of Solid Freestanding Walls & Solid Freestanding Signs

hiD
Cross-Section Type of Surface
7 25
1.3 1.4 2.0
1.0 1.1 1.5
1.0 1.2 1.4
0.5 0.6 0.7
Round (DJCh > 2.5)
0.7 0.8 0.9
(DJCh > 5.3, Din m, qz in N/m2) 0.8 1.0 1.2
Round (DJCh ::; 2.5)
All 0.7 0.8 1.2
(D qz::; 5.3, Din m, qz in N/m2)
Notes:
I. The design wind force shall be calculated based on the area of the structure projected on a plane normal to the wind direction. The
force shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
2. Linear interpolation is permitted for hi D values other than shown.
3. Notation:
D: diameter of circular cross-section and least horizontal dimension of square, hexagonal or octagonal cross-sections at elevation
under consideration, in meters;
D': depth of protruding elements such as ribs and spoilers, m; and

h: height of structure, m; and
qz: velocity pressure evaluated at height z above ground, N/m'
4. For rooftop equipment on buildings with a mean roof height of h :::;

18 m, use Section 207D.S.I.
Figure 207D.5-1
Other Structures Force Coefficients, Cf
Chimneys, Tanks, Rooftop Equipment, & Similar Structures
Flat-Sided Rounded Members

E
Members D qz s 5.3 D ««> 5.3
< 0.1 2.0 1.2 0.8
0.1 to 0.29 1.8 1.3 0.9
0.3 to 0.7 1.6 1.5 1.1
Notes:
1. Signs with openings comprising 30% or more of the gross area are classified as open signs.
2. The calculation of the design wind forces shall be based on the area of all exposed members and elements projected on a plane
normal to the wind direction. Forces shall be assumed to act parallel to the wind direction.
3. The area At consistent with these force coefficients is the solid area projected normal to the wind direction.
4. Notation:
E: ratio of solid area to gross area;
D: diameter of a typical round member, m;
qz: velocity pressure evaluated at height z above ground, N/m'
Figure 207D.5-2
Other Structures Force Coefficients, Cf All Heights of Open Signs & Lattice Frameworks

I Tower Cross Section Cf
Square 4. OE2 - 5. 9E + 4.0

I
Triangle 3.4E2 - 4. 7E + 3.4 I
Notes:
1. For all wind directions considered, the area At consistent with the specified force coefficients shall be the solid area of a tower face
projected on the plane of that face for the tower segment under consideration.
2. The specified force coefficients are for towers with structural angles or similar flat sided members.
3. For towers containing rounded members, it is acceptable to multiply the specified force coefficients by the following factor when
determining wind forces on such members:
O. 51f·2 + O. 57, but not> 1.0
4. Wind forces shall be applied in the directions resulting in maximum member forces and reactions. For towers with square cross-sections,
wind forces shall be multiplied by the following factor when the wind is directed along a tower diagonal:
1+ O. 75E, but not> 1.2
5. Wind forces on tower appurtenances such as ladders, conduits, lights, elevators, etc., shall be calculated using appropriate force
coefficients for these elements.
6. Notation:
E: ratio of solid area to gross area of one tower face for the segment under consideration.
Figure 207D.5-2
Other Structures Force Coefficients, Cf Trussed Towers of All Heights

207E Wind Loads - Components and Cladding indicate that some reduction in pressures jar compunent3 4.
(C&C) and cladding of buildings located in Exposure B ts
justified. Hence, the code permits the use of the applicable
Commentary: exposure category when using these coefficients.
In developing the set of pressure coefficients applicable for The pressure coefficients given in Figure 207E.6-1 /01'
the design of components and cladding (C&C) as given in buildings with mean height greater than 18m Were
Figures 207E.4-1. 207E.4-2A. 207E.4-2B. 207E.4-2C. developedfollowing a similar approach. but the influence
207E.4-3. 207E.4-4. 207E.4-5A. 20 7E.4-5B. and 207E.4- of exposure was not enveloped (Stathopoulos and
6. an envelope approach was followed but using different Dumitrescu-Brulotte 1989). Therefore. expOSure 5.
methods thanfor the MWFRS of Figure 207C.4-1. Because categories B, C, or D may be used with the values of(GCp)
of the small effective area that may be involved in the in Figure 207E.6-1 as appropriate.
design of a particular component (consider. e.g.. the
rt}Jiwtlve area associated with the de.l'igll of (Ifastener), the 207E.l Scope
point wise pressure fluctuations may be highly correlated
over the ellecfive area of interest. Consider the loealpurlin 207E.1.1 Building Types
loads shown in Figure C207C.4-1. The approach involved
spatial averaging and time averaging of the point This chapter applies to the determination of wind pressures
pressures over the effective area transmitting loads to the on components and cladding (C&C) on buildings.
purlin while the building model was permitted to rotate in
the wind tunnel through 360°. As the induced localized 1. Part I is applicable to an enclosed or partially
pressures may also vary widely as afunction of the specific enclosed:
location on the building. height above ground level.
exposure. . and more importantly. local geometric (see definition
• Low-rise building III
discontinuities and location of the element relative to the Section 207 A.2)
boundaries in the building surfaces (walls. roof lines),
these factors were also enveloped in the wind tunnel tests.
• Building with h ::;18 m
Thus,for the pressure coefficients given in Figures 207E.4-
1, 207E.4-2A, 207E.4-2B, 207E.4-2C, 207E.4-3, 207E.4-4,
The building has a flat roof, gable roof, multi span
207E.4-5A, 207E.4-5B, and 207E.4-6, the directionality of
gable roof, hip roof, monos lope roof, stepped roof, or
the wind and influence of exposure have been removed and
sawtooth roof and the wind pressures are calculated
the surfaces of the building "zoned" to reflect an envelope
from a wind pressure equation.
of the peak pressures possible for a given design
application.
2. Part 2 is a simplified approach and is applicable to an
enclosed:
As indicated in the discussion for Figure 207C.4-1, the
wind tunnel experiments checked both Exposure Band C
terrains. Basically (GCp) values associated with Exposure • Low-rise building (see definition in
Section 207 A.2)
B terrain would be higher than those for Exposure C
terrain because of reduced velocity pressure in Exposure
B terrain. The (GCp) values given in Figures 207E.4-1, • Building with h ::;18 m
207E.4-2A, 207E.4-2B, 207E.4-2C, 207E.4-3, 207E.4-4,
The building has a flat roof, gable roof, or hip roof and
207E.4-5A, 207E.4-5B, and 207E.4-6 are associated with
the wind pressures are determined directly from a
Exposure C terrain as obtained in the wind tunnel.
table.
However, they may also be usedfor any exposure when the
correct velocity pressure representing the appropriate
3. Part 3 IS applicable to an enclosed or partially
exposure is used as discussed below.
enclosed:
The wind tunnel studies conducted by ESDU (1990)
determined that when low-rise buildings (h < 18m) are • Building with h > 18 m
embedded in suburban terrain (Exposure B), the pressures
on components and cladding in most cases are lower than The building has a flat roof, pitched roof, gable roof,
those currently used in the standards and codes. although hip roof, mansard roof, arched roof, or domed roof and
the values show a very large scatter because of high the wind pressures are calculated from a wind pressure
turbulence and many variables. The results seem to equation.

4. Part 4 is a simplified approach and is applicable to an Commentary:

enclosed:
Air-permeable roof or wall claddings allo~ partial air
• Building with h ::;48 m pressure equalization between their exterior and interior
surfaces. Examples include siding, pressure-equalized rain
The building has a flat roof, gable roof, hip roof, screen walls, shingles, tiles, concrete roof pavers, and
monoslope roof, or mansard roof and the wind aggregate roof surfacing.
pressures are determined directly from a table.
The peak pressure acting across an air-permeable
5. Part 5 is applicable to an open building of all heights cladding material is dependent on the characteristics of
,I
having a pitched free roof, mouoslope free roof, or other components or layers of a building envelope
trough free roof. assembly. At any given instant the total netpressure across
a building envelope assembly will be equal to the sum of
6. Part 6 is applicable to building appurtenances such as thepartial pressures across the individual layers as shown
roof overhangs and parapets and rooftop equipment. in Figure C207E.I-I. However, theproportion of the total
net pressure borne by each layer will varyfrom instant to
207E.1.2 Conditions instant due to fluctuations in the external and internal
pressures and will depend on the porosity and stiffness of
A building whose design wind loads are determined in each layer, as well as the volumes of the air spaces between
accordance with this chapter shall comply with all of the the layers. As a result, although there is load sharing
following conditions: among the various layers, the sum of the peak pressures
across the individual layers will typically exceed the peak
I. The building is a regular-shaped building as defined in pressure across the entire system. In the absence of
Section 207 A.2. detailed information on the division of loads, a simple,
conservative approach is to assign the entire differential
2. The building does not have response characteristics pressure to each layer designed to carry load.
making it subject to across wind loading, vortex
shedding, or instability due to galloping or flutter; or it To maximize pressure equalization (reduction) across any
does not have a site location for which channeling cladding system (irrespective of the permeability of the
effects or buffeting in the wake of upwind obstructions cladding itselj), the layer or layers behind the cladding
warrant special consideration. should be:
207E1.3 Limitations • relatively stiff in comparison to the cladding material

and .
load magnification effect caused by gusts in resonance with • relatively air-impermeable in comparison to the
along-wind vibrations of flexible buildings. The loads on cladding material.
buildings not meeting the requirements of Section
207E.l.2, or having- unusual shapes or response Furthermore, the air space between the cladding and the
characteristics, shall be determined using recognized next adjacent building envelope surface behind the
literature documenting such wind load effects or shall use cladding (e.g., the exterior sheathing) should be as small
the wind tunnel procedure specified in Section 207F. as practicable and compartmentalized to avoid
communication or venting between different pressure
207E.1.4 Shielding zones of a building's surfaces.
There shall be no reductions in velocity pressure due to The design wind pressures derived from Section 207E
apparent shielding afforded by buildings and other represent thepressure differential between the exterior and
structures or terrain features. interior surfaces of the exterior envelope (wall or roof
system). Because of partial air-pressure equalization
207E.1.5 Air-Permeable Cladding provided by air-permeable claddings, the components and
cladding pressures derived from Section 207E can
Design wind loads determined from Section 207E shall be overestimate the load on air-permeable cladding elements.
used for air-permeable cladding unless approved test data The designer may elect either to use the loads derivedfrom ,I
or recognized literature demonstrates lower loads for the Section 207E or to use loads derived by an approved I
type of air-permeable cladding being considered. alternative method. If the designer desires to determine the
I
pressure differential across a specific cladding element in

combination with other elements comprising a specific
building envelope assembly, appropriate full-scale
pressure measurements should be made on the applicable
building envelope assembly, or reference should be made
to recognized literature (Cheung and Melbourne 1986,
Haig 1990, Baskaran 1992, Southern Building Code
Congress International 1994, Peterka et al. 1997, ASTM
2006, 2007, and Kala et al. 2008) for documentation
pertaining to wind loads. Such alternative methods may
vary according to a given cladding product or class of
cladding products or assemblies because each has unique
features that affect pressure equalization.
EXTERIOR LAYEFWHEATHING
AIR SPACE - WALL CAVITY
ClADOtNG ~- JNTERIOR LAYERIFINISH

I
I
I
BUIlDING BUllDNG
EXTERIOR a I b t d INTERIOR
•I • • •
I p. -I = presue
~ . = presswe
dilferential across cIaddI'Ig layer
dllrerentialaaoss exteria layer/sheathing
I ~- = presswe dilferential.across irterior layerlfinish
I
I
Figure C207E.I-I
Distribution of Net Components and Cladding Pressure Acting on a Building Surface
(Building Envelope) Comprised of Three Components (Layers)
207E.2 General Requirements • Basic Wind Speed V (Section 207 A.S)

• Wind directionality factor K d (Section 207 A.6)
207E.2.1 Wind Load Parameters Specified in Section
207A • Exposure category (Section 207A.7)
• Topographic factor Kzt (Section 207A.8)
The following wind load parameters are specified III
• Gust Effect Factor (Section 207A.9)
Section 207 A:
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phlllpplnes, Inc. (ASEP)

• Internal pressure coefficient (GCpi) topographic factor defined, see

(Section 207 A.II). Section 207 A.8
basic wind speed, see Section 207 A.5
207E.2.2 Minimum Design Wind Pressures velocity pressure calculated usmg
Equation 207E.3-1 at height h
The design wind pressure for components and cladding of
buildings shall not be less than a net pressure of 0.77 kN/m2 The numerical coefficient 0.613 shall be used except where
acting in either direction normal to the surface. sufficient climatic data are available to justify the selection
of a different value of this factor for a design application.
207E.2.3 Tributary Areas Greater than 65 m2
Commentary:
Component and cladding elements with tributary areas
greater than 65 m? shall be permitted to be designed using See commentary, Section C207B.3.2.
the provisions for MWFRS.
Figures 20 7E.4-1, 207E.4-2A, 20 7E.4-2B, and
207E.2.4 External Pressure Coefficients 207E.4-2C. The pressure coefficient values provided in
thesefigures are to be usedfor buildings with a mean roof
Combined gust effect factor and external pressure height of 18 m or less. The values were obtainedfrom wind-
coefficients for components and cladding, (GCp)' are tunnel tests conducted at the University of Western Ontario
given in the figures associated with this chapter. The (Davenport et al. 1977, 1978), at the James Cook
pressure coefficient values and gust effect factor shall not University of North Queensland (Best and Holmes 1978),
be separated. and at Concordia University (Stathopoulos 1981,
Stathopoulos and Zhu 1988, Stathopoulos and Luchian
207E.3 Velocity Pressure 1990, 1992, and Stathopoulos and Saathoff 1991). These
coefficients were refined to reflect results offoil-scale tests
207E.3.1 Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient conducted by the National Bureau of Standards (Marshall
1977) and the Building Research Station, England (Eaton
and Mayne 1975). Pressure coefficientsfor hemispherical
Based on the exposure category determined in
domes on the ground or on cylindrical structures were
Section 207 A. 7.3, a velocity pressure exposure coefficient
based on wind-tunnel tests (Taylor 1991). Some of the
Kz or Kh, as applicable, shall be determined from
characteristics of the values in thefigure are asfollows:
Table 207E.3-1. For a site located in a transition zone
between exposure categories, that is, near to a change in 1. The values are combined values of (GCp)' The gust
ground surface roughness, intermediate values of K z or effect factors from these values should not be
K h» between those shown in Table 207E.3-I, are permitted, separated.
provided that they are determined by a rational analysis
method defined in the recognized literature. 2. The velocity pressure qh evaluated at mean roof
height should be used with all values of(GCp).
Commentary: 3. The values provided in thefigure represent the upper
bounds of the most severe values for any wind
See commentary, Section C207B.3.1. direction. The reduced probability that the design
wind speed may not occur in the particular direction
207E.3.2 Velocity Pressure for which the worst pressure coefficient is recorded
has not been included in the values shown in the
Velocity pressure, qz, evaluated at height z shall be figure.
calculated by the following equation:
4. The wind-tunnel values, as measured, were based on
the mean hourly wind speed. The values provided in
qz = O.613KzKztKdV2 (N/m2);V in
(207E.3-I)
thefigures are the measured values divided by (1.53/
mls (see Figure C207A.5-1) to adjust for the reduced
pressure coefficient values associated with a 3-s gust
where speed.
wind directionality factor, see Section
Each component and cladding element should be designed
207A.6
for the maximum positive and negative pressures
velocity pressure exposure coefficient, see
(including applicable internal pressures) acting on it. The
Section 207E.3.I
pressure coefficient values should be determined for each Figure 20 7E. 6-1. The pressure coefficients shown in this
component and cladding element on the basis of its figure reflect the results obtained from comprehensive
location on the building and the effective area for the wind tunnel studies carried out (Stathopoulos and
element. Research (Stathopoulos and Zhu 1988, 1990) Dumitrescu-Brulotte 1989). The availability of more
indicated that the pressure coefficients provided generally comprehensive wind tunnel data has also allowed a
apply to facades with architectural features, such as simplification of the zoning for pressure coefficients, flat
balconies, ribs, andvariousfacade textures. In ASCE 7-02, roofs are now divided into three zones, and walls are
the roof slope range and values of (GCp) were updated represented by two zones.
based on subsequent studies (Stathopoulos et al. 1999,
2000, 2001). The external pressure coefficients and zones given in
Figure 207E.6-1 were established by wind tunnel tests on
Figures 20 7E. 4-4, 207E.4-5A, and 207E.4-5B. These isolated "box-like" buildings (Akins and Cermak 1975 and
figures present values of (GCp) for the design of roof Peterka and Cermak 1975). Boundary-layer wind-tunnel
components and cladding for buildings with multispan tests on high-rise buildings (mostly in downtown city
gable roofs and buildings with monos lope roofs. The centers) show that variations in pressure coefficients and
coefficients are based on wind tunnel studies (Stathopoulos the distribution of pressure on the different building
and Mohammadian 1986, Suny and Stathopoulos 1988, facades are obtained (Templin and Cermak 1978). These
and Stathopoulos and Saathoff 1991). variations are due to building geometry, low attached
buildings, nonrectangular cross-sections, setbacks, and
Figure 20 7E. 4-6. The values of(GCp) in this figure arefor sloping surfaces. In addition, surrounding buildings
contribute to the variations in pressure. Wind tunnel tests
the design of roof components and cladding for buildings
indicate that pressure coefficients are not distributed
with sawtooth roofs and mean roof height, h, less than or
symmetrically and can give rise to torsional wind loading
equal to 18 m. Note that the coefficients for corner zones
on the building.
on segment A differ from those coefficients for corner zones
on the segments designated as B, C, and D. Also, when the
Boundary-layer wind-tunnel tests that include modeling of
roof angle is less than or equal to J00, values of (GCp) for
surrounding buildings permit the establishment of more
regular gable roofs (Figure 207E.4-2A) are to be used. The
exact magnitudes and distributions of(GCp) for buildings
coefficients included in Figure 207E.4-6 are based on wind
tunnel studies reported by Saathoff and Stathopoulos that are not isolated or "boxlike" in shape.
(1992).
Figure 207E.4-7. This figure for cladding pressures on

dome roofs is based on Taylor (1991). Negative pressures
are to be applied to the entire surface, because they apply
along the full arc that is perpendicular to the wind
direction and that passes through the top of the dome.
Users are cautioned that only three shapes were available
to define values in this figure (holD = 0.5, liD =
0.5; holD = 0.0, liD = 0.5; and holD = 0.0, II
D = 0.33).

Table 207E.3-1
Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficients, Kh and Kz
Exposure
Height above ground level, Z
B C D
(m)
0-4.5 0.70 0.85 1.03
6.0 0.70 0.90 1.08
7.5 0.70 0.94 1.12
9.0 0.70 0.98 1.16
12.0 0.76 1.04 1.22
15.0 0.81 1.09 1.27
18.0 0.85 1.13 1.31
21.0 0.89 1.17 1.34
24.0 0.93 1.21 1.38
27.0 0.96 1.24 1.40
30.0 0.99 1.26 1.43
36.0 1.04 1.31 1.48
42.0 1.09 1.36 1.52
48.0 1.13 1.39 1.55
54.0 1.17 1.43 1.58
60.0 1.20 1.46 1.61
75.0 1.28 1.53 1.68
90.0 1.35 1.59 1.73
105.0 1.41 1.64 1.78
120.0 1.47 1.69 1.82
135.0 1.52 1.73 1.86
150.0 1.56 1.77 1.89
Notes:
1. The velocity pressure exposure coefficient Kz may be determined from the following formula:
For 4.57 m ::; Z ::; Zg For Z < 4.57 m
2/0: 2/0:
K, = 2.01 ( z/Zg ) K; = 2.01 ( 4. 57/zg )
2. a and Zg are tabulated in Table 207A.9-1.

3. Linear interpolation for intermediate values of height Z is acceptable.
4. Exposure categories are defined in Section 207A.7.

Part 1: Low-Rise Buildings 207E.4.2 Design Wind Pressures
Commentary: Design wind pressures on component and cladding

elements of low-rise buildings and buildings with
The component and cladding tables in Figure 207E.5-1 are h:S 18 m shall be determined from the following equation:
a tabulation of the pressures on an enclosed, regular, 9-m
high building with a roof as described. The pressures can
be modified to a different exposure and height with the 207EA-l
same adjustment factors as the MWFRS pressures. For the
designer to use this method for the design of the where
components and cladding, the building must conform to all velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof
five requirements in Section 207E.6; otherwise one of the height h as defined in Section 207E.3
other procedures specified in Section 207E.1.1 must be external pressure coefficients given in:
used.
• Figure 207EA-l (walls)
207E.4 Building Types • Figures. 207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2C (flat
roofs, gable roofs, and hip roofs)
The provisions of Section 207E.4 are applicable to an • Figure 207E.4-3 (stepped roofs)
enclosed and partially enclosed: • Figure 207E.4-4 (multispan gable roofs)
• Figures 207EA-5A and 207E.4-58
• Low-rise building (see definition in Section 207A.2) (monoslope roofs)
• Figure 207E.4-6 (sawtooth roofs)
• Building with h:S 18 m • Figure 207E.4-7 (domed roofs)
• Figure 207B.4-3, footnote 4 (arched roofs)
The building has a flat roof, gable roof, multispan gable internal pressure coefficient given III
roof, hip roof, monoslope roof, stepped roof, or sawtooth Table 207A.l1-1
roof. The steps required for the determination of wind loads
on components and cladding for these building types are
shown in Table 207E.4-1.
207E.4.1 Conditions User Note:
For the determination of the design wind pressures on the Use Part 1of Section 207 E to determine wind pressures
components and claddings using the provisions of on C&C of enclosed and partially enclosed low-rise
Section 207E.4.2 the conditions indicated on the selected buildings having roof shapes as specified in the
figure(s) shall be applicable to the building under applicable figures. The provisions in Part 1 are based
consideration. on the Envelope Procedure with wind pressures
calculated using the specified equation as applicable to
each building surface. For buildings for which these
provisions are applicable this method generally yields
the lowest wind pressures of all analytical methods
contained in this code.

Table 207E.4-1 Part 2: Low-Rise Buildings (Simplified)

Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads
Enclosed and Partially Enclosed 207E.5 Building Types
Low-rise Buildings
The provisions of Section 207E.5 are applicable to an
Step I: Determine risk category of building or other enclosed:
structure, see Table 103-1
• Low-rise building (see definition in Section 207A2)
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
applicable risk category, see Figure 207A5-
lA, B or C • Building with h ::;18 m
Step 3: Determine wind load parameters: The building has a flat roof, gable roof, or hip roof. The
);> Wind directionality factor, Kd, see steps required for the determination of wind loads on
Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A6-1 components and cladding for these building types are
shown in Table 207E.5-1.
);> Exposure category B, CorD, see Section
207A.7 207E.5.1 Conditions
);> Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1 For the design of components and cladding the building
shall comply with all the following conditions:
);> Enclosure classification, see Section
207A.IO I. The mean roof height h must be less than or equal to
);> Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpa, see 18 m (i.e. h::; 18 m).
Section 207 A.II and Table 207 AII-I
2. The building is enclosed as defined in
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure Section 207 A2 and conforms to the wind-borne debris
coefficient tc, or Kh, see Table 207E.3-1 provisions of Section 207 A.I 0.3.
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh, see
3. The building is a regular-shaped building or structure
Equation 207E.3-1
as defined in Section 207 A.2.
(GCp) 4. The building does not have response characteristics
making it .subject to across wind loading, vortex
);> Walls, see Figure 207E.4-1 shedding, or instability due to galloping or flutter; and
);> Flat roofs, gable roofs, hip roofs, see it does not have a site location for which channeling
Figure 207E.4-2 effects or buffeting in the wake of upwind obstructions
);> Stepped roofs, see Figure 207E.4-3 warrant special consideration.
);> Multispan gable roofs, see Figure 207E.4- 5. The building has either a flat roof, a gable roof with
4
fJ ::; 45°, or a hip roof with fJ ::; 27°.
);> Monoslope roofs, see Figure 207E.4-5
);> Sawtooth roofs, see Figure 207E.4-6
);> Domed roofs, see Figure 207E.4-7
);> Arched roofs, see Figure 207B.4-3
footnote 4
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation 207E.4-1

207E.S.2 Design Wind Pressures Table 207E.5-1

Steps to Determine C&C
Net design wind pressures, Pnet, for component and Wind Loads Enclosed Low-rise Buildings
cladding of buildings designed using the procedure (Simplified Method)
specified herein represent the net pressures (sum of internal
and external) that shall be applied normal to each building
Step Determine risk category, see Table 103-1
surface as shown in Figure 207E.5-I. Pnet shall be
I:
determined by the following equation:
Step Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
2: applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
Pnet = )'K ztPnet9 (207E.5-I)
lA, B or C
where Step Determine wind load parameters:

3:
). adjustment factor for building height and
~ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
exposure from Figure 207E.5-1
207A.7
topographic factor as defined in
Section 207A.8 evaluated at 0.33 mean ~ Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section
roof height, o. 33h 207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
Pnet30 net design wind pressure for Exposure B,
Step Enter figure to determine wind pressures
at h = 9 m, from Figure 207E.5-1
4: at h = 9 m., Pnet9' see Figure 207E.5-1
Step Enter figure to determine adjustment for
5: building height and exposure, )., see Figure
207E.5-1
User Note:
Step Determine adjusted wind pressures, Pnet, see
Part 2 of Section 207E is a simplified method to 6: Equation 207E.5-I.
determine wind pressures on C&C of enclosed low-rise
buildings having flat, gable or hip roof shapes. The
provisions of Part 2 are based on the Envelope
Procedure of Part 1 with wind pressures determined
from a table and adjusted as appropriate.

Part 3: Buildings with h > 18 m 207E.6.2 Design Wind Pressures
Commentary: Design wind pressures on component and cladding for all

buildings with h > 18 m shall be determined from the
In Equation 207E.6-1 a velocity pressure term, qi, appears following equation:
that is defined as the "velocity pressure for internal
pressure determination. " The positive internal pressure is 207E.6-1
dictated by the positive exterior pressure on the windward
face at the point where there is an opening. The positive where
exterior pressure at the opening is governed by the value
ofq at the level of the opening, not qh' For positive internal q qz for windward walls calculated at height z
pressure evaluation, q j may conservatively be evaluated at above the ground
height h (qj = qh)' For low buildings this does not make q q h for leeward walls, side walls, and roofs
much difference, but for the example of a 91.5-m-tall evaluated at height h
building in Exposure B with the highest opening at 18 m, qh for windward walls, side walls, leeward
the difference between q9.15 and q18 represents a 59 walls, and roofs of enclosed buildings and for
percent increase in internal pressure. This is unrealistic negative internal pressure evaluation in
and represents an unnecessary degree of conservatism. partially enclosed buildings
Accordingly, qj= qz for positive internal pressure qz for positive internal pressure evaluation in
evaluation in partially enclosed buildings where height z partially enclosed buildings where height z is
is defined as the level of the highest opening in the building defined as the level of the highest opening in
that could affect the positive internal pressure. For the building that could affect the positive
buildings sited in wind-borne debris regions, glazing that internal pressure. For positive internal
is not impact resistant or protected with an impact pressure evaluation, qj may conservatively be
protective system, qj should be treated as an opening. evaluated at height h(qi = qh)
External pressure coefficients given in:
207E.6 Building Types • Figure 207E.6-1 for walls and flat roofs
• Figure 207Bo4-3, footnote 4, for arched
The provisions of Section 207E.6 are applicable to an roofs
enclosed or partially enclosed building with a mean roof • Figure 207Eo4- 7 for domed roofs
height h > 18 m with a flat roof, pitched roof, gable roof, • Note 6 of Figure 207E.6-1
hip roof, mansard roof, arched roof, or domed roof. The Internal pressure coefficient given in
steps required for the determination of wind loads on Table 207 A.ll-1
components and cladding for these building types are
shown in Table 207E.6-1. q and qj shall be evaluated using exposure defined in
Section 207 A.ll-l
207E.6.1 Conditions
Exception.'
For the determination of the design wind pressures on the
component and cladding using the provisions of In buildings with a mean roof height h greater than 18 m
Section 207E.6.2, the conditions indicated on the selected and less than 27.4 m, (GCp) values from Figures 207E.4-
figure(s) shall be applicable to the building under I through 207E.4-6 shall be permitted to be used if the
consideration. height to width ratio is one or less.
User Note:
Section Part 3 of Section 207E for determining wind

pressures for C&C of enclosed and partially enclosed
buildings with h > 18 m having roof shapes as specified
in the applicable figures. These provisions are based on
the Directional Procedure with wind pressures
calculated from the specified equation applicable to
each building surface.

Table 207E.6-1 Part 4: Buildings with h ::;48 m (Simplified)

Enclosed and Partially Enclosed Commentary:
Building with h > 18 m
This section has been added to ASCE 7-10 to cover the
common practical case of enclosed buildings up to height
Step I; Determine risk category, see Table 103-1
h = 49 m. Table 207E. 7-2 includes wall and roofpressures
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the jOI'j7.111roofs {e < 10'1, gable roofs. hip ro~fs, monos/ope
applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5- I'ooft, ·und mansard roofs. Pressures (Ire derived /i'OIn
lA, B or C FiJt,1Ire207E.6~j (fla/roDfs), Ftgure 207E.4-2A. 8, and C
(gable and hip roofs), and Figure 207E.4-5A and B
(II'/Otlos{ope roofs) of PC!I'I3. Pressures were selected /'01'
};> Wind directionality factor, Kd• see each zone that encompasses the largest pressure
Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1 coefficients fQI' the CQli1pCll1abie zones from the different
roof shapes. Thus, for some C(~ es. the pressures tabulated
};> Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
are conservative in orde« 10 mqlt1tail'l-simplicity. The (GCp)
207A.7
values from ihesefigl//'es lII'el'e cOfnbirred with an intemal
};> Topographic factor, Kzt, see Section pres s ure aoeffieient (+ or-O;') 8)./0 obtatn (I net ao'(4ficienf
207A.8 and Figure 207A.8-1 FOI11 which· pressures were calculated. The lablda(et/
PI-·e.sSUl,'€S are applicable to the entire zone sIlO,iF"in the
};> Enclosure classification, see Section
various figures.
207A.I0
};> Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpa, see Pressures are shownfor an effective wind area of 0.93 m2•
Section 207 A.II and Table 207 A.II-I A reduction factor is also shown to obtain pressures for
larger effective wind areas. The reduction factors are
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure based on the graph of external pressure coefficients shown
coefficient Kz or Kh• see Table 207E.3-1 in the figures in Part 3 and are based on the most
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh' see Table conservative reduction for each zone from the various
207E.3-1 figures.
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient, 207E.7 Building Types

(GCp)
The provisions of Section 207E.7 are applicable to an
);> Walls and flat roofs, (0 < 10°), see
Figure 207E.6-1 enclosed building having a mean roof height h ::;49 m
with a flat roof, gable roof, hip roof, monoslope roof, or
};> Gable and hip roofs, see Figure 207E.4-2 mansard roof. The steps required for the determination of
per Note 6 of Figure 207E.6-1 wind loads on components and cladding for these building
types are shown in Table 207E.7-1.
};> Arched roofs, see Figure 207B.4-3,
footnote 4
};> Domed roofs, see Figure 207E.4-7
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, Equation 207E.6-

I

CHAPn:R 2 - Minimum Dosign Loads 2-141
207E.7.1 Wind Loads-Components and Cladding
User Note:
207E.7.1.1 Wall and Roof Surfaces
Part 4 of Section 207 E is a simplified method ./O/'

Design wind pressures on the designated zones of walls
determining wind pressures for C&C of enclosed and
and roofs surfaces shall be determined from
partially enclosed buildings with h :s 49 m. having roof
Table 207E.7-2 based on the applicable basic wind speed
shapes as specified in the applicable figures. These
V, mean roof height h, and roof slope 8. Tabulated
provisions are based on the Directional Procedure from
pressures shall be multiplied by the exposure adjustment
Part 3 with wind pressures selected directlyfrom a table
factor (EAF) shown in the table if exposure is different
and adjusted as applicable.
than Exposure C. Pressures in Table 207E.7-2 are based on
an effective wind area of 0.93 m2• Reductions in wind
pressure for larger effective wind areas may be taken based Table 207E.7-1
on the reduction multipliers (RF) shown in the table. Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads
Pressures are to be applied over the entire zone shown in Enclosed Building with h > 48.8 m
the figures. Final design wind pressure shall be determined
from the following equation:
Step Determine risk category, see Table 103-1
I:
P = Ptable(EAF)(RF)Kzt (207E.7-1)
Step Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
where 2: applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
lA, B or C
RF effective area reduction factor from
Table 207E.7-2 Step Determine wind load parameters:
EAF Exposure adjustment factor from 3:
Table 207E.7-2 y Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
Kzt topographic factor as defined 111
207A.7
Section 207 A.S Step Enter Table 207E.7-2 to determine pressure on
4: walls and roof, p, using Equation 207E.7-1.
207E.7.1.2 Parapets Rooftypes are:
Design wind pressures on parapet surfaces shall be based y Flat roof (8 < 10°)
on wind pressures for the applicable edge and corner zones y Gable roof
in which the parapet is located, as shown in
Table 207E.7-2, modified based on the following two load y Hip roof
cases: Y Monoslope roof
• Load Case A shall consist of applying the applicable

y Mansard roof
positive wall pressure from the table to the front Step Determine topographic factors, Kzt, and apply
surface of the parapet while applying the applicable 5: factor to pressures determined from tables (if
negative edge or corner zone roof pressure from the applicable), see Section 207 A.S
table to the back surface.
• Load Case B shall consist of applying the applicable Pressures in Table 207E.7-2 are based on an effective wind
positive wall pressure from the table to the back of the area of 0.93 rrr'. Reduction in wind pressure for larger
parapet surface and applying the applicable negative effective wind area may be taken based on the reduction
wall pressure from the table to the front surface. factor shown in the table. Pressures are to be applied to the
parapet in accordance with Figure 207E.7-1. The height h
to be used with Figure 207E.7-1 to determine the pressures
shall be the height to the top of the parapet. Determine final
pressure from Equation 207E. 7-1.
Commentary.'
Parapet component and cladding wind pressures can be

obtained from the tables as shown in the parapet figures
from the table. The pressures obtained are slightly Commentary:

conservative based on the net pressure coefficients for
parapets compared to roof zones from Part 3. Two load Component and cladding pressures for roof overhangs can
cases must be considered based on pressures applied to be obtainedfrom the tables as shown in Figure 207E. 7-2.
both windward and leeward parapet surfaces as shown in These pressures are slightly conservative and are based on
Figure 207E. 7-1. the external pressure coefficients contained in Figure
207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2Cfrom Part 3.
207E.7.1.3 Roof Overhangs
Design wind pressure on roof overhangs shall be based on

wind pressures shown for the applicable zones in Table
207E.7-2 modified as described herein. 'or Zones I and 2,
a multiplier of 1.0 shall be used on pressures shown in
Table 207E.7-2. For Zone 3, a multiplier of 1.15 shall be
used on pressures shown in Table 207E.7-2.
Pressures in Table 207E.7-2 are based on an effective wind

area of 0.93 rrr', Reductions in wind pressure for larger
effective wind areas may be taken based on the reduction
multiplier shown in Table 207E.7-2. Pressures on roof
overhangs include the pressure from the top and bottom
surface of overhang. Pressures on the underside of the
overhangs are equal to the adjacent wall pressures. Refer to
the overhang drawing shown in Figure 207E.7-2.
Determine final pressure from Equation 207E.7-1.

Flat Roof Gable Roof

8<IOdeg
Hip Roof
Mansard Roof
Figure 207E.7-2
C & C Zones C&C Wall and Roof Pressures, h s 48 m
Enclosed Buildings

Roof and Wall Pressures-Components and Cladding

48
~ 1-1-1'
45
c: - - Exposure Adjustment Factor
-I-f--' - -
"
::
42
h (m.) Exp B ExpD
39 48.0 0.809 1.113
: 1=-
36 45.0 0.805 1.116
.-..
- 42.0 0.801 1.11 R
33
e
....
'-'
30 -
39.0 0.796 1.121
l-
I-
I-
36.0 0.792 1.125

.c
....~
I:l.()
27 33.0 0.786 1.128
==
I:l.()
30.0 0.781 1.132
....= 24
l- I- 1-1- 1-' - 27.0 0.775 1.137
- I-
:5!
·S 21 24.0 0.768 1.141
. '1-'-
=:i 21.0 0.760 1.147
18
- -::j 18.0 0.751 1.154 -
IS
15.0 0.741 1.161 -
12 12.0 0.729 1.171 -
- l-
I- 9.0 0.713 l.UG
9
6.0 0.692 1.201
6
4.5 0.677 1.214
3
0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25
Notes to Component and Cladding Wind Pressure Table:

1. For each roof form, Exposure C, V and h determine roof and wall cladding pressures for the applicable zone from tables
above. For other exposures B or D, multiply pressures from table by the appropriate exposure adjustment factor determined
from figure above.
2. Interpolation between h values is permitted. For pressures at other V values than shown in the table, multiply table value
for any given V 'in the table as shown above:
Pressure at desired V = pressure from table at V 'x [V desired/V 12

3. Where two load cases are shown, both positive and negative pressures shall be considered.
4. Pressures are shown for an effective wind area = 0.93 m2• For larger effective wind areas, the pressure shown may be
reduced by the reduction coefficient applicable to each zone.
Notation:
h mean roof height (m)
V Basic wind speed (kph)
Table 207E.7-2 (continued)
C & C Zones C&C Wall and Roof Pressures, h s 48 m
Enclosed Buildings

Reduction Factors
Effective Wind Area
1.1
- --
_ -
"
-
I- - 1---
- 1--, - -
- _'- .-
-- --
--
I--
A
-
--
- ~ ........... 1- -
--
- - I-
1---
I- -- -
........
.........._ .......
........
r- B
... r.... ......

....... .......
.. 0.9
....... r-... - .........::.:
.......
0.9
- -_
e
.... roo..
~
'oJ _- r-....
........
--. ._
~ 0.8 " .......... 0.8
= -
e
;:: ...... . ..........
'oJ
- -- ....... f'-
=~ 1- I- - -
.......
'C
~
0.7 r-....
.......
" 0.7
-
'"" ...... -
0.6
-
- -
- - -
I-- _- --
-- - I- I- - -
- ,- - - -
0.6
- - - --
1.9 4.5 9.3 18.6 46.5 93
Effective Wind Area (rrr')
Reduction Factors
Effective Wind Area
Roof Form Sign Pressure Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5
Flat Minus D D D C E
Flat Plus NA NA NA D D
Gable, Mansard Minus B C C C E
Gable, Mansard Plus B B B D D
Hip Minus B C C C E
Hip Plus B B B D D
Monoslope Minus A B D C E
Monoslope Plus C C C D D
Overhangs All A A B NA NA
Table 207E.7-2 (continued)

C & C Effective Wind Area C&C Wall and Roof Pressures, h ~ 48 m
Enclosed Buildings

Table 207E.7-2
Components and Cladding - Part 4
C&C, V = 150 -200 kph, h = 4.5 - 15111
Exposure C
V (kph) 150 200
Load Zone Zone
h (m) Roof Form
Case I 2 3 4 I' 5 I 2 3 4 5
1 -1.5579 -2.4453 -3.3328 -1.0649 :1-1.9523
1
-2.7696 -4.3473 -5.9249 -1.8932 -3.4708
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.0649 , 1.0649 NA NA NA 1.8932 1.8932
Gable Roof 1 -1.1635 -1.9523 -2.9384 -1.2621 ,I -1.9523 .2.0685 -3.4708 -5.2238 -2.2438 -3.4708
,
Mansard Roof 2 0.6705 0.6705 0.6705 1.1635 1.0649 1.1920 1.1920 1.1920 2.0685 1.8932
15
1 -1.0649 -1.8537 -2.7412 -1.2621 '1-1.9523 -1.8932 -3.2955 -4.8732 -2.2438 -3.4708
Hip Roof
2 0.6705 0.6705 0.6705 1.1635 1.0649 1.1920 1.1920 1.1920 2.0685 1.8932
Monoslope 1 -1.3607 -1.7551 -3.0370 -1.2621 I, -1.9523 -2.4191 -3.1202 -5.3990 -2.2438 -3.4708
Roof 2 0.5719 0.5719 0.5719 1.1635 1.0649 1.0167 1.0167 1.0167 2.0685 1.8932
1 -1.4865 -2.3332 -3.1799 -1.0161 -1.8628 -2.6426 -4.1479 -5.6531 -1.8063 -3.3116
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.0161 1.0161 NA NA NA 1.8063 1.8063 I
Gable Roof 1 -1.1101 -1.8628 -2.8036 , -1.2042 -1.8628 -1.9736 -3.3116 -4.9841 -2.1408 -3.3116
Mansard Roof 2 0.6397 0.6397 0.6397 1.1101 1.0161 1.1373 1.1373 1.1373 1.9736 1.8063
12
I -1.0161 -1.7687 -2.6154 -1.2042 -1.8628 -1.8063 -3.1444 -4.6496 -2.1408 -3.3116
Hip Roof
2 0.6397 0.6397 0.6397 1.1101 1.0161 1.1373 1.1373 1.1373 1.9736 1.8063
Monoslope I -1.2983 -1.6746 -2.8977 -1.2042 -1.8628 -2.3081 -2.9771 -5.1514 -2.1408 -3.3116
Roof 2 0.5457 0.5457 0.5457 1.1101 1.0161 0.9701 0.9701 0.9701 1.9736 1.8063
I -1.4007 -2.1986 -2.9964 -0.9574 -1.7553 -2.490 I -3.9086 -5.3270 -1.7021 -3.1206
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 0.9574 0.9574 NA NA NA 1.7021 1.7021
Gable Roof I -1.0461 -1.7553 -2.6418 -1.1347 -1.7553 -1.8597 -3.1206 -4.6966 -2.0173 -3.1206
Mansard Roof 2 0.6028 0.6028 0.6028 1.0461 0.9574 1.0717 1.0717 1.0717 1.8597 1.7021 ,
9
1 -0.9574 -1.6667 -2.4645 -1.1347 -1.7553 ·1.7021 -2.9629 -4.3814 -2.0173 -3.1206
Hip Roof
2 0.6028 0.6028 0.6028 1.0461 0.9574 1.0717 1.0717 1.0717 1.8597 1.7021
Monoslope I -1.2234 -1.5780 -2.7305 -1.1347 -1.7553 -2.1749 -2.8053 -4.8542 -2.0173 -3.1206
Roof 2 0.5142 0.5142 0.5142 1.0461 0.9574 0.9141 0.9141 0.9141 1.8597 1.7021
I -1.3435 -2.1088 -2.8741 -0.9184 -1.6837 -2.3885 -3.7490 -5.1096 -1.6326 -2.9932
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 0.9184 0.9184 NA NA NA 1.6326 1.6326
Gable Roof I -1.0034 -1.6837 -2.5340 -1.0884 -1.6837 -1.7838 -2.9932 -4.5049 -1.9350 -2.9932
Mansard Roof 2 0.5782 0.5782 0.5782 1.0034 0.9184 1.0280 1.0280 1.0280 1.7838 1.6326
7.5
I -0.9184 -1.5986 -2.3639 -1.0884 -1.6837 -1.6326 -2.8420 -4.2025 -1.9350 -2.9932
Hip Roof
2 0.5782 0.5782 0.5782 1.0034 0.9184 1.0280 1.0280 1.0280 1.7838 1.6326
Monoslope I -1.1735 -1.5136 -2.6190 -1.0884 -1.6837 -2.0862 -2.6908 -4.6561 -1.9350 -2.9932
Roof 2 0.4932 0.4932 0.4932 1.0034 0.9184 0.8768 0.8768 0.8768 1.7838 1.6326
I -1.2864 -2.0191 -2.7518 -0.8793 -1.6120 -2.2869 -3.5895 -4.8921 -1.5632 -2.8658
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 0.8793 0.8793 NA NA NA 1.5632 1.5632
Gable Roof I -0.9607 -1.6120 -2.4262 -1.0421 -1.6120 -1.7079 -2.8658 -4.3132 -1.8526 -2.8658
Mansard Roof 2 0.5536 0.5536 0.5536 0.9607 0.8793 0.9842 0.9842 0.9842 1.7079 1.5632
6
1 -0.8793 -1.5306 -2.2633 -1.0421 -1.6120 -1.5632 -2.7211 -4.0237 -1.8526 -2.8658
Hip Roof
2 0.5536 0.5536 0.5536 0.9607 0.8793 0.9842 0.9842 0.9842 1.7079 1.5632
Monoslope I -1.1235 -1.4492 -2.5076 -1.0421 -1.6120 -1.9974 -2.5763 -4.4579 -1.8526 -2.8658 i
Roof 2 0.4722 0.4722 0.4722 0.9607 0.8793 0.8395 0.8395 0.8395 1.7079 1.5632
I -1.2149 -1.9069 -2.5990 -0.8304 -1.5225 -2.1598 -3.3901 -4.6204 -1.4763 -2.7066
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 0.8304 0.8304 NA NA NA 1.4763 1.4763
Gable Roof I -0.9073 -1.5225 -2.2914 -0.9842 -1.5225 -1.6130 -2.7066 -4.0736 -1.7497 -2.7066
Mansard Roof 2 0.5229 0.5229 0.5229 0.9073 0.8304 0.9295 0.9295 0.9295 1.6130 1.4763
4.5
1 -0.8304 -1.4456 -2.1376 -0.9842 -1.5225 -1.4763 -2.5699 -3.8002 -1.7497 -2.7066
Hip Roof
2 0.5229 0.5229 0.5229 0.9073 0.8304 0.9295 0.9295 0.9295 1.6130 1.4763
Monoslope I -1.0611 -1.3687 -2.3683 -0.9842 -1.5225 -1.8864 -2.4332 -4.2103 -1.7497 -2.7066
Roof 2 0.4460 0.4460 0.4460 0.9073 0.8304 0.7928 0.7928 0.7928 1.6130 1.4763

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 250 -300 kph, h = 4.5 - 15 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 250 300
Load Zone Zone
h (m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
I -4.3276 -6.7926 -9.2577 -2.9581 -5.4232 -6.2317 -9.7814 -13.3311 -4.2596 -7.8093
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.9581 2.9581 NA NA NA 4.2596 4.2596
Gable Roof I -3.2320 -5.4232 -8.1621 -3.5059 -5.4232 -4.6541 -7.8093 -11.7534 -5.0485 -7.8093
Mansard Roof 2 1.8625 1.8625 1.8625 3.2320 2.9581 2.6820 2.6820 2.6820 4.6541 4.2596
15
I -2.9581 -5.1493 -7.6143 -3.5059 -5.4232 -4.2596 -7.4149 -10.9646 -5.0485 -7.8093
Hip Roof
2 1.8625 1.8625 1.8625 3.2320 2.9581 2.6820 2.6820 2.6820 4.6541 4.2596
Monoslope I -3.7798 -4.8754 -8.4360 -3.5059 -5.4232 -5.4429 -7.0205 -12.1479 -5.0485 -7.8093
Roof 2 1.5886 1.5886 1.5886 3.2320 2.9581 2.2876 2.2876 2.2876 4.6541 4.2596
1 -4.1291 -6.4810 -8.8330 -2.8224 -5.1744 -5.9458 -9.3327 -12.7196 -4.0642 -7.4511
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.8224 2.8224 NA NA NA 4.0642 4.0642
Gable Roof I -3.0837 -5.1744 -7.7877 -3.3451 -5.1744 -4.4406 -7.4511 -11.2143 -4.8169 -7.4511
Mansard Roof 2 1.7771 1.7771 1.7771 3.0837 2.8224 2.5590 2.5590 2.5590 4.4406 4.0642
12
I -2.8224 -4.9131 -7.2650 -3.3451 -5.1744 -4.0642 -7.0748 -10.4617 -4.8169 -7.4511
Hip Roof
2 1.7771 1.7771 1.7771 3.0837 2.8224 2.5590 2.5590 2.5590 4.4406 4.0642
Monoslope I -3.6064 -4.6517 -8.0490 -3.3451 -5.1744 -5.1932 -6.6985 -11.5906 -4.8169 -7.4511
Roof 2 1.5157 1.5157 1.5157 3.0837 2.8224 2.1826 2.1826 2.1826 4.4406 4.0642
I -3.8908 -6.1071 -8.3234 -2.6596 -4.8759 -5.6028 -8.7943 -11.9858 -3.8298 -7.0212
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.6596 2.6596 NA NA NA 3.8298 3.8298
Gable Roof I -2.9058 -4.8759 -7.3384 -3.1521 -4.8759 -4.1844 -7.0212 -10.5673 -4.5390 -7.0212
Mansard Roof 2 1.6745 1.6745 1.6745 2.9058 2.6596 2.4113 2.4113 2.4113 4.1844 3.8298
9
I -2.6596 -4.6296 -6.8459 -3.1521 -4.8759 -3.8298 -6.6666 -9.8581 -4.5390 -7.0212
Hip Roof
2 1.6745 1.6745 1.6745 2.9058 2.6596 2.4113 2.4113 2.4113 4.1844 3.8298
Monoslope I -3.3983 -4.3834 -7.5847 -3.1521 -4.8759 -4.8936 -6.3120 -10.9219 -4.5390 -7.0212
Roof 2 1.4283 1.4283 1.4283 2.9058 2.6596 2.0567 2.0567 2.0567 4.1844 3.8298
1 -3.7320 -5.8579 -7.9837 -2.5510 -4.6768 -5.3741 -8.4353 -11.4965 -3.6735 -6.7347
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.5510 2.5510 NA NA NA 3.6735 3.6735
Gable Roof I -2.7872 -4.6768 -7.0389 -3.0234 -4.6768 -4.0136 -6.7347 -10.1360 -4.3537 -6.7347
Mansard Roof 2 1.6062 1.6062 1.6062 2.7872 2.5510 2.3129 i3129 2.3129 4.0136 3.6735
7.5
1 -2.5510 -4.4406 -6.5665 -3.0234 -4.6768 -3.6735 -6.3945 -9.4557 -4.3537 -6.7347
Hip Roof
2 1.6062 1.6062 1.6062 2.7872 2.5510 2.3129 2.3129 2.3129 4.0136 3.6735
Monoslope 1 -3.2596 -4.2044 -7.2751 -3.0234 -4.6768 -4.6939 -6.0544 -10.4761 -4.3537 -6.7347
Roof 2 1.3700 1.3700 1.3700 2.7872 2.5510 1.9728 1.9728 1.9728 4.0136 3.6735
I -3.5732 -5.6086 -7.6440 -2.4425 -4.4778 -5.1454 -8.0764 -11.0073 -3.5171 -6.4481
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.4425 2.4425 NA NA NA 3.5171 3.5171
Gable Roof I -2.6686 -4.4778 -6.7394 -2.8948 -4.4778 -3.8428 -6.4481 -9.7047 -4.1685 -6.4481
Mansard Roof 2 1.5378 1.5378 1.5378 2.6686 2.4425 2.2145 2.2145 2.2145 3.8428 3.5171
6
I -2.4425 -4.2517 -6.2871 -2.8948 -4.4778 -3.5171 -6.1224 -9.0534 -4.1685 -6.4481
Hip Roof
2 1.5378 1.5378 1.5378 2.6686 2.4425 2.2145 2.2145 2.2145 3.8428 3.5171
Monoslope 1 -3.1209 -4.0255 -6.9655 -2.8948 -4.4778 -4.4941 -5.7968 -10.0303 -4.1685 -6.4481
Roof 2 1.3117 1.3117 1.3117 2.6686 2.4425 1.8888 1.8888 1.8888 3.8428 3.5171
I -3.3747 -5.2970 -7.2193 -2.3068 -4.2291 -4.8596 -7.6277 -10.3958 -3.3217 -6.0899
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 2.3068 2.3068 NA NA NA 3.3217 3.3217
Gable Roof I -2.5204 -4.2291 -6.3650 -2.7339 -4.2291 -3.6293 -6.0899 -9.1655 -3.9369 -6.0899
Mansard Roof 2 1.4524 1.4524 1.4524 2.5204 2.3068 2.0915 2.0915 2.0915 3.6293 3.3217
4.5
1 -2.3068 -4.0155 -5.9378 -2.7339 -4.2291 -3.3217 -5.7823 -8.5504 -3.9369 -6.0899
Hip Roof
2 1.4524 1.4524 1.4524 2.5204 2.3068 2.0915 2.0915 2.0915 3.6293 3.3217
Monoslope I -2.9475 -3.8019 -6.5785 -2.7339 -4.2291 -4.2444 -5.4747 -9.4731 -3.9369 -6.0899
Roof 2 1.2388 1.2388 1.2388 2.5204 2.3068 1.7839 1.7839 1.7839 3.6293 3.3217

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 350 kph, h = 4.5 - 15 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 350
Load Zone
h(m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5
1 -8.4820 -13.3136 -18.1451 -5.7978 -10.6294
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.7978 5.7978
Gable Roof I -6.3347 -10.6294 -15.9978 -6.8715 -10.6294
Mansard Roof 2 3.6505 3.6505 3.6505 6.3347 5.7978
15
1 -5.7978 -10.0925 -14.9241 -6.8715 -10.6294
Hip Roof
2 3.6505 3.6505 3.6505 6.3347 5.7978
Monoslope 1 -7.4084 -9.5557 -16.5346 -6.8715 -10.6294
Roof 2 3.1137 3.1137 3.1137 6.3347 5.7978
I -8.0929 -12.7029 -17.3128 -5.5319 -10.1418
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.5319 5.5319
Gable Roof 1 -6.0441 -10.1418 -15.2639 -6.5563 -10.1418
Mansard Roof 2 3.4830 3.4830 3.4830 6.0441 5.5319
12
1 -5.5319 -9.6296 -14.2395 -6.5563 -10.1418
Hip Roof
2 3.4830 3.4830 3.4830 6.0441 5.5319
Monoslope 1 -7.0685 -9.1174 -15.7761 -6.5563 -10.1418
Roof 2 2.9708 2.9708 2.9708 6.0441 5.5319
1 -7.6260 -11.9700 -16.3139 -5.2127 -9.5567
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.2127 5.2127
Gable Roof I -5.6954 -9.5567 -14.3833 -6.1781 -9.5567
Mansard Roof 2 3.2821 3.2821 3.2821 5.6954 5.2127
9
1 -5.2127 -9.0740 -13.4180 -6.1781 -9.5567
Hip Roof
2 3.2821 3.2821 3.2821 5.6954 5.2127
Monoslope 1 -6.6607 -8.5914 -14.8660 -6.1781 -9.5567
Roof 2 2.7994 2.7994 2.7994 5.6954 5.2127
I -7.3148 -11.4814 -15.6481 -5.0000 -9.1666
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 5.0000 5.0000
Gable Roof 1 -5.4629 -9.1666 -13.7962 -5.9259 -9.1666
Mansard Roof 2 3.1481 3.1481 3.1481 5.4629 5.0000
7.5
1 -5.0000 -8.7037 -12.8703 -5.9259 -9.1666
Hip Roof
2 3.1481 3.1481 3.1481 5.4629 5.0000
Monoslope 1 -6.3889 -8.2407 -14.2592 -5.9259 -9.1666
Roof 2 2.6852 2.6852 2.6852 5.4629 5.0000
1 -7.0035 -10.9929 -14.9822 -4.7872 -8.7766
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 4.7872 4.7872
Gable Roof I -5.2305 -8.7766 -13.2092 -5.6737 -8.7766
Mansard Roof 2 3.0142 3.0142 3.0142 5.2305 4.7872
6
1 -4.7872 -8.3333 -12.3226 -5.6737 -8.7766
Hip Roof
2 3.0142 3.0142 3.0142 5.2305 4.7872
Monoslope 1 -6.1170 -7.8900 -13.6524 -5.6737 -8.7766
Roof 2 2.5709 2.5709 2.5709 5.2305 4.7872
1 -6.6144 -10.3821 -14.1498 -4.5213 -8.2890
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 4.5213 4.5213
Gable Roof I -4.9399 -8.2890 -12.4753 -5.3585 -8.2890
Mansard Roof 2 2.8467 2.8467 2.8467 4.9399 4.5213
4.5
1 -4.5213 -7.8703 -11.6380 -5.3585 -8.2890
Hip Roof
2 2.8467 2.8467 2.8467 4.9399 4.5213
Monoslope 1 -5.7772 -7.4517 -12.8939 -5.3585 -8.2890
Roof 2 2.4281 2.4281 2.4281 4.9399 4.5213

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = ISO -200 kph, h = 18 - 33111
Exposure C
V (kph) 150 200
h (m) I Roof Form

Load Zone Zone
I
Case 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 -1.8438 -2.8940 -3.9443 ·1.2603 -2.3106 -3.2778 -5.1450 -7.0121 -2.2405 -4.1077
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2603 I 1.2603 NA NA NA 2.2405 2.2405
Gable Roof I -1.3770 -2.3106 -3.4775 -1.4937 -2.3106 -2.4480 -4.1077 -6.1822 -2.6555 -4.1077
Mansard Roof 2 0.7935 0.7935 0.7935 1.3770 1.2603 1.4107 1.4107 1.4107 2.4480 2.2405
33
I -1.2603 -2.1939 -3.2441 -1.4937 -2.3106 -2.2405 -3.9002 -5.7673 -2.6555 -4.1077
Hip Roof
2 I 0.7935 0.7935 0.7935 1.3770 1.2603 1.4107 1.4107 1.4107 2.4480 2.2405
Monoslope I -1.6104 -2.0772 -3.5942 -1.4937 -2.3106 -2.8629 -3.6927 -6.3897 -2.6555 -4.1077
Roof 2 0.6768 0.6768 I 0.6768 1.3770 1.2603 1.2033 1.2033 1.2033 2.4480 2.2405
I -1.8009 -2.8267 ,I -3.8526 -1.2310 -2.2568 -3.2016 -5.0253 I -6.8490 -2.1884 -4.0121
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2310 1.2310 NA NA NA 2.1884 2.1884 "
Gable Roof 1 -1.3450 -2.2568 -3.3966 -1.4590 -2.2568 -2.3911 -4.0121 -6.0385 -2.5937 -4.0121
Mansard Roof 2 0.7751 0.7751 0.7751 1.3450 1.2310 1.3779 1.3779 1.3779 2.3911 2.1884
30
1 -1.2310 -2.1428 -3.1687 -1.4590 -2.2568 -2.1884 ' -3.8095 -5.6332 -2.5937 -4.0121
Hip Roof
2 0.7751 0.7751 0.7751 1.3450 1.2310 1.3779 1.3779 1.3779 2.3911 2.1884
Monoslope I -1.5729 -2.0289 -3.5106 -1.4590 -2.2568 -2.7963 -3.6069 -6.2411 -2.5937 -4.0121
Roof 2 0.6611 0.6611 0.6611 1.3450 1.2310 1.1753 1.1753 1.1753 2.3911 2.1884
I -1.7723 -2.7819 -3.7914 -1.2115 -2.2210 -3.1508 -4.9455 -6.7403 -2.1537 -3.9485
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2115 1.2115 NA NA NA 2.1537 2.1537
Gable Roof I -1.3236 -2.2210 -3.3427 -1.4358 -2.2210 -2.3531 -3.9485 -5.9426 -2.5525 -3.9485
Mansard Roof 2 0.7628 0.7628 0.7628 1.3236 1.2115 1.3560 1.3560 1.3560 2.3531 2.1537
27
1 -1.2115 -2.1088 -3.1184 -1.4358 -2.2210 -2.1537 -3.7490 -5.5438 -2.5525 -3.9485
Hip Roof
2 0.7628 0.7628 0.7628 1.3236 1.2115 1.3560 1.3560 1.3560 2.3531 2.1537
Monoslope 1 -1.5480 -1.9967 -3.4549 -1.4358 -2.2210 -2.7520 -3.5496 -6.1420 -2.5525 -3.9485
Roof 2 0.6506 0.6506 0.6506 1.3236 1.2115 1.1566 1.1566 1.1566 2.3531 2.1537
1 -1.7294 -2.7146 -3.6997 -1.1821 -2.1673 -3.0746 -4.8259 -6.5772 -2.1016 -3.8529
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.1821 1.1821 NA NA NA 2.1016 2.1016
Gable Roof 1 -1.2916 -2.1673 -3.2619 -1.4011 -2.1673 -2.2962 -3.8529 -5.7988 -2.4908 -3.8529
Mansard Roof 2 0.7443 0.7443 0.7443 1.2916 1.1821 1.3232 [.3232 1.3232 2.2962 2.1016
24
1 -1.1821 -2.0578 -3.0429 -1.4011 -2.1673 -2.1016 -3.6583 -5.4097 -2.4908 -3.8529
Hip Roof
2 0.7443 0.7443 0.7443 1.2916 1.1821 1.3232 1.3232 1.3232 2.2962 2.1016
Monoslope 1 -1.5105 -1.9484 -3.3713 -1.4011 -2.1673 -2.6854 -3.4637 -5.9934 -2.4908 -3.8529
Roof 2 0.6349 0.6349 0.6349 1.2916 1.1821 1.1286 1.1286 1.1286 2.2962 2.1016
1 -1.6723 -2.6248 -3.5774 -1.1431 -2.0956 -2.9729 -4.6664 -6.3598 -2.0321 -3.7256
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.1431 1.1431 NA NA NA 2.0321 2.0321
Gable Roof 1 -1.2489 -2.0956 -3.1540 -1.3547 -2.0956 -2.2203 -3.7256 -5.6072 -2.4084 -3.7256
Mansard Roof 2 0.7197 0.7197 0.7197 1.2489 1.1431 1.2795 1.2795 1.2795 2.2203 2.0321
21
1 -1.1431 -1.9898 -2.9423 -1.3547 -2.0956 -2.0321 -3.5374 -5.2308 -2.4084 -3.7256
Hip Roof
2 0.7197 0.7197 0.7197 1.2489 1.1431 1.2795 1.2795 1.2795 2.2203 2.0321
Monoslope 1 -1.4606 -1.8839 -3.2599 -1.3547 -2.0956 -2.5966 -3.3492 -5.7953 -2.4084 -3.7256
Roof 2 0.6139 0.6139 0.6139 1.2489 1.1431 1.0913 1.0913 1.0913 2.2203 2.0321
,
1 -1.6151 -2.5351 -3.4551 -1.1040 -2.0240 -2.8713 -4.5068 -6.1424 -1.9626 -3.5982
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.1040 1.1040 NA NA NA 1.9626 1.9626
Gable Roof 1 -1.2062 -2.0240 -3.0462 -1.3084 -2.0240 -2.1444 -3.5982 -5.4155 -2.3261 -3.5982
Mansard Roof 2 0.6951 0.6951 0.6951 1.2062 1.1040 1.2357 1.2357 1.2357 2.1444 1.9626
18
1 -1.1040 -1.9218 -2.8417 -1.3084 -2.0240 -1.9626 -3.4165 -5.0520 -2.3261 -3.5982
Hip Roof
2 0.6951 0.6951 0.6951 1.2062 1.1040 1.2357 1.2357 1.2357 2.1444 1.9626
Monoslope 1 -1.4107 -1.8195 -3.1484 -1.3084 -2.0240 -2.5078 -3.2347 -5.5972 -2.3261 -3.5982
Roof 2 0.5929 0.5929 0.5929 1.2062 1.1040 1.0540 1.0540 1.0540 2.1444 1.9626

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 250 -300 kph, h = 18 - 33 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 250 300
Load Zone Zone
h (m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
I -5.1216 -8.0390 -10,9564 -3.5009 -6.4182 -7.3751 -11.5761 -15,7772 -5.0412 -9.2422
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3,5009 3,5009 NA NA NA 5,0412 5,0412
Gable Roof 1 -3,8250 -6.4182 -9,6598 -4,1492 -6.4182 -5,5080 -9.2422 -13,9100 -5.9748 -9.2422
Mansard Roof 2 2.2042 2.2042 2.2042 3,8250 3.5009 3,1741 3.1741 3.1741 5.5080 5,0412
33 -9.2422
1 -3.5009 -6.0941 -9.0114 -4.1492 -6.4182 -5,0412 -8.7755 -12.9765 -5.9748
Hip Roof
2 2.2042 2.2042 2.2042 3.8250 3.5009 3.1741 3.1741 3.1741 5,5080 5.0412
Monoslope 1 -4.4733 -5.7699 -9,9839 -4.1492 -6.4182 -6.4416 -8.3087 -14.3768 -5.9748 -9.2422
Roof 2 1.8801 1.8801 1.8801 3.8250 3.5009 2.7073 2.7073 2.7073 5.5080 5.0412
1 -5.0025 -7.8520 -10.7016 -3.4194 -6.2690 -7.2036 -11.3069 -15.4103 -4.9240 -9,0273
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.4194 3.4194 NA NA NA 4,9240 4.9240
Gable Roof I -3.7360 -6.2690 -9.4351 -4.0527 -6.2690 -5.3799 -9.0273 -13.5866 -5.8358 -9.0273
Mansard Roof 2 2.1530 2.1530 2,1530 3,7360 3.4194 3.1003 3.1003 3.1003 5.3799 4,9240
30 -9.0273
I -3.4194 -5.9524 -8.8019 -4.0527 -6.2690 -4.9240 -8.5714 -12.6747 -5.8358
Hip Roof
2 2.1 530 2.1530 2.1530 3.7360 3.4194 3.1003 3,1003 3.1003 5.3799 4,9240
Monoslope 1 -4.3693 -5.6357 -9.7517 -4,0527 -6.2690 -6.2918 -8.1155 -14.0425 -5.8358 -9,0273
Roof 2 1.8364 1.8364 1.8364 3.7360 3.4194 2.6444 2.6444 2.6444 5.3799 4.9240
1 -4.9231 -7.7274 -10.5317 -3.3652 -6.1695 -7.0893 -11.1275 -15.1656 -4.8458 -8.8840
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.3652 3.3652 NA NA NA 4,8458 4,8458
Gable Roof 1 -3.6767 -6.1695 -9.2853 -3.9883 -6.1695 -5.2945 -8.8840 -13.3709 -5.7432 -8.8840
Mansard Roof 2 2.1188 2.1188 2.1188 3.6767 3.3652 3.0511 3.0511 3.0511 5.2945 4.8458
27 -8,8840
I -3.3652 -5.8579 -8.6622 -3.9883 -6.1695 -4.8458 -8.4353 -12.4735 -5.7432
Hip Roof
2 2.1188 2.1188 2.1188 3.6767 3.3652 3.0511 3.0511 3.0511 5.2945 4.8458
Monoslope J -4.2999 -5.5463 -9.5969 -3.9883 -6.1695 -6.1919 -7.9866 -13.8196 -5.7432 -8,8840
Roof 2 1.8072 1.8072 1.8072 3.6767 3.3652 2.6024 2.6024 2.6024 5.2945 4.8458
I -4.8040 -7.5404 -10.2769 -3.2837 -6.0202 -6.9178 -10.8582 -14.7987 -4.7286 -8.6691
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3,2837 3.2837 NA NA NA 4.7286 4.7286
Gable Roof I -3.5878 -6.0202 -9.0607 -3.8918 -6.0202 -5.1664 -8.6691 -13.0474 -5.6043 -8.6691
Mansard Roof 2 2.0675 2.0675 2,0675 3.5878 3.2837 2.9773 2.9773 2.9773 5.1664 4.7286
24
I -3.2837 -5.7161 -8.4526 -3.8918 -6.0202 -4.7286 -8.2313 -12.1717 -5.6043 -8,6691
Hip Roof
2 2.0675 2.0675 2.0675 3.5878 3.2837 2.9773 2.9773 2.9773 5.1664 4.7286
Monos lope I -4.1 959 -5.4121 -9.3647 -3.8918 -6.0202 -6.0421 -7.7934 -13.4852 -5.6043 -8.6691
Roof 2 1.7635 1.7635 1,7635 3.5878 3.2837 2.5394 2.5394 2.5394 5.1664 4.7286
I -4.6452 -7.2912 -9.9372 -3.1752 -5.8212 -6.6891 -10.4993 -14.3095 -4.5723 -8.3825
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.1752 3.1752 NA NA NA 4.5723 4.5723
Gable Roof 1 -3.4692 -5.8212 -8.7612 -3.7632 -5.8212 -4.9956 -8.3825 -12.6161 -5.4190 -8.3825
Mansard Roof 2 1.9992 1.9992 1.9992 3.4692 3.1752 2.8788 2.8788 2.8788 4.9956 4.5723
21
1 -3.1752 -5.5272 -8.1732 -3,7632 -5.8212 -4.5723 -7.9591 -11.7694 -5.4190 -8.3825
Hip Roof
2 1.9992 1.9992 1.9992 3.4692 3.1752 2.8788 2.8788 2.8788 4.9956 4.5723
Monos1ope 1 -4.0572 -5.2332 -9.0552 -3.7632 -5.8212 .5.8423 -7.5358 -13.0394 -5.4190 -8.3825
Roof 2 1.7052 1.7052 1.7052 3.4692 3,1752 2.4555 2.4555 2.4555 4.9956 4.5723
I -4.4864 -7.0419 -9.5974 -3.0666 -5.6222 -6.4604 -10.1403 -13.8203 -4.4160 '8.0959
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.0666 3.0666 NA NA NA 4.4160 4.4160
Gable Roof I -3.3506 -5.6222 -8.4616 -3,6345 -5.6222 -4.8248 -8.0959 -12.1848 -5.2337 -8.0959
Mansard Roof 2 1.9308 1.9308 1.9308 3.3506 3.0666 2.7804 2.7804 2.7804 4.8248 4.4160
18
I -3.0666 -5.3382 -7,8937 -3.6345 -5.6222 -4.4160 -7.6870 -11.3670 -5.2337 -8.0959
Hip Roof
2 1.9308 1.9308 1.9308 3,3506 3,0666 2,7804 2,7804 2.7804 4.8248 4.4160
Monoslope 1 -3.9185 -5.0543 -8.7456 -3.6345 -5.6222 -5.6426 -7.2782 -12.5937 -5.2337 -8.0959
Roof 2 1.6469 1.6469 1.6469 3.3506 3.0666 2.3715 2.3715 2.3715 4.8248 404160

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 350 kph, h = 18 - 33 m
Exposure C
V (kpb) 350
Load Zone
h(m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5
I -10.0384 -15.7564 -21.4745 -6.8617 -12.5797
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.8617 6.8617
Gable Roof 1 ..7.4970 -12.5797 -18.9331 -8.1323 -12.5797
Mansard Roof 2 4.3203 4.3203 4.3203 7.4970 6.8617
33
1 -6.8617 -11.9444 -17.6624 -8.1323 -12.5797
Hip Roof
2 4.3203 4.3203 4.3203 7.4970 6.8617
Monoslope 1 -8.7677 -11.3090 -19.5685 -8.1323 -12.5797
Roof 2 3.6850 3.6850 3.6850 7.4970 6.8617
1 -9.8049 -15.3900 -20.9751 -6.7021 -12.2872
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.7021 6.7021
Gable Roof I -7.3227 -12.2872 -18.4928 -7.9432 -12.2872
Mansard Roof 2 4.2198 4.2198 4.2198 7.3227 6.7021
30
I -6.7021 -11.6666 -17.2517 -7.9432 -12.2872
Hip Roof
2 4.2198 4.2198 4.2198 7.3227 6.7021
Monoslope I -8.5638 -11.0460 -19.1134 -7.9432 -12.2872
Roof 2 3.5993 3.5993 3.5993 7.3227 6.7021
I -9.6493 -15.1457 -20.6421 -6.5957 -12.0921
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.5957 6.5957
Gable Roof I -7.2064 -12.0921 -18.1993 -7.8171 -12.0921
Mansard Roof 2 4.1529 4.1529 4.1529 7.2064 6.5957
27
I -6.5957 -11.4814 -16.9778 -7.8171 -12.0921
Hip Roof
2 4.1529 4.1529 4.1529 7.2064 6.5957
Monoslope I -8.4279 -10.8707 -18.8100 -7.8171 -12.0921
Roof 2 3.5421 3.5421 3.5421 7.2064 6.5957
1 -9.4158 -14.7793 -20.1427 -6.4361 -11.7996
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.4361 6.4361
Gable Roof 1 -7.0321 ~11.7996 -17.7590 -7.6280 -11.7996
Mansard Roof 2 4.0524 4.0524 4.0524 1.0321 6.4361
24
1 -6.4361 -11.2036 -16.5671 -7.6280 -11.7996
Hip Roof
2 4.0524 4.0524 4.0524 7.0321 6.4361
Monoslope 1 -8.2240 -10.6077 -18.3549 -7.6280 -11.7996
Roof 2 3.4564 3.4564 3.4564 7.0321 6.4361
I -9.1046 -14.2907 -19.4768 -6.2234 -11.4095
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.2234 6.2234
Gable Roof I -6.7996 -11.4095 -17.1719 -7.3758 -11.4095
Mansard Roof 2 3.9184 3.9184 3.9184 6.7996 6.2234
21
1 -6.2234 -10.8333 -16.0194 -7.3758 -11.4095
Hip Roof
2 3.9184 3.9184 3.9184 6.7996 6.2234
Monoslope 1 -7.9521 -10.2570 -17.7481 -7.3758 -11.4095
Roof 2 3.3422 3.3422 3.3422 6.7996 6.2234
1 -8.7933 -13.8021 -18.8110 -6.0106 -11.0194
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.0106 6.0106
Gable Roof 1 -6.5671 -11.0194 -16.5848 -7.1237 -11.0194
Mansard Roof 2 3.7845 3.7845 3.7845 6.5671 6.0106
18
1 -6.0106 -10.4629 -15.4717 -7.1237 -11.0194
Hip Roof
2 3.7845 3.7845 3.7845 6.5671 6.0106
Monoslope 1 -7.6802 -9.9064 -17.1414 -7.1237 -11.0194
Roof 2 3.2279 3.2279 3.2279 6.5671 6.0106

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 150 -200 kph, h = 36 - 48 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 150 200

Load Zone Zone
h (m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 -1.9867 -3.1184 -4.2501 -1.3580 -2.4897 -3.5319 -5.5438 -7.5556 -2.4142 -4.4261
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3580 1.3580 NA NA NA 2.4142 2.4142
Gable Roof 1 -1.4837 -2.4897 -3.7471 -1.6095 -2.4897 -2.6378 -4.4261 -6.6615 -2.8613 -4.4261
Mansard Roof 2 0.8550 0.8550 0.8550 1.4837 1.3580 1.5201 1.5201 1.5201 2.6378 2.4142
48
1 -1.3580 -2.3639 -3.4956 -1.6095 -2.4897 -2.4142 -4.2025 -6.2144 -2.8613 -4.4261
Hip Roof
2 0.8550 0.8550 0.8550 1.4837 1.3580 1.5201 1.5201 1.5201 2.6378 2.4142
Monoslope 1 ·1.7352 -2.2382 -3.8728 -1.6095 -2.4897 -3.0848 -3.9790 -6.8850 -2.8613 -4.4261
Roof 2 0.7293 0.7293 0.7293 1.4837 1.3580 1.2965 1.2965 1.2965 2.6378 2.4142
I ·1.9724 -3.0959 -4.2195 -1.3482 -2.4718 -3.5065 -5.5039 -7.5013 -2.3969 -4.3942
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3482 1.3482 NA NA NA 2.3969 2.3969
Gable Roof I -1.4731 -2.4718 -3.7201 -1.5979 -2.4718 -2.6188 -4.3942 -6.6136 -2.8407 -4.3942
Mansard Roof 2 0.8489 0.8489 0.8489 1.4731 1.3482 1.5091 1.5091 1.5091 2.6188 2.3969
45 , -1.3482 -2.3469 -3.4705 -1.5979 -2.4718 -2.3969 -4.1723 -6.1697 -2.8407 -4.3942
Hip Roof
2 0.8489 0.8489 0.8489 1.4731 1.3482 1.5091 1.5091 1.5091 2.6188 2.3969
Monoslope 1 -1.7227 -2.2221 -3.8450 -1.5979 -2.4718 -3.0627 -3.9504 -6.8355 -2.8407 -4.3942
Roof 2 0.7241 0.7241 0.7241 1.4731 1.3482 1.2872 1.2872 1.2872 2.6188 2.3969
I -1.9438 -3.0511 -4.1583 -1.3287 -2.4359 -3.4557 -5.4241 -7.3926 -2.3621 -4.3306
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3287 1.3287 NA NA NA 2.3621 2.3621
Gable Roof 1 -1.4517 -2.4359 -3.6662 -1.5747 -2.4359 -2.5808 -4.3306 -6.5177 -2.7996 -4.3306
Mansard Roof 2 0.8366 0.8366 0.8366 1.4517 1.3287 1.4873 1.4873 1.4873 2.5808 2.3621
42
I -1.3287 -2.3129 -3.4202 -1.5747 -2.4359 -2.3621 -4.1118 -6.0803 -2.7996 -4.3306
Hip Roof
2 0.8366 0.8366 0.8366 1.4517 1.3287 1.4873 1.4873 1.4873 2.5808 2.3621
Monoslope 1 -1.6978 -2.1899 -3.7892 -1.5747 -2.4359 -3.0183 -3.8931 -6.7364 -2.7996 -4.3306
Roof 2 0.7136 0.7136 0.7136 1.4517 1.3287 1.2685 1.2685 1.2685 2.5808 2.3621
I -1.9152 -3.0062 -4.0972 -1.3092 -2.4001 -3.4049 -5.3444 -7.2839 -2.3274 -4.2669
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.3092 1.3092 NA NA NA 2.3274 2.3274
Gable Roof 1 -1.4304 -2.4001 -3.6123 -1.5516 -2.4001 -2.5429 -4.2669 -6.4219 -2.7584 -4.2669
Mansard Roof 2 0.8243 0.8243 0.8243 1.4304 1.3092 1.4654 1.4654 1.4654 2.5429 , 2.3274
39
1 -1.3092 -2.2789 -3.3699 -1.5516 -2.4001 -2.3274 -4.0514 -5.9909 -2.7584 -4.2669
Hip Roof
2 0.8243 0.8243 0.8243 1.4304 1.3092 1.4654 1.4654 1.4654 2.5429 2.3274
Monoslope 1 -1.6728 -2.1577 -3.7335 -1.5516 -2.4001 -2.9739 -3.8359 -6.6374 -2.7584 -4.2669
Roof 2 0.7031 0.7031 0.7031 1.4304 1.3092 1.2499 1.2499 1.2499 2.5429 2.3274
I -1.8724 -2.9389 -4.0054 -1.2798 -2.3464 -3.3287 -5.2247 -7.1208 -2.2753 -4.1713
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 1.2798 1.2798 NA NA NA 2.2753 2.2753
Gable Roof 1 -1.3984 -2.3464 -3.5314 -1.5169 -2.3464 -2.4860 -4.1713 -6.2781 -2.6966 -4.1713
Mansard Roof 2 0.8058 0.8058 0.8058 1.3984 1.2798 1.4326 1.4326 1.4326 2.4860 2.2753
36
1 -1.2798 -2.2279 -3.2944 -1.5169 -2.3464 -2.2753 -3.9607 -5.8567 -2.6966 '-4.1713
Hip Roof
2 0.8058 0.8058 0.8058 1.3984 1.2798 1.4326 1.4326 1.4326 2.4860 2.2753
Monoslope 1 -1.6354 -2.1094 -3.6499 -1.5169 -2.3464 -2.9073 -3.7500 -6.4888 -2.6966 -4.1713
Roof 2 0.6873 0.6873 0.6873 1.3984 1.2798 1.2219 1.2219 1.2219 2.4860 2.2753

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 250 -300 kph, h = 36 - 48 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 250 300
Load Zone Zone
h(m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 -5.5186 -8.6622 -11.8057 -3.7722 -6.9158 -7.9468 -12.4735 -17.0002 -5.4320 -9.9587
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.7722 3.7722 NA NA NA 5.4320 5.4320
Gable Roof I -4.1215 -6.9158 -10.4086 -4.4708 -6.9158 -5.9350 -9.9587 -14.9883 -6.4379 -9.9587
Mansard Roof 2 2.3751 2.3751 2.3751 4.1215 3.7722 3.4202 3.4202 3.4202 5.9350 5.4320
48
I -3.7722 -6.5665 -9.7100 -4.4708 -6.9158 -5.4320 -9.4557 -13.9824 -6.4379 -9.9587
Hip Roof
2 2.3751 2.3751 2.3751 4.1215 3.7722 3.4202 3.4202 3.4202 5.9350 5.4320
Monoslope 1 -4.8201 -6.2172 -10.7579 -4.4708 -6.9158 -6.9409 -8.9528 -15.4913 -6.4379 -9.9587
Roof 2 2.0258 2.0258 2.0258 4.1215 3.7722 I 2.9172 2.9172 2.9172 5.9350 5.4320
I -5.4789 -8.5998 -11.7208 -3.7451 -6.8660 -7.8897 -12.3838 -16.8779 -5.3929 -9.8871
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.7451 3.7451 NA NA NA 5.3929 5.3929
Gable Roof 1 -4.0919 -6.8660 -10.3337 -4.4386 -6.8660 -5.8923 -9.8871 -14.8805 -6.3916 -9.8871
Mansard Roof 2 2.3580 2.3580 2.3580 4.0919 3.7451 3.3956 3.3956 3.3956 5.8923 5.3929
45
1 -3.7451 -6.5192 -9.6402 -4.4386 -6.8660 -5.3929 -9.3877 -13.8818 -6.3916 -9.8871
Hip Roof
2 2.3580 2.3580 2.3580 4.0919 3.7451 3.3956 3.3956 3.3956 5.8923 5.3929
Monos lope 1 -4.7854 -6.1725 -10.6805 -4.4386 -6.8660 -6.8910 -8.8884 -15.3799 -6.3916 -9.8871
Roof 2 2.0113 2.0113 2.0113 4.0919 3.7451 2.8962 2.8962 2.8962 5.8923 5.3929
1 -5.3995 -8.4752 -11.5509 -3.6908 -6.7665 -7.7753 -12.2043 -16.6333 -5.3148 -9.7438
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.6908 3.6908 NA NA NA 5.3148 5.3148
Gable Roof 1 -4.0326 -6.7665 -10.1839 -4.3743 -6.7665 -5.8069 -9.7438 -14.6649 -6.2990 -9.7438
Mansard Roof 2 2.3238 2.3238 2.3238 4.0326 3.6908 3.3463 3.3463 3.3463 5.8069 5.3148
42
1 -3.6908 -6.4248 -9.5004 -4.3743 -6.7665 -5.3148 -9.2517 -13.6806 -6.2990 -9.7438
Hip Roof
2 2.3238 2.3238 2.3238 4.0326 3.6908 3.3463 3.3463 3.3463 5.8069 5.3148
Monoslope 1 -4.7160 -6.0830 -10.5257 -4.3743 -6.7665 -6.7911 -8.7595 -15.1570 -6.2990 -9.7438
Roof 2 1.9821 1.9821 1.9821 4.0326 3.6908 2.8542 2.8542 2.8542 5.8069 5.3148
1 -5.3201 -8.3506 -11.3810 -3.6365 -6.6670 -7.6610 -11.0248 -16.3887 -5.2366 -9.6005
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.6365 3.6365 NA NA NA 5.2366 5.2366
Gable Roof 1 -3.9733 -6.6670 -10.0342 -4.3100 -6.6670 -5.7215 -9.6005 -14.4492 -6.2064 -9.6005
Mansard Roof 2 2.2897 2.2897 2.2897 3.9733 3.6365 3.2971 3.2971 3.2971 5.7215 5.2366
39
1 -3.6365 -6.3303 -9.3607 -4.3100 -6.6670 -5.2366 -9.1156 -13.4794 -6.2064 -9.6005
Hip Roof
2 2.2897 2.2897 2.2897 3.9733 3.6365 3.2971 3.2971 3.2971 5.7215 5.2366
Monoslope I -4.6467 -5.9936 -10.3709 -4.3100 -6.6670 -6.6912 -8.6307 -14.9341 -6.2064 -9.6005
Roof 2 1.9530 1.9530 1.9530 3.9733 3.6365 2.8123 2.8123 2.8123 5.7215 5.2366
I -5.2010 -8.1636 -11.1262 -3.5551 -6.5177 -7.4895 -11.7556 -16.0218 -5.1194 -9.3855
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 3.5551 3.5551 NA NA NA 5.1194 5.1194
Gable Roof I -3.8843 -6.5177 -9.8095 -4.2135 -6.5177 -5.5934 -9.3855 -14.1257 -6.0674 -9.3855
Mansard Roof 2 2.2384 2.2384 2.2384 3.8843 3.5551 3.2233 3.2233 3.2233 5.5934 5.1194
36
1 -3.5551 -6.1886 -9.1512 -4.2135 -6.5177 -5.1194 -8.9115 -13.1777 -6.0674 -9.3855
Hip Roof
2 2.2384 2.2384 2.2384 3.8843 3.5551 3.2233 3.2233 3.2233 5.5934 5.1194
Monoslope 1 -4.5427 -5.8594 -10.1387 -4.2135 -6.5177 -6.5414 -8.4375 -14.5997 -6.0674 -9.3855
Roof 2 1.9092 1.9092 1.9092 3.8843 3.5551 2.7493 2.7493 2.7493 5.5934 5.1194

Table 207E.7-2
C&C, V = 350 kph, h = 36 - 48 m
Exposure C
V (kph) 350
Load Zone
h(m) Roof Form
Case 1 2 3 4 5
1 -10.8165 -16.9778 -23.1392 -7.3936 -13.5549
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.3936 7.3936
Gable Roof 1 -8.0782 -13.5549 -20.4008 -8.7628 -13.5549
Mansard Roof 2 4.6552 4.6552 4.6552 8.0782 7.3936
48
I -7.3936 -12.8703 -19.0316 -8.7628 .13.5549
Hip Roof
2 4.6552 4.6552 4.6552 8.0782 7.3936
I -9.4474 -12.1857 -21.0854 -8.7628 -13.5549
Monoslope Roof
2 3.9706 3.9706 3.9706 8.0782 7.3936
I -10.7387 -16.8557 -22.9727 -7.3404 -13.4574
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.3404 7.3404
Gable Roof I -8.0201 -13.4574 -20.2540 -8.6997 -13.4574
Mansard Roof 2 4.6217 4.6217 4.6217 8.0201 7.3404
45
I -7.3404 -12.7777 -18.8947 -8.6997 -13.4574
Hip Roof
2 4.6217 4.6217 4.6217 8.0201 7.3404
I -9.3794 -12.0980 -20.9337 -8.6997 -13.4574
Monoslope Roof
2 3.9421 3.9421 3.9421 8.0201 7.3404
I -10.5831 -16.6114 -22.6398 -7.2340 -13.2623
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.2340 7.2340
I -7.9038 -13.2623 -19.9605 i -8.5736 -13.2623 i
Gable Roof
Mansard Roof 2 4.5547 4.5547 4.5547 7.9038 7.2340
42
I -7.2340 -12.5925 -18.6209 -8.5736 -13.2623
Hip Roof
2 4.5547 4.5547 4.5547 7.9038 7.2340
I -9.2435 -11.9227 -20.6303 -8.5736 -13.2623
Monoslope Roof
2 3.8849 3.8849 3.8849 7.9038 7.2340
I -10.4274 -16.3671 -22.3068 -7.1276 -13.0673
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 7.1276 7.1276
Gable Roof I -7.7876 -13.0673 -19.6670 -8.4476 -13.0673
Mansard Roof 2 4.4878 4.4878 4.4878 7.7876 7.1276
39
I -7.1276 -12.4073 -18.3470 -8.4476 -13.0673
Hip Roof
2 4.4878 4.4878 4.4878 7.7876 7.1276
I -9.1075 -11.7474 -20.3269 -8.4476 -13.0673
Monoslope Roof
2 3.8278 3.8278 3.8278 7.7876 7.1276
I -10.1940 -16.0007 -21.8074 -6.9680 -12.7748
Flat Roof
2 NA NA NA 6.9680 6.9680
Gable Roof 1 -7.6132 -12.7748 -19.2267 -8.2584 -12.7748
Mansard Roof 2 4.3873 4.3873 4.3873 7.6132 6.9680
36
1 -6.9680 -12.1296 -17.9363 -8.2584 -12.7748
Hip Roof
2 4.3873 4.3873 4.3873 7.6132 6.9680
1 -8.9036 -11.4844 -19.8718 -8.2584 -12.7748
Monoslope Roof
2 3.7421 3.7421 3.7421 7.6132 6.9680

Part 5: Open Buildings Net pressure coefficients eN include contributions from top
and bottom surfaces. All load cases shown for each roof
Commentary: angle shall be investigated. Plus and minus signs signify
pressure acting toward and away from the top surface of
In determining loads on component and cladding elements the roof, respectively.
for open building roofs using Figures 207E.8-I, 207E.8-2
and 207E.8-3, it is important for the designer to note that
User Note:
the net pressure coefficient eN is based on contributions
from the top and bottom surfaces of the roof This implies
Use Part 5 of Section 207E for determining wind
that the element receives load from both surfaces. Such
pressures for C&C of open buildings having pitched,
would not be the case if the surface below the roof were
monos lope or troughed roofs. These provisions are
separated structurally from the top roof surface. In this
based on the Directional Procedure with wind pressures
case, the pressure coefficient should be separated for the
calculated from the specified equation applicable to
effect of top and bottom pressures, or conservatively, each
, each roof surface.
surface could be designed using the eN value from Figures
207E.8-1, 207E.8-2 and 207E.8-3.
Table 207E.8-1
207E.8 Building Types Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads
Open Buildings
The provisions of Section 207E.8 are applicable to an open
building of all heights having a pitched free roof,
monosloped free roof, or troughed free roof. The steps Step 1: Determine risk category, see Table 103-1
required for the determination of wind loads on Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the
components and cladding for these building types is shown applicable risk category, see Figure 207 A.5-
in Table 207E.8-1. lA, B orC
207E.8.1 Conditions Step 3: Determine wind load parameters:
~ Wind directionality factor Kzt!

For the determination of the design wind pressures on see Section 207 A.6 and Table 207 A.6-1
components and claddings using the provisions of Section
207E.8.2, the conditions indicated on the selected figure(s) ~ Exposure category B, CorD, see Section
shall be applicable to the building under consideration. 207A.7
.
~ Topographic factor Kzt, see Section
207E.8.2 Design Wind Pressures 207A.8 and Figure 207A.8-1
The net design wind pressure for component and cladding ~ Gust effect factor, G, see Section 207 A.9
elements of open buildings of all heights with monoslope, Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure
pitched, and troughed roofs shall be determined by the coefficient, «, or Kh, see Table 207E.3-1
following equation:
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure,
see Equation 207E.3-1
(207E.8-1)
Step 6: Determine net pressure coefficients, eN
where ~ Monosloped roof, see Figure 207E.8-1
velocity pressure evaluated at mean roof ~ Pitched roof, see Figure 207E.8-2
height h using the exposure as defined in
Section 207 A. 7.3 that results in the highest ~ Troughed roof, see Figure 207E.8-3
wind loads for any wind direction at the site Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, see Equation
gust-effect factor from Section 207 A.9 207E.8-1
net pressure coefficient given in:
• Figure 207E.8-1 for monos loped roof
• Figure 207E.8-2 for pitched roof
• Figure 207E.8-3 for troughed roof

Part 6: Building Appurtenances and Rooftop • Load Case B: Leeward Parapet shall consist of
Structures and Equipment applying the applicable positive wall pressure from
Figure 207EA-I (h::; 18 m) or Figure 207E.6-1
207E.9 Parapets (h > 18 m) to the windward surface of the parapet,
and applying the applicable negative wall pressure
The design wind pressure for component and cladding from Figure 207EA-l (h ::; 18 m) or Figure 207E.6-1
elements of parapets for all building types and heights, (h > 18 m) as applicable to the leeward surface. Edge
except enclosed buildings with h ::;48 m for which the and comer zones shall be arranged as shown in the
provisions of Part 4 are used, shall be determined from the applicable figures. (GCp) shall be determined for
following equation: appropriate roof angle and effective wind area from
the applicable figures.
(207E.9-1)
If internal pressure is present, both load cases should be
evaluated under positive and negative internal pressure.
where
velocity pressure evaluated at the top of the The steps required for the determination of wind loads on
parapet component and cladding of parapets are shown in Table
external pressure coefficient given in 207E.9-1.
• Figure 207EA-l for walls with h > 18 m
• Figures 207EA-2A to 207EA-2C for flat User Note:
roofs, gable roofs, and hip roofs
• Figure 207EA-3 for stepped roofs Use Part 6 of Section 207E for determining wind
• Figure 207EA-4 for multispan gable roofs pressures for C&C on roof overhangs and parapets of
• Figure 207EA-5A and 207EA-5B for buildings. These provisions are based on the
monoslope roofs Directional Procedure with wind pressures calculated
• Figure 207EA-6 for sawtooth roofs from the specified equation applicable to each roof
• Figure 207EA- 7 for domed roofs of all overhang or parapet surface.
heights
• Figure 207E.6-1 for walls and flat roofs
with h > 18 m
• Figure 207BA-3 for footnote 4 for arched
roofs
internal pressure coefficient from
Table 207 A.ll-l, based on the porosity of the
parapet envelope
Two load cases, see Figure 207E.9-1, shall be considered:
• Load Case A: Windward Parapet shall consist of

applying the applicable positive wall pressure from
Figure 207EA-l (h::; 18 m) or Figure 207E.6-1
(h> 18 m) to the windward surface of the parapet
while applying the applicable negative edge or comer
zone roof pressure from Figures 207EA-2 (A, B or C),
207EA-3, 207EA-4, 207EA-5 (A or B), 207EA-6,
207EA-7, Figure 207BA-3 footnote 4, or Figure
207E.6-1 (h> 18 m) as applicable to the leeward
surface of the parapet.

Table 207E.9-1 207E.10 Roof Overhangs

Parapets The design wind pressure for roof overhangs of enclosed
and partially enclosed buildings of all heights, except
enclosed buildings with h :::;48 m for which the provisions
Step I: Determine risk category, see Table 103-1
of Part 4 are used, shall be determined from the following
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the equation:
lA, B orC
(207E.I 0-1)
~ Wind directionality factor Kzt, where
see Section 207 A6 and Table 207 A.6-1 velocity pressure from Section 207E.3.2
~ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section evaluated at mean roof height h using
207A.7 exposure defined in Section 207 A. 7.3
~ Topographic factor Kzt, see Section external pressure coefficients for overhangs
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A8-1 given in Figures 207E.4-2A to 207E.4-2C (flat
~ Enclosure classification, see Section roofs, gable roofs, and hip roofs), including
207A.lO contributions from top and bottom surfaces of
~ Internal pressure coefficient, (GCpJ, see overhang. The external pressure coefficient
Section 207 All and Table 207 A.II-I for the covering on the underside of the roof
I Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure overhang is the same as the external pressure
coefficient, K h' at the top of the parapet see coefficient on the adjacent wall surface,
Table 207E.3-1 adjusted for effective wind area, determined
from Figure 207E.4-1 or Figure 207E.6-1 as
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qp' at the top of
applicable
the parapet, see Equation 207E.3-1 internal pressure coefficient given III
Step 6: Determine external pressure coefficient for Table 207A.ll-1

wall and roof surfaces adjacent to parapet,
(GCp)
~ Walls with h s 18 ill, see Figure 207E.4-

1
~ Flat, gable and hip roofs, see Figures
207E.4-2A to 207E.4.2C
~ Stepped roofs, see Figure 207E.4-3
~ Muitispan gable roofs, see Figure
207E.4-4
~ Monoslope roofs, Figures 207E.4-5A and
207E.4-5B
~ Sawtooth roofs, see Figure 207E.4-6
~ Domed roofs of all heights, see Figure
207E.4-7
~ Walls and flat roofs with h > 18 m, see
Figure 207E.6-1
~ Arched roofs, see footnote 4 of Figure
207B.4-3
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, see Equation
207E.9-1 on windward and leeward face of
parapet, considering two load cases (Case A
and Case B) as shown in Figure 207E.9-1

The steps required for the determination of wind loads on 207E.ll Rooftop Structures and Equipment for
components and cladding of roof overhangs are shown in Buildings with h:::; 18 m
Table 207E.1 0-1.
The components and cladding pressure on each wall of the
Table 207E.1 0-1 rooftop structure shall be equal to the lateral force
Steps to Determine C&C Wind Loads determined in accordance with Section 207D.5.1 divided
Roof Overhangs by the respective wall surface are of the rooftop structure
and shall be considered to act inward and outward. The
components and cladding pressure on the roof shall be
Step 1: Determine risk category, see Table 103-1 equal to the vertical uplift force determined in accordance
Step 2: Determine the basic wind speed, V, for the with Section 207D.5.1 divided by the horizontal projected
applicable risk category, see Figure 207A5- area of the roof of the rooftop structure and shall be
lA, B orC considered to act in the upward direction.

~ Wind directionality factor Kzt,
see Section 207 A6 and Table 207 A6-1
~ Exposure category B, C or D, see Section
207A.7
~ Topographic factor Kzt, see Section
207 A.8 and Figure 207 A.8-1
Enclosure classification, see Section
207AlO
Internal pressure coefficient,

see Section 207 All
Table 207 AII-I
Step 4: Determine velocity pressure exposure
coefficient, Kh, see Table 207E.3-1
Step 5: Determine velocity pressure, qh' at mean roof

height h using Equation 207E.3-1
(GCp), using Figures 207E.4-2A through C
for flat, gabled and hip roofs
Step 7: Calculate wind pressure, p, using
Equation 207E.l 0-1, refer to
Figure 207E.I 0-1

-1.8
-1.6
-1.4
l-UJ __"""",
-1.4
-1.2
~
--
""""""" ~ !!IIo
-1.1
-1.0
-0.8
-0.6
-- -0.8
-0.4
-0.2
o
+0.2
+0.4
a
..........
Q)
+0.6
+0.8
+1.0
I~
+0.7
+1.0
~ +1.2
~ 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
Effective Wind Area, m2
Notes:
I. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, rrr'.
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures.
5. Values of GCp for walls shall be reduced by 10% when (J ::; 10 0 •
6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or O. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
0
h mean roof height, m, except that eave height shall be used for (J ::; 10
Figure 207E.4-1
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Walls, h s 18 m Enclosed
Partially Enclosed Buildings

a
f
-1.&
-3.0 :-Q) Roof

-2.& -2.8
0. -2.6 '\.
U
, L
<.:J
+-'
-2.4
-2.2
" a
r
!=1
...... -2.0
0
o -1.& -m "'-, -1.8 0. -3.2
is
U
Q)
0
-1.6
-1.4
-1.2
-cD
"' "-~ '-
"'"'- -1.1
U -3.0
._-~
<.:J
~
<!)
-2.8
-2.6
~ -1.0 -1.0
~.9 U -2.4
CIl
CIl
-0.& ~
~ -2.2
0 -0.6 <!)
'-' 0-2.0
A.. -0.4
....... U -1.8
-0.2 -1.1
-1.6 -1:6
0 ~
....~ +0.2 ~ +0.2
en
CIl
<!)
-1.4
+0.3
~ +0.4 '-' -1.2
A.. -1.1
+0.6 ....... -1.0
CI:l
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 1&.6 46.5 92.9
S0 ;Q
-
-0.8
2
Effective Wind Area, m -0.6
>< 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92:9
~
Notes:
Effective Wind Area, rrr'
I. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh'
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, rrr',
0
5. If a parapet equal to or higher than 0.9 m is provided around the perimeter of the roof with (J :::; 7 , the negative values of GCp in Zone 3 shall be equal
to those for Zone 2 and positive values of GCp in Zones 2 and 3 shall be set equal to those for wall Zones 4 and 5 respectively in Figure 207E.4-1.
6. Values of GCp for roof overhangs include pressure contributions from both upper and lower surfaces.
7. Notation:
0
h eave height shall be used for (J :::; 10 •
Figure 207EA-2A
External Pressure Coefficients, CCp Gable Roofs () s 7°, h s 18 m

-3.0
a U
0..
-2.8
-2.6
F® -- -2.6
r 0
'~f
v
......
-2.4
-2.2
-2.0
""""'- ~
Roof
-2.0
U -1.8 1--(2) ·17

~
~
-1.6
~
CD V
0
-1.4
....,""" -1.2
-1.2
U
V -1.0 'QJ5 ,
.09
-0.8 .0.8
~
rJ:J
rJ:J -0.6
L V
I-<
p..
-0.4
a -0.2
r-~a~- .......
~ 0
-SV I
+0.2
+1).3
+0.4 ~ +1),5
l>< +0.6
~ ,
+0.8
j•
0_1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
-4.0
-3.8 ,_(D
-3.6
Overhan -3.7
-3.4 ~
-3.2 \..
-3.0
-2.8
-2.6
.
" "-
~
-2.5
-2.4
-2.2
'12) I
-2,2
l ~
S
-2.0
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
a
r ~
~
Notes:
I. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, rrr'.
6. For hip roofs with 7 < () ::; 27", edge/ridge strips and pressure coefficients for ridges of gabled roofs shall apply on each hip.
7. For hip roofs with (J ::; 25", Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
8. Notation:
A 10% of least horizontal dimension or O. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension 0.9 m.
mean roof height, m, except that eave height shall be used for (J ::; 10
0
h •
Figure 207EA-2B
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp GablelHip Roofs 7° < o s 27°, h s 18 m

-1.6
-1.4
-®&1J Roof
-
-1.2 - I- -~ ·12
-1.0
r-- ...
r-- ....
-1.0
-0.8 -0. -0.8
-0.6
-0.4
-
-0.2 t- - -
o - I--- -
-
-- - _.
«iz ,
- 1- -
-Hl.4 !- ~- f-
+0.6
+0.8 i{!)(2)aQ)·
- -
+1.0
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
l Effective Wind Area, rrr'

(l
r
0.
U -3.0
0 -2.8
~~ -2.6
.....
~
o
-2.4
~ -2.2
~
~ -2.0
0
U -1.8
~ -1.6
~
;:::::l
r:/l -1.4
.~ o:
~ -1.2
~
h p..
--' -1.0
_ __t_ ro 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
S~
>;; Effective Wind Area, m2
~
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with q".

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area, m'
6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or O. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension 0.9 m.
8 angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-2C
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Gable Roofs 27° < () ~ 45°, h ~ 18 m

-I, 1
lJ
h1 2:: 3 m
b = 1.5h1
b < 30m
h1
- = 0.30 to 0.70
h
WI
w = 0.25 to 0.75
Notes:
t~ .1 W2
W
I, On the lower level of flat, stepped roofs shown in Figure 207E.4-3, the zone designations and pressure coefficients shown in Figure 207E.4-2A shall
apply, except that at the roof-upper wall intersectiorus), Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2 and Zone 2 shall be treated as Zone 1. Positive values of GCp
equal to those for walls in Figure 207E.4-1 shall apply on the cross-hatched areas shown in Figure 207E.4-3.
2. Notation:
b 1. 5hl in Figure 207E.4-3, but not greater than 30 m.

n, hi or h2 in Figure 207E.4-3; h = hi + h2; hi ;:::3.1 m; h;/h = 0.3 to 0, 7.
W Building width in Figure 207E.4-3.
Wi WI orW2 orW3 in Figure207E.4-3. =W WI + W2 or WI + Wz + W3;WdW = 0.25 to 0.75.
8 Angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207EA-3
External Pressure Coefficients, CCp Stepped Roofs, h :5 18 m

a
r I
I ELEVA TlON OF BUILDING (2 or More Spans)
I
I
I
J
(0 2
I
I
I
I
I
I PLAN AND ELEVATION OF A SINGLE SPAN MODULE
l
a.
t
-3.0 -3.0
-2,8 -(3) -2.8 ~
10°< () S 30° 30°< e S 45°
-2,7
0.. -2.6
13)
-2,6 -2.6
U
V
·2,4
·2,2
-0 ",
........._ ~ -2,2 U
V
0.. -2.4
-2.2
1(2J
-2,5
~~-2.0
......
(!)
U -1.6
-1.8
1\1)
~ '" ~
-1.7
-1.6
~(!)
~ -2.0
......
-1.8
-1.6
[-CD
~
"' ""'- "'-

-2.0
-1.7
~
~ -1.4 -1.4
U
-1.4
~
~
(!)
-1.2 -1.2
~
0 (!)
·1.1
U-l.O 0
(!) ·0.8
U -1.0
-0,8
(!)
~ -0,6 -0.6
00
00 -0.4
~
00 -0,4
(!) 00
;..., -0.2 (!) -0.2
~ ;...,
...... 0 ~ 0
ro ......
a
(!)
.......
+0.2
+0.4
1(1)(2)&(3)
+0,4
ro
a
+0.2
+0,4
(!)
>< +0.6 +0.6
t;;
+0,6
~ +0.8 +0.8 +0,8
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9

~ 1l1)(2)&(3)
+1.0
+1.0
Notes: Effective Wind Area, m2 +1.2
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with o«. 0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9
2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, m2 Effective Wind Area rrr'
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectlvet y. '
4. Each component shall be designed for maximum positive and negative pressures,
5. For (J ~ 10°, values of GCp from Figure 207E.4-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
h mean roof height, m, except that the eave height shall be used for (J ~ 10°
W building module width, m
Figure 207E.4-4
External Pressure Coefficients, CCp Multispan Gable Roofs, h ::; 18 m

CHAPTER 2 _ Minimum Design Loads 2-165
-3.0
r 2et
1 r 1
2et -2.8
[(3') I'
r ®:
-2.6 -2.6
-y f'-. I
I @ 0.. -2.4
2r U '"
I
~
o -2.2
" "-
40:
I __ _J
I
~~-2.0
.....a.>U -1.8
:-W ~ IIiIo.. I
-1.8
L_ -(2') I~ I
I ~
-1.6 -1.6
I ~ -1.4 -{_2) ~ -1.5
I
I
CD a.>
0
U -1.2
~ I, -1.3
-1.2
-w
-1.1
I ~-1.0
rL ®~
I
--I ;:::$ -0.8

00
I 00
-0.6
a.>
;.....
-'-f ~
.-;
-0.4 I
I
I ~ -0.2
_jet
a
a.>
..... 0 ALLZON£S
>< +0.2 +0.2
+0.3
~ +0.4
+0.6
+0.8
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.5 92.9

j
J
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh'

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, m'
5. For 8 ::; 30, values of GCp from Figure 207E.4-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
h eave height shall be used for 8 ::; 100
W building width, m
8 angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-5A
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Monoslope Roofs, 30 < () ::; 100,h ::; 18 m

I
-3.0
2a1
r
-2.9
-jar -2.S
[-cD t---
-2.6
'"I' ..
r 0) L--
1
2 --I
I
--r
a -2.4
-2.2
-2.0
,
~
~
-2,0
1
1 0..
I U
o
-~
-I.S
I
I t-(2J
_ _j
I
1 I=l
.....u
Q)
-1.6
-1.4
.......... ............. -1.6
1 ~ -1.3
@1
t
I
CD 12
~
~
Q)
-1.2
-1.0 !CD ·1.2

-1.1
0
I
-, I u -O.S
r 0)
I Q) -0.6
j ~
I (/'J
-0.4
I (/'J
I Q)
~
-0.2
1
t
I p..
o
r-- --_j
a .......
ro +0.2
S
Q) +0.4
-HlJ
-HI.4
~ +0.6
~
+O.S
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 IS.6 46.5 92.9
I Effective Wind Area, rrr'
J
I. w J
Notes:
l. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh'

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, m'
5. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or O. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension 0.9 m
W building width, m
8 angle of plane of roof from horizontal, a
Figure 207EA-5B
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Monoslope Roofs, 10° < 8 s 30°, h s 18 m

(l -4.4
r -4.2 ~SPANA)
-4.1
-4.0
-3.S r--...
,.,
~l -3.7
-3.6
U
0.. -3.4
-3.2
1(2) - ~
-)2
d -3.0
+-'~
0
......
Q)
-2.S
i-0)(SPAN
'"... ,
B.C & D)
~
, , ~
-...
'" .... , ...
-2.6 -1.6
~
~
C,)
Q)
-2.4
-2.2
rw ~ ... "I11III
,., -2.1
, '"
-2 I
0 ~
(l
U -2.0 ~ ~ ~ ·1.9
Q) -I.S
.... ......
I-<
::s
(/)
(/)
Q)
I-<
Po;
-1.6
-1.4
-1.2
.... " "'- ,...... '-.:
-1.6
-1.1
1 ........
ro
E
-1.0
-O.S f-----
J ~
Q)
+-'
:><
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
+0.2
+0.4 +0.4
+0.6 _(i")
J
+0.7
~
+O.S
j 3)
ILlV "'-.L~ ... _.'" , ..... +O,a
+1.0
Elevation of Building (2 or More Spans) +1.2
+1.1
+1.4
\6J
0.1 0.9 1.9 4.6 9.3 18.6 46.S 92.9
Notes:
1. Vertical scale denotes GCp to be used with qh.

2. Horizontal scale denotes effective wind area A, m2
3. Plus and minus signs signify pressures acting toward and away from the surfaces, respectively,
5. For fJ ::; 10°, values of GCp from Figure 207E.4-2A shall be used.
6. Notation:
h mean roof height, m, except that the eave height shall be used for I] ::; 10°
W building module width, m
fJ angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.4-6
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Sawtooth Roofs, h ~ 18 m

Wind.
f
Wind.
h
External Pressure Coefficient for Domes with a Circular Base

e, degrees Negative Pressures Positive Pressures Positive Pressures
0-90 0-60 61-90
GCp -0.90 +0.90 +0.50
Notes:
1. Values denote GCp to be used with q(hD+f)' where hD + f is the height at the top of the dome.
4. Values apply to 0 s hDID s 0.5, O. 2 s f ID ~ 0.5.
5. 8 = 0° on dome springline, 8 = 90° at dome center top point. f is measured from spring line to top.
Figure 207EA-7
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Doomed Roofs, All Heights
Enclosed, Partially Enclosed Buildings and Structures

Flat Roof Hip Roof (70 < 9 s 27°)
Gable Roof (9 s 7°) Gable Roof (7° < 9 :::;45°)
D Interior Zones • End Zones .Corner Zones

Roofs - Zone l!Walls - Zone 4 Roofs - Zone 2/Walls - Zone 5 Roofs - Zone 3
Notes:
I. Pressures shown are applied normal to the surface, for exposure B, at h = 9 m. Adjust to other conditions using Equation 207E.5-1.
3. For hip roofs with (J :::; 25°, Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
4. For effective wind areas between those given, value may be interpolated, otherwise use the value associated with the lower effective wind area.
5. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or o. 4h, whichever is smaller, but not less than either 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
h mean roof height, m, except that the eave height shall be used for (J < 10°
Figure 207E.5-1
Design Wind Pressures Walls and Roofs, h s 18 m
Enclosed Buildings
I.
I
Net Design Wind Pressure, Pnet (kPa) (Exposure B at h = 10 m with I = 1.0 and Kd = 1.0)
Effective Basic Wind Speed V (kph)

Zone wind area
(sq. m.) 150 200 250 300 350
1 1.0 0.30 -0.75 0.54 -1.33 0.84 -2.08 1.22 -2.99 1.65 -4.07
1 2.0 0.28 -0.73 0.51 -1.29 0.79 -2.02 1.14 -2.91 1.55 -3.96
1 4.5 0.26 -0.70 0.46 -1.25 0.72 -1.95 1.04 -2.81 1.41 -3.83
..'"
'"'"
bJl
1
2
9.5
1.0
0.24
0.30
-0.68
-1.25
0.43
0.54
-1.22
-2.23
0.67
0.84
-1.90
-3.48
0.96
1.22
-2.74
-5.02
1.31
1.65
-3.72
-6.83
'"
"C
I- 2 2.0 0.28 -1.12 0.51 -1.99 0.79 -3.11 1.14 -4.48 1.55 -6.10
B 2 4.5 0.26 -0.94 0.46 -1.68 0.72 -2.62 1.04 -3.77 1.41 -5.14
=...
Q
2 9.5 0.24 -0.81 0.43 -1.44 0.67 -2.25 0.96 -3.24 1.31 -4.41
Q
3 1.0 0.30 -1.89 0.54 -3.36 0.84 -5.25 1.22 -7.56 1.65 -10.29
I:t:
3 2.0 0.28 -1.56 0.51 -2.78 0.79 -4.34 1.14 -6.26 1.55 -8.52
3 4.5 0.26 -1.14 0.46 -2.02 0.72 -3.16 1.04 -4.55 1.41 -6.19
3 9.5 0.24 -0.81 0.43 -1.44 0.67 -2.25 0.96 -3.24 1.31 -4.41
1 1.0 0.43 -0.68 0.77 -1.22 1.20 -1.90 1.72 -2.74 2.34 -3.72
1 2.0 0.39 -0.66 0.70 -1.18 1.09 -1.85 1.57 -2.66 2.14 -3.62
'" 1 4.5 0.34 -0.64 0.61 -1.14 0.95 -1.78 1.37 -2.56 1.86 -3.48
...'"'"
bJl 1 9.5 0.31 -0.62 0.55 -1.1 0 0.85 -1.72 1.23 -2.48 1.67 -3.38
'"
"C 2 1.0 0.43 -1.19 0.77 -2.12 1.20 -3.32 1.72 -4.77 2.34 -6.50
....
I-
2 2.0 0.39 -1.10 0.70 -1.95 1.09 -3.04 1.57 -4.38 2.14 -5.96
B 2 4.5 0.34 -0.97 0.61 -1.72 0.95 -2.69 1.37 -3.88 1.86 -5.27
I-
2 9.5 0.31 -0.88 0.55 -1.56 0.85 -2.44 1.23 -3.51 1.67 -4.77
...
A
Q
Q
3 1.0 0.43 -1.76 0.77 -3.14 1.20 -4.90 1.72 -7.05 2.34 -9.60
I:t: 3 2.0 0.39 -1.65 0.70 -2.93 1.09 -4.57 1.57 -6.59 2.14 -8.96
3 4.5 0.34 -1.49 0.61 -2.66 0.95 -4.15 1.37 -5.98 1.86 -8.14
3 9.5 0.31 -1.38 0.55 -2.45 0.85 -3.83 1.23 -5.52 1.67 -7.52
1 1.0 0.68 -0.75 1.22 -1.33 1.90 -2.08 2.74 -3.00 3.72 -4.09
1 2.0 0.66 -0.71 1.18 -1.27 1.85 -1.98 2.66 -2.85 3.62 -3.88
..
'"
'"
'"
bJl
1
1
4.5
9.5
0.64
0.62
-0.66
-0.62
1.14
1.10
-1.17
-1.10
1.78
1.72
-1.83
-1.72
2.56
2.48
-2.63
-2.48
3.48
3.38
-3.59
-3.38
'"
"C 2 1.0 0.68 -0.88 1.22 -1.56 1.90 -2.44 2.74 -3.51 3.72 -4.77
'"
..". 2 2.0 0.66 -0.84 1.18 -1.49 1.85 -2.32 2.66 -3.34 3.62 -4.55
....
Q
2 4.5 0.64 -0.79 1.14 -1.40 1.78 -2.18 2.56 -3.14 3.48 -4.27
....
I-
2 9.5 0.62 -0.75 1.10 -1.33 1.72 -2.08 2-.48 -3.00 3.38 -4.09
...
A
Q 3 1.0 0.68 -0.88 1.22 -1.56 1.90 -2.44 2.74 -3.51 3.72 -4.77
~ 3 2.0 0.66 -0.84 1.18 -1.49 1.85 -2.32 2.66 -3.34 3.62 -4.55
3 4.5 0.64 -0.79 1.14 -1.40 1.78 -2.18 2.56 -3.14 3.48 -4.27
3 9.5 0.62 -0.75 1.10 -1.33 1.72 -2.08 2.48 -3.00 3.38 -4.09
4 1.0 0.75 -0.81 1.33 -1.44 2.08 -2.25 2.99 -3.24 4.07 -4.41
4 2.0 0.72 -0.78 1.27 -1.38 1.99 -2.16 2.86 -3.12 3.90 -4.24
4 4.5 0.67 -0.73 1.19 -1.30 1.86 -2.03 2.68 -2.93 3.65 -3.98
4 9.5 0.64 -0.70 1.13 -1.24 1.77 -1.94 2.55 -2.80 3.46 -3.81
=.. 4 46.5 0.56 -0.62 0.99 -1.10 1.55 -1.72 2.23 -2.48 3.03 -3.38
~ 5 1.0 0.75 -1.00 1.33 -1.78 2.08 -2.78 2.99 -4.00 4.07 -5.45
5 2.0 0.72 -0.94 1.27 -1.67 1.99 -2.60 2.86 -3.75 3.90 -5.10
5 4.5 0.67 -0.85 1.19 -1.50 1.86 -2.35 2.68 -3.38 3.65 -4.60
5 9.5 0.64 -0.78 1.13 -1.38 1.77 -2.15 2.55 -3.1 0 3.46 -4.22
5 46.5 0.56 -0.62 0.99 -1.10 1.55 -1.72 2.23 -2.48 3.03 -3.38
Note: For effective areas between those given above the load may be interpolated, otherwise use the toad associated With the lower effective
area. Thejinal value, including all permitted reductions, used in the design shall not be less than that required by Section 207E.2.2.
Figure 207E.5-1 (continued)

18 m
Design Wind Pressures on Walls and Roofs of Enclosed Buildings with h ::::;
Components and Cladding

Roof Overhang Net Design Wind Pressure, Pnet (kPa)

(Exposure B at h = 10 m with I = 1.0 and Kd = 1.0)
Effective Basic Wind Speed V (kph)

wind I
Zone
area 150 200 250 300 350
(sq.m) I
2 0.9 -1.19 -2.12 -3.31 -4.76 -6.48

'"'"
...I>Jl'" 2 1.9 -1.17 -2.08 -3.25 -4.69 -10.27
2 4.6 -1.14 -2.03 -3.17 -4.57 -6.38
'0
r--
'" 2 9.3 -1.13 -2.00 -3.13 -4.51 -8.21
.s 3 0.9 -1.89 -3.35 -5.24 -7.55 -6.22
0
..... 3 1.9 -1.51 -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -5.45
=
e 3 4.6 -1.00 -1.78 -2.78 -4.00 -6.14
I::.:i
3 9.3 -1.25 -2.23 -3.48 -5.02 -6.83
'"'" 2 0.9 -1.51 -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -8.21
...I>Jl'" 2 1.9 -1.51 -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -13.38
'0
r-
'" 2 4.6 -1.51 -2.68 -4.19 -6.03 -8.21
2 -1.51 -2.68 -4.19 .1
9.3 -6.03 -12.17
'".s 3 0.9 -2.46 -4.37 -6.82 -9.83 -8.21
r--
A 3 1.9 -2.24 -3.97 -6.21 -8.94 -10.45
..... 3 4.6 -1.92 -3.41 -5.33 -7.67
e -8.21
=
I::.:i 3 9.3 -1.70 -3.02 -4.71 -6.79 -9.24
..,
2 0.9 -1.38 .2.45 -3.83 -5.52 -7.52
...'"I>Jl'" 2 1.9 -1.35 -2.40 -3.75 -5.40 -7.52
'"
'0
on
2 4.6 -1.29 -2.29 -3.57 -5.14 -7.34
2 9.3 -1.25 -2.23 -3.48 -5.02 -7.34
""'.s"
r- 3 0.9 -1.38 -2.45 -3.83 -5.52 -7.00
'"A
.....
3 1.9 -1.35 -2.40 -3.75 -5.40 -7.00
3 4.6 -1.29 -2.29 -3.57 -5.14 -6.83
=
=
I::.:i 3 9.3 -1.25 -2.23 -3.48 -5.02 -6.83
Adj ustment Factor

for Building Height and Exposure, A
Mean roof height Exposure .

(m) B C D
4.5 l.00 1.21 1.47
6.0 l.00 1.29 1.55
7.5 1.00 1.35 1.61
9.0 1.00 1.40 1.66
10.5 l.05 1.45 l.70
12.0 l.09 1.49 1.74
13.5 1.12 1.53 1.78
15.0 1.16 1.56 l.81
16.5 1.19 1.59 l.84
18.0 1.22 l.62 l.87
Figure 207E.5-1 (continued)

Design Wind Pressures on Walls and Roofs of Enclosed Buildings with h ~ 18 m
Components and Cladding

D_1i' UI' 4.6

· 3,1
·3.6
-14
C. - :iZ - 3.2
U -3.0
C • 2,S
....'" · 2.6
....=~~ - 2.4
·12
-2.0
e~ ·18 -l.S
-1.6
0 · 1.6
U - 1.4 -1.4
. _ .. ~ - 1.2
,a ----- -- :::
"""
~
~
-1.0
· D,S
·0.6
-1.0
-0.9
-0.7
~
I I
I
I
I
,
I
I
-=
~"""
~
- 0.4
· 0.2:
0
+0.2
t I
~ 5
I
I ,
I
.5
....~"""~
~
+0.4
+O.~
+ 0.1
+O.G
+0.9
I + 1.0
N
,
I
I
I
I
,
I
0.1 (I.P 1.11 4.6 ".3 18.6 46,$ ~2J"

I I
I I
I I
WALL ELEVATION
Notes:
I. Vertical scaledenotes GCp 10 be lllletl with appropriate qz or qh'

2. Ilorizontnl scale denotes effective wind nreu, 1112
3. Plus and minliS signs signify pressures Ilclinf,\ IOIVurdand away from the surfaces, respectively.
4. Usc qt with positive values of CCII IIlId q/, with negative values of GCp.
5. rille]'1 component sllnll be designed rOT: maximum posluve and negative pressures.
6. ·oef1icicnts·lIrc for I'oofs wi.lh angle (J ::; 10· _Pm: olher roof angles and geometry, use GCp values from Figure 207EA-2A, Band C and attendant qh
based on exposure defined in Section 207 A.7.
7. If a parapet equal to or higher than 0.9 m is provided around the perimeter of the roof with (J :s; 10· ,Zone 3 shall be treated as Zone 2.
8. Notation:
a or
10% least hcrizorunl dimensin», but not less than 0.9 m.
h mean roof he.ig.l\l, m, cxcept tlun eave height shall be used for (J $ 10· .
Z height above ground, rn
(J angle ofplane or roof from-horizontal, D
Figure 207E.6-1
External Pressure Coefficients, GCp Walls and Roofs, h > 18 m

Windward parapet Leeward parapet

Load Case A Load Case B
Top parapet
p7
Windward Parapet
Load Case A
l. Windward parapet pressure (Pt) is determined using the positive wall pressure (Ps) zones 4 or 5 from Table 207E.7-2.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (P2) is determined using the negative roof pressure (P7) zones 2 or 3 from Table 207E.7-2.
Leeward Parapet
Load Case B
l. Windward parapet pressure (P3) is determined using the positive wall pressure (Ps) zones 4 or 5 from Table 207E.7-2.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (P4) is determined using the negative wall pressure (P6) zones 4 or 5 from Table 207E.7-2.
Figure 207E.7-l
Parapet Wind Loads Application of Parapet Wind Loads, h :::;48.8 m

I
]ps
pw
Povh 1.0 x roof pressure p from tables for edge Zopes 1,2
Povh 1.15 x roof pressure p from tables for comer Zone 3
Notes:
1. Povh = roof pressure at overhang for edge or comer zone as applicable from figures in roof pressure table.
2. Povh from figures includes load from both top and bottom surface of overhang.
3. Pressure Ps at soffit of overhang can be assumed same as wall pressure, PW.
Figure 207E.7-2
Roof Overhang Wind Loads Application of Overhang Wind Loads, h ::;48 m

CHAPTER ;J - Mlnlmum Desigll I oads 2--175
,------- _.,_l
a
20
3 a
t
_ _ 1__ 2 r
,3 h
!
llllllllllllllill
-
Roof Effective CN
Angle Wind Area Clear Wind Flow Obstructed Wind Flow
(J Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 Zone 2 Zone 1
::;a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
> a2, 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7
1.2 -1.1
0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0°
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
< a2 3.2 -4.2 2.4 -2.1 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -5.1 1.2 -2.6 0.8 -1.7
7.5°
> a2, 2.4 -2.1 2.4 -2.1
1.6 -1.4
l.2 -2.6 1.2 -2.6 0.8
-1.7
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -1.4 1.6 -1.4 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.7 0.8 -1.7
< a2 3.6 -3.8 2.7 -2.9 1.8 -1.9 2.4 -4.2 1.8 -3.2 1.2 -2.1
I
15°
> a2, 2.7 -2.9 2.7 -2.9
1.8 -1.9
1.8 -3.2 1.8 -3.2 I
1.2
-2.1 I
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.8 -1.9 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1 1.2 -2.1
< a2 5.2 -5 3.9 -3.8 2.6 2.5 3.2 -4.6 2.4 -3.5 1.6 -2.3
> a2, 3.9 -3.8 3.9 -3.8
2.6 2.5
2.4 -3.5 2.4 -3.5 1.6
-2.3
30°
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 2.6 -2.5 2.6 -2.5 2.6 2.5 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3 1.6 -2.3
< a2 5.2 -4.6 3.9 -3.5 2.6 2.3 4.2 -3.8 3.2 -2.9 2.1 -1.9
45°
> a2, 3.9 -3.5 3.9 -3.5
2.6 2.3
3.2 -2.9 3.2 -2.9 2.1
-1.9
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 2.6 -2.3 2.6 -2.3 2.6 2.3 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9 2.1 -1.9
Notes:
I. eN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).

inhibiting wind flow (>50% blockage).
3. For values of (J other than those shown, linear interpolation is permitted.
5. Components and cladding elements shall be designed for positive and negative pressure coefficients shown.
6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or 0.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
L Horizontal dimension of building, measured in along wind direction, m
() angle of plane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.8-1
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Monoslope Free Roofs, () ::;45°,0.25::; hi L ::; 1.0
Open Buildings

2-176 CHAPTER 2 -- Minimum Design Loads
L
I 1- L
3
3
,---
3
,--- "' L~
2 2
2
1
1 1 h
2
3 777777777777777777777
Roof Effective eN
< a2 2.4 -3.3 1.8 -1.7 1.2 -1.1 1 -3.6 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
0°
> aZ, 1.8 -1.7 1.8 -1.7
1.2 -1.1
0.8 -1.8 0.8 -1.8
0.5
-1.2
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
< a2 2.2 -3.6 1.7 -1.8 1.1 -1.2 1 -5.1 0.8 -2.6 0.5 -1.7
7.5°
> a2, 1.7 -1.8 1.7 -1.8
1.1 -1.2
0.8 -2.6 0.8 -2.6
0.5 -1.7
< 4.0az
> 4.0a2 1.1 -1.2 1.2 -1.2 1.1 -1.2 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7 0.5 -1.7
< a2 2.2 -2.2 1.7 -1.7 1.1 -1.1 1 -3.2 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -1.6
15°
> a2, 1.7 -1.7 1.7 -1.7
1.1 -1.1
0.8 -2.4 0.8 -2.4
0.5 -1.6
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6 0.5 -1.6
< a2 2.6 -1.8 2 -1.4 1.3 -0.9 1 -2.4 0.8 -1.8 0.5 -1.2
30°
> a2, 2 -1.4 2 -1.4
1.3 -0.9
0.8 -1.8 0.8
-1.8 0.5 -1.2
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 1.3 -0.9 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
< a2 2.2 -l.6 1.7 -1.2 1.1 -0.8 I -2.4 0.8 -l.8 0.5 -1.2
.
45°
> a2, 1.7 -1.2 1.7 -1.2
1.1 -0.8
0.8 -1.8 0.8
-1.8 0.5 -1.2
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.1 -0.8 1.1 -0.8 1.1 -0.8 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2 0.5 -1.2
Notes:
1. eN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).

6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or O. 4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m. Dimension
"a" is as shown in Figure 207E.8-1.
(J angle ofpJane of roof from horizontal, 0
Figure 207E.8-2
Net Pressure Coefficient, eN Pitched Free Roofs, e ::; 45°, 0.25::; hi L ::;1.0
Open Buildings

----L ----I L
113
I
I
I
2
h
1
I
1
2
2 j
77777777777777777777/
3
Roof Effective CN
a2
:::; 2.4 -3.3 l.8 I -l.7 l.2 -1.1 1 -3.6 0.8 -l.8 0.5 -l.2
0°
> a2, l.8 -l.7 l.8 -l.7
l.2 -1.1
0.8 -l.8 0.8 -l.8
0.5
-1.2
s 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 l.2 -1.1 l.2 -1.1 1.2 -1.1 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -l.2
a2
:::; 2.4 -3.3 l.8 -l.7 l.2 -1.1 1 -4.8 0.8 -2.4 0.5 -l.6
7.5°
> a2, 1.8 -1.1 l.8 -l.7
1.2 -1.1
0.8 --2.4 0.8 -2.4
0.5 -l.6
s 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.2 -1.1 l.2 -1.1 l.2 -1.1 0.5 -l.6 0.5 -l.6 0.5 -l.6
a2
:::; 2.2 -2.2 l.7 -l.7 1.1 -1.1 1 -2.4 0.8 -l.8 0.5 -l.2
15°
> a2, l.7 -l.7 l.7 -l.7
1.1 -1.1
0.8 -l.8 0.8
-l.8 0.5 -l.2
s 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 1.1 -1.1 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -l.2
:::;
a2 l.8 -2.6 l.4 -2 0.9 -1.3 1 -2.8 0.8 -2.1 0.5 -l.4
30°
> a2, l.4 -2 l.4 -2
0.9 -1.3
0.8. -2.1 0.8
-2.1 0.5 -l.4
< 4.0a2
> 4.0a2 0.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.9 -1.3 0.5 -l.4 0.5 -1.4 0.5 -1.4
a2
:::; l.6 -2.2 l.2 -l.7 0.8 -1.1 1 -2.4 0.8 -l.8 0.5 -l.2
45°
> a2, l.2 -l.7 l.2 -l.7
0.8 -1.1
0.8 -l.8 0.8
-l.8 0.5 -l.2
< 4.0a2 I
> 4.0a2 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.1 0.8 -1.1 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -l.2 0.5 -l.2
II
Notes:
1. eN denotes net pressures (contributions from top and bottom surfaces).

4. Plus and minus sigus signify pressures acting towards and away from the top roof surface, respectively.
6. Notation:
a 10% of least horizontal dimension or O.4h, whichever is smaller but not less than 4% of least horizontal dimension or 0.9 m.
Dimension "a" is as shown in Figure 207E.8-1.
Figure 207E.8-3
Net Pressure Coefficient, CN Troughed Free Roofs, () s 45°, 0.25:::;hi L :::;1.0
Open Buildings
Windward parapet Leeward parapet

Load Case A Load Case B Top parapet
hp
Windward Parapet
Load Case A
1. Windward parapet pressure (P1) is determined using the positive wall pressure (Ps) zones 4 or 5 from the applicable figure.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (P2) is determined using the negative roof pressure (p,) zones 2 or 3 from the applicable figure.
Leeward Parapet
Load Case B
1. Windward parapet pressure (P3) is determined using the positive wall pressure (Ps) zones 4 or 5 from the applicable figure.
2. Leeward parapet pressure (P4) is determined using the negative wall pressure (P6) zones 4 or 5 from the applicable figure.
User Note:
See Note 5 in Figure 207E.4-2A and Note

7 in Figure 207E.6-J for reductions in .
component and cladding roof pressures
when parapets 0.9 m or higher are
present.
Figure 207E.9-1
Parapet Wind Loads C&C - Part 6, All Building Heights All Building Types

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design l.oads 2-179
Notes:
I. Net roof pressure Povh on roof overhangs is determined from interior, edge or comer zones as applicable from figures.
2. Net pressure Povh from figures includes pressure contribution from top and bottom surfaces of roof overhang.
3. Positive pressure at roof overhang soffit P. is the same as adjacent wall pressure PW'
Figure 207E.l 0-1

Wind Loading - Roof Overhangs, C&C, All Building Heights All Building Types

?-1flO CII/'\r'TF'I"\ 2 Minimum [)c~~igll LO:Jds
207F Wind Tunnel Procedure accelerations. Each of these models, together with a model
of the surroundings (proximity model), can provide
Wind tunnel testing is specified when a structure contains information other than wind loads, such as snow loads on
any of the characteristics defined in Sections 207B.1.3, complex roofs, wind data to evaluate environmental impact
207C1.3, 207D.1.3, or 207E.1.3 or when the designer on pedestrians, and concentrations of air-pollutant
wishes to more accurately determine the wind loads. For emissions for environmental impact determinations.
some building shapes wind tunnel testing can reduce the Several references provide detailed information and
conservatism due to enveloping of wind loads inherent in guidance for the determination of wind loads and other
the Directional Procedure, Envelope Procedure, or types of design data by wind tunnel tests (Cermak 1977,
Analytical Procedure for Components and Cladding. A lso, Reinhold 1982, ASCE 1999, and Boggs and Peterka 1989).
wind tunnel testing accounts for shielding or channeling
and can more accurately determine wind loads for a Wind tunnel tests frequently measure wind loads that are
complex building shape than the Directional Procedure, significantly lower than required by Sections 207A, 207B,
Envelope Procedure, or Analytical Procedure for 207C, 207D, and 207E due to the shape of the building, the
Components and Cladding. It is the intent of the code that likelihood that the highest wind speeds occur at directions
any building or other structure be allowed to use the wind where the building's shape or pressure coefficients are less
tunnel testing method to determine wind loads. than their maximum values, specific buildings included in
Requirements for proper testing are given in Section a detailed proximity model that may provide shielding in
207F.2. excess of that implied by exposure categories, and
necessary conservatism in enveloping load coefficients in
It is common practice to resort to wind tunnel tests when Sections 207C and 207E. In some cases, adjacent
design data are required for the following wind-induced structures may shield the structure sufficiently that
loads: removal of one or two structures could significantly
increase wind loads. Additional wind tunnel testing without
1. Curtain wall pressures resulting from irregular specific nearby buildings (or with additional buildings if
geometry. they might cause increased loads through channeling or
buffeting) is an effective method for determining the
2. Across-wind and lor torsional loads. influence of adjacent buildings.
3. Periodic loads caused by vortex shedding. For this reason, the code limits the reduction that can be
accepted from wind tunnel tests to 80 percent of the result
4. Loads resulting from instabilities, such as flutter or obtained from Part 1 of Section 207B or Part 1 of Section
galloping. 207C, or Section 207E, if the wind tunnel proximity model
included any specific influential buildings or other objects
Boundary-layer wind tunnels capable of de velop ing flows that, in the judgment of an experienced wind engineer, are
that meet the conditions stipulated in Section 207F.2 likely to have substantially influenced the results beyond
typically have test-section dimensions in the following those characteristic of the general surroundings. If there
ranges: width of 2 to 4 m, height of 2 to 3 m, and length of are any such buildings or objects, supplemental testing can
15 to 30 m. Maximum wind speeds are ordinarily in the be performed to quantify their effect on the original results
range of 10 to 45 m/s. The wind tunnel may be either an and possibly justify a limit lower than 80 percent, by
open-circuit or closed circuit type. removing them from the detailed proximity model and
replacing them with characteristic ground roughness
Three basic types of wind-tunnel test models are commonly consistent with the adjacent roughness. A specific
used. These are designated as follows: (I) rigid Pressure influential building or object is one within the detailed
Model (PM), (2) rigid high-frequency base balance model proximity model that protrudes well above its
(H-FBBM), and (3) Aero-elastic Model (AM). One or more surroundings, or is unusually close to the subject building,
of the models may be employed to obtain design loads for or may otherwise cause substantial sheltering effect or
a particular building or structure. The PM provides local magnification of the wind loads. When these supplemental
peak pressures for design of elements, such as cladding test results are included with the original results, the
and mean pressures, for the determination of overall mean acceptable results are then considered to be the higher of
loads. The H-FBBM measures overall fluctuating loads both conditions.
(aerodynamic admittance) for the determination of
dynamic responses. When motion of a building or structure However, the absolute minimum reduction permitted is 65
influences the wind loading, the AM is employed for direct percent of the baseline result for components and cladding,
measurement of overall loads, deflections, and and 50 percent for the main windforce resisting system. A
higher reduction is permitted for MWFRS, because

CHAr" I EF~:-' - Minimum I:)(e~iqnLoads )--W1
components and cladding loads are more subject to 207F.l Scope

changes due to local channeling effects when surroundings
change and can easily be dramatically increased when a The Wind Tunnel Procedure shall be used where required
new adjacent building is constructed. It is also recognized by Sections 2078.1.3, 207C.1.3, and 207D.1.3. The Wind
that claddingfailures are much more common than failures Tunnel Procedure shall be permitted for any building or
of the MWFRS. In addition, for the case of MWFRS it is structure in lieu of the design procedures specified in
easily demonstrated that the overall drag coefficient for Section 2078 (MWFRS for buildings of all heights and
certain common building shapes, such as circular simple diaphragm buildings with h ::;49 m, Section 207C
cylinders especially with rounded or domed tops, is one- (MWFRS of low-rise buildings and simple diaphragm low-
half or less of the drag coefficient for the rectangular rise buildings), Section 207D (MWFRS for all other
prisms that form the basis of Section 207B, 207C, and structures), and Section 207E (components and cladding
207E. for all building types and other structures).
For components and cladding, the 80-percent limit is

User Note:
defined by the interior zones I and 4 in Figures 207E.4-1,
207E.4-2A, 207E.4-2B, 207E.4-2C, 207E.4-3, 20 7E.4-4,
207E.4-5A, 207E.4-5B, 207E.4-6, 207E.4-7, and 207E.5- Section 207F may always be usedfor determining wind
1. This limitation recognizes that pressures in the edge pressures for the MWFRS and/or for C&C of any
zones are the ones most likely to be reduced by the specific building or structure. This method is considered to
produce the most accurate wind pressures of any
geometry of real buildings compared to the rectangular
prismatic buildings assumed in Section 207E. Therefore, method specified in this Code.
pressures in edge and corner zones are permitted to be as
low as 80 percent of the interior pressures from Section 207F.2 Test Conditions
207E without the supplemental tests. The 80 percent limit
based on zone 1 is directly applicable to all roof areas, and Wind tunnel tests, or similar tests employing fluids other
the 80 percent limit based on zone 4 is directly applicable than air, used for the determination of design wind loads
to all wall areas. for any building or other structure, shall be conducted in
accordance with this section. Tests for the determination of
The limitation on MWFRS loads is more complex because mean and fluctuating forces and pressures shall meet all of
the load effects (e.g., member stresses or forces, the following conditions:
deflections) at any point are the combined effect of a vector
of applied loads instead of a simple scalar value. In general I. The natural atmospheric boundary layer has been
the ratio of forces or moments or torques (force modeled to account for the variation of wind spe~d
eccentricity) at various floors throughout the building with height.
using a wind tunnel study will not be the same as those
ratios determined from Sections 207B and 207C, and 2. The relevant macro-(integral) length and micro-length
therefore comparison between the two methods is not well scales of the longitudinal component of atmospheric
defined. Requiring each load effectfrom a wind tunnel test turbulence are modeled to approximately the same
to be no less than 80 percent of the same effect resulting scale as that used to model the building or structure.
from Sections 207B and 207C is impractical and
unnecessarily complex and detailed, given the approximate 3. The modeled building or other structure and
nature of the 80 percent value. Instead, the intent of the surrounding structures and topography are
limitation is effectively implemented by applying it only to geometrically similar to their full-scale counterparts,
a simple index that characterizes the overall loading. For except that, for low-rise buildings meeting the
flexible (tall) buildings, the most descriptive index of requirements of Section 207C.I.2, tests shall be
overall loading is the base overturning moment. For other permitted for the modeled building in a single
buildings, the overturning moment can be a poor exposure site as defined in Section 207 A.7.3.
characterization of the overall loading, and the base shear
is recommended instead. 4. The projected area of the modeled building or other
structure and surroundings is less than 8 percent of the
test section cross-sectional area unless correction is
made for blockage.
5. The longitudinal pressure gradient in the wind tunnel

test section is accounted for.

6. Reynolds number effects on pressures and forces are Database-Assisted Design. Wind-tunnel aerodynamics
minimized. databases that contain records of pressures measured
synchronously at large numbers of locations on the
7. Response characteristics of the wind tunnel exterior surface of building models have been developed by
instrumentation are consistent with the required wind researchers, e.g., Simiu et al. (2003) and Main and
measurements. Fritz (2006). Such databases include data that permit a
designer to determine, without specific wind tunnel tests
207F.3 Dynamic Response wind-induced forces and moments in Main Wind Forc;
Resisting Systems and Components and Cladding of
Tests for the purpose of determining the dynamic response selected shapes and sizes of buildings. A public domain set
of a building or other structure shall be in accordance with of such databases, recorded in tests conducted at the
Section 207F.2. The structural model and associated University of Western Ontario (Ho et al. 2005 and St.
analysis shall account for mass distribution, stiffness, and Pierre et al. 2005) for buildings with gable roofs is
damping. available on the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST) website: www.nist.gov/wtnd,
207F.4 Load Effects Interpolation softwarefor buildings with similar shape and
with dimensions close to and intermediate between those
207F.4.1 Mean Recurrence Intervals of Load Effects included in the set of databases is also available on that
site. Because the database results are for generic
The load effect required for Strength Design shall be surroundings as permitted in item 3 of Section 20 7F.2,
determined for the same mean recurrence interval as for the interpolation or extrapolationfrom these databases should
Analytical Method, by using a rational analysis method, be used only if condition 2 of Section 207B.l.2 is true.
defined in the recognized literature, for combining the Extrapolations from available building shapes and sizes
directional wind tunnel data with the directional are not permitted, and interpolations in some instances
meteorological data or probabilistic models based thereon. may not be advisable. For these reasons, the guidance of
The load effect required for Allowable Stress Design shall an engineer experienced in wind loads on buildings and
be equal to the load effect required for Strength Design familiar with the usage of these databases is recommended.
divided by 1.6. For buildings that are sensitive to possible All databases must have been obtained using testing
variations in the values of the dynamic parameters, methodology that meets the requirements for wind tunnel
sensitivity studies shall be required to provide a rational testing specified in Section 207F.
basis for design recommendations.
207F.4.3 Limitations on Loads
Commentary:
Loads for the main wind force resisting system determined
Examples of analysis methods for combining directional by wind tunnel testing shall be limited such that the overall
wind tunnel data with the directional meteorological data principal loads in the x and y directions are not less than 80
or probabilistic models based thereon are described in percent of those that would be obtained from Part 1 of
Lepage and Irwin (1985), Rigato et al. (2001), Isyumov et Section 207B or Part 1 of Section 207C. The overall
al. (2003), Irwin et al. (2005), Simiu and Filliben (2005), principal load shall be based on the overturning moment
and Simiu and Miyata (2006). for flexible buildings and the base shear for other buildings.
207F.4.2 Limitations on Wind Speeds Pressures for components and cladding determined by
wind tunnel testing shall be limited to not less than 80
The wind speeds and probabilistic estimates based thereon percent of those calculated for Zone 4 for walls and Zone
shall be subject to the limitations described in Section 1 for roofs using the procedure of Section 207E. These
207A.5.3. Zones refer to those shown in Figures 207E.4-1, 207E.4-
2A, 207E.4-2B, 207E.4-2C, 207E.4-3, 207E.4-4, 207E.4-
Commentary: SA, 207E.4-5B, 207E.4-6, 207E.4-7, and 207E.6-1.
Section 207F.4.2 specifies that the statistical methods used The limiting values of 80 percent may be reduced to 50
to analyze historical wind speed and direction data for percent for the main wind force resisting system and 65
wind tunnel studies shall be subject to the same limitations percent for components and cladding if either of the
specified in Section 207F.4.2 that apply to the Analytical following conditions applies:
Method.

I. There were no specific influential buildings or objects

within the detailed proximity model.
2. Loads and pressures from supplemental tests for all

significant wind directions in which specific
influential buildings or objects are replaced by the
roughness representative of the adjacent roughness
condition, but not rougher than exposure B, are
included in the test results.
207F.S Wind-Borne Debris
Glazing in buildings in wind-borne debris regions shall be

protected in accordance with Section 207A.IO.3.

2--18tl CHI\PTER 2 - Minimum Design LORds
SECTION 208 that portion of the base shear, V, considered

EARTHQUAKE LOADS concentrated at the top of the structure in addition
to r;
208.1 General lateral force at Level i for use in Equation 208-
14
208.1.1 Purpose g acceleration due to gravity = 9.815 m/sec?
hi, hn' h ; = height above the base to Level i, n or x,
The purpose of the succeeding earthquake provisions is respectively, m
primarily to design seismic-resistant structures to J importance factor given in Table 208-1
safeguard against major structural damage that may lead to Jp importance factor for nonstructural component as
loss of life and property. These provisions are not intended given in Table 208-1
to assure zero-damage to structures nor maintain their L live load
functionality after a severe earthquake. Leveli level of the structure referred to by the
subscript i
208.1.2 Minimum Seismic Design "i 1" designates the first level above the base
Level n that level that is uppermost in the main
Structures and portions thereof shall, as a minimum, be portion of the structure
designed and constructed to resist the effects of seismic Level x that level that is under design consideration
ground motions as provided in this section. "x 1" designates the first level above the base
M maximum moment magnitude
208.1.3 Seismic and Wind Design Na near-source factor used in the determination of C a
in Seismic Zone 4 related to both the proximity of
When the code-prescribed wind design produces greater the building or structure to known faults with
effects, the wind design shall govern, but detailing magnitudes as set forth in Tables 208-4 and 208-5
requirements and limitations prescribed in this section and Nv near-source factor used in the determination of Cv
referenced sections shall be made to govern. in Seismic Zone 4 related to both the proximity of
the building or structure to known faults with
208.2 Definitions magnitudes as set forth in Tables 208-4 and 208-6
PJ plasticity index of soil determined in accordance
See Section 202. with approved national standards
R numerical coefficient representative of the inherent
208.3 Symbols and Notations over-strength and global ductility capacity of
lateral-force-resisting systems, as set forth in Table
AB ground floor area of structure to include area 208-11 or 208-12 .
covered by all overhangs and projections, m2 r a ratio used in determining pO Dthe
Ac the combined effective area of the shear walls in redundancy/reliability factor. See Section 208.5.
the first storey of the structure, m2 SA,SB,SC,SD,SE,SF = soil profile types as set forth
Ae the minimum cross-sectional area in any in Table 208-2
horizontal plane in the first storey of a shear wall, T elastic fundamental period of vibration of the
m2 structure in the direction under consideration,
Ax the torsional amplification factor at Level x sec
up numerical coefficient specified in Section 208.7 V base shear given by Equations. 208-8, 208-9,
and set forth in Table 208-13 208-10, 208-11 or 208-15
Ca seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208-7 the design storey shear in Storey x
C, numerical coefficient given in Section 208.5.2.2 the total seismic dead load defined in Section
C; seismic coefficient, as set forth in Table 208-8 208.5.2.1
D dead load = that portion of W located at or assigned to
De the length of a shear wall in the first storey in the Level i or x, respectively
direction parallel to the applied forces, m the weight of an element or component
E, Eh, Em' Ev = earthquake loads set forth in Section the weight of the diaphragm and the element
208.6 tributary thereto at Level x, including applicable
Fx design seismic force applied to Level i, n or x, portions of other loads defined in Section
respectively 208.6.1
Fp design seismic force on a part of the structure z seismic zone factor as given in Table 208-3
F px design seismic force on a diaphragm

CI-lIWTER 2 Minimum Design Loads 2 185
!J.M =: Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, 208.4.2 Occupancy Categories

which is the total drift or total storey drift that
occurs when the structure is subjected to the For purposes of earthquake-resistant design, each structure
Design Basis Ground Motion, including shall be placed in one of the occupancy categories listed in
estimated elastic and inelastic contributions to Table 103-1. Table 208-1 assigns importance factors, I and
the total deformation defined in Section Ip, and structural observation requirements for each I
208.6.4.2, mm I
category.
!J.s Design Level Response Displacement, which is I
the total drift or total storey drift that occurs Table 208-1 - Seismic Importance Factors
when the structure is subjected to the design II
seismic forces, mm Seismic Seismic
Occupancy
l)i == horizontal displacement at Level i relative to the Importance Importance 2
Category I
base due to applied lateral forces, Ii, for use in Factor, I Factor, t,
Equation 208-14, mm I. Essential I
1.50 1.50
p Redundancy/Reliability Factor given by Facilities 3
Equation 208-20 II. Hazardous
1.25 1.50
no Seismic Force Amplification Factor, which is Facilities
required to account for structural over-strength III. Special
and set forth in Table 208-11 Occupancy 1.00 1.00
Structures
208.4 Basis for Design IV. Standard
Occupancy 1.00 1.00
208.4.1 General Structures
V. Miscellaneous I
1.00 1.00
The procedures and the limitations for the design of structures
structures shall be determined considering seismic zoning, I See Table 103-1 for occupancy category listing
site characteristics, occupancy, configuration, structural
2 The limitation of I p for panel connections in Section
system and height in accordance with this section.
Structures shall be designed with adequate strength to 208.7.2.3 shall be 1.0 for the entire connector
withstand the lateral displacements induced by the Design 3 Structural observation requirements are given in Section
Basis Ground Motion, considering the inelastic response of 107.9
the structure and the inherent redundancy, over-strength 4 For anchorage of machinery and equipment required for
and ductility of the lateral force-resisting system. life-safety systl'f_ms,the value of l» sha~l be taken as 1.5
The minimum design strength shall be based on the Design 208.4.3 Site Geology and Soil Characteristics
Seismic Forces determined in accordance with the static
lateral force procedure of Section 208.5, except as Each site shall be assigned a soil profile type based on
modified by Section 208.5.3.5.4. properly substantiated geotechnical data using the site
categorization procedure set forth in Section 208.4.3.1.1
Where strength design is used, the load combinations of and Table 208-2.
Section 203.3 shall apply. Where Allowable Stress Design
is used, the load combinations of Section 203.4 shall apply. Exception:
When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail
Allowable Stress Design may be used to evaluate sliding
or overturning at the soil-structure interface regardless of to determine the soil profile type, Type SD shall be used.
the design approach used in the design of the structure, Soil Profile Type SE or SF need not be assumed unless the
provided load combinations of Section 203.4 are utilized. building official determines that Type SE or SF may be
present at the site or in the event that Type SE or SF is
established by geotechnical data.
National Structural Coele of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

208.4.3.1 Soil Profile Type 5. The criteria set forth in the definition for Soil Profile
Type SF requiring site-specific evaluation shall be
Soil Profile Types SA, S8, Sc, SD and SE are defined in considered. If the site corresponds to these criteria, the
Table 208-2 and Soil Profile Type SF is defined as soils site shall be classified as Soil Profile Type SF and a
requiring site-specific evaluation as follows: site-specific evaluation shall be conducted.
1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under 208.4.3.1.1 Site Categorization Procedure
seismic loading, such as liquefiable soils, quick and
highly sensitive clays, and collapsible weakly 208.4.3.1.1.1 Scope
cemented soils.
This section describes the procedure for determining Soil
2. Peats and/or highly organic clays, where the thickness Profile Types SA through SF as defined in Table 208-2.
of peat or highly organic clay exceeds 3.0 m.
3. Very high plasticity clays with a plasticity index, PI>

75, where the depth of clay exceeds 7.5 m.
4. Very thick soft/medium stiff clays, where the depth of

clay exceeds 35 m.
Table 208-2 - Soil Profile Types
Average Soil Properties for Top 30 m of Soil Profile

Undrained
Soil Profile Soil Profile Name t Generic Shear Wave Velocity, SPT, N (blows/ Shear
Type Description
Vs (m/s) 300 mm) Strength, S u
(kPa),
SA Hard Rock > 1500
S8 Rock 760 to 1500

Sr. Very Dense Soil and Soft Rock 360 to 760 > 50 > 100
SD Stiff Soil Profile 180 to 360 15 to 50 50 to 100
S/ Soft Soil Profile < 180 < 15 <50
Soil Requiring Site-specific Evaluation.
SF
See Section 208.4.3.1
J Soil Profile Type S E also includes any soil profile with more than 3.0 m of soft clay defined as a soil with plasticity index,
PI> 20, wmc ~ 40% and Su < 24 kPa. The Plasticity Index, PI, and the moisture content, wmco shall be determined
in accordance with approved national standards.
A soil profile with v s < 180 m] s or any

208.4.3.1.1.2 Definitions
profile with more than 3 m of soft clay defined
as soil with PI> 20, wmc ~ 40 percent and
Soil profile types are defined as follows:
Su < 25 kPa
Soils requiring site-specific evaluation, refer to
SA Hard rock with measured shear wave velocity,
Section 208.4.3.1
v.> 1500m/s
S8 Rock with 760 mf s < Vs ~ 1500 mf s
Sc Very dense soil and soft rock with 360 m]s <
Vs < 760 mf s or with either N > 50 or Su ~
100 kPa
SD Stiff soil with 180 mls ~ vs ~ 360 mf s or
with 15 s N s 50 or 50 kPa s Su s
100 kPa

208.4.3.1.1.2.1 vs' Average Shear Wave Velocity 208.4.3.1.1.2.4 Rock Profiles, SA and S8
Vs shall be determined in accordance with the following The shear ~ave velocity for rock, Soil Profile Type S8,
equation: shall be either measured on site or estimated by a
geotechnical engineer, engineering geologist or
seismologist for competent rock with moderate fracturing
and weathering. Softer and more highly fractured and
(208-1 )
weathered rock shall either be measured on site for shear
wave velocity or classified as Soil Profile Type Sc.
where
d, thickness of Layer i , m The hard rock, Soil Profile Type SA, category shall be
Vsi shear wave velocity in Layer t , mls supported by shear wave velocity measurement either on
site or on profiles of the same rock type in the same
208.4.3.1.1.2.2N, Average Field formation with an equal or greater degree of weathering
and fracturing. Where hard rock conditions are known to
Standard Penetration Resistance and
be continuous to a depth of 30 m, surficial shear wave
N ch» Average Standard Penetration
velocity measurements may be extrapolated to assess vS'
Resistance for Cohesionless Soil
Layers The rock categories, Soil Profile Types SA and S8, shall
not be used if there is more than 3 meters of soil between
the rock surface and the bottom of the spread footing or mat
Nand N eh shall be determined in accordance with the
foundation.
following equation:
The definitions presented herein shall apply to the upper

30 m of the site profile. Profiles containing distinctly
(208-2) different soil layers shall be subdivided into those layers
designated by a number from I to n at the bottom, where
there are a total of n distinct layers in the upper 30 m. The
symbol i then refer to anyone of the layers between 1 and
(208-3) n.
208.4.3.1.1.2.5 Soft Clay ProfIle, SE

where
The existence of It total thickness of soft clay greater than

thickness of Layer i in mm
3 m shall be investigated where a soft clay layer is defined
the total thickness of cohesion less soil layers
by Su < 24 kPa, wme ~ 40 percent and PI > 20. If
in the top 30 m
these criteria are met, the site shall be classified as Soil
the standard penetration resistance of soil
Profile Type S E'
layer in accordance with approved nationally
recognized standards
208.4.3.1.1.2.6 Soil ProfIles s., SD and SE
208.4.3.1.1.2.3 su, Average Undrained Shear
Sites with Soil Profile Types Sc, SD and SE shall be
Strength
classified by using one of the following three methods with
V s , Nand Su computed in all cases as specified in Section
Su shall be determined in accordance with the following
208.4.3.1.1.2.
equation:
I. Vs for the top 30 meters (vs method}

(208-4)
2. N for the top 30 meters (N method).
where
3. NCH for cohesionless soil layers (PI < 20) in the top
de the total thickness (100 - ds) of cohesive 30 m and average Su for cohesive soil layers (PI>
soil layers in the top 30 m 20) in the top 30 m (su method).
Sui the undrained shear strength in accordance
with approved nationally recognized
standards, not to exceed 250 kPa
208.4.4 Site Seismic Hazard Characteristics Table 208-4 - Seismic Source Types I
,Seismic hazard characteristics for the site shall be Seismic Source

established based on the seismic zone and proximity of the Seismic Definition
Seismic Source
site to active seismic sources, site soil profile Source
Description
characteristics and the structure's importance factor. Type Maximum Moment
Magnitude, M
208.4.4.1 Seismic Zone
Faults that are
The Philippine archipelago is divided into two seismic capable of
zones only. Zone 2 covers the provinces of Palawan producing large
(except Busuanga) , Sulu and Tawi-Tawi while the rest of A magnitude events 7.0 ~ M s 8.4
the country is under Zone 4 as shown in Figure 208-1. Each and that have a
structure shall be assigned a seismic zone factor Z, in high rate of seismic
accordance with Table 208-3. activity.
Table 208-3 Seismic Zone Factor Z All faults other

ZONE 2 4
B than Types A and 6.5 s M < 7.0
C.
z 0.20 OAO
Faults that are not
208.4.4.2 Seismic Source Types
capable of
producing large
Table 208-4 defines the types of seismic sources. The
magnitude
location and type of seismic sources to be used for design C M < 6.S
earthquakes and
shall be established based on approved geological data; see
that have a
Figure 208-2A. Type A sources shall be determined from
relatively low rate
Figure 208-2B, 2C, 2D, 2E or the most recent mapping of
of seismic activity.
active faults by the Philippine Institute of Volcanology and
Seismology (PHIVOLCS).
'Subduction sources shall be evaluated on a site-
specific basis.

1_ ....
•
•
-
•• •
ZONE 4
1
ZONE 2
•
Figure 208-1 Referenced Seismic Map of the Philippines
2-1g0 CHAPTF,R I' - Minimum Design Loads
Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches

in the Philippines
-, f
- Eerthquakl Soure ..
....
....
,/ <3 Active Fluhe
.~
.'
~
L
~
ti
P
-
-----_"""·
So6dIhO ·1,_1._
..... 11."""" ......
AIIIIRI_"'t>oro projoc1Jon
/ - Tninlbm f'iul
/ Convergence Zone
................ Trwnch
....... CofI~onm".
Copilal CllylMunodpollty
N
... -
---'.
,.;~
", ...
A i<'oI
--- '~~
\
\
100
""
200 300
,1"11
w,"
\ \
'\
\~
..~ \
,,,.
.'
... _ .. .
/
"'
• J,.
.....t-
C.
lot
",
t
'J
..I,'
..
.,f
~114
~- - ...
".. ~T_1oO
WtOI. l'NtIJ~or.~
I.
\~
1)1"
"'" "" ""

Figure 208-2A Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in the Philippines

CHAPTFR;> - Minimum i)esiDIl LOJcls :2 191
Distribution of Active Faults in

Cordillera Administrative Region (CAR)
Earthquake Sourcel
Active Fault.
DaShed 11M -"ace i.t 8pprOElmloie

ApproxllN" gft'ahore prOjeCtIOn
~----
)-...;c..,
_YAD -
'\\...
'%
II
,\.~u.l\fl~
I .-'"
11 , AIIRA
"
I
-e
_ ~io"J KAUNOA
-
.-
.- ...
......~;.~
,
to' N
1. 211
A 10 .. '"
\
Figure 208-2B Distribution of Active Faults in Cordillera Administrative Region (CAR)

\

in Region 1
......
~.
,/
/
- ...
---
_____ o.tIedlM .........
~-
c........... Zo...
.-
,,-#'
~y
i-r . /
.
/' /
/ I
/
/
/
....
l
-, /
"~
........... \
.,
50
i
Figure 208-2C Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 1


in Region 2
- .....
-
-- .~ "'"
_
-~!IJw.fIr: ......~
~
-'~IifJIII~RuII.
"""'F_ ().
......
a.m .... _ ...
---.--
--
I
!
,~'
(i
/\J ,
\1 I '
/ y\
'\ ; !/ J' '\(~',;;.
" .-fP<.::'
,
-/J,/ ~'I
.~
11:"-"
I
pJ
·'.....1....
"'"
_ _ _ ~hIUpp!MfAll "Pl'):
.. ,..
._ Digd"".g"", I
,....
Figure 208-2D Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 2
7- 194 CIIAPT[~ 2 . Minimum Dosign Loads
I if f! : riI
II t
i
II uuII I
..
'.
II
Figure 208-2E Distribution of Active Faults in Region 3

in Region 4A
-.... -,-._~ Phl11pplnoFoub (PF):

DIgdIg ond ~.._.... j
j
----- ~
Com_Z-
........
---
llWlCtl
... ·noe.~
)'
AU!"""'" RIv .. Foub n
IIflIoI
j
N
,
........=;::;-or'=-=::.:=~r
~_~~lr ..."",
J
J
A
Figure 208-2F Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 4A
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, /th Edition, 2015
.I
I
'III
iii.!!.
,"
.,,,,,11
"
"
",
,,'
"
/~
/
I ~!~>z I
I',' I Ji' iIl'.
I,il' ..
I "'.I.~
I (
'
I
~. iI •• "
U
Figure 208-2F Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 4B

CHAPTFR '2 - MinllTll.lr'l1 Dcsiqf1 l.oads /. H)f
Distribution of Active Faults in

Region 5
· a... &rttIquak. SouI'Cft
\1 '".."~-I
'
AetJy. Faults
- - - - o.tted ...... Ir..:a illIPPOairNII

Appro...-. ohhor. pIIo;.ctJon
.,..
N
,
A
"'''
Figure 208-2E Distribution of Active Faults in Region 5

? 1UB CHAP J ER 2 Minimum D siun Lnads
Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 6
Ear1hquake Source.
Active Faulls
I """"'10 ,_ ..__
:&!!iId"-·IUIU.~
,.1
--- .. ojo<Oon
)' Convergence Zona
..__ .." 'ranch
".
10
A
20 30
.'l;;iiil;i;.
.. !O
Figure 208-2F Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 6
Association of Structural I:::l1gil18«I'S of tile 1')llilippines, Inc. (ASH))

CHAPTFR /. rIi1inillllllll Dresiun I oads /- H1C)
Distribution of Active Faults in Region 7

_ ...
; Earthquake Sources
Actlv.F_
---oa.r.d"-IrXiI.~'"
,-'"
.1iIII.
N
A
... ...
Figure 208-2G Distribution of Active Faults in Region 7
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, lIh Edition, 201 [i

:;> ?OO n-IAPTER;; - fIilillimlllll npsign l.oads

....
Earthquake Sources
Active Faullll
- 'SC11k11iM·'lfiDD"~ •
• - ~- - Daah6d line - trlloe I, approlim.ale
Appro.imate olf,here projechon
NORTHERN SAMAR
\_
.""
,0
N ' ....
~1II5d11g"~
PHIIm'INl~Of~~Dmswoux.,
., ....,:r.-I~~!:~
...
...I"" •c= I•
A
20
'" ==s
2 ....
40 50
-
Figure 208-2H Distribution of Active Faults in Region 8
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philipplnes, Inc. (ASEP)

"
\i
\
~
.. .•~
r.
-1--
.-_
c:;:::::::::::: •
IJ
"
Figure 208-21 Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Autonomous Region of Muslim Mindanao (ARMM)

Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 9
- Daehed "rae - trace;' appra:urnaIIt
•••••
Approa'll'l'\Ale oIWlorfl pmiIIdIon
Convergence
Trench
Zon •
-
/~
_/
-d"l
1~'
t I
(
_.fpJ
\i.
10 20
A 30 40 50
KliImo'' ' '
Figure 208-21 Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 9
Association of Structural [ngilleers of the Philippines. lnc. (ASEP)

CHAPTER 7 - Minimum npsion LOClrlS 2 -20:~
.:.rthquak.
Active Faun.
Soun: ••
-
-
-----
kItd_~'~aoIoli.l*IMII
DuhedlirJe-tr8CItll..,pr~
A.pprannMa ot9ttocn prQtedion

\
__j
Fl.]I I
A
'I. m
~., " 'III ;0
'II
Figure 208-2K Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 10


in Region 11
-
.- ,
\
\\
.-'" II I
\.
( \
\, \
i
Earthqulke Source.
Active Faulta
------~--
- Sotidh-lraC8l1aHtD1
- - - - - D-.hed the· nc. II; appn:lllmaa
Convervenc:e Zone
• capitol c., ....unidpaJlty
Figure 208-2L Distribution of Active Faults in Region 11

CHAPl [r~ 7. - Minimum Dosign Loads 2-205

in Region 12
--...----
, Active F.... 1s
I _.- Sotid line -Irace iii oeft.i'l
J Convergence Zone
\ )
j
...
/
• 10 20
A .,
'"
- Figure 208-2M Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 12

National Structural Code of the Philippines volume I, 7th Edition, 20'15
2-206 CIIAPTER 2 Minimum Design t.oads

in Region 13
~==-======~----------~-----------\,
EMthquake Soun:ea
~
\
- SMD_.;""._.~
-----!IooNd
~-..-
Convergence
..... _,..,.._
Zone
\.
\
~------ \ :'0
\.,.
\~
\\ 1.-
~ ....
i;
I:>
'\ 1
\\
\
\
\\
\
\\ \ \,
\(
...
,
r
i
.-'" o 10 110
A IS).. 10
Figure 208-2N Distribution of Active Faults and Trenches in Region 13
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. Inc, (ASEP)

CHAPTER 2 . Minimum Desigll Loads 2·207
208.4.4.3 Seismic Zone 4 Near-Source Factor 4. The exceptions to Section SIS.6.S shall not apply,
except for columns in one-storey buildings or columns
In Seismic Zone 4, each site shall be assigned near-source at the top storey of multistorey buildings.
factors in accordance with Tables 208-S and 208-6 based
S. None of the following structural irregularities is
on the Seismic Source Type as set forth in Section
present: Type 1,4 or S of Table 208-9, and Type I or
208.4.4.2.
4 of Table 208-10.
For high rise structures and essential facilities within

208.4.4.4 Seismic Response Coefficients
2.0 km ofa major fault, a site specific seismic elastic design
response spectrum is recommended to be obtained for the
Each structure shall be assigned a seismic coefficient, Ca,
specific area.
in accordance with Table 208-7 and a seismic coefficient,
Table 208-S Near-Source Factor N a I

c.; in accordance with Table 208-8.
Seismic Closest Distance To Table 208-7 Seismic Coefficient, c,
Source Known Seismic Source?
Soil Profile Seismic Zone Z
'U:'..e_e <2km <S km 2:IOkm
Type Z = 0.2 Z = 0.4
A I.S 1.2 1.0
B 1.3 1.0 1.0 SA 0.16 0.32Na
C 1.0 1.0 1.0 SB 0.20 0.40N"
Sc 0.24 0.40Na
Table 208-6 Near-Source Factor, Nv I Sn 0.28 0.44Na
Sf: 0.34 0.44Na
Seismic Closest Distance To
SF See Footnote 1 of Table 208-8
Source Known S~ismic Source!
TY.I!.e <2km S km 10 km >ISkm
A 2.0 1.6 1.2 1.0 Table 208-8 Seismic Coefficient, c;
B 1.6 1.2 1.0 1.0 Soil Profile Seismic Zone Z
C 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Type Z = 0.2 Z= 0.4
Notesfor Tables 208.5 and 208.6: SA 0.16 0.32Nv
The Near-Source Factor may be based on the linear S8 0.20 0.40Nv
interpolation of values for distances other than those Sc 0.32 0.S6Nv
shown in the table. SD . 0.40 0.64Nv
Sf: 0.64 0.96Nv
2 The closest distance to seismic source shall be taken
SF See Footnote 1of Table 208-8
as the minimum distance between the site and the area
described by the vertical projection of the source on I Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site
the surface (i.e., surface projection offault plane). The response analysis shall be performed to determine
surface projection need not include portions of the seismic coefficients
source at depths of 10 km or greater. The largest value
of the Near-Source Factor considering all sources 208.4.5 Configuration Requirements
shall be usedfor design.
Each structure shall be designated as being structurally
The value of N a used to determine Ca need not exceed 1.1 regular or irregular in accordance with Sections 208.4.S.1
for structures complying with all the following conditions: and 208.4.S.2.
1. The soil profile type is SA, SB, Sc or SD' 208.4.5.1 Regular Structures
2. P = 1.0.
Regular structures have no significant physical
3. Except in single-storey structures, residential building discontinuities in plan or vertical configuration or in their
accommodating 10 or fewer persons, private garages, lateral-force-resisting systems such as the irregular features
carports, sheds and agricultural buildings, moment described in Section 208.4.S.2.
frame systems designated as part of the lateral-force-
resisting system shall be special moment-resisting
frames.
208.4.5.2 Irregular Structures Table 208-9 Vertical Structural Irregularities
Reference
I. Irregular structures have significant physical Irregularity Type and Definition
Section
discontinuities in configuration or in their lateral-
1. Stiffness Irregularity - Soft
force-resisting systems. Irregular features include, but
Storey ,
are not limited to, those described in Tables 208-9 and
A soft storey is one in which the
208-10. All structures in occupancy Categories 4 and 208.4.8.3
lateral stiffness is less than 70 % of
5 in Seismic Zone 2 need to be evaluated only for Item 2
that in the storey above or less than
vertical irregularities of Type 5 (Table 208-9) and
80 percent of the average stiffness
horizontal irregularities of Type 1 (Table 208-10).
of the three stories above.
2. Structures having any of the features listed in Table
208-9 shill] be designated as if having a vertical 2. Weight (Mass) Irregularity
Mass irregularity shall be
irregularity.
considered to exist where the
208.4.8.3
Exception: effective mass of any storey is more
Item 2
Where no storey drift ratio under design lateral forces is than 150 % of the effective mass of
greater than J. 3 times the storey driP eatto of the storey an adjacent storey: A roof that is
above, (he structure may be deemed 10 I1Qt have the lighter than the floor below need
structural. irregularities of7)lpe I Of' 2 I'll Table 208-9, The not be considered.
storey drift, ratio /01' the lop two stories need 1101 be 3. Vertical Geometric Irregularity
considered. The slorey dl'ijl fiJI' this determination may be Vertical geometric irregularity shall
calculated neglecting torsional effects. be considered to exist where the
horizontal dimension of the latera1- 208.4.8.3
3. Structures having any of the features listed in Table force-resisting system in any storey Item 2
208-10 shall be designated as having a plan is more than 130 % of that in an
irregularity. adjacent storey. One-storey
aenthouses need not be considered.
4. In-Plane Discontinuity In
Vertical Lateral-Foree-Resisting
Element Irregularity 208.5.8.1.5.
An in-plane offset of the 1atera1- 1
load-resisting elements greater than
the len' h of those elements.
5. Discontinuity In Capacity -
Weak Storey Irregularity
A weak storey is one in which the
storey strength is less than 80 % of
that in the storey above. The storey 208.4.9.1
strength is the total strength of all
seismic-resisting elements sharing
the storey for the direction under
consideration.

Table 208-10 Horizontal Structural Irregularities 208.4.6 Structural Systems
Reference
Irregularity Type and Definition ~truct~ral systems shall be classified as one of the types
Section
listed 111 Table 208-11 and defined in this section.
1. Torsional Irregularity - To Be
Considered When Diaphragms Are '
208.4.6.1 Bearing Wall System
Not Flexible
Torsional irregularity shall be
A structural system without a complete vertical load-
considered to exist when the 208.7.2.7
carrying space frame. Bearing walls or bracing systems
maximum storey drift, computed Item 6
provide support for all or most gravity loads. Resistance to
including accidental torsion, at one
lateral load is provided by shear walls or braced frames.
end of the structure transverse to an
axrs IS more than 1.2 times the
208.4.6.2 Building Frame System
average of the storey drifts of the two
ends of the structure.
A structural system with an essentially complete space
2. Re-Entrant Corner Irregularity
frame providing support for gravity loads. Resistance to
Plan configurations of a structure and
lateral load is provided by shear walls or braced frames.
its lateral-force-resisting system 208.7.2.7
contain re-entrant corners, where both Items 6
208.4.6.3 Moment-Resisting Frame System
projections of the structure beyond a and 7
re-entrant corner are greater than 15
% of the plan dimension of the A structural system with an essentially complete space
structure in the given direction. frame providing support for gravity loads. Moment-
resisting frames provide resistance to lateral load primarily
3. Diaphragm Discontinuity
by flexural action of members.
Irregularity
Diaphragms with abrupt
discontinuities or variations 111
208.4.6.4 Dual System
stiffness, including those having 208.7.2.7
cutout or open areas greater than 50 % Item 6 A structural system with the following features:
of the gross enclosed area of the
diaphragm, or changes in effective 1. An essentially complete space frame that provides
diaphragm stiffness of more than 50 support for gravity loads.
% from one storey to the next. 2. Resistance to lateral load is provided by shear walls or
4. Out-Of-Plane Offsets Irregularity 208.5.8.5. braced frames and moment-resisting frames (SMRF,
Discontinuities in a lateral force path, 1 IMRF, MMRWF or steel OMRF). The moment-
such as out-of-plane offsets of the 208.7.2.7 resisting frames shall be designed to independently
vertical elements Item 6; resist at least 25 percent of the design base shear.
5. Non-parallel Systems Irregularity
The vertical lateral-load-resisting 3. The two systems shall be designed to resist the total
elements are not parallel to or design base shear in proportion to their relative
208.7.1 rigidities considering the interaction ofthe dual system
symmetric about the major orthogonal
axes of the lateral force-resisting at all levels.
systems.

208.4.6.5 Cantilevered Column System 208.4.8 Selection of Lateral Force Procedure
A structural system relying on cantilevered column Any structure may be, and certain structures defined below
elements for lateral resistance. shall be, designed using the dynamic lateral-force
procedures of Section 208.5.3.
208.4.6.6 Undefined Structural System
208.4.8.1 Simplified Static
A structural system not listed in Table 208-11.
The simplified static lateral-force procedure set forth in
208.4.6.7 Non-building Structural System Section 208.5.1.1 may be used for the following structures
of Occupancy Category IV or V:
A structural system conforming to Section 208.8.
1. Buildings of any occupancy (including single-family
208.4.7 Height Limits dwellings) not more than three stories in height
excluding basements that use light-frame construction.
Height limits for the various structural systems in Seismic
Zone 4 are given in Table 208-11. 2. Other buildings not more than two stories in height
excluding basements.
Exception:
Regular structures may exceed these limits by not more 208.4.8.2 Static
than 50 percent for unoccupied structures, which are not
accessible to the general public. The static lateral force procedure of Section 208.5 may be
used for the following structures:
i. All structures, regular or irregular in Occupancy

Categories IV and V in Seismic Zone 2.
2. Regular structures under 75 m in height with lateral

force resistance provided by systems listed in Table
208-11, except where Section 208.4.8.3, Item 4,
applies.
3. Irregular structures not more than five stories or 20'm

in height. .
4. Structures having a flexible upper portion supported

on a rigid lower portion wher~ both portions of the
structure considered separately can be classified as
being regular the-average storey stiffness of the lower
portion. is at least lOti mes the average storey stiffness
of the upper portion and the peri-od of the entire
structure is not ·greater -chilD 1."1 limes Ute period of the
IIpper portion. eons idered as.a separate structure f xed
at the base.

CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-211 I
I
I
208.4.8.3 Dynamic 208.4.9 System Limitations
The dynamic lateral-force procedure of Section 208.5.3 208.4.9.1 Discontinuity

shall be used for all other structures, including the
following: Structures with a discontinuity in capacity, vertical
irregularity Type 5 as defined in Table 208-9, shall not be
I. Structures 75 m or more in height, except as permitted over two stories or 9 m in height where the weak storey has
by Section 208.4.8.2, Item 1. a calculated strength of less than 65 % of the storey above.
2. Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric Exception:

vertical irregularity of Type 1, 2 or 3, as defined in
Where the weak storey is capable of resisting a total lateral
Table 208-9, or structures having irregular features not
seismic force of no times the design force prescribed in
described in Table 208-9 or 208-10, except as
Section 208.5.
permitted by Section 208.4.10.3.1.
208.4.9.2 Undefined Structural Systems

3. Structures over five stories or 20 m in height in
Seismic Zone 4 not having the same structural system
For undefined structural systems not listed in Table 208-
throughout their height except as permitted by Section
11, the coefficient R shall be substantiated by approved
208.5.3.2.
cyclic test data and analyses. The following items shall be
addressed when establishing R:
4. Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil Profile
Type SF, that have a period greater than 0.7 s. The
1. Dynamic response characteristics,
analysis shall include the effects of the soils at the site
and shall conform to Section 208.5.3.2, Item 4. 2. Lateral force resistance,
3. Over-strength and strain hardening or softening,
208.4.8.4 Alternative Procedures
4. Strength and stiffness degradation,
208.4.8.4.1 General
5. Energy dissipation characteristics,
Alternative lateral-force procedures using rational analyses 6. System ductility, and
based on well-established principles of mechanics may be
7. Redundancy.
used in lieu of those prescribed in these provisions.
208.4.9.3 Irregular Features

208.4.8.4.2 Seismic Isolation
All structures having irregular features described in Table

Seismic isolation, energy dissipation and damping systems
208-9 or 208-10 shall be designed to meet the additional
may be used in the analysis and design of structures when
requirements of those sections referenced in the tables.
approved by the building official and when special
detailing is used to provide results equivalent to those
obtained by the use of conventional structural systems. 208.4.10 Determination of Seismic Factors
208.4.10.1 Determination of no
For specific elements of the structure, as specifically
identified in this code, the minimum design strength shall
be the product of the seismic force over-strength factor no
and the design seismic forces set forth in Section 208.5. For
both Allowable Stress Design and Strength Design, the
Seismic Force Over-strength Factor, no, shall be taken
from Table 208-11.

208.4.10.2 Determination of R seismic forces in structures exceeding 50 m in height in

Seismic Zone 4.
The value for R shall be taken from Table 208-1 I.
208.4.10.3.3 Combinations along the Same Axis
208.4.10.3 Combinations of Structural Systems
Where a combination of different structural systems is
Where combinations of structural systems are incorporated utilized to resist lateral forces in the same direction, the
into the same structure, the requirements of this section value of R used for design in that direction shall not be
shall be satisfied. greater than the least value for any of the systems utilized
in that same direction.
208.4.10.3.1 Vertical Combinations
208.5 Minimum Design Lateral Forces and Related
The value of R used in the design of any storey shall be less Effects
than or equal to the value of R used in the given direction
for the storey above. 208.5.1 Simplified Static Force Procedure
Exception: Structures conforming to the requirements of Section

208.4.S.1 may be designed using this procedure.
This requirement need not be applied to a storey where the
dead weight above that storey is less than 10 percent of the Simplified Design Base Shear
208.5.1.1
total dead weight of the structure.
The total design base shear in a given direction shall be
Structures may be designed using the procedures of this
determined from the following equation:
section under the following conditions:
3Ca
The entire structure is designed using the lowest R of the V=-W (208-5)
lateral force-resisting systems used, or R
1. The following two-stage static analysis procedures where the value of C a shall be based on Table 208- 7 for the
may be used for structures conforming to Section soil profile type. When the soil properties are not known
20S.4.S.2, Item 4. in sufficient detail to determine the soil profile type, Type
1.1 The flexible upper portion shall be designed as a S D shall be used in Seismic Zone 4, and Type S E shall be
separate structure, supported laterally by the rigid used in Seismic Zone 2. In Seismic Zone 4, the Near-
lower portion, using the appropriate values of R Source Factor, N a' need not be greater than 1.2 if none of
andp. the following structural irregularities are present:
1.2 The rigid lower portion stud I be designed as a l. Type 1,4 or 5 of Table 20S-9, or
separate tructure using the appropriate values of
.R and p. The reactions from the upper portion 2. Type 1 or 4 of Table 20S-10.
shall be those determined fJ'01l1 the. analysis of the
upper portion amplified by the ratio of the (Rj p) 208.5.1.2 Vertical Distribution
of the upper portion over (Rjp) of the lower
portion. The forces at each level shall be calculated using the
following equation:
208.4.10.3.2 Combinations along Different Axes
In Seismic Zone 4 where a structure has a bearing wall 3Ca

F x =-w· (208-6)
R l
system in only one direction, the value of R used for design
in the orthogonal direction shall not be greater than that
used for the bearing wall system. where the value of Ca shall be determined as in Section
208.5.1.1.
Any combination of bearing wall systems, building frame
systems, dual systems or moment-resisting frame systems
may be used to resist seismic forces in structures less than
50 m in height. Only combinations of dual systems and
special moment-resisting frames shall be used to resist

208.5.1.3 Horizontal Distribution of Shear where

the average of the displacements at the
The design storey shear, V x' in any storey is the sum of the
extreme points of the structure at Level x,
forces F t and F x above that storey. Vx shall be distributed
mm
to the various elements of the vertical lateral force-resisting
the maximum displacement at Level x,
system in proportion to their rigidities, considering the
mm
rigidity of the diaphragm. See Section 208.7.2.3 for rigid
elements that are not intended to be part of the lateral force-
The value of Ax need not exceed 3.0
resisting systems.
208.5.1.5 Overturning
Where diaphragms are not flexible, the mass at each level
shall be assumed to be displaced from the calculated center
Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning
of mass in each direction a distance equal to 5 percent of
effects caused by earthquake forces specified in Section
the building dimension at that level perpendicular to the
208.5.2.3. At any level, the overturning moments to be
direction of the force under consideration. The effect of
res isted shall be determined using those seismic forces (F t
this displacement on the storey shear distribution shall be
and F x) that act on levels above the level under
considered.
consideration. At any level, the incremental changes of the
design overturning moment shall be distributed to the
Diaphragms shall be considered flexible for the purposes
various resisting elements in the manner prescribed in
of distribution of storey shear and torsional moment when
Section 208.5.1.3. Overturning effects on every element
the maximum lateral deformation of the diaphragm is more
shall be carried down to the foundation. See Sections 207.1
than two times the average storey drift of the associated
and 208.7 for combining gravity and seismic forces.
storey. This may be determined by comparing the
~omputed midpoint in-plane deflection of the diaphragm
Itself under lateral load with the storey drift of adjoining 208.5.1.5.1 Elements Supporting Discontinuous
Systems
vertical-resisting elements under equivalent tributary
lateral load.
208.5.1.5.1.1 General
208.5.1.4 Horizontal Torsional Moments
Where any portion of the lateral load-resisting system is
discontinuous, such as for vertical irregularity Type 4 in
Provisions shall be made for the increased shears resulting
Table 208-9 or plan irregularity Type 4 in Table 208-10,
from horizontal torsion where diaphragms are not flexible.
concrete, masonry, steel and wood elements supporting
The most severe load combination for each element shall
such discontinuous systems shall have the design strength
be considered for design.
to resist the combination loads resulting from the special
seismic load combinations of Section 203.5.
The torsional design moment at a given storey shall be the
moment resulting from eccentricities between applied
Exceptions:
design lateral forces at levels above that storey and the
vertical-resisting elements in that storey plus an accidental 1. The quantity Em in Section 208.6 need not exceed the
torsion. maximum force that can be transferred to the element
by the lateral-force-resisting system.
The accidental torsional moment shall be determined by
assuming the mass is displaced as required by Section 2. Concrete slabs supporting light-frame wood shear
wall systems or light-frame steel and wood structural
208.5.1.3.
panel shear wall systems.
Where torsional irregularity exists, as defined in Table
For Allowable Stress Design, the design strength may be
208-10, the effects shall be accounted for by increasing the
determined using an allowable stress increase of 1.7 and a
accidental torsion at each level by an amplification factor,
Ax, determined from the following equation: resistance factor, cp, of 1.0. This increase shall not be
combined with the one- third stress increase permitted by
Section 203.4, but may be combined with the duration of
load increase permitted in Section 615.3.4.
(208-7)

208.5.1.5.1.1.2 Detailing requirements in Seismic 208.5.1.6 AppJicabiJity

Zone 4
Sections 208.6.2, 208.6.3, 208.5.2.1, 208.5.2.2, 208.5.2.3,
In Seismic Zone 4, elements supporting discontinuous 208.6.4,208.6.5 and 208.5.3 shall not apply when using the
systems shall meet the following detailing or member simplified procedure.
limitations:
Exception:
I. Reinforced concrete or reinforced masonry elements
For buildings with relatively flexible structural systems,
designed primarily as axial-load members shall
the building official may require consideration of PfJ.
comply with Section 421.4.4.5.
effects and drift in accordance with Sections 208.6.3,
208.6.4 and 208.6.5. fJ.s shall be determined using design
2. Reinforced concrete elements designed primarily as
seismic forces from Section 208.5.1.1.
flexural members and supporting other than light-
frame wood shear wall system or light-frame steel and
Where used, !J.M shall be taken equal to 0.01 times the
wood structural panel shear wall systems shall comply
storey height of all stories. In Section 208.7.2.7,
with Sections 421.3.2 and 421.3.3. Strength
computations for portions of slabs designed as Equation 208-22 shall read Fpx = 3~a wpx and need not
supporting elements shall include only those portions exceed Cawpx, but shall not be less than O. 5Cawpx' Rand
of the slab that comply with the requirements of these no shall be taken from Table 208-11.
sections.
208.5.2 Static Force Procedure
3. Masonry elements designed primarily as axial-load
carrying members shall comply with Sections 208.5.2.1 Design Base Shear
706.1.12.4, Item I, and 708.2.6.2.6.
The total design base shear in a given direction shall be
4. Masonry elements designed primarily as flexural determined from the following equation:
members shall comply with Section 708.2.6.2.5.
5. Steel elements designed primarily as axial-load (208-8)

members shall comply with Sections 515.4.2 and
515.4.3.
The total design base shear need not exceed the following:
6. Steel elements designed primarily as flexural members
or trusses shall have bracing for both top and bottom
beam flanges or chords at the location of the support (208-9)
of the discontinuous system and shall comply with the
requirements of Section 515.6.1.3.
The total design base shear shall not be less than the
7. Wood elements designed primarily as flexural following:
members shall be provided with lateral bracing or
solid blocking at each end of the element and at the
connection location(s) of the discontinuous system. V = O.l1CalW (208-10)
208.5.1.5.2 At Foundation
In addition, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear shall
also not be less than the following:
See Sections 208.4.1 and 308.4 for overturning moments
to be resisted at the foundation soil interface.
O.8ZN1··I
V'= 'w (208-11)
R

208.5.2.2 Structure Period distribution. The elastic deflections, 'h shall be calculated
using the applied lateral forces, t..
The value of T shall be determined from one of the
following methods: 208.5.2.3 Vertical Distribution of Force
1. Method A: The total force shall be distributed over the height of the
structure in conformance with Equations 208-15, 208-16
For all buildings, the value T may be approximated from
and 208-17 in the absence of a more rigorous procedure.
the following equation:
n
(208-12)
V= F + LFi
t (208-15)
where i=l
0.0853 for steel moment-resisting frames

0.0731 for reinforced concrete moment- The concentrated force F, at the top, which is in addition
resisting frames and eccentrically braced to F n' shall be determined from the equation:
frames
0.0488 for all other buildings Ft = 0.07TV (208-16)
Alternatively, the value of C, for structures with concrete The value of T used for the purpose of calculating F t shall
or masonry shear walls may be taken as 0.0743/.jA;. be the period that corresponds with the design base shear
as computed using Equation 208-4. F t need not exceed
O. 25V and may be considered as zero where T is 0.7 s or
The value of Ac shall be determined from the following
less. The remaining portion of the base shear shall be
equation:
distributed over the height of the structure, including Level
n, according to the following equation:
(208-13)
(208-17)
The value of De/hn used in Equation 208-13 shall not
exceed 0.9.
At each level designated as x, the force F x shall be applied
2. Method B: over the area of the building in accordance with the mass
distribution at that level. Structural displacements and
The fundamental period T may be calculated using the
design seismic forces shall be calculated as the effect of
structural properties and deformational characteristics of
forces F x and F t applied at the appropriate levels above the
the resisting elements in a properly substantiated analysis.
base.
The analysis shall be in accordance with the requirements
of Section 208.6.2. The value of T from Method B shall
208.5.3 Dynamic Analysis Procedures
not exceed a value 30 percent greater than the value of T
obtained from Method A in Seismic Zone 4, and 40 percent
208.5.3.1 General
in Seismic Zone 2.
Dynamic analyses procedures, when used, shall conform to
The fundamental period T may be computed by using the
the criteria established in this section. The analysis shall be
following equation:
based on an appropriate ground motion representation and
shall be performed using accepted principles of dynamics.
(208-14) Structures that are designed in accordance with this section

shall comply with all other applicable requirements of
these provisions.
The values of Ii represent any lateral force distributed

approximately in accordance with the principles of
Equations. 208-15, 208-16 and 208-17 or any other rational

208.5.3.2 Ground Motion 4. For structures on Soil Profile Type SF, the following
requirements shall apply when required by Section
T~ ground motion representation shall, as a minimum, be 208.4.8.3, Item 4:
one having a 10-percent probability of being exceeded in
50 years, shall not be reduced by the quantity R and may 4.1 The ground motion representation shall be
be one of the following: developed in accordance with Items 2 and 3.
I. An elastic design response spectrum constructed in 4.2 Possible amplification of building response due to
accordance with Figure 208-3, using the values of Ca the effects of soil-structure interaction and
and Cv consistent with the specific site. The design lengthening of building period caused by inelastic
acceleration ordinates shall be multiplied by the behavior shall be considered.
acceleration of gravity, 9.815 m/sec".
5. The vertical component of ground motion may be
defined by scaling corresponding horizontal
2. A site-specific elastic design response spectrum based
accelerations by a factor of two- thirds. Altemative
on the geologic, tectonic, seismologic and soil
factors may be used when substantiated by site-
characteristics associated with the specific site. The
specific data. Where the Near-Source Factor, N a, is
spectrum shall be developed for a damping ratio of
greater than 1.0, site-specific vertical response spectra
0.05, unless a different value is shown to be consistent
shall be used in lieu of the factor of two-thirds.
with the anticipated structural behavior at the intensity
of shaking established for the site.
3. Ground motion time histories developed for the

specific site shall be representative of actual
earthquake motions. Response spectra from time
histories, either individually or in combination, shall
approximate the site design spectrum conforming to
Section 208.5.3.2, Item 2.
Control Periods
2.5Ga
T, = Cv12.5Ca
'ii
S
II
To = 0.2Ts
r
Ga
0
o 0.2
t
2
Period (TITs)
3 4 5
Torrs
Figure 208-3
Design Response Spectra

CHAF'T[F~ :2 - Minirm!rlI[lesiun t.oads
208.5.3.3 Mathematical Model Jar the modes considered, at least 90 percent of the
participating mass of the structure is included in the
A mathematical model of the physical structure shall calculation of response tor each principal horizontal
represent the spatial distribution of the mass and stiffness direction.
of the structure to an extent that is adequate for the
calculation of the significant features of its dynamic 208.5.3.5.3 Combining Modes
response. A three-dimensional model shall be used for the
dynamic analysis of structures with highly irregular plan The peak member forces, displacements, storey forces,
configurations such as those having a plan irregularity storey shears and base reactions for each mode shall be
defined in Table 208- I0 and having a rigid or semi-rigid combined by recognized methods. When three-
diaphragm. The stiffness properties used in the analysis dimensional models are used for analysis, modal
and general mathematical modeling shall be in accordance interaction effects shall be considered when combining
with Section 208.6.2. modal maxima.
208.5.3.4 Description of Analysis Procedures 208.5.3.5.4 Reduction of Elastic Response

Parameters for Design
208.5.3.4.1 Response Spectrum Analysis
Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced for purposes
All elastic dynamic analysis of a structure utilizing the peak of design in accordance with the following items, with the
dynamic response of all modes having a significant limitation that in no case shall the Elastic Response
contribution to total structural response. Peak modal Parameters be reduced such that the corresponding design
responses are calculated using the ordinates of the base shear is less than the Elastic Response Base Shear
appropriate response spectrum curve which correspond to divided by the value of R.
the modal periods. Maximum modal contributions are
combined in a statistical manner to obtain an approximate- I. For all regular structures where the ground motion
total structural response. representation complies with Section 208.5.3.2, Item
1, Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced such
208.5.3.4.2 Time History Analysis that the corresponding design base shear is not less
than 90 percent of the base shear determined in
An analysis of the dynamic response of a structure at each accordance with Section 208.5.2.
increment of time when the base is subjected to a specific
ground motion time history. 2. For all regular structures where the ground motion
representation complies with Section 208.5.3.2, Item
208.5.3.5 Response Spectrum Analysis 2, Elastic Response Parameters may be reduced such
that the corresponding design base shear is not less
208.5.3.5.1 Response Spectrum Representation than 80 percent of the base shear determined in
and Interpretation of Results accordance with Section 208.5.2.
The ground motion representation shall be in accordance 3. For all irregular structures, regardless of the ground
with Section 208.5.3.2. The corresponding response motion representation, Elastic Response Parameters
parameters, including forces, moments and displacements, may be reduced such that the corresponding design
shall be denoted as Elastic Response Parameters. Elastic base shear is not less than 100 percent of the base shear
Response Parameters may be reduced in accordance with determined in accordance with Section 208.5.2.
Section 208.5.3.5.4.
The corresponding reduced design seismic forces shall be
The base shear for a given direction, determined using used for design in accordance with Section 203.
dynamic analysis must not be less than the value obtained
by the equivalent latera! force method of Section 208.5.2. 208.5.3.5.5 Directional Effects
In this case, all corresponding response parameters are
adjusted proportionately. Directional effects for horizontal ground motion shall
conform to the requirements of Section 208.6. The effects
208.5.3.5.2 Number of Modes of vertical ground motions on horizontal cantilevers and
pre-stressed elements shall be considered in accordance
The requirement of Section 208.5.3.4.1 that all significant with Section 208.6. Alternately, vertical seismic response
modes be included may be satisfied by demonstrating that may be determined by dynamic response methods; in no

case shall the response used for design be less than that 208.5.3.6.2 Elastic Time History Analysis
obtained by the static method.
Elastic time history shall conform to Sections 208.5.3.1,
208.5.3.5.6 Torsion 208.5.3.2, 208.5.3.3, 208.5.3.5.2, 208.5.3.5.4,
208.6.5.3.5.5, 208.6.5.3.5.6, 208.5.3.5.7 and 208.5.3.6.1
The analysis shall account for torsional effects, including and 208.6.6.1. Response parameters from elastic time-
accidental torsional effects as prescribed in Section history analysis shall be denoted as Elastic Response
208.5.1.4. Where three-dimensional models are used for Parameters. All elements shall be designed using Strength
analysis, effects of accidental torsion shall be accounted for Design. Elastic Response Parameters may be scaled in
by appropriate adjustments in the model such as adj usimcrn accordance with Section 208.5.3.5.4.
of mass locations, or by equivalent static PI' cedures such
as provided in Section 208.5.1.3. 208.5.3.6.3 Nonlinear Time History Analysis
208.5.3.5.7 Dual Systems 208.5.3.6.3.1 Nonlinear Time History
Where the lateral forces are resisted by a dual system as Nonlinear time history analysis shall meet the requirements
defined in Section 208.4.6.4, the combined system shall be of Section 208.4.8.4, and time histories shall be developed
capable of resisting the base shear determined in and results determined in accordance with the requirements
accordance with this section. The moment-resisting frame of Section 208.5.3.6.1. Capacities and characteristics of
shall conform to Section 208.4.6.4, Item 2, and may be nonlinear elements shall be modeled consistent with test
analyzed using either the procedures of Section 208.5.2.3 data or substantiated analysis, considering the Importance
or those of Section 208.5.3.5. Factor. The maximum inelastic response displacement
shall not be reduced and shall comply with Section 208.6.5.
208.5.3.6 Time History Analysis
208.5.3.6.3.2 Design Review
208.5.3.6.1 Time History
When nonlinear time-history analysis is used to justify a
Time-history analysis shall be performed with pairs of structural design, a design review of the lateral- force-
appropriate horizontal ground-motion time- history resisting system shall be performed by an independent
components that shall be selected and scaled from not less engineering team, including: persons licensed ill the
than three recorded events. Appropriate time histories shall appropriate disciplines and experienced in seismic analysis
have magnitudes, fault distances and source mechanisms methods. The lateral-fotce-rcsisting system design review
that are consistent with those that control the design-basis shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
earthquake (or maximum capable earthquake). Where
three appropriate recorded ground-motion Lime-history 1. Reviewing the development of site-specific spectra
pairs are not available, appropriate simulated ground- and ground-motion time histories.
motion time-history pairs may be used to make up the tala I
number required. For each pair of horizontal ground- 2. Reviewing the preliminary design of the lateral-force-
motion components, the square root of the sum of the resisting system.
squares (SRSS) of the 5 percent-damped site-specific
spectrum of the scaled horizontal components shall be 3. Reviewing the final design of the lateral-force-
constructed. The motions shall be scaled such that the resisting system and all supporting analyses.
average value of the SRSS spectra does not fall below 1.4
times the 5 percent-damped spectrum of the design-basis The engineer-of-record shall submit with the plans and
earthquake for periods from O.2T second to 1. 5T seconds. calculations a statement by all members of the engineering
Each pair of time histories shall be applied simultaneously team doing the review stating that the above review has
to the model considering torsional effects. been performed.
The parameter of interest shall be calculated for each time-

history analysis. If three time-history analyses are
performed, then the maximum response of the parameter
of interest shall be used for design. If seven or more time-
history analyses are performed, then the average value of
the response parameter of interest may be used for design.

CHAPT EI~ 2. _. Minimum DRsign I OF1ds 2-21 q
208.6 Earthquake Loads and Modeling r max is defined as the largest of the element storey shear
Requirements ratios, rio which occurs in any of the storey levels at or
below the two-thirds height level ofthe building.
Earthquake Loads
For braced frames, the value of r, is equal to the maximum
Structures shall be designed for ground motion producing horizontal force component in a single brace element
structural response and seismic forces in any horizontal divided by the total storey shear.
direction. The following earthquake loads shall be used in
the load combinations set forth in Section 203: For moment frames, r, shall be taken as the maximum of
the sum of the shears in any two adjacent columns in a
moment frame bay divided by the storey shear. For
(208-18)
columns common to two bays with moment-resisting
connections on opposite sides at Level i in the direction
(208-19)
under consideration, 70 percent of the shear in that column
where may be used in the column shear summation.
E the earthquake load on an element of the For shear walls, ri shall be taken as the maximum value of
structure resulting from the combination of the product of the wall shear multiplied by 3/lw and
the horizontal component, Eh, and the divided by the total storey shear, where lw is the length of
vertical component, Ev the wall in meter.
= the earthquake load due to the base shear,
V, as set forth in Section 208.5.2 or the For dual systems, r, shall be taken as the maximum value
design lateral force, F p' as set forth in of r, as defined above considering all lateral-load-resisting
Section 208.9 elements. The lateral loads shall be distributed to elements
the estimated maximum earthquake force based on relative rigidities considering the interaction of
that can be developed in the structure as set the dual system. For dual systems, the value of p need not
forth in Section 208.6.1, and used in the exceed 80 percent of the value calculated above.
design of specific elements of the structure,
as specifically identified in this section p shall not be taken less than 1.0 and need not be greater
= the load effect resulting from the vertical than 1.5. For special moment-resisting frames, except
component of the earthquake ground when used in dual systems, p shall not exceed 1.25. The
motion and is equal to an addition of number of bays of special moment-resisting frames shall
O.5CaID to the dead load effect, D, for be increased to reduce r, such that p is less than or equal
Strength Design, and may be taken as zero to 1.25.
for Allowable Stress Design
the seismic force amplification factor that is Exception:
required to account for structural AB may be taken as the average floor area in the upper
overstrength, as set forth in Section setback portion of the building where a larger base area
208.4.10.1 exists at the ground floor.
p Reliability/Redundancy Factor as given by
the following equation: When calculating drift, or when the structure is located in
6.1 Seismic Zone 2, p shall be taken equal to 1.0.
p=2---= (208-20)
rmax.j7f;
The ground motion producing lateral response and design
seismic forces may be assumed to act non-concurrently in
where the direction of each principal axis of the structure, except
rmax the maximum element-storey shear ratio. as required by Section 208.7.2.
For a given direction of loading, the
element-storey shear ratio is the ratio of the Seismic dead load, W, is the total dead load and applicable
design storey shear in the most heavily portions of other loads listed below.
loaded single element divided by the total
design storey shear. I, In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum of
25 percent of the floor live load shall be applicable.
For any given Storey Level i, the element-storey shear ratio
is denoted as rio The maximum element-storey shear ratio
2. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a 208.6.4.1 Determination of Lls
load of not less than 0.5 kN/m2 shall be included.
A static, elastic analysis of the lateral force-resisting
3. Total weight of permanent equipment shall be system shall be prepared using the design seismic forces
included. from Section 208.5.2.1. Alternatively, dynamic analysis
may be performed in accordance with Section 208.5.3.
208.6.2 Modeling Requirements Where Allowable Stress Design is used and where drift is
being computed, the load combinations of Section 203.3
The mathematical model of the physical structure shall shall be used. The mathematical model shall comply with
include all elements of the lateral-force-resisting system. Section 208.6.2. The resulting deformations, denoted as
The model shall also include the stiffness and strength of Lls, shall be determined at all critical locations in the
elements, which are significant to the distribution of forces, structure. Calculated drift shall include translational and
and shall represent the spatial distribution of the mass and torsional deflections.
stiffness of the structure. In addition, the model shall
comply with the following: 208.6.4.2 Determination of LlM
1. Stiffness properties of reinforced concrete and The Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, LlM' shall
masonry elements shall consider the effects of cracked be computed as follows:
sections.
(208-21 )
2. For steel moment frame systems, the contribution of
panel zone deformations to overall storey drift shall be Exception:
included.
Alternatively, Llm may be computed by nonlinear time
history analysis in accordance with Section 208.5.3.6.3.
208.6.3 P Ll Effects
The analysis used to determine the Maximum Inelastic

The resulting member forces and moments and the storey
Response Displacement LlMshall consider PLl effects.
drifts induced by P Ll effects shall be considered in the
evaluation of overall structural frame stability and shall be
evaluated using the forces producing the displacements of 208.6.5 Storey Drift Limitation
Lls. P Llneed not be considered when the ratio of secondary
moment to primary moment does not exceed 0.10; the ratio Storey drifts shall be computed using the Maximum
may be evaluated for any storey as the product of the total Inelastic Response Displacement, LlM.
dead and floor live loads, as required in Section 203, above
the storey times the seismic drift in that storey divided by 208.6.5.1 Calculated
the product of the seismic shear in that storey times the
height of that storey. In Seismic Zone 4, PLl need not be Calculated storey drift using LlM shall not exceed 0.025
considered when the storey drift ratio does not exceed times the storey height for structures having a fundamental
O.02/R. period of less than 0.7 sec. For structures having a
fundamental period of 0.7 sec or greater, the calculated
208.6.4 Drift storey drift shall not exceed 0.020 times the storey height.
Drift or horizontal displacements of the structure shall be Exceptions:

computed where required by this code. For both Allowable 1. These drift limits may be exceeded when it is
Stress Design and Strength Design, the Maximum Inelastic demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated by
Response Displacement, LlM' of the structure caused by the both structural elements and nonstructural elements
Design Basis Ground Motion shall be determined in that could affect life safety. The drift used in this
accordance with this section. The drifts corresponding to assessment shall be based upon the Maximum
the design seismic forces of Section 208.5.2.1 or Section Inelastic Response Displacement, LlM.
208.5.3.5, Lls, shall be determined in accordance with
Section 208.6.4.1. To determine LlM' these drifts shall be 2. There shall be no drift limit in Single-storey steel-
amplified in accordance with Section 208.6.4.2. framed structures whose primary use is limited to
storage, factories or workshops. Minor accessory
uses shall be allowed. Structures on which this
exception is used shall not have equipment attached to

the structural frame or shall have such equipment In Seismic Zones 2 and 4, provision shall be made for the
detailed to accommodate the additional drift. Walls effects of earthquake forces acting in a direction other than
that are laterally supported by the steelframe shall be the principal axes in each of the following circumstances:
designed to accommodate the drift in accordance with
Section 208.7.2.3. 1. The structure has plan irregularity Type 5 as given in
Table 208-10.
208.6.5.2 Limitations
2. The structure has plan irregularity Type 1 as given in
The design lateral forces used to determine the calculated Table 208-10 for both major axes.
drift may disregard the limitations of Equations. 208-11
and 208-10 and may be based on the period determined 3. A column of a structure forms part of two or more
from Equations. 208-14 neglecting the 30 or 40 percent intersecting lateral-force-resisting systems.
limitations of Section 208.5.2.2.
Exception:
208.6.6 Vertical Component
If the axial load in the column due to.seismic forces acting
in either direction is less than 20 percent of the column
The following requirements apply in Seismic Zone 4 only.
axial load capacity.
Horizontal cantilever components shall be designed for a
net upward force ofO. 7CaIWp.
The requirement that orthogonal effects be considered may
be satisfied by designing such elements for 100 percent of
In addition to all other applicable load combinations, the prescribed design seismic forces in one direction plus
horizontal pre-stressed components shall be designed using 30 percent of the prescribed design seismic forces in the
not more than 50 percent of the dead load for the gravity perpendicular direction. The combination requiring the
load, alone or in combination with the lateral force effects. greater component strength shall be used for design.
Alternatively, the effects of the two orthogonal directions
208.7 Detailed Systems Design Requirements may be combined on a square root of the sum of the squares
(SRSS) basis. When the SRSS method of combining
208.7.1 General directional effects is used, each term computed shall be
assigned the sign that will result in the most conservative
All structural framing systems shall comply with the result.
requirements of Section 208.4. Only the elements of the
designated seismic-force-resisting system shall be used to
resist design forces. The individual components shall be
designed to resist the prescribed design seismic forces
acting on them. The components shall also comply with the
specific requirements for the material contained in
Chapters 4 through 7. In addition, such framing systems
and components shall comply with the detailed system
design requirements contained in Section 208.7.
All building components in Seismic Zones 2 and 4 shall be

designed to resist the effects of the seismic forces
prescribed herein and the effects of gravity loadings from
dead and floor live loads.
Consideration shall be given to design for uplift effects

caused by seismic loads.

~22 CHAPTER 2 - Minimum Design Loads
8.7.2 Structural Framing Systems of the Maximum Inelastic Response Displacement, 11M,
considering PI1Deffects determined in accordance with
ur types of general building framing systems defined in Section 208.6.4.2 or the deformation induced by a storey
ction 208.4.6 are recognized in these provisions and drift of 0.0025 times the storey height. When computing
own in Table 208-11. Each type is subdivided by the expected deformations, the stiffening effect of those
res of vertical elements used to resist lateral seismic elements not part of the lateral-foree-resisting system shall
·ces. Special framing requirements are given in this be neglected.
ction and in Chapters 4 through 7.
For elements not part of the lateral-force-resisting system,
8.7.2.1 Detailing for Combinations of Systems the forces inducted by the expected deformation may be
considered as ultimate or factored forces. When computing
r components common to different structural systems, the forces induced by expected deformations, the
~more restrictive detailing requirements shall be used. restraining effect of adjoining rigid structures and
non structural elements shall be considered and a rational
8.7.2.2 Connections value of member and restraint stiffness shall be used.
Inelastic deformations of members and connections may be
mnections that resist design seismic forces shall be considered in the evaluation, provided the assumed
signed and detailed on the drawings. calculated capacities are consistent with member and
connection design and detailing.
8.7.2.3 Deformation Compatibility
For concrete and masonry elements that are part of the
I structural framing elements and their connections, not lateral- force-resisting system, the assumed flexural and
quired by design to be part of the lateral-force-resisting shear stiffness properties shall not exceed one half of the
stem, shall be designed andlor detailed to be adequate to gross section properties unless a rational cracked-section
iintain support of design dead plus live loads when analysis is performed. Additional deformations that may
bjected to the expected deformations caused by seismic result from foundation flexibility and diaphragm
rces. PI1 effects on such elements shall be considered. deflections shall be considered. For concrete elements not
.pected deformations shall be determined as the greater part of the lateral-force-resisting system, see Section 421.9.

Table 208-11A Earthquake-Foree-Resisting Structural Systems of Concrete
System Limitation and

R no Building Height Limitation by
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System
Seismic Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone 4
A. Bearing Wall Systems
• SEecial reinforced concrete shear walls 4.5 2.8 NL 50
• Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls 4.5 2.8 NL NP
B. Building Frame Systems
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls or braced
5.0 2.8 NL 75
frames (shear walls)
• Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls or braced
5.6 2.2 NL NP
frames
• Intermediate precast shear walls or braced frames 5.0 2.5 NL 10
C. Moment-Resisting Frame Systems
• Special reinforced concrete moment frames 8.5 2.8 NL NL
• Intermediate reinforced concrete moment frames 5.5 2.8 NL NP
• Ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames 3.5 2.8 NL NP
D. Dual Systems
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls 8.5 2.8 NL NL
E. Dual System with Intermediate Moment Frames
• Special reinforced concrete shear walls 6.5 2.8 NL 50
• Shear wall frame interactive system with ordinary
reinforced concrete moment frames and ordinary 4.2 2.8 NP NP
reinforced concrete shear walls
F. Cantilevered Column BuildingSystems
• Cantilevered column elements 2.2 2.0 NL 10
G. Shear Wall- Frame Interaction Systems 5.5 2.8 NL 50

Table 208-11 B Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Steel

Building Height Limitation by
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R no Seismic Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone 4
A. Be(/I';nJ.! Wall Systems
• Light steel-framed bearing walls with tension-only 2.8 2.2 NL 20
bracing
• Braced frames where bracing carries gravity load 4.4 2.2 NL 50
• Light framed walls sheathed with steel sheets
structural panels rated for shear resistance or steel 5.5 2.8 NL 20
sheets
• Light-framed walls with shear panels of all other 4.5 2.8 NL 20
lighJ materials
• Light-framed wall systems using flat strap bracing 2.8 2.2 NL NP
B. DlIiitiillg Frame Systems
• Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF), moment- 8.0 2.8 NL 30
resisti ng connections at columns away from links
.. Steel eccentrically braced frames (EBF), non-
moment-resisting connections at columns away 6.0 2.2 NL 30
from links
• Special concentrically braced frames (SeBF) 6.0 2.2 NL 30
• Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OeBF) 3.2 2.2 NL NP
• Light-framed walls sheathed with steel sheet 6.5 2.8 NL 20
structuralpanels / sheet steel panels
• Light frame walls with shear panels of all other
2.5 2.8 NL NP
materials
• Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF), non-
7.0 2.8 NL 30
moment-resistlllg beam-column connection
• Buckling-restrained braced frames, moment- 8.0 2.8 NL 30
resisting beam-column connections
• Special steel plate shear walls (SPSW) 7.0 2.8 NL 30
C. Moment-Resisting Frame Systems
• Special moment-resisting frame (S]\IJRF) 8.0 3.0 NL NL
• Intermediate steel moment frames (lMF) 4.5 3.0 NL NP
• Ordinary moment frames (OMF) 3.5 3.0 NL NP
• Special truss moment frames (STMF) 6.5 3.0 NL NP
• Special composite steel and concrete moment 8.0 3.0 NL NL
frames
• Intermediate composite moment frames 5.0 3.0 NL NP
• Composite partially restrained moment frames 6.0 3.0 50 NP
• Ordinary composite moment frames 3.0 3.0 NP NP
D. Dual Systems with Special Moment Frames
• Steel eccentrically braced frames 8.0 2.8 NL NL
• Special steel cencentricaljybraced frames 7.0 2.8 NL NL
• Composite steel and concrete eccentrically braced 8.0 2.8 NL NL
frame

Table 208-11 B (continued) Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Steel

/
Building Height
R no Limitation by Seismic
Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone 4
• Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced
6.0 2.8 NL NL
frame
• Composite steel plate shear walls 7.5 2.8 NL NL
• Buckling-restrained braced frame 8.0 2.8 NL NL
• Special steel plate shear walls 8.0 2.8 NL NL
• Masonry shear wall with steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
• Steel EBF with steel SMRF 8.5 2.8 NL NL
• Steel EBF with steel OMRF 4.2 2.8 NL 50
• Special concentrically braced frames with steel 7.5 2.8 NL NL
SMRF
• Special concentrically braced frames with steel 4.2 2.8 NL 50
OMRF
E. Dual System with Intermediate Moment Frames
• Special steel concentrically braced frame 6.0 2.8 NL NP
• Composite steel and concrete concentrically braced 5.5 2.8 NL NP
frame
• Ordinary composite braced frame 3.5 2.8 NL NP
• Ordinary composite reinforced concrete shear walls 5.0 3.0 NL NP
with steel elements
F. Cantilevered Column Building Systems
• Special steel moment frames 2.2 2.0 10 10
• Intermediate steel moment frames 1.2 2.0 10 NP
• Ordinary steel moment frames 1.0 2.0 10 NP
• Cantilevered column elements 2.2 2.0 NL 10
G. Steel Systems not Specifically Detailed for Seismic .
3.0 3.0 NL NP
Resistance .•Excluding Cantilever Systems

Table 208-11 C Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Masonry

Building Height Limitation by
Basic Seismic-Force Resisting System R flo Seismic Zone, m
Zone 2 Zone 4
4.5 2.8 NL 50
5.5 2.8 NL 50
6.5 2.8 NL 50
5.5 2.8 NL 50
4.2 2.8 NL 50
• Mason shear walls with concrete IMRF 4.2 2.8 NL NP
• Masonry shear walls with masonry MMR WF 6.0 2.8 NL 50
Table 208-IID Earthquake-Force-Resisting Structural Systems of Wood

R Building Height Limitation by
Seismic Zone (meters)
Zone 2 Zone 4
• Light-framed walls with shear panels: wood

structural panel walls for structures three stories or 5.5 2.8 NL 20
less
2.8 2.2 NL 20
NA NA
5.6 2.2 . NL 20
208.7.2.3.1 Adjoining Rigid Elements connections and fasteners in accordance with the following
provisions:
Moment-resisting frames and shear walls may be enclosed
by or adjoined by more rigid elements; provided it can be 1. Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative
shown that the participation or failure of the more rigid movement between stories of not less than two times
elements will not impair the vertical and lateral- load- storey drift caused by wind, the calculated storey drift
resisting ability of the gravity load and lateral- force- based on aM or 12.7 mm, whichever is greater.
resisting systems. The effects of adjoining rigid elements
2. Connections to permit movement in the plane of the
shall be considered when assessing whether a structure
panel for storey drift shall be sliding connections using
shall be designated regular or irregular in Section 208.4.5.
slotted or oversize holes, connections that permit
movement by bending of steel, or other connections
208.7.2.3.2 Exterior Elements
providing equivalent sliding and ductility capacity.
Exterior non-bearing, non-shear wall panels or elements

3. Bodies of connections shall have sufficient ductility
that are attached to or enclose the exterior shall be designed
and rotation capacity to preclude fracture of the
to resist the forces per Equation 208-27 or 208-28 and shall
concrete or brittle failures at or near welds.
accommodate movements of the structure based on aM and
temperature changes. Such elements shall be supported by
means of cast-in-place concrete or by mechanical

4. The body of the connection shall be designed for the other elements of the lateral-force-resisting system. For
force determined by Equation 208-28, where Rp = Allowable Stress Design, the design strength may be
3.0 and ap = 1. O. determined using an allowable stress increase of 1.7 and a
resistance factor, 8, of l.0. This increase shall not be
5. All fasteners in the connecting system, such as bolts, combined with the one-third stress increase permitted by
inserts, welds and dowels, shall be designed for the Section 203.4, but may be combined with the duration of
forces determined by Equation 208-28, where Rp = load increase permitted in Section 615.3.4.
1.0 and ap = 1. O.
208.7.2.5 Concrete Frames
6. Fasteners embedded in concrete shall be attached to,
Concrete frames required by design to be part ofthe lateral-
or hooked around, reinforcing steel or otherwise
force-resisting system shall conform to the following:
terminated to effectively transfer forces to the
reinforcing steel.
1. In Seismic Zone 4 they shall be special moment-
resisting frames.
208.7.2.3.3 Ties and Continuity
2. In Seismic Zone 2 they shall, as a minimum, be
All parts of a structure shall be interconnected and the
intermediate moment-resisting frames.
connections shall be capable of transmitting the seismic
force induced by the parts being connected. As a minimum,
208.7.2.6 Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls
any smaller portion of the building shall be tied to the
remainder of the building with elements having at least
Concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored to all floors
strength to resist O. 5Cal times the weight of the smaller
and roofs that provide out-of-plane lateral support of the
portion.
wall. The anchorage shall provide a positive direct
connection between the wall and floor or roof construction
A positive connection for resisting horizontal force acting
capable of resisting the larger of the horizontal forces
parallel to the member shall be provided for each beam,
specified in this section and Sections 206.4 and 208.9. In
girder or truss. This force shall not be less than O.3Cal
addition, in Seismic Zone 4, diaphragm to wall anchorage
times the dead plus live load.
using embedded straps shall have the straps attached to or
hooked around the reinforcing steel or otherwise
208.7.2.4 Collector Elements
terminated to effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing
steel. Requirements for developing anchorage. forces in
Collector elements shall be provided that are capable of
diaphragms are given in Section 208.7.2.6. Diaphragm
transferring the seismic forces originating in other portions
deformation shall be considered in the' design of the
of the structure to the element providing the resistance to
supported walls.
those forces.
208.7.2.6.1 Out-of-Plane Wall Anchorage to
Collector elements, splices and their connections to
Flexible Diaphragms
resisting elements shall resist the forces determined in
accordance with Equation 208-22. In addition, collector
This section shall apply in Seismic Zone 4 where flexible
elements; splices, and their connections to resisting
diaphragms, as defined in Section 208.5.1.3, provide lateral
elements shall have the design strength to resist the
support for walls.
combined loads resulting from the special seismic load of
Section 203.5.
1. Elements of the wall anchorage system shall be
designed for the forces specified in Section 208.9
Exception:
where Rp = 3.0 and ap = 1.5.
In structures, or portions thereof, braced entirely by light-
frame wood shear walls or light-frame steel and wood 2. In Seismic Zone 4, the value of F p used for the design
structural panel shear wall systems, collector elements, of the elements of the wall anchorage system shall not
splices and connections to resisting elements need only be be less than 6.1 kN per lineal meter of wall substituted
designed to resist forces in accordance with Equation 208- for E.
22.
3. See Section 206.4 for minimum design forces in other
The quantity EM need not exceed the maximum force that seismic zones.
can be transferred to the collector by the diaphragm and

4. When elements of the wall anchorage system are not accordance with Section 208.5.2 using a R not
loaded concentrically or are not perpendicular to the exceeding 4.
wall, the system shall be designed to resist all
components of the forces induced by the eccentricity. 4. Diaphragms supporting concrete or masonry walls
shall have continuous ties or struts between diaphragrn
5. When pilasters are present in the wall, the anchorage chords to distribute the anchorage forces specified in
force at the pilasters shall be calculated considering Section 208.7.2.7. Added chords of subdiaphragms
the additional load transferred from the wall panels to may be used to form subdiaphragms to transmit the
the pilasters. However, the minimum anchorage force anchorage forces to the main continuous crossties. The
at a floor or roof shall be that specified in Section maximum length-to-width ratio of the wood structural
208.7.2.7, Item 2. sub-diaphragm shall be 2 V2: 1.
6. The strength design forces for steel elements of the 5. Where wood diaphragms are used to laterally support
wall anchorage system shall be 1.4 times the forces concrete or masonry walls, the anchorage shall
otherwise required by this section. conform to Section 208.7.2.7. In Seismic Zone 2 and
4, anchorage shall not be accomplished by use of
7. The strength design forces for wood elements of the toenails or nails subject to withdrawal, wood ledgers
wall anchorage system shall be 0.85 times the force or framing shall not be used in cross-grain bending or
otherwise required by this section and these wood cross-grain tension, and the continuous ties required
elements shall have a minimum actual net thickness of by Item 4 shall be in addition to the diaphragm
63.5 mm. sheathing.
208.7.2.7 Diaphragms 6. Connections of diaphragms to the vertical elements in

structures in Seismic Zone 4, having a plan irregularity
J. The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm shall not of Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 in Table 208-10, shall be designed
exceed the permissible deflection of the attached without considering either the one-third increase or the
elements. Permissible deflection shall be that duration of load increase considered in allowable
deflection that will permit the attached element to stresses for elements resisting earthquake forces.
maintain its structural integrity under the individual
loading and continue to support the prescribed loads. 7. In structures in Seismic Zone 4 having a plan
irregularity of Type 2 in Table 208-10, diaphragm
2. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist chords and drag members shall be designed
the forces determined in accordance with the considering independent movement of the projecting
following equation: wings of the structure. Each of these diaphragm
elements shall be designed for the more severe of the
following two assumptions:
(208-22)
a. Motion of the projecting wings 111 the same
direction.
The force F px determined from Equation 208-22 need
not exceed 1.0Calwpx, but shall not be less than b. Motion of the projecting wings 111 opposing
O.5Calwpx· directions.
Exception:
When the diaphragm is required to transfer design
seismic forces from the vertical-resisting elements This requirement may be deemed satisfied if the procedures
above the diaphragm to other vertical-resisting of Section 208.5.3 in conjunction with a three-dimensional
elements below the diaphragm due to offset in the model have been used to determine the lateral seismic
placement of the elements or to changes in stiffness in forces for design.
the vertical elements, these forces shall be added
to those determined from Equation 208-22. 208.7.2.8 Framing below the Base
3. Design seismic forces for flexible diaphragms The strength and stiffness of the framing between the base
providing lateral supports for walls or frames of and the foundation shall not be less than that of the
masonry or concrete shall be determined using superstructure. The special detailing requirements of
Equation 208-22 based on the load determined in Chapters 4, 5 and 7, as appropriate, shall apply to columns

supporting discontinuous lateral-force-resisting elements When applicable, design strengths and other detailed
and to SMRF, IMRF, EBF, STMF and MMRWF system design criteria shall be obtained from other sections or their
elements below the base, which are required to transmit the referenced standards. The design of non-building
forces resulting from lateral loads to the foundation. structures shall use the load combinations or factors
specified in Section 203.3 or 203.4. For non-building
208.7.2.9 Building Separations structures designed using Section 208.8.3, 208.8.4 or
208.8.5, the Reliability/Redundancy Factor, p, may be
All structures shall be separated from adjoining structures. taken as 1.0.
Separations shall allow for the displacement .:lm. Adjacent
buildings on the same property shall be separated by at When applicable design strengths and other design criteria
least .:lMT where are not contained in or referenced by this code, such criteria
shall be obtained from approved national standards.
(208-23)
208.8.1.3 Weight W
and .:lMl and LlM2 are the displacements of the adjacent
buildings. The weight, W, for non-building structures shall include all
dead loads as defined for buildings in Section 208.6.1. For
When a structure adjoins a property line not common to a purposes of calculating design seismic forces in non-
public way, that structure shall also be set back from the building structures, W shall also include all normal
property line by at least the displacement LlM of that operating contents for items such as tanks, vessels, bins and
structure. piping.
Exception: 208.8.1.4 Period
Smaller separations or property line setbacks may be The fundamental period of the structure shall be
permitted when justified by rational analyses based on determined by rational methods such as by using Method
maximum expected ground motions. B in Section 208.5.2.2.
208.8 Non-Building Structures 208.8.1.5 Drift
208.8.1 General The drift limitations of Section 208.6.5 need not apply to
non-building structures. Drift limitations shall be
208.8.1.1 Scope established for structural or nonstructural elements whose
failure would cause life hazards. PLl effects shall be
Non-building structures include all self- supporting considered for structures whose calculated drifts exceed
structures other than buildings that carry gravity loads and the values in Section 208.6.3.
resist the effects of earthquakes. Non-building structures
shall be designed to provide the strength required to resist
the displacements induced by the minimum lateral forces
specified in this section. Design shall conform to the
applicable provisions of other sections as modified by the
provisions contained in Section 208.8.
208.8.1.2 Criteria
The minimum design seismic forces prescribed in this

section are at a level that produces displacements in a fixed
base, elastic model of the structure, comparable to those
expected of the real structure when responding to the
Design Basis Ground Motion. Reductions in these forces
using the coefficient R is permitted where the design of
non-building structures provides sufficient strength and
ductility, consistent with the provisions specified herein for
buildings, to resist the effects of seismic ground motions as
represented by these design forces.

Table 208-12 R and no Il Factors for Non-building calculated member forces and moments does not exceed
Structures 2.8.
/
STRUCTURE TYPE R no 208.8.3 Rigid Structures

1. Vessels, including tanks and
pressurized spheres, on braced 2.2 Rigid structures (those with period T less than 0.06 s) and
2.0
or unbraced legs. their anchorages shall be designed for the lateral force
obtained from Equation 208-24.
2. Cast-in-place concrete silos and
chimneys having walls 3.6 2.0
continuous to the foundations (208-24)
3. Distributed mass cantilever
structures such as stacks,
2.9 2.0 The force V shall be distributed according to the
chimneys, silos and skirt-
supported vertical vessels. distribution of mass and shall be assumed to act in any
4. Trussed towers (freestanding or horizontal direction.
guyed), guyed stacks and 2.9 2.0
chimneys. 208.8.4 Tanks with Supported Bottoms
5. Cantilevered column-type 2.0
2.2 Flat bottom tanks or other tanks with supported bottoms,
structures.
2.0 founded at or below grade, shall be designed to resist the
6. Cooling towers. 3.6 seismic forces calculated using the procedures in Section
7. Bins and hoppers on braced or 2.0 208.9 for rigid structures considering the entire weight of
2.9 the tank and its contents. Alternatively, such tanks may be
unbraced legs.
2.0 designed using one of the two procedures described below:
8. Storage racks. 3.6
2.0 1. A response spectrum analysis that includes
9. Signs and billboards. 3.6 consideration of the actual ground motion anticipated
10. Amusement structures and 2.0 at the site and the inertial effects of the contained fluid.
2.2
monuments.
2. A design basis prescribed for the particular type of
11. All other self-supporting 2.0 tank by an approved national standard, provided that
2.9
structures not otherwise covered.
the seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in
conformance with the provisions of Sections 208.4.4.2
208.8.1.6 Interaction Effects and 208.4.4.3, respectively.
In Seismic Zone 4, structures that support flexible 208.8.5 Other Non-building Structures
non structural elements whose combined weight exceeds 25
percent of the weight of the structure shall be designed Non-building structures that are not covered by Section
considering interaction effects between the structure and 208.8.3 and 208.8.4 shall be designed to resist design
the supported elements. seismic forces not less than those determined in accordance
with the provisions in Section 208.5 with the following
208.8.2 Lateral Force additions and exceptions:
Lateral-force procedures for non-building structures with 1. The factors R and no

shall be as set forth in Table
structural systems similar to buildings (those with 208-12. The total design base shear determined in
structural systems which are listed in Table 208-11) shall accordance with Section 208.5.2 shall not be less than
be selected in accordance with the provisions of Section the following:
208.4.
V = O.S6CalW (208-25)
Exception:
Additionally, for Seismic Zone 4, the total base shear
Intermediate moment-resistingframes (IMRF) may be used shall also not be less than the following:
in Seismic Zone 4 for non-building structures in
Occupancy Categories III and IV if (1) the structure is less
than 15m in height and (2) the value R used in reducing 1.6ZN.,l
v= .. ' W (208-26)
R

CHAF)TEr~ ? - Minimum Desiqn Loads 2 231
2. The vertical distribution of the design seismic forces 208.9.2 Design for Total Lateral Force
in structures covered by this section may be
determined by using the provisions of Section The total design lateral seismic force, F p, shall be
208.5.2.3 or by using the procedures of Section determined from the following equation:
208.5.3.
(208-27)
Exception:
For irregular structures assigned to Occupancy
Categories 1and 11that cannot be modeled as a single Alternatively, F p may be calculated using the following
mass, the procedures of Section 208.5.3 shall be used. equation:
3. Where an approved national standard provides a basis

for the earthquake-resistant design of a particular type (208-28)
of non-building structure covered by this section, such
a standard may be used, subject to the limitations in
this section:
Except that F p shall not be less than O. 7 Cal p W p and need
not be more than 4CalpW p.
The seismic zones and occupancy categories shall be in
conformance with the provisions of Sections 208.4.4 and
208.4.2, respectively. where
The values for total lateral force and total base overturning the element or component attachment
moment used in design shall not be less than 80 percent of elevation with respect to grade.
the values that would be obtained using these provisions .. ti; shall not be taken less than 0.0.
the structure roof elevation with respect to
208.9 Lateral Force on Elements of Structures, grade.
Nonstructural Components and Equipment the in-structure Component Amplification
Supported by Structures Factor that varies from 1.0 to 2.5.
208.9.1 General A value for up shall be selected from Table 208-13.

Alternatively, this factor may be determined based on the
Elements of structures and their attachments, permanent dynamic properties or empirical data ofthe component and
nonstructural components and their attachments, and the the structure that supports it. The value shall not be taken
attachments for permanent equipment supported by a less than 1.0.
structure shall be designed to resist the total design seismic
forces prescribed in Section 208.9.2. Rp is the Component Response Modification Factor that
shall be taken from Table 208-13, except that Rp for
Attachments for floor- or roof-mounted equipment anchorages shall equal 1.5 for shallow expansion anchor
weighing less than 1.8 kN, and furniture need not be bolts, shallow chemical anchors or shallow cast-in-place
designed. anchors. Shallow anchors are those with an embedment
length-to-diameter ratio of less than 8. When anchorage is
Attachments shall include anchorages and required constructed of non-ductile materials, or by use of adhesive,
bracing. Friction resulting from gravity loads shall not be u, shall equal 1.0.
considered to provide resistance to seismic forces.
The design lateral forces determined using Equation 208-
When the structural failure of the lateral-force-resisting 27 or 208-19 shall be distributed in proportion to the mass
systems of non-rigid equipment would cause a life hazard, distribution of the element or component.
such systems shall be designed to resist the seismic forces
prescribed in Section 208.9.2.
When permissible design strengths and other acceptance

criteria are not contained in or referenced by this code, such
criteria shall be obtained from approved national standards
subject to the approval of the building official.

Forces determined using Equation 208-27 or 208-28 shall

be used to design members and connections that transfer
these forces to the seismic-resisting systems. Members and
connection design shall use the load combinations and
factors specified in Section 203.3 or 203.4. The
Reliability/Redundancy Factor, p, may be taken equal to
l.0.
For applicable forces and Component Response

Modification Factors in connectors for exterior panels and
diaphragms, refer to Sections 208.7.2.3 and 208.7.2.7.
Forces shall be applied in the horizontal directions, which

result in the most critical loadings for design.

Table 208-13 Horizontal Force Factors, ap and Rp for Table 208-13 (continued)
Elements of Structures and Nonstructural Components
Element or
and Equipment Category ap Rp Footnote
:/ Component
Element or 2. 1. Exterior and interior ornamentations
Category ap Rp Footnote
and appendages.
Component N onstructural
1. Elements of 1. Walls includinf the followin Components a. Laterally
Structures a. Unbraced braced or
(cantilevered) 2.5 3.0 anchored to
parapets the structural
2.5 3.0
b. Exterior walls frame at a
at or above the point below
ground floor their centers
and parapets 1.0 3.0 2 of mass
braced above b. Laterally
their centers braced or
of gravity anchored to
c. All interior- the structural
1.0 3.0
bearing and frame at or
1.0 3.0 2 above their
non-bearing
walls centers of
2. Penthouse mass
(except when 2. Signs and
2.5 3.0
framed by an billboards
2.5 4.0 3. Storage racks
extension of
the structural (include
2.5 4.0 4
frame) contents) over
3. Connections 1.8 m tall.
for 4.Permanent
prefabricated floor-
structural supported
1.0 3.0 3 cabinets and
elements other
walls. See also book stacks 1.0 3.0 5
Section . more than 1.8
208.7.2 m in height
(include
contents)
5.Anchorage
and lateral
bracing for 3,6,7,
1.0 3.0
suspended 8
ceilings and
light fixtures
6.Access floor
1.0 3.0 4,5,9
systems
7. Masonry or
concrete
1.0 3.0
fences over
1.8 m high
8. Partitions. 1.0 3.0

Table 208-13 (continued) Table 208-13 (continued)
Element or Element or
Category up Rp Footnote Category Com onent up Rp Footnote I
Component
" ~-------------~-----~-~-~~~-+----·~---I--------I
3. Equipment 1. Tanks and 4. Other 1. Rigid
vessels Components components
(include with ductile 1.0 3.0 1
contents), 1.0 3.0 material and
including attachments.
support 2. Rigid
systems. components
with
2. Electrical, 1.0 1.5 1
nonductile
mechanical 5,10,
material or
and plumbing 11,12,
attachments
equipment and 1.0 3.0 13,14,
3. Flexible
associated 15,16
components
conduit and
with ductile 2.5 3.0 1
ductwork and
material and
piping.
attachments.
3. Any flexible 4. Flexible
equipment components
laterally with
2.5 1.5 1
braced or nonductile
anchored to 5,10, material or
2.5 3.0
the structural 14, attachments.
frame at a 15,16
Notesfor Table 208.13
point below I See Section 208.2 for definitions of flexible components
I
their center of and rigid components.
mass
2 See Section 208.8.7.2.3 and 208. 7.2. 7 for concrete and
4.Anchorage of
masonry walls and Section 208.9.2for connections for
emergency
panel connectors for panels.
power supply
3 Applies to Seismic Z:mes 2 and 4 only.
systems and
essential 4 Ground supported steel storage racks may be designed
communicatio using the provisions of Sections 208.8. Load and
ns equipment. resistance factor design may be used for the design of
Anchorage cold-formed steel members, provided seismic design
and support forces are equal to or greater than those specified in
systems for 1.0 3.0 17,18 Section 208.9.2 or 208.8.3 as appropriate.
battery racks 5 Only anchorage or restraints need be designed.
and fuel tanks 6 Ceiling weight shall include all light fixtures and other
necessary for equipment or partitions that are laterally supported by
operation of the ceiling. For purposes of determining the seismic
emergency force, a ceiling weight of not less than 0.2 kPa shall be
equipment. used.
See also 7 Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum
Section board screw or nail attached to suspended members
208.7.2 that support a ceiling at one level extending from wall
5. Temporary to wall need not be analyzed, provided the walls are not
containers over 15 meters apart.
with 1.0 3.0 19 8 Light fixtures and mechanical services installed in
flammable or
metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay-in
hazardous
panel ceilings shall be independently supported from
materials.

the structure above as specified in UBe Standard 25-2, expansion anchors, the design forces for the anchors
Part III. calculated by Equations. 208-27, or 208-28 (including
9 Wp for access floor systems shall be the dead load of limits). shall be additionally multiplied by factor of2. O.
the access floor system plus 25 percent of the floor live /5 Equipment anchorage shall not be designed such that
load plus a 0.5 kPa partition load allowance. loads are resisted by gravity friction (e.g., friction
/0 Equipment includes, but is not limited to, boilers, clips).
chillers, heat exchangers, pumps, air-handling units, 16 Expansion anchors, which are required to resist
cooling towers, control panels, motors, switchgear, seismic loads in tension, shall not be used where
transformers and life-safety equipment. It shall include operational vibrating loads are present.
major conduit, ducting and piping, which services such 17 Movement of components within electrical cabinets,
machinery and equipment and fire sprinkler systems. rack-and skid-mounted equipment and portions of skid-
See Section 208.9.2 for additional requirements for mounted electromechanical equipment that may cause
determining ap for nonrigid or flexibly mounted damage to other components by displacing, shall be
equipment. restricted by attachment to anchored equipment or
// Seismic restraints may be omitted from piping and duct support frames.
supports if all thefollowing conditions are satisfied: /8 Batteries on racks shall be restrained against
t t.t Lateral motion of the piping or duct will not cause movement in all direction due to earthquake forces.
damaging impact with other systems. 19 Seismic restraints may include straps, chains, bolts,
11.2 The piping or duct is made of ductile material with barriers or other mechanisms that prevent sliding,
ductile connections. falling and breach of containment of flammable and
1/3 Lateral motion of the piping or duct does not cause toxic materials. Friction forces may not be used to resist
impact offragile appurtenances (e.g., sprinkler heads) lateral loads in the restraints unless positive uplift
with any other equipment, piping or structural member. restraint is provided which ensures that the friction
forces act continuously.
/14 Lateral motion of the piping or duct does not cause
loss of system vertical support.
208.9.3 Specifying Lateral Forces
11.5 Rod-hung supports of less than 300 mm in length
have top connections that cannot develop moments.
Design specifications for equipment shall either specify the
11 6 Support members cantilevered up from the floor are
design lateral forces prescribed herein or reference these
checked for stability. provisions.
12 Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical
raceways, such as cable trays, conduit and bus ducts, if 208.9.4 Relative Motion of Equipment Attachments
all the following conditions are satisfied:
12.1 Lateral motion of the raceway will not cause For equipment in Categories I and II buildings as defined
damaging impact with other systems. in Table 103-1, the lateral-force design shall consider the
12.2 Lateral motion of the raceway does not cause loss of effects of relative motion of the points of attachment to the
system vertical support. structure, using the drift based upon 11M,
12.3 Rod-hung supports of less than 300 mm in length
have top connections that cannot develop moments. 208.9.5 Alternative Designs
12.4 Support members cantilevered up from the floor are
Where an approved national standard or approved physical
checkedfor stability.
test data provide a basis for the earthquake-resistant design
/3 Piping, ducts and electrical raceways, which must be
of a particular type of equipment or other nonstructural
functional following an earthquake, spanning between component, such a standard or data may be accepted as a
different buildings or structural systems shall be basis for design of the items with the following limitations:
sufficiently flexible to withstand relative motion of
support points assuming out-of-phase motions.
1. These provisions shall provide minimum values for
14 Vibration isolators supporting equipment shall be the design of the anchorage and the members and
designedfor lateral loads or restrainedfrom displacing connections that transfer the forces to the seismic-
laterally by other means. Restraint shall also be resisting system.
provided. which limits vertical displacement, such that
lateral restraints do not become disengaged. ap and 2. The force, Fp' and the overtuming moment used in the
Rpfor equipment supported on vibration isolators shall design of the nonstructural component shall not be less
be taken as 2.5 and 1.5, respectively, except that if the th~n 80 percent .o~the values that would be obtained
isolation mounting frame is supported by shallow or usmg these provisions.
208.10 Alternative Earthquake Load Procedure SECTION 109

SOn. LATERAL WADS
The earthquake load procedure of latest edition of
ASCE/SEI 7 prior to the release of this code may be used 209.1 General
in determining the earthquake loads as an alternative
procedure subject to reliable research work commissioned Basement, foundation and retaining walls shall be designed
by the owner or the engineer-on-record to provide for all to resist lateral soil loads. Soil loads specified in Table 209_
data required due to the non-availability of PHIVOLCS- 1 shall be used as the minimum design lateral soil loads
issued spectral acceleration maps for all areas in the unless specified otherwise in a soi I investigation report
Philippines. approved by the building official. Basement walls and
other walls in which horizontal movement is restricted at
The engineer-on-record shall be responsible for the the top shall be designed for at-rest pressure. Retaining
spectral acceleration and other related data not issued by walls free to move and rotate at the top are permitted to be
PHIVOLCS used in the determination of the earthquake designed for active pressure. Design lateral pressure from
loads. This alternative earthquake load procedure shall be surcharge loads shall be added to the lateral earth pressure
subject to Peer Review and approval of the Building load. Design lateral pressure shall be increased if soils with
Official. expansion potential are present at the site.
Exception:
Basement walls extending not more than 2.4 m below grade
and supporting flexible floor systems shall be permitted to
be designed for active pressure.

CHAPTFR 2 - Minimum Design Loads 2-237
Table 209-1 - Soil Lateral Load govern. Submerged or saturated soil pressures
shall include the weight of the buoyant soil plus
Design Lateral
Unified the hydrostatic loads.
Description of Soil Load a
Soil b Unsuitable as backfill material.
Backfill Material kPa per m depth
c Classificat The definition and classification of soil
Active At-rest C
ion materials shall be in accordance with ASTM

pressure pressure
Well-graded, D 2487.
clean gravels; GW 5 10
gravel-sand mixes . - ------ - -
- - --
Poorly graded
clean gravels; OP 5 10
gravel-sand mixes
Silty gravels,
poorly graded OM 6 10
gravel-sand mixes
Clayey gravels,
poorly graded
GC 7 10
gravel-and-clay
mixes
Well-graded,
clean sands;
SW 5 10
gravelly sand
mixes
Poorly graded
clean sands; sand- SP 5 10
gravel mixes
Silty sands, poorly
graded sand-silt SM 7 10
mixes
Sand-silt clay mix
SM-SC 7 16
with _plastic fines
Clayey sands,
poorly graded SC 10 16
sand-clay mixes
Inorganic silts and
ML 7 16
clayey silts
Mixture of
inorganic silt and ML-CL 10 16
clay
Inorganic clays of
low to medium CL 10 16
plasticity
Organic silts and
silt clays, low OL Note b Note b
plasticity
Inorganic clayey
MH Note b Note b
silts, elastic silts
Inorganic clays of
CH Note b Noteb
high plasticity
Organic clays and
OH Note b Note b
silty clays
a Design lateral soil loads are given for moist
conditions for the specified soils at their
optimum densities. Actual field conditions shall
2-238 CHAPTER 2 ~ Minimum Design Loads
SECTION 110
RAlNWADS ,SECTION Zit
FLOOD LOADS
210.1 Roof Drainage
211.1 General
Roof drainage systems shall be designed in accordance
with the provisions of the code having jurisdiction in the Within flood hazard areas as established in Section 211.3,
area. The flow capacity of secondary (overflow) drains or all new construction of buildings, structures and portions
scuppers shall not be less than that of the primary drains or of buildings and structures, including substantial
scuppers. improvement and restoration of substantial damage to
buildings and structures, shall be designed and constructed
210.2 Design Rain Loads to resist the effects of flood hazards and flood loads. For
buildings that are located in more than one flood hazard
Each portion of a roof shall be designed to sustain the load area, the provisions associated with the most restrictive
of rainwater that will accumulate on it if the primary flood hazard area shall apply.
drainage system for that portion is blocked plus the
uniform load caused by water that rises above the inlet of 211.2 Definitions
the secondary drainage system at its design flow.
The following words and terms shall, for the purposes of
this section, have the meanings shown herein.
(210-1)
where BASE FLOOD refers to flood having a l-percent chance
of being equaled or exceeded in any given year.
dh additional depth of water on the undeflected
roof above the inlet of secondary drainage
BASE FLOOD ELEVATION (BFE) is the elevation of
system at its design flow (i.e., the hydraulic
the base flood, m, including wave height, relative to the
head), mm
datum to be set by the specific national or local government
ds == depth of water on the undeflected roof up to
agency.
the inlet of secondary drainage system when
the primary drainage system is blocked (i.e.,
BASEMENT is the portion of a building having its floor
the static head), mm
sub grade (below ground level) on all sides.
R rain load on the un deflected roof, kPa
DESIGN FLOOD is the flood associated with the greater

When the phrase "undeflected roof' is used, deflections
of the following two "areas:
from loads (including dead loads) shall not be considered
when determining the amount of rain on the roof.
1. Area with a flood plain subject to a l-percent or greater
chance of flooding in any year; or
210.3 Ponding Instability
2. Area designated as a flood hazard area on a
For roofs with a slope less than 6 mm per 300 mrn, the community's flood hazard map, or otherwise legally
design calculations shall include verification of adequate designated.
stiffness to preclude progressive deflection.
DESIGN FLOOD ELEVATION (DFE) is the elevation
210.4 Controlled Drainage of the "design flood," including wave height, m, relative to
the datum specified on the community's legally designated
Roofs equipped with hardware to control the rate of flood hazard map. The design flood elevation shall be the
drainage shall be equipped with a secondary drainage elevation of the highest existing grade of the perimeter of
system at a higher elevation that limits accumulation of the building plus the depth specified on the flood hazard
water on the roof above that elevation. Such roofs shall be map.
designed to sustain the load of rainwater that will
accumulate on them to the elevation of the secondary DRY FLOODPROOFING is a combination of design
drainage system plus the uniform load caused by water that modifications that results in a building or structure,
rises above the inlet of the secondary drainage system at its including the attendant utility and sanitary facilities, being
design flow determined from Section 210.2. Such roofs water tight with walls substantially impermeable to the
shall also be checked for ponding instability in accordance passage of water and with structural components having
with Section 210.3. the capacity to resist loads as identified in the code.

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION refers to buildings and construction means the first placement of permanent
structures for which the "start of construction" commenced construction of a building (including a manufactured
before the effective date of the ordinance or standard. home) 011 a site, such as the pouring of a slab or footings,
"Existing construction" is also referred to as "existing installation of pilings or construction of columns.
structures." Permanent construction does not include land preparation
(such as clearing, excavation, grading or filling), the
EXISTING STRUCTURE See "Existing construction." installation of streets or walkways, excavation for a
basement, footings, piers or foundations, the erection of
FLOOD or FLOODING is a general and temporary temporary forms or the installation of accessory buildings
condition of partial or complete inundation of normally dry such as garages or sheds not occupied as dwelling units or
land from: not part of the main building. For a substantial
improvement, the actual "start of construction" means the
1. The overflow of inland or tidal waters. first alteration of any wall, ceiling, floor or other structural
part of a building, whether or not that alteration affects the
2. The unusual and rapid accumulation or runoff of external dimensions of the building.
surface waters from any source.
SUBST ANTJAL DAMAGE refers to damage to any
FLOOD DAMAGE-RESIST ANT MATERIALS are origin sustained by a structure whereby the cost of
construction material capable of withstanding direct and restoring the structure to its before-damaged condition
prolonged contact with floodwaters without sustaining any would equal or exceed 50 percent of the market value of
damage that requires more than cosmetic repair. the structure before the damage occurred.
FLOOD HAZARD AREA refers to the greater of the SUBST ANTJAL IMPROVEMENT refers to any repair,
following two areas:
reconstruction, rehabilitation, addition or improvement of
a building or structure, the cost of which equals or exceeds
1. The area within a flood plain subject to a l-percent or 50 percent of the market value of the structure before the
greater chance of flooding in any year. improvement or repair is started. If the structure has
2. The area designated as a flood hazard area on a sustained substantial damage, any repairs are considered
community's flood hazard map, or otherwise legally substantial improvement regardless of the actual repair
designated. work performed. The term does not, however, include
either:
FLOOD HAZARD AREA SUBJECT TO HIGH
VELOCITY-WAVE ACTION refers to area within the I. • Any project for improvement of a building required to
flood hazard area that is subject to high velocity wave correct existing health, sanitary or safety code
action. violations identified by the building official and that
are the minimum necessary to assure safe living
FLOODWA Y is the channel of the river, creek or other conditions.
watercourse and the adjacent land areas that must be
reserved in order to discharge the base flood without 2. Any alteration of a historic structure provided that the
cumulatively increasing the water surface elevation more alteration will not preclude the structure's continued
than a designated height. designation as a historic structure.
LOWEST FLOOR refers to the floor of the lowest 211.3 Design Requirements
enclosed area, including basement, but excluding any
unfinished or flood-resistant enclosure, usable solely for 211.3.1 Design Loads
vehicle parking, building access or limited storage
provided that such enclosure is not built so as to render the Structural systems of buildings or other structures shall be
structure in violation of this section. designed, constructed, connected, and anchored to resist
flotation, collapse, and permanent lateral displacement due
START OF CONSTRUCTION refers to the date of to action of flood loads associated with the design flood
permit issuance for new construction and substantial (see Section 211.3.3) and other loads in accordance with
improvements to existing structures, provided the actual the load combinations of Section 203.
start of construction, repair, reconstruction, rehabilitation,
addition, placement or other improvement is within 180
days after the date of issuance. The actual start of

211.3.2 Erosion and Scour 211.4.3 Hydrodynamic Loads
The effects of erosion and scour shall be included in the Dynamic effects of moving water shall be determined by
cflculation of loads on buildings and other structures in detailed analysis utilizing basic concepts of flUi~
flood hazard areas. mechanics.
211.3.3 Loads on Breakaway Walls Exception:
Where water velocities do not exceed 3. 05 mls, dynamic

Walls and partitions required by ASCE/SEI 24, to break
effects of moving water shall be permitted to be
away, including their connections to the structure, shall be
converted into equivalent hydrostatic loads by
designed for the largest of the following loads acting
increasing the DFE for design purposes by an
perpendicular to the plane of the wall:
equivalent surcharge depth, dh, on the headwater side,
and above the ground level only, equal to
I. The wind load specified in Section 207.
(2 I I - I)
2. The earthquake load specified in Section 208.
3. 0.48 kPa. where
The loading at which breakaway walls are intended to v average velocity of water, m/s
collapse shall not exceed 0.96 kPa unless the design meets g acceleration due to gravity, 9.81 m/s?
the following conditions: a coefficient of drag or shape factor (not less
than 1.25)
1. Breakaway wall collapse is designed to result from a
flood load less than that which occurs during the base The equivalent surcharge depth shall be added to the DFE
flood. design depth and the resultant hydrostatic pressures applied
to, and uniformly distributed across, the vertical projected
2. The supporting foundation and the elevated portion of area of the building or structure that is perpendicular to the
the building shall be designed against collapse, flow. Surfaces parallel to the flow or surfaces wetted by the
permanent lateral displacement, and other structural tail water shall be subject to the hydrostatic pressures for
damage due to the effects of flood loads in depths to the DFE only.
combination with other loads as specified in Section
203. 211.4.4 Wave Loads
211.4 Loads During Flooding Wave loads shall be determined by one of the following
three methods: (1) by using the analytical procedures
211.4.1 Load Basis outlined in this section, (2) by more advanced numerical
modeling procedures, or (3) by laboratory test procedures
In flood hazard areas, the structural design shall be based (physical modeling).
on the design flood.
Wave loads are those loads that result from water waves
211.4.2 Hydrostatic Loads propagating over the water surface and striking a building
or other structure. Design and construction of buildings and
Hydrostatic loads caused by a depth of water to the level of other structures subject to wave loads shall account for the
the DFE shall be applied over all surfaces involved, both following loads: waves breaking on any portion of the
above and below ground level, except that for surfaces building or structure; uplift forces caused by shoaling
exposed to free water, the design depth shall be increased waves beneath a building or structure, or portion thereof;
by 0.30 m. Reduced uplift and lateral loads on surfaces of wave run-up striking any portion of the building or
enclosed spaces below the DFE shall apply only if structure; wave-induced drag and inertia forces; and wave-
provision is made for entry and exit of floodwater. induced scour at the base of a building or structure, or its
foundation. Wave loads shall be included for both V-Zones
and A-Zones. In V-Zones, waves are 0.91 m high, or
higher; in .coastal floodplains landward of the V-Zone,
waves are less than 0.91 m.

Nonbreaking and broken wave loads shall be calculated 211.4.4.2 Breaking Wave Loads on Vertical Walls
using the procedures described in Sections 211.4.2 and
211.4.3 that show how to calculate hydrostatic and Maximum pressures and net forces resulting from a
~ hydrodynamic loads. normally incident breaking wave (depth-limited in size,
with H b = O. 78ds) acting on a rigid vertical wall shall
Breaking wave loads shall be calculated using the be calculated by the following:
procedures described in Sections 211.4.4.1 through
211.4.4.4. Breaking wave heights used in the procedures (211-5)
described in Sections 211.4.4.1 through 211.4.4.4 shall be
calculated for V -Zones and Coastal A-Zones using and
Equations 211-2 and 211-3. (211-6)
u, = O. 78ds (211-2) where
where Pmax maximum combined dynamic (CpY wds)

and static (1. 2y wds) wave pressures, also
Hb breaking wave height, m
referred to as shock pressures, kN/m2
ds local still water depth, m
net breaking wave force per unit length of
structure, also referred to as shock,
The local still water depth shall be calculated using
impulse, or wave impact force, kN/m,
Equation 211-3, unless more advanced procedures or
acting near the still water elevation
laboratory tests permitted by this section are used.
dynamic pressure coefficient (1.6 <
d; = O. 65(BFE - G) (211-3)
c, < 3.5) (see Table 211-1)
Yw unit weight of water, kN/m3, 9.80 kN/m3
for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for salt
where
water
still water depth, m at base of building or
G ground elevation, m
other structure where the wave breaks
211.4.4.1 Breaking Wave Loads on Vertical Pilings and

This procedure assumes the vertical wall causes a reflected
Columns
or standing wave against the waterward side of the wall
with the crest of the wave at a height of 1.2d, above the still
The net force resulting from a breaking wave acting on a water level. Thus, the dynamic static and total pressure
rigid vertical pile or column shall be assumed to act at the distributions against the wall are as shown in Figure 211-
still water elevation and shall be calculated by the l.
following:
This procedure also assumes the space behind the vertical
(211-4) wall is dry, with no fluid balancing the static component of
where the wave force on the outside of the wall. If free water
exists behind the wall, a portion of the hydrostatic
= net wave force, kN component of the wave pressure and force disappears (see
unit weight of water, in Ib per cubic kN/m3, Figure 211-2) and the net force shall be computed by
= 9.80 kN/m3 for fresh water and 10.05 Equation 211-7 (the maximum combined wave pressure is
kN/m3 for salt water still computed with Equation 211-5).
Yw unit weight of water, kN/m3, 9.80 kN/m3 for
fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for salt water (211-7)
coefficient of drag for breaking waves, =
l.75 for round piles or columns, and = 2.25 where
for square piles or columns
net breaking wave force per unit length of
D pile or column diameter, m for circular
structure, also referred to as shock, impulse,
sections, or for a square pile or column, 1.4
or wave impact force, kN/m, acting near the
times the width of the pile or column, m
still water elevation
breaking wave height, m

dynamic pressure coefficient (1.6 < Cp < 211.5 Establishment of Flood Hazard Areas
3.5) (see Table 211-1)
, Yw unit weight of water, kN/m\ = 9.80 kN/m3 To establish flood hazard areas, the governing body shall
for fresh water and 10.05 kN/m3 for salt adopt a flood hazard map and supporting data. The flOod
water hazard map shall include, at a minimum, areas of special
still water depth, m at base of building or flood hazard where records are available.
other structure where the wave breaks
211.6 Design and Construction
211.4.4.3 Breaking Wave Loads on Non-vertical
Walls The design and construction of buildings and structures
located in flood hazard areas, including flood hazard areas
Breaking wave forces given by Equations 211-6 and 211- 7 subject to high velocity wave action.
shall be modified in instances where the walls or surfaces
upon which the breaking waves act are non-vertical. The 211.7 Flood Hazard Documentation
horizontal component of breaking wave force shall be
given by The following documentation shall be prepared and sealed
by an engineer-of-record and submitted to the building
(211-8) official:
where I. For construction in flood hazard areas not subject to

horizontal component of breaking wave high-velocity wave action:
force, kN/m
net breaking wave force acting on a vertical 1.1 The elevation of the lowest floor, including the
surface, kN/m basement, as required by the lowest floor
a vertical angle between non-vertical surface elevation.
and the horizontal
l.2 For fully enclosed areas below the design flood
211 ..4.4.4 Breaking Wave Loads from Obliquely elevation where provisions to allow for the
Incident Waves automatic entry and exit of floodwaters do not
meet the minimum requirements, construction
Breaking wave forces given by Equations 211-6 and 211-7 documents shall include a statement that the
shall be modified in instances where waves are obliquely design will provide for equalization of hydrostatic
incident. Breaking wave forces from non-normally flood forces.
incident waves shall be given by
1.3 For dry flood-proofed nonresidential buildings,
(211-9) construction documents shall include a statement
that the dry flood-proofing is designed.
where
horizontal component of obliquely incident 2. For construction in flood hazard areas subject to high-
breaking wave force, kN/m velocity wave action:
a net breaking wave force (normally incident
waves) acting on a vertical surface, kN/m 2.1 The elevation of the bottom of the lowest
horizontal structural member as required by the
211.4.5 Impact Loads lowest floor elevation.
Impact loads are those that result from debris, ice, and any 2.2 Construction documents shall include a statement
object transported by floodwaters striking against buildings that the building is designed, including that the
and structures, or parts thereof. Impact loads shall be pile or column foundation and building or
determined using a rational approach as concentrated loads structure to be attached thereto is designed to be
acting horizontally at the most critical location at or below anchored to resist flotation, collapse and lateral
the DFE. movement due to the effects of wind and flood
loads acting simultaneously on all building
components, and other load requirements of
Section 203.

2.3 For breakaway walls designed to resist a nominal ASCE/SEI

load of less than 0.5 kPa or more than 1.0 kPa, American Society of Civil Engineers
construction documents shall include a statement Structural Engineering Institute
that the breakaway wall is designed. 1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
Table 211-1 Value of Dynamic Pressure Coefficient, Cp
ASCE/SEI24
Building Category C Section 5.3.3
I 1.6 Flood Resistant Design and Construction, 1998
II 2.8
II 3.2
IV 3.5
211.8 Consensus Standards and Other Referenced

Documents
This section lists the consensus standards and other

documents which are adopted by reference within this
chapter:
Vertical Wall
Crest of reflected wave
l
1.2 ds , -.....,.- Crest of incident wave
o.ssd,
Stillwater level
Hydrostatic pressure
Ground elevation
Figure 211-1
Normally Incident Breaking Wave Pressures Against a Vertical Wall
(Space Behind Vertical Wall Is Dry)

Vertical Wall
Crest of reflected wave
Dynamic pressure
1.2 d.•
Stillwater level
,
d.• I
Net hydrostatic pressure
Ground elevation
Figure 211-2
Normally Incident Breaking Wave Pressures Against a Vertical Wall
(Still Water Level Equal on Both Sides of Wall)

NSCP C101-15
Chapter 3
EARTHWORKS AND
FOUNDATIONS

VOLUME I

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606

CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks and Foundations 3-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 301- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3-3

301.1 Scope .- " 3-3
301.2 Quality and Design " : ,' .3-3
301.3 Allowable Bearing Pressures ,." , , , , " , , ,3-3
301.4 Definitions ., " , ' , " J-3
SECTION 302 - EXCAVATION AND FILLS 3-3
302.1 General ; , , , ' 3-3
302.2 Cuts , , , , 3-3
302.4 Fills 3-5
302.5 Setbacks , , , , 3-6
302.6 Drainage and Terracing ' ,3-6
302.7 Erosion Control 3-7
SECTION 303 - FOUNDATION INVESTIGATION 3-8
303.1 General , , ", " , ,., , ' , 3-8
303.2 Soil Classification , , "' , " , " ' , , , 3-9
303.3 Questionable Soils , , H , ".3-9
303.4 Liquefaction Study , ,.., ", " , , , 3-9
303.5 Expansive Soils , , , , ,', , ,., " ,', " , ,.., 3-9
303.6 Compressible Soils , , , , , 3-10
303.7 Reports , " , , , , , , , 3-10
303.8 Soil Tests , " ..,.." 3-10
303.9 Liquefaction Potential and Soil Strength Loss , , 3-12
303.10 Adjacent Loads " , ,..,.., , ,.., , , , , 3-12
303.11 Drainage , , , ,.., ,., , , ,.' , " ..,." 3-12
303.12 Plate Load Test , , , , J·12
SECTION 304 - ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND LATERAL PRESSURES 3-12
304.1 From Geotechnical Site Investigation and Assessment.. , 3-12
304.2 Presumptive Load-Bearing and Lateral Resisting Values : , , :., 3-l3
304,3 Minimum Allowable Pressures , -13
304.4 Foundations Adjacent to Existing Retaining/Basement Walls , , 3-13
SECTION 305 - FOOTINGS 3-14
305.1 General , , , · 3-14
305.2 Footing Design , , " , , 3-14
305.4 Stepped Foundations , 3-14
305.5 Footings on or Adjacent to Slopes " , , _ 3-15
305.6 Foundation Plates or Sills ,.." 3-16
305.7 Designs Employing Lateral Bearing ~ , ,..3-16
305.8 Grillage Footings , " ,' " , , : 3-17
305.9 Bleacher Footings "." 3-17

3-2 CHAPTER 3 - Earthworks and Foundations
SECTION 306 - PILES-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3-17

30('( I General ., 3-17
306.2 Interconnection , 3-17
306.3 Determination of Allowable Loads , 3-17
306.4 Static Load Test , 3-18
306.5 Dynamic Load Test 3-18
306.6 Column Action 3-18
306.7 Group Action 3-18
306.8 Lateral Loads , 3-18
306.9 Piles in Subsiding Areas _.3-19
306.10 Water Jetting , , 3-19
306.10 Protection of Pile Materials 3-19
306.12 Allowable Loads 3-19
306.13 Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses 3-19
SECTION 307 - PILES-SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 3-20
307.1 Round Wood Piles ,,, _ 3-20
307.2 Uncased Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles , , 3-20
307.3 Metal-Cased Concrete Piles 3-20
307.4 Precast Concrete Piles 3-21
307.5 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles (Pretensioned) 3-21
307.6 Structural Steel Piles 3-22
307.7 Concrete-Filled Steel Pipe Piles 3-22
SECTION 308 - FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION-SEISMIC ZONE 4 3-23
308.1 General 3-23
308.2 Foundation and Geotechnical Investigations 3-23
308.3 Footing Foundations 3-23
308.4 Pier and Pile Foundations 3-23
308.5 Driven Pile Foundations 3-24
308.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations 3-26
SECTION 309 - SPECIAL FOUNDATION, SLOPE STABILIZATION .AND MATERIALS' OF
CONSTRUCTION 26
309.1 Special Foundation Systems ' 3-26
309.2 Acceptance and Approval , , " _ 3-26
309.3 Specific Applications 3-26

SECTION 301 SE TION 302

y GENERAL REQUIREMENTS EXCAVATIONS AND FILLS
301.1 Scope 302.1 General
This chapter sets forth requirements for excavations, fills, Excavation or fills for buildings or structures shall be
footings and foundations for any building or structure. constructed or protected such that they do not endanger life
or property. Reference is made to Section 109 of this code
301.2 Quality and Design for requirements governing excavation, grading and
earthwork construction, including fills and embankments.
The quality and design of materials used structurally in
excavations, fills, footings and foundations shall conform to 302.2 Cuts
the requirements specified in Chapters 4,5,6 and 7.
302.2.1 General
301.3 Allowable Bearing Pressures
Unless otherwise recommended in the approved
Allowable stresses and design formulas provided in this geotechnical engineering report or engineering report, cuts
chapter shall be used with the allowable stress design load shall conform to the provisions of this section. In the
combinations specified in Section 203.4. absence of an approved geotechnical engineering report,
these provisions may be waived for cuts 3 m or less in
301.4 Definitions height, involving intact rock or hard soil, that are not
intended to support structures.
See Sections 102 and 202.
302.2.2 Slopes
The slope of cut surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for

the intended use and shall be no steeper than 1 unit vertical
in 2 units horizontal (50% slope) unless a geotechnical
engineering report, stating that the site has been
investigated, and giving an opinion that a cut at a steeper
slope shall be stable and not create a hazard to public or
private property, is submitted and approved. Such cuts shall
be protected against erosion or degradation by sufficient
cover, drainage, engineering and/or biotechnical means.
302.3 Excavations
302.3.1 Footings
Existing footings or foundations which may be undermined

by any excavation shall be underpinned adequately or
otherwise protected against settlement and shall be
protected against lateral movement.

302.3.2 Protection of Adjoining Property 302.3.3 Support of Excavations and Open Cuts
J The following provisions shall apply unless prevailing local Excavations or open cuts in excess of 1.5m in depth shall
laws are deemed more stringent from an engineering have adequately designed shoring or support to protect
standpoint: against collapse.
1. Before commencing the excavation, the person making
or causing the excavation to be made shall notify in
writing the owners of adjoining building not less than
10 days before such excavation is to be made and that
the adjoining building shall be protected. The condition
of the adjoining building shall be documented to
include photographs prior to excavation. Technical
documents pertaining to the proposed underpinning
and excavation plan shall be provided the owner of the
adjacent property.
FOR: a) H S20.Dm: FOR: X min '" 2 for properly compacted tllla

WI:t 2.0 m:
hl:!li 10.Om:
X min - 1 for cuts on hard 5011and
Intact rock I Permit Area Boundary
X min - for loose or uncompacted salls,
b) H :t 20.0m: a thorough sollinvestisation to
W.:t4.0m: be conducted by a certified IHis but I
hl:!li 10.0m: Geotechnical Enalneer Is required o.6m
lmin.
Top of Siope-
Natural or Flnlah Grade
TI T-
+ .,'"' -' Bo" ... ..,
Toe of Slope
n ~1
I
HI' I Properly designed Interceptor

dl'lllna with outralls spaced at
regular Interval.
FOR:
a) H = height of slope
b) W I- width of tarrace
Figure 302-1 Cut Slopes
2. Unless it can be shown through a detailed geotechnical

investigation that underpinning is unnecessary, any
person making or causing an excavation shall protect
the excavation so that the soil of adjoining property
will not cave in or settle.
In cases where the adjacent existing structure will have
more basements than the proposed building, the foundation
of the proposed building should be designed so as not to
impart additional lateral earth pressures on the existing
building (see Section 304.4).

302.4 Fills 302.4.3 Fill Material
~02.4.1 General Any organic or deleterious material shall be removed and

will not be permitted in fills. Except as permitted by the
Unless otherwise recommended in the approved geotechnical engineer, no rock or similar irreducible
geotechnical engineering report, fills shall conform to the material with a maximum dimension greater than 200 mm
provisions of this section. In the absence of an approved shall be buried or placed in fills.
geotechnical engineering report or engineering report, these
provisions may be waived for minor fills (H :5 2.0 m) not Exception:
intended to support structures.
The placement of larger rock may be permitted when the
geotechnical engineer properly devises a method of
Fills to be used to support the foundations of any building
placement, and continuously inspects its placement and
or structure shall be placed in accordance with accepted
approves the jill stability. The following conditions shall
engineering practice. A geotechnical investigation report
also apply:
and a report of satisfactory placement of fill, both
acceptable to the building official, shall be submitted when 1. Prior to issuance of the grading permit, potential rock
required by the building official. disposal areas shall be delineated on the grading plan.
2. Rock sizes greater than 300 mm in maximum
No fill or other surcharge loads shall be placed adjacent to
dimension shall be 3 m or more below grade, measured
any building or structure unless such building or structure is
vertically.
capable of withstanding the additional vertical and
horizontal loads caused by the fill or surcharge. 3. Rocks shall be placed so as to assure jilling of all voids
with well-graded soil.
Fill slopes shall not be constructed on natural slopes steeper
than 1 unit vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope). 302.4.4 Compaction
302.4.2 Preparation of Ground All fills shall be compacted in lilts not exceeding 20 till in
thickness to a minimum 0(90 percent of max imu 111 density
The existing ground surface shall be adequately prepared to as determined by ASTM Standard 0-1557. In-place density
receive fill by removing any deleterious materials, shall be determined in accordance with ASTM 0-1556,
non-complying fill, topsoil and other unsuitable materials, D-2167, D-2922, D-30 17 or equivalent. For clean granular
and by scarifying to provide a bond with the new fill. materials, the use of the foregoing procedures is
inappropriate. Relative density criteria shall be used based
Where the natural slopes are steeper than I unit vertical in on ASTM D5030-04. A minimum of three tests for every
5 units horizontal (20% slope) and the height is greater than 500 m2 area should be performed for every lift to verify
1.5 m, the ground surface shall be prepared by benching compliance with compaction requirements.
into sound bedrock or other competent material as
determined by the geotechnical engineer. The bench under 302.4.5 Slope
the toe of a fill on a slope steeper than 1 unit vertical in
5 units horizontal (20% slope) shall be at least 3 m wide. The slope of fill surfaces shall be no steeper than is safe for
the intended use. Fill slopes shall be no steeper than 1 unit
The area beyond the toe of fill shall be sloped to drain or a vertical in 2 units horizontal (50% slope) unless
paved drain shall be provided. When fill is to be placed substantiating data justifying steeper slopes are submitted
over a cut, the bench under the toe of fill shall be at least and approved.
3 m wide but the cut shall be made before placing the fill
and acceptance by the geotechnical engineer as a suitable
foundation for fill.

302.5 Setbacks 302.6.2 Terraces
302.5.1 General Terraces at least 2.0m in width shall be established at not

more than 10.Om vertical intervals on all cut or fill slopes to
Cut and fill slopes shall be set back from site boundaries in control surface drainage and debris except that where only
accordance with this section subject to verification with one terrace is required, it shall be at mid-height. For cut or
detailed slope stability study. Setback dimensions shall be fill slopes greater than 20.0m in vertical height, terraces at
horizontal distances measured perpendicular to the site least 4.0m in width shall be established at not more than
boundary. Setback dimensions shall be as shown in IO.Om vertical intervals. Terrace widths and vertical
Figure 302-1. spacing for cut and fill slopes greater than 40.0m in height
shall be designed by the Geotechnical Engineer and
302.5.2 Top of Cut Slope approved by the Building Official. Suitable access shall be
provided to permit proper cleaning and maintenance.
The top of cut slopes shall not be made nearer to a site
boundary line than one fifth of the vertical height of cut Swales or ditches on terraces shall be designed to
with a minimum of 0.6 m and a maximum of 3 m. The effectively collect surface water and discharge to an outfall.
setback may need to be increased for any required It shall have a minimum gradient of 0.5 percent and must be
interceptor drains. paved with reinforced concrete not less than 75 mm in
thickness or an approved equal paving material.
302.5.3 Toe of Fill Slope
A single run of swale or ditch shall not collect runoff from a
The toe of a fill slope shall be made not nearer to the site tributary area exceeding 1,000 m2 (projected area) without
boundary line than one half the height of the slope with a discharging into a down drain.
minimum of 0.6 m and a maximum of 6 m. Where a fill
slope is to be located near the site boundary and the 302.6.3 Subsurface Drainage
adjacent off-site property is developed, special precautions
shall be incorporated in the work as the building official Cut and fill slopes shall be provided with surface drainage
deems necessary to protect the adjoining property from as necessary for stability.
damage as a result of such grading. These precautions may
include but are not limited to: 302.6.4 Disposal
1. Additional setbacks.
All drainage facilities shall be designed to carry waters to
2. Provision for retaining or slough walls. the nearest practicable drainage way approved by the
Building Official or otlier appropriate jurisdiction as a safe
3. Mechanical stabilization or chemical treatment of the
place to deposit such waters. Erosion of ground in the area
fill slope surface to minimize erosion.
of discharge shall be prevented by installation of non-
4. Rockfall protection erosive down drains or other devices or splash blocks.
5. Provisions for the control of surface subsurface waters.
Building pads shall have a drainage gradient of 2 percent
toward approved drainage facilities, unless waived by the
302.5.4 Modification of Slope Location
Building Official.
The building official may approve alternate setbacks. The

Note:
building official may require an investigation and
recommendation by a qualified geotechnical engineer to The gradient from the building pad may be 1percent if all
demonstrate that the intent of this section has been satisfied. of the following conditions exist throughout the permit
area:
302.6 Drainage and Terracing
1. No proposed fills are greater than 3 m in maximum
depth.
302.6.1 General
2. No proposed finish cut or fill slope faces have a
Unless otherwise indicated on the approved grading plan, vertical height in excess of 3 m.
drainage facilities and terracing shall conform to the
3. No existing slope faces steeper than 1 unit vertical in
provisions of this section for cut or fill slopes steeper than
10 units horizontal (10% slope) have a vertical height
1 unit vertical in 3 units horizontal (33.3% slope).
in excess of 3m.

302.6.5 Interceptor Drains and biological attack, mechanical damage, creep,

installation damage and pH conditions to the reinforcement.
Paved or Lined interceptor drains shall be installed along
the top of all cut slopes where the tributary drainage area Select Granular Backfill shall consist of sound, durable,
above slopes toward the cut has a drainage path greater than granular material free from organic matter or other
12 m measured horizontally. Unless specified otherwise by deleterious material (such as shale or other soft particles
the Engineer of Record, interceptor drains shall be paved with poor durability).
with a minimum of 75 mm of concrete or gunite and
reinforced. They shall have a minimum depth of 300 mm The select granular backfill materials for these earth
and a minimum paved width of 750 mm measured structures shall conform to Grading Requirements as stated
horizontally across the drain. The slope of drain shall be in Table 302.1
approved by the building official. Interceptor drains shall be
provided with outfalls spaced at regular intervals sufficient Table 302-1 Grading Requirements
enough to avoid overflow of drains. In cases where neither
reinforced concrete nor reinforced gunite shall be used as Standard Sieve Percent by Mass Passing
the paving material for the drain, sufficient testing on the Opening (mm) Designated Sieve
alternative material must be conducted to determine its (AASHTO T 27 and T II)
effectiveness and durability as a channel lining material. 100 100
0.0425 0-60
302.7 Erosion Control 0.075 0-15
302.7.1 Slopes The angle of internal friction for the backfill material shall
not be less than 34 0
•
The faces of cut and fill slopes shall be prepared and

maintained to control against erosion. This erosion control The assigned cohesion value during the design stage for the
may consist of biotechnical or geosynthetic intervention backfill material within the reinforced zone shall not exceed
adapted to the local conditions. The protection for the 5 kPa.
slopes shall be installed as soon as practicable and prior to
calling for final approval. Where cut slopes are not subject The soils should be compacted to no less than 95% MDD
to erosion due to the erosion-resistant character of the determine according to AASHTO T 99 Method CorD and
materials, such protection may be omitted. corrected for oversized material according to AASHTO T
99, Note 9.
302.7.2 Other Devices
The material shall have a Plasticity Indexof not more than
Where necessary, check dams, cribbing, riprap or other 15 for rigid faced MSE structures, and not more than 20 for
devices or methods shall be employed to control erosion flexible or ductile faced MSE structures, as determined by
and provide safety. AASHTOT90.
302.7.2 Scour Protection Electrochemical requirements for Mechanically Stabilized

Earth (MSE) retaining walls with metallic reinforcements
Retaining structures and foundations located on stream shall comply with summarized in Table 302-2.
banks and beds shall be provided with appropriate
countermeasures, designed on the basis of a detailed Table 302-2 Electrochemical Requirements
engineering study, for long-term protection against scouring
and erosion. Test Requirements
Resistivity, AASHTO
302.8 MSE Structures and Similar Reinforced 3000 Q-cm min.
T 288
Embankments and Fills pH, AASHTO T 289 5.0 to 10.0
Sulfate Content
The design of Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) 200 ppm max.
AASHTO T290
Structures and Similar Reinforced Embankments and Fills Chloride Content
shall incorporate provisions for internal and external 100 ppm max.
AASHTOT 291
drainage.
Electrochemical requirements for Mechanically Stabilized
The design for the required reinforcement shall take into Earth MSE retaining walls with Geosynthetic
consideration the detrimental effects of corrosion, chemical

reinforcements specify that the pH shall be between 5.0 to

10.0 as determined by AASHTO T 289.
SECTION 303
FOUNDATION'INVESTIGATION
303.1 General
Foundation investigation shall be conducted and a

Professional Report shall be submitted at each building site
For structures two storeys or higher, an exhaustive
geotechnical study shall be performed to evaluate in-situ
soil parameters for foundation design and analysis. The
minimum required number of boreholes per structure based
on footprint area is summarized in Table 303-l. All of these
boreholes should fall within the footprint of the structure,
and should generally be uniformly distributed throughout
the building footprint. Unless specified by the consulting
Geotechnical Engineer, all boreholes should be drilled to a
depth of at least five meters into hard strata or until a
suitable bearing layer is reached. For buildings with
basements, the depth of boring should extend to twice the
least dimension of the structure's footprint (2B) added to
the depth of the basement.
Table 303-1 Minimum required number of boreholes per

structure.
FOOTPRINT AREA OF MINIMUM REQUIRED

STRUCTURE (m2) NUMBER OF
BOREHOLES*
AS.50
50 < A::; 500 2
A 2:500 2 + (All 000)**
(Rounded Up to Nearest
Integer)
*The minimum required number of boreholes should in no

way be construed as an upper limit value.
** "A" corresponds to the footprint area of the structure in

2
m.
An exhaustive geotechnical investigation should also be

conducted in cases of:
I) questionable soils, expansive soils, or problematic

soils (e.g. liquefiable, organic, compressible,
sensitive, etc.);

2) to determine whether the existmg groundwater Exception:

table is above or within 1.5 meters below the
The building official may waive this evaluation upon receipt
elevation of the lowest floor level;
of written opinion of a qualified geotechnical engineer that
3) where such floor is located below the finished
liquefaction is not probable.
ground level adjacent to the foundation;
4) in cases where the use of pile foundations and/or
303.5 Expansive Soils
ground improvement are anticipated;
5) in areas underlain by rock strata where the rock is
Soils meeting all four of the following provisions shall be
suspected to be of questionable characteristics or
considered expansive:
indicate variations in the structure of the rock or
where solution cavities or voids are expected to be I. Plasticity index (PI) of 15 or greater, determined in
present in the rock; and accordance with ASTM D 4318.
6) other cases deemed necessary by the Geotechnical
Engineer. 2. More than 10 percent of the soil particles pass a No.
200 sieve (75 m), determined in accordance with
ASTMD-422.
The Building Official may require that the interpretation
and evaluation of the results of the foundation investigation 3. More than 10 percent of the soil particles are less than
be made by a geotechnical engineer. 5 micrometers in size, determined in accordance with
ASTM D-422.
303.2 Soil Classification
4. Expansion index greater than 20, determined in
accordance with ASTM D-4829.
For the purposes of this chapter, the definition and
classification of soil materials for use in Table 304-1 shall Tests that show compliance with Items 1, 2 and 3 shall not
be according to ASTM D-2487. be required if the test prescribed in Item 4 is conducted.
Soil classification shall be based on observation and any 303.5.1 Design for Expansive Soils
necessary tests of the materials disclosed by borings or
excavations made in appropriate locations. Additional Footings or foundations for buildings and structures
studies may be necessary to evaluate soil strength, the effect founded on expansive soils shall be designed in accordance
of moisture variation on soil-bearing capacity, with Section 1805.8.1 or 1805.8.2.
compressibility, liquefaction susceptibility and expansion
potential. Footing or foundation design need not comply with Section
303.5.3 or 303.5.4 where the soil is removed in accordance
303.3 Questionable Soils with Section 303.5.4, nor where the building official
approves stabilization of the soil in accordance with Section
Where the classification, strength or compressibility of the 303.5.5.
soil are unknown, or where a load bearing value superior to
that specified in this code is claimed, the Building Official 303.5.2 Foundations
shall require that these be verified through the necessary
geotechnical study stipulated in Section 303.l. Footings or foundations placed on or within the active zone
of expansive soils shall be designed to resist differential
303.4 Liquefaction Study volume changes and to prevent structural damage to the
supported structure. Deflection and racking of the supported
A liquefaction susceptibility assessment in accordance with shall be limited to that which will not interfere with the
accepted practice is warranted if both conditions below are usability and serviceability of the structure.
discovered during the course of the geotechnical
investigation: Foundations placed below where volume change occurs or
below expansive soil shall comply with the following
1. Shallow ground water, 2 m or less.
provisions:
2. Unconsolidated saturated sandy alluvium (N < 15)
l. Foundations extending into or penetrating expansive
soils shall be designed to prevent uplift of the
supported structure.
2. Foundations penetrating expansive soils shall be
designed to resist forces exerted on the foundation due

to soil volume changes or shall be isolated from the If wide, massive loads within the structures to be built on
expansive soil. compressible fine-grained soils are to be expected for
J
prolonged periods of time, the settlement effects on existing
303.5.3 Slab-on-Ground, Foundations adjacent structures should be evaluated as well.
Moments, shears and deflections for use in designing slab- 303.7 Reports
on-ground, mat or raft foundations on expansive soils shall
be determined in accordance with WRlICRSJ Design of The soil classification and design-bearing capacity shall be
Slab-on-Ground Foundations or PTJ Standard shown on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to
Requirements for Analysis of Shallow Concrete Table 305-1. The building official may require submission
Foundations on Expansive Soils. Using the moments, of a written report of the investigation, which shall include,
shears and deflections determined above, non-prestressed but need not be limited to, the following information:
slabs-on-ground, mat or raft foundations on expansive soils
1. A plot showing the location of all test borings,
shall be designed in accordance with PTI Standard
surroundings and/or in-situ tests and excavations.
Requirements for Design of Shallow Post-Tensioned
Concrete Foundations on Expansive Soils. It shall be 2. Technical descriptions and classifications of the
permitted to analyze and design such slabs by other materials encountered.
methods that account for soil-structure interaction, the
3. Elevation of the water table, if encountered.
deformed shape of the soil support, the place or stiffened
plate action of the slab as well as both center lift and edge 4. Recommendations for foundation type and design
lift conditions. Such alternative methods shall be rational criteria, including bearing capacity, provisions to
and the basis for all aspects and parameters of the method mitigate the effects of differential settlements and
shall be available for peer review. expansive soils, provisions to mitigate the effects of
liquefaction and soil strength loss, provisions for
303.5.4 Removal of Expansive Soils special foundation solutions, provisions for ground
improvement measures, and effects of loads on and due
Where expansive soil is removed in lieu of designing to adjacent structures.
footings or foundations in accordance with Section 302.3.2,
5. Expected total and differential settlement.
the soil shall be removed to a depth sufficient to ensure a
constant moisture content in the remainmg soil. 6. Laboratory test results of soil samples.
Fill material shall not contain expansive soils and shall
7. Field borehole log containing the following
comply with Section 302.3.3.
information
Exception: a. Project location
Expansive soil need not be removed to the depth of constant b. Depth of borehole
moisture, provided the confining pressure in the expansive
c. Ground elevation
soil created by the fill and supported structure exceeds the
swell pressure provided that the confining pressure d. Ground water table elevation
resulting from the fill and structural dead loads exceed the
e. Date started and finished
swell pressure by 20%.
The soil classification and design-bearing capacity shall be
303.5.5 Stabilization shown on the plans, unless the foundation conforms to
Table 305-1.
Where the active zone of expansive soils is stabilized in lieu I
of designing footings or foundations in accordance with When expansive soils are present, the Building Official
Section 306.2, the soil shall be stabilized by chemical, may require that special provisions be made in the
dewatering, pre-saturation or equivalent established foundation design and construction to safeguard against
techniques. damage due to this expansiveness. The building official
may require a special investigation and report to provide
303.6 Compressible Soils these design and construction criteria.
If the borehole data show that the proposed structures are to 303.8 Soil Tests
be built above compressible fine-grained soils (with N< 6 ),
it is recommended that consolidation tests be performed in Tables 303-2 and 303-3 summarize the commonly used
accordance with ASTM D 2435 to determine the settlement field and laboratory tests needed in determining the in-situ
parameters for the site.

soil parameters for use in foundation design and analysis. Table 303-3 Geophysical Tests
Field Test ASTM Output Data /

Table 303-2 Laboratory and Field Tests Designation Parameter
Obtained
Laboratory I ASTM/Test Output Data I Geophysical Tests
Field Test Designation Parameter Seismic D 5777-00 Maps subsurface
Obtained refraction geologic conditions,
Classification of Soils lithologic units and
fractures.
Moisture content D22l6-05 Moisture/ water
Seismic D 7128 Map the top of
content
refraction bedrock. Estimate
Grain size D422-63 Soil gradation elastic wave velocity
analysis of subsurface
Atterberg Limits 04318-05 Liquid limit, materials.
_£!astic limit Ground D 6432-11 Maps lateral
USCS D2487-00 Classification of Penetrating continuity of
soils Radar (GPR) lithologic units and
detects changes in
Specific Gravity D854-05 Specific gravity
the acoustic
Shrinkage Limit D427-04 Shrinkage limit properties of
Organic Matter D2974-00 Moisture content, subsurface
ash content and geomaterials,
percent organic
matter in soil Crosshole D4428 p-wave and s-wave
Swedish Weight JIS NslV-value seismic survey velocity
indicating, determination, elastic
Sounding Test A122l :2002
undrained soil shear moduli determination
strength
UCT Test (Soils) D2 166-00 Strength Downhole 07400 p-wave and s-wave
parameters seismic survey velocity
Tri-axial (UU D2850-03a Strength determination,
Test) parameters elastic moduli
Tri-axial (CU D4767-04 Strength determination
Test) parameters Geo-resistivity _D 6431-99 Determine
Oedometer (l-D D2435-04 Consolidation Survey horizontal traveling
Consolidation) parameters compression and
Laboratory Vane 04648-05 Strength shear seismic
Shear parameters waves at test sites.
Direct Shear D3080-04 Strength
Test _})_arameters
UCT for Intact D2938-95 Strength
Rock parameters
Standard 01586-99 N-value
Penetration Test
Modified Proctor D1557-02 Maximum dry
Test density
Standard Proctor D698-00a Maximum dry
Test density
Field Density D1556-00 Maximum dry
Test density
CBRLab Test D1883-05 CBR
Cone Penetration 03441-05 Soil strength
Test parameters

303.9 Liquefaction Potential and Soil Strength Loss SECTION 3lM

When required by Section 303.3, the potential for soil ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION AND
liquefaction and soil strength loss during earthquakes shall LATERAL PRESSURES
be evaluated during the geotechnical investigation. The
geotechnical evaluation shall assess potential consequences 304.1 From Geotechnical Site Investigation and
of any liquefaction and soil strength loss, including Assessment
estimation of differential settlement, lateral movement or
reduction in foundation soil-bearing capacity, and discuss The recommended allowable foundation and lateral
mitigating measures. Such measures shall be given pressures shall be estimated from a reasonably exhaustive
consideration in the design of the building and may include, geotechnical site investigation and assessment, which shall
but are not limited to: ground stabilization, selection of include at least the following:
appropriate foundation type and depths, selection of
appropriate structural systems to accommodate anticipated a. Description of regional geologic characteristics;
displacements, or any combination of these measures. b. Characterization of in-situ geotechnical conditions;
The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss shall be c. Factual report on the in-situ and laboratory tests
evaluated for a site peak ground acceleration that, as a performed to characterize the site (See Section 303.7
minimum, conforms to the probability of exceedance for a list of in-situ and laboratory tests commonly
specified in Section 208.6.2. Peak ground acceleration may carried out for geotechnical site characterization);
be determined based on a site-specific study taking into d. Disclosure of the assumptions and the applicable
account soil amplification effects. analytical or empirical models used in estimating the
allowable foundation and lateral pressures;
In the absence of such a study, peak ground acceleration
may be assumed equal to the seismic zone factor ill" e. Calculations carried out and Factor of Safety (FS)
Table 208-3. assumed in arriving at the recommended allowable
foundation and lateral pressures; and
303.10 Adjacent Loads f. Evaluation of existing potential geologic hazards and
those that may be induced or triggered by the
Where footings are placed at varying elevations, the effect construction/installation of the structure.
of adjacent loads shall be included in the foundation design.
The geotechnical site investigation and assessment shall be
303.11 Drainage performed by a geotechnical engineer.
Provisions shall be made for the control and drainage of A geotechnical investigation and assessment shall be
surface water around buildings. (See also Section 305.5.5.) presented in a report. The report, together with a brief
and ensure that scour will not threaten such structures. resume and a sworn statement of accountability of the
geotechnical engineering consultant who prepared it, shall
303.12 Plate Load Test be included in the submittals to be reviewed and examined
by the building official or government authority in charge
of issuing the relevant permits such as environmental
The plate load test is generally used for determination of
soil sub grade properties for rigid foundations. If used for compliance certificate and/or building permit.
building foundations, it must be emphasized that the Depth
of Influence is only up to twice (2B) the width (B) of the
test plate. Care must be used when extending the results to
deeper depths as well as layered soils and variable
subsurface conditions.

304.2 Presumptive Load-Bearing and Lateral For clay, sandy clay, silty clay and clayey silt, in no case
Resisting Values shall the lateral sliding resistance exceed one-half the dead
JI' load.
When no exhaustive geotechnical site assessment and
investigation is performed, especially when no in-situ or 304.3 Minimum Allowable Pressures
very limited tests are carried out, the presumptive load-
bearing and lateral resisting values provided in Table 304-1 The recommended allowable foundation and lateral values
shall be used. Use of these values requires that the shall be with the allowable stress design load combinations
foundation design engineer has, at the least, carried out an specified in Section 203.4.
inspection of the site and has become familiar with the
predominant soil or rock characteristics of the site. 304.4 Foundations Adjacent to Existing
Retaining/Basement Wal1s
Presumptive load-bearing values shall apply to materials
with similar physical characteristics and dispositions. Mud, In cases where the adjacent building will have more
organic silt, organic clays, peat or unprepared fill shall not basements than the proposed building, the foundation of the
be assumed to have a presumptive load-bearing capacity proposed building should be designed so as not to impart
unless data from a geotechnical site assessment and additional lateral earth pressures on the existing building.
investigation to substantiate the use of such a value are
submitted.
Table 304-1 Allowable Foundation and Lateral Pressure
Lateral
Allowable Bearing Lateral Sliding"
Foundation BelowNatural
Class of Materials}
. Pressure2 Gradel
(kPa/mof Resistance"
(kPa)
. depth)
Coefficient'
(kPa)
1. "Intact" Tuffaceous Sandstone a 1,000 300 - -

2. "Lightly Weathered" Tuffaceous Sandstone b 500 150 - -
3. Sandy Gravel and lor Gravel(GW & GP) 100 30 . 0.35 -
4. Well-graded Sand, Poorly-graded Sand, Silty Sand,
Clayey Sand, Silty Gravel and Clayey Gravel (SW, 75 25 0.25 -
SP, SM, SC, GM and GC)
5. Clay, Sandy Clay, Silty Clay and Clayey Silt (CL, ML, 50 c 15 - 7
MH, and CH)
I A geotechnical site investigation is recommended for soil classification (Refer to Section 303)-
All values of allowable foundation pressure are for footings having a minimum width of 300mm and a minimum depth of 300l11m into the natural grade. Except as noted in
Footnote 'a', an increase of 20% is allowed/or each additional 300mm a/width and/or depth (0 a maximum value a/three limes the designated value, An increase oj one-third
is permitted when using the alternate load combinations in Section 203.4 that include wind or earthquake loads
) The resistance values derived from the table are permitted to be increased by the tabular value for each additional 300 111111 0/ depth 10 a maximum of 15 times the tabular
value. Isolated poles for uses such as jlagpoles or signs and poles used to support buildings that are not adversely affected by a 12111111
motion at the ground surface due to
short-term lateral loads are permitted to be designed using lateral-bearing values equal to two times the tabular values. .
.. Lateral bearing and sliding resistance may be combined.
s Coefficient to be multiplied by the dead load.
• Lateral sliding resistance value to be multiplied by the contact area. In no case shall the lateral sliding resistance exceed one-half the dead load.
Must satisfy both UCTmi"~ 3Mpa and RQD ?:_70
h Must satisfy both UCTmi"~ 1Mpa and RQD ?:_50
No increase shall be allowedfor an increase of width.

· ION 305 305.2.1 Design Loads
OOTINGS Footings shall be designed for the most unfavorable load

effects due to combinations of loads. The dead load is
305.1 General permitted to include the weight of foundations, footings
and overlying fill. Reduced live loads as permitted in the
Footings and foundations shall be constructed of masonry, Chapter on Loadings are permitted to be used in the
concrete or treated wood in conformance with Chapters 4, design of footings.
6 and 7. Footings of concrete and masonry shall be of
solid material. Foundations supporting wood shall extend 305.2.2 Vibratory Loads
at least 150 mm above the adjacent finish grade. Footings
shall have a minimum depth as indicated in Table 305-1, Where machinery operations or other vibratory loads or
unless another depth is warranted, as established by a vibrations are transmitted to the foundations,
foundation investigation. consideration shall be given in the Report to address the
foundation design to preve_nt detrimental disturbances to
The provisions of this section do not apply to building and the soil.
foundation systems in those areas subject to scour and
water pressure by wind and wave action. Buildings and 305.3 Bearing Walls
foundations subject to such loads shall be designed in
accordance with approved national standard Bearing walls shall be supported on masonry or concrete
foundations or piles or other permitted foundation system
Table 305-1 Minimum Requirements for Foundations 1,2,3
that shall be of sufficient size to support all loads.
Thickness of Where a design is not provided, the minimum foundation

Number of Foundation Wall Width Thickness Depth Below
Floors of of Undisturbed requirements for stud bearing walls shall be as set forth in
(mm)
Supported by Footing Footing Ground Table 305-1, unless expansive soils of a severity to cause
the Foundations (mm) (mm) Surface (mm) 4
Concrete
Unit differential movement are known to exist.
Masonry
1 150 150 300 150 300 Exceptions:

---
2 200 200 375 175 450 1. A one-story wood or metal-frame building not used
- for human occupancy and not over 40 m2 in floor
3 250 250 450 200 600 area may be constructed with walls supported on a
wood foundation plate permanently under. the water
I Where unusual conditions are found, footings and foundations shall table when permitted by the building official.
be as required in Section 305, I,
2. The support of buildings by posts embedded in earth
2 The ground under the floor may be excavated to the elevation of the
shall be designed as specified in Section 305.7. Wood
fop of the footing.
posts or poles embedded in earth shall be pressure
J Foundation may support a roof in addition to the stipulated number treated with an approved preservative. Steel posts or
of floors, Foundations supporting roofs only shall be as required for
supporting one floor.
poles shall be protected as specified in Section
306.10.
305.2 Footing Design
305.4 Stepped Foundations
Except for special provisions of Section 307 covering the
design of piles, all portions of footings shall be designed Foundations for all buildings where the surface of the
in accordance with the structural provisions of this code ground slopes more than 1 unit vertical, in 10 units
and shall be designed to minimize differential settlement horizontal (1 0% slope) shall be level or shall be stepped
when necessary and the effects of expansive soils when so that both top and bottom of such foundation are level.
present.
Slab-on-grade and mat-type footings for buildings located

on expansive soils may be designed in accordance with
the geotechnical recommendation as permitted by the
building official.

CHAPTER 3 -- Earthworks and Foundations 3-15
Face of Footing
Top of Slope
/
H/2 but Toe of Slope

need not
exceed
6.0m
T
H
need not exoaed 9.0m

1
FOR: Properly d8ligned inlBn:eptcr
a) H = height of slope drains willi outfaIls spaced at
proper intervala (whenever possible)
b) WI = width of terrace
Figure 305-1 Setback Dimensions for Building Clearance for Stable Natural Slopes on Firm and Intact Ground
305.5 Footings on or Adjacent to Slopes 305.5.3 Footing Setback from Descending Slope
Surface
305.5.1 Scope
Footings on or adjacent to slope surfaces shall be founded
The placement of buildings and structures on or adjacent in firm material with an embedment and setback from the
to slopes steeper than I unit vertical in 3 units horizontal slope surface sufficient to provide vertical and lateral
(33.3% slope) shall be in accordance with this section. support for the footing without detrimental settlement.
Except as provided for in Section 305.5.6 and
305.5.2 Building Clearance from Ascending Slopes Figure 305- I, the following setback is deemed adequate
to meet the criteria. Where the slope is steeper than 1 unit
In general, buildings below slopes shall be set a sufficient vertical in I unit horizontal (1 00% slope), the required
distance from the slope to provide protection from slope setback shall be measured from an imaginary plane 45
drainage, erosion and shallow failures. Except as degrees to the horizontal, projected upward from the toe
provided for in Section 305.5.6 and Figure 305-1, the of the slope. - .
following criteria will be assumed to provide this
protection. Where the existing slope is steeper than I unit 305.5.4 Pools
vertical in I unit horizontal (100% slope), the toe of the
slope shall be assumed to be at the intersection of a The setback between pools regulated by this code and
horizontal plane drawn from the top of the foundation and slopes shall be equal to one half the building footing
a plane drawn tangent to the slope at an angle of 45 setback distance required by this section. That portion of
degrees to the horizontal. Where a retaining wall is the pool wall within a horizontal distance of 2 meters
constructed at the toe of the slope, the height of the slope from the top of the slope shall be capable of supporting
shall be measured from the top of the wall to the top of the water in the pool without soil support.
the slope.
305.5.5 Foundation Elevation
On graded sites, the top of any exterior foundation shall

extend above the elevation of the street gutter at point of
discharge or the inlet of an approved drainage device a
minimum of 300 mm plus 2 percent. The building official
may permit alternate elevations, provided it can be
demonstrated that required drainage to the point of
discharge and away from the structure is provided at all
locations on the site.

305.5.6 Alternate Setback and Clearance 305.7.2 Design Criteria

:-
The Building Official may approve alternate setbacks and 305.7.2.1 Non-constrained
clearances. The building official may require an
investigation and recommendation of a qualified engineer The following formula may be used in determining the
to demonstrate that the intent of this section has been depth of embedment required to resist lateral loads where
satisfied. Such an investigation shall include no constraint is provided at the ground surface, such as
consideration of material, height of slope, slope gradient, rigid floor or rigid ground surface pavement.
load intensity and erosion characteristics of slope
material.
305.5.7 Reinforced Slopes d=2

A(~ 1~1+-:4) (305-1 )
Footings on or adjacent to slopes reinforced using rock

anchors, soils nails, geosynthethics or any other similar where:
ground improvement technique shall be founded such that
it does not interfere with or impair the function of the 2.3P
A=--
reinforcing elements. The Building Official may require Stb
the recommendation of a geotechnical engineer to
demonstrate that the reinforced slope can safely carry the b diameter of round post or footing or diagonal
structural loads it will be subjected to. dimension of square post or footing, m.
d depth of embedment in earth in m but not over
305.6 Foundation Plates or Sills 3.5 m for purpose of computing lateral pressure,
m
Wood plates or sills shall be bolted to the foundation or
h distance from ground surface to point of
foundation wall. Steel bolts with a minimum nominal application of P, m
diameter of 12 mm shall be used in Seismic Zone 2. Steel P applied lateral force, kN
bolts with a minimum nominal diameter of 16 mm shall St allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set
be used in Seismic Zone 4. Bolts shall be embedded at forth in Table 304-1 based on a depth of one
least 180 mm into the concrete or masonry and shall be third the depth of embedment, kPa
spaced not more than 2 meters apart. There shall be a S3 allowable lateral soil-bearing pressure as set
minimum of two bolts per piece with one bolt located not forth in Table 304-1 based on a depth equal to
more than 300 mm or less than seven bolt diameters from the depth of embedment, kPa
each end of the piece. A properly sized nut and washer
shall be tightened on each bolt to the plate. Foundation 305.7.2.2 Constrained
plates and sills shall be the kind of wood specified in
Chapter 6. The following formula may be used to determine the
depth of embedment required to resist lateral loads where
305.7 Designs Employing Lateral Bearing constraint is provided at the ground surface, such as a
rigid floor or pavement.
305.7.1 General
(305-2)
Construction employing posts or poles as columns
embedded in earth or embedded in concrete footings in
the earth may be used and designed to resist both axial
and lateral loads. The depth to resist lateral loads shall be
determined by means of the design criteria established
herein or other methods approved by the building official.

305.7.2.3 Vertical load

SECTION 306
"The resistance to vertical loads is determined by the PILES-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
allowable soil-bearing pressure set forth in Table 304-1.
306.1 General
305.7.3 Backfill
Pile foundations shall be designed and installed on the
The backfill in the annular space around column not basis of a foundation investigation as defined in
embedded in poured footings shall be by one of the Section 303 where required by the building official.
following methods:
The investigation and report provisions of Section 303
I. Backfill shall be of concrete with an ultimate strength shall be expanded to include, but not be limited to, the
of 15 MPa at 28 days. The hole shall not be less than following:
100 mm larger than the diameter of the column at its
bottom or 100 mm larger than the diagonal I. Recommended pile types and installed allowable
dimension of a square or rectangular column. axial capacities, and estimated settlement.
2. Backfill shall be of clean sand. The sand shall be 2. Driving criteria.

thoroughly compacted by tamping in layers not more 3. Installation procedures.
than 200 mm in thickness.
4. Field inspection and reporting procedures (to include
305.7.4 Limitations procedures for verification of the installed bearing
capacity where required).
The design procedure outlined in this section shall be 5. Pile load test requirements.
subject to the following limitations:
The use of piles not specifically mentioned in this chapter
305.7.4.1 The frictional resistance for retaining walls shall be permitted, subject to the approval of the building
and slabs on silts and clays shall be limited to one half of official upon submission of acceptable test data,
the normal force imposed on the soi1 by the weight of the calculations or other information relating to the properties
footing or slab. and load-carrying capacities of such piles.
305.7.4.2 Posts embedded in earth shall not be used to 306.2 Interconnection

provide lateral support for structural or nonstructural
materials such as plaster, masonry or concrete unless Individual pile caps- and caissons of every structure
bracing is provided. subjected to seismic forces shall be interconnected by ties.
Such ties shall be capable of resisting, in tension or
305.8 Grillage Footings compression, a minimum horizontal force equal to 10
percent of the largest column vertical load.
When grillage footings of structural steel shapes are used
on soils, they shall be completely embedded in concrete. Exception:
Concrete cover shall be at least 150 mm on the bottom
and at least 100 mm at all other points. Other approved methods may be used where it can be
demonstrated that equivalent restraint can be provided.
305.9 Bleacher Footings
306.3 Determination of Allowable Loads
Footings for open-air seating facilities shall comply with
Chapter 3. The allowable axial and lateral loads on .piles shall be
determined by an approved formula, by a foundation
Exceptions: investigation or by load tests. Static axial compressive
pile load test shall be in accordance with ASTM Standard
Temporary open-air portable bleachers may be supported 0-1143, and lateral load testing of piles shall conform
upon wood sills or steel plates placed directly upon the with ASTM Standard 0-3966. Dynamic pile tests shall
ground surface, provided soil pressure does not exceed be in accordance with ASTM Standard 0-4945. Static
50kPa. axial tensile load testing to determine the uplift capacity
of pile-soil systems shall be in accordance with ASTM
Standard 0-3689.

'}-18 CHAPTEI~ :3 - E:arthwork:3 "mel F'Jundations
306.4 Static Load Test 306.7 Group Action
Static axial compressive pile load test shall be in Consideration shall be given to the reduction of allowable
accordance with ASTM Standard 0-1143, The building pile load when piles are placed in groups.
official may require that the test be conducted under the
supervision of a geotechnical engineer experienced and Where soil conditions make such load reductions
knowledgeable in the practice of static pile load testing advisable or necessary, the allowable axial and lateral
loads determined for a single pile shall be reduced by any
When the allowable axial compressive load of a single rational method or formula submitted to the building
pile is determined by a static load test, one of the official.
following methods shall be used:
306.8 Lateral Loads
Method 1. It shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield
point under test load. The yield point shall be defined as The design of piles subjected to lateral loads shall be
that point at which an increase in load produces a consistent with the design rules given Sections 306.1
disproportionate increase in settlement. through 306.7, where applicable. For foundations
involving piles subjected to lateral, the investigation and
Method 2. It shall not exceed one half of the load, which report provisions of Section 303 shall be expanded to
causes a net settlement, after deducting rebound, of include, but not be limited to:
0.03 mm/kN of test load, which has been applied for a
I. Allowable lateral load capacity of recommended pile
period of at least 24 hours.
type.
Method 3. It shall not exceed one half of that load under 2. Resulting lateral displacements at allowable lateral
which, during a 40-hour period of continuous load load.
application, no additional settlement takes place.
3. Lateral pile load test requirements.
306.5 Dynamic Load Test
306.8.1 The design resistance of piles subjected to lateral
loads, should be assessed based on one of the following
High-strain dynamic load test may be used to determine
failure mechanisms:
the bearing capacity of piles, in accordance with
ASTM Standard 0-4945. The building official may
I. For short piles, rotation or translation as a rigid body
require that the test be conducted by a geotechnical
engineer experienced and knowledgeable in the practice 2. For long slender piles, bending failure' of the pile,
of dynamic load testing. accompanied by 'Iocal yielding and displacement of
the soil near the top of the pile.
306.6 Column Action
306.8.2 Pile Groups
All piles standing unbraced in air, water or material not
capable of lateral support shall conform with the The group effects shall be considered when assessing the
applicable column formula as specified in this code. Such resistance oflaterally loaded pile groups.
piles driven into firm ground may be considered fixed and
laterally supported at 1.5 m below the ground surface and 306.8.3 Group interaction effects as well as head fixity
in soft material at 3 m from the ground surface unless shall be accounted for when deriving the lateral resistance
otherwise prescribed by the building official after a of pile groups from results of load tests performed on
foundation investigation by an approved agency. individual piles.
306.8.4 When assessing lateral load resistance from

results of subsurface investigation and pile strength
parameters, the transverse resistance of a pile or pile
group shall be calculated using a compatible set of
structural effects of actions, ground reactions and
displacements, and consider the possibility of structural
failure of the pile in the ground as well as the degree of
freedom of rotation of piles at the connection with the
structure.

306.9 Piles in Subsiding Areas 306.12 Allowable Loads
<Vhere piles are driven through subsiding fills or other The allowable loads based on soil conditions shall be
subsiding strata and derive support from underlying established in accordance with Section 306.
firmer materials, consideration shall be given to the
downward frictional forces, which may be imposed on the Exception:
piles by the subsiding upper strata.
Any uncased cast-in-place pile may be assumed to
develop (J jricli()l'1ql re!liSIC1I1Ce equal to one sixth of the
Where the influence of subsiding fills is considered as
bearing j/alue of th« sotl material at minimum depth as set
imposing loads on the pile, the allowable stresses
forth in Tabte 305-1 bu! no! to exceed 25 kPa unless a
specified in this chapter may be increased if satisfactory
greater value is allowed by the building official after a
substantiating data are submitted.
foundation investigation as specified in Section 303 is
submitted. Frictional resistance and bearing resistance
306.10 Water Jetting
shall not be assumed to act simultaneously unless
recommended after a foundation investigation as
Installation of Piles by water shall not be used except
specified in Section 303.
where and as specifically permitted by the building
official. When used, jetting shall be carried out in such a
306.13 Use of Higher Allowable Pile Stresses
manner that the carrying capacity of existing piles and
structures shall not be impaired. After withdrawal of the
Allowable compressive stresses greater than those
jet, piles shall be driven down until the required resistance
specified in Section 307 shall be permitted when
is obtained.
substantiating data justifying such higher stresses are
submitted to and approved by the building official. Such
306.10 Protection of Pile Materials
substantiating data shall be included in the foundation
investigation report in accordance with Section 306.1.
Where the boring records of site conditions indicate
possible deleterious action on pile materials because of
soil constituents, changing water levels or other factors,
such materials shall be adequately protected by methods
or processes approved by the geotechnical engineer.
The effectiveness of such methods or processes for the

particular purpose shall have been thoroughly established
by satisfactory service records or other evidence, which
demonstrates the effectiveness of such protective
measures.

SECTION307 307.2.2 Allowable Stresses

,fILES-SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
The allowable compressive stress in the concrete shall not
307.1 Round Wood Piles exceed 0.33f~. The allowable compressive stress of
reinforcement shall not exceed 34 percent of the yield
307.1.1 Material strength of the steel or 175 MPa.
Except where untreated piles are permitted, wood piles 307.3 Metal-Cased Concrete Piles
shall be pressure treated. Untreated piles may be used
only when it has been established that the cutoff will be 307.3.1 Material
below lowest groundwater level assumed to exist during
the life of the structure. Concrete used in metal-cased concrete piles shall have a
specified compressive strength f~ of not less than
307.1.2 Allowable Stresses 17.5 MPa.
The allowable unit stresses for round woodpiles shall not 307.3.2 Installation
exceed those set forth in Chapter 6.
Every metal casing for a concrete pile shall have a sealed
The allowable values listed in, for compression parallel to tip with a diameter of not less than 200 mm.
the grain at extreme fiber in bending are based on load
sharing as occurs in a pile cluster. For piles which Concrete piles cast in place in metal shells shall have
support their own specific load, a safety factor of 1.25 shells driven for their full length in contact with the
shall be applied to compression parallel to the grain surrounding soil and left permanently in place. The shells
values and 1.30 to extreme fiber in bending values. shall be sufficiently strong to resist collapse and
sufficiently watertight to exclude water and foreign
307.2 Uncased Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles material during the placing of concrete.
307.2.1 Material Piles shall be driven in such order and with such spacing
as to ensure against distortion of or injury to piles already
Concrete piles cast in place against earth in drilled or in place. No pile shall be driven within four and one-half
bored holes shall be made in such a manner as to ensure average pile diameters of a pile filled with concrete less
the exclusion of any foreign matter and to secure a full- than 24 hours old unless approved by the ·geotechnical
sized shaft. engineer.
The length of such pile shall be limited to not more than 307.3.3 Allowable Stresses
30 times the average diameter. Concrete shall have a
specified compressive strength f~ of not less than Allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified in
17.5 MPa. Section 307.2.2, except that the allowable concrete stress
may be increased to a maximum value of 0.40f~ for that
Exception: portion of the pile meeting the following conditions:
The length of pile may exceed 30 times the diameter 1. The thickness of the metal casing is not less than
provided the design and installation of the pile foundation 1.7 mm (No. 14 carbon sheet steel gage).
is in accordance with an approved foundation
2. The casing is seamless or is provided with seams of
investigation report.
equal strength and is of a configuration that will
provide confinement to the cast-in-place concrete.
3. The specified compressive strength f~ shall not

exceed 35 MPa and the ratio of steel minimum
specified yield strength F y to concrete specified
compressive strength f~ shall not be less than 6.
4. The pile diameter is not greater than 400 mm.

307.4 Precast Concrete Piles 307.5.2.2 Transverse Reinforcement
/ 307.4.1 Materials Ties or spiral reinforcement shall not be spaced more than
75 llllll apart, center to center, for a distance of 600 111111
Precast concrete piles shall have a specified compressive from the ends and not more than 200 mm elsewhere.
strength f~ of not less than 20 MPa, and shall develop a
compressive strength of not less than 20 MPa before At each end of the pile, the first five ties or spirals shall be
driving. spaced 25 mm center to center.
307.4.2 Reinforcement Ties For piles having a diameter of 600 mm or less, wire shall
not be smaller than 5.5 mm (No.5 B.W.gage).
The longitudinal reinforcement in driven precast concrete
piles shall be laterally tied with steel ties or wire spirals. For piles having a diameter greater than 600 mm but less
Ties and spirals shall not be spaced more than 75 mm than 900 mm, wire shall not be smaller than 6 mm
apart, center to center, for a distance of 600 mrn from the (No.4 B.W.gage).
ends and not more than 200 mm elsewhere. The gage of
ties and spirals shall be as follows: For piles having a diameter greater than 900 mm, wire
shall not be smaller than 6.5 mm (No.3 B.W.gauge).
1. For piles having a diameter of 400 mm or less, wire
shall not be smaller than 5.5 mm (No.5 B.W.gage).
307.5.3 Allowable Stresses
2. For piles, having a diameter of more than 400 rnrn
and less than 500 mm, wire shall not be smaller than Precast prestressed piling shall be designed to resist
6 rnrn (No.4 B.W.gage). stresses induced by handling and driving as well as by
loads. The effective prestress in the pile shall not be less
3. For piles having a diameter of 500 mm and larger,
than 2.5 MPa for piles up to 10 m in length, 4 MPa for
wire shall not be smaller than 6.5 mm
piles up to 15 m in length, and 5 MPa for piles greater
(No.3 B.W. gage).
than 15 meters in length.
The compressive stress in the concrete due to externally
applied load shall not exceed:
Precast concrete piling shall be designed to resist stresses
induced by handling and driving as well as by loads. The
allowable stresses shall not exceed the values specified in
fc = O. 33f~ - O. 27fpc (307-1)
Section 307.2.2. where
fpc effective prestress stress on the gross

307.5 Precast Prestressed Concrete Piles
(Pretensioned) section.
Effective prestress shall be based on an assumed loss of
307.5.1 Materials 200 MPa in the prestressing steel. The allowable stress in
the prestressing steel shall not exceed the values specified
Precast prestressed concrete piles shall have a specified in Section 418.6.
compressive strength f~of not less than 35 MPa and shall
develop a compressive strength of not less than 27 MPa 307.5.4 Splicing
before driving.
Where required, splicing for concrete piles shall be by use
307.5.2 Reinforcement of embedded and properly anchored thick steel plates at
the ends being joined which shall then be fully welded, or
307.5.2.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement by use of adequate sized dowel rods and steel receiving
sleeves. The dowels and the faces shall then be joined by
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be high-tensile structural epoxy. Metal splice cans are not allowed.
seven-wire strand conforming to ASTM Standards.
Longitudinal reinforcement shall be laterally tied with
steel ties or wire spirals.

307.6 Structural Steel Piles 307.7.2 Allowable Stresses
Material The allowable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the
minimum specified yield strength F y of the steel or 0.33
Structural steel piles, steel pipe piles and fully welded of the specified compressive strength f~ of concrete,
steel piles fabricated from plates shall conform to one of
provided F y shall not be assumed greater than 250 MPa
the material specifications listed in Section 501.3.
for computational purposes.
Exception:
The allowable axial stresses shall not exceed 0.35 of the When justified in accordance with Section 306.12, the
minimum specified yield strength F y or 85 MPa, allowable stresses may be increased to O. SO F y'
whichever is less.
307.7.3 Minimum Dimensions
Exception:
When justified in accordance with Section 306.12, the Driven piles of uniform section shall have a nominal
allowable axial stress may be increased above 85 MPa outside diameter of not less than 200 mm.
and O. 3 SF y, but shall not exceed O. SF y'
307.6.3 Minimum Dimensions
Sections of driven H-piles shall comply with the

following:
1. The flange projection shall not exceed 14 times the
minimum thickness of metal in either the flange or
the web, and the flange widths shall not be less than
80 percent of the depth of the section.
2. The nominal depth in the direction of the web shall
not be less than 200 mm.
3. Flanges and webs shall have a mimmum nominal
thickness of 10 mm.
Sections of driven pipe piles shall have an outside

diameter of not less than 250 mm and a minimum
thickness of not less than 6 mm.
307.7 Concrete-Filled Steel Pipe Piles
307.7.1 Material
The steel pipe of concrete-filled steel pipe piles shall

conform to one of the material specifications listed in
Section 501.3. The concrete in concrete-filled steel pipe
piles shall have a specified compressive strength f~of not
less than 17.5 MPa.

SECTION 308 308.3 Footing Foundations
;J FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION- Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 in

SEISMIC ZONE 4 accordance with Section 208.4, individual spread footings
founded on soil defined in Section 208.4.3 as Soil profile
308.1 General Type SE or SF shall be interconnected by ties. Ties shall
be capable of carrying, in tension or compression, unless
In Seismic Zones 4, the further requirements of this it is demonstrated that equivalent restraint is provided by
section shall apply to the design and construction of reinforced concrete beams within slabs on grade or
foundations, foundation components and the connection reinforced concretes labs on grade.
of superstructure elements thereto. See Section 421.10
for additional requirements for structural concrete 308.4 Pier and Pile Foundations
foundations resisting seismic forces.
Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 in
308.2 Foundation and Geotechnical Investigations accordance with Section 208.4, the following shall apply.
Individual pile caps, piers or piles shall be interconnected
Where a structure is determined to be in Seismic Zone 4 by ties. Ties shall be capable of carrying, in tension and
in accordance with Section 208.4, an investigation shall compression, unless it can be demonstrated that
be conducted and shall include an evaluation of the equivalent restraint is provided by reinforced concrete
following potential hazards resulting from earthquake beams within slabs on grade, reinforced concrete slabs on
motions: slope instability, liquefaction and surface rupture grade, confinement by competent rock, hard cohesive
due to faulting or lateral spreading. soils or very dense granular soils. Concrete shall have a
specified compressive strength of not less than 3,000 psi
In addition, the following investigations shall also be met: . (20.68 MPa) at 28days.
I. A determination of lateral pressures on basement and Exception:

retaining walls due to earthquake motions.
Piers supporting foundation walls, isolated interior posts
2. An assessment of potential consequences of any detailed so the pier is not subject to lateral loads, lightly
liquefaction and soil strength loss, including loaded exterior decks and patios and occupancy category
estimation of differential settlement, lateral IV and V specified in Section 103 not exceeding two
movement or reduction in foundation soil-bearing stories of light-frame construction, are not subject to
capacity, and shall address mitigation measures. Such interconnection if it can be shown the soils are of
measures shall be given consideration in the design adequate stiffness: subject to the approval of the building
of the structure and can include but are not limited to official.
ground stabilization, selection of appropriate
foundation type and depths, selection of appropriate
structural systems to accommodate anticipated
displacements or any combination of these measures.
The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss
shall be evaluated for site peak ground acceleration
magnitudes and source characteristics consistent with
the design earthquake ground motions. Peak ground
acceleration shall be determined from a site-specific
study taking into account soil amplification effects,
as specified in Section 208.4.

308.4.1 Connection to Pile Cap 308.5 Driven Pile Foundations

/
For piles required to resist uplift forces or provide 308.5.1 Precast Concrete Piles
rotational restraint, design of anchorage of piles into the
pile cap shall be provided considering the combined effect Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4, a
of axial forces due to uplift and bending moments due to mirumum longitudinal steel reinforcement ratio of 0.01
fixity to the pile cap. Anchorage shall develop a minimum shall be provided for precast non-prestressed concrete
of 25 percent of the strength of the pile in tension. piles. The longitudinal reinforcing shall be confined with
Anchorage into the pile cap shall be capable of closed ties or equivalent spirals of a minimum 3/8 in
developing the following: (10 mm) diameter. Transverse confinement reinforcing
shall be provided at a maximum spacing of eight times the
I. In the case of uplift, the lesser of the nominal tensile diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar, but not to
strength of the longitudinal reinforcement in a exceed 6 in. (152 mm), within three pile diameters of the
concrete pile, or the nominal tensile strength of a bottom of the pile cap. Outside of the confinement region,
steel pile, or the pile uplift soil nominal strength closed ties or equivalent spirals shall be provided at a 16
factored by 1.3 or the axial tension force resulting longitudinal-bar-diameter maximum spacing, but not
from the load combinations of Section 203. greater than 8 in. (200 mm). Reinforcement shall be full
length.
2. In the case of rotational restraint, the lesser of the
axial and shear forces, and moments resulting from For Site Classes D through F, Transverse confinement
the load combinations of Section 203 or development reinforcement consisting of closed ties or equivalent
of the full axial, bending and shear nominal strength spirals shall be provided in accordance with
of the pile. Sections 21.6.4.2 through 21.6.4.4 of ACI 318 for the full
length of the pile.
308.4.2 Design Details for Piers, Piles and Grade
Beams In other than Site Classes E or F, the specified transverse
confinement reinforcement shall be provided within three
Piers or piles shall be designed and constructed to pile diameters below the bottom of the pile cap, but it is
withstand maximum imposed curvatures from earthquake permitted to use a transverse reinforcing ratio of not less
ground motions and structure response. Curvatures shall than one-half of that required in Section 21.6.4.4(a) of
include free-field soil strains modified for soil-pile- ACI 318 throughout the remainder of the pile length.
structure interaction coupled with pier or pile
deformations induced by lateral pier or pile resistance to
structure seismic forces. Concrete piers or piles on soil
type SE or SF sites, as determined in Section 208.4.3,
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with
Sections 410 within seven pile diameters of the pile cap
and the interfaces of soft to medium stiff clay or
liquefiable strata. Grade beams shall be designed as
beams in accordance Section 4. When grade beams have
the capacity to resist the forces from the load
combinations in Section 203.
308.4.3 Flexural Strength
Where the vertical lateral-force-resisting elements are

columns, the grade beam or pile cap flexural strengths
shall exceed the column flexural strength. The connection
between batter piles and grade beams or pile caps shall be
designed to resist the nominal strength of the pile acting
as a short column. Batter piles and their connection shall
be capable of resisting forces and moments from the load
combinations of Section 203.

308.5.2 Precast Prestressed Piles but not less than:
Wflere a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4, the

following shall apply: Ps = O.12 -II~ -
[11.4P]
+ I' A (308.5.3)
yh 2 e g
For the upper 20 ft (6 m) of precast prestressed piles, the and need not exceed:
minimum volumetric ratio of spiral reinforcement shall Ps = 0.021 (308.5.4)
not be less than 0.007 or the amount required by the
following equation: where
Pile cross-sectional area, mm/
Ps = 0.121~/IYh (308.5.1 )
Core area defined by spiral outside diameter,
where rnrrr'
Specified compressive strength of
I~ Specified compressive strength of concrete,
I~ MPa:::; 41.4 MPa
Iyh =
concrete, MPa
Yield strength of spiral reinforcement,
r.; Yield strength of spiral reinforcement
< 586 MPa
586 MPa Axial load on pile resulting from the load
P
Ps Spiral reinforcement index combination 1.2D + 0.5L + 1.0E, kN
(volume spiral/volume of core) Volumetric ratio (volume of spiral! volume of
Ps
core)
A minimum of one-half of the volumetric ratio of spiral
reinforcement required by Eq. 308.5.1 shall be provided This required amount of spiral reinforcement is permitted
for the remaining length of the pile. to be obtained by providing an inner and outer spiral.
Requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 21, need not apply. When transverse reinforcement consists of rectangular
hoops and cross ties, the total cross-sectional area of
Where the total pile length in the soil is 35 Ii (10,668 mm) lateral transverse reinforcement in the ductile region with
or less, the lateral transverse reinforcement in the ductile spacings, and perpendicular to dimension, he, shall
region shall occur through the length of the pile. Where
conform to:
the pile length exceeds 35 It (10,668 mm), the ductile pile
region shall be taken as the-greater of 35,ft (10,668 rnm) 01'
the distance from the underside of the pile cap to the point
Ash = O.3she ( -II~ Ag - 1 ) [12 -
) (A P ]
1.4 I' A
of zero curvature plus three times [he least pile yh . eh c g
dimension.
(308.5.5)
In the ductile region, the center-to-center spacing of the but not less than:
spirals or hoop reinforcement shall not exceed one-fifth
of the least pile dimension, six times the diameter of the
longitudinal strand, or 8 in (203 mm), whichever is ASh
I~ )
= O. izs«; ( I yh 2 + I~Ag
[1 1.4P] (308.5.6)
smaller.
where
Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping one full :::;483 MPa
tum, by welding, or by the use of a mechanical connector.
Cross-sectional dimension of pile core
Where spiral reinforcement is lap spliced, the ends of the
measured center to center of hoop
spiral shall terminate in a seismic hook in accordance
reinforcement, mm
with ACI 318, except that the bend shall be not less than
s Spacing of transverse reinforcement
135°.
measured along length of pile, mm
Axial load, N
Where the transverse reinforcement consists of circular
Cross-sectional area of transverse
spirals, the volumetric ratio of spiral transverse
reinforcement, mm2
reinforcement in the ductile region shall comply with the
Gross area of pile, mm'
following:
Specified compressive strength of concrete,
I~ (Ag [12+ 1.4P] MPa

) (308.5.2)
Ps = 0.25 Iyh Aeh -1 I~Ag

The hoops and cross ties shall be equivalent to deformed SECTION 309
bars not less than 10 mrn in size. Rectangular hoop ends
shall terminate at a corner with seismic hooks. SPECIAL FOUNDATION,
SLOPE STABILIZATION AND
Outside of the length of the pile requiring transverse
confinement reinforcing, the spiral or hoop reinforcing
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
with a volumetric ratio not less than one-half of that
required for transverse confinement reinforcing shall be 309.1 Special Foundation Systems
provided.
Special foundation systems or materials other than
specified in the foregoing Sections may be introduced
308.6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Foundations
provided that such systems can be supported by
calculations and theory to be providing safe foundation
Where a structure is assigned to Seismic Zone 4 a
systems and when approved by the Engineer of record.
minimum longitudinal reinforcement ratio of 0.005 shall
Materials for incorporation into the foundation should
be provided for uncased cast-in-place drilled or augered
have proven track record of successful usage in similar
concrete piles, piers or caissons in the top one-half of the
applications.
pile length a minimum length of 10 feet (3,048 mm)
below ground or throughout the flexural length of the pile,
whichever length is greatest. The flexural length shall be 309.2 Acceptance and Approval
taken as the length of the pile to a point where the
concrete section cracking moment strength multiplied by Structure support on improved ground using such special
0.4 exceeds the required moment strength at that point. systems or proprietary systems may be approved subject
There shall be a minimum of four longitudinal bars with to submittal of calculations and other proof of acceptance
transverse confinement reinforcement provided in the pile and successful usage.
within three times the least pile dimension of the bottom
of the pile cap. A transverse spiral reinforcement ratio of 309.3 Specific Applications
not less than one-half of that required in Section 410 for
other than Soil Profile Type S E, SF or as determined in Specialty foundation systems may be applied or used
Section 208.4.3 or liquefiable sites is permitted. Tie specifically to address any or combinations of the
spacing throughout the remainder of the concrete section following: Bearing Capacity Improvement, Liquefaction
shall neither exceed 12-longitudinal-bar diameters, mitigation, slope stability enhancement, control and/or
one-half the least dimension of the section, nor 12 inches acceleration of Consolidation settlements or immediate
(305 mm). Ties shall be a minimum of 10mm bars for settlements, increase in soil shear capacity, increased
piles with a least dimension up to 20 inches (508 mrn), pullout or overturning capacity, special anchors in soil
and 12 mm bars for larger piles. and rock and other beneficial effects. Controlled low
strength materials (CLSM) to reduce fill loads may be
allowed for use where applicable.

NSCP C101-15
Chapter 4
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

VOLUME I

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No.: (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline@~mail.com

CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete 4-1
Table of Contents
SECTION 401 , 7
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 7
401.1 Scope ,., , 7
401.2 General , , 7
401.3 Purpose 7
401.4 Applicability " 7
401.5 Interpretation , 8
401.6 Building Official , 8
401.7 Licensed Design Professional , ' , " 8
401.8 Construction Documents and Design Records , 9
401.9 Testing and Inspection , ' 9
401.10 Approval of Special Systems of Design, Construction, or Alternative Construction Materials 9
401.11 Provisions for Earthquake Resistance , 9
SECTION 402 9
NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY 9
402.1 Scope 9
402.2 Notation - 9
402.3 Terminology , , 20
SECTION 403 28
REFERENCED STANDARDS 28
403.1 Scope 28
403.2 Referenced Standards 28
SECTION 404 31
STRUCTURAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 31
404.1 Scope 31
404.2 Materials - 31
404.3 Design Loads 31
404.4 Structural System and Load Paths 31
404.5 Structural Analysis 32
404.6 Strength _ _ 32
404.7 Serviceability _.. 32
404.8 Durability _ _ 32
404.9 Sustainability 33
404.10 Structural Integrity _.., 33
404.11 Fire Resistance 33
404.12 Requirements for Specific Types of Construction 33
404.13 Construction and Inspection " ' 34
404.14 Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures , 34
SECTION 405 34
LOADS 34
405.1 Scope ; , 34
405.2 General 34
405.3 Load Factors and Combinations 34
SECTION 406 , , 36
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 36
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, yth Edition, 2015

4-2 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
406.1 Scope 36
106.2 General · , " , , , , , 36
406.3 Modeling Assumptions 37
406.4 Arrangement of Live Load ,, 37
406.5 Simplified Method of Analysis for Non-Prestressed Continuous Beams and One-way Slabs 37
406.6 First-order Analysis 38
406.7 Elastic Second-order Analysis 41
406.8 Inelastic Second-Order Analysis , 41
406.9 Acceptability of Finite Element Analysis , , 42
SECTION 407 42
ONE-WAY SLABS 42
407.1 Scope , 42
407.2 General 42
407.3 Design Limits , , · 42
407.4 Required Strength 43
407.5 Design Strength , , , , , 44
407.6 Reinforcement Limits 44
407.7 Reinforcement Detailing , ',' ""'" , , 45
SECTION 408 47
TWO-WAY SLABS 47
408.1 Scope 47
408.2 General : 47
408.3 Design Limits ,48
408.5 Design Strength 51
408.7 Reinforcement Detailing 52
408.8 Non-Prestressed Two-Way Joist Systems , 56
408.9 Lift-slab Construction 57
408.10 Direct Design Method 57
408.11 Equivalent Frame Method , : · , .- 60
SECTION 409 61
BEAMS 61
409.1 Scope , , 61
409.2 General 61
409.3 Design Limits ,., , · 62
409.4 Required Strength , , 63
409.5 Design Strength , 63
409.6 Reinforcement Limits , , 64
409.8 Non-Prestressed One-way Joist Systems 68
409.9 Deep Beams , , 69
SECTION 410 70
COLUMNS 70
410.1 Scope 70
410.2 General ,., ' ,.70
410.3 Design Limits _ , 70
410.5 Design Strength , , ,71

410.7 Reinforcement Detailing _ 71

SECTION 411 74
WALLS 74
411.1 Scope , , 74
411.2 General 74
411.3 Design Limits , " 74
411.4 Required Strength , , 75
411.6 Reinforcement Limits , 76
411.8 Alternative Method for Out-of-Plane Slender Wall Analysis 78
SECTION 412 79
DIAPHRAGMS 79
412.1 Scope 79
412.2 General , 79
412.3 Design Limits 80
412.4 Required Strength d , 80
412.5 Design Strength , , 80
412.7 Reinforcement Detailing , 82
SECTION 413 83
FOUNDATIONS 83
413.1 Scope 83
413.2 General 83
413.3 Shallow Foundations 84
413.4 Deep Foundations _ 85
SECTION 414 86
PLAIN CONCRETE ! ~ 86
414.1 Scope , , 86
414.2 General 86
414.3 Design Limits 86
414.4 Required Strength , 87
SECTION 415 90
BEAM-CONCRETE AND 90
SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS 90
415.1 Scope , , 90
415.2 General , · 90
415.3 Transfer of Column Axial Force through the Floor System 90
415.4 Detailing of Joints 90
SECTION 416 91
CONNECTION BETWEEN MEMBERS 91
416.1 Scope " 91
416.2 Connections of Precast Members 91
416.3 Connections to Foundations 92
416.4 Horizontal Shear Transfer in Composite Concrete Flexural Members , 94
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, th Edition. 2015

416.5 Brackets and Corbels , 95

s,:CTION 417 97
ANCHORING TO CONCRETE 97
417.1 Scope 97
417.2 General 98
417.3 General Requirements for Strength of Anchors 100
417.4 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading _ 102
417.5 Design Requirements for Shear Loading 105
417.6 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces 108
417.7 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thicknesses to Preclude Splitting Failure _ 108
417.8 Installation and Inspection of Anchors 109
SECTION 418 110
EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT STRUCTURES 110
418.1 Scope 110
418.4 Intermediate Moment Frames 111
418.5 Intermediate Precast Structural Walls 113
418.6 Beams of Special Moment Frames 113
418.7 Columns of Special Moment Frames 115
418.8 Joints of Special Moment Frames 117
418.9 Special Moment Frames Constructed Using Precast Concrete 119
418.10 Special Structural Walls , _ 119
418.11 Special Structural Walls Constructed Using Precast Concrete 123
418.12 Diaphragms and Trusses _. " _ 123
418.13 Foundations , 125
418.14 Members Not Designated as Part of the Seismic-Force-Resisting System _ 127
SECTION 419 128
CONCRETE: DESIGN AND DURABILITY REQUIREMENTS 128
419.1 Scope ,_ 128
419.2 Concrete Design Properties : 128
419.3 Concrete Durability Requirements "" : _ : 129
419.3.1 Exposure Categories and Classes _.._ _ 129
419.4 Grout Durability Requirements 131
SECTION 420 131
STEEL REINFORCEMENT PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND EMBEDMENTS 131
420.1 Scope - - 131
420.2 Non-Prestressed Bars and Wires _ 131
420.3 Prestressing Strands, Wires, and Bars 132
420.5 Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement 136
420.6 Provisions for Durability of Steel Reinforcement _ 136
420.7 Embedments _.._ __ 138
SECTION 421 139
STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS 139
421.1 Scope , 139
SECTION 422 142
SECTIONAL STRENGTH 142
422.1 Scope _ _ 142
422.2 Design Assumptions for Moment and Axial Strength _ 142

CHj\PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4--5
422.3 Flexural Strength , , ,., 143

422.4 Axial Strength or Combined Flexural and Axial Strength 143
422.5 One-way Shear Strength 144
422.6 Two-Way Shear Strength , 147
422.7 Torsional Strength , " , , , 150
422.8 Bearing , 152
422.9 Shear Friction " ' , ,",.",.,.152
SECTION 423 154
STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS 154
423.1 Scope , , , , , 154
423.2 General ,..,', , , , 154
423,3 Design Strength , , , " 154
423.4 Strength ofStruts , " , , .., 154
423.5 Reinforcement Crossing Bottle-Shaped Struts " " 155
423.6 Strut Reinforcement Detailing ,_ _ , " , 155
423.7 Strength of Ties , , , , 155
423.8 Tie Reinforcement Detailing _ 156
423.9 Strength of Nodal Zones , '., ' , ~ 156
SECTION 424 157
SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS 157
424.1 Scope _ , : 157
424.2 Deflections Due to Service-Level Gravity Loads " "." " 157
424.3 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in One-Way Slabs and Beams _ " 158
424.4 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement _ _ _ 159
424.5 Permissible Stresses in Prestressed Concrete Flexural Members " 160
SECTION 425 161
REINFORCEMENT DETAILS 161
425.1 Scope " ..- , - 161
425.2 Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement ~ , 161
425.3 Standard Hooks, Seismic Hooks, Crossties, and Minimum Inside Bend Diameters 162
425.4 Development of Reinforcement , , 163
425.5 Splices , ' _ , 167
425.6 Bundled Reinforcement. _ 169
425.7 Transverse Reinforcement. 169
425.8 Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers , , J 72
425.9 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioned Tendons _ , 172
SECTION 426 175
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION 175
426.1 Scope _ _ 175
426.2 Design Criteria _ 175
426.3 Member Information _ , ,_ 175
426.4 Concrete Materials and Mixture Requirements " 175
426.5 Concrete Production and Construction , , _ 178
426.6 Reinforcement Materials and Construction Requirements " 181
426.7 Anchoring to Concrete 182
426.8 Embedments _ , " , , 182
426.9 Additional Requirements for Precast Concrete ,.., " 183
426.10 Additional Requirements for Prestressed Concrete ,' 183
426.11 Formwork , 184
426.12 Concrete Evaluation and Acceptance , 185
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ih Edition. 2015

CHAPTEf'< 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-5
422.3 Flexural Strength " 143

( 422.4 Axial Strength or Combined Flexural and Axial Strength 143
422.5 One-way Shear Strength 144
422.6 Two-Way Shear Strength , 147
422.7 Torsional Strength ISO
422.8 Bearing , , 152
422.9 Shear Friction 152
SECTION 423 154
STRUT-AND-TIE MODELS 154
423.1 Scope , 154
423.2 General , _ , 154
423.4 Strength of Struts " 154
423.5 Reinforcement Crossing Bottle-Shaped Struts 155
423.6 Strut Reinforcement Detailing 155
423.7 Strength of Ties 155
423.8 Tie Reinforcement Detailing , 156
423.9 Strength of Nodal Zones , 156
SECTION 424 157
SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS 157
424.1 Scope _. " 157
424.2 Deflections Due to Service-Level Gravity Loads , 157
424.3 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in One-Way Slabs and Beams " 158
424.4 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement , , 159
424.5 Permissible Stresses in Prestressed Concrete Flexural Members , 160
SECTION 425 161
REINFORCEMENT DETAILS 161
425.1 Scope : 161
425.2 Minimum Spacing ofReinforcement : : 161
425.3 Standard Hooks, Seismic Hooks, Crossties, and Minimum Inside Bend Diameters 162
425.4 Development of Reinforcement · 163
425.5 Splices 167
425.6 Bundled Reinforcement 169
425.7 Transverse Reinforcement. 169
425.8 Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers _ 172
425.9 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioned Tendons 172
SECTION 426 175
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND INSPECTION 175
426.1 Scope , , · 175
426.2 Design Criteria 175
426.3 Member Information , 175
426.4 Concrete Materials and Mixture Requirements , , 175
426.5 Concrete Production and Construction 178
426.6 Reinforcement Materials and Construction Requirements , ; 181
426.7 Anchoring to Concrete 182
426.8 Embedments , 182
426.9 Additional Requirements for Precast Concrete 183
426.10 Additional Requirements for Prestressed Concrete , 183
426.11 Formwork 184
426.12 Concrete Evaluation and Acceptance 185
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, i" Edition. 20'15

4·6 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
426.13 Inspection , " , , 187

"
SECTION 427 188
STRENGTH EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 188
427.1 Scope " , " , , , 188
427.2 General ',.,.., 188
427.3 Analytical Strength Evaluation , , , 188
427.4 Strength Evaluation by Load Test 189
427.5 Reduced Load Rating , : J 90
SECTION 428 191

BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE THIN SHELLS 191
428.1 Scope and Definitions '., 191
428.2 Analysis and Design J 91
428.4.1 Cast-in-place Non-Prestressed Concrete ' , 192
428.4.2 Cast-in-place Prestressed Concrete _.. 192
428.4.3 Precast Non-Prestressed or Prestressed oncretc Manufactured Under Plant Conditions 192
428.4.4 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements f'01' Corrosive Environments !93
428.5 Shell Reinforcement , : , ,J 93
428.6 Construction , , ,.., 194
SECTION 429 194
ALTERNATE DESIGN METHOD 194
429.1 Notations ; , 194
429.2 Scope ,' 194
429.3 General , , ; 194
429.4 Permissible Service Load Stresses , .- 194
429.5 Development and Splices ofReinforcement... 195
429.7 Compression Members With or Without Flexure · 195
429.8 Shear and Torsion , 195-
APPENDIX A : 199
APPENDIX B 201

SECTION 401 401.2.5 This chapter provides the minimum requirements

for the materials, design, construction, and strength
.GENERAL REQUIREMENTS evaluation of structural concrete members and systems in
any structure designed and constructed under the
401.1 Scope requirements of the general building code.
401.1.1 This section addresses (a) to (h): 401.2.6 Modifications to this Code that are adopted by a
particular government agency or local government are
a. General requirements of this Chapter; part of that organization's requirements, but are not part
of this Code.
b. Purpose of this Chapter;
401.2.7 This chapter provides the minimum requirements
c. Applicability of this Chapter; for the materials, design, construction, and strength
evaluation of structural concrete members and systems in
d. Interpretation of this Chapter; any structure within this Code.
e. Definition of building official and the licensed design 401.3 Purpose

professional;
401.3.1 The purpose of this chapter is to provide for
f. Construction documents; public health and safety by establishing minimum
requirements for strength, stability, serviceability,
g. Testing and inspection; durability, and integrity of concrete structures.
h. Approval of special systems of design, construction, 401.3.2 This chapter does not address all design
or alternative construction materials. considerations.
401.2 General 401.3.3 Construction means and methods are not

addressed in this section.
401.2.1 Chapter 4 refers to the structural concrete
provision of the National Structural Code of the 401.4 Applicability
Philippines, Volume I (NSCP Vol. I), 7th Edition and may
be cited as such, and will be referred to herein as "this 401.4.1 This chapter shall apply to concrete structures
Code". designed and constructed under the requirements of the
general building code.
401.2.2 This chapter provides minimum requirements
for the design and construction of structural concrete 401.4.2 Applicable provisions of this chapter shall be
elements of any building or other structure under permitted to be used for structures not governed by the
requirements of the National Building Code of the general building code.
Philippines of which this chapter of the National
Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume I, forms a 401.4.3 The design of thin shells and folded plate
part. This chapter also covers the strength evaluation of concrete structures shall be in accordance with Section
existing concrete structures. 428.
For structural concrete, f~ shall not be less than 17 MPa. 401.4.4 Design and construction of structural concrete
No maximum value of f~ shall apply unless restricted by slabs cast on stay-in-place, non-composite steel deck are
a specific code provision. governed by this chapter.
401.2.3 This chapter is in English, with SI units, 401.4.5 Design and construction of one- and two-
published by the Association of Structural Engineers of family dwellings and multiple single-family dwellings
the Philippines, Inc. (townhouses) and their accessory structures may be
designed until such time provisions of the National
401.2.4 In case of conflict between this edition and other Structural Code of the Philippines, Volume III, Housing is
earlier versions, this latest version governs. published.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ih Edition, 20~15

401.4.6 This chapter does not apply to the design and 401.5.5 The following words and terms in this section
installation of concrete piles, drilled piers, and caissons shall be interpreted in accordance with (a) through (e):
embedded in ground except as provided in (a) or (b):
a. The word "shall" is always mandatory;
a. For portions in air or water, or in soil incapable of
providing adequate lateral restraint to prevent b. Provisions of this section are mandatory even if the
buckling throughout their length. See also Sect. word "shall" is not used;
418.13.1.2.
c. Words used in the present tense shall include the
b. For structures in region of high seismic risk or future;
assigned to high seismic performance or design
categories d. The word "and" indicates that all of the connected
items, conditions, requirements, or events shall apply;
401.4.7 This chapter does not govern design and
construction of slabs-on-ground, unless the slab transmits e. The word "or" indicates that all of the connected
vertical loads or lateral forces from other portions of the items, conditions, requirements, or events are
structure to the soil. alternatives, at least one of which shall be satisfied.
401.4.8 For unusual structures, such as arches, tanks, 401.5.6 In any case in which one or more provisions of
reservoirs, bins and silos, blast-resistant structures, and this Chapter are declared by an appropriate court to be
chimneys, provisions of this section shall govern where invalid, that ruling shall not affect the validity of the
applicable. For tanks and reservoirs refer also to ACI 350, remaining provisions of this Chapter, which are severable.
ACI 334.IR, and ACI 372R. The ruling of the court shall be effective only in that
court's jurisdiction, and shall not affect the content of
401.4.9 This chapter does not govern the composite interpretation of this Chapter in other jurisdictions.
design of structural concrete slabs cast-in-place,
composite steel form deck. Concrete used in the 401.5.7 If conflicts occur between provisions of this
construction of such slabs shall be governed by Sections code and standards and documents referenced in Section
40 I to 406 of this chapter, where applicable. Portions of 403, this Chapter shall apply.
such slabs designed as reinforced concrete are governed
by this chapter. 401.6 Building Official
401.5 Interpretation 401.6.1 All references in this chapter to the building

official shall be understood to mean the persons who
401.5.1 The principles of interpretation in this Section administer and enforce this Code.
shall apply to this Chapter as a whole unless otherwise
stated. 401.6.2 Actions and decisions by the building official
affect only the specific jurisdiction and do not change this
401.5.2 This Chapter consists of sections and Code.
appendices, including text, headings, tables, figures,
footnotes to tables and figures, and referenced standards. 401.6.3 The building official shall have the right to
order testing of any materials used in concrete
401.5.3 This Chapter shall be interpreted in a manner construction to determine if materials are of the quality
that avoids conflict between or among its provisions. specified.
Specific provisions shall govern over general provisions.
401. 7 Licensed Design Professional
401.5.4 This chapter shall be interpreted and applied in
accordance with the plain meaning of the words and terms 401.7.1 All references in this Code to the licensed design
used. Specific definitions of words and terms in this professional shall be understood to mean the person who
section shall be used where provided and applicable, is licensed and responsible for, and in charge of, the
regardless of whether other materials, standards, or structural design or inspection.
resources outside of this section provide a different
definition.

CHAPTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete 4-9
401.8 Construction Documents and Design Records SECTION 402

,401.8.1 The licensed design professional shall provide NOTATION AND TERMINOLOGY
in the construction documents the information required in
Section 426 and that required by the jurisdiction. 402.1 Scope
401.8.2 Calculations pertinent to design shall be 'filed 402.1.1 This section defines notation and terminology
with the construction documents if required by the used in this chapter.
building official. Analyses and designs using computer
programs shall be permitted provided design assumptions 402.2 . Notation
user input, and computer-generated output are submitted.
Model analysis shall be permitted to supplement a shear span, distance between
calculations, concentrated load and face of
supports, mm.
401.9 Testing and Inspection a depth of equivalent rectangular stress
block, mm.
401.9.1 Concrete materials shall be tested III shear span, equal to distance from
accordance with the requirements of Section 426, center of concentrated load to either:
(a) face of support for continuous or
401.9.2 Concrete construction shall be inspected in cantilevered members, or (b) center
accordance with the general building code and in of support for simply supported
accordance with Sections 417 and 426. members, mm.
A area of that part of cross section
401.9.3 Inspection records shall include information between flexural tension face and
required in Sections 417 and 426. center of gravity of gross section,
mm2.
401.10 Approval of Special Systems of Design, Area of an individual bar or wire,
Construction, or Alternative Construction mnr',
Materials net bearing area of the head of stud,
anchor bolt, or headed deformed bars,
401.10.1 Sponsors of any system of design, mm",
construction, or alternative construction materials within area of concrete section resisting
the scope of this Chapter, the adequacy of which has been shear transfer, mrrr'.
shown by successful use or by analysis or test, but which area of contact surface being
does not conform to or is not covered by this Chapter, investigated for horizontal shear,
shall have the fight to present the data on which their mm''.
design is based to the building official or to a committee greater gross cross-sectional area of
of competent ,structural engineers appointed by the the slab-beam strips of the two
building official. This commiuee shall have the authority orthogonal equivalent frames
to investigate the data so submitted, require tests, and intersecting at a column of a two-way
formulate rules governing design and construction of such slab, mrrr'.
systems to meet the intent of this Code. These rules, when cross-sectional area of a member
approved by the building official, and promulgated, shall measured to the outside edges of
be of the same force and effect as the provisions of this transverse reinforcement, rnm'.
Code. area enclosed by outside perimeter of
concrete cross section, mm",
401.11 Provisions for Earthquake Resistance cross-sectional area at one end of a
strut in a strut-and-tie model, taken
perpendicular to the axis of the strut,
401.11.1 In regions of moderate (seismic zone 2) or
high seismic risk (seismic zone 4), provisions of Section
mm'
area of that part of cross section
418 shall be satisfied.
between the flexural tension face and
centroid of gross section, mnr'
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7111 Edition, 2015

gross area of concrete section area enclosed by centerline of the

bounded by web thickness and length outermost closed transverse torsional
of section in the direction of shear reinforcement, mm2.
force considered in the case of walls, total area occupied by duct,
and gross area of concrete section in sheathing, and prestressing
the case of diaphragms, not to exceed reinforcement, mm2.
the thickness times the width of the area of prestressed reinforcement in
diaphragm, mm", tension zone, mm".
area of concrete section of an total area of prestressing
individual pier, horizontal wall reinforcement, mm".
segment, or coupling beam resisting area of non-prestressed longitudinal
shear, mrrr'. tension reinforcement, mrrr',
area of reinforcement in bracket or A's area of compression reinforcement
corbel resisting design moment, mm' mm.2 '
gross area of concrete section, mm". area of primary tension

For a hollow section, Ag is the area reinforcement in a corbel or bracket,
of the concrete only and does not mm",
include the area of the void(s). effective cross-sectional area of
total area of shear reinforcement anchor intension, mrrr'.
parallel to primary tension Ase,v effective cross-sectional area of
reinforcement in a corbel or bracket, anchor in shear, mm/.
mm", total cross-sectional area of
effective cross-sectional area within a transverse reinforcement, including
joint in a plane parallel to plane of crossties, within spacing sand
beam reinforcement generating shear perpendicular to dimension be, mm",
in the joint, mrrr', total area of surface reinforcement at
total area of longitudinal spacing Si in the i-th layer crossing a
reinforcement to resist torsion, mm'. strut, with reinforcement at an angle
rmrnmum area of longitudinal a, to the axis of the strut, mm',
reinforcement to resist torsion, mm" As,min minimum area of flexural
area of reinforcement in bracket or reinforcement, mm'',
corbel resisting factored tensile force total area of non-prestressed
Nuc,mm2. longitudinal reinforcement bars or
area of a face of a nodal zone or a steel shapes, and excluding
section through a nodal zone, mm'. prestressing reinforcement, mm'',
projected influence area of a single area of steel shape, pipe, or tubing in
adhesive anchor or group of adhesive a composite section, mrrr',
anchors, for calculation of bond area of structural steel shape, pipe or
strength intension, mrn", tubing in a composite section, mm",
projected influence area of a single total area of longitudinal
adhesive anchor, for calculation of reinforcement to resist torsion, mm'',
bond strength in tension if not limited Atp area of prestressing reinforcement in
by edge distance or spacing, mnr', a tie, mm''.
projected concrete failure area of a total cross-sectional area of all
single anchor or group of anchors, transverse reinforcement within
for calculation of strength in tension, spacing s that crosses the potential
rnm". plane of splitting through the
projected concrete failure area of a reinforcement being developed,
single anchor, for calculation of mnr',
strength intension if not limited by ~rea ?f non-prestressed reinforcement
edge distance or spacing, mm'', III a he, mm.
gross area enclosed by torsional shear area of shear reinforcement within
flow path, mnr', spacing s, mm".
total area of reinforcement in each
group of diagonal bars in a
diagonally reinforced coupling beam,

CHAPTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete 4-'11
2
mm. measured in the direction
area of shear friction reinforcement, perpendicular to bi> mm.
2
mm . nominal bearing strength, N.
area of shear reinforcement parallel factored bearing load, N,
to flexural tension reinforcement distance from extreme compression
within spacing sz, mrrr', fiber to neutral axis, rnm.
Av,min minimum area of shear reinforcement critical edge distance required to
within spacing s, mm". develop the basic strength as
AVe projected concrete failure area of a controlled by concrete breakout or
single anchor or group of anchors, for bond of a post-installed anchor III
calculation of strength in shear, mmi, tension in uncracked concrete
Aveo projected concrete failure area of a without supplementary reinforcement
single anchor, for calculation of to control splitting, mm.
strength in shear, if not limited by Ca,max maximum distance from center of an
comer influences, spacing, or anchor shaft to the edge of concrete,
member thickness, mrrr'. mm.
loaded area for consideration of ea,min minimum distance from center of an
bearing strength, mm', anchor shaft to the edge of concrete,
maximum area of the portion of the mm.
supporting surface that is distance from the center of an anchor
geometrically similar to and shaft to the edge of concrete in one
concentric with the loaded area. direction, mm. If shear is applied to
the area of the lower base of the anchor, Cal is taken in the direction
largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or of the applied shear. If tension is
tapered wedge contained wholly applied to the anchor, Cal is the
within the support and having its mmrmum edge distance. Where
upper base equal to the loaded area. anchors subject to shear are located
The sides of the pyramid, cone, or in narrow sections of limited
tapered wedge shall be sloped one thickness, See Section 417,5,2.4.
vertical to two horizontal, mnr'. C'al limiting value of Cal where anchors
b width of compression face of are located less than 1.5Cal from
member, mm. three or more edges, mm.
cross-sectional dimension of member distance from center. of an anchor
core measured to the outside edges of - shaft to the edge of concrete in the
the transverse reinforcement direction perpendicular to Cal, mm.
composing area Ash, mm. lesser of: (a) the distance from center
Effective flange width of T section, of a bar or wire to the nearest
mm. concrete surface, and (b) one-half the
perimeter of critical section for two- center-to-center spacing of bars or
way shear in slabs and footings, mm. wires being developed, mm.
width of a strut, mm. clear cover of reinforcement, mm.
the effective slab width resisting projected distance from center of an
YrMsc· anchor shaft on one side of the
width of that part of cross section anchor required to develop the full
containing the closed stirrups bond strength of a single adhesive
resisting torsion, mm. anchor, mm.
width of cross section at contact distance from the interior face of the
surface being investigated for column to the slab edge measured
horizontal shear, mm. parallel to CI, but not exceeding CI,
web width or diameter of circular mm.
section, mm. dimension of rectangular or
dimension of the critical section bo equivalent rectangular column,
measured in the direction of the span capital, or bracket measured in the
for which moments are determined, direction of the span for which
mm. moments are being determined, mm.
dimension of the critical section bo Cz dimension of rectangular or
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ih Edition, 20'15

equivalent rectangular column, concrete, MPa.

capital, or bracket measured in the EI flexural stiffness of member, N-mm2•
direction perpendicular to Ct, mm. (El)ef{ Effective flexural stiffness of
c cross-sectional constant to define member, Nsmrrr' .
torsional properties of slab and beam. modulus of elasticity of prestressing
compressive force acting on a nodal reinforcement, MPa.
zone, N. modulus of elasticity of
a factor relating actual moment reinforcement and structural steel,
diagram to an equivalent uniform excluding prestressing reinforcement,
moment diagram. MPa.
d distance from extreme compression f~ specified compressive strength of
fiber to centroid of longitudinal concrete, MPa.
tension reinforcement, mm. square root of specified compressive
d' distance from extreme compression strength of concrete, MPa.
fiber to centroid of longitudinal fee effective compressive strength of the
compression reinforcement, mm. concrete in a strut or a nodal zone,
outside diameter of anchor or shaft MPa.
diameter of headed stud, headed bolt, fe;' compressive strength of concrete at
or hooked bolt, mm. time of initial prestress, MPa.
d'a value substituted for da if an square root of specified compressive
oversized anchor is used, mm. strength of concrete at time of initial
Nominal maximum size of coarse prestress, MPa.
aggregate, mm. fern measured average compressive
nominal diameter of bar, wire, or strength of concrete, MPa.
prestressing strand, mm.
distance from extreme compression
r: average splitting tensile strength of
lightweight concrete, MPa.
fiber to centroid of prestressed stress due to unfactored dead load, at
reinforcement, mm. extreme fiber of section where tensile
diameter of pile at footing base, mm. stress is caused by externally applied
distance from extreme tension fiber loads, MPa.
to centroid of tension reinforcement, decompression stress; stress in the
mm. prestressing steel when stress is zero
D dead loads or related internal in the concrete at the same level as
moments and forces. the centroid of the prestressing steel,
effect of service dead load. MPa.
distance from the inner surface of the fpc compressive stress in concrete, after
shaft of a J- or L-bolt to the outer tip allowance for all prestress losses, at
of the J- or L-bolt, mm. centroid of cross section resisting
distance between resultant tension externally applied loads or at junction
load on a group of anchors loaded in of web and flange where the centroid
tension and the centroid of the group lies within the flange, MPa. In a
of anchors loaded in tension, mm; composite member, fpc is resultant
eN' is always positive. compressive stress at centroid of
distance between resultant shear load composite section, or at junction of
on a group of anchors loaded in shear web and flange where the centroid
III the same direction, and the lies within the flange, due to both
centroid of the group of anchors prestress and moments' resisted by
loaded in shear in the same direction, precast member acting alone.
mm; ev' is always positive. r; compressive stress in concrete due to
effective prestress forces, after
E effect of horizontal and vertical
earthquake-induced forces. allowance for all prestress losses, at
modulus of elasticity of concrete, extreme fiber of section if tensile
MPa. stress is caused by externally applied
modulus of elasticity of beam loads, MPa.
concrete, MPa. fps stress in prestressing steel at nominal
modulus of elasticity of slab flexural strength, MPa.

CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete 4- i3
fpu specified tensile strength of three or more edges, mm.

prestressing reinforcement, MPa. storey height for storey x
y"" fpy specified yield strength of laterally unsupported height at
prestressing reinforcement, MPa. extreme compression of wall or wall
fT modulus of rupture of concrete, MPa. pier, mm., equivalent to iu for
fs tensile stress in reinforcement at compression members, mm.
service loads, excluding prestressing depth of shear head cross section,
reinforcement, MPa. mm.
f~ compressive stress in reinforcement height of entire wall from base to top,
under factored loads, excluding or clear height of wall segment or
prestressing reinforcement, MPa. wall pier considered, mm.
r; effective stress in prestressed maximum center to center horizontal
reinforcement (after allowance for all spacing of hoop or crosstie legs on all
prestress losses), MPa. faces of the column, mm.
r: stress in the i-th layer of surface H effect of service load due to lateral
reinforcement, MPa. earth pressure, ground water
ft extreme fiber stress in tension in the pressure, or pressure of bulk
pre-compressed tensile zone materials, N.
calculated at service loads using I moment of inertia of section of beam
gross section properties after about the centroidal axis, mm4.
allowance of all prestress losses, moment of inertia about centroidal
MPa. axis of gross section of beam, mm 4•
r.: specified tensile strength of anchor
steel, MPa.
moment of inertia of cracked section
transformed to concrete, mm4.
specified yield strength of non-. effective moment of inertia for
prestressed reinforcement, MPa. computation of deflection, mm 4.
t; specified yield strength of anchor moment of inertia of gross concrete
steel, MPa. section about centroidal axis,
r; specified yield strength of transverse neglecting reinforcement, mm4.
reinforcement, MPa. moment of inertia about of slab about
F effect of service lateral load due to centroidal axis, mm",
fluids with well-defined pressures moment of inertia of reinforcement
and maximum heights. about centroidal axis of member
nominal strength at face of a nodal . cross section, mm",
zone, N. moment of inertia of structural steel
nominal strength of a strut, N. shape, pipe or tubing about centroidal
nominal strength of a tie, N. axis of composite member cross
factored force on the face of a node, section, rnm".
N. k effective length factor for
factored compressive force in a strut, compression members.
N. coefficient for basic concrete
factored tensile force in a tie, N. breakout strength in tension.
overall thickness of member, mm. coefficient for pry out strength.
thickness of shell or folded plate, concrete strength factor.
mm. confinement effectiveness factor.
thickness of member in which an wobble friction coefficient per mm of
anchor is located, measured parallel prestressing tendon ..
to anchor axis, mm. torsional stiffness of torsional
dimension of anchorage device or member; moment per unit rotation.
single group of closely spaced transverse reinforcement index, mm.
devices in the direction of bursting coefficient associated with the 5%
being considered, mm. fractile.
effective embedment depth of anchor, span length of beam or one-way slab;
mm. clear projection of cantilever, mm.
h'e! limiting value of he! where anchors additional embedment length beyond
are located less than 1.5he! from centerline of support or point of
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, y'h Edition. 2015

inflection, mm. length of span in direction

length along which anchorage of a tie perpendicular to .f 1> measured center-
" .fane
must occur, mm. to-center of supports, mm.
width of bearing, mm. effect of service live load.
length of a compression member in a development length, mm.
frame, measured center-to-center of effect of service roof live load.
the joints, mm. design moment
development length 10 tension of maximum un factored moment due to
deformed bar, deformed wire, plain service loads, including P 11 effects.
and deformed welded wire M moment acting on anchor or anchor
reinforcement, or pretensioned group, N-mm.
strand, mm. maximum moment in member due to
development length in compression service loads at stage deflection is
of deformed bars and deformed wire, calculated, N-mm.
mm. moment at the face of the joint,
development length 10 tension of corresponding to the nominal flexural
deformed bar or deformed wire with strength of the column framing into
a standard hook, measured from that joint, calculated for the factored
outside end of hook, point of axial force, consistent with the
tangency, toward critical section, direction of the lateral forces
mm. considered, resulting in the lowest
load bearing length of anchor for flexural strength.
shear, mm. factored moment amplified for the
length of clear span measured face- effects of member curvature used for
to-face of supports, mm. design of compression member, N-
length, measured from joint face mm.
along axis of member, over which Mer cracking moment, N-mm.
special transverse reinforcement must Mere moment causing flexural cracking at
be provided, mm. section due to externally applied
compression lap splice length, mm. loads, N-mm
tension lap splice length, mm. moment at the face of the joint,
span of member under load test, corresponding to the nominal flexural
taken as the shorter span for two-way strength of the girder including slab
slab systems, mm. Span is the lesser where in tension, framing. into that
of: (a) distance between centers of joint
supports, and (b) clear distance factored moment modified to account
between supports plus thickness h of for effect of axial compression, N-
member. Span for a cantilever shall mm.
be taken as twice the distance from Mmax maximum factored moment at section
the face of support to cantilever end. due to externally applied loads, N-
transfer length of prestressed mm.
reinforcement, mm. nominal flexural strength at section,
unsupported length of column or N-mm.
wall, mm nominal flexural strength of beam
length of shear head arm from including slab where in tension,
centroid of concentrated load or framing into joint, N-mm.
reaction, mm. nominal flexural strength of column
length of entire wall, or length of framing into joint, calculated for
wall segment or wall pier considered factored axial force, consistent with
in direction of shear force, mm. the direction of lateral forces
length of prestressing tendon element considered, resulting in lowest
from jacking end to any point x, mm. flexural strength, N-mm.
length of span in direction that total factored static moment, N-mm.
moments are being determined, required plastic moment strength of
measured center-to-center of shearhead cross section, N-mm.
supports, mm. probable flexural strength of

members, with or without axial load, n modular ratio of elasticity, but not
determined using the properties of the less than 6
member at the joint faces assuming a s.r«,
tensile strength 111 the longitudinal n number of items, such as, bars, wires,
bars of at least 1.25fy and a monostrand anchorage devices,
strength-reduction factor 4J of 1.0, N- anchors or shearhead arms.
mm. number of longitudinal bars around
maximum moment III wall due to the perimeter of a column core with
service loads, excluding P A effects, rectilinear hoops that are laterally
N-mm. supported by the corner of hoops or
factored slab moment that is resisted by seismic hooks. A bundle of bars
by the column at ajoint, N-mm. is counted as a single bar.
Ms1ab portion of slab factored moment N design axial load normal to cross
balanced by support moment, N-mm section occurring simultaneously
factored moment at section, N-mm. with V; to be taken as positive for
moment at the mid-height section of compression, negative for tension,
the wall due to factored lateral and and to include effects of tension due
eccentric vertical loads, not including to creep and shrinkage.
P A effects, N-mm. number of bars in a layer being
moment resistance contributed by spliced or developed at a critical
shearhead reinforcement, N-mm. section.
lesser factored end moment on a N tension force acting on anchor or
compression member, to be taken as anchor group, N.
positive if member is bent in single nominal bond strength intension of a
curvature, negative if bent in double single adhesive anchor, N.
curvature, N-mm. nominal bond strength intension of a
factored end moment on a group of adhesive anchors, N.
compression member at the end at basic concrete breakout strength in
which M 1 acts, due to loads that tension of a single anchor in cracked
cause no appreciable sidesway, concrete, N.
calculated using a first-order elastic Basic bond strength in tension of a
frame analysis, N-mm. single adhesive anchor, N.
factored end moment on compression the resultant tensile force acting on
member at the end at which M 1 acts, the portion of the' concrete cross
due to loads that cause appreciable section that IS subjected to tensile
sidesway, calculated using a first- stresses due to the combined effects
order elastic frame analysis, N-mm. of service loads and effective
greater factored end moment on prestress, N.
compression member. If transverse nominal concrete breakout strength in
loading occurs between supports, tension of a single anchor, N.
M 2 is taken as the largest moment nominal concrete breakout strength in
occurring in member. Value of /112 tension of a group of anchors, N.
is always positive, N-mm. basic concrete pryout strength of a
minimum value of M2, N-mm. single anchor, N.
M2,min
M2ns factored end moment on compression Ncpg basic concrete pryout strength of a
member at the end at which M2 acts, group of anchors, N.
due to loads that cause no appreciable nominal strength in tension, N,
sidesway, calculated using a first- pullout strength in tension of a single
order elastic frame analysis, N-mm. anchor in cracked concrete, N,
factored end moment on compression nominal pullout strength in tension of
member at the end at which M 2 acts, a single anchor, N
nominal strength of a single anchor
due to loads that cause appreciable
or individual anchors in a group of
sidesway, calculated using a first-
anchors in tension as governed by the
order elastic frame analysis, N-mm.
steel strength, N.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume i, ih Edition, 2015

side-face blowout strength of a single PI) secondary moment due to individual

anchor, N. member slenderness, N-mm.
Nsb9 side-face blowout strength of a group Pll secondary moment due to lateral
of anchors, N. deflection, N-mm.
factored axial force normal to cross prestressing tendon force at any point
section occurring simultaneously x.
with Vu or Tu; to be taken as factored dead load per unit area, kPa.
positive for compression and factored live load per unit area, kPa.
negative for tension, N. factored load per unit area, kPa.
factored tensile force applied to stability index for a storey.
anchor or individual anchor m a radius of gyration of cross section of
group of anchors, N. a compression member, mm.
Nua,g total factored tensile force applied to R reaction, N.
anchor group, N. R cumulative load effect of service rain
Nua,; factored tensile force applied to most load.
highly stressed anchor in a group of 5 spacing of shear reinforcement in
anchors, N. direction parallel to longitudinal
Nua,s = . Factored sustained tension load, N. reinforcement, mm.
«: factored horizontal tensile force 5 center-to-center spacing of items,
applied at top of bracket or corbel such as longitudinal reinforcement,
acting simultaneously with Vu; to be transverse reinforcement, tendons, or
taken as positive for tension, N. anchors, mm.
Pcp outside perimeter of the concrete 5 Standard deviation, MPa.
cross section, mm. 51 center-to-center spacing of
perimeter of centerline of outermost reinforcements in the i-th layer
closed transverse torsional adjacent to the surface of the
reinforcement, mm. member, mm.
critical buckling load, N. center-to-center spacing of transverse
nominal axial compressive strength reinforcements within the length
ofa member, N. fo,mm.
Pn,max maximum nominal axial compressive sample standard deviation, MPa.
strength of member, N. spacing of wire to be developed or
nominal axial tensile strength of spliced, mm.
member, N. clear distance between adjacent webs,
Pnt,max Maximum nominal axial tensile mm.
strength of member, N. 52 center-to-center spacing of
nominal axial load strength at zero longitudinal shear or torsional
eccentricity, N. reinforcement, mm.
prestressing force at jacking end, N. elastic section modulus of section.
factored prestressing force at moment, shear or axial force at
anchorage device, N. connection corresponding to
prestressing force evaluated at development of probable strength at
distance f px from the jacking end, N intended yield locations, based on the
prestressing tendon force at jacking governing mechanism of inelastic
end. lateral deformation, considering both
unfactored axial load at the design, gravity and earthquake load effects.
mid-height section including effects elastic section modulus, mm".
of self-weight, N. nominal moment, shear, axial,
factored post-tensioned tendon force torsional, or bearing strength.
at the anchorage device. yield strength of connection, based
factored axial load at given on f y, for moment, shear, or axial
eccentricity, :::;l/JP n- force, MPa.
Factored axial force; to be taken as wall thickness o-f hollow section, mm.
positrve for compression and thickness of'flange, mm.
negative for tension, N.

CHAPTER 4- -- Structural Concrete 4-'17
T cumulative effects of service Vepg nominal concrete pryout strength of a

temperature, creep, shrinkage, group of anchors, N.
differential settlement, and shrinkage Vew nominal shear strength provided by
compensating concrete. concrete where diagonal cracking
T tension force acting on a nodal zone results from high principal tensile
in a strut-and-tie model, N. stress in web, N.
cracking torsional moment, N-mm. shear force at section due to
total test load, N. un factored dead load, N.
threshold torsional moment, N-mm. Design shear force for load
factored torsional moment at section, combinations including earthquake
N-mm. effects, N.
u strength of a member or cross section permissible horizontal shear stress,
required to resist factored loads or MPa.
related internal moments and forces factored shear force at section due to
in such combinations as stipulated in externally applied loads occurring
this Code. simultaneously with Mmax, N.
design shear stress, MPa. nominal shear strength, N.
Stress corresponding to nominal two- nominal horizontal shear strength, N.
way shear strength provided by vertical component of effective
concrete, MPa. prestress force at section, N.
equivalent concrete stress nominal shear strength provided by
corresponding to nominal two-way shear reinforcement, N.
shear strength of slab or footing, nominal strength in shear of a single
MPa. anchor or group of anchors as
equivalent concrete stress governed by the steel strength, N.
corresponding to nominal two-way factored shear force at section, N.
shear strength provided by factored shear force applied to a
reinforcement, MPa. single anchor or group of anchors, N.
Maximum factored two-way shear total factored shear force applied to
stress calculated around the perimeter anchor group, N.
of a given critical section, MPa. Vua,i factored shear force applied to most
factored shear stress on the slab highly stressed anchor in a group of
critical section for two-way action anchors, N.
due to gravity loads without moment Factored shear force along horizontal
transfer, MPa. interface in composite concrete
V design shear force at section flexural member, N.
shear force acting on anchor or factored horizontal shear in a storey,
anchor group, N. N.
V-,- applied shear perpendicular to the density, unit weight, of normal-
edge, N. weight concrete or equilibrium
applied shear parallel to the edge, N. density of lightweight concrete, kg/
basic concrete breakout strength in nr'.
shear of a single anchor in cracked factored live load per unit area.
concrete, N. factored load per unit length of beam
nominal shear strength provided by or one-way slab, N/mm.
concrete, N. width of a strut perpendicular to the
nominal concrete breakout strength in axis of the strut, mm,
shear of a single anchor, N. effective height of concrete
nominal concrete breakout strength in concentric with a tie, used to
shear of a group of anchors, N. dimension nodal zone, mm.
nominal shear strength provided by Wt,max maximum effective height of
concrete where diagonal cracking concrete concentric with a tie, mm.
results from combined shear and w/cm maximum water-cementitious
moment, N. materials ratio.
nominal concrete pryout strength of a effect of wind load.
single anchor, N. service-level wind load, N.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, th Edition, 2015

4-18 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
x shorter overall dimension of the ratio of maximum factored

rectangular part of cross section, mm. sustained shear within a storey to the
Y longer overall dimension of maximum factored shear in that
rectangular part of cross section, mm. storey associated with the same load
Yt distance from centroidal axis of gross combination.
section, neglecting reinforcement, to fJdns ratio used to account for reduction of
tension face, mm. stiffness of columns due to sustained
a angle between inclined stirrups and axial loads.
longitudinal axis of member. factor used to account for the effect
a angle defining the orientation of of the anchorage of ties on the
reinforcement. effective compressive strength of a
a total angular change of prestressing nodal zone.
tendon profile in radians from tendon fJs factor used to account for the effect
jacking end to any point x. of cracking and confining
coefficient defining the relative reinforcement on the effective
contribution of concrete strength to compressive strength of the concrete
nominal wall shear strength in a strut.
ratio of flexural stiffness of beam ratio of torsional stiffness of edge
section to flexural stiffness of a width beam section to flexural stiffness of a
of slab bounded laterally by width of slab equal to span length of
centerlines of adjacent panels, if any, beam, center-to-center of supports.
on each side of the beam. Eeb e
Eeb1b 2Eesls
Eesls factor relating depth of equivalent
average value of at for all beams rectangular compressive stress block
on edges of a panel. to depth of neutral axis.
at in direction of ft. Yt factor used to determine the fraction
of M se transferred by slab flexure at
at in direction of f2•
slab-column connections.
angle between the axis of a strut and
Yp factor for type of prestressing
the bars In the i-th layer of
reinforcement.
reinforcement crossing that strut.
Yp 0.55 for fpy/fpu not less than 0.80.
total angular change of tendon profile
from tendon jacking end to point OAO for f py/ f pu not less than 0.85.
under considerations, radians. 0.28 for f py/ f pu not less than 0.90.
constant used to compute Vein slabs Ys factor used to determine the portion
and footings. of reinforcement located in center
ratio of flexural stiffness of shear band of footing.
head arm to surrounding composite Yv factor used to determine the fraction
slab section. of M se transferred by eccentricity of
orientation of distributed shear at slab-column connections.
reinforcement in a strut. Yv l-Yt
a2 orientation of reinforcement s Moment magnification factor used to
orthogonal to at in a strut. reflect effects of member curvature
fJ ratio of long to short dimensions: between ends of compression
clear span for two-way slabs, sides of member.
column, concentrated load or reaction moment magnification factor for
area; or sides of a footing. frames not braced against sideways,
ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to reflect lateral drift resulting from
to total area of tension reinforcement lateral and gravity loads.
at section. design displacement, mm.
ratio of long side to short side of computed, out-of-plane deflection at
concentrated load or reaction area mid-height of wall corresponding to
cracking moment, Mer' mm.
maximum deflection measured
during the second test relative to the

position of the structure at the value of net tensile strain in the
beginning of the second test, rnrn. extreme layer of longitudinal tension
increase in stress in prestressing reinforcement used to define a
reinforcement due to factored loads, compression-controlled section.
MPa. (J angle between axis of strut,
stress in prestressing reinforcement at compression diagonal, or
service loads less decompression compression field and the tension
stress, MPa. chord of the members.
difference between the stress that can correction factor related to unit
be developed in the strand at the weight of concrete.
section under consideration and the modification factor to reflect the
stress required to resist factored reduced mechanical properties of
bending moment at section, M,t!QJ, lightweight concrete relative to
MPa. normal-weight concrete of the same
measured maximum deflection, mm. compressive strength.
calculated, out-of-plane deflection at modification factor to reflect the
mid-height of wall corresponding to reduced mechanical properties of
nominal flexural strength, Mn, mm. lightweight concrete in certain
relative lateral deflection between the concrete anchorage applications.
top and bottom of a storey due to multiplier used for additional
Vus, mm. deflection due to long-term effects.
residual deflection measured 24 hours II coefficient offriction.
after removal of the test load. For the 1] number of identical arms of
first load test, residual deflection is shearhead.
measured relative to the position' of post-tensioning curvature friction
the structure at the beginning of the coefficient.
first load test. For the second load time-dependent factor for sustained
test, residual deflection is measured load.
relative to the position of the P ratio of non-prestressed tension
structure at the beginning of the reinforcement.
second load test, mm. P As/Clwd)
measured residual deflection, mm. P ratio of As to bd
maximum deflection at or near P' ratio of compression reinforcement,
midheight due to service loads, mm A's to bd.
out-of-plane deflection due to service reinforcement ratio producing
loads, mm. balanced strain conditions.
calculated out-of-plane deflection at PI ratio of area of distributed
mid-height of wall due to factored longitudinal reinforcement to gross
loads, mm. concrete area perpendicular to that
design storey drift of storey x, mm. reinforcement.
maximum deflection, during first ratio of prestressed reinforcement,
load test, measured 24 hours after Apsto bd.;
application of the full test load, mm. Ps ratio of volume of spiral
maximum deflection, during second reinforcement to total volume of core
load test, measured 24hours after confined by the spiral, measured out-
application of the full test load. to-out of spirals -,
Deflection is measured relative to the Pt ratio of area of distributed transverse
position of the structure at the reinforcement to gross concrete area
beginning of second load test, mm. perpendicular to that reinforcement.
maximum usable strain at extreme Pv ratio of tie reinforcement area to area
concrete compression fiber. of contact surface.
net tensile strain in extreme layer of Av
longitudinal tension reinforcement at Pv
bvs
nominal strength, excluding strains ratio of tension reinforcement, As to
Pw
due to effective prestress, creep, bwd.
shrinkage, and temperature. strength-reduction factor.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7'~'Edition, 2015

cfJk stiffness reduction factor. length based on confining

/.
'fer
characteristic bond stress of adhesive reinforcement.
anchor in cracked concrete, MPa. 1/Js factor used to modify development
Tuner characteristic bond stress of adhesive length based on reinforcement size.
anchor in uncracked concrete, MPa. factor used to modify development
1/Je
factor used to modify development length for casting location intension.
length based on cover. factor used to modify development
1/Je,N
factor used to modify tensile strength length for welded deformed wire
of anchors based on presence or reinforcement in tension.
absence of cracks in concrete. amplification factor to account for
1/Jep,N factor used to modify tensile strength overstrength of the seismic-force-
of post-installed anchors intended for resisting system determined in
use in uncracked concrete without accordance with the general building
supplementary reinforcement to code.
account for the splitting tensile reinforcement indices for flanged
stresses due to installation. sections computed as for w, wp and
1/Jep,Na factor used to modify tensile strength co' except that b shall be the web
of adhesive anchors intended for use width, and reinforcement area shall
in uncracked concrete without be that required to develop
supplementary reinforcement to compressive strength of web only.
account for the splitting tensile
stresses due to installation. 402.3 Terminology
1/Je.p factor used to modify pullout strength
of anchors based on presence or ADHESIVE are chemical components formulated from
absence of cracks in concrete. organic polymers, or a combination of organic polymers
factor used to modify shear strength and inorganic materials that cure if blended together.
of anchors based on presence or
absence of cracks in concrete and ADMIXTURE is a material other than water, aggregate,
presence or absence of or hydraulic cement used as an ingredient of concrete and
supplementary reinforcement. added to concrete before or during its mixing to modify
factor used to modify development its properties.
length based on reinforcement
coating. AGGREGATE is a granular material, such as sand,
1/Jee,N factor used to modify tensile strength gravel, crushed stone and iron blast-furnace slag, and
of anchors based on eccentricity of when used with a cementing medium forms a hydraulic
applied loads. cement concrete or mortar.
1/Jee,Na factor used to modify tensile strength
of adhesive anchors based on AGGREGATE, LIGHTWEIGHT is an aggregate
eccentricity of applied loads. meeting the requirements of ASTM C330 and having a
1/Jee,V factor used to modify shear strength bulk density with a dry, lose weight of 1120 kg/rrr' or
of anchors based on eccentricity of less, determined in accordance with ASTM C29. In some
applied loads. standards, the term lightweight aggregate is being
1/Jed,N factor used to modify tensile strength replaced by the term low-density aggregate.
of anchors based on proximity to
edges of concrete member.
ANCHOR is a steel element either cast into concrete or
1/Jed,Na factor used to modify tensile strength
post-installed into a hardened concrete member and used
of adhesive anchors based on to transmit applied loads to the concrete.
proximity to edges of concrete
member.
ANCHOR, CAST -IN is a headed bolt, headed stud, or
1/Jed,V factor used to modify shear strength
hooked bolt (J- or L-bolt) installed before placing
of anchors based on proximity to
concrete.
edges of concrete member.
factor used to modify shear strength
ANCHOR, HEADED BOLT is a cast-in steel anchor
of anchors located in concrete
that develops its tensile strength from the mechanical
members with n; < 1. SCal'
interlock provided by either a head or nut at the embedded
factor used to modify development
end of the anchor.

ANCHOR, HOOKED BOLT is a cast-in anchor ANCHORAGE DEVICE in post-tensioned members the
anchored mainly by bearing of the 90-degree bend (L- hardware used to transfer force from prestressed
bolt) or ISO-degree bend (J-bolt) against the concrete, at reinforcement to the concrete.
its embedded end, and having a minimum eh equal to
sa; ANCHORAGE DEVICE, BASIC MONOSTRAND is
an anchorage device used with any single strand or a
ANCHOR, HEADED STUD is a steel anchor single 16mm. or smaller diameter bar that is in accordance
conforming to the requirements of A WSD l.lM and with Sections 425.S.1 ,425.S.2 and 425.9.3.1a.
affixed to a plate or similar steel attachment by the stud
arc welding process before casting. ANCHORAGE DEVICE, BASIC MULTISTRAND is
an anchorage device used with multiple strands, bars, or
ANCHOR, HORIZONT AL OR UPWARDLY wires, or with single bars larger than 16 mm diameters
INCLINED is an anchor installed in a hole drilled that satisfies Sections 425 .S.l, 425. S.2 and 425.9.3.1 b.
horizontally or in a hole drilled at any orientation above
horizontal. ANCHORAGE DEVICE, SPECIAL is an anchorage
device that satisfies tests required in Section 425.9.3.1c.
ANCHOR, POST-INSTALLED, is an anchor installed
in hardened concrete; adhesive, expansion, and undercut, ANCHORAGE ZONE in post-tensioned members,
anchors are examples of post-installed anchors. portion of the member through which the concentrated
prestressing force is transferred to the concrete and
ANCHOR, ADHESIVE is a post-installed anchor, distributed more uniformly across the section; its extent is
inserted into hardened concrete with an anchor hole equal to the largest dimension of the cross section; for
diameter not greater than I.Stimes the anchor diameter, anchorage devices located away from the end of a
that transfers loads to the concrete by bond between the member, the anchorage zone includes the disturbed
anchor and the adhesive, and bond between the adhesive regions ahead of and behind the anchorage device.
and the concrete.
ATTACHMENT is a structural assembly, external to the
ANCHOR, ADHESIVE-STEEL ELEMENTS are steel surface of the concrete that transmits loads to or receives
elements for adhesive anchors include threaded rods, loads from the anchor.
deformed reinforcing bars, or internally threaded steel
sleeves with external deformations. B-REGION is a portion of a member in which it is
reasonable to assume that strains due to flexure vary
ANCHOR, EXPANSION is a post-installed anchor, linearly through section.
inserted into hardened concrete that transfers loads to or
from the co~~rete by direct bearing or friction or both. BASE OF STRUCTURE is a level at which the
horizontal earthquake ground motions are assumed to be
ANCHOR, UNDERCUT is a post-installed anchor that imparted to a building. This level does not necessarily
develops its tensile strength from the mechanical interlock coincide with the ground level.
provided by undercutting of the concrete at the embedded
end of the anchor. Undercutting is achieved with a special BEAM is a member subjected primarily to flexure and
drill before installing the anchor or alternatively by the shear, with or without axial force or torsion; beams in a
anchor itself during its installation. moment frame that forms part of the lateral-force-resisting
system are predominantly horizontal members; a girder is
ANCHOR GROUP is a number of similar anchors a beam.
having approximately equal effective embedment depths
with spacing s between adjacent anchors such that the BOUNDARY ELEMENT is a portion along wall and
protected areas overlap. diaphragm edge, including edges of openings,
strengthened by longitudinal and transverse
ANCHOR PULLOUT STRENGTH is the strength reinforcement.
corresponding to the anchoring device or a major
BUILDING OFFICIAL is a term used in a general
component of the device sliding out from the concrete
building code to identify the person charged with
without breaking out a substantial portion of the
administration and enforcement of provisions of the
surrounding concrete.
building code. Such term as building inspector is a
variation of the title, and the term "building official" as
National Structural Code of the Phjjjppinf';s Volume I, Edition. 2015

used in this Code, is intended to include those variations, CONCRETE, NON-PRESTRESSED is a reinforced
as./Nell as others that are used in the same sense. concrete with at least the minimum amount of non-
prestressed reinforcement and no prestressed
CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS are materials that reinforcement; or for two-way slabs, with less than the
have cementing value if used in concrete either by minimum amount of prestressed reinforcement.
themselves, such as portland cement, blended hydraulic
cements, and expansive cement, or such materials in CONCRETE, NORMALWEIGHT is a concrete
combination with fly ash, raw or other calcined natural containing only aggregate that conforms to ASTM C33.
pozzolans, silica fume, and slag cement.
CONCRETE, PLAIN is a concrete with no
COLLECTOR is an element that acts in axial tension or reinforcement or with less reinforcement than the
compression to transmit forces between a structural minimum amount specified for reinforced concrete.
diaphragm and a vertical element of the seismic-force-
resisting system. CONCRETE, PRECAST is a concrete element cast
elsewhere than its final position in the structure.
COLUMN is a member, usually vertical or predominantly
vertical, used primarily to support axial compressive load, CONCRETE,PRESTRESSED is a concrete in which
but that can also resist moment, shear, or torsion. Columns internal stresses have been introduced to reduce potential
used as part of a lateral-force-resisting system resist tensile stresses in concrete resulting from service loads.
combined axial load, moment, and shear. Refer to moment
frame. CONCRETE, REINFORCED is a concrete reinforced
with at least the minimum amounts of non-prestressed or
COLUMN CAPITAL is an enlargement of the top of a prestressed reinforcement required by this Code.
concrete column located directly below the slab or drop
panel that is cast monolithically with the column. CONCRETE, SAND-LIGHTWEIGHT is a concrete
containing only normal weight fine aggregate that
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS is a construction- conforms to ASTM C33M and lightweight coarse
related Code requirements directed to the contractor to be aggregate that conforms to ASTM C330M.
incorporated into construction documents by the licensed
design professional, as applicable. CONCRETE, STEEL FIBER-REINFORCED is a
concrete containing a prescribed amount of dispersed,
COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS randomly oriented, discontinuous deformed steel fibers.
are concrete flexural members of precast or cast-in-place
concrete elements, constructed in separate placements but CONCRETE STRENGTH, SPECIFIED
connected so that all elements respond to loads as a unit. COMPRESSIVE is a compressive strength of concrete
used in design and evaluated in accordance with
COMPRESSION-CONTROLLED SECTION is a provisions of this Code, MPa. Whenever the quantity f~
cross section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme is under a radical sign, square root of numerical value
tension reinforcement at nominal strength is less than or only is intended, and result has units of MPa.
equal to the compression-controlled strain limit.
CONCRETE BREAKOUT STRENGTH is a strength
COMPRESSION-CONTROLLED STRAIN LIMIT IS corresponding to a volume of concrete surrounding the
a net tensile strain at balanced strain conditions. anchor or group of anchors separating from the member.
CONCRETE are mixture of portland cement or any other CONCRETE PRYOUT STRENGTH is a strength
hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and corresponding to formation of a concrete. spall behind
water, with or without admixtures. short, stiff anchors displaced in the direction opposite to
the applied shear force.
CONCRETE, ALL-LIGHTWEIGHT is a lightweight
concrete containing only lightweight coarse and fine CONNECTION is a region of a structure that joins two
aggregates that conform to ASTM C330. or more members; a connection also refers to a region that
joins members of which one or more is precast.
CONCRETE, LIGHTWEIGHT is a concrete
containing lightweight aggregate and an equivalent CONNECTION, DUCTILE is a connection that
density, as determined by ASTM C567, between 1440 experiences yielding as a result of the earthquake design
and 1840 kg/m '. displacements.

CONNECTION, STRONG is a connection between DISTANCE SLEEVE is a sleeve that encases the center
one or more precast elements that remains elastic while part of an undercut anchor, a torque-controlled expansion
adjoining members experience yielding as a result of the anchor, or a displacement-controlled expansion anchor,
earthquake design displacements. but does 110texpand.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS is a written and graphic DROP PANEL is a projection below the slab used to
documents and specifications prepared or assembled for reduce the amount of negative reinforcement over a
describing the location, design, materials, and physical column or the minimum required slab thickness, and to
characteristics of the elements of a project necessary for increase the slab shear strength.
obtaining a building permit and construction of the
project. DUCT is a conduit, plain or corrugated, to accommodate
prestressing reinforcement for post-tensioning
CONTRACTION JOINT is a formed, sawed, or tooled applications.
groove in a concrete structure to create a weakened plane
and regulate the location of cracking resulting from the DURABILITY is an ability of a structure or member to
dimensional change of different parts of the structure. resist deterioration that impairs performance or limits
service life of the structure in the relevant environment
COVER, SPECIFIED CONCRETE is a distance considered in design.
between the outermost surface of embedded
reinforcement and the closest outer surface of the EDGE DISTANCE is a distance from the edge of the
concrete. concrete surface to the center of the nearest anchor.
CROSSTIE is a continuous reinforcing bar having a EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF SECTION is a distance

seismic hook at one end and a hook not less than 90- measured from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
degree hooks with at least six-diameter extension at the tension reinforcement.
other end. The hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal
bars. The 90-degree hooks of two successive cross ties EFFECTIVE EMBEDMENT DEPTH is an overall
engaging the same longitudinal bars shall be alternated depth through which the anchor transfers force to or from
end for end. the surrounding concrete; effective embedment depth will
normally be the depth of the concrete failure surface in
D-REGION is a portion of a member within a distance, tension applications; for cast-in headed anchor bolts and
h, from a force discontinuity or a geometric discontinuity headed studs, the effective embedment depth is measured
from the bearing contact surface of the head.
DESIGN DISPLACEMENT is a total calculated lateral
displacement expected for the design-basis earthquake. EFFECTIVE PRESTRESS is a stress remaining in
prestressing reinforcement after all losses in Section
DESIGN INFORMATION is project-specific 420.3.2.6 have occurred.
information to be incorporated into construction
documents by the licensed design professional, as EMBEDMENTS is an items embedded in concrete,
applicable. excluding reinforcement as defined in Section 420 and
anchors as defined in Section 417. Reinforcement or
DESIGN LOAD COMBINATION is a combination of anchors welded, bolted or otherwise connected to the
factored loads and forces. embedded item to develop the strength of the assembly are
considered to be part of the embedment.
DESIGN STOREY DRIFT RATIO is a relative
difference of design displacement in between the top and EMBEDMENTS, PIPE is an embedded pipes, conduits,
bottom of a storey, divided by the story height. and sleeves.
DEVELOPMENT LENGTH is a length of embedded EMBEDMENT LENGTH is a length of embedded

reinforcement, including prestressing strand, required to reinforcement provided beyond a critical section.
develop the design strength of reinforcement at a critical
section. EQUILIBRIUM DENSITY is a density of lightweight
concrete determined in accordance with ASTMC 567
DISCONTINUITY is an abrupt change in geometry or after exposure to a relative humidity of 50 ± 5 percent and
loading. a temperature of 23 ± 2.00 °C for a period of time
sufficient to reach constant density.
National Structural Code of the Prlilippin8s VOiUr1l8 I, Edition 2015

1
EXPANSION SLEEVE is an outer part of an expansion JACKING FORCE In prestressed concrete, temporary
apchor that is forced outward by the center part, either by force exerted by device that introduces tension into
applied torque or impact, to bear against the sides of the prestressing reinforcement.
predrilled hole. Refer to anchor, expansion.
JOINT is a portion of structure common to intersecting
EXTREME TENSION REINFORCEMENT is a layer members.
of prestressed or non-prestressed reinforcement that is the
farthest from the extreme compression fiber. LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL is an
individual who is licensed to practice structural design as
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS is a numerical defined by the statutory requirements of the Professional
modeling technique in which a structure is divided into a Regulation Commission (PRC) or jurisdiction in which
number of discrete elements for analysis. the project is to be constructed and who is in responsible
charge of the structural design.
FIVE PERCENT FRACTILE is a statistical term
meaning 90 percent confidence that there is 95 percent LOAD are forces or other actions that result from the
probability of the actual strength exceeding the nominal weight of all building materials, occupants, and their
strength. possessions, environmental effects, differential movement,
and restrained dimensional changes; permanent loads are
HEADED DEFORMED BARS is a deformed those loads in which variations over time are rare or of
reinforcing bars with heads attached at one or both ends. small magnitude; all other loads are variable loads.
HEADED SHEAR STUD REINFORCEMENT is a LOAD, DEAD is the weight of the members, supported
reinforcement consisting of individual headed studs or structure, and permanent attachments or accessories that
groups of studs, with anchorage provided by a head at are likely to be present on a structure in service; or loads
each end, or by a head at one end and a common base rail meeting specific criteria found in the general building
consisting of a steel plate or shape at the other end. code; without load factors.
HOOP is a closed tie or continuously wound tie. A closed LOAD, FACTORED is a load, multiplied by appropriate
tie, made up of one or several reinforcement elements, load factors.
each having seismic hooks at both ends. A closed tie shall
not be made up of interlocking headed deformed bars. LOAD, LIVE is a load that is not permanently applied to
Section 425.7.4. a structure, but is likely to occur during the service life of
the structure (excluding environmental loads); or loads
INSPECTION is an observation, verification, and meeting specific criteria found in the general building
required documentation of the materials, installation, code; without load factors.
fabrication, erection or placement of components and
connections to determine compliance with construction LOAD, ROOF LIVE is a load on a roof produced during
documents and referenced standards. maintenance by workers, equipment, and materials, and
during the life of the structure by movable objects, such as
INSPECTION, CONTINUOUS is the full time planters or other similar small decorative appurtenances
observation, verification, and required documentation of that are not occupancy related; or loads meeting specific
work in the area where the work is being performed. criteria found in the general building code; without load
factors.
INSPECTION, PERIODIC is the part-time or
intermittent observation, verification, and required LOAD, SERVICE are all loads, static or transitory,
documentation of work in the area where the work is imposed on a structure or element thereof, during the
being performed. operation of a facility, without load factors.
ISOLATION JOINT is a separation between adjoining LOAD PATH are sequence of members and connections
parts of a concrete structure, usually a vertical plane, at a designed to transfer the factored loads and forces in such
designed location such as to interfere least with combinations as are stipulated in this Code, from the point
performance of the structure, yet such as to allow relative of application or origination through the structure to the
movement in three directions and avoid formation of final support location or the foundation.
cracks elsewhere in the concrete and through which all or
part of the bonded reinforcement is interrupted. MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS (MPH) published instructions for the

correct installation of the anchor under all covered POST-TENSIONING is a method of prestressing in
installation conditions as supplied in the product which prestressing reinforcement is tensioned after
packaging. concrete has hardened.
MODULUS OF ELASTICITY is a ratio of normal PRECOMPRESSED TENSILE ZONE is a portion of a

stress to corresponding strain for tensile or compressive prestressed member where flexural tension, calculated
stresses below proportional limit of material. using gross section properties, would occur under service
loads if the prestress force was not present.
MOMENT FRAME is a frame in which beams, slabs,
columns, and joints resist forces predominantly shear, and PRE TENSIONING is a method of prestressing in which
axial force; Beams or slabs are predominantly horizontal prestressing reinforcement is tensioned before concrete is
or nearly horizontal; Columns are predominantly vertical cast.
or nearly vertical.
PROJECTED AREA is an area on the free surface of the
MOMENT FRAME, ORDINARY is a cast-in-place or concrete member that is used to represent the larger base
precast concrete beam-column or slab-column frame of the assumed rectilinear failure surface.
complying with Section 418.3.
PROJECTED INFLUENCE AREA is a rectilinear area
MOMENT FRAME, INTERMEDIATE is a cast-in- on the free surface of the concrete member that is used to
place frame or two-way slab-column frame beams calculate the bond strength of adhesive anchors.
complying with Section 418.4.
REINFORCEMENT is a steel element or elements
MOMENT FRAME, SPECIAL is a cast-in-place embedded in concrete and conforming to Sections 420.2
beam-column frame complying with Sections 418.2.3 through 420.5. Prestressed reinforcement in external
through 418.2.8; and, Sections 418.6 through 418.8. A tendons is also considered reinforcement.
precast beam-column frame complying with Sections
418.2.3 through 418.2.8 and 418.9. REINFORCEMENT, DEFORMED is a deformed bars,
welded bar mats, deformed wire, and welded wire
NET TENSILE STRAIN is a tensile strain at nominal reinforcement conforming to Sections 420.2.1.3,
strength exclusive of strains due to effective prestress, 420.2.1.5, or 420.2.1.7, excluding plain wire.
creep, shrinkage and temperature.
REINFORCEMENT, PLAIN are bars or wires
NODAL ZONE is a volume of concrete around a node conforming to Section 420.2.1.4 or 420.2.1.7 that do
that is assumed to transfer strut-and-tie forces through the not conform to definition of deformed reinforcement.
node.
REINFORCEMENT, PRESTRESSED is a prestressing
NODE is a point in a strut-and-tie model where the axes reinforcement that has been tensioned to impart forces to
of the struts, ties, and concentrated forces acting on the concrete.
joint intersect.
REINFORCEMENT, BONDED PRESTRESSED is a
ONE-WAY CONSTRUCTION is members designed to pretensioned reinforcement or prestressed reinforcement
be capable of supporting all loads through bending in a in a bonded tendon.
single direction; refer to two-way construction.
REINFORCEMENT, PRESTRESSING is a high-
PEDESTAL is a member with a ratio of height-to-least strength reinforcement such as strand, wire, or bar
lateral dimension less than or equal to three used conforming to Section 420.3.1.
primarily to support axial compressive load; for a tapered
member, the least lateral dimension is the average of the REINFORCEMENT, WELDED WIRE is a plain or
top and bottom dimensions of the smaller side. deformed wire fabricated into sheets or rolls conforming
to Section 420.2.1.7.
PLASTIC HINGE REGION is a length of frame
element over which flexural yielding is intended to occur REINFORCEMENT, WELDED DEFORMED
due to earthquake design displacements, extending not STEEL BAR MAT is a mat conforming to Section
less than a distance h from the critical section where 420.2.1.5 consisting of two layers of deformed bars at
flexural yielding initiates. right angles to each other welded at the intersections.
National Structural Code of the Phl1ippines Volt-nne !, Editicn, 2015

4-26 CH,t.'pTER 4 - Structural Concrete
REINFORCEMENT, ANCHOR is an reinforcement SPLITTING TENSILE STRENGTH is a tensile

used t" transfer the full design load from the anchors into strength of concrete determined in accordance with
the structural member. ASTM C496M as described in "Specifications for
Lightweight Aggregatefor Structural Concrete" (ASTM
REINFORCEMENT, SUPPLEMENTARY is a C330).
reinforcement that acts to restrain the potential concrete
breakout but is not designed to transfer the full design STEEL ELEMENT, BRITTLE is an element with a
load from the anchors into the structural member. tensile test elongation of less than 14 percent, or reduction
in area of less than 30 percent at failure.
SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY is a classification
assigned to a structure based on its occupancy category STEEL ELEMENT, DUCTILE is an element with a
and the severity of the design earthquake ground motion tensile test elongation of at least 14 percent and reduction
at the site, as defined in Section 402 of this Code. in area of at least 30 percent; Steel element meeting the
requirements of AS1'M A307 shall be considered ductile;
SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM is a portion except a-s modified by for earthquake effect,s, deformed
of the structure designed to resist earthquake effects reinforcing bars meeting the requirements of ASTM
required by the legally adopted general building code A615M, A706M, or.A955M shall be considered as ductile
using the applicable provisions and load combinations. steel elements.
SEISMIC HOOK is a hook on a stirrup, or crosstie STIRRUP is an reinforcement used to resist shear and
having a bend not less than 135 degrees, except that torsion stresses in a structural member; typically
circular hoops shall have a bend not less than 90 degrees; deformed bars, deformed wires, or welded wire
hooks shall have a 6db, but not less than 75 mm. The reinforcement either single leg or bent into L, U or
hooks shall engage the longitudinal reinforcement and the rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to or at an
extension shall project into the interior of the stirrup or angle to longitudinal reinforcement. Refer to "tie."
hoop.
STRENGTH, DESIGN is a nominal strength multiplied
SHEAR CAP is a projection below the slab used to by a strength reduction factor, 4J.
increase the slab shear strength.
STRENGTH, NOMINAL is strength of a member or
SHEA THING is a material encasing prestressing cross section calculated in accordance with provisions and
reinforcement to prevent bonding of the prestressing assumptions of the strength design method of this chapter
reinforcement with the surrounding concrete, to provide before application of any strength reduction factors.
corrosion protection, and to contain the corrosion
inhibiting coating. STRENGTH, REQUIRED is strength of a member or
cross section required to resist factored loads or related
SPACING is a center-to-center distance between adjacent internal moments and forces in such combinations as are
items, such as longitudinal reinforcement, transverse stipulated in this chapter.
reinforcement, prestressing reinforcement, or anchors.
STRESS is the intensity of force per unit area.
SPACING, CLEAR is a least dimension between the
outermost surfaces of adjacent items. STRESS LENGTH is a length of anchor, extending
beyond concrete in which it is anchored, subject to full
SPAN LENGTH is a distance between supports. tensile load applied to anchor, and for which cross-
sectional area is minimum and constant.
SPECIAL SEISMIC SYSTEMS is a structural systems
that use special moment frames, special structural walls, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE is a concrete used for
or both. structural purposes, including plain and reinforced
concrete.
SPECIAL TY INSERT is a predesigned and
prefabricated cast-in anchors specifically designed for STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGM is a member, such as a
attachment of bolted or slotted connections. floor or roof slab, that transmits forces acting in the plane
of the member to the vertical elements of the seismic-
SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT is a continuously wound force-resisting system. A structural diaphragm may
reinforcement in the form of a cylindrical helix. include chords and collectors as part of the diaphragm.

STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY is an ability of a structure TENDON, EXTERNAL is a tendon external to the
through strength, redundancy, ductility, and detailing of member concrete cross section in post-tensioned
reinforcement to redistribute stresses and maintain overall applications.
stability if localized damage or significant overstress
occurs. TENDON, UNBONDED is a tendon in which prestressed
reinforcement is prevented from bonding to the concrete.
STRUCTURAL SYSTEM interconnected members The prestressing force is permanently transferred to the
designed to meet performance requirements. concrete at the tendon ends by the anchorages only.
STRUCTURAL TRUSS is an assemblage of reinforced TENSION-CONTROLLED SECTION is a cross

concrete members subjected primarily to axial forces. section in which the net tensile strain in the extreme
tension steel at nominal strength is greater than or equal to
STRUCTURAL WALL is a wall proportioned to resist 0.005.
combinations of shears, moments, and axial forces in the
plane of the wall; a shear wall is a structural wall. TIE is a loop of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing
longitudinal reinforcement; a continuously wound bar or
STRUCTURAL WALL, ORDINARY REINFORCED wire in the form of a circle, rectangle, or other polygon
CONCRETE is a wall complying with the requirements shape without re-entrant comers is acceptable; refer to
of Sections 411. stirrup or hoop; or a tension member in a strut-and-tie
model.
STRUCTURAL WALL, ORDINARY PLAIN
CONCRETE IS a wall complying with the TRANSFER is an act of transferring stress in
requirements of Section 414. prestressing reinforcement from jacks or pretensioning
bed to concrete member.
STRUCTURAL WALL, INTERMEDIATE
PRECAST is a wall complying with Section 418.5. TRANSFER LENGTH is a length of embedded
pretensioned reinforcement required to transfer the
STRUCTURAL WALL, SPECIAL is a cast-in-place effective prestress to the concrete.
structural wall in accordance with Sections 418.2.3
through 418.2.8 and 418.10; or precast structural wall TWO-WAY CONSTRUCTION are members designed
accordance with Sections 418.2.3 through 418.2.8 and to be capable of supporting loads through bending in two
418.11. directions; Some slabs and foundations are considered
two-way construction, Refer to one-way construction.
STRUT is a compression member in a strut-and-tie model
representing the resultant of a parallel or a fan-shaped WALL is a vertical element designed to resist axial load,
compression field. lateral load, or both, with a horizontal length-to-thickness
ratio greater than three, used to enclose or separate spaces.
STRUT, BOTTLE-SHAPED is a strut that is wider at
mid-length than at its ends. WALL SEGMENT is a portion of wall bounded by
vertical or horizontal openings or edges.
STRUT-AND-TIE MODEL is a truss model of a
WALL SEGMENT, HORIZONTAL is a segment of
structural member or of a D-region in such a member,
a structural wall, bounded vertically by two openings or
made up of struts and ties connected at nodes, capable of
by an opening and an edge.
transferring the factored loads to the supports or to
adjacent B-regions.
WALL SEGMENT, VERTICAL is a segment of a
structural wall, bounded horizontally by two openings or
TENDON In post-tensioned members, a tendon is a
by an opening and an edge; Wall piers are vertical wall
complete assembly consisting of anchorages, prestressing
segments.
reinforcement, and sheathing with coating for unbounded
applications or ducts filled with grout for bonded
WALL PIER is a vertical wall segments with dimensions
applications.
and reinforcement intended to result in shear demand
being limited by flexural yielding of the vertical
TENDON, BONDED is a tendon in which prestressed
reinforcement in the pier.
reinforcement is continuously bonded to the concrete
through grouting of ducts embedded within the concrete
cross section.
National Structural Code of the Philippines volume 11

WATER- 'MENTITl U MATERIALS RATIO is a SECTION 403

ralio of mass of wa er, excluding that absorbed by the
aggregate, to the InUSS of cernentitious materials in a REFERENCED STANDARDS
mixture, stated as 11 decimal.
403.1 Scope
WORK is the entire construction or separately
identifiable parts thereof that are required to be furnished 403.1 Standards, or specific sections thereof, cited in
under the construction documents. this Code, including Annex, Appendices, or Supplements
where prescribed, are referenced without exception in this
YIELD STRENGTH is a specified rmmmum yield Code, unless peclfically noted, ited standards are listed
strength or yield point of reinforcement; yield strength or in the following with lhei r serial designations, including
yield point shall be determined in tension according to year of adoption or revision.
applicable ASTM standards as modified by this section.
403.2 Referenced Standards
403.2.1 American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
Article Desl nutlon Title

Article 5.10.9.6 AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Article 5.10.9.7.2 Design Specifications,
Article 5.10.9.7.3 6th Edition, 2012
AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Article 10.3.2.3 Construction Specifications,
3rd Edition, 2010
403.2.2 American Concrete Institute CACI)
Standard/ Section
Title
Desi nation
Section 4.2.3 of
Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI301-10
Building Code Requirements for
ACI318.2-14
Concrete Thin Shells
Residential Code Requirements for
ACI332-14
Structural Concrete and Comrnentar
Qualification of Post-Installed
ACI355.2-07 Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and
ommentary
Qualification of Post-
ACI355.4-11 Installed Adhesive Anchors in
Concrete
Acceptance Criteria for Moment
ACI374.1-05
Frames Based on Structural Testing
Specification for Unbonded Single-
ACI423.7-07
Strand Tendon Materials
Acceptance Criteria for Special
Unbonded Post-Tensioned Precast
ACIITG-5.1-07
Structural Walls Based on Validation
Testlns

403.2.3 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard

Title
(ASCE)/Structural Engineering Institute (SEI) Designation
.' Standard Specification for
Section High- Strength Low-Alloy
Title
Designation Structural Steel, up to 345 MPa
A588/A588M-IO
Section 2.3.3. Minimum Yield Point, with
Load Combinations Atmospheric Corrosion
including Flood Loads ASCE/SEI 7-10 Minimum Resistance
Section 2.3.4, Design Loads for Buildings Standard Specification for
Load Combinations and Other Structures Deformed and Plain Carbon-
A6l5/A615M-12
excluding Atmospheric Steel Bars for Concrete
Ice Loads Reinforcement
Steel Deformed and Plain
403.2.4 ASTM International A706/A706M-09b Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
Standard Standard Specification for
Title
Designation A 7221A 722M -12 Uncoated High-Strength Steel
Standard Specification for Bars for Prestressing Concrete
A36/A36M-12
Carbon Structural Steel Standard Specification for Zinc-
Standard Specification for Pipe, A767/A767M-09 Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars
Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, for Concrete Reinforcement
A53/A53M-12
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Standard Specification for
Seamless A775/A775M-07b Epoxy-Coated Steel
Standard Specification for Reinforcing Bars
A184/A184M-06 Welded Deformed Steel Bar' Standard Specification for Steel
(20 II) Mats for Concrete A820/A820M-l1 Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced
Reinforcement Concrete
Standard Specification for High- Standard Specification for
A2421 A242M -04
Strength Low-Alloy Structural A884/A884M-12 Epoxy- Coated Steel Wire and
(2009)
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and A934/A934M-07 Epoxy- Coated Prefabricated
A307-12
Threaded Rod, 420 MPa Tensile Steel Rei hfQt!oi ng Bars
Strength Standard Specification for
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Stainless-
A955! A955M-12c1
A416/A416M-12a Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven- Steel Bars for Concrete
Wire for Prestressed Concrete Reinforcement
Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Headed Steel Bars for
Wire for Prestressed Concrete Concrete Reinforcement
A421/A421M-I0 A970/A970M-12
including Supplementary including Annex A I
Requirement I, Requirements or Class HA
Low- Relaxation Wire Headed Dimensions
A9921A992M-ll
Cold- Formed Welded and Structural Steel Shapes
A500/A500M-I0a Seamless Carbon Steel Standard Specification for Rail-
Structural Tubing in Rounds Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed
A9961A996M-09b
and Shapes Bars for Concrete
Standard Specification for Hot- Reinforcement
A501-07 Formed Welded and Seamless Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing Deformed and Plain Stainless
AI022/AI022M-07 Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Standard Specification for
High- Strength Low-Alloy for Concrete Reinforcement
A572/A572M-12a Columbium- Vanadium
Structural Steel
National Stl'uctural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ih Edition, 2015

Standard Standard
Title Title
Deslgnarlon Designation
Deformed and Plain, Low- C330/C330M-09 Lightweight Aggregates for
AI035/AI035M-ll Carbon, Chromium, Steel Bars Structural Concrete
for Concrete Reinforcement Standard Test Method for
Standard Specification for Steel C496/C496M-ll Splitting Tensile Strength of
AI044/Al044M-05
Stud Assemblies for Shear C}'Iindrical Concrete Specimens
. (2010)
Reinforcement of Concrete Standard Test Method or
Standard Specification for Zinc C567/C567M-II Determining Density of
Al055/Al055M-10 c! and Epoxy Dual-Coated Steel Structural Lightweight Concrete
Reinforcing Bars Standard Specification for
C595/C595M-12c1
Standard Specification for Zinc- Blended Hydraulic Cements
Coated (Galvanized) Steel Standard Specification for Coal
Al060/Al060M-ll cl Welded Wire Reinforcement, Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Plain and Deformed, for C618-12a
Natural Pozzolan for Use in
Concrete Concrete
Carbon- Steel Wire and Welded Concrete Made by Volumetric
Al064/Al064M-12 C685/C685M-Il
Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Batching and Continuous
Deformed, for Concrete Mixing
Standard Test Method for Standard Specification for
Bulk Density("Unit Weight") C845/C845M-12
C29/C29M-09 Expansive Hydraulic Cement
and Voids in Aggregate Standard Specification for Slag
Standard Practice for C989/C989M-12a Cement for Use in Concrete and
C3l/C31M-12 Making and Curing Concrete Mortars
Test Specimens in the Field Standard Test Method for
Standard Specification for Length Change of Hydraulic-
C33/C33M-13 C 10 12/C I012M-13
Concrete Aggregates Cement Mortars Exposed to a
Standard Test Method for Sulfate Solution
C39/C39M-12a Compressive Strength of Standard Specification for
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens CI017/CI017M-07 Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Standard Test Method for Producing Flowing Concrete
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Standard Practice for
C42/C42M-13
Cores and Sawed Beams of Laboratories Testing Concrete
Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
CI077-13
Standard Specification for Use in Construction and
C94/C94M-12a
ReadY' Mixed Concrete Criteria for Laboratory
Standard Specification for Evaluation
C144-11
Aggregale for MasOlll}'_ Mortar Standard Specification for Fiber-
CI116/Cl16M-IOa
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete
CI50/C150M-12
Portland Cement Standard Performance
Standard Practice for Sampling Cl157/Cl157M-ll Specification for Hydraulic
CI72/CI72M-I0 Cement
Freshly Mixed Concrete
Standard Test Method for Air Standard Test Method for
C1218!1218M-
Content of Freshly Mixed Water-Soluble Chloride in
C173!173M-12 99(2008)
Concrete by the Volumetric Mortar and Concrete
Method Standard Specification for Silica
Standard Test Method for Air C1240-12 Fume Used in Cementitious
Content of Freshly Mixed Mixtures
C23l/C231M-IO Concrete by the Pressure Standard Test for
C1580-09c1
Method Water-Soluble Sulfate in Soil
Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-
C260/C260M-IOa Air-Entraining Admixtures C1582/C1582M-ll
Induced Corrosion of
For Concrete
Reinforcing Steel in Concrete

Standard SECTION 404

Title
Designation
(
Standard Specification for STRUCTURAL SYSTEM
C 1602/C 1602M-12
Mixing Water Used in the REQUIREMENTS
Production of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete 404.1 Scope
Standard Test Method for
Flexural Performance of Fiber- 404.1.1 This section shall apply to design of structural
C1609/C1609M-12 Reinforced Concrete (Using concrete in structures or portions of structures defined in
Beam With Third- Point Section 40 I.
Loading)
Standard Test Method for 404.2 Materials
D516-11
Sulfate Ion in Water
Standard Test Method for 404.2.1 Design properties of concrete shall be selected
D4130-08 Sulfate Ion in Brackish Water, to be in accordance with Section 419.
Seawater, and Brines
404.2.2 Design properties of reinforcement shall be
403.2.5 American Welding Society (A WS) selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
Standard 404.3 Design Loads

Title
Desi nation
A WS Dl.4/Dl.4M: Structural Welding Code 404.3.1 Loads and load combinations considered III
2011 Reinforcing Steel design shall be in accordance with Section 405.
AWS Dl.1/Dl.1M: Structural Welding Code
2010 Steel 404.4 Structural System and Load Paths
403.2.6 Australian Standard (AS) and New Zealand 404.4.1 The structural system shall include (a) through
Standard (NZS) (g), as applicable:
Standard a. Floor construction and roof construction, including

Title
Designation one-way and two-way slabs;
Steel Reinforcing
AS/NZS 4671: 2001
Material b. Beams and joists;
NZS 3101: 2006 Concrete Structures Standard
Part 1& Part 2 Design of Concrete Structures c. Column;
NZS 3109 Welding of Reinforcing Steel
Amendment 2 d. Wall;
Structural Steel Welding-
AS/NZS 1554.3: 2008
Welding of Reinforcing Steel e. Diaphragms;
Part 3
f. Foundations;
g. Joints, connections, and anchors as required to

transmit forces from one component to another.
404.4.2 Design of structural members including joints

and connections given in Section 404.4.1 shall be in
accordance with Sections 407 through 418.
404.4.3 It shall be permitted to design a structural

system comprising structural members not in accordance
with Sections 404.4.1 and 404.4.2, provided the structural
system is approved in accordance with Section 401.10.1.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ih Edition, 2015

404.4.4 The structural system shall be designed to resist 404.4.7.4 Diaphragms shall be designed to resist
the factored loads in load combinations given in Section applicable lateral loads from soil and hydrostatic pressure
404.3 without exceeding the appropriate member design and other loads assigned to the diaphragm by structural
strengths, considering one or more continuous load paths analysis.
from the point of load application or origination to the
final point of resistance. 404.4.7.5 Collectors shall be provided where required to
transmit forces between diaphragms and vertical
404.4.5 Structural systems shall be designed to elements.
accommodate anticipated volume change and differential
settlement. 404.4.7.6 Diaphragms that are part of the seismic-force-
resisting system shall be designed for the applied forces.
404.4.6 Seismic-Force-Resisting System In structures assigned to seismic zone 4, the diaphragm
design shall be in accordance with Section 418.
404.4.6.1 Every structure shall be assigned to a seismic
zones 4, or 2, in accordance with the general building 404.5 Structural Analysis
code or as determined by the authority having jurisdiction
in areas without a legally adopted building code. 404.5.1 Analytical procedures shall satisfy
compatibility of deformations and equilibrium of forces.
404.4.6.2 Structural systems designated as part of the
seismic-force-resisting system shall be restricted to those 404.5.2 The methods of analyses given in Section 406
systems designated by the general building code or as shall be permitted.
determined by the authority having jurisdiction in areas
without a legally adopted building code. 404.6 Strength
404.4.6.3 Structural systems assigned to seismic zone 2 404.6.1 Design strength of a member and its joints and
shall satisfy the applicable requirements of this Code. connections, in terms of moment, axial force, shear,
Structures assigned to seismic zone 2 are not required to torsion, and bearing, shall be taken as the nominal
be designed in accordance with Section 418. strength Sn, multiplied by the applicable strength
reduction factor cp.
404.4.6.4 Structural systems assigned to seismic zone 4
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 418 in addition to 404.6.2 Structures and structural members shall have
applicable requirements of other sections of this Code. design strength at all sections, cpSn, greater than or equal
to the required strength U calculated for the factored
404.4.6.5 In structures assigned to seismic zone 4, loads and forces in such combinations as required by this
structural members assumed not to be part of the seismic- Section or the general building code.
force-resisting system shall be permitted, provided their
effect on the response of the system is considered and 404.7 Serviceability
accommodated in the structural design. Consequences of
damage to structural and nonstructural members that are 404.7.1 Evaluation of performance at service load
not a part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be conditions shall consider reactions, moments, torsions,
considered. shears, and axial forces induced by prestressing, creep,
shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation,
404.4.7 Diaphragms restraint of attached structural members, and foundation
settlement.
404.4.7.1 Diaphragms, such as floor or roof slabs, shall
be designed to resist simultaneously both out-of-plane 404.7.2 For structures, structural members, and their
gravity loads and in-plane lateral forces in load connections, the requirements of Section 404.7.1 shall be
combinations given in Section 404.3. deemed to be satisfied if designed in accordance with the
provisions of the applicable member sections.
404.4.7.2 Diaphragms and their connections to framing
members shall be designed to transfer forces between the 404.8 Durability
diaphragm and framing members.
404.8.1 Concrete mixtures shall be designed in
404.4.7.3 Diaphragms and their connections shall be accordance with the requirements of Sections 419.3.2 and
designed to provide lateral support to vertical, horizontal, 426.4, considering applicable environmental exposure to
and inclined elements. provide required durability.

~: I
I
404.8.2 Reinforcement shall be protected from 404.12 Requirements for Specific Types of
,,.. corrosion in accordance with Section 420.6. Construction
II
404.9 Sustainability 404.12.1 Precast Concrete Systems
404.9.1 The licensed design professional shall be 404.12.1 Design of precast concrete members and
permitted to specify in the construction documents connections shall include loading and restraint conditions
sustainability requirements in addition to strength, from initial fabrication to end use in the structure,
serviceability, and durability requirements of this Code. including form removal, storage, transportation, and
erection.
404.9.2 The strength, serviceability, and durability
requirements of this Code shall take precedence over 404.12.1.2 Design, fabrication, and construction of
sustainability considerations. precast members and their connections shall include the
effects of tolerances.
404.10 Structural Integrity
404.12.1.3 When precast members are incorporated into
404.10.1 General a structural system, the forces and deformations occurring
in and adjacent to connections shall be included in the
404.10.1.1 Reinforcement and connections shall be design.
detailed to tie the structure together effectively and to
improve overall structural integrity. 404.12.1.4 Where system behavior requires in-plane
loads to be transferred between the members of a precast
404.10.2 Minimum Requirements for Structural floor or wall system, (a) and (b) shall be satisfied:
Integrity
a. In-plane load paths shall be continuous through both
404.10.2.1 Structural members and their connections shall connections and members.
be in accordance with structural integrity requirements in
Table 404.10.2.1. b. Where tension loads occur, a load path of steel or
steel reinforcement, with or without splices, shall be
Table 404.10.2.1 provided.
Minimum Requirements for Structural Integrity
404.12.1.5 Distribution of forces that act perpendicular
Member Type Section to the plane of precast members shall 'be established by
Non-prestressed two-way slabs 408.7.4.2 analysis or test.
Prestressed two-wa slabs 408.7.5.6
Non-prestressed two-way joist systems 408.8.1.6 404.12.2 Prestressed Concrete Systems
Cast-in-place beams 409.7.7
Non-prestressed one-wa ioist systems 409.8.1.6 404.12.2.1 Design of prestressed members and systems
Precast joints and connections 416.2.1.8 shall be based on strength and on behavior at service
conditions at all critical stages during the life of the
structure from the time prestress is first applied.
404.11 Fire Resistance
404.12.2.2 Provisions shall be made for effects on
404.11.1 Structural concrete members shall satisfy the
adjoining construction of elastic and plastic deformations,
fire protection requirements of the general building code.
deflections, changes in length, and rotations due to
prestressing. Effects of temperature change, restraint of
404.11.2 Where the general building code requires a
attached structural members, foundation settlement, creep,
thickness of concrete cover for fire protection greater than
and shrinkage shall also be considered.
the concrete cover specified in Section 420.6.1, such
greater thickness shall govern.
404.12.2.3 Stress concentrations due to prestressing
shall be considered in design.
404.12.2.4 Effect of loss of area due to open ducts shall

be considered in computing section properties before
grout in post-tensioning ducts has attained design
strength.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ih Edition, 20'15
~, ...
404.12.2.5 Post-tensioning tendons shall be permitted SECTION 405

to be external to any concrete section of a member.
Strength and serviceability design requirements of this LOADS
Code shall be used to evaluate the effects of external
tendon forces on the concrete structure. 405.1 Scope
404.12.3 Composite Concrete Flexural Members 405.1.1 This Section shall apply to selection of load
factors and combinations used in design, except as
404.12.3.1 This Chapter shall apply to composite permitted in Section 427.
concrete flexural members as defined in Section 402.
405.2 General
404.12.3.2 Individual members shall be designed for all
critical stages of loading. 405.2.1 Loads shall include self-weight; applied loads;
and effects of prestressing, earthquakes, restraint of
404.12.3.3 Members shall be designed to support all volume change, and differential settlement.
loads introduced prior to full development of design
strength of composite members. 405.2.2 Loads and seismic zones shall be In
accordance with the general building code, or determined
404.12.3.4 Reinforcement shall be detailed to minimize by another authority having jurisdiction in areas without a
cracking and to prevent separation of individual legally adopted building code.
components of composite members.
405.2.3 Live load reductions shall be permitted in
404.12.4 Composite Steel and Concrete accordance with the general building code or, in the
Construction absence of a general building code, in accordance with
ASCE/SEI7.
404.12.4.1 Composite compression members shall
include all members reinforced longitudinally with 405.3 Load Factors and Combinations
structural steel shapes, pipe, or tubing with or without
longitudinal bars. 405.3.1 Required strength, U, shall be at least equal to
the effects of factored loads in Table 405.3.1, with
404.12.4.1 The design of composite compression exceptions and additions in Sections 405.3.3 through
members shall be in accordance with Section 410. 40S.3.12.
404.12.5 Structural Plain Concrete Systems Table 405.3.1 Load Combinations

Primary
404.12.5.1 The design of structural plain concrete Load Designation Equation
Load
members, both cast-in-place and precast, shall be in
U= lAD (405.31a) D
accordance with Section 414.
U= 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5 (Lror R) (405.3lb) L
404.13 Construction and Inspection U = 1.2D + 1.6 (Lr or R)
(405.3lc) Lror R
+ (1.0L or 0.5 W)
404.13.1 Specifications for construction execution shall U= 1.2D+ 1.0W+ 1.0L
(40S.31d) W
be in accordance with Section 426. + O.S (Lr or R)
U = 1.2D + 1.0E + 1.0L (40S.31e) E
404.13.2 Specifications for construction execution shall U= 0.9D + LOW (405.31f) W
be in accordance with Section 426. U= 0.9D + 1.0 E (405.3lg) E
404.14 Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures 405.3.2 The effect of one or more loads not acting
simultaneously shall be investigated.
404.14.1 Strength evaluation of existing structures shall
be in accordance with Section 427. 405.3.3 The load factor on live load Lin Eqs. 405.3.lc,
405.3.1d, and 405.3.1e shall be permitted to be reduced to
0.5 except for (a), (b), or (c):
a. Garages;
b. Areas occupied as places of public assembly;

c. Areas where L is greater than 4.8 kPa. 405.3.8 If lateral earth pressure H is present, it shall be
included in the load combination equations of Section
405.3.4 If applicable, L shall include (a) through (f): 405.3.l in accordance with (a), (b), or (c):
a. Concentrated live loads; a. If H acts alone or adds to the primary load, it shall be
included with a load factor of 1.6 in Eq. 405.3.1 a
b. Vehicular loads; through 405.3.le;
c. Crane loads; b. If the effect of H is permanent and counteracts the

primary load, it shall be included with a load factor of
d. Loads on hand rails, guardrails, and vehicular 0.9 in Eq. 405.3.1fand 405.3.1g;
barrier systems;
c. If the effect of H is not permanent but, when present,
e. Impact effects; counteracts the primary load, H shall not be included
in Eq. 405.3.1a through 405.3.lg.
f. Vibration effects.
405.3.9 If a structure is in a flood zone, the flood loads
405.3.5 If wind load W is based on service-level loads, and the appropriate load factors and combinations of
1.6W shall be used in place of 1. OW in Eqs. 405.3.ld ASCE/SEI 7 shall be used.
and 405.3.lf, and O.8W shall be used in place ofO.5W
in Eq. 405.3.lc. 405.3.10 Required strength U shall include intemalload
effects due to reactions induced by prestressing with a
405.3.6 The structural effects of forces due to restraint load factor of 1.0.
of volume change and differential settlement, T, shall be
considered in combination with other loads if the effects 405.3.11 For post-tensioned anchorage zone design, a
of T can adversely affect structural safety or performance. load factor of 1.2 shall be applied to the maximum
The load factor for T shall be established considering the prestressing reinforcement jacking force.
uncertainty associated with the likely magnitude of T, the
probability that the maximum effect of T will occur
simultaneously with other applied loads, and the potential
adverse consequences if the effect of T is greater than
assumed. The load factor on T shall not have a value less
than 1.0.
405.3.7 If fluid load F is present, it shall be included in

the load combination equations of Section 405.3.1 in
accordance with (a), (b), (c) or (d):
a. If F acts alone or adds to the effects of D, it shall be

included with a load factor of 1.4 in Eq. 405.3.1a;
b. If F adds to the primary load, it shall be included

with a load factor of 1.2 in Eq. 405.3.1 b through
405.3.1e;
c. If F adds to the primary load, it shall be included

with a load factor of 1.2 in Eq. 405.3.1b through
405.3.1e;
d. If the effect of F is permanent and counteracts the

primary load, it shall be included with a load factor of
0.9 in Eq. 405.3.1g.
e. If the effect of F is not permanent but, when present,

counteracts the primary load, F shall not be included
in Eq. 405.3.1a through 405.3.lg.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7'il Edition, 2015

406.2.4.4 A member or region shall be permitted to be

SECTION 406 analyzed and designed using the strut-and-tie method in
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS accordance with Section 423.
406.1 Scope 406.2.5 Slenderness effects shall be permitted to be

neglected if (a) or (b) is satisfied:
406.1.1 This section shall apply to methods of
analysis, modeling of members and structural systems, a. For columns not braced against sidesway
and calculation of load effects.
kf < 22
__ u (406.2.5a)
r -
406.2 General
406.2.1 Members and structural systems shall be b. For columns braced against sidesway
permitted to be modeled in accordance with Section
406.3. kf
_u s 34 + 12 MdM2 (406.2.5b)
r
406.2.2 All members and structural systems shall be
analyzed for the maximum effects of loads including the and
arrangements of live load in accordance with Section
406.4. kf
~<40 (406.2.5c)
r -
406.2.3 Methods of analysis permitted by this Section
shall be (a) through (e): where M1/M2 is negative if the column is bent in single
curvature, and positive for double curvature.
a. The simplified method for analysis of continuous
beams and one-way slabs for gravity loads in Section If bracing elements resisting lateral movement of a storey
406.5; have a total stiffness of at least 12 times the gross lateral
stiffness of the columns in the direction considered, it
b. First-order in Section 406.6; shall be permitted to consider columns within the storey
to be braced against sidesway.
c. Elastic second-order in Section 406.7 (d) inelastic
second-orders in Section 406.8 (e) Finite element in 406.2.5.1 The radius of gyration, r, shall be permitted to
Section 406.9; be calculated by (a),(b),or (c):
d. Inelastic second-order in Section 406.8;

(406.2.5.1 )
e. Finite element in Section 406.9.
406.2.4 Additional analysis methods that are permitted b. 0.30 times the dimension in the direction stability
include Sections 406.2.4.1 through 406.2.4.4. is being considered for rectangular columns;
406.2.4.1 Two-way slabs shall be permitted to be

analyzed for gravity loads in accordance with (a) or (b): c. 0.25 times the diameter of circular columns.
a. Direct design method in Section 408.10;

406.2.5.2 For composite columns, the radius of gyration,
b. Equivalent frame method in Section 408.11. r, shall not be taken greater than: ~
406.2.4.2 Slender walls shall be permitted to be analyzed

in accordance with Section 411.8 for out-of-plane effects. (406.2.5.2)
406.2.4.3 Diaphragms shall be permitted t 0 be

analyzed in accordance with Section 412.4.2.
Longitudinal bars located within a concrete core encased
by structural steel or within transverse reinforcement

CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete If-37
surrounding a structural steel core shall be permitted to be O. 5bw and an effective flange width less than or equal to
used in calculating Asx and l sx- 4bw·
406.2.6 Unless slenderness effects are neglected as 406.3.2.3 For prestressed T-beams, it shall be permitted
permitted by Section 406.2.5, the design of columns,
to use the geometry provided by Sections 406.3.2.1 and
restraining beams, and other supporting members shall be 406.3.2.2.
based on the factored forces and moments considering
second order effects in accordance with Sections 406.6.4,
406.4 Arrangement of Live Load
406.7, or 406.8. M" including second-order effects shall
not exceed 1.4M" due to first-order effects.
406.4.1 For the design of floors or roofs to resist
gravity loads, it shall be permitted to assume that live load
406.3 Modeling Assumptions is applied only to the level under consideration.
406.3.1 General 406.4.2 For one-way slabs and beams, it shall be

permitted to assume (a) and (b):
406.3.1.1 Relative stiffnesses of members within
structural systems shall be based on reasonable and
fl. Maximum positive M" near midspan occurs with
consistent assumptions.
factored L on the span and on alternate spans;
406.3.1.2 To calculate moments and shears caused by

b. Maximum negative M" at a support occurs with
gravity loads in columns, beams, and slabs, it shall be
factored L on adjacent spans only.
permitted to use a model limited to the members in the
level being considered and the columns above and below
406.4.3 For two-way slab systems, factored moments
that level. It shall be permitted to assume far ends of
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 406.4.3.1,
columns built integrally with the structure to be fixed.
406.4.3.2, or 406.4.3.3, and shall be at least the moments
resulting from factored L applied simultaneously to all
406.3.1.3 The analysis model shall consider the effects
panels.
of variation of member cross-sectional properties, such as
that due to haunches.
406.4.3.1 If the arrangement of L is known, the slab
system shall be analyzed for that arrangement.
406.3.2 T-beam Geometry
406.4.3.2 If L is variable and does not exceed O. 75D, or

406.3.2.1 For non-prestressed T-beams supporting
the nature of E is such that all panels will be loaded
monolithic or composite slabs, the effective flange width
simultaneously, it shall be permitted to assume that
bf shall include the beam web width bw plus an effective
maximum M u at all sections occurs with factored L
overhanging flange width in accordance with Table
applied simultaneously to all panels.
406.3.2.1, where h is the slab thickness and Sw is the
clear distance to the adjacent web.
406.4.3.3 For loading conditions other than those
defined in Section 406.4.3.1 or 406.4.3.2, it shall be
Table 406.3.2.1: Dimensional Limits for Effective
permitted to assume (a) and (b):
Overhanging Flange Width for T-Beams
a. Maximum positive Mu near midspan of panel occurs
Effective overhanging flange
Flange location with 75 percent of factored L on the panel and
width, beyond face of web
~--------~------~ 8h
alternate panels;
Each side of web Least of: s /2

b. Maximum negative Mu at a support occurs with 75
/,,/8
percent of factored L on adjacent panels only.
6h
One side of web Least of: s /2
406.5 Simplified Method of Analysis for Non-
/,,/12
Prestressed Continuous Beams and One-way
Slabs
406.3.2.2 Isolated non-prestressed T-beams in which the
flange is used to provide additional compression area 406.5.1 It shall be permitted to calculate M u and V u
shall have a flange thickness greater than or equal to due to gravity loads in accordance with this section for
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, in Edition, 2015

continuous beams and one-way slabs satisfying (a) Table 406.5.4 Approximate Shears for
through (e): Non-Prestressed Continuous Beams and One-Way
Slabs
a. Members are prismatic;
Location
b. Loads are uniformly distributed; Exterior face of first interior
su or!
c. L s 3D; Face of all other supports
d. There are at least two spans;

406.5.5 Floor or roof level moments shall be resisted
by distributing the moment between columns immediately
e. The longer of two adjacent spans does not exceed
above and below the given floor in proportion to the
the shorter by more than 20 percent.
relative column stiffnesses considering conditions of
restraint.
406.5.2 M u due to gravity loads shall be calculated in
accordance with Table 406.5.2.
406.6 First-order Analysis
Table 406.5.2 Approximate Moments for Non-
406.6.1 General
Prestressed Continuous Beams and One-Way Slabs
406.6.1.1 Slenderness effects shall be considered in

Moment Location Condition MtI~
accordance with Section 406.6.4, unless they are allowed
Discontinuous end
integral with wu.e~/14 to be neglected by Section 406.2.5.
End span support
Positive Discontinuous end . 406.6.1.2 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
wu.e~/l1
unrestrained elastic first-order analysis shall be permitted in
Interior
All
accordance with Section 406.6.5.
spans
wu.e~/16
Member built 406.6.2 Modeling of Members and Structural

Integrally with
wu.e~/24 Systems
Interior face supporting
of exterior spandrel beam
support 406.6.2.1 Floor or roof level moments shall be resisted
Member built
integrally with wu.e~/16
by distributing the moment between columns immediately
supporting column above and below the' given floor in proportion to
Exterior face the relative column stiffnesses and considering conditions
Two spans wu.e~/9
of first of restraint.
interior More than two
support spans
wu.e~/10
406.6.2.2 For frames or continuous construction,
Negative[lj
Face of consideration shall be given to the effect of floor and roof
Other All wu.e~/ll load patterns on transfer of moment to exterior and
supports
interior columns, and of eccentric loading due to other
a) Slabs with spans causes.
not exceeding 3m.
Face of all b) Beams where
supports ratio of sum of
406.6.2.3 It shall be permitted to simplify the analysis
satisfying column stiffuesses
wu.e~/12 model by the assumptions of (a), (b), or both:
(a) or (b) to beam stiffuess
exceeds 8 at each a. Solid slabs or one-way joist systems built integrally
end of span
with supports, with clear spans not more than 3m.,
shall be permitted to be analyzed as continuous
[1] To calculate negative moments, in shall be the average of members on knife edge supports with spans equal to
the adjacent clear span lengths.
the clear spans of the member and width of support
beams otherwise neglected;
406.5.3 It Moments calculated in accordance with
Section 406.5.2 shall not be redistributed.
b. For frames or continuous construction, it shall be
permitted to assume the intersecting member regions
406.5.4 Vu due to gravity loads shall be calculated in
are rigid.

406.6.3 Section Properties agreement with results of comprehensive tests and

analysis and I of other frame members shall be III
406.6.3.1 Factored Load Analysis accordance with Sections 406.6.3.l.l and 406.6.3.l.2.
406.6.3.1.1 Floor Moment of inertia and cross-sectional 406.6.3.2 Service Load Analysis
area of members shall be calculated in accordance with
Tables 406.6.3.1.1(a) or 406.6.3. 1.1(b), unless a 406.6.3.2.1 Immediate and time-dependent deflections
more rigorous analysis is used. If sustained lateral loads due to gravity loads shall be calculated in accordance with
are present, I for columns and walls shall be divided by Section 424.2.
(1 + Pds) where Pds is the ratio of maximum factored
sustained shear within a storey to the maximum factored 406.6.3.2.2 It shall be permitted to calculate immediate
shear in that storey associated with the same load lateral deflections using a moment of inertia of 1.4 times I
combination. defined in Section 406.6.3.1, or using a more detailed
analysis, but the value shall not exceed Ig'
Table 40 6.6.3.1.1(a) Moment of Inertia and Cross-
Sectional Area Permitted for Elastic Analysis at 406.6.4 Slenderness Effects, Moment Magnification
Factored Load Level Method
Member Moment of Cross-Sectional I 406.6.4.1 Unless Section 406.2.5 is satisfied, columns

and condition Inertia Area
and stories in structures shall be designated as being
Columns O.70Ig
nonsway or sway. Analysis of columns in nonsway
Uncracked O.70Ig frames or storeys shall be in accordance with Section
Walls 406.6.4.5. Analysis of columns in sway frames or storeys
Cracked O.3SIg 1.0Ag
shall be in accordance with Section 406.6.4.6.
Beams O.3SIg
O.2SIg 406.6.4.2 The cross-sectional dimensions of each

Flat plates and flat slabs
member used in an analysis shall be within 10 percent of
the specified member dimensions in construction
documents or the analysis shall be repeated. If the
Table 406.6.3.1.1(b) Alternative Moments ofInertia stiffnesses of Table 406.6.3.1.1 (b) are used in an analysis,
for Elastic Analysis at Factored Load the assumed member reinforcement ratio shall also be
within 10 percent of the specified member reinforcement
Alternative Value of I for Elastic Analysis in construction documents.
Member Minimum J Maximum
Columns O.35Ig ( 0.80+25-A")( »;

1---0.5- Pu) I. O.87SIg 406.6.4.3 It shall be permitted to analyze columns and
and walls A, Puh Po
stories in structures as nonsway frames if (a) or (b) is
Beams,
satisfied:
flat
plates, O.25Ig (0.10+ 25p) (1.2- 0.2~}, O.SIg
and flat a. The increase in column end moments due to second
slabs order effects does not exceed 5 percent of the first
"
Note: For continuous flexural members, 1 shall be permitted to be taken order end moments;
as the average of values obtained for the critical positive and negative
moment sections. Pu and Mu shall be calculated from the load b. Q in accordance with Section 406.6.4.4.1 does not
combination under consideration, or the combination of P u and Mit that
produces the least value of I.
exceed 0.05.
406.6.3.1.2 For factored lateral load analysis, it shall be 406.6.4.4 Stability Properties
permitted to assume I = O.51 g for all members or to
calculate I by a more detailed analysis, considering the 406.6.4.4.1 The stability index for a storey, Q, shall be
reduced stiffness of all members under the loading calculated by:
conditions.
(406.6.4.4.1 )
406.6.3.1.3 For factored lateral load analysis of two-way
slab systems without beams, which are designated as part
of the seismic-force-resisting system, I for slab members where L P u and V us are the total factored vertical load
shall be defined by a model that is in substantial and horizontal storey shear, respectively, in the story

being evaluated, and /::"0 is the first-order relative lateral Cm,

{)= _~ 2: 1.0
defleQtlon between the top and the bottom of that storey (406.6.4.5.2)
due to Vus' O.75P.
406.6.4.4.2 The critical buckling load, P c» shall be 406.6.4.5.3 Cm shall be in accordance with (a) or (b);
calculated by:
a. For columns without transverse loads applied
between supports:
(406.6.4.4.2)
(406.6.4.5.3a)
406.6.4.4.3 The effective length factor k shall be
calculated using Ee in accordance with Section 419.2.2
where MtfMz is negative if the column is bent in single
and I in accordance with Section 406.6.3.1.1. For
curvature, and positive ifbent in double curvature;
nons way members, k shall be permitted to be taken as
1.0, and for sway members, k shall be at least 1.0. b. For columns with transverse loads applied between
supports.
406.6.4.4.4 For non-composite columns, (EJ)e!! shall
be calculated in accordance with (a), (b), or (c): Cm = 1.0 (406.6.4.5 .3b)
a. O.4Eelg 406.6.4.5.4 Mz in Eq. 406.6.4.5.1 shall be at least

(EJ)e!! = 1 + P (406.6.4.4.4a)
dns Mz. min calculated according to Eq. 406.6.4.5.4 about
each axis separately.
b. O. 2Ee/g + Eslse
(EI)e!! = (406.6.4.4.4b)
1+ Pdns MZ,min = Pu(15 + 0,03h) (406.6.4.5.4)
c. Eel
(EI)e!! = 1+ P (406.6.4.4.4c) If MZ,min exceeds Mz, Cm shall be taken equal to 1.0 or
dns calculated based on the ratio of the calculated end
moments MtfMz, using Eq. 406.6.4.5.3a.
where Pdns shall be the ratio of maximum factored
sustained axial load to maximum factored axial load 406.6.4.6 Moment Magnification Method: Sway
associated with the same load combination and I in Eq. Frames
406.6.4.4.4c is calculated according to Table
406.6.3.1.1 (b) for columns and walls. 406.6.4.6.1 Moments Ml and Mz at the ends of an
individual column shall be calculated by (a) and (b).
406.6.4.4.5 For composite columns, (EJ)e!! shall be
calculated by Eq. 406.6.4.4.4b, Eq. 406.6.4.4.5, or from a
a. (406.6.4.6.la)
more detailed analysis.
b. (406.6.4.6.1 b)
(0.2Eclg)
(EJ)e!! = 1 P
+ . dns
+ Eslsx (406.6.4.4.5)
406.6.4.6.2 The moment magnifier lis shall be
calculated by (a), (b), or (c). If lis exceeds 1.5, only (b) or
406.6.4.5 Moment Magnification Method:
(c) shall be permitted:
Nonsway Frames
406.6.4.5.1 The factored moment used for design of

columns and walls, Me, shall be the first-order factored a. (406.6.4.6.2a)
moment Mz amplified for the effects of member
curvature.
b. (406.6.4.6.2b)
(406.6.4.5.1)
c. Second-order elastic analysis.
406.6.4.5.2 Magnification factor li shall be calculated
by:

where L P" is the summation of all the factored vertical 406.7 Elastic Second-order Analysis
,. loads in a storey and L Pc is the summation for all sway
I resisting columns in a storey. Pc is calculated using Eq. 406.7.1 General
406.6.4.4.2 with k determined for sway members from
Section 406.6.4.4.3 and (EJ)e{{ from Section 406.6.4.4.4 406.7.1.1 An elastic second-order analysis shall consider
or 406.6.4.4.5 as appropriate with Pds substituted for the influence of axial loads, presence of cracked regions
Pdns'
along the length of the member, and effects of load
duration. These considerations are satisfied using the
406.6.4.6.3 Flexural members shall be designed for the cross-sectional properties defined in Section 406.7.2.
total magnified end moments of the columns at the joint.
406.7.1.2 Slenderness effects along the length of a
406.6.4.6.4 Second-order effects shall be considered column shall be considered. It shall be permitted to
along the length of columns in sway frames. It shall be calculate these effects using Section 406.6.4.5.
permitted to account for these effects using Section
406.6.4.5, where em is calculated using Ml and Mz from 406.7.1.3 The cross-sectional dimensions of each
Section 406.6.4.6.1. member used in an analysis to calculate slenderness
effects shall be within 10 percent of the specified member
406.6.5 Redistribution of Moments in Continuous dimensions in construction documents or the analysis
Flexural Members shall be repeated.
406.6.5.1 Except where approximate values for moments 406.7.1.4 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
are used in accordance with Section 406.5, where elastic second-order analysis shall be permitted III
moments have been calculated in accordance with Section accordance with Section 406.6.5.
406.8, or where moments in two-way slabs are
determined using pattern loading specified in Section 406.7.2 Section Properties
406.4.3.3, reduction of moments at sections of maximum
negative or maximum positive moment calculated by 406.7.2.1 Factored Load Analysis
elastic theory shall be permitted for any assumed loading
arrangement if (a) and (b) are satisfied: 406.7.2.1.1 It shall be permitted to use section properties
calculated in accordance with Section 406.6.3.1.
a. Flexural members are continuous;
406.7.2.2 Service Load Analysis
b. e, ~ 0.0075 at the section at which moment IS
reduced. 406.7.2.2.1 Immediate and time-dependent deflections
due to gravity loads shall be calculated in accordance with
406.6.5.2 For prestressed members, moments include Section 424.2.
those due to factored loads and those due to reactions
induced by prestressing. 406.7.2.2.2 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to
calculate immediate deflections using a moment of inertia
406.6.5.3 At the section where the moment is reduced, of 1.4 times I given in Section 406.6.3.1, or calculated
redistribution shall not exceed the lesser of 1000£t using a more detailed analysis, but the value shall not
percent and 20 percent. exceed Ig-
406.6.5.4 The reduced moment shall be used to calculate 406.8 Inelastic Second-Order Analysis
redistributed moments at all other sections within the
spans such that static equilibrium is maintained after 406.8.1 General
redistribution of moments for each loading arrangement.
406.8.1.1 An inelastic second-order analysis shall
406.6.5.5 Shears and support reactions shall be consider material nonlinearity, member curvature and
calculated in accordance with static equilibrium lateral drift, duration of loads, shrinkage and creep, and
considering the redistributed moments for each loading interaction with the supporting foundation.
arrangement.
406.8.1.2 An inelastic second-order analysis procedure
shall have been shown to result in prediction of strength
in substantial agreement with results of comprehensive
National Structural Cede of the Philippines VOILHll(~ l. Edition, 20-1~}

tests of statically indeterminate reinforced concrete SECTION 407

structures.
ONE-WAY SLABS
406.8.1.3 Slenderness effects along the length of a
column shall be considered. It shall be permitted to 407.1 Scope
calculate these effects using Section 406.6.4.5.
407.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non-
406.8.1.4 The cross-sectional dimensions of each prestressed and prestressed slabs reinforced for flexure in
member used in an analysis to calculate slenderness one direction, including:
effects shall be within 10 percent of the specified member
dimensions in construction documents or the analysis a. Solid slabs;
shall be repeated.
b. Slabs cast on stay-in-place, non-composite steel deck;
406.8.1.5 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
inelastic second-order analysis shall not be permitted. c. Composite slabs of concrete elements constructed in
separate placements but connected so that all
406.9 Acceptability of Finite Element Analysis elements resist loads as a unit;
406.9.1 Finite element analysis to determine load d. Precast, prestressed hollow-core slabs.
effects shall be permitted.
407.2 General
406.9.2 The finite element model shall be appropriate
for its intended purpose. 407.2.1 The effects of concentrated loads and openings
406.9.3 For inelastic analysis, a separate analysis shall
be performed for each factored load combination. 407.2.2 Materials
406.9.4 The licensed design professional shall confirm 407.2.2.1 Design properties for concrete shall be selected
that the results are appropriate for the purposes of the to be in accordance with Section 419.
analysis.
407.2.2.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall
406.9.5 The cross-sectional dimensions of each be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
member used in an analysis shall be within 10 percent of
the specified member dimensions in construction 407.2.2.3 Materials, design and detailing requirements
documents or the analysis shall be repeated. for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with
Section 420.7.
406.9.6 Redistribution of moments calculated by an
inelastic analysis shall not be permitted. 407.2.3 Connection to Other Members
407.2.3.1 For cast-in-place construction, slab-column

joints shall satisfy Section 415.
407.2.3.2 For precast construction, connections shall

satisfy the force transfer requirements of Section 416.2.
407.3 Design Limits
407.3.1 Minimum Slab Thickness
407.3.1.1 For solid non-prestressed slabs not supporting

or attached 'to partitions or other construction likely to be
damaged by large deflections, overall slab thickness h
shall not be less than the limits in Table 407.3.1.1, unless
the calculated deflection limits of Section 407.3.2 are
satisfied.

C~irA.PTER4 -- Structural Concrete 4-43
Table 407.3.1.1 Minimum Thickness of Solid 407.3.3 Reinforcement Strain Limit in Non-
Non-Prestressed One-Way Slabs Prestressed Slabs
Support condition Minimum hilI 407.3.3.1 For non-prestressed slabs, e, shall be at least
Simply supported i!l20 0.004.
One end continuous 1!/24
Both ends continuous 1!/28 407.3.4 Stress Limits in Prestressed Slabs
Cantilever 1!/10
[1J Expression applicable for normal weight concrete and fy= 420 MPa. 407.3.4.1 Prestressed slabs shall be classified as Class U
For other cases, minimum h shall be modified in accordance with T, or C in accordance with Section 424.5.2. '
Sections 407.3.1.1.1 through 407.3.1.1.3, as appropriate.
407.3.4.2 Stresses in prestressed slabs immediately after
407.3.1.1.1 For f yother than 420 MPa, the expressions transfer and at service loads shall not exceed the
in Table 407.3.l.l shall be multiplied by (0.4 + permissible stresses in Sections 424.5.3 and 424.5.4.
fy/700).
407.4 Required Strength
407.3.1.1.2 For non-prestressed slabs made of
lightweight concrete having we in the range of 1440 to 407.4.1 General
1840 kg/rrr', the expressions in Table 407.3.1.1 shall be
multiplied by the greater of (a) and (b): 407.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated In
accordance with the factored load combinations In
Section 405.
a. 1.65 - O.0003wc
407.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in

b. 1.09
accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406.
407.3.1.1.3 For non-prestressed composite slabs made
of a combination of lightweight and normal weight 407.4.1.3 For prestressed slabs, effects of reactions
concrete that are shored during construction, where the induced by prestressing shall be considered in accordance
with Section 405.3.11.
lightweight concrete is in compression, the modifier of
Section 407.3.1.1.2 shall apply.
407.4.2 Factored Moment
407.3.1.2 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall
be permitted to be included in h if it is placed 407.4.2.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, M" at
monolithically with the floor slab, or if the floor finish is the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the face
designed to be composite with the floor slab in of support.
accordance with Section 416.4.
407.4.3 Factored Shear
407.3.2 Calculated Deflection Limits
407.4.3.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, V" at
407.3.2.1 For non-prestressed slabs not satisfying the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the face
Section 407.3.1 and for prestressed slabs, immediate and of support.
time-dependent deflections shall be calculated in
accordance with Section 424.2 and shall not exceed the 407.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
limits in Section 424.2.2. critical section located d from the face of support for non-
prestressed slabs or h/2 from the face of support for
407.3.2.2 For non-prestressed composite concrete prestressed slabs shall be permitted to be designed for V"
slabs satisfying Section 407.3.1, deflections occurring at that critical section if(a) through (c) are satisfied:
after the member becomes composite need not be
calculated. Deflections occurring before the member a. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear,
becomes composite shall be investigated, unless the pre- introduces compression into the end region of the
composite thickness also satisfies Section 407.3.1. slab;
b. Loads are applied at or near the top surface of the

slab;
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume i, til Edition, 2015

c. No concentrated load occurs between the face of 407.6 Reinforcement Limits

support and critical section.
"
407.6.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in Non-
407.5 Design Strength Prestressed Slabs
407.5.1 General 407.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement

As, min shall be provided in accordance with Table
407.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination, 407.6.1.1.
design strength at all sections shall satisfy q,Sn 2:: U
including (a) and (b):
Table 407.6.1.1 As,min for Non-Prestressed One-Way
Slabs
Reinforcement
[Y' MPa As,min
Type
Interaction between load effects shall be considered.
Deformed 0.0020Ag
<420
407.5.1.2 q, shall be determined in accordance with bars
Section 421.2.
Deformed 0.0018 x 420
Ag
bars or welded Greater Fy
407.5.2 Moment ~420
wire of:
reinforcement O.OO14Ag
407.5.2.1 Mn shall be calculated III accordance with
Section 422.3.
'407.6.2 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in
407.5.2.2 For prestressed slabs, external tendons shall be Prestressed Slabs
considered as unbonded tendons in calculating flexural
strength, unless the external tendons are effectively 407.6.2.1 For slabs with bonded prestressed
bonded to the concrete section along its entire length. reinforcement, total quantity of As and Aps shall be
adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the
407.5.2.3 If primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that cracking load calculated on the basis of [T as given in
is considered to be a T-beam flange is parallel to the Section 419.2.3.
longitudinal axis of the beam, reinforcement
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam shall be 407.6.2.2 For slabs with both flexural and shear design
provided in the top of the slab in accordance with (a) and strength at least twice the required strength, Section
(b). This provision does not apply to joist construction: 407.6.2.1 need not be satisfied.
a. Slab reinforcement perpendicular to the beam shall 407.6.2.3 For slabs with unbonded tendons, the
be designed to resist the factored load on the minimum area of bonded deformed longitudinal
overhanging slab width assumed to act as a reinforcement, As, min' shall be:
cantilever;
As, min 2:: O.004Act (407.6.2.3 )
b. Only the effective overhanging slab width in
accordance with Section 406.3.2 need be considered. where Act is the area of that part of the cross section
between the flexural tension face and the centroid of the
407.5.3 Shear gross section.
407.5.3.1 Vnshall be calculated III accordance with 407.6.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
Section 422.5.
407.6.3.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement,
407.5.3.2 For composite concrete slabs, horizontal shear Av, min shall be provided in all regions where V u > q, V c-
strength, V nh, shall be calculated in accordance with For precast prestressed hollow-core slabs with un topped
Section 416.4. h > 315mm, Av,min shall be provided in all regions
where Vu > O.Sq,Vcw•

CHAPTER 4 - Structurai Concrete 4~45
407.6.3.2 If shown by testing that the required Mn and 407.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing
V n can be developed, Section 407.6.3.1 need not be
.,' satisfied. Such tests shall simulate effects of differential 407.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall be in accordance
settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change, with Section 425.2.
based on a realistic assessment of these effects occurring
in service. 407.7.2.2 For non-prestressed and Class C prestressed
slabs, spacing of bonded longitudinal reinforcement
407.6.3.3 If shear reinforcement is required, Avo min, closest to the tension face shall not exceed s calculated in
shall be in accordance with Section 409.6.3.3. accordance with Section 424.3.
407.6.4 Minimum Shrinkage and Temperature 407.7.2.3 Maximum spacing s of deformed

Reinforcement reinforcement shall be the lesser of 3h and 450 mm.
407.6.4.1 Reinforcement shall be provided to resist 407.7.2.4 Spacing of reinforcement required by Section
shrinkage and temperature stresses in accordance with 407.5.2.3 shall not exceed the lesser of 5h and 450 mm.
Section 424.4.
407.7.3 Flexural Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed
407.6.4.2 If prestressed shrinkage and temperature Slabs
reinforcement in accordance with Section 424.4.4 is used,
Sections 407.6.4.2.1 through 407.6.4.2.3 shall apply. 407.7.3.1 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
reinforcement at each section of the slab shall be
407.6.4.2.1 For monolithic, cast-in-place, post-tensioned developed on each side of that section.
beam-and-slab construction, gross concrete area shall
consist of the total beam area including the slab thickness 407.7.3.2 Critical locations for development of
and the slab area within half the clear distance to adjacent reinforcement are points of maximum stress and points
beam webs. It shall be permitted to include the effective along the span where bent or terminated tension
force in beam tendons in the calculation of total prestress reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure.
force acting on gross concrete area.
407.7.3.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point
407.6.4.2.2 If slabs are supported on walls or not cast at which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a
monolithically with beams, gross concrete area is the slab distance at least the greater of d and 12db, except at
section tributary to the tendon or tendon group. supports of simply-supported spans and at free ends of
cantilevers. .
407.6.4.2.3 At least one tendon is required in the slab
between faces of adjacent beams or walls. 407.7.3.4 Continuing flexural tension reinforcement
shall have an embedment length at least t d beyond the
407.7 Reinforcement Detailing point where bent or terminated tension reinforcement is
no longer required to resist flexure.
407.7.1 General
407.7.3.5 Flexural tension reinforcement shall not be
407.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in terminated in a tension zone unless (a), (b), or (c) is
accordance with Section 420.6.1. satisfied:
407.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and a. Vu ~ (2/3)cfJVn at the cutoff point;

prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4. b. For 36 mm cfJ bars and smaller, continuing
reinforcement provides double the area required for
407.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be in flexure at the cutoff point and Vu ~ (3/4)cfJV n;
c. Stirrup area in excess of that required for shear is
407.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with provided along each terminated bar or wire over a
Section 425.6. distance 3j4d from the termination point. Excess
stirrup area shall be not less than O.41bws/fyt·
Spacing s shall not exceed dj(SPb)'
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, y'h Edition, 2015

407.7.3.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for 407.7.4 Flexural Reinforcement in Prestressed
tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is not Slabs
directly proportional to moment, such as in sloped,
stepped, or tapered slabs, or where tension reinforcement 407.7.4.1 External tendons shall be attached to the
is not parallel to the compression face. member in a manner that maintains the specified
eccentricity between the tendons and the concrete
407.7.3.7 In slabs with spans not exceeding 3 m, welded centroid through the full range of anticipated member
wire reinforcement, with wire size not exceeding MW30 deflections.
or M030, shall be permitted to be curved from a point
near the top of slab over the support to a point near the 407.7.4.2 If non-prestressed reinforcement is required to
bottom of slab at mid-span, provided such reinforcement satisfy flexural strength, the detailing requirements of
is continuous over, or developed at, the support. Section 407.7.3 shall be satisfied.
407.7.3.8 Termination of Reinforcement 407.7.4.3 Termination of Prestressed

Reinforcement
407.7.3.8.1 At simple supports, at least one-third of the
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend 407.7.4.3.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be
along the slab bottom into the support. For precast slabs, designed and detailed in accordance with Section 425.9.
such reinforcement shall extend at least to the center of
the bearing length. 407.7.4.3.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers
shall be designed and detailed in accordance with Section
407.7.3.8.2 At other supports, at least one-fourth of the 425.8.
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend
along the slab bottom into the support at least l50 mm. 407.7.4.4 Termination of Deformed Reinforcement
in Slabs with Un bonded Tendons
407.7.3.8.3 At simple supports and points of inflection,
db for positive moment tension reinforcement shall be 407.7.4.4.1 Length of deformed reinforcement required
limited such that f d for that reinforcement satisfies (a) or by Section 407.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) and
(b). If reinforcement terminates beyond the centerline of (b):
supports by a standard hook or a mechanical anchorage at
least equivalent to a standard hook, (a) or (b) need not be a. At least fn/3 in positive moment areas and be
satisfied. centered in those areas;
a. fd:::;(1. 3Mn/Vu + fa) if end of reinforcement is b. At least fn/6 on each side of the face of support.
confined by a compressive reaction;
407.7.5 Shear Reinforcement
b. (M n/V u + fa) if end of reinforcement is not
f d :::;
confined by a compressive reaction. 407.7.5.1 If shear reinforcement is required, transverse
reinforcement shall be detailed according to Section
where M n is calculated assuming all reinforcement at the 409.7.6.2.
section is stressed to f y and V u is calculated at the
section. 407.7.6 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
At a support, fa is the embedment length beyond the 407.7.6.1 Shrinkage and temperature reinforcement in
center of the support. accordance with Section 407.6.4 shall be placed
perpendicular to flexural reinforcement.
At a point of inflection, fa is the embedment length
beyond the point of inflection, limited to the greater of d 407.7.6.2 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement
and 12db.
407.7.6.2.1 Spacing of deformed shrinkage and
407.7.3.8.4 At least one-third of the negative moment temperature reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of
reinforcement at a support shall have an embedment 5h and 450 mm.
length beyond the point of inflection at least the greatest
of d, 12db, and fn/16.

CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-47
407.7.6.3 Prestressed Reinforcement SECTION 408

,/
407.7.6.3.1 Spacing of slab tendons required by Section TWO-WAY SLABS
407.6.4.2, and the distance between face of beam or wall
to the nearest slab tendon, shall not exceed 1.8 m. 408.1 Scope
407.7.6.3.2 If spacing of slab tendons exceeds 1.4 m., 408.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non-
additional deformed shrinkage and temperature prestressed and prestressed slabs reinforced for flexure in
reinforcement conforming to Section 424.4.3 shall be two directions, with or without beams between supports,
provided parallel to the tendons, except Section 424.4.3.4 including (a) through (d):
need not be satisfied.
a. Solid slabs;
In calculating the area of additional reinforcement, it shall
be permitted to take the gross concrete area in Table b. Slabs cast on stay-in-place, non-composite steel deck;
424.4.3.2 as the slab area between faces of beams. This
shrinkage and temperature reinforcement shall extend c. Composite slabs of concrete elements constructed in
from the slab edge for a distance not less than the slab separate placements but connected so that all
tendon spacing. elements resist loads as a unit;
d. Two-way joist systems in accordance with Section

408.8.
408.2 General
408.2.1 A slab system shall be permitted to be

designed by any procedure satisfying equilibrium and
geometric compatibility, provided that design strength at
every section is at least equal to required strength, and all
serviceability requirements are satisfied. The direct design
method of Section 408.10 or the equivalent frame method
of Section 408.11 is permitted for design where
applicable.
408.2.2 The effects of concentrated loads and openings

408.2.3 Slabs prestressed with an average effective

compressive stress less than 0.9 MPa shall be designed as
non-prestressed slabs.
408.2.4 A drop panel in a non-prestressed slab, where

used to reduce the minimum required thickness in
accordance with Section 408.3.1.1 or the quantity of
deformed negative moment reinforcement at a support in
accordance with Section 408.5.2.2, shall satisfy (a) and
(b):
a. The drop panel shall project below the slab at least

114of the adjacent slab thickness;
b. The drop panel shall extend in each direction from

the centerline of support a distance not less than 1/6
the span length measured from center-to-center of
supports in that direction.

4-48 CHAPTER 4 _, Structural Concrete
408.2.5 A shear cap, where used to increase the critical Table 408.3.1.1 Minimum Thickness of
section for shear at a slab-column joint, shall project Non-Prestressed Two-Way Slabs without
below the slab soffit and extend horizontally from the Interior Beams (mm.) [I]
face of the column a distance at least equal to the
thickness of the projection below the slab soffit. Without drop panels 131 With drop panels 1 1
3
Interior Interior
408.2.6 Materials Exterior panels Exterior panels
panels panels
Without With Without With
408.2.6.1 Design properties for concrete shall be {Y' edge edge edge edge
141
selected to be in accordance with Section 419. MPa[2] beams beams beams beamsl41
280 fn/33 fn/36 fn/36 fn/36 fn/40 fn/40
408.2.6.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall 420 fn/30 fn/33 fn/33 fn/33 fn/36 fn/36
be selected to be in accordance with Section 420. 520 fn/28 fn/31 fn/31 fn/31 fn/34 f,j34 I
408.2.6.3 Materials, design and detailing requirements [I] inisthe clear span in the long direction, measured face-to-face of
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with supports (mm.).
Section 420.7. [2] For {y between the values given in the table, minimum thickness
shall be calculated by linear interpnlation
408.2.7 Connections to Other Members [3] Drop panels as given in Section 408.2.4.
[4] Slabs with beams between columns along exterior edges. The value
of at for the edge beam shall be calculated in accordance with
408.2.7.1 Connections of two-way slabs to supporting
Section 408.10.2.7. Exterior panels shall be considered to be without
members shall be in accordance with Section 415.
edge beams if at is less than O.S.
408.3 Design Limits 408.3.1.2 For non-prestressed slabs with beams spanning
between supports on all sides, overall slab thickness h
408.3.1 Minimum Slab Thickness shall satisfy the limits in Table 408.3.1.2, unless the
calculated deflection limits of Section 408.3.2 are
408.3.1.1 For non-prestressed slabs without interior satisfied.
beams spanning between supports on all sides, having a
maximum ratio of long-to-short span of 2, overall slab Table 408.3.1.2 Minimum Thickness of Non-
thickness h shall not be less than the limits in Table Prestressed Two-Way Slabs with Beams Spanning
408.3.1.1, and shall be at least the value in (a) or (b), between Supports on All Sides.
unless the calculated deflection limits of Section 408.3.2
are satisfied: arm[l] Minimum h, mm
atm:S; 0.2 Section 408.3.1.1 applies (a)
a. Slabs without drop panels as given in Section 408.2.4
...................................................................... 125mm. en (0.8.1L) 1,400 (b )[2][3]
Greater
0.22 < arm :0; 2.0 36 + SfJear," - 0.2)
of:
b. Slabs drop panels as given in Section 408.2.4 .... 125 (c)
..... " ' ,' 100 mm.
arm> 2.0
Greater en (0.8.1L) 1,400 (d)[2][3]
of:
36 + 9fJ
90 (e)
[I] atm is the average value of at for all beams on edges of a panel
and at shall be calculated in accordance with Section 408.10.2.7.
[2] in is the clear span in the long direction, measured face-to-face of
beams (mm.).
[3]p is the ratio of clear spans in long to short directions of slab.
408.3.1.2.1 At discontinuous edges of slabs conforming

to Section 408.3.1.2, an edge beam with at 2:: 0.80 shall
be provided, or the minimum thickness required by (b) or
(d) of Table 408.3.1.2 shall be increased by at least 10
percent in the panel with a discontinuous edge.
408.3.1.3 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall

be permitted to be included in h if it is placed

CHJ\PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-49
monolithically with the floor slab, or if the floor finish is 406. Alternatively, the provisions of Section 408.10 for
designed to be composite with the floor slab in the direct design method shall be permitted for the
JI' accordance with Section 416.4. analysis of non-prestressed slabs and the provisions of
Section 408.11 for the equivalent frame method shall be
408.3.1.4 If single- or multiple-leg stirrups are used as permitted for the analysis of non-prestressed and
shear reinforcement, the slab thickness shall be sufficient prestressed slabs, except Sections 408.11.6.5 and
to satisfy the requirements for d in Section 422.6.7.1. 408.11.6.6 shall not apply to prestressed slabs.
408.3.2 Calculated Deflection Limits 408.4.1.3 For prestressed slabs, effects of reactions
induced by prestressing shall be considered in accordance
408.3.2.1 Immediate and time-dependent deflections with Section 405.3.11.
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 424.2 and
shall not exceed the limits in Section 424.2.2 for two-way 408.4.1.4 For a slab system supported by columns or
slabs given in (a) through (c): walls, dimensions C1, cz, and fn shall be based on an
effective support area. The effective support area is the
a. Non-prestressed slabs not satisfying Section 408.3.1; intersection of the bottom surface of the slab, or drop
panel or shear cap if present, with the largest right circular
b. Non-prestressed slabs without interior beams cone, right pyramid, or tapered wedge whose surfaces are
spanning between the supports on all sides and located within the column and the capital or bracket and
having a ratio of long-to-short span exceeding 2.0; are oriented no greater than 45 degrees to the axis of the
column.
c. Prestressed slabs.
408.4.1.5 A column strip is a design strip with a width
408.3.2.2 For non-prestressed composite concrete slabs on each side of a column centerline equal to the lesser of
satisfying Sections 408.3.1.1 or 408.3.1.2, deflections 0.25fz and 0.25f1. A column strip shall include beams
occurring after the member becomes composite need not within the strip, if present.
be calculated. Deflections occurring before the member
becomes composite shall be investigated, unless the pre- 408.4.1.6 A middle strip is a design strip bounded by
composite thickness also satisfies Sections 408.3.1.1 or two column strips.
408.3.1.2.
408.4.1. 7 A panel is bounded by column, beam, or wall
408.3.3 Reinforcement Strain Limit in Non- centerlines on all sides.
Prestressed Slabs .
408.4.1.8 For monolithic or fully composite construction
408.3.3.1 For non-prestressed slabs, e, shall be at least supporting two-way slabs, a beam includes that portion of
0.004. slab, on each side of the beam extending a distance equal
to the projection of the beam above or below the slab,
408.3.4 Stress Limits in Prestressed Slabs whichever is greater, but not greater than four times the
slab thickness.
408.3.4.1 Prestressed slabs shall be designed as Class U
408.4.1.9 Combining the results of a gravity load
with It ::;0.50.[1';. Other stresses in prestressed slabs
analysis with the results of a lateral load analysis shall be
immediately after transfer and at service loads shall not
permitted.
exceed the permissible stresses in Sections 424.5.3 and
424.5.4.
408.4.2 Factored Moment
408.4 Required Strength
408.4.2.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, Mu at
the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the face
408.4.1 General
of support, except if analyzed in accordance with Section
408.4.2.2.
408.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated In
accordance with the factored load combinations In
408.4.2.2 For slabs analyzed using the direct design
Section 405.
method or the equivalent frame method, Mu at the
support shall be located in accordance with Section
408.10 or 408.11, respectively.
accordance with the analysis procedures given in Section
National Structural Code of tile Philippines Volume I, 7'h Edition, 2015

408.4.2.3 Factored Slab Moment Resisted by the 408.4.2.3.6 The fraction of M sc not calculated to be
Column resisted by flexure shall be assumed to be resisted by
eccentricity of shear in accordance with Section
408.4.2.3.1 If gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other 408.4.4.2.
effects cause a transfer of moment between the slab and
column, a fraction of M sc» the factored slab moment 408.4.3 Factored One-Way Shear
resisted by the column at a joint, shall be transferred by
flexure in accordance with Sections 408.4.2.3.2 through 408.4.3.1 For slabs built integrally with supports, V u at
408.4.2.3.5. the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the face
of support.
408.4.2.3.2 The fraction of factored slab moment
resisted by the column, YrMsc, shall be assumed to be 408.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
transferred by flexure, where Y] shall be calculated by: critical section located d from the face of support for
non-prestressed slabs and h/2 from the face of support
1 for prestressed slabs shall be permitted to be designed for
y,=---- (408.4.2.3.2) VII at that critical section if (a) through (c) are satisfied:
1+ (i)~
a. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear,
introduces compression into the end regions of the
408.4.2.3.3 The effective slab width bs1ab for resisting slab;
Y fM sc shall be the width of column or capital plus 1.5h
of slab or drop panel on either side of column or capital. b. Loads are applied at or near the top surface of the
slab;
408.4.2.3.4 For non-prestressed slabs, where the
limitations on Vug and e, in Table 408.4.2.3.4 are c. No concentrated load occurs between the face of
satisfied, Y r shall be permitted to be increased to the support and critical section.
maximum modified values provided in Table 408.4.2.3.4,
where Vc is calculated in accordance with Section 408.4.4 Factored Two-Way Shear
422.6.5, and Vug is the factored shear stress on the slab
408.4.4.1 Critical Section
critical section for two-way action due to gravity loads
without moment transfer.
408.4.4.1.1 Slabs shall be evaluated for two-way shear in
the vicinity of columns, concentrated loads, and reaction
408.4.2.3.5 Concentration of reinforcement over the
areas at critical sections in accordance with Section
column by closer spacing or additional reinforcement
422.6.4.
shall be used to resist moment on the effective slab width
defined in Sections 408.4.2.3.2 and 408.4.2.3.3.
408.4.4.1.2 Slabs reinforced with stirrups or headed
shear stud reinforcement shall be evaluated for two-way
Table 408.4.2.3.4 Maximum Modified Values ofYr for
shear at critical sections in accordance with Section
Non-Prestressed Two-Way Slabs 422.6.4.2.
Et
Column Span (within Maximum Modified 408.4.4.1.3 Slabs reinforced with shearheads shall be
Vug
Location Direction bs1ab) Yr evaluated for two-way shear at critical sections in
accordance with Section 422.6.9.8.
Corner Either
column direction
s O.S¢vc ;::0.004 1.0
408.4.4.2 Factored Two-Way Shear Stress Due to
Perpen-
Shear and Factored Slab Moment
dicular to ~ 0.7S¢vc :;::0.004 1.0
the edge Resisted by the Column
Edge
column 1.25
Parallel to
the edge
~ 0.4¢vc 2: 0.010 1 + e-) IF, ~ 1.0
3 . b,
408.4.4.2.1 For two-way shear with factored slab
moment resisted by the column, factored shear stress Vu
shall be calculated at critical sections in accordance with
US Section 408.4.4.1. Factored shear stress vll corresponds to
Interior Either
~ O.4¢vc
::: 5'1.0
a combination of vltg and the shear stress produced by
column direction 0.010
1+(;)~ YvMsco where Yv is given in Section 408.4.4.2.2 and Msc
is given in Section 408.4.2.3.1.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines 1 Inc. (ASEP)
__-
~,'
408.4.4.2.2 The fraction of M sc transferred by 408.5.3 Shear

eccentricity of shear, YvMsc, shall be applied at the
centroid of the critical section in accordance with Section 408.5.3.1 Design shear strength of slabs in the vicinity of
408.4.4.1, where: columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas shall be the
more severe of Sections 408.5.3.1.1 and 408.5.3.1.2.
Yv = 1- Y] (408.4.4.2.2)
408.5.3.1.1 For one-way shear, where each critical
408.4.4.2.3 The factored shear stress resulting from section to be investigated extends in a plane across the
YvMsc shall be assumed to vary linearly about the entire slab width, V n shall be calculated in accordance
centroid of the critical section in accordance with Section with Section 422.5.
408.4.4.1.
408.5.3.1.2 For two-way shear, Vn shall be calculated in
408.5 Design Strength accordance with Section 422.6.
408.5.1 General 408.5.3.2 For composite concrete slabs, horizontal shear

strength, V nh» shall be calculated in accordance with
408.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination, Section 416.4.
design strength shall satisfy rpSn 2: U, including (a)
through (d). Interaction between load effects shall be 408.5.4 Openings in Slab Systems
considered.
408.5.4.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in slab
a. rpMn 2: Mu at all sections along the span in each systems if shown by analysis that all strength and
direction; serviceability requirements, including the limits on
deflections, are satisfied.
b. rpMn 2: YtMsc within bs1ab as defined III Section
408.4.2.3.3; 408.5.4.2 As an alternative to Section 408.5.4.1,
openings shall be permitted in slab systems without
beams in accordance with (a) through (d):
c. rpV n 2: V u at all sections along the span in each
direction for one-way shear;
a. Openings of any size shall be permitted in the area
common to intersecting middle strips, but the total
d. rpvn 2: Vu at the critical sections defined in Section
quantity of reinforcement in the panel shall be at least
408.4.4.1 for two-way shear.
that required. for the panel without the opening;
408.5.1.2 rp shall be in accordance with Section 421.2.
b. At two intersecting column strips, not more than 1/8
the width of column strip in either span shall be
408.5.1.3 If shearheads are provided, Sections 422.6.9
interrupted by openings. A quantity of reinforcement
and 408.5.1.l(a) shall be satisfied in the vicinity of the
at least equal to that interrupted by an opening shall
column. Beyond each arm of the shearhead, Section
be added on the sides of the opening;
408.5.1.1(a) through (d) shall apply.
c. At the intersection of one column strip and one
408.5.2 Moment
middle strip, not more than 1/4 of the reinforcement
in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. A
408.5.2.1 Mn shall be calculated in accordance with
quantity of reinforcement at least equal to that
Section 422.3.
interrupted by an opening shall be added on the sides
of the opening;
408.5.2.2 In calculating Mn for non-prestressed slabs
with a drop panel, the thickness of the drop panel below
d. If an opening is located within a column strip or
the slab shall not be assumed to be greater than 114 the closer than 10h from a concentrated load or reaction
distance from the edge of drop panel to the face of area, Section 422.6.4.3 for slabs without shearheads
column or column capital. or Section 422.6.9.9 for slabs with shearheads shall
be satisfied.
408.5.2.3 In calculating Mn for prestressed slabs,
external tendons shall be considered as unbonded unless
the external tendons are effectively bonded to the slab
along its entire length.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volurne I, ill Edition. 2015

408.6 Reinforcement Limits Table 408.6.2.3

" Minimum Bonded Deformed Longitudinal
408.6.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in Non- Reinforcement As,min in Two-Way Slabs
Prestressed Slabs with Bonded or Unbonded Tendons
408.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement, Calculated {t after

Region As,min mm'
As, min shall be provided near the tension face in the all losses, MPa
direction of the span under consideration in accordance
Positive
t. ~0.17.f1Z Not required (a)
with Table 408.6.1.1. Moment Nc (b)[ 1],[2].[4]
0.17.f1Z < it s o.sm O.Sf,
Table 408.6.1.1 Negative
As,min for Non-Prestressed Two-Way Slabs moment (c)
at
it s 0.s.f1Z 0.0007SAct [3],[4]
columns
Reinforcement 2
{y, MPa As,minmm. [1] The value of fy shall not exceed 420 MPa.
type
Deformed bars <420 0.0020Ag (2] N c = the resultant tensile force acting on the portion of the
concrete cross section that is subjected to tensile stresses due
Deformed bars O:601B x '1-20 to the combined effects of service loads and effective
or welded wire :::420
Greater Iy As prestress.
of:
reinforcement 0.0014Ag (3] Act = greater gross cross-sectional area of the slab beam strips
of the two orthogonal equivalent frames intersecting at a
colunm of a two-way slab.
(4] For slabs with bonded tendons, it shall be permitted to reduce
408.6.2 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in As. min by the area of the bonded prestressed reinforcement
Prestressed Slabs located within the area used to determine N c for positive
moment, or within the width of slab defined in Section
40B.7.5.3(a) for negative moment.
408.6.2.1 For prestressed slabs, the effective prestress
force Apsfse shall provide a minimum average
408.7 Reinforcement Detailing
compressive stress of 0.9 MPa 011 the slab section
tributary to the tendon or tendon group. For slabs with
408.7.1 General
varying cross section along the slab span, either parallel
or perpendicular to the tendon or tendon group, the
408.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
minimum average effective prestress of 0.9 MPa is
required at every cross section tributary to the tendon or
tendon group along the span.
408.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
408.6.2.2 For slabs with bonded prestressed
Section 425.4.
reinforcement, total quantity of As and Aps shall be
adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the
408.7.1.3 Splice lengths of deformed reinforcement shall
cracking load calculated on the basis of f r defined in
be in accordance with Section 425.5.
Section 419.2.3.
408.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be detailed in accordance
408.6.2.2.1 For slabs with both flexural and shear design
with Section 425.6.
strength at least twice the required strength, Section
408.6.2.2 need not be satisfied.
408.7.2 Flexural Reinforcement Spacing
408.6.2.3 For prestressed slabs, a JJ11l11tllUl11 area of
408.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall be inaccordance
bonded deformed longitudinal reinforcement As. m(,,' shall
with Section 425.2.
be provided in the pre-compressed tensile zone in the
direction of (he span under consideration in accordance
408.7.2.2 For non-prestressed solid slabs, maximum
with Table 408.6.2.3.
spacing s of deformed longitudinal reinforcement shall be
the lesser of 2h and 450 mm at critical sections, and the
lesser of 3h and 450 mm at other sections.
408.7.2.3 For prestressed slabs with uniformly

distributed loads, maximum spacing s of tendons or

groups of tendons in at least one direction shall be the a, Positive moment reinforcement shall extend to the
lesser of 8h and 1.5 m. edge of slab and have embedment, straight or
hooked, at least 150 mm. into spandrel beams,
408.7.2.4 Concentrated loads and openings shall be columns, or walls;
considered in determining tendon spacing.
b. Negative moment reinforcement shall be bent,
408.7.3 Corner Restraint in Slabs hooked, or otherwise anchored into spandrel beams,
columns, or walls, and shall be developed at the face
408.7.3.1 At exterior corners of slabs supported by edge of support.
walls or where one or more edge beams have a value of f
greater than 1.0, reinforcement at top and bottom of slab 408.7.4.1.2 Where a slab is not supported by a spandrel
shall be designed to resist Mu per unit width due to corner beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or where a slab
effects equal to the maximum positive Mu per unit width cantilevers beyond the support, anchorage of
in the slab panel. reinforcement shall be permitted within the slab.
408.7.3.1.1 Factored moment due to corner effects, Mu, 408.7.4.1.3 For slabs without beams, reinforcement
shall be assumed to be about an axis perpendicular to the extensions shall be in accordance with (a) through (c):
diagonal from the comer in the top of the slab and about
an axis parallel to the diagonal from the corner in the a. Reinforcement lengths shall be at least in accordance
bottom of the slab. with Figure 408.7.4.1.3(a), and if slabs act as primary
members resistmg lateral loads, reinforcement
408.7.3.1.2 Reinforcement shall be provided for a lengths shall be at least those required by analysis;
distance in each direction from the comer equal to 1/5 the
longer span. b. If adjacent spans are unequal, extensions of negative
moment reinforcement beyond the face of support in
408.7.3.1.3 Reinforcement shall be placed parallel to the accordance with Figure 408.7.4.1.3(a) shall be based
diagonal in the top of the slab and perpendicular to the on the longer span;
diagonal in the bottom of the slab. Alternatively,
reinforcement shall be placed in two layers parallel to the c. Bent bars shall be permitted only where the depth-to
sides of the slab in both the top and bottom of the slab. span ratio permits use of bends of 45 degrees or less.
408.7.4 Flexural Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed 408.7.4.2 Structural Integrity

Slabs
408.7.4.2.1 All bottom deformed bars or deformed wires
408.7.4.1 Termination of Reinforcement within the column strip, in each direction, shall be
continuous or spliced with full mechanical, full welded, or
408.7.4.1.1 Where a slab is supported on spandrel Class B tension splices. Splices shall be located in
beams, columns, or walls, anchorage of reinforcement accordance with Figure 408.7.4. 1.3(a).
perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall satisfy (a) and
(b):
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ill Edition, 2015

LOCATtON MINIMUM ....

ATIECT10N
WITHOUT DROP PANELS
I Wf1'H DROP PANELS
t O.SOI" 1 0.30t,.. J fL 0.331..
TOP
ReMAINDER
I1
II ! O.20tn
II,!
I
!
I
'II
0,204 i 10.20/"
Ll,
!
,
i
,
0.204 !I
,I
.--1' ! '-f'-
COLUMN
~ ~----~--------~--~------------~------~------~,~"
l
~~' i :
------------~~
-1M\mm 'V~ 150mm-T
BOTTO..
! Ii:
100%
: !\ IJ I
...
0.2.2("
I I
0.22(" .,+,.. 0.221"
TOP 100% I =)1" "'I
,t
I ~150mm -r-tl-
REMAINDER I-H""!I~t=
__
1.....;'-'-
150_._m_m .• _O._'5_4_~
t.fa.,{_
~
1 r._Max_._O._15_l,, 15O;.,_mm_,-
......
__
_~jL,r+-
" I
~ Ci
ExterIot supput ExterIor st,qJOI't
{No eleb continuity) (No slab oorr,Unuityl
Figure 408.7.4.1.3(a)
Minimum Extensions for Deformed Reinforcement in Two-Way Slabs without Beams
Punching shear crack

intercepted by top
reinforcement
(a) Slab of normal proporttons
Punching shear crack

not Intercepted by top
I'8lnforcement __ ...J
(b) Thick slab
Figure 408.7.4.1.3(b)
Punching Shear Cracks in Slabs with Reinforcement Extensions Consistent with Figure 408.7.4.1.3(a)

408.7.4.2.2 At least two of the column strip bottom bars 408.7.5.5 Termination of Deformed Reinforcement
or wires in each direction shall pass within the region in Slabs with Unbonded Tendons
..." bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column
and shall be anchored at exterior supports. 408.7.5.5.1 Length of deformed reinforcement required
by Section 408.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) and
408.7.4.2.3 In slabs with shearheads where it is not (b):
practical to pass the bottom bars through the column in
accordance with Section 408.7.4.2.2, at least two bottom a. In positive moment areas, length of reinforcement
bars or wires in each direction shall pass through the shall be at least f n/3 and be centered in those areas;
shearhead as close to the column as practicable and be
continuous or spliced with full mechanical, full welded, or b. In negative moment areas, reinforcement shall extend
Class B tension splices. At exterior columns, the bars or at least f n/ 6 on each side of the face of support.
wires shall be anchored at the shearhead.
408.7.5.6 Structural Integrity
408.7.5 Flexural Reinforcement in Prestressed
Slabs 408.7.5.6.1 Except as permitted in Section 408.7.5.6.3,
at least two tendons with 12 mm. diameter or larger strand
408.7.5.1 External tendons shall be attached to the slab shall be placed in each direction at columns in accordance
in a manner that maintains the specified eccentricity with (a) or (b):
between the tendons and the concrete centroid through the
full range of anticipated member deflections. a. Tendons shall pass through the region bounded by
the longitudinal reinforcement of the column;
408.7.5.2 If bonded deformed longitudinal reinforcement
is required to satisfy flexural strength or for tensile stress b. Tendons shall be anchored within the region bounded
conditions in accordance with Eq. 408.6.2.3(b), the by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column, and
detailing requirements of Section 407.7.3 shall be the anchorage shall be located beyond the column
satisfied. centroid and away from the anchored span.
408.7.5.3 Bonded longitudinal reinforcement required by 408.7.5.6.2 Outside of the column and shear cap faces,
Eq. 408.6.2.3(c) shall be placed in the top of the slab, and the two structural integrity tendons required by Section
shall be in accordance with (a) through (c): 408.7.5.6.1 shall pass under any orthogonal tendons 111
adjacent spans.
a. Reinforcement shall be distributed between lines that
are 1. 5h outside opposite faces of the column 408.7.5.6.3 Slabs with tendons not satisfying Section
support; 408.7.5.6.1 shall be permitted if bonded bottom deformed
reinforcement is provided in each direction in accordance
b. At least four deformed bars, deformed wires, or with Sections 408.7.5.6.3.1 through 408.7.5.6.3.3.
bonded strands shall be provided in each direction;
408.7.5.6.3.1 Minimum bottom deformed reinforcement
c. Maximum spacing s between bonded longitudinal As in each direction shall be the greater of (a) and (b):
reinforcement shall not exceed 300 mm.
408.7.5.4 Termination of Prestressed Reinforcement a. (408.7.5.6.3.1a)
408.7.5.4.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be

designed and detailed in accordance with Section 425.9. b. (408.7 .5.6.3.1 b)
408.7.5.4.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers

shall be designed and detailed in accordance with Section
where bw is the width of the column face through which
425.8. the reinforcement passes.
408.7.5.6.3.2 Bottom deformed reinforcement

calculated in Section 408.7.5.6.3.1 shall pass within the
region bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the
column and shall be anchored at exterior supports.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volurne I, til Edition, 2016

408.7.5.6.3.3 Bottom deformed reinforcement shall be Table 408.7.7.1.2

anchored to develop f y beyond the column or shear cap Shear Stud Location and Spacing Limits
face.
Maximum
Direction Description
distance or
408.7.6 Shear Reinforcement - Stirrups of mea- of Condition
spacing,
surement measurement
mm.
408.7.6.1 Single-leg, simple-U, multiple-U, and closed Distance
stirrups shall be permitted as shear reinforcement. from
column face
408.7.6.2 Stirrup anchorage and geometry shall be in to first All d/2
peripheral
line of
Perpen- shear studs
408.7.6.3 If stirrups are provided, location and spacing dicular to Non pre-
shall be in accordance with Table 408.7.6.3. column stressed v
ll:;;cpo.s.fil 3d/4
Constant
face slab with
Spacing
Table 408.7.6.3 Non pre-
between
First Stirrup Location and Spacing Limits stressed Vu > cpo.s.fil d/2
peripheral
slab with
lines of
Maximum Prestressed slabs
shear studs
Direction of Description of distance conforming to Section 3d/4
measurement measurement or spacing, 422.6.5.4
mm. Spacing
between
Distance from
adjacent
column face to first d/2 Parallel
shear studs
Perpendicular to stirrup to
column face column
on All 2d
Spacing between peripheral
stirrups
d/2 face
line nearest
to column
Spacing between
Parallel to column face
vertical legs of 2d
face
stirrups
408.8 Non-Prestressed Two-Way Joist Systems
408.7.7 Shear Reinforcement - Headed Studs

408.8.1 General
408.7.7.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement shall be

408.8.1.1 Non-prestressed two-way joist construction
permitted if placed perpendicular to the plane of the slab.
consists of a monolithic combination of regularly spaced
ribs and a top slab designed to span in two orthogonal
408.7.7.1.1 The overall height of the shear stud assembly directions.
shall be at least the thickness of the slab minus the sum of
(a) through (c):
408.8.1.2 Width of ribs shall be at least 100 mm. at any
location along the depth.
a. Concrete cover on the top flexural reinforcement;
408.8.1.3 Overall depth of ribs shall not exceed 3.5
b. Concrete cover on the base rail; times the minimum width.
c. 1/2 the bar diameter of the flexural tension 408.8.1.4 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
reinforcement.
750 mm.
408.7.7.1.2 Headed shear stud reinforcement location and

408.8.1.5 Vcshall be permitted to be taken as 1.1 times
spacing shall be in accordance with Table 408.7.7.1.2.
the values calculated in Section 422.5.
408.8.1.6 For structural integrity, at least one bottom bar

in each joist shall be continuous and shall be anchored to
develop f y at the face of supports.

408.8.1. 7 Reinforcement area perpendicular to the ribs 408.10.1.2 Variations from the limitations in Section
shall satisfy slab moment strength requirements, 408.10.2 shall be permitted if demonstrated by analysis
considering load concentrations, and shall be at least the that equilibrium and geometric companbillty are satisfied,
shrinkage and temperature reinforcement area in the design strength at every section is at least equal LO the
accordance with Section 424.4. required strength, an I serviceability conditions, including
limits on deflection, are met.
408.8.1.8 Two-way joist construction not satisfying the
limitations of Sections 408.8.1.1 through 408.8.1.4 shall 408.10.1.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports
be designed as slabs and beams. shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
408.8.2 Joist Systems with Structural Fillers 408.10.2 Limitations for Use of Direct Design
Method
408.8.2.1 If permanent burned clay or concrete tile
fillers of material having a unit compressive strength at 408.10.2.1 There shall be at least three continuous
least equal to f~ in the joists are used, Sections spans in each direction.
408.8.2.1.1 and 408.8.2.1.2 shall apply.
408.10.2.2 Successive span lengths measured center-to
408.8.2.1.1 Slab thickness over fillers shall be at least center of supports in each direction shall not differ by
the greater of 1112 the clear distance between ribs and more than one-third the longer span.
40mm.
408.10.2.3 Panels shall be rectangular, with the ratio of
408.8.2.1.2 For calculation of shear and negative longer to shorter panel dimensions, measured center to
moment strength, it shall be permitted to include the center of supports, not to exceed 2.
vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs. Other
portions of fillers shall not be included in strength 408.10.2.4 Column offset shall not exceed 10 percent of
calculations. the span in direction of offset from either axis between
centerlines of successive columns.
408.8.3 Joist Systems with Other Fillers
408.10.2.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and
408.8.3.1 If fillers not complying with Section 408.8.2.1 uniformly distributed over an entire panel.
or removable forms are used, slab thickness shall be at
least the greater of 1112 the clear distance between ribs 408.10.2.6 Unfactored live load shall not exceed two
and 50 mm. times the unfactored dead load.
408.9 Lift-slab Construction 408.10.2.7 For a panel with beams between supports on
all sides, Eq. 408.10.2.7a shall be satisfied for beams in
408.9.1 In slabs constructed with lift-slab methods the two perpendicular directions.
where it is impractical to pass the tendons required by
Section 408.7.5.6.1 or the bottom bars required by Section
408.7.4.2 or 408.7.5.6.3 through the column, at least two (408.10.2.7a)
post-tensioned tendons or two bonded bottom bars or
wires in each direction shall pass through the lifting collar
as close to the column as practicable, and be continuous where afl and al2 are calculated by
or spliced with full mechanical, full welded, or Class B
tension splices. At exterior columns, the reinforcement
shall be anchored at the lifting collar. (408.10.2.7b)
408.10 Direct Design Method

408.10.3 Total Factored Static Moment for a Span
408.10.1 General
408.10.3.1 Total factored static moment, M 0' for a span
408.10.1.1 Two-way slabs satisfying the limits In shall be calculated for a strip bounded laterally by the
Section 408.10.2 shall be permitted to be designed in panel centerline on each side of the centerline of supports.
accordance with this section.
National Structul-ai Code of the Philippines Volurne I, ill Edition, 2016

408.10.3.2 The absolute sum of positive and average 408.10.4.5 Negative Mu shall be the greater of the two
negative Mu in each direction shall be at least: interior negative M u calculated for spans framing into a
common support unless an analysis is made to distribute
the unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffnesses
(408.1 0.3.2)
ofadjoining elements.
408.10.3.2.1 In Eq. 408.10.3.2, In is the clear span length 408.10.4.6 Edge beams or edges of slabs shall be
in the direction that moments are considered, shall extend designed to resist in torsion their share of exterior
from face to face of columns, capitals, brackets, or walls, negative n;
and shall be at least 0.6511,
408.10.5 Factored Moments in Column Strips
408.10.3.2.2 In Eq. 408.10.3.2, if the transverse span of
panels on either side of the centerline of supports varies, 408.10.5.1 The column strip shall resist the portion of
12 shall be taken as the average of adjacent transverse interior negative Mu in accordance with Table 408.10.5.1.
spans.
Table 408.10.5.1
408.10.3.2.3 In Eq. 408.10.3.2, if the span adjacent Portion of Interior Negative Mu in Column Strip
and parallel to a slab edge is being considered, the
distance from edge to panel centerline shall be substituted 12lf1
aflldll
for 12, 0.5 1.0 2.0
0 0.75 0.75 0.75
408.10.4 Distribution of Total Factored Static 21.0 0.90 0.75 0.45
Moment Note: Linear interpclatlons shall be made between values shown.
408.10.4.1 In an interior span, M 0 shall be distributed 408.10.5.2 The column strip shall resist the portion of
as follows: O.65Mo to negative moment and O.35Mo to exterior negative Mu in accordance with Table
positive moment. 408.10.5.2.
Table 408.10.5.2
408.10.4.2 In an end span, Mo shall be distributed Portion of Exterior Negative M u in Column Strip
inaccordance with Table 408.10.4.2.
Table 408.10.4.2 12/11

af112/ll Pt 0.5 1.0 2.0
Distribution Coefficients for End Spans
0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Slab without Exterior
0
Slab >2.5 0.75 0.75 0.75
with beams between edge fully
beams interior supports restrained 0 1.0 1.0 1.0
21.0
Exterior between Without With 22.5 0.90 0.75 0.45
edge all edge edge Note: Lmear interpolations shall be made between values shown. P.. IS
unrestrained supports beam beam calculated using Eg. 408.10.S.2a where C is calculated using Eg.
Interior 408.10.S.2b.
negative
0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
Positive 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
(408.10.5.2a)
Exterior
negative
0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
(408.10.5.2b)
408.10.4.3 Modification of negative and positive
factored moments by up to 10 percent shall be permitted
if the total factored static moment for a panel, M 0' in the 408.10.5.3 For T- or L-sections, it shall be permitted to
direction considered is at least that calculated by Eq. calculate the constant C in Eq. 408.l0.5.2b by dividing
408.10.3.2. Moment redistribution in accordance with the section, as given in Section 408.4.1.8, into separate
Section 406.6.5 is not permitted. rectangular parts and summing the values of C for each
part.
408.10.4.4 Critical section for negative M u shall be at
the face of rectangular supports. 408.10.5.4 If the width of the column or wall is at least
(3/4)12, negative Mu shall be uniformly distributed
across 12,

408.]0.5.5 The column strip shall resist the portion of 408.10.7 Factored Moments in Columns and Walls
positive Mu in accordance with Table 408.10.5.5.
408.10.7.1 Columns and walls built integrally with a
Table 408.10.5.5 slab system shall resist moments caused by factored loads
Portion of Positive Mu ill Column Strip on the slab system.
afl «.«. e if I 408.10.7.2 At an interior support, columns or walls

0.5 1.0 2.0 above and below the slab shall resist the factored moment
0 0.60 0.60 0.60 calculated by Eq. 408.10.7.2 in direct proportion to their
2:1.0 0.90 0.75 0.45 stiffnesses unless a general analysis is made.
Note: Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
408.10.5.6 For slabs with beams between supports, the (408.10.7.2)

slab portion of column strips shall resist column strip
moments not resisted by beams. where qDu', f2', and fn', refer to the shorter span.
408.10.5.7 Factored Moments in Beams 408.10.7.3 The gravity load moment to be transferred
between slab and edge column in accordance with Section
408.10.5.7.1 Beams between supports shall resist the 408.4.2.3 shall not be less than O.3Mo.
portion of column strip Mu in accordance with Table
408.10.5.7.1. 408.10.8 Factored Shear in Slab Systems with Beams
Table 408.10.5.7.1 408.10.8.1 Beams between supports shall resist the

Portion of Column Strip Mu in Beams portion of shear in accordance with Table 408.1 0.8.1
caused by factored loads on tributary areas in accordance
Distribution coefficient with Figure 408.1 0.8.1.
o o
2:1.0 0.85 Table 408.10.8.1 Portion of Shear Resisted by Beam
Note: Linear interpolation shall be made between values shown.
(afl f2/ft) Distribution Coefficient
0 0
408.10.5.7.2 In addition to moments calculated >1.0 1.0
according to Section 408.10.5.7.1, beams shall resist
Note: Linear interpolation shall be made between values shown.
moments caused by factored loads applied directly to the
beams, including the weight of the beam stem above and
below the slab.
408.10.6 Factored Moments in Middle Strips
408.10.6.1 That portion of negative and positive

factored moments not resisted by column strips shall be
proportionately assigned to corresponding half middle
strips.
408.10.6.2 Each middle strip shall resist the sum of the

moments assigned to its two half middle strips.
408.10.6.3 A middle strip adjacent and parallel to a wall

supported edge shall resist twice the moment assigned to
the half middle strip corresponding to the first row of
Figure 408.10.8.1
interior supports.
Tributary Area for Shear on an Interior Beam
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. Edition, 20'i 6

408.10.8.2 In addition to shears calculated according to loading, a separate analysis of each floor or roof with the
Section 408.10.8.1, beams shall resist shears caused by far ends of columns considered fixed is permitted.
factored loads applied directly to the beams, including the
weight of the beam stem above and below the slab. 408.11.2.6 If slab-beams are analyzed separately, it
shall be permitted to calculate the moment at a given
408.10.8.3 Calculation of required slab shear strength support by assuming that the slab-beam is fixed at
based on the assumption that loads is distributed to supports two or more panels away, provided the slab
supporting beams in accordance with Section 408.10.8.1 continues beyond the assumed fixed supports.
shall be permitted. Shear resistance to total VII occurring
on a panel shall be provided. 408.11.3 Slab-Beams
408.11 Equivalent Frame Method 408.11.3.1 The moment of inertia of slab-beams from
the center of the column to the face of the column,
408.11.1 General bracket, or capital shall be assumed equal to the moment
of inertia of the slab-beam at the face of the column,
408.11.1.1 All sections of slabs and supporting bracket, or capital divided by the quantity (1- cz/fz)Z,
members in two-way slab systems designed by the where cz and fz are measured transverse to the direction
equivalent frame method shall resist moments and shears of the span for which moments are being determined.
obtained from an analysis in accordance with Sections
408.11.2 through 408.11.6. 408.11.3.2 Variation in moment of inertia along the
axis of slab-beams shall be taken into account.
408.11.1.2 Live load shall be arranged 111 accordance
with Section 406.4.3. 408.11.3.3 It shall be permitted to use the gross cross-
sectional area of concrete to determine the moment of
408.11.1.3 It shall be permitted to account for the inertia of slab-beams at any cross section outside of joints
contribution of metal column capitals to stiffness, or column capitals.
resistance to moment, and resistance to shear.
408.11.4 Columns
408.11.1.4 It shall be permitted to neglect the change in
length of columns and slabs due to direct stress, and 408.11.4.1 The moment of inertia of columns from top
deflections due to shear. to bottom of the slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed to
be infinite.
408.11.2 Equivalent Frames
408.11.4.2 Variation in moment of inertia along the axis
408.11.2.1 The structure shall be modeled by equivalent of columns shall be taken into account.
frames on column lines taken longitudinally and
transversely through the building. 408.11.4.3 It shall be permitted to use the gross cross-
sectional area of concrete to determine the moment of
408.11.2.2 Each equivalent frame shall consist of a row inertia of columns at any cross section outside of joints or
of columns or supports and slab-beam strips bounded column capitals.
laterally by the panel centerline on each side of the
centerline of columns or supports. 408.11.5 Torsional Members
408.11.2.3 Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge shall 408.11.5.1 Torsional members shall be assumed to have
be bounded by that edge and the centerline of the adjacent a constant cross section throughout their length consisting
panel. of the greatest of (a) through (c):
408.11.2.4 Columns or supports shall be assumed to be a. A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the
attached to slab-beam strips by torsional members column, bracket, or capital in the direction of the
transverse to the direction of the span for which moments span for which moments are being determined;
are being calculated and extending to the panel centerlines
on each side of a column. b. For monolithic or fully composite construction, the
portion of slab specified in (a) plus that part of the
408.11.2.5 Analysis of each equivalent frame in its transverse beam above and below the slab;
entirety shall be permitted. Alternatively, for gravity
Association of Structural
CH,I\PTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete 4-61
c. The transverse beam In accordance with Section SECTION 409

408.4.1.8.
BEAMS
408.11.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the
direction of the span for which moments are being 409.1 Scope
calculated, the torsional stiffness shall be multiplied by
the ratio of the moment of inertia of the slab with such a 409.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non-
beam to the moment of inertia of the slab without such a prestressed and prestressed beams, including:
beam.
a. Composite beams of concrete elements constructed in
408.11.6 Factored Moments separate placements but connected so that all
elements resist loads as a unit;
408.11.6.1 At interior supports, the critical section for
negative Mu in both column and middle strips shall be b. One-way joist systems in accordance with Section
taken at the face of rectilinear supports, but not farther 409.8;
away than 0.175£1 from the center of a column.
c. Deep beams in accordance with Section 409.9-.
408.11.6.2 At exterior supports without brackets or
capitals, the critical section for negative Mu in the span 409.2 General
perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at the face of the
supporting element. 409.2.1 Materials
408.11.6.3 At exterior supports with brackets or 409.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
capitals, the critical section for negative Mu in the span selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance from
the face of the supporting element not exceeding one-half 409.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall
the projection of the bracket or capital beyond the face of be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
the supporting element.
409.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements
408.11.6.4 Circular or regular polygon-shaped supports for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with
shall be assumed to be square supports with the same area Section 420.7.
for location of critical section for negative design
moment. 409.2.2 Connection to Other Members
408.11.6.5 Where slab systems within limitations of 409.2.2.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam-column
Section 408.10.2 are analyzed by the equivalent frame joints shall satisfy Section 415.
method, it shall be permitted to reduce the calculated
moments in such proportion that the absolute sum of the 409.2.2.2 For precast construction, connections shall
positive and average negative design moments need not satisfy the force transfer requirements of Section 416.2.
exceed the value obtained from Eq. 408.10.3.2.
409.2.3 Stability
408.11.6.6 It shall be permitted to distribute moments at
critical sections to column strips, beams, and middle strips 409.2.3.1 If a beam is not continuously laterally braced,
in accordance with the direct design method in Section (a) and (b) shall be satisfied:
408.10 provided that Eq, 408.10.2.7a is satisfied.
a. Spacing of lateral bracing shall not exceed 50 times
the least width of compression flange or face;
b. Spacing of lateral bracing shall take into account

effects of eccentric loads.
409.2.3.2 In prestressed beams, buckling of thin webs

and flanges shall be considered. If there is intermittent
contact between prestressed reinforcement and an
oversize duct, member buckling between contact points
shall be considered.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7til Edition 2016

409.2.4 T-Beam Construction 409.3.1.1.1 For t,other than 420 MPa, the expressions
In Table 409.3.1.1 shall be multiplied by
409.2.4.1 In T-beam construction, flange and web (0.4 + fy/700).
concrete shall be placed monolithically or made
composite in accordance with Section 416.4. 409.3.1.1.2 For non-prestressed beams made of
lightweight concrete having w c in the range of 1440 to
409.2.4.2 Effective flange width shall be in accordance 1840 kg/nr', the expressions in Table 409.3.1.1 shall be
with Section 406.3.2. multiplied by the greater of (a) and (b):
409.2.4.3 For T-beam flanges where the primary flexural a. 1.65 - O.0003wc;
slab reinforcement is parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the beam, reinforcement in the flange perpendicular to the
b. 1.09.
longitudinal axis of the beam shall be in accordance with
Section 407.5.2.3.
409.3.1.1.3 For non-prestressed composite beams made
of a combination of lightweight and normal-weight
409.2.4.4 For torsional design according to Section
concrete shored during construction, and where the
422.7, the overhanging flange width used to calculate lightweight concrete is in compression, the modifier of
Acp,Ag, and Pcp shall be in accordance with (a) and (b): Section 409.3.1.1.2 shall apply.
a. The overhanging flange width shall include that 409.3.1.2 The thickness of a concrete floor finish shall
portion of slab on each side of the beam extending a be permitted to be included in It if it is placed
distance equal to the projection of the beam above or monolithically with the beam, or if the floor finish is
below the slab, whichever is greater, but not greater designed to be composite with the beam in accordance
than four times the slab thickness; with Section 416.4.
b. The overhanging flanges shall be neglected in cases 409.3.2 Calculated Deflection Limits
where the parameter Ap Z /Pcp for solid sections or
Ap Z /Pcp for hollow sections calculated for a beam 409.3.2.1 For non-prestressed beams not satisfying
with flanges is less than that calculated for the same Section 409.3.1 and for prestressed beams, immediate and
beam ignoring the flanges. time-dependent deflections shall be calculated in
accordance with Section 424.2 and shall not exceed the
409.3 Design Limits limits in Section 424.2.2.
409.3.1 Minimum Beam Depth 409.3.2.2 For non-prestressed composite concrete beams
satisfying Section 409.3.1, deflections occurring after the
409.3.1.1 For non-prestressed beams not supporting or member becomes composite need not be calculated.
attached to partitions or other construction likely to be Deflections occurring before the member becomes
damaged by large deflection, overall beam depth h shall composite shall be investigated unless the pre-composite
atisfy (he limits in able 409.3. l.I, unless the calculated depth also satisfies Section 409.3.1.
deflection limns ofSection 409.3.2 are satisfied.
409.3.3 Reinforcement Strain Limit in
Table 409.3.1.1 Non-Prestressed Beams
Minimum Depth of Non-Prestressed Beams
409.3.3.1 For non-prestressed beams with Pu <
O.10 f~Ag , e, shall be at least 0.004.
Support Condition Minimum Mil
Simply supported f/16 409.3.4 Stress Limits in Prestressed Beams
One end continuous f118.S
Both ends continuous fl_21 409.3.4.1 Prestressed beams shall be classified as Class
Cantilever f/8 U, T, or C in accordance with Section 424.5.2.
[I) Expressions applicable for normal weight concrete and f y = 420 MPa.
For other cases, minimum h shall be modified in accordance with 409.3.4.2 Stresses in prestressed beams immediately
Sections 409.3. 1.l.l through 409.3.1.1.3, as appropriate. after transfer and at service loads shall not exceed
permissible stresses in Sections 424.5.3 and 424.5.4 .
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines) Inc. (/\SEP)

409.4 Required Strength prestressed beams shall be permitted to be designed for

T u at that critical section unless a concentrated torsional
409.4.-1 General moment occurs within this distance. In that case, the
critical section shall be taken at the face of the support.
409.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated III
accordance with the factored load combinations III 409.4.4.4 It shall be permitted to reduce T" III
Section 405. accordance with Section 422.7.3.
409.4.1.2 Required strength shall be calculated in 409.5 Design Strength

409.5.1 General
409.4.1.3 For prestressed beams, effects of reactions
induced by prestressing shall be considered in accordance 409.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
with Section 405.3.11. design strength at all sections shall satisfy cpSn 2': U
including (a) through (d). Interaction between load effects
409.4.2 Factored Moment shall be considered.
409.4.2.1 For beams built integrally with supports, Mu

at the support shall be permitted to be calculated at the
face of support.
409.4.3 Factored Shear
409.4.3.1 For beams built integrally with supports, V u at

of support. 409.5.1.2 cp shall be determined in accordance with
Section 42l.2.
409.4.3.2 Sections between the face of support and a
critical section located d from the face of support for non- 409.5.2 Moment
prestressed beams and hj2 from the face of support for
prestressed beams shall be permitted to be designed for 409.5.2.1 If P" < 0.10f~Ag, Mn shall be calculated in
Vu at that critical section if(a) through (c) are satisfied: accordance with Section 422.3.
a. Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, 409.5.2.2 If P" 2': O. 10 f~Ag , M n shall be calculated in
introduces compression into the end region of the accordance with Section 422.4.
beam;
409.5.2.3 For prestressed beams, external tendons shall
b. Loads are applied at or near the top surface of the be considered as unbonded tendons in calculating flexural
beam; strength, unless the external tendons are effectively
bonded to the concrete along the entire length.
c. No concentrated load occurs between the face of
support and critical section.
409.5.3 Shear
409.4.4 Factored Torsion 409.5.3.1 Vn shall be calculated in accordance with

Section 422.5.
409.4.4.1 Unless determined by a more detailed analysis,
it shall be permitted to take the torsional loading from a 409.5.3.2 For composite concrete beams, horizontal
slab as uniformly distributed along the beam.
shear strength V nh shall be calculated in accordance with
Section 416.4.
409.4.4.2 For beams built integrally with supports, Tu at
409.5.4 Torsion
of support.
409.5.4.1 If Tu < cpTth where Tth is given in Section
409.4.4.3 Sections between the face of support and a 422.7, it shall be permitted to neglect torsional effects.
critical section located d from the face of support for non- The minimum reinforcement requirements of Section
prestressed beams or hj2 from the face of support for
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume l, 7nl Edition, 2016

4-64 CH!£\PTER 4 ---Structural Concrete
409.6.4 and the detailing requirements of Sections 409.7.5

and 409.7.6.3 need not be satisfied. a,
409.5.4.2 Tn shall be calculated in accordance with

Section 422.7.
b.
409.5.4.3 Longitudinal and transverse reinforcement
required for torsion shall be added to that required for the
V w Mwand P u that act in combination with the torsion. 409.6.1.3 If As provided at every section is at least one-
third greater than As required by analysis, Sections
409.5.4.4 For prestressed beams, the total area of 409.6.1.1 and 409.6.1.2 need not be satisfied.
longitudinal reinforcement, As and Aps' at each section
shall be designed to resist Mu at that section, plus an 409.6.2 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in
additional concentric longitudinal tensile force equal to Prestressed Beams
At! Y' based on T" at that section.
409.6.2.1 For beams with bonded prestressed
reinforcement, total quantity of As and Aps shall be
409.5.4.5 It shall be permitted to reduce the area of
longitudinal torsional reinforcement in the flexural adequate to develop a factored load at least 1.2 times the
cracking load calculated on the basis of f r defined in
compression zone by an amount equal to Mu/CO. 9dfy),
Section 419.2.3.
where Mu occurs simultaneously with T" at that section,
except that the longitudinal reinforcement area shall not
409.6.2.2 For beams with both flexural and shear design
be less than the minimum required in Section 409.6.4.
strength at least twice the required strength, Section
409.6.2.1 need not be satisfied.
409.5.4.6 For solid sections with an aspect ratio,
h/ bt :2: 4.5, it shall be permitted to use an alternative
409.6.2.3 For beams with unbonded tendons, the
design procedure, provided the adequacy of the procedure
nuntrnum area of bonded deformed longitudinal
has been shown by analysis and substantial agreement
reinforcement As,min shall be:
with results of comprehensive tests. The minimum
reinforcement requirements of Section 409.6.4 need not
be satisfied, but the detailing requirements of Sections As,min = O.004Act (409.6.2.3)
409.7.5 and 409.7.6.3 apply.
where Act is the area of that part of the cross section
409.5.4.7 For solid precast sections with an aspect ratio between the flexural tension face and the centroid of the
h/ b, :2: 4. 5, it shall be perrnitted to use an alternative gross section.
design procedure and open web reinforcement provided
the adequacy of the procedure and reinforcement have 409.6.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
been shown by analysis and substantial agreement with
results of comprehensive tests. The mmrmurn 409.6.3.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement,
reinforcement requirements of Section 409.6.4 and Av,min' shall be provided in all regions where V u >
detailing requirements of Sections 409.7.5 and 409.7.6.3 O. 5CPVc except for the cases in Table 409.6.3.1, where at
need not be satisfied. least Av,min shall be provided where V" > cpV c-
409.6 Reinforcement Limits 409.6.3.2 If shown by testing that the required Mn and
V n can be developed, Section 409.6.3.1 need not be
409.6.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement in Non- satisfied. Such tests shall simulate effects of differential
Prestressed Beams settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change,
based on a realistic assessment of these effects occurring
409.6.1.1 A minimum area of flexural reinforcement in service.
As,minshall be provided at every section where tension
reinforcement is required by analysis. 409.6.3.3 If shear reinforcement is required and torsional
effects can be neglected according to Section 409.5.4.1,
409.6.1.2 As,min shall be the greater of (a) and (b), Av,min shall be in accordance with Table 409.6.3.3
except as provided in Section 409.6.1.3. For a statically
determinate beam with a flange in tension, the value of
bw shall be the lesser of bl and 2bw.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (l-\SEP)

Table 409.6.3.1
Cases Where Av,min is not Required
a.
uo.sev, < Vu:S; CPVc
Conditions
h < 250 mm
h :::;greater of 2.St, or O.Sbw b.
and
h < 600 mm
Constructed with steel
h:::; 600 mm
fibered reinforced
normal-weight 409.7 Reinforcement Detailing
concrete conforming
to Sections and 409.7.1 General
426.4.1.5.1 (a),
426.4.2.2(d), and 409.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
426.12.5.I(a) and with accordance with Section 420.6.1.
_' :::; 40 MPa

Table 409.6.3.3 Required Av,min prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4.
Beam Type Av,mlniS
Non-prestressed
0.062 Jl/w Tyt a
409.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be in
and prestressed Greater accordance with Section 425.5.
with Apslse < of: bw
0.3S b
0.40 CAps + fpu + As + fy) T'Yt 409.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be in accordance with
Greater
0.062 m r: bw
'vt
c Section 425.6.
Prestressed with of: bw
Lesser 0.3S d 409.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing
T'vi
Apsf~e ;:::0.40 CAps + fp u+
As + fy)
of:
Apsfpu
80fytd
Jf bw
e 409.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall be
with Section 425.2.
III accordance
409.6.4 Minimum Torsional Reinforcement 409.7.2.2 For non-prestressed and Class C prestressed
beams, spacing of bonded longitudinal reinforcement
409.6.4.1 A minimum area of torsional reinforcement closest to the tension face shall not exceed s given in
shall be provided in all regions where T u ~ cpT th Section 424.3.
409.7.2.3 For non-prestressed and Class C prestressed
409.6.4.2 If torsional reinforcement IS required, beams with h exceeding 900 mm., longitudinal skin
minimum transverse reinforcement (Av + 2At)minl s reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed on both side
shall be the greater of (a) and (b): faces of the beam for a distance h/2 from the tension
face. Spacing of skin reinforcement shall not exceed s
given in Section 424.3.2, where Cc is the clear cover from
fTrbw
a. O.062" '~-, the skin reinforcement to the side face. It shall be
yt permitted to include skin reinforcement III strength
bw calculations if a strain compatibility analysis is made.
b. 0.3S,-
yt
409.7.3 Flexural Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed
Beams
409.6.4.3 If torsional reinforcement IS required,
minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement Ai,min shall 409.7.3.1 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
be the lesser of (a) and (b): reinforcement at each section of the beam shall be
developed on each side of that section.

409.7.3.2 Critical locations for development of 409.7.3.8.3 At simple supports and points of inflection,
reinforcement are points of maximum stress and points db for positive moment tension reinforcement shall be
along the span where bent or terminated tension limited such that f for that reinforcement satisfies (a) or
reinforcement is no longer required to resist flexure. (b); If reinforcement terminates beyond the centerline of
supports by a standard hook or a mechanical anchorage at
409.7.3.3 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point least equivalent to a standard hook, (a) or (b) need not be
at which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a satisfied.
distance equal to the greater of d and 12db , except at
supports of simply-supported spans and at free ends of a. fd:::;(1. 3MniVu + fa) if end of reinforcement IS
cantilevers. confined by a compressive reaction;
409.7.3.4 Continuing flexural tension reinforcement b. fd:::;(MniVu + fa) if end of reinforcement is not
shall have an embedment length at least f d beyond the confined by a compressive reaction.
point where bent or terminated tension reinforcement is
no longer required to resist flexure. Where: M n is calculated assuming all reinforcement
at the section is stressed to f y and V u is calculated at
409.7.3.5 Flexural tension reinforcement shall not be the section. At a support, fa is the embedment length
terminated in a tension zone unless (a), (b), or (c) is beyond the center of the support. At a point of
satisfied: inflection, fa is the embedment length beyond the
point of inflection limited to the greater of d
a. Vu :::;(2/3)lPV n at the cutoff point; and 12db .
b. For 36 mm lP bars and smaller, continuing 409.7.3.8.4 At least one-third of the negative moment
reinforcement provides double the area required for reinforcement at a support shall have an embedment
flexure at the cutoff point and V u :::;(3 14) lPV n' length beyond the point of inflection at least the greatest
of d, 12db ,and fn/16 .
c. Stirrup or hoop area in excess of that required for
shear and torsion is provided along each terminated 409.7.4 Flexural Reinforcement in Prestressed
bar or wire over a distance 3 14d from the Beams
termination point. Excess stirrup or hoop area shall
be at least 60bws If yt» Spacing s shall not exceed 409.7.4.1 External tendons shall be attached to the
d/8/h· member in a manner that maintains the specified
eccentricity between the tendons and the' concrete
409.7.3.6 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for centroid through the full range of anticipated member
tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is not deflections.
stepped, or tapered beams; or where tension 409.7.4.2 If non-prestressed reinforcement is required to
reinforcement is not parallel to the compression face. satisfy flexural strength, the detailing requirements of
Section 409.7.3 shall be satisfied.
409.7.3.7 Development of tension reinforcement by
bending across the web to be anchored or made 409.7.4.3 Termination of Prestressed Reinforcement
continuous with reinforcement on the opposite face of
beam shall be permitted. 409.7.4.3.1 Post-tensioned anchorage zones shall be
designed and detailed in accordance with Section 425.9.
409.7.3.8 Termination of Reinforcement
409.7.4.3.2 Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers shall
409.7.3.8.1 At simple supports, at least one-third the be designed and detailed in accordance with Section
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend 425.8.
along the beam bottom into the support at least 150 mm.,
except for precast beams where such reinforcement shall 409.7.4.4 Termination of deformed reinforcement in
extend at least to the center of the bearing length. beams with unbonded tendons
409.7.3.8.2 At other supports, at least one-fourth the 409.7.4.4.1 Length of deformed reinforcement required
maximum positive moment reinforcement shall extend by Section 409.6.2.3 shall be in accordance with (a) and
along the beam bottom into the support at least 150 mm. (b):

CHAPTER 4 Structural Concrete 4-67
a. At least i,,/3 in positrve moment areas and be be continuous with longitudinal reinforcement and if
_ centered in those areas; extended into a region of compression, shall be anchored
d/2 beyond mid-depth of member.
b. At least i,,/6 on each side of the face of support in
negative moment areas. Table 409.7.6.2.2 Maximum Spacing of Shear
Reinforcement
409.7.5 Longitudinal Torsional Reinforcement
Maximum S, mm
409.7.5.1 If torsional reinforcement IS required, Non-
longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be distributed Vs Prestressed
prestressed
around the perimeter of closed stirrups that satisfy Section beam
beam
425.7. I .6, or hoops with spacing not greater than 300 mm.
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be inside the stirrup d 3h
Lesser - -4
or hoop and at least one longitudinal bar or tendon shall ~ O.33fiZ bwd 2
of:
be placed in each corner.
600
409.7.5.2 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall d 3h

have a diameter at least 0.042 times the transverse Lesser -
> O.33fiZ bwd 4 8
reinforcement spacing, but not less than 10 mrn. of:
300
409.7.5.3 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall
extend for a distance of at least (bt + d) beyond the point 409.7.6.3 Torsion
required by analysis.
409.7.6.3.1 If required, transverse torsional reinforcement
409.7.5.4 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be shall be closed stirrups satisfying Section 425.7.1.6 or
developed at the face of the support at both ends of the hoops.
beam.
409.7.6.3.2 Transverse torsional reinforcement shall
409.7.6 Transverse Reinforcement extend a distance of at least (bt + d) beyond the point
required by analysis.
409.7.6.1 General
409.7.6.3.3 Spacing of transverse torsional reinforcement
409.7.6.1.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be in shall not exceed the lesser of PhiS and 300 mm.
accordance with this section. The most restrictive
requirements shall apply. 409.7.6.3.4 For hollow sections, the distance from the
centerline of the transverse torsional reinforcement to the
409.7.6.1.2 Details of transverse reinforcement shall be in inside face of the wall of the hollow section shall be at
accordance with Section 425.7. least O.5Aoh/Ph'
409.7.6.2 Shear 409.7.6.4 Lateral Support of Compression

Reinforcement
409.7.6.2.1 If required, shear reinforcement shall be
provided using stirrups, hoops, or longitudinal bent bars. 409.7.6.4.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be provided
throughout the distance where longitudinal compression
409.7.6.2.2 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement reinforcement is required. Lateral support of longitudinal
shall be in accordance with Table 409.7.6.2.2. compression reinforcement shall be provided by closed
stirrups or hoops in accordance with Sections 409.7.6.4.2
409.7.6.2.3 Inclined stirrups and longitudinal bars bent to through 409.7.6.4.4.
act as shear reinforcement shall be spaced so that every
45-degree line, extending d/2 toward the reaction from 409.7.6.4.2 Size of transverse reinforcement shall be at
mid-depth of member to longitudinal tension least (a) or (b). Deformed wire or welded wire
reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of reinforcement of equivalent area shall be permitted.
shear reinforcement.
a. 10 mm cfJ for longitudinal bars 32 mm cfJ and smaller;
409.7.6.2.4 Longitudinal bars bent to act as shear
reinforcement, if extended into a region of tension, shall
National Structural Code of the Phinppines Volume I, 7~nEdition 20"16

4-68 CHAPTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete
b. 12 mm cP for longitudinal bars 36 mm cp and larger 409.7.7.3 Longitudinal structural integrity reinforcement
and.for longitudinal bundled bars. shall pass through the region bounded by the longitudinal
reinforcement ofthe column.
409.7.7.4 Longitudinal structural integrity reinforcement

409.7.6.4.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not at non continuous supports shall be anchored to develop
exceed the least of (a) through (c): f y at the face of the support.
a. 16db of longitudinal reinforcement; 409.7.7.5 If splices are necessary 1D continuous

structural integrity reinforcement, the reinforcement shall
b. 48db of transverse reinforcement; be spliced in accordance with (a) and (b):
c. Least dimension of beam. a. Positive moment reinforcement shall be spliced at or

near the support;
409.7.6.4.4 Longitudinal compression reinforcement
shall be arranged such that every comer and alternate b. Negative moment reinforcement shall be spliced at or
compression bar shall be enclosed by the comer of the near mid-span.
transverse reinforcement with an included angle of not
more than 135 degrees, and no bar shall be farther than 409.7.7.6 Splices shall be full mechanical, full welded,
150 mm. clear on each side along the transverse or Class B tension lap splices.
reinforcement from such an enclosed bar.
409.8 Non-Prestressed One-way Joist Systems
409.7.7 Structural Integrity Reinforcement in east-
in-Place Beams 401).8.1 General
409.7.7.1 For beams along the perimeter of the structure, 409.8.1.1 Non-prestressed one-way joist construction
structural integrity reinforcement shall be in accordance consists of a monolithic combination of regularly spaced
with (a) through (c): ribs and a top slab designed to span in one direction.
a. At least one-quarter the maximum positive moment 409.8.1.2 Width of ribs shall be at least 100 mm at any
reinforcement, but not less than two bars or strands, location along the depth.
shall be continuous;
409.8.1.3 Overall depth of. ribs shall not exceed 3.5
b. At least one-sixth the negative moment reinforcement times the minimum width.
at the support, but not less than two bars or strands,
shall be continuous; 409.8.1.4 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed
750 mm.
c. Longitudinal structural integrity reinforcement shall
be enclosed by closed stirrups in accordance with 409.8.1.5 V c shall be permitted to be taken as 1.1 times
Section 425.7.1.6 or hoops along the clear span of the the value calculated in Section 422.5.
beam.
409.8.1.6 For structural integrity, at least one bottom bar
409.7.7.2 For other than perimeter beams, structural in each joist shall be continuous and shall be anchored to
integrity reinforcement shall be in accordance with (a) or develop f y at the face of supports.
(b):
409.8.1.7 Reinforcement perpendicular to the ribs shall
a. At least one-quarter the maximum positive moment be provided in the slab as required for flexure,
reinforcement, but not less than two bars or strands" considering load concentrations, and shall be at least that
shall be continuous; required for shrinkage and temperature in accordance
with Section 424.4.
b. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be enclosed by
closed stirrups in accordance with Section 425.7.1.6 409.8.1.8 One-way joist construction not satisfying the
or hoops along the clear span of the beam. limitations of Sections 409.8.1.1 through 409.8.1.4 shall
be designed as slabs and beams.

409.8.2 Joist Systems with Structural Fillers 409.9.3 Reinforcement Limits
409.8.2.1 If permanent burned clay or concrete tile 409.9.3.1 Distributed reinforcement along the side faces
fillers of material having a unit compressive strength at of deep beams shall be at least that required in (a) and (b):
least equal to f~ in the joists are used, Sections
409.8.2.1.1 and 409.8.2.1.2 shall apply. a. The area of distributed reinforcement perpendicular
to the longitudinal axis of the beam, Av shall be at
409.8.2.1.1 Slab thickness over fillers shall be at least least O.002Sbws, where s is the spacing of the
the greater of 1/12 the clear distance between ribs and 40 distributed transverse reinforcement;
mm.
b. The area of distributed reinforcement parallel to the
409.8.2.1.2 For calculation of shear and negative longitudinal axis of the beam, Avh, shall be at least
moment strength, it shall be permitted to include the O.002Sbws2, where S2 is the spacing of the
vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs. Other distributed longitudinal reinforcement.
portions of fillers shall not be included in strength
calculations. 409.9.3.2 The minimum area of flexural tension
reinforcement, As,min , shall be determined in accordance
409.8.3 Joist Systems with Other Fillers with Section 409.6.1.
409.8.3.1 If fillers not complying with Section 409.8.2.1 409.9.4 Reinforcement Detailing
or removable forms are used, slab thickness shall be at
least the greater of 1112 the clear distance between ribs 409.9.4.1 Concrete cover shall be in accordance with
and 50 mm. Section 420.6.1.
409.9 Deep Beams 409.9.4.2 Minimum spacing for longitudinal

reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 425.2.
409.9.1 General
409.9.4.3 Spacing of distributed reinforcement required
409.9.1.1 Deep beams are members that are loaded on in Section 409.9.3.1 shall not exceed the lesser of diS
one face and supported on the opposite face such that and 300 mm.
strut-like compression elements can develop between the
loads and supports and that satisfy (a) or (b): 409.9.4.4 Development of tension reinforcement shall
account for distribution of stress in reinforcement that is
a. Clear span does not exceed four times the overall not directly proportional to the bending moment.
member depth, h;
409.9.4.5 At simple supports, positive moment tension
b. Concentrated loads exist within a distance 2h from reinforcement shall be anchored to develop f y at the face
the face of the support. of the support. If a deep beam is designed using Section
423, the positive moment tension reinforcement shall be
409.9.1.2 Deep beams shall be designed taking into anchored in accordance with Sections 423.8.2 and
account nonlinear distribution of longitudinal strain over 423.8.3.
the depth of the beam.
409.9.4.6 At interior supports, (a) and (b) shall be
409.9.1.3 Strut-and-tie models in accordance with satisfied:
Section 423 are deemed to satisfy Section 409.9.1.2.
a. Negative moment tension reinforcement shall be
409.9.2 Dimensional Limits continuous with that of the adjacent spans;
409.9.2.1 Deep beam dimensions shall be selected such b. Positive moment tension reinforcement shall be
that: continuous or spliced with that of the adjacent spans.
(409.9.2.1)
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I.

[~-('0 CHAPTEr< 4·-- St(UCtUf8! Concrete
410.3.1.2 For columns with cross sections larger than

SECTION 410
required by considerations of loading, it sball be
COLUMNS permitted to base gross area considered, required
reinforcement, and design strength 011 a reduced effective
410.1 Scope area, not less than one-half the total area. This provision
sball not apply to columns in special moment frames
410.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of designed in accordance with Section 418.
non-prestressed, prestressed, and composite columns,
including reinforced concrete pedestals. 410.3.1.3 For columns built monolithically with a
concrete wall, the outer limits of the effective cross
410.1.2 Design of plain concrete pedestals shall be in section of the column shall not be taken greater
accordance with Section 414. than40mm. outside the transverse reinforcement.
410.2 General 410.3.1.4 For columns with two or more interlocking

spirals, outer limits of the effective cross section shall be
410.2.1 Materials taken at a distance outside the spirals equal to the
minimum required concrete cover.
410.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
selected to be in accordance with Section 419. 410.3.1.5 If a reduced effective area IS considered
according to Sections 410.3.1.1 through 410.3.1.4,
410.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement and structural analysis and design of other parts of the
structural steel used in composite columns shall be structure that interact with the column shall be based on
selected to be in accordance with Section 420. the actual cross section.
410.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements 410.3.1.6 For composite columns with a concrete core
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with encased by structural steel, the thickness of the steel
Section 420.7. encasement shall be at least (a) or (b):
410.2.2
410.2.2.1
Composite Columns
If a structural steel shape, pipe, or tubing is

a. b rt:
~~
for each face of width b;
used as longitudinal reinforcement, the column shall be

designed as a composite column.
b. h rt: for circular sections of diameter h.
410.2.3 Connection to Other Members ~BE;
410.2.3.1 For cast-in-place construction, beam-column 410.4 Required Strength
and slab-column joints shall satisfy Section 415.
410.4.1 General
410.2.3.2 For precast construction, connections shall
satisfy the force transfer requirements of Section 416.2. 410.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in
accordance with the factored load combinations 111
410.2.3.3 Connections of columns to foundations shall Section 405.
satisfy Section 416.3.
410.3 Design Limits accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406.
410.3.1 Dimensional Limits 410.4.2 Factored Axial Force and Moment
410.3.1.1 For columns with a square, octagonal, or other 410.4.2.1 Pll and Mll occurring simultaneously for each
shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to base gross applicable factored load combination shall be considered.
area considered, required reinforcement, and design
strength on a circular section with a diameter equal to the
least lateral dimension of the actual shape.
Association of Structural Engineers of HIe PhlJippines, Inc= (/\SEP)

410.5 Design Strength 410.6.2 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
410;5.1 General 410.6.2.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement,

Av,min, shall be provided in all regions where VI( >
410.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination, O.Sq,Vc·
design strength at all sections shall satisfy q,Sn ~"U,
including (a) through (d). Interaction between load effects 410.6.2.2 If shear reinforcement is required, Av,min shall
shall be considered: be the greater of (a) and (b):
a. O.062v J c-,
!7Ibws
yt
bws
b. 0.35-,
yt

410.5.1.2 q, shall be determined In accordance with
Section 421.2. 410.7.1 General
410.5.2 Axial Force and Moment 410.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
410.5.2.1 Pn and Mn shall be calculated in accordance
with Section 422.4. 410.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and
410.5.2.2 For composite columns, forces shall be Section 425.4.
transferred between the steel section and concrete by
direct bearing, shear connectors, or bond in accordance to 410.7.1.3 Bundled bars shall be III accordance with
the axial strength assigned to each component. Section 425.6.
410.5.3 Shear 410.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing
410.5.3.1 V n shall be calculated In accordance with 410.7.2.1 Minimum spacing s shall be III accordance
Section 422.5. with Section 425.2.
410.5.4 Torsion 410.7.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
410.5.4.1 If r; ~ q,Tth, where Tth is given in Section 410.7.3.1 For non-prestressed columns and for
422.7, torsion shall be considered in accordance with prestressed columns with average 'pe < 1.60 MPa, the
Section 409. minimum number of longitudinal bars shall be (a), (b), or
(c):
410.6 Reinforcement Limits
a. Three within triangular ties;
410.6.1 Minimum and Maximum Longitudinal
Reinforcement b. Four within rectangular or circular ties;
410.6.1.1 For non-prestressed columns and for c. Six enclosed by spirals or for columns of special
prestressed columns with average' pe < 1.6 MPa, area of moment frames enclosed by circular hoops.
longitudinal reinforcement shall be at least O.OlAg but
410.7.3.2 For composite columns with structural steel
shall not exceed O. OSAg.
cores, a longitudinal bar shall be located at every comer
of a rectangular cross section, with other longitudinal bars
410.6.1.2 For composite columns with a structural steel spaced not farther apart than one-half the least side
core, area of longitudinal bars located within the dimension of the composite column.
transverse reinforcement shall be at least O. 01(Ag -
Asx), but shall not exceed O. OS(Ag - Asx).
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, i" Edition, 2016

410.7.4 Offset Bent Longitudinal Reinforcement Table 410.7.5.2.2 Tension Lap Splice Class
:;/
410.7.4.1 The slope of the inclined portion of an offset Tensile

Splice details Splice type
bent longitudinal bar relative to the longitudinal axis of bar stress
the column shall not exceed 1 in 6. Portions of bar above S 50% bars spliced at any
and below an offset shall be parallel to axis of column. section and lap splices on
Class A
s O.5fy adjacent bars staggered by
410.7.4.2 If the column face is offset 75 mm or more, at least Ed
longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent and separate Other Class B
dowels, lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to > O.5fy All cases Class B
the offset column faces, shall be provided.
410.7.5.3 End-bearing Splices
410.7.5 Splices of Longitudinal Reinforcement
410.7.5.3.1 If the bar force due to factored loads is
410.7.5.1 General compressive, end-bearing splices shall be permitted
provided the splices are staggered or additional bars are
410.7.5.1.1 Lap splices, mechanical splices, butt-welded provided at splice locations. The continuing bars in each
splices, and end-bearing splices shall be permitted. face of the column shall have a tensile strength at least
O. 25fy times the area of the vertical reinforcement along
410.7.5.1.2 Splices shall satisfy requirements for all that face.
factored load combinations.
410.7.5.3.2 For composite columns, ends of structural
410.7.5.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be steel cores shall be accurately finished to bear at end-
in accordance with Section 425.5 and shall satisfy the bearing splices, with positive provision for alignment of
requirements of Section 410.7.5.2 for lap splices or one core above the other in concentric contact. Bearing
Section 410.7.5.3 for end-bearing splices. shall be considered effective to transfer not greater than
50 percent of the total compressive force in the steel core.
410.7.5.2 Lap Splices
410.7.6 Transverse Reinforcement
compressive, compression lap splices shall be permitted. 410.7.6.1 General
It shall be permitted to decrease the compression lap
splice length in accordance with (a) or (b), but the lap
410.7.6.1.1 Transverse reinforcement shall satisfy the
splice length shall be at least 300 mm.: most.restrictive requirements for reinforcement spacing.
a. For tied columns, where ties throughout the lap splice 410.7.6.1.2 Details of transverse reinforcement shall be
length have an effective area not less than O.0015hs in accordance with Section 425.7.2 for ties, Section
in both directions, lap splice length shall be permitted 425.7.3 for spirals, or Section 425.7.4 for hoops.
to be multiplied by 0.83. Tie legs perpendicular to
dimension h shall be considered in calculating 410.7.6.1.3 For prestressed columns with average
effective area;
f pe2:: 1.6 MPa, transverse ties or hoops need not satisfy
the 16db spacing requirement of Section 425.7.2.1.
b. For spiral columns, where spirals throughout the lap
splice length satisfy Section 425.7.3, lap splice length
410.7.6.1.4 For composite columns with a structural
shall be permitted to be multiplied by 0.75.
steel core, transverse ties or hoops shall have. a minimum
db of 0.02 times the greater side dimension of the
composite column, but shall be at least 10 mm cp and
tensile, tension lap splices shall be in accordance with
need not be larger than 16 mm cpo Spacing shall satisfy
Table 410.7.5.2.2.
Section 425.7.2.1, but not exceed 0.5 times the least
dimension of the composite column. Deformed wire or
welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area shall be
permitted.

410.7.6.1.5 Longitudinal reinforcement shall be laterally 410.7.6.4 Lateral Support of Offset Bent
supported using ties or hoops in accordance with Section Longitudinal Bars
410.1.6,2 or spirals in aceordance with Section 410.7.6.3,
unless tests lind structural analyses demonstrate adequate 410.7.6.4.1 Where longitudinal bars are offset,
strength and feasibility of construction. horizontal support shall be provided by ties, hoops,
spirals, or parts of the floor construction and shall be
410.7.6.1.6 If anchor bolts are placed in the top of a designed to resist 1.5 times the horizontal component of
column or pedestal; the bolts shall be enclosed by the calculated force in the inclined portion of the offset
transverse reinforcement that also surrounds at least four bar.
longitudinal bars within the column or pedestal. The
transverse reinforcement shall be distributed within 125 410.7.6.4.2 If transverse reinforcement is provided to
mm. of the top of the column or pedestal and shall consist resist forces that result from offset bends, ties, hoops, or
of at least two 12 mm tP or three 10 mm rp bars. spirals shall be placed not more than 150 mm. from points
of bend.
410.7.6.2 Lateral Support of Longitudinal Bars
Using Ties or Hoops 410.7.6.5 Shear
410.7.6.2.1 n any storey, the bottom tie or hoop shall be 410.7.6.5.1 If required, shear reinforcement shall be
located not more than one-half the tie or hoop spacing provided using ties, hoops, or spirals.
above the top of footing or slab.
410.7.6.5.2 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement
410.7.6.2.2 111'any storey. the top lie or hoop shall be shall be in accordance with Table 410.7.6.5.2.
located not more than one-half the tie or hoop spacing
below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in the slab, Table 410.7.6.5.2 Maximum Spacing of Shear
drop panel, or shear cap. If beams or brackets frame into Reinforcement
all sides of the column, the top tie or hoop shall be located
not more than 75 mm below the lowest horizontal Maximum S, mm.
reinforcement in the shallowest beam or bracket. Non- Prestressed
Vs column
prestressed
410.7.6.3 Lateral Support of Longitudinal Bars column
Using Spirals d 3h
Lesser
:5 0.33/1lbwd of: 2 _4
410.7.6.3.1 n any storey, the bottom of the spiral shall . 600
be located at the top of footing or slab. d 3h
Lesser
410.7.6.3.2 In any storey, the top of the spiral shall be
> 0.33/1lbwd of: 4' _8
300
located in accordance with Table 410.7.6.3.2.
Table 410.7.6.3.2 Spiral Extension Requirements at

Top of Column
Framing at
Extension requirements
columne~nd~~~~ __ ~ __ ~ __ ~~~~~ __ ~
Beams or brackets Extend to the level of the lowest
frame into all sides of horizontal reinforcement in members
the column sllJ)Q_ortedabove.
Extend to the level of the lowest
horizontal reinforcement in members
Beams or brackets do
supported above. Additional column
not frame into all sides
ties shall extend above termination
of the column
of spiral to bottom of slab, drop
panel, or shear Clip.
Extend to the level at which the
Columns with capitals diameter or width of capital is twice
that ofthe column.

411.2.3 Load Distribution

SECTION 411
WAtLS 411.2.3.1 Unless otherwise demonstrated by an analysis,
the horizontal length of wall considered as effective for
411.1 Scope resisting each concentrated load shall not exceed the
lesser of the center-to-center distance between loads, and
411.1.1 This section shall apply to the design the bearing width plus four times the wall thickness.
of non-prestressed and prestressed walls including (a) Effective horizontal length for bearing shall not extend
through (c): beyond vertical wall joints unless design provides for
transfer of forces across the joints.
a. Cast-in-place;
411.2.4 Intersecting Elements
b. Precast in-plant;
411.2.4.1 Walls shall be anchored to intersecting
c. Precast on-site including tilt-up. elements, such as floors and roofs; columns, pilasters,
buttresses, or intersecting walls; and to footings.
411.1.2 Design of special structural walls shall be in
accordance with Section 418. 411.3 Design Limits
411.1.3 Design of plain concrete walls shall be 411.3.1 Minimum Wall Thickness
in accordance with Section 414.
411.3.1.1 Minimum wall thicknesses shall be in
411.1.4 Design of cantilever retaining walls shall be accordance with Table 411.3.l.l. Thinner walls are
in accordance with Sections 422.2 through 422.4, with permitted if adequate strength and stability can be
minimum horizontal reinforcement in accordance with demonstrated by structural analysis
Section 41l.6.
Table 411.3.1.1
411.2 General Minimum Wall Thickness, h
411.2.1 Materials Wall type Minimum thickness, h

Greater 100mm
Bearing'!' a.
411.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be of:
selected to be in accordance with Section 419. 1/25 the lesser of .
. unsupported
b.
411.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall length and
be selected to be in accordance with Section 420. unsupported
heig_ht
411.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements Greater
Non-bearing 100mm c.
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with of:
Section 420.7. 1130 the lesser of
unsupported
d.
411.2.2 Connection to Other Members length and
unsupported
411.2.2.1 For precast walls, connections shall be height
designed in accordance with Section 416.2. Exterior
basement and 190mm e.
Foundation [I]
411.2.2.2 Connections of walls to foundations shall
satisfy Section 416.3. [1] Only applies to walls designed in accordance with the simplified
design method of Section 411.5.3.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, inc. (.""SEP)

CHAF' rEF( 4 -- Structural C-oncTete !1 75
411.4 Required Strength 411.5.2 Axial Load and I n-plane or 0 ut-of-plane

Flexure
" 411.4.1 General
411.5.2.1 For bearing walls, Pn and Mn (in-plane or out-
411.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated 111 of- plane) shall be calculated in accordance with Section
accordance with the factored load combinations 111 422.4. Alternatively, axial load and out-of-plane flexure
Section 405. shall be permitted to be considered in accordance with
Section 411.5.3.
accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406. 411.5.2.2 For nonbearing walls, Mn shall be calculated
in accordance with Section 422.3.
411.4.1.3 Slenderness effects shall be calculated in
accordance with Sections 406.6.4, 406.7, or 406.8. 411.5.3 Axial Load and Out-of-Plane Flexure-
Alternati vely, out-of-plane slenderness analysis shall be Simplified Design Method
permitted using Section 411.8 for walls meeting the
requirements of that section. 411.5.3.1 If the resultant of all factored loads is located
within the middle third of the thickness of a solid wall
411.4.1.4 Walls shall be designed for eccentric axial with a rectangular cross section, P n shall be permitted to
loads and any lateral or other loads to which they are be calculated by:
subjected.
kl 2]
411.4.2 Factored Axial Force and Moment lfJP n = O.55lfJ f~Ag [1 - (32~) (411.5.3.1)
411.4.2.1 Walls shall be designed for the maximum

factored moment, M uo that can accompany the factored 411.5.3.2 Effective length factor, k, for use with Eq,
axial force for each applicable load combination. The 411.5.3.1 shall be in accordance with Table 411.5.3.2.
factored axial force, Pu, at given eccentricity shall not
exce d tPPm max where Pn, max shall be as given in Table 411.5.3.2 Effective Length Factor k for Walls
Section 422.4.2.1 and strength reduction factor tP
shall be that 1'01' compression-controlled sections in Boundary conditions k
Section 42l.2.2. The maximum factored moment Mu Walls braced top and bottom against lateral
shall be magnified for slenderness effects in accordance translation and
with Sections 406.6.4, 406.7, or 406.8. a. Restrained against rotation at one or both
0.8
ends (top, bottom, or both)
411.4.3 Factored Shear b. Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0
Walls not braced against lateral translation 2.0
411.4.3.1 Walls shall be designed for the maximum in-
plane V u and out-of-plane V U' 411.5.3.3 lfJ in Eq. 411.5.3.1 shall be that for
compression controlled sections in Section 421.2.2.
411.5 Design Strength
411.5.3.4 Wall reinforcement shall be at least that
411.5.1 General required by Section 411.6.
411.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination, 411.5.4 In-plane Shear
design strength at all sections shall satisfy tPSn 2': U,
including (a) through (c). Interaction between axial load 411.5.4.1 V n shall be calculated in' accordance with
and moment shall be considered. Sections 41l.5.4.2 through 411.5.4.8. Alternatively, for
walls with hw::; 21 w, it shall be permitted to design for
in-plane shear in accordance with the strut-and-tie method
of Section 423. In all cases, reinforcement shall satisfy the
limits of Sections 411.6, 411.7.2, and 411.7.3.
411.5.1.2 tP shall be determined in accordance with

Section 42l.2.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume! 1 yt!l Edition, 2016
411.5.4.2 For in-plane shear design, is h thickness of 411.5.4.8 Vs shall be provided by transverse shear
waJJ.and d shall be taken equal to O. 8fw. A larger value reinforcement and shall be calculated by:
of d, equal to the distance from extreme compression
fiber to center of force of all reinforcement in tension,
shall be permitted if the center of tension is calculated by (411.5.4.8)
a strain compatibility analysis.
411.5.4.3 Vn at any horizontal section shall not exceed 411.5.5 Out-or-plane Shear
0.83Jf~hd.
411.5.5.1 V n shall be calculated in accordance with
411.5.4.4 Vn shall be calculated by: Section 422.5.
(411.5.4.4) 411.6 Reinforcement Limits
411.5.4.5 Unless a more detailed calculation is made in 411.6.1 If in-plane V u s O. 5.pV c, rnimmum Pi and
accordance with Section 411.5.4.6, Vc shall not exceed minimum Pi shall be in accordance with Table 4 11.6.1.
These limits need not be satisfied if adequate strength and
O. 171ffihd for walls subject to axial compression or
st~bility can be demonstrated by structural analysis.
exceed the value given in Section 422.5.7 for walls
subject to axial tension. 411.6.2 If in-plane Vu :2: O. 5.pVc, (a) and (b) shall be
satisfied:
411.5.4.6 It shall be permitted to calculate Vein
accordance with Table 411.5.4.6, where Nu is positive for a. Pi shall be at least the greater of the value calculated
compression and negative for tension and the quantity by Eq. 411.6.2 and 0.0025, but need not exceed Pt in
N u/ Ag is expressed in kPa. accordance with Table 411.6.1.
411.5.4.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a Pi :2: 0.0025 + 0.5(2.5 - hw/fw)(pt - 0.0025)
distance fw/2 or one-half the wall height, whichever is
less, shall be permitted to be designed for (411.6.2)
V c calculated using the detailed calculation options in b. Pt shall be at least 0.0025
Table 411.5.4.6 at a distance above the base of fw/2 or
one-half the wall height, whichever is less.
Table 411.5.4.6 Vc: Non-Prestressed and Prestressed Walls
Calculation Option Axial force Vc

Compression O.l7A!1lhd (a)
Simplified ( 0.29N)
0.17 1 +~ A!1lhd (b)
Tension Greater of:
0 (c)
!1l
0.27A hd + Nud
4f (d)
w
Tension or [ e; (Oouv'7Z+ 0 2l'..)] h

Detailed
Compression
Lesser of: O.OS?c.J7Z + Mu _ fw fw hd
Vu 2 (e)
Equation shall not apply if (Mu/Vu - fw/2) is

negative.

CH/\PTEH 4 - Structural Concrete 4~77
Table 411.6.1 Minimum Reinforcement for Walls with In-plane Vu S O. 5f/>Vc

Type of
Minimum Minimum
Wall Type Non-prestressed
Bar/Wire Size {Y' MPa Longitudtnal!", Pc Transverse, Pc
Reinforcement
2: 420 0.0012 0.0020
Sl6mm¢
Deformed Bars <420 0.0015 0.0025
Cast-in-place > 16 mm¢ Any 0.0015 0.0025
Welded Wire
S MW200 or MD200 Any 0.0012 0.0020
Rei nforcement
Deformed Bars or
Precast[l] Welded Wire Any Any 0.0010 0.0010
Reinforcement
(I] Prestressed walls with an average effective compressive stress of at least 1.6 MPa need not meet the requirement for minimum longitudinal
reinforcement, PF'
[2] In one-way precast, prestressed walls not wider than 3.7 m. and not mechanically connected to cause restraint in the transverse direction, the
minimum reinforcement requirement in the direction normal to the flexural reinforcement need not be satisfied.
411.7 Reinforcement Detailing 411.7.2.3 For walls with It greater than 250 mm., except
basement walls and cantilever retaining walls, distributed
411.7.1 General reinforcement for each direction shall be placed in two
layers parallel with wall faces in accordance with (a) and
411.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be m ~): ..

a. One layer consisting of at least 1/2 and not exceeding
411.7.1.2 Development lengths of deformed and 2/3 of total reinforcement required for each direction
prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with shall be placed at least 50 mm., but not exceeding
Section 425.4. h/3, from the exterior surface;
411.7.1.3 Splice lengths of deformed reinforcement shall b. The other layer consisting of the balance of required
be in accordance with Section 425.5. reinforcement in that direction, shall be placed at
least 20 nmi, but not greater than h/3, from the
411.7.2 Spacing of Longitudinal Reinforcement interior surface.
411.7.2.1 Spacing, s, oflongitudinal bars in cast-in-place 411.7.2.4 Flexural tension reinforcement shall be well
walls shall not exceed tile lesser bf 3h and 450 1"1'1111. If distributed and placed as close as practicable to the
shear reinforcement is required for in-plane strength tension face.
spacing of longitudinal reinforcement shall not exceed
.f!w/3. 411.7.3 Spacing of Transverse Reinforcement
411.7.2.2 Spacing, s, of longitudinal bars 111 precast 411.7.3.1 Spacing, s, of transverse reinforcement in east-
walls shall not exceed the lesser of (a) and (b): in-place walls shall not exceed the lesser of 3h and 450
mm. If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane
a. 5h; strength, s shall not exceed fwl3.
b. 450 mm. for exterior walls or 750 mm. for interior 411.7.3.2 Spacing, s, of transverse bars in precast walls
walls. shall not exceed the lesser of (a) and (b):
If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane strength, s a. 5h;

shall not exceed the smallest of 3h, 450 mm., and f w13.
b. 450 mm. for exterior walls or 750 mm. for interior
walls.
If shear reinforcement is required for in-plane strength, S

shall not exceed the smallest of 3h, 450 mm., and f w15.
National Structural Code of the Philippines volume !, Edition,20H3

411.7.4 Lateral Support of Longitudinal 411.8.2.2 Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall
.' Reinforcement above any section shall be assumed to be distributed over

a width equal to the bearing width, plus a width on each
411.7.4.1 If longitudinal reinforcement is required for side that increases at a slope of 2 vertical to I horizontal,
axial strength or if Ast exceeds O.OlAg, longitudinal but not extending beyond (a) or (b):
reinforcement shall be laterally supported by transverse
ties. a. The spacing of the concentrated loads;
411.7.5 Reinforcement Around Openings b. The edges of the wall panel.
411.7.5.1 In addition to the minimum reinforcement 411.8.3 Factored Moment

required by Section 411.6, at least two 16 mm ¢ bars in
walls having two layers of reinforcement in both 411.8.3.1 Mu at mid-height of wall due to combined
directions and one 16 mm ¢ bar in walls having a single flexure and axial loads shall include the effects of wall
layer of reinforcement in both directions shall be provided deflection in accordance with (a) or (b):
around window, door, and similarly sized openings. Such
bars shall be anchored to develop f y in tension at the a. By iterative calculation using
comers of the openings.
(411.8.3.la)
411.8 Alternative Method for Out-of-Plane Slender
Wall Analysis where M ua is the maximum factored moment at
midheight of wall due to lateral and eccentric vertical
411.8.1 General loads, not including P fl effects.
411.8.1.1 It shall be permitted to analyze out-of-plane flu shall be calculated by:

slenderness effects in accordance with this section for
walls satisfying (a) through (e):
(411.8.3.1b)
a. Cross section is constant over the height of the wall;
b. Wall is tension-controlled for out-of-plane moment where I er shall be calculated by:

effect;
c. ¢Mn is at least Men where Mer is calculated using

f r as provided in Section 419.2.3;
d. P u at the mid-height section does not exceed and the value of Es/ Ee shall be at least 6.
O. 06f~Ag;
b. By direct calculation using:
e. Calculated out-of-plane deflection due to service
loads, fls, including Pfl effects, does not exceed
fe/1SO.
(411.8.3.ld)
411.8.2 Modeling
411.8.2.1 The wall shall be analyzed as a simply- 411.8.4 Out-of-Plane Deflection - Service Loads
supported, axially-loaded member subject to an out-of-
plane uniformly distributed lateral load, with maximum 411.8.4.1 Out-of-plane deflection due to service loads,
moments and deflections occurring at mid-height. fls, shall be calculated in accordance with Table
411.8.4.1, where Ma is calculated by Section 411.8.4.2.

- _.
Table 411.8.4.1Calculation of L1s SECTION 412

DIAPHRAGMS
(a) 412.1 Scope
s (Z/3)Mcr
412.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of
> (Z/3)Mcr fj = (Z/3)fj + (Ma - (Z/3)Mcr) (b) non-prestressed and prestressed diaphragms, including (a)
'--- .....1-_
s cr (Mn - (Z/3)Mcr) through (d):
411.8.4.2 The maximum moment Ma at mid-height of a. Diaphragms that are cast-in-place slabs;
wall due to service lateral and eccentric vertical loads,
including P sL1s effects, shall be calculated by Eq. b. Diaphragms that comprise a cast-in-place topping
411.8.4.2 with iteration of deflections. slab on precast elements;
c. Diaphragms that comprise precast elements with end

(411.8.4.2)
strips formed by either a cast-in-place concrete
topping slab or edge beams;
411.8.4.3 L1er and L1n shall be calculated by (a) and (b):
d. Diaphragms of interconnected precast elements
without cast-in-place concrete topping.
5Mcrf~
a. L1er = 48Eclg
(4l1.8.4.3a)
412.1.2 Diaphragms in structures assigned to seismic
zone 4 shall also satisfy requirements of Section 418.12.
5Mni~
b. L1n = (4l1.8.4.3b)
48Eeler 412.2 General
412.2.1 Design shall consider (a) through (e):

411.8.4.4 t.; shall be calculated by Eg. 411.8.3.lc.
a. Diaphragm in-plane forces due to lateral loads acting
on the building;
b. Diaphragm transfer forces;
c. Connection forces between the diaphragm and

vertical framing or nonstructural elements;
d. Forces resulting from bracing vertical or sloped

building elements;
e. Diaphragm out-of-plane forces due to gravity and

other loads applied to the diaphragm surface.
412.2.2 Materials
412.2.2.1 Design properties for concrete shall be

selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
412.2.2.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall

be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. ih Edition, 2016

4-80 CHAPTER 4 ~. Structural Concrete
412.3 Design Limits d. A finite element model considering diaphragm

flexibility;
"412.3.1 Minimum Diaphragm Thickness
e. A strut-and-tie model in accordance with Section
412.3.1.1 Diaphragms shall have thickness as required 423.2.
for stability, strength, and stiffness under factored load
combinations. 412.5 Design Strength
412.3.1.2 Floor and roof diaphragms shall have a 412.5.1 General

thickness not less than that required for floor and roof
elements in other parts ofthis Code. 412.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
design strengths of diaphragms and connections shall
412.4 Required Strength satisfy lPSn ;::: U. Interaction between load effects shall be
considered.
412.4.1 General
412.5.1.2 lP shall be determined III accordance with
412.4.1.1 Required strength of diaphragms, collectors, Section 421.2.
and their connections shall be calculated in accordance
with the factored load combinations in Section 405. 412.5.1.3 Design strengths shall be in accordance with
(a), (b), (c), or (d):
412.4.1.2 Required strength of diaphragms that are part
of floor or roof construction shall include effects of out- a. For a diaphragm idealized as a beam whose depth is
of-plane loads simultaneous with other applicable loads. equal to the full diaphragm depth, with moment
resisted by boundary reinforcement concentrated at
412.4.2 Diaphragm Modeling and Analysis the diaphragm edges, design strengths shall be III
accordance with Sections 412.5.2 through 412.5.4;
412.4.2.1 Diaphragm modeling and analysis
requirements of the general building code shall govern b. For a diaphragm or a diaphragm segment modeled as
where applicable. Otherwise, diaphragm modeling and a strut-and-tie system, design strengths shall be in
analysis shall be in accordance with Sections 412.4.2.2 accordance with Section 423.3;
through 412.4.2.4.
c. For a diaphragm idealized with a finite-element
412.4.2.2 Modeling and analysis procedures shall satisfy model, design strengths shall be in accordance with
requirements of Section 406. Section 422. Non-uniform shear distributions shall be
considered in design for shear. Collectors in such
412.4.2.3 Any set of reasonable and consistent designs shall be provided to transfer diaphragm
assumptions for diaphragm stiffness shall be permitted. shears to the vertical elements of the lateral-force-
resisting system;
412.4.2.4 Calculation of diaphragm in-plane design
moments, shears, and axial forces shall be consistent with d. For a diaphragm designed by alternative methods,
requirements of equilibrium and with design boundary such methods shall satisfy the requirements of
conditions. It shall be permitted to calculate design equilibrium and shall provide design strengths at least
moments, shears, and axial forces in accordance with one equal to required strengths for all elements in the load
of (a) through (e): path.
a. A rigid diaphragm model if the diaphragm can be 412.5.1.4 It shall be permitted to use pre-compression
idealized as rigid; from prestressed reinforcement to resist diaphragm forces.
b. A flexible diaphragm model if the diaphragm can be 412.5.1.5 If non-prestressed, bonded prestressing
idealized as flexible; reinforcement is designed to resist collector forces,
diaphragm shear, or tension due to in-plane moment, the
c. A bounding analysis in which the design values are value of steel stress used to calculate resistance shall not
the envelope of values obtained by assuming upper exceed the lesser of the specified yield strength and 420
bound and lower bound in-plane stiffnesses for the MPa.
diaphragm in two or more separate analyses;

CHAPTER 4 - Stnlr:tllr81 Concrete 4..81
412.5.2 Moment and Axial Force 412.5.3.4 For a diaphragm that is entirely cast-in-place,
cross-sectional dimensions shall be selected to satisfy Eq.
412.5.2.1 It shall be permitted to design a diaphragm to 412.5.3.4.
resist in-plane moment and axial force in accordance with
Sections 422,3 and 422.4, (412.5.3.4)
412.5.2.2 It shall be permitted to resist tension due to

moment by (a), (b), (c), or (d), or those methods in
where the value of ffi used to calculate V n shall not
exceed 8.3 MPa.
combination:
412.5.3.5 For diaphragms that are cast-in-place concrete
a, Deformed bars conforming to Section 420.2.1;
topping slabs on precast elements, (a) and (b) shall be
satisfied:
b. Strands or bars conforming to Section 420.3.1, either
prestressed or non-prestressed;
a. V n shall be calculated in accordance with Eq.
412.5.3.3, and cross-sectional dimensions shall be
c. Mechanical connectors crossing joints between
selected to satisfy Eq. 412.5.3.4. Acv shall be
precast elements;
calculated using the thickness of the topping slab for
non-composite topping slab diaphragms and the
d. Pre-compression from prestressed reinforcement.
combined thickness of cast-in-place and precast
elements for composite topping slab diaphragms. For
412.5.2.3 Non-prestressed reinforcement and mechanical
composite topping slab diaphragms, the value of f~
connectors resisting tension due to moment shall be
in Eqs. 412.5.3.3 and 412.5.3.4 shall not exceed the
located within hj4 of the tension edge of the diaphragm,
lesser of f~ for the precast members and f~ for the
where h is diaphragm depth measured in the plane of the topping slab;
diaphragm at that location. Where diaphragm depth
changes along' the span, it shall be permitted to develop
b. V nshall not exceed the value calculated in accordance
reinforcement into adjacent diaphragm segments that axe
with the shear-friction provisions of Section 422.9
not within the hj4 limit.
considering the thickness of the topping slab above
joints, between precast elements in non-composite
412.5.2.4 Mechanical connectors crossing joints between
and composite topping slab diaphragms and the
precast elements shall be designed to resist required
reinforcement crossing the joints between the precast
tension under the anticipated joint opening.
members.
412.5.3 Shear
412.5.3.6 For diaphragms that are interconnected precast
elements without a concrete topping, and for diaphragms
412.5.3.1 This section shall apply to diaphragm in-plane that are precast elements with end strips formed by either
shear strength. a cast-in-place concrete topping slab or edge beams; it
shall be permitted to design for shear in accordance with
412.5.3.2 f/J shall be 0,75, unless a lesser value IS
(a), (b), or both.
required by Section 421.2.4.
a. The nominal strength of grouted joints shall not
412.5.3.3 For a diaphragm that is entirely cast-in-place, exceed 0.55 MPa. Reinforcement shall be designed to
V n shall be calculated by Eq. 412.5.3.3. resist shear through shear-friction in accordance with
Section 422.9. Shear-friction reinforcement shall be
in addition to reinforcement designed to resist tension
(412.5.3.3) due to moment and axial force;
where Acv is the gross area of concrete bounded by b. Mechanical connectors crossing jomts between
diaphragm web thickness and depth, reduced by void precast elements shall be designed to resist required
areas if present; the value of ffi used to calculate Vn shear under anticipated joint opening.
shall not exceed 8.3 MPa; and Pt is distributed
reinforcement oriented parallel to the in-plane shear.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, til Edition, 2016

4~82 CHP-d~:rTER
4 -- Structural Concrete
412.5.3.7 For any diaphragm, where shear is transferred 412.6.3 Reinforcement designed to resist diaphragm
from the diaphragm to a collector, or from the diaphragm in-plane forces shall be in addition to reinforcement
or collector to a vertical element of the lateral-force- designed to resist other load effects, except reinforcement
resisting system, (a) or (b) shall apply: designed to resist shrinkage and temperature effects shall
be permitted to also resist diaphragm in-plane forces
a. Where shear is transferred through concrete, the
shear-friction provisions of Section 422.9 shall be 412.7 Reinforcement Detailing
satisfied;
412.7.1 General
b. Where shear is transferred through mechanical
connectors or dowels, effects of uplift and rotation of 412.7.1.1 Concrete cover for reinforcement shall be in
the vertical element of the lateral-force-resisting accordance with Section 420.6.l.
system shall be considered.
412.5.4 Collectors prestressed reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 425.4, unless longer lengths are required by
412.5.4.1 Collectors shall extend from the vertical Section 418.
elements of the lateral-force-resisting system across all or
part of the diaphragm depth as required to transfer shear 412.7.1.3 Splices of deformed reinforcement shall be in
from the diaphragm to the vertical element. It shall be accordance with Section 425.5.
permitted to discontinue a collector along lengths of
vertical elements of the lateral force-resisting system 412.7.1.4 Bundled bars shall be m accordance with
where transfer of design collector forces is not required. Section 425.6.
412.5.4.2 Collectors shall be designed as tension 412.7.2 Reinforcement Spacing

members, compression members, or both, in accordance
with Section 422.4. 412.7.2.1 Minimum spacing sof reinforcement shall be
in accordance with Section 425.2.
412.5.4.3 Where a collector is designed to transfer forces
to a vertical element, collector reinforcement shall extend 412.7.2.2 Maximum spacing s of deformed
along the vertical element at least the greater of (a) and reinforcement shall be the lesser of five times the
(b): diaphragm thickness and 450 mm.
a. The length required to develop the reinforcement in 412.7.3 Diaphragm and Collector Reinforcement
tension;
412.7.3.1 Except for slabs-on-ground, diaphragms that
b. The length required to transmit the design forces to are part of floor or roof construction shall satisfy
the vertical element through shear-friction in reinforcement detailing of one-way slabs in accordance
accordance with Section 422.9, through mechanical with Section 407.7 or two-way slabs in accordance with
connectors, or through other force transfer Section 408.7, as applicable.
mechanisms.
412.7.3.2 Calculated tensile or compressive force in
412.6 Reinforcement Limits reinforcement at each section of the diaphragm or
collector shall be developed on each side of that section.
412.6.1 Reinforcement to resist shrinkage and
temperature stresses shall be in accordance with Section 412.7.3.3 Reinforcement provided to resist tension shall
424.4. extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required
to resist tension at least f d, except at diaphragm edges
412.6.2 Except for slabs-on-ground, diaphragms that and at expansion joints.
are part of floor or roof construction shall satisfy
reinforcement limits for one-way slabs in accordance with
Section 407.6 or two-way slabs in accordance with
Section 408.6, as applicable.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ll,SEP)

SECTION 413 413.2.3 Earthquake Effects
FOUNDATIONS 413.2.3.1 Structural members extending below the base

of the structure that are required to transmit forces
413.1 Scope resulting from earthquake effects to the foundation shall
be designed in accordance with Section 418.2.2.3.
413.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non-
prestressed and prestressed foundations, including 413.2.3.2 For structures assigned to seismic zone 4,
shallow foundations (a) through (e) and, where shallow and deep foundations resisting earthquake-
applicable, deep foundations (f) through (i): induced forces or transferring earthquake-induced forces
between structure and ground shall be designed in
a. Strip footings; accordance with Section 418.13.
b. Isolated footings; 413.2.4 Slabs-an-Ground
c. Combined footings; 413.2.4.1 Slabs-on-ground that transmit vertical loads or

lateral forces from other parts of the structure to the
d. Mat foundations; ground shall be designed and detailed in accordance with
applicable provisions of this Code.
e. Grade beams;
413.2.4.2 Slabs-on-ground that transmits lateral forces as
f. Pile caps; part of the seismic-foree-resisting system shall be
designed in accordance with Section 418.13.
g. Piles;
413.2.5 Plain Concrete
h. Drilled piers;
413.2.5.1 Plain concrete foundations shall be designed in
i. Caissons. accordance with Section 414.
413.1.2 Foundations excluded by Section 401.4.6 are 413.2.6 Design Criteria

excluded from this section.
413.2.6.1 Foundations shall be proportioned to resist
413.2 General factored loads and induced reactions.
413.2.1 Materials 413.2.6.2 Foundation systems shall be permitted to be

designed by any procedure satisfying equilibrium and
413.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be geometric compatibility.
selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
413.2.6.3 Foundation design in accordance with strut-
413.2.1.2 Design properties for steel reinforcement shall and-tie modeling, Section 423, shall be permitted.
be selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
413.2.6.4 External moment on any section of a strip
413.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements footing, isolated footing, or pile cap shall be calculated by
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with passing a vertical plane through the member and
Section 420.7. calculating the moment of the forces acting over the entire
area of member on one side of that vertical plane.
413.2.2 Connection to Other Members
413.2.7 Critical Sections for Shallow Foundations
413.2.2.1 Design and detailing of cast-in-place and and Pile Caps
precast column, pedestal, and wall connections to
foundations shall be in accordance with Section 416.3. 413.2.7.1 Mu at the supported member shall be
permitted to be calculated at the critical section defined in
accordance with Table 413.2.7.1.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ill Edition, 2016

.,
4~84 CH/,PTEF;; If - Structural Concrete
Table 413.2.7.1 413.3.1.2 Overall depth of foundation shall be selected

Location of Critical Section for M u such that the effective depth of bottom reinforcement is at
least 150 mm.
Supported member Location of critical section
Column or pedestal Face of column or pedestal 413.3.1.3 In sloped, stepped, or tapered foundations,
Halfway between face of depth and location of steps or angle of slope shall be such
Column with steel base that design requirements are satisfied at every section.
column and edge of steel base
plate
plate
Concrete wall Face of wall 413.3.2 One-Way Shallow Foundations
Halfway between center and
Masonry wall 413.3.2.1 The design and detailing of one-way shallow
face of masonry wall
foundations, including strip footings, combined footings,
413.2.7.2 The location of critical section for factored and grade beams, shall be in accordance with this section
shear in accordance with Sections 407.4.3 and 408.4.3 for and the applicable provisions of Sections 407and 409.
one-way shear or Section 408.4.4.1 for two-way shear
shall be measured from the location of the critical section 413.3.2.2 Reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly
for Mu in Section 413.2.7.1. across entire width of one-way footings.
413.2.7.3 Circular or regular polygon-shaped concrete 413.3.3 Two-Way Isolated Footings

columns or pedestals shall be permitted to be treated as
square members of equivalent area when locating critical 413.3.3.1 The design and detailing of two-way isolated
sections for moment, shear, and development of footings shall be in accordance with this section and the
reinforcement. applicable provisions of Sections 407 and 408.
413.2.8 Development of Reinforcement in Shallow 413.3.3.2 In square two-way footings, reinforcement

Foundations and Pile Caps shall be distributed uniformly across entire width of
footing in both directions.
413.2.8.1 Development of reinforcement shall be in
accordance with Section 425. 413.3.3.3 In rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be
distributed in accordance with (a) and (b).
413.2.8.2 Calculated tensile or compression force in
reinforcement at each section shall be developed on each a. Reinforcement in the long direction shall be
side of that section. distributed uniformly across entire width of footing.
413.2.8.3 Critical sections for development of b. For reinforcement in the short direction, a portion of
reinforcement shall be assumed at the same locations as the total reinforcement, y sAs, shall be distributed
given in Section 413.2.7.1 for maximum factored moment uniformly over a band width equal to the length of
and at all other vertical planes where changes of section short side of footing, centered on centerline of
or reinforcement occur. column or pedestal. Remainder of reinforcement
required in the short direction,(1 - y s)As, shall be
413.2.8.4 Adequate anchorage shall be provided for distributed uniformly outside the center band width
tension reinforcement where reinforcement stress is not of footing, where y s is calculated by:
stepped, or tapered foundations; or where tension 2
(413.3.3.3)
reinforcement is not parallel to the compression face. Ys = (P + 1)
413.3 Shallow Foundations where P is the ratio of long to short side of footing.
413.3.1 General 413.3.4 Two-Way Combined Footings and Mat

Foundations
413.3.1.1 Minimum base area of foundation shall be
calculated from unfactored forces and moments 413.3.4.1 The design and detailing of combined footings
transmitted by foundation to soil or rock and permissible and mat foundations shall be in accordance with this
bearing pressure selected through principles of soil or section and the applicable provisions of Section 408.
rock mechanics.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phllippines. Inc. (ASEP)

413.3.4.2 The direct design method of Section 408.l0 423.4.3, where Ps = O.60.it and.it is in accordance with
shall not be used to design combined footings and mat Section 419.2.4.
foundations.
413.4.2.5 Calculation of factored shear on any section
413.3.4.3 Distribution of bearing pressure under through a pile cap shall be in accordance with (a) through
combined footings and mat foundations shall be (c):
consistent with properties of the soil or rock and the
structure, and with established principles of soil or rock a. Entire reaction from any pile with its center located
mechanics. dptle/2 or more outside the section shall be
considered as producing shear on that section;
413.3.4.4 Minimum reinforcement in non-prestressed
mat foundations shall be in accordance with Section b. Reaction from any pile with its center locate dpile/2
408.6.1.1. or more inside the section shall be considered as
producing no shear on that section;
413.4 Deep Foundations
c. For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion
413.4.1 General of the pile reaction to be considered as producing
shear on the section shall be based on a linear
4]3.4.1.1 Number and arrangement of piles, drilled interpolation between full value at dpile/2 outside
piers, and caissons shall be determined from unfactored
the section and zero value at dpile/2 inside the
forces and moments transmitted to these. members and
section.
permissible member .capacity selected through principles
of soil or rock mechanics.
413.4.3 Deep Foundation Members
413.4.2 Pile Caps
413.4.3.1 Portions of deep foundation members in air,
water, or soils not capable cfproviding-adequate restraint
413.4.2.1 Overall depth of pile cap shall be selected such
throughout the member length to prevent lateral buckling
that the effective depth of bottom reinforcement is at least
shall be designed as columns in accordance 'with the
300mm.
applicable provisions of Section 410.
413.4.2.2 Factored moments and shears shall be
permitted to be calculated with the reaction from any pile
assumed to be concentrated at the centroid of the pile
section.
413.4.2.3 Except for pile caps designed in accordance

with Section 413.2.6.3, the pile cap shall be designed such
rhat (a) is satisfied for one-way foundations and (a) and
(b) are satisfied for two way foundations.
a. cp V n 2:: V
U' where V n shall be calculated in
accordance with Section 422.5 for one-way shear, Vu
shall be calculated in accordance with Section
413.4.2.5, and cp shall be in accordance with Section
421.2;
b. cpvn 2:: Vu> where vn shall be calculated in

accordance with Section 422.6 for two-way shear.v;
shall be calculated in accordance with Section
413.4.2.5, and cp shall be in accordance with Section
421.2.
413.4.2.4 If the pile cap is designed in accordance with

strut-and-tie modeling as permitted in Section 413.2.6.3,
the effective concrete compressive strength of the struts,
fee' shall be calculated in accordance with Section
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, ii1 Edition, 2016

Ill. Foundation or basement walls not less than

SECTION 414 190 mm. thick and retaining no more than 1.2
PLAIN CONCRETE m. of unbalanced fill.
414.1 Scope 414.1.5 Plain concrete shall not be permitted for

columns and pile caps.
414.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of plain
concrete members, including (a) and (b): 414.2 General
a. Members in building structures; 414.2.1 Materials
b. Members in non-building structures such as arches, 414.2.1.1 Design properties for concrete shall be
underground utility structures, gravity walls, and selected to be in accordance with Section 419.
shielding walls.
414.2.1.2 Steel reinforcement, if required, shall be
414.1.2 This section shall not govern the design of selected to be in accordance with Section 420.
cast-in-place concrete piles and piers embedded In
ground. 414.2.1.3 Materials, design, and detailing requirements
for embedments in concrete shall be in accordance with
414.1.3 Plain concrete shall be permitted only in cases Section 420.7.
(a) through (d):
414.2.1 Connection to Other Members
a. Members that are continuously supported by soil or
supported by other structural members capable of 414.2.2.1 Tension shall not be transmitted through
providing continuous vertical support; outside edges, construction joints, contraction joints, or
isolation joints of an individual plain concrete element.
b. Members for which arch action provides compression
under all conditions of loading; 414.2.2.2 Walls shall be braced against lateral
translation.
c. Walls;
414.2.3 Precast
d. Pedestals.
414.2.3.1 Design of .precast members shallconsider all
414.1.4 Plain concrete shall be permitted for a loading conditions from initial fabrication to completion
structure assigned to seismic zone 4, only in cases (a) and of the structure, including form removal, storage,
(b): transportation, and erection.
a. Footings supporting cast-in-place reinforced concrete 414.2.3.2 Precast members shall be connected to transfer
or reinforced masonry walls provided the footings are lateral forces into a structural system capable of resisting
reinforced longitudinally with at least two continuous such forces.
reinforcing bars. Bars shall be at least 12 mm l/J and
have a total area of not less than 0.002 times the 414.3 Design Limits
gross cross-sectional area of the footing. Continuity
of reinforcement shall be provided at comers and 414.3.1 Bearing Walls
intersections;
414.3.1.1 Minimum bearing wall thickness shall be in
b. Foundation elements (i) through (iii) for detached accordance with Table 414.3.1.1.
one- and two-family dwellings not exceeding three
storeys and constructed with stud bearing walls:
I. Footings supporting walls;
11. Isolated footings supporting columns or

pedestals;

_"
CHAPTER 4 _ Structural Concrete 4-87
Table 414.3.1.1 Minimum Thickness of Bearing Walls 414.4 Required Strength
Wall ie Minimum thickness 414.4.1 General

General ~-+-;:G~r-ea-te-r-r-71~4~Om!!!m.!!.!.!'~~~!:!....-----l
of: 414.4.1.1 Required strength shall be calculated in
1/24 the lesser of unsupported accordance with the factored load combinations defined
length and IlnsuQRortedheight
in Section 405.
Exterior basement 190 mm
Foundation =-=c:..:.:...+-:-1';;-90~m:::m::'__----------~
414.3.2 Footings
414.4.1.3 No flexural continuity due to tension shall be
414.3.2.1 Footing thickness shall be at least 200 mm.
assumed between adjacent structural plain concrete
elements.
414.3.2.2 Base area of footing shall be determined from
unfactored forces and moments transmitted by footing to
414.4.2 Walls
soil and permissible soil pressure selected through
principles of soil mechanics.
414.4.2.1 Walls shall be designed for an eccentricity
corresponding to the maximum moment that can
414.3.3 Pedestals
accompany the axial load but not less than O.10h, where
h is the wall thickness.
414.3.3.1 Ratio of unsupported height to average least
lateral dimension shall not exceed 3.
414.4.3 Footings
414.3.4 Contraction and Isolation Joints
414.4.3.1 General
414.3.4.1 Contraction or isolation joints shall be
414.4.3.1.1 For footings supporting circular or regular
provided to divide structural plain concrete members into
polygon-shaped concrete columns or pedestals, it shall be
flexurally discontinuous elements. The size of each
permitted to assume a square section of equivalent area
element shall be selected to limit stress caused by restraint
for determining critical sections.
to movements from creep, shrinkage, and temperature
effects.
414.4.3.2 Factored Moment
414.3.4.2 The number and location of contraction or
isolation joints shall be determined considering (a) 414.4.3.2.1 The critical section for Mu shall be located
through (f): in accordance with Table 414.4.3.2.1.
a. Influence of climatic conditions; Table 414.4.3.2.1 Location of Critical Section for Mu
b. Selection and proportioning of materials; Supported member Location of critical section

Column or pedestal Face of column or pedestal
c. Mixing, placing, and curing of concrete; Halfway between face of
Column with steel base
column and edge of steel base
plate
d. Degree of restraint to movement; plate
Concrete wall Face of wall
e. Stresses due to loads to which an element is Halfway between center and
Masonry wall
subjected, face of masonry wall
f. Construction techniques.

414.4.3.3 Factored One-Way Shear 414.5.1.4 Flexure and axial strength calculations shall be
based on a linear stress-strain relationship in both tension
41(.4.3.3.1 r;r one-way shear, critical sections shall be and compression.
located h from (a) and (b) where h is the footing
thickness. 414.5.1.5 A for lightweight concrete shall be III
a. Location defined in Table 414.4.3.2.1;
414.5.1.6 No strength shall be assigned to steel
b. Face of concentrated loads or reaction areas. reinforcement.
414.4.3.3.2 Sections between (a) or (b) of Section 414.5.1.7 When calculating member strength in flexure,
414.4.3.3.1 and the critical section for shear shall be combined flexure and axial load, or shear, the entire cross
permitted to be designed for V u at the critical section for section shall be considered in design, except for concrete
shear. cast against soil where overall thickness h shall be taken
as 50 mm less than the specified thickness.
414.4.3.4 Factored Two-Way Shear
414.5.1.8 Unless demonstrated by analysis, horizontal
414.4.3.4.1 For two-way shear, critical sections shall be length of wall to be considered effective for resisting each
located so that the perimeter bo is a minimum but need vertical concentrated load shall not exceed center-to-
not be closer than hj2 to (a) through (c): center distance between loads, or bearing width plus four
times the wall thickness.
a. Location defined in Table 414.4.3.2.1;
414.5.2 Flexure
b. Face of concentrated loads or reaction areas;
'414.5.2.1 Mn shall be the lesser of Eq. 414.5.2.la
c. Changes in footing thickness. calculated at the tension face and Eq. 414.5.2.1b
calculated at the compression face:
414.4.3.4.2 For square or rectangular columns,
concentrated loads, or reaction areas, critical section for (414.5.2.la)
two-way shear shall be permitted to be calculated
assuming straight sides.
Mn = O.85f~Sm (414.5.2.lb)
414.5 Design Strength
where Sm is the corresponding elastic section modulus.
414.5.1 General
414.5.3 Axial Compression
414.5.1.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
design strength at all sections shall satisfy l/JSn ~ U, 414.5.3.1 P n shall be calculated by:
including (a) through (d). Interaction between load effects
shall be considered.
(414.5.3.1)
414.5.4 Flexure and Axial Compression
414.5.4.1 Unless permitted by Section 414.5.4.2, member

dimensions shall be proportioned to be in accordance with
Table 414.5.4.1, where Mn is calculated in accordance
with Section 4l4.5.2.l(b) and Pn is calculated in
414.5.1.2 l/J shall be determined in accordance with
Section 421.2.
414.5.1.3 Tensile strength of concrete shall be permitted

to be considered in design.

-
Table 414.5.4.1 Table 414.5.6.1

Combined Flexure and Axial Compression Nominal Bearing Strength
Relative Geometric
Loca~ti~o~n ~ ~I_n~te~r~a~cti~'o~n~E-Lqlu_8_tl~o_oI
Conditions
u; Pu f77 Supporting surface is .JA;JA; (0.85[;A
Tension face S-A
m
S 0.42,1" [( (a) wider on all sides
Lesser 1)
g of: 2(0.85[; At)

than the loaded area
Other
Compression face (b)
414.5.4.2 For walls of solid rectangular cross section 414.6.1 At least two 16 mm c/J bars shall be provided
where Mu S Pu(h/6), Mu need not be considered in around all window and door openings. Such bars shall
design and P n is calculated by extend at least 600 mm beyond the comers of openings.
(414.5.4.2)
I I
414.5.5 Shear
414.5.5.1 Vn shall be calculated in accordance with

Table 414.5.5.1.
Table 414.5.5.1 Nominal Shear Strength
Shear
Action
One-way
Two-way
[I] P is the ratio of long side to short side of concentrated load or

reaction area.
414.5.6 Bearing
414.5.6.1 Bn shall be calculated in accordance with

Table 414.5.6.1.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, J'h Edition, 2016

4·~80 CHlJ"PTER 4 --- Structur;:':11Concrete
SECTION 415 concrete strength with vertical dowels and spirals as

required to achieve adequate strength;
,.BEAM-CONCRETE AND
SLAB-COLUMN JOINTS c. For beam-column and slab-column joints that are
restrained in accordance with Section 415.2.4 or
415.2.5, respectively, it shall be permitted to
415.1 Scope
calculate the design strength of the column on an
assumed concrete strength in the column joint equal
415.1.1 This section shall apply to the design and
to 75 percent of column concrete strength plus 35
detailing of cast-in-place beam-column and slab-column
percent of floor concrete strength, where the value of
joints.
column concrete strength shall not exceed 2.5 times
the floor concrete strength.
415.2 General
415.4 Detailing of Joints
415.2.1 Beam-column and slab-column joints shall
satisfy Section 415.3 for transfer of column axial force 415.4.1 Beam-column and slab-column joints that are
through the floor system. restrained in accordance with Section 415.2.4 or 415.2.5,
respectively, and are not part of a seismic-force-resisting
415.2.2 If gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other system need not satisfy the provisions for transverse
lateral forces cause transfer of moment at beam-column or reinforcement of Section 415.4.2.
slab-column joints, the shear resulting from moment
415.4.2 The area of all legs of transverse
transfer shall be considered in the design of the joint.
reinforcement in each principal direction of beam-column
and slab-column joints shall be at least the greater of (a)
415.2.3 Beam-column and slab-column joints that
and (b):
transfer moment to columns shall satisfy the detailing
provisions in Section 415.4. Beam-column joints within bs
special moment frames, slab-column joints within a. O.062ffc,-yt
intermediate moment frames, and beam-column and slab-
column joints using frames not designated as part of the bs
b. 0.35,-
seismic-force-resisting systems in structures assigned to yt
seismic zone 4,shall satisfy Section 418.
where b is the dimension of the column section
415.2.4 A beam-column joint shall be considered to be perpendicular to the direction under consideration.
restrained if the joint is laterally supported on four sides
by beams of approximately equal depth. 415.4.2.1 At beam~column and slab-colum'n joints, an
area of transverse reinforcement calculated in accordance
415.2.5 A slab-column joint shall be considered to be with Section 415.4.2 shall be distributed within the
restrained if the joint is laterally supported on four sides column height not less than the deepest beam or slab
by the slab. element framing into the column.
415.3 Transfer of Column Axial Force through the 415.4.2.2 For beam-column joints, the spacing of the
Floor System transverse reinforcement s shall not exceed one-half the
depth of the shallowest beam.
415.3.1 If'~ of a column is greater than 1.4 times that
of the floor system, transmission of axial force through 415.4.3 If longitudinal beam or column reinforcement
the floor system shall in accordance with (a), (b), or (c): is spliced or terminated in a joint, closed transverse
reinforcement in accordance with Section 410.7.6 shall be
a. Concrete of compressive strength specified for the provided in the joint, unless the joint region is restrained
column shall be placed in the floor at the column in accordance with Section 415.2.4 or 415.2.5.
location. Column concrete shall extend outward at
least 600 mm. into the floor slab from face of column 415.4.4 Development of longitudinal reinforcement
for the full depth of the slab and be integrated with terminating in the joint shall be in accordance with
floor concrete; Section 425.4.
b. The Design strength of a column through a floor

system shall be calculated using the lower value of
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, inc. (p,SEP)

SECTION 416 416.2.1.8 Integrity ties shall be provided in the vertical
longitudinal, and transverse directions and around th~
CONNECTION BETWEEN perimeter of a structure in accordance with Section
MEMBERS 416.2.4 or 416.2.5.
416.1 Scope 416.2.2 Required Strength
416.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of joints 416.2.2.1 Required strength of connections and adjacent
and connections at the intersection of concrete members regions shall be calculated in accordance with the factored
and for load transfer between concrete surfaces, including load combinations in Section 405.
(a) through (d):
416.2.2.2 Required strength of connections and adjacent
a. Connections of precast members; regions shall be calculated in accordance with the analysis
procedures in Section 406.
b. Connections between foundations and either cast-in-
place or precast members; 416.2.3 Design Strength
c. Horizontal shear strength of composite concrete 416.2.3.1 For each applicable load combination, design
flexural members; strengths of precast member connections shall satisfy
d. Brackets and corbels. (416.2.3.1)
416.2 Connections of Precast Members

416.2.3.2 ¢ shall be determined in accordance with
416.2.1 General Section 421.2.
416.2.1.1 Transfer of forces by means of grouted joints, 416.2.3.3 At the contact surface between supported and
shear keys, bearing, anchors, mechanical connectors, steel supporting members, or between a supported 01'
reinforcement, reinforced topping, or a combination of supporting member and an intermediate bearing element
these, shall be permitted. nominal bearing strength for concrete surfaces, Bn shall
be caiculated in accordance with S~UOJl 422.8, Bn shall
416.2.1.2 Adequacy of connections shall be verified by be the lesser of the nominal. concrete bearing strengths for
analysis or test. the supported er supporting member surface, and shall not
exceed the strength of intermediate bearing elements, if
416.2.1.3 Connection details that rely solely on friction present.
caused by gravity loads shall not be permitted.
416.2.3.4 If shear is the primary result of imposed
416.2.1.4 Connections, and regions of members adjacent loading and shear transfer occurs across a given plane, it
to connections, shall be designed to resist forces and shall be permitted to calculate V n in accordance with the
accommodate deformations due to all load effects in the shear friction provisions in Section 422.9.
precast structural system.
416.2.4 Minimum Connection Strength and
416.2.1.5 Design of connections shall consider structural Integrity Tie Requirements
effects of restraint of volume change in accordance with
Section 405.3.6. 416.2.4.1 Unless where the provisions of Section 416.2.5
govern, longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall
416.2.1.6 Design of connections shall consider the connect precast members. to a lateral force-resisting
effects of tolerances specified for fabrication and erection system, and vertical integrity ties shall be provided in
of precast members. accordance with Section 416.2.4.3 to connect adjacent
floor and roof levels.
416.2.1.7 Design of a connection with multiple
components shall consider the differences III stiffness, 416.2.4.2 Where precast members form floor or roof
strength, and ductility of the components. diaphragms, the connections between the diaphragm and
those members being laterally supported by the
diaphragm shall have a nominal tensile strength of not
less than 4.4 kN per linear m.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I: Edition. 2016

4-92 CHAPTER 4 _- Structural Concrete
416.2.4.3 Vertical integrity ties shall be provided at 416.2.5.2 Vertical integrity ties shall satisfy (a) through
horizontal joints between all vertical precast structural (c):
members, except cladding, and shall satisfy (a) or (b):
a. Integrity ties shall be provided in all wall panels and
a. Concrete connections between precast columns shall shall be continuous over the height of the building;
have vertical integrity ties, with a nominal tensile
strength of at least 1.4A~, in N, where Ag is the gross b. Integrity ties shall provide a nominal tensile strength
area of the column, mm . For columns with a larger of at least 44 kN per horizontal meter of wall;
cross-section than required by consideration of
loading, a reduced effective area based on the cross c. At least two integrity ties shall be provided in each
section required shall be permitted. The reduced wall panel.
effective area shall be at least one-half the gross area
of the column; 416.2.6 Minimum Dimensions at Bearing
Connections
b. The Connections between precast wall panels shall
have at least two vertical integrity ties, with a 416.2.6.1 Dimensions of bearing connections shall
nominal tensile strength of at least 44 kN per tie. satisfy Section 416.2.6.2 or 416.2.6.3 unless shown by
analysis or test that lesser dimensions will not impair
416.2.5 Integrity Tie Requirements for Precast performance.
Concrete Bearing Wall Structures Three
Storeys or More in Height 416.2.6.2 For precast slabs, beams, or stemmed
members, minimum design dimensions from the face of
416.2.5.1 Integrity ties in floor and roof systems shall support to end of precast member in the direction of the
satisfy (a) through (f): span, considering specified tolerances, shall be in
a. Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall be
provided in floor and roof systems to provide a Table 416.2.6.2
nominal tensile strength of at least 22 kN per meter Minimum Design Dimensions from Face of
of width or length; Support to End of Precast Member
b. Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall be Member t e Minimum distance, mm.
provided over interior wall supports and between the Solid or hollow-core f /180
Greater of:
floor or roof system and exterior walls; slab 50
Beam or stemmed
Greater of:
e /180
c. Longitudinal and transverse integrity ties shall be member 75
positioned in or within 600 mm. of the plane of the
floor or roof system; 416.2.6.3 Bearing pads adjacent to unarmored faces shall
be set back from the face of the support and the end of the
d. Longitudinal integrity ties shall be oriented parallel to supported member a distance not less than 12 mm. or the
floor or roof slab spans and shall be spaced not chamfer dimension at a chamfered face.
greater than 3.0 m on center. Provisions shall be
made to transfer forces around openings; 416.3 Connections to Foundations
e. Transverse integrity ties shall be oriented 416.3.1 General

perpendicular to floor or roof slab spans and shall be
spaced not greater than the bearing wall spacing; 416.3.1.1 Factored forces and moments at base of
columns, walls, or pedestals shall be transferred to
f. Integrity ties at the perimeter of each floor and root: supporting foundations by bearing on concrete and by
within 1.2 m of the edge, shall provide a nominal reinforcement, dowels, anchor bolts, or mechanical
tensile strength of at least 71 kN. connectors.
416.3.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical

connectors between a supported member and foundation
shall be designed to transfer (a) and (b):

CH/\PTE.R 4 -- St(uctural Concrete 4-93
u. Compressive forces that exceed the lesser of the and shall not exceed the strength of intermediate bearing
concrete bearing strengths of either the supported clements, if present.
-member or the foundation, calculated in accordance
with Section 422.8; 416.3.3.5 At the contact surface between supported
member and foundation, V n shall be calculated in
b. Any calculated tensile force across the interface, accordance with the shear friction provisions in Section
422.9 or by other appropriate means.
416.3.1.3 At the base of a composite column with a
structural steel core, (a) or (b) shall be satisfied: 416.3.3.6 At the base of a precast column, pedestal, or
wall, anchor bolts and anchors for mechanical
a. Base of structural steel section shall be designed to connections shall be designed in accordance with Section
transfer the total factored forces from the entire 417. Forces developed during erection shall be
composite member to the foundation; considered.
b. Base of structural steel section shall be designed to 416.3.3.7 At the base of a precast column, pedestal, or
transfer the factored forces frOI11the steel core only, wall, mechanical connectors shall be designed to reach
and the remainder of the total factored forces shall be their design strength before anchorage failure or failure of
transferred to the foundation by compression in the surrounding concrete.
concrete and by reinforcement.
416.3.4 Minimum Reinforcement for Connections
416.3.2 Required Strength Between Cast-In-Place Members And
Foundation
416.3.2.1 Factored forces and moments transferred to
foundations shall be calculated in accordance with the 416.3.4.1 For connections between a cast-in-place
factored load combinations in Section 405 and analysis column or pedestal and foundation, As crossing the
procedures in Section 406. interface shall be at least 0, 005Ag, where Ag is the gross
area of the supported member.
416.3.3 Design Strength
416.3.4.2 For connections between a cast-in-place wall
416.3.3.1 Design strengths of connections between and foundation, area of vertical reinforcement crossing
columns, walls, or pedestals and foundations shall satisfy the interface shall satisfy Section 411.6.1.
Eq. 416.3.3.1 for each applicable load combination, For
connections between precast members and foundations, 416.3.5 Details for Connections 'between Cast-in-
requirements for vertical integrity ties in Section Place Members and Foundation
416.2.4.3 or 416.2.5,2 shall be satisfied.
416.3.5.1 At the base of a cast-in-place column,
(416.3.3.1) pedestal, or wall, reinforcement required to satisfy
Sections 416.3.3 and 416.3.4 shall be provided either by
where Sn is the nominal flexural, shear, axial, torsional, extending longitudinal bars into supporting foundation or
or bearing strength of the connection. by dowels.
416.3.3.2 rp shall be determined in accordance with 416.3.5.2 Where moments are transferred to the
Section 421.2. foundation, reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical
connectors shall satisfy Section 410.7.5 for splices.
416.3.3.3 Combined moment and axial strength of
connections shall be calculated in accordance with 416.3.5.3 If a pinned or rocker connection is used at the
Section 422.4. base of a cast-in-place column or pedestal, the connection
to foundation shall satisfy Section 416.3.3.
416.3.3.4 At the contact surface between a supported
member and foundation, or between a supported member 416.3.5.4 At footings, it shall be permitted to lap splice
or foundation and an intermediate bearing element, 40 mm rp and 58 mm rp longitudinal bars, in compression
nominal bearing strength, Bn, shall be calculated in only, with dowels to satisfy Section 416.3.3.1. Dowels
accordance with Section 422.8 for concrete surfaces. Bn shall satisfy (a) through (c):
shall be the lesser of the nominal concrete bearing
strengths for the supported member or foundation surface a. Dowels shall not be larger than 36 mm rp;
National Structural Code of the Pnitlppines volume 1\701 Edition, 20'16

4-94 CHl\PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
b. Dowels shall extend into supported member at least

cfJVnh;::: Vu (416.4.3.1)
the greater of the development length of the
,t longitudinal bars in compression, I de, and the where nominal horizontal shear strength, V nh' is
compression lap splice length of the dowels, Ise; calculated in accordance with Section 416.4.4.
c. Dowels shall extend into the footing at least Ide of 416.4.3.2 cfJ shall be determined in accordance with
the dowels. Section 421.2.
416.3.6 Details for Connections between Precast 416.4.4 Nominal Horizontal Shear Strength
Members and Foundation
416.4.4.1 If Vu > ¢(3. 5bvd), Vnh shall be taken as v,
416.3.6.1 At the base of a precast column, pedestal or calculated in accordance with Section 422.9.
wall, the connection to the foundation shall satisfy
Section 416.2.4.3 or 416.2.5.2. where, b.; is the width of the contact surface, and d is in
416.3.6.2 If the applicable load combinations of Section
416.3.3 result in no tension at the base of precast walls, 416.4.4.2 If V u ::; cfJ(3. 5bvd), V nh shall be taken as V n
vertical integrity ties required by Section 416.2.4.3(b) calculated in accordance with Table 416.4.4.2, where
shall be permitted to be developed into an adequately Av.min is in accordance with Section 416.4.6, b.; is the
reinforced concrete slab-on-ground. width of the contact surface, and d is in accordance with
Section 416.4.4.3.
416.4 Horizontal Shear Transfer in Composite
Concrete Flexural Members 416.4.4.3 In Table 416.4.4.2, d shall be the distance
from extreme compression fiber for the entire composite
416.4.1 General section to the centroid of prestressed and non-prestressed
longitudinal tension reinforcement, if any, but need not be
416.4.1.1 In a composite concrete flexural member, taken less than O.SOh for prestressed concrete members.
horizontal shear forces shall be provided at contact
surfaces of interconnected elements. 416.4.4.4 Transverse reinforcement in the previously
cast concrete that extends into the cast-in-place concrete
416.4.1.2 Where tension exists across any contact and is anchored on both sides of the interface shall be
surface between interconnected concrete elements,
permitted to be included as ties for calculat!on of V nh .
horizontal shear transfer by contact shall be permitted
only where transverse reinforcement is provided III
416.4.5 Alternative Method for Calculating Design
accordance with Sections 416.4.6 and 416.4.7.
Horizontal Shear Strength
416.4.1.3 Surface preparation assumed for design shall
416.4.5.1 As an alternative to Section 416.4.3.1, factored
be specified in the construction documents.
horizontal shear V uh shall be calculated from the change
in flexural compressive or tensile force in any segment of
416.4.2 Required Strength
the composite concrete member, and Eq. 416.4.5.1 shall
be satisfied at all locations along the horizontal interface:
416.4.2.1 Factored forces transferred along the contact
surface in composite concrete flexural members shall be
(416.4.5.1)
calculated in accordance with the factored load
combinations in Section 405.
Nominal horizontal shear strength, V nh» shall be
416.4.2.2 Required strength shall be calculated in calculated in accordance with Section 416.4.4.1 or
accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406. 416.4.4.2, where area of contact surface shall be
substituted for bvd and V uh shall be substituted for V u .
416.4.3 Design Strength Provisions shall be made to transfer the change in
compressive or tensile force as horizontal shear force
416.4.3.1 Design strength for horizontal shear transfer across the interface.
shall satisfy Eq. 416.4.3.1 at all locations along the
horizontal interface in a composite concrete flexural 416.4.5.2 Where shear transfer reinforcement is
member, unless Section 416.4.5 is satisfied: designed to resist horizontal shear to satisfy Eq. 416.4.5.1,
the tie area to tie spacing ratio along the member shall
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. U~,SEP)

approximately reflect the distribution of interface shear

forces in tile composite concrete flexural member.
416.4.5.3 'fran verse reinforcement in a previously cast

section that extends into the cast-in-place section and is
anchored on both ides f th interface shall be permitted
to be included as ties for calculation Of V1I11•
Table 416.4.4.2
Nominal Horizontal Shear Strength
Shear transfer
Contact surface preparation III
reinforcement
Concrete placed against hardened concrete

(a)
intentionally roughened to a full amplitude Lesser of:
of approximately 6 mm.
3.5~d (b)
(c)
not intentionally roughened
Other cases (d)
intentionally rou_gheMd
1] Concrete contact surface shall be clean and free of laitance 416.4.7.3 Shear transfer reinforcement shall be
developed in interconnected elements in accordance with
416.4.6 Minimum Reinforcement for Horizontal Section 425.7.1.
Shear Transfer
416.5 Brackets and Corbels
416.4.6.1 Where shear transfer reinforcement IS
designed to resist horizontal shear, Av,min shall be the 416.5.1 General

greater of (a) and (b):
416.5.1.1 Brackets and corbels with shear span-to-depth
ratio av/ d's 1. 0 and with factored horizontal tensile
a. force N uc S V u shall be permitted to be designed in
b. 416.5.2 Dimensional Limits
416.5.2.1 Effective depth d for a bracket or corbel shall

416.4.7 Reinforcement Detailing for Horizontal be calculated at the face of the support.
Shear Transfer
416.5.2.2 Overall depth of bracket or corbel at the
416.4.7.1 Shear transfer reinforcement shall consist of outside edge of the bearing area shall be at least O.Sd.
single bars or wire, multiple leg stirrups, or vertical legs
of welded wire reinforcement.
416.4.7.2 Where shear transfer reinfercernent IS

resigned to resist horizontal shear, longitudinal spacing of
shear transfer reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of
600 ImTI and four times the least dimension of the
supported element.

416.5.2.3 No part of the bearing area on a bracket or 416.5.3.4 Horizontal tensile force acting on a bracket or
corbel shall project farther from the face of support than corbel shall be treated as a live load when calculating
(a) or (b): Nuc' even if the tension results from restraint of creep,
shrinkage, or temperature change.
a, End of the straight portion of the primary tension
reinforcement; 416.5.3.5 Unless tensile forces are prevented from being
applied to the bracket or corbel, N uc shall be at least
b. Interior face of the transverse anchor bar, if one is 0.2Vu·
provided.
416.5.4 Design Strength
416.5.2.4 For normal-weight concrete, the bracket or
corbel dimensions shall be selected such that V u/ 4J shall 416.5.4.1 Design strength at all sections shall satisfy
not exceed the least of (a) through (c): 4JSn ~ U, including (a) through (c). Interaction between
load effects shall be considered.
b. (3.3 + O.08f~)bwd
416.5.4.2 4J shall be determined In accordance with

Section 421.2.
416.5.2.5 For all-lightweight or sand-lightweight'
416.5.4.3 Nominal tensile strength Nn provided by An
concrete, the bracket or corbel dimensions shall be
shall be calculated by
selected such that V u/ 4J shall not exceed the lesser of (a)
and (b):
(416.5.4.3)
a. ( 0.2 - 0.07 C;;) f~bwd 416.5.4.4 Nominal shear strength V n provided by

Avt shall be calculated in accordance with provisions for
shear-friction in Section 422.9, where Avf. is the area of
reinforcement that crosses the assumed shear plane.
416.5.4.5 Nominal flexural strength Mn provided by At

shall be calculated in accordance with the design
416.5.3 Required Strength assumptions in Section 422.2.
416.5.3.1 The section at the face of the support shall be 416.5.5 Reinforcement Limits
designed to resist simultaneously the factored shear V u,
the factored horizontal tensile force N uc, and the factored 416.5.5.1 Area of primary tension reinforcement, Asc'
moment Mu given by [VuUv + Nuc(h - d)]. shall be at least the greatest of (a) through (c):
416.5.3.2 Factored tensile force, Nun and shear, V u ,

shall be the maximum values calculated in accordance
with the factored load combinations in Section 405.
b. (2/3)Avt + An
accordance with the analysis procedures in Section 406,
and the requirements in this section.

416.5.5.2 Total area of closed stirrups or ties parallel to

SECTION 417
primary tension reinforcement, Ah , shall be at least:
ANCHORING TO CONCRETE
(416.5.5.2)
417.1 Scope
416.5.6 Reinforcement Detailing 417.1.1 This section provides design requirements for
anchors in concrete used to transmit structural loads by
416.5.6.1 Concrete cover shall be in accordance with means of tension, shear, or a combination of tension and
Section 420.6.1.3. shear between: (a) connected structural elements; or (b)
safety-related attachments and structural elements. Safety
416.5.6.2 Minimum spacing for deformed reinforcement levels specified are intended for in-service conditions,
shall be in accordance with Section 425.2. rather than for short-term handling and construction
conditions.
416.5.6.3 At the front face of a bracket or corbel,
primary tension reinforcement shall be anchored by (a), 417.1.2 This section applies to cast-in anchors and to
(b), or (c): post-installed expansion (torque-controlled and
displacement-controlled), undercut, and adhesive anchors.
a. A weld to a transverse bar of at least equal size that is Adhesive anchors shall be installed in concrete having a
designed to develop f y of primary tension minimum age of 21 days at time of anchor installation.
reinforcement; Specialty inserts, through-bolts, multiple anchors
connected to a single steel plate at the embedded end of
b. Bending the primary tension reinforcement back to the anchors, grouted anchors, and direct anchors such as
form a horizontal loop; powder or pneumatic actuated nails or bolts are not
included in the provisions of this section. Reinforcement
c. Other means of anchorage that develops f y' used as part of the embedment shall be designed in
accordance with other parts of this Chapter.
416.5.6.4 Primary tension reinforcement shall be
developed at the face of the support. 417.1.3 Design provisions are included for the
following types of anchors:
416.5.6.5 Development of tension reinforcement shall
account for distribution of stress in reinforcement that is a. Headed studs and headed bolts having a geometry
not directly proportional to the bending moment. that has been demonstrated to result in a pullout
strength in uncracked concrete equal to or exceeding
416.5.6.6 Closed stirrups or ties shall be spaced such that 1.4Np' where Np is given in Eq. 417.4.3.4;
Ah is uniformly distributed within (2/3)d measured
from the primary tension reinforcement. b. Hooked bolts having a geometry that has been
demonstrated to result in a pullout strength without
the benefit of friction in un cracked concrete equal to
or exceeding 1.4Np' where Np is given in
Eq.417.4.3.5;
c. Post-installed expansion and undercut anchors that

meet the assessment criteria of ACI 355.2;
d. Adhesive anchors that meet the assessment criteria of

ACI355.4M.
417.1.4 Load Applications that are Predominantly High

Cycle Fatigue or Impact Loads are not covered by this
Section.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, til Edition, 20'16

417.2 General 417.2.3.4 Requirements for Tensile Loading
.'
417.2.1 Anchors and anchor groups shall be designed 417.2.3.4.1 Where the tensile component of the strength-
for critical effects of factored loads as determined by level earthquake force applied to a single anchor or group
elastic analysis. Plastic analysis approaches are permitted of anchors is equal to or less than 20 percent of the total
where nominal strength is controlled by ductile steel factored anchor tensile force associated with the same
elements, provided that deformational compatibility is load combination, it shall be permitted to design a single
taken into account. anchor or group of anchors to satisfy Section 417.4 and
the tensile strength requirements of Section 417.3.1.1.
417.2.1.1 Anchor group effects shall be considered
wherever two or more anchors have spacing less than the 417.2.3.4.2 Where the tensile component of the strength-
critical spacing as follows: level earthquake force applied to anchors exceeds 20
percent of the total factored anchor tensile force
Failure Mode Under associated with the same load combination, anchors and
Critical Spacing
Investigation their attachments shall be designed in accordance with
Concrete breakout in tension 3he[_ Section 417.2.3.4.3. The anchor design tensile strength
shall be determined in accordance with Section
Bond strength in tension 2CNA
417.2.3.4.4.
Concrete breakout in shear 2cal
417.2.3.4.3 Anchors and their attachments shall satisfy
one of options (a) through (d):
Only those anchors susceptible to the particular failure
mode under investigation shall be included in the group.
a. For single anchors, the concrete-governed strength
shall be greater than the steel strength of the anchor.
417.2.2 The design strength of anchors shall equal or
For anchor groups, the ratio of the tensile load on the
exceed the largest required strength calculated from the
most highly stressed anchor to the steel strength of
applicable load combinations in Section 405.3.
that anchor shall be equal to or greater than the ratio
of the tensile load on tension loaded anchors to the
417.2.3 Seismic Design concrete-governed strength of those anchors. In each
case:
417.2.3.1 Anchors in structures assigned to seismic zone
4 shall satisfy the additional requirements of Sections
I. The steel strength shall be taken as 1.2 times the
417.2.3.2 through 417.2.3.7. nominal steel strength of the anchor;
417.2.3.2 The provisions of this section do not apply to n. The concrete-governed strength shall be taken as
the design of anchors in plastic hinge zones of concrete the nominal strength considering pullout, side
structures under earthquake forces. face blowout, concrete breakout, and bond
strength as applicable. For consideration of
417.2.3.3 Post-installed anchors shall be qualified for pullout in groups, the ratio shall be calculated for
earthquake loading in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI the most highly stressed anchor.
35S.4M. The pullout strength N p and steel strength in
shear V sa of expansion and undercut anchors shall be In addition, the following shall be satisfied:
based on the results of the ACI 355.2 Simulated Seismic
Tests. For adhesive anchors, the steel strength in shear ni. Anchors shall transmit tensile loads via a ductile
V sa and the characteristic bond stresses Tuner and Ter steel element with a stretch length of at least
shall be based on results of the ACI 355.4M Simulated eight anchor diameters unless otherwise
Seismic Tests. determined by analysis;
IV. Where anchors are subject to load reversals, the

anchor shall be protected against buckling;
v. Where connections are threaded and the ductile

steel elements are not threaded over their entire
length, the ratio of f uta/ f ya shall not be less
than 1.3 unless the threaded portions are upset.

The upset portions shall not be included in the 417.2.3.4.5 Where anchor reinforcement is provided in
stretch length; accordance with Section 417.4.2.9, no reduction in design
tensile strength beyond that specified in Section 417.4.2.9
VI, Deformed reinforcing bars used as ductile steel shall be required.
elements to resist earthquake effects shall be
limited to ASTM A6l5M Grades 280 and 420 417.2.3.5 Requirements for Shear Loading
satisfying the requirements of Section
420.2.2.5(b) or ASTM A706M Grade 420. 417.2.3.5.1 Where the shear component of the strength-
level earthquake force applied to the anchor or group of
b. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for anchors is equal to or less than 20 percent of the total
the maximum tension that can be transmitted to the factored anchor shear force associated with the same load
anchor or group of anchors based on the development combination, it shall be permitted to design the anchor or
of a ductile yield mechanism in the attachment in group of anchors to satisfy Section 417.5 and the shear
tension, flexure, shear, or bearing, or a combination strength requirements of Section 417.3.1.1.
of those conditions, and considering both material
overstrength and strain hardening effects for the 417.2.3.5.2 Where the shear component of the strength-
attachment. The anchor design tensile strength shall level earthquake force applied to anchors exceeds 20
be calculated from Section 417.2.3.4.4; percent of the total factored anchor shear force associated
with the same load combination, anchors and their
c. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for attachments shall be designed in accordance with Section
the maximum tension that can be transmitted to the 417.2.3.5.3. The anchor design shear strength for resisting
anchors by a non-yielding attachment. The anchor earthquake forces shall be determined in accordance with
design tensile strength shall be calculated from Section 417.5.
Section 417.2.3.4.4;
417,2.3.5,3 Anchors and their attachments shall be
d. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for designed using one of options (a) through (c):
the maximum tension obtained from design load
combinations that include E, with E increased by no' a. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for
The anchor design tensile strength shall satisfy the the maximum shear that can be transmitted to the
tensile strength requirements of Section 417.2.3.4.4. anchor or group of anchors based on the development
of a ductile yield mechanism in the attachment in
417.2.3.4.4 The anchor design tensile strength for flexure, shear, or bearing, or a combination of those
resisting earthquake forces shall be determined from conditions, and considering. both material
consideration of (a) through (e) for the failure modes overstrength and strain hardening effects in the
given in Table 417.3.1.1 assuming the concrete is cracked attachment;
unless it can be demonstrated that the concrete remains
uncracked: b. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for
the maximum shear that can be transmitted to the
a, lfJN sa for a single anchor, or for the most highly anchors by a non-yielding attachment;
stressed individual anchor in a group of anchors;
c. The anchor or group of anchors shall be designed for
b. O.75lfJNcb or O.75lfJNcbg' except that Ncb or Ncbg the maximum shear obtained from design load
need not be calculated where anchor reinforcement combinations that include E, with E increased by no'
satisfying Section 417.4.2.9 is provided; The anchor design shear strength shall satisfy the
shear strength requirements of Section 417.3.1.1.
c. O. 75lfJN pn for a single anchor, or for the most highly
stressed individual anchor in a group of anchors; 417.2.3.5.4 Where anchor reinforcement is provided in
accordance with Section 417.5.2.9, no reduction in design
shear strength beyond that specified in Section 417.5.2.9
shall be required.
e. O. 75lfJN a or O. 75lfJN ago

417.2.3.6 Single anchors or groups of anchors that are
subjected to both tension and shear forces shall be
where lfJ is in accordance with Section 417.3.3, designed to satisfy the requirements of Section 417.6,
with the anchor design tensile strength calculated from
Section 417.2.3.4.4.
National Structural Code of the Philippines volume i,

417.2.3.7 Anchor reinforcement used in structures c. Pullout strength cast-in, post-installed expansion, or
assigned to seismic zone 4 shall be deformed undercut anchor in tension (Section 41704.3);
.' reinforcement and shall be limited to ASTM A615M
Grades 280 and 420 satisfying the requirements of d. Concrete side-face blowout strength of headed
Section 420.2.2.5(b) or ASTM A 706M Grade 420. anchor in tension (Section 417.4.4);
417.2.4 Adhesive anchors installed horizontally or e. Bond strength of adhesive anchor in tension (Section
upwardly inclined shall be qualified in accordance with 417.4.5);
ACI 355.4M requirements for sensitivity to installation
direction. f. Steel strength of anchor in shear (Section 417.5.1);
417.2.5 For adhesive anchors subjected to sustained g. Concrete breakout strength of anchor in shear
tension loading, Section 417.3.1.2 shall be satisfied. For (Section 417.5.2);
groups of adhesive anchors, Eq. 417.3.1.2 shall be
satisfied for the anchor that resists the highest sustained h. Concrete pryout strength of anchor in shear (Section
tension load. Installer certification and inspection 417.5.3).
requirements for horizontal and upwardly inclined
adhesive anchors subjected to sustained tension loading In addition, anchors shall satisfy the required edge
shall be in accordance with Sections 417.8.2.2 through distances, spacings, and thicknesses to preclude splitting
417.8.2.4. failure, as required in Section 417.7.
417.2.6 Modification factor Aa for lightweight 417.3.1.1 The design of anchors shall be in accordance
concrete shall be taken as: with Table 417.3.1.l. In addition, the design of anchors
shall satisfy Section 417.2.3 for earthquake loading and
Cast-in and undercut anchor concrete failure .......... 1. OA Section 417.3.1.2 for adhesive anchors subject to
sustained tensile loading.
Expansion and adhesive anchor concrete failure .... O.8A
417.3.1.2 For the design of adhesive anchors to resist
Adhesive anchor bond failure per Eq. 41704.5.2 ...... O.6A sustained tensions loads, in addition to Section 417 .3.1.1,
Eq. 417.3 .1.2 shall be satisfied.
where A is determined in accordance with Section
419.2.4. It shall be permitted to use an alternative value of (417.3.1.2)
Aa a where tests have been performed and evaluated in
accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355AM.
where N ba is determined in accordance with Section
41704.5.2.
417.2.7 The values of f~ used for calculation purposes
in this chapter shall not exceed 70 MPa for cast-in
anchors, and 55 MPa for post-installed anchors. Testing is 417.3.1.3 When both Nua and Vua are present,
required for post-installed anchors when used in concrete interaction effects shall be considered using an interaction
with t; greater than 55 MPa. expression that results in computation of strength in
substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
This requirement shall be considered satisfied by Section
417.3 General Requirements for Strength of
417.6.
Anchors
417.3.1 Strength design of anchors shall be based 417.3.2 The nominal strength for any anchor or group
of anchors shall be based on design models that result in
either on computation using design models that satisfy the
predictions of strength in substantial agreement with
requirements of Section 417.3.2, or on test evaluation
using the 5 percent fractile of applicable test results for results of comprehensive tests. The materials used in the
the following: tests shall be compatible with the materials used in the
structure. The nominal strength shall be based on the 5
percent fractile of the basic individual anchor strength.
a. Steel strength of anchor in tension (Section 41704.1);
For nominal strengths related to concrete strength,
modifications for size effects, the number of anchors, the
b. Concrete breakout strength of anchor in tension
effects of close spacing of anchors, proximity to edges,
(Section 41704.2);
depth of the concrete member, eccentric loadings of
anchor groups, and presence or absence of cracking shall

be taken into account. Limits on edge distances and

anchor spacing in the design models shall be consistent
with the tests that verified the model.
Table 417.3.1.1 Required Strength of Anchors, Except as Noted in Section 417.2.3
Anchor I!roupTlI
Failure mode Single anchor
Individual anchor in a I!rOuD Anchors as a group
Steel strength in tension (Section 417.4.1) ¢N,a > Nun. ¢Nsa > Nuai
Concrete breakout strength in tension (Section 417.4,2) ¢Ncb 2:: Nua ¢NCb/!. 2:: Nua../l.
Pullout strength in tension (Section 417.4.3) ¢Nvn 2:: Nua ¢Nvn 2:: Nua;
Concrete side-face blowout strength in tension (Sectiou 417.4.4) ¢Nsb > «: ¢Nsbg > Nu,!~
Bond s(rength of adhesive anchor intension (Seci ion 417.4.5) ¢Na. > Nua ¢Nag 2:: Nua.1!.
Steel strength in shear,(Seotiol) 417.5.1) ¢I'sa > II, a ¢v,a> Vuai
Concrete breakout strength in shear (Section 417.5.2) ¢Vcb 2:: Vua ¢VCIJg_2:: Vua,g
Concrete pryout strength in shear (Section 417.5.3) ¢Vcv 2:: Vua ¢Vcpg > Vua,g
[I) Required strengths for steel and pullout failure modes shall be calculated for the most highly stressed anchor in the group.
417.3.2.1 The effect of reinforcement provided to 11. Shear loads 0.60

restrain the concrete breakout shall be permitted to be
included in the design models used to satisfy Section c. Anchor governed by concrete breakout, side-face
417.3.2. Where anchor reinforcement is provided .in blowout, pullout, or pryout strength
accordance with Sections 417.4.2.9 and 417.5.2.9,
calculation of the concrete breakout strength in Condition A Condition B
accordance with Sections 417.4.2 and 417.5.2 is not
required. t, Shear loads 0.75 0.70
417.3.2.2 For anchors with diameters not exceeding 11. Tension loads
100mm, the concrete breakout strength requirements shall Cast-in headed studs,
be considered satisfied by the design procedure of headed bolts,
Sections 417.4.2 and 417.5.2. or
hooked bolts 0.75 0.70
417.3.2.3 For adhesive anchors with embedment depths
4da :::;he! :::;20da, the bond strength requirements shall
be considered satisfied by the design procedure of Section Post-installed anchors with category as determined from
417.4.5. ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M
417.3.3 Strength reduction factor cP for anchors in Condition A Condition B

concrete shall be as follows when the load combinations
of Section 405.3 are used: Category 1 0.75 0.65
(Low sensitivity to installation and high reliability)
a. Anchor governed by strength of a ductile steel
element Category2 0.65 0.55
(Medium sensitivity to installation and medium
1. Tension loads 0.75 reliability)
11. Shear loads 0.65 Category 3 0.55 " 0.45

(High sensitivity to installation and lower reliability)
b. Anchor governed by strength of a brittle steel
element Condition A applies where supplementary reinforcement
is present except for pullout and pryout strengths.
i. Tension loads 0.65
Condition B applies where supplementary reinforcement
is not present, and for pullout or pryout strength.

4~102 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
417.4 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading 417.4.2.2 The basic concrete breakout strength of a
single anchor in tension in cracked concrete, N b, shall not
417.4.1 Steel Strength of Anchor in Tension exceed
417.4.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in tension (417.4.2.2a)

as governed by the steel, N sa' shall be evaluated by
calculations based on the properties of the anchor material where ke = 10 for cast-in anchors, k; = 17 for post-
and the physical dimensions of the anchor. installed anchors.
417.4.1.2 The nominal strength of an anchor in tension, The value of k; for post-installed anchors shall be
N sa' shall not exceed permitted to be increased above 17 based on ACI 355.2 or
ACI 355.4M product-specific tests, but shall not exceed
(417.4.1.2) 10.
Alternatively, for cast-in headed studs and headed bolts

where Ase,N is the effective cross-sectional area of an with 280 mm s he! s 635 mm, Nb shall not exceed
anchor in tension, mrrr', and f uta shall not be taken
greater than the smaller of 1.9f ya and 860 MPa. (417.4.2.2b)
417.4.2 Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in

Tension 417.4.2.3 Where anchors are located less than 1.5he!
from three or more edges, the value of he! used for the
417.4.2.1 The nominal concrete breakout strength in calculation of ANe in accordance with Section 417.4.2.1,
tension, Neb of a single anchor or N ebg of a group of as well as for the equations in Sections 417.4.2.1 through
anchors, shall not exceed: 417.4.2.5 shall be the larger of (ca,max)/l. 5and s/3,
where s is the maximum spacing between anchors within
a. For a single anchor; the group.
417.4.2.4 The modification factor for anchor groups

(417.4.2.1a) loaded eccentrically in tension, 1/Jee,N , shall be calculated
as
1
b. For a group of anchors; Wec,N = (' 2e~) (417.4.2.4)
1 + 3he!
but 1/Jee,N shall not be taken greater than 1.0. If the
loading on an anchor group is such that only some
(417.4.2.1b) anchors are in tension, only those anchors that are in
tension shall be considered when determining the
eccentricity e~ for use in Eq. 417.4.2.4 and for the
Factors 1/Jee,N' 1/Jed,N, 1/Je,N, and 1/Jep,N are defined in calculation of Nebg according to Eq. 417.4.2.1b.
Sections 417.4.2.4, 417.4.2.5, 417.4.2.6, and 417.4.2.7,
respectively. ANeis the projected concrete failure area of a In the case where eccentric loading exists about two axes,
single anchor or group of anchors that shall be
the modification factor, 1/Jee,N shall be calculated for each
approximated as the base of the rectilinear geometrical
axis individually and the product of these factors used as
figure that results from projecting the failure surface
1/Jee,N in Eq. 417.4.2.1b.
outward 1, 5he! from the centerlines of the anchor, or in
the case of a group of anchors, from a line through a row
417.4.2.5 The modification factor for edge effects for
of adjacent anchors. ANe shall not exceed nANeo, where n
single anchors or anchor groups loaded in tension, 1/Jed,N,
is the number of anchors in the group that resist tension.
shall be calculated as:
nANeo is the projected concrete failure area of a single
anchor with an edge distance equal to or greater than
1.5he!
If Ca,min;;::; 1, 5he!, then when 1/Jed,N = 1.0
(417.4.2.5a)
(417.4.2.1c)

If ea,min 417.4.2.8 Where an additional plate or washer is added

Ca,min < I.She!, then 1/Jed,N = 0.7 + 0.3 1. She!
at the head of the anchor, it shall be permitted to calculate
(417.4.2.5b) the projected area of the failure surface by projecting the
failure surface outward 1. She! from the effective
417.4.2.6 For anchors located in a region of a concrete perimeter of the plate or washer. The effective perimeter
member where analysis indicates no cracking at service shall not exceed the value at a section projected outward
load levels, the following modification factor shall be more than the thickness of the washer or plate from the
permitted: outer edge of the head of the anchor.
a. 1/Je,N= 1.25 for cast-in anchors;
417.4.2.9 Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
accordance with Section 425 on both sides of the breakout
b. 1/Je,N= 1.4 for post-installed anchors, where the value surface, the design strength of the anchor reinforcement
ofke used in Eq. 417.4.2.2a is 17; shall be permitted to be used instead of the concrete
breakout strength in determining cfJNn- A strength
Where the value of k.; used in Eq. 417.4.2.2a is taken reduction factor of 0.75 shall be used in the design of the
from the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M product evaluation anchor reinforcement.
report for post-installed anchors qualified for use in both
cracked and uncracked concrete, the values of k; and 417.4.3 Pullout Strength of Cast-In, Post-Installed
1/Je,N shall be based on the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M Expansion and Undercut Anchors in
product evaluation report. Tension
Where the value of k; used in Eq. 417.4.2.2a is taken 417.4.3.1 The nominal pullout strength of a single cast-
from the ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M product evaluation in, post-installed expansion, and post-installed undercut
report for post-installed anchors qualified for use III anchor in tension, Npn' shall not exceed
uncracked concrete, 1/Je,N shall be taken as 1.0.
(417.4.3.1)
When analysis indicates cracking at service load levels,
1/Je,N shall be taken as 1.0 for both cast-in anchors and
post-installed anchors. Post-installed anchors shall be where v.» is defined in Section 417.4.3.6.
qualified for use in cracked concrete in accordance with
ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M. The cracking in the concrete 417.4.3.2 For post-installed expansion and undercut
shall be controlled by flexural reinforcement distributed anchors, the values of N p shall be based on the 5 percent
in accordance with Section 424.3.2, or equivalent crack fractile of results of tests performed. and evaluated
control shall be provided by confining reinforcement. according to ACI 355.2. It is not permissible to calculate
the pullout strength in tension for such anchors.
417.4.2.7 The modification factor for post-installed
anchors designed for uncracked concrete in accordance 417.4.3.3 For single cast-in headed studs and headed
with Section 417.4.2.6 without supplementary bolts, it shall be permitted to evaluate the pullout strength
reinforcement to control splitting, 1/Jep,N, shall be in tension using Section 417.4.3.4. For single J- or L-
calculated as follows using the critical distance cae as bolts, it shall be permitted to evaluate the pullout strength
defined in Section 417.7.6. in tension using Section 417.4.3.5. Alternatively, it shall
be permitted to use values of N p based on the 5 percent
If ca,min ~ cae, then when1/Jcp,N = 1.0 (417.4.2.7a) fractile of tests performed and evaluated in the same
manner as the ACI 355.2 procedures but without the
benefit of friction.
ea/min
If Ca,min < cae, then when1/Jep,N= --,
cae 417.4.3.4 The pullout strength in tension of a single
(417.4.2.5b) headed stud or headed bolt, Np' for use in Eq. 417.4.3.1,
shall not exceed:
but 1/Jep,N determined from Eq. 417.4.2.7b shall not be
taken less than 1. She! / Cae' where the critical distance (417.4.3.4)
cae is defined in Section 417.7.6.
417.4.3.5 The pullout strength in tension of a single

For all other cases, including cast-in anchors, 1/Jep,N shall .1
hooked bolt, N p' for use in Eq. 417.4.3.1 shall not exceed:
be taken as 1.0.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume L 7th Edition, 2016

4-'104 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
(417.4.3.5)
ANa
Nag = A1/Jee,Na,
Nao
1/Jed,Na' 1/Jep,Na' N ba
(417.4.5.1b)
417.4.3.6 For an anchor located in a region ofa concrete
member where analysis indicates no cracking at service
load levels, the following modification factor shall be Factors 1/Jee,Na, 1/Jed,Na, and 1/Jep,Na are defined in
permitted: Sections 417.4.5.3, 417.4.5.4, and 417.4.5.5, respectively.
ANa is the projected influence area of a single adhesive
v,» = 1.4 (417.4.3.6)
anchor or group of adhesive anchors that shall be
approximated as a rectilinear area that projects outward a
Where analysis indicates cracking at service load levels,
distance cNa from the centerline of the adhesive anchor,
1/Je,p shall be taken as 1.0.
or in the case of a group of adhesive anchors, from a line
through a row of adjacent adhesive anchors. ANa shall not
417.4.4 Concrete Side-Face Blowout Strength of a exceed nANao, where n is the number of adhesive
Headed Anchor in Tension
anchors in the group that resist tension loads. ANao is the
projected influence area of a single adhesive anchor with
417.4.4.1 For a single headed anchor with deep
an edge distance equal to or greater than cNa:
embedment close to an edge (he! > 2.5cal), the nominal
side-face blowout strength, N sb» shall not exceed: (417.4.5.1c)
«; = (13CaljAbrg)la.JTI (417.4.4.1) where
If Ca2 for the single headed anchor is less than 3Cal, the
CNa
= 10d a jTuner
7.6 (41745
... 1d)
value of N sb shall be multiplied by the factor
(1 + cad cal)/4 where 1.0 s cad Cal::; 3. O.
and constant 7.6 carries the unit ofMPa.
417.4.4.2 For multiple headed anchors with deep
embedment close to an edge (he! > 2.5cal) and anchor 417.4.5.2 The basic bond strength of a single adhesive
anchor in tension in cracked concrete, N ba, shall not
spacing less than 6Cal, the nominal strength of those
exceed
anchors susceptible to a side-face blowout failure N sbg
shall not exceed:
(417.4.5.2)
Nsbg = (1 + 6: J a
Nsb (417.4.4.2)
The characteristic bond stress, Ten shall be taken as the 5
percent fractile of results of tests performed and evaluated
where s is the distance between the outer anchors along according to ACI 355.4M.
the edge, and Nsb is obtained from Eq. 417.4.4.1 without
modification for a perpendicular edge distance. Where analysis indicates cracking at service load levels,
adhesive anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked
417.4.5 Bond Strength of Adhesive Anchor in concrete in accordance with ACI 355.4M.
Tension
For adhesive anchors located in a region of a concrete
417.4.5.1 The nominal bond strength in tension, N a of a member where analysis indicates no cracking at service
single adhesive anchor or Nag of a group of adhesive load levels, Tuner shall be permitted to be used in place of
anchors, shall not exceed T er in Eq. 41 7.4.5.2 and shall be taken as the 5 percent
fractile of results of tests performed and evaluated
a. For a single adhesive anchor: according to ACI 355.4M.
It shall be permitted to use the minimum characteristic

ANa
Na = A1/Jed,Na, 1/Jep,Na' N ba (417.4.5.1a) bond stress values in Table 417.4.5.2 provided (a) through
Nao (e) are satisfied:
b. For a group of adhesive anchors: a. Anchors shall meet the requirements of ACI 355.4M;

CHAPTER 4 .--Structural Concrete 4- 105
b. Anchors shall be installed in holes drilled with a

rotary impact drill or rock drill; then "'ed.Na = 1.0 (417.4.S.4a)
c. Concrete at time of anchor installation shall have a If ca,min < CNa,
minimum compressive strength of 17 MPa;

Ca,min
then ljJedNa = 0.7+0.3-- (417.4.S.4b)
. CNa
d. Concrete at time of anchor installation shall have a
minimum age of21 days;
417.4.5.5 The modification factor for adhesive anchors
e. Concrete temperature at time of anchor installation
designed for uncracked concrete in accordance with
shall be at least 10°e.
Section 417.4.5.2 without supplementary reinforcement to
control splitting, "'epNa, shall be calculated as:
Table 417.4.5.2 Minimum Characteristic Bond
Stresses[IJ[2[
If ca,min 2:: cae'
Moisture
Peak in-
Installation content
service then "'cp,Na = 1.0 (417.4.S.5a)
and of concrete Tuner,
Temperature 'l'cnMPa
service at time of MPa
of concrete,
environment anchor If ca.min < caco
installation
°C
Dry to fully Ca,min
Outdoor 79 l.4 4.5 then ljJedNa = 0.7+0.3-- (417.4.S.4b)
saturated . CNa
Indoor Dry 43 2.1 7.0
[iI Where anchor design includes sustained tension loading, multiply values of Tn'
and Tuner by 0.4. but "'ep,Na determined from Eq. 417.4.S.Sb shall not be
t2[ Where anchor design includes earthquake loads for structures assigned to taken less than cNal cae, where the critical edge distance,
seismic zone 4, multiply values of Ter by 0.8 and Tuner by 0.4. cae, is defined in Section 417.7.6. For all other cases,
1/Jep,Na shall be taken as 1.0.
417.4.5.3 The modification factor for adhesive anchor
groups loaded eccentrically in tension, 1/Jee,Na, shall be 417.5 Design Requirements for Shear Loading
calculated as:
417.5.1 Steel Strength of Anchor in Shear
1
"'ee,Na = ( e' ) (417.4.5.3) 417.5.1.1 The nominal strength of an anchor in shear as
1 +____!Y_
cs« governed by steel, V sa, shall be evaluated by calculations
based on the properties of the anchor material and the
but "'ee,Na shall not be taken greater than 1.0. physical dimensions of the anchor. Where concrete
breakout is a potential failure mode, the required steel
If the loading on an adhesive anchor group is such that shear strength shall be consistent with the assumed
only some adhesive anchors are in tension, only those breakout surface.
adhesive anchors that are in tension shall be considered
when determining the eccentricity eN for use in Eq. 417.5.1.2 The nominal strength of an anchor III shear,
417.4.5.3 and for the calculation of Nag according to Eq. Vsa, shall not exceed (a) through (c):
417.4.S.1b.
a. For cast-in headed stud anchor;
In the case where eccentric loading exists about two
orthogonal axes, the modification factor, "'ee,Na, shall be V sa = Ase,v f uta (417.S.1.2a)
calculated for each axis individually and the product of
these factors used as 1/J ec.Na in Eq. 417.4.5.1 b. where Ase,v is the effective cross-sectional area of an
anchor in shear, mm', and f uta shall not be taken greater
417.4.5.4 The modification factor for edge effects for than the smaller of 1. 9 f ya and 860 MPa.
single adhesive anchors or adhesive anchor groups loaded
in tension, "'ed,Na, shall be calculated as: b. For cast-in headed bolt and hooked bolt anchors and
for post-installed anchors where sleeves do not
extend through the shear plane;

4-106 CHAPTER 4 - suuctura' Concrete
edge for a single anchor or a group of anchors. It shall be

Vsa = 0.6Ase.vfuta (417.5.1.2b)
permitted to evaluate AVe as the base of a truncated half-
pyramid projected on the side face of the member where
where Ase V is the effective cross-sectional area of an the top of the half-pyramid is given by the axis of the
anchor in shear, mm", and f uta shall not be taken greater anchor row selected as critical. The value of Cal shall be
than the smaller of 1.9f ya and 860 MPa. taken as the distance from the edge to this axis. AVe shall
not exceed nAveo, where n is the number of anchors in
c. For post-installed anchors where sleeves extend the group.
through the shear plane, V sa shall be based on the Aveo is the projected area for a single anchor in a deep
results of tests performed and evaluated according to member with a distance from edges equal or greater than
ACI 355.2. Alternatively, Eq. 417.5.1.2b shall be 1. SCal in the direction perpendicular to the shear force. It
permitted to be used. shall be permitted to evaluate AVeo as the base of a half
pyramid with a side length parallel to the edge of 3Cal
417.5.1.3 Where anchors are used with built-up grout and a depth of 1. SCal
pads, the nominal strengths of Section 417.5.1.2 shall be
multiplied by a factor 0.80. (417.5 .2.1c)
417.5.2 Concrete Breakout Strength of Anchor in Where anchors are located at varying distances from the
Shear edge and the anchors are welded to the attachment so as
to distribute the force to all anchors, it shall be permitted
417.5.2.1 The nominal concrete breakout strength In to evaluate the strength based on the distance to the
shear, Veb of a single anchor or Vebg of a group of farthest row of anchors from the edge. In this case, it shall
anchors, shall not exceed: be permitted to base the value of Cal on the distance from
the edge to the axis of the farthest anchor row that is
a. For shear force perpendicular to the edge on a single selected as critical, and all of the shear shall be assumed
anchor; to be carried by this critical anchor row alone.
417.5.2.2 The basic concrete breakout strength in shear

(417.5.2.la)
of a single anchor in cracked concrete, Vb, shall be the
smaller of (a) and (b):
(0.6 (!:f fda)

b. For shear force perpendicular to the edge on a group 2
of anchors; a. Vb = Aaffc(Cal) 1.5
(417.5.2.2a)
where leis the load-bearing length of the anchor for

shear:
(417.5.2.lb)
Ie = he! for anchors with a constant stiffness over the
c. For shear force parallel to an edge, V cb or Vebg shall full length of embedded section, such as headed studs and
be permitted to be twice the value of the shear force post-installed anchors with one tubular shell over full
determined from Eq. 417.5.2.1a or 417.5.2.1b, length of the embedment depth;
respectively, with the shear force assumed to act
perpendicular to the edge and with WedY taken equal Ie = 2da for torque-controlled expansion anchors with a
to 1.0; distance sleeve separated from expansion sleeve, and
Ie :5 8da in all cases.
d. For anchors located at a corner, the limiting nominal
concrete breakout strength shall be determined for b. (417.5.2.2a)
each edge, and the minimum value shall be used.
417.5.2.3 For cast-in headed studs, headed bolts, or
Factors WeeY, Wed.V, We.V, and WhY are defined in hooked bolts that are continuously welded to steel
Sections 417.5.2.5, 417.5.2.6, 417.5.2.7, and 417.5.2.8,
attachments having a minimum thickness equal to the
respectively. Vb is the basic concrete breakout strength
greater of 10 mm. and half of the anchor diameter, the
value for a single anchor. AVe is the projected area of the basic concrete breakout strength in shear of a single
failure surface on the side of the concrete member at its

417.5.3 Concrete Pryout Strength of Anchor in 417.7 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and
Shear Thicknesses to Preclude Splitting Failure
417.5.3.1 The nominal pryout strength, Vep for a single Minimum spacings and edge distances for anchors and
anchor or Vepg for a group of anchors, shall not exceed: minimum thicknesses of members shall conform to
Sections 417.7.1 through 417.7.6, unless supplementary
a. For a single anchor; reinforcement is provided to control splitting. Lesser
values from product-specific tests performed in
(417.5.3.1a) accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M shall be
permitted.
For cast-in, expansion, and undercut anchors, N ep shall be
taken as Ncb determined from Eq. 417.4.2.la, and for 417.7.1 Unless determined in accordance with Section
adhesive anchors, N ep shall be the lesser of N a 417.7.4, minimum center-to-center spacing of anchors
determined from Eq. 417.4.5.1a and Ncb determined from shall be 4da for cast-in anchors that will not be torqued,
Eq.417.4.2.la. and 6da for torqued cast-in anchors and post-installed
anchors.
b. For a group of anchors:
417.7.2 Unless determined in accordance with Section
(417.5.3.lb) 417.7.4, minimum edge distances for cast-in anchors that
will not be torqued shall be based on specified cover
requirements for reinforcement in Section 420.6.1. For
For cast-in, expansion, and undercut anchors, N epg shall
cast-in anchors that will be torqued, the minimum edge
be taken as Nepg determined from Eq. 417.4.2.1b, and for
distances shall be 6da.
adhesive anchors, N cpg shall be the lesser ofN ag
determined from Eq. 417.4.5.1 band N epg determined 417.7.3 Unless determined in accordance with Section
from Eq. 417.4.2.l b. 417.7.4, minimum edge distances for post-installed
anchors shall be based on the greater of specified cover
In Eq. 417.5.3.1a and 417.5.3.lb, kcp = 1.0 for her < requirements for reinforcement in Section 420.6.1, or
65 mm.; and kcp = 2.0 for hel ~ 65 mm. minimum edge distance requirements for the products as
determined by tests in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI
417.6 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces 355.4M, and shall not be less than twice the maximum
aggregate size. In the absence of product-specific ACI
Unless determined in accordance with Sectio'n.4.1.7.3.1.3, 355.2 or ACI 355.4M test information, the minimum edge
anchors or groups of anchors that are subjected to both distance shall not be less than:
shear and axial loads shall he designed to satisfy the
requirements of Seotions. 417.6.1 through 417.6.3. The Adhesive anchors 6da
values of q,NII and </>V" shall be the required strengths as
determined from Section 417 .3.l.l or from Section Undercut anchors 6da
417.2.3.
Torque-controlled anchors .." , 8da
417.6.1 If Vua/(cfJV,,)::;; 0.2 for the governing
strength in shear, then full strength in tension shall be Displacement-controlled anchors 10da
permitted: cfJNn ~ Nua.
417.7.4 For anchors where installation does not
417.6.2 If Nua/(cfJNn)::;; 0.2 for the governing produce a splitting force and that will not be torqued, if
strength in tension, then full strength in shear shall be the edge distance or spacing is less than those specified in
permitted: cfJV n ~ Vua' Sections 417.7.1 to 417.7.3, calculations shall be
performed by substituting for da a smaller value d~ that
417.6.3 If Vua/(cfJVn) > 0.2 for the governing meets the requirements of Sections 417.7.1 to 417.7.3.
strength in shear and Nua/(cfJNn) > 0.2 for the Calculated forces applied to the anchor shall be limited to
governing strength in tension, then: the values corresponding to an anchor having a diameter
ofd~.
(417.6.3) 417.7.5 Unless determined from tests in accordance

with ACI 355.2, the value of her for an expansion or
undercut post-installed anchor shall not exceed the greater
Assocration of Structural Engineers of the Philippines. inc. (f\SEP)

CHAPTER 4 _. Structural Concrete 4-109
of 2/3 of the member thickness, ha, and the member 417.8.2.1 For adhesive anchors, the construction
thickness minus 100 mm. documents shall specify proof loading where required in
accordance with ACI 355.4M. The construction
417.7.6 Unless determined from tension tests in documents shall also specify all parameters associated
accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4M, the critical with the characteristic bond stress used for the design
edge distance, cae' shall not be taken less than: according to Section 417.4.5, including minimum age of
concrete; concrete temperature range; moisture condition
Adhesive anchors 2hef of concrete at time of installation; type of lightweight
concrete, if applicable; and requirements for hole drilling
Undercut anchors 2. Shef and preparation.
417.8.2.2 Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or

Torque-controlled expansion anchors 4hef
upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall
be performed by personnel certified by an applicable
Displacement-controlled expansion anchors ... 4hef certification program. Certification shall include written
and performance tests in accordance with the ACIICRSI
417.7.7 Construction documents shall specify use of Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program, or
anchors with a minimum edge distance as assumed in equivalent.
design.
417.8.2.3 The acceptability of certification other than the
417.8 Installation and Inspection of Anchors ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification shall
be the responsibility of the licensed design professional.
417.8.1 Anchors shall be installed by qualified
personnel in accordance with the construction documents 417.8.2.4 Adhesive anchors installed in horizontal or
and, where applicable, manufacturer's instructions. The- upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension
construction documents shall require installation of post- loads shall be continuously inspected during installation
installed adhesive anchors in accordance with the by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by the
Manufacturer's Printed Installation Instructions (MPH). building official. The special inspector shall furnish a
Installation of adhesive anchors shall be performed by report to the licensed design professional and building
personnel trained to install adhesive anchors. official that the work covered by the report has been
performed and that the materials used and the installation
417.8.2 Installation of anchors shall be inspected in procedures used conform with the approved construction
accordance with Section 401.9 and the general building documents and the Manufacturer's Printed Installation
code. Adhesive anchors shall be also subject to Sections Instructions (MPH).
417.8.2.1 through 417.8.2.4.
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume i, 7th Edition. 2016

4~'1:10 CHAPTER 4 ~-Structural Concrete
a. Ordinary moment frames shall satisfy Section 418.3;

SECTION 418
EARTHQUAKE-RESISTANT b. Ordinary reinforced concrete structural walls need
STRUCTURES not satisfy any detailing provisions in Section 418,
unless required by Section 418.2.1.3 or 418.2.1.4.
418.1 Scope
c. Intermediate moment frames shall satisfy Section
418.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of non- 418.4;
prestressed and prestressed concrete structures assigned to
seismic zone 4, including, where applicable: d. Intermediate precast walls shall satisfy Section 418.5;
a. Structural systems designated as part of the seismic- e. Special moment frames shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3
force-resisting system, including diaphragms, through 418.2.8 and 418.6 through 418.8;
moment frames, structural walls, and foundations;
f. Special moment frames constructed using precast
b. Members not designated as part of the seismic-force- concrete shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3 through
resisting system but required to support other loads 418.2.8 and 418.9;
while undergoing deformations associated with
earthquake effects. g. Special structural walls shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3
through 418.2.8 and 418.10;
418.1.2 Structures designed according to the
provisions of this chapter are intended to resist earthquake h. Special structural walls constructed using precast
motions through ductile inelastic response of selected concrete shall satisfy Sections 418.2.3 through
members. 418.2.8 and 418.11.
418.2 General 418.2.1.6 A reinforced concrete structural system not

satisfying this section shall be permitted if it is
418.2.1 Structural Systems demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis that
the proposed system will have strength and toughness
418.2.1.1 All structures shall be assigned to a seismic equal to or exceeding those provided by a comparable
zone in accordance with Section 404.4.6.1. reinforced concrete structure satisfying this section ..
418.2.1.2 All members shall satisfy Sections 401 to 417 418.2.2 Analysis and Proportioning-of Structural
and 419 to 426. Structures assigned to seismic zones 4, or Members
2, also shall satisfy Sections 418.2.1.3 through 418.2.1.7,
as applicable. Where Section 418 conflicts with other 418.2.2.1 The interaction of all structural and
sections of this Code, Section 418 shall govern. nonstructural members that affect the linear and nonlinear
response of the structure to earthquake motions shall be
418.2.1.3 Structures assigned to seismic zone 2 shall considered in the analysis.
satisfy Sections 418.2.2 and 418.2.3.
418.2.2.2 Rigid members assumed not to be a part of the
418.2.1.4 Structures assigned to seismic zone 4 shall seismic force-resisting system shall be permitted provided
satisfy Sections 418.2.2 through 418.2.8 and Sections their effect on the response of the system is considered in
418.12 through 418.14. the structural design. Consequences of failure of structural
and non structural members that are not a part of the
418.2.1.5 Structural systems designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be considered.
seismic-force-resisting system shall be restricted to those
designated by the general building code, or determined by 418.2.2.3 Structural members extending below the base
other authority having jurisdiction in areas without a of structure that are required to transmit forces resulting
legally adopted building code. Except for areas of low from earthquake effects to the foundation shall comply
seismic risk, for which Section 418 does not apply, (a) with the requirements of Section 418 that are consistent
through (h) shall be satisfied for each structural system with the seismic-force-resisting system above the base of
designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting system, in structure.
addition to Sections 418.2.1.3 through 418.2.1.5:
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (p.,SEP)

CHi\PTER 4 - Structural Concreto 4--1'11
418.2.3 Anchoring to Concrete yielding of reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of

lateral displacements beyond the linear range of behavior.
, 418.2.3~1 Anchors resisting earthquake-induced forces in
structures assigned to seismic zones 4 or 2 shall be in 418.2.8.2 Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts, or other
accordance with Section 417.2.3. similar elements to longitudinal reinforcement required by
design shall not be permitted.
418.2.4 Strength Reduction Factors
418.3 Ordinary Moment Frames
418.2.4.1 Strength reduction factors shall be m
accordance with Section 421. 418.3.1 Scope
418.2.5 Concrete in Special Moment Frames and 418.3.1.1 This section shall apply to ordinary moment
Special Structural Walls frames forming part of the seismic-force-resisting system.
418.2.5.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete in 418.3.2 Beams shall have at least two continuous bars
special moment frames and special structural walls shall at both top and bottom faces. Continuous bottom bars
be in accordance with the special seismic systems shall have area not less than one-fourth the maximum area
requirements of Table 419.2.1.1. of bottom bars along the span. These bars shall be
anchored to develop f y in tension at the face of support.
418.2.6 Reinforcement in Special Moment Frames
and Special Structural Walls 418.3.3 Columns having unsupported length iu ~ SCl
shall have cf> V n at least the lesser of (a) and (b):
418.2.6.1 Reinforcement in special moment frames and
special structural walls shall be in accordance with the a. The shear associated with development of nominal
special seismic systems requirements of Section 420.2.2.
moment strengths of the column at each restrained
end of the unsupported length due to reverse
418.2.7 Mechanical Splices in Special Moment
Frames and Special Structural Walls curvature bending. Column flexural strength shall be
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with
418.2.7.1 Mechanical splices shall be classified as (a) or the direction of the lateral forces considered,
(b): resulting in the highest flexural strength;
a. Type 1 - Mechanical splice conforming to Section b. The maximl!m shear obtained from design load
425.5.7;
combinations that include E, with noE substituted
for E.
b. Type 2 - Mechanical splice conforming to Section
425.5.7 and capable of developing the specified
tensile strength of the spliced bars. 418.4 Intermediate Moment Frames
418.2.7.2 Type 1 mechanical splices shall not be located 418.4.1 Scope

within a distance equal to twice the member depth from
the column or beam face for special moment frames or 418.4.1.1 This section shall apply to intermediate
from critical sections where yielding of the reinforcement moment frames including two-way slabs without beams
is likely to occur as a result of lateral displacements forming part of the seismic force-resisting system.
beyond the linear range of behavior. Type 2 mechanical
splices shall be permitted at any location, except as noted 418.4.2 Beams
in Section 4IS.9.2.1(c).
418.4.2.1 Beams shall have at least two continuous bars
418.2.8 Welded Splices in Special Moment Frames at both top and bottom faces. Continuous bottom bars
and Special Structural Walls shall have area not less than one-fourth the maximum area
of bottom bars along the span. These bars shall be
418.2.8.1 Welded splices in reinforcement resistmg anchored to develop f y in tension at the face of support.
earthquake-induced forces shall conform to Section
425.5.7 and shall not be located within a distance equal 418.4.2.2 The positive moment strength at the face of
to twice the member depth from the column or beam face the joint shall be at least one-third the negative moment
for special moment frames or from critical sections where strength provided at that face of the joint. Neither the
National Structural Code of the Phihppines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2016

negative nor the positive moment strength at any section b. The maximum shear obtained from factored load
along the length of the beam shall be less than one-fifth combinations that include E, with floE substituted
the maximum moment strength provided at the face of for E.
either joint.
418.4.3.2 Columns shall be spirally reinforced in
418.4.2.3 cJ>Vn shall be at least the lesser of (a) and (b): accordance with Section 410 or shall be in accordance
with Sections 418.4.3.3 through 418.4.3.5. Provisions of
a. The sum of the shear associated with development of Section 418.4.3.6 shall apply to all columns supporting
nominal moment strengths of the beam at each discontinuous stiff members.
restrained end of the clear span due to reverse
418.4.3.3 At both ends of the column, hoops shall be
curvature bending and the shear calculated for
provided at spacing So over a length f 0 measured from
factored gravity loads; the joint face. Spacing So shall not exceed the smallest of
(a) through (d):
b. The maximum shear obtained from design load
combinations that include E, with E taken as twice a. 8 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar
that prescribed by the general building code. enclosed;
418.4.2.4 At both ends of the beam, hoops shall be b. 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar;
provided over a length of at least 2h measured from the
face of the supporting member toward mid-span. The first c. One-half of the smallest cross-sectional dimension of
hoop shall be located not more than 50 mm from the face
the column;
of the supporting member. Spacing of hoops shall not
exceed the smallest of (a) through (d):
d. 300 mm.
a. d / 4;
Length f 0 shall not be less than the largest of (e), (f), and
(g):
b. Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal
bar enclosed;
e. One-sixth of the clear span of the column;
c. 24 times the diameter of the hoop bar;

f. Maximum cross-sectional dimension of the column;
d. 300 mm.
g. 450 mm.
418.4.2.5 Transverse reinforcement spacing shall not

418.4.3.4 The first hoop shall be located not more than
exceed d/2 throughout the length of the beam.
so/2 from the joint face.
418.4.2.6 In beams having factored axial compressive
418.4.3.5 Outside of length fo' spacing of transverse
force exceeding Ag[~/I0, transverse reinforcement
reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section
required by Section 418.4.2.5 shall conform to Section 410.7.6.5.2.
425.7.2.2 and either Section 425.7.2.3 or 425.7.2.4.
418.4.3.6 Columns supporting reactions from
418.4.3 Columns discontinuous stiff members, such as walls, shall be
provided with transverse reinforcement at the spacing, so,
418.4.3.1 cJ>Vn shall be at least the lesser of (a) and (b): in accordance with Section 418.4.3.3 over the full height
beneath the level at which the discontinuity occurs if the
a. The shear associated with development of nominal portion of factored axial compressive force in these
moment strengths of the column at each restrained members related to earthquake effects exceeds Agf~/I0.
end of the unsupported length due to reverse If design forces have been magnified to account for the
curvature bending. Column flexural strength shall be overstrength of the vertical elements of the seismic-force-
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with
resisting system, the limit of Agf~/10 shall be increased
the direction of the lateral forces considered,
to Agf~1 4. Transverse reinforcement shall extend above
resulting in the highest flexural strength;
and below the column in accordance with Section
418.7.5.6(b).
Association of Structural Enqineers of the Philippines, Inc. (.A.SEP)

CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
418.4.4 Joints 418.5.2 General
418.4.4.1 Beam-column joints shall have transverse 418.5.2.1 Tn connections between wall panels, or
reinforcement conforming to Section 41S. between wall panels and the foundation, yielding shall be
restricted to steel elements or reinforcement.
418.4.5 Two-Way Slabs without Beams
418.5.2.2 For elements of the connection that are not
418.4.5.1 Factored slab moment at the support including designed to yield, the required strength shall be based on
earthquake effects, E, shall be calculated for load 1. SSy of the yielding portion of the connection.
combinations given in Eq. 40S.3.le and 40S.3.lg.
Reinforcement to resist M sc shall be placed within the 418.5.2.3 In structures assigned to seismic zone 4, wall
column strip defined in Section 408.4.1.S. piers shall be designed in accordance with Section
418.10.80r418.14.
418.4.5.2 Reinforcement placed within the effective
width given in Section 408.4.2.3.3 shall be designed to 418.6 Beams of Special Moment Frames
resist Y f MSC" Effecti ve slab width for exterior and corner
connections shall not extend beyond the column face a 418.6.1 Scope
distance greater than c, measured perpendicular to the
slab span. 418.6.1.1 This section shall apply to beams of special
moment frames that form part of the seismic-force-
418.4.5.3 At least one-half of the reinforcement in the resisting system and are proportioned primarily to resist
column strip at the support shall be placed within the flexure and shear.
effective slab width given in Section 408.4.2.3.3.
418.6.1.2 Beams of special moment frames shall frame
418.4.5.4 At least one-quarter of the top reinforcement at into columns of special moment frames satisfying Section
the support in the column strip shall be continuous 418.7.
throughout the span.
418.6.2 Dimensional Limits
418.4.5.5 Continuous bottom reinforcement III the
column strip shall be at least one-third of the top 418.6.2.1 Beams shall satisfy (a) through (c):
reinforcement at the support in the column strip.
a. Clear span, In' shall be at least 4d;
418.4.5.6 At least one-half of all bottom middle strip
reinforcement and all bottom column strip reinforcement b. Width, bw, shall be at least the smaller of O. 3h and
at mid-span shall be continuous and shall develop f y at 2S0mm;
the face of support as defined in Section 408.10.3.2.1.
c. Projection of the beam width beyond the width of the
418.4.5.7 At discontinuous edges of the slab, all top and
supporting column on each side shall not exceed the
bottom reinforcement at the support shall be developed at
the face of support as defined in Section 408.10.3.2.1. smaller of Cz and O.7SCi'
418.4.5.8 At the critical sections for columns defined in 418.6.3 Longitudinal Reinforcement
Section 422.6.4.1, two-way shear caused by factored
gravity loads shall not exceed 0.44> V c, where V c shall be 418.6.3.1 Beams shall have at least two continuous bars
calculated in accordance with Section 422.6.S. This at both top and bottom faces. At any section, for top as
requirement need not be satisfied if the slab satisfies well as for bottom reinforcement, the amount of
Section 418.14.S. reinforcement shall be at least that required by Section
409.6.1.2 and the reinforcement ratio, p, shall not exceed
418.5 Intermediate Precast Structural Walls 0.02S.
418.5.1 Scope 418.6.3.2 Positive moment strength at joint face shall be

at least one-half the negative moment strength provided at
418.5.1.1 This section shall apply to intermediate precast that face of the joint. Both the negative and the positive
structural walls forming part of the seismic-force-resisting moment strength at any section along member length shall
system. be at least one-fourth the maximum moment strength
provided at face of either joint.
National Structural COGeof the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2016

418.6.3.3 Lap splices of deformed longitudinal a. Over a length equal to twice the beam depth
reinforcement shall be permitted if hoop or spiral measured from the face of the supporting column
J!' reinforccment is provided over the lap length. Spacing of toward mid-span, at both ends of the beam;
the transverse reinforcement enclosing the lap spliced
bars shall not exceed the smaller of d/4 and 100 mm. Lap b. Over lengths equal to twice the beam depth on both
splices shall not be used in locations (a) through (c): sides of a section where flexural yielding is likely to
occur as a result of lateral displacements beyond the
a. Within the joints; elastic range of behavior.
b. Within a distance of twice the beam depth from the 418.6.4.2 Where hoops are required, primary longitudinal
face of the joint; reinforcing bars closest to the tension and compression
faces shall have lateral support in accordance with Section
c. Within a distance of twice the beam depth from 425.7.2.3 and 425.7.2.4. The spacing of transversely
critical sections where flexural yielding is likely to supported flexural reinforcing bars shall not exceed 350
occur as a result of lateral displacements beyond the mm. Skin reinforcement required by Section 409.7.2.3
elastic range of behavior. need not be laterally supported.
418.6.3.4 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section 418.6.4.3 Hoops in beams shall be permitted to be made
418.2.7 and welded splices shall conform to Section up of two pieces of reinforcement: a stirrup having
418.2.8. seismic hooks at both ends and closed by a crosstie.
Consecutive crossties engaging the same longitudinal bar
418.6.3.5 Unless used in a special moment frame as shall have their 90-degree hooks at opposite sides of the
permitted by Section 418.9.2.3, prestressing shall satisfy flexural member. If the longitudinal reinforcing bars
(a) through (d): secured by the crossties are confined by a slab on only
one side of the beam, the 90-degree hooks of the crossties
a. The average prestress, fpc, calculated for an area shall be placed on that side.
equal to the smallest cross-sectional dimension of the
beam multiplied by the perpendicular cross-sectional 418.6.4.4 The first hoop shall be located not more than
dimension shall not exceed the lesser of 3.5 MPa and 50 mm from the face of a supporting column. Spacing of
f~/10; the hoops shall not exceed the smallest of (a) through (c):
b. Prestressing steel shall be un bonded in potential a. d/4;

plastic hinge regions, and the calculated strains in
prestressing steel under the design displacement shall b. Six times the diameter of the smallest primary
be less than one percent; flexural reinforcing bars excluding longitudinal skin
reinforcement required by Section 409.7.2.3;
c. Prestressing steel shall not contribute more than one-
fourth of the positive or negative flexural strength at
c. 150 mm.
the critical section in a plastic hinge region and shall
be anchored at or beyond the exterior face of the
joint;
418.6.4.5 Where hoops are required, they shall be
designed to resist shear according to Section 418.6.5.
d. Anchorages of post-tensioning tendons resisting
earthquake-induced forces shall be capable of
418.6.4.6 Where hoops are not required, stirrups with
seismic hooks at both ends shall be spaced at a distance
allowing tendons to withstand 50 cycles of loading,
with prestressed reinforcement forces bounded by 40 not more than d/2 throughout the length of the beam.
and 85 percent of the specified tensile strength of the
prestressing steel.
418.6.4.7 In beams having factored axial compressive
force exceeding Agf~/10, hoops satisfying Sections
418.6.4 Transverse Reinforcement 418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 shall be provided along
lengths given in Section 418.6.4.1. Along the remaining
418.6.4.1 Hoops shall be provided in the following length, hoops satisfying Section 418.7.5.2 shall have
regions of a beam: spacing, s, not exceeding the smaller of six times the
diameter of the smallest longitudinal beam bars and 150
mm Where concrete cover over transverse reinforcement
exceeds 100 mm, additional transverse reinforcement
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phiiippines, Inc. (;\SEP)

CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4·.1'1fi
having cover not exceeding 100 mm and spacing not 418.7.3.2 The flexural strengths of the columns shall
exceeding 300 mm shall be provided. satisfy
418.6.5 Shear Strength (418.7.3.2)
418.6.5.1 Design Forces where
The design shear force, Ve, shall be calculated from 'f.Mnc = sum of nominal flexural strengths of
consideration of the forces on the portion of the beam columns framing into the joint, evaluated at
between faces of the joints. It shall be assumed that the faces of the joint. Column flexural
moments of opposite sign corresponding to probable strength shall be calculated for the factored
flexural strength, Mpn act at the joint faces and that the axial force, consistent with the direction of
beam is loaded with the factored tributary gravity load the lateral forces considered, resulting in
along its span. the lowest flexural strength.
418.6.5.2 Transverse Reinforcement sum of nominal flexural strengths of the

beams framing into the joint, evaluated at
Transverse reinforcement over the lengths identified in the faces of the joint. In T-beam
Section 418.6.4.1 shall be designed to resist shear construction, where the slab is in tension
assuming Vc = 0 when both (a) and (b) occur: under moments at the face of the joint, slab
reinforcement within an effective slab
a. The earthquake-induced shear force calculated in width defined in accordance with Section
accordance with Section 418.6.5.1 represents at least 406.3.2 shall be assumed to contribute to
Mnb if the slab reinforcement is developed
one-half of the maximum required shear strength
at the critical section for flexure.
within those lengths;
b. The factored axial compressive force, P u- including Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column
moments oppose the beam moments. Equation 418.7.3.2
earthquake effects is less than Agf~/20.
shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both
directions in the vertical plane of the frame considered.
418.7 Columns of Special Moment Frames
418.7.3.3 If Section 418.7.3.2 is not satisfied at a joint,
418.7.1 Scope the lateral strength and stiffness of the eolurnns framing
into that joint shall be ignote.d when' calculating strength
418.7.1.1 This section shall apply to columns of special and stiffness of the structure, These columns shall
moment frames that form part of the seismic-force- conform to Section 418.14.
resisting system and are proportioned primarily to resist
flexure, shear, and axial forces. 418.7.4 Longitudinal Reinforcement
418.7.2 Dimensional Limits 418.7.4.1 Area of longitudinal reinforcement, Ast. shall be

at least O.01Ag and shall not exceed O.06Ag
418.7.2.1 Columns shall satisfy (a) and (b):
418.7.4.2 In columns with circular hoops, there shall be
a. The shortest cross-sectional dimension, measured on at least six longitudinal bars.
a straight line passing through the geometric centroid,
shall be at least 300 mm; 418.7.4.3 Mechanical splices shall conform to Section
418.2.7 and welded splices shall conform to Section
b. The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to 418.2.8. Lap splices shall be permitted only within the
the perpendicular dimension shall be at least 0.4. center half of the member length, shall be designed as
tension lap splices, and shall be enclosed within
transverse reinforcement in accordance with Sections
418.7.3 Minimum Flexural Strength of Columns
418.7.5.2 and 418.7.5.3.
418.7.3.1 Columns shall satisfy Section 418.7.3.2 or

418.7.3.3:
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume i, 7th Edition. 2016

4_cl c16 CHAPTER 4 - Struciu(ai Concrele
418.7.5 Transverse Reinforcement b. Six times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal
bar;
4'18.7.5.1 Transverse reinforcement required in Sections
418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 shall be provided over a
c. So as calculated by
length f 0 from each joint face and on both sides of any
section where flexural yielding is likely to occur as a
result of lateral displacements beyond the elastic range of 350 - h )
So = 100 + ( 3 x (418.7.5.3)
behavior. Length f 0 shall be at least the largest of (a)
through (c):
The value of So from Eq. 418.7.5.3 shall not exceed 150
mm. and need not be taken less than 100 mm.
a. The depth of the column at the joint face or at the
section where flexural yielding is likely to occur;
418.7.5.4 Amount of transverse reinforcement shall be in
b. One-sixth of the clear span of the column;
c. 450mm. The concrete strength factor, kf' and confinement

effectiveness factor, kn' are calculated according to Eq.
418.7.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be in 418.7.5.4a and 418.7.5.4b.
accordance with (a) through (f):
a. kf = [;5 + 0.6;:::::1.0 (418.7.5.4a)
a. Transverse reinforcement shall comprise either single
or overlapping spirals, circular hoops, or rectilinear
hoops with or without crossties;
b. (418.7.5.4b)
b. Bends of rectilinear hoops and cross ties shall engage
peripheral longitudinal reinforcing bars;
where nl is the number ofiongitudinal bars or bar bundles
c. Crossties of the same or smaller bar size as the hoops around the perimeter of a column core with rectilinear
shall be permitted, subject to the limitation of Section hoops that are laterally supported by the corner of hoops
425.7.2.2. Consecutive crossties shall be alternated or by seismic hooks.
end for end along the longitudinal reinforcement and
around the perimeter of the cross section; 418.7.5.5 Beyond the length fo given III Section
418.7.5.1, the column shall contain spiral or hoop
d. Where rectilinear hoops or crossties are used, they reinforcement satisfying Sections 425.7.2' through
shall provide lateral support to longitudinal 425.7.4 with spacing, s, not exceeding the smaller of six
reinforcement in accordance with Sections 425.7.2.2 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal column
and 425.7.2.3; bars and 150 mm., unless a larger amount of transverse
reinforcement is required by Section 418.7.4.3 or 418.7.6.
e. Reinforcement shall be arrange such that the spacing
hx of longitudinal bars laterally supported by the 418.7.5.6 Columns supporting reactions from
comer of a crosstie or hoop leg shall not exceed 350 discontinued stiff members, such as walls, shall satisfy (a)
mm around the perimeter of the column; and (b):
f. Where P u > 0.3Agf~ or r; > 70 MPa in columns a. Transverse reinforcement required by Sections
with rectilinear hoops, every longitudinal bar or 418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 shall be provided over
bundle of bars around the perimeter of the column the full height at all levels beneath the discontinuity if
core shall have lateral support provided by the comer the factored axial compressive for~e in these
of a hoop or by a seismic hook, and the value of hx columns, related to earthquake effect, exceeds
shall not exceed 200 mm P u shall be the largest value Agf~/10. Where design forces have been magnified
in compression consistent with factored load to account for the overstrength of the vertical
combinations including E. elements of the seismic- force-resisting system, the
limit of Agf~/10 shall be increased to Agf~/4;
418.7.5.3 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed the smallest of (a) through (c): b. Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the
discontinued member at least f d of the largest
a. One-fourth of the minimum column dimension; longitudinal column bar, where f d is in accordance

with Section 418.8.5. Where the lower end of the the largest longitudinal column bar at the point of
column terminates on a wall, the required transverse termination. Where the column terminates on a
reinforcement shall extend into the wall at least I d of footing
Table 418.7.5.4
Transverse Reinforcement for Columns of Special Moment Frames
Transverse
Conditions Applicable Expressions
Reinforcement
Pu s 0.30Agtd and
ASh
td:s 70 MPa
Greater of (a)
and (b)
0.3 (J.
A
A
-l)-=-ryet/
eli
(a)
she
for rectilinear
0.O91~1 (b)
hoop Pu > 0.30Agtd or Greatest of (a), fJlt
td > 70 MPa (b), and (c) Rj
O.2kfl<n fiT (c)
'yt cit
Pu s 0.30Agtd and Greater of
0.45 (-g
A [,'
-1)_c (d)
td s 70 MPa (d) and (e)
Ps Acll &
for spiral or
0.12 td (e)
circular hoop Pu > 0.30Agtd or
Greatest of fit
td > 70 MPa (d), (e), and (f) 0.35kfkn~
e.
yt ch (t)
or mat, the required transverse reinforcement shall 418.7.6.2 Transverse Reinforcement

extend at least 300 mm into the footing or mat.
418.7.6.2.1 Transverse reinforcement over the lengths
418.7.5.7 If the concrete cover outside the confining 10, given in Section 418.7.5.1, shall be designed to resist
transverse reinforcement required by Sections 418.7.5.1, shear assuming Vc = 0 when both (a) and (b) occur:
418.7.5.5, and 418.7.5.6 exceeds 100 mm, additional
transverse reinforcement having cover not exceeding 100 a. The earthquake-induced shear force, calculated in
mm. and spacing not exceeding 300 mm shall be accordance with Section 418.7.6.1, is at least one-half
provided. of the maximum required shear strength within 10;
418.7.6 Shear Strength b. The factored axial compressive force, P w including

earthquake effects is less than Agt~/20.
418.7.6.1 Design Forces
418.8 Joints of Special Moment Frames
418.7.6.1.1 The design shear force Ve shall be
calculated from considering the maximum forces that can 418.8.1 Scope
be generated at the faces of the joints at each end of the
column. These joint forces shall be calculated using the 418.8.1.1 This section shall apply to beam-column joints
maximum probable flexural strengths, M pr- at each end of of special moment frames forming part of the seismic-
the column associated with the range of factored axial force-resisting system.
forces, P u. acting on the column. The column shears need
not exceed those calculated from joint strengths based on 418.8.2 General
M pr of the beams framing into the joint. In no case shall
Ve be less than the factored shear calculated by analysis 418.8.2.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at
of the structure. the joint face shall be calculated assuming that the stress
in the flexural tensile reinforcement is 1. 25/y.
418.8.2.2 Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in

a column shall extend to the far face of the confined
column core and shall be developed in tension in

4-118 CHi\PTEH 4 -- StructurE!l ConCr8lt.3
accordance with Section 418.8.5 and in compression It1 Table 418.8.4.1

accordance with Seclion 425.4.9. Nominal Joint Shear Strength Vn
418.8.2.3 Where longitudinal beam reinforcement Joint configuration Vn

extends through a beam-column joint, the column For joints confined by l.7AmApl
dimension parallel to the beam reinforcement shall be at beams on all four faces [I]
least 20 times the diameter of the largest longitudinal For joints confined by l.2AmApl
beam bar for normal-weight concrete or 26 times the beams on three faces or
diameter of the largest longitudinal bar for lightweight on two opposite faces [I]
concrete. For other cases 1.0AmAp1
III Refer to Section 41 g.8.4.2.
418.8.2.4 Depth h of the joint shall not be less than one-
[2] A shall be 0.75 for lightweight concrete and 1.0 for normal-
half of depth h of any beam framing into the joint and weight concrete. Aj is given in Section 418.8.4.3.
generating joint shear as part of the seismic-force-
resisting system.
418.8.4.2 In Table 418.8.4.1, ajoint face is considered to
be confined by a beam if the beam width is at least three-
418.8.3 Transverse Reinforcement quarters of the effective joint width. Extensions of beams
at least one overall beam depth h beyond the joint face
418.8.3.1 Joint transverse reinforcement shall satisfy are considered adequate for confining that joint face.
Sections 418.7.5.2, 418.7.5.3, 418.7.5.4, and 418.7.5.7, Extensions of beams shall satisfy Sections 418.6.2(b),
except as permitted in Section 418.8.3.2. 418.6.3.1,418.6.4.2,418.6.4.3, and 418.6.4.4.
418.8.3.2 Where beams frame into all four sides of the 418.8.4.3 Effective cross-sectional area within a joint,
joint and where each beam width is at least three-fourths
Aj, shall be calculated from joint depth times effective
the column width, the amount of reinforcement required
joint width. Joint depth shall be the overall depth of the
by Section 418.7.5.4 shall be permitted to be reduced by
column, h. Effective joint width shall be the overall width
one-half, and the spacing required by Section 418.7.5.3
of the column, except where a beam frames into a wider
shall be permitted to be increased to 150 mm within the
column, effective joint width shall not exceed the smaller
overall depth h of the shallowest framing beam.
of (a) and (b):
418.8.3.3 Longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the
a. Beam width plus joint depth;
column core shall be confined by transverse
reinforcement passing through the column that satisfies
b. Twice the smaller perpendicular distance from
spacing requirements of Section 418.6.4.4, and
longitudinal axis of beam to column side.
requirements of Sections 418.6.4.2, and 418.6.4.3, if such
confinement is not provided by a beam framing into the
418.8.5 Development Length of Bars in Tension
joint.
418.8.3.4 Where beam negative moment reinforcement 418.8.5.1 For bar sizes 10 mm cfJ through 36 mm cfJ
is provided by headed deformed bars that terminate in the terminating in a standard hook, f dh shall be calculated by
joint, the column shall extend above the top of the joint a Eq. 418.8.5.1, but fdh shall be at least the larger of8db
distance at least the depth h of the joint. Alternatively, the and 150 mm. for normal-weight concrete and at least the
beam reinforcement shall be enclosed by additional larger of 10db and 190 mm. for lightweight concrete.
vertical joint reinforcement providing equivalent
confinement to the top face of the joint. (418.8.5.1 )
The value of A shall be 0.75 for lightweight and 1.0 for

normal-weight concrete.
The hook shall be located within the confined core of a

column or of a boundary element, with the hook bent into
418.8.4 Shear Strength the joint.
418.8.4.1 V n of the joint shall be in accordance with 418.8.5.2 For headed deformed bars satisfying Section
Table 418.8.4.1. 420.2.1.6, development in tension shall be in accordance
Association of Structural Enqineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

with Section 425.4.4, except clear spacing between bars a. Requirements of Sections 418.6 through 418.8 for
shall ge permitted to be at least 3db or greater. special moment frames constructed with cast-in-place
concrete;
418.8.5.3 For bar sizes 10 mm (/J through 36 mm (/J, fd'
the development length in tension for a straight bar, shall b. Provision Section 418.6.2.1(a) shall apply to
be at least the larger of (a) and (b): segments between locations where flexural yielding
is intended to occur due to design displacements;
a. 2.5 times the length in accordance with Section
418.8.5.1 if the depth of the concrete cast in one lift c. Design strength of the strong connection, (/JSn' shall
beneath the bar does not exceed 300 mm; be at least Se;
d. Primary longitudinal reinforcement shall be made

b. 3.25 times the length in accordance with Section
continuous across connections and shall be developed
418.8.5.1 if the depth of the concrete cast in one lift outside both the strong connection and the plastic
beneath the bar exceeds 300 mm. hinge region;
418.8.5.4 Straight bars terminated at a joint shall pass e. For column-to-column connections, (/JSn shall be at
through the confined core of a column or a boundary least 1.4Se, (/JMn shall be at least O.4Mpr for the
element. Any portion of f d not within the confined core column within the story height, and (/JV n shall be at
shall be increased by a factor of 1.6. least Vein accordance with Section 418.7.6.1.
418.8.5.5 If epoxy-coated reinforcement is used, the 418.9.2.3 Special moment frames constructed using
development lengths in Sections 418.8.5.1, 418.8.5.3, and precast concrete and not satisfying Section 418.9.2.1 or
418.8.5.4 shall be multiplied by applicable factors in 418.9.2.2 shall satisfy (a) through (c):
Section 425.4.2.4 or 425.4.3.2.
a. ACI374.1;
418.9 Special Moment Frames Constructed Using
Precast Concrete b. Details and materials used in the test specimens shall
be representative of those used in the structure;
418.9.1 Scope
c. The design procedure used to proportion the test
418.9.1.1 This section shall apply to special moment specimens shall define the mechanism by which the
frames constructed using precast concrete forming part of frame resists gravity and earthquake effects, and shall
the seismic-force resisting system. establish acceptance values for sustaining that
mechanism. Portions of the mechanism that deviate
418.9.2 General from Code requirements shall be contained in the test
specimens and shall be tested to determine upper
418.9.2.1 Special moment frames with ductile bounds for acceptance values.
connections constructed using precast concrete shall
satisfy (a) through (c): 418.10 Special Structural Walls
a. Requirements of Sections 418.6 through 418.8 for 418.10.1 Scope

special moment frames constructed with cast-in-place
concrete; 418.10.1.1 This section shall apply to special structural
walls and all components of special structural walls
b. V n for connections calculated according to Section including coupling beams and wall piers forming part of
422.9 shall be at least 2Ve, where Ve is in the seismic-force-resisting system.
accordance with Section 418.6.5.1 or 418.7.6.1;
418.10.1.2 Special structural walls constructed using
c. Mechanical splices of beam reinforcement shall be precast concrete shall be in accordance with Section
located not closer than hj2 from the joint face and 418.11 in addition to Section 418.10.
shall satisfy Section 418.2.7.
418.10.2 Reinforcement
418.9.2.2 Special moment frames with strong connections
constructed using precast concrete shall satisfy (a) 418.10.2.1 The distributed web reinforcement ratios, PI
through (e): and Pt, for structural walls shall be at least 0.0025,

4~120 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
except that if Vu does not exceed 418.10.4.4 For all vertical wall segments sharing a
O.Q83Acv1ffi, PI and Pt shall be permitted to be common lateral force, V n shall not be taken larger than
reduced to the values in Section 411.6. Reinforcement 0.66Acvffc, where Acv is the gross area of concrete
spacing each way in structural walls shall not exceed 450 bounded by web thickness and length of section. For any
mm. Reinforcement contributing to V n shall be one of the individual vertical wall segments, V n shall not
continuous and shall be distributed across the shear plane. be taken larger than O.83Acwffc, where Acw is the area
of concrete section of the individual vertical wall segment
418.10.2.2 At least two curtains of reinforcement shall considered.
be used in a wall if Vu > 0.17Acvlffc or hw/fw ;;:::
2.0, in which hw and f w refer to height and length of 418.10.4.5 For horizontal wall segments and coupling
entire wall, respectively. beams, V n shall not be taken larger than 0.83Acwffc,
where Acw is the area of concrete section of a horizontal
418.10.2.3 Reinforcement III structural walls shall be wall segment or coupling beam.
developed or spliced for f y in tension in accordance with
Sections 425.4, 425.5, and (a) through (c): 418.10.5 Design for Flexure and Axial Force
a. Longitudinal reinforcement shall extend beyond the 418.10.5.1 Structural walls and portions of such walls
point at which it is no longer required to resist flexure subject to combined flexure and axial loads shall be
by least O.8f w, except at the top of a wall; designed in accordance with Section 422.4. Concrete and
developed longitudinal reinforcement within effective
b. At locations where yielding of longitudinal flange widths, boundary elements, and the wall web shall
reinforcement is likely to occur as a result of lateral be considered effective. The effects of openings shall be
displacements, development lengths of longitudinal considered.
reinforcement shall be 1.25 times the values
calculated for f y in tension; 418.10.5.2 Unless a more detailed analysis is performed,
effective flange widths of flanged sections shall extend
c. Mechanical splices of reinforcement shall conform to from the face of the web a distance equal to the lesser of
Section 418.2.7 and welded splices of reinforcement one-half the distance to an adjacent wall web and 25
shall conform to Section 418.2.8. percent of the total wall height.
418.10.3 Design Forces 418.10.6 Boundary Elements of Special Structural

Walls
V u shall be obtained from the lateral load analysis III
accordance with the factored load combinations. 418.10.6.1 The need for special boundary elements at the
edges of structural walls shall be evaluated in accordance
418.10.4 Shear Strength with Section 418.10.6.2 or 418.10.6.3. The requirements
of Sections 418.10.6.4 and 418.10.6.5 shall also be
418.10.4.1 Vn of structural walls shall not exceed: satisfied.
418.10.6.2 Walls or wall piers with hw/fw ;;::: 2.0 that are
(418.10.4.1) effectively continuous from the base of structure to top of
wall and are designed to have a single critical section for
flexure and axial loads shall satisfy (a) and (b) or shall be
where the coefficient ac is 0.25 for hw/fw :::;1.5, is designed by Section 418.10.6.3:
0.17 for hw/fw;;::: 2.0, and varies linearly between 0.25
and 0.17 for hw/fw between 1.5 and 2.0. a. Compression zones shall be reinforced with special
boundary elements where
418.10.4.2 In Section 418.10.4.1, the value of ratio
hw/fw used to calculate Vn for segments of a wall shall
fw
be the larger of the ratios for the entire wall and the e> .. (418.10.6.2;
segment of wall considered. - 600(o.,/h,,,)
418.10.4.3 Walls shall have distributed shear and c corresponds to the largest neutral axis depth
reinforcement in two orthogonal directions in the plane of calculated for the factored axial force and nominal
the wall. If hw/fw does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement moment strength consistent with the direction of the
ratio PI shall be at least the reinforcement ratio Pt.

design displacement Oil' Ratio 0ulhw shall not be reinforcement spacing limit of Section 418.7.5.3(a)
taken less than 0.005. shall be one-third of the least dimension of the
boundary element;
b. Where special boundary elements are required by (a),
the special boundary element transverse f. The amount of transverse reinforcement shall be in
reinforcement shall extend vertically above and accordance with Table 418.10.6.4(f).
below the critical section at least the larger of f wand
Mill 4V w except as permitted 111 Section Table 418.10.6.4(1)
418.10.6.4(g). Transverse Reinforcement for
Special Boundary Elements
418.10.6.3 Structural walls not designed in accordance
with Section 418.10.6.2 shall have special boundary Transverse
Applicable expressions
elements at boundaries and edges around openings of reinforcement
structural walls where the maximum extreme fiber A [,'
compressive stress, corresponding to load combinations
ASh
she Greater
0.3(-g
Aeh
-1)~
fvt
(a)
including earthquake effects, E, exceeds O. 2f~. The For rectilinear of
special boundary element shall be permitted to be hoop
0.09 f: (b)
discontinued where the calculated compressive stress is fvt
A [,'
less than O. 15f~. Stresses shall be calculated for the
factored loads using a linearly elastic model and gross Greater
0.45 (-g
Aeh
-1)~
fvt
(c)
Ps
section properties. For walls with flanges, an effective For spiral or of
0.12 f: Cd)
flange width as given in Section 418.10.5.2 shall be used. circular hoop fvt
418.10.6.4 Where special boundary elements are g. Where the critical section occurs at the wall base, the
required by Section 418.10.6.2 or 418.10.6.3, (a) through boundary element transverse reinforcement at the
(h) shall be satisfied: wall base shall extend into the support at least f d, in
accordance with Section 418.10.2.3, of the largest
a. The boundary element shall extend horizontally from longitudinal reinforcement in the special boundary
the extreme compression fiber a distance be at least element. Where the special boundary element
the larger of c - O.lfw and e/2, where e is the terminates on a footing, mat, or pile cap, special
largest neutral axis depth calculated for the factored boundary element transverse reinforcement shall
axial force and nominal moment strength consistent extend at least 300 mm into the footing, mat, or pile
with 0u; cap, unless .il greater extension is required by Section
40S.l3.2.3;
b. Width of flexural compression zone b over the
horizontal distance calculated by Section h. Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall extend
418.10.6.4(a), including flange if present, shall be at to within ISO mm of the end of the wall.
least hu/16; Reinforcement shall be anchored to develop f y
within the confined core of the boundary element
c. For walls or wall piers with hwl f w ~ 2.0 that are using standard hooks or heads. Where the confined
effectively continuous from the base of structure to boundary element has sufficient length to develop the
top of wall, designed to have a single critical section horizontal web reinforcement, and As! yl s of the
for flexure and axial loads, and with elfw ~ 3/B,
horizontal web reinforcement does not exceed
width of the flexural compression zone b over the
Asf ytl s of the boundary element transverse
length calculated in Section 4IS.10.6.4(a) shall be
reinforcement parallel to the horizontal web
greater than or equal to 300 mm;
reinforcement, it shall be permitted to terminate the
horizontal web reinforcement without a standard
d. In flanged sections, the boundary element shall
hook or head.
include the effective flange width in compression and
shall extend at least 300 mm. into the web;
418.10.6.5 Where special boundary elements are not
required by Section 418.10.6.2 or 418.10.6.3, (a) and (b)
e. The boundary element transverse reinforcement shall
shall be satisfied:
satisfy Sections 418.7.5 .2(a) through (e) and Section
418.7.5.3, except the value hx in Section 418.7.5.2
a. If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the wall
shall not exceed the lesser of 350 mrn and two-thirds
boundary exceeds 2. BI f y' boundary transverse
of the boundary element thickness, and the transverse

reinforcement shall satisfy Section 418.7.5.2(a)

through (c) over the distance calculated in accordance
. with Section 418.10.6.4(a). The longitudinal spacing (418.10.7.4)
of transverse reinforcement at the wall boundary shall
not exceed the lesser of 200 mm and 8db of the where a is the angle between the diagonal bars and
smallest primary flexural reinforcing bars, except the the longitudinal axis of the coupling beam;
spacing shall not exceed the lesser of 150 mm and
6db within a distance equal to the greater of i wand b. Each group of diagonal bars shall consist of a
M u/ 4V u above and below critical sections where minimum of four bars provided in two or more
yielding of longitudinal reinforcement is likely to layers. The diagonal bars shall be embedded into the
occur as a result of in elastic lateral displacements; wall at least 1.25 times the development length for f y
in tension;
b. Except where V u in the plane of the wall is less than
O. 083AcvA!1'c, horizontal reinforcement c. Each group of diagonal bars shall be enclosed by
terminating at the edges of structural walls without rectilinear transverse reinforcement having out-to-out
boundary elements shall have a standard hook dimensions of at least bw/2 in the direction parallel
engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge to bw and bw/5 along the other sides, where bw is
reinforcement, shall be enclosed in U-stirrups having the web width of the coupling beam. The transverse
the same size and spacing as, and spliced to, the reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section
horizontal reinforcement. 418.7.5.2(a) through (e), with ASh not less than the
greater of (i) and (ii):
418.10.7 Coupling Beams
i)
O.09sbc-
f~
418.10.7.1 Coupling beams with (in/h) 2: 4 shall satisfy
the requirements of Section 418.6, with the wall boundary
r;
interpreted as being a column. The provisions of Sections
418.6.2.I(b) and 418.6.2.I(c) need not be satisfied if it
ii)
O.3sbc (A--1
g ) r:
-
can be shown by analysis that the beam has adequate ACh fyt
lateral stability.
For the purpose of calculating Ag, the concrete cover in
418.10.7.2 Coupling beams with (in/h) < 2 and with Section 420.6.1 shall be assumed on all four sides of each
V u exceeding o. 33A!1'cAcw shall be reinforced with two group of diagonal bars. The transverse reinforcement shall
intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars symmetrical have spacing measured parallel to the diagonal bars
about the mid-span, unless it can be shown that loss of satisfying Section 418.7.5.3(c) and not exceeding 6db of
stiffness and strength of the coupling beams will not the smallest diagonal bars, and shall have spacing of
impair the vertical load-carrying ability of the structure, crossties or legs of hoops measured perpendicular to the
the egress from the structure, or the integrity of diagonal bars not exceeding 350 mm. The transverse
nonstructural components and their connections to the reinforcement shall continue through the intersection of
structure. the diagonal bars. At the intersection, it is permitted to
modify the arrangement of the transverse reinforcement
418.10.7.3 Coupling beams not governed by Section provided the spacing and volume ratio requirements are
418.10.7.1 or 418.10.7.2 shall be permitted to be satisfied. Additional longitudinal and transverse
reinforced either with two intersecting groups of reinforcement shall be distributed around the beam
diagonally placed bars symmetrical about the mid-span or perimeter with total area in each direction of at least
according to Sections 418.6.3 through 418.6.5, with the O.002bws and spacing not exceeding 300 mm.
wall boundary interpreted as being a column.
d. Transverse reinforcement shall be provided for the
418.10.7.4 Coupling beams reinforced with two entire beam cross section in accordance with Section
intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars symmetrical 418.7.5.2(a) through (e) with ASh not less than the
about the mid-span shall satisfy (a), (b), and either (c) or greater of (i) and (ii):
(d), and the requirements of Section 409.9 need not be
satisfied:
i) O.09sbcf-
f~
yt
a. V n shall be calculated by

the design shear force from the wall pier into the adjacent
.. _
11) 0. 3S b (A
C _-
g 1) - r: wall segments.
. ACh {yt
418.10.9 Construction Joints
Longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed the smaller of ISO mm and 6db of the smallest 418.10.9.1 Construction joints in structural walls shall be
diagonal bars. Spacing of crossties or legs of hoops both specified according to Section 426.5.6, and contact
vertically and horizontally in the plane of the beam cross surfaces shall be roughened consistent with the condition
section shall not exceed 200 mm. Each crosstie and each selected in Section 422.9.4.2.
hoop leg shall engage a longitudinal bar of equal or
greater diameter. It shall be permitted to configure hoops 418.10.10 Discontinuous Walls
as specified in Section 418.6.4.3.
418.10.10.1 Columns supporting discontinuous structural
418.10.8 Wall Piers walls shall be reinforced in accordance with Section
418.7.5.6.
418.10.8.1 Wall piers shall satisfy the special moment
frame requirements for columns of Sections 418.7.4, 418.11 Special Structural Walls Constructed Using
418.7.5, and 418.7.6, with joint faces taken as the top and Precast Concrete
bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. Alternatively,
wall piers with (fw/bw) > 2.5 shall satisfy (a) through 418.11.1 Scope
(f):
418.11.1.1 This section shall apply to special structural
a. Design shear force shall be calculated in accordance walls constructed using precast concrete forming part of
with Section 418.7.6.1 with joint faces taken as the the seismic-force resisting system.
top and bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. If
the general building code includes provisions to 418.11.2 General
account for overstrength of the seismic-force-
resisting system, the design shear force need not 418.11.2.1 Special structural walls constructed using
exceed flo times the factored shear calculated by precast concrete shall satisfy Section 418.10 and 418.5.2.
analysis of the structure for earthquake load effects;
b. V n and distributed shear reinforcement shall satisfy precast concrete and unbonded post-tensioning tendons
Section 418.10.4; and not satisfying the requirements of Section 418.11.2.1
are permitted provided they satisfy the requirements of
c. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoops except it ACI ITO 5.1.
shall be permitted to use single-leg horizontal
reinforcement parallel to fw where only one curtain 418.12 Diaphragms and Trusses
of distributed shear reinforcement is provided.
Single-leg horizontal reinforcement shall have 180- 418.12.1 Scope
degree bends at each end that engage wall pier
boundary longitudinal reinforcement; 418.12.1.1 This section shall apply to diaphragms and
collectors forming part of the seismic-force-resisting
d. Vertical spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not system in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
exceed 150 mm;
418.12.1.2 Section 418.12.11 shall apply to structural
e. Transverse reinforcement shall extend at least 300 trusses forming part of the seismic-force-resisting system
mm. above and below the clear height of the wall in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
pier;
418.12.2 Design Forces
f. Special boundary elements shall be provided if
required by Section 418.10.6.3. 418.12.2.1 The earthquake design forces for diaphragms
shall be obtained from the general building code using the
418.10.8.2 For wall piers at the edge of a wall, horizontal applicable provisions and load combinations.
reinforcement shall be provided in adjacent wall segments
above and below the wall pier and be designed to transfer
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 20'16

CHAPTER 4 - Structurai Concrete 4-123
the design shear force from the wall pier into the adjacent
ii) _0. 3sbc
-
(~
ACh
- 1) ff~_
yt
wall segments.
418.10.9 Construction Joints

Longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed the smaller of 150 mm and 6db of the smallest 418.10.9.1 Construction joints in structural walls shall be
diagonal bars. Spacing of crossties or legs of hoops both specified according to Section 426.5.6, and contact
vertically and horizontally in the plane of the beam cross surfaces shall be roughened consistent with the condition
section shall not exceed 200 mm. Each crosstie and each selected in Section 422.9.4.2.
hoop leg shall engage a longitudinal bar of equal or
greater diameter. It shall be permitted to configure hoops 418.10.10 Discontinuous Walls
as specified in Section 418.6.4.3.
418.10.10.1 Columns supporting discontinuous structural
418.10.8 Wall Piers walls shall be reinforced in accordance with Section
418.7.5.6.
418.10.8.1 Wall piers shall satisfy the special moment
frame requirements for columns of Sections 418.7.4, 418.11 Special Structural Walls Constructed Using
418.7.5, and 418.7.6, with joint faces taken as the top and Precast Concrete
bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. Alternatively,
wall piers with (fw/bw) > 2.5 shall satisfy (a) through 418.11.1 Scope
(f):
418.11.1.1 This section shall apply to special structural
a. Design shear force shall be calculated in accordance walls constructed using precast concrete forming part of
with Section 418.7.6.1 with joint faces taken as the the seismic-force resisting system.
top and bottom of the clear height of the wall pier. If
the general building code includes provisions to 418.11.2 General
account for overstrength of the seismic-force-
resisting system, the design shear force need not 418.11.2.1 Special structural walls constructed using
exceed no times the factored shear calculated by precast concrete shall satisfy Section 418.10 and 418.5.2.
analysis of the structure for earthquake load effects;
b. V n and distributed shear reinforcement shall satisfy precast concrete and unbonded post-tensioning tendons
Section 418.10.4; and not satisfying the requirements of Section 418.11.2.1
are permitted provided they satisfy the requirements of
c. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoops except it ACI ITG 5.1.
shall be permitted to use single-leg horizontal
reinforcement parallel to fw where only one curtain 418.12 Diaphragms and Trusses
of distributed shear reinforcement is provided.
Single-leg horizontal reinforcement shall have 180- 418.12.1 Scope
degree bends at each end that engage wall pier
boundary longitudinal reinforcement; 418.12.1.1 This section shall apply to diaphragms and
collectors forming part of the seismic-foree-resisting
d. Vertical spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not system in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
exceed 150 mm;
418.12.1.2 Section 418.12.11 shall apply to structural
e. Transverse reinforcement shall extend at least 300 trusses forming part of the seismic-force-resisting system
mm. above and below the clear height of the wall in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
pier;
418.12.2 Design Forces
f. Special boundary elements shall be provided if
required by Section 418.10.6.3. 418.12.2.1 The earthquake design forces for diaphragms
shall be obtained from the general building code using the
418.10.8.2 For wall piers at the edge of a wall, horizontal applicable provisions and load combinations.
reinforcement shall be provided in adjacent wall segments
above and below the wall pier and be designed to transfer

4-124 CHi\PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
418.12.3 Seismic Load Path 418.12.7.2 Bonded tendons used as reinforcement to

resist collector forces, diaphragm shear, or flexural
.:H.8.12.3.1 All diaphragms and their connections shall be tension shall be designed such that the stress due to design
designed and detailed to provide for transfer of forces to earthquake forces does not exceed 420 MPa. Pre-
collector elements and to the vertical elements of the compression from unbonded tendons shall be permitted to
seismic-force-resisting system. resist diaphragm design forces if a seismic load path is
provided.
418.12.3.2 Elements of a structural diaphragm system
that are subjected primarily to axial forces and used to 418.12.7.3 All reinforcement used to resist collector
transfer diaphragm shear or flexural forces around forces, diaphragm shear, or flexural tension shall be
openings or other discontinuities shall satisfy the developed or spliced for f y in tension.
requirements for collectors in Sections 418.12.7.5 and
418.12.7.6. 418.12.7.4 Type 2 splices are required where mechanical
splices are used to transfer forces between the diaphragm
418.12.4 Cast-In-Place Composite Topping Slab and the vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting
Diaphragms system.
418.12.4.1 A cast-in-place composite topping slab on a 418.12.7.5 Collector elements with compressive stresses
precast floor or roof shall be permitted as a structural exceeding O.2f~ at any section shall have transverse
diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place topping slab is reinforcement satisfying Sections 418.7.5.2(a) through
reinforced and the surface of the previously hardened 418.7.5.2(e) and 418.7.5.3, except the spacing limit of
concrete on which the topping slab is placed is clean, free Section 418.7.5 .3(a) shall be one-third of the least
of laitance, and intentionally roughened. dimension of the collector. The amount of transverse
reinforcement shall be in accordance with Table
418.12.5 Cast-in-Place Non-Composite Topping Slab 418.12.7.5. The specified transverse reinforcement is
Diaphragms permitted to be discontinued at a section where the
calculated compressive stress is less than O. 15f~.
418.12.5.1 A cast-in-place non-composite topping on a
precast floor or roof shall be permitted as a structural If design forces have been amplified to account for the
diaphragm, provided the cast-in-place topping slab acting overstrength of the vertical elements of the seismic-force-
alone is designed and detailed to resist the design resisting system, the limit of O.2f~ shall be increased to
earthquake forces. o. 5f~, and the limit of O.15f~ shall be increased to
O.4f~·
418.12.6 Minimum Thickness of Diaphragms
Table 418.12.7.5
418.12.6.1 Concrete slabs and composite topping slabs Transverse Reinforcement for Collector Elements
serving as diaphragms used to transmit earthquake forces
shall be at least 50 mm thick. Topping slabs placed over Transverse
Applicable expressions
precast floor or roof elements, acting as diaphragms and reinforcement
not relying on composite action with the precast elements ASh
-
to resist the design earthquake forces, shall be at least 65 0.09 fc'
she (a)
mm thick. for t;
rectilinear hoop
418.12.7 Reinforcement
Ps Greater
0.45 (-g
A
Aeh
- 1) fyt_::_
f;'
(b)
418.12.7.1 The minimum reinforcement ratio for for spiral or
of
diaphragms shall be in conformance with Section 424.4. circular hoop 0.12 f( (c)
Except for post-tensioned slabs, reinforcement spacing fyt
each way in floor or roof systems shall not exceed 450
mm. Where welded wire reinforcement is used as the 418.12.7.6 Longitudinal reinforcement detailing for
distributed reinforcement to resist shear in topping slabs collector elements at splices and anchorage zones shall
placed over precast floor and roof elements, the wires satisfy (a) or (b):
parallel to the joints between the precast elements shall be
spaced not less than 250 mm on center. Reinforcement a. Center-to-center spacing of at least three longitudinal
provided for shear strength shall be continuous and shall bar diameters, but not less than 40 mm, and concrete
be distributed uniformly across the shear plane.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, inc. (ASEP)

clear cover of at least two and one-half longitudinal 4 t 8.12.10 Construction Joints
bar diameters, but not less than 50 11111l;
418.12.10.1 Construction joints in diaphragms shall be
b. Arca of transverse reinforcement, providing Av at specified according to Section 426.5.6, and contact
least the greater of O.06Zj'f;,Cbw s/fyt) and surfaces shall be roughened consistent with the condition
0.35bws/fyt, except as required in Section selected in Section 422.9.4.2.
418.12.7.5
418.12.11 Structural Trusses
418.12.8 Flexural Strength
418.12.11.1 Structural buss elements with compressive
418.12.8.1 Diaphragms and portions of diaphragms shall stresses exceeding O. Zf~ at any section shall have
be designed for flexure in accordance with Section 412. transverse reinforcement, in accordance with Sections
418.7.5.2,418.7.5.3,418.7.5.7, and Table 418.12.11.1,
The effects of openings shall be considered.
over the length of the element.
418.12.9 Shear Strength
Table 418.12.11.1
Transverse Reinforcement for Structural Trusses
418.12.9.1 Vn of diaphragms shall not exceed:
Transverse
(418.12.9.1) Applicable expressions
reinforcement
For cast-in-place topping slab diaphragms on precast floor

or roof members, Aev shall be calculated using only the
ASh
-
she
0.3(-g
A
ACh
-1)~ [,'
fyt
(a)
Greater of
thickness of topping slab for non-composite topping slab
for 0.09 f;
diaphragms and the combined thickness of cast-in-place (b)
and precast elements for composite topping slab
rectilinear hoop t;
diaphragms. For composite topping slab diaphragms, the
value of f~ used to calculate V n shall not exceed the Ps.
0.45 (-g
A
ACh
- 1)"":"
[,'
fyt
(c)
smaller of f~ for the precast members and f~ for the for spiral or Greater of
topping slab. circular hoop
0.12 fJ (d)
t;
418.12.9.2 Vn of diaphragms shall not exceed
0.66Aevj'f;,. 418.12.11.2 All continuous reinforcement in structural
truss elements shall be developed or spliced for f y in
418.12.9.3 Above joints between precast elements in tension.
non-composite and composite cast-in-place topping slab
diaphragms, V n shall not exceed: 418.13 Foundations
(418.12.9.3) 418.13.1 Scope
where Avt is the total area of shear friction reinforcement 418.13.1.1 This section shall apply to foundations
within the topping slab, including both distributed and resisting earthquake-induced forces or transferring
boundary reinforcement, that is oriented perpendicular to earthquake-induced forces between structure and ground
joints in the precast system and coefficient of friction, II, in structures assigned to seismic zone 4.
is 1.01, where 1 is given in Section 419.2.4. At least
one-half of Avt shall be uniformly distributed along the 418.13.1.2 The provisions in this section for piles, drilled
length of the potential shear plane. The area of distributed piers, caissons, and slabs-on-ground shall supplement
reinforcement in the topping slab shall satisfy Section other applicable Code design and construction criteria,
424.4.3.2 in each direction. including Sections 401.4.5 and 401.4.6.
418.12.9.4 Above joints between precast elements in 418.13.2 Footings, Foundation Mats, and Pile Caps
non-composite and composite cast-in-place topping slab
diaphragms, V n shall not exceed the limits in Section 418.13.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement of columns and
422.9.4.4, where Ae is calculated using only the thickness structural walls resisting forces induced by earthquake
of the topping slab. effects shall extend into the footing, mat, or pile cap, and
shall be fully developed for tension at the interface.
Nationa: Structural Code or the

4" J 26 CHP.,PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
418.13.2.2 Columns designed assuming fixed-end a structural diaphragm and part of the seismic-force-
conditions at the foundation shall comply with Section resisting system.
.' 418.l3.2:1 and, if hooks are required, longitudinal
reinforcement resisting flexure shall have 90-degree 418.13.4 Piles, Piers, and Caissons
hooks near the bottom of the foundation with the free end
of the bars oriented toward the center of the column. 418.13.4.1 Piles, piers, or caissons resisting tension loads
shall have continuous longitudinal reinforcement over the
418.13.2.3 Columns or boundary elements of special length resisting design tension forces. The longitudinal
structural walls that have an edge within one-half the reinforcement shall be detailed to transfer tension forces
footing depth from an edge of the footing shall have within the pile cap to supported structural members.
transverse reinforcement in accordance with Sections
418.7.5.2 through 418.7.5.4 provided below the top of 418.13.4.2 Where tension forces induced by earthquake
the footing. This reinforcement shall extend into the effects are transferred between pile cap or mat foundation
footing, mat, or pile cap a length equal to the development and precast pile by reinforcing bars grouted or post-
length, calculated for f y in tension, of the column or installed in the top of the pile, the grouting system shall
boundary element longitudinal reinforcement. have been demonstrated by test to develop at least
1. 25fy of the bar.
418.13.2.4 Where earthquake effects create uplift forces
in boundary elements of special structural walls or 418.13.4.3 Piles, piers, or caissons shall have transverse
columns, flexural reinforcement shall be provided in the reinforcement in accordance with Sections 418.7.5.2(a)
top of the footing, mat or pile cap to resist actions through (e), 418.7.5.3 and 418.7.5.4 excluding
resulting from the factored load combinations, and shall requirements of (c) and (f) of Table 418.7.5.4 at locations
be at least that required by Section 407.6.1 or 409.6.1. (a) and (b):
418.13.2.5 Structural plain concrete in footings and a. At the top of the member for at least five times the
basement walls shall be in accordance with Section member cross-sectional dimension, and at least 1.8 m
414.1.4. below the bottom of the pile cap;
418.13.3 Grade Beams and Slabs-on-Ground b. For the portion of piles in soil that is not capable of
providing lateral support, or in air and water, along
418.13.3.1 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal the entire unsupported length plus the length required
ties between pile caps or footings shall have continuous in (a).
longitudinal reinforcement that shall be developed within
or beyond the supported column or anchored within the 418.13.4.4 For precast concrete driven piles, the length
pile cap or footing at all discontinuities. of transverse reinforcement provided shall be sufficient to
account for potential variations in the elevation of pile
418.13.3.2 Grade beams designed to act as horizontal tips.
ties between pile caps or footings shall be sized such that
the smallest cross-sectional dimension shall be at least 418.13.4.5 Concrete piles, piers, or caissons in
equal to the clear spacing between connected columns foundations supporting one- and two-story stud bearing
divided by 20,_but need not exceed 450 mm. Closed ties wall construction are exempt from the transverse
shall be provided at a spacing not to exceed the lesser of reinforcement requirements of Sections 418.13.4.3 and
one-half the smallest' orthogonal cross-sectional 418.13.4.4.
dimension and 300 mm.
418.13.4.6 Pile caps incorporating batter piles shall be
418.13.3.3 Grade beams and beams that are part of a mat designed to resist the full compressive, strength of the
foundation subjected to flexure from columns that are part batter piles acting as short columns. The slenderness
of the seismic- force-resisting system shall be in effects of batter piles shall be considered for the portion
accordance with Section 418.6. of the piles in soil that is not capable of providing lateral
support, or in air or water.
418.13.3.4 Slabs-on-ground that resist earthquake forces
from walls or columns that are part of the seismic-force-
resisting system shall be designed as diaphragms in
accordance with Section 418.12. The construction
documents shall clearly indicate that the slab-on-ground is
Association of Structural Engineers of the Phiilppines, Inc (ASEP)

418.14 Members Not Designated as Part of the 418.14.3.3 Where the induced moments or shears exceed
Seismic-Force-Reslstlng System cfJMn or cfJVn of the frame member, or if induced
moments or shears are not calculated, (a) through (d) shall
418.14.1 Scope be satisfied:
418.14.1.1 This section shall apply to members not a. Materials, mechanical splices, and welded splices
designated as part of the seismic-force-resisting system in shall satisfy the requirements for special moment
structures assigned to seismic zone 4. frames in Sections 418.2.5 through 418.2.8;
418.14.2 Design Actions b. Beams shall satisfy Sections 418.14.3.2(a) and

418.6.5;
418.14.2.1 Members not designated as part of the
seismic force-resisting system shall be evaluated for c. Columns shall satisfy Sections 418.7.4, 418.7.5, and
gravity load combinations of (1. 2D + 1. OL + O.2S) or 418.7.6;
0.9D, whichever is critical, acting simultaneously with
the design displacement tiu' The load factor on the live d. Joints shall satisfy Section 418.8.3.1.
load, L, shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.5 except for
garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and 418.14.4 Precast Beams and Columns
all areas where L is greater than 4.8 kPa.
418.14.4.1 Precast concrete frame members assumed not
418.14.3 Cast-In-Place Beams, Columns, and Joints to contribute to lateral resistance, including their
connections, shall satisfy (a) through (d):
418.14.3.1 Cast-in-place beams and columns shall be
detailed in accordance with Section 418.14.3.2 or a. Requirements of Section 418.14.3;
418.14.3.3 depen ling 011 the magnitude of moments and
shears induced in, those members when subjected to the b. Ties specified in Section 418.14.3.2(b) over the entire
design displacement 0u' If effects of 0" are not explicitly column height, including the depth of the beams;
checked. the provisions of Section 41:8-.14.3.3 shall be'
satisfied. c. Structural integrity reinforcement, in accordance with
Section 404.10;
418.14.3.2 Where the induced moments and shears do
not exceed the design moment and shear strength of the d. Bearing length at the support of a beam shall be at
frame member, (a) through (c) shall be satisfied: least 50 mm longer than determined from Section
416.2.6.
a. Beams shall satisfy Section 418.6.3.1. Transverse
reinforcement shall be provided throughout the 418.14.5 Slab-Column Connections
length of the beam at spacing not to exceed dJ2.
Where faetored axial force exceeds Agf~/10, 418.14.5.1 For slab-column connections of two-way
transverse reinforcement shall be hoops satisfying slabs without beams, slab shear reinforcement satisfying
Section 418.7.5.2 at spacing so, according 10 Section the requirements of Section 408.7.6 or 408.7.7 shall be
4 L8.14:3.2(b); provided at any slab critical section defined in Section
422.6.4.1 if !J.x/hsx;?: 0.035 - (1/20)(Vug/cfJvc).
b. Columns shall, satisfy Sections 418.7.4.1, 418.7.5.2 Required slab shear reinforcement shall provide Vs ;?:
and 418.7.6. The maximum longitudinal spacing of 0.29m at the slab critical section and shall extend at
hoops shall be So fot the full column length. Spacing. least four times the slab thickness from the face of the
So shall not exceed the smaller of six diameters of the
support adjacent to the slab critical section. The shear
smallest longitudinal bar enclosed and 150 mm; reinforcement requirements of this provision shall not
apply ifAx/hsx s 0.005.
c. Columns with factored gravity axial forces exceeding
0.35Po shall satisfy Sections 418.14.3.2(b) and The value of (Ax/hsx) shall be taken as the greater of the
418.7.5.7. The amount of transverse reinforcement values of the adjacent storeys above and below the slab-
provided shall be one-half of that required by Section column connection. V c shall be calculated in accordance
418.7.5.4 and spacing shall not exceed So for the full with Section 422.6.5. Vug is the factored shear stress on
column length.
the slab critical section for two-way action due to gravity
loads without moment transfer.

418.14.6 Wall Piers SECTION 419

418.14.6.1 Wall piers not designated as part of the CONCRETE: DESIGN AND
seismic-force resisting system shall satisfy the DURABILIlY REQUIREMENTS
requirements of Section 418.10.8. Where the general
building code includes provisions to account for 419.1 Scope
overstrength of the seismic-force-resisting system, it shall
be permitted to calculate the design shear force as no 419.1.1 This section shall apply to concrete, including:
times the shear induced under design displacements, liu'
a. Properties to be used for design;
b. Durability requirements
419.1.2 This section shall apply to durability

requirements for grout used for bonded tendons in
419.2 Concrete Design Properties
419.2.1 Specified Compressive Strength
419.2.1.1 The value of f~ shall be specified in

construction documents and shall be in accordance with
(a) through (c):
a. Limits in Table 419.2.1.1;
b. Durability requirements in Table 419.3.2.1;
c. Structural strength requirements.
Table 419.2.1.1 Limits for f~
Minimum Maximum
Application Concrete
f~,MPa r: MPa
Normal-weight
General and 17 None
lightweight
Special
moment Normal-weight 21 None
frames
and special
Lightweight 35[1]
structural 21
walls
[1] The limit is permitted to be exceeded where demonstrated by

experimental evidence that members made with lightweight
concrete provide strength and toughness equal to or exceeding those
of comparable members made with normal weight concrete of the
same strength.
419.2.1.2 The specified compressive strength shall be

used for proportioning of concrete mixtures in Section
426.4.3 and for testing and acceptance of concrete in
Section 426.12.3.

CHAPTER 4 -. Structural Concrete 4-'129
419.2.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, I~ shall be based 419.2.4.3 If the measured average splitting tensile
on 2i1--daytests. If other than 28 days, test age for I~ shall strength of lightweight concrete, let, is used to calculate
be indicated in the construction documents. it, laboratory tests shall be conducted in accordance with
ASTM C330M to establish the value of let and the
419.2.2 Modulus of Elasticity corresponding value of Iem and it shall be calculated
by:
419.2.2.1 Modulus of elasticity, Ee> for concrete shall
be permitted to be calculated as (a) or (b):
it = let s 1.0 (419.2.4.3)
O.56~
a. For values of we between 1440 and 2560 kg/ m)
The concrete mixture tested in order to calculate it shall
(419.2.2.1.a) be representative of that to be used in the Work.
419.3 Concrete Durability Requirements

b. For normal weight concrete
419.3.1 Exposure Categories and Classes

s, = 4700.fTc (in MPa) (419.2.2.1.b)
419.3.1.1 The licensed design professional shall assign
419.2.3 Modulus of Rupture exposure classes in accordance with the severity of the
anticipated exposure of members for each exposure
419.2.3.1 Modulus of rupture, Ir, for concrete shall be category in Table 419.3.1.1.
calculated by:
Table 419.3.1.1
t- = o.6u/H (419.2.3.1) Exposure Categories and Classes
where the value of it IS In accordance with Section Category Class Condition

FO Concrete not exposed to rrcezing-and·lh3Iving c)'Ilies
419.2.4. Concrete exposed to freezing-and-thawing cycles
FI
with limited exposure to water
419.2.4 Lightweight Concrete Freezing and Concrete exposed to freezing-and-thawing cycles
F2
thawing (F) with frequent exposure to water
Concrete exposed to freezing-and-thawing cycles
419.2.4.1 To account for the properties of lightweight F3 with frequent exposure to water and exposure to
concrete, a modification factor it is used as a multiplier deicin chemicals
of .fTc in all applicable provisions of this Code. . Water-soluble sulfate

(501-)
Dissolved Sulfate
(502-)
in soil, percent by
mass[IJ in water~ppm!'J
419.2.4.2 The value of it shall be based on the
SO SO' < 0.10 502 < 150
composition of the aggregate in the concrete mixture in 150 ~ Sal < 1500
SI 0.10 s SOl- < 0.20
accordance with Table 419.2.4.2 or as permitted in or seawater
Section 419.2.4.3. S2 0.20 < SO' < 2.00 1500 < 502 < 10,000
S3 SO' > 2.00 502 > 10.000
Table 419.2.4.2 Concrete dry in service. Concrete in contact with
Modification Factor In contact WO
water and low permeability is not required
with
Concrete in contact with water and low penneabiiity
water(W) WI
Concrete Composition or aggregates A is re.quired
CO Concrete dry or protected from moisture
Fine: ASTM C330M
All-lightweight 0.75 Corrosion Concrete exposed to moisture but not to an external
Coarse: ASTM C330M CI
protection of source of ch lorides
Fine: Combination of ASTM
Lightweight, fine reinforcement Concrete exposed to moisture and an external source
C330M and C33M 0.75 to 0.85['J (C)
blend C2 of chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt, brackish
Coarse: ASTM C330M water, seawater, or spray from these sources
Sand-lightweight
Fine: ASTM C33M
0.85 ''I Percent sulfate by mass tn soil shall be determined ~y AS --.1M Cl580
.'
Coarse: ASTM C330M [2] Concentration of dissolved sulfates in water in ppm shall be determined by
Fine: ASTM C33M ASTM 0516 or ASTM 04130
Sand-lightweight,
Coarse: Combination of 0.85 to 1.00[2J
coarse blend
ASTMC330M and C33M
Normal-weighl Fine or Coarse: ASTM C33M 1.00
419.3.2 Requirements for Concrete Mixtures
ITlI' , . ..
Linear interpolation from 0.75 to 0.85 IS permitted based on the
absolute volume of normal weight fine aggregate as a fraction of the 419.3.2.1 Based on the exposure classes assigned from
total absolute volume of fine aggregate.P'Linear interpolation from Table 419.3.1.1, concrete mixtures shall conform to the
0.85 to 1.00 is permitted based on the absolute volume of normal-
weight coarse aggregate as a fraction of the total absolute volume of
most restrictive requirements In Table 419.3.2.1.
coarse aggregate.

4-130 Ci--i,i\PTER 4 - Structural Concrete
Table 419.3.2.1 Requirements for Concrete by Exposure Class

- Additional requirements
Exposure Maximum Minimum
Class w/cmlll r: MPa Air content
Limits on cementitious
materials
FO N/A 17 N/A N/A
Fl 0.55 24 Table 419.3.3.1 N/A
F2 0.45 31 Table 419.3.3.1 N/A
F3 0.401LJ 35lLJ Table 419.3.3.1 Section 426.4.2.2(b)
Cernentitious materials PI - Types
ASTM ASTM ASTM Calcium chloride admixture
C150M C595M C1157M
No Type No Type No Type
SO N/A 17 No restriction
restriction restriction restriction
Types IP,IS, or
SI 28 II [4][5] ITwith (MS) MS No restriction
0.50
designation
Types IP,IS, or
S2 0.45 31 V [5] ITwith (HS) HS Not permitted
designation
Types IP,lS, or
Vplus HS plus
ITwith (HS)
pozzolan pozzolan or
S3 0.45 31 designation Not permitted
or slag slag cement
cement [6] plus pozzolan or [6]
, slag cement[6]
WO N/A 17 None
WI 0.50 28 None
Maximum water-soluble chloride ion
(CI-) content in concrete, ¥ercent by weight of
cement 7] Additional provisions
Non-prestressed
Prestressed concrete
concrete
CO N/A 17 1.00 0.06
None
Cl N/A 17 0.30 0.06
C2 0.40 35 0.15 0.06 Concrete cover I~J
[IJ
The maximum w/cm limits in Table 419.3.2.1 do not apply to lightweight concrete.
For plain concrete, the maximumw / em shall be 0045 and the minimum f~ shall be 31.0 MPa.
[2]
[J] Alternative combinations ofcementitious materials to those listed in Table 419.3.2.1 are permitted when tested for sulfate resistance and meeting the
criteria in Section 426A.2.2( c).
[4J For seawater exposure, other types of portland cements with tricaJcium aluminate (CJA) contents up to 10 percent are permitted if the w/cm does not
exceed 0040.
[5J Other available types of cement such as Type I or Type III are permitted in Exposure Classes SI or S2 if the CJA contents are less than 8 percent for
Exposure Class SI or less than 5 percent for Exposure Class S2.
The amount of the specific source of the pozzolan or slag cement to be used shall be at least the amount that has been determined by service record to
[6]
improve sulfate resistance when used in concrete containing Type V cement. Alternatively, the amount of the specific source of the pozzolan or slag
cement to be used shall be at least the amount tested in accordance with ASTM CI012 and meeting the criteria in Section 426A.2.2(c).
[7J Water-soluble chloride ion content that is contributed from the ingredients including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admixtures shall be
determined on the concrete mixture by ASTM C1218M at age between 28 and 42 days.
[8J
Concrete cover shall be in accordance with Section 420.6.

II
419.3.3 Additional Requirements for Freezing and SECTION 420 I
Thawing Exposure
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
419.3.3.1 Normal-weight and lightweight concrete PROPERTIES, DURABILITY, AND
subject to freezing and thawing Exposure Classes Fl, F2,
or F3 shall be air entrained. Except as permitted in Section
EMBEDMENTS
419.3.3.3, air content shall conform to Table 419.3.3.1.
420.1 Scope
Table 419.3.3.1
420.1.1 This section shall apply to steel reinforcement,
Total Air Content for Concrete Exposed to Cycles of
and shall govern (a) through (c):
Freezing and Thawing
a. Material properties;
Nominal maximum Target air content, percent
aggregate size, mm. FI F2 and F3
10 6 7.5 b. Properties to be used for design;
12 5.5 7
20 5 6 c. Durability requirements, including minimum
25 4.5 6 specified cover requirements.
40 4.5 5.5
50 4 5 420.1.2 Provisions of Section 420.7 shall apply to
75 3.5 4.5 embedments.
419.3.3.2 Concrete shall be sampled in accordance with 420.2 Non-Prestressed Bars and Wires
ASTM CI72, and air content shall be measured in
accordance with ASTM C231M or ASTM C 173M. 420.2.1 Material Properties
419.3.3.3 For f~ exceeding 35 MPa, reduction of air 420.2.1.1 Non-prestressed bars and wires shall be
content indicated in Table 419.3.3.1 by 1.0 percentage deformed, except plain bars or wires are permitted for use
point is permitted. in spirals.
419.3.3.4 The maximum percentage of pozzolans, 420.2.1.2 Yield strength of non-prestressed bars and
including fly ash and silica fume, and slag cement in wires shall be determined by either (a) or (b):
concrete assigned to Exposure Class F3, shall be in
accordance with Section 426.4.2.2(b). a. The offset- method, using an offset of 0.2 percent in
accordance with ASTM A370;
419.3.4 Alternative Combinations of Cementitious
Materials for Sulfate Exposure b. The yield point by the halt-of-force method, provided
the non-prestressed bar or wire has a sharp-kneed or
419.3.4.1 Alternative combinations of cementitious well-defined type of yield point.
materials to those listed in Section 419.3.2 are permitted
when tested for sulfate resistance. Testing and acceptance 420.2.1.3 Deformed bars shall conform to (a), (b), (c),
criteria shall conform to Table 426.4.2.2( c). (d), or (e).
419.4 Grout Durability Requirements a. ASTM A615M - carbon steel;
419.4.1 Water-soluble chloride ion content of grout for b. ASTM A 706M -low-alloy steel;
bonded tendons shall not exceed 0.06 percent when tested
in accordance with ASTM C1218M, measured by mass of C. ASTM A996M - axle steel and rail steel; bars from
chloride ion to mass of cement. rail steel shall be Type R;
d. ASTM A955M - stainless steel;
e. ASTM AI035M -low-carbon chromium steel.

420.2.1.4 Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall 420.2.2.4 Types of non-prestressed bars and wires to be
conform to ASTM A6l5M, A706M, A955M, or specified for particular structural applications shall be in
AI035M. accordance with Table 420.2.2.4(a) for deformed
reinforcement and Table 420.2.2.4(b) for plain
420.2.1.5 Welded deformed bar mats shall conform to reinforcement.
ASTM A184M. Deformed bars used in welded deformed
bar mats shall conform to ASTM A6I5M or A 706M. 420.2.2.5 Deformed non-prestressed longitudinal
reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced moment, axial
420.2.1.6 Headed deformed bars shall conform to ASTM force, or both, in special moment frames, special
A970M, including Annex Al requirements for Class HA structural walls, and all components of special structural
head dimensions. walls including coupling beams and wall piers shall be in
accordance with (a) or (b):
420.2.1.7 Deformed wire, plain wire, welded deformed
wire reinforcement, and welded plain wire reinforcement a) ASTM A706M, Grade 420;
shall conform to (a) or (b), except that yield strength shall
be determined in accordance with 420.2.1.2: b) ASTM A615M Grade 280 reinforcement if (i) and
are satisfied and ASTM A615M Grade 420
a. AI064M - carbon steel; reinforcement if (i) through (iii) are satisfied.
b. Al 022M - stainless steel. i. actual yield strength based on mill tests does not
exceed f y by more than 125 MPa;
420.2.1.7.1 Deformed wire sizes MD25 through MD200
shall be permitted. n, ratio of the actual tensile strength to the actual
yield strength is at least 1.25;
420.2.1.7.2 Deformed wire sizes larger than MD200 .
shall be permitted in welded wire reinforcement if treated 111. minimum elongation in 200 mm shall be at least
as plain wire for calculation of development and splice 14 percent for bar sizes 10 mm cp through 20
lengths in accordance with Sections 425.4.7 and 425.5.4, mm cp, at least 12 percent for bar sizes 25 mm cp
respectively. through 36 mm cP, and at least 10 percent for bar
sizes 40 mm cp and 58 mm cpo
420.2.1.7.3 Except as permitted for welded wire
reinforcement used as stirrups in accordance with Section 420.3 Prestressing Strands, Wires, and Bars
425.7.1, spacing of welded intersections in welded wire
reinforcement in direction of calculated stress shall not 420.3.1 Material Properties
exceed (a) or (b):
420.3.1.1 Except as required in Section 420.3.1.3 for
a. 400 mm for welded deformed wire reinforcement; special moment frames and special structural walls,
prestressing reinforcement shall conform to (a), (b), (c),
b. 300 mm for welded plain wire reinforcement. or (d):
420.2.2 Design Properties a. ASTM A416M - strand;
420.2.2.1 For non-prestressed bars and wires, the stress b. ASTM A421M - wire;
below f y shall be Es times steel strain. For strains greater
than that corresponding to f y, stress shall be considered C. ASTM A42lM - low-relaxation wire including,
independent of strain and equal to f y' Supplementary Requirement SI "Low-Relaxation
Wire and Relaxation Testing";
420.2.2.2 Modulus of elasticity, Es, for nonprestressed
bars and wires shall be permitted to be taken as 200,000 d. ASTM A722M - high-strength bar.
MPa.
420.3.1.2 Prestressing strands, wires, and bars not listed
420.2.2.3 Yield strength for non-prestressed bars and in ASTM A4l6M, A421M, or A722M are permitted
wires shall be based on the specified grade of provided they conform to minimum requirements of these
reinforcement and shall not exceed the values given in specifications and are shown by test or analysis not to
Section 420.2.2.4 for the associated applications. impair the performance of the member.

420.3.1.3 Prestressing reinforcement resisting beams and wall piers, cast using precast concrete shall
.earthquake-induced moment and axial force, or both, in comply with ASTM A4l6M or A122M.
special moment frames, special structural walls, and all
components of special structural walls including coupling
Table 420.2.2.4(a)
Non-Prestressed Deformed Reinforcement
Maximum Applicable ASTM Specification

value of f y or f yt
Application Welded
Usage permitted for Deformed Deformed Welded wire
deformed
design calculations, Bars Wires reinforcement
bar mats
MPa
Special
Flexure, axial Refer to Not
seismic 420 Not permitted Not permitted
force, and Sect. 420.2.2.5 permitted
systems
shrinkage and
A615M, A706M, AI064M, AI064M,
temperature Other 550 AI84M[I]
A955M, A996M AI022M AI022M
Special A615M, A 706M,
AI064M AI064M[2],
seismic 700 A955M, A996M, AI022M[2] Not permitted
AI022M
Lateral support systems AI035M
of longitudinal A615M, A 706M,
AI064M,
bars or concrete Spirals 700 A955M, A996M, Not permitted Not permitted
AI022M
confinement AI035M
A615M, A 706M, AI064M, AI064M,
Others 550 Not permitted
A955M, A996M AI022M AI022M
Special
A615M, A706M, AI064M,
Seismic 420 Not permitted Not permitted
A955M, A996M AI022M
~stems
A615M, A706M, A1064M, AI064M,
Spirals 420 Not permitted
A955M, A996M A1022M AI022M
Shear AI064M and
Shear A615M, A 706M, AI064M,
420 AI022M welded Not permitted
friction A955M, A996M AI022M
plain wire
AI064Mand
Stirrups, ties,
550
A615M, A706M, . A1064M, A I022M welded Not permitted
hoops A955M, A996M AI022M
deformed wire
Longitudinal
A615M, A706M, AI064M, AI064M,
Torsion and 420 Not permitted
A955M, A996M AI022M A1022M
transverse
1'1 Welded deformed bar mats shall be
. .
permitted to be assembled usmg A615M or A7D6M deformed bars •
121 ASTM AI064M and AI022M are not permitted in special seismic systems where the weld is required to resist stresses in response to confinement,
lateral support of longitudinal bars, shear, or other actions.

Table 420.2.2.4(b) Non-Prestressed Plain Spiral Reinforcement
Maximum Applicable
Usage Application
value oft, or fyt ASTM
permitted for design Specification
calculations, MPa Plain Bars Plain Wires
A6ISM,
Spirals in special A706M, A1064M,
700
seismic systems A9SSM, AI022M
Lateral support of AI03SM
longitudinal bars or
Concrete
A6ISM,
confinement
A706M, AI064M,
Spirals 700
A9SSM, AI022M
AI03SM
A61SM,
A706M, AI064M,
Shear Spirals 420
A9SSM, AI022M
AI03SM
A6ISM,
Torsion in
A706M, AI064M,
Non-prestressed Spirals 420
A9SSM, AI022M
beams
AI03SM
Table 420.3.2.2 Prestressing Strands, Wires, and Bars
Maximum value of f pu
Type permitted for design Applicable ASTM Specification
calculations, MPa
Strand (stress-relieved
1860 A416M
and low-relaxation)
A421M
Wire (stress-relieved and
Ins
.A421M
low-relaxation) Including Supplementary Requirement SI
"Low-Relaxation Wire and Relaxation Testing"
High-strength bar 103S A422M
420.3.2 Design Properties permitted for members with bonded prestressed

reinforcement if all prestressed reinforcement is in the
420.3.2.1 Modulus of elasticity, E p, for prestressing tension zone and Ips ~ O. 5lpu'
reinforcement shall be determined from tests or as
reported by the manufacturer.
420.3.2.2 Tensile strength, Ipu> shall be based on the

specified grade or type of prestressing reinforcement and (420.3.2.3.1 )
shall not exceed the values given in Table 420.3.2.2.
Where Yp is in accordance with Table 420.3.2.3.1.
420.3.2.3 Stress in Bonded Prestressed
Reinforcement at Nominal Flexural If compression reinforcement is considered for the
Strength, Ips calculation of Ips by Eq. 420.3.2.3.1, (a) and (b) shall be
satisfied.
420.3.2.3.1 As an altemative to a more accurate
calculation of Ips based on strain compatibility, values of a. If d' exceeds O.15dp' the compression
fps calculated in accordance with Eq. 420.3.2.3.1 shall be reinforcement shall be neglected in Eq. 420.3.2.3.1.

b. If compression reinforcement IS included in Eq. Table 420.3.2.5.1

420.3.2.3.1, the term Maximum Permissible Tensile Stresses in Prestressed
Reinforcement
Stage Location Maximum tensile stress

0.94fpy
O.8Ofpu
shall not be taken less than 0.17, Maximum
During At jacking Least jacking force
Table 420.3.2.3.1 stressing end of: recommended
Values of Yp for Use in Equation (Sect. 420.3.2.3.1) by the supplier
of anchorage
Ipyllpu Y,p device
2: 0.80 0.55 At post-
2: 0.85 0.40 Immediately tensioning
2: 0.90 0.28 after force anchorage 0.7Ofpu
transfer devices and
couplers
420.3.2.3.2 For pretensioned strands, the strand design
stress at sections of members located within f d from the
free end of strand shall not exceed that calculated in 420.3.2.6 Prestress Losses
420.3.2.6.1 Prestress losses shall be considered in the
calculation of the effective tensile stress in the prestressed
420.3.2.4 Stress in Unbonded Prestressed
Reinforcement at Nominal Flexural reinforcement, fse' and shall include (a) through (f):
Strength, Ips
a. Prestressed reinforcement seating at transfer;
420.3.2.4.1 As an alternative to a more accurate
b. Elastic shortening of concrete;
calculation of Ips, values 01ps calculated in accordance
with Table 420.3.2.4.1 shall be permitted for members
c. Creep of concrete;
prestressed with unbonded tendons if Ise 2:: O. 5 f pu-
d. Shrinkage of concrete;
Table 420.3.2.4.1
Approximate Values of Ips at Nominal Flexural e. Relaxation of prestressed reinforcement;
Strength for Unbonded Tendons
f. Friction loss due to intended or unintended curvature
e.r« Ips in post-tensioning tendons.
fse + 70 +1:1(100pp)
The least 420.3.2.6.2 Calculated friction loss in post-tensioning
:'S 35
of: fse + 420
fpy tendons shall be based on experimentally determined
wobble and curvature friction coefficients.
fse + 70 + f:I(300pp)
The least
> 35
of fse + 210 420.3.2.6.3 Where loss of prestress in a member is
fpy anticipated due to connection of the member to adjoining
construction, such loss of prestress shall be included in
design calculations.
420.3.2.5 Permissible Tensile Stresses in
Prestressed Reinforcement 420.4 Structural Steel, Pipe, and Tubing for
Composite Columns
420.3.2.5.1 The tensile stress in prestressed
reinforcement shall not exceed the limits in Table 420.4.1 Material Properties
420.3.2.5.1.
420.4.1.1 Structural steel other than steel pipe or tubing
used in composite columns shall conform to (a), (b), (c), II
(d), or (e):

a. ASTM A36M - carbon steel; 420.6.1.3 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements
.' b. ASTM A242M - high-strength low-alloy steel; 420.6.1.3.1 Non-prestressed cast-in-place concrete
members shall have specified concrete cover for
c .. ASTM A572M high-strength, low-alloy, reinforcement at least that given in Table 420.6.1.3.1.
columbium-vanadium steel;
Table 420.6.1.3.1
d. ASTM A588M - high-strength, low-alloy, 345 MPa Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in-Place Non-
steel; Prestressed Concrete Members
e. ASTM A992M - structural shapes. Specified

Concrete
Member Reinforcement cover,
exposure
mm.
420.4.1.2 Steel pipe or tubing used in composite
columns to encase a concrete core shall conform to (a), Cast against
and
(b), (c) or (d):
permanently All All 75
in contact
a. ASTM A53M Grade B - black steel, hot-dipped, with ground
zinc-coated;
20 mm cp through
50
Exposed to 58 mm cp bars
b. ASTM A500M - cold-formed, welded, seamless;
weather or in 16 mm cP bar,
All
contact with MW2000r
c. ASTM A50lM - hot-formed, welded, seamless. 40
ground MD200
wire, and smaller
d. ASTM AI085 - cold-formed, welded.
40 mm cP and 58
Slabs, 40
mm cP bars
420.4.2 Design Properties joists, and
Not exposed walls 36 mm cP bar and
20
to weather or smaller
420.4.2.1 For structural steel in composite columns,
Beams,
in contact
maximum value of f y shall be in accordance with the columns,
Primary
with ground reinforcement,
appropriate ASTM specifications in Section 420.4.1. pedestals, 40
stirrups, ties,
and
spirals, and hoops
420.4.2.2 For structural steel used in composite columns tension ties
with a structural steel core, value of f y shall not exceed Jable 420.6.1.3.2
345 MPa.
Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in-Place
Prestressed Concrete Members
420.5 Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement
Specified
Concrete
420.5.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement and stud exposure
mm.
assemblies shall conform to ASTM AI044M.
Cast against
and
420.6 Provisions for Durability of Steel permanently All All 75
Reinforcement in contact
with ground
420.6.1 Specified Concrete Cover Slabs,
Exposed to joists, and All 25
420.6.1.1 Unless the general building code requires a weather or in walls
greater concrete cover for fire protection, the minimum contact with
specified concrete cover shall be in accordance with ground All other All 40
Section 420.6.1.2 through 420.6.1.4.
Slabs,
joists, and All 20
420.6.1.2 It shall be permitted to consider concrete floor Not exposed
walls
finishes as part of required cover for non-structural to weather or
Beams, Primary
purposes. in contact 40
columns, reinforcement
with ground
and tension Stirrups, ties,
25
ties spirals, and hoops

CHAPTEH 4-.-- Structural Cor.crete
Table 420.6.1.3.3 420.6.1.3.4 For bundled bars, specified concrete cover

Specified Concrete Cover for Precast Non-Prestressed shall be at least the smaller of (a) and (b):
or Prestressed Concrete Members
Manufactured Under Plant Conditions a. The equivalent diameter of the bundle;
Specified b. 50 mrn,
Concrete
exposure
mm. and for concrete cast against and permanently in contact
40 mm 1> and 58 mm 1> with ground, the specified cover shall be 75 mm.
bars; tendons larger 40
than 40 mm diameter
36 mm 1> bars and
420.6.1.3.5 For headed shear stud reinforcement,
Walls smaller; specified concrete cover for the heads or base rails shall
MW200 and MD200 be at least that required for the reinforcement in the
20
wire and smaller; member.
tendons and strands 40
Exposed
mm 1> and smaller 420.6.1.4 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements
to
40 mm 1> and 58 mm 1> for Corrosive Environments
weather
orin
than 40 mm 1>
contact 420.6.1.4.1 In corrosive environments or other severe
20 mm 1> through 36
with exposure conditions, the specified concrete cover shall be
mm 1> bars; tendons
ground increased as deemed necessary. The applicable
and strands larger than 40
All other 16 mm 1> through 40 requirements for concrete based on exposure categories in
mm o Section 419.3 shall be satisfied, or other protection shall
16 mm 1> bar, MW200 be provided.
or MD200 wire, and
smaller; tendons and 32 420.6.1.4.2 For prestressed concrete members classified
strands 16 mm 1> and as Class T or C in Section 424.5.2 and exposed to
smaller corrosive environments or other severe exposure
40 mm 1> and 58 mm 1> categories such as those given III Section 419.3, the
specified concrete cover for prestressed reinforcement
than 40 mm 1>
Slabs, shall be at least 1.5 times the cover in Section 420.6.1.3.2
Tendons and strands 40
joists, 20 for cast-in-place members and in Section 420.6.1.3.3 for
mm 1> and smaller
Not and walls precast members.
36 mm 1> bar, MW200
exposed
or MD200 wire, and 16
to 420.6.1.4.3 If the pre-compressed tensile zone is not in
smaller
weather
Greater of tension under sustained loads, Section 420.6.1.4.2 need
orm
db not be satisfied.
contact Beams,
and 16
with columns,
Primary reinforcement mm and 420.6.2 Non-Prestressed Coated Reinforcement
ground pedestals,
need not
and
exceed 40
tension 420.6.2.1 Non-prestressed coated reinforcement shall
mm
ties conform to Table 420.6.2.1
Stirrups, ties, spirals,
10
and hoops Table 420.6.2.1
Non-Prestressed Coated Reinforcement
420.6.1.3.2 Cast-in-place prestressed concrete members
shall have specified concrete cover for reinforcement, Type of
Applic able ASTM-specifications
ducts and end fittings at least that given in Table Coatin
Welded
420.6.1.3.2. Bar Wire
wire
Not
420.6.1.3.3 Precast non-prestressed or prestressed Zinc-coated A767M AI060M
permitted
concrete members manufactured under plant conditions A775M
shall have specified concrete cover for reinforcement, Epoxy-coated or A884M A884M
ducts, and end fittings at least that given in Table A934M
420.6.1.3.3. Zinc and Not
Not
epoxy dual AI055M permitted
permitted
coated

420.6.2.2 Deformed bars to be zinc-coated, epoxy- 420.7 Embedments

coated, or zinc and epoxy dual-coated shall conform to
Sections 420.2.1.3 (a), (b) or (c). 420.7.1 Embedments shall not significantly impair the
strength of the structure and shall not reduce fire
420.6.2.3 Wire and welded wire reinforcement to be protection.
epoxy-coated shall conform to Section 420.2.1.7(a).
420.7.2 Embedment materials shall not be harmful to
420.6.3 Corrosion Protection for Unbounded concrete or reinforcement.
Prestressing Reinforcement
420.7.3 Aluminum embedments shall be coated or
420.6.3.1 Unbonded prestressing reinforcement shall be covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction and
encased in sheathing, and the space between the strand electrolytic action between aluminum and steel.
and the sheathing shall be completely filled with a
material formulated to inhibit corrosion. Sheathing shall 420.7.4 Reinforcement with an area at least 0.002
be watertight and continuous over the unbonded length. times the area of the concrete section shall be provided
perpendicular to pipe embedments.
420.6.3.2 In corrosive environments, the sheathing shall
be connected to all stressing, intermediate, and fixed 420.7.5 Specified concrete cover for pipe embedments
anchorages in a watertight fashion. with their fittings shall be at least 40 mm for concrete
exposed to earth or weather, and at least 20mm for
420.6.3.3 Unbonded single-strand tendons shall be concrete not exposed to weather, or not in contact with
protected against corrosion in accordance with ACI 423.7. ground.
420.6.4 Corrosion Protection for Grouted Tendons 420.7.6 Use of Quenched Tempered Thermo-
Mechanically Treated (QT/TMT)
420.6.4.1 Ducts for grouted tendons shall be grout-tight Reinforcing Bars in Structures Located in
and non-reactive with concrete, prestressing Seismic Zone 4
reinforcement, grout, and corrosion inhibitor admixtures.
420.7.6.1 (NZS 3101 5.3.2.1) Reinforcing bars to
420.6.4.2 Ducts shall be maintained free of water. comply with AS/NZS 4671. Reinforcement shall be
manufactured using either the micro-alloy process or the
420.6.4.3 Ducts for grouted single-wire, single-strand, or in-line quenched and tempered process. However, where
single-bar tendons shall have an inside diameter at least the in-line quenched and tempered process, or equivalent
6mm larger than the diameter of the prestressing is used, the restrictions of Section 420.7.62 shall apply.
reinforcement.
420.7.6.2 (NZS 31015.3.2.2) Restrictions on In-line
420.6.4.4 Ducts for grouted multiple wire, multiple Quenched and Tempered Reinforcement:
strand, or multiple bar tendons shall have an inside cross-
sectional area at least two times the cross-sectional area of Reinforcement bars manufactured by the in-line quenched
the prestressing reinforcement. and tempered process shall not be used when welding,
galvanizing, hot bending, or threading of bars occurs.
420.6.5 Corrosion Protection for Post-Tensioning
Anchorages, Couplers, and End Fittings 420.7.6.3 (NZS 3101 C5.3.2)
420.6.5.1 Anchorages, couplers, and end fittings shall be It is important to note that any process involving heat e.g.
protected to provide long-term resistance to corrosion. welding, galvanizing, hot bending can adversely affect the
mechanical properties of quenched and tempered
420.6.6 Corrosion Protection for External Post- reinforcing bars by modification of the micro-structure.
Tensioning
Threading of quenched and tempered bar removes some to
420.6.6.1 External tendons and tendon anchorage all hardened outer layer resulting in a disproportionate loss
regions shall be protected against corrosion. of strength.

420.7.6.4 (NZS 3109 Amendment 2) SECTION 421

Quenched and tempered reinforcing bars shall not be STRENGTH REDUCTION
straightened or rebent. FACTORS
420.7.6.5 (AS/NZS 1554.3:2002) 421.1 Scope
Quenched and tempered reinforcing bars cannot be 421.1.1 This section shall apply to the selection of
welded without strength loss. It is recommended that a strength reduction factors used in design, except as
suitable warning be added to the standard to this effect. permitted by Section 427.
This is covered in the amendment to NZS 3101.
421.2 Strength Reduction Factors for Structural
420.7.7 Restrictions in the Use of Quenched Concrete Members and Connections
Tempered Thermo-mechanically Treated
(QT/TMT) Reinforcing Bars in Structures 421.2.1 Strength reduction factors, cp, shall be in
Located in Seismic Zone 4 accordance with Table 421.2.1, except as modified by
Sections 421.2.2, 421.2.3, and 421.2.4.
420.7.7.1The restrictions prohibit the use of quenched
tempered (QT) and thermo-mechanically treated (TMT) 421.2.2 Strength reduction factor for moment, axial
reinforcing bars specifically where: force, or combined moment and axial force shall be in
1. There is preheating greater than 275°C;
2. Bending of reinforcing bars requiring preheating;
3. Splicing of reinforcing bars that will require welding

or lap or butt welded joints;
4. Threading of reinforcing bar ends for use of

mechanical couplers;
5. Tack welding for grounding wires will be required.
420.7.7.2 Use of QT/TMT Reinforcing Bars Not

Complying to the Foregoing Restrictions:
420.7.7.2.1 Design Engineers are reminded that the

performance of QT/TMT rebars under cyclic loading
could result in premature spalling and failure of the
concrete and the premature failure of the QT/TMT
reinforcing bars.
4207.7.2.2 Civil Engineer-in-Charge of Construction

shall inform the Design Engineer in writing if QT/TMT
reinforcing bars are to be substituted to MA reinforcing
bars.

Table 421.2.1
Strength Reduction Factors, QJ
Action or Structural Element cP Exceptions

0.65 to 0.90
Near ends of pre tensioned members where strands are
Moment, axial force, or combined in accordance
(a) not fully developed, cP shall be in accordance with
moment and axial force with
Section 421.2.3.
Section 421.2.2
Additional requirements are given in Section 421.2.4
(b) Shear 0.75
for structures designed to resist earthguake effects.
(c) Torsion 0.75 -
(d) Bearing 0.65 -
(e) Post-tensioned anchorage zones 0.85 -
(f) Brackets and corbels 0.75 -
Struts, ties, nodal zones, and bearing
(g) areas designed in accordance with strut- 0.75 -
and-tie method in Section 423
Components of connections of precast
(h) members controlled by yielding of steel 0.90 -
elements in tension
(i) Plain concrete elements 0.60 -
0.45 to 0.75
(j) Anchors in concrete elements in accordance -
with Section 417
Table 421.2.2
Strength Reduction Factor, QJ, for Moment, Axial Force, or Combined Moment and Axial Force
Net tensile stain, e, Classification ' e of transverse reinforcement

S irals centormfn to Sect. 425.7.3 Other
Compression
e, ::::;
Ety 0.75 (a) 0.65 (b)
controlled
Ety < e, < 0.005 Transition'!' 0.75 + 0.15 (E t - E ty ) (c) 0.65 + 0.25 (d)
_ (0.005 - e, )
Tension
e, ~ 0.005 0.90 (e) 0.90 (f)
controlled
[I] For sections classified as transition, it shall be permitted to use l/J corresponding to compression-controlled sections.
421.2.2.1 For deformed reinforcement, Ety shall be

f y/ Es . For Grade 280 deformed reinforcement, it shall (42l.2.3)
be permitted to take Ety equal to 0.002.
421.2.4 For structures that rely on elements in (a), (b),

421.2.2.2 For all prestressed reinforcement, Ety shall be
or (c) to resist earthquake effects, E, the value of
taken as 0.002.
lfJ for shear shall be modified in accordance with Sections
42l.2.4.1 through 42l.2.4.3
421.2.3 For sections in' pretensioned members where
strand is not fully developed, lfJ shall be calculated at each
a. Special moment frames;
section in accordance with Table 421.2.3, where Itr is
calculated using Eq. 421.2.3, I db is the debonded length
b. Special structural walls;
at the end of the member, f se is the effective stress in the
prestressed reinforcement after allowance for all losses,
c. Intermediate precast structural walls in structures
and I d is given in Section 425.4.8.1.
assigned to seismic zone 4.

421.2.4.1 For any member designed to resist E, 421.2.4.3 For beam-column JOInts and diagonally
cp for shear shall be 0,60 if the nominal shear strength of reinforced coupling beams, cp for shear shall be 0.85.
" the member is less than the shear corresponding to the
development of the nominal moment strength of the
member. The nominal moment strength shall be
calculated considering the most critical factored axial
loads and including E.
421.2.4.2 For diaphragms, cp for shear shall not exceed

the least value of cp for shear used for the vertical
components of the primary seismic-force-resisting
system.
Table 421.2.3 Strength Reduction Factor, cp, for Section of Pretensioned Members
Condition near Stress in concrete Distance from end of member
end of member under service load II) to section under consideration
cp
$ ftr 0.75 (a)
All strands
Not applicable Linear interpolation from
bonded ftr to fd (b)
0.75 to 0.90[2)
No tension
< (fdh + ftr) 0.75 (c)
Linear interpolation from
One or more
calculated (fdb + ftr) to «; + fd)
0.75 to 0.90[2J Cd)
Strands debonded $_Cfdb + ftd 0.75 (e)
Tension calculated Linear interpolation from
«; +'ftr) to Cfdb + Ud) 0.75 to 0.90[2J
(1)
[11 Stress calculated using gross cross-sectional properties in extreme concrete fiber of pre-compressed tensile zone under service loads after allowance
for all prestress losses at section under consideration,
[21 It shall be permitted to use a strength reduction factor of 0.75.

422.2.2.2 Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected

S~CTION 422 in flexural and axial strength calculations.
SECTIONAL STRENGTH
422.2.2.3 The relationship between concrete
422.1 Scope compressive stress and strain shall be represented by a
rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or other shape that
422.1.1 This section shall apply to calculating nominal results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement
strength at sections of members, including (a) through (g): with results of comprehensive tests.
a. Flexural strength; 422.2.2.4 The equivalent rectangular concrete stress

distribution in accordance with Sections 422.2.2.4.1
b. Axial strength or combined flexural and axial through 422.2.2.4.3 satisfies Section 422.2.2.3.
strength;
422.2.2.4.1 Concrete stress of O. 85f~ shall be assumed
c. One-way shear strength; uniformly distributed over an equivalent compression
zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a line
d. Two-way shear strength; parallel to the neutral axis located a distance a from the
fiber of maximum compressive strain, as calculated by:
e. Torsional strength;
(422.2.2.4.1 )
f. Bearing;
422.2.2.4.2 Distance from the fiber of maximum
g. Shear friction.
compressive strain to the neutral axis, c, shall be
measured perpendicular to the neutral axis.
422.1.2 Sectional strength requirements of this chapter
shall be satisfied unless the member or region of the
member is designed in accordance with Section 423.
422.2.2.4.3 Values of PI shall be in accordance with
Table 422.2.2.4.3
422.1.3 Design strength at a section shall be taken as Table 422.2.2.4.3
the nominal strength multiplied by the applicable strength Values of PI for Equivalent Rectangular Concrete
reduction factor, cp, given in Section 42l. Stress Distribution
422.2 Design Assumptions

Strength
for Moment and Axial r: MPa Pl
17 < r/. < 28 0.85 (a)
0.05(1; - 28)
422.2.1 Equilibrium and Strain Compatibility 28 < I; < 55 0.85 7 (b)
422.2.1.1 Equilibrium shall be satisfied at each section. r; ~ 55 0.65 (c)
422.2.1.2 Strain in concrete and non-prestressed 422.2.3 Design Assumptions for Non-Prestressed
reinforcement shall be assumed proportional to the Reinforcement
distance from neutral axis.
422.2.3.1 Deformed reinforcement used to resist tensile
422.2.1.3 Strain in prestressed concrete and in bonded or compressive forces shall conform to Section 420.2.1.
and unbonded prestressed reinforcement shall include the
strain due to effective prestress. 422.2.3.2 Stress-strain relationship and modulus of
elasticity for deformed reinforcement shall be idealized in
422.2.1.4 Changes in strain for bonded prestressed accordance with Sections 420.2.2.1 and 420.2.2.2.
reinforcement shall be assumed proportional to the
distance from neutral axis. 422.2.4 Design Assumptions for Prestressing
Reinforcement
422.2.2 Design Assumptions for Concrete
422.2.4.1 For members with bonded prestressing
422.2.2.1 Maximum strain at the extreme concrete reinforcement conforming to Section 420.3.1, stress at
compression fiber shall be assumed equal to 0.003.

CH/",PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-143
nominal flexural strength, f ps» shall be calculated In 422.4 Axial Strength or Combined Flexural and
accordance with Section 420.3.2.3. Axial Strength
422.2.4.2 For members with unbonded prestressing 422.4.1 General

reinforcement conforming to Section 420.3.1, f ps shall be
calculated in accordance with Section 420.3.2.4. 422.4.1.1 Nominal flexural and axial strength shall be
calculated in accordance with the assumptions of Section
422.2.4.3 If the embedded length of the prestressing 422.2.
strand is less than t d» the design strand stress shall not
exceed the value given in Section 425.4.8.3, as modified 422.4.2 Maximum Axial Compressive Strength
by Section 425.4.8.1(b).
422.4.2.1 Nominal axial compressive strength, P n, shall
422.3 Flexural Strength not exceed P n,max, in accordance with Table 422.4.2.1,
where PolS calculated by Eq. 422.4.2.2 for non-
422.3.1 General prestressed members and composite steel and concrete
members, and by Eq. 422.4.2.3 for prestressed members.
422.3.1.1 Nominal flexural strength Mn shall be
calculated in accordance with the assumptions of Section Table 422.4.2.1
422.2. Maximum Axial Strength
422.3.2 Prestressed Concrete Members Transverse

Member Pn,max
Reinforcement
Ties conforming
422.3.2.1 Deformed reinforcement conforming to
to 0.80 Po (a)
Section 420.2.1, provided in conjunction with prestressed Section 422.4.2.4
reinforcement, shall be permitted to be considered to Non-prestressed
Spirals
contribute to the tensile force and be included in flexural conforming to 0.85 Po (b)
strength calculations at a stress equal to f y' Section 422.4.2.5
Ties 0.80 Po (c)
Prestressed
422.3.2.2 Other non-prestressed reinforcement shall be Spirals 0.85 P" (d)
permitted to be considered to contribute to the flexural Composite steel and
concrete columns
strength if a strain compatibility analysis is performed to All 0.85 Po (e)
in accordance with
calculate stresses in such reinforcement.
L-_.....:::S.::.;ec:.;;tion
410
422.3.3 Composite Concrete Members 422.4.2.2 For non-prestressed members and composite
steel and concrete members, Po shall be calculated by
422.3.3.1 Provisions of Section 422.3.3 apply to
members constructed in separate placements but
(422.4.2.2)
connected so that all elements resist loads as a unit.
where Ast is the total area of non-prestressed longitudinal

422.3.3.2 For calculation of Mn for composite slabs and
reinforcement.
beams, use of the entire composite section shall be
permitted.
422.4.2.3 For prestressed members, Po shall be
calculated by:
422.3.3.3 For calculation of Mn for composite slabs and
beams, no distinction shall be made between shored and
unshored members. Po = O. 85f~(Ag - Ast - Apd} + fyAst
- u: - O. 003Ep)Apt
422.3.3.4 For calculation of Mn for composite members
(422.4.2.3)
where the specified concrete compressive strength of
different elements varies, properties of the individual
Where Apt is the total area of prestressing reinforcement,
elements shall be used in design. Alternatively, it shall be
Apd is the total area occupied by duct, sheathing, and
permitted to use the value of f~ for the element that
results in the most critical value of Mn. prestressing reinforcement, and the value of f se shall be
at least 0, 003Ep- For grouted, post-tensioned tendons, it
shall be permitted to assume Apd equals Apt·

422.4.2.4 Tie reinforcement for lateral support of 422.5.1.8 Effect of axial tension due to creep and
.r longitudinal reinforcement in compression members shall shrinkage in restrained members shall be considered in
satisfy Sections 410.7.6.2 and 425.7.2. calculating Vc'
422.4.2.5 Spiral reinforcement for lateral support of 422.5.1.9 Effect of inclined flexural compression in
longitudinal reinforcement in compression members shall variable depth members shall be permitted to be
satisfy Sections 410.7.6.3 and 425.7.3. considered in calculating V c-
422.4.3 Maximum Axial Tensile Strength 422.5.2 Geometric Assumptions
422.4.3.1 Nominal axial tensile strength of a non- 422.5.2.1 For calculation of Vc and Vs in prestressed
prestressed, composite, or prestressed member, P nt » shall members, d shall be taken as the distance from the
not be taken greater than P nt.max , calculated by: extreme compression fiber to the centroid of prestressed
and any non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcement but
need not be taken less than O.Sh.
(422.4.3.1)
422.5.2.2 For calculation of V c and V s in solid, circular
sections, d shall be permitted to be taken as 0.8 times the
where ir;+ IIIp) shall not exceed I py, and Apt is zero diameter and bw shall be permitted to be taken as the
for non-prestressed members. diameter.
422.5 One-way Shear Strength 422.5.3 Limiting Material Strengths
422.5.1 General 422.5.3.1 The value of fTc used to calculate V c, V ci»

and Vcw for one-way shear shall not exceed 8.3MPa,
422.5.1.1 Nominal one-way shear strength at a section, unless allowed in Section 422.5.3.2.
V n' shall be calculated by:
(422.5.1.1)
422.5.3.2 Values of fTc greater than 8.3MPa shall be
permitted in calculating Vc, Vci, and Vcw for reinforced or
prestressed concrete beams and concrete joist construction
422.5.1.2 Cross-sectional dimensions shall be selected to having minimum web reinforcement in accordance with
satisfy Eq. 422.5.1.2. Section 409.6.3.3 or 409.6.4.2.
(422.5.1.2) 422.5.3.3 The values of Iy and Iyt used to calculate Vs

shall not exceed the limits in Section 420.2.2.4.
422.5.1.3 For non-prestressed members, V c shall be 422.5.4 Composite Concrete Members

calculated in accordance with Sections 422.5.5, 422.5.6,
or 422.5.7. 422.5.4.1 This section shall apply to members
constructed in separate placements but connected so that
422.5.1.4 For prestressed members, Vc, Vci, and Vcw all elements resist loads as a unit.
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 422.5.8 or
422.5.9. 422.5.4.2 For calculation of V n for composite members,
no distinction shall be made between shored and unshored
422.5.1.5 For calculation of Vc> Vci, and Vcw, Ashall be members.
in accordance with Section 419.2.4.
422.5.4.3 For calculation of V n for composite members
422.5.1.6 V s shall be calculated in accordance with where the specified concrete compressive strength, unit
Section 422.5.10. weight, or other properties of different elements vary,
properties of the individual elements shall be used in
422.5.1. 7 Effect of any openings in members shall be design. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use the
considered in calculating V n- properties of the element that results in the most critical
value ofVn.

CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete 4~145
422.5.4.4 If an entire composite member is assumed to Table 422.5.6.1

resist vertical shear, it shall be permitted to calculate Ve Detailed Method for Calculating Ve for
assuming a monolithically cast member of the same cross- Non-Prestressed Members with Axial Compression
sectional shape.
Vc
422.5.4.5 If an entire composite member is assumed to
resist vertical shear, it shall be permitted to calculate V s (0.16ilJ!c' + 17pw M"_~:4h;d)bwd [IJ (a)
assuming a monolithically cast member of the same cross- Equation not applicable if
Lesser
sectional shape if shear reinforcement is fully anchored of (a),
into the interconnected elements in accordance with (b), Mu-Nu
(4h-8-- d) :::;0
(b)
Section 425.7. and
(c):
422.5.5 Vc for Non-Prestressed Members without O.29N"
0.29Agz bwd 1+--
Axial Force All
'\j
III M u occurs simultaneously With V u at the section considered
422.5.5.1 For non-prestressed members without axial
force, Ve shall be calculated by: 422.5.7 Vc for Non-Prestressed Members with
Significant Axial Tension
(422.5.5.1)
422.5.7.1 For non-prestressed members with significant
unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance axial tension, V c shall be calculated by:
with Table 422.5.5.1.
Table 422.5.5.1
Vc = 0.17 (1 + 3.~~JAmbwd (422.5.7.1)
Detailed Method for Calculating Ve where N u is negative for tension, and Ve shall not be less
Vc than zero.
[If
d
Least of (gz
0.16..1 Ie + 17PwMVu ) bwd (a)
(a), (b),
422.5.8 V c for Prestressed Members
and (0. 16Agz + 17Pw) bwd (b)
(c): 422.5.8.1 This section shall apply to the calculation of
0.29AfiZ bwd (c)
tu M u occurs V c for post-tensioned and pretensioned members in
simultaneously with Vu at the section
regions where the effective force in the prestressed
considered
reinforcement is' fully transferred to the concrete. For
regions of pretensioned members where the effective
422.5.6 Ve for Non-Prestressed Members with Axial
force in the prestressed reinforcement is not fully
Compression
transferred to the concrete, Section 422.5.9 shall govern
the calculation of V c-
422.5.6.1 For non-prestressed members with axial
compression, Ve shall be calculated by;
422.5.8.2 For prestressed flexural members with
Apsfse 2: 0.4(Apsfpu + Asfy), Vc shall be calculated in
v, = 0.17 (1 + 1:~JAmbwd (422.5.6.1)
accordance with Table 422.5.8.2, but need not be less
than the value calculated by Eq. 422.5.5.1. Alternatively,
it shall be permitted to calculate Vein accordance with
Section 422.5.8.3.
unless a more detailed calculation is made in accordance
with Table 422.5.6.1, where Nu is positive for Table 422.5.8.2
compression. AMrtlximate Method for Galcidating V c
Vc
[.IJ
Least (' gz
of (a), 0.05..1 Ie + 4.8 Vu_dp_
)
M" bwd (a)
(b),
and
( 0.05Agz + 4.8) bwd (b)
(c): o..42fi..,fI!.b,'{__d (c)
[I] Mu occurs simultaneously with Vu at the section considered

422.5.8.3 For prestressed members, Ve shall be 422.5.9 Ve for Pretensioned Members in Regions of
permitted to be the lesser of Vei calculated in accordance Reduced Prestress Force
.' with Section
with Section
422.5.8.3.1 and Vew calculated in accordance
422.5.8.3.2 or 422.5.8.3.3. 422.5.9.1 When calculating Ve, the transfer length of
prestressed reinforcement f tr» shall be assumed to be
422.5.8.3.1 The flexure-shear strength, Vei, shall be the 50db for strand and 100db for wire.
greater of (a) and (b):
422.5.9.2 If bonding of strands extends to the end of the
member, the effective prestress force shall be assumed to
a, vary linearly from zero at the end of the prestressed
reinforcement to a maximum at a distance f tr from the
(422.5.8.3.la) end of the prestressed reinforcement.
(422.5.8.3.lb) 422.5.9.3 At locations corresponding to a reduced

effective prestress force in Section 422.5.9.2, Ve shall be
where dp need not be taken less than O. 80h, the values calculated in accordance with (a) through (c):
of Mmax and Vi shall be calculated from the load
combinations causing maximum factored moment to a. The reduced effective prestress force shall be used to
occur at section considered, and Mere shall be calculated determine the applicability of Section 422.5.8.2;
by:
b. The reduced effective prestress force shall be used to
Mere = (;) (0, 5).ffi+fpe - fd) (422.5.8.3.lc) calculate Vew in Section 422.5.8.3;
c. The value of Ve calculated using Section 422.5.8.2

422.5.8.3.2 The web-shear strength, Vew, shall be shall not exceed the value of V cw calculated using
calculated by: the reduced effective prestress force.
422.5.9.4 If bonding of strands does not extend to the

end of the member, the effective prestress force shall be
assumed to vary linearly from zero at the point where
bonding commences to a maximum at a distance f tr from
where dp need not be taken less than O.80h and Vp is the
the point.
vertical component of the effective prestress.
422.5.9.5 At locations corresponding to a reduced
422.5.8.3.3 As an alternative to Section 422.5.8.3.2, it effective prestress force according to Section 422:5.9.4,
shall be permitted to calculate Vew as the shear force Vc shall be calculated in accordance with (a) through (c):
corresponding to dead load plus live load that results in a
principal tensile stress of 0.33).ffi at location (a) or a. The reduced effective prestress force shall be used to
(b): determine the applicability of Section 422.5.8.2;
a. Where the centroidal axis of the prestressed cross b. The reduced effective prestress force shall be used to
section is in the web, the principal tensile stress shall calculate Ve in accordance with Section 422.5.8.3;
be calculated at the centroidal axis;
c. The value of Ve calculated using Section 422.5.8.2
b. Where the centroidal axis of the prestressed cross shall not exceed the value of V cw calculated using
section is in the flange, the principal tensile stress the reduced effective prestress force.
shall be calculated at the intersection of the flange
and the web. 422.5.10 One-way Shear Reinforcement
422.5.8.3.4 In composite members, the principal tensile 422.5.10.1 At each section where Vu > f/lVc, transverse
stress in Section 422.5.8.3.3 shall be calculated using the reinforcement shall be provided such that Eq. 422.5.10.1
cross section that resists live load. is satisfied.
Vu
V>--V
s - tP c
(422.5.10.1)

CH/\PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4-14"1
422.5.10.2 For one-way members reinforced with 422.5.10.5.5 For each rectangular tie, stirrup, hoop, or
transverse reinforcement, V s shall be calculated in crosstie, Av shall be the effective area of all bar legs or
accordance with Section 422.5.10.5. wires within spacing s.
422.5.10.3 For one-way members reinforced with bent- 422.5.10.5.6 For each circular tie or spiral, Av shall be
up longitudinal bars, V s shall be calculated in accordance two times the area of the bar or wire within spacing s.
with Section 422.5.10.6.
422.5.10.6 One-Way Shear Strength Provided by
422.5.10.4 If more than one type of shear reinforcement Bent-Up Longitudinal Bars
is provided to reinforce the same portion of a member, V s
shall be the sum of the Vs values for the various types of 422.5.10.6.1 The center three-fourths of the inclined
shear reinforcement. portion of bent-up longitudinal bars shall be permitted to
be used as shear reinforcement in non-prestressed
422.5.10.5 One-way Shear Strength Provided by members if the angle a between the bent-up bars and the
Transverse Reinforcement longitudinal axis of the member is at least 30 degrees.
422.5.10.5.1 In non-prestressed and prestressed members, 422.5.10.6.2 If shear reinforcement consists of a single
shear reinforcement satisfying (a), (b), or (c) shall be bar or a single group of parallel bars having an area Av,
permitted: all bent the same distance from the support, V s shall be
the lesser of (a) and (b):
a. Stirrups, ties, or hoops perpendicular to longitudinal
axis of member;
a. (422.5.10.6.2a)
b. Axial welded wire reinforcement with wires located
perpendicular to longitudinal axis of member; b. (422.5.10.6.2b)
c. Spiral reinforcement.
where a is the angle between bent-up reinforcement and
longitudinal axis of the member.
422.5.10.5.2 Inclined stirrups making an angle of at least
45 degrees with the longitudinal axis of the member and
422.5.10.6.3 If shear reinforcement consists of a series
crossing the plane of the potential shear crack shall be
of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-up bars
permitted to be used as shear reinforcement in non-
at different distances from the support, V s shall be
prestressed members.
calculated by Eq. 422.5.10.5.4.
422.5.10.5.3 V s for shear reinforcement in Section
422.6 Two-Way Shear Strength
422.5.10.5.1 shall be calculated by:
422.6.1 General
(422.5.10.3)
422.6.1.1 Provisions Sections 422.6.1 through 422.6.8
apply to the nominal shear strength of two-way members
where s is the spiral pitch or the longitudinal spacing of
with and without shear reinforcement. Where structural
the shear reinforcement and Av is given in Section
steel 1- or channel-shaped sections are used as shear
422.5.10.5.5 or 422.5.10.5.6. heads, two-way members shall be designed for shear in
422.5.10.5.4 Vs for shear reinforcement III Section
422.5.10.5.2 shall be calculated by: 422.6.1.2 Nominal shear strength for two-way members
without shear reinforcement shall be calculated by
Avf yt(sin a + cos a)d (422.5.10.4)
V = -_:;_------- (422.6.1.2)
s S
where a is the angle between the inclined stirrups and the 422.6.1.3 Nominal shear strength for two-way members
longitudinal axis of the member, s is measured parallel to with shear reinforcement other than shear heads shall be
the longitudinal reinforcement, and Av is given in Section calculated by
422.5.10.5.5.

and (b) shall be permitted to be defined assuming straight

(422.6.l.3) sides.
422.6.4.1.2 For a circular or regular polygon-shaped

422.6.1.4 Two-way shear shall be resisted by a section column, critical sections for two-way shear in accordance
with a depth d and an assumed critical perimeter bo as with Section 422.6.4.1 (a) and (b) shall be permitted to be
defined in Section 422.6.4. defined assuming a square column of equivalent area.
422.6.1.5 Vc for two-way shear shall be calculated in 422.6.4.2 For two-way members reinforced with headed
accordance with Section 422.6.5. For two-way members shear reinforcement or single- or multi-leg stirrups, a
with shear reinforcement, Vc shall not exceed the limits critical section with perimeter bo located d /2 beyond the
in Section 422.6.6.1. outermost peripheral line of shear reinforcement shall also
be considered. The shape of this critical section shall be a
422.6.1.6 For calculation of vc, .il shall be in accordance polygon selected to minimize boo
422.6.4.3 If an opening is located within a column strip
422.6.1.7 For two-way members reinforced with single- or closer than 10h from a concentrated load or reaction
or multiple-leg stirrups, Vs shall be calculated in area, a portion of bo enclosed by straight lines projecting
accordance with Section 422.6.7. from the centroid of the column, concentrated load or
reaction area and tangent to the boundaries of the opening
422.6.1.8 For two-way members reinforced with headed shall be considered ineffective.
shear stud reinforcement, Vs shall be calculated in
accordance with Section 422.6.8. 422.6.5 Two-way Shear Strength Provided by
Concrete
422.6.2 Effective Depth
422.6.5.1 For non-prestressed two-way members, Vc
422.6.2.1 For calculation of Vc and Vs for two-way shall be calculated in accordance with Section 422.6.5.2.
shear, d shall be the average of the effective depths in the For prestressed two-way members, Vc shall be calculated
two orthogonal directions. in accordance with (a) or (b):
422.6.2.2 For prestressed, two-way members, d need not a. Section 422.6.5.2

be taken less than O.Bh.
b. Section 422.6.5.5, if the conditions of Section
422.6.3 Limiting Material Strengths 422.6.5.4 are satisfied
422.6.3.1 The value of m used to calculate

way shear shall not exceed 8.3MPa.
Vc for two- 422.6.5.2 v c shall be calculated
Table 422.6.5.2.
in accordance with
422.6.3.2 The value of f yt used to calculate Vs shall not Table 422.6.5.2

exceed the limits in Section 420.2.2.4. Calculation of Vc for Two-way Shear
422.6.4 Critical Sections for Two-way Members Vc
422.6.4.1 For two-way shear, critical sections shall be 0.33AffJ (a)

located so that the perimeter bo is a minimum but need
not be closer than d /2 to (a) and (b): Least of (a), (b), O.17(l+~)AffJ (b)
and (c):
a. Edges or comers of columns, concentrated loads, or
reaction areas;
0.083 (2 + a;od)A .m (c)
b. Changes in slab or footing thickness, such as edges of
Note: P IS the ratio of long Side to short Side of the column, concentrated
capitals, drop panels, or shear caps. load, or reaction area and Us is given in Section 422.6.5.3.
422.6.4.1.1 For square or rectangular columns, 422.6.5.3 The value of as is 40 for interior columns, 30
concentrated loads, or reaction areas, critical sections for for edge columns, and 20 for comer columns.
two-way shear in accordance with Section 422.6.4.I(a)

CHJ\PTER 4 ~---
Structural Concrete
422.6.5.4 For prestressed, two-way members, it shall be Table 422.6.6.2

permitted to calculate Vc using Section 422.6.5.5 provided Maximum Vu for Two-Way Members with Shear
that (a) through (c) are satisfied: Reinforcement
-
a. Bonded reinforcement is provided in accordance with Maximum Vu at critical

Sections 408.6.2.3 and 408.7.5.3; Type of shear
sections defined in
reinforcement
Section 422.6.4.1
b. No portion of the column cross section is closer to a Stirrups cpO.SO fd (a)
discontinuous edge than four times the slab thickness -I
Headed shear stud
h; reinforcement
cpO.66ffZ (b)
c. Effective prestress, fpc, in each direction is not less 422.6.7 Two-way Shear Strength Provided by
than 0.9 MPa. Single- or Multiple-leg Stirrups
422.6.5.5 For prestressed, two-way members 422.6.7.1 Single- or multiple-leg stirrups fabricated from
conforming to Section 422.6.5.4, Vc shall be permitted to bars or wires shall be permitted to be used as shear
be the lesser of (a) and (b): reinforcement in slabs and footings satisfying (a) and (b):
_!7I Vp a. d is at least 150 mm;

a. Vc - 0.29), y f c + O. 3f pc +b d (422.6.5.5a)
o
b. Vc -
_ O.083Ayfc!71( 1.5 asd)
+T + O.3fpc + bv,d
b. d is at least 16db, where db is the diameter of the
stirrups.
o 0
(422.6.5 .5b)
422.6.7.2 For two-way members with stirrups, Vs shall
where as is given in Section 422.6.5.3, the value of fpc is be calculated by:
the average of fpc in the two directions and shall not
exceed 3.5 MPa, Vp is the vertical component of all (422.6.7.2)
effective prestress forces crossing the critical section, and
the value of m shall not exceed 5.8 MPa. where Av is the sum of the area of all legs of
reinforcement on one peripheral line that is geometrically
422.6.6 Maximum Shear for Two-way Members similar to the perimeter of the column section, and s is
with Shear Reinforcement the spacing of the peripheral lines of shear reinforcement
in the direction perpendicular to the column face.
422.6.6.1 For two-way members with shear
reinforcement, the value of Vc calculated at critical 422.6.8 Two-way Shear Strength Provided by
sections shall not exceed the limits in Table 422.6.6.1. Headed Shear Stud Reinforcement
Table 422.6.6.1 422.6.8.1 Headed shear stud reinforcement shall be

Maximum Vc for Two-Way Members with Shear permitted to be used as shear reinforcement in slabs and
Reinforcement footings if the placement and geometry of the headed
shear stud reinforcement satisfies Section 408.7.7.
Maximum veat Maximum veat
critical sections critical section 422.6.8.2 For two-way members with headed shear stud
Type of shear
defined in defined in reinforcement, Vs shall be calculated by:
reinforcement
Section Section
422.6.4.1 422.6.4.2
Stirrups O.1n lId (a) o.lnlfd (b) (422.6.8.2)
Headed shear
stud O.25i1.J1Z (c) O.17i1.J1Z (d)
reinforcement
where Av is the sum of the area of all shear studs on one
peripheral line that is geometrically similar to the
422.6.6.2 For two-way members with shear
perimeter of the column section, and s is the spacing of
reinforcement, effective depth shall be selected such that
the peripheral lines of headed shear stud reinforcement in
Vu calculated at critical sections does not exceed the
the direction perpendicular to the column face.
values in Table 422.6.6.2

4-150 CH.APTER 4 - Structural Concrete
422.6.8.3 If headed shear stud reinforcement is provided, b. Change in M u in column strip over the length Iv
;tv / s shal~.satisfy: stirrups;
A b c. Mp as given in Section 422.6.9.6.

~~0.17.f1'c-o (422.6.8.3)
s fyt
422.6.9.8 The critical section for shear shall be
perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross each
422.6.9 Design Provisions for Two-way Members shearhead arm at a distance (3/4)[lv - (ct/2)]from the
with Shearheads. column face. This critical section shall be located so that
bo is a minimum, but need not be closer than d/2 to the
422.6.9.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes edges of the supporting column.
fabricated with a full penetration weld into identical arms
at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be interrupted 422.6.9.9 If an opening is located within a column strip
within the column section. or closer than 10h from a column in slabs with
shearheads, the ineffective portion of bo shall be one-half
422.6.9.2 A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 times of that given in Section 422.6.4.3.
the web thickness of the steel shape.
422.6.9.10 Factored shear stress due to vertical loads
422.6.9.3 The ends of each shearhead arm shall be shall not be greater than O. 33f/J.f1'con the critical section
permitted to be cut at angles of at least 30 degrees with given in Section 422.6.9.8 and shall not be greater than
the horizontal if the plastic flexural strength, M p' of the O. 58f/J.f1'c on the critical section closest to the column
remaining tapered section is adequate to resist the shear given in Section 422.6.4.1(a).
force attributed to that arm of the shearhead.
422.6.9.11 Where transfer of moment is considered, the
422.6.9.4 Compression flanges of steel shapes shall be shearhead shall have adequate anchorage to transmit Mp
within O. 3d of the compression surface of the slab. to the column.
422.6.9.5 The ratio av between the flexural stiffness of 422.6.9.12 Where transfer of moment is considered, the
each shearhead arm and that of the surrounding composite sum of factored shear stresses due to vertical load acting
cracked slab section of width (cz + d) shall be at least on the critical section given in Section 422.6.9.8 and the
0.15. shear stresses resulting from factored moment transferred
by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical
422.6.9.6 For each arm of the shearhead, Mp shall section closest to' the column given in Section
satisfy: 422.6.4.I(a) shall not exceed 0.33f/Jl.f1'c.
1
Mp >~[h
- 24m v
+a v (I v
_ C )]
2
(422.6.9.6) 422.7 Torsional Strength
422.7.1 General
where f/J corresponds to tension-controlled members, n is
the number of shearhead arms, and Iv is the minimum 422.7.1.1 This section shall apply to members if
length of each shearhead arm required to satisfy Sections T u ~ f/JTth » where f/J is given in Section 421 and
422.6.9.8 and 422.6.9.10. threshold torsion, Tth' is given in Section 422.7.4. If
T u < f/JTth » it shall be permitted to neglect torsional
422.6.9.7 Nominal flexural strength contributed to each effects.
slab column strip by a shearhead, Mv, shall satisfy:
422.7.1.2 Nominal torsional strength shall be calculated
M f/JavV u ( I
<-- -_ C1) (422.6.9.7) in accordance with Section 422.7.6.
v - 2n v 2
422.7.1.3 For calculation of Tthand Tcr, l shall be in
where f/J corresponds to tension-controlled members. accordance with Section 419.2.4.
However, Mv shall not exceed the least of (a) through (c):
422.7.2 Limiting Material Strengths
a, 30 percent of Mu in each slab column strip;
422.7.2.1 The value of used to calculate Tth and Tcr
shall not exceed 8.3 MPa.

CHA.PTER 4 -- Structural Concreto
422.7.2.2 The values of f y and f yt for longitudinal and 422.7.5 Cracking Torsion
transverse torsional reinforcement shall not exceed the
limitsin Section 420.2.2.4. 422.7.5.1 Cracking torsion, Ter shall be calculated in
accordance with Table 422.7.5.1 for solid and hollow
422.7.3 Factored Design Torsion cross sections, where N u is positive for compression and
negative for tension.
422.7.3.1 If T u ;:::cpTer and T u is required to maintain
equilibrium, the member shall be designed to resist T u- Table 422.7.5.1 Cracking Torsion
422.7.3.2 In a statically indeterminate structure where I--Type of member

T u ;::: cpT cr and a reduction of T u in a member can occur Non-prestressed 0.33,1 f1j (A~1'\ (a)
due to redistribution of internal forces after torsional member \Pcp)
cracking, T u to cpTel·, where the cracking torsion, Ter, is
calculated in accordance with Section 422.7.5.
Prestressed
member
0.33,1 f1j (A~p)
PcP
):1 + 0.33,1f,,,m (b)
Non-prestressed
422.7.3.3 If T u is redistributed in accordance with
Section 422.7.3.2, the factored moments and shears used
member
ubjected to axial
0.33,1 .m (A~p)
Pcp
1+
N
0.33Ag,1
u
f1j
(c)
for design of the adjoining members shall be in force
equilibrium with the reduced torsion.
422.7.6 Torsional Strength
422.7.4 Threshold Torsion
422.7.6.1 For non-prestressed and prestressed members,
422.7.4.1 Threshold torsion, Tth, shall be calculated in Tn shall be the lesser of (a) and (b):
accordance with Table 422.7A.l(a) for solid cross
sections and Table 422.7 A.l (b) for hollow cross sections,
2AoAtfyt
where N u is positive for compression and negative for a Tn = cot s (422.7.6.1a)
tension. s
Table 422.7.4.1(a)
Threshold Torsion for Solid Cross Sections b Tn = 2AoAdy cotB (422.7.6.1b)
Ph
Type of member r;
where Ao shall be determined by analysis, B shall not be
Non-prestressed taken less than 30 degrees nor greater than 60 degrees, At
(a)
member is the area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion,
Prestressed
member
0.083,1 .m ( A~p )
Pcp
1+
{,,,
O.33,1.JlJ
(b)
Al is the area of longitudinal torsional reinforcement, and
Ph is the perimeter of the centerline of the outermost
Non-prestressed closed stirrup.
member Nu
0.083,1 f1j (A~p ) 1+ (c)
subjected to axial Pcp 0.33Ag,1 f1j 422.7.6.1.1 In Eq. 422.7.6.1a and 422.7.6.1b, it shall be
force permitted to take Ao equal to O.85Aoh'
Table 422.7.4.1(b) 422.7.6.1.2 In Eq. 422.7.6.1a and 422.7.6.1b, it shall be

Threshold Torsion for Hollow Cross Sections permitted to take B equal to (a) or (b):
Ty e of member T a. 45 degrees for non-prestressed members or members

Non-prestressed
(a) with Apsfse < O.4(Apsfpu + Asly);
member
Prestressed b. 37.5 degrees for prestressed members with Apsfse 2:
(b)
member
O. 4(Apsfpu + Asfy).
Non-prestressed
member
0.083,1 f1j (A~) (c) 422.7.7 Cross-Sectional Limits
SUbjected to axial Pcp .
force
422.7.7.1 Cross-sectional dimensions shall be selected
such that (a) or (b) is satisfied:
Nationsl Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition. 20'1(.1

a. For solid sections (422.8.3.1)
(_u)
V 2
+ (T)2uP~ s cfJ (_cV + O. 66m)
for each applicable factored load combination.
bwd 1.7AOh bwd 422.8.3.2 Nominal bearing strength, Bn, shall be

(422.7.7.la) calculated in accordance with Table 422.8.3.2, where A1
is the loaded area and A2 is the area of the lower base of
b. For hollow sections the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the support and having its upper
base equal to the loaded area. The sides of the pyramid,
V
( bwd
u) +
(T uPh )
1. 7A~h s cfJ
( Vc
bwd
m)
+ O.66" f~
cone, or tapered wedge shall be sloped 1 vertical to 2
horizontal.
(422.7.7.1 b)
Table 422.8.3.2
Nominal Bearing Strength
422.7.7.1.1 For prestressed members, the value of d
used in Section 422.7.7.1 need not be taken less than Geometry of
O.8h. Bn
bearing area
422.7.7.1.2 For hollow sections where the wall thickness Supporting

Lesser JA;JA; (0.85f;A1) (a)
of
varies around the perimeter, Eq. 422.7.7.lb shall be surface is wider
(a)
evaluated at the location where the term on all sides than 2(0.85f;A1) (b)
and
the loaded area
(b)
Other cases 0.85fdAl (c)
422.9 Shear Friction

is a maximum.
422.9.1 General
422.7.7.2 For hollow sections where the wall thickness
is less than Aoh/Ph, the term (T uPh/ AOh2) in Eq, 422.9.1.1 This section shall apply where it is appropriate
422.7.7.lb shall be taken as (Tu/l. 7 Aoht), where t is to consider shear transfer across any given plane, such as
the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at the an existing or potential crack, an interface between
location where the stresses are being checked. dissimilar materials, or an interface between two
concretes cast at different times.
422.8 Bearing
422.9.1.2 The required area of shear-friction
422.8.1 General reinforcement across the assumed shear plane, Avt, shall
be calculated in accordance with Section 422.9.4.
422.8.1.1 This section shall apply to the calculation of Alternatively, it shall be permitted to use shear transfer
bearing strength of concrete members. design methods that result in prediction of strength in
substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
422.8.1.2 Bearing strength provisions in this section
shall not apply to post-tensioned anchorage zones or strut- 422.9.1.3 The value of f y used to calculate V n for shear
and-tie models. friction shall not exceed the limit in Section 420.2.2.4.
422.8.2 Required Strength 422.9.1.4 Surface preparation of the shear plane assumed
for design shall be specified in the construction
422.8.2.1 Factored compressive force transferred documents.
through bearing shall be calculated in accordance with the
factored load combinations defined in Section 405 and 422.9.2 Required Strength
analysis procedures defined in Section 406.
422.9.2.1 Factored forces across the assumed shear plane
422.8.3 Design Strength shall be calculated in accordance with the factored load
combinations defined in Section 405 and analysis
422.8.3.1 Design bearing strength shall satisfy: procedures defined in Section 406.

CHAPTER 4 .- Struc tural Concrete 4·'153
422.9.3 Design Strength wherea is the angle between shea r-friction reinforcement
and assumed shear plane and J1 is the coefficient of
422.9.3.1 Design shear strength across the assumed friction in accordance with Table 422.9.4.2.
shear plane shall satisfy:
CPVn ;::: Vu (422.9.3.1)
for each applicable factored load combination. 422.9.4.4 The value of V n acr oss the assumed shear
plane shall not exceed the lim its in Table 422.9.4.4.
422.9.4 Nominal Shear Strength Where concretes of different str engths are cast against
each other, the lesser value of f ~ shall be used in Table
422.9.4.1 Value of V n across the assumed shear plane 422.9.4.4.
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 422.9.4.2 Table 422.9 .4.4
or 422.9.4.3. Vn shall not exceed the value calculated in Maximum V n Across the As sumed Shear Plane
Condition Maximum V"
422.9.4.2 If shear-friction reinforcement is perpendicular Normal weight
to the shear plane, nominal shear strength across the concrete placed O.2fdAc (a)
assumed shear plane shall be calculated by: monolithically or
Least of
placed against
(a),
(422.9.4.2) hardened concrete (3.3 + O.08fd)Ac (b)
(b), and
(c)
where AVf is the area of reinforcement crossing the (c)
llAc
assumed shear plane to resist shear and J1 is the
coefficient of friction in accordance with Table 422.9.4.2. Lesser O.2fJAc (d)
Other cases of (d)
and e 5.5Ac (e)
Table 422.9.4.2 Coefficients of Friction'!'
Coefficient of 422.9.4.5 Permanent net compr ession across the shear
Contact surface condition
friction Jl. plane shall be permitted to be ad ded to Avr! Y' the force
Concrete laced monolithically 1.4A. a) in the shear-friction reinforceme nt, to calculate required
Concrete placed against Apf·
hardened concrete intentionally
LOA. (b)
roughened to a full amplitude of 422.9.4.6 Area of reinforcemen t required to resist a net
a roximatel 6 mm. factored tension across an assum ed shear plane shall be
Concrete placed against added to the area of reinforcem ent required for shear
hardened concrete not o.sa (c) friction crossing the assumed she ar plane.
intentionall rou hened
Concrete placed against as- 422.9.5 Detailing for Shear-f riction Reinforcement
rolled structural steel that is
clean, free of paint, and with 422.9.5.1 Reinforcement crossi ng the shear plane to
shear transferred across the 0.7il. (d) satisfy Section 422.9.4 shall be an chored to develop f y on
contact surface by headed studs
both sides of the shear plane.
or by welded deformed bars or
wires.
IliA= 1.0 for normal-weight concrete; A = 0.75 for all lightweight
concrete. Otherwise, A is calculated based on volumetric proportions
of lightweight and normal-weight aggregate as given in Section
419.2.4.1, but shall not exceed 0.85.
422.9.4.3 If shear-friction reinforcement is inclined to

the shear plane and the shear force induces tension in the
shear-friction reinforcement, nominal shear strength
across the assumed shear plane shall be calculated by:
(422.9.4.3)

4-154 CHl\PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
SECTION 423 423.3 Design Strength
STRUT -AND-TIE MODELS 423.3.1 For each applicable factored load combination,
design strength of each strut, tie, and nodal zone in a
423.1 Scope strut-and-tie model shall satisfy cp5n ~ U, including (a)
through (c):
423.1.1 This section shall apply to the design of
structural concrete members, or regions of members, a.
where load or geometric discontinuities cause a nonlinear
distribution of longitudinal strains within the cross
section. b. Ties cpF nt ~ F ut
423.1.2 Any structural concrete member, or

discontinuity region in a member, shall be permitted to be
c. Nodal zones cpF nn ~ F us
designed by modeling the member or region as an
idealized truss. This truss shall be designed in accordance
with the strut-and-tie method in Section 423.
423.3.2 f/J shall be in accordance with Section 421.2
423.2 General
423.4 Strength of Struts
423.2.1 Strut-and-tie models shall consist of struts and
423.4.1 The nominal compressive strength of a strut,
ties connected at nodes to form an idealized truss.
F ns' shall be calculated by (a) or (b):
423.2.2 Geometry of the idealized truss shall be

a. Strut without longitudinal reinforcement
consistent with the dimensions of the struts, ties, nodal
zones, bearing areas, and supports.
Fns = leeAes (423.4.1a)
423.2.3 Strut-and-tie models shall be capable of
transferring all factored loads to supports or adjacent B- b. Strut with longitudinal reinforcement
regions.
(423.4.1b)
423.2.4 The internal forces in strut-and-tie models
shall be In equilibrium with the applied loads and where F ns shall be. evaluated at each end of the strut and
reactions. taken as the lesser value, Aes is the cross-sectional area at
the end of the strut under consideration, lee is given in
423.2.5 Ties shall be permitted to cross struts and other Section 423.4.3, A~ is the area of compression
ties. reinforcement along the length of the strut, and I~ is the
stress in the compression reinforcement at the nominal
423.2.6 Struts shall intersect or overlap only at nodes. axial strength of the strut. It shall be permitted to take I~
equal to Iy for Grade 280 or Grade 420 reinforcement.
423.2.7 The angle between the axes of any strut and
any tie entering a single node shall be at least 25 degrees. 423.4.2 Effective compressive strength of concrete in a
strut, lee' shall be calculated in accordance with Section
423.2.8 Deep beams designed using strut-and-tie 423.4.3 or 423.4.4.
models shall satisfy Sections 409.9.2.1, 409.9.3.l, and
409.9.4. 423.4.3 Effective compressive strength of concrete in a
strut, lee, shall be calculated by:
423.2.9 Brackets and corbels with shear span-to-depth
ratio uv/ d < 2.0 designed using strut-and-tie models
shall satisfy Sections 416.5.2, 416.5.6, and Eq. 423.2.9.
lee = O. 85Psf~ (423.4.3)
(423.2.9) where Ps, in accordance with Table 423.4.3, accounts for

the effect of cracking and crack-control reinforcement on
the effective compressive strength of the concrete.

Table 423.4.3 Strut Coefficient Ps a2 to the axis of the strut, or in one direction at an angle
al to the axis of the strut. Where the reinforcement is
Strut geometry and Reinforcement placed in only one direction, al shall be at least 40
location crossing a Ps degrees.
strut
Struts with uniform 423.6 Strut Reinforcement Detailing
cross-sectional area NA 1.0 (a)
along length 423.6.1 Compression reinforcement in struts shall be
Struts located in a region Satisfying parallel to the axis of the strut and enclosed along the
0.75 (b)
of a member where the Section 423.5 length of the strut by closed ties in accordance with
width of the compressed Section 423.6.3 or by spirals in accordance with Section
concrete at mid-length 423.6.4.
Not Satisfying
ofthe strut can spread 0.60..1 (c)
Section 423.5
laterally (bottle-shaped 423.6.2 Compression reinforcement in struts shall be
struts) anchored to develop f~ at the face of the nodal zone,
Struts located in tension where f~ is calculated in accordance with Section
members or the tension NA 0.40 (d) 423.4.1.
zones of members
All other cases NA 0.60..1 (e) 423.6.3 Closed ties enclosing compression
reinforcement in struts shall satisfy Section 425.7.2 and
423.4.4 If confining reinforcement is provided along this section.
the length of a strut and its effect is documented by tests
and analyses, it shall be permitted to use an increased 423.6.3.1 Spacing of closed ties, s, along the length of
value of fee when calculating Fns. the strut shall not exceed the smallest of (a) through (c):
423.5 Reinforcement Crossing Bottle-Shaped Struts a. Smallest dimension of cross section of strut;
423.5.1 For bottle-shaped struts designed using b. 48db of bar or wire used for closed tie
Ps = O. 75,reinforcement to resist transverse tension reinforcement;
resulting from spreading of the compressive force in the
strut shall cross the strut axis. It shall be permitted to c. 16db of compression reinforcement.
determine the transverse tension by assuming that the
compressive force in a bottle-shaped strut spreads at a 423.6.3.2 The .first closed tie shall be located not more
slope of 2 parallel to 1 perpendicular to the axis of the than O. 5s from the face of the nodal zone at each end of a
strut. strut.
423.5.2 Reinforcement required in Section 423.5.l 423.6.3.3 Closed ties shall be arranged such that every
shall be developed beyond the extents of the strut in corner and alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral
accordance with Section 425.4. support provided by crossties or the corner of a tie with an
included angle of not more than 135 degrees and no
423.5.3 Distributed reinforcement calculated in longitudinal bar shall be farther than 150 mm clear on
accordance with Eq. 423.5.3 and crossing the strut axis each side along the tie from such a laterally supported bar.
shall be deemed to satisfy Section 423.5.1, if
t: :::;40MPa. 423.6.4 Spirals enclosing compression reinforcement
in struts shall satisfy Section 425.7.3.
As;
L -b . sin a; 2: 0.003
ss,
(423.5.3)
423.7 Strength of Ties
where As; is the total area of distributed reinforcement at 423.7.1 Tie reinforcement shall be non-prestressed or
spacing s, in the i-th direction of reinforcement crossing a prestressed.
strut at an angle a; to the axis of a strut, and bs is the
width of the strut. 423.7.2 The nominal tensile strength ofa tie, Fnt, shall
be calculated by:
423.5.3.1 Distributed reinforcement required in Section
423.5.3 shall be placed orthogonally at angles al and (423.7.2)

4~156 CHAPTER. 4 ~-Structural Concrete
where (f se + !::"f p) shall not exceed f py, and Atp is zero 423.9.3 If confining reinforcement is provided within
for mm-prestres~ed members. the nodal zone and its effect is documented by tests and
analyses, it shall be permitted to use an increased value of
423.7.3 In Eq. 423.7.2, it shall be permitted to take fee when calculating F nn-
S] p equal to 420 MPa for bonded prestressed
reinforcement and 70 MPa for unbonded prestressed 423.9.4 The area of each face of a nodal zone, Anz,
reinforcement. Higher values of !::"f p shall be permitted if shall be taken as the smaller of (a) and (b):
justified by analysis.
a. Area of the face of the nodal zone perpendicular to
the line of action of F us;
423.8 Tie Reinforcement Detailing
b. Area of a section through the nodal zone
423.8.1 The centroidal axis of the tie reinforcement
perpendicular to the line of action of the resultant
shall coincide with the axis of the tie assumed in the strut-
force on the section.
and-tie model.
423.9.5 In a three-dimensional strut-and-tie model, the

423.8.2 Tie reinforcement shall be anchored by
area of each face of a nodal zone shall be at least that
mechanical devices, post-tensioning anchorage devices,
given in Section 423.9.4, and the shape of each face of the
standard hooks, or straight bar development in accordance
nodal zone shall be similar to the shape of the projection
of the end of the strut onto the corresponding face of the
nodal zone.
423.8.3 Tie reinforcement shall be developed 111
a. The difference between the tie force on one side of a

node and the tie force on the other side shall be
developed within the nodal zone.
b. At nodal zones anchoring one or more ties, the tie

force in each direction shall be developed at the point
where the centroid of the reinforcement in the tie
leaves the extended nodal zone.
423.9 Strength of Nodal Zones
423.9.1 The nominal compressive strength of a nodal

zone, Fnn, shall be calculated by:
(423.9.1)
where fee is defined in Section 423.9.2 or 423.9.3 and

Anz is given in Section 423.9.4 or423.9.5.
423.9.2 The effective compressive strength of concrete

at a face of a nodal zone, fee' shall be calculated by:
fee = O. 85Pnf~ (423.9.2)
where Pn shall be in accordance with Table 423.9.2.
Table 423.9.2 Nodal Zone Coefficient Pn

Configuration of nodal zone On
Nodal zone bounded by struts, bearing areas, (a)
1.0
or both
Nodal zone anchoring one tie 0.80 (b)
Nodal zone anchoring two or more ties 0.60 (c)

CHAPTER ~ -- Structut"~41 Concrete 4-157
SECTION 424 deformations that adversely affect strength or

serviceability of a structure.
SERVICEABILITY
REQUIREMENTS 424.2.2 Deflections calculated in accordance with
Sections 424.2.3 through 424.2.5 shall not exceed the
424.1 Scope limits in Table 424.2.2.
424.1.1 This section shall apply to member design for 424.2.3 Calculation of Immediate Deflections
minimum serviceability, including (a) through (d):
424.2.3.1 Immediate deflections shall be calculated
a. Section 424.2 Deflections due to service-level gravity using methods or formulas for elastic deflections,
loads; considering effects of cracking and reinforcement on
member stiffness.
b. Section 424.3 Distribution of flexural reinforcement
in one-way slabs and beams to control cracking; 424.2.3.2 Effect of variation of cross-sectional
properties, such as haunches, shall be considered when
c. Section 424.4 Shrinkage and temperature calculating deflections.
reinforcement;
424.2.3.3 Deflections in two-way slab systems shall be
d. Section 424.5 Permissi ble stresses in prestressed calculated taking into account size and shape of the panel,
flexural members. conditions of support, and nature of restraints at the panel
edges.
424.2 Deflections Due to Service-Level Gravity
Loads 424.2.3.4 Modulus of elasticity, Ec, shall be permitted to
be calculated in accordance with Section 419.2.2.
424.2.1 Members subjected to flexure shall be
designed with adequate stiffness to limit deflections or
Table 424.2.2 Maximum Permissible Calculated Deflections

Member Condition Deflection to be considered Deflection limitation
Not supporting or attached to non- Immediate deflection due to
Flat roofs .f/180[1]
structural elements likely to be maximum of L; and R
Floors damaged by large deflections Immediate deflectiondue to L 'f/360
likely to be
That part of the total deflection
damaged by
occurring after attachment of non- f/480[3]
Supporting or large
structural elements, which is the
attached to non- deflections
Roof or floors sum of the time-dependent
structural not likely to be
deflection due to all sustained loads
elements damaged by
and the immediate deflection due to f/240[4]
large
any additional live 10adY]
deflections
[I] Limit not intended to safeguard against ponding. Ponding shall be checked by calculations of deflection, including added deflections due to ponded
water, and considering time-dependent effects of sustained loads, camber, construction tolerances, and reliability of provisions for drainage.
[2] Time-dependent deflection shall be calculated in accordance with Section 424.2.4, but shall be permitted to be reduced by amount of deflection
calculated to occur before attachment of non-structural elements. This amount shall be calculated on basis of accepted engineering data relating to time-
deflection characteristics of members similar to those being considered. .
[3] Limit shall be permitted to be exceeded if measures are taken to prevent damage to supported or attached elements.
[4] Limit shall not exceed tolerance provided for nonstructural elements
424.2.3,5 For non-prestressed members, effective

moment of inertia, Ie' shall be calculated by Eq.
424.2.3.5a unless obtained by a more comprehensive (424.2.3.5a)
analysis, but Ie shall not be greater than I g-
where M cr is calculated by

4-158 CHf\.PTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
Table 424.2.4.1.3
Time-Dependent Factor for Sustained Loads
(424.2.3 .5b)
Sustained load duration,
Time-dependent factor {'
424.2.3.6 For continuous one-way slabs and beams, Ie months
shall be permitted to be taken as the average of values 3 1.0
obtained from Eq. 424.2.3.5a for the critical positive and 6 1.2
negative moment sections. 12 \.4
60 or more 2.0
424.2.3.7 For prismatic one-way slabs and beams, t,
shall be permitted to be taken as the value obtained from 424.2.4.2 Prestressed Members
Eq. 424.2.3.5a at mid-span for simple and continuous
spans, and at the support for cantilevers. 424.2.4.2.1 Additional time-dependent deflection of
prestressed concrete members shall be calculated
424.2.3.8 For prestressed Class U slabs and beams as considering stresses in concrete and reinforcement under
defined in Section 424.5.2, it shall be permitted to sustained load, and the effects of creep and shrinkage of
calculate deflections based on I s concrete and relaxation of prestressed reinforcement.
424.2.3.9 For prestressed Class T and Class C slabs and 424.2.5 Calculation of Deflections of Composite
beams as defined in Section 424.5.2, deflection Concrete Construction
calculations shall be based on a cracked transformed
section analysis. It shall be permitted to base deflection 424.2.5.1 If composite concrete flexural members are
calculations on a bilinear moment-deflection relationship shored during construction so that, after removal of
or Ie in accordance with Eq. 424.2.3.5a, where Mer is temporary supports, the dead load is resisted by the full
calculated as as: composite section, it shall be permitted to consider the
composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast
member for calculation of deflections.
M = elr + Ipe)/g (424.2.3.9)
cr Yt
424.2.5.2 If composite concrete flexural members are
not shored during construction, the magnitude and
duration of load before and after composite action
424.2.4 Calculation of Time-Dependent Deflections
becomes effective shall be considered in calculating time-
dependent deflections. . .
424.2.4.1 Non-Prestressed Members
424.2.5.3 Deflections resulting from differential
424.2.4.1.1 Unless obtained from a more comprehensive
shrinkage of precast and cast-in-place components, and of
analysis, additional time-dependent deflection resulting
axial creep effects in prestressed members, shall be
from creep and shrinkage of flexural members shall be
considered.
calculated as the product of the immediate deflection
caused by sustained load and the factor Aa.
424.3 Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement in
One-Way Slabs and Beams
A - ( (424.2.4.1.1 )
a -1 + SOp' 424.3.1 Bonded reinforcement shall be distributed to
control flexural cracking in tension zones of non-
prestressed and Class C prestressed slabs and beams
424.2.4.1.2 In Eq. 424.2.4.1.1, pi shall be calculated at reinforced for flexure in one direction only. .
mid-span for simple and continuous spans, and at the
support for cantilevers. 424.3.2 Spacing of bonded reinforcement closest to the
tension face shall not exceed the limits in Table 424.3.2,
424.2.4.1.3 In Eq. 424.2.4.1.1, values of the time where cc is the least distance from surface of deformed or
dependent factor for sustained loads, (, shall be in prestressed reinforcement to the tension face. Calculated
accordance with Table 424.2.4.1.3. stress in deformed reinforcement, Is, and calculated
change in stress in bonded prestressed reinforcement,
IIIps» shall be in accordance with Sections 424.3.2.1 and
424.3.2.2, respectively.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, inc. (,t:\SEP)

CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete 4·159
Table 424.3.2 424.3.5 The spacing of bonded flexural reinforcement

Maximum Spacing of Bonded in non-prestressed and Class C prestressed one-way slabs
Reinforcement in Non-Prestressed and Class C and beams subject to fatigue, designed to be watertight, or
Prestressed One-Way Slabs and Beams exposed to corrosive environments, shall be selected
based on investigations and precautions specific to those
, Reinforcement conditions and shall not exceed the limits of Section
Maximum spacing s 424.3.2.
!ype
I,
Deformed bars Lesser

380 C7: - z.se,
8O
)
424.4 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
or wires of: 424.4.1 Reinforcement to resist shrinkage and

temperature stresses shall be provided in one-way slabs in
300 7:
(280)
the direction perpendicular to the flexural reinforcement
in accordance with Section 424.4.3 or 424.4.4.
Bonded
Lesser
(~) [380 G;p~)- 2.SCc] 424.4.2 If shrinkage and temperature movements are
restrained, the effects of T shall be considered in
prestressed
of: accordance with Section 405.3.6.
reinforcement
(~) [300G;p~)] 424.4.3 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement
I Combined
deformed bars
or wires and Lesser
(~) [380 G;p~)- 2.SCc]
424.4.3.1 Deformed reinforcement to resist shrinkage
and temperature stresses shall conform to Table
420.2.2.4(a) and shall be in accordance with Sections
bonded of: 424.4.3.2 through 424.4.3.5.
prestressed
reinforcement
(~) [380 G;p~)] 424.4.3.2 The ratio of deformed shrinkage and
temperature reinforcement area to gross concrete area
424.3.2.1 Stress Is in deformed reinforcement closest to shall satisfy the limits in Table 424.4.3.2.
the tension face at service loads shall be calculated based
on the unfactored moment, or it shall be permitted to take Table 424.4.3.2
Is as (2/3)ly· Minimum Ratios of Deformed Shrinkage and
Temperature Reinforcement Area to' Gross Concrete
. Area
424.3.2.2 Change in stress III ps in bonded prestressed
reinforcement at service loads shall be equal to the
calculated stress based on a cracked section analysis Reinforcement r; Minimum reinforcement
type MPa ratio
minus the decompression stress Idc' It shall be permitted
to take Ide equal to the effective stress in the prestressed Deformed bars <420 0.0020
reinforcement I se- The value of IIIps shall not exceed 0.0018 x 420
250 MPa. If III ps does not exceed 140 MPa, the spacing Deformed bars
Greater fy
or welded wire ~420
limits in Table 424.3.2 need not be satisfied. of:
reinforcement 0.0014
424.3.3 If there is only one bonded bar, pretensioned

strand, or bonded tendon nearest to the extreme tension 424.4.3.3 The spacing of deformed shrinkage and
face, the width of the extreme tension face shall not temperature reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of
exceed s determined in accordance with Table 424.3.2. 5h and 450 mm.
424.3.4 If flanges of T-beams are in tension, part of the 424.4.3.4 At all sections where required, deformed
bonded flexural tension reinforcement shall be distributed reinforcement used to resist shrinkage and temperature
over an effective flange width as defined in accordance stresses shall develop Iy in tension.
with Section 406.3.2, but not wider than In/tO. If the
effective flange width exceeds In/tO, additional bonded
longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided in the outer
portions of the flange.

Ij 160 CHf\PT FR 4 - Structural Cone! etc"
424.4.3.5 For one-way precast slabs and one-way Table 424.5.2.1

precast., prestressed wall panels, shrinkage and Classification of Prestressed
temperature reinforcement is not required in the direction Flexural Members Based on It
perpendicular to the flexural reinforcement if (a) through
(c) are satisfied. Assumed Behavior Class Limits of It
Uncracked U[i] t. :::;
0.62ffd
a. Precast members are not wider than 3.7 m; Transition between
uncracked and T 0.62f1J <ft:::;f1J
b. Precast members are not mechanically connected to cracked
cause restraint in the transverse direction;
Cracked C ft > ffd
III Prestressed two -way slabs shall be designed
1 as C'I1~~ U with
c. Reinforcement is not required to resist transverse
flexural stresses.
r,« O.SiTc
424.5.2.2 For Class U and T members, stresses at service

424.4.4 Prestressed Reinforcement
loads shall be permitted to be calculated using the
uncracked section.
424.4.4.1 Prestressed reinforcement to resist shrinkage
and temperature stresses shall conform to Table 420.3.2.2
424.5.2.3 For Class C members, stresses at service loads
and the effective prestress after losses shall provide an
shall be calculated using the cracked transformed section.
average compressive stress of at least 0.7 MPa on gross
concrete area.
424.5.3 Permissible Concrete Stresses at Transfer
of Prestress
424.5 Permissible Stresses in Prestressed Concrete
Flexural Members
424.5.3.1 Calculated extreme concrete fiber stress in
compression immediately after transfer of prestress, but
424.5.1 General
before time-dependent prestress losses, shall not exceed
the limits in Table 424.5.3.1.
424.5.1.1 Concrete stresses in prestressed flexural
members shall be limited in accordance with Section
Table 424.5.3.1
424.5.2 through 424.5.4 unless it is shown by test or
Concrete Compressive Stress Limits
analysis that performance will not be impaired.
Immediately After Transfer of Prestress
424.5.1.2 For calculation of stresses at transfer of

Concrete
prestress, at service loads, and at cracking loads, elastic
Location Compressive Stress
theory shall be used with assumptions (a) and (b):
Limits
End of simply-supported
a. Strains vary linearly with distance from neutral axis 0.70f:i
members
in accordance with Section 422.2.1;
All other locations 0.60f:i
b. At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
424.5.3.2 Calculated extreme concrete fiber stress in
424.5.2 Classification of Prestressed Flexural tension immediately after transfer of prestress, but before
Members time-dependent prestress losses, shall not exceed the
limits in Table 424.5.3.2, unless permitted by Section
424.5.2.1 Prestressed flexural members shall be 424.5.3.2.1.
classified as Class U, T, or C in accordance with Table
424.5.2.1, based on the extreme fiber stress in tension It
in the precompressed tensile zone calculated at service
loads assuming an uncracked section.

CHAPTER 4·- Structural Concrete 4-161
Table 424.5.3.2 SECTION 425

Concrete Tensile Stress Limits Immediately After
Transfer of Prestress, Without REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
Additional Bonded Reinforcement in Tension Zone
425.1 Scope
Concrete
Location Compressive Stress 425.1.1 This section shall apply to reinforcement details,
Limits including:
End of simply-supported
I
members O.s}t:1 a. Minimum spacing;
All other locations 0.25 Jt:1
b. Standard hooks, seismic hooks, and crossties;
424.5.3.2.1 The limits in Table 424.S.3.2 shall be c. Development of reinforcement;

permitted to be exceeded where additional bonded
reinforcement in the tension zone resists the total tensile d. Splices;
force in the concrete calculated with the assumption of an
uncracked section. e. Bundled reinforcement;
424.5.4 Permissible Concrete Compressive Stresses f. Transverse reinforcement;

at Service Loads
g. Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers.
424.5.4.1 For Class U and T members, the calculated
extreme concrete fiber stress in compression at service
425.1.2 The provisions of Section 42S.9 shall apply to
loads, after allowance for all prestress losses, shall not
anchorage zones for post-tensioned tendons.
exceed the limits in Table 424.S.4.I.
425.2 Minimum Spacing of Reinforcement
Table 424.5.4.1
Concrete Compressive Stress Limits at Service Loads
425.2.1 For parallel non-prestressed reinforcement in a
horizontal layer, clear spacing shall be at least the greatest
Concrete
of SOmm, db, and (4/3)dagg.
Location Compressive Stress
Limits
425.2.2 For parallel non-prestressed reinforcement
Prestress plus sustained load 0.45t:1 placed in two ormore horizontal layers, reinforcement in
I the upper layers shall be placed directly above
Prestress plus total load 0·6Ot:1 reinforcement in the bottom layer with a clear spacing
between layers of at least 2S mm.
425.2.3 For longitudinal reinforcement in columns,

pedestals, struts, and boundary elements in walls, clear
spacing between bars shall be at least the greatest of 40
mm, 1. sa; and (4/3)dagg.
Table 425.2.4
Minimum Center-to-Center Spacing of Pre tensioned
Strands at Ends of Members
r: MPa Nominal strand

diameter, mm.
Minimums
<28 All 4dh
<12mm 4db
2: 28 12mm 4Smm
ISmm SOmm

4· i62 CHAPTEr.< 4 _. Structural Concrete
425.2.4 For pretensioned strands at ends of a member, 425.3.4 Seismic hooks used to anchor stirrups, ties,
minimum center-to-center spacing s shall be the greater of hoops, and crossties shall be in accordance with (a) and
tfte value in-Table 425.2.4, and [C4/3)dagg + db]. (b):
425.2.5 For pretensioned wire at ends of a member, a. Minimum bend of 90 degrees for circular hoops and
minimum center-to-center spacing s shall be the greater of 135 degrees for all other hoops;
sa, and [C4/3)dagg + db].
b. Hook shall engage longitudinal reinforcement and the
extension shall project into the interior of the stirrup
425.3 Standard Hooks, Seismic Hooks, Crossties,
or hoop.
and Minimum Inside Bend Diameters
425.3.5 Crossties shall be In accordance with (a)
425.3.1 Standard hooks for the development of
through (e):
deformed bars in tension shall conform to Table 425.3.1.
a. Crosstie shall be continuous between ends;

425.3.2 Minimum inside bend diameters for bars used
as transverse reinforcement and standard hooks for bars
used to anchor stirrups, ties, hoops, and spirals shall b. There shall be a seismic hook at one end;
conform to Table 425.3.2. Standard hooks shall enclose
longitudinal reinforcement. c. There shall be a standard hook at other end with
minimum bend of 90 degrees;
425.3.3 Minimum inside bend diameters for welded
wire reinforcement used as stirrups or ties shall not be less d. Hooks shall engage peripheral longitudinal bars;
than 4db for deformed wire larger than D6 and 2db for
all other wires. Bends with inside diameter of less than e. 90-degree hooks of two successive crossties engaging
8db shall not be less than 4db from nearest welded the same longitudinal bars shall be alternated end for
intersection. end, unless crossties satisfy Section 418.6.4.3 or
425.7.1.6.1.
Table 425.3.1
Standard Hook Geometry for Development of Deformed Bars in Tension
Type of standard Minimum inside Straight extension Ill'

Bar size Type of standard hook
hook bend diameter mm. e.; mm.
10 mm cjJthrough / Point at whiCh
bar Is developed
6db
25mmcjJ <4,
I
28 mm cjJthrough
90-degree hook 8db 12db
36mm¢
'..,
Diem."',
40 mmcjJ and
58mmcjJ
ioa, t4b
10 mm cjJthrough ~ Point at whldl

bar IS devatoped
6db
25 mm o I , .
28 mm cjJthrough Greater of
180-degree hook 8db
36mmcjJ 4db and 65 mm lJIamelW
40 mm¢ and
10db tdlt
58mmcjJ

CHAPTER t! - Structural Concrete 4-1G3
Table 425.3.2
Minimum Inside Bend Diameters and Standard Hook Geometry for Stirrups, Ties, and Hoops
Minimum inside Straight extension

Type of III
Bar size bend diameter Type of standard hook
standard hook
10 mm ¢ through
mm.
4db ,
lext
Greater of
mm.
L
, 1-.... 90-degree
b~l1d
16mm¢ 46b and 75 mm
90-degree hook ~J (~
\
Diameter '-_/
20 mm ¢ through iart
6db 12db
25 mm¢
10 mm ¢ through
I I~
4db
16mm¢
135-degree hook
Greater of do,J
Dillmel8r
~'~~~
\
_x_
bend
6db and 75 mm
20 mm ¢ through
25mm¢
6db ...
~
- t
10 mm ¢ through
4db
16mm¢ Greater of d. ~ 180-d""",
ISO-degree hook Diameter ~end
6db and 65 mm
20 mm ¢ through
6db
I~
25mm¢
[II A standard book for stirrups, ties, and hoops includes the specific inside bend diameter and straight extension length. It shall be permitted to use a longer
straight extension at the end of a hook. A longer extension shall not be considered to increase the anchorage capacity of the hook.
425.4 Development of Reinforcement 425.4.2 Development of Deformed Bars and

Deformed Wires in Tension
425.4.1 General
425.4.2.1 Development length I d for deformed bars and
425.4.1.1 Calculated tension or compression In deformed wires in tension shall be the greater of (a) and
reinforcement at each section of a member shall be (b):
developed on each side of that section by embedment
length, hook, headed deformed bar, mechanical device, or a. Length calculated in accordance with Section
a combination thereof. 425.4.2.2 or 425.4.2.3 using the applicable
modification factors of Section 425.4.2.4;
425.4.1.2 Hooks and heads shall not be used to develop
bars in compression. b. 300mm.
425.4.1.3 Development lengths do not require a strength 425.4.2.2 For deformed bars or deformed wires, Id shall
reduction factor cpo be calculated in accordance with Table 425.4.2.2.
425.4.1.4 The values of m

used to calculate
development length shall not exceed S.3 MPa.

4-154 CHf\pnJ{ I( -- Structural Concrete
Table 425.4.2.2
Development Length for Deformed Bars and Deformed Wires in Tension
20 mm l/J and smaller bars

Spacing and cover 25 mm l/J and larger bars
and deformed wires
Clear spacing of bars or wires being developed or lap spliced
not less than db, clear cover at least db, and stirrups or ties
throughout db not less than the Code minimum,
or
Clear spacing of bars or wires being developed or lap spliced
at least 2d and clear cover at least d
Other cases
425.4.2.3 For deformed bars or deformed wires, fd shall

be calculated by:
Table 425.4.2.4
Modification Factors for Development of
(425.4.2.3a) Deformed Bars and Deformed Wires in Tension
Modification Value of
Condition
factor factor
in which the confinement term (Cb + Ktr)/db shall not Lightweight concrete 0.75
exceed 2.5, and Lightweight Lightweight concrete,
In
accordance
A where f ct is specified
with Section 419.2.4.3
40Atr Normal-weight concrete 1.0
K --- (425.4.2.3b) Epoxy-coated or zinc and
tr - sn
epoxy dual-coated
reinforcement with
1.5
wheren is the number of bars or wires being developed or clear cover less than 3db
lap spliced along the plane of splitting. It shall be or clear spacing less than
6d,
permitted to use Ktr = 0 as a design simplification even Epoxy'!'
Epoxy-coated or zinc and
if transverse reinforcement is present. 'Pe epoxy dual-coated
1.2
reinforcement for a II
425.4.2.4 For the calculation of f d» modification factors other conditions
Uncoated or zinc-coated
shall be in accordance with Table 425.4.2.4.
(galvanized) 1.0
425.4.3 Development of Standard Hooks in Tension reinforcement
25 mm I/J and larger bars 1.0
Size
425.4.3.1 Development length fdh for deformed bars in 20 mm I/J and smaller
'Ps 0.8
bars and deformed wires
tension terminating in a standard hook shall be the greater
More than 300 mm. of
of (a) through (c): Casting fresh concrete placed
1.3
position!'! below horizontal
a. 'Pt reinforcement
with IP e- IP e' IP TO and 1given in
Other 1.0
Section 425.4.3.2;
[I] The product 'Pt'Pe need not exceed IJ.
425.4.3.2 For the calculation of f dh:» modification

factors shall be in accordance with Table 425.4.3.2.
Factors IP c and IP r shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.
c. 150 mm. At discontinuous ends of members Section 425.4.3.3 shall
apply.

Table 425.4.3.2 425.4.4 Development of Headed Deformed Bars in

Modification Factors for Development Tension
of Hooked Bars in Tension
425.4.4.1 Use of heads to develop deformed bars in
Modification
Condition
Value of tension shall be permitted if conditions (a) through (g) are
factor factor satisfied:
Lightweight concrete 0.75
In
Lightweight Lightweight concrete, a. Bar shall conform to Section 420.2.1.3;
accordance
A where f ct is specified
with Section 419.2.4.3
Normal-weight concrete 1.0
b. Bar f y shall not exceed 420 KPa;
Epoxy-coated or zinc and
epoxy dual-coated 1.2
Epoxy reinforcement c. Bar size shall not exceed 36 mm 4> bar;
'P. Uncoated or zinc-coated
(ga Ivan ized) 1.0 d. Net bearing area of head Abrg shall be at least 4Ab;
reinforcement
For 36 mmet> bar and
e. Concrete shall be normal-weight;
smaller hooks with side
cover (normal to plane of
Cover hook) ::0. 65 mm. and for 0.7 f. Clear cover for bar shall be at least 2db;
'Pc 90-degree hook with
cover 011 bar extension
bevond hook> 50 mm.
g. Clear spacing between bars shall be at least 4db•
Other 1.0
For 90-degree hooks of 425.4.4.2 Development length f dt for headed deformed
36 mm et> and smaller bars in tension shall be the greatest of (a) through (c):
bars
I. enclosed along fd/z
within ties or a.
stirrups!" with lJIe, given in
perpendicular to f dh
Confining
at s:S; 3dbor 0.8
reinforcement'f
2. enclosed along the bar
Section 425.4.4.3 and value of f~ shall not exceed
'Pr
extension beyond 40 MPa;
hook including the
bend within ties or
stirrups!'!
perpendicular to f ext
ats < 3db
Other 1.0 c. 150 mm.
III The first tie Of stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of' the hook within 2db of the outside of
the bend.
the nominal diameter of the hooked bar.

(2) dbis
425.4.4.3 Modification factor rp e in Section 425.4.4.2(a)
shall be 1.2 for epoxy-coated or zinc and epoxy dual-
coated bars and 1.0 for uncoated or zinc-coated
425.4.3.3 For bars being developed by a standard hook (galvanized) bars.
at discontinuous ends of members with both side cover
and top (or bottom) cover over hook less than 65mm, (a) 425.4.5 Development of Mechanically Anchored
through (c) shall be satisfied: Deformed Bars in Tension
a. The hook shall be enclosed along f dh within ties or 425.4.5.1 Any mechanical attachment or device capable
stirrupsperpendicular to f dh at s s; 3db; of developing f y of deformed bars "shall be permitted,
provided it is approved by the building official in
b. The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion accordance with Section 401.10. Development of
of the hook within 2db of the outside of the bend; deformed bars shall be permitted to consist of a
combination of mechanical anchorage plus additional
c. IJI r shall be taken as 1.0 in calculating f dh III
embedment length of the deformed bars between the
accordance with Section 425.4.3.1(a). critical section and the mechanical attachment or device.
where db is the nominal diameter of the hooked bar.
National Structural Code of tile Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2016

4- 166 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
425.4.6 Development of Welded Deformed Wire section to the outermost crosswire shall be the greater of
~ Reinforcement in Tension (a) and (b) and shall require a minimum of two cross
wires within fd.
425.4.6.1 Development length f d for welded deformed
wire reinforcement in tension measured from the critical a. Length calculated in accordance with Section
section to the end of wire shall be the greater of (a) and 425.4.7.2;
(b), where wires in the direction of the development
length shall all be deformed MD200 or smaller. b. 150 mm.
a. Length calculated in accordance with Section 425.4.7.2 fd shall be the greater of (a) and (b):
425.4.6.2;
a. spacing of cross wires +50 mm;
b. 200 mm.
425.4.6.2 For welded deformed wire reinforcement, fd b. 3.3 C.~)(A:), where s is the spacing between
shall be calculated from Section 425.4.2.2 or 425.4.2.3,
the wires to be developed, and A is given in Table
times welded deformed wire reinforcement factor 'Pw
425.4.2.4.
from Section 425.4.6.3 or 425.4.6.4. For epoxy-coated
welded deformed wire reinforcement meeting Section
425.4.8 Development of Pretensioned Seven-Wire
425.4.6.3, it shall be permitted to use 'Pe = 1. 0 10
Strands in Tension
Section 425.4.2.2 or 425.4.2.3.
425.4.8.1 Development length fd of pretensioned

425.4.6.3 For welded deformed wire reinforcement with
seven-wire strands in tension shall be in accordance with
at least one cross wire within f d that is at least 50 mm.
(a) and (b):
from the critical section, 'Pw shall be the greater of (a)
and (b), and need not exceed 1.0:
a. e =
d
(fse)
21
d
b
+ (fps
.
-7 fse) d
b
(425.4.8.1)
b. If bonding of a strand does not extend to end of

member, and design includes tension at service loads
b. (S:lb) in the pre-compressed tensile zone, f d calculated by
Eq. 425.4.8.1 shal.l be doubled.
where s is the spacing between the wires to be developed. 425.4.8.2 Seven-wire strand shall be bonded at least
f d beyond the critical section except as provided in
425.4.6.4 For welded deformed wire reinforcement Section 425.4.8.3.
with no cross wires within f d or with a single cross wire
less than 50 mm from the critical section, 'Pw shall be 425.4.8.3 Embedment less than f d shall be permitted
taken as 1.0. at a section of a member provided the design strand stress
at that section does not exceed values obtained from the
425.4.6.5 Where any plain wires, or deformed wires bilinear relationship defined by Eq. 425.4.8.1.
larger than MD200, are present in the welded deformed
wire reinforcement in the direction of the development 425.4.9 Development of Deformed Bars and
length, the reinforcement shall be developed in Deformed Wires in Compression
425.4.9.1 Development length fde for deformed bars
425.4.6.6 Zinc-coated (galvanized) welded deformed and deformed wires in compression shall be the greater of
wire reinforcement shall be developed in accordance with (a) and (b)
Section 425.4.7.
a. Length calculated III accordance with Section
425.4.7 Development of Welded Plain Wire 425.4.9.2;
Reinforcement in Tension
b. 200 mm.
425.4.7.1 Development length fd for welded plain
wire reinforcement in tension measured from the critical

CHf\F'-1ER II - Structural Concrete
425.4.9.2 I dcshall be the greater of (a) and (b), b. At other locations where anchorage or development
multiplied by the modification factors of Section for f y is required;
425.4.9.3:
c. Where bars are required to be continuous;
a.
d. For headed and mechanically anchored deformed
reinforcement;
e. In seismic-farce-resisting systems In structures

assigned to Seismic zone 4.
425.4.9.3 For the calculation of I dc, modification factors

425.5 Splices
shall be in accordance with Table 425.4.9.3, except 'Pr
shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.
425.5.1 General
Table 425.4.9.3
425.5.1.1 Lap splices shall not be permitted for bars
Modification Factors for Deformed Bars
larger than 36 mm cp, except as provided in Section
and Wires in Compression
425.5.5.3.
Modification Value of
Condition 425.5.1.2 For contact lap splices, minimum clear spacing
factor factor
Lightweight concrete 0.75 between the contact lap splice and adjacent splices or bars
In accordance shall be in accordance with the requirements for
Lightweight Lightweight concrete, if f ct with Section
A is specified individual bars in Section 425.2.1.
419.2.4.3
Normal-weight concrete 1.0
Reinforcement enclosed within 425.5.1.3 For non-contact splices in flexural members,
(I), (2), (3) or (4): the transverse center-to-center spacing of spliced bars
I. a spiral shall not exceed the lesser of one-fifth the required lap
2. a circular continuously wound splice length and 150 mm.
tie with db 2': 6 mm in. and
Confining pitch j; 100 mm
0.75 425.5.1.4 Reduction of development length in
reinforcement 3. 6 mm cP bar or M0l30 wire
ties in accordance with Section accordance with Section 425.4.10.1 IS not permitted in
'Pr
425.7.2 spaced « 100 mm on calculating lap splice lengths.
center
4. hoops in accordance with
Section 425.7.4 spaced :5 100
425.5.1.5 Lap splices of bundled bars shall be in
mm on center accordance with Section 425.6.1.7.
Other 1.0
425.5.2 Lap Splice Lengths of Deformed Bars and
425.4.10 Reduction of Development Length for Deformed Wires in Tension
Excess Reinforcement
425.5.2.1 Tension lap splice length 1st for deformed
425.4.10.1 Reduction of development lengths defined bars and deformed wires in tension shall be in accordance
in Sections 425.4.2.1 (a), 425.4.3.I(a), 425.4.6.1(a), with Table 425.5.2.1, where Id shall be in accordance
425.4.7.1(a), and 425.4.9.1(a) shall be permitted by use of with Section 425.4.2.1(a).
the ratio (As,provided/ As,required), except where
prohibited by Section 425.4.1 0.2. The modified
development lengths shall not be less than the respective
I
mimmums specified III Sections 425.4.2.1 (b),
425.4.3.1(b), 425.4.3.1(c), 425.4.6.1(b), 425.4.7.1(b), and
425.4.9.1(b).
425.4.10.2 A reduction of development length in

accordance with Section 425.4.10.1 is not permitted for
(a) through (e).
a. At the face of a non-continuous support;
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7ttl Edition, 2016

CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
Table 425.5.2.1
Lap Splice Lengths of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wires in Tension
[1) Maximum percent of

As,provided/ As,required
As spliced within required Splice Type f st
over length of splice lap length
50 Class A Greater of: 1.0f_11_and 300 mm
~2.0
100 Class B Greater of:
1.3fd and 300 mm
<2.0 All cases Class B
IIJ Ratio of area of reinforcement provided to area of rein tor cement required by analysis at splice location.
425.5.2.2 If bars of different size are lap spliced in where s is the spacing of cross wires and fd is calculated
tension, f st shall be the greater of f d of the larger bar in accordance with Section 425.4. 7.2(b).
and
f st of the smaller bar. 425.5.4.2 If As,provided/ As,required ? 2.0 over the
length of the spl ice, f st measured between outermost
425.5.3 Lap splice lengths of welded deformed wire cross wires of each reinforcement sheet shall be permitted
reinforcement in tension to be the greater of (a) and (b).
425.5.3.1 Tension lap splice length f st of welded

deformed wire reinforcement in tension with cross wires
within the lap splice length shall be the greater of 1.3f d b. 50 mm.
and 200 mm, where f d is calculated in accordance with
Section 425.4.6.I(a), provided (a) and (b) are satisfied: where fd is calculated by Section 425.4.7.2(b).
a. Overlap between outermost cross wires of each 425.5.5 Lap Splice Lengths of Deformed Bars in
reinforcement sheet shall be at least 50 mm; Compression
b. Wires in the direction of the development length shall 425.5.5.1 Compression lap splice length fsc of 36
all be deformed MD200 or smaller in accordance mm 4J or smaller deformed bars in compression shall be
with Section 425.5.2. calculated in accordance with (a) or (b):
425.5.3.l.2 If Section 425.5.3.I(b) is not satisfied, fst a. For 1y ~ 420 MPa: f sc is the greater of 0.0711 ydb
shall be calculated in accordance with Section 425.5.4. and 300 mm;
425.5.3.l.3 If the welded deformed wire reinforcement

b. For Iy > 420 MPa: fsc is the greater of
is zinc-coated (galvanized), f st shall be calculated in
(0. 13/y - 24)db and 300 mm.
425.5.4 Lap Splice Lengths of Welded Plain Wire For I~ < 21 MPa, the length of lap shall be increased by
Reinforcement in Tension one-third.
425.5.4.1 Tension lap splice length fst of welded plain 425.5.5.2 Compression lap splices shall not be used
wire reinforcement in tension between outermost cross for bars larger than 36 mm 4J, except as permitted in
wires of each reinforcement sheet shall be at least the Section 425.5.5.3.
greatest of (a) through (c):
425.5.5.3 Compression lap splices of 40 mm 4J or 58
a. s+ 50mm; mm 4J bars to 36 mm 4J or smaller bars shall be permitted
and shall be in accordance with Section 425.5.5.4.
425.5.5.4 Where bars of different size are lap spliced

c. 150 mm. in compression, f sc shall be the greater of f de of larger
bar calculated in accordance with Section 425.4.9.1 and

CHAPTE.R 4 ._.Structural C()I1CretlO~
f sc of smaller bar calculated in accordance with Section 425.6.1.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated
425.5,5.1 as appropriate. within the span of flexural members shall terminate at
different points with at least. 40db stagger.
425.5.6 End-Bearing Splices of Deformed Bars in
Compression 425.6.1.5 Development length for individual bars
within a bundle, in tension or compression, shall be that
425.5.6.1 For bars required for compression only, of the individual bar, increased 20 percent for a three-bar
transmission of compressive stress by end bearing of bundle, and 33 percent for a four-bar bundle.
square-cut ends held in concentric contact by a suitable
device shall be permitted. 425.6.1.6 A unit of bundled bars shall be treated as a
single bar with an area equivalent to that of the bundle
425.5.6.2 End-bearing splices shall be permitted only and a centroid coinciding with that of the bundle. The
in members containing closed stirrups, ties, spirals, or diameter of the equivalent bar shall be used for db in (a)
hoops. through (e):
425.5.6.3 Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces a. Spacing limitations based on db;
within 1.5 degrees of a right angle to the axis of the bars
and shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full bearing after b. Cover requirements based on db;
assembly.
c. Spacing and cover values in Section 425.4.2.2;
425.5.7 Mechanical and Welded Splices of
Deformed Bars in Tension or Compression d. Confinement term in Section 425.4.2.3;
425.5.7.1 A mechanical or welded splice shall develop e. IJI e factor in Section 425.4.2.4.
in tension or compression, as required, at least 1. 25[ y of
the bar. 425.6.1. 7 Lap splices of bars in a bundle shall be
based on the lap splice length required for individual bars
425.5.7.2 Welding of reinforcing bars shall conform to within the bundle, increased in accordance with Section
Section 426.6.4. 425.6.1.5. Individual bar splices within a bundle shall not
overlap. Entire bundles shall not be lap spliced.
425.5.7.3 Mechanical or welded splices need not be
staggered except as required by Section 425.5.7.4. 425.6.2 Post-tensioning Ducts
425.5.7.4 Splices in tension tie members shall be made 425.6.2.1 Bundling of post-tensioning ducts shall be
with a mechanical or welded splice in accordance with permitted if shown that concrete can be satisfactorily
Section 425.5.7.1. Splices in adjacent bars shall be placed and if provision is made to prevent the prestressing
staggered at least 750 mm. steel, when tensioned, from breaking through the duct.
425.6 Bundled Reinforcement 425.7 Transverse Reinforcement
425.6.1 Non-Prestressed Reinforcement 425.7.1 Stirrups
425.6.1.1 Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled 425.7.1.1 Stirrups shall extend as close to the
in contact to act as a unit shall be limited to four in any compression and tension surfaces of the member as cover
one bundle. requirements and proximity of other reinforcement
permits and shall be anchored at both ends. Where used as
425.6.1.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within shear reinforcement, stirrups shall extend a distance d
transverse reinforcement. Bundled bars in compression from extreme compression fiber.
members shall be enclosed by transverse reinforcement at
least 12 mm cp in size. 425.7.1.2 Between anchored ends, each bend in the
continuous portion of a single or multiple U-stirrup and
425.6.1.3 Bars larger than a 36 mm cp shall not be each bend in a closed stirrup shall enclose a longitudinal
bundled in beams. bar or strand.
National Structural Code of tile Philippines Volume I. 7th Edition, 20'15

4-'170 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
425.7.1.3 Anchorage of deformed bar and wire shall b. In accordance with Section 425.7.1.3(a) or (b) or
byin accordance with (a), (b), or (c): Section 425.7.1.4, where the concrete surrounding
the anchorage is restrained against spalling by a
a. For 16 mm 4J bar and MD200 wire, and smaller, and flange or slab or similar member.
for 20 mm 4J through 25 mm 4J bars with! yt ::; 280
MPa, a standard hook around longitudinal 425.7.1.6.1 Stirrups used for torsion or integrity
reinforcement; reinforcement shall be permitted to be made up of two
pieces of reinforcement: a single-U stirrup anchored
b. For 20 mm 4J through 25 mm 4J bars with !yt > 280 according to Section 42S.7.1.6(a) closed by a crosstie
MPa, a standard hook around a longitudinal bar plus where the 90-degree hook of the crosstie shall be
an embedment between mid-height of the member restrained against spalling by a flange or slab or similar
and the outside end of the hook equal to or greater member.
than 0.17db!yt/(;"/1'J, with;" as given in Table
425.7.1.7 Except where used for torsion or integrity
425.4.3.2;
reinforcement, closed stirrups are permitted to be made
using pairs of Ll-stirrups spliced to form a closed unit
c. In joist construction, for 12 mm 4J bar and MDI30 where lap lengths are at least 1.31 d. In members with a
wire and smaller, a standard hook.
total depth of at least 450 mm, such splices with Abf yt ::;
40 kN per leg shall be considered adequate if stirrup legs
425.7.1.4 Anchorage of each leg of welded plain wire
extend the full available depth of member.
reinforcement forming a single U-stirrup shall be in
425.7.2 Ties
a. Two longitudinal wires spaced at a 50 mm spacing
425.7.2.1 Ties shall consist of a closed loop of deformed
along the member at the top of the U;
bar or deformed wire with spacing in accordance with (a)
and (b):
b. One longitudinal wire located not more than d/4
from the compression face and a second wire closer
a. Clear spacing of at least (4/3)dagg;
to the compression face and spaced not less than 50
mm from ,the first wire. The second wire shall be
permitted to be located on the stirrup leg beyond a b. Center-to-center spacing shall not exceed the least of
bend, or on a bend with an inside diameter of bend of 16db of longitudinal bar, 48db of tie bar, and
at least 8db. smallest dimension of member.
425.7.1.5 Anchorage of each end ofa single leg stirrup 425.7.2.2 Diameter of tie bar or wire shall be at least (a)
of welded wire reinforcement shall be with two or (b):
longitudinal wires at a minimum spacing of 50 mm with
(a) and (b): a. 10 mm 4J enclosing 32 mm 4J or smaller longitudinal
bars;
a. Inner wire at least the greater of d/4 or 50 mm from
d/2; b. 12 mm 4J enclosing 36 mm 4J or larger longitudinal
bars or bundled longitudinal bars.
b. Outer longitudinal wire at tension face shall not be
farther from the face than the portion of primary 425.7.2.2.1 As an alternative to deformed bars,
flexural reinforcement closest to the face. deformed wire or welded wire reinforcement of
equivalent area to that required in Section 425.7.2.1 shall
425.7.1.6 Stirrups used for torsion or integrity be permitted subject to the requirements of Table
reinforcement shall be closed stirrups perpendicular to the 420.2.2.4a.
axis of the member. Where welded wire reinforcement is
used, transverse wires shall be perpendicular to the axis of 425.7.2.3 Rectilinear ties shall be arranged to satisfy (a)
the member. Such stirrups shall be anchored by (a) or (b): and (b):
a. Ends shall terminate with 13S-degree standard hooks a. Every comer and alternate longitudinal bar shall have
around a longitudinal bar; lateral support provided by the comer of a tie with an
included angle of not more than 135 degrees;

b. No unsupported bar shall be farther than 150 mm where the value of f yt shall not be taken greater than 700
clear on each side along the tie from a laterally MPa.
s-upported bar.
425.7.3.4 Spirals shall be anchored by 1-1/2 extra turns
425.7.2.3.1 Anchorage of rectilinear ties shall be of spiral bar or wire at each end.
provided by standard hooks that conform to Section
425.3.2 and engage a longitudinal bar. A tie shall not be 425.7.3.5 Spirals are permitted to be spliced by (a) or
made up of interlocking headed deformed bars. (b):
425.7.2.4 Circular ties shall be permitted where a. Mechanical or welded splices 111 accordance with
longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter of a Section 425.5.7;
circle.
b. Lap splices in accordance with Section 425.7.3.6 for
425.7.2.4.1 Anchorage of individual circular ties shall f yt not exceeding 420 MPa.
be in accordance with (a) through (c):
425.7.3.6 Spiral lap splices shall be at least the greater of
a. Ends shall overlap by at least 150 mm; 300 mm and the lap length in Table 425.7.3.6.
b. Ends shall terminate with standard hooks in Table 425.7.3.6

accordance with Section 425.3.2 that engage a Lap Length for Spiral Reinforcement
longitudinal bar;
Ends of Lap
c. Overlaps at ends of adjacent circular ties shall be Reinforcement Coating lapped spiral length
bar or wire mm.
staggered around the perimeter enclosing the
Uncoated or
longitudinal bars. Hook not
zinc-coated 48db
required
(galvanized)
425.7.2.5 Ties to resist torsion shall be perpendicular to
Deformed bar Epoxy-coated Hook not
the axis of the member anchored by either (a) or (b): or zinc and required
ria,
epoxy dual
coated Standard hook of
a. Ends shall terminate with 135-degree standard hooks Section 425.3.2[1] 48db
or seismic hooks around a longitudinal bar;
Hook not
Uncoated 48db
required
b. In accordance with Section 425.7.1.3(a) or (b) or
425.7.1.4, where the concrete surrounding the Deformed wire Hook not
anchorage is restrained against spalling. required
rza,
Epoxy-coated
Standard hook of
425.7.3 Spirals Section 425.3.2[1] 48db
Hook not
425.7.3.1 Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced Uncoated or
required
rza,
Plain bar zinc-coated
continuous bar or wire with clear spacing conforming to (galvan ized) Standard hook of
(a) and (b): Section 425.3.2[1] 48db
Hook not
a. At least the greater of25 mm and (4j3)dagg; Plain wire Uncoated
required
rza,
Standard hook of
48db
b. Not greater than 75 mm. Section 425.3.2[1]
II) Hooks shall be embedded within the core confined bythe'spiral~
425.7.3.2 For cast-in-place construction, spiral bar or
wire diameter shall be at least 10 mm.
425.7.4 Hoops
425.7.3.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcement ratio Ps shall
satisfy Eq. 425.7.3.3. 425.7.4.1 Hoops shall consist of a closed tie or
continuously wound tie, which can consist of several
reinforcement elements each having seismic hooks at both
Ps ~ 0.45 (--, - 1) -t: (425.7.3.3) ends.
ACh r;

4-'172 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
425.7.4.2 Anchorage of the ends of the reinforcement 425.9.1.5 Stressing sequence shall be considered in the
elements that- comprise hoops shall be provided by design process and specified as required by Section
seismic hooks that conform to Section 425.3,4 and engage 426.10.
a longitudinal bar. A closed tie shall not be made up of
interlocking headed deformed bars. 425.9.2 Required Strength
425.8 Post- Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers 425.9.2.1 Factored prestressing force at the anchorage
device shall exceed the least of (a) through (c), where 1.2
425.8.1 Anchorages and couplers for tendons shall is the load factor from Section 405.3.12:
develop at least 95 percent of f pu when tested in an
unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set. a. 1. 2(0. 94fpy)Aps;
425.8.2 Anchorages and couplers for bonded tendons b. 1. 2(0. 80fpu)Aps;

shall be located so that 100 percent of f pu shall be
developed at critical sections after the post-tensioned c. Maximum jacking force designated by the supplier
reinforcement is bonded in the member. of anchorage devices multiplied by 1.2.
425.8.3 In unbonded construction subject to repetitive

loads, the possibility of fatigue of prestressed 425.9.3 Local Zone
reinforcement in anchorages and couplers shall be
considered. 425.9.3.1 The design of local zone in post-tensioned
anchorages shall meet the requirements of (a), (b), or (c):
425.8.4 Couplers shall be placed at locations approved
by the licensed design professional and enclosed in a. Mono strand or single 16 mm or smaller diameter bar
housings long enough to permit necessary movements. anchorage devices shall meet the bearing resistance
and local zone requirements of ACI 423.7;
425.9 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioned Tendons
b. Basic multi-strand anchorage devices shall meet the
425.9.1 General bearing resistance requirements of AASI-ITO .LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications Article 5.10.9.7.2,
425.9.1.1 Anchorage regions of post-tensioned tendons except thul the load factors shall be in accordance
with Section 405.3,.12 and cfJ shall be in accordance
shall consist of two zones, (a) and (b):
with Section 421 1;+
a. The local zone shall be assumed to be a rectangular
prism (or equivalent rectangular prism for circular or c. Special anchorage devices shall satisfy the tests
oval anchorages) of concrete immediately required in AASI-rro LRFD Bridge Design
surrounding the anchorage device and any confining Specifications, Article 5.'lO.9.7.3, and. described in
reinforcement; AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications,
Article 10.3.2.3.
b. The general zone includes the local zone and shall be
assumed to be the portion of the member through 425.9.3.2 Where special anchorage devices are used,
which the concentrated prestressing force is supplementary skin reinforcement shall be provided in
transferred to the concrete and distributed more addition to the confining reinforcement specified for the
uniformly across the section. anchorage device.
425.9.1.2 The local zone shall be designed in accordance 425.9.3.2.1 Supplementary skin reinforcement shall be
with Section 425.9.3. similar in configuration and at least equivalent in
volumetric ratio to any supplementary skin reinforcement
425.9.1.3 The general zone shall be designed in used in the qualifying acceptance tests of the anchorage
accordance with Section 425.9.4. device.
425.9.1.4 Compressive strength of concrete required at 425.9.4 General Zone

time of post-tensioning shall be specified as required by
Section 426.10 425.9.4.1 The extent of the general zone is equal to the
largest dimension of the cross section. In the case of slabs
with anchorages or groups of anchorages spaced along the

CHAPTER 4 ._ Structural Concrete 4-173
slab edge, the depth of the general zone shall be taken as 425.9.4.3.3 Three-dimensional effects shall be
the sp!cing of the tendons. considered in design and analyzed by (a) or (b):
425.9.4.2 For anchorage devices located away from a. Three-dimensional analysis procedures;
the end of a member, the general zone shall include the
disturbed regions ahead of and behind the anchorage b. Approximated by considering the summation of
devices. effects for two orthogonal planes.
425.9.4.3 Analysis of General Zones 425.9.4.4 Reinforcement Limits
425.9.4.3.1 Methods (a) through (c) shall be permitted 425.9.4.4.1 Tensile strength of concrete shall be
for design of general zones: neglected in calculations of reinforcement requirements.
a. Strut-and-tie models in accordance with Section 423; 425.9.4.4.2 Reinforcement shall be provided in the
general zone to resist bursting, spalling, and longitudinal
b. Linear stress analysis, including finite element edge tension forces induced by anchorage devices, as
analysis or equivalent; applicable. Effects of abrupt changes in section and
stressing sequence shall be considered.
c. Simplified equations in AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications, Article 5.10.9.6, except where 425.9.4.4.3 For anchorage devices located away from the
restricted by Section 425.9.4.3.2. end of the member, bonded reinforcement shall be
provided to transfer at least O. 35P pu into the concrete
The design of general zones by other methods shall be section behind the anchor. Such reinforcement shall be
permitted, provided that the specific procedures used for placed symmetrically around the anchorage device and
design result in prediction of strength in substantial shall be fully developed both behind and ahead of the
agreement with results of comprehensive tests. anchorage device.
425.9.4.3.2 Simplified equations as permitted by Section 425.9.4.4.4 If tendons are curved in the general zone,
425.9.4.3.1(c) shall not be used where (a), (b), (c), (d), bonded reinforcement shall be provided to resist radial
(e), (f), or (g) occur: and splitting forces, except for monostrand tendons in
slabs or where analysis shows reinforcement is not
a. Member cross sections are non-rectangular; required.
b. Discontinuities in or near the general zone cause 425.9.4.4.5 Reinforcement with a nominal tensile
deviations in the force flow path; strength equal to 2 percent of the factored prestressing
force shall be provided in orthogonal directions parallel to
c. Minimum edge distance is less than l.5 times the the loaded face of the anchorage zone to limit spalling,
anchorage device lateral dimension in that direction; except for monostrand tendons in slabs or where analysis
shows reinforcement is not required.
d. Multiple anchorage devices are used in other than
one closely spaced group; 425.9.4.4.6 For mono strand anchorage devices for 12
mm. or smaller diameter strands in normal-weight
e. Centroid of the tendons is located outside the kern; concrete slabs, reinforcement satisfying (a) and (b) shall
be provided in the general zone, unless a detailed analysis
f. Angle of inclination of the tendon in the general zone in accordance with Section 425.9.4.3 shows that this
is less than -5 degrees from the centerline of axis of reinforcement is not required:
the member, where the angle is negative if the anchor
force points away from the centroid of the section; a. Two horizontal bars at least 12 mm cp in size shall be
provided parallel to the slab edge. They shall be
g. Angle of inclination of the tendon in the general zone permitted to be in contact with the front face of the
is greater than +20 degrees from the centerline of axis anchorage device and shall be within a distance of
of the member, where the angle is positive if the ahead of each device. Those bars shall extend at least
anchor force points towards the centroid of the 150 mm. either side of the outer edges of each
section. device;

4-'174 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
b. If the center-to-center spacing of anchorage devices b. Prestressing reinforcement is stressed to no more than
.' is 300 mm or less, the anchorage devices shall be 50 percent of the final prestressing force.
considered as a group. 1':01" each group of six or more
anchorage devices, n + 1 hairpin bars or closed 425.9.5 Reinforcement Detailing
stirrups at least J 0 mm 1> ill size shall be provided,
where n is the number of anchorage devices. One 425.9.5.1 Selection of reinforcement size, spacing,
hairpin bar or stirrup shall be placed between each cover, and other details for anchorage zones shall make
anchorage device and one 011 each side of the group. allowances for tolerances on fabrication and placement of
The hairpin bars or stirrups shall be placed with the reinforcement; for the size of aggregate; and for adequate
legs extending into the slab perpendicular to the edge, placement and consolidation of the concrete.
The center portion of the hairpin bars or stirrups shall
be placed perpendioular to the plane of the slab from
31118 to hj2 ahead of the anehorage devices.
425.9.4.5 Limiting Stresses in General Zones
425.9.4.5.1 Maximum design tensile stress in

reinforcement at nominal strength shall not exceed the
limits in Table 425.9.4.5.l.
Table 425.9.4.5.1
Maximum Design Tensile Stress in Reinforcement
Maximum design tensile

Type of reinforcement
stress
Non-prestressed
fy
reinforcement
Bonded, prestressed
fpy
reinforcement
Unbonded, prestressed
reinforcement
fse + 70
425.9.4.5.2 Compressive stress in concrete at nominal

strength shall not exceed O. 7 ;'t~i' where;' is defined in
Section 419.2.4.
425.9.4.5.3 If concrete is confined by spirals or hoops

and the effect of confining reinforcement is documented
by tests and analysis, it shall be permitted to use an
increased value of compressive stress in concrete when
calculating the nominal strength of the general zone.
425.9.4.5.4 Prestressing reinforcement shall not be

stressed until compressive strength of concrete, as
indicated by tests of cylinders cured in a manner
consistent with curing of the member, is at least 17 MPa
for single-strand or bar tendons '01' at least 28 MPa for
multistrand tendons unless Section 425.9.4.5.5 IS
satisfied.
425.9.4.5.5 Provisions of Section 425.9.4.5.4 need not

be satisfied if (a) or (b) is satisfied:
a. Oversized anchorage devices are used to compensate

for a lower concrete compressive strength;

CHAPTER 4 -- SlrLlctlifal Concrete 4-175
SECTION 426 Table 426.4.1.1.1 (a)

Specifications for Cementitious Materials
; CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AND INSPECTION Cementitious
Specification
Material
426.1 Scope Portland cement ASTMCl50M
ASTM C595M,
Blended hydraulic
426.1.1 This section addresses (a) through (c): excluding Type IS(~ 70) and
cements
T_ypeIT_(S~ 70)
a. Design information that the licensed design Expansive
ASTMC845M
professional shall specify in the construction hydraulic cement
documents, if applicable; Hydraulic cement ASTM Cl157M
Fly ash and natural
ASTM C6l8
b. Compliance requirements that the licensed design pozzolan
professional shall specify in the construction Sla~ cement ASTMC989M
documents, if applicable; Silica fume ASTM CI240
c. Inspection requirements that the licensed design b. All cementinous materials specified in Table
professional shall specify in the construction 426.4.1.1.1 (a) and the combinations of these
documents, if applicable. materials shall be included in calculating the w/ em
of the concrete mixture.
426.2 Design Criteria
426.4.1.2 Aggregates
426.2.1 Design Information:
426.4.1.2.1 Compliance Requirements:
a. Name and year of issue of the Code, general building
code, and any supplements governing design. a. Aggregates shall conform to (1) or (2):
b. Loads used in design. I. Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33M;
c. Design work delegated to the contractor including 2. Lightweight aggregate: ASTM C330M.
applicable design criteria.
b. Aggregates -not conforming to ASTM C33M or
426.3 Member Information ASTM C330M are permitted if they have been
shown by test or actual service to produce concrete of
426.3.1 Design Information: adequate strength and durability and are approved by
the building official.
a. Member size, location, and related tolerances.
426.4.1.3 Water
426.4 Concrete Materials and Mixture
Requirements 426.4.1.3.1 Compliance Requirements:
426.4.1 Concrete Materials a. Mixing water shall conform to ASTM C1602M;
426.4.1.1 Cementitious Materials b. Mixing water, including that portion of mixing water
contributed in the form of free moisture on
426.4.1.1.1 Compliance Requirements: aggregates, shall not contain deleterious amounts of
chloride ion when used for prestressed concrete, for
a. Cementitious materials shall conform to the concrete that will contain aluminum embedments, or
specifications in Table 426.4.1.1.1 (a); for concrete cast against stay-in-place galvanized
steel forms.

4-1i'fi CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
426.4.1.4 Admixtures 3. Maximum wlcm applicable to most restrictive

" assigned durability exposure class from Section
a. Admixtures shall conform to (1) through (4): 419.3.2.1;
I. Water reduction and setting time modification: 4. Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate not
ASTMC494M; to exceed the least of (a), (b), and (c):
2. Producing flowing concrete: ASTM CIOI7M; a. 115 the narrowest dimension between sides
of forms;
3. Air entrainment: ASTM C260M;
b. 1/3 the depth of slabs;
4. Inhibiting chloride-induced corrosion: ASTM
C1582M. c. 3/4 the minimum specified clear spacing
between individual reinforcing bars or wires,
b. Admixtures that do not conform to the specifications bundles of bars, prestressed reinforcement,
in Section 426.4.1.4.1 (a) shall be subject to prior individual tendons, bundled tendons, or
review by the licensed design professional; ducts.
c. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride These limitations shall not apply if, in the judgment of the
from sources other than impurities in admixture licensed design professional, workability and methods of
ingredients shall not be used in prestressed concrete, consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without
in concrete containing embedded aluminum, or in honeycombs or voids.
concrete cast against stay-in-place galvanized steel
forms; 5. For members assigned to Exposure Category F,
air content from Section 419.3.3.1;
d. Admixtures used in concrete contammg expansive
cements conforming to ASTM C845M shall be 6. For members assigned to Exposure Class C,
compatible with the cement and produce no applicable chloride ion limits for assigned
deleterious effects. Exposure Class from 4 Section 419.3.2.1;
426.4.1.5 Steel Fiber Reinforcement 7. For members assigned to Exposure Category S,

type of cementitious materials for assigned
426.4.1.5.1 Compliance Requirements: Exposure Class from 419.3.2.1;
a. Steel fiber reinforcement used for shear resistance 8. For members assigned to Exposure Class S2 or
shall satisfy (1) and (2): S3, admixtures containing calcium chloride are
prohibited;
I. Be deformed and conform to ASTM A820M;
9. Equilibrium density oflightweight concrete;
2. Have a length-to-diameter ratio of at least 50 and
not exceeding 100. 10. Requirement for submittal of the volumetric
fractions of aggregate in lightweight concrete
426.4.2 Concrete Mixture Requirements mixtures for the verification of 1value if used in
design;
426.4.2.1 Design Information:
II. If used for shear resistance in accordance with
a. Requirements (1) through (11) for each concrete Section 409.6.3.1, requirements for steel fiber
mixture, based on assigned exposure classes or reinforced concrete.
design of members:
b. At the option of the licensed design professional,
1. Minimum specified compressive strength of exposure classe based on the severity of the
concrete, f~; anticipated expo-sure of members;
2. Test age for demonstrating compliance with f~if c. The required compressive strength at designated
different from 28 days; stages of construction for each part of the structure
designed by the licensed design professional.

CHAPTEf=( 4 .. Stn.lctuml Cone: etc., 4177
426.4.2.2 Compliance Requirements: Table 426.4.2.2(b)

Limits on Cementitious Materials for Concrete
a. The required compressive strength at designated Assigned to Exposure Class F3
stages of construction for each part of the structure
not designed by the licensed design professional shall Maximum percent
,I
be submitted for review; of
Cementitious Materials
total cementitious
b. The maximum percentage of pozzolans, including fly materials by mass
ash and silica fume, and slag cement in concrete Fly ash or other pozzolans
25
assigned to Exposure Class F3, shall be in accordance conforming to ASTM C618
with Table 426.4.2.2(b) and (I) and (2). Slag cement conforming to
50
ASTM C989M I
I. The maximum percentage limits in Table Silica fume conforming to

426.4.2.2(b) shall include the fly ash or other 10
ASTM CI240
pozzolans, slag cement, and silica fume used in Total of fly ash or other
the manufacture of ASTM C595M and CI157M 35
pozzolans and silica fume
blended cements; Total of fly ash or other
pozzolans, slag cement, and 50
2. The individual limits in Table 426.4.2.2(b) shall silica fume
apply regardless of the number of cementitious
materials in a concrete mixture.
Table 426.4.2.2(c)
Requirements for Establishing Suitability of Combinations of
Cementitious Materials-Exposed to Water-Soluble Sulfate
Exposure Maximum expansion strain if tested using ASTM CI012M

class At 6 months At 12 months At 18 months
Sl 0.10 percent No requirement No requirement
S2 0.05 percent 0.10 percent III No requirement
S3 No requirement No requirement 0.10 percent
III
The 12·month expansion limit applies only if the measured expansion exceeds the 6·month maximum expansion limit.
c. For concrete exposed to sulfate, alternative I. Can be placed readily without segregation into I
combinations of cementitious materials to those forms and around reinforcement under

I
specified in Section 426.4.2.1 (a)(7) are permitted anticipated placement conditions;
if tests for sulfate resistance satisfy the criteria in
Table 426.4.2.2(c). 2. Meets requirements for assigned exposure class
in accordance with either Section 426.4.2.I(a) or
d. Steel fiber-reinforced concrete used for shear 426.4.2.1 (b);
resistance shall satisfy (I) and (2):
3. Conforms to strength test requirements for
1. Conform to ASTM C II 16M; standard-cured specimens.
2. Contain at least 60 kg of deformed steel b. Concrete mixture proportions shall be established in

fibers per cubic meter of concrete. accordance with Article 4.2.3 of ACI 301M or by an
alternative method acceptable to the licensed design
426.4.3 Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures professional. Alternative methods shall have a
probability of satisfying the strength requirements for
426.4.3.1 Compliance Requirements: acceptance tests of standard-cured specimens that
meets or exceeds the probability associated with the
a. Concrete mixture proportions shall be established so method in Article 4.2.3 of ACI 301M. If Article 4.2.3
that the concrete satisfies (I) through (3): of ACI 301M is used, the strength test records used
for establishing and documenting concrete mixture
proportions shall not be more than 24 months old;

4 178 CHf\PTt'.R 4 -- Structural Concrete
c. The concrete materials used to develop the concrete d. Ready-mixed and site-mixed concrete shall be
mixture ,proportions shall correspond to those to be batched, mixed, and delivered in accordance with
used in the proposed Work; ASTM C94M or ASTM C685M.
d. If different concrete mixtures are to be used for 426.5.2 Concrete Placement and Consolidation
different portions of proposed Work, each mixture
shall comply with the concrete mixture requirements 426.5.2.1 Compliance Requirements:
stated in the construction documents.
a. Debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be
426.4.4 Documentation of Concrete Mixture occupied by concrete before placement;
Characteristics
b. Standing water shall be removed from place of
426.4.4.1 Compliance Requirements: deposit before concrete is placed unless a tremie is to
be used or unless otherwise permitted by both the
a. Documentation of concrete mixture characteristics licensed design professional and the building official;
shall be submitted for review by the licensed design
professional before the mixture is used and before c. Masonry filler units that will be in contact with
making changes to mixtures already in use. Evidence concrete shall be pre-wetted prior to placing concrete;
of the ability of the proposed mixture to comply with
the concrete mixture requirements in the construction d. Equipment used to convey concrete from the mixer to
documents shall be included in the documentation. the location of final placement shall have capabilities
The evidence shall be based on field test records or to achieve the placement requirements;
laboratory trial batches. Field test records shall
represent conditions similar to those anticipated e. Concrete shall not be pumped through pipe made of
during the proposed Work; aluminum or aluminum alloys;
b. If field or laboratory test data are not available, and f. Concrete shall be placed III accordance with (I)
f~ s 35 MPa, concrete proportions shall be based on through (5):
other experience or information, if approved by the
licensed design professional. If f~ > 3S MPa, test I. At a rate to provide an adequate supply of
data documenting the characteristics of the proposed concrete at the location of placement;
mixtures are required;
2. At a rate so concrete at all times has sufficient
c. If data become available during construction that workability such that it can be consolidated by
consistently exceed the strength-test acceptance the intended methods;
criteria for standard-cured specimens, it shall be
permitted to modify mixture to reduce the average 3. Without segregation or loss of materials;
strength. Submit evidence acceptable 1:0 the licensed
design professional to demonstrate that the modified 4. Without interruptions sufficient to permit loss of
mixture will comply with the concrete mixture workability between successive placements that
requirements in the construction documents. would result in cold joints;
426.5 Concrete Production and Construction 5. Deposited as near to its final location as
practicable to avoid segregation due to
426.5.1 Concrete Production rehandling or flowing.
426.5.1.1 Compliance Requirements: g. Concrete that has been contaminated or has lost its
initial workability to the extent that it can no longer
a. Cementitious materials and aggregates shall be stored be consolidated by the intended methods shall not be
to prevent deterioration or contamination; used;
b. Material that has deteriorated or has been h. Retempering concrete in accordance with the limits
contaminated shall not be used in concrete; of ASTM C94M shall be permitted unless otherwise
restricted by the licensed design professional;
c. Equipment for mixing and transporting concrete shall
conform to ASTM C94M or ASTM C685M;

CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete 4179
i, After starting, concreting shall be carried on as a at the same time and from the same samples as
continuous operation until the completion of a panel standard-cured cylinders;
or section, as defined by its boundaries or
predetermined joints; 2. Field-cured cylinders shall be cured in
accordance with the field curing procedure of
j. Concrete shall be consolidated by suitable means ASTM C3l M and tested in accordance with
during placement and shall be worked around ASTM C39M.
reinforcement and embedments and into corners of
forms; c. Procedures for protecting and curing concrete shall
be considered adequate if (1) or (2) are satisfied:
k. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be
generally level. I. Average strength of field-cured cylinders at test
age designated for determination of f~ is equal
426.5.3 Curing Concrete to or at least 85 percent of that of companion
standard-cured cylinders;
2. Average strength of field-cured cylinders at test
a. If supplementary tests of field-cured specimens are age exceeds f~ by more than 3.5 MPa.
required to verify adequacy of curing and protection,
the number and size of test specimens and the 426.5.4 Concreting in Cold Weather
frequency of these supplementary tests.
426.5.3.2 Compliance Requirements:
426.5.4.1 (a) Temperature limits for concrete as
a. Concrete, other than high-early-strength, shall be delivered in cold weather.
maintained at a temperature of at least 10°C and in a
moist condition for at least the first 7 days after 426.5.4.2 Compliance Requirements:
placement, except if accelerated curing is used;
a. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating
b. High-early-strength concrete shall be maintained at a concrete materials and protecting concrete during
temperature of at least 10°C and in a moist condition freezing or near-freezing weather;
for at least the first 3 days after placement, except if
accelerated curing is used; b. Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall not
be used;
c. Accelerated curing to accelerate strength gain and
reduce time of curing is permitted using high c. Forms, fillers, and ground with which concrete is to
pressure steam, steam at atmospheric pressure, heat come in contact shall be free from frost and ice;
and moisture, or other process acceptable to the
licensed design professional. If accelerated curing is d. Concrete materials and production methods shall be
used, (1) and (2) shall apply: selected so that the concrete temperature at delivery
complies with the specified temperature limits.
1. Compressive strength at the load stage
considered shall be at least the strength required 426.5.5 Concreting in Hot Weather
at that load stage.
2. Accelerated curing shall not impair the durability
of the concrete. 426.5.5.1 (a) Temperature limits for concrete as
delivered in hot weather.
d. If required by the building official or licensed design
professional, results of tests of cylinders made and 426.5.5.2 Compliance Requirements:
cured in accordance with (I) and (2) shall be
provided in addition to results of standard-cured a. Concrete materials and production methods shall be
cylinder strength tests: selected so that the concrete temperature at delivery
complies with the specified temperature limits;
l. At least two 150 by 300 mm or at least three 100
by 200 mm field-cured cylinders shall be molded
National Structural Code of the Phllippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

4-1 SO CHAr~TER 1\ - Structural Concrete
b. Handling, placing, protection, and curing procedures e. Immediately before new concrete is placed,
shall limit concrete temperatures or water construction joints shall be pre-wetted and standing
evaporation that could reduce strength, serviceability, water removed.
and durability of the member or structure.
426.5.7 Construction of Concrete Members
426.5.6 Construction, Contraction, and Isolation
Joints 426.5.7.1 Design Information:
426.5.6.1 Design Information: a. Details required to accommodate dimensional

changes resulting from prestressing, creep, shrinkage,
a. If required by the design, locations and details of and temperature;
construction, isolation, and contraction joints;
b. Identify if a slab-on-ground is designed as a
b. Details required for transfer of shear and other forces structural diaphragm or part of the seismic-force-
through construction joints; resisting system;
c. Surface preparation, including intentional roughening c. Details for construction of sloped or stepped footings
of hardened concrete surfaces where concrete is to be designed to act as a unit;
placed against previously hardened concrete;
d. Locations where slab and column concrete
d. Locations where shear is transferred between as- placements are required to be integrated during
rolled steel and concrete using headed studs or placement in accordance with Section 415.3;
welded reinforcing bars requiring steel to be clean
and free of paint; e. Locations where steel fiber-reinforced concrete IS
required for shear resistance in accordance with
e. Surface preparation including intentional roughening Section 409.6.3.1.
if composite topping slabs are to be cast in place on a
precast floor or roof intended to act structurally with 426.5.7.2 Compliance Requirements:
the precast members.
a. Beams, girders, or slabs supported by columns or
426.5.6.2 Compliance Requirements: walls shall not be cast until concrete in the vertical
support members is no longer plastic;
a. Joint locations or joint details not shown or that differ
from those indicated in construction documents shall b. Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels, shear caps,
be submitted for review by the licensed design and capitals shall be placed monolithically as part of
professional; a slab system, unless otherwise shown in construction
documents;
b. Except for prestressed concrete, construction joints in
floor and roof systems shall be located within the c. At locations where slab and column concrete
middle third of spans of slabs, beams, and girders placements are required to be integrated during
unless otherwise approved by the licensed design placement, column concrete shall extend full slab
professional; depth at least 0.60 m into floor slab from face of
column and be integrated with floor concrete;
c. Construction J01l1ts in girders shall be offset a
distance of at least two times the width of intersecting d. Saw-cutting in slabs-on-ground identified in the
beams, measured from the face of the intersecting construction documents as structural diaphragms or
beam, unless otherwise approved by the licensed part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall not be
design professional; permitted unless specifically indicated or approved
by the licensed design professional.
d. Surface of concrete construction J01l1ts shall be
intentionally roughened if specified. Otherwise,
construction joints shall be cleaned and laitance
removed before new concrete is placed;

CHAPTEI={ 4 - Structural Concrete 4-1131
426.6 Reinforcement Materials and Construction 426.6.2 Placement

Requirements
426.6.2.1 Design Information.
426.6.1 General
a. Tolerances on location of reinforcement taking into
426.6.1.1 Design Information consideration tolerances on d and specified concrete
cover in accordance with Table 426.6.2.1 (a);
a. ASTM designation and grade of reinforcement; Table 426.6.2.1(a)
Tolerances on d and Specified Cover
b. Type, size, location requirements, detailing, and
embedment length of reinforcement; Tolerance
d, Tolerance on specified
on d,
mm. concrete cover, mm,'"
c. Concrete cover to reinforcement; mm.
-10
d. Location and length oflap splices; :5200 ±10 Smaller of
-in * specified
-12
cover
e. Type and location of mechanical splices;
f. Type and location of end-bearing splices;

>200 ±12 Smaller of
-ill* specified cover
(I] Tolerance for cover to formed soffits is - 6 rnm,

g. Type and location of welded splices and other
required welding of reinforcing bars; b. Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and ends
of reinforcement in accordance with Table
h. ASTM designation for protective coatings of non- 426.6.2.1 (b). The tolerance for specified concrete
prestressed reinforcement; cover in Table 426.6.2.I(a) shall also apply at
discontinuous ends of members.
1. Corrosion protection for exposed reinforcement
intended to be bonded with extensions on future Table 426.6.2.1(b)
Work. Tolerances for Longitudinal Location of Bends
and Ends of Reinforcement
426.6.1.2 Compliance Requirements
Tolerances,
a. Mill test reports for reinforcement shall be submitted; Location of bends or reinforcement ends
. mm .
Discontinuous ends of brackets and corbels ±I2
b. Non-prestressed reinforcement with rust, mill scale, Discontinuous ends of other members ±25
or a combination of both shall be considered Other locations ±50
satisfactory, provided a hand-wire-brushed
representative test specimen of the reinforcement
426.6.2.2 Compliance Requirements
complies with the applicable ASTM specification for
the minimum dimensions (including height of
a. Reinforcement, including bundled bars, shall be
deformations) and weight per unit length;
placed within required tolerances and supported to
prevent displacement beyond required tolerances
c. Prestressing reinforcement shall be free of mill scale,
during concrete placement;
pitting, and excessive rust. A light coating of rust
shall be permitted;
b. Spiral units shall be continuous bar or wire placed
with even spacing and without distortion beyond the
d. At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement to be
tolerances for the specified dimensions;
bonded shall be clean of mud, oil, or other deleterious
coatings that decrease bond.
c. Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as
permitted in the construction documents, or as
authorized by the licensed design professional;
d. For longitudinal column bars forming an endbearing

splice, the bearing of square cut ends shall be held in
concentric contact;

4-Hl2 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
e. Bar ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 1.5 e. For post-installed anchors, parameters associated
.' degrees of a right angle to the axis of the bars and with the strength used for design, including anchor
shall be fitted within 3 degrees of full bearing after category, concrete strength, and aggregate type;
assembly.
f. For adhesive anchors, parameters associated with the
426.6.3 Bending characteristic bond stress used for design in
accordance with Section 41704.5 including minimum
426.6.3.1 Compliance Requirements age of concrete, concrete temperature range, moisture
condition of concrete at time of installation, type of
a. Reinforcement shall be bent cold prior to placement, lightweight concrete if applicable, and requirements
unless otherwise permitted by the licensed design for hole drilling and preparation;
professional;
g. Qualification requirements for installers of anchors in
b. Field bending of reinforcement partially embedded in accordance with Section 417.8.1;
concrete shall not be permitted, except as shown in
the construction documents or permitted by the h. Adhesive anchors installed in a horizontal or
licensed design professional; upwardly inclined orientation, if they support
sustained tension loads;
c. Offset bars shall be bent before placement in the
forms. i. Required certifications for installers of adhesive
anchors that are installed in a horizontal or upwardly
426.6.4 Welding inclined orientation to support sustained tension loads
in accordance with Sections 417.8.2.2 and 417.8.2.3;
426.6.4.1 Compliance Requirements.
J. For adhesive anchors, proof loading where required
a. Welding of all non-prestressed bars shall conform to in accordance with Section 417.8.2.1;
the requirements of AWS D1.4M. ASTM
specifications for bar reinforcement, except for k. Corrosion protection for exposed anchors intended
ASTM A 706M, shall be supplemented to require a for attachment with future Work.
mill test report of material properties that
demonstrate conformance to the requirements in 426.7.2 Compliance Requirements
AWS DlAM;
a. Post-installed anchors shall be installed in accordance
b. Welding of crossing bars shall not be used for with the Manufacturer's Printed Installation
assembly of reinforcement unless permitted by the Instructions (MPH).
licensed design professional.
426.8 Embedments
426.7 Anchoring to Concrete
426.7.1 Design Information
a. Type, size, details, and location of embedments
a. Requirements for assessment and qualification of designed by the licensed design professional;
anchors for the applicable conditions of use in
accordance with Section 417.1.3; b. Reinforcement required to be placed perpendicular to
pipe embedments;
b. Type, size, location requirements, effective
embedment depth, and installation requirements for c. Specified concrete cover for pipe embedments with
anchors; their fittings;
c. Minimum edge distance of anchors in accordance d. Corrosion protection for exposed embedments
with Section 417.7; intended to be connected with future Work.
d. Inspection requirements in accordance with Section 426.8.2 Compliance Requirements:

426.13;
a. Type, size, details, and location of embedments not
shown in the construction documents shall be

CHAPTER 4 ~ Structural Concrete 4 183
submitted for review by the licensed design strength, and stability until permanent connections
professional; are completed;
"
b. Aluminum embedments shall be coated or covered to e. If approved by the licensed design professional, items,
prevent aluminum-concrete reaction and electrolytic embedded while the concrete is in a plastic state shall
action between aluminum and steel; satisfy (I) through (4):
c. Pipes and fittings not shown in the construction I. Embedded items shall protrude from the precast
documents shall be designed to resist effects of the concrete members or remain exposed for
material, pressure, and temperature to which they will inspection;
be subjected;
2. Embedded items are not required to be hooked or
d. No liquid, gas, or vapor, except water not exceeding tied to reinforcement within the concrete;
32 DC or 0.35 MPa pressure, shall be placed in the
pipes until the concrete has attained its specified 3. Embedded items shall be maintained 111 the
strength; correct position while the concrete remains
plastic;
e. In solid slabs, piping, except for radiant heating or
snow melting, shall be placed between top and 4. The concrete shall be consolidated around
bottom reinforcement; embedded items.
f. Conduit and piping shall be fabricated and installed 426.10 Additional Requirements for Prestressed
so that cutting, bending, or displacement of Concrete
reinforcement from its specified location is not
~~~. . 426.10.1 Design Information:
426.9 Additional Requirements for Precast a. Magnitude and location of prestressing forces;
Concrete
b. Stressing sequence of tendons;
c. Type, size, details, and location of post-tensioning
a. Dimensional tolerances for precast members and anchorages for systems selected by the licensed
interfacing members; design professional;
b. Details of lifting devices, embedments, and related d. Tolerances for placement of tendons and post-
reinforcement required to resist temporary loads from tensioning ducts in accordance with Table
handling, storage, transportation, and erection, if 426.6.2.1 (a);
designed by the licensed design professional.
e. Materials and details of corrosion protection for
426.9.2 Compliance Requirements: unbonded tendons, external tendons, couplers, end
fittings, post-tensioning anchorages, and anchorage
a. Members shall be marked to indicate location and regions;
orientation in the structure and date of manufacture;
f. Requirements for ducts for bonded tendons;
b. Identification marks on members shall correspond to
erection drawings; g. Requirements for grouting of' bonded tendons,
including maximum water-soluble chloride ion (en
c. Design and details of lifting devices, embedments, content requirements in Section 419.4.1.
and related reinforcement required to resist
temporary loads from handling, storage, 426.10.2 Compliance Requirements:
transportation, and erection shall be provided if not
designed by the licensed design professional; a. Type, size, details, and location of post-tensioning
anchorage systems not shown in the construction
d. During erection, precast members and structures shall documents shall be submitted to the licensed design
be supported and braced to ensure proper alignment, professional for review;

4-'1a4 CHAPTER 4 -- Structural Concrete
b. Tendons and post-tensioning ducts shall be placed exception to these strength requirements is provided
within required tolerances and supported to prevent in Section 426.1 0.2(k);
displacement beyond required tolerances during
concrete placement; k. Lower concrete compressive strength than required
by Section 426.1 0.2m shall be permitted if (1) or (2)
c. Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by the is satisfied:
licensed design professional and enclosed in housings
long enough to permit necessary movements; 1. Oversized anchorage devices are used to
compensate for a lower concrete compressive
d. Burning or welding operations in the vicinity of strength;
prestressing reinforcement shall be performed in such
a manner that prestressing reinforcement is not 2. Prestressing reinforcement is stressed to no more
subject to welding sparks, ground currents, or than 50 percent of the final prestressing force.
temperatures that degrade the properties of the
reinforcement; 426.11 Formwork
e. Prestressing force and friction losses shall be verified 426.11.1 Design of Formwork
by (1) and (2):
I. Measured elongation of prestressed
reinforcement compared with elongation a. Requirement for the contractor to design, fabricate,
calculated using the modulus of elasticity install, and remove formwork;
determined from tests or as reported by the
manufacturer; b. Location of composite members requiring shoring;
2. Jacking force measured using calibrated c. Requirements for removal of shoring of composite
equipment such as a hydraulic pressure gauge, members.
load cell, or dynamometer.
f. The cause of any difference in force determination
between (1) and (2) of Section 426.1 0.2( e) that a. Design offormwork shall consider (1) through (5):
exceeds 5 percent for pretensioned construction or 7
percent for post-tensioned construction shall be I. Method of concrete placement;
ascertained and corrected unless otherwise approved
by the licensed design professional; 2. Rate of concrete placement;
g. Loss of prestress force due to unreplaced broken 3. Construction loads, including vertical,
prestressed reinforcement shall not exceed 2 percent; horizontal, and impact;
h. If the transfer of force from the anchorages of the 4. Avoidance of damage to previously constructed
pretensioning bed to the concrete is accomplished by members;
flame cutting prestressed reinforcement, the cutting
locations and cutting sequence shall be selected to 5. For post-tensioned members, allowance for
avoid undesired temporary stresses in pretensioned movement of the member during application of
members; the prestressing force without damage to the
member.
L Long lengths of exposed pretensioned strand shall be
cut near the member to minimize shock to the b. Formwork fabrication and installation shall result in a
concrete; final structure that conforms to shapes, lines, and
dimensions of the members as required by the
j. Prestressing reinforcement in post-tensioned construction documents;
construction shall not be stressed until the concrete
compressive strength is at least 17 MPa for single- c. Formwork shall be sufficiently tight to inhibit
strand or bar tendons, 28 MPa for multi-strand leakage of paste or mortar;
tendons, or a higher strength, if required. An

d. Formwork shall be braced or tied together to strength to support such additional loads and
maintain position and shape. without impairing serviceability.
426.11.2 Removal of Formwork 426.12 Concrete Evaluation and Acceptance
426.11.2.1 Compliance requirements: 426.12.1 General
a. Before starting construction, the contractor shall 426.12.1.1 Compliance Requirements:

develop a procedure and schedule for removal of
formwork and installation of reshores, and shall a. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of
calculate the loads transferred to the structure during at least two l50x300 mm cylinders or at least three
this process; 100x200 mm cylinders made from the same sample
of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age
b. Structural analysis and concrete strength designated for f~;
requirements used in planning and implementing the
forrnwork removal and reshore installation shall be b. The testing agency performing acceptance testing
furnished by the contractor to the licensed design shall comply with ASTM CI077;
professional and, when requested, to the building
official; c. Qualified field testing technicians shall perform tests
on fresh concrete at the job site, prepare specimens
c. No construction loads shall be placed on, nor any for standard curing, prepare specimens for field
forrnwork removed from, any part of the structure curing, if required, and record the temperature of the
under construction except when that portion of the fresh concrete when preparing specimens for strength
structure in combination with remaining forrnwork tests;
has sufficient strength to support safely its weight
and loads placed thereon and without impairing d. Qualified laboratory technicians shall perform
serviceability; required laboratory tests;
d. Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by e. All reports of acceptance tests shall be provided to
structural analysis considering anticipated loads, the licensed design professional, contractor, concrete
strength of formwork, and an estimate of in-place producer, and, if requested, to the owner and the
concrete strength; building official.
e. The estimate of in-place concrete strength shall be 426.12.2 Frequency of Testing

based on tests of field-cured cylinders or on other
procedures to evaluate concrete strength approved by 426.12.2.1 Compliance Requirements:
the licensed design professional and, when requested,
approved by the building official; a. Samples for preparing strength test specimens of each
concrete mixture placed each day shall be taken in
f. Formwork shall be removed in such a manner not to accordance with (1) through (3):
impair safety and serviceability of the structure;
1. At least once a day;
g. Concrete exposed by formwork removal shall have
sufficient strength not to be damaged by the removal; 2. At least once for each 110m3 of concrete;
h. Forrnwork supports for post-tensioned members shall 3. At least once for each 460 m2·of surface area for
not be removed until sufficient post-tensioning has slabs or walls.
been applied to enable post-tensioned members to
support their dead load and anticipated construction b. On a given project, if total volume of concrete is such
loads: that frequency of testing would provide fewer than
five strength tests for a given concrete mixture,
i. No construction loads exceeding the strength test specimens shall be made from at least
combination of superimposed dead load plus live five randomly selected batches or from each batch if
load including reduction shall be placed on any fewer than five batches are used;
unshored portion of the structure under
construction, unless analysis indicates adequate

c. If the total quantity of a given concrete mixture is below f~ by more than the limit allowed for
¥ less than 38 rrr', strength tests are not required if acceptance;
evidence of satisfactory strength is submitted to and
approved by the building official. c. Cores shall be obtained, moisture-conditioned by
storage in watertight bags or containers, transported
426.12.3 Acceptance Criteria for Standard- Cured to the testing agency and tested in accordance with
Specimens ASTM '42. 'ores shall be tested between 48 hours
and 7 days after coring unless otherwise approved by
426.12.3.1 Compliance Requirements: the licensed design professional. The specifier of
tests referenced in ASTM C42M shall be the licensed
a. Specimens for acceptance tests shall be in accordance design professional;
with (1) and (2):
d. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be
I. Sampling of concrete for strength test specimens considered structurally adequate if (I) and (2) are
shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172M; satisfied:
2. Cylinders for strength tests shall be made and 1. The average of three cores is equal to at least 85
standard-cured in accordance with ASTM C31 M percent of f~;
and tested in accordance with ASTM C39M.
2. No single core is less than 75 percent of f~.
b. Strength level of a concrete mixture shall be
acceptable if (1) and (2) are satisfied: e. Additional testing of cores extracted from locations
represented by erratic core strength results shall be
1. Every arithmetic average of any three permitted;
consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds f~;
f. If criteria of for evaluating structural adequacy based
2. No strength test falls below f~ by more than 3.5 011 core strength results am not met, and if the
MPa if f~ is 35 MPa or less; or by more than structural adequacy remains in doubt the responsible
0.10f~ if f~ exceeds 35 MPa. authority shall he permitted to order a strength
evaluation in accordance with Section 427 for the
c. If either of the requirements of Section 426.12.3.I(b) questionable portion of the structure or take other
are not satisfied, steps shall be taken to increase the appropriate action.
average of subsequent strength results;
426.12.5 Acceptance of Steel Fiber-Reinforced
d. Requirements for investigating low strength-test Concrete
results shall apply if the requirements of Section
426.12.3.1(b)(2) are not met. 426.12.5.1 Compliance Requirements:
426.12.4 Investigation of Low Strength-Test Results a. Steel fiber-reinforced concrete used for shear
resistance shall satisfy (1) through (3):
1. The compressive strength acceptance criteria for
a. If any strength, test 0 f standard-cured cyl inders faUs standard-cured specimens;
below f~ by more than the limit allowed for
acceptance, or if tests of field-cured. cylinders 2. The residual strength obtained from flexural
indicate deficiencies in protection and curing, steps testing in accordance with ASTM C 1609M at a
shall be taken to ensure that structural adequacy 0[> mid-span deflection of 1/300 of the span length
the structure is not jeopardized; is at least the greater of (i) and (ii):
b. If the likelihood of low-strength concrete is I. 90 percent of the measured first-peak

confirmed and calculations indicate that structural strength obtained from a flexural test and;
adequacy is significantly reduced, tests of cores
drilled from the area in question in accordance with 11. 90 percent of the strength corresponding
ASTM C42M shall be permitted. In such cases, three to O.62ffi.
cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc (ASEP)

CHAPTEf'< '1· Structur al COllcl'ete
3. The residual strength obtained from flexural c. The date and time of mixing, quantity, proportions of
testing in accordance with ASTM Cl609M at a materials used, approximate placement location in the
- mid-span deflection of 1/150 of the span length structure, and results of tests for fresh and hardened
is at least the greater of (i) and (ii): concrete properties for all concrete mixtures used in
the Work;
j, 75 percent of the measured first-peak
strength obtained from a flexural test and; d. Concrete temperatures and protection given to
concrete during placement and curing when the
11. 75 percent of the strength corresponding ambient temperature falls below 5 °C or rises above
to o.62fFc. 35°C.
426.13 Inspection 426.13.2.3 Test reports shall be reviewed to verify

compliance with Section 420.2.2.5 if ASTM A6l5M
426.13,1 General deformed reinforcement is used to resist earthquake-
induced flexure, axial forces, or both in special moment
frames, special structural walls, and components of
426.13.1.1 Concrete construction shall be inspected as
required by the general building code. special structural walls including coupling beams and
wall piers.
426.13.1.2 In the absence of general building code
inspection requirements, concrete construction shall be 426.13.3 Items Requiring Inspection
inspected throughout the various Work stages by or under
the supervision of a licensed design professional or by a 426.13.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the general
qualified inspector in accordance with the provisions of building code, items requiring verification and inspection
this section. shall be continuously or periodically inspected in
accordance with Sections 426.13.3.2 and 426.13.3.3.
426.13.1.3 The licensed design professional, a person
under the supervision of a licensed design professional, or 426.13.3.2 Items requiring continuous inspection shall
a qualified inspector shall verify compliance with include (a) through (d):
construction documents.
a. Placement of concrete;
426.13.1.4 For continuous construction inspection of
special moment frames, qualified inspectors under the b. Tensioning of prestressing steel and grouting of
supervisron of the licensed design professional bonded tendons;
responsible for the structural design or under the
supervision of a licensed design professional with c. Installation of adhesive anchors in horizontal or
demonstrated capability to supervise inspection of these upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained
elements shall inspect placement of reinforcement and tension loads in accordance with Section 417.8.2.4;
concrete.
d. Reinforcement for special moment frames.
426.13.2 Inspection reports
426.13.3.3 Items requiring periodic inspection shall
426.13.2.1 Inspection reports shall document inspected include (a) through (g):
items and be developed throughout each construction
Work stage by the licensed design professional, person a. Placement of reinforcement, embedments, and post-
under the supervision of a licensed design professional, or tensioning tendons;
qualified inspector. Records of the inspection shall be
preserved by the party performing the inspection for at b. Curing method and duration of curing for each
least two years after completion of the project. member;
426.13.2.2 Inspection reports shall document (a) c. Construction and removal of forms and reshoring;
through (e)
d. Sequence of erection and connection of precast
a. General progress of the Work; members;
b. Any significant construction loadings on completed e. Verification of in-place concrete strength before
floors, members, or walls; stressing post-tensioned reinforcement and before

removal of shores and formwork from beams and

SECTION 427
.'_ structural slabs;
STRENGTH EVALUATION OF
f. Installation of cast-in anchors, expansion anchors, EXISTING STRUCTURES
and undercut anchors in accordance with Section
417.8.2; 427.1 Scope
g. Installation of adhesive anchors where continuous 427.1.1 Provisions of this section shall apply to the
inspection is not required in accordance with Section strength evaluation of existing structures by analytical
417.8.2.4 or as a condition of the assessment in means or by load testing.
accordance with ACI 35S.4M.
427.2 General
427.2.1 If there is doubt that a pari or all of a structure

meets the safety requirements of this . de and the
structure is to remain ill service, a trength evaluation
shaJi be carried out as required by the licensed design
professional or building official.
427.2.2 If the effect of a strength deficiency is well

understood and it is practical to measure the dimensions
and determine the material properties of the members
required for analysis, an analytical evaluation of strength
based on this information is permitted. Required data
shall be determined in accordance with Section 427.3.
427.2.3 II' the effect of a strength deficiency is not well

understood Or it is not practical to measure the dimensions
and determine the material properties of the members
required for analysis, a IMd test is required in accordance
with Section 427.4.
427.2.4 If uncertainty about the strength .of part or all

of a structure involves deterioration, and if the observed
response during the load test satisfies the acceptance
criteria in Section 427.4.5. the structure or parr of the
structure is permitted to remai n in service for a time
period specified by tho licensed design professional. If
deemed necessary by the licensed design professional
periodic re-evaluations shall be conducted.
427.3 Analytical Strength Evaluation
427.3.1 Verification of As-built Condition
427.3.1.1 Dimensions of members shall be established at

critical sections.
427.3.1.2 Locations and sizes of reinforcement shall be

determined by measurement. It shall be permitted ['0 base
reinforcement locations on available drawings if field-
veri 5ed at representative locations to confirm' the
information on the drawings.

CHAPTER If·· Structural Concrete 4·189
427.3.1.3 If required, an estimated equivalent f~ shall 427.4.1.4 A precast member to be made composite with
.' be based on analysis of results of cylinder tests from the

original construction or tests of cores removed from the
part of the structure where strength is in question.
cast-in-place concrete shall be permitted to be tested in
flexure as a precast member alone in accordance with (a)
and (b):
427.3.1.4 The method for obtaining and testing cores a. Test loads shall be applied only when calculations
shall be in accordance with ASTM C42M. indicate the isolated precast member will not fail by
compression or buckling;
427.3.1.5 The properties of reinforcement are permitted
to be based on tensile tests of representative samples of b. The test load, when applied to the precast member
the material in the structure. alone, shall induce the same total force in the tensile
reinforcement as would be produced by loading the
427.3.2 Strength Reduction Factors composite member with the test load in accordance
427.3.2.1 If dimensions, size and location of
reinforcement, and material properties are determined in 427.4.2 Test Load Arrangement and Load Factors
accordance with Section 427.3.1, it is permitted to
increase lP from the design values elsewhere in this Code, 427.4.2.1 Test load arrangements shall be selected to
however lP shall not exceed the limits in Table 427.3.2.1. maximize the deflection, load effects, and stresses in the
critical regions of the members being evaluated.
Table 427.3.2.1
Maximum Permissible Strength Reduction Factors 427.4.2.2 The total test load, Tt, including dead load
already in place shall be at least the greatest of (a), (b),
Maximum and (c):
Transverse
Strength Classification Permissible
reinforcement
Flexure, Tension a. Tt = 1. 1SD + 1. SL + O.4(Lror R) (427.4.2.2a)
All cases 1.0
Axial, or Controlled
Compression S irals* 0.9
both
Controlled Other
b. T, = 1.1SD + O. 9L + 1. SeLrar R) (427 .4.2.2b)
0.8
Bearin 0.8------" c. Tt = 1.3D (427.4.2.2c)

* Spirals shall satisfy Sections 410.7.6.3,420.2.2, and 425.7.3.
427.4.2.3 It is permittedto reduce L in Section 427.4.2.2

427.4 Strength Evaluation by Load Test in accordance with the general building code.
427.4.1 General 427.4.2.4 The load factor on the live load L in Section
427.4.2.2(b) shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.45
427.4.1.1 Load tests shall be conducted in a manner that except for parking structures, areas occupied as places of
provides for safety of life and the structure during the test. public assembly, or areas where L is greater than 4.8
kPa.
427.4.1.2 Safety measures shall not interfere with the
load test or affect the results. 427.4.3 Test Load Application
427.4.1.3 The portion of the structure subject to the test 427.4.3.1 Total test load, Tt, shall be applied in at least
load shall be at least 56 days old. If the owner of the four approximately equal increments.
structure, the contractor, the licensed design professional,
and all other involved parties agree, it shall be permitted
427.4.3.2 Uniform Tt shall be applied in a manner that
to perform the load test at an earlier age. ensures uniform distribution of the load transmitted to the
structure or portion of the structure being tested. Arching
of the test load shall be avoided.

4-190 CHAPTEF~ 4·~ Structural Concrete
427.4.3.3 After the final load increment is applied, T, 427.4.5.6 If Section 427 A.5.5 is not satisfied, it shall be
shall remain on the structure for at least 24 hours unless permitted to repeat the load test provided that the second
signs of distress, as noted in Section 427 A.5, are load test begins no earlier than 72 hours after removal of
observed. externally applied loads from the first load test.
427.4.3.4 After all response measurements are recorded, 427.4.5.7 Portions of the structure tested in the second
the test load shall be removed as soon as practical. load test shall be considered acceptable if:
427.4.4 Response Measurements

Az
<_
A
Llr_ 5 (427.4.5.7b)
427.4.4.1 Response measurements, such as deflection,
strain, slip, and crack width, shall be made at locations
where maximum response is expected. Additional 427.5 Reduced Load Rating
measurements shall be made if required.
427.5.1 If the structure under investigation does not
427.4.4.2 The initial value for all applicable response satisfy conditions or criteria of Section 427.3 or 427.4.5,
measurements shall be obtained not more than 1 hour the structure shall be permitted for use at a lower load
before applying the first load increment. rating, based on the results of the load test or analysis, if
approved by the building official.
427.4.4.3 A set of response measurements shall be
recorded after each load increment is applied and after T,
has been applied on the structure for at least 24 hours.
427.4.4.4 A set of final response measurements shall be

made 24 hours after T t is removed.
427.4.5 Acceptance Criteria
427.4.5.1 The portion of the structure tested shall show

no spalling or crushing of concrete, or other evidence of
failure.
427.4.5.2 Members tested shall not exhibit cracks

indicating imminent shear failure.
427.4.5.3 In regions of members without transverse

reinforcement, structural cracks inclined to the
longitudinal axis and having a horizontal projection
greater than the depth of the member shall be evaluated.
For variable-depth members, the depth shall be measured
at the mid-length of the crack.
427.4.5.4 In regions of anchorage and lap splices of

reinforcement, short inclined cracks or horizontal cracks
along the line of reinforcement shall be evaluated.
427.4.5.5 Measured deflections shall satisfy (a) or (b):
a.
it (427 A.5.5a)
Al~ 20, OOOh
b.
Al (427 A.S.5b)
A r-<-
4

SECTION 428 dependent effects, and compatibility of strains. The
analysis shall represent to a suitable approximation three-
~ BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS dimensional action of the shell together with its auxiliary
FOR CONCRETE THIN SHELLS members.
428.1 Scope and Definitions 428.1.9 Experimental Analysis
428.1.1 Provisions of this section shall apply to thin An analysis procedure based on the measurement of
shell and folded plate concrete structures, including ribs deformations or strains, or both, of the structure or its
and edge members. model; experimental analysis is based on either elastic or
inelastic behavior.
428.1.2 All provisions of this Code not specifically
excluded, and not in contlict with provisions of Section 428.2 Analysis and Design
428, shall apply to thin-shell structures.
428.2.1 Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis for
428.1.3 Thin Shells determining internal forces and displacements of thin
shells. This behavior shall be permitted to be established
Three-dimensional spatial structures made up of one or by computations based on an analysis of the uncracked
more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses are concrete structure in which the material is assumed
small compared to their other dimensions. Thin shells are linearly elastic, homogeneous and isotropic. Poisson's
characterized by their three-dimensional load-carrying ratio of concrete shall be permitted to be taken equal to
behavior, which is determined by the geometry of their zero.
forms, by the manner in which they are supported, and by
the nature of the applied load. 428.2.2 Inelastic analysis shall be permitted to be used
where it can be shown that such methods provide a safe
428.1.4 Folded Plates basis for design.
A class of shell structure formed by joining flat, thin slabs 428.2.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and
along their edges to create a three-dimensional spatial external loads shall be made to ensure consistency of
structure. results.
428.1.5 Ribbed Shells 428.2.4 Experimental or numerical analysis procedures

shall be permitted. where it can be shown that such
Spatial structures with material placed primarily along procedures provide a safe basis for design.
certain preferred rib lines, with the area between the ribs
filled with thin slabs or left open. 428.2.5 Approximate methods of analysis shall be
permitted where it can be shown that such methods
428.1.6 Auxiliary Members provide a safe basis for design.
Ribs or edge beams that serve to strengthen, stiffen, or 428.2.6 In prestressed shells, the analysis shall also
support the shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly consider behavior under loads induced during
with the shell. prestressing, at cracking load, and at factored load. Where
tendons are draped within a shell, design shall take into
428.1.7 Elastic Analysis account force components on the shell resulting from the
tendon profile not lying in one plane.
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on
equilibrium, compatibility of strains, and assumed elastic 428.2.7 The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement
behavior, and representing to a suitable approximation the shall be proportioned for the required strength and
three-dimensional action of the shell together with its serviceability, using either the strength design method of
auxiliary members. Section 422.1.3 or the design method of Section 424.
428.1.8 Inelastic Analysis 428.2.8 Shell instability shall be investigated and

shown by design to be precluded.
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on
equilibrium, nonlinear stress-strain relations for concrete 428.2.9 Auxiliary members shall be designed
and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and time- according to the applicable provisions of this chapter. It

4,192 CHAPTER I) .. Structural COl)clde
shall be permiued 10 assume lhac 11 portion the shell or 428.4.2 Cast-in-place Prestressed Concrete
equal 10 the flange widtb, as specified in Section 409.2.4,
acts with the .auxiliary member .. In such portions of the Prestressed cast-in-place concrete shells shall have
shell, the reinforcement pcrpcn licular [0 the auxiliary specified cover for reinforcement, ducts, and end fittings
member shall be at least equal to tflal required lor the at least that given in Table 428.4.2.
flange ora T-beam by Section 409.2.4.4.
Table 428.4.2
428.2.10 Strength design of shell slabs for membrane Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in Place
and bending forces shall be based on the distribution of Prestressed Concrete Shells
stresses and strains as determined from either elastic or an
inelastic analysis. Specified
Concrete
Reinforcem ent Cover,
exposure
428.2.11 In a region where membrane cracking IS mm
predicted, the nominal compressive strength parallel to Prestressing tendons and
Exposed to
the cracks shall be taken as O. 4f~. weather or in prestressing rei nforcement; 25
25
contact with the mm c/J bar, M W200 or MD
428.3 Design Strength ground 200 wire, and smaller
28mm ba r and larger dh
428.3.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete f~ Not exposed to
Prestressing tendons and
20
at 28 days shall not be less than 21 MPa. einforceruent
weather or in
contact with the 20 mrn cp ba r and larger db
428.3.2 Specified yield strength of non-prestressed ground 16 rnm cp bar ,MW200 or
10
reinforcement f y shall not exceed 420 MPa. MD200 wire , and smaller
428.4 Sped lied Cover 1'01' Thin Shells Unless a greater 428.4.3 Precast Non-Prestressed or Prestressed
concrete cover is required by the General Building ode Concrete Manufactured Under Plant
for fire protection specified concrete COVill' shall be in Conditions
accordance with Sec!iOI1 428.4.1 lilnmgh 428.4.3. For
shells subjected to corrosive environments 42:8..4.4 shall Precast non-prestressed concrete manufactured under
apply. plant conditions 'shells shall have specified cover for
reinforcement, dUCIS, and end fittings at least that given in
428.4.1 Cast-in-place Non-Prestressed Concrete Table 428.4.3.
Non-prestressed cast-in-place concrete shells shall have Table 428.4.3

specified cover for reinforcement shall be at least that Specified Concrete Cover for Precast Non-Prestressed
given in Table 428.4.1. or Prestressed Concrete Shells Manufactured Under
Plant Conditions
Table 428.4.1
Specified Concrete Cover for Cast-in Place Non- Specified
Concrete
Prestressed Concrete Shells Reinforcem ent Cover,
exposure
mm
Concrete Specified
20 mm cp throu gh 36 mm c/J
Reinforcement bars. Ten dons and
exposure Cover,mm
Exposed to prestressing reinforcement 40
weather or in larger than 16 mmcp
Exposed to 20 mrn cp or larger 50
contact with the throu It 4 o mm cp.
weather or in
contact with the 16 mm cp, MW200 or ground 16 mm cp
bar , MW2000r
ground MD200 wire, and 40 MD200 wire, and smaller;
!
32
smaller Tendons and strands 16
Not exposed to
weather or in
20 mrn cp or larger 20
mm an d smaller
tendons and
i
Not exposed to 20 II,
contact with the 16 mm cp, MW200 or weather or in einforcement
ground MD200 wire, and 12 contact with the 20 mrncp bar and larger 16
smaller ground 16 mm cp bar ,MW200 or
10
MD200 wire, and smaller

CHAPTEfc{ 4· Structliial Concrete 4··I~n
428.4.4 Specified Concrete Cover Requirements for Grade 420 reinforcement or 0.0020 for Grade 280
Corrosive Environments reinforcement.
428.4.4.1 In corrosive environment or other severe 428.5.4 Reinforcement for shear and bending moments
exposure conditions, the specified concrete cover shall be about axes in the plane of the shell slab shall be calculated
increased as deemed necessary and specified by the in accordance with Sections 406, 407 and 408.
licensed design professional. The applicable requirements
for concrete based on exposure categories in Section 428.5.5 The area of shell tension reinforcement shall
419.3.1.1 shall be satisfied, or other protection shall be be limited so that the reinforcement will yield before
provided. either crushing of concrete in compression or shell
buckling can take place.
428.4.4.2 For prestressed concrete members classified as
Class T or C in Section 424.4.2.1 and exposed to 428.5.6 In regions of high tension, membrane
corrosive environments or other severe exposure reinforcement shall, if practical, be placed in the general
categories such as those defined in Section 419.3.1.1, the directions of the principal tensile membrane forces.
specified concrete cover shall be at least 1.5 times the Where this is not practical, it shall be permitted to place
cover for prestressed reinforcement required by Section membrane reinforcement in two or more component
405.1.2 for cast-in-place prestressed concrete members directions.
and Section 405.1.3 for precast concrete members.
428.5.7 If the direction of reinforcement varies more
428.4.4.3 The increase cover requirement of Section than 10 degrees from the direction of principal tensile
428.4.4.2 need not be satisfied if the precompressed membrane force, the amount of reinforcement shall be
tensile zone is not in tension under sustained loads. reviewed in relation to cracking at service loads.
428.4.5 Concrete Surface Exposed to Earth or 428.5.8 If the magnitude of the principal tensile
Weather membrane stress within the shell varies greatly over the
area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total
428.4.5.1 If concrete surface is exposed to earth or tension shall be permitted to be concentrated in the
weather, concrete cover provisions shall be in accordance regions of largest tensile stress where it can be shown that
with Section 420.6.1. this provides a safe basis for design. The ratio of shell
reinforcement in any portion of the tensile zone shall be at
428.5 Shell Reinforcement least 0.0035 based on the overall thickness of the shell.
428.5.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist 428.5.9 Reinforcement required to resist shell bending
tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to resist moments shall be proportioned with due regard to the
tension from bending and twisting moments, to limit simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same
shrinkage and temperature cracking and as reinforcement location. Where shell reinforcement is required in only
at shell boundaries, load attachments and shell openings. one face to resist bending moments, equal amounts shall
be placed near both surfaces of the shell even though a
428.5.2 Tensile reinforcement shall be provided in two reversal of bending moments is not indicated by the
or more directions and shall be proportioned such that its analysis.
resistance in any direction equals or exceeds the
component of internal forces in that direction. 428.5.10 Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not
be spaced farther apart than 450 mm, nor farther apart
Alternatively, reinforcement for the membrane forces in than five times the shell thickness. Where the principal
the slab shall be calculated as the reinforcement required membrane tensile stress on the gross concrete area due to
to resist axial tensile forces plus the tensile force due to factored loads exceeds o. 33cpl..[f;· reinforcement shall
shear- friction required to transfer shear across any cross not be spaced farther apart than three times the shell
section of the membrane. The assumed coefficient of thickness and 450 mm.
friction, /1, shall not exceed that specified in Section
422.9.4.2. 428.5.11 Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell
and supporting members or edge members shall be
428.5.3 The minimum area of shell reinforcement at anchored in or extended through such members in
any section as measured in two orthogonal directions shall accordance with the requirements of Section 425, except
be at least 0.0018 times the gross area of the section for that the minimum development length shall be 1. 2/ d but
not less than 450 mm.

4·191~ CH!\P II~R 1.( •. Si.ruclurcll Concrete
428.5 2 Splice ~ development lengths or shell

SECTION 429
relnforcerncnt shalt be governed by the provisions of
Section 425.4.2, except thai the mlnlrnunt splice length of ALTERNATE DESIGN METHOD
tension bill's shall be 1.2 times the value required by
Secuon 425, but not less than 450 mm. The number of 429.1 Notations
splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept to a
practical minimum, Where splices arc necessary, they See Section 402.2.
shall be staggered at least ell with not more than one-
third of the reinforccmem spliced at any section. 429.2 Scope
428.6 Construction 429.2.1 Non-prestressed reinforced concrete members

shall be permitted to be designed using service loads
428.6.1 When removal of forrnwork is based on a (without load factors) and permissible service load
specific modulus of elasticity of concrete because of stresses in accordance with provisions of Section 429.
stability or deflection considerations, the value of the
modulus of elasticity Ee shalt be determined from flexural 429.2.2 For design of members not covered by Section
tests of field-cured beam specimens. The number of test 424, appropriate provisions of this Code shall apply.
specimens, the dimensions of test beam specimens, and
test procedures shalt be specified by the engineer-of- 429.2.3 All applicable provisions of this Code for non-
record. prestressed concrete, except Section 406.5, shall apply to
members designed by the Alternate Design Method.
428.6.2 Contract documents shalt specify the
tolerances for the shape of the shell. If construction results 429.2.4 Flexural members shall meet requirements for
in deviations from the shape greater than the specified deflection control in Section 424.2.1, and requirements of
tolerances, an analysis of the effect of the deviations shall Sections 408.7.2, 409.2.3, 409.6.1, and 409.9 of this
be made and any required remedial actions shall be taken Code.
to ensure safe behavior.
429.3 General
429.3.1 Load factors and strength reduction factors cp

shall be taken as unity for members designed by the
Alternate Design Method.
429.3.2 It shall be permitted to proportion members for

75 percent of capacities required by other parts of Section
429 when considering wind or earthquake forces
combined with other loads, provided the resulting section
is not less than that required for the combination of dead
and live load.
429.3.3 When dead load reduces effects of other loads,

members shall be designed for 85 percent of dead load in
combination with the other loads.
429.4 Permissible Service Load Stresses
429.4.1 Stresses in concrete shall not exceed the

following:
1. Flexure
Extreme fiber stress in compression ........ O. 45f~

CHAPTER 4·, Structural Concrete Ir-195
2. Shear" 429.6 Flexure

Beams and one-way slabs and footings:
For investigation of stresses at service loads, straight-line
Shear carried by concrete, Ve ·111 ffi theory for flexure shall be used with the following
Maximum shear carried by concrete plus shear assumptions:
reinforcement, ve ** _ ~ffi 429.6.1 Strains vary linearly as the distance from the
Joists: neutral axis, except for deep flexural members with
overall depth-span ratios greater than 2/5 for continuous
Shear carried by concrete, Ve ···· .. · .. ···· .. · .. ···111 ffi spans and 4/5 for simple spans, a nonlinear distribution of
strain shall be considered. See Section 409.9 of this
Two-way slabs and footings:
Chapter.
Shear carried by concrete,
Ve __ __ H· .. ·(11J (1 + 2/Pe)ffi 429.6.2 Stress-strain relationship of concrete is a
straight line under' service loads within permissible
but not greater than ,: ~ffi service load stresses.
3. Bearing on loaded areal 0. 31~

429.6.3 In reinforced concrete members, concrete
resists no tension.
429.4.2 Tensile stress in reinforcement Isshall not
exceed the following: 429.6.4 It shall be permitted to take the modular ratio,
n = Es/ Ee-as the nearest whole number (but not less than
1. Grade 280 reinforcement 140 MPa 6). Except in calculations for deflections, value of nfor
lightweight concrete shall be assumed to be the same as
2. Grade 420 reinforcement or greater and welded wire for normal weight concrete of the same strength.
fabric (plain or deformed) 170 MPa
429.6.5 In doubly reinforced flexural members, an
3. For flexural reinforcement, cp10 mm or less, in one- effective modular ratio of 2Es/ Ee shall be used to
way slabs of not more than 4 m span but not greater transform compression reinforcement for stress
than 200 MPa O.50 Iy computations. Compressive stress in such reinforcement
shall not exceed permissible tensile stress.
429.5 Development and Splices of Reinforcement
429.7 Compression Members With or Without
429.5.1 Development and splices of reinforcement Flexure
shall be as required in Section 425 of this chapter.
429.7.1 Combined flexure and axial load capacity of
429.5.2 In satisfying requirements of Section compression members shall be taken as 40 percent of that
409.7.3.8.3, Mn shall be taken as computed moment computed in accordance with provisions in Section 422 of
capacity assuming all posrtive moment tension this Chapter.
reinforcement at the section to be stressed to the
permissible tensile stress f s- and V u shall be taken as 429.7.2 Slenderness effects shall be included
unfactored shear force at the section. according to requirements of Table 406.6.3.1.1 (b),
Sections 406.6.4.4.1 through 406.4.4.2, 406.6.4.5.1. In
Eqs. 406.6.4.4.1, 406.6.4.5.1 and 406.6.4.5.2 the term P u
shall be replaced by 2.5 times the design axial load, and
the factor 0.75 shall be taken equal to ,1.0.
• For more detailed calculation of the shear stress carried by concrete Vc 427.7.3 Walls shall be designed in accordance with
and shear values for lightweight aggregate concrete, see Section 429.8.4.
** Designed in accordance with Section 406.4 of this code. Section 411 of this Chapter with flexure and axial load
+When the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, capacities taken as 40 percent of that computed using
permissible bearing stress on the loaded area shall be permitted to be Section 411. In Eq. 411.5.3.1, cp shall be taken equal to
multiplied by .J A21 A1 but not more than 2. When the supporting 1.0.
surface is sloped or stepped, A2 shall be permitted to be taken as the
area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a right pyramid or cone 429.8 Shear and Torsion
contained wholly within the support and having for its upper base the
loaded area, and having side slopes of I vertical-to 2 horizontal.
429.8.1 Design shear stress vshall be computed by

4-196 CHf\PTFR 4 -- Strllctur:1! CO!lCfI'*.'
(429.8.1) Quantity N / Ag shall be expressed in M Pa,

.' .V = V /(bwd)
429.8.4.6 Shear stresses carried by concrete Ve, apply to

where V is design shear force at section considered.
normal-weight concrete. When lightweight aggregate
concrete is used, one of the following modifications shall
429.8.2 When the reaction in direction of applicd
apply:
sheaf, introduces compresslon into the end regions of <I
member, sections located less than a distance cl from Iace
When fet is specified and concrete is proportioned in
of support shall (ie permitted to be designe I for I,he • arne
accordance with Section 426.4.4, fct/6.7 shall be
shear V as that computed at a distance tl.
substituted for .fi'c but the value of fct/6.7 shall not
429.8_' Whenever applicable, effect of torsion, in exceed.fi'c.
accordance with provisions of Section 409.5.4, shall be
added. Shear and torsioual mornent strengths pro idcd by
concrete an I limiting maximum strengths for torsion shall
I. When fer is not specified, the value of !Fe shalf be
multiplied by 0.75 for 'ail-lightweight" concrete and
be taken as 55 percent ol'the values given in Seolioll409. by 0.85 for 'sand-lightweight" concrete. Linear
interpolarlon shall be permitted when partial sand
429.8.4 Shear Stress Carried by Concrete replacement is used.
429.8.4.1 For members subject to shear and flexure 421).8.4.7 In determining shear stress carried by concrete
only, shear stress carded by concrete va shall not exceed v" whenever applicable, effects of axial tension due to
O.09..fi'c unless a more detailed calculation is made in creep and shrinkage ill restrained members shall be
'accordance with Section 429.&.4.4. included Rod it shall be permitted to include effects of
inclined flexural compression 111 variable-depth members.
429.8.4.2 For members subject to axial compression,
shear stress carried by concrete Ve, shall not exceed 429.8.5 Shear Stress Carried by Shear
0.09ffi unless a more detailed calculation is made in Reinforcement
429.8.5.1 Types of Shear Reinforcement
429.8.4.3 For members subject to significant axial
tension, shear reinforcement shall be designed to carry Shear reinforcement shall consist of one of the following:
total shear, unless a more detailed calculation is made
usmg 1. Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member;
Ve == 0.09(1 + 0.6N/Ag)ffi (429.8.4.3) 2. Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicular
to axis of member making an angle of 45 degrees or
more with longitudinal tension reinforcement;
Where N is negative for tension. Quantity N / Ag shall be
expressed in MPa. 3. Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion
making an angle of 30 degrees or more with
429.8.4.4 For members subject to shear and flexure longitudinal tension reinforcement;
only, it shall be permitted to compute ve by
4. Combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal
reinforcement;
Ve = 0.083.fi'c + 9pw Vd/M (429.8.4.4)
5. Spirals.
but shall not exceed 0.14ffi. Quantity Vd/ M shall not
be taken greater than 1.0, where M is design moment 429.8.5.2 Design yield strength of shear reinforcement
occurring simultaneously with V at section considered. shall not exceed 420 MPa.
429.8.4.5 For members subject to axial compression, it 429.8.5.3 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as
shall be permitted to compute ve by shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from
extreme compression fiber and shall be anchored ai both
ends according to Section 425.7.1 of this section to
Ve = 0.09(1 + 0.09N/Ag).fi'c (429.8.4.5) develop design yield strength 'of reinforcement,

Cf-I,I\P fE.f"( 1] -- SllllctmClI COI1Ci el(~ 4-197
429.8.5.4 Spacing Limits for Shear Reinforcement 429.8.5.6.2 When shear reinforcement perpendicular to
axis of member is used:
429.8.5.4.1 Spacing of shear reinforcement placed
perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2, (429.8.5.6.2)
nor 600 mm.
429.8.5.6.3 When inclined stirrups are used as shear
429.8.5.4.2 Inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement:
reinforcement shall be so spaced that every 45-degree
line, extending toward the reaction from mid-depth of (v-vc)bws
member (d/2) to longitudinal tension reinforcement, A = -..,.-----...,- (429.8.5.6.3)
V [",(sin a + cos a)
shall be crossed by at least one line of shear
reinforcement.
429.8.5.6.4 When shear reinforcement consists of a
single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up at
429.8.5.4.3 When (v-vc) exceeds ~/H, maximum the same distance from the support:
spacing given in Sections 429.8.5.4.1 and 429.8.5.4.2
shall be reduced by one-half.
(429.8.5.6.4)
429.8.5.5 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
429.8.5.5.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement

where (v- vc) shall not exceed G) /H.
shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members where design shear stress v is greater than one- 429.8.5.6.5 When shear reinforcement consists of a
half the permissible shear stress Vc carried by concrete, series of parallel bent-up bars or groups of parallel bent-
except: up bars at different distances from the support, required
area shall be computed by Eq. 429.8.5.6.3.
1. Slabs and footings;
429.8.5.6.6 Only the center three-quarters of the inclined
2. Concrete joist construction defined by Section 408.8 portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be considered
of this section; effective for shear reinforcement.
3. Beam with total depth not greater than 250 mm, 2.5
times thickness of flange, or one-half the width of 429.8.5.6.7 When more than one type of shear
web, whichever is greatest. reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of a
member, required area shall be computed as the sum of
429.8.5.5.2 Minimum shear reinforcement requirements the various types separately. In such computations, Vc
shall be included only once.
of Section 429.8.5.5.1 shall be permitted to be waived if
shown by test that required ultimate flexural and shear
strength can be developed when shear reinforcement is 429.8.5.6.8 Value of (v- vc) shall not exceed G) /H.
omitted.
429.8.6 Shear-Friction
429.8.5.5.3 Where shear reinforcement is required by
Section 429.8.5.5.1 or by analysis, minimum area of shear Where it is appropriate to consider shear transfer across a
reinforcement shall be computed by: given plane, such as an existing or potential crack, an
interface between dissimilar materials, or an interface
(429.8.5.5.3) between two concretes cast at different times, shear-
friction provisions of Section 422.9 of this Chapter shall
where bw and s are in mm. be permitted to be applied, with limiting maximum stress
for shear taken as 55 percent of that given in Section
429.8.5.6 Design of Shear Reinforcement 422.9.4.4. Permissible stress in shear-friction
reinforcement shall be that given in Section 429.4.2.
429.8.5.6.1 Where design shear stress v exceeds shear
stress carried by concrete v c» shear reinforcement shall be 429.8.7 Special Provisions for Slabs and Footings
provided in accordance with Sections 429.8.5.6.2 through
429.8.5.6.8. 429.8.7.1 Shear capacity of slabs and footings in the
vicinity of concentrated loads or reactions is governed by
the more severe of two conditions:

4 cl98 CHAPTEH 4 Structural Concrete
426J.8.7.1.1 Beam action rOt" slab or Iooting, whh a of this section shall be used, with shear strengths provided
critical section extending ill a plane across the entire by concrete and limiting maximum strengths [or shear
width and located at a distance d Irorn race or taken as 55 percent of the values given in Section 416. In
concentrated load or reaction area. For this condition, the Section 411.5.4,6, the design axial load shall be
slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with multiplied by 1.2 if compression and 2.0 if tension, and
Sections 429.8.1 through 429.8.5. substituted for N u'
429.8.7.1.2 Two-way action for slab or footing, with a 429.8.9 Composite Concrete Flexural Members
critical section perpendicular to plane of slab and located
so that its perimeter is a minimum, but need not approach For design of compo He concrete flexural members
closer than d/2 to perimeter of concentrated load or permissible horizontal shear stress 1'Jlt shall not exceed 55
reaction area. For this condition, the slab or footing shall percent or
the horizontal shear strengths given in Section
be designed in accordance with Sections 429.8.7.2 and 416.4.3.1 of this '!lapier,
429.8.7.3.
429.8.7.2 Design shear stress v shall be computed by
(429.8.7.2)
where V and bo, shall be taken at the critical section

defined in Section 429.8.7.1.2.
429.8.7.3 Design shear stress v shall not exceed Vc

given by Eq. 429.8.7.3 unless shear reinforcement is
provided
(429.8.7.3)
but Vc shall 110t exceed G) .[1fPc is the ratio of long

side to short side of concentrated load or reaction area.
When lightweight aggregate concrete is used, the
modillcarions of Section 429.8.4.6 shall apply.
429.8.7.4 If shear reinforcement consisting of bars or

wires is provided in accordance with Section 408.7.6 of
this section, Vc shall not exceed CJ m, and v shall not
exceed O. 25m.
429.8.7.5 If shear reinforcement eonsistiug of Sleet J-

or C-shape.d sections (shearheads) is provided in
accordance with Section 408.7.7 of this section, 17 on the
critical section defined ill Section 429:8.7: 1.2 shalt not
exceed 0,3m, and VOLI the critical section defined in
Section 422.6.9.8 shall not exceed G) m·
In Eqs, 422.6.9.6 and 422.6.9.7. design shear forte V
shall be multiplied by 2 and substituted for Vu .
429.8.8 Special Provisions for Other Members
For design of deep flexural members, brackets and

corbels, and walls, the special provisions of Section 416.4

CHAPTER 4·· Structural Concrete 4-199
APPENDIX A
.' As an aid to users of the NSCP Vol. 1, 71h Edition and ACT Building Code, information on size, areas, and weights of various
steel reinforcement is presented
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INFORMATION
ASTM STANDARD PHILIPPINE STANDARD (SI)
Bar Size Nominal Nominal Nominal Bar Size Nominal Nominal

Designation Diameter Area mass Designation Area, mm2 mass, kg/m
inch mm in" mnr' Ib/ft. kg/m
3 0.375 9.5 0.11 71 0.376 0.560 10 79 0.618
4 0.500 12.7 0.20 129 0.668 0.994 12 113 0.890
5 0.625 15.9 0.31 199 1.043 1.552 16 201 1.580
6 0.750 19.1 0.44 294 1.502 2.235 20 314 2.465
7 0.875 22.2 0.60 387 2.044 3.042 n.a n.a n.a
8 1.000 25.4 0.79 510 2.670 3.973 25 491 3.851
9 1.128 28.7 1.00 645 3.400 5.060 28 616 4.831
10 1.270 32.3 1.27 819 4.303 6.404 32 804 6.310
II 1.410 35.8 1.57 1006 5.313 7.907 36 1019 7.986
14 1.693 43.0 2.25 1452 7.650 11.382 40 1257 10.861
18 2.257 57.3 4.00 2581 13.60 20.240 58 2642 20.729
"Nominal Nominal
Nominal
Type* diameter, . 2 weight,
area, in.
ASTM Standard Reinforcement Bars m. lb/ft
0.192 0.029 0.098
Nominal Nominal Prestressing 0.196 0.030 0.102
Nominal
Type* diameter, • 2 weight, wire 0.250 0.049 0.170
area, 111.
in. lb/ft 0.276 0.060 0.204
114(0.250) 0.036 0.122 3/4 0.44 1.50
5/6 (0.313) 0.058 0.197 7/8 0.60 2.04
Seven-wire Prestressing
3/8 (0.375) 0.080 0.272 1 0.78 2.67
strand bars (Type
7/16 1-118 0.99 3.38
(Grade 0.108 0.367 I, plain)
(0.438) 1-1/4 1.23 4.17
250)
112(0.500) 0.144 0.490 1-3/8 1.48· 5.05
(0.600) 0.216 0.737 5/8 0.28 0.98
3/8 (0.375) 0.085 0.290 3/4 0.42 1.49
7/16 Prestressing 1 0.85 3.01
0.115 0.390
(0.438) bars (Type 1-1/4 1.25 4.39
Seven-wire
112(0.500) 0.153 0.520 II, 1-3/8 1.58 5.56
strand
(0.520) 0.167 0.570 deformed) 1-3/4 2.58 9.10
(Grade
(0,563) 0.192 0.650 2-1/2 5.16 18.20
270)
(0.600) 0.217 0.740 3 6.85 24.09
(0.620) 0.231 0.780 • AVailable of some strand, WIre. find bar size should be In"cslllll'lCd In
advance.
(0.700) 0.294 1.000

WRI STANDARD WIRE REINFORCEMENT (Customary Units)*

II
Nominal Nominal Nominal Area, in'/ft of'width of various spacings
W & 0 size
Diameter, area, weight, Centcr-to-eenter spllcil_I!I. ill.
Plain Deformed Ill. in. Iblfi 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 16 18
W45 D45 0.757 0.450 1.530 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.909 0.680 0.540 0.450 0.340 0.300
W31 031 0.628 0.310 1.054 1.860 1.240 0.930 0.620 0.470 0.370 0.310 0.232 0.207
W30 D30 0.618 a.JOO 1.020 1.800 1.200 0.<;00 0.600 O.~150 0.360 OJ{JII 0.225 0.200
W211 028 0.597 0.280 0.952 1.680 1.120 0.8~O 0.560 0.420 0.330 0280 0.210 0.187
W2G 026 (1.575 0.260 0.884 1.560 1.040 0.780
--
0.520 O:39U 0.310 n..260 0.195 0.173
W24 D24 0.553 0.240 0.816 1.440 0.960 0.720 00480 0.360 0.280 0.240 0.180 0.160
W22 022 0.529 0.220 0.748 1.320 0.880 0.660 0.440 0.330 0.260 0.220 0.165 0.147
W20 020 0.505 0.200 0.680 1.200 0.800 0.600 00400 0.300 0.240 0.200 0.150 0.133
WI8 DI8 0.479 0.180 0.6[2 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.360 0.270 0.216 0.180 0.135 0.120
WI6 016 00451 0.[60 0.544 0.960 0.640 00480 0.320 0.240 0.192 0.160 0.120 0.107
WI4 DI4 0.422 0.140 0.476 0.840 0.560 00420 0.280 0.210 0.168 0.140 0.105 0.093
WI2 DI2 0.391 0.120 00408 o.no OASO 0.360 0.240 0.180 0.144 0.120 0.090 0.080
WII 011 0.374 0.110 0.374 0.660 0.440 0.330 0.220 0.165 0.132 0.110 0.083 0.073
W10.5 - 0.366 0.\05 0.357 0.630 00420 0.315 0.210 0.157 0.126 0.105 0.071 0.070
WID DID 0.357 0.100 0.340 0.600 00400 0.300 0.200 0.150 0.120 0.100 0.080 0.067
W9.5
W9
-
09
0.348
0.338
0.095
0.090
0.323
0.306
0.570
0.540
0.380
0.360
0.285
0.270
0.190
0.180
0.142
0.135
0.114
0.108
0.095
0.090
0.075
0.068
0.063
0.060
W8.5 ·
08
0.329
0.319
0.085
0.080
0.289
0.272
0.510 0.340 0.255 0.170 0.127 0.102 0.085 0.064 0.057
W8 0.480 0.320 0.240 0.160 0.120 0.096 0.080 0.060 0.053
W7.5 · 0.309 0.075 0.255 00450 0.300 0.225 0.150 0.112 0.090 0.075 0.056 0.050
W7 07 0.299 0.070 0.238 0.420 0.280 0.210 0.140 0.[05 0.084 0.070 0.053 0.047
W6.5
W6
·
06
0.288
0.276
0.065
0.060
0.221
0.204
0.390
0.360
0.260
0.240
0.19:>
0.180
0.130
0.120
0.097
0.090
0.078
0.072
(),O()S
0.060
0.049
0.045
0.043
0.040
W5.5 - 0.265 '0-055 0.187 0.330 . 0.220 0.165 0.110 0.082 0.066 0.055 0.041 0.037
W5 05 0.252 0.050 0.170 0.300 0.200 0.150 0.100 0.075 0.060 0.050 0.038 0.033
W4.5 - 0.239 0.045 0.153 0.270 0.[80 0.135
O.[20
0.090 0.067 0.054 0.045 0.034 0.030
W4 04 0.226 0.040 0.136 0.240 0.[60 0.080 0.060 0.048 0.040 0.030 0.027
W3.5 · 0.211 0.035 0.119 0.2[0 0.[40 0.105 0.070 0.052 0.042 0.035 0,026 0.023
W3 - 0.195 0.030 0.102 0.180 0.120 0.090 0.060 0.045 0.036 0.030 0.023 0.020
W2.9 - 0.192 0.029 0.098 0.[ 74 0.116 0.087 0,058 0.043 0.035 0.029 0.022 0.019
W2.5 - 0.178 0.025 0.085 0.[50 0.100 0.075 0.050 0.037 0.030 0.025 0.019 0.017
W2.1 - 0.[61 0.020 0.070 0.130 0.084 0.063 0.042 0.032 0.025 0.021 0.016 0.014
W2 - 0.160 0.020 O,O6!:l (J.IlO 0.080 0.060 0.040 0.030 0.024 0.020 0.015 0.013
WIA · 0.134 0.014 0.049 0.084 0.056 0.042 0.028 0.028 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.099
• Reference "Stnrctural Welded Wire Reinforcement Manual of Standard Practice," Wire Reinforcement Institute, Hartford, CT, Sixth Edition, Apr., 2001

CHAPTER II -- Structural Concrete 4~201
WRI STANDARD WIRE REINFORCEMENT (Metric Units)*

II' Equivalent Area, mmi/m, of width of various spacings
W & Dsize MW& MD size Nom. Nom. Nominal
Customary Units Metric Units Dia., area, weight,
Center-to-center spacing, mm.
mm. mm' kg/m
Plain Deformed Plain Deformed 51 76 102 152 203 254 305 406 457
W45 045 MW290 M0290 19,23 290 2.280 5686 3816 2843 1908 1429 1142 951 714 635
W31 031 MW200 M0200 15.96 200 1.570 3922 2632 1961 1316 985 787 656 493 438
W30 031 MW194 M0194 15.70 194 1.020 3804 2553 1902 1276 956 764 636 478 425
W28 028 MWI81 MOl81 15.17 181 0.952 3549 2382 1775 1191 892 713 593 446 396
W26 026 MWI68 MOl68 14.61 168 0.884 3294 2211 1647 1105 828 661 551 414 368
W24 024 MWI55 MOl55 14.04 155 0.816 3039 2040 1520 1020 764 610 508 382 339
W22 022 MWI42 MOl42 13.44 142 0.748 2784 1868 1392 934 700 559 466 350 311
W20 020 MWI29 MOl29 12.83 129 1.010 2540 1693 1270 847 635 508 423 318 282
WI8 018 MWI16 MOl16 12.17 116 0.91I 2286 1524 1143 762 572 457 381 286 254
WI6 016 MW103 MOI03 11.46 103 0.809 2032 1355 1016 677 508 406 339 254 225
WI4 014 MW90 M090 10.72 90 0.708 1778 1185 889 593 445 356 296 222
WI2 012 MW77 M077 9.93 77 0.607 1524 1016 762 508 381 305 254 190
~ 168
WlI OIl MW71 M071 9.50 71 0.556 1397 931 699 466 349 279 233 175 155
WIO.5 - MW68 - 9.30 68 0.531 1334 889 667 445 332 267 222 167 149
WIO 010 MW65 M065 9.07 65 0.506 1270 847 635 423 318 254 212 160 142
W9.5 - MW61 - 8.84 61 0.481 1207 804 603 402 301 241 201 ISO 133
W9 09 MW58 M058 8.59 58 0.456 1143 762 572 381 286 229 191 143 127
W8.5
W8
-
08
MW55
MW52
-
M052
8.36
8.10
55
52
0.430
0.405
1080
1016
720
677
540
508
360
339
269
254
216
203
180
169
135
128
120
114
W7.5 . MW48 - 7.85 48 0.379 963 635 476 318 237 191 159 118
~ 98
W7 07 MW45 M045 7.60 45 0.354 889 593 445 296 222 178 148 III
W6.5 - MW42 - 7.32 42 0.329 826 550 413 275 205 165 138 103 92
W6 06 MW39 M039 7.01 39 . 0.304 762 508 381 254 191 152 127 96 85
W5.5
W5
-
05
MW36
MW32
M036
M032
6.73
6.40
36
32
0.278
0.253
699
635
466
423
349
318
233
212
174
159
140
127
116
106
89
78
79
70
W4.5 - MW29 - 6.07 29 0.228 572 381 286 191 142 114 95.3 71 63
W4 04 MW26 M026 5.74 26 0.202 508 339 254 169 127 102 84.7 64 57
W3.5 - MW23 - 5.36 23 0.177 445 296 222 148 110 88.9 74.1 56 50
W3 - MWI9 - 4.95 19 0.152 381 254 191 127 95.3 76.2 63.5 47 42
W2.5 - MWI6 - 4.52 16 0.126 317 212 159 106 78.3 63.5 52.9 39 35
W2.1 - MW14 -. 4.11 14 0.106 267 178 133 88.9 65.6 52.9 44.5 34 31
W2 - MWI3 4.06 13 0.101 254 169 127 84.7 63.5 50.8 42.3 32 28
W MWIO 3.51 10 0.076 191 127 953 63.5 48.4 38.1 31.8 25 22
WI.4 - MW9 - 3.40 9 0.071 178 119 88.9 59.3 44.5 36.0 29.6 22 20

I{ 202 CHAPTER 4 - Structural Concrete
~PPENJ)IXB
Equivalence between-Sf Metric,
MKS-Metric, and U.S. ('",nolllll,,), Unit of NOI1.hUTllogcnm,.I"lunli,,,,s in the Code
U.S_ Customary units stress in pounds per
Provision Number 51-metric stress in MP. mks-metric stress in kgf/cnr'
!Il,lore inch [j,!i)
1 MPa 10klli1cm' 145 psi
f~: 21 MPa l~= 210 kgrlcm' fc = 3, 000 pSI
I;= 28 MP. f~ = 280 ~gl'lc,"' f~ = 4,000 psi
f~ = 35 MPa f~= 350 ~1l1'lc'Il' f~ = 5,000 psi
f~ = 40 MPa f~ = 420 kglJcm' f~ = 6, 000 p~i
I» = 280 MPa f ~ = 2,800 kgf/cm' t» = 40,000 psi
fy'" 420 MPa /, : 4,200 kglYcm1 fT = 60,000 psi
f~" = 1725 MP. f P" = 17,600 kgll1>OI' f~u= 250,000 psi
f"" = 1860 MP. fl,,, = 19,000 kgf/cm' fv~ = 270,000 psi
,Jj{inMP. 3.1fJ.{f. in kgf/cm' 12minpsi
O. 313m in Mr. In in kgf/cnr' 3. 77 !if: in psi

o. Oalm in MP. 0.27.rn in kgf/cm' minpsi
O.17m in MP. O. 53,fF., in kgf/cnr' 2m III psi

406.6.4 5.4 M~.""" = Pu(l. 5 + O.03h) Ml,,,,''': Pu(15 + 0.03h) M2."L(n : Pu(0.6 + O. 03h)
407.3.1.1.1 ( 0.4
[,)
+ 70ii (0.4 + 7~~0) (0.4+_f_y
100,000
)
407.3.1.1.2 (1.65 - 0, 0003w,) 2: 1.09 (1.65 - 0.0003w,) 2: 1.09 (1.65 - O. 0003w,) 2: 1.09
0.0018 x 420 0.0018 x 4200 0.0018 x 60,000
407.6.1.1
r, 11.;
fy
A. r, 11,
b,s bss b,«

407.7.3.5(c) 0.41T 4.2, 60-
l' y, fYl
in (0. 8 +..!r...) fn(0.8+...lz_) in (0.8 + _!z_)

408.3. U(b)(c) h: ..... > 125m01 h= 1<)100 > 12.5 ern h= ~OO)lliQ > 5'
36 + 5P(<<,n.- 0.2) 36 + SP(Ur,» - o. 2) 36 + 5{1,(<<'m- 0.2) - In
408.3.1 .2(d)(e)
fn(0.8+_2__) fn(0.8+~) e; (0.8 +__1r_)
h : 1400 > 90 rm - ".000 >9 "" "'QQ,''"O > 3 5'
36 + ')!i - n - 36 + 9/i em 36 + 9{J -' In
408.3.4.1 r,« 0.50 m f,,,;1.6m t,« 6ffi
408.6.1.1
0.0018 x 420
lis
0.0018 x 4200
A, . 0.0018 x 60~ 000
I, t, f~ II,
0.17ffi 0.53ffi 2m
408.6.2.3
0.50m 1.6m 6ffi
O.37J7Ihwd. 1.2,fF.IJ"d 4.5mbwd

A, = ·'A.. - A, :
408.7.5.6.3.1(.) and II f), r,
(b)
2.1bwd 21bwd 300bwd
A, =---r;-- A :--
s fy As=t;-
408.7.7.1.2 </>o.sffi </>1.6ffi </>6ffi
409.3.1.l.1
0.4+
r,
700 0.4 + 7000
r, 0.4+_f_y_
100,000
409.3.1.1.2 (1.65 - O. 0003wcl 2: 1.09 (1.65 - 0.0003wc) 21.09 (1.65 - 0.0005wcl2: 1.09
0.25m 0.80ffi 3ffi b d

t;-bwd -f- -bwd fy w
y
409.6.1 ,2(a) and (b)
1.4 14 200
y;bwd fy bwd ,.
Tbwd
409.6.3.1 Vu"; </>0.17ffibwd Vu ,,; </>0.53ffibwd V,,"; </>2mbwd
mbws ffibwS mbwS

Av.min 2 0.062 T
yt
Av,min ~ 0.2 fy< Av,min 2: 0.75 Tyl
409.6.3.3(a) and (b)
ffibwS ffibwS 50bws
Av,min 2: O. 35 T
y<
Av.min 2 3.5 T
yt
AV'nlfn~-f-
y<

CHAPTER 4 .- Structural Concrete 4·203
b
(A. + 2A,)ls <'= 0.062 fFcb
w
f (A. + 2A,l/s <'= 0.2
fFcbw
fy, (A. + 2A,l/s <'= O. 75fFc ,w
yt
yt
409.6.4.2(0) and (b)
0.35bw s.se, 50bw
(A. + 2A,)ls <'= -,- (A. + 2A,l/s <'= -,- (A. + 2Atl/s <'= -,-
y' yt yr
0.42fFcA,p 1.33fFcA,p (At) 'y, 5jHAp
409.6.4.3(a) and (b)

Al•min,,; 'y
(At)
s
'yt
- Ph-
r, Al•min,,; ,
y
- -
s
PhT
y
A'.min =t:': (At)
5 Ph'y
'yt
0.42fFcA,p (0. 175bw) r; 1. 33fFcA,p (25b

-- )
w 'y,
Ph-
5jf.Ap (25bw) r;
At.mill ,,; ,
y
- -,--
yt
PhT
y
At.m," s t, r; r, Al•min ,,; -,--
y
- -,-
yt
PhT
y
bws bws bws

409.7.3.5(c) 60-
OA1,
yt
4.2,
y' r;
409.7.6.2.2 o.33fFcbwd l.lfFcbwd 4fFcbwd
409.9.2 1 Vu ,,; </>0.83fFcbwd Vu ,,; </>2.65fFcbwd Vu"; </>lofFcbwd
fFcbwS fFcbws fFcbws
Av.m," <'= 0.062 T
y,
Av.min <'= 0.2 T
y,
Av.m," <'= 0.75 ,
yt:
410.6.2.2
fFcbwS fFcbwS fFcbwS
AV•mill <'= 0.35 T Av,nlill ;::: 3.5 ,
yt
AV•mill <'= 0.35 ,
yt
y'
410.7.6.5.2 0.33fFcbwd l.lfFcbwd 4fFcbwd

411.5.4.3 0.83fFchd 2. 65fFclid 10fFchd
411.5.4.5 and
O.l7AfFchd 0.53AfFchd UfFchd
411.5.4.6(a)
411.5.4.6(b) ( 0.29Nu) fFc

0.17 1 +-A-,- A '~bwd 0.53 (1 + 3~~J AfFcbwd 2 (1 + 5:~~J AfFcbwd
fFc N"d fFc Nud fFc Nud

411.5.4.6(d) V, = 0 ..27A hd+'4f V, = O. 88A hd + 4fw V, = 3. 3A hd +f
w 4 w
411.5.4.6(e) V = [o.os).m+ e w' (0 um+~)l'l.~ hd _ [0.16).m.,":

V, - + (o.mm
~_!=.
+ °'::")1 hd V = [0.16).mc + e W'
(0 mm+O'N")]
"w' hd
c c ~_!:- I: ~_~
v" • • V" 1 v" z
412.5.3.3 fFc";8.3 inMPa fFc,,; 27 in kgf/crrr' fFc,,; 100 inpsi
Vu"; </>0.66A,vfFc Vu ";</>2.1AwfFc Vu ";</>8AwfFc

412.5.3.4
m,,; 8.3 inMP. m ,,; 27 in kgf/cm' m,,; 100 in psi
414.5.2.1. M" = 0.42AfFcsm Mn = 1. 33AfFcsm Mn = 5AfFcsm
414.5.4.1 (a) M" _ PlI < </>0.42A,f'f; M" _ PlI < </>1.33Am Mll PU<</>5AfFc
Sm Ag - c Sm Ag - C Sm Ag - c
4
414.5.5.I(a) Vn = o.lufFcbwh Vn = 0.35AfFcbwh VII = "3 AfFcbwh
VII = 0.11 [1 +~lAfFcboh Vn = 0.35[1 +~lAfFcboh' Vn = [1 +~l~AfFcboh

414.5.5.I(b) and (c)
V" = O. 22AfFcboh Vn = 0.7ufFcboh Vn = 2(~AfFcboh)
fFcbws fFcbws fFcbwS

Av.m'n <'= 0.062 T
yt
Av.m'n <'= 0.2 ,
yt:
Av.m'n <'= 0.75 ,
y'
415.4.2
Av.m'n <'= 0.35 mT bwS
yt
Av.min <'= 3.5
fFcbwS
,
yt
Av,rnin;:::
bws
50,
yt
416.4.4.1 </>(3.5bvdl <IJ (35 b.JJd) <IJ(500bvdl
A( 1.8 + 0.6 A;~;,) bud A (18 + O. 6 A;~;,) bvd A(260 + 0.6A;~;')bvd

416.4.4.2
3.5bvd 35bvd 500bvd
o.sse,« 5.6bvd 80bvd
fFcbws fFcbwS fFcbwS
Av.mln <'= 0.062 , Av.m'n <'= 0.2 , Av.m'" <'= 0.75 ,
yr yt o yt
416.4.6. I
bws bws bws
Av.m'n <'= 0.35, Av.m'n <'= 3. 5 AV.mln<'= 50
yt Tyt Tyt
(3.3 + O. 08'~lbwd (34 + O. 08'~lbwd (480 + O. 08'~lbwd
416.S.2.4(b) and (c)
l1bwd 110bwd 1600b",d
416.5.2.5(bl (5.5 - 1.9 C;;) bwd (55 - 20 ~) bwd (800 - 280 C;;) bwd
15 L5
Nb = k,AafFche{ Nb = k,AafFche/.5 Nb = kcAafFchef
417.4.2.2.
kc=10 or 7 k,=10 or 7 k,=24 or 17
417.4.2.2b Nb = 3.9AafFche!/J Nb = 5.8A.fFche!/3 Nb = 16AafFche!/3
417.4.4.1 Nsb = 13Ca1FsAafFc Nsb = 42.5Ca1FsAafFc Nsb = 160Ca1FsAa,f'f;

417.4.5.1d 10M
7.6
lOti"
!if lOti"
~
4175.2.2a
417.5,2.2b
Vb = 0.6
I!
Ce)
a
02
.[if;.A"ftCco
Vb = 3.1 A",Ir.;(c"J) ,,5

,)'·5 v, -- 0.6 (!.!)"'
tin ,,5
.[if;.AaftCca,)
",. = 3. 8Aam(eD,)':!'!
Vb = 7
rr
<1:, fii:,AaftCca,)15
Vb = C)), • .[ff,(Cn,)15
. 02
417.5.23 Vb = 0.66(~)
02
.[if;.AaftCca,)15 Vb = 2.1 (;:) fii:,AoftCCal)L5 Vb = 8 till
(l'.)".2 fii:,AaJli::Ccad '5
d"
418.7.5.2 r~ > 70 MPa f~ > 700 kgl7~ml r:. > 10,000 Il'li
418.7.5.3 SO= 100 + --3- CISO- "~) So= 10+ Cs- S li
- ..) So =4+ (14
--3-
-IL.)
418.7.5.4(a) -J:c_
k f-17S+ 0 . 6>- 1• 0
I~
kf = 1750 + 0.6 ~ 1.0
t:
kf = 25.000 + 0.6.2: 1.0
1. nJli::Aj S.3AftAj 20AftAj
418.8.4.1 1. UJli::Aj 4.0A/HAj lSA/HAj
1.0A{f'.:A/ a, 2i.,fffJ'1 12).,ff.A}
418.8.5.1 I! dh = l,db/(5. 4-Aft) fdh = r:t((b/(17~/1D e dh = I yrl/'/( 65}./H),
418.10.2.1 0.083A,,,,A,ff; 0.2711""A.[f. A,vAft
418.10.2.2 0.171l •• .J..fFc 0.S3A<vA/f" 2A."A.[f.
Vn = A,v(a,Aft + ptfy) Vn = A,v(a,Aft+ p,ly) V" = A,v(a,Aft + p,fy)
hw a, = O.BO hw hw
418.1004.1
a, = O.ZS for fw:S 1.5 for fw:S 1.5 a, = 3.0 for t:= 1.5
hw a, = 0.53 hw hw
a, = 0.17 for 'f:; :s 2.0 for f,.. s 2.0 ae = O. ZO for f .. :s Z. 0
0.66A,vAft 2. 12AevAft BA,vAm

418.10.4.4
0.83AcvAm 2.65ACI,'J.[lf.. 1.M."Am
418.10.4.5 0.83A,vAm 2.651), ... .fFc iOIl.,,).m
418.10.6.5(a) 2.8!r, 28/1,. 400/1,.
418.10.6.5(b) O.83jl"'I~m 0.271l"vJ.,f'i'; A••')./fl
418.10.7.2 O.33)..[ff,A,,,, 1.1i./fltt ... 4),mAew
418,10.7.4 VII = ZAvd/ysill a:s O.83.[F;.Acw ti" = 211,'dfr 5"111a :S Z.:65,[f:.A.", v, = 2A""lysin a:S 10mA,w
ftbws bwS ftbwS
Av.min~ 0.062 Tyt A u, min ~ 0.2 m f A.,mln ~ 0.75 Tyt
y'
418.12.7.6(b)
bws bws 50bws
Av.min~ 0.3ST Av.min~ 3.5, Av,min ~ -1-'
. ", r y'
418.12.9.1 Vn =1l.v(0.17J.[f. + pJ,,) VOl= A",.(O. 53A.fn +p,!,) Vn '" jl~,,(V.,ff; + p,[ y)
418.12.9.2 O.66A nu M 2,.1211(p.[ff. 8A",Jr;
418.14.5.1 0.29,fJ-f 0.?3,m 3.SJr;
419.2.2.1(a) e, = w~ 50.'43M E, = 1I'~·r.O.14ft e, = wPo. 33m
419.2.2.1(b) E, =4.700./h e, = 15. 100ft Ee = 57,000ft
419.2.3.1 t, = 0.621../l'c 1,.'lAm t,= 7. 5}..jl~
419.2.4.3 A = I «/( O.56,.{f;;J :s 1.0 A = [ .. /(0. 56JT;;;) s 1.0 A = I c,'/( 6.7 rr;;:; ~ 1.0
t: I~ I~
Ise+7O+1O o pp Ise+700+~
OPp I se + 10,000 + 100p
p
420.3.2.4.1
Ise + 420 Ise + 4200 Ise + 60,000
I~ I~ I~
Ips =L; + 70+~ Ips = Ise + 700 + -0--
3 OPp
Ips = Ise + 10.000 +----00
pp 3 Pp
f .. + 210 I •• + 2100 / .. + 30,000
421.2.3 e.; = (;7) db f'r = (fse)

210 <lb ftr
( I••)
= 3000 db
422.2.2.4.3
o. 05CI~ - 28) o. 05(1~ - 280) O.05(f~ - 4000)
0.85- 0.85 0.85 -
7 10 1000
422.5.1.2 Vu :s./I{Ve + o. 66.fff,IJ ...,Q Vll ~ <I>(V,
+ 2.ZmiJ ••.d} V" :s ojI(V.+ O,ff./I •. d)
Ve = O.lnftbw<l Vc = O. 53A,f'i';bwd Ve = Umbwd
Ve = (0. 16A/H + 17pw ~~) bwd Vc = (0. SAffi + 176pw ~~) bwd Ve = (0. 19Am + 2500p", ~~) bwd
422.5.5.1
:s (0. 16Am + 17p", ~~) b",d :s (0. 5)'m + 176pw ~~) bwd s (0. 19J.ffi + 2500pw ~~) bwd
~ 0.2<)),,mb,.Ci :S0.9U,f'i';bwd ~ 3. SJ./f.b",d

CHAPTER II -- Structural Concrete 4-205
422.5.6.1 Vc = 0.17(1+ l:~JAmbwd V, = 0.53 ( 1 + 140A,

N,,) A f,bwd n: V, = 2 (1 + 20~~AJ Ambwd
)/'
422.5.6.1 (a) V,=(O.16A,J7f+17PW Vd 1h_d)bwd V,=(OSA,J7f+176P W Vd,lo-d)bwd V,=(19A,J7f+ZSOOP" Vd ", d)bwd

Mil-NuB M,.-N us Mil-NuB
422.5.6.1 (b) Ve=0.29.1lmbwd tJ 0,29N

1+--"
Ar.
Ve = 0.93Ambwd J1 + 3~~g Ve = 3. SAm bwd J + 500Ag
N" fJJ
( 1+~0.29N,,) Amf~bwd?O
422.5.7.1 Vc=0.17 v. = 0.53 (1 + 3~~J Ambwd ? 0 V, = 2 (1 + 5:O~JAmbwd? 0
dp dp
V,- -( 0.05.11
mfe+48 Vu
M" ) bwd Ve = (0. 16A.,f'f; + 49 V;:'p) bwd Ve= ( 0.6.1l.,f'f;
fc+700-- Vu ) bwd
M"
422.5.8.2
Ve'; (0.05Am + 4,8)bwd Ve'; (0. 16A.,f'f; + 49)bwd v, ,; (0. 6Am + 700)bwd
O.17.1l.,f'f;bwd ,; Vc ,; o. 42.1lmbwd O.SJA,ff;bwd OS; V. OS; 1.33Ambwd 2.Ilmbwd OS; Ve OS; 5Ambwd
422.58,3,1 a V" = 0.05.1l

m bwdp + Vd + Mmax
VjMcre
Vci-' - 0 16Amb cwp+V
dd+-- V,M"e
M,nar
V,,=0.6A
mbwdp+V + d
ViMcre
Mm=
422.5.8.3,1 b V" = 0, 14A.,f'f;bwd V" = 0.4SA.,f'f;bwd Ve, = 1.7.Ilmbwd
4225.8,3 1c Mere = (f.) (0. 5.1l.,f'f;+ fve - frl) Mm = (f.) (16Am + fpe - frl) Mere = (f.) (6Am + fve - fd)
422.5.8.3,2 Vew = (0. 29A,fTc + O.3fpc)bwdp + v, Vcw= (0. 93Am + 0, 3fpc)bwdp + v, Vew = (3. SA.,f'f;+ O.3fve)bwdp + Vp
422.5.8.3.3 0.33A.,f'f; 1.Um 4A,fTc
422_5_10.6.2a
422.5.10.6.2b
Vs OS; 0.2SA.,f'f;bwd Vs OS; 0.8Ambwd v. OS; 3Ambwd
422.6.3.1 m OS; 8.3 in MP. 3.18,fTc OS; 27 in kgf/crrr' m OS; 100 inpsi
422.6.5.2(a) ve = 0.33Am ve=l.Um ve=4.Ilm
422.6.5.2(b) Vc = 0,17(1+~)Am Ve = 0.53 (1 +~).Il.,f'f; Vc=(2+i).Ilm
422.6.5.2(c) Vc = 0.083 (2 + a;d)A,fTc Ve = 0.27 (2 + a;d) A-!1'c Ve= (2 + a;d)A,fTc

0 D 0
,fTc OS; 5.8 inMPa 3. 18m OS;19 in kgf/crrr' m OS; 70 in psi

422.6.5.5
0,9 MPa OS; f pe OS; 3.5 MPa 9 kgf/cm' OS; f pe OS; 35 kgf/crrr' 125 psi OS; fpe OS; 500 psi
422.6.5.5a Vc = (0, 29Am + 0.3fpc) + Vp/Cbod) Vc = (0. 93Am + O.3fpc) + Vp/(bod) Vc = (3. SAm + O.3f po) + VII/Cbod)
ve = 0.083 (1.5 + a;d)A,fTc Vc = 0.27(1.5 + a;d)A,fTc Vc = (1.5 + a;d) Am

422.6.5.5b 0 0 0
+0. 3fpe + Vp/Cbod) +0_3fpc + Vp/(bod) +0. 3f pc + Vp/Cbod)

422,6,6.1(a), (b), (d) 0.17.1lm 0.53Am 2im
422.6.6.1 (c) 0.25A,fTc 0.80Am Um
422.6.6.2(a) 0.5A,fTc 1.6Am 6Am
422.6.6.2(b) .p0.66m .p2.1m .p8,fTc
422.6.8.3 (A;)? O.17m(;;,) (:v)? 0 53,fTc(;;,) (:v) ? 2,fTc(;;,)
.pO.33m .pl.1-!1'c .p4-!1'c

422.6.9.10
.p0.S8m .pl.9m .p7,fTc
422.6.9,12 , .p0.33m .pl.l,fTc .p4,fTc
422.7.2.1 m OS; 8.3 inMPa m OS; 27 in kgf/cnr' m OS; 100 inpsi
422.7.4.1(0)(a) T'h < 0.083Am(A~p)

Pcp T'h < 0.27.1lm(A~p)
Pcp T'h < A,fTc (;::)
422.7.4.1 (a)(b) r.; < o. 083A-!1'c(;::) J1 t.,., 0.33,Am

T'h < 0.27A-!1'c(A~p)H
Pcp 1 + m T
th
<A,fTc (A~p)_
e Pcp
Jl +..lE_
4A,fTc
422.7.4.1 (a)(c) p
T'h < 0.08U ,fTc(A~)J
cp
1+ N"- -!1'c
O.33AgA f~
T'h<0.27.1l -!1'c(A~)
cp
s: J 1+ N"
m
AgA fe
T'h < A.,f'f;( -A~)
Pcp
J N"
1 +-----m
4AgA f~
422.7.4.1 (b) (a) T'h < O.08Um ( A~ ) T'h < 0.27.1lm( A~)
Pcp Pcp T'h < A,fTc(:e:)
422.7.4.1 (b) (b) P

T'h < O.08U ,fTc(A~)J fpc
1 +---:.tic T'h < 0.27.11 Pcp
m(A~)H 1 + ,fTc T'h < Am (:e:)
cp O.33A f~
422.7.4.1 (b)(c) T'h<0.08U m( s:

A~)
ep
J1+ N" m
O.33AgA r:
T'h<0.27.1l ,fTc(A~)J
ep
s: 1+ N"
,fTc
AgA r:
T'h<A m( i:
A~)
ep
Jl N"
1+-----m
4AgA t:

422.7.5.1 (a) TO'-- 0.33A ft(A~p)

Ic - Tcr --Aft(A~I')
c PC',. Tn' -- 4Aft(A~p)
Ic -
Pcp r.;
422.7.5.I(b) TcT=0.33Aft(A;p)JI +~ T =Aft(A~p)f+

Pcp
Ipc
A.f1'c T .=4Am(A~p)J1+~
Pcp o. "if3};,fi"; CI C CI Pcp C 4lj{';
422.7.5.1 (c) -
TCT-0.33A ft(A~p)J
t: p
cp
J+ N"
o. 33JI,.1.
ff,.
t; TCT=Aft(A~p)
Pcp Jl 1+ n;
AgAmt;
TCT-- 4A. m(A~p)l
I, p
cp
1 N.
+----:tic
4AgA t:
422.7.7.la ( bwd
V" f +
(TuPu YVc
1. 7A~h ~ </> bwd + O.66m
() (_u)
V'(TPy+
bwd
~
1. 7 Aoh
~</>(_' V +2m)
bwd
(Vu)2
-
bwd
+--(TuPuy
1. 7 A~h
<</>-(Vc
- bwd
r (
+Bm)
422.7.7.1 b (Vu
bd_
w
f C·1.7A"h
+ ~
uP
• V,
~</> bd_+0.66
w
ft)I~ (_u)
V'(TPy+
bwd
~
1.7 AOh
V +2m)
~</>(_e
bwd
(Vu)'
bwd +
(TuPuy (V,
1. 7A~h ~ </> bwd + Bm
)
(3.3 + O.OBI~)A, (34 + O.OBI~)Ae (4BO + O.OBI~)A,
422.9.4.4(b), (c),
and (e) 11Ae HOA, 1600A,
5.5A, 55Ac BOOAe
s= Is - 2. Sec
3BO (2BO) s=3B Is -2,5e,
(BOO) s= (40,000)
15 ~ - 2. se,
424.3.2
s= 300 C!BO)T.. s=30 (2BOO)
-- s=12 CIO,
-- 000)
Is t,
IJ.lpss 250 Mr. IJ.lps~ 2500 kgfJcm' IJ.Ips ~ 36,000 psi
424.3.2.2
sr,.. s 140 Mra IJ.Ips ~ 1400 kgf/crrr' t.{p, ~ 20,000 psi
0.0018 x 420 0.0018 x 4200 O.001B x 60,000
424.4.3.2
t, r, I)·
It ~ 0.62ft It ~2ft It ~ 7.5ft
0.62ft < It ~ 1. oft 2ft < It s 3. 2ft 7. 5m < It ~ 12ft
424.5.2.1
It> 1. oft It> 3.2ft I,> 12ft
It s 0.50j!: It s 1.6F. It~6F.
0.50F. 1.6F. 6ft:

424.5.3.1
0.2S,y;; 0.8[r:. 3F
424.4.1.4 I1'c ~ B.3 Mra ft ~ 26.5 kgf/crrr' ft~ 100 psi
425.4.2.2 f=---d(f,,"I,I/I. ) e, = (Iyl/Jtl/J. ) db . f = (Iyl/Jtl/J.) d

rt 2.J.l/fi b 6.6Aft d 25Aft. b
e = ___!z_ l/Jtl/J.l/Jsd f - _I_y_l/J,l/J.l/Js d f - __'!_b_ l/Jtl/J.l/Jsd
425.4.2.3a
d 1.1).ft e'+I1") (rob
b d - 3. 5Aft (C'::") b d - 40Aft (C'::") b
(0, ].9{y.p.) d (O.06{Yl/J.)
425.4.4.2(a)
If'; b
---
1Jr·
lIb
(0.0161
myl/J.) d b
425.4.6.3(a) (IY;y240) f~-t{jO) ('y-~:,OOO)
425.4.6.3(b) 3.3(_l!_)(~)
Am s C~)(~) 0.27 (_l!_) (~)
Aft s
425.4.8.1 (a) (Ise)d
21 b+ f'" +/~·)d
7 b
(b_)d
210 b +
(Ips + Is.)
70
d
b
(~)d
3000 blOOD
+(Ips+ls')d
b
(O.24fY)d (0.0.75IY)d
425.4.9.2(a)
Am b Affi b
( f~ )
SOA.,ff; db
425.4.9.2(b) (0. O'Ur~.)db (0. 004-4{y) db (0.0003Iy)db

e.enr,«, 0.00731ydb 0.00051ydb
425.5.5.I(a) and (b)
(0. 131y - 24)11" (0.013Iy - 24)db (0.00091,- 24)db
0.17dbf)., 0.053 dblyt 0.014 ddyt
425.7.1.3(b)
~m Affi ;,_fFc
425.7.1.7 Abl yt s 40,000 N Abl yt ~ 4000 kgf Ably. s 9000 Ib
425.9.4.5.1 Ip. = Is. + 70 Ips = Is. + 700 f". = Is. + 10,000
426.12,5.1 0.62,,[1'; 2m 7.5ft

NSCP C101-15
Chapter 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL

VOLUME I

Tel. No. : (+632) 410-0483

Fax No. : (+632) 411-8606
Email: aseponline®~rnail.com

CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel 5-1
Table of Contents
PART 1- SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL MEMBERS 5-11

SYMBOLS 5-11
DEFINITIONS 5-19
SECTION 501 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 5-35
50 1.1 Scope , · ' , , 5-35
501.2 Referenced Specifications, Codes and Standards 5-35
501.3 Material 5-38
501.4 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications , 5-40
SECTION 502 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 5-40
502.1 General Provisions , , ,5-40
502.2 Loads and Load Combinations _ 5-40
502.3 Design Basis ~ _ M 5-40
502.4 Classification of Sections for Local Buckling 5-42
502.5 Fabrication, Erection and Quality Control .: 5-46
502.6 Evaluation of Existing Structures ; 5-46
SECTION 503 _ STABILITY ANALYSIS AND DESI.GN 5-47
503.1 Stability Design Requirements 5-47
503.2 Calculation of Required Strengths " 5-48
SECTION 504 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION 5-51
504.1 Slenderness Limitations 5-51
504.2 Tensile Strength 5-51
504.3 Area Determination 5-51
504.4 Built-up Members , - , 5-52
504.5 Pin-Connected Members : 5-52
504.6 Eyebars , , , 5-52
SECTION 505 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION 5-55
505.1 General Provisions , , 5-55
505.2 Slenderness Limitations and Effective Length , 5-55
505.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling of Members Without Slender Elements ~ 5-55
505.4 Compressive Strength for Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members without Slender Elements 5-55
505.5 Single Angle Compression Members 5-56
505.6 Built-up Members 5-57
505.7 Members with Slender Elements 5-59
SECTION 506 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE 5-62
506.1 General Provisions , , , _... 5-62
506.2 Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members arid Channels Bent about their Major Axis 5-64
506.3 Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Compact Webs and Noncompact or Slender Flanges Bent about their
Major Axis , 5-65
506.4 Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent about their Major Axis 5-65
506.5 Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Slender Webs Bent about their Major Axis 5-67
506.6 I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about their Minor Axis 5-68
506.7 Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-shaped Members 5-68
506.8 Round HSS , 5-69
506.9 Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry 5-69

5-2 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
506.10 Single Angles ,., , 5-70

._ 506.11 Rectangular Bars and Rounds ' ,.5-71
506.12 Unsymmetrical Shapes , 5-72
506.13 Proportions of Beams and Girders ' , 5-72
SECTION 507 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR 5-74
507.2 Members with Unstiffened or Stiffened Webs _ " 5-74
507.3 Tension Field Action 5-75
507.4 Single Angles , " , , , ,,5-76
507,5 Rectangular HSS and Box Members , , 5-76
507.6 Round HSS , _ , , 5-76
507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Doubly Symmetric Shapes ,., 5-76
507.8 Beams and Girders with Web Openings , 5-76
SECTION 508 - DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION 5-77
508.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force, " ..,.., , 5-77
508.2 Unsymmetric and other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force, , , , 5-78
508.3 Members under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial Force 5-79
SECTION 509 - DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS 5-81
509,1 General Provisions , , , , ' ,5-81
509.2 Axial Members , , 5-81
509.3 Flexural Members ,.,"', ,.,.., " " ' , , 5-84
509.4 Flexural Strength of Concrete-Encased and Filled Members : 5-88
509.5 Combined Axial Force and Flexure " " .." ,., ", ,..5-88
509.6 Special Cases " " , " .., " , , , 5-88
SECTION 510 - DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS 5-89
510.2 Welds , , , ,.." 5-90
510,3 Bolts and ThreadedParts , ,5-98
510.4 Affected Elements of Members and Connecting Elements 0 5-102
510.5 Fillers "."", ", ,'" ,"" " , ,' : 5-103
510,6 Splices ., ,',", " ,., , , 5-104
510,7 Bearing Strength , , 5-104
510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete , ' 5-104
510.9 Anchor Rods and Embedments , 5-104
510,10 Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces 5-105
SECTION 511 - DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS 5-109
511,1 Concentrated Forces on HSS , , 5-109
511.2 HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections , ' , , 5-111
511.3 HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections _. 5-118
SECTION 512 - DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY 5-122
512.1 General Provisions ".,., , , , , " 5-122
512,2 Camber .., " " "" ' _ " ,.,5-122
512.3 Deflections ., , , 5-122
512.4 Drift , ,.,', , , , " , , 5-123
512.5 Vibration, , .- , ,., ' _ ,,5-123
512.6 Wind-Induced Motion , 5-123
512.7 Expansion and Contraction " , ,5-123
512.8 Connection Slip ",., .."", , "., , 5-123

SECTION 513 - FABRICATION, ERECTION AND QUALITY CONTROL 5-123

513.1 Shop and Erection Drawings 5-123
513.2 Fabrication , 5-123
513.3 Shop Painting , 5-J25
513.4 Erection ' " ' , ' 5-1 25
513.5 Quality Control , · , , 5-126
APPENDIX A - INELASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 5-126
A-l.l General Provisions 5-126
A-l.2 Materials 5-126
A-l.3 Moment Redistribution 5-126
A-l.4 Local Buckling 5-126
A-l.5 Stability and Second-Order Effects 5-127
A-l.6 Columns and Other Compression Members ._ 5-127
A-l.7 Beams and Other Flexural Members , 5-128
A-l.8 Members under Combined Forces 5-128
A-l.9 Connections , , , , '.., 5-128
APPENDIX A-2 - DESIGN FOR PONDING 5-129
A-2.1 Simplified Design for Ponding " 5-129
A-2.2 Improved Design for Ponding _ , , 5-129
APPENDIX A-3 - DESIGN FOR FATIGUE 5-130
A-3.l General Provisions , , , 5-130
A-3.2 Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges " , 5-130
A-3.3 Design Stress Range , ,., 5-131
A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts , , 5-132
A-3.5 Special Fabrication and Erection Requirements " 5-132
APPENDIX A-4 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS 5-147
A-4.1 General Provisions , 5-147
A-4.2 Structural Design for Fire Conditions by Analysis 5-147
A-4.3 Design by Qualification Testing , 5-150
APPENDIX A-5 - EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 5-151
A-5.1 General Provisions , " , , ,.5-151
A-5.2 Material Properties , , 5-151
A-5.3 Evaluation by Structural Analysis 5-151
A-5.4 Evaluation by Load Tests , r , 5-152
A-5.5 Evaluation Report , _ , _ _ 5-152
APPENDIX A-6 - STABILITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS 5-153
A-6.1 General Provisions , , , 5-153
A-6.2 Columns , 5-153
A-6.3 Beams 5-153
APPENDIX A-7 - DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD 5-156
A-7.1 General Requirements 5-156
A-7.2 Notional Loads · ; _ , 5-156
A-7.3 Design-Analysis Constraints · 5-156

5·4 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel
PART 2A - SEISMIC PROVISION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS ···················· ······ ..··..······ 5-157
SYMBOLS 5-157
PART2B
SECTION 514 - STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING PROVISIONS 5-160
514.1 Scope 5-160
SECTION 515 _ REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS 5-161
SECTION 516 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 5-161
SECTION 517 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS 5-162
517.1 Loads and Load Combinations 5-162
517.2 Nominal Strength 5-162
SECTION 518 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND
ERECTION DRA WINGS 5-162
518.1 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications 5-162
518.2 Shop Drawings 5-163
518.3 Erection Drawings 5-163
SECTION 519 - MATERIALS 5-163
519.1 Material Specifications 5-163
519.2 Material Properties for Determination of Required Strength of Members and Connections 5-163
519.3 Heavy Section CVN Requirements 5-164
SECTION 520 - CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS 5-165
520.1 Scope H _ 5-165
520.2 Bolted Joints H 5-165
520.3 Welded Joints H 5-165
520.4 Protected Zone _ ; 5-166
520.5 Continuity Plates and Stiffeners , 5-166
SECTION 521 - MEMBERS : 5-167
521.1 Scope 5-167
521.2 Classification of Sections for Local Buckling _. 5-167
521.3 Column Strength _ 5-169
521.4 Column Splices ; " 5-169
521.5 Column Bases , , 5-169
521.6 H-Piles " 5-170
SECTION A.- MOMENT FRAME SYSTEMS 5-171
SECTION A.3 - SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) 5-171
522.1 Scope _ , , , 5-171
522.2 Beam-to-Column Connections ; , , , , 5-171
522.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web) 5-172
522.4 Beam and Column Limitations 5-172
522.5 Continuity Plates ' 5-172
522.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio , 5-173
522.7 Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column Connections _ 5-174
522.8 Lateral Bracing ofBeams , , "' 5-174
522.9 Column Splices , _ , ', 5-174

528.9 Protected Zone 5-187

>,·528.10 Demand Critical Welds 5-187
SECTION B.4 - BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF) .5-187
529.1 Scope _ , , , 5-187
529.2 Bracing Members ,., , 5-187
529.3 Bracing Connections 5-188
529.4 Special Requirements , , , · , 5-189
529.5 Beams and Columns, 5-189
529.6 Protected Zone 5-189
SECTION B.5 - SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (SPSW) 5-190
530.1 Scope 5-190
530.2 Webs · , 5-190
530,3 Connections of Webs to Boundary Elements 5-190
530.4 Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements 5-190
SECTION C. - COMPOSITE MOMENT-FRAME SYSTEMS 5-171
SECTION C.l- COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF) 5-171
SECTION C.2 - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-SCBF) 5-171
SECTION C.3 - COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF) 5-171
SECTION C.4 - COMPOSITE ORDINARY SHEAR WALLS (C-OSW) 5-171
SECTION C.5 - COMPOSITE SPECIAL SHEAR WALLS (C-SSW) 5-171
SECTION C.6 - COMPOSITE PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-PSW) 5-171
SECTION 531 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 5-191
531.1 Scope , , u.: 5-191
B-1. PREQUALIFICATION OF BEAM-COLUMN AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS 5-192
B-l.1 Scope , , 5-192
B-l.2 General Requirements , _: , ,..5-192
B-l,3 Testing Requirements 5-192
B-I.4 Prequalification Variables _ 5-192
B-l.5 Design Procedure , " e 5-193
B-l.6 Prequalification Record 5-193
B-2. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 5-194
B-2.1 Scope. ' ' , ' 5-194
B-2.2 Inspection and Nondestructive Testing PersonneI. , ,.5-194
B-2.3 Contractor Documents _. 5-194
B-2.4 Quality Assurance Agency Documents 5-194
B-2.5 Inspection Points and Frequencies ' 5-195
B-3. SEISMIC DESIGN COEFFICIENTS AND APPROXIMATE PERIOD PARAMETERS 5-199
B-3,1 Scope , 5-199
B-3.2 Symbols 5-199
B-4. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN AND LINK-TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS 5-200
B-4.1 Scope _ 5-200
B-4.2 Symbols 5-200
B-4.3 Definitions , , 5-200
B-4.4 Test Subassemblage Requirements 5-200
B-4.5 Essential Test Variables , H " , , 5-201
B-4.6 Loading History , 5-202

CHAPTER 5 _. Structural Steel 5-7
B-4.7 Instrumentation , , , , 5-203

B-4,8 Materials Testing Requirements ," ..'_ , " , " ,', ,',', ,.., ,..,,', .., ,..,', 5-203
B-4.9 Test Reporting Requirements " , , , , 5-203
B-4.10 Acceptance Criteria , , , 5-204
B-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACES 5-205
B-5.1 Scope, " , , , , " , " 5-205
B-5.2 Symbols , , " " , , ,.., , ,"", , , ,', ,., , , 5-205
B-5.3 Definitions , ,., , " .., '" , ', ,"', , ,.." .." , 5-205
B-5.4 Subassemblage Test Specimen 5-205
B-5.5 Brace Test Specimen 5-206
B-5.6 Loading History " , , , 5-206
B-5.7 Instrumentation , , , _ "., 5-207
B-5.8 Materials Testing Requirements , , 5-207
B-5.9 Test Reporting Requirements 5-207
B-5.10 Acceptance Criteria , 5-208
B-6. WELDING PROVISIONS 5-208
B-6. I Scope 5-208
B-6.2 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications, Shop Drawings, and Erection Drawings 5-208
B-6.3 Personnel , 5-209
B-6.4 Nondestructive Testing Procedures 5-209
B-6.5 Additional Welding Provisions 5-210
B-6.6 Additional Welding Provisions for Demand Critical Welds Only 5-210
B-7 WELD METAL/WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NOTCH TOUGHNESS VERIFICATION
TEST 5-211
B-7. I Scope , , 5-211
B-7.2 Test Conditions 5-212
B-7.3 Test Specimens 5-212
B-7.4 Acceptance Criteria 5-212
PART 2B - COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REINFORCED CONCRETE BUILDINGS 5-213
.
SECTION 532 - SCOPE 5-213
SECTION 533 - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS 5-213
SECTION 534 - GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 5-214
SECTION 535 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS 5-214
535. I Loads and Load Combinations 5-214
535.2 Nominal Strength 5-214
SECTION 536 - MATERIALS 5-215
536.1 Structural Steel _ 5-215
536.2 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement 5-2 I 5
SECTION 537 - COMPOSITE MEMBERS 5-215
537.1 Scope _ 5-215
537.2 Composite Floor and Roof Slabs _ 5-215
537.3 Composite Beams , 5-21.5
537.4 Encased Composite Columns 5-215
537.5 Filled Composite Columns 5-218
SECTION 538 - COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS 5-218
538.1 Scope - - 5-218
538.2 General Requirements 5-218

538.3 Nominal Strength of Connections 5-218

., SECTION 539 - COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED (PR) MOMENT FRAMES (C-PRMF) 5-220
539.1 Scope 5-220
539.2 Columns 5-220
539.3 Composite Beams 5-220
539.4 Moment Connections 5-220
SECTION 540 - COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF) 5-220
540.1 Scope 5-220
540.2 Columns 5-220
540.3 Beams 5-220
540.4 Moment Connections 5-221
540.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio , , , 5-221
SECTION 541 - COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES (C-IMF) 5-221
541.1 Scope " 5-221
541.2 Columns : _ , , 5-221
541.3 Beams , " 5-221
541.4 Moment Connections " 5-221
SECTION 542 - COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (C-OMF) 5-222
542.1 Scope 5-222
542.2 Columns · 5-222
542.3 Beams , ,.: " · , , 5-222
542.4 Moment Connections ' H.; , ,; " 5-222
SECTION 543 - COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-CBF) 5-222
543.1 Scope 5-222
543.2 Columns 5-222
543.3 Beams ".." ,, : ' : , 5-222
543.4 Braces 5-222
543.5 Connections : 5-222
SECTION 544 - COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF) 5-223
544.1 Scope , , ' , , ' 5-223
544.2 Columns , , , , 5-223
544.3 Beams 5-223
544.4 Braces 5-223
544.5 Connections 5-223
SECTION 545 - COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF) 5-223
545.1 Scope , , \ 5-223
545.2 Columns H 5-223
545.3 Links 5-223
545.4 Braces 5-224
545.5 Connections 5-224
SECTION 546 - ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL ELEMENTS (C-ORCW) 5-224
546.1 Scope 5-224
546.2 Boundary Members _, , 5-224
546.3 Steel Coupling Beams " 5-225
546.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams 5-225

CHAPTER tJ Structural Steel 5-9
SECTION 547 - SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL ELEMENTS (C-SRCW) 5-225
547.1 Scope 5-225
547.2 Boundary Members 5-225
547.3 Steel Coupling Beams 5-226
547.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams 5-226
SECTION 548 - COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALLS (C-SPW) 5-226
548.1 Scope 5-226
548.2 Wall Elements , 5-226
548.3 Boundary Members 5-227
548.4 Openings 5-227
SECTION 549 - STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND
ERECTION DRA WINGS 5-227
SECTION 550 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 5-228
PART 3 - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 5-228
SYMBOLS 5-228
SECTION 551 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 5-235
551.1 Scope, Applicability and Definitions _ 5-235
551.2 Material _ 5-236
551.3 Loads ; 5-238
551.4 Allowable Strength Design 5-238
551.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design 5-239
551.7 Yield Stress and Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming · 5-239
551.8 Serviceability , : 5-240
551.9 Referenced Documents , , , 5-240
SECTION 552 - ELEMENTS 5-242
552.1 Dimensional Limits and Considerations , _- 5-242
552.2 Effective Widths of Stiffened Elements : 5-243
552.3 Effective Widths of Un stiffened Elements 5-248
552.4 Effective Width of Uniformly Compressed Elements with a Simple Lip Edge Stiffener , 5-251
522.5 Effective Widths of Stiffened Elements with Single or Multiple Intermediate Stiffeners or Edge Stiffened Elements
with Intermediate Stiffener(s) , _ 5-253
SECTION 553 - MEMBERS 5-255
553.1 Properties of Sections .' _ 5-255
553.2 Tension Members , __ _ ~ 5-255
553.3 Flexural Members - , __._ 5-255
553.4 Concentrically Loaded Compression Members - : 5-273
553.5 Combined Axial Load and Bending 5-277
SECTION 554 - STRUCTURAL ASSEMBLIESAND SYSTEMS 5-280
554.1 Built-Up Sections ;..- 5-280
554.2 Mixed Systems - 5-282
554.3 Lateral and Stability Bracing _ 5-282
554.4 Cold-Formed Steel Light-Frame Construction 5-284
554.5 Floor, Roof, or Wall Steel Diaphragm Construction - 5-284
554.6 Metal Roof and Wall System , 5-285

SECTION 555 - CONNECTIONS AND JOINTS 5-291

tI' 555.1 General Provisions _ , 5-291
555.2 Welded Connections , 5-291
555.3 Bolted Connection 5-299
555.4 Screw Connections , 5-301
555.5 Rupture , 5-304
555.5 Connecting to Other Materials , 5-304
SECTION 556 - TESTS FOR SPECIAL CASES 5-304
556.1 Tests for Determining Structural Performance 5-304
556.2 Tests for Confirming Structural Performance " 5-307
556.3 Tests for Determining Mechanical Properties 5-307
SECTION 557 - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS FOR
CYCLIC LOADING (FATIGUE) 5-308
557.1 General , , , 5-308
557.2 Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress Ranges 5-310
557.3 Design Stress Range , , 5-310
557.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts , 5-31 0
557.5 Special Fabrication Requirements 5-311
SECTION C-l - DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS USING THE DIRECT
STRENGTH METHOD 5-311
C-l Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members Using the Direct Strength Method 5-311
SECTION C-2 - SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS 5-318
C.2.1 General Requirements , , 5-318
C.2.2 Design and Analysis Constraints , , " 5-318
SECTION C3 - ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS 5-319
C.3.1 Scope 5-319
C.3.2 Other Steels 5-319
C.3.3 Loads : 5-319
C.3.4 Referenced Documents 5-319
C.3.5 Tension Members 5-340
C.3.6 Light-Frame Steel Construction 5-320
C.3.7 Welded Connections 5-321
C.3.8 Bolted Connections 5-322
C.3.9 Rupture 5-327
1 ~ - ~I - • - I I =--- ~ r:~. ......," ....,--:..-=- - - - - --:: _-

~~
. ...c:- -
:; _
_
II -
_ _
"-,.
I~
I,
.. _
-
_
~
_ I
_.' j
_
_
~
to. -
_ f- __
_l_" - __
I
.~
I·
_
I .'
_ _ _
_ -
__
I • - _1_
_
t
'I
"
,,__
J- r
~
_

This Chapter includes the following: PARTi

11 Part 1 Specification for Steel Members SPECIFICATION FO S 'EEL
MEMBERS
Appendix A
Part 2A Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings

SYMBOLS
A Column cross-sectional area, mnr'
Appendix B
Total cross-sectional area of member,
Part 2B Seismic Provisions for Composite Structural Steel
mrrr'
Loaded area of concrete, mm"
and Reinforced Concrete Buildings
Cross-sectional area of the base metal,
Part 3 Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel
mnr'
Nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or
Structural Members
threaded part, mm''
Cross-sectional area of the overlapping
Appendix C
branch, mm"
Cross-sectional area of the overlapped
branch, mnr'
Area of concrete, mrrr'
Area of concrete slab within effective
width, mm2
Area of an upset rod based on the major
thread diameter, mm2
Effective net area, mrrr'
Summation of the effective areas of the
cross section based on the reduced
2
effective width, be' mm
Afc Area of compression flange, mrrr'
Afg Gross tension flange area, mrrr'
Afn Net tension flange area, mnr'

Aft Area of tension flange, min2
Ag Gross area of member, mrrr'
Ag Gross area of section based on design wall
thickness, mnr'
Ag Gross area of composite member, mm'
Ag Chord gross area, mm"
Agv Gross area subject to shear, mm"
An Net area of member, mrrr'
Ant Net area subject to tension, mm2
Anv Net area subject to shear, mnr'
Apb Projected bearing area, mrrr'
AT Area of adequately developed longitudinal
reinforcing steel within the effective width
of the concrete slab, mrrr'
Area of steel cross section, mm"
Cross-sectional area of stud shear
connector, mnr'
Shear area on the failure path, mm"
Area of continuous reinforcing bars, mnr'
Stiffener area, mnr'
Net tensile area, mm2
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, 7th EdItion, 2015

Web area, the overall depth times the web D Outside diameter, mm
thickness, dtw, mm" D Outside diameter of round HSS mam
Effective area of the weld, mm" member, mm
Effective area of weld throat of any ith Chord diameter, mm
weld element, mm2 Outside diameter of round HSS branch
Area of steel concentrically bearing on a member, mm
concrete support, mrrr' Factor used in Eq. 507.3-3, dependent on
Maximum area of the portion of the the type of transverse stiffeners used in a
supporting surface that is geometrically plate girder
similar to and concentric with the loaded In slip-critical connections, a multiplier
area, mm/ that reflects the ratio of the mean installed
B Overall width of rectangular hollow bolt pretension to the specified minimum
structural sections (HSS) member, bolt pretension
measured 90° to the plane of the Modulus of elasticity of steel 200,000 MPa
connection, mm Modulus of elasticity of concrete
B Overall width of rectangular HSS main Modulus of elasticity of concrete at
member, measured 90° to the plane of the elevated temperature, MPa
connection, mm Effective stiffness of composite section, N-
B Factor for lateral-torsional buckling m mm"
tees and double angles Modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated
Overall width of rectangular HSS branch temperature, MPa
member, measured 90° to the plane of the Available axial stress at the point of
connection, mm consideration, MPa
Overall branch width of the overlapping FBM Nominal strength of the base metal per unit
branch, mm area, MPa
Overall branch width of the overlapped Available flexural stress at the point of
branch, mm consideration about the major axis, MPa
Width of plate, transverse to the axis of Available flexural stress at the point of
the main member, mm consideration about the minor axis, MPa
Width of plate, measure 90° to the plane Available stress, MPa
of connection, mrn Critical stress, MPa
Factors used m determining Mu for Buckling stress for the section as
combined bending and axial forces when determined by analysis, MPa
first-order analysis is employed Critical stress about the minor axis, MPa
Fcry
HSS torsional constant
Lateral-torsional buckling modification r.: Critical torsional buckling stress, MPa
Fe Elastic critical buckling stress, MPa
factor for non-uniform moment diagrams
when both ends of the unsupported r.. Elastic flexural buckling stress about the
major axis, MPa
segment are braced
FEXX Electrode classification number, MPa
Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness
and curvature Fey Elastic flexural buckling stress about the
Constant based on stress category, given minor axis, MPa
in Table 501-3.1 Elastic torsional buckling stress, MPa
Coefficient assuming no lateral translation A calculated stress used in the calculation
of the frame of nominal flexural strength, MPa
Ponding flexibility coefficient for primary Nominal torsional strength
member in a flat roof Nominal tensile stress F nt- or shear stress,
Coefficient for web sidesway buckling Fnv, from Table 510.3.2, MPa
Ponding flexibility coefficient for Nominal tensile stress from Table 510.3.2,
secondary member in a flat roof MPa
Web shear coefficient F'n Nominal tensile stress modified to include
Warping constant, mm 6 the effects of shearing stress, MPa
Nominal dead load Nominal shear stress from Table 510.3.2,
Outside diameter of round HSS member, MPa
Design stress range, MPa
mm

Threshold fatigue stress range, maximum G Shear modulus of elasticity of steel 77,200
stress range for indefinite design life from MPa
Table A-3.1, MPa r.H Story shear produced by the lateral forces
Specified minimum tensile strength of the used to compute !1H, N
type of steel being used, MPa H Overall height of rectangular HSS member,
Specified minimum tensile strength of a measured in the plane of the connection,
stud shear connector, MPa mm
Specified minimum tensile strength of the H Overall height of rectangular HSS main
connected material, MPa member, measured in the plane of the
Specified minimum tensile strength of HSS connection, mm
material, MPa Flexural constant
Fum Specified minimum tensile strength of the Overall height of rectangular HSS branch
type of steel being used at elevated member, measured in the plane of the
temperature, MPa connection, mm
Nominal strength of the weld metal per Overall depth of the overlapping branch
unit area, MPa Moment of inertia in the place of bending,
Nominal stress in any ith weld element, mm"
MPa I Moment of inertia about the axis of
r.; x component of stress F wi, MPa bending, mm 4
Fwiy y component of stress F wi, MPa Moment of inertia of the concrete section,
Fy Specified minimum yield stress of the type mm"
of steel being used, MPa. As used in this Moment of inertia of the steel deck
Specification, "yield stress" denotes either supported on secondary members, mm4
the specified minimum yield point (for Moment of inertia of primary members,
those steels that have a yield point) or mm"
specified yield strength (for those steels Moment of inertia of secondary members,
that do not have a yield point) mrn"
Specified minimum yield stress of the Moment of inertia of steel shape, mm"
compression flange, MPa Moment of inertia of reinforcing bars, mm4
Specified minimum yield stress of the Moment of inertia about the principal axes,
column web, MPa mm"
Specified minimum yield stress of HSS Out-of-plane moment of inertia, mm"
member material, MPa Minor principal axis moment of inertia,
Specified minimum yield stress of HSS mm"
main member material, MPa Moment of inertia about y-axis referred to
Specified minimum yield stress of HSS the compression flange, or if reverse
branch member material, MPa curvature bending referred to smaller
Fybi Specified minimum yield stress of the flange, mm"
overlapping branch material, MPa Torsional constant, mm4
]
Specified minimum yield stress of the
K Effective length factor determined III
overlapped branch material, MPa
accordance with Section 503
Specified minimum yield stress of the
Effective length factor for torsional
flange, MPa
buckling
Fym Specified minimum yield stress of the type
Effective length factor in the plane of
of steel being used at elevated temperature,
bending, calculated based on the
MPa
assumption of no lateral translation set
Specified minimum yield stress of plate,
equal to 1.0 unless analysis indicates that a
MPa
smaller value may be used
Specified rmmmum yield stress of
Effective length factor in the plane of
reinforcing bars, MPa
bending, calculated based on a sidesway
Fyst Specified minimum yield stress of the
buckling analysis '
stiffener material, MPa
L Story height, mm
Specified minimum yield stress of the web,
L Length of the member, mm
MPa
L Actual length of end-loaded weld, mm
L Nominal occupancy live load

L Laterally unbraced length of a member, First-order moment using LRFD or ASD

mm load combinations assuming there is no
L Span length, mm lateral translation of the frame, N-mm
L Length of member between work points at Plastic bending moment, N-mm
truss chord centerlines, mm Required second-order flexural strength
Length between points that are either under LRFD or ASD load combinations,
braced against lateral displacement of N-mm
compression flange or based against twist Required flexural strength using LRFD or
of the cross section, mm ASD load combinations, N-mm
Distance between braces, mm Required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
Length of channel shear connector, mm Required in-plane flexural strength in
Clear distance, in the direction of the force, branch, N-mm
between the edge of the hole and the edge Required out-of-plane flexural strength in
of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, branch, N-mm
mm Required flexural strength in chord using
Total effective weld length of groove and LRFD load combinations, N-mm
fillet welds to rectangular HSS, mm Yield moment about the axis of bending,
Limiting laterally unbraced length for the N-mm
limit state of yielding, mm Smaller moment, calculated from a first-
Column spacing in direction of girder, m order analysis, at the ends of that portion of
Limiting laterally unbraced length for the member unbraced in the plane of
plastic analysis, mm bending under consideration, N-mm
Maximum unbraced length for Mr (the Larger moment, calculated from a first-
required flexural strength), mm order analysis, at the ends or that portion of
Limiting laterally unbraced length for the tile member u,nbl'3Ced in the plane of
limit state of inelastic lateral-torsional bending under consideration, N-mm
buckling, mm N Length of bearing (not less than k for end
Column spacing perpendicular to direction beam reactions). mm
of girder, m N Bearing length of the load, measured
Distance from maximum to zero shear parallel to the axis of the HSS member, (or
force, mm measured across the width of the HSS in
Absolute value of moment at quarter point the case of the loaded cap plates), mm
of the unbraced segment, N-mm N Number of stress range fluctuations III
Required flexural strength in chord, using design life
ASD load combinations, N-mm Number of bolts carrying the applied
Absolute value of moment at centerline of tension
the unbraced segment, N-mm Ni Additional lateral load
Required bracing moment, N-mm Ni Notional lateral load applied at level i, N
Absolute value of moment at three-quarter Ns Number of slip planes
point of the unbraced segment, N-mm Ov Overlap connection coefficient
Me (x,y) Available flexural strength determined in P Pitch per thread, mm
accordance with Section 506, N-mm Pbr Required brace strength, N
Available flexural-torsional strength for Pc Available axial compressive strength, N
strong axis flexure determined in Pc Available tensile strength, N
accordance with Section 506, N-mm Pco Available compressive strength out of the
Elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, plane of bending, N
N-mm Pe1,Pe2= Elastic critical buckling load for braced and
First-order moment under LRFD or ASD unbraced frame, respectively, N
load combinations caused by lateral Euler buckling load, evaluated in the plane
translation ofthe frame only, N-mm of bending, N
Mmax Absolute value of maximum moment in the Pl(t,c) First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD
unbraced segment, N-mm load combinations as a result of lateral
Nominal flexural strength, N-mm translation of the frame only (tension or
compression), N

CHAPTER 5 ---Structural Steel 5-15
P n(t,c) First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD Total nominal strength of transversely
load combinations, assuming there is no loaded fillet welds, as determined in
lateral translation of the frame (tension or accordance with Table 5 10.2.5 without the
compression), N alternate in Section 5 I0.2.4 (a)
Nominal axial strength, N s Elastic section modulus of round HSS,
Nominal axial compressive strength mm '
without consideration of length effects, N s Lowest elastic section modulus relative to
Nominal bearing strength of concrete, N the axis of bending, mrrr'
Required second-order axial strength using Spacing of secondary members, m
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N Chord elastic section modulus, mrn '
Required axial compressive strength using Elastic section modulus to the toe in
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N compression relative to the axis of bending,
Required strength, N mm'
Required tensile strength using LRFD or Effective section modulus about major
ASD load combinations, N axis, mrrr'
Required axial strength in branch, N Elastic section modulus referred to tension
Required axial strength in chord, N and compression flanges, respectively,
mm '
Required axial strength in compression, N
Elastic section modulus taken about the
Member yield strength, N principal axes, mm '
Full reduction factor for slender For channels, taken as the minimum
compression elements section modulus
Reduction factor for slender stiffened Nominal forces and deformations due to
compression elements the design-basis fire defined in Section A-
Chord-stress interaction parameter 4.2.1
Nominal strength of one stud shear Tension force due to ASD load
connector, N combinations, kN
Reduction factor for slender unstiffened Minimum fastener tension given in
compression elements Table 510.3.1, kN
R Nominal load due to rainwater exclusive of Available torsional strength, N-mm
the ponding contribution, MPa Nominal torsional strength, N-mm
Seismic response modification coefficient Required torsional strength, N-mm
Required strength (ASD) Tension force due to LRFD load
Reduction factor for joints using a pair of combinations, kN
transverse fillet welds only :: Shear lag factor
Coefficient to account for group effect Utilization ratio
Factor in Eq. 503.2-6b dependent on type Reduction coefficient, used in calculating
of system block shear rupture strength
Cross-section monosymmetry parameter Stress index
Nominal strength, specified in Section 502 Stress index
through 511 Required shear force introduced to column,
Nominal slip resistance, N N
Position effect factor for shear studs V' Required shear force transferred by shear
Web plastification factor connectors, N
Reduction factor for reinforced or non- Available shear strength, N
reinforced transverse partial-joint- Nominal shear strength, N
penetration (PIP) groove welds Required shear strength at the location of
Web plastification factor corresponding to the stiffener, N
the tension flange yielding limit state Vr Required shear strength using LRFD or
Required strength (LRFD) ASD load combinations, N
Total nominal strength of longitudinally Gravity load from the LRFD load
loaded fillet welds, as determined in combination or 1.6 times the ASD load
accordance with Table 510.2.5 combination applied at level i, N
Hole reduction coefficient, N

Pn(t,c) First-order axial force using LRFD or ASD Total nominal strength of transversely
load combinations, assuming there is no loaded fillet welds, as determined in
lateral translation of the frame (tension or accordance with Table 510.2.5 without the
compression), N alternate in Section 510.2.4 (a)
Nominal axial strength, N s Elastic section modulus of round HSS
Nominal axial compressive strength mm3 '
without consideration of length effects, N s Lowest elastic section modulus relative to

Nominal bearing strength of concrete, N the axis of bending, mrrr'
Required second-order axial strength using Spacing of secondary members, m
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N Chord elastic section modulus, mnr'
Required axial compressive strength using Elastic section modulus to the toe III
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N compression relative to the axis of bending,
Required strength, N mm '
= Required tensile strength using LRFD or Effective section modulus about major
AS'o load combinations, N axis, mm3
Required axial strength in branch, N Elastic section modulus referred to tension
Required axial strength in chord, N and compression flanges, respectively,
= Required axial strength in compression, N
mrrr'
Elastic section modulus taken about the
Member yield strength, N
principal axes, mm3
Full reduction factor for slender For channels, taken as the minimum
compression elements section modulus
Reduction factor for slender stiffened Nominal forces and deformations due to
compression elements the design-basis fire defined in Section A-
Chord-stress interaction parameter 4.2.1
Nominal strength of one stud shear Tension force due to ASD load
connector, N combinations, kN
Reduction factor for slender unstiffened Minimum fastener tension given in
compression elements Table 510.3.1, kN
R Nominal load due to rainwater exclusive of Available torsional strength, N-mm
the ponding contribution, MPa Nominal torsional strength, N-mm
Seismic response modification coefficient Required torsional strength, N-mm
Required strength (ASD) Tension force due to LRFD load
Reduction factor for joints using a pair of combinations, kN
transverse fillet welds only Shear lag factor
Coefficient to account for group effect Utilization ratio
Factor in Eq. 503.2-6b dependent on type Reduction coefficient, used in calculating
of system block shear rupture strength
Cross-section mono symmetry parameter Stress index
Nominal strength, specified in Section 502 Stress index
through 511 Required shear force introduced to column,
Nominal slip resistance, N N
Position effect factor for shear studs Vi Required shear force transferred by shear
Web plastification factor connectors, N
Reduction factor for reinforced or non- Available shear strength, N
reinforced transverse partial-j oint- Nominal shear strength, N
penetration (PJP) groove welds Required shear strength at the location of
Web plastification factor corresponding to the stiffener, N
the tension flange yielding limit state Required shear strength using LRFD or
Required strength (LRFD) ASD load combinations, N
Total nominal strength of longitudinally Gravity load from the LRFD load
loaded fillet welds, as determined III combination or 1.6 times the ASD load
accordance with Table 510.2.5 combination applied at level i, N
Hole reduction coefficient, N

Z Plastic section modulus about the axis of Stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners,
.. bending, mm3
Branch plastic section modulus about the
mm
Nominal fastener diameter, mm
correct axis of bending, mrrr' Full nominal depth of the section, mm
Zx,y Plastic section modulus about the principal Full nominal depth of tee, mm
axes, mnr' Depth of rectangular bar, mm
a Clear distance between transverse
Diameter, mm
stiffeners, mm
Distance between connectors in a built-up Pin diameter, mm
a
member, mm Roller diameter, mm
a Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to Beam depth, mm
edge of member measured parallel to the Nominal diameter (body or shank
direction of force, mm diameter), mm
a Half the length of the non-welded root face Column depth, mm
in the direction of the thickness of the Eccentricity in a truss connection, positive
tension-loaded plate, mm being away from the branches, mm
Ratio of two times the web area III emid-ht = Distance from the edge of stud shank to the
compression due to application of major steel deck web, measured at mid-height of
axis bending moment alone to the area of the deck rib, and in the load bearing
the compression flange components direction of the stud (in other words, in the
b Outside width of leg in compression, mm direction of maximum moment for a
b Full width of longest angle leg, mm simply supported beam), mm
b Width of unstiffened compression element; fa Required axial stress at the point of
for flanges of I-shaped members and tees, consideration using LRFD or ASD load
the width b is half the full-flange width; combinations, MPa
Required flexural stress at the point of
b f; for legs of angles and flanges of fb(w,z)
consideration (major axis, minor axis)
channels and zees, the width b is the full using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
nominal dimension; for plates, the width b MPa
is the distance from the free edge to the Specified minimum compressive strength
first row of fasteners or line of welds, or
f~
of concrete, MPa
the distance between adjacent lines of Specified minimum compressive strength
fasteners or lines of welds; for rectangular of concrete at elevate temperatures, MPa
HSS, the width b is the clear distance fo Stress due to D + R (the nominal dead load
between the webs less the inside comer + the nominal load due to rainwater or
radius on each side, mm snow exclusive of the ponding
b Width of the angle leg resisting the shear contribution), MPa
force, mm fv Required shear strength per unit area, MPa
Width of column flange, mm g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage)
Reduced effective width, mm between fastener gage lines, mm
Effective edge distance; the distance from g Gap between toes of branch members in a
the edge of the hole to the edge of the part gapped K-connection, neglecting the
measured in the direction normal to the welds, mm
applied force, mm h Clear distance between flanges less the
».; Effective width of the branch face welded fillet or comer radius for rolled shapes; for
built-up sections, the distance between
to the chord
Effective width of the branch face welded adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear
to the overlapped brace distance between flanges when welds are
Flange width, mm used; for tees, the overall depth; for
rectangular HSS, the clear distance
Compression flange width, mm
between the flanges less the inside comer
Width of tension flange, mm radius on each side, mm
Longer leg of angle, mm h Distance between centroids of individual
Shorter leg of angle, mm components perpendicular to the member
axis of buckling, mm

CHAPTEF~ 5 - Structural Steel 5-17
Twice the distance from the centroid to the moment alone

following: the inside face of the Effective radius of gyration used in the
compression flange less the fillet or corner determination of L; for the lateral-
radius, for rolled shapes; the nearest line of torsional buckl ing limit state for major axis
fasteners at the compression flange or the bending of doubly symmetric compact I-
inside faces of the compression flange shaped members and channels
when welds are used, for built-up sections, Radius of gyration about geometric axis
mm parallel to connected leg, mm
Distance between flange centroids, mrn Radius of gyration about y-axis, mm
Twice the distance from the plastic neutral Radius of gyration for the minor principal
axis to the nearest line of fasteners at the axis, mm
compression flange or the inside face of the s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing
compression flange when welds are used, (pitch) of any two consecutive holes, mm
mm t Thickness of element, mm
Hole factor t Wall thickness, mm
Factor defined by Eq. 507.2-6 for t Angle leg thickness, mm
minimum moment of inertia for a Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of
t
transverse stiffener bending, mm
k Distance from outer face of flange to the Thickness of connected material, rnm
web toe of fillet, mm
t
t Thickness of plate, mm
k Outside corner radius of the HSS, which is
t Design wall thickness for HSS equal to
permitted to be taken as 1.5t if unknown,
mm 0.93 times the nominal wall thickness for
Coefficient for slender unstiffened ERW HSS and equal to the nominal wall
elements, mm coefficient thickness for SAW HSS, mm
t Total thickness of fillers, mm
Web plate buckling coefficient
Largest laterally unbraced length along t Design wall thickness of HSS main
either flange at the point of load, mm member, mm
Length of bearing, mm Design wall thickness of HSS branch
I
member, mm
I Length of connection in the direction of
Thickness of the overlapping branch, mm
loading, mm
Number of nodal braced points within the Thickness of the overlapped branch, mm
n
span Thickness of the column-flange, mm
n Threads per mm Thickness of the loaded flange, mm
p Ratio of element i deformation to its Flange thickness of channel shear
deformation at maximum stress connector, mm
p Projected length of the overlapping branch Compression flange thickness, mrn
on the chord Thickness of plate, mm
q Overlap length measured along the
Thickness of tension loaded plate, mm
connecting face of the chord beneath the
two branches Thickness of the attached transverse plate,
r Governing radius of gyration, mm mm
Distance from instantaneous center of Web stiffener thickness, mm
rcit
rotation to weld element with minimum Web thickness of channel shear connector,
!J..u/ri ratio, mm mm
Minimum radius of gyration of individual Beam web thickness, mm
component in a built-up member, mm Web thickness, mm
Radius of gyration of individual component Column web thickness, mm
relative to its centroidal axis parallel to Thickness of element, mm
member axis of buckling, mm w Width of cover plate, mm
Polar radius of gyration about the shear Weld leg size, mm
w
center, mm Subscript relating symbol to major
w
Radius of gyration of the flange principal axis bending
components in flexural compression plus Plate width, mm
w
one-third of the web area in compression
due to application of major axis bending

w Leg size of the reinforcing or contouring width of the chord for rectangular HSS
fillet, if any, in the direction of the Load length parameter, applicable only to
thickness of the tension-loaded plate, mm rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
Weight of concrete per unit volume contact of the branch with the chord in the
Average width of concrete rib or haunch, plane of the connection to the chord width
mm Slenderness parameter
Subscript relating symbol to strong axis Limiting slenderness parameter for
Coordinates of the shear center with compact element
respect to the centroid, mm Limiting slenderness parameter for
x Connection eccentricity, mm compact flange
Subscript relating symbol to weak axis Limiting slenderness parameter for
y
compact web
z Subscript relating symbol to minor
Limiting slenderness parameter for
principal axis bending
noncompact element
a Factor used in Hz equation
Limiting slenderness parameter for non-
a Separation ratio for built-up compression
compact flange
members Limiting slenderness parameter for non-
P Reduction factor given by Eq. 510.2-1 compact web
P Width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to Mean slip coefficient for class A or B
chord diameter for round HSS; the ratio of surfaces, as applicable, or as established by
overall branch width to chord width for tests
rectangular HSS Resistance factor, specified in Section 502
PT Brace stiffness requirement excluding web
distortion, N-mm/radian
through 511
CPB Resistance factor for bearing on concrete
Required brace stiffness Resistance factor for flexure
Effective width ratio; the sum of the
CPb
CPc Resistance factor for compression
perimeters of the two branch members in a
CPc Resistance factor for axially loaded
K-connection divided by eight times the
composite columns
chord width
Resistance factor for shear on the failure
e.; Effective outside punching perimeter CPs!
path
e.: Web distortional stiffness, including the
effect of web transverse stiffeners, if any,
CPT Resistance factor for torsion
CPt Resistance factor for tension
Nsmm/radian
CPv Resistance factor for shear
Pw Section property for unequal leg angles,
positive for short legs in compression and
fl Safety factor
negative for long legs in compression flB Safety fact~r for bearing on concrete
First-order interstory drift due to the design flb Safety factor for flexure
loads, mm flc Safety factor for compression
First-order interstory drift due to lateral flc Safety factor for axially loaded composite
forces, mm columns
Deformation of welded elements at Safety factor for shear on the failure path
intermediate stress levels, linearly Safety factor for torsion
proportioned to the critical deformation
Safety factor for tension
based on distance from the instantaneous
Safety factor for shear
center of rotation, r, , mm
Minimum reinforcement ratio for
Deformation of weld element at maximum
longitudinal reinforcing element
stress, mm
(J Angle of loading measured from the
Deformation of welded element at ultimate
welded longitudinal axis, degrees
stress (fracture), usually in element furthest
(J Acute angle between the branch and chord,
from instantaneous center of rotation, mm
degrees
y Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-
Strain corresponding to compressive
half the diameter to the wall thickness for
round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width strength, f~
to wall thickness for rectangular HSS Parameter for reduced flexural stiffness
Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the using the direct analysis method
branches of a gapped K-connection to the

CHAPTER 5 - Strllctur81 Steel 5-19
DEFINITIONS BATTEN PLATE is a plate rigidly connected to two

parallel components of a built-up column or beam
designed to transmit shear between the components.
ACTIVE FIRE PROTECTION is a building material
and systems that are activated by a fire to mitigate adverse
BEAM is a structural member that has the primary
effects or to notify people to take some action mitigate
function of resisting bending moments.
adverse effects.
ADJUSTED BRACE STRENGTH is the strength of a BEAM-COLUMN is a structural member that resists
brace in a buckling-restrained braced frame at both axial force and bending moment.
deformations corresponding to 2.0 times the design story
drift. BEARING is the connection, limit state of ultimate shear
forces transmitted by the mechanical fastener to the
ALLOWABLE STRENGTH is the nominal strength connection elements.
divided by the safety factor, Rn/n.
BEARING refers to a bolted connection, limit state of
shear forces transmitted by the bolt to the connection
ALLOWABLE STRESS is the allowable strength
elements.
divided by the appropriate section property, such as
section modulus or cross-section area.
BEARING (LOCAL COMPRESSIVE YIELDING)
refers to the limit state of local compressive yielding due
AMPLIFICATION FACTOR is the multiplier of the
to the action of a member bearing against another member
results of first-order analysis to reflect second-order
or surface.
effects.
BEARING-TYPE CONNECTION is a bolted
AMPLIFIED SEISMIC LOAD is the horizontal
connection where shear forces are transmitted by the bolt
component of earthquake load E multiplied by no,
where bearing against the connection elements.
E and the horizontal component of E are specified in the
NSCP code. BLOCK SHEAR RUPTURE refers to a connection,
limit state of tension fracture along one path and shear
APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE is a Building Code yielding or shear fracture along another path.
under which the structure is designed (i.e NSCP 6th
Edition). BOUNDARY MEMBER is a portion along wall and
diaphragm edge strengthened with structural steel sections
ASD (ALLOWABLE STRENGTH DESIGN) is a and/or longitudinal steel reinforcement and transverse
method of proportioning structural components such that reinforcement.
the allowable strength equals or exceeds the required
strength of the component under the action of the ASD BRACED FRAME is an essentially vertical truss system
load combinations. that provides resistance to lateral loads and provides
stability for the structural system.
ASD LOAD COMBINATION refers to load
combination in the NSCP code intended for allowable BRACING is a member or system that provides stiffness
strength design (allowable stress design). and strength to limit the out-of-plane movement of
another member at a brace point.
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (AHJ) is
the organization, political subdivision, office or individual BRACE TEST SPECIMEN is a single buckling-
charged with the responsibility of administering and restrained brace element used for laboratory testing
enforcing the provisions of this standard. intended to model the brace in the Prototype.
AVAILABLE STRENGTH is the design strength or BRANCH FACE is the wall ofHSS branch member.
allowable strength, as appropriate.
BRANCH MEMBER refers HSS connections, member
AVAILABLE STRESS is the design stress or allowable that terminates at a chord member or main member.
stress, as appropriate.
BUCKLING is a limit state of sudden change in the
AVERAGE RIB WIDTH is the average width of the rib geometry of a structure or any of its elements under a
of a corrugation in a formed steel deck. critical loading condition.

:)-20 CI~IAP-rEr~ 5 - Structural Steel
BUCKLING STRENGTH IS a nominal strength for COLUMN is the structural member that has the primary
instability limits states. function of resisting axial force,
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAME COLU MN BASE is an assemblage of structural shapes,

(BRBF) is a diagonally braced frame satisfying the plates, connectors, bolts, and rods at the base of a column
requirements or Section 529 in which all members of the used to transmit forces between the steel superstructure
bracing system are subjected primarily to axial forces and and the foundation.
in which the limit slate of compression buckling of braces
is precluded at forces and deformations corresponding to COMBINED SYSTEM refers to the structure comprised
2.0 times the design story drift. of two or more lateral load-resisting systems of different
type.
BUCKLING-RESTRAINING SYSTEM is the system
of restraints that limits buckling of the steel core in COMPACT SECTION IS a section capable of
BRBF. This system includes the casing on tbe steel core developing a fully plastic stress distribution and
and structural elements adjoining its connections. The possessing a rotation capacity of approximately three
buckling-restraining system is intended to permit the before the onset of local buckling.
transverse expansion and longitudinal contraction of the
steel core for deformations corresponding to 2.0 times the COMPARTMENTATION is the enclosure of a building
design story drift. space with elements that have specific fire endurance.
BUILT-UP MEMBER, CROSS-SECTION, COMPLETE-JOINT -PENETRA TION GROOVE

SECTION, SHAPE refers to the member, cross-section, WELD (CJP) is a groove weld in which weld metal
section or shape fabricated from structural steel elements extends through the joint thickness, except as permitted
that are welded or bolted together. for HSS connections.
CAMBER is a curvature fabricated into a beam or COMPOSITE is the condition 111 which steel and
truss so as to compensate for deflection induced by concrete elements and members work as a unit in the
loads. distribution of internal forces.
CASING is an element tbat resists forces transverse to COMPOSITE BEAM refers to structural steel beam in
the axis of the brace thereby restraining buckling of the contact with and acting compositely with reinforced
core. The casing requires a means of delivering this force concrete via bond or shear connectors.
to the remainder of the buckling-restraining system. The
casing resists little or no force in the axis of the brace. COMPOSITE BRACE is a reinforced-concrete-encased
structural steel section (rolled or built-up) or concrete-
CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST is a standard filled steel section used as a brace.
dynamic test measuring notch toughness of a specimen.
COMPOSITE COLUMN is a reinforced-concrete-
CHORD MEMBER refers to or HSS, primary member encased structural steel section (rolled or built-up) or
that extends through a truss connection. concrete-filled steel section used as a column.
CLADDING is the exterior covering of structure. COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY BRACED

FRAME (C-EBF) is a composite braced frame meeting
COLD-FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBER the requirements of Section 545.
refers to the shape manufactured by press-braking
blanks sheared from sheets, cut lengths of coils or COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAME
plates, or by roll forming cold- or hot- rolled coils or (C-IMF) is a composite moment frame meeting the
sheets; both forming operations being performed at requirements of Section 541.
ambient room temperature, that is, without manifest
addition of heat such as would be required for hot COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAME
forming. (C-OBF) is a composite braced frame meeting the
requirements of Section 544.
COLLECTOR ELEMENT refers to the member that
serves to transfer loads between floor diaphragms and the COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME
members of the seismic load resisting system. (C-OMF) is a composite moment frame meeting the

COMPOSITE PARTIALLY RESTRAINED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS refers to the design

MOMENT FRAME (C-PRMF) is a composite moment drawings, specifications, shop drawings, and erection
frame meeting the requirements of Section 539. drawings.
COMPOSITE SHEAR WALL is a reinforced concrete CONTRACTOR is a fabricator or erector, as applicable.

wall that has unencased or reinforced-concrete encased
structural steel sections as boundary members. CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER is the transfer of
thermal energy from a point of higher temperature to a
COMPOSITE SLAB) is a concrete slab supported on point of lower temperature through the motion of an
and bonded to a formed steel deck that acts as a intervening medium.
diaphragm to transfer load to and between elements of the
seismic load resisting system. COPE is a cut-out made in a structural member to
remove a flange and conform to the shape of an
COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY intersecting member.
BRACED FRAME (C-CBF) is a composite braced
frame meeting the requirements of Section 543. COUPLING BEAM is a structural steel or composite
beam connecting adjacent reinforced concrete wall
COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME elements so that they act together to resist lateral loads.
(C-SMF) is a composite moment frame meeting the
requirements of Section 540. COVER PLATE is a plate welded or bolted to the flange
of a member to increase cross-sectional area, section
COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR WALL modulus, or moment of inertia.
(C-SPW) is a wall consisting of steel plate with
reinforced concrete encasement on one or both sides that CROSS CONNECTION refers to HSS connection in
provides out-of-plane stiffening to prevent buckling of the which forces in branch members or connecting
steel plate and meeting the requirements of Section 548. elements transverse to the main member are primarily
equilibrated by forces in other branch members or
CONCRETE CRUSHING is the limit state of connecting elements on the opposite side of the main
compressive failure in concrete having reached the member.
ultimate strain.
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA is an Effective area, Ae,
CONCRETE HAUNCH is a section of solid concrete calculated using the effective widths of component
that results from stopping the deck on each side of the elements in accordance with Section 552. If the effective
girder in a composite floor system constructed using a widths of all component elements, determined in
formed steel deck. accordance with Section 552, are equal to the actual flat
widths, it equals the gross or net area, as applicable.
CONCRETE-ENCASED BEAM is a beam that totally
encased in concrete cast integrally with the slab. CURTAIN WALL STUD is a member in the steel
framed exterior wall system that transfers transverse (out-
CONFIRMA TORY TEST is a test made, when desired, of-plane) loads and is limited to a superimposed axial
on members, connections, and assemblies designed in load, exclusive of sheathing materials, of not more than
accordance with the provisions of Section 551 through 1460 N/m, or superimposed axial load of not more than
Section 557, Appendices 1 and 2, and Section C-3 of this 890 N per stud.
Specification or its specific references, in order to
compare actual to calculated performance. DEMAND CRITICAL WELD weld so designated by
this chapter.
CONNECTION is a combination of structural elements
and joints used to transmit forces between two or more DESIGN-BASIS FIRE is a set of conditions that define
members. the development of a fire and the spread of combustion
products throughout a building or portion thereof.
CONTINUITY PLATES is a column stiffeners at the
top and bottom of the panel zone; also known as DESIGN EARTHQUAKE refers to the earthquake
transverse stiffeners. represented by the design response spectrum as specified
in the NSCP code.

DESIGN LOAD is the applied load determined in DIRECT BOND INTERACTION is a mechanism by
accordance with either LRFD load combinations or which force is transferred between steel and concrete
. ASD load combinations, whichever is applicable. in a composite section by bond stress.
DESIGN METHODOLOGY is a set of step-by-step DIRECT STRENGTH METHOD is an alternative

procedures, based on calculation or experiment, used to design method detailed in Section C-1 that provides
determine sizes, lengths, and details in the design of predictions of member strengths without the use of
buckling-restrained braces and their connections. effective widths.
DESIGN STORY DRIFT is an amplified story drift DISTORTIONAL BUCKLING is a mode of buckling
(drift under the design earthquake, including the effects of involving change in cross-sectional shape, excluding local
inelastic action), determined as specified in the NSCP buckling.
code.
DISTORTIONAL FAILURE is a limit state of an
DESIGN STRENGTH is the resistance factor multiplied HSS truss connection based on distortion of a
by the nominal strength, cpRn. rectangular HSS chord member into a rhomboidal shape.
DESIGN STRESS RANGE refers to magnitude of DISTORTIONAL STIFFNESS is an out-of-plane

change in stress due to the repeated application and flexural stiffuess of web.
removal of service live loads. For locations subject to
stress reversal, it is the algebraic difference of the peak DOUBLE CURVATURE is a deformed shape of a beam
stresses. with one or more inflection points within the span.
DESIGN STRESS is the design strength divided by DOUBLE-CONCENTRATED FORCES is the two
the appropriate section property, such as section equal and opposite forces that form a couple on the
modulus or cross section area. same side of the loaded member.
DESIGN WALL THICKNESS is the HSS wall DOUBLER is a plate added to, and parallel with, a beam
thickness assumed in the determination of section or column web to increase resistance to concentrated
properties. forces.
DIAGONAL BRACING is an inclined structural DOUBLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section

members carrying primarily axial load that are employed symmetric about tW? orthogonal axes through its centroid.
to enable a structural frame to act as a truss to resist
lateral loads. DUAL SYSTEM is a structural system with the
following features: (1) an essentially complete space
DIAGONAL STIFFENER is a web stiffener at frame that provides support for gravity loads; (2)
column panel zone oriented diagonally to the flanges, resistance to lateral load provided by moment frames
on one or both sides of the web. (SMF, IMF or OMF) that are capable of resisting at least
25 percent of the base shear, and concrete or steel shear
DIAPHRAGM is the roof, floor or other membrane walls, or steel braced frames (EBF, SCBF or OCBF); and
or bracing system that transfers in-plane forces to the (3) each system designed to resist the total lateral load in
lateral force resisting system. proportion to its relative rigidity.
DIAPHRAGM PLATE is a plate possessing in-plane DUCTILE LIMIT STATE includes member and
shear stiffness and strength, used to transfer forces to the connection yielding, bearing deformation at bolt holes, as
supporting elements. well as buckling of members that conform to the width-
thickness limitations of Table 521-1. Fracture of a
DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD is the design method member or of a connection, or buckling of a connection
for stability that captures the effects of residual stresses element, is not a ductile limit state.
and initial out-of-plumbness of frames by reducing
stiffness and applying notional loads in a second-order
analysis.

CHAPTER 5·- Structural Steel 5·23
ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME (EBF) is a END RETURN is a length of fillet weld that continues
diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of around a corner in the same plane.
Section 528 that has at least one end of each bracing
member connected to a beam a short distance from ENGINEER OF RECORD is a licensed professional
another beam-to-brace connection or a beam-to-column responsible for sealing the design drawings and
connection. specifications.
EFFECTIVE DESIGN WIDTH (EFFECTIVE EXEMPTED COLUMN refers to the column not
WIDTH) is a flat width of an element reduced for design meeting the requirements of Equation 522-3 for SMF.
purposes, also known simply as the effective width.
EXPANSION ROCKER refers to support with curved
EFFECTIVE LENGTH is the length of an otherwise surface on which a member bears that can tilt to
identical column with the same strength when analyzed accommodate expansion.
with pinned end conditions.
EXP ANSION ROLLER is a round steel bar on which a
EFFECTIVE LENGTH FACTOR is the ratio between member bears that can roll to accommodate expansion.
the effective length and the unbraced length of the
member. EXPECTED TENSILE STRENGTH is the tensile
strength of a member, equal to the specified minimum
EFFECTIVE NET AREA IS a net area modified to tensile strength, Fu, multiplied by Rt.
account for the effect of shear lag.
EXPECTED YIELD STRENGTH is the yield strength
EFFECTIVE SECTION MODULUS IS a section in tension of a member, equal to the expected yield stress
modulus reduced to account for buckling of slender multiplied by Ag.
compression elements.
EXPECTED YIELD STRESS is the yield stress of the
EFFECTIVE WIDTH refers to reduced width of a
material, equal to the specified minimum yield stress, F y'
plate or slab with an assumed uniform stress
distribution which produces the same effect on the multiplied by Ry.
behavior of a structural member as the actual plate or slab
width with its non-uniform stress distribution. EYEBAR refers to pin-connected tension member of
uniform thickness, with forged or thermally cut head of
ELASTIC ANALYSIS is a structural analysis based on greater width than the body, proportioned to provide
the assumption that the structure returns to its original approximately equal strength in the head and body.
geometry on removal of the load.
FACE BEARING PLATES refers to stiffeners attached
ELEV ATED TEMPERATURES refers to heating to structural steel beams that are embedded in reinforced
conditions experienced by building elements or structures concrete walls or columns. The plates are located at the
as a result of fire, which are in excess of the anticipated face of the reinforced concrete to provide confinement
I I
ambient conditions. and to transfer loads to the concrete through direct
bearing.
ENCASED COMPOSITE BEAM is a composite beam
completely enclosed in reinforced concrete. FACTORED LOAD is the product of a load factor and
the nominal load.
ENCASED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a structural
steel column (rolled or built-up) completely encased in FASTENER is a generic term for bolts, rivets, or other
reinforced concrete. connecting devices.
ENCASED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a composite FATIGUE is a limit state of crack initiation and
column consisting of a structural concrete column and growth resulting from repeated application of live
one or more embedded steel shapes. loads.
END PANEL is a web panel with an adjacent panel on FAYING SURFACE is a contact surface of connection
one side only. elements transmitting a shear force.

FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a round or FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELD is a weld in a

.rectangular structural steel section filled with concrete. groove formed by a member with a curved surface in
contact with a planar member.
FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMN is a composite
column consisting of a shell of HSS or steel pipe filled FLARE V-GROOVE WELD is a weld in a groove
with structural concrete. formed by two members with curved surfaces.
FILLER is a plate used to build up the thickness of one FLASHOVER is the rapid transition to a state of total
component. surface involvement in a fire of combustible materials
within an enclosure.
FILLER METAL is a metal or alloy to be added in
making a welded joint. FLAT WIDTH is a nominal width of rectangular
HSS minus twice the outside comer radius. In absence
FILLET WELD is a weld of generally triangular of knowledge of the comer radius, the flat width may be
cross section made between intersecting surfaces of taken as the total section width minus three times the
elements. thickness.
FILLET WELD REINFORCEMENT is a fillet welds FLAT WIDTH is the Nominal width of an element
added to groove welds. exclusive of comers measured along its plane.
FIRE refers to as destructive burning, as manifested by FLAT-WIDTH-TO THICKNESS RATIO (FLAT

any or all of the following: light, flame, heat, or smoke. WIDTH RATIO) refers to flat width of an element
measured along its plane, divided by its thickness.
FIRE BARRIER is an element of construction formed of
fire-resisting materials and tested in accordance with FLEXURAL BUCKLING is a buckling mode in
ASTM Standard E1l9, or other approved standard fire which a compression member deflects laterally without
resistance test, to demonstrate compliance with the twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
Building Code.
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING is a buckling
FIRE ENDURANCE is a measure of the elapsed time mode in which a compression member bends and
during which a material or assembly continues to exhibit twists simultaneously without change in cross-sectional
fire resistance. shape.
FIRE RESISTANCE is the property of assemblies that FORCE is a resultant of distribution of stress over a
prevents or retards the passage of excessive heat, hot prescribed area.
gases or flames under conditions of use and enables them
to continue to perform a stipulated function. FORMED SECTION see cold-formed steel structural
member.
FIRE RESISTANCE RATING is the period of time a
building element, component or assembly maintains the FORMED STEEL DECK refers to composite
ability to contain a fire, continues to perform a given construction, steel cold formed into a decking profile used
structural function, or both, as determined by test or as a permanent concrete form.
methods based on tests.
FULL, UNREDUCED AREA, A, is calculated without
FIRST-ORDER ANALYSIS is a structural analysis in considering local buckling in the component elements,
which equilibrium conditions are formulated on the which equals either the gross area or net area, as
undeformed structure; second-order effects are neglected. applicable.
FITTED BEARING STIFFENER is a stiffener used at FULLY COMPOSITE BEAM is a composite beam that
a support or concentrated load that fits tightly against one has a sufficient number of shear connectors to develop the
or both flanges of a beam so as to transmit load through nominal plastic flexural strength ofthe composite section.
bearing.
FULLY RESTRAINED MOMENT CONNECTION
FLANGE OF A SECTION IN BENDING (FLANGE) is a connection capable of transferring moment with
is a flat width of flange including any intermediate negligible rotation between connected members.
stiffeners plus adjoining comers.

GAGE is a transverse center-to-center spacing of HEAT RELEASE RATE is the rate at which thermal
fasteners. energy is generated by a burning material.
GAP CONNECTION refers to HSS truss connection HORIZONTAL SHEAR is a Force at the interface
with a gap or space on the chord face between intersecting between steel and concrete surfaces in a composite
branch members. beam.
GENERAL COLLAPSE. is a limit state of chord HSS is a square, rectangular or round hollow structural
plastification of opposing sides of a round HSS chord steel section produced in accordance with a pipe or tubing
member at a cross-connection. product specification.
GEOMETRIC AXIS is the axis parallel to web, flange User Note: A pipe can be designed using the same
or angle leg. design rules for round HSS sections as long as it
conforms to ASTM A53 Class B and the appropriate
GIRDER see Beam. parameters are used in the design.
GIRDER see Beam. INELASTIC ANALYSIS refers to structural analysis

that takes into account inelastic material behavior,
GIRDER FILLER is a narrow piece of sheet steel used including plastic analysis.
as a fill between the edge of a deck sheet and the flange of
a girder in a composite floor system constructed using a INELASTIC DEFORM ATlON is the permanent or
formed steel deck. plastic portion oi the axial displacement in a buckling-
restrained brace.
GIRT is a horizontal structural member that supports wall
panels and is primarily subjected to bending under IN-PLANE INSTABILITY. refers to limit state of a
horizontal loads, such as wind load. beam-column bent about its major axis while lateral
buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is prevented by
GOUGE refers to relatively smooth surface groove or lateral bracing.
cavity resulting from plastic deformation or removal of
material. IN-PLANE INSTABILITY refers to buckling involving
in the plane of the frame or the member.
GRAVITY AXIS is the axis through the center of gravity
of a member along its length. INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAME (IMF) is the
moment frame' system that meets the requirements of
GRAVITY FRAME is a portion of the framing system Section 523.
not included in the lateral load resisting system.
INTERMEDIATE SEISMIC SYSTEMS is seisrmc
GRAVITY LOAD is a load, such as that produced by systems designed assuming moderate inelastic action
dead and live loads, acting in the downward direction. occurs in some members under the design earthquake.
GRIP (OF BOLT) is the thickness of material through INTERSTORY DRIFT ANGLE. refers to interstory
which a bolt passes. displacement divided by story height, radians.
GROSS AREA, Ag, without deductions for holes, INSTABILITY refers to limit state reached 111 the
openings and cutouts. loading of a structural component, frame or structure
in which a slight disturbance in the loads or
geometry produces large displacements.
GROOVE WELD is a weld in a groove between
connection elements. See also AWS D 1.1.
INVERTED-V-BRACED FRAME. refers to V-braced
frame.
GUSSET PLATE is a plate element connecting truss
members or a strut or brace to a beam or column.
JOINT is an area where two or more ends, surfaces, or
edges are attached. Categorized by type of fastener or
HEAT FLUX is the radiant energy per unit surface area.
weld used and the method of force transfer.

JOINT ECCENTRICITY refers to HSS truss LIMIT STATE is the condition in which a structure or
connection, perpendicular distance from chord member component becomes unfit for service and is judged either
.' center of gravity to intersection of branch member work to be no longer useful for its intended function
points. (serviceability limit state) or to have reached its ultimate
load-carrying capacity (strength limit state).
K-AREA is the region of the web that extends from the
tangent point of the web and the flange-web fillet (AISC LINK in EBF, the segment of a beam that is located
"k" dimension) a distance of 38 mm into the web beyond between the ends of two diagonal braces or between the
the "k" dimension. end of a diagonal brace and a column. The length of the
link is defined as the clear distance between the ends of
K-BRACED FRAME is a bracing configuration in two diagonal braces or between the diagonal brace and
which braces connect to a column at a location with no the column face.
diaphragm or other out-of-plane support.
LINK INTERMEDIATE WEB STIFFENERS IS the
K-CONNECTION -refers to HSS connection III which vertical web stiffeners placed within the link in EBF.
forces in branch members or connecting elements
transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated LINK ROTATION ANGLE is an inelastic angle
by forces in other branch members or connecting between the link and the beam outside of the link when
elements on the same side of the main member. the total story drift is equal to the design story drift.
LACING is a plate, angle or other steel shape, in a LINK SHEAR DESIGN STRENGTH refers to lesser of
lattice configuration, that connects two steel shapes the available shear strength of the link developed from the
together. moment or shear strength of the link.
LAP JOINT is a joint between two overlapping . LOAD refers to force or other action that results from the
connection elements in parallel planes. weight of building materials, occupants and their
possessions, environmental effects, differential
LATERAL BRACING is a diagonal bracing, shear movement, or restrained dimensional changes.
walls or equivalent means for providing in-plane
lateral stability. LOAD-CARRYING REINFORCEMENT is a
reinforcement in composite members designed and
LATERAL BRACING MEMBER refers to a member detailed to resist the required loads.
that is designed to inhibit lateral buckling or lateral-
torsional buckling of primary framing members. LOAD is a force" or other action that results from the
weight of building materials, occupants and their
LATERAL LOAD refers to load, such as that possessions, environmental effects, differential
produced by wind or earthquake effects, acting III a movement, or restrained dimensional changes.
lateral direction.
LOAD EFFECT refers to forces, stresses and
LATERAL LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM refers to deformations produced in a structural component by the
structural system designed to resist lateral loads and applied loads.
provide stability for the structure as a whole.
LOAD FACTOR is a factor that accounts for deviations
LATERAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING is a buckling of the nominal load from the actual load, for uncertainties
mode of a flexural member involving deflection in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect
normal to the plane of bending occurring simultaneously and for the probability that more than one extreme load
with twist about the shear center of the cross-section. will occur simultaneously.
LEANING COLUMN is a column designed to carry LOCAL BENDING is the ultimate state of large
gravity loads only, with connections that are not deformation of a flange under a concentrated transverse
intended to provide resistance to lateral loads. force.
LENGTH EFFECTS is the consideration of the LOCAL BUCKLING refers to buckling of a

reduction in strength of a member based on its compression element where the line junctions between
unbraced length. elements remain straight and angles between elements do
not change.

LOCAL CRIPPLING refers to limit state of local failure MOMENT FRAME refers to framing system that
of web plate in the immediate vicinity of a concentrated provides resistance to lateral loads and provides stability
load or reaction. to the structural system, primarily by shear and flexure
of the framing members and their connections.
LOCAL YIELDING refers to yielding that occurs ill a
local area of an element. MULTIPLE-STIFFENED ELEMENT is an element
stiffened between webs, or between a web and a stiffened
LOWEST ANTICIPATED SERVICE edge, by means of intermediate stiffeners parallel to the
TEMPERATURE (LAST) is the lowest I-hour average direction of stress.
temperature with a I ~O-year mean recurrence interval.
NET AREA, An, is equal to gross area less the area of
LRFD (LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR holes, openings, and cutouts.
DESIGN) is the method of proportioning structural
components such that the design strength equals or NODAL BRACE is a brace that prevents lateral
exceeds the required strength of the component under the movement or twist independently of other braces at
action of the LRFD load combinations. adjacent brace points (see relative brace).
LRFD LOAD COMBINATION is the load combination NOMINAL DIMENSION refers to the designated or
in the NSCP code intended for strength design (load and theoretical dimension, as in the tables of section
resistance factor design). properties.
MAIN MEMBER refers to HSS connections, chord NOMINAL LOAD is the magnitude of the load specified
member, column or other HSS member to which branch by the NSCP code.
members or other connecting elements are attached.
NOMINAL RIB HEIGHT refers to height of formed
MASTER COIL refers to one continuous, weld-free coil steel deck measured from the underside of the lowest
as produced by a hot mill, cold mill, metallic coating line point to the top of the highest point.
or paint line and identifiable by a unique coil number. In
some cases, this coil is cut into smaller coils or slit into NOMINAL STRENGTH is a strength of a structure or
narrower coils; however, all of these smaller and lor component (without the resistance factor or safety factor
narrower finished coils are said to have come from the applied) to resist load effects, as determined in
same master coil if they are traceable to the original accordance with this Specification.
master coil number.
NONCOMPACT SECTION is a section that can
MEASURED FLEXURAL RESISTANCE is a bending develop the yield stress in its compression elements
moment measured in a beam at the face of the column, for before local buckling occurs, but cannot develop a
a beam-to-column test specimen tested in accordance with rotation capacity of three.
Appendix B-4.
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING refers to inspection
MECHANISM is a structural system that includes a procedure wherein no material is destroyed and integrity
sufficient number of real hinges, plastic hinges or of the material or component is not affected.
both, so as to be able to articulate in one or more
rigid body modes. NOTCH TOUGHNESS refers to energy absorbed at a
specified temperature as measured in the Charpy V-Notch
MILL SCALE is an oxide surface coating on steel test.
formed by the hot rolling process.
NOTIONAL LOAD refers to Virtual load applied in a
MILLED SURFACE is a surface that has been machined structural analysis to account for destabilizing effects that
flat by a mechanically guided tool to a flat, smooth are not otherwise accounted for in the design provisions.
condition.
NSCP CODE refers to the building code under which the
MOMENT CONNECTION is a connection that structure is designed. NSCP 6th Edition.
transmits bending moment between connected
members.

ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED PARTIALLY RESTRAINED MOMENT

fRAME (OCBF) refers to a diagonally braced frame CONNECTION is a connection capable of
meeting the requirements of Section 527 in which all transferring moment with rotation between connected
members of the bracing system are subjected primarily to members that is not negligible.
axial forces.
PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION refers to Building
ORDINARY MOMENT FRAME (OMF) refers to materials and systems whose ability to resist the effects of
moment frame system that meets the requirements of fire does not rely on any outside activating condition or
Section 524. mechanism.
ORDINARY REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR PERCENT ELONGATION is a measure of ductility,

WALL WITH STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS determined in a tensile test as the maximum elongation of
(C-ORCW) is a composite shear walls meeting the the gage length divided by the original gage length.
PERFORMANCE-BASED DESIGN is an engineering
ORDINARY SEISMIC SYSTEMS is a seismic systems approach to structural design that is based on agreed-upon
designed assuming limited inelastic action occurs in some performance goals and objectives, engineering analysis
members under the design earthquake. and quantitative assessment of alternatives against those
design goals and objectives using accepted engineering
OUT-OF-PLANE BUCKLING refers to limit state of tools, methodologies and performance criteria.
a beam-column bent about its major axis while
lateral buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is not PERFORMANCE TEST is a test made on structural
prevented by lateral bracing. members, connections, and assemblies whose
performance cannot be determined in accordance with
OVERLAP CONNECTION refers HSS truss Section 551 to Section 557 of this specification or its
connection in which - intersecting branch members specific references.
overlap.
PERMANENT LOAD refers to load III which
OVERSTRENGTH FACTOR, no
refers to the factor variations over time are rare or of small magnitude.
specified by the NSCP code in order to determine the All other loads are variable loads.
amplified seismic load, where required by these
Provisions. PIPE see HSS.
PANEL ZONE is a web area of beam-to-column PITCH is the longifudinal center-to-center spacing of
connection delineated by the extension of beam and fasteners. Center-to-center spacing of bolt threads along
column flanges through the connection, transmitting axis of bolt.
moment through a shear panel.
PLASTIC ANALYSIS refers to structural analysis based
PARTIALLY COMPOSITE BEAM is an unencased on the assumption of rigid-plastic behavior, in other
composite beam with a nominal flexural strength words, that equilibrium is satisfied throughout the
controlled by the strength of the shear stud connectors. structure and the stress is at or below the yield stress.
PARTIALLY RESTRAINED COMPOSITE PLASTIC HINGE refers to yielded zone that forms in a
CONNECTION is a partially restrained (PR) structural member when the plastic moment is attained.
connections as defined in the Specification that connect The member is assumed to rotate further as if
partially or fully composite beams to steel columns with hinged, except that such rotation is restrained by the
flexural resistance provided by a force couple achieved plastic moment.
with steel reinforcement in the slab and a steel seat angle
or similar connection at the bottom flange. PLASTIC MOMENT refers to the theoretical resisting
moment developed within a fully yielded cross section.
PARTIAL-JOINT -PENETRATION GROOVE
WELD (PJP) is a Groove weld in which the penetration PLASTIC STRESS DISTRIBUTION METHOD is a
is intentionally less than the complete thickness of the method for determining the stresses in a composite
connected element. member assuming that the steel section and the concrete
in the cross section are fully plastic.

PLASTIFICATION refers to HSS connection, limit state PRYING ACTION is an amplification of the tension
based on an out-of-plane flexural yield line mechanism in force in a bolt caused by leverage between the point of
the chord at a branch member connection. applied load, the bolt and the reaction of the connected
elements.
PLATE GIRDER is a built-up beam.
PUBLISHED SPECIFICATION are requirements for a
PLUG WELD is a weld made in a circular hole in one steel listed by a manufacturer, processor, producer,
element of a joint fusing that element to another element. purchaser, or other body, which (1) are generally
available in the public domain or are available to the
POINT-SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section public upon request, (2) are established before the steel is
symmetrical about a point (centroid) such as a Z-section ordered, and (3) as a minimum, specify minimum
having equal flanges. mechanical properties, chemical composition limits, and,
if coated sheet, coating properties.
PONDING is retention of water due solely to the
deflection of flat roof framing. PUNCHING LOAD is a component of branch member
force perpendicular to a chord.
POSITIVE FLEXURAL STRENGTH is the load or
force that can be carried by an element, member, or PURLIN. is a horizontal structural member that supports
frame after initial buckling has occurred. roof deck and is primarily subjected to bending under
vertical loads such as snow, wind or dead loads.
POST-BUCKLING STRENGTH. is the load or force
that can be carried by an element, member, or frame P - Ii EFFECT is the effect of loads acting on the
after initial buckling has occurred. deflected shape of a member between joints or nodes.
PREQUALIFIED CONNECTION refers to the P - LI EFFECT is the effect of loads acting on the
connection that complies with the requirements of displaced location of joints or nodes in a structure. In
Appendix B-1. tiered building structures, this is the effect of loads acting
on the laterally displaced location of floors and roofs.
PRESCRIPTIVE DESIGN is a design method that
documents compliance with general criteria established in QUALITY ASSURANCE is system of shop and field
a building code. activities and controls implemented by the owner or
his/her designated representative to provide confidence
PRETENSIONED JOINT is a joint with high-strength to the owner and the building authority that quality
bolts tightened to the specified minimum pretension. requirements are implemented.
PROPERLY DEVELOPED is a reinforcing bars QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN is a written description

detailed to yield in a ductile manner before crushing of qualifications, procedures, quality inspections,
of the concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions of resources, and records to be used to provide assurance
ACI 318 in so far as development length, spacing and that the structure complies with the engineer's quality
cover shall be deemed to be properly developed. requirements, specifications and contract documents.
PROTECTED ZONE is an area of members in which QUALITY CONTROL is a system of shop and field
limitations apply to fabrication and attachments. See controls implemented by the fabricator and erector to
Section 520.4. ensure that contract and company fabrication and erection
requirements are met.
PROTOTYPE refers to the brace, connections, members,
steel properties, and other design, detailing, and RATIONAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS is an
construction features to be used in the actual building analysis based on theory that is appropriate for the
frame. situation, relevant test data if available, and sound
engineering judgment.
PROTOTYPE is the connection or brace design that is to
be used in the building (SMF, IMF, EBF, and BRBF). REDUCED BEAM SECTION refers to reduction in
cross section over a discrete length that promotes a zone
PROVISIONS refers to this document, and in reference of inelasticity in the member.
to the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings (ANSI/ AISC 341).

REENTRANT refers to a cope or weld access hole, a cut SAFETY FACTOR,.n is the factor that accounts for
.at an abrupt change in direction in which the exposed deviations of the actual strength from the nominal
surface is concave. strength, deviations of the actual load from the nominal
load, uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load
REINFORCED-CONCRETE-ENCASED SHAPES is into a load effect and for the manner and consequences of
a structural steel sections encased in reinforced concrete. failure.
RELA TIVE BRACE is a brace that controls the relative SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS refers to the structural
movement of two adjacent brace points along the length analysis in which equilibrium conditions are formulated
of a beam or column or the relative lateral displacement on the deformed structure; second-order effects (both
of two stories in a frame (see nodal brace). p - {; and P - ..1, unless specified otherwise) are
included.
REQUIRED STRENGTH is the forces, stresses and
deformations acting on the structural component, SECOND-ORDER EFFECT is an effect of loads acting
determined by either structural analysis, for the LRFD on the deformed configuration of a structure; includes
or ASD load combinations, as appropriate, or as specified P - {; effect and P - ..1 effect.
by this Specification or Standard.
SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY refers to the
RESISTANCE. See the definition of Nominal Strength. classification assigned to a building by the NSCP code
based upon its seismic use group and the design spectral
RESISTANCE FACTOR, cp is a factor that accounts for response acceleration coefficients.
unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength from the
actual strength and for the manner and consequences of SEISMIC LOAD RESISTING SYSTEM (SLRS) is an
failure. assembly of structural elements in the building that resists
seismic loads, including struts, collectors, chords,
RESTRAINED CONSTRUCTION refers to floor and diaphragms and trusses. Seismic response modification
roof assemblies and individual beams in buildings where coefficient, R. Factor that reduces seismic load effects to
the surrounding or supporting structure is capable of strength level as specified by the NSCP code.
resisting substantial thermal expansion throughout the
range of anticipated elevated temperatures. SEISMIC RESPONSE MODIFICATION
COEFFICIENT is a factor that reduces seismic load
RESTRAINING BARS is a steel reinforcement in effects to strength level.
composite members that is not designed to carry required
loads, but is provided to facilitate the erection of other SEISMIC USE GROUP refers to the classification
steel reinforcement and to provide anchorage for stirrups assigned to a structure based on its use as specified by the
or ties. Generally, such reinforcement is not spliced to be NSCP code.
continuous.
SERVICE LOAD is a load under which serviceability
REVERSE CURV ATURE see double curvature limit states are evaluated.
ROOT OF JOINT is a portion of a joint to be welded SERVICE LOAD COMBINATION is a load

where the members are closest to each other. combination under which serviceability limit states are
evaluated.
ROTATION CAPACITY is the incremental angular
rotation that a given shape can accept prior to SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATE is a limiting
excessive load shedding, defined as the ratio of the condition affecting the ability of a structure to preserve its
inelastic rotation attained to the idealized elastic rotation appearance, maintainability, durability or the comfort of
at first yield. its occupants or function of machinery, under normal
usage.
RUPTURE STRENGTH is a strength limited by
breaking or tearing of members or connecting elements. SHEAR BUCKLING is a buckling mode in which a
plate element, such as the web of a beam, deforms
RUPTURE STRENGTH refers to a connection, strength under pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
limited by tension or shear rupture.

CHAPTEF< 5 - Structural Steel 5-31
SHEAR CONNECTOR refers to headed stud, channel, SINGLY-SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section

plate or other shape welded to a steel member and symmetric about only one axis through its centroid.
embedded in concrete of a composite member to
transmit shear forces at the interface between the two SLENDER-ELEMENT SECTION is a cross section
materials. possessing plate components of sufficient slenderness
such that local buckling in the elastic range will occur.
SHEAR CONNECTOR STRENGTH refers to limit
state of reaching the strength of a shear connector, as SLIP refers to in a bolted connection, limit state of
governed by the connector bearing against the concrete in relative motion of connected parts prior to the attainment
the slab or by the tensile strength of the connector. of the available strength of the connection.
SHEAR RUPTURE refers to limit state of rupture SLIP-CRITICAL CONNECTION refers to bolted
(fracture) due to shear. connection designed to resist movement by friction on the
faying surface of the connection under the clamping
SHEAR WALL is a wall that provides resistance to forces of the bolts.
lateral loads in the plane of the wall and provides stability
for the structural system. SLOT WELD refers to weld made in an elongated hole
fusing an element to another element.
SHEAR YIELDING IS a yielding that occurs due to
shear. SNUG-TIGHTENED JOINT is a joint with the
connected plies in firm contact as specified in Section
SHEAR YIELDING (PUNCHING) refers to HSS 510.
connection, limit state based on out-of-plane shear
strength of the chord wall to which branch members are SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME
attached. (SCBF) is a diagonally braced frame meeting the
requirements of Section 526 in which all members of the
SHEET STEEL refers to a composite floor system, steel bracing system are subjected primarily to axial forces.
used for closure plates or miscellaneous trimming in a
formed steel deck. SPECIAL MOMENT FRAME (SMF) refers to moment
frame system that meets the requirements of Section 522.
SHIM is a thin layer of material used to fill a space
between faying or bearing surfaces. SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALL (SPSW) refers to
plate shear wall system that meets the requirements of
SIDESW A Y BUCKLING is a limit state of lateral Section 530. . .
buckling of the tension flange opposite the location of
a concentrated compression force. SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR
WALLS COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
SIDEW ALL CRIPPLING (FRAME) is a limit state of STEEL ELEMENTS (C-SRCW) is a composite shear
web crippling of the sidewalls of a chord member at a walls meeting the requirements of Section 547.
HSS truss connection.
SPECIAL SEISMIC SYSTEMS is seismic systems
SIDEWALL CRUSHING is a limit state based on designed assuming significant inelastic action occurs in
bearing strength of chord member sidewall in HSS some members under the design earthquake.
truss connection.
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAME (STMF). refers
SIMPLE CONNECTION is a connection that transmits to truss moment frame system that meets the requirements
negligible bending moment between connected members. of Section 525.
SINGLE-CONCENTRA TED FORCE is a tensile or SPECIFICATION refers to the AISC Specification for
compressive force applied normal to the flange of a Structural Steel Buildings (ANSI/AISC 360).
member.
SPECIFIED MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH
SINGLE CURVATURE is a deformed shape of a beam is the lower limit of tensile strength specified for a
with no inflection point within the span. material as defined by ASTM.

SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRESS is the lower STRESS refers to stress as used III this Specification
limit of yield stress specified for a material as defined by means force per unit area.
ASTM.
STRESS is a force per unit area caused by axial force,
SPLICE is a connection between two structural elements moment, shear or torsion.
joined at their ends to form a single, longer element.
STRESS CONCENTRATION is a localized stress
SS (STRUCTURAL STEEL) . is an ASTM designation considerably higher than average (even in
for certain steels intended for structural applications. uniformly loaded cross sections of uniform thickness)
due to abrupt changes in geometry or localized loading.
STABILITY is a condition reached in the loading of a
structural component, frame or structure in which a STRONG AXIS is a major principal centroidal axis of a
slight disturbance in the loads or geometry does not cross section.
produce large displacements.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS is a determination of load
STATIC YIELD STRENGTH is the strength of a effects on members and connections based on principles
structural member or connection determined on the basis of structural mechanics.
of testing conducted under slow monotonic loading until
failure. STRUCTURAL COMPONENT refers to member,
connector, connecting element or assemblage.
STEEL CORE is an axial-force-resisting element of
braces in BRBF. The steel core contains a yielding STRUCTURAL MEMBERS See the definition of Cold-
segment and connections to transfer its axial force to Formed Structural Steel Structural Members
adjoining elements; it may also contain projections
beyond the casing and transition segments between the STRUCTURAL STEEL are steel elements as defined in
projections and yielding segment. Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges.
STIFFENED ELEMENT refers to flat compression
element with adjoining out-of-plane elements along both STRUCTURAL SYSTEM is an assemblage of load-
edges parallel to the direction of loading. carrying components that are joined together to provide
interaction or interdependence.
STIFFENED OR PARTIALL Y STIFFENED
COMPRESSION ELEMENTS. is a flat compression SUB-ASSEMBLAGE TEST SPECIMEN ts the
elements (i.e., a plane compression flange of a flexural combination of the brace, the connections 'and testing
member or a plane web or flange of compression apparatus that replicate as closely as practical the axial
member) of which both edges parallel to the direction of and flexural deformations of the brace in the prototype.
stresses are stiffened either by a web, flange, stiffening
lip, intermediate stiffener, or the like. SUB-ELEMENT OF A MULTIPLE STIFFENED
ELEMENT is a portion of a multiple stiffened element
STIFFENER is a structural element, usually an angle or between adjacent intermediate stiffeners, between web
plate, attached to a member to distribute load, transfer and intermediate stiffener, or between edge and
shear or prevent buckling. intermediate stiffener.
STIFFNESS is a resistance to deformation of a member T-CONNECTION refers to HSS connection in which

or structure, measured by the ratio of the applied force (or the branch member or connecting element is
moment) to the corresponding displacement (or rotation). perpendicular to the main member and in which forces
transverse to the main member are primarily equilibrated
STRAIN COMPATIBILITY METHOD is a method by shear in the main member.
for determining the stresses in a composite member
considering the stress-strain relationships of each TENSILE RUPTURE refers to limit state of rupture
material and its location with respect to the neutral axis (fracture) due to tension.
of the cross section.
TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MATERIAL) is the
STRENGTH LIMIT STATE refers to limiting condition maximum tensile stress that a material is capable of
affecting the safety of the structure, in which the ultimate sustaining as defined by ASTM.
load-carrying capacity is reached.

TENSILE STRENGTH (OF MEMBER) is the TURN-OF-NUT METHOD refers to procedure whereby
maximum tension force that a member is capable of the specified pretension in high-strength bolts is
sustaining. controlled by rotating the fastener component a
predetermined amount after the bolt has been snug
TENSILE YIELDING is the yielding that occurs due to tightened.
tension.
UNBRACED LENGTH is a distance between braced
TENSION AND SHEAR RUPTURE refers to bolt, points of a member, measured between the centers of
limit state of rupture (fracture) due to simultaneous gravity of the bracing members.
tension and shear force.
UNENCASED COMPOSITE BEAM is a composite
TENSION FIELD ACTION is the behavior of a beam wherein the steel section is not completely enclosed
panel under shear in which diagonal tensile forces in reinforced concrete and relies on mechanical
develop in the web and compressive forces develop connectors for composite action with a reinforced slab or
in the transverse stiffeners in a manner similar to a slab on metal deck.
Pratt truss.
UNEVEN LOAD DISTRIBUTION refers to HSS
TESTED CONNECTION refers to connection that connection, condition in which the load is not
complies with the requirements of Appendix B-4. distributed through the cross section of connected
elements in a manner that can be readily determined.
TEST SPECIMEN is a brace test specimen or sub-
assemblage test specimen. UNFRAMED END is the end of a member not
restrained against rotation by stiffeners or connection
THERMALLY CUT is a cut with gas, plasma or laser. elements.
THICKNESS refers to thickness of any element or UNRESTRAINED CONSTRUCTION refers to the

section is the base steel thickness, exclusive of coatings. floor and roof assemblies and individual beams in
buildings that are assumed to be free to rotate and expand
TIE PLATE is a plate element used to join two parallel throughout the range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
components of a built-up column, girder or strut rigidly
connected to the parallel components and designed to UN STIFFENED COMPRESSION ELEMENTS is a
transmit shear between them. flat compression element stiffened at only one edge
parallel to the direction of stress.
TOE OF FILLET refers to junction of a fillet weld
face and base metal. Tangent point of a rolled section UNSTIFFENED ELEMENT refers to flat compression
fillet. element with an adjoining out-of-plane element along one
edge parallel to the direction of loading.
TORSIONAL BRACING is a bracing resisting twist of
a beam or column. UN SYMMETRIC SECTION is a section not symmetric
either about an axis or a point.
TORSIONAL BUCKLING is a buckling mode in which
a compression member twists about its shear center axis. V-BRACED FRAME is a concentrically braced frame
(SCBF, OCBF or BRBF) in which a pair of diagonal
TORSIONAL YIELDING is the yielding that occurs braces located either above or below a beam is connected
due to torsion. to a single point within the clear beam span. Where the
diagonal braces are below the beam, the system is also
TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT refers to a steel referred to as an inverted-V-braced frame.
reinforcement in the form of closed ties or welded wire
fabric providing confinement for the concrete surrounding VARIABLE LOAD is a load not classified as permanent
the steel shape core in an encased concrete composite load.
column.
VERTICAL BRACING SYSTEM is a system of
TRANSVERSE STIFFENER is a web stiffener oriented shear walls, braced frames or both, extending through
perpendicular to the flanges, attached to the web. one or more floors of a building.
TUBING see HSS.

VIRGIN STEEL is steel as received from the steel YIELD MOMENT refers to in a member subjected to
producer or warehouse before being cold worked as a bending, the moment at which the extreme outer fiber
result of fabricating operations. first attains the yield stress.
VIRGIN STEEL PROPERTIES is a mechanical YIELD POINT refers to first stress in a material at which
property of virgin steel such as yield stress, tensile an increase in strain occurs without an increase in stress as
strength, and elongation. defined by ASTM.
WEAK AXIS is a minor principal centroidal axis of a YIELD STRENGTH refers to stress at which a material
cross section. exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the
proportionality of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
WEATHERING STEEL refers to high-strength, low-
alloy steel that, with suitable precautions, can be used in YIELD STRESS is a generic term to denote either yield
normal atmospheric exposures (not marine) without point or yield strength, as appropriate for the material.
protective paint coating.
YIELDING is a limit state of inelastic deformation that
WEB is the portion of the section that is joined to two occurs after the yield stress is reached.
flanges, or that is joined to only one flange provided it
crosses the neutral axis. YIELDING (PLASTIC MOMENT) is a yielding
throughout the cross section of a member as the bending
WEB BUCKLING. refers to limit state of lateral moment reaches the plastic moment.
instability of a web.
YIELDING (YIELD MOMENT) is a yielding at the
WEB COMPRESSION BUCKLING refers to limit extreme fiber on the cross section of a member when the
state of out-of-plane compression buckling of the web due bending moment reaches the yield moment
to a concentrated compression force.
WEB CRIPPLING is a limit state of local failure of web

plate in the immediate vicinity of a concentrated load or
reaction.
WEB SIDESW AY BUCKLING refers to limit state of

lateral buckling of the tension flange opposite the location
of a concentrated compression force.
WELD METAL is a portion of a fusion weld that has

been completely melted during welding. Weld metal has
elements of filler metal and base metal melted in the weld
thermal cycle.
WELD ROOT See root of joint.
X-BRACED FRAME is a concentrically braced frame

(OCBF or SCBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
crosses near the mid-length of the braces.
Y-BRACED FRAME is an eccentrically braced frame

(EBF) in which the stem of the Y is the link of the EBF
system.
Y-CONNECTION refers to HSS connection in which

the branch member or connecting element is not
perpendicular to the main member and in which
forces transverse to the main member are primarily
equilibrated by shear in the main member.

SECTION 501 501.1.3 Nuclear Applications
GENERAL PROVISIONS The design of nuclear structures shall comply with the
requirements of the Specification for the Design,
501.1 Scope Fabrication, and Erection of Steel Safety-Related
Structures in Nuclear Facilities (ANSI! AISC N690)
Section 501 states the scope of the specification, including Supplement No.2 or the Load and Resistance
summarizes referenced specification, code, and standard Factor Design Specification for Steel Safety-Related
documents, and provides requirements for materials and Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSJlAISC N690L), in
contract documents. addition to the provisions of this Chapter.
User Note: User notes are intended to provide concise 501.2 Referenced Specifications, Codes and
and practical guidance in the application of the Standards
provisions.
The following specifications, codes and standards are
This Chapter sets forth criteria for the design, referenced in this Chapter:
fabrication, and erection of structural steel buildings and
other structures, where other structures are defined as American Concrete Institute (ACI)
those structures designed, fabricated, and erected in a manner
similar to buildings, with building-like vertical and lateral ACI 31S-0S Building Code Requirements for
load resisting elements. Where conditions are not covered Structural Concrete and Commentary
by this Chapter, designs are permitted to be based on tests
or analysis, subject to the approval of the authority having ACI31SM-OS Metric Building Code Requirements for
jurisdiction. Alternate methods of analysis and design shall Structural Concrete and Commentary
be permitted, provided such alternate methods or criteria are
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. ACI 349-06 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-
Related Concrete Structures and Commentary
User Note: For the design of structural members, other
than Hollow Structural Sections (HSS), that are cold-
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC)
formed to shapes, with elements not more than 25 mm in
thickness, the provisions in the AISI North American
AISC 3 03-10 Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Buildings and Bridges
Structural Members are recommended.
ANSI! AISC 341-10 Seismic Provisions for
501.1.1 Low-Seismic Applications Structural Steel Buildings
When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, ANSII AISCN690-1994(R2004) Specification for the
(as specified in this Chapter) is taken equal to or less Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel Safety-Related
than 3, the design, fabrication, and erection of Structures for Nuclear Facilities, including Supplement
structural-steel-framed buildings and other structures No.2
shall comply with this Chapter.
ANSI/AISC N690L-03 Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Steel Safety-Related Structures
501.1.2 High-Seismic Applications for Nuclear Facilities
When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
(as specified in this Chapter) is taken greater than 3, the
design, fabrication and erection of structural-steel-framed SEIIASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
buildings and other structures shall comply with the and Other Structures
requirements in the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel
Buildings (NSCP Chapter 5 Part 2), in addition to the ASCE/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Methods for
provisions of this Specification. Structural Fire Protection
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B 18.2.6-06 Fasteners for Use in Structural A490-08b Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel
Applications Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASME B46.1-02 Surface Texture, Surface A490M-08 Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel
Roughness, Waviness, and Lay Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints
(Metric)
ASTM International (ASTM)
ASOO-03a Standard Specification for Cold-Formed
A6/A6M-09 Standard Specification for General Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Rounds and Shapes
Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASOI-07 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed
A36/ A36M-08 Standard Specification for Carbon Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
Structural Steel
AS02-03 Standard Specification for Steel Structural
AS3/AS3M-07 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Rivets
Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless AS 14/AS14M-OS Standard Specification for High-
Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate,
A193/A193M-08b Standard Specification for Alloy- Suitable for Welding
Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High-Temperature Service AS29/AS29M-OS Standard Specification for High-
Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
Al 94/A194M-09 Standard Specification for Carbon
and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High- AS63-07a Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy
Temperature Service, or Both Steel Nuts
A216/Al16M-08 Standard Specification for Steel AS63M-07 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy
Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High Steel Nuts [Metric}
Temperature Service
AS68/AS68M-09 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,
Al42/Al42M-04 Standard Specification for High- Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
A283/A283M-03 Standard Specification for Low AS72/ AS72M-07 Standard Specification for
and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium
Structural Steel
A307-07b Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength AS88/AS88M-OS Standard Specification for High-
Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
A32S-09 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm Thick
Steel, Heat Treated, 1201105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength A606/A606M-09 Standard Specification for
Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-
A32SM-09 Standard Specification for High-Strength Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric
Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) Corrosion Resistance
A3S4-07a Standard Specification for Quenched and A618/ A618M-04 Standard Specification for Hot-
Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy
Threaded Fasteners Structural Tubing
A370-09 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for A668/A668M-04 Standard Specification for Steel
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products Forgings, Carbon and Alloy,for General Industrial Use
A449-07b Standard Specification for Quenched and

Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs

A673/A673M-04 Standard Specification for F1SS4-07a Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel,
Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural 36,55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength
Steel
User Note: ASTM F1SS4 is the most commonly
A709/A709M-09 Standard Specification for Carbon referenced specification for anchor rods. Grade and
and High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel Shapes, weldability must be specified.
Plates, and Bars and Quenched-and-Tempered Alloy
Structural Steel Plates for Bridges F18S2-08 Standard Specification for "Twist-Off' Type
Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies,
A7S1-08 Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
American Welding Society (AWS)
A847/A847M-OS Standard Specification for Cold-
Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength, Low-Alloy AWS D1. .lID 1. IM-2004 Structural Welding Code-Steel
Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance AWS AS.l IAS.l M-2004 Specification for Carbon Steel
Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
A8S2/A8S2M-03(2007) Standard Specification for
Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate A WS AS.SI AS.SM-2004 Specification for Low-Alloy
with 485 MPa Minimum Yield Strength to 100 mm Thick Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
A913/A913M-07 Standard Specification for High- AWS AS.l7/AS.l7M-97 Specification for Carbon Steel
Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process
(QST) AWS AS.18/AS.l8M-200S Specificationfor Carbon Steel
Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
A9921 A992M -06a Standard Specification for Steel for
Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing AWS AS.20IAS.20M-200S Specificationfor Carbon Steel
Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
User Note: ASTM A992 is the most commonly
referenced specification for W shapes. AWS AS.23/AS.23M-2007 Specification for Low-Alloy
Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
AlOl l/AlOl IM-09a Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- AWS AS.2SIAS.2SM-97 (R2009) Specification for Carbon
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Electrogas
Improved Formability Welding
C33-03 Standard Specification for Concrete AWS AS.261 AS.26M-97 (R2009) Specification for Carbon
Aggregates and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Electrogas Welding
C330-04 Standard Specification for Lightweight AWS AS.28/AS.28M-200S Specification for Low-Alloy
Aggregates for Structural Concrete Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
E119-08a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of AWS AS.29/AS.29M-200S Specification for Low-Alloy
Building Construction and Materials Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
E709-08 Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC)
Examination
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTMA325
F436-09 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel orA490 Bolts, 2004
Washers
F9S9-09 Standard Specification for Compressible-

Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with
Structural Fasteners

501.3 Material
0'
5. Bars:
501.3.1 Structural Steel Materials
ASTM A361A36M
Material test reports or report of tests made by the ASTM A5291 A529M
fabricator or a testing laboratory shall constitute sufficient ASTM A5721 A572M
evidence of conformity with one of the above listed ASTM A7091A709M
ASTM standards. For hot-rolled structural shapes, plates,
and bars, such tests shall be made in accordance with Sheets:
6.
ASTM A61A6M; for sheets, such tests shall be made in
accordance with ASTM A5681 A568M; for tubing and ASTMA606
pipe, such tests shall be made in accordance with the AlOll1AI01IMSS
requirements of the applicable ASTM standards listed
HSLAS
above for those product forms. If requested, the fabricator
shall provide an affidavit stating that the structural steel HSLAS-F
furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified.
501.3.1.2 Unidentified Steel
501.3.1.1 ASTM Designations
Unidentified steel free of injurious defects is permitted to
Structural steel material conforming to one of the be used for unimportant members or details, where the
following ASTM specifications is approved for use under precise physical properties and weldability of the steel
this Specification: would not affect the strength of the structure.
1. Hot-rolled structural shapes: 501.3.1.3 Rolled Heavy Shapes
ASTM A36 IA36M ASTM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness
ASTM A5291 A529M exceeding 50 mm, used as members subject to primary
ASTM A5721 A572M (computed) tensile forces due to tension or flexure and
ASTM A5881 A588M spliced using complete-joint-penetration groove welds
ASTM A7091 A709M that fuse through the thickness of the member, shall be
ASTM A9131 A913M specified as follows
ASTM A9921 A992M
The contract documents shall require that such shapes be
2. Structural tubing: supplied with Charpy V-Notch (CVN) impact testresults in
ASTMA500 accordance with ASTM A61A6M,
ASTM A501
ASTMA618 Supplementary Requirement S30, Charpy V-Notch Impact
ASTM A847 Test for Structural Shapes - Alternate Core Location. The
impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 27 J
3. Pipe: absorbed energy at +21 'C.
ASTM A531A53M, Gr. B The above requirements do not apply if the splices and
connections are made by bolting. The above requirements do
4. Plates: not apply to hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness
ASTM A36/A36M exceeding 50 mm that have shapes with flange or web
ASTM A242/A242M elements less than 50 mm thick welded with complete-joint-
ASTM A2831 A283M penetration groove welds to the face of the shapes with
ASTM A514/A514M thicker elements.
ASTM A5291 A529M
ASTM A572/A572M User Note: Additional requirements for joints in heavy
ASTM A588/A588M rolled members are given in Sections 510.1.5, 510.1.6,
ASTM A 7091A709M 510.2.7, and 513.2.2.
ASTM A852/A852M
ASTM AlOII/AI0IIM

3. Washers:
.' 501.3.1.4 Built-Up Heavy Shapes

ASTM F436!F436M
4. Compressible-Washer- Type Direct Tension

Built-up cross-sections consisting of plates with a
Indicators:
thickness exceeding 50 mm, used as members subject to
primary (computed) tensile forces due to tension or
ASTM F9S9!F959M
flexure and spliced or connected to other members using
complete joint-penetration groove welds that fuse through
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient
the thickness of the plates, shall be specified as follows.
evidence of conformity with the standards.
The contract documents shall require that the steel be
supplied with Charpy V-Notch impact test results in
accordance with ASTM A6!A6M, Supplementary 501.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods
Requirement S5, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. The
impact test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming to one
A673!A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a minimum of the following ASTM specifications is approved for use
average value of27 J absorbed energy at +21 =C. under this Specification:
ASTM A36! A36M
The above requirements also apply to built-up cross- ASTM A193!A193M
sections consisting of plates exceeding 50 mm that are ASTM A3S4
welded with complete-joint-penetration groove welds to the ASTMA449
face of other sections. ASTM A572! A572M
ASTM AS88!AS88M
User Note: Additional requirements for joints in heavy ASTM FlSS4
built-up members are given in Sections 510.1.5, 510.1.6,
510.2.7 and 513.2.2. User Note: ASTM F15S4 IS the preferred material
specification for anchor rods.
501.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgings
A449 material is acceptable for high-strength anchor
Cast steel shall conform to ASTM A216! A216M, Gr. rods and threaded rods of any diameter.
WCB with Supplementary Requirement S 11. Steel
forgings shall conform to ASTM A668! A668M. Test Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall conform to
reports produced in accordance with the above reference the Unified Standard Series of ASME B 18.2.6 and shall
standards shall constitute sufficient evidence of have Class 2A tolerances.
conformity with such standards.
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient
501.3.3 Bolts, Washers and Nuts evidence of conformity with the standards.
Bolt, washer, and nut material conforming to one of the 501.3.5 Consumables for Welding
following ASTM specifications is approved for use under
this Specification: Filler metals and fluxes shall conform to one of the
following specifications of the American Welding
1. Bolts: Society:
ASTMA307 AWS AS.!
ASTM A325!A325M AWSAS.S
ASTMA449 AWS A5.17!AS.17M
ASTM A490! A490M AWS AS.l8
AWSA5.20
ASTM Fl852
AWS A5.23!AS.23M
A WS AS.2S!AS.25M
2. Nuts:
AWS A5.26!A5.26M
ASTM A194!A194M AWSAS.28
ASTM A563!A563M AWSA5.29
AWS AS.32!A5.32M

Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient SECTION 502

$vidence of conformity with the standards. Filler metals and
fluxes that are suitable for the intended application shall be DESIGN RE UlREMENTS
selected.
502.1 General Provisions
501.3.6 Headed Stud Anchors
The design of members and connections shall be consistent
Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the with the intended behavior of the framing system and the
requirements of Structural Welding Code-Steel, assumptions made in the structural analysis. Unless
AWSDl.l. restricted by this chapter, lateral load resistance and stability
may be provided by any combination of members and
User Note: Studs are made from cold drawn bar, either connections.
semi-killed or killed aluminwn or silicon deoxidized,
conforming to the requirements of ASTM A291 A29M-04, 502.2 Loads and Load Combinations
Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy,
Hot-Wrought, General Requirements for. The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by this
chapter. In the absence of a building code, the loads and
Manufacturer's certification shall constitute sufficient load combinations shall be those stipulated in Chapter 2.
evidence of conformity with AWS D 1.1. For design purposes, the nominal loads shall be taken as the
loads stipulated by this chapter.
501.4 Structural Design Drawings and
Specifications 502.3 Design Basis
See Section 106. Designs shall be made according to the provisions for
Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) or to the
provisions for Allowable Strength Design (ASD).
The required strength of structural members and

connections shall be determined by structural analysis
for the appropriate load combinations as stipulated in
Section 502.2.
Design by elastic, inelastic or plastic analysis is permitted.

Provisions for inelastic and plastic analysis are as
stipulated in Appendix A-I, Inelastic Analysis and
Design. The provisions for moment redistribution in
continuous beams in Appendix A-I, Section A-1.3 are
permitted for elastic analysis only.
502.3.2 Limit States
Design shall be based on the principle that no applicable

strength or serviceability limit state shall be exceeded
when the structure is subjected to all appropriate load
combinations.

502.3.3 Design for Strength Using Load and 502.3.6 Design of Connections
Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
" Design according to the provisions for LRFD satisfies the
Connection elements shall be designed in accordance with
the provisions of Sections 510 and 511. The forces and
requirements of this chapter when the design strength of deformations used in design shall be consistent with the
each structural component equals or exceeds the required intended performance of the connection and the assumptions
strength determined on the basis of the LRFD load used in the structural analysis.
combinations. All provisions of this chapter, except for
those in Section 502.3.4, shall apply. 502.3.6.1 Simple Connections
Design shall be in accordance with Eq. 502.3- 1: A simple connection transmits a negligible moment
across the connection. In the analysis of the structure,
(502.3-1) simple connections may be assumed to allow unrestrained
relative rotation between the framing elements being
where connected. A simple connection shall have sufficient
rotation capacity to accommodate the required rotation
Ru required strength (LRFD) determined by the analysis of the structure. Inelastic
Rn nominal strength, specified in Sections 502 rotation of the connection is permitted.
through 511
4> resistance factor, specified In Sections 502 502.3.6.2 Moment Connections
through 511
4>Rn design strength A moment connection transmits moment across the
connection. Two types of moment connections, FR and
502.3.4 Design for Strength Using Allowable PR, are permitted, as specified below.
Strength Design (ASD)
1. Fully-Restrained (FR) Moment Connections
Design according to the provisions for ASD satisfies the
requirements of this chapter when the allowable Fully-restrained (FR) moment connections transfer
strength of each structural component equals or moment with a negligible rotation between the
exceeds the required strength determined on the basis connected members. In the analysis of the structure,
of the ASD load combinations. All provisions of this the connection may be assumed to allow no relative
chapter, except those of Section 502.3.3, shall apply. rotation. An FR connection shall have sufficient
strength and stiffness to maintain the angle between
Design shall be in accordance with Eq. 502. 3-2: the connected members at the strength limit states.
(502.3-2) 2. Partially-Restrained (PR) Moment Connections
where Partially-restrained (PR) moment connections

transfer moments, but the rotation between connected
Ra required strength (ASD) members is not negligible. In the analysis of the
Rn nominal strength, specified in Sections 502 structure, the force-deformation response
through 511 characteristics of the connection shall be included. The
fi safety factor, specified in Sections 502 response characteristics of a PR connection shall be
through 511 documented in the technical literature or established
Rn/fi = allowable strength by analytical or experimental means. The
component elements of a PR connection shall have
502.3.5 Design for Stability sufficient strength, stiffness, and deformation
capacity at the strength limit states.
Stability of the structure and its elements shall be
determined in accordance with Section 503.

502.3.9 Design for Serviceability 502.4 Member Properties
·The overall structure and the individual members, 502.4.1 Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
connections, and connectors shall be checked for
serviceability. Performance requirements for Sections are classified as compact, non-compact, or
serviceability design are given in Section 512. slender-element sections. For a section to qualify as
compact its flanges must be continuously connected to
502.3.10 Design for Ponding the web or webs and the width-thickness ratios of its
compression elements must not exceed the limiting width-
The roof system shall be investigated through structural thickness ratios Ap from Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2. If the
analysis to assure adequate strength and stability under width-thickness ratio of one or more compression elements
ponding conditions, unless the roof surface is provided exceeds Ap, but does not exceed Ar from Tables 502.4.1
with a slope of 20 mm per meter or greater toward points
and 502.4.2, the section is noncompact. If the width-
of free drainage or an adequate system of drainage is
thickness ratio of any element exceeds An the section is
provided to prevent the accumulation of water.
referred to as a slender-element section.
See Appendix A-2, Design for Ponding, for methods of
502.4.2 Unstiffened Elements
checking ponding.
For unstiffened elements supported along only one edge
502.3.11 Design for Fatigue
parallel to the direction of the compression force, the
width shall be taken as follows:
Fatigue shall be considered in accordance with Appendix
A-3, Design for Fatigue, for members and their
connections subject to repeated loading. Fatigue need not 1. For flanges ofI-shaped members and tees, the width b
be considered for seismic effects or for the effects of wind is one-half the full-flange width, bt-
loading on normal building lateral load resisting systems
and building enclosure components. 2. For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees,
the width b is the full nominal dimension.
502.3.12 Design for Fire Conditions
3. For plates, the width b is the distance from the free
Two methods of design for fire conditions are edge to the first row of fasteners or line of welds.
provided in Appendix A-4, Structural Design for Fire
Conditions: Qualification Testing and Engineering 4. For stems of tees, d is taken as the full nominal
Analysis. Compliance with the fire protection depth of the section.
requirements in this Chapter shall be deemed to satisfy
the requirements of this section and Appendix A-4. User Note: Refer to Table 502.4.1 for the graphic
representation ofunstiffened element dimensions.
Nothing in this section is intended to create or imply a
contractual requirement for the engineer-of-record 502.4.3 Stiffened Elements
responsible for the structural design or any other
member of the design team. For stiffened elements supported along two edges parallel
to the direction of the compression force, the width shall
502.3.13 Design for Corrosion Effects be taken as follows:
Where corrosion may impair the strength or serviceability

L For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is the clear
of a structure, structural components shall be designed to
distance between flanges less the fillet or comer radius
tolerate corrosion or shall be protected against corrosion.
at each flange; he is twice the distance from the
centroid to the inside face of the compression flange
less the fillet or comer radius.
2. For webs of built-up sections, h is the distance

between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear
distance between flanges when welds are used, and
he is twice the distance from the centroid to the nearest
line of fasteners at the compression flange or the

inside face of the compression flange when welds 503 .1 Design Wall Thickness for HSS
are used; hp is twice the distance from the plastic
neutral axis to the nearest line of fasteners at the The design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations
compression flange or the inside face of the involving the wall thickness of hollow structural sections
compression flange when welds are used. (HSS). The design wall thickness, t, shall be taken equal
to 0.93 times the nominal wall thickness for electric-
3. For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up sections, the resistance welded (ERW) HSS and equal to the nominal
width b is the distance between adjacent lines of thickness for submerged-arc welded (SAW) HSS.
fasteners or lines of welds.
4. For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections

(HSS), the width b is the clear distance between web
less the inside comer radius on each side. For webs of
rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance between the
flanges less the inside comer radius on each side. If
the comer radius is not known, band h shall be taken
as the corresponding outside dimension minus three
times the thickness. The thickness, t, shall be taken as
the design wall thickness, per Section 502.3.12.
User Note: Refer to Table 502.4.2 for the graphic

representation of stiffened element dimensions.
For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the

nominal value halfway between the free edge and the
corresponding face of the web.
I·

Table 502.4.1 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements

.t'
Width- Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios

Description of
Case Thickness Example
Elements Ratio Ap Ar
(compact) (non-compact)
r-~L1
Flexure in flanges of t,
1 rolled I-shaped bit 0.38 JEIFy 1.0JEIFy
sections and channels
Flexure in flanges of
r l1 b
't
doubly and singly [/I][bJ
2
symmetric I-shaped
bit 0.38 JEIFy 0.9S-}kcEIFL
built-up sections
Uniform compression
in flanges of rolled 1-
'"
1::
shaped sections, ib~"1
Q)
plates projecting from ~ ~
a
Q) rolled I-shaped "tt
W 3
"0
sections; outstanding bit NA 0.56 JEIFy
Q)
I:l legs of pairs of angles
~ in continuous contact
:t:j
...... ~
'"I:l and flanges of ~ k:~
;:::J channels
Uniform compression
,-btl
in flanges of built-up
- [aJ t 't
I-shaped sections and
4 bit NA 0.64jkcEIFy .. ~
plates or angle legs
projecting from built-
,b
up I-shaped sections
Uniform compression
in legs of single
5
angles, legs of double
angles with
separators, and all
other unstiffened
bit NA 0.4SjEIFy
,fi
r
elements
Flexure in legs of
6 bit 0.54jEIFy 0.91jEIFy
single angles
[,j kc = ,j h4/ tw ' but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes. (See Cases 2 and 4)
F L = 0.7 F y for minor-axis bending, major axis bending of slender-web built-up I-shaped members, and major axis bending of compact and
[bj
non-compact web built-up I-shaped members with SxtiSxc ;:0: 0.7; FL = FySxtiSxc ;:0: O. 5Fy for major-axis bending of compact and non-compact
web built-up I-shaped members with s., /
Sxc < 0.7. (See Case 2)

Table 502.4.2 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements
Width- Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios

Description of
Case Thickness Ap Ar Example
Elements Ratio (compact) (non-compact)
Flexure III flanges of

7
tees
bit 0.38 JEfFy 1.0jE'/I~
Uniform compression
8 NA 0.75 JEfFy
in stems of tees
Flexure In webs of
doubly symmetric 1- h
9 3.76jE/Fy 5.70jE/Fy
shaped sections and
channels
Uniform compression
in webs of doubly h
10 NA 1.49JEfFy
symmetric I-shaped
sections
Flexure in webs
&t
2~na
1:7h': 1'//IlA
~ .I~
2
11 of singly-symmetric
I-shaped sections ( 0.54 ~; - 0.09 r.
s AT
5.70 JEfFy
"t\ +tw
cg
l\
W//////A
Uniform compression
III flanges of
rectangular box and
hollow structural
sections of uniform
thickness subject to
12 bit 1.1ZjE/Fy 1.40jE/Fy
bending or
compression; flange
cover plates and
diaphragm plates
between lines of
fasteners or welds

Table 502.4.2 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements (continuation)
Limiting Width-Thickness
Width-
Description of Ratios
Case Thickness Example
Elements ilp ilr
Ratio
(compact) (non-compact)
/rh'ZT,ij) ~
l3
Flexure in webs of
rectangular HSS
hit 2.42jE/Fy 5.70 JEfFy
~! ~~t
+
~
~ ~ ~
'({r.//7///. 'l
<J1
"'i:J ~b
<ll
a
<ll
~W#"$ff'#ff#j~
u:l
-0
Il)
Uniform compression
~ ft ~
t:: 14 in all other stiffened bit NA 1.49jE/Fy
~
:tj elements
U5 ~ ~
Circular hollow _....".,...

t
sections
In uniform D/t NA O.l1E/Fy
compression ~
15
l D \d
t V!
In Flexure D/t O.07E/Fy O.31E/Fy
'7"ZP
502.5 Fabrication, Erection and Quality Control
Shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection,

and quality control shall meet the requirements
stipulated in Section 513, Fabrication, Erection, and
Quality Control.
502.6 Evaluation of Existing Structures
Provisions for the evaluation of existing structures are

presented in Appendix A-5, Evaluation of Existing
Structures.

CHAPTER 5 -- Structural Steel 5-47
SECTION 503 503.1.3 System Stability Design Requirements
STABILITY ANALYSIS AND Lateral stability shall be provided by moment frames

DESIGN braced frames, shear walls, andlor other equivalent latera;
load resisting systems. The overturning effects of drift and
503.1 Stability Design Requirements the destabilizing influence of gravity loads shall be
considered. Force transfer and load sharing between
503.1.1 General Stability Requirements elements of the framing systems shall be considered.
Braced-frame and shear-wall systems, moment frames,
Stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and gravity framing systems, and combined systems shall
for each of its elements. Any method that considers the satisfy the following specific requirements:
influence of second-order effects (including P -!J. and
503.1.3.1 Braced-Frame and Shear-Wall Systems
P - Ii effects), flexural, shear and axial deformations,
geometric imperfections, and member stiffness reduction
In structures where lateral stability is provided solely by
due to residual stresses on the stability of the structure and
diagonal bracing, shear walls, or equivalent means, the
its elements is permitted. The methods prescribed in this
section and Appendix A-7, Direct Analysis Method, effective length factor, K, for compression members shall
satisfy these requirements. All component and be taken as 1.0, unless structural analysis indicates that a
connection deformations that contribute to the lateral smaller value is appropriate. In braced-frame systems, it is
displacements shall be considered in the stability analysis. permitted to design the columns, beams, and diagonal
members as a vertically cantilevered, simply connected
In structures designed by elastic analysis, individual truss.
member stability and stability of the structure as a whole
are provided jointly by: User Note: Knee-braced frames function as moment-
frame systems and should be treated as indicated in
:1. Calculation of the required strengths for Section 503.1.3.2. Eccentrically braced frame systems
members, connections and other elements using function as combined systems and should be treated as
one of the methods specified in Section 503.2.2, and indicated in Section 503.1.3.4.
2. Satisfaction of the member and connection design 503.1.3.2 Moment-Frame Systems

requirements in this specification based upon those
required strengths. In frames where lateral stability is provided by the
flexural stiffness. of connected beams and columns ' the
In structures designed by inelastic analysis, the provisions effective length factor K or elastic critical buckling stress,
of Appendix A-I, Inelastic Analysis and Design, shall be Fe, for columns and beam-columns shall be determined as
satisfied. specified in Section 503.2.
503.1.2 Member Stability Design Requirements 503.1.3.3 Gravity Framing Systems
Individual member stability is provided by satisfying the Columns in gravity framing systems shall be designed
provisions of Sections 505, 506, 507, 508 and 509. based on their actual length (K = 1.0) unless analysis
shows that a smaller value may be used. The lateral stability
User Note: Local buckling of cross section components of gravity framing systems shall be provided by moment
can be avoided by the use of compact sections defined in frames, braced frames, shear walls, andlor other equivalent
Section 502.4. lateral load resisting systems. P - t::. effects due to load on
the gravity columns shall be transferred to the lateral load
Where elements are designed to function as braces to resisting systems and shall be considered in the
define the unbraced length of columns and beams, the calculation of the required strengths of the lateral load
bracing system shall have sufficient stiffness and strength resisting systems.
to control member movement at the braced points. Methods
of satisfying this requirement are provided in
Appendix A-6, Stability Bracingfor Columns and Beams.

503.1.3.4 Combined Systems For members subjected to axial compression, B 1 may be

calculated based on the first-order estimate
•The analysis and design of members, connections and other r, = Pnt + r».
elements in combined systems of moment frames, braced
frames, and/or shear walls and gravity frames shall meet the User Note: B 1 is an amplifier to account for second
requirements of their respective systems. order effects caused by displacements between brace
points (P - 8) and B2 is an amplifier to account for
503.2 Calculation of Required Strengths
second order effects caused by displacements of braced
points (P - ll).
Except as permitted in Section 503.2.2.2, required
strengths shall be determined using a second-order For members in which B1 < 1.05, it is conservative
analysis as specified in Section 503.2.1. Design by either to amplify the sum of the non-sway and sway moments
second-order or first-order analysis shall meet the (as obtained, for instance, by a first-order elastic analysis)
requirements specified in Section 503.2.2. by the B2 amplifier, in other words,
503.2.1 Methods of Second-Order Analysis

Mr = B2(Mnt + Mit)·
Second-order analysis shall conform to the requirements (503.2-3)

of this Section.
503.2.1.1 General Second-Order Elastic Analysis

User Note: Note that the B2 amplifier (Eq. 503.2-3)
Any second-order elastic analysis method that considers can be estimated in preliminary design by using a
both P - !:::. and P - 8 effectsmay be used. maximum lateral drift limit corresponding to the story
shear L H in Eq. 503.2-6b.
The amplified First-Order Elastic Analysis Method
defined in Section 503.2.1.2 is an accepted method for and
second-order elastic analysis of braced, moment, and
combined framing systems. a = 1.00(LRFD) a = 1.60(ASD)
required second-order flexural strength using
503.2.1.2 Second-Order Analysis by Amplified
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N-mm
First-Order Elastic Analysis
first-order moment using LRFD or ASD
load combinations, assuming there is no
User Note: A method is provided in this section to lateral translation of the frame, N-mm
account for second-order effects in frames by amplifying first-order moment using LRFD or ASD
the axial forces and moments in members and connections load combinations caused by lateral
from a first-order analysis.
translation of the frame only, N-mm
required second-order axial strength using
The following is an approximate second-order analysis LRFD or ASD load combinations, N
procedure for calculating the required flexural and axial first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD
strengths in members of lateral load resisting systems.The load combinations, assuming there is no
required second-order flexural strength, M To and axial lateral translation of the frame, N
strength, P r, shall be determined as follows: total vertical load supported by the story
using LRFD or ASD load combinations,
(503.2-la) including gravity column loads, N
first-order axial force using LRFD or ASD
load combinations caused by lateral
(503.2-lb)
translation of the frame only, N
is a coefficient assuming no lateral
where
translation of the frame whose value shall
be taken as follows:
C
B1 ::: 17t . ;::: 1 (503.2-2)
1- aPr/Pel a. For beam-columns not subject to transverse
loading between supports in the plane of
bending,

Cm = 0.6 - 0.4(M1/Mz) (503.2-4) L = story height, mm

K1 = effective length factor in the plane
Where Ml and M2, calculated from a first- of bending, calculated based on the
order analysis, are the smaller and larger assumption of no lateral translation,
moments, respectively, at the ends of that set equal to 1.0 unless analysis
portion of the member un braced in the indicates that a smaller value may
plane of bending under consideration. be used
MtI Mz is positive when the member is KZ = effective length factor in the plane
bent in reverse curvature, negative when of bending, calculated based on a
bent in single curvature. sidesway buckling analysis
b. For beam-columns subjected to transverse User Note: Methods for calculation of

loading between supports, the value of Cm K Z are discussed in the AISC Commentary.
shall be determined either by analysis or
conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases. AH = first-order inters tory drift due to
lateral forces, mm. Where AH
Pel elastic critical buckling resistance varies over the plan area of the
of the member in the plane of structure, AH shall be the average
bending, calculated based on the drift weighted in proportion to
assumption of zero sidesway, N vertical load or, alternatively, the
maximum drift
1:H story shear produced by the lateral
(503.2-5) forces used to compute AH, N
IP eZ elastic critical buckling resistance 503.2.2 Design Requirements

for the story determined by
sidesway buckling analysis, N These requirements apply to all types of braced, moment,
and combined framing systems. Where the ratio of second-
For moment frames, where sidesway order drift to first-order drift is equal to or less than 1.5, the
required strengths of members, connections and other
buckling effective length factors Kz are
elements shall be determined by one of the methods
determined for the columns, it is permitted
specified in Sections 503.2.2.1 or 503.2.2.2, or by the
to calculate the elastic story sidesway
Direct Analysis 'Method of Appendix A-7. Where the ratio
buckling resistance as
of second-order drift to first-order drift is greater than 1.5,
the required strengths shall be determined by the Direct
(503.2-6a) Analysis Method of Appendix A-7.
User Note: The ratio of second-order drift to first-order

drift can be represented by 81,as calculated using
For all types of lateral load resisting
Eq. 503.2-3. Alternatively, the ratio can be calculated
systems, it is permitted to use
by comparing the results of a second-order analysis to the
results of a first-order analysis, where the analyses are
conducted either under LRFD load combinations directly
(503.2-6b) or under ASD load combinations with a 1.6 factor applied
to the ASD gravity loads.
where
For the methods specified in Sections 503.2.2.1 or
503.2.2.2:
E = modulus of elasticity of steel =
200,000 MPa
RM = 1.0 for braced-frame systems;
1. Analysis shall be conducted according to the design and
loading requirements specified in either Section
= 0.85 for moment-frame and
502.3.3 (LRFD) or Section 502.3.4 (ASD).
combined systems, unless a larger
value is justified by analysis
I = moment of inertia in the plane of
bending, mm4

5-50 CHAP fER 5 - Structural Steel
2. The structure shall be analyzed using the nominal 503.2.2.2 Design by First-Order Analysis
geometry and the nominal elastic stiffness for all
elements. Required strengths are permitted to be determined by a
first-order analysis, with all members designed using
503.2.2.1 Design by Second-Order Analysis K =1. 0, provided that
Where required strengths are determined by a second-order I. The required compressive strengths of all members
analysis: whose flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute
to the lateral stability of the structure satisfy the
1. The provisions of Section 503.2.1 shall be satisfied. following limitation:
2. For design by ASD, analyses shall be carried out under (503.2-7)

1.6 times the ASD load combinations and the results where
shall be divided by 1.6 to obtain the required
strengths. a = 1.0 (LRFD) a = 1.6 (ASD)
User Note: The amplified first order analysis method of required axial compressive strength under LRFD
Section 503.2.1.2 incorporates the 1.6 multiplier directly or ASD load combinations, N
in the B1 and B2 amplifiers, such that no other member yield strength ( = AF y), N
modification is needed.
2. All load combinations include an additional lateral
3. All gravity-only load combinations shall include a
load, Ni, applied in combination with other loads at
minimum lateral load applied at each level of the
each level of the structure, where
structure of O. 002Yi, where Yi is the design gravity.
load applied at level i, N. This minimum lateral load (503.2-8)
shall be considered independently in two orthogonal
directions.
where
User Note: The minimum lateral load of O.002Yi, gravity load from the LRFD load
in conjunction with the other design-analysis combination or 1.6 times the ASD load
constraints listed in this section, limits the error that
combination applied at level i, N
would otherwise be caused by neglecting initial out-of-
plumbness and member stiffness reduction due to
b..fL the maximum ratio of b.. to L for all
stories in the structure
residual stresses in the analysis.
first-order interstory drift due to the design
4. Where the ratio of second-order drift to first-order loads, mm. Where b.. varies over the plan
drift is less than or equal to 1.1, members are area of the structure, b.. shall be the average
permitted to be designed using K =
1. O. drift weighted in proportion to vertical
Otherwise, columns and beam-columns in moment load or, alternatively, the maximum drift
L story height, mm
frames shall be designed using a K factor or column
buckling stress, Fe' determined from a sidesway
buckling analysis of the structure. Stiffness User Note: The drift b.. is calculated under LRFD load
reduction adjustment due to column inelasticity is combinations directly or under ASD load combinations
with a 1.6 factor applied to the ASD gravity loads.
permitted in the determination of the K factor. For
braced frames, K for compression members shall be
This additional lateral load shall be considered
taken as 1.0, unless structural analysis indicates a
independently in two orthogonal directions.
smaller value may be used.
3. The non-sway amplification of beam-column moments
is considered by applying the B 1 amplifier of Section
503.2.1 to the total member moments.

SECTION 504 504.3 Area Determination
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR 504.3.1 Gross Area

TENSION
The gross area, Ag, of a member is the total cross-
504.1 Slenderness Limitations sectional area.
There is no maximum slenderness limit for design of 504.3.2 Net Area

members in tension.
The net area, An, of a member is the sum of the products
User Note: For members designed on the basis of tension, of the thickness and the net width of each element
the slenderness ratio Llr preferably should not exceed computed as follows:
300. This suggestion does not apply to rods or hangers in
tension. In computing net area for tension and shear, the width of a
bolt hole shall be taken 2 mm greater than the nominal
504.2 Tensile Strength dimension of the hole.
The design tensile strength, lPtP n, and the allowable For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal
tensile strength, P nl fit, of tension members, shall be the or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be obtained by
lower value obtained according to the limit states of deducting from the gross width the sum of the diameters or
tensile yielding in the gross section and tensile rupture in slot dimensions as provided in Section 510.3.2, of all holes
the net section. in the chain, and adding, for each gage space in the chain,
the quantity s2 14g.
I. For tensile yielding in the gross section:
where
(504.2-1)
s longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any
two consecuti ve holes, mm
lPt = 0.90 (LRFD) fit = 1.67 (ASD) g transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between
fastener gage lines, mm
2. For tensile rupture in the net section:
For angles, the gage for holes in opposite adjacent legs

Pn = F uAe (504.2-2)
shall be the sum of the gages from the back of the angles
less the thickness.
lPt = 0.75 (LRFD) fit = 2.00 (ASD)
For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate, the net area, An,
where is the gross area minus the product of the thickness and the
total width of material that is removed to form the slot. In
effective net area, rnrrr' determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld
gross area of member, rnm' metal shall not be considered as adding to the net area.
specified minimum yield stress of the type of
steel being used, MPa User Note: Section 510.4.1.(2) limits An to a maximum of
specified minimum tensile strength of the type O. 85Ag connection design for splice plates with holes.
of steel being used, MPa
504.3.3 Effective Net Area
When members without holes are fully connected by
welds, the effective net area used in Eq. 504.2-2 shall be The effective area of tension members shall be
as defined in Section 504.3. When holes are present in a determined as follows:
member with welded end connections, or at the welded
connection in the case of plug or slot welds, the effective (504.3-1 )
net area through the holes shall be used in Equation 504.2-2.
where U, the shear lag factor, is determined as shown in

Table 504.3. 1.

Members such as single angles, double angles and WT where

sections shall have connections proportioned such that U is
equal to or greater than 0.60. Alternatively, a lesser value of
2t(a + d/2), mrrr'
shortest distance from edge of the pin
U is permitted if these tension members are designed for
hole to the edge of the member
the effect of eccentricity in accordance with Section
measured parallel to the direction of the
508.1.2 or Section 508.2.
force, mm
504.4 Built-up Members
2t + 16, mm but not more than the
actual distance from the edge of the hole
to the edge of the part measured in the
For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors
direction normal to the applied force
between elements in continuous contact consisting of a
d pin diameter, mm
plate and a shape or two plates, see Section 510.3.5.
t thickness of plate, mm
Either perforated cover plate or tie plates without lacing 3. For bearing on the projected area of the pin, see
are permitted to be used on the open sides of built-up Section 510.7.
tension members. Tie plates shall have a Icngt11 not less than
two-thirds the distance between the lines of welds or 4. For yielding on the gross section, use Eq. 504.2-1.
fasteners connecting them to the components of the member.
The thickness of such tie plates shall not be less than one- 504.5.2 Dimensional Requirements
fiftieth of the distance between these lines. The
longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or fasteners at
The pin hole shall be located midway between the ed~es
tie plates shall not exceed 150 mm. of the member in the direction normal to the applied
force. When the pin is expected to provide for relative
User Note: The longitudinal spacing of connectors movement between connected parts while under full
between components should preferably limit the load, the diameter of the pin hole shall not be more than 1
slenderness ratio in any component between the mm greater than the diameter ofthe pin.
connectors to 300.
The width of the plate at the pin hole shall not be less
504.5 Pin-Connected Members
than 2beff + d and the minimum extension, a, beyond
the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the
504.5.1 Tensile Strength
member, shall not be less than 1. 33beff.
The design tensile strength, CPtP n, and the allowable
The comers beyond the pin hole are permitted to be cut at
tensile strength, P n/ fit of pin-connected members, shall
45° to the axis of the member, provided the net area
be the lower value obtained according to the limit states
beyond the pin hole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut,
of tensile rupture, shear rupture, bearing, and yielding.
is not less than that required beyond the pin hole parallel to
the axis ofthe member.
1. For tensile rupture on the net effective area:
504.6 Eyebars
(504.5-1)
504.6.1 Tensile Strength
CPt = 0.75 (LRFD) fit = 2.00 (ASD)
The available tensile strength of eyebars shall be
2. For shear rupture on the effective area: determined in accordance with Section 504.2, with Ag
taken as the cross-sectional area of the body.
v; = 0.6FuAsf (504.5-2)
For calculation purposes, the width of the body of the
eyebars shall not exceed eight times its thickness.
CPs! = 0.75 (LRFD) fisf = 2.00 (ASD)

504.6.2 Dimensional Requirements
Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without

reinforcement at the pin holes, and have circular heads
with the periphery concentric with the pin hole.
The radius of transition between the circular head and the

eye bar body shall not be less than the head diameter.
The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times

the eyebar body width, and the pin hole diameter shall not
be more than 1 mm greater than the pin diameter.
For steels having F y greater than 485 MPa, the hole

diameter shall not exceed five times the plate thickness, and
the width of the eyebar body shall be reduced accordingly.
A thickness of less than 13 mm is permissible only if

external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and filler
plates into snug contact. The width from the hole edge to
the plate edge perpendicular to the direction of applied
load shall be greater than two-thirds and, for the purpose
of calculation, not more than three-fourths times the
eyebar body width.

Table 504.3.1 Shear Lag Factors for Connections to Tension Members
Case Description of Element Shear Lag Factor, U ExamEle

All tension members where the tension load is transmitted
I directly to each of cross-sectional elements by fasteners or U= 1.0 --
welds. (except as in Cases 3, 4,5 and 6)
All tension members, except plates and HSS, where the _.Yr-
tension load is transmitted to some but not all of the :!=
1
!1
2 U = I--
cross-sectional elements by fasteners or longitudinal welds
(Alternately, for W, M, Sand HP, Case 7 may be used.)
I
~ :,
'~
All tension members where the tension load is transmitted
U = 1.0
and
3 by transverse welds to some but not all of the cross-
sectional elements.
An = area of the directly -
connected elements
12:: 2w ... U = 1.0
Plates where the tension load is transmitted by longitudinal 2w > I 2:: 1.5w ... U = 0.S7
4
welds only. 1.5w> I 2:: w ... U = 0.75
~~
= 1.0
I 2:: 1.3D ... U
D s I < 1.3D ... U = 1 - ~

5 Round HSS with a single concentric gusset plate.
x = D/rr
ffi
x
m
12::H ... U=I-
T
with a single
concentric gusset plate
82 + 28H
6 Rectangular HSS x- 4(8 + H)
:fa >1
x
I>- H ... U --I--
- I
with two side gusset
plates 82
x- 4(8 + H)
with flange connected
with 3 or more bJ? 2/3d ... U = 0.90
W, M, S or HP Shapes or Tees fasteners per line in bJ< 2/3d ... U= 0.85 -
cut from these shapes. (If U is direction of loading
7
calculated per Case 2, the larger with web connected
value is permitted to be used) with 4 or more
U=0.70 -
fasteners per line in
direction of loading
with 4 or more
fasteners per line in U=0.80 .-
Single angles (If U is calculated direction of loading
8 per Case 2, the larger value is
with 2 or 3 fasteners
permitted to be used
per line in the U=0.60 -
direction of loading
I = length of connection, mm; w = plate width, mm; x = connection eccentricity, mm B = overall width of
rectangular HSS member, measured 90 degrees to the plane of the connection, mm; H = overall height of
rectangular HSS member, measured in the plane of the connection, mm.

SECTION 505 The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall be detennined

based on the limit state of flexural buckling.
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR
COMPRESSION (50S.3-1)
505.1 General Provisions The flexural buckling stress, Fer, is determined as follows:
The design compressive strength, c/JeP n, and the allowable

compressive strength, P nl ne, are determined as follows: 1. when -KL ~4.71
r
fl;
-
Fy
(or Fe :2: 0.44Fy)
The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall be the lowest
value obtained according to the limit states of flexural
buckling, torsional buckling and flexural-torsional buckling.
Fer = [0.658;:]Fy (50S.3-2)
1. For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric members the
2.
limit state of flexural buckling is applicable.
For singly symmetric and unsymmetric members, and

2. when -KL >4.71-
r
fl;
Fy
(or Fe < 0.44Fy)
certain doubly symmetric members, such as cruciform
or built-up columns, the limit states of torsional or
flexural-torsional buckling are also applicable. Fer = 0.877Fe (S05.3-3)
where
c/Je = 0.90 (LRFD) ne = 1.67(ASD)
Fe = elastic critical buckling stress determined according
505.2 Slenderness Limitations and Effective Length to Eq. SOS.3-4, Section SOS.4, or the provisions of
Section S03.2, as applicable, MPa.
The effective length factor, K, for calculation of column
slenderness, KLlr, shall be determined in accordance with
Section S03, (SOS.3-4)
where
User Note: The two equations for calculating the limits and
L laterally unbraced length of the member, mm applicability of Section S05.3, one based on KLlr and one
r governing radius of gyration, mm based on Fe' provide the same result.
K the effective length factor, as shown below
505.4 Compressive Strength for Torsional and
User Note: For members designed on the basis of Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members
compression, the slenderness ratio KLlr preferably without Slender Elements
should not exceed 200.
This section applies to singly symmetric and unsymmetric
505.3 Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling of members, and certain doubly symmetric members, such as
Members Without Slender Elements cruciform or built-up columns with compact and
noncompact sections, as defined in Section 502.4 for
This section applies to compression members with compact uniformly compressed elements. These provisions are not
and noncompact sections, as defined in Section S02.4, for required for single angles, which are covered in Section
uniformly compressed elements. SOS.S.
User Note: When the torsional unbraced length is larger The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall be determined
than the lateral unbraced length, then Section S05.4 may based on the limit states of flexural-torsional and torsional
control the design of wide flange and similarly shaped buckling, as follows:
columns.
(505.4-1)

where
I. For double-angle and tee-shaped compression
members:
Ag gross area of member, mm2
Cw warping constant, mm"
Fer
= (Eery 2H
+ Ferz) [ _
1
1- _4._F_el.,,::,;,Y_F_Cr_zH_~21
(F cry t F crz) (505.4-7)
(505.4-2) x2 +y2
H=1- 0 0 (505.4-8)
-2
To
where Fery taken as Fer from Eq. 505.3-2 or 505.3-3,
for flexural buckling about the y-axis of symmetry and 1£2E
F =--=
KL KL and ex K L 2 (505.4-9)
(T: )
6J
F erz =--
A - 2 (505.4-3)
gTo (505.4-10)
2. For all other cases, Fer shall be determined according to

Eq. 505.3-2 or 505.3-3, using the torsional or flexural-
torsional elastic buckling stress, Fe, determined as (505.4-11)
follows:
a. For doubly symmetric members:
G shear modulus of elasticity of steel
77 200 MPa
(505.4-4) moment of inertia about the principal axes,
mm4
torsional constant, mm"
b. For singly symmetric members where y is the axis effective length factor for torsional buckling
of symmetry: coordinates of shear center with respect to the
centroid.znm
Fe
= (F ey 2H
+ Fez) [ _
1
v;r.»
1--_;;--.,,- 1 polar radius of gyration about the shear center,
mm
(Fey + Fez)2 radius of gyration about y-axis, mm
(505.4-5)
User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped sections,
c. For un symmetric members, Fe is the lowest root Cw may be taken as lyh~/4, where ho is the distance
of the cubic equation:
between flange centroids, in lieu of a more precise analysis.
For tees and double angles, omit term with Cw when
(Fe - Fex) (Fe - Fey)(Fe - Fez) computing Fez and take Xo as O.
- F;(Fe - Fey) (;:r 2

505.5 Single Angle Compression Members
- F;(Fe - Fex) (;:) =0 The nominal compressive strength, P n, of single angle

members shall be determined in accordance with. Section
505.3 or Section 505.7, as appropriate, for axially loaded
(505.4-6) members, as well as those subject to the slenderness
modification of Sections 505.5(1) or 505.5(2), provided the
members meet the criteria imposed.

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5-57
The effects of eccentricity on single angle members are For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than
permitted to be neglected when the members are evaluated as l.7 and connected through the shorter leg, KLIT from
axially loaded compression members using one of the Eqs. 505.5.3 and 505.5.4 shall be increased by adding
effective slenderness ratios specified below, provided that: (1)
members are loaded at the ends in compression through the
6[ (btl bs)2 - 1], but KLIT of the member shall not
same one leg; (2) members are attached by welding or by be less than O. 82LIT z'
minimum two-bolt connections; and (3) there are no
intermediate transverse loads. where
L. For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected L length of member between work points at
through the longer leg that are individual members or are truss chord centerlines, mm
web members of planar trusses with adjacent web longer leg of angle, mm
members attached to the same side of the gusset plate or shorter leg of angle, mm
chord:
L Tx radius of gyration about geometric axis
a. When 0:::;- < 80: parallel to connected leg, mm
Tx
Tz radius of gyration for the minor principal axis,
KL L mm
-= 72 +0.75- (505.5-1 )
T Tx
3. Single-angle members with different end conditions
b. When L from those described in Section 505.5(1) or 505.5(2),
->80: with leg length ratios greater than 1.7, or with transverse
Tx loading shall be evaluated for combined axial load and
flexure using the provisions of Section 508. End
KL L connection to different legs on each end or to both legs,
- = 32 + 1.25-:::; 200 (505.5-2)
the use of single bolts or the attachment of adjacent web
T Tx
members to opposite sides of the gusset plate or chord
For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less than shall constitute different end conditions requiring the use
1.7 and connected through the shorter leg, K LIT from of Section 508 provisions.
Eqs. 505.5.1 and 505.5.2 shall be increased by adding
4[(btlbs)2 -1], but KLIT of the members shall 505.6 Built-up Members
not be less than O. 95LIT z-
505.6.1 Compressive Strength
2. For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles connected
I..The nominal compressive strength of built-up
through the longer leg that are web members of box or
members composed of two or more shapes that are
space trusses with adjacent web members attached to the
interconnected by bolts or welds shall be determined in
same side of the gusset plate or chord:
accordance with Sections 505.3, 505.4, or 505.7
subject to the following modification. In lieu of
L
a. When 0:::; - :::;75: more accurate analysis, if the buckling mode involves
Tx relative deformations that produce shear forces in the
connectors between individual shapes, KLIT IS
KL L replaced by (KLIT)m determined as follows:
-= 60+0.8- (505.5-3)
T Tx
a. For intermediate connectors that are snug-tight
L
b. When - > 75: bolted:
Tx
KL L
- =45+-:::; 200 (505.5-4) (KL)2 + (.~.)2 (505.6-1)
T Tx T 0 Tt··,

b. For intermediate connectors that are welded or but rather to prevent relative movement between the
pretensioned bolted: components at the end as the built-up member takes a
curved shape.
(KL)2
-
r 0
+082
•
a2
(1 + a2)
( -a )2
rib
At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on
base plates or milled surfaces. all components in contact with
one another shall be connected by a weld having a length not
(505.6-2) less than the maximum width of the member or by bolts
spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters apart for a
where
distance equal to 1 112times the maximum width of the
member.
modified column slenderness of
built-up member
Along the length of built-up compression members between
column slenderness of built-up the end connections required above, longitudinal spacing for
member acting as a unit in the intermittent welds or bolts shall be adequate to provide for
buckling direction being the transfer of the required forces. For limitations on the
considered longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements in
distance between connectors, mm continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two
plates, see Section 510.3.5. Where a component of a built-
minimum radius of gyration of
up compression member consists of an outside plate, the
individual component, mm
maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the
radius of gyration of individual
component relative to its centroidal thinner outside plate times 0.75 JEfFy , nor 300 mm,
axis parallel to member axis of
buckling, mm when intermittent welds are provided along the edges of
a separation ratio =h/2rib the components or when fasteners are provided on all gage
h distance between centroids of lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the
individual components maximum spacing on each gage line shall not exceed the
perpendicular to the member axis of
buckling, mm
j
thickness of the thinner outside plate times 1. 12 E / F y
nor 450 mm.

2. The nominal compressive strength of built-up members
composed of two or more shapes or plates with at least Open sides of compression members built up from plates
one open side interconnected by perforated cover plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover plates
or lacing with tie plates shall be determined in perforated with a succession of access holes. The
accordance with Sections 505.3, 505.4, or 505.7 subject unsupported width of such plates at access holes, as
to the modification given in Section 505.6.1(1). defined in Section 502.4, is assumed to contribute to the
available strength provided the following requirements are
505.6.2 Dimensional Requirements met:
Individual components of compression members composed of 1. The width-thickness ratio shall conform to the
two or more shapes shall be connected to one another at limitations of Section 502.4.
intervals, a, such that the effective slenderness ratio Ka/ri
of each of the component shapes, between the fasteners, does User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting
not exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness width/thickness ratio for Case 14 in Table 502.4.2 with
ratio of the built-up member. The least radius of gyration, the width, b, taken as the transverse distance between
ri, shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of each the nearest lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is
component part. The end connection shall be welded or taken at the widest hole. In lieu of this approach, the
pretensioned bolted with Class A or B faying surfaces. limiting width thickness ratio may be determined through
analysis
User Note: It is acceptable to design a bolted end connection
of a built-up compression member for the full compressive 2. The ratio oflength (in direction of stress) to width of hole
load with bolts in shear and bolt values based on bearing shall not exceed two.
values; however, the bolts must be pretensioned. The
requirement for Class A or B faying surfaces is not intended
for the resistance of the axial force in the built-up member,

3. The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress The nominal compressive strength, P n, shall be determined
shall be not less than the transverse distance between based on the limit states of flexural, torsional and flexural-
nearest lines of connecting fasteners or welds. torsional buckling.
4. The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a

minimum radius of38 mm. (505.7-1)
As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing with tie

plates is permitted at each end and at intermediate points if
the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends
as practicable. In members providing available strength, the
end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance QFy]
between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the Fer = Q [ O.658--P;;- Fy (505.7-2)
components of the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have
a length not less than one-half of this distance. The thickness
of tie plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of the distance
between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the b. When KL
- > 4.71 ~ --
r QFy
segments of the members. In welded construction, the welding
on each line connecting a tie plate shall total not less than
one-third the length of the plate. In bolted construction, the Fer = O. 877 Fe (505.7-3)
spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not
more than six diameters and the tie plates shall be connected Fe elastic critical buckling stress, calculated using
to each segment by at least three fasteners. Eqs. 505.3-4 and 505.4-4 for doubly symmetric
members, Eqs. 505.3-4 and 505.4-5 for singly
Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels, or other shapes symmetric members, and Eq. 505.4-6 for
employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that the L[r ratio of unsymmetric members, except for single angles
the flange included between their connections shall not where Fe is calculated using Eq. 505.3-4.
exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness ratio for Q 1.0 for members with compact and noncompact
the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to sections, as defined in Section 502.4, for
provide a shearing strength normal to the axis of the member uniformly compressed elements
equal to 2 percent of the available compressive strength of the QsQa for members with slender-element
member. The Llr ratio for lacing bars arranged in single sections, as defined in Section 502.4, for
systems shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio uniformly compressed elements ..
shall not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at the
intersections. For lacing bars in compression, 1 is permitted to User Note: For cross sections composed of only
be taken as the unsupported length of the lacing bar between unstiffened slender elements, Q a =
1 then = Q s . For
welds or fasteners connecting it to the components of the cross sections composed of only stiffened slender elements,
built-up member for single lacing, and 70 percent of that Qs = 1 then Q = Qa. For cross sections composed of
distance for double lacing. both stiffened and unstiffened slender elements,
Q = QsQa·
User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the
member shall {lreferably be not less than 60" for single
505.7.1 Slender Unstiffened Elements, Qs
lacing and 45 for double lacing. When the distance
between the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is
The reduction factor Q s for slender unstiffened elements is
more than 380 mm, the lacing shall preferably be double
defined as follows:
or be made of angles.
1. For flanges, angles, and plates projecting from rolled
For additional spacing requirements, see Section 510.3.5.
columns or other compression members:
505.7 Members with Slender Elements
This section applies to compression members with slender

a. When s,
t
0.56 fI
~Fy
sections, as defined in Section 502.4 for uniformly
compressed elements. (505.7-4)

Qs = 1.0 (505.7-10)
b. When 0.56
~Fy t
rI
< ~ < 1.03
~Fy
[!
b. When 0.45 < -:5
b 0.91fo,
-
fi
t Fy
Q, ~ 1.415- o. 74m (505.7-5)

(505.7-11)
Q, ~ 1.34-0.76mfi
b rI
c. When t ~1.03~Fy c. When !!. > 0.91 IE.
t ~Fy
(505.7-6) 0.53E
Qs = 2 (505.7-12)
Fy(~)
2. For flanges, angles, and plates projecting from built-up where
columns or other compression members:
a. When b
i> jEk'
0.64 Fy
b = full width of longest angle leg, mm
4. For stems of tees

o, = 1.0 (505.7-7)'
a. When ~,;; 0.75fo,
Qs = 1.0 (505.7-13)
[!_ < ~ :51.03 [!_

Q, ~ 1.415- 0.65 m j:~, (505.7-8) b. When 0.75
. ~F; t ~F;
c. When -b
t
> 1.17~kc
--
Fy
Q, ~ 1.908- 1.22(~) fi (505.7-14)
0.90Ekc
Qs = 2 (505.7-9) c. When ~ < 1.03fo,
t- F y
Fy(~)
where:
(505.7-15)
4 and shall not be taken less
than 0.35 nor greater than
0.76 for calculation purposes where:
b width
= of unstiffened compression
3. For single angles element, as defined in Section 502.4, mm
d = the full nominal depth of tee, mm
t = thickness of element, mm
a. When
b r!_
t:5 0.45~Fy

505.7.2. Slender Stiffened Elements, Qa 1. For axially-loaded circular sections:
The reduction factor, Q a for slender stiffened elements is E D E

When 0.11-<-<0.45-
defined as follows: Fy t Fy
(505.7-16) 0.038E 2
Q = Qa = Fy(D/t) +3 (505.7-19)
where:
where
total cross-sectional area of member, mm!
D = outside diameter, mm
summation of the effective areas of the cross
t = wall thickness, mm
section based on the reduced effective width,
be, mrrr'
The reduced effective width, be, is determined as follows:
1. For uniformly compressed slender elements, with
~ ;" 1.49 fi · except flange, of square ODd
rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
b, = 1.92. fi[l ~~~:~~ b S; (505.7-17)
where
f is taken as Fer with Fer calculated based on

Q = 1.0.
2. For flanges of square and rectangular slender-
element sections of uniform thickness with
~ ;" 1. 40 fi ·
fE[
be = 1.92t~7 1- (b/t)~7
0.38 fE] s b (505.7-18)
where:
User .Note: In lieu of calculating

f = P n/Aeff which requires iteration; f may be taken
equal to Fs. This will result in a slightly conservative
estimate of column capacity.

where:
SECTION 506
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR Mmax absolute value of maximum moment in
Fl/EXURE the unbraced segment, N-mm
absolute value of moment at quarter point
506.1 General Provisions of the unbraced segment, N-mm
absolute value of moment at centerline
of the unbraced segment, N-mm
The design flexural strength, l/J bM n, and the allowable
Me absolute value of moment at three-
flexural strength, Mn/flb, shall be determined as follows:
quarter point of the unbraced segment,
N-mm
1. For all provisions in this section
Rm cross-section monosymmetry parameter
1.0, doubly symmetric members
l/Jb = O. 90(LRFD) flb = 1.67(ASD)
1.0, singly symmetric members
and the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be subjected to single curvature bending
determined according to Section 506.2 through
Section 506.12. In singly symmetric members SUbjected to reverse
curvature bending, the lateral-torsional buckling
2. The provisions in this section are based on the strength shall be checked for both flanges. The
assumption that points of support for beams and available flexural strength shall be greater than or equal
girders are restrained against rotation about their to the maximum required moment causing compression
longitudinal axis. within the flange under consideration.
The following terms are common to the equations in this C b is permitted to be conservatively taken as 1.0 for all
section except where noted: cases. For cantilevers or overhangs where the free end
is unbraced, Cb = 1.0.
lateral-torsional buckling modification
factor for nonuniform moment diagrams User Note: For doubly symmetric members with no
when both ends of the unsupported segment transverse loading between brace points, Eq. 506.1-1
are braced reduces to 2.27 for the case of equal end moments of
opposite sign and to 1.67 when one end moment equals
12.5Mmax zero.
c, = 2. 5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3Mc
Rm
~ 3.0
(506.1-1)

Table 506.1.1 Selection Table for the Application of Section 506 Sections
Section in Section
Cross Section Flange Slenderness Web Slenderness Limit States
506
506.2
-f }- C C Y,LTB
506.3
-I NC,S C LTB, FLB
506.4
-I1:
. '
.. - _. C,NC,S C,NC Y,LTB,FLB,TFY
506.5
~I
~I--f
J LJ
C,NC,S S Y,LTB,FLB,TFY
506.6
-+-+ C,NC,S N/A Y,FLB
506.7
B C,NC,S C,NC Y,FLB, WLB
506.8
-O- N/A N/A Y,LB
506.9 -~9-F-I--- C,NC,S N/A Y,LTB,FLB
506.10 .
b'-~' _- N/A N/A Y,LTB,LLB
506.11
506.12
e.
Unsymmetrical shapes
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A Y,LTB
All limit states

Y = yielding, LTB = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB = flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY = tension I'
flange yielding, LLB = leg local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = noncompact, S = slender

506.2 Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members User Note: The square root term in Eq. 506.2-4 may be
." and Channels Bent about their Major Axis conservatively taken equal to 1.0.
This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped members The limiting lengths Lp and L; are determined as follows:
and channels bent about their major axis, having compact
webs and compact flanges as defined in Section 502.4.
(506.2-5)
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower
value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
(plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
506.2.1. Yielding t; =
E0cJSJl:
1. 95Tts 0. 7Fy 1+
0.7 F y SXho)2
1+6.76 ( ----
E tc
(506.2-1 ) (506.2-6)
where where
specified minimum yield stress of the type of (506.2-7)

steel being used, MPa
= plastic section modulus about the x-axis, mnr'
and
506.2.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling For a doubly symmetric f-shape: c = 1 (506.2-8a)
1. When the limit state of lateral- For a channel: c=hO~y (506.2-8b)

torsional 2. Cw
buckling does not apply. where
ho = distance between the flange centroids, mm
Mn = c; [Mp - (Mp - O. 7FySx) (~: =~~)] :5 Mp

User Note: If the square root term in Eq. 506.2-4 is
conservatively taken equal to 1, Eq. 506.2-6 becomes
(506.2-2)
3. When t., > t;
(506.2-3)
Note that this approximation can be extremely
where conservative.
Lb = Length between points that are either braced For doubly symmetric l-shapes with rectangular flanges,
against lateral displacement of compression r hZ ,8 LId titus Eq. 5062-7 becomes
C IV = ~
flange or braced against twist of the cross
section, mm
4
1 + 0.078 : ~
x 0
(Lb
Tts
f (506.2-4) rts may be approximated accurately and conservatively as
the radius of gyration of the compression flanges plus one-
sixth of the web:
modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
torsional constant, mm"
elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis,
mnr'

506.3 Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members with User Note: I-shaped members for which this section is
Compact Webs and Noncompact or Slender applicable may be designed conservatively using Section
Flanges Bent about their Major Axis 506.5.
This section applies to doubly symmetric 1- shaped members The nominal flexural strength, M n, shall be the lowest value
bent about their major axis having compact webs and obtained according to the limit states of compression flange
noncompact or slender flanges as defined in Section 502.4. yielding, lateral-torsional buckling, compression flange local
buckling and tension flange yielding.
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value
obtained according to the limit states of lateral-torsional 506.4.1 Compression Flange Yielding
buckling and compression flange local buckling.
(506.4-1 )
506.3.1 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
506.4.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
For lateral-torsional buckling, the provisions of Section
506.2.2 shall apply. I. When t; < Lp the limit state of lateral-
torsional buckling does not apply.
506.3.2 Compression Flange Local Buckling
I. For sections with noncompact flanges 2. When
Mn = [Mp - (Mp - O. 7FySx) C~~t--1;t)]

(506.4-2)
(506.3-1) 3. When t; > t;
2. For sections with slender flanges
u; = FerSxc :$ RpcMyc (506.4-3)
(506.3-2)
where
Mye = FySxe (506.4-4)
where
C b_n2E J Lb 2
F er = 2 1 + O. 078S-h (-)
. xc 0 rt
Apt =
Ap is the limiting slenderness for a compact
(~:)
(506.4-5)
flange, Table 502.4.l and Table 502.4.2
=
Art Ar is the limiting slenderness for a For
lye
1:$ 0.23. J shall be taken as zero.
noncompact flange, Table 502.4.1 and Table 502.4.2 y
4
k = and shall not be taken less than The stress, F L, is determined as follows:
c ~h/tw
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
For
506.4 Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or
Noncompact Webs Bent about their Major Axis FL = O.7Fy (506.4-6a)
This section applies to: (a) doubly symmetric 1- shaped For Sxt < 0.7
members bent about their major axis with noncompact webs;
s;
and (b) singly symmetric I-shaped members with webs
attached to the mid-width of the flanges, bent about their (506.4-6b)
major axis, with compact or noncompact webs, as defined
in Section 502.4.

The limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of where
.yielding, Lp, is
(506.4-11)
L,} ::::1.1Tt rI
~p; (506.4-7)
compression flange width, mm
compression flange thickness, mm
The limiting unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic
lateral-torsional buckling, Ln is 2. For I-shapes with channel caps or cover plates
attached to the compression flange:
F S h)2 radius of gyration of the flange components in

1 + 6.76 ( ; x; 0
flexural compression plus one-third of the web area
in compression due to application of major axis
(506.4-8) bending moment alone, mm
The web plastification factor, Rpe, is determined as the ratio of two times the web area in compression
follows: due to application of major axis bending moment
alone to the area of the compression flange
components
a.
User Note: For I-shapes with a rectangular compression
flange, r t may be approximated accurately and
(506.4-9a) conservatively as the radius of gyration of the
compression flange plus one-third of the compression
portion of the web; in other words,
b.
Rpe = [Mp _ (Mp _

Mye Mye
1)( .it - .itpw )]
Arw - Apw
s Mp
Mye
(506.4-9b) 506.4.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling
where 1. For sections with- compact flanges, the limit state of

local buckling does not apply.
z.r,« 1.6SxeFy
elastic section modulus referred to tension and For sections with noncompact flanges
2.
compression flanges, respectively, mrrr'
he
tw Mn = [RpcMyc - (RpcMyc - FLSxc) (~f-_l~~,)]
Ap, the limiting slenderness for a compact web,
see Tables 502.4.1and 502.4.2 (506.4-12)
An the limiting slenderness for a noncompact
web, see Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2
The effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional (506.4-13)

buckling, T t, is determined as follows:
where:
1. For I-shapes with a rectangular compression flange:
defined in Eqs. 506.4-6a and 506.4-6b
bfe the web plastification factor, determined by
Tt = r==='==== Eqs. 506.4-9
(506.4-10) ke = 4
..Jh7t:, and shall not be taken less than
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation

purposes

(btc/2ttc) 506.5 Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric 1-

Ap' the limiting slenderness for a compact flange, Shaped Members with Slender Webs Bent
Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2 about their Major Axis
Art Ap the limiting slenderness for a noncompact
flange, Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2 This section applies to doubly symmetric and singly
symmetric 1- shaped members with slender webs attached to
the mid-width of the flanges, bent about their major axis, as
506.4.4 Tension Flange Yielding
defined in Section 502.4
1. When Sxt ~ Sxe the limit state of tension flange

The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value
yielding does not apply.
obtained according to the limit states of compression flange
yielding, lateral-torsional buckling, compression flange local
2. When s., < Sxe buckling and tension flange yielding.
(506.4-14) 506.5.1 Compression Flange Yielding

where
(506.5-1)
The web plastification factor corresponding to the tension 506.5.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
flange yielding limit state, Rpt is determined as follows:
(506.5-2)
a. For
1. When t; s Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional
buckling does not apply.
(506.4-15a)
Fer = c, [Fy - (0. 3Fy) (~: =~:)] s Fy
R Mp
= [-- Mp
( --1 ) ( A- Apw)] Mp
<-
(506.5-3)
pt M yt Myt Arw - Apw - Myt
3. When Lb > t;
(506.4-15b)
where
(506.5-4)
A he/tw
Apw Ap ,the limiting slenderness for a compact web,
where
defined in Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2
An the limiting slenderness for a non compact
web, defined in Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2 Lp is defined by Eq. 506.4-7
LT = 7rr,Jo. :F
y
(506.5·5)
Rpg is the bending S::gth redu(c~:n factorjl;: E)

R
pg
= 1- 1200 + 300aw
- - 5. 7 -
tw Fy
::; 1.0
(506.5-6)

where: The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value
aw .'
obtained according to the limit states of yielding (plastic
defined by Eq. 506.4-11 but shall not exceed 10 and
moment) and flange local buckling.
rt = the effective radius of gyration for lateral buckling
as defined in Section 506.4.
506.6.1 Yielding
506.5.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling
(506.6-1 )
(506.5-7)
1. For sections with compact flanges, the limit state of 506.6.2 Flange Local Buckling
compression flange local buckling does not apply.
1. For Sections with compact flanges the limit state of
2. For sections with noncompact flanges yielding shall apply.
User Note: All current ASTM Au W, S, M, C and Me

(506.5-8) shapes except W21x48, W14x99, WI4x90, WI2x65,
WIQx12, W8x31, W8xJO, W6x15, W6x9, W6x8.5 and
3. For sections with slender flange sections

M4x6 have compact no nges at toy = 34 5 Mpa.
2. For sections with noncompact flanges
0.9Eke
Fer =
(:lr)
2
(506.5-9)
Mn = [Mp - (Mp - O. 7F ySy) (A~f~A~;,)]
where (506.6-2)
and shall not be taken less than 0.35
nor greater than 0.76 for calculation (506.6-3)
purposes
bfc/2tfc where
Ap, the limiting slenderness for a
Fer =
0.69E
2
compact flange, Tables 502.4.l and (506.6-4)
502.4.2
Ar, the limiting slenderness for a
(:lr)
noncompact flange, Tables 502.4.1 and bit
502.4.2 Ap,the limiting slenderness for a compact flange,
Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4.2
506.5.4 Tension Flange Yielding Arf =: An the limiting slenderness for a noncompact
flange, Tables 502.4.1 and 502.4,2
1. When Sxt 2':: s.; the limit state of tension flange Sy for a channel shall be taken as the minimum section
yielding does not apply. modulus
506.7 Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-shaped

2. When s., < Sxe Members '
(506.5-10) This section .appl ies to square and. reotangular HSS, and
doubly symmetric box-shaped members bent about either
'axis, having compact or noncompact webs and compact,
506.6 I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent about noncompact 01' slender flanges as defined in Section 502.4.
their Minor Axis The nominal flexural strength M'l> shall be the lowest
value obtained according to the Iimit states of yielding
This section applies to I-shaped members and channels bent (plastic moment), flange local buckling and web local
about their minor axis. buckling under pure flexure.

506.7.1 Yielding moment) and local buckling.
(506.7-1) 506.8.1 Yielding
where:
(506.8-1 )
Z = plastic section modulus about the axis of bending,
mm3
506.8.2 Local Buckling
506.7.2 Flange Local Buckling
1. For compact sections, the limit state of flange local
2. For noncompact sections
2. For sections with noncompact flanges
0.021E )
Mn =( ~ +Fy S (506.8-2)
M. ~ M, - eM, -FyS)(3.57~ ~-4.0)'; M,
3. For sections with slender walls

(506.7-2)
3. For sections with slender flanges Mn = FcrS (506.8-3)
(506.7-3) where
where 0.33E
Fcr = D (506.8-4)
Seff is the effective section modulus determined with the
t
effective width of the compression flange taken as:
S = elastic section modulus, mrrr'
be = 1.92t [ 0.38~1
1 - --
bit
-
Fy
~ b (506.7-4) 506.9 Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of
Symmetry
This section applies to tees and double angles loaded in the

506.7.3 Web Local Buckling
plane of symmetry.
1. For compact sections, the limit state of web local
buckling does not apply. The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lowest value
2. For sections with noncompact webs moment), lateral-torsional buckling and flange local
buckling.
M. ~ M, - eM,- FyS,) (0.305

s n,
t:~-0.738) 506.9.1 Yielding
(506.9-1)
where
(506.7-5)
506.8 Round HSS
Mp = F yZ x ~ 1. 6M y for stems in tension (506.9-2)
s My for stems in compression (506.9-3)
This section applies to round HSS having D / t ratios ofless
than 0.45E 506.9.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
-F-'
y
(506.9-4)
The nominal flexural strength, M n- shall be the lower value
National Structural Code of the ,Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

where: The nominal flexural strength, M n, shall be the lowest value

(506.9-5) moment), lateral-torsional buckling and leg local buckling.
506.10.1 Yielding
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in tension and the (506.10-1)
minus sign applies when the stem is in compression. If the tip
where:
of the stem is in compression anywhere along the unbraced
length, the negative value of B shall be used. My = yield moment about the axis of bending, N-mm.
506.9.3 Flange Local Buckling of Tees 506.10.2 Lateral- Torsional Buckling
(506.9-6) For single angles without continuous lateral-torsional

restraint along the length
S xc is the elastic section modulus referred to the
compression flange.
F cr is determined as follows:
(506.10-2)
2. When Me > My
2. For noncompact sections
(506.9-7)
n, ~(1.92 -1.17 ~)MY" 1.5M y
(506.10-3)
where:
3. For slender sections
Me, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, IS
O.69E determined as follows:
Fer = . 2
(506.9-8)
(:f,) 1. For bending about one of the geometric axes of an equal-
leg angle with no lateral- torsional restraint.
506.10 Single Angles a. With maximum compression at the toe
This section applies to single angles with and without

continuous lateral restraint along their length.
Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional restraint

l+O.78(~)2 -1)
along the length shall be permitted to be designed on the
(506. 10-4a)
basis of geometric axis (x, y) bending. Single angles without
continuous lateral-torsional restraint along the length shall be b. With maximum tension at the toe
designed using the provisions for principal axis bending
except where the provision for bending about a geometric
axis is permitted.
User Note: For geometric axis design, use section

properties computed about the x- and y-axis of the angle,
(506.10-4b)
parallel and perpendicular to the legs. For principal axis
design use section properties computed about the major and My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment
minor principal axes of the angle.
calculated using the geometric section modulus.

User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single angles with 506.10.3 Leg Local Buckling
their vertical leg toe in compression, and having a span-to-
.' depth ratio less than or equal to The limit state of leg local buckling applies when the toe of
the leg is in compression.
1.64E
-F-
,(t)2
i
Fy
-1.4"£
1. For compact sections, the limit state ofleg local
y
2. For sections with noncompact legs

2. For bending about one of the geometric axes of an
equal-leg angle with lateral-torsional restraint at the
point of maximum moment only
(506.10-7)
Me shall be taken as 1.25 times Me computed using
Eq. 506.l0-4a or 506.10-4b
3. For sections with slender legs
My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated using
the geometric section modulus. (506.10-8)
where:
3. For bending about the major principal axis of equal-leg
angles:
O.71E
Fer =--2-
O.46EbZtZCb
Me=---L--- (506.10-5) (~)
b outside width of leg in compression, mm
elastic section modulus to the toe in compression
4. For bending about the major principal axis of unequal-
relative to the axis of bending, mm '. For bending
leg angles:
about one of the geometric axes of an equal-leg
angle with no lateral-torsional restraint,
Se shall be 0.80 of the geometric axis section
P~+O.052(~)2 +Pw) modulus.
506.11 Rectangular Bars and Rounds

(506.10-6)
where: This section applies to rectangular bars bent about either
geometric axis and rounds.
Cb IS computed using Eq. 506.1-1 with a maximum value
of1.5. , The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower
L laterally unbraced length of a member, mm.
value obtained according to the limit states of yielding
/z minor principal axis moment of inertia, mm". (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling, as required.
rz radius of gyrati~n for the minor principal axis,
mm 506.11.1 Yielding
t angle leg thickness, mm
fJw a section property for unequal leg angles, positive Lbd O.08E
for short legs in compression and negative for For rectangular bars with -- < --- bent about
t2 - Fy
long legs in compression. If the long leg is in
compression anywhere along the unbraced length their major axis, rectangular bars bent about their minor axis,
of the member, the negative value of Pw shall be and rounds:
used (506.11-1)

506.11.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling 506.12.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
O.OSE Lbd 1.9E (506.12-3)

I. For rectangular bars with -F-- < -2- s -F
y t y where:
bent about their major axis:
F cr = buckling stress for the section as determined by
analysis, MPa
User Note: In the case of z-shaped members, it is

(506.11-2) recommended that F cr be taken as O. 50 F cr of a channel
with same flange and web properties.
For rectangular bars with Lbd 1.9E

2. 7 > ---p- bent 506.12.3 Local Buckling
y
about their major axis: (506.12-4)
(506.11-3) where:
where: F CT = buckling stress for the section as determined by
1.9ECb analysis, MPa
Fer = L d
IJ
(506.11-4)
7 506.13 Proportions of Beams and Girders
t width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of
bending, mm '506.13.1 Hole Reductions
d depth of rectangular bar, in. mm
length between points -that are either braced against This section applies to rolled or built-up shapes, and cover-
lateral displacement of" the compression region or plated beams with holes, proportioned on the basis of
bracedagainst (wist of the cross section, mm flexural strength of the gross section.
3. For round and rectangular bars bent about their In addition to the limit states specified in the previous
minor axis, the limit state of lateral-torsional sections, the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be limited
buckling need not be considered. according to the limit state of tensile rupture of the tension
flange.
506.12 Unsymmetrical Shapes
1. For FuAfn 2:: YtFyAfg, the limit state of tensile
This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes, except Rupture shall not apply.
single angles.
2. For F uAfn < YtF yAfg, the nominal flexural
The nominal flexural strength, Mn> shall be the lowest
strength, Mn, at the location of the holes in the tension
value obtained according to the limit state of yielding (yield
flange shall not be taken greater than:
moment), lateral-torsional buckling and local buckling where
FuAfn
(506.12-1) n; =-A--Sx (506.13-1)
fg
where: where:
S lowest elastic section modulus relative to the axis gross tension flange area, shall be calculated in
of bending, mnr' accordance with the provisions of Section 504.3.1,
mm2
506.12.1 Yielding net tension flange area, calculated in accordance
with the provisions of Section 504.3.2, mrrr'
(506.12-2) 1.0 for Fy/Fu sO.SO
1.1 otherwise

---------------~----
506.13.2 Proportioning Limits for I -Shaped Partial-length cover plates shall be extended beyond the
Members theoretical cutoff point and the extended portion shall be
.' attached to the beam or girder by high-strength bolts in a
Singly symmetric 1- shaped members shall satisfy the slip-critical connection or fillet welds. The attachment shall
following limit: be adequate, at the applicable strength given in Sections
510.2.2,51003.8, or 502.3.9 to develop the cover plate's portion
I of the flexural strength in the beam or girder at the theoretical
0.1:::; ;e:::; 0.9 (506.13-2) cutoff point.
y
For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate
1- shaped members with slender webs shall also satisfy the
termination to the beam or girder shall have continuous
following limits:
welds along both edges of the cover plate in the length a',
a defined below, and shall be adequate to develop the cover
1. For h_:::; 1.5 plate's portion of the strength of the beam or girder at the
distance a' from the end of the cover plate.
(,h ) max ~ 11. 7

w
fl;
Y
(506.13-3) I. When there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than
three-fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the
plate
2. For a a' =W (506.13-5)
i> 1.5
where:
0.42E w = width of cover plate, mm

---
(t:)max Fy
(506.13~4)
2. When there is a continuous weld smaller than three-
where: fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the plate
a clear distance between transverse stiffeners, mm

a' = 1.5w (506.13-6)
In unstiffened girders h/tw shall not exceed 260. The ratio of 3. When there is no weld across the end of the plate
the web area to the compression flange area shall not exceed
10.
a' = 2w (506.13-7)
506.13.3 Cover Plates

506.13.4. Built-Up Beams
Flanges of welded beams or girders may be varied in
Where two or more beams or channels are used side-by-side
thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the
to form a flexural member, they shall be connected together
use of cover plates.
in compliance with Section 505.6.2. When concentrated
loads are carried from one beam to another, or distributed
The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of bolted
between the beams, diaphragms having sufficient stiffness to
girders shall not exceed 70 percent of the total flange area.
distribute the load shall be welded or bolted between the
beams.
High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to web, or
cover plate to flange, shall be proportioned to resist the total
horizontal shear resulting from the bending forces on the
girder. The longitudinal distribution of these bolts or
intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the intensity of
the shear. However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed
the maximum permitted for compression or tension members
in Section 505.6 or 504.4, respectively. Bolts or welds
connecting flange to web shall also be proportioned to
transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the flange,
unless provision is made to transmit such loads by direct
bearing.

SECTION 507
b. For 1.10jkvEIFy<hltw5,1.37jkvEIFy
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
507.1 General Provisions
(507.2-4)
Two methods of calculating shear strength are presented
below. The method presented in Section 507.2 does not
utilize the post buckling strength of the member (tension c. For h/tw> 1.37jkv E/Fy
field action). The method presented in Section 507.3 utilizes
tension field action.
1.51Ekv
(507.2-5)
The design shear strength,cI>vV n, and the allowable shear Cv = (h/tw)'l.Fy
strength, V n/!lv, shall be determined as follows.
where:
For all provisions in this section except Section 507.2.1(1):
Aw = the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw mrrr'
cl>v = 0.90 (LRFD) n, = 1.67 (ASD)
The web plate buckling coefficient, kv is determined as
507.2 Members with Unstiffened or Stiffened Webs follows:
507.2.1 Nominal Shear Strength a. For unstiffened webs with h/tw < 260, kv =5
This section applies to webs of singly or doubly symmetric.
except for the stem of tee shapes where kv = 1.2.
members and channels subject to shear in the plane of the
b. For stiffened webs,
web.
5
The nominal shear strength, V n' of unstiffened or stiffened kv = 5 + (a/h)2
webs, according to the limit states of shear yielding and shear
buckling, is 260 2
= 5 when a/h > 3.0 or a/h > [h/tJ
Vn = 0.6FyAwCv (507.2-1)
where:
L For webs of rolled I-shaped members
a clear distance between transverse stiffeners, mm
h for rolled shapes, the clear distance between flanges less
with h/tw::; 2. 24jE/Fy the fillet or comer radii, mm
for built-up welded sections, the clear distance
cl>v = 1.00 (LRFD) n, = 1.50 (ASD) between flanges, mm
for built-up bolted sections, the distance between
and fastener lines, mm
for tees, the overall depth, mm
C; = 1.0 (507.2-2)
507.2.2 Transverse Stiffeners
2. For webs of all other doubly symmetric shapes and
singly symmetric shapes and channels, except round Transverse stiffeners are not required where
HSS, the web shear coefficient, Cv, is determined as hi tw 5, 2.46.J ElF y , or where the required shear strength
follows: is less than or equal to the available shear strength provided in
accordance with Section 507.2.1 for k; = 5.
a. For h/tw::; 1.10 jkv E/Fy:
Transverse stiffeners used to develop the available web shear
strength, as provided in Section 507.2.1, shall have a moment
C; = 1.0 (507.2-3) of inertia about an axis in the web center for stiffener pairs or
about the face in contact with the web plate for single
stiffeners, which shall not be less than at~j, where

2.5 507.3.2 Nominal Shear Strength with Tension Field

j = (a/h)Z - 2 ~ 0.5 (507.2-6) Action
Transverse stiffeners are permitted to be stopped short of the When tension field action IS permitted according to
tension flange, provided bearing is not needed to transmit a Section 507.3.1, the nominal shear strength, V n' with
concentrated load or reaction. The weld by which transverse tension field action, according to the limit state of tension
stiffeners are attached to the web shall be terminated not less field yielding, shall be
than four times nor more than six times the web thickness from
the near toe to the web-to-flange weld. When single stiffeners
are used, they shall be attached to the compression flange, if it 1. For h/tw::; 1.10 Jkv E/Fy
consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due
to torsion in the flange. When lateral bracing is attached to a
stiffener, or a pair of stiffeners, these, in tum, shall be Vn = 0.6FyAw (507.3-1)
connected to the compression flange to transmit 1 percent of
the total flange force, unless the flange is composed only of
angles. 2. For h/tw> 1.10.Jkv E/Fy
Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall be spaced

not more than 305 mm on center. If intermittent fillet welds are VII == O.6FyAw
(c; + 1-C) v
1.15../1 + (alh)2
(507.3-2)
used, the clear distance between welds shall not be more than
16 times the web thickness nor more than 250 mm.
where:
507.3 Tension Field Action
k; and Cv are as defined in Section 507.2.1.
507.3.1 Limits on the Use of Tension Field
Action 507.3.3. Transverse Stiffeners
Consideration of tension field action is permitted for flanged Transverse stiffeners subject to tension field action shall meet
members when the web plate is supported on all four sides the requirements of Section 507.2.2 and the following
by flanges or stiffeners. Consideration of tension field limitations:
action is not permitted for:
1. end panels in all members with transverse stiffeners;

I. (bit)" OS0.56
.
J/ yst
2. members when a/h. exceeds 3.0 or [260/(h/tw)]Z;
(507.3-3)
4. h/bfc or h/bft > 6.0 where:
(b/t)st the width-thickness ratio of the stiffener

where:
r.; specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener
material, MPa
Afc area of compression flange, mrrr' coefficient defined in Section 507.2.1
Aft area of tension fl an ge.rn m ' 1.0 for stiffeners in pairs .
bfe width of compression flange, mm 1.8 for single angle stiffeners
b,t width of tension flange, mm 2.4 for single plate stiffeners
required shear strength at the location of the
In these cases, the nominal shear strength, V n, shall be stiffener, N
determined according to the provisions of Section 507.2. available shear strength; c/JvV n(LRFD) or
Vn/ n, (ASD) with V n as defined in Section
507.3.2, N

507.4 Single Angles 507.7 Weak Axis Shear in Singly and Doubly
.'The nominal shear strength, V n, of a single angle leg shall be Symmetric Shapes
determined using Equation (507.2-1) with Cv =

1.0, Aw = For singly and doubly symmetric shapes loaded in the weak
bt where b = width of the leg resisting the shear force, mm axis without torsion, the nominal shear strength, V n- for
each shear resisting element shall be determined using
and k; = 1.2.
Eq. 507.2-1 and Section 507.2.1(2) with Aw = bItt and
507.5 Rectangular HSS and Box Members k; = 1.2.
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of rectangular HSS and box User Note: For all ASTM A6 W, S, M and HP shapes, when
members shall be determined using the provisions of r;« 345 MPa, c; = 1.0.
Section 507.2.1 with Aw =
2ht where h for the width
resisting the shear force shall be taken as the clear distance 507.8 Beams and Girders with Web Openings
between the flanges less the inside corner radius on each
side and tw = t and kv =
5. If the comer radius is not The effect of all web openings on the nominal shear
known, h shall be taken as the corresponding outside strength of steel and composite beams shall be determined.
dimension minus three times the thickness. Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the
required strength exceeds the available strength of the
507.6 Round HSS member at the opening.
The nominal shear strength, V n, of round HSS, according to

the limit states of shear yielding and shear buckling, is
(507.6-1)
where:
F cr shall be the larger of
1.60E
Fcr = 5
(507.6-2a)
~(~t
and
0.78E
Fcr = --3-
(507.6-2b)
(~)2
but shall not exceed O. 6F y
gross area of section based on design wall

thickness, mm!
outside diameter, mm
the distance from maximum to zero shear force, mm
design wall thickness, equal to 0.93 times the
nominal wall thickness for ERW HSS and equal to
the nominal thickness for SAW HSS, mm
User Note: The shear buckling equations, Equations

507.6-2a and 507.6-2b, will control for D It over 100, high
strength steels, and long lengths. If the shear strength for
standard sections is desired, shear yielding will usually
control

r-
CHAF'TEF~ 5 Structural Steel 5-77
SECTION 508 Mr =required flexural strength using LRFD load

combinations, N-llllll
DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR Me = cfJ bM n = design flexural strength determined in
COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION accordance with Section 506, N-mm
cfJe = resistance factor for compression = 0.90
This section addresses members subject to axial force and cfJb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
flexure about one or both axes, with or without torsion, and
to members subject to torsion only. For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
508.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject required axial compressive strength using ASD load
to Flexure and Axial Force combinations, N
P n/fie =
allowable axial compressive strength,
508.1.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in determined in accordance with Section 505, N
Flexure and Compression Mr ee required flexural strength using ASD load
combinations, N-mm
The interaction of flexure and compression in doubly
symmetric members and singly symmetric members for
Mc = Mn/fib =
allowable flexural strength determined
in accordance with Section 506, N-mm
which O. 1 ::::; yci
(I Iy) ::::;0.9, that are constrained to s~fety factor for compression = 1.67
bend about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by safety factor for flexure = 1.67
Eqs. 50S.I-la and 50S.I-Ib, where lye is the moment of
inertia about the y-axis referred to the compression flange, 508.1.2 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in
mm4. Flexure and Tension
User Note: Section 50S.2 is permitted to be used in lieu of the The interaction of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric
provisions of this section. members and singly symmetric members constrained to bend
about a geometric axis (x and/or y) shall be limited by
P Eqs. 50S.I-la and 508.I-lb,
1. For >0 2
__!:.
Pc - .
where
e, 8 (Mrx
-+- -+-Mry) ::::;1.0 (50S.1-la)
r, 9 u.; Mey For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
Pr required tensile strength using LRFD load
combinations, N
Pr
2. For p < 0.2 Pc cfJtP n = design tensile strength, determined in
e accordance with Section 504.2, N
Mr = required flexural strength using LRFD load
(50S.I-lb) combinations, N-mm
Me = cfJbMn = design flexural strength determined
in accordance with Section 506, N-mm
where: cfJt = resistance factor for tension (see Section 504.2)
P r = required axial compressive strength, N cfJb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
Pc = available axial compressive strength, N
For doubly symmetric members,
Mr
Me
X
=
=
required flexural strength, N-mm
available flexural strength, N-mm
subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending
C b in Section 506 may be increased by J 1+ P
u
Pey
for
y subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending axial tension that acts concurrently with flexure, where
P _ rr2Ely
ey - L~
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
required axial compressive strength using LRFD load For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
combinations, N
Pr required tensile strength using ASD load
cfJeP n = design axial compressive strength,
combinations, N
determined in accordance with Section 505, N
PeP nl fit = allowable tensile strength, determined
in accordance with Section 504.2, N 508.2 Un symmetric and other Members Subject to
required flexural strength using ASD load Flexure and Axial Force
combinations, N-mm
Me = Mn/D.b =
allowable flexural strength determined This section addresses the interaction of flexure and axial
in accordance with Section 506, N-mm stress for shapes not covered in Section 508.1. It is
safety factor for tension (see Section 504.2) permitted to use the provisions of this Section for any shape
safety factor for flexure = 1.67 in lieu of the provisions of Section 508.1.
fbw + 1hz I =51.0

For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Section 506 may be
increased by
1.5P a
1+ -- C
lor
•
aXIa
I
tension
.
that acts
IFafa + r.: r:
(508.2-1)
Pey
1£2£1 where
concurrently with flexure where P ey = ~
Lb
fa required axial stress at the point of .
consideration, MPa
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and
available axial stress at the point of
tension is permitted in lieu ofEq. 508.I-la and 508.1-1b.
consideration, MPa
required flexural stress at the point of
508.1.3 Doubly Symmetric Members in Single Axis
consideration, MPa
Flexure and Compression
available flexural stress at the point of
consideration, MPa
For doubly symmetric members in flexure and compression
w subscript relating symbol to major principal
with moments primarily in one plane, it is permissible to
axis bending
consider the two independent limit states, in-plane instability
z subscript relating symbol to minor principal
and out-of-plane buckling or flexural-torsional buckling,
axis bending
separately in lieu of the combined approach provided in
Section 508.1.1.
1. For the limit state of in-plane instability, Eqs. 508.1.1
shall be used with fa required axial stress using LRFD load
Pc, Mr and Me determined in the plane of bending. combinations, MPa
cfJeF er = design axial stress, determined in
2. For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling accordance with Section 505 for
compression or Section 504.2 for tension,
v, (Mr)
2 MPa
p+ M =51.0 (508.1-2) required flexural stress at the specific
co ex location in the cross section using LRFD
where load combinations, MPa
P co available compressive strength out of the plane of

cfJb Mn/S = design flexural stress
determined in accordance with section
bending, N
506, MPa. Use the section modulus for the
Mex available flexural-torsional strength for strong
specific location in the cross section and
axis flexure determined from Section 506, N-mm
consider the sign of the stress
resistance factor for compression = 0.90
If bending occurs only about the weak axis, the moment
resistance factor for tension (Section 504.2)
ratio in Eq. 508.1-2 shall be neglected.
resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
For members with significant biaxial moments
eMr/ Me;::: 0.05) in both directions), the provisions of For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
Section 508.1.1 shall be followed.
fa required axial stress using ASD load
combinations, MPa
=
Fer / D.e allowable axial stress
determined in accordance with section 505
for compression, or Section 504.2 for
tension, MPa

required flexural stress at the specific I. For round HSS, Fer shall be the larger of
location in the cross section using ASD
load combinations, MPa
Fbw,Fbz MnffibS = allowable flexural stress
(508.3-2a)
determined in accordance with Section 506,
MPa. Use the section modulus for the specific
location in the cross section and consider and
the sign of the stress
safety factor for compression = 1.67 0.60E
safety factor for tension (Section 504.2) Fer =--3-
(508.3-2b)
safety factor for flexure = 1.67 (~)Z
Eq. 508.2-1 shall be evaluated using the principal bending
but shall not exceed O. 6F y, where
axes by considering the sense of the flexural stresses at the
critical points of the cross section. The flexural terms are L length of the member, mm
either added to or subtracted from the axial term as appropri- D = outside diameter, mm
ate. When the axial force is compression, second order effects
shall be included according to the provisions of Section 503.
2. For rectangular HSS
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and
tension is permitted in lieu of Eq. 508.2-1.
a. For hit:$; 2.45 JEfFy
508.3 Members under Torsion and Combined
Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or Axial Force
Fer = 0.6Fy (508.3-3)
508.3.1 Torsional Strength of Round and

Rectangular HSS b. For 2.45 JEfFy < hit:$; 3.07 JEfFy
The design torsional strength, 4Jr Tn, and the allowable
torsional strength, T nffir, for round and rectangular HSS
shall be determined as follows:
Fer = O.6Fy (2.45 JEfFy)/(hft)
(508.3-4)
4Jr = 0.90 (LRFD) fir = 1.67 (ASD)
The nominal torsional strength, Tn, according to the limit
c. For 3.07 JEfFy < hit:$; 260
states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling is:
Fer = 0.458rr2Ef(hft)2 (508.3-5)
t; = Fere (508.3-1)
where
User Note: The torsional shear constant, C, may be
is the HSS torsional constant conservatively taken as:
shall be determined as follows: l£(D - t)2t
For a round HSS : C
= 2
For rectangular HSS:
C = 2(8 - t)(H - t)t - 4.5(4 -1£)t3

508.3.2 HSS Subject to Combined Torsion, Shear, 508.3.3 Strength of Non-HSS Members under
Flexure and Axial Force Torsion and Combined Stress
When the required torsional strength, T To is less than or The design torsional strength, cfJTF n' and the allowable
equal to 20 percent of the available torsional strength, T c- torsional strength, F n/fiT' for non-HSS members shall be
the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial force the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of
for HSS shall be determined by Section 508.1 and the yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under shear
torsional effects shall be neglected. When T r exceeds, stress, or buckling, determined as follows:
20 percent of T c- the interaction of torsion, shear, flexure
and/or axial force shall be limited by cfJT = 0.90 (LRFD) fiT = 1.67 (ASD)
l. For the limit state of yielding under normal stress
(508.3-6)
(508.3-7)
2. For the limit state of shear yielding under shear stress

where
r; = 0.6Fy (508.3-8)
3. or the limit state of buckling
required axial strength using LRFD load
combinations, N
Fn = Fer (508.3-9)
where
cfJP n- design tensile or compressive strength III
accordance with Section 504 or 505, N Fer = buckling stress for the section as determined by
required flexural strength using LRFD load analysis, MPa.
combinations, N-mm
cfJ bM n, design flexural strength in accordance Some constrained local yielding is permitted
with Section 506, N-mm adjacent to areas that remain elastic
required shear strength using LRFD load
combinations, N
cfJvV n, design shear strength in accordance with
Section 507, N
-, - . --. = -- -- -- -- -
required torsional strength using LRFD load
combinations, N-mm .. - -.
- --
cfJTT n, design torsional strength in accordance

with Section 508.3.1, N-mm
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
Pr required axial strength using ASD load

combinations, N
PcP nl fi , allowable tensile or compressive
strength in accordance with Section 504 or 505, N
Mr required flexural strength using ASD load
combinations determined in accordance with
Section 502.5, N-mm
Me Mnl fib , allowable flexural strength III
accordance with Section 506, N-mm
Vr required shear strength using' ASD load
combinations, N
Vc V nl fiv , allowable shear strength in accordance
with Section 507, N
Tr required torsional strength using ASD load
combinations, N-mm
Tc T nl fiT , allowable torsional strength III
accordance with Section 508.3.1, N-mm

CHAPTER 5 . Structural Steel 5-81
SECTION 509
DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS 509.1.2 Material Limitations
509.1 General Provisions Concrete and steel reinforcing bars in composite systems
shall be subject to the following limitations.
In determining load effects in members and connections of a
structure that includes composite members, consideration I. For the determination of the available strength, concrete
shall be given to the effective sections at the time each
shall have a compressive strength f~ of not less than
increment of load is applied. The design, detailing and
21 MPa nor more than 70 MPa for normal weight
material properties related to the concrete and reinforcing steel
concrete and not less than 21 MPa nor more than
portions of composite construction shall comply with the
42 MPa for lightweight concrete.
reinforced concrete and reinforcing bar design
specifications stipulated by applicable building code. In the
User Note: Higher strength concrete materials may be used
absence of a building code, the provisions in Chapter 4 shall
for stiffuess calculations but may not be relied upon for
apply.
strength calculations unless justified by testing or analysis.
509.1.1 Nominal Strength of Composite Sections

2. The specified minimum yield stress of structural
steel and reinforcing bars used in calculating the
Two methods are provided for determining the nominal strength
strength of a composite column shall not exceed
of composite sections: the plastic stress distribution method
525 MPa.
and the strain-compatibility method.
The tensile strength of the concrete shall be neglected in the
Higher material strengths are permitted when their use is
determination of the nominal strength of composite
justified by testing or analysis.
members.
User Note: Additional reinforced concrete material
509.1.1.1 Plastic Stress Distribution Method
limitations are specified in Chapter 4.
For the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal

509.1.3 Shear Connectors
strength shall be computed assuming that steel components
have reached a stress of F y in either tension or compression Shear connectors shall be headed steel studs not less than
and concrete components in compression have reached a four stud diameters in length after installation, or hot-rolled
stress of O. 85f~. For round HSS filled with concrete, a steel channels. Shear stud design values shall be taken as per
stress of O. 95f~ is permitted to be used for concrete Sections 509.2.l.7 and 509.3.2.4 (2). Stud connectors shall
components in uniform compression to account for the conform to the requirements of Section 50l.3.6. Channel
effects of concrete confinement. connectors shall conform to the requirements of Section
501.3.1.
509.1.1.2 Strain-Compatibility Method
509.2 Axial Members
For the strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of
strains across the section shall be assumed, with the This section applies to two types of composite axial
maximum concrete compressive strain equal to members: encased and filled sections.
0.003 mmlmm. The stress-strain relationships for steel and
concrete shall be obtained from tests or from published
results for similar materials.
User Note: The strain compatibility method should be used

to determine nominal strength for irregular sections and
for cases where the steel does not exhibit elasto-plastic
behavior. General guidelines for the strain-compatibility
method for encased columns are given in AISC Design
Guide 6 and Sections 410.3 and 410.4 of this Code.

509.2.1 Encased Composite Columns A e = area of concrete, mrn"

A-area
sr- of continuous reinforcing bars, mm
509.2.1.1.1 Limitations Ee = modulus of elasticity of concrete
To qualify as an encased composite column, the following

limitations shall be met: (0. 043w~·5ft,MPa)
I. The cross-sectional area of the steel core shall comprise modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa
at least I percent of the total composite cross section. specified compressive strength of concrete,
MPa
2. Concrete encasement of the steel core shall be specified minimum yield stress of steel section,
reinforced with continuous longitudinal bars and MPa
lateral ties or spirals. The minimum transverse Fyr = specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing
reinforcement shall be at least 6 mrrr' per mm of tie bars, MPa
spacing. moment of inertia of the concrete
section, mm4
3. The minimum reinforcement ratio for continuous IS moment of inertia of steel shape, mm4
4
longitudinal reinforcing, PST> shall be 0.004, where Isr = moment of inertia of reinforcing bars, mm
PST> is given by: K the effective length factor determined in accordance
Asr with Section 502
r-r : g (509.2-1 ) L laterally un braced length of the member, mm
weight of concrete per unit volume
where
area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm'

gross area of composite member, mrrr'
(1500::;; We s 2500 ~)
where
509.2.1.1.2 Compressive Strength
EI elf = effective stiffness of composite section, N-mm2
The design compressive strength, QJeP n, and allowable
compressive strength, P nl !le, for axially loaded encased (509.2-6)
composite columns shall be determined for the limit state of
flexural buckling based on column slenderness as follows:
where
QJe = O. 75(LRFD) n, = 2. OO(ASD)
(509.2-7)
1. When r,> 0.44Po
(509.2-2) 509.2.1.3.3 Tensile Strength
The design tensile strength, QJtP n- and allowable tensile

2. When r, < 0.44Po strength, P nl !It, for encased composite columns shall be
determined for the limit state of yielding as
Pn = 0.877Pe (509.2-3)
(509.2-8)
where
(509.2-4) QJt = 0.90(LRFD) n, = 1.67(ASD)
(509.2-5)
where
As = area of the steel section, mm''

509.2.1.4.4 Shear Strength 509.2.1.6.6 Detailing Requirements
The available shear strength shall be calculated based on At least four continuous longitudinal reinforcing bars shall
either the shear strength of the steel section alone as be used in encased composite columns. Transverse
specified in Section 507 plus the shear strength provided by reinforcement shall be spaced at the smallest of 16
tie reinforcement, if present, or the shear strength of the longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar diameters or 0.5
reinforced concrete portion alone. times the least dimension of the composite section. The
encasement shall provide at least 40 mm of clear cover
User Note: The nominal shear strength of tie reinforcement to the reinforcing steel.
may be determined as AstFyr(d/s) where Ast is the
area of tie reinforcement, d is the effective depth of Shear connectors shall be provided to transfer the
required shear force specified in Section 509.2.1.5. The
the concrete section, and S is the spacing of the tie
shear connectors shall be distributed along the length of the
reinforcement. The shear capacity of reinforced concrete
member at least a distance of 2.5 times the depth of the
may be determined according to Chapter 4 Section 411.
encased composite column above and below the load
transfer region. The maximum connector spacing shall be
509.2.1.5.5 Load Transfer
400mm.
Loads applied to axially loaded encased composite columns
Connectors to transfer axial load shall be placed on at least
shall be transferred between the steel and concrete in
two faces of the steel shape in a configuration symmetrical
accordance with the following requirements:
about the steel shape axes.
l. When the external force is applied directly to the steel
If the composite cross section is built up from two or
section, shear connectors shall be provided to transfer
more encased steel shapes, the shapes shall be
the required shear force, V', as follows:
interconnected with lacing, tie plates, batten plates or similar
components to prevent buckling of individual shapes due to
(509.2-9) loads applied prior to hardening of the concrete.
where
509.2.1.7.7 Strength of Stud Shear Connectors
required shear force introduced to column, N
The nominal strength of one stud shear connector embedded
area of steel cross section, mm''
in solid concrete is:
nominal axial compressive strength without
consideration of length effects, N
(509.2-12)
2. When the external force is applied directly to the
concrete encasement, shear connectors shall be provided where
to transfer the required shear force, V', as follows:
cross-sectional area of stud shear connector, mrn/
specified minimum tensile strength of a stud shear
(509.2-10)
connector, MPa
3. When load is applied to the concrete of an encased

509.2.2 Filled Composite Columns
composite column by direct bearing the design bearing
strength, cfJ BP p' and the allowable bearing strength, 509.2.2.1 Limitations
Pp/fiB, of the concrete shall be:
To qualify as a filled composite column the following
(509.2-11) limitations shall be met:
1. The cross-sectional area of the steel HSS shall

cfJB = O.65(LRFD) fiB = 2. 31(ASD) comprise at least 1 percent of the total composite cross
section.
where
2. The maximum b/ t ratio for a rectangular HSS used
AB = loaded area of concrete, mnr' as a composite column shall be equal to 2. 26J ElF y'
Higher ratios are permitted when their use is justified

by testing or analysis. When load is applied to the concrete of an encased or filled

composite column by direct bearing the design bearing
3. • The maximum D It ratio for a round HSS filled
strength, ¢BP p» and the allowable bearing strength,
with concrete shall be 0.15 E/Fy. Higher ratios are
permitted when their use is justified by testing or
pp/nB of the concrete shall be:
analysis.
(509.2-17)
509.2.2.2 Compressive Strength
CPB= O.65(LRFD) llB = 2. 31(ASD)

The design compressive strength, q>cP't. and allowable
compressive strength, P nl n; for axially loaded filled where
composite columns shall be determined for the limit state of
flexural buckling based on Section 509.2.1.2 with the AB = the loaded area, mrrr'
following modifications:
509.2.2.6 Detailing Requirements
(509.2-13)
Where required, shear connectors transferring the required
Cz = 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for circular shear force shall be distributed along the length of the
sections member at least a distance of 2.5 times the width of a
rectangular HSS or 2.5 times the diameter of a round HSS
(509.2-14)
both above and below the load transfer region. The maximum
connector spacing shall be 400 mm.
C3 = 0.6 + 2 t. As
Vic + As
):s; 0.9 (509.2-15)
509.3 Flexural Members
509.3.1 General
509.2.2.3 Tensile Strength
509.3.1.1 Effective Width

The design tensile strength, ¢tP n, and allowable tensile
strength, P nl nt, for filled composite columns shall be The effective width of the concrete slab is the sum of the
determined for the limit state of yielding as: effective widths for each side of the beam centerline, each
of which shall not exceed:
(509.2-16)
1. one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-center of
supports;
¢t = O.90(LRFD) fit = 1.67(ASD) 2. one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent
beam; or
509.2.2.4 Shear Strength 3. the distance to the edge of the slab.
The available shear strength shall be calculated based on

509.3.1.2 Shear Strength
either the shear strength of the steel section alone as
specified in Section 507 or the shear strength of the
The available shear strength of composite beams with shear
reinforced concrete portion alone.
connectors shall be determined based upon the propertie of
the steel section alone in accordance with Section 507. The
509.2.2.5 Load Transfer available shear strength of concrete-encased and filled
composite members shall be determined based upon the
Loads applied to filled composite columns shall be transferred properties of the steel section alone in accordance with
between the steel and concrete. When the external force is 'SectiQn 507 or based upon the properties of Lhe concrete and
applied either to the steel section or to the concrete infill, longitudinal steel reinforcement.
transfer of force from the steel section to the concrete core
is required from direct bond interaction, shear connection or
direct bearing. The force transfer mechanism providing the
largest nominal strength may be used. These force transfer
mechanisms shall lio.t be superimposed,

509.3.1.3 Strength During Construction provided that:
When temporary shores are not used during construction, 1. The steel beam is compact and is adequately braced
the steel section alone shall have adequate strength to according to Section 506.
support all loads applied prior to the concrete attaining 75
percent of its specified strength f~. The available flexural 2. Shear connectors connect the slab to the steel beam in
strength of the steel section shall be determined according the negative moment region.
to Section 506.
3. The slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam,
509.3.2 Strength of Composite Beams with within the effective width of the slab, is properly
Shear Connectors developed.
509.3.2.1 Positive Flexural Strength 509.3.2.3 Strength of Composite Beams with

Formed Steel Deck
The design positive flexural strength, cfJbMm and the
allowable positive flexural strength, M n/ fib, shall be 1. General II
determined for the limit state of yielding as follows:
The available flexural strength of composite construction
consisting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck
cfJb = 0.90(LRFD) fib = 1.67(ASD) connected to steel beams shall be determined by the
applicable portions of Section 509.3.2a and 509.3.2b, with
1. For h/tw -:53.76jE/Fy, the following requirements:
a. This section is applicable to decks with nominal rib

M n' shall be determined from the plastic stress distribution height not greater than 75 mm. The average width
on the composite section for the limit state of yielding of concrete rib or haunch, Wr, shall be not less than
(plastic moment). 50 mm, but shall not be taken in calculations as
more than the minimum clear width near the top of
User Note: All current ASTM A6 W, Sand HP shapes the steel deck.
satisfy the limit given In Section 509.3.2.2.1(1) for
Fy -:5 345 MPa. b. The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel
beam with welded stud shear connectors 20 mm or
less in diameter (AWS D 1.1). Studs shall be welded
2. For h/tw > 3.76 jE/Fy, either through the deck or directly to the steel cross
section. Stud shear connectors, after installation,
M n' shall be determined from the superposition of elastic shall extend not less than 40 mm above the top of
stresses, considering the effects of shoring, for the limit the steel deck and there shall be at least 12 mm of
state of yielding (yield moment). concrete cover above the top of the installed studs.
509.3.2.2 Negative Flexural Strength c. The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not
less than 50 mm.
The design negative flexural strength, cfJbMm and the
d. Steel deck shall be anchored to all supporting
allowable negative flexural strength, Mn/fib' shall be
members at a spacing not to exceed 450 mm. Such
determined for the steel section alone, in accordance with
anchorage shall be provided by stud connectors, a
the requirements of Section 506.
combination of stud connectors and arc spot
(puddle) welds, or other devices specified by the
Alternatively, the available negative flexural strength shall be
designer.
determined from the plastic stress distribution on the
composite section, for the limit state of yielding (plastic
2. Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam
moment), with
Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be
neglected in determining composite section properties
cfJb = 0.90 (LRFD) fib = 1.67(ASD) and in calculating Ac for deck ribs oriented
perpendicular to the steel beams.

3. Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam 2. Load Transfer for Negative Moment
• Concrete below the top of the steel deck may be
included in determining composite section properties In continuous composite beams where longitudinal
and shall be included in calculating Ac. reinforcing steel in the negative moment regions is
considered to act compositely with the steel beam, the
Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams may be total horizontal shear force between the point of
split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete maximum negative moment and the point of zero
haunch. moment shall be taken as the lower value according to
the limit states of yielding of the steel reinforcement in
When the nominal depth of steel deck is 40 mm or the slab, or strength of the shear connectors:
greater, the average width, wn of the supported haunch
or rib shall be not less than 50 rnm for the first stud in a. Tensile yielding of the slab reinforcement
the transverse row plus four stud diameters for each
additional stud. (509.3-2a)
where
509.3.2.4 Shear Connectors
Ar = area of adequately developed
1. Load Transfer for Positive Moment longitudinal reinforcing steel within the
effective width of the concrete slab, mm'
The entire horizontal shear at the interface between the specified minimum yield stress of the
steel beam and the concrete slab shall be assumed to be reinforcing steel, MPa
transferred by shear connectors, except for concrete-
encased beams as defined in Section 509.3. For b. Strength of shear connectors
composite action with concrete subject to flexural
compression, the total horizontal shear force> V' (509.3-2b)
between the point of maximum positive moment and
the point of zero moment shall be taken as U1e lowest 3. Strength of Stud Shear Connectors
value according to the limit states of concrete crushing,
tensile yielding 0 f the steel section or strength of the The nominal strength of one stud shear connector
shear connectors: embedded in solid concrete or in a composite slab is
a. Concrete crushing
a; = O.5~sc.Jf~Ec s RgRpAscFu
V' = O. 85f~Ac (509.3-la) (509.3-3)
where
b. Tensile yielding of the steel section
cross-sectional area of stud shear
V' = FyAs (509.3-lb) connector, mrrr'
modulus of elasticity of concrete
c. Strength of shear connectors
(509.3-1c)
(0. 043w~·5 F MPa )
specified minimum tensile strength of a
stud shear connector, MPa
where
1.0 ; (a) for one stud welded in a steel deck
rib with the deck oriented perpendicular
area of concrete slab within effective to the steel shape; (b) for any number of
width, mnr' studs welded in a row directly to the steel
area of steel cross section, mrrr' shape; (c) for any number of studs welded
sum of nominal strengths of shear in a row through steel deck with the deck
connectors between the point of oriented parallel to the steel shape and
maximum positive moment and the the ratio of the average rib width to rib
point of zero moment, N depth 2: 1.5
0.85; (a) for two studs welded in a steel
deck rib with the deck oriented
perpendicular to the steel shape; (b) for
one stud welded through steel deck with

the deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and no more than 50 percent of the top
shape and the ratio of the average rib flange of the steel shape maybe covered by
width to rib depth <1.5 decking or steel sheet, such as girder filler
0.7 for three or more studs welded in a material.
steel deck rib with the deck oriented * * for a single stud
perpendicular to the steel shape t this value maybe increased to 0.75 when
1.0 for studs welded directly to the steel
emid-ht ~ 50 mm
shape (in other words, not through steel
deck or sheet) and having a haunch
detail with not more than 50 percent of 4. Strength of Channel Shear Connectors
the top flange covered by deck or sheet
steel closures The nominal strength of one channel shear connector
0.75; (a) for studs welded in a composite embedded in a solid concrete slab is
slab with the deck oriented perpendicular
to the beam and emid-ht ~ 50 mm;
(509.3-4)
(b) for studs welded through steel deck,
or steel sheet used as girder filler
material, and embedded in a composite where
slab with the deck oriented parallel to the
beam
0.6 for studs welded in a composite slab
t, flange thickness of channel shear connector,
mm
with deck oriented perpendicular to the web thickness of channel shear
beam and connector, mm
emid-ht < 50 mm . Le length of channel shear connector, mm
emid-ht = distance from the edge of stud shank to
the steel deck web, measured at mid- The strength of the channel shear connector shall be
height of the deck rib, and in the load developed by welding the channel to the beam flange for
bearing direction of the stud (in other a force equal to Qn, considering eccentricity on the
words, in the direction of maximum connector.
moment for a simply supported beam),
mm
we weight of concrete per unit volume 5. Required Number of Shear Connectors
(1500::; We::; 2500 kg/m3)
The number of shear connectors required between the
User Note: The table below presents values for Rg and Rp section of maximum bending moment, positive or
negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall
for several cases
be equal to the horizontal shear force as determined in
Sections 509.3.2.4(1) and 509.3.2.4(2) divided by the
Condition Rg Rp nominal strength of one shear connector as determined
No Decking* l.0 l.0 from Section 509.3.2.4(3) or Section 509.3.2.4(4).
Decking oriented parallel to the steel
shape 6. Shear Connector Placement and Spacing
wr/hr ~ 1.5 1.0 0.75
wr/hr < 1.5 0.85** 0.75 Shear connectors required on each side of the point of
Decking oriented perpendicular to the maximum bending moment, positive or negative, shall
steel shape be distributed uniformly between that point and the
Number of studs occupying the same adjacent points of zero moment, unless otherwise
decking rib specified. However, the number of shear connectors
1 1.0 0.6t placed between any concentrated load and the nearest
2 0.85 0.6t point of zero moment shall be sufficient to develop the
3 or more 0.70 0.6t maximum moment required at the concentrated load
nominal rib height, mm point.
w, average width of concrete rib or haunch as
defined Section 509.1.3c,mm Shear connectors shall have at least 25 mm of lateral
* to qualify as "no decking," stud shear concrete cover, except for connectors installed in the ribs of
connectors shall be welded directly to the steel formed steel decks. The diameter of studs shall not be

greater than 2.5 times the thickness of the flange to which

they are welded, unless located over the web. The minimum 4>b = O.90(LRFD) fib = 1.67(ASD)
center-to-center spacing of stud connectors shall be six
diameters along the longitudinal axis of the supporting I. The nominal strength of the cross section of a composite
composite beam and four diameters transverse to the lon- member subjected to combined axial compression and
gitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam, except that flexure shall be determined using either the plastic
within the ribs of formed steel decks oriented perpendicular stress distribution method or the strain-compatibility
to the steel beam the minimum center-to-center spacing method.
shall be four diameters in any direction. The maximum
center-to-center spacing of shear connectors shall not 2. To account for the influence of length effects on the
exceed eight times the total slab thickness. axial strength of the member, the nominal axial
strength of the member shall be determined by Section
509.4 Flexural Strength of Concrete-Encased and 509.2 with Po taken as the nominal axial strength of
Filled Members the cross section determined in Section 509.4 (I)
above.
The nominal flexural strength of concrete-encased and filled
members shall be determined using one of the following 509.6 Special Cases
methods:
When composite construction does not conform to the
a. The superposition of elastic stresses on the composite requirements of Section 509.1 through Section 509.4, the
section, considering the effects of shoring, for the limit strength of shear connectors and details of construction shall
state of yielding (yield moment), be established by testing.
where
4>b = O.90(LRFD) fib = 1.67(ASD)
b. The plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone,

for the limit state of yielding (plastic moment), where
4>b = O. 90(LRFD) fib = 1.67(ASD)
c. If shear connectors are provided and the concrete

meets the requirements of Section 509.1.2, the
nominal flexural strength shall be computed based upon
the plastic stress distribution on the composite section
or from the strain-compatibility method,
where
4>b = O.85(LRFD) fib = 1. 76(ASD)
509.5 Combined Axial Force and Flexure
The interaction between axial forces and flexure in

composite members shall account for stability as required
by Section 503. The design compressive strength, 4>cP n>
and allowable compressive strength, P nl fie, and the
design flexural strength, 4>bMn, and allowable flexural
strength, Mn/fib, are determined as follows:
4>c = O.75(LRFD) fie = 2. OO(ASD)

SECTION 510 a. An axial tensile force of 50 percent of the required

compressive strength of the member; or
DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
b. The moment and shear resulting from a transverse load
510.1 General Provisions equal to 2 percent of the required compressive strength
of the member. The transverse load shall be applied at the
510.1.1 Design Basis location of the splice exclusive of other loads that act on
the member. The member shall be taken as pinned for the
determination of the shears and moments at the splice.
The design strength, cfJRn, and the allowable strength
Rnl n, of connections shall be determined in accordance User Note: All compression joints should also be
with the provisions of this section and the provisions of
proportioned to resist any tension developed by the load
Section 502 .
combinations stipulated in Section 502.2.
The required strength of the connections shall be determined

510.1.5 Splices in Heavy Sections
by structural analysis for the specified design loads,
consistent with the type of construction specified, or shall be
When tensile forces due to applied tension or flexure are to
a proportion of the required strength of the connected
be transmitted through splices in heavy sections, as defined
members when so specified herein.
in Section 501.3.1.3 and 501.3. lA, by complete joint-
penetration groove (CJP) welds, material notch-toughness
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially loaded
requirements as given in Section 501.3.1.3 and 501.3.1.4,
members do not intersect at one point, the effects of
weld access hole details as given in Section 510.1.6 and
eccentricity shall be considered.
thermal cut surface preparation and inspection requirements
as given in Section 513.2.2 shall apply. The foregoing
510.1.2 Simple Connections provision is not applicable to splices of elements of built-up
shapes that are welded prior to assembling the shape.
Simple connections of beams, girders, or trusses shall be
designed as flexible and are permitted to be proportioned for User Note: CJP groove welded splices of heavy sections
the reaction shears only, except as otherwise indicated in the can exhibit detrimental effects of weld shrinkage. Members
design documents. Flexible beam connections shall that are sized for compression that are also subject to tensile
accommodate end rotations of simple beams. Some inelastic, forces may be less susceptible to damage from shrinkage if
but self-limiting deformation in the connection is permitted they are spliced using PJP groove welds on the flanges and
to accommodate the end rotation of a simple beam. fillet-welded web plates or using bolts for some or all of
the splice.
510.1.3 Moment Connections
510.1.6 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes
End connections of restrained beams, girders, and trusses
shall be designed for the combined effect of forces resulting All weld access holes required to facilitate welding
from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the operations shall have a length from the toe of the weld
connections. Response criteria for moment connections are
preparation not less than 1 ~ times the thickness of the material
provided in Section 502.3.6.2.
in which the hole is made. The height of the access hole shall be
User Note: See Section 503 and Appendix A-7 for analysis 1 ~ times the thickness of the material with the access hole, tw,
2
requirements to establish the required strength and stiffness but not less than 25 mm nor does it need to exceed 50 mm.
for design of connections. The access hole shall be detailed to provide room for weld
backing as needed.
510.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing Joints
For sections that are rolled or welded prior to cutting, the
l. When columns bear on bearing plates or are finished to edge of the web shall be sloped or curved from the surface
bear at splices, there shall be sufficient connectors to of the flange to the reentrant surface of the access hole. In
hold all parts securely in place. hot-rolled shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groove
welds that join the web-to-flange, all beam copes and weld
2. When compression members other than columns are access holes shall be free of notches and sharp reentrant
finished to bear, the splice material and its connectors corners. No arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius
shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be less than 10 mm.
proportioned for either (a) or (b) below. It is permissible
to use the less severe of the two conditions:

In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint-penetration 510.1.10 Limitations on Bolted and Welded
groove welds that join the web-to-flange, all beam copes Connections
and weld access holes shall be free of notches and sharp
reentrant comers. The access hole shall be permitted to Pretensioned joints, slip-critical joints or welds shall be
terminate perpendicular to the flange, providing the weld is used for the following connections:
terminated at least a distance equal to the weld size away
from the access hole. I. Column splices in all multi-story structures over 38 m
in height.
For heavy sections as defined in Section 501.3.1.3 and
Section 501.3.1.4, the thermally cut surfaces of beam copes 2. Connections of all beams and girders to columns and
and weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal and any other beams and girders on which the bracing of
inspected by either magnetic particle or dye penetrant methods columns is dependent in structures over 38 m in height.
prior to deposition of splice welds. If the curved transition
portion of weld access holes and beam copes are formed by 3. In all structures carrying cranes of over 50 kN capacity:
predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or roof truss splices and connections of trusses to
cope need not be ground. Weld access holes and beam copes columns, column splices, column bracing, knee braces,
in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by dye and crane supports.
penetrant or magnetic particle methods.
4. Connections for the support of machinery and other live
510.1.7 Placement of Welds and Bolts loads that produce impact or reversal of load
Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member which Snug-tightened joints or joints with ASTM A307 bolts shall
transmit axial force into that member shall be sized so that be permitted except where otherwise specified.
the center of gravity of the group coincides with the center
of gravity of the member, unless provision is made for the' 510.2 Welds
eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to end
connections of statically loaded single angle, double angle, All provisions of AWS Dl.l apply under this Specification,
and similar members. with the exception that the provisions of the listed NSCP
Specification Sections apply under this Specification in lieu
510.1.8 Bolts in Combination with Welds of the cited A WS provisions as follows:
Bolts shall not be considered as sharing the load in NSCP Structural Steel Section 510.1.6 in lieu of AWS Dl.l
combination with welds, except that shear connections with Section 5.17.1
any grade of bolts permitted by Section 501.3.3 installed in
standard holes or short slots transverse to the direction of the NSCP Structural Steel Section 510.2.2a in lieu of AWS D 1.1
load are permitted to be considered to share the load with Section 2.3.2
longitudinally loaded fillet welds. In such connections the
available strength of the bolts shall not be taken as greater than NSCP Structural Steel Table 510.2.2 in lieu of A WS D 1.1
50 percent of the available strength of bearing-type bolts in Table 2.1
the connection.
NSCP Structural Steel Table 510.2.5 in lieu of A WS D 1.1
In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and Table 2.3
high strength bolts tightened to the requirements for slip-
critical connections are permitted to be utilized for NSCP Structural Steel Appendix A-3, Table A-3.l in lieu of
carrying loads present at the time of alteration and the AWS D 1.'I Table 2.4
welding need only provide the additional required strength.
NSCP Structural Steel Section 502.3.9 and Appendix A-3
510.1.9 High-Strength BoIts in Combination in lieu of AWS D 1.1 Section 2, Part C
with Rivets
NSCP Structural Steel Section 513.2 in lieu of AWS Dl.l
In both new work and alterations, in connections designed Sections 5.15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4
as slip-critical connections in accordance with the
provisions of Section 510.3, high-strength bolts are
permitted to be considered as sharing the load with existing
rivets.

510.2.1 Groove Welds The effective weld size for flare groove welds, when filled
flush to the surface of a round bar, a 900 bend in a formed
510.2.1.1 Effective Area section, or rectangular HSS shall be as shown in Table
510.2.2, unless other effective throats are demonstrated by
The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as tests. The effective size of flare groove welds filled less
the length of the weld times the effective throat thickness. than flush shall be as shown in Table 510.2.2, less the
greatest perpendicular dimension measured from a line flush
The effective throat thickness of a complete-joint- to the base metal surface to the weld surface.
penetration (CJP) groove weld shall be the thickness of the
thinner part joined. Table 510.2.2 Effective Weld Sizes of Flare
Groove Welds
,-------,---
Table 510.2.1 Effective Throat of Partial- Joint-Penetration Welding
Flare Bevel Groove'" Flare V Groove I
Groove Welds Process
Welding Position
F (flat), Groove Type GMAWand 5 3
Welding Process H (horiz.), (AWS D1.I,
Effective
FCAW-G -R -R
Throat 8 4
V (vert.), Figure 3.3)
OH (overhead)
SMAWand 5 5
Shielded Metal Arc FCAW-S -R -R
(SMAW) All
16 8
5 1
J or U Groove SAW -R -R
600V 16 2
Gas Metal Arc (GMAW)
Flux Cored Arc (FCA W) All
Depth of l'lFor Flare Bevel Groove with R < 10 mm use only reinforcing
Groove fillet weld on filled flush joint. General Note: R=radius of joint surface
(can be assumed to be 2t for HSS), mm
--~---------~
J orU Groove
Submerged Arc (SAW)
F 60° Bevel or V Table 510.2.3 Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
Gas Metal Arc (GMA W) Depth of Material Thickness of Thinner Minimum Effective
45°
Flux Cored Arc (FCA W) F,H Groove Part Joined, mm Throat Thickness.P' mm.
Bevel
Depth of To 6 inclusive 3
Shielded Metal Arc 45° Groove
Over 6 to 13 . 5
(SMAW) All Bevel Minus 3
mm Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 to 38 8
Over 38 to 57 10 !
Depth of
45°
Over 57 to 150 13
Gas Metal Arc (GMAW) Groove
Flux Cored Arc (FCA W) V,OH Bevel Minus 3 Over 150 16
mm
l'lSee Table 510.2.1.
Larger effective throat thicknesses than those in Table 510.2.2

The effective throat thickness of a partial-joint-penetration are permitted, provided the fabricator can establish by
(PJP) groove weld shall be as shown in Table 510.2.1. qualification the consistent production of such larger effective
throat thicknesses. Qualification shall consist of sectioning
User Note: The effective throat size of a partial-joint- the weld normal to its axis, at mid-length and terminal ends.
penetration groove weld is dependent on the process used Such sectioning shall be made on a number of combinations
and the weld position. The contract documents should either of material sizes representative of the range to be used in the
indicate the effective throat required or the weld strength fabrication.
required, and the fabricator should detail the joint based on
the weld process and position to be used to weld the joint.

510.2.1.2 Limitations 2. Along edges of material G nun or more in thickness,

no! greater than the thickness of the material minus
'he minimum effective throat thickness of a partial-joint- 2 111m, unless lbe weld is especially designated on the
penetration groove weld shall not he less Ulan the size required drawings lO be built out to blain Cull-throat lhickncs . In
10 transrnir calculated forces nor the size shown in Table the as-Welded condition, the distance between the dgc
510.2.3. Minimum weld size is determined by the thinner of of the base metal and the toe of the weld is permitted to be
the two parts joined. less than 2 mm provided the weld size is clearly
verifiable.
Table 510.2.4 Minimum Size of Fi lIet Welds
The minimum effective length of fillet welds designed on
Material Thickness of Minimum size of Fillet the basis of strength shall be not less than four times the
Thinner Part Joined, mm weld, [aJ mm. nominal size, or else the size of the weld shall be considered
not to exceed ~ of its effective length. If longitudinal fillet
To 6 inclusive 3
5 welds are used alone in end connections of flat-bar tension
Over 6 to 13 members, the length of each fillet weld shall be not less than
Over 13 to 19 6
8 the perpendicular distance between them, For the effect of
Over 19 longitudinal fillet weld length in end connectlons upon the
(')Leg Dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds must be used. effective area of the connected member, see Section 504,3.3.
Note: See Section SJO.2.2b for maximum size of fillet welds.
F01' end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to IDO limes he
510.2.2 Fillet Welds leg dimension, it is permitted to take the effective length
equal to' the actual length. When the length of the end-loaded
510.2.2.1 Effective Area fillet weld exceeds J 00 times the weld size the effective
length shall be determined by multiplying the actual length
The effective area of a Iillet weld shall be the effective length by the reduction factor, p,
multiplied by the effective throat. The effective throat of a
fillet weld shall be the 'shortest distance from the roo: to the p = 1.2 - O.002(L/w) ::; 1.0 (510.2-1)
face of the diagrammatic weld. An increase in effective throa;
is permitted if consistent penetration beyond the root of the where
diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by !eds uslng the L = actual length of end-loaded weld, mm
production process and procedure variables. w = weld leg size, mm
For fillet welds in boles and slots, the ·efrective length

When the length of theweld exceeds 300 times the leg size,
shall be the length of the centerline ef the weld along the
center of the plane through the threat. Tn ,the case of the value of p shall be taken as 0.60.
overlapping fillets the effective area shall not exceed the
nominal cross-sectioual area: of the hole or slot, ill' the plane Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to be used to transfer
of the faying surface. calculated stress across a joint or faying surfaces when the
required strength is less than that developed by a continuous
510.2.2.2 Limitations fillet weld of the smallest permitted size, and to join
components of'built-up members. The effective length of any
segment of intermittent fillet welding shall be not less than
The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not less than the
four times the weld size, with a minimum of38 mm.
size required to transmit calculated forces, nor the size as
shown in Table 510.2.4. These provisions do not apply to
fillet weld reinforcements of partial- or complete-joint- In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be five
penetration groove welds. times the thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less
than 25 mm, Lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to
axial stress that utilize transverse fillet welds only shall be
The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall
fillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except where
be:
the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to
prevent opening of the joint under maximum loading.
1. Along edges of material less than 6 mm thick, not
greater than the thickness of the material.
Fillet weld terminations are permitted to be stopped short or
extend to the ends or sides of parts or be boxed except as
limited by the following:

l. For lap joints in which one connected part extends beyond The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10
an edge of another connected part that is subject to times the thickness of the weld. The width of the slot shall be
calculated tensile stress, fillet welds shall terminate not not less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm
less than the size of the weld from that edge. rounded to the next larger even mm, nor shall it be larger
than 2.!:.times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot
4
2. For connections where flexibility of the outstanding
shall be semicircular or shall have the comers rounded to a
elements is required, when end returns are used, the
radius of not less than the thickness of the part containing it,
length of the return shall not exceed four times the
except those ends which extend to the edge of the part.
nominal size of the weld nor half the width of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction
3. Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners to plate girder
transverse to their length shall be four times the width of the
webs 19 mm thick or less shall end not less than four
slot. The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal
times nor more than six times the thickness of the web
direction on any line shall be two times the length of the slot.
from the web toe of the web-to-flange welds, except
where the ends of stiffeners are welded to the flange.
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm or less in
thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In
4. Fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a common
material over 16 mm thick, the thickness of the weld shall be
plane shall be interrupted at the comer common to both
at least one-half the thickness of the material but not less
welds.
than 16 mm.
User Note: Fillet weld terminations should be located

510.2.4 Strength
approximately one weld size from of the edge of the
connection to minimize notches in the base metal. Fillet
The design strength, CPRn, and the allowable strength,
welds terminated at the end of the joint, other than those
connecting stiffeners to girder webs, are not a cause for Rn/!l, of welds shall be the lower value of the base material
correction. and the weld metal strength determined according to the limit
states of tensile rupture, shear rupture or yielding as
Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be used to follows:
transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or
separation oflapped parts and to join components of built-up For the base metal
members. Such fillet welds may overlap, subject to the
provisions of Section 510.2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are (510.2-2)
not to be considered plug or slot welds.
For the weld metal
510.2.3 Plug and Slot Welds
(510.2-3)
510.2.3.1 Effective Area
where
The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be
F BM = nominal strength of the base metal per unit area,
considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or
MPa
slot in the plane of the faying surface.
Fw = nominal strength of the weld metal per unit area,
MPa
510.2.3.2 Limitations
ABM= cross-sectional area of the base metal,
mrn '
Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear
Aw effective area of the weld, mrrr'
in lap joints or to prevent buckling oflapped parts and to join
component parts of built-up members.
The values of cP, !l,F BM, F wand limitations thereon are
The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not be less given in Table 510.2.5.
than the thickness of the part containing it plus 8 mm, rounded
to the next larger even mm, nor greater than the minimum Alternatively, for fillet welds loaded in-plane the design
strength, CPRn and the allowable strength, Rn/!l, of welds
diameter plus 3 mm or 2 .!:.times the thickness of the weld.
4 is permitted to be determined as follows:
The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall

be four times the diameter of the hole. .
cP = 0.75 (LRFD) !l = 2. 00 (ASD)

1. For a linear weld group loaded in-plane through the 1_ For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded and
center of gravity consisting of elements that are oriented both
longitudinally and transversely to the direction of
(510.2-4) applied load, the combined strength, Rn, of the fillet
weld group shall be determined as the greater of
where
(510.2-9a)
Fw = 0.60FEXX(1.0+0.50sinl.56) (510.2-5)
or
and e; = O. 85Rwl + 1. 5Rwt (510.2-9b)
FEXX electrode classification number, MPa where

6 angle of loading measured from the weld
longitudinal axis, degrees Rwl the total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded
effective area of the weld, mm ' fillet welds, as determined in accordance with
Table 510.2.5, N
User Note: A linear weld group is one in which all elements Rwt the total nominal strength of transversely loaded
are in a line or are parallel. fillet welds, as determined in accordance with
Table 510.2.5 without the alternate in Section
2. For weld elements within a weld group that are loaded 510.2.4(1), N
in-plane and analyzed using an instantaneous center of
rotation method, the components of the nominal 510.2.5 Combination of Welds
strength, Rnx and Rny, are permitted to be
determined as follows: If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet,
plug, slot) are combined in a single joint, the strength of each
(510.2-6) shall be separately computed with reference to the axis of the
group in order to determine the strength of the combination.
where
AWi = effective area of weld throat of any

ith weld element, mnr'
F wi = O.60F Exx(l. 0 + 0.50 sin 1. 56)f(p) (510.2-7)
fCp) = [pCl.9 - O. 9p)]O.3 (510.2-8)
F wi nominal stress in any ith weld element, MPa
F wix X component of
,Fwi
Fwiy Y component of stress, FWi
p Ild Ilm' ratio of element i deformation to its
deformation at maximum stress
W weld leg size, mm
rcrit distance from instantaneous center of rotation to
weld element with minimum Ilulri ratio, mm
Ili deformation of weld elements at intermediate
stress levels, linearly proportioned to the
critical deformation based on distance
from the instantaneous center of rotation, ri,
mm
ri /lui rcrit
Ilm 0.209(6 + 2)-O.32w, deformation of weld
element at maximum stress, mm
Ilu 1. 087(6)-O.65w :5 0.17w, deformation of
weld element at ultimate stress (fracture), usually
in element furthest from instantaneous center of
rotation, mm

510.2.6 Filler Metal Requirements
The choice of electrode for use with complete-joint-

penetration groove welds subject to tension normal to the
effective area shall comply with the requirements for
matching filler metals given in AWS Dl.l/D.lM.
User Note: The following User Note Table summarizes

the AWS D 1. 1 provision for matching filler metals. Other
restrictions exist. For a complete list of base metals and
prequalified matching filler metals see AWS Dl.lID.lM,
Table 3.1.
Base Metal Matching Filler Metal
A36 s ~in. thick 60 & 70 ksi Electrodes
A36 > ~ in. AS72 (Gr. SO&SS) SMAW: E701S, E7016, E7018,
A913 (Gr. SO) E7028
AS88* A992 Other processes: 70 ksi
AIDII AID18 electrodes
A91 3 (Gr. 60 & 6S) 80 ksi electrodes
* For corrosion resistance and color similar to the base see A WS

DU, Section 3.7.3
.
Notes:
I. Filler metal shall meet the requirements of AWS AS.!, AS.5

AS.l7, AS.! 8, AS.20, AS.23, A5.28 and AS.29.
2. In joints with base metals of different strengths use either a filler

metal that matches the higher strength base metal or a filler metal
that matches the lower strength and produces a low hydrogen
deposit.

Table 510.2.5 Available Strength of Welded Joints, N
Load Type and Nominal Effective

Direction Pertinent Strength Area Required
Relative to Metal 4J and n (FBM or Fw) (ABM orAw)
Fi11erMetal
Strength Level[fi][b]
Weld Axis N mrrr'
COMPLETE-JOINT -PENETRA nON GROOVE WELDS
Matching filler
metal shall
be used. For T and
Tension comer joints with
Normal to weld Strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal backing left in
axis place, notch tough
filler metal is
required. See
Section 510.2.6.
Filler metal with a
strength
level equal to or
Compression one
Strength of the joint is controlled
Normal to weld strength level less
by the base metal
axis than
matching filler
metal is
permitted.
Filler metal with a
strength
Tension or
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel level equal to or
Compression
to a weld need not be considered in design of less than
Parallel to weld
welds joining the parts. matching filler
axis
metal is
l2ermitted.
Strength of the joint is controlled . Matching filler
Shear metal shall
by the base metal be used.[c]

Table 510.2.5 Available Strength of Welded Joints, N (continuation)
Load Type and Nominal Effective

Required
Direction Pertinent Strength Area
cp and n Filler Metal
Relative to Metal (F BM or Fw) (ABM or Aw) Strength Level[a][b]
2
Weld Axis N mm
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING FLARE VEE GROOVE
AND FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS
Base
cp = 0.90
Fy See Section 51004
Tension n = 1.67
Normal to weld axis
Weld
cp = 0.80 O.60FEXX See Section 510.2.1 a
n = 1.88
Compression
Column to base
Plate and column Compressive stress need not be considered in design of welds joining the parts.
splices designed per
Section 510.104(1)
Compression cp = 0.90
Connections of Base Fy See Section 51004
members designed n = 1.67 Filler metal with a
to bear other
than columns as cp = 0.80 strength
described in Weld O.60F EXX
See Section 510.2.1a level equal to or
Section 510.1.4(2) n = 1.88 less than
matching filler
Compression Base
cp = 0.90 Fy See Section 51004 metal is
Connections not
n = 1.67 permitted
finished-to-bear Weld
cp = 0.80 O.90FEXX See Section 51O.2.1a
n = 1.88
Tension or
Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to a weld need not be considered
Compression
in design of welds joining the parts.
Parallel to weld axis
Base Governed by Section 51004
Shear
Weld
cp = 0.75
O.60FEXX See Section 510.2.2a
n = 2.00
PLUG AND SLOT WELDS
Base Governed by 51004
Shear
Weld
cp = 0.75
O.60FEXX See Section 510.2.3a
n = 2.00
(a) For matching weld metal see AWS D1 .1, Section 3.3.
(b) Filler metal with a strength level one strength level greater than matching is permitted.
(c) Filler metals with a strength level less than matching may be used for groove welds between the webs and flanges of built-up sections transferring
shear loads, or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld joint shall be detailed and the weld shall be designed
using the thickness of the material as the effective throat, cp= =
0.80, n 1.88 and O. 60F EXX as the nominal strength
(d) Alternatively, the provisions of Section 510.204(1) are permitted provided the deformation compatibility of the various weld elements is considered.
Alternatively, Sections 510.204(2) and 510.204(3) are special applications of Section 510.204(1) that provide for deformation compatibility

Filler metal with a specified Charpy V-Notch (CVN) Except as permitted below, installation shall be assured by
toughness of 27 J at 4 DC shall be used in the following any of the following methods: tum-of-nut method, a direct
joints: tension indicator, calibrated wrench or alternative design
bolt.
1. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded T and
comer joints with steel backing left in place, subject to Bolts are permitted to be installed to only the snug-tight
tension normal to the effective area, unless the joints condition when used in
are designed using the nominal strength and resistance
factor or safety factor as applicable for a partial-joint- 1. bearing-type connections.
penetration groove weld.
2. tension or combined shear and tension applications, for
2. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded splices ASTM A325 or A325M bolts only, where loosening or
subject to tension normal to the effective area in heavy fatiguedue to vibration or load fluctuations are not design
sections as defined in Section 501.3 .1.3 and 501.3 .1A. considerations.
The manufacturer's Certificate of Conformance shall be The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness attained
sufficient evidence of compliance. by either a fe\ impacts of an impact wrench or the full
effort 0 f a worker w ith an ordinary spud wrench that brings
510.2.7 Mixed Weld Metal the connected plies into firm contact. Bolts to be tightened
only to the snug-tight condition shall be clearly identified
When Charpy V-Notch toughness is specified, the process on the design and erection drawings.
consumables for all weld metal, tack welds, root pass and
subsequent passes deposited in a joint shall be compatible to When ASTM A490 or A490M bolts over 25 mm in diameter
ensure notch-tough composite weld metal. are used in slotted or oversized holes in external plies, a
single hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436, except
510.3 Bolts and Threaded Parts with 8 mm minimum thickness, shall be used in lieu of the
standard washer.
510.3.1 High-Strength Bolts
User Note: Washer requirements are provided in the RCSC
Use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the provisions of Specification, Section 6.
the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325
or A490 Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC
Specification, as approved by the Research Council on
Structural Connections, except as otherwise provided in this
Specification.
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent

to the washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale.
All ASTM A325 or A325M and A490 or A490M bolts shall
be tightened to a bolt tension not less than that given in
Table 510.3.1, except as noted below.
Table 510.3.1 Minimum Bolt Pretension, kN*

Bolt Size, mm A325M Bolts A490MBoits
M16 91 114
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
M24 205 257
M27 267 334
M30 326 408
MJ6 475 595
-Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts, rounded off to
nearest kN, as specified in ASTM specifications for A325M and A490M
bolts with UNC threads.

Table 510.3.2 Nominal Stress of Fasteners and In slip-critical connections in which the direction of loading
Threaded Parts, MPa is toward an edge of a connected part, adequate available
bearing strength shall be provided based upon the applicable
requirements of Section 51OJ.l O.
Nominal Shear
Nominal
Stress in
Tensile When bolt requirements cannot be provided by ASTM A325
Description of Fasteners Bearing-Type
Stress, Fnt, and A325M, F1852, or A490 and A490M bolts because of
Connections, Fnv,
MPa requirements for lengths exceeding 12 diameters or diameters
MPa
exceeding 38 mm, bolts or threaded rods conforming to
ASTM A354 Or. BC, A354 Or. BD, or A449 are permitted
A307 bolts 310[a][b] 165 [b][c][t]
to be used in accordance with the provisions for threaded
rods in Table 510.3.2.
A325 or A325M bolts, when
threads are not excluded 620[e] 372[t]
When ASTM A354 Or. BC, A354 Or. BD, or A449 bolts
from shear planes
and threaded rods are used in slip-critical connections, the
A325 or A325M bolts, when bolt geometry including the head and nut(s) shall be equal
threads are excluded from to or (if larger in diameter) proportional to that provided by
620[e] 457[t]
ASTM A325 and A325M, or ASTM A490 and A490M
shear planes
bolts. Installation shall comply with all applicable
A490 or A490M bolts, when requirements of the RCSC Specification with modifications as
threads are not excluded 780[e] 457[t]
required for the increased diameter and/ or length to provide
from shear planes the design pretension.
A490 or A490M bolts, when 510.3.2. Size and Use of Holes

780[e]
threads are excluded from 579[t]
shear planes The maximum sizes of holes for bolts are given in
Table 510.3.3, except that larger holes, required for tolerance
[Threaded parts meeting the on location of anchor rods in concrete foundations, are
requirements of Sectior permitted in column base details.
501.3.4, when threads an O.75FJa][d] 0.450Fu
not excluded from shea Table 510.3.3 Nominal Hole Dimensions, mm
planes
Hole Dimensions
[Threaded parts meeting the Bolt

Diameter Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
requirements of Section 0.75F:[a][d] (Dia) (Width x Length) (Width xLength)
u O.563Fu (Dia)
~01.3.4, when threads are
!excluded from shear planes MI6 18 20 18 x 22 18 x40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
II] Subject to the requirements of Appendix A-3 M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
M24 27(a) 30 27 x 32 27 x60
[b] For A307 bolts the tabulated values shall be reduced by I percent fo M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
each 2 mm over 5 diameters of length in the grip M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
:::M36 d+3 d+ 8 (d+3)x(d+ 10) (d+ 3)x 2.5 d
(e] Threads permitted in shear planes
[dJ The nominal tensile strength of the threaded portion of an upset rod 0) Clearance provided allows the use of a M30 bolt if desirable.
based upon the cross-sectional area at its major thread diameter, Ao•
which shall be larger than the nominal body area of the rod before
upsetting times F y Standard holes or short-slotted holes transverse to the
direction of the load shall be provided in accordance with
(e] For A325 or A325M and A490 or A490M bolts subject to tensile
fatigue loading, see Appendix A-3 the provisions of this specification, unless oversized holes,
short-slotted holes parallel to the load or long-slotted holes
[f] When bearing-type connections used to splice tension members have
a fastener pattern whose length, measured parallel to the line of fbrcc,
are approved by the engineer-of-record. Finger shims up to
exceeds 1270 mm, tabulated values shall be reduced by 20 percent 6 mm are permitted in slip-critical connections designed on
the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal
shear strength of the fastener to that specified for slotted
holes.

Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip- Table 510.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance,[a] mm, from
critical connections, but they shall not be used in bearing- Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of Connected Part
type connections. Hardened washers shall be installed over
At Rolled Edges of
oversized holes in an outer ply.
Bolt Diameter Plates, Shapes or
At Sheared Edges
(mm) Bars, or Thermally
Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip- Cut Ed es"·l
critical or bearing-type connections. The slots are permitted 16 28 22
without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical 20 34 26
connections, but the length shall be normal to the direction 22 38 28
of the load in bearing-type connections. Washers shall be 24 42 30
installed over short-slotted holes in an outer ply; when high- 27 48 34
strength bolts are used, such washers shall be hardened.
30 52 38
36 64 46
Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the
Over 36 l.75d 1.25d
connected parts of either a slip-critical or bearing-type
connection at an individual faying surface. Long-slotted holes I., Lesser edge distances are permitted to be used provided provisions of Section
510.3.10. as appropriate. are satisfied.
are permitted without regard to direction of loading in slip-
1'1 For oversized or slotted holes, see Table 510.3.5
critical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of
load in bearing-type connections. Where long-slotted holes 1'1 All edge distances in this column are permitted to be reduced 3 mrn when the hole
is at a point where required strength does not exceed 25 percent of the maximum
are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a continuous bar strength in the element.
with standard holes, having a size sufficient to completely
I~I These are permitted to be 32 mrn at the ends of beam connection angles and shear
cover the slot after installation, shall be provided. In high- end Inloli.
strength bolted connections, such plate washers or continuous
bars shall be not less than 8 mm thick and shall be of structural Table 510.3.5 Values of Edge Distance Increment C2,mm
grade material, but need not be hardened. If hardened washers
Nominal Long Axis Perpendicular to
are required for use of high-strength bolts, the hardened Long Axis
Diameter of Oversized Ed
washers shall be placed over the outer surface of the plate
washer or bar.
Fastener
(nUll)
Holes Short
Slots
.La;,
Sio '1
Parallel to
Edge
522 2 3
510.3.3 Minimum Spacing 24 3 J 0.75d 0
"2.27 3 5
The distance between centers of standard, oversized, or 1'1 When length of slot is less than maximum allowable (see Table 510.3.3),
C2 is permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the
slotted holes, shall not be less than 2 ~ times the nominal maximum and actual slot lengths.
3
diameter, d, ofthe fastener; a distance of 3d is preferred.
510.3.5 Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance
510.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance
The maximum distance from the center of any bolt or rivet
The distance from the center of a standard hole to an
to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the
edge of a connected part in any direction shall not be less
thickness ofthe connected part under consideration, but shall
than either the applicable value from Table 510.3.4, or as
not exceed 150 mm. The longitudinal spacing of fasteners
required in Section 510.3.10. The distance from the center
between elements in continuous contact consisting of a plate
of an oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected
and a shape or two plates shall be as follows:
part shall be not less than that required for a standard hole to
an edge of a connected part plus the applicable increment
1. For painted members or unpainted members not subject to
C2 from Table 510.3.5. corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 24 times the
thickness of the thinner plate or 300 mm.
User .Note: The edge di_stliuces in Tables 51O~3.4 are
minimum edge distanees based on standard fabrication 2. For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to
practices· ana wO~'klllanshjl) tolerancei The appropriate atmospheric COJ1'OSiOD, the spacing shall not exceed 14
provisiens of Sectiens 510,3110 and 510".4 must be times the thickness of the thinner plate or 180 mm.
satisfied.

510.3.6 Tension and Shear Strength of Bolts User Note: Note that when the required stress, f, in
and Threaded Parts either shear or tension, is less than or equal to 30% of the
corresponding available stress, the effects of combined stress
The design tension or shear strength, 4JRn, and the allowable need not be investigated. Also note that Eqs. 51 0.3-3a and
tension or shear strength, Rn/n of a snug-tightened or 510.3-3b can be rewritten so as to find a nominal shear
pretensioned high-strength bolt or threaded part shall be stress, F~v' as a function of the required tensile stress, ft.
determined according to the limit states of tensile rupture and
shear rupture as follows: 510.3.8 High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical
Connections
(510.3-1)
High-strength bolts in slip-critical connections are permitted
4J = 0.75 (LRFD) n= 2.00 (ASD) to be designed to prevent slip either as a serviceability limit
state or at the required strength limit state. The connection
where must also be checked for shear strength in accordance with
Fn nominal tensile stress F nt- or shear stress, F nv from Sections 510.3.6 and 510.3.7 and bearing strength in
Table 510.3.2,MPa accordance with Sections 510.3.1 and 510.3.10.
Ab nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded
Slip-critical connections shall be designed as follows, unless
part (for upset rods, see footnote d, Table 510.3.2),
mm/ otherwise designated by the engineer- of- record. Connections
with standard holes or slots transverse to the direction of the
load shall be designed for slip as a serviceability limit
The required tensile strength shall include any tension
state. Connections with oversized holes or slots parallel to
resulting from prying action produced by deformation of the
the direction of the load shall be designed to prevent slip at
connected parts.
the required strength level.
510.3.7 Combined Tension and Shear in
Bearing- Type Connections The design slip resistance, 4JRn, and the allowable slip
.1
resistance, Rnl n, shall be determined for the limit state of
slip as follows:
II
The available tensile strength of a bolt subjected to I
combined tension and shear shall be determined according to (510.3-4)
the limit states of tension and shear rupture as follows:
For connections in which prevention of slip is a
(510.3-2) serviceability limit state
II
4J = O.7S(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD) 4J = 1.00(LRFD) n= 1. SO(ASD)
I
where
I
For connections designed to prevent slip at the required
F~t = nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects strength level
of shearing stress, MPa n=
4J = O.8S(LRFD) 1.76(ASD)
where
, Fnt )
Fnt = 1. sr.; - ""F fv s Fnt (LRFD
Il mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as
.." nv
applicable, or as established by tests
(510.3-3a)
:::::0.35 for Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill
scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A coatings
on blast-cleaned steel and hot-dipped galvanized and
roughened surfaces)
(51 0.3-3b)
= 0.50 for Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned
steel surfaces or surfaces with Class B coatings on
Fnt nominal tensile stress from Table 510.3.2, MPa blast-cleaned steel)
F nv nominal shear stress from Table 510.3.2, MPa Du 1.13; a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean
installed bolt pretension to the specified minimum
f 17 the required shear stress, MPa
bolt pretension. The use of other values may be
approved by the engineer-of-record.
The available shear stress of the fastener shall equal or exceed
the required shear strength per unit area, f v-

hole factor determined as follows: a. when deformation at the bolt hole at service load is
(a) For standard size holes «; = 1.00 a design consideration
(b) For oversized and hsc =
0.85
(510.3-6a)
short-slotted holes
(c) For long-slotted holes hsc =
0.70
number of slip planes b. when deformation at the bolt hole at service load is
not a design consideration
minimum fastener tension given in Table 510.3.1,
kN
(510.3-6b)
User Note: There are special cases where, with oversize
holes and slots parallel to the load, the movement possible 2. For a bolt in a connection with long-slotted holes with
due to connection slip could cause a structural failure. the slot perpendicular to the direction of force:
Resistance and safety factors are provided for connections
where slip is prevented until the required strength load is (510.3-6c)
reached.
3. For connections made using bolts that pass completely
Design loads are used for either design method and all through an unstiffened box member or HSS, see Section
connections must be checked for strength as bearing-type 510.7 and Eq. 510.7-1,
connections.
where
510.3.9 Combined Tension and Shear in Slip- d ee nominal bolt diameter, mm

Critical Connections Fu specified minimum tensile strength of the
connected material, MPa
When a slip-critical connection is subjected to an applied Lc clear distance, in the direction of the force,
tension that reduces the net clamping force, the available between the edge of the hole and the edge of the
slip resistance per bolt, from Section 510.3.8, shall be adjacent hole or edge of the material, mm
multiplied by the factor, ks' as follows: t thickness of connected material, mm
For connections, the bearing resistance shall be taken as the

(510.3-5a) sum of the bearing resistances of the individual bolts.
Bearing strength shall be checked for both bearing-type

1.5Tu
k, = 1 - D T N (ASD) (51 0.3-5b) and slip-critical connections. The use of evensized holes
u b b and 5110rl- and long-slotted holes parallel to' the Iine of
where force is restricted to sllp-critica I connections per Section
510.3.2.
number of bolts carrying the applied tension
tension force due to ASD load combinations, kN 510.3.11 Special Fasteners
minimum fastener tension given in Table 510.3.1,
kN. The nominal strength of special fasteners other than the
tension force due to LRFD load combinations, kN bolts presented in Table 510.3.2 shall be verified by tests.
510.3.10 Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes 510.3.12 Tension Fasteners
The available bearing strength, lfJRn and Rn/U, at bolt When bolts or other fasteners in tension are attached to an
holes shall be determined for the limit state of bearing as unstiffened box or HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall
follows: be determined by rational analysis.
= 2. OO(ASD) 510.4 Affected Elements of Members and Connecting

lfJ = 0.75(LRFD) U
Elements
1. For a bolt in a connection with standard, oversized, and
This section applies to elements of members at connections
short-slotted holes, independent of the direction of
loading, or a long-slotted hole with the slot parallel and connecting elements, such as plates, gussets, angles,
and brackets.
to the direction of the bearing force:

510.4.1 Strength of Elements in Tension
(510.4-5)
The design strength, cfJRn, and the allowable strength,
Rn/n., of affected and connecting elements loaded in
tension shall be the lower value obtained according to the
cfJ = O.75(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD)
limit states of tensile yielding and tensile rupture. where
gross area subject to shear, mrrr'
1. For tensile yielding of connecting elements:
net area subject to tension, mrrr'
net area subject to shear, mrrr'
cfJ = O.75(LRFD) n. = 1.67(ASD) Where the tension stress is uniform, U bs = 1; where the
tension stress is nonuniform, U bs O. 5. =
2. For tensile rupture of connecting elements:
User Note: The cases where U bs must be taken equal to
(510.4-2) 0.5
cfJ = O.75(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD) 510.4.4 Strength of Elements in Compression
where The available strength of connecting elements in

compression for the limit states of yielding and buckling
Ae = effective net area as defined in Section 504.3.3, shall be determined as follows.
mm/; for bolted splice plates,
For KLlr::::; 25
(510.4-6)
510.4.2 Strength of Elements in Shear
The available shear yield strength of affected and connecting

cfJ = O.90(LRFD) n= 1.67(ASD)
elements in shear shall be the lower value obtained according
For KLlr::::; 25 the provisions of Section 505 apply.
to the limit states of shear yielding and shear rupture:
1. For shear yielding of the element: 510.5 Fillers
In welded construction, any filler 6 mm or more in thickness

u; = O.60FyAg (510.4-3)
shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate and shall be
welded to the part on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to
cfJ = 1.00(LRFD) n. = 1. 50(ASD) transmit the splice plate load, applied at the surface of the
filler. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be
2. For shear rupture of the element: sufficient to transmit the splice plate load and shall be long
enough to avoid overloading the filler along the toe of the
II
n; = O.6FuAnv (510.4-4) weld. Any filler less than 6 mm thick shall have its edges
made flush with the edges of the splice plate and the weld I
cfJ = O.75(LRFD) n. = 2. OO(ASD) size shall be the sum of the size necessary to carry the splice
plus the thickness of the filler plate.
where
When a bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are
A-net area subiect to shear, mnr' equal to or less than 6 mm thick, the shear strength shall be
nv - J
used without reduction. When a bolt that carries load passes
through fillers that are greater than 6 mm thick, one of the
510.4.3 Block Shear Strength
following requirements shall apply:
The available strength for the limit state of block shear
I. For fillers that are equal to or less than 20 mm thick,
rupture along a shear failure path or path(s) and a
the shear strength of the bolts shall be multiplied by the
perpendicular tension failure path shall be taken as
factor [1 - 0.01S4(t - 6)], where t is the total
thickness of the fillers up to 20 mm

2. The fillers shall be extended beyond the joint and the lb = length of bearing, mm
filler extension shall be secured with enough bolts to
uniformly distribute the total force in the connected 510.8 Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete
element over the combined cross section of the connected
element and the fillers; Proper provision shall be made to transfer the column loads
and moments to the footings and foundations.
3. The size of the joint shall be increased to
accommodate a number of bolts that is equivalent to In the absence of code regulations, the design bearing
the total number required in (2) above; or
strength, cfJcP p, and the allowable bearing strength,
4. The joint shall be designed to prevent slip at required P pi !lc' for the limit state of concrete crushing are
strength levels in accordance with Section 510.3.8. permitted to be taken as follows:
510.6 Splices cfJc = 0.65(LRFD) n, = 2. 31(ASD)

Groove-welded splices in plate girders and beams shall The nominal bearing strength, P p' is determined as follows:
develop the nominal strength of the smaller spliced section.
Other types of splices in cross sections of plate girders and I. On the full area of a concrete support:
beams shall develop the strength required by tile forces at the
point of the splice. (510.8-1)
510.7 Bearing Strength

2. On less than the full area of a concrete support:
The design bearing strength, cfJRn, and the allowable (510.8-2)

bearing strength, Rn/!l, of surfaces in contact shall be
determined for the limit state. of bearing (local compressive
yielding) as follows: where
cfJ = O. 75(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD) area of teel concentricalty beal"ing Oil a concrete

support, mm2
maximum area of the portion of the supporting
The nominal bearing strength, Rm is defined as follows for
surface that is geometrically similar to and
the various types of bearing:
concentric with the loaded area, mnr'
7?? .
1. For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, or bored f~ =
holes, and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners:
510.9 Anchor Rods and Embedments
(510.7-1)
Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the required
where resistance to loads on the completed structure at the base of
columns including the net tensile components of any bending
Fy specified minimum yield stress, MPa moment that may resull from load combinarions stipulated in
Apb projected bearing area, mrrr' Section 502.2. The anchor rods shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements for threaded parts in
2. For expansion rollers and rockers Table 510.3.2.
a. When a « 635 mm Larger oversized and slotted holes are permitted in base
plates when adequate bearing is provided for the nut by
using ASTM F844 washers or plate washers.
(510.7-2)
User Note: The permitted hole sizes and corresponding
b. When d > 635 mm washer dimensions are given in the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction
Rn = 30.2(Fy - 90) 'bv'd/20 (510.7-3)
where
d = diameter, mm

When horizontal forces are present at column bases, these If the length of loading across the member flange is less
forces should, where possible, be resisted by bearing against than O.lSbf, where bf is the member flange width,
concrete elements or by shear friction between the column Eq. 510.10-1 need not be checked.
base plate and the foundation. When anchor rods are designed
to resist horizontal force the base plate hole size, the anchor When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a
rod setting tolerance, and the horizontal movement of the
distance from the member end that is less than 10tf, Rn,
column shall be considered in the design.
shall be reduced by 50 percent.
User Note: See Chapter 4 for embedment design and for
When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall be
shear friction design. See OSHA for special erection
requirements for anchor rods. provided.
510.10 Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces 510.10.2 Web Local Yielding
This section applies to single-concentrated forces and both

This section applies to single-and double-
components of double-concentrated forces.
concentrated force applied normal to the flange(s) of
wide flange sections and similar built-up shapes. A single-
concentrated force can be either tensile or compressive. The available strength for the limit state of web local yielding
Double-concentrated forces are one tensile and one shall be determined as follows:
compressive and form a couple on the same side of the
loaded member. cfJ = 1.00(LRFD) !l = 1.S0(ASD)
When the required strength exceeds the available strength as The nominal strength, Rno shall be determined as follows:
determined for the limit states listed in this section, stiffeners
and/or doublers shall be provided and shall be sized for the J. When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at
difference between the required strength and the available a distance from the member end that is greater than the
strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners shall also meet depth of the member d.
the design requirements in Section 510.10.8. Doublers shall
also meet the design requirement in Section 510.10.9. (510.10-2)
User Note: See Appendix A-6.3 for requirements for the 2. When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at
ends of cantilever members. a distance from the member end that is less than or
equal to the depth of the member d.
Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams In
accordance with the requirements of Section 510.10.7.
(510.10-3)
510.10.1 Flange Local Bending where
This section applies to tensile single-concentrated forces k distance from outer face of the flange to the web
and the tensile component of double-concentrated forces. toe of the fillet, mm
specified minimum yield stress of the web, MPa
The design strength, cfJRn, and the allowable strength, length of bearing (not less than k for end beam
Rn/!l, for the limit state of flange local bending shall be reactions), mm
determined as follows: web thickness, mm
(510.1 0-1) When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler

plate shall be provided.
cfJ = O. 90(LRFD) !l = 1.67(ASD)
where
F yf specified minimum yield stress of the flange, MPa
tf thickness of the loaded flange, mm

510.10.3 Web Local Crippling 510.10.4 Web Sidesway Buckling
This section applies to compressive single-concentrated This section applies only to compressive single-concentrated
forces or the compressive component of double- forces applied to members where relative lateral movement
concentrated forces. between the loaded compression flange and the tension
flange is not restrained at the point of application of the
The available strength for the limit state of web local concentrated force.
crippling shall be determined as follows:
The available strength of the web shall be determined as
4> = 0.75(LRFD) n= 2. OO(ASD) follows:
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as follows: 4> = 0.85(LRFD) .n = 1.76(ASD)
'I. When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted The nominal strength, Rm for the limit state of web
is applied at a distance from the member end that is sidesway buckling shall be determined as follows:
greater than or equal to d/2:
1. If the compression flange is restrained against rotation:
n; = O. 80t~[1 + 3 e)(:;)15] tFet, a. For (h/tw)f(l/bf) s 2.3
(510.1 0-4)
2. When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted

is applied at a distance from the member end that is less
b. For (h/tw)/(l/b,) > 2.3, the limit
than d/2:
state of web sidesway buckling does not
apply.
a. For N/d < 0.2
When the required strength of the web exceeds the available
n; = O. 40t~[ 1 +3 (:) (:; f] JEF;:t, strength, local lateral bracing shall be provided at the
tension flange or either a pair of transverse stiffeners or a
doubler plate shall be provided.
(510.10-5a)
2. If the compression flange is not restrained against
b. For N/d > 0.2 rotation:
a. For
(510.10-7)
(51O.1O-5b)
where
overall depth of the member, mm b. For (h/tw)f(l/bf) > 1.7, the limit
flange thickness, mm state of web sidesway buckling does not apply.
When required, a transverse stiffener, or pair of transverse When the required strength of the web exceeds the available
stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending at least one-half the strength, local lateral bracing shall be provided at both flanges
depth of the web shall be provided. at the point of application of the concentrated forces.

In Eqs. 510.10-6 and 510.10-7, the following definitions The nominal strength, Rn shall be determined as follows:
apply:
1. When the effect of panel-zone deformation on frame
flange width, mm stability is not considered in the analysis:
6.62 X 106 MPa when Mu < My (LRFD) or
1. SMa < My (ASD) at the location of the force a. For r;« O.4Pc
3.31 x 106 MPa when Mu ;:::My (LRFD) or
(510.10-9)
1. SMa;::: My (ASD) at the location of the force
h clear distance between flanges less the fillet or
comer radius for rolled shapes; distance between
b. For r;» O.4Pc
adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance
between flanges when welds are used for built-up
shapes, mm.
1 largest laterally unbraced length along either flange
at the point of load, mm (510.1-10)
flange thickness, mm , I
web thickness, mm 2. When frame stability, including plastic panel-zone

deformation, is considered in the analysis:
User Note: For determination of adequate restraint, refer to
Appendix A-6. a. For r;« O.7SPc
510.10.5 Web Compression BuckJing 3bcft~f)

u; = O. 60F ydctw (1 + dbdctw
This section applies to a pair of compressive single-
(510.10-11)
concentrated forces or the compressive components in a pair of
double-concentrated forces, applied at both flanges of a
member at the same location.
The available strength for the limit state of web local buckling
(510.1-12)
In Eqs. 510.10-9 through 510.10-12, the following

(510.1 0-8)
definitions apply:
4> = O.90(LRFD) n= 1.67(ASD) column cross-sectional area, mm/

width of column flange, mm
When the pair of concentrated compressive forces to be beam depth, mm
resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is column depth, mm
less than d/2, Rn shall be reduced by 50 percent. specified minimum yield stress of the column web,
MPa
When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair of Py, N (LRFD)
transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending the full
O.6Py, N (ASD)
depth of the web shall be provided.
required strength, N
510.10.6 Web Panel Zone Shear F yA, axial yield strength of the column, N
thickness of the column flange, mm
This section applies to double-concentrated forces applied tw column web thickness, mm
to one or both flanges of a member at the same location.
The available strength of the web panel zone for the limit state When required, doubler plate(s) or a pair of diagonal stiffeners
of shear yielding shall be determined as follows: shall be provided within the boundaries the rigid connection
whose webs lie in a common plane.
4> = O.90(LRFD) n= 1.67(ASD)
See Section 510.10.9 for doubler plate design requirements.

510.10.7 Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders 3. Transverse stiffeners shall extend a minimum of one-
half the depth of the member except as required in
At unframed ends of beams and girders not otherwise Sections 510.10.5 and 510.10.7.
restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axes, a
pair of transverse stiffeners, extending the full depth of the 510.10.9 Additional Doubler Plate for
web, shall be provided. Concentrated Forces
510.10.8 Additional Stiffener Requirements for Doubler plates required for compression strength shall be
Concentrated Forces designed in accordance with the requirements of Section
505.
Stiffeners required to resist tensile concentrated forces shall
Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be designed
be designed in accordance with the requirements of
in accordance with the requirements of Section 504.
Section 504 and welded to the loaded flange and the web.
The welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference Doubler plates required for shear strength (see Section
between the required strength and available limit state 510.10.6) shall be designed in accordance with the
strength. The stiffener to web welds shall be sized to transfer provisions of Section 507.
to the web the algebraic difference in tensile force at the
ends of the stiffener. In addition, doubler plates shall comply with the following
criteria:
Stiffeners required to resist compressive concentrated forces
shall be designed in accordance with the requirements in 1. The thickness and extent of the doubler plate shall
Sections 505.6.2 and 510.4.4 and shall either bear on or be provide the additional material necessary to equal or
welded to the loaded flange and welded to the web. The exceed the strength requirements.
welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference between
the required strength and the applicable limit state strength. 2. The doubler plate shall be welded to develop the
The weld to the web shall be sized to transfer to the web the proportion of the total force transmitted to the doubler
algebraic difference in compression force at the ends of the plate.
stiffener. For fitted bearing stiffeners, see Section 510.7.
Transverse full depth bearing stiffeners for compressive

forces applied to a beam or plate girder flange(s) shall be
designed as axially compressed members (columns) in
accordance with the requirements of Sections 505.6.2 and
510.4.4.
The member properties shall be determined using an

effective length of O. 75h and a cross section composed of
two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of
25tw at interior stiffeners and 25tw at the ends of
members. The weld connecting full depth bearing stiffeners to
the web shall be sized to transmit the difference in
compressive force at each of the stiffeners to the web.
Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply with the

following additional criteria:
1. The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness

of the column web shall not be less than one-third of the
width of the flange or moment connection plate
delivering the concentrated force.
2. The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than one-

half the thickness of the flange or moment connection
plate delivering the concentrated load, and greater than or
equal to the width divided by 16.

SECTION 511
DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER cP = 0.90(LRFD) n = 1.67(ASD)
CONNECTIONS where Qf is given by Eq. 511.2-1.
511.1 Concentrated Forces on HSS Additional limits of applicability are
511. 1.1 Definitions of Parameters 1. 0.2 < BpID:::; 1.0
B is the overall width of rectangular HSS member, 2. D It:::; 50 for T-connections and D n s: 40 for
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the cross-connections
connection, mm
is the width of plate, measured 90 degrees to the 511.1.3.2 Criteria for Rectangular HSS
plane of the connection, mm
is the outside diameter of round HSS member, mm When a concentrated force is distributed transversely to the
is the specified minimum yield stress ofHSS axis of the HSS the design strength, CPRn, and the
member allowable strength, Rnl n, shall be the lowest value
material, MPa according to the limit states of local yielding due to uneven
is the specified minimum yield stress of plate, load distribution, shear yielding (punching) and sidewall
MPa strength.
is the specified minimum tensile strength of HSS
material, MPa Additional limits of applicability are
H is the overall height of rectangular HSS member,
measured in the plane of the connection, mm 1. 0.25<BpIB:::;1.0
N is the bearing length of the load, measured parallel
to the axis of the HSS member, (or measured 2. Bit for the loaded HSS wall s 35
across the width of the HSS in the case ofloaded
cap plates), mm a. For the limit state oflocal yielding due to uneven
is the design wall thickness ofHSS member, mm load distribution in the loaded plate,
is the thickness of plate, mm
u; = [10Fyt/(Blt)]Bp s FyptpBp
511.1.2 Limits of Applicability
(511.1-2)
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits of applicability: cP = O. 95(LRFD) n= 1.58(ASD)
1. Strength:Fy:::; 360MPa forHSS b. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
2. Ductility: Fyi F u s 0.8 for HSS

(511.1-3)
3. Other limits apply for specific criteria
cP = 0.95(LRFD) n= 1.58(ASD)
511.1.3 Concentrated Force Distributed
Transversely where
511.1.3.1 Criterion for Round HSS
When a concentrated force is distributed transversely to the This limit state need not be checked when Bp >
axis of the HSS the design strength, CPRw and the (B - 2t), nor when u, < O.85B.
allowable strength, Rnl n, for th.e limit state of local
yielding shall be determined as follows:
(511.1-1)

-'' ' ' '" ~
\
I
5-110 CHAPTER 5 - Structural Steel i

\
I
c. For the limit state of sidewall under tension The nonuniformity of load transfer along the I
loading, the available strength shall be taken as the line of weld, due to the flexibility of the
strength for sidewall local yielding. For the limit HSS wall in a transverse plate-to-HSS !
state of sidewall under compression loading, connection, shall be considered in
I
available strength shall be taken as the lowest proportioning such welds. This requirement
value obtained according to the limit states of can be satisfied by limiting the total
sidewall local yielding, sidewall local crippling effective weld length, Le, of groove and
and sidewall local buckling. fillet welds to rectangular HSS as follows:
This limit state need not be checked unless the

chord member and branch member (connecting
Le2[10/(B/t)l[(Fyt)j(Fyptp)]Bp s 2Bp I
element) have the same width (P 1.0). = (511.1-7) I

where
c.l.l For the limit state of sidewall local yielding,
total effective weld length
Rn = 2F yt[5k + N] (511.1-4) for welds on both sides of
the transverse plate, mm
cfJ = 1.00(LRFD) n= 1.50(ASD)
In lieu of Eq. 511.1-7, this requirement may
where be satisfied by other rational approaches.
k outside corner radius of the HSS,
which is permitted to be taken as User Note: An upper limit on weld size will
be given by the weld that develops the
1. 5t if unknown, mm
available strength of the connected element.
c.l.2 For the limit state of sidewall local
crippling, in T- connections,
Longitudinally at the Center of the HSS
Diameter or Width, and Acting
Rn = 1. 6tz[1 + 3N /(H - 3t)] (EFy)O.5 Qf Perpendicular to the HSS Axis
(511.1-5)
When a concentrated force is distributed longitudinally
along the axis of the HSS at the center of the HSS diameter
cfJ = 0.75(LRFD) n= 2.00(ASD) or width, and also acts perpendicular to the axis direction of
the HSS (or has a component perpendicular to the axis
where Qf is given byEq. 511.2-10. direction of the HSS), the design strength, cfJRn, and the I
allowable strength, Rn/n, perpendicular to the HSS axis

c.l.3 For the limit state of sidewall local buckling shall be determined for the limit state of chord plastification
in cross-connections, as follows.
•
Rn = [48t3/(H - 3t)] (EFy)o.5Qf 511.1.4.1 Criterion for Round HSS
(511.1-6)
An additional limit of applicability is: D It ::; 50 for
T-connections and D It::; 40 for cross-connections
cfJ = 0.90(LRFD) n= 1.67(ASD) I
Where Qf is given by Eq. 511.2-10.

u; = 5. 5FytZ(1 + 0.25 N /D)Qf (51l.l-8)
cfJ = 0.90(LRFD) n = 1.67(ASD)

i
where Q f is given by Eq. 511.2-1. I
j
I
I
I
511.1.4.2 Criterion for Rectangular HSS the cap plate (of thickness tp) and disperses into the two
HSS walls of dimension B.
An additional limit of applicability is: B /t for the loaded
HSS wall s 40 If (Stp + N) ;:::B, the available strength of the HSS is
computed by summing the contributions of all four HSS
walls.
e; = [Fyt2 /(1- tp/B)] [ZN /B + 4(1- tp/B)o.5Qr]
(511.1-9) If (se, + N) < B, the available strength of the HSS is
computed by summing the contributions of the two walls
t/J = 1.00(LRFD) D. = 1. SO(ASD) into which the load is distributed.
where a. For the limit state of wall local yielding, for one wall,
(511.1-11)
t/J = 1.00(LRFD) D. = 1. SO(ASD)

U is given by Eq. 511.2-12
b. For the limit state of wall local crippling, for one wall,
Longitudinally at the Center of the HSS
Width, and Acting Parallel to the HSS Axis e; = O. 8t2 [1 + (6N/B)(t/tp)1.5] [EFytp/t]O.5
When a concentrated force is distributed longitudinally (511.1-12)

along the axis of a rectangular HSS, and also acts parallel
but eccentric to the axis direction of the member, the t/J = 0.7S(LRFD) D. = 2. OO(ASD)
connection shall be verified as follows:
511.2 HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
F yptp ::; F ut (511.1-10)
HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as connections
User Note: This provision is primarily intended for shear that consist of one or more branch members that are directly
tab connections. Equation 511.1-10 precludes shear yielding welded to a continuous chord that passes through the
(punching) of the HSS wall by requiring the plate (shear connection and shall be classified as follows:
tab) strength to be less than the HSS wall strength. For
bracing connections to HSS columns, where a load is 1. When the punching load (P r sin 8) in a branch
applied by a longitudinal plate at an angle to the HSS axis, member is equilibrated by beam shear in the chord
the connection design will be governed by the force member, the connection shall be classified as a T-
component perpendicular to the HSS axis (see Section connection when the branch is perpendicular to the
511.1.4b). chord and a Y -connection otherwise.
511.1.6 Concentrated Axial Force on the 2. When the punching load (P r sin 8) in a branch
End of a Rectangular HSS with a Cap member is essentially equilibrated (within 20 percent)
Plate. by loads in other branch member(s) on the same side of
the connection, the connection shall be classified as a
When a concentrated force acts on the end of a capped HSS, K-connection. The relevant gap is between the primary
and the force is in the direction of the HSS axis, the design branch members whose loads equilibrate. An
strength, t/JRn> and the allowable strength, Rn/D., shall be N-connection can be considered as a type of
determined for the limit states of wall local yielding (due to K-connection.
tensile or compressive forces) and wall local crippling (due
to compressive forces only), with consideration for shear User Note: A K-connection with one branch perpendicular
lag, as follows. to the chord is often called an N-connection.
User Note: The procedure below presumes that the 3. When the punching load (P r sin 8) is transmitted
concentrated force has a dispersion slope of 2.5:1 through through the chord member and is equilibrated by
branch member(s) on the opposite side, the connection

shall be classified as a cross-connection. y the chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half
the diameter to the wall thickness =
D 12t for
4. When a connection has more than two primary branch round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall
members or branch members in more than one plane, thickness =
B 12t for rectangu lar HSS
the connection shall be classified as a general or the load length parameter, applicable only to
multiplanar connection. rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of contact
of the branch with the chord in the plane of the
When branch members transmit part of their load as K- connection to the chord width =
NIB, where
connections and part of their load as T-, Y-, or cross-
N = Hblsin (J
connections, the nominal strength shall be determined by (J acute angle between the branch and chord
interpolation on the proportion of each in total. (degrees)
the gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the
For the purposes of this Specification, the centerlines of branches of a gapped K connection to the width of
branch members and chord members shall lie in a common
the chord = gl B for rectangular HSS
plane. Rectangular HSS connections are further limited to
have all members oriented with walls parallel to the plane.
511.2.2 Criteria for Round HSS
For trusses that are made with HSS that are connected by
welding branch members to chord members, eccentricities
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and
within the limits of applicability are permitted without
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated
consideration of the resulting moments for the design of the
connection. through the chord-stress interaction parameter Q f'
511.2.1 Definitions of Parameters When the chord is in tension,
B overall width of rectangular HSS main member,

measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection, mm When the chord is in compression,
overall width of rectangular HSS branch member,
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the Qf = 1.0 - O.3U(1 + U) (SIl.2-1)
connection, mm
D outside diameter of round HSS main member, mm
where U is the utilization ratio given by
outside diameter of round HSS branch member,
mm
(SI1.2-2)
e eccentricity in a truss connection, positive
being away from the branches, mm and
specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
member material, MPa
Pr required axial strength in chord, N; for K-
specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch
member material, MPa connections, P r is to be determined on the side of
the joint that has the lower compression stress
specified minimum tensile strength of HSS
material, MPa (lower U)
gap between toes of branch members in a gapped Mr required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
g
K-connection, neglecting the welds, mm Ag chord gross area, mnr'
H overall height of rectangular HSS main member, Fe available stress, MPa
measured in the plane of the connection, mm S chord elastic section modulus, mrrr'
overall height of rectangular HSS branch member,
measured in the plane of the connection, mm For design according to Section S02.3.3 (LRFD):
design wall thickness of HSS main member, mm
design wall thickness ofHSS branch member, mm Pr Pu =required axial strength in chord, using LRFD
the width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to load combinations, N
chord diameter = D bl D for round HSS; the ratio Mr Mu = required flexural strength in chord, using
of overall branch width to chord width = Bb/ B LRFD load combinations, N-mm
for rectangular HSS Fe = Fy, MPa
the effective width ratio; the sum of the perimeters
of the two branch members in a K-connection
For design according to Section S02.3.4 (ASD):
divided by eight times the chord width

Pa = required axial strength in chord, using ASD 511.2.2.2 Branches with Axial Loads in T-, Y-
load combinations, N and Cross-Connections
• Mr M a = required flexural strength in chord, using
ASD load combinations, N-mm For T- and Y- connections, the design strength of the branch
r, O. 6Fy, MPa cfJPn, or the allowable strength of the branch, Pn/n, shall
be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of
511.2.2.1 Limits of Applicability chord plastification and shear yielding (punching).
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection 1. For the limit state of chord plastification in T- and Y-
configuration is within the following limits of applicabi lity: connections,
l. Joint eccentricity: -0.55D :5 e:5 O.25D, where (511.2-3)

D is the chord diameter and e is positive away from the
branches. cfJ = 0.90(LRFD) n= 1. 67ASD)
2. Branch angle: cfJ ~ 30°. 2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
3. Chord wall slenderness ratio of diameter to wall

thickness less than or equal to 50 for T -, Y - and K-
connections; less than or equal to 40 for cross- cfJ = 0.95(LRFD) n= 1. 58 (ASD)
connections.
This limit state need not be checked when
4. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to
f3 > (1 - l/Y)·
wall thickness less than or equal to 50.
3. For the limit state of chord plastification in cross-
5. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter connections,
to wall thickness less than or equal to 0.05 ElF y'
(511.2-5)
6. Width ratio: 0.2 < DblD :5 1.0 in general, and
0.4 :5 D bl D :5 1.0 for gapped K-connections. cfJ = 0.90(LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)
7. If a gap connection: g greater than or equal to the sum 511.2.2.3 Branches with Axial Loads in K-
of the branch wall thicknesses. Connections
8. If an overlap connection: 25% :5 o;

:5 100%, For K-connections, the design strength of the branch, cfJP n-
where Ov = (qlp) X 100%. P is the projected and the allowable strength of the branch, P nl n, shall be
length of the overlapping branch on the chord; q is the the lower value obtained according to the limit states of
overlap length measured along the connecting face of chord plastification for gapped and overlapped connections
the chord beneath the two branches. For overlap and shear yielding (punching) for gapped connections only.
connections, the larger (or if equal diameter, the
thicker) branch is a "thru member" connected directly 1. For the limit state of chord plastification,
to the chord.
cfJ = O. 90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)
9. Branch thickness ratio for overlap connections:
thickness of overlapping branch to be less than or equal For the compression branch:
to the thickness of the overlapped branch.
r; sin (:1 = Fyt2[2. 0 + 11. 33DbID]QgQf
1O. Strength: F y:5 360 MPa for chord and branches. (511.2-6)
11. Ductility: FylFu:5 0.8 where Db refers to the compression branch only, and

Fe available stress, MPa

S chord elastic section modulus, mrrr'
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):

(511.2-7)
Pr = Pu= required axial strength in chord, using
In gapped connections, g (measured along the crown of the LRFD load combinations, N
chord neglecting weld dimensions) is positive. In Mr = Ma = required flexural strength in chord, using
overlapped connections, g is negative and equals q. LRFD load combinations, N-mm
Fe = Fy,MPa
For the tension branch,
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD):
P n sin (J == (P n sin (J)compression branch (511.2-8)
Pr = P a == required axial strength in chord, using
2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching) in ASD load combinations, N
gapped K-connections, Mr = Mu = required flexural strength in chord, using
ASD load combinations, N-mm
(511.2-9) Fe = O. 6Fy, MPa
4> = O. 95(LRFD) n= 1.58 (ASD) 511.2.3.1 Limits of Applicability
511.2.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits:
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated 1. Joint eccentricity: -0.55H s e s O. 25H, where
through the chord-stress interaction parameter Q f. H is the chord depth and e is positive away from the
branches
1. When the chord is in tension, 2. Branch angle: (J ;:::: 30°
3. Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to

thickness less than or equal to 35 for gapped
2. When the chord is in compression in T-, Y-, and cross- K-connections and- T-, Y - and cross-connections; less
connections, than or equal to 30 for overlapped K-connections
(511.2-10) 4. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall

Qf == 1.3 - 0.4U/P:::;; 1
width to thickness less than or equal to 35
3. When the chord is in compression in gapped K-

5. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall
connections,
wall width to thickness less than or equal to
0.5
Qf = 1.3 - 0.4U/Peff:::;; 1 (511.2-11) 1.25 ( E / F yb ) and also less than 35 for gapped
K-connections and T-, Y- and cross-connections; less
0.5
4. Where U is the utilization ratio given by than or equal to 1. 1 ( E / F yb ) for overlapped
K-connections
(511.2-12)
6. Width ratio: ratio of overall wall width of branch to
where overall wall width of chord greater than or equal to 0.25
for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped K-connections;
P r = required axial strength in chord, N. For gapped K- greater than or equal to 0.35 for gapped K-connections
connections, P r is to be determined on the side of
the joint that has the higher compression stress
7. Aspect ratio: 0.5 ::;;ratio of depth to width s 2.0
(higher U).
required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
chord gross area, mrrr' 8. Overlap: 25% s o; s 100%, where

O; = (q/p) x 100%. p is the projected length of This limit state need not be checked when
the overlapping branch on the chord; q is the overlap P> (1 - 1/y), nor when p< 0.8S and B/t ~
length measured along the connecting face of the chord 10.
beneath the two branches. For overlap connections, the
larger (or if equal width, the thicker) branch is a "thru 3. For the limit state of sidewall strength, the available
member" connected directly to the chord strength for branches in tension shall be taken as the
available strength for sidewall local yielding. For the
9. Branch width ratio for overlap connections: ratio of limit state of sidewall strength, the available strength
overall wall width of overlapping branch to overall wall for branches in compression shall be taken as the lower
width of overlapped branch greater than or equal to of the strengths for sidewall local yielding and sidewall
0.7S local crippling. For cross-connections with a branch
angle less than 90 degrees, an additional check for
10. Branch thickness ratio for overlap connections: chord sidewall shear failure must be made in
thickness of overlapping branch to be less than or equal accordance with Section S07.5.
to the thickness of the overlapped branch
This limit state need not be checked unless the chord
11. Strength: F y ::; 360 MPa for chord and branches member and branch member have the same width
(P = 1.0).
12. Ductility: Fy/Fu::; 0.8
a. For the limit state of local yielding,
PnsinB = 2Fyt[Sk + N] (511.2-1S)
511.2.3.2 Branches with Axial Loads in T-, Y-
and Cross-Connections l/J = 1.00 (LRFD) n= 1. SO (ASD)
where
For T-, Y-, and cross-connections, the design strength of the
branch, l/JP n- or the allowable strength of the branch,
P n/ n, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the k outside comer radius of the HSS, which
limit states of chord wall plastification, shear yielding is permitted to be taken as 1. St if
(punching), sidewall strength and local yielding due to unknown, mm
uneven load distribution. In addition to the limits of N bearing length of the load, parallel to
applicability in Section S11.2.3a, fJ shall not be less than the axis of the HSS main member
0.2S. . Hb/sin B, mm
1. For the limit state of chord wall plastification,

b. For the limit state of sidewall local crippling, in T-
and Y-connections,
Pn sin 8 = Fyt2[211/(1- p) + 4/(1- p)o.5]Qf
(SI1.2-l3) Pnsin B
= 1.6t2[1 + 3N/(H - 3t)] (EFy)O.5Qf
l/J = 1.00(LRFD) n= 1. SO (ASD)
(511.2-16)
This limit state need not be checked when p > 0.8S.
l/J = 0.7S(LRFD) n= 2.00 (ASD)
2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
c. For the limit state of sidewall local crippling in
(SI1.2-14) cross-connections,
l/J = O. 9S (LRFD) n= 1. S8 (ASD) PnsinB = [48t3/(H - 3t)] (EFy)O.5Qf

(511.2-17)
In Eq. SI1.2-14, the effective outside punching
parameter p eop = Sp/r shall not exceed fJ. l/J = 0.90(LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)

d. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven b. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
• load distribution,
r; sin 6 = O. 6FytB[2" + P + Peop]
(511.2-21 )
4> = 0.95 (LRFD) n. = 1.58 (ASD)
(511.2-17)
In the above equation, the effective outside
4> = 0.95(LRFD) n = 1.58 (ASD) punching parameter Peop = 5p /y shall not
where
exceed p.
This limit state need only be checked if
beoi = [10/(B/t)][Fyt/FYbtb]Bb s e, Bb < (B - 2t) or the branch is not square.
(511.2-19) c. For the limit state of shear yielding of the chord in

the gap, available strength shall be checked in
This limit state need not be checked when accordance with Section 507.5. This limit state
p < 0.85. need only be checked if the chord is not square.
d. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven

511.2.3.3 Branches with Axial Loads in Gapped K-
load distribution,
Connections
For gapped K-connections, the design strength of the r; = Fybtb[2Hb + e, + beoi (511.2-22)
branch, 4>P n , or the allowable strength of the branch, - 4tb]
Pn/n., shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
limit states of chord wall plastiflcation shear yielding 4> = 0.95 (LRFD) n. = 1.58 (ASD)
(punching), shear yielding and local yielding due to uneven
load distribution. In addition to the limits of applicability in where
Section K2.3a, the following limits shall apply:
beoi = [10/(B/t)J[Fyt/(Fybtb)]Bb ~ s;
1. Bb/B ~ 0.1 + y/50.
(511.2-23)
2. Pett ~ 0.35.
This limit state need only be checked if the branch
is not square or B /t < 15.
3. {~O. 5(1 - !Jeff)
511.2.3.4 Branches with Axial Loads in
4. Gap: g greater than or equal to the sum of the branch Overlapped K - Connections
wall thicknesses.
FOf overlapped Kconnections, the design strength of the
5. The smaller B b > 0.63 times the larger Bb• branch,4>Pn or the allowable 'strength of the branch,
P n/n, shall be determined from (he limit state of local
a. For the limit state of chord wall plastification, yielding due to uneven load distribution,
4> = 0.95 (LRFD) n= 1.58 (ASD)
(511.2-20) For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 25% ~

Ov ~ 50% measured with respect to the overlapping
4> = 0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD) branch,
Pn = FYbitbi[(Ov/50)(2Hbi - 4tbi) + beoi + beovl

(511.2-24)

For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 50% :::; Sl1.2.3e Welds to Branches
Ov < 80% measured with respect to the overlapping
branch, The nonuniformity of load transfer along the line of weld,
due to differences in relative flexibility of HSS walls in
HSS-to-HSS connections, shall be considered in
Pn = Fybitbi[2Hbi - 4tbi + beoi + beovl proportioning such welds. This can be considered by
(511.2-25) limiting the total effective weld length, Le, of groove and
fillet welds to rectangular HSS as follows:
For the overlapping branch, and for overlap 80% :::;
Ov :::;100% measured with respect to the overlapping 1. In T-, Y- and cross-connections, for (J s 50 degrees
branch,
2(Hb - 1. 2tb)
Pn = Fybitbi[2Hbi - 4tbi + Bbi + beovl Le = .
Sill (J
+ (B b - 1. 2t b ) (511.2-29)
(511.2-26)
for (J 2:: 60 degrees
where
beoi is the effective width of the branch face welded to 2(H b --1. Zlb)
L = - (511.2-30)
the chord, e sin-(J
beoi [10/CB/t)J[(Fyt)/(FYbitb;)]Bbi ::;;Bbi
Linear interpolation shall be used to determine Le for
(511.2-27) values of (J between 50 and 60 degrees.
b eov is the effective width of the branch face welded to
the overlapped brace 2. In gapped K-connections, around each branch,
[10/(Bbj/tbj)][(Fyb/bj)/(Fybitbi)]Bbi s Bbi II
for (J :::; 50 degrees
(511.2-28)
overall branch width of the overlapping branch,
mm
overall branch width of the overlapped branch,
mm
specified minimum yield stress of the overlapping (511.2-31)
Fybi
branch material, MPa
specified minimum yield stress of the overlapped for (J 2:: 60 degrees
Fybj
branch material, MPa
overall depth of the overlapping branch, mm
2(Hb - 1.2tb)
thickness ofthe overlapping branch, mrn Le = .
Sill (J
+ (B b - 1. 2t b ) (511.2-32)
thickness of the overlapped branch, mm
For the overlapped branch, P n shall not exceed P n of the Linear interpolation shall be used to determine Le for values
overlapping branch, calculated using Eq. 511.2-24, of (J between 50 and 60 degrees. In lieu of the above criteria
511.2-25, or 511.2-26, as applicable, multiplied by the in Eqs. 511.2-29 to 511.2-32, other rational criteria are
factor(AbjF yb/ AbiF Ybi), permitted.
where
Abi = cross-sectional area of the overlapping branch

Abj = cross-sectional area of the overlapped branch

511.3 HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections 11 the load length parameter, applicable only to
rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of contact
HSS-to-HSS moment connections are defined as of the branch with the chord in the plane of the
connections that consist of one or two branch members that connection to the chord width = N/ B, where
are directly welded to a continuous chord that passes N = Hblsin (J
through the connection, with the branch or branches loaded (J acute angle between the branch and chord
by bending moments. (degrees)
A connection shall be classified 511.3.2 Criteria for Round HSS
1. As aT-connection when there is one branch and it is The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and
perpendicular to the chord and as a Y -connection when local branch connection forces shall be incorporated
there is one branch but not perpendicular to the chord. through the chord-stress interaction parameter Q f.
2. As a cross-connection when there is a branch on each
(opposite) side of the chord. When the chord is in tension,
For the purposes of this Specification, the centerlines of Qf =1

the branch member(s) and the chord member shall lie in When the chord is in compression,
a common plane.
511.3.1 Definitions of Parameters

Qf = 1.0 - 0.3U(1 + U) (511.3-1)
where U is the utilization ratio given by,

B overall width of rectangular HSS main member,
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the
connection, mm (511.3-2)
Bb overall width of rectangular HSS branch member,
measured 90 degrees to the plane of the where
connection, mm
D outside diameter of round HSS main member, mm Pr required axial strength in chord, N
outside diameter of round HSS branch member, Mr required flexural strength in chord, N-mm
mm Ag chord gross area, mnr'
specified minimum yield stress of HSS main
Fe available stress, MPa
member, MPa
specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch
S chord elastic section modulus, mrn'
member, MPa
ultimate strength ofHSS member, MPa For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
overall height of rectangular HSS main member,
measured in the plane of the connection, mm Pr = Pu = required axial strength in chord, using
overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, LRFD load combinations, N
measured in the plane of the connection, mm Mr = Mu = required flexural strength in chord, using
design wall thickness ofHSS main member, mm LRFD load combinations, N-mm
t
design wall thickness of HSS branch member, mm Ag = Fy,MPa
the width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to
chord diameter = D bl D for round HSS; the ratio
of overall branch width to chord width = B bl B
for rectangular HSS
Pr = Pa = required axial strength in chord, using
ASD load combinations, N
y the chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the
Mr = M a = required flexural strength in chord, using
diameter to the wall thickness = D 12t for round
ASD load combinations, N-mm
HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall
thickness = B 12t for rectangular HSS
Fe = O. 6Fy, MPa

511.3.2.1 Limits of Applicability 511.3.2.3 Branches with Out-or-Plane Bending

Moments in T -, Y- and Cross-Connections
The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
configuration is within the following limits of applicability: The design strength, l/JM n, and the allowable strength,
M nl n, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
1. Branch angle:O :2: 30°. limit states of chord plastification and shear yielding
(punching).
2. Chord wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to wall
thickness less than or equal to 50 for T - and Y- 1. For the limit state of chord plastification,
connections; less than or equal to 40 for cross-
connections. MnsinO = Fyt2Db[3.0/(1- 0.81fJ)]Q,
3. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter to (511.3-5)
wall thickness less than or equal to 50.
l/J = 0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)
4. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of diameter
to wall thickness less than or equal to O. 05E I F y 2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching),
5. Width ratio: .2 < D bl D s 1.0 . Mn = O. 6FytD~[(3 + sin 0)/4sin 2

O]Q,
(511.3-6)
6. Strength: F y ::; 360 MPa for chord and branches
l/J = 0.95 (LRFD) n= 1. 58(ASD)
7. Ductility: Fyi F u s 0.8
This limit state need not be checked when
511.3.2.2 Branches with In-Plane Bending Moments fJ > (1- 1/Y)·
in T -, Y - arid Cross-Connections
511.3.2.4 Branches with Combined Bending
The design strength, l/JMn' and the allowable strength, Moment and Axial Force in T -, Y and
M nl n, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the Cross - Connections
limit states of chord plastification and shear yielding
(punching). Connections subject to branch axial load, branch in-plane
bending moment, and branch out-of-plane bending moment,
I. For the limit state of chord plastification, or any combination of these load effects, should satisfy the
following.
M n sin 0 = 5 . 39F y t2yO.5fJD bQ t (511.3-3)
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD):
l/J = 0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD) 2
(Prll/JPn) + (Mr-ipll/JMn-iP)
2. For the limit state of shear yielding (punching), + (Mr-opll/JMn-op) s 1.0
Mn = O. 6FytD~[(1 + 3sin 0)/4sin 2
0]
where
(511.3-7)
(511.3-4)
P u= required axial strength in branch, using
l/J = 0.95 (LRFD) n= 1.58 (ASD) LRFD load combinations, N
design strength obtained from Section 511.2.2b
This limit state need not be checked when required in-plane flexural strength in branch,
fJ > (1 - 1/Y)· using LRFD load combinations, N-mm
lJMn-ip = design strength obtained from Section 511.3 .2b
Mr-op = required out-of-plane flexural strength in
branch, using LRFD load combinations, N-mm
lJMn-op = design strength obtained from Section 511.3 .2c

Pr Pa= required axial strength in chord, using ASD load

combinations, N
where
Mr M a= required flexural strength in chord, using ASD
load combinations, N-mm
Pr P a= required axial strength in branch, using
ASD load combinations, N Fe = O. 6Fy, MPa
P n /n,110 allowable strength obtained from Section
511.2.2b 511.3.3.1 Limits of Applicability
required in-plane flexural strength in
branch, using ASD load combinations, N- The criteria herein are applicable only when the connection
mm configuration is within the following limits:
allowable strength obtained from Section
511.3.2b 1. Branch angle is approximately 90 0
•
Mr-op required out-of-plane flexural strength in

branch, using ASD load combinations, N- 2. Chord wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall width to
mm thickness less than or equal to 35.
511.3.2c 3. Tension branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall wall
width to thickness less than or equal to 35.
511.3.3 Criteria for Rectangular HSS
4 .. Compression branch wall slenderness: ratio of overall
The interaction of stress due to chord member forces and wall width to thickness less than or equal to
local branch connection forces shall be incorporated
1. 25(E/Fyb)o.s and also less than 35.
through the chord-stress interaction parameter Qf.
5. Width ratio: ratio of overall wall width of branch to

When the chord is in tension,
overall wall width of chord greater than or equal to
0.25.
6. Aspect ratio: O. 5 :5 ratio of depth to width:5 2. O.

When the chord is in compression,
7. Strength: F y :5 360 MPa for chord and branches.

Qf = (1.3 - 0.4U/P):51 (511.3-9)
8. Ductility: F y/ F u :5 0.8.
where U is the utilization ratio given by
(511.3-10)
where 511.3.3.2 Branches with In-Plane Bending

Moments in T- and Cross-Connections
Pr = required axial strength in chord, N
Mr required flexural strength in chord, N-mm The design strength, cfJM n, and the allowable strength,
Ag chord gross area, mm" Mn/U, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
Fe available stress, MPa limit states of chord wall plastification, sidewall local
S chord elastic section modulus, mnr' yielding and local yielding due to uneven load distribution.
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD): 1. For the limit state of chord wall plastification,
Pr P u= required axial strength in chord, using LRFD Mn = FytzHb[(1/217) + 2/(1- p)0.s + 17/(1- P)]Qf
load combinations, N (511.3-11)
Mr M u= required flexural strength in chord, using LRFD
load combinations, N-mm

cp = 1.00 (LRFD) n= 1.50(ASD) 2. For the limit state of sidewall local yielding,
This limit state need not be checked when (511.3-16)

s» 0.85.
cp = 1.00 (LRFD) n = 1. 50(ASD)
2. For the limit state of sidewall local yielding,
(511.3-12) where
Fy F y for T-connections
cp = 1.00 (LRFD) n= 1.50(ASD)
Fy * O. 8F y for cross-connections
where
Fy * F y for T-connections This limit state need not be checked when p < 0.85.
Fy * O. 8Fy for cross-connections
3. For the limit state of local yielding due to uneven load
distribution,
This limit state need not be checked when p < 0.85.
3. For the limit state oflocal yielding due to uneven load
Mn = FYb[Zb - 0.51(1- beoJBb)2Bb 2tb]
distribution, (511.3-17)
cp = 0.95 (LRFD) n= 1. 58(ASD)

cp = 0.95 (LRFD) n= 1. 58(ASD) where
where
[10/(B/t)l[Fyt/(FYbtb)]Bb s e;
(511.3-18)
beoi = [10/(B/t)l[Fyt/(FYbtb)]Bb s e, branch plastic section modulus about the axis
(511.3-14) of bending, mnr'
= branch plastic section modulus about the axis of This limit state need not be checked when fJ < 0.85.
bending, mm3
4. For the limit state of chord distortional failure,
This limit state need not be checked when fJ < 0.85.
511.3.3.3 Branches with Out-of-Plane Bending
Moments in T- and Cross-Connections (511.3-19)
The design strength, cpM n, and the allowable strength, cp = 1.00 (LRFD) n= 1. 50(ASD)
Mn/n, shall be the lowest value obtained according to the
limit states of chord wall plastification, sidewall local This limit state need not be checked for cross-
yielding, local yielding due to uneven load distribution and connections or for T-connections if chord distortional
chord distortional failure. failure is prevented by other means.
1. For the limit state of chord wall plastification,

II
Mn = Fy t2[0. 5Hb(1 + /1)/(1 - /1)

+ [2BBb(1 + /1)/(1 - /1)]o.5]Qf
(511.3-15)
cp = 1.00 (LRFD) n= 1.50(ASD)
This limit state need not be checked when p > 0.85.

511.3.3.4 Branches with Combined Bending Moment SECTION 512

and Axial Force in T - and Cross-
Connections DESIGN FOR SERVICEABILITY
Connections subject to branch axial load, branch in-plane 512.1 General Provisions
bending moment, and branch out-of-plane bending moment,
or any combination of these load effects, should satisfy Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building,
its appearance, maintainability, durability, and comfort of
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) its occupants are preserved under normal usage. Limiting
values of structural behavior for serviceability (for example,
maximum deflections, accelerations) shall be chosen with
(Pr/cpPn) + (Mr-ip/cpMn-ip) due regard to the intended function of the structure.
+ (Mr-op/cpMn-op) s 1.0 Serviceability shall be evaluated using appropriate load
combinations for the serviceability limit states identified.
(511.3-20)
where
User Note: Additional information on serviceability limit
P u= required axial strength in branch, using states, service loads and appropriate load combinations for
LRFD load combinations, N serviceability requirements can be found in ASCE 7,
design strength obtained from Section Appendix B and its Commentary. The performance
511.2.3b requirements for serviceability in this Section are consistent
required in-plane flexural strength in branch, with those requirements. Service loads, as stipulated herein,
using LRFD load combinations, N-mm are those that act on the structure at an arbitrary point in
design strength obtained from Section time. That is, the appropriate load combinations are often
511.3.3b less severe than those in ASCE 7, Section 2.4, where the
Mr-op required out-of-plane flexural strength in LRFD load combinations are given.
branch, using LRFD load combinations,
N-mm 512.2 Camber
cpM n-op = design strength obtained from Section
511.3.3c Where camber is used to achieve proper position and
location of the structure, the magnitude, direction and
For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD) location of camber shall be specified in the structural
drawings.
(Pr/(Pn/!1)) + (Mr-ip/(Mn-iP/!1))
User Note: Camber recommendations are provided in the
+ (Mr-op/(Mn-op/!1)) ::; 1.0 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
(511.3-21)
where 512.3 Deflections
P a= required axial strength in branch, using Deflections in structural members and structural systems
ASD load combinations, N under appropriate service load combinations shall not
allowable strength obtained from Section impair the serviceability of the structure.
511.2.3b
Mr-ip required in-plane flexural strength in User Note: Conditions to be considered include levelness
branch, using ASD load combinations, of floors, alignment of structural members, integrity of
N-mm building finishes, and other factors that affect the normal
allowable strength obtained from Section usage and function of the structure. For composite
511.3.3b members, the additional deflections due to the shrinkage
Mr-op required out-of-plane flexural strength in and creep of the concrete should be considered.
branch, using ASD load combinations,
N-mm
511.3.3c

CHAPTER 5 Strllclural Steel 5-123
512.4 Drift SECTION 513

.. Drift of a structure shall be evaluated under service loads to FABRICATION, ERECTION AND
provide for serviceability of the structure, including the QUALITY CONTROL
integrity of interior partitions and exterior cladding. Drift
under strength load combinations shall not cause collision Drawings
with adjacent structures or exceed the limiting values of
such drifts that may be specified by this code. Shop drawings shall be prepared in advance of fabrication
and give complete information necessary for the fabrication
512.5 Vibration of the component parts of the structure, including the
location, type and size of welds and bolts. Erection
The effect of vibration on the comfort of the occupants and drawings shall be prepared in advance of erection and give
the function of the structure shall be considered. The information necessary for erection of the structure. Shop
sources of vibration to be considered include pedestrian and erection drawings shall clearly distinguish between
loading, vibrating machinery and others identified for the shop and field welds and bolts and shall clearly identify
structure. pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted
connections. Shop and erection drawings shall be made with
512.6 Wind-Induced Motion due regard to speed and economy in fabrication and
erection.
The effect of wind-induced motion of buildings on the
comfort of occupants shall be considered. 513.2 Fabrication
512.7 Expansion and Contraction 513.2.1 Cambering, Curving and Straightening
The effects of thermal expansion and contraction or' a Local application of heat or mechanical means is permitted
building shall be considered. Damage to building cladding to be used to introduce or correct camber, curvature and
can cause water penetration and may lead to corrosion. straightness. The temperature of heated areas, as measured
by approved methods, shall not exceed 593°C for
512.8 Connection Slip A5l4/A5l4M and A852/A852M steel nor 649°C for other
steels.
The effects of connection slip shall be included in the
design where slip at bolted connections may cause 513.2.2 Thermal Cutting
deformations that impair the serviceability of the structure.
Where appropriate, the connection shall be designed to Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of AWS
preclude slip. For the design of slip-critical connections see Dl.1, Sections 5.15.1.2, 5.15.4.3 and 5.15.4.4 with the
Sections 510.3.8 and 510.3.9. exception that thermally cut free edges that will be subject
to calculated static tensile stress shall be free of round-
User Note: For more information on connection slip, refer bottom gouges greater than 5 mm deep and sharp V-shaped
to the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using notches. Gouges deeper than 5 mm and notches shall be
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. removed by grinding or repaired by welding.
Reentrant corners, except reentrant corners of beam copes

and weld access holes, shall meet the requirements of AWS
Dl.l, Section A5.16. If another specified contour is
required it must be shown on the contract documents. Beam
copes and weld access holes shall meet the geometrical
requirements of Section 510.1.6. Beam copes and welds
access holes in shapes that are to be galvanized shall be
ground. For shapes with a flange thickness not exceeding
50 mm the roughness of thermally cut surfaces of copes
shall be no greater than a surface roughness value of
50 um as defined in ASME B46.l Surface Texture
(Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay). For beam copes
and weld access holes in which the curved part of the access
hole is thermally cut in ASTM A61A6M hot rolled shapes
with a flange thickness exceeding 50 mm and welded built-

up shapes with material thickness greater than 50 mrn, a Compression joints that depend on contact bearing as part
preheat temperature of not less lban 66°C shall be applied of the splice strength shall have the bearing surfaces of
prior [0 thermal cutting. The thermally cut surface of access individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling, sawing, or
heles in.I\STM A6/A6M hot-rolled shapes with a flange other suitable means.
thickness exceeding 50 mm and built-up shapes with a
material thickness greater than 50 mm shall be ground and 513.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances
inspected for cracks using magnetic particle inspection in
accordance with ASTM E709. Any crack is unacceptable Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with the
regardless of size or location. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges.
User Note: The AWS Surface Roughness Guide for
Oxygen Cutting (AWS C4.1-77) sample 3 may be used as a 513.2.8 Finish of Column Bases
guide for evaluating the surface roughness of copes 111
shapes with flanges not exceeding 50 mm thick. Column bases and base plates shall be finished 111
accordance with the following requirements:
513.2.3 Planing of Edges
I. Steel bearing plates 50 mm or less in thickness are
Planing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of permitted without milling, provided a satisfactory
plates or shapes is not required unless specifically called for contact bearing is obtained. Steel bearing plates over
in the contract documents or included in a stipulated edge 50 mm but not over 100 mm in thickness are permitted
preparation for welding. to be straightened by pressing or, if presses are not
available, by milling for bearing surfaces (except as
513.2.4 Welded Construction noted in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section), to
obtain a satisfactory contact bearing. Steel bearing
The technique of welding, the workmanship, appearance plates over 100 mm in thickness shall be milled for
and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting bearing surfaces (except as noted in subparagraphs 2
nonconforming work shall be in accordance with AWS and 3 of this section).
D 1.1 except as modified in Section 510.2.
2. Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases
513.2.5 Bolted Construction that are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on
foundations need not be milled.
Parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and
rigidly held together during assembly. Use of a drift pin in 3. Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when
bolt holes during assembly shall not distort the metal or complete-joint penetration groove welds are provided
enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for between the column and the bearing plate.
rejection.
513.2.9 Holes for Anchor Rods
Bolt holes shall comply with the provisions of the RCSC
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or Holes for anchor rods shall be permitted to be thermally cut
A490 Bolts, Section 3.3 except that thermally cut holes in accordance with the provisions of Section 513.2.2.
shall be permitted with a surface roughness profile not
exceeding 25 urn as defined in ASME B46.1. Gouges shall 513.2.10 Drain Holes
not exceed a depth of 2 mm.
When water can collect inside HSS or box members, either
Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness of not during construction or during service, the member shall be
more than 6 mm within a joint, are permitted in joints sealed, provided with a drain hole at the base, or protected
without changing the strength (based upon hole type) for the by other suitable means.
design of connections. The orientation of such shims is
independent of the direction of application of the load. The 513.2.11 Requirements for Galvanized Members
use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements
of the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using Members and parts to be galvanized shall be designed,
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, except as modified in Section detailed and fabricated to provide for flow and drainage of
510.3.513.2.6 Compression Joints pickling fluids and zinc and to prevent pressure build-up in
enclosed parts.

CHAPTEI-\ :)
User Note: See The Design of Products to be Hot-Dip 513.4.2 Bracing

Galvanized after Fabrication, American Galvanizer's
• Association, and ASTM A123, A153, A384 and A780 for The frame of steel skeleton buildings shall be carried up
useful information on design and detailing of galvanized true and plumb within the limits defined in the AISC Code
members. of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
Temporary bracing shall be provided, in accordance with
513.3 Shop Painting the requirements of the Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges, wherever necessary to support the
513.3.1 General Requirements loads to which the structure may be subjected, including
equipment and the operation of same. Such bracing shall be
Shop painting and surface preparation shall be in left in place as long as required for safety.
accordance with the provisions of the AISC Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Shop 513.4.3 Alignment
paint is not required unless specified by the contract
documents. No permanent bolting or welding shall be performed until
the adjacent affected portions of the structure have been
513.3.2 Inaccessible Surfaces properly aligned.
Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop 513.4.4 Fit of Column Compression Joints
assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if and Base Plates
required by the design documents.
Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 2 111m,
513.3.3 Contact Surfaces regardless of the type of splice used ( partial-joint-
penetration groove welded or bolted), is permitted. If the
Paint is permitted in bearing-type connections. For slip- gap exceeds 2 mm, but is less than 6 mm, and if an
critical connections, the faying surface requirements shall engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact area
be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with nontapered
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, Section 3.2.2(b). steel shims. Shims need not be other than mild steel,
regardless of the grade of the main material.
513.3.4 Finished Surfaces
513.4.5 Field Welding
Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected against
corrosion by a rust inhibitive coating that can be removed Shop paint on surfaces adjacent to joints to be field welded
prior to erection, or which has characteristics that make shall be wire brushed if necessary to assure weld quality.
removal prior to erection unnecessary. Field welding of attachments to installed embedments in
contact with concrete shall be done in such a manner as to
513.3. 5 Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds avoid excessive thermal expansion of the embedment which
could result in spalling or cracking of the concrete or
Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, excessive stress in the embedment anchors.
surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld location shall be
free of materials that would prevent proper welding or 513.4.6 Field Painting
produce objectionable fumes during welding.
Responsibility for touch-up paintmg, cleaning and field
513.4 Erection painting shall be allocated in accordance with accepted local
practices, and this allocation shall be set forth explicitly in
513.4.1 Alignment of Column Bases the design documents.
Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with 513.4.7 Field Connections
full bearing on concrete or masonry.
As erection progresses, the structure shall be securely bolted
or welded to support the dead, wind and erection loads.

513.5 Quality Control APPENDIX A

The Iab icator shall provide quality control procedures to INELASTIC ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
the extent lhat the Iabricaree deems necessary LO assure that
the work is performed ill accordance with this Specification. A-I.1 General Provisions
In addition to the fabricator's quality control procedures
material and workmanship at all times may be subject to Inelastic analysis is permitted for design according to the
inspection by qualified inspectors representing the provisions of Section 502.3.3 (LRFD). Inelastic analysis is
purchaser, If such inspection by representatives or the not permitted for design according to the provisions of
purchaser will be required, it shall be so stated in the design Section 502.3A (ASD) except as provided in Section A-1.3.
documents.
A-1.2 Materials
513.5.1 Cooperation
Members undergoing plastic hinging shall have a specified
As far as possible the inspection by representau es of the minimum yield stress not exceeding 450 MPa.
purchaser shall be made at the fabricator's plant. The
fabricarer shall cooperate wilh the inspector permitting A-I.3 Moment Redistribution
.access for inspection. to all places where work is being done.
The purchaser's inspector shall schedule this work for Beams and girders composed of compact sections as
minimum interruption to the work of the fabricator. defined in Section 502.4 and satisfying the unbraced length
requirements of Section A-I.7, including composite
513.5.2 Rejections members, may be proportioned for nine-tenths of the
negative moments at points of support, produced by the
Material or workmanship I1Ql in confermance with the gravity loading computed by an elastic analysis, provided
provisions of this Chapter may be rejected at any time that the maximum positive moment is increased by one-
during the progress of the work. The fabricator shall receive tenth of the average negative moments. This reduction is not
copies of all reports furnished to the purchaser by the permitted for moments produced by loading on cantilevers
inspection agency. and for design according to Sections A-IA through A-I.8 of
this appendix.
513.5.3 Inspection of Welding
If the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly
The inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance framed to the beam or girder, the one-tenth reduction may
with the provisions of AWS D l.J except as modi fled ifl be used in proportioning the column for combined axial
Section 510.2. W.hen visual inspection is required to be force and flexure, provided that the axial force does not
performed by AWS certified welding inspectors, it shall be exceed O.15cJ>cFyAg for LRFD or O.15FyAg/.o.c for
so specified in the design documents. When uondestructive ASD,
testing is required, the process; exten ( and standards of
acceptanceshall be clearly defined in the design documents. where
513.5.4 Inspection of Slip-Critical High- gross area of member, mnr'

Strength Bolted Connections. specified minimum yield stress of the compression
flange, MPa
The inspection of slip-critical high-strength bolted resistance factor for compression = 0.90
connections shall be in accordance with the provisions of
safety factor for compression = 1.67
the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts.
A-1.4 Local Buckling
513.5.5 Identification of Steel
Flanges and webs of members subject to plastic hinging in
combined flexure and axial compression shall be compact
The fabricator shall be able to demonstrate by a written
with width-thickness ratios less than or equal to the limiting
procedure and by, actual practice a method of material
identification, visible at least through the "fit-up" operation, II.p defined in Table 502A.I or as modified as follows:
for the main structural elements of each shipping piece.

1. For webs of doubly symmetric wide flange members

and rectangular HSS in combined flexure and
compression
A-1.5 Stability and Second-Order Effects
Continuous beams not subjected to axial loads and that do

h/tw s 3.76 fI._E(1 __2~_75_P_u) (A-I-I) not contribute to lateral stability of framed structures may
, ~F; "'bPy be designed based on a first-order inelastic analysis or a
plastic mechanism analysis. Braced frames and moment
frames may be designed based on a first-order inelastic
analysis or a plastic mechanism analysis provided that
stability and second-order effects are taken into account,
hi'
,
i; s 1.12 fI. (2.33 - ~)€PbPy
~F;
~ 1.49
~F;
fI. Structures may be designed on the basis of a second-order
inelastic analysis. For beam-columns, connections and
(A-I-2) connected members, the required strengths shall be
where determined from a second-order inelastic analysis, where
equilibrium is satisfied on the deformed geometry, taking
into account the change in stiffness due to yielding.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000
MPa ,I
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the A-1.5a Braced Frames
type of steel being used, MPa
h = as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm In braced frames designed on the basis of inelastic analysis,
braces shall be designed to remain elastic under the design
Pu= required axial strength in compression, N
loads. The required axial strength for columns and
Py= member yield strength, N
web thickness, mm
compression braces shall not exceed, €Pc = (0. 85FyAg).
tw =
€Pb= resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
where
€Pc = 0.90(LRFD)
2. For flanges of rectangular box and hollow structural
sections of uniform thickness subject to bending or
A-1.5b Moment Frames
compression, flange cover plates, and diaphragm plates
between lines of fasteners or welds
In moment frames designed on the basis of inelastic
analysis, the required axial strength of columns shall not
bit::; 0.94 JEfFy (A-1-3) exceed €Pc = (0. 75FyAg),
where
where
b as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm €Pc = 0.90(LRFD)
t as defined in Section 502.4.2, mm
A-1.6 Columns and Other Compression Members
3. For circular hollow sections in flexure
In addition to the limits set in Sections A-1.5.a and A-1.5.b,
on s: 0.045EIFy (A-l-4)
the required axial strength of columns designed on the basis
of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the design strength,
where
€PcP n, determined according to the provisions of Section
505.3.
D = outside diameter of round HSS member, mm
Design by inelastic analysis is permitted if the column
j
slenderness ratio, L Ir, does not exceed 4. 71 ElF y,

where. A-1.8 Members under Combined Forces
L laterally unbraced length of a member, mm When inelastic analysis is used for symmetric members
r governing radius of gyration, mm subject to bending and axial force, the provisions in Section
508.1 apply. Inelastic analysis is not permitted for members
User Note: A well-proportioned member will not be subject to torsion and combined torsion, flexure, shear
expected to reach this limit. andlor axial force.
A-I.7 Beams and Other Flexural Members A-I.9 Connections
The required moment strength, Mu, of beams designed on

Connections adjacent to plastic hinging regions of
the basis of inelastic analysis shall not exceed the design
eonnected members shall be designed with sufficient
strength and doctility to sustain the forces anti deformations
strength, cfJMn' where
imposed under: the required loads.
(A-I-6)
cfJc = O.90(LRFD)
Design by inelastic analysis is permitted for members that

are compact as defined in Section 502A and as modified in
Section A-IA.
The laterally unbraced length, Lb, of the compression

flange adjacent to plastic hinge locations shall not exceed
Lpd, determined as follows.
1. For doubly symmetric and s,ingiy symmetric l-shaped

members with the compression flange equal to or larger
than the tension flange loaded in the plane of'rheweb:
where
smaller moment at end of unbraced length
of beam, N-mm
larger moment at end of unbraced length of
beam, N-mm
radius of gyration about minor axis, mm
(M1/M2) is positive when moments
cause reverse curvature and negative for
single curvature.
2. For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams:
Lpd = [0.17 + 0.10 (::)] (~)ry ~ (~)ry

0.10
(A-I-8)
There is no limit on Lb for members with circular or

square cross sections or for any beam bent about its
minor axis.

APPENDIX A-2
Us
= (0, 8Fy
f
- fo) (A-2-4)
DESIGN FOR PONDING o s
where
A-2.1 Simplified Design for Ponding
fo stress due to the load combination (D + R)
The roof system shall be considered stable for ponding and D nominal dead load
no further investigation is needed if both of the following R nominal load due to rainwater or snow, exclusive of
two conditions are met: the ponding contribution, MPa
(A-2-1) For roof framing consisting of primary and secondary

members, the combined stiffness shall be evaluated as
(A- 2-2) follows: enter Figure A-2-1 at the level of the computed
where stress index Up determined for the primary beam; move
horizontally to the computed C s value of the secondary
beams and then downward to the abscissa scale. The II
combined stiffness of the primary and secondary framing is
sufficient to prevent ponding if the flexibility constant read I
504SL: from this latter scale is more than the value of Cp computed
Cs""---
Is for the given primary member; if not, a stiffer primary or
column spacing in direction of girder (length of secondary beam, or combination of both, is required.
primary members), m
column spacing perpendicular to direction of girder A similar procedure must be followed using Figure A-2-2.
(length of secondary members), m For roof framing consisting of a series of equally spaced
spacing of secondary members, m wall-bearing beams, the stiffness shall be evaluated as
moment of inertia of primary members, mm4 follows. The beams are considered as secondary members
moment of inertia of secondary members, mm 4 supported on an infinitely stiff primary member. For this
moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on case, enter Figure A-2-2 with the computed stress index Us.
secondary members, mm 4 per m The limiting value of Cs is determined by the intercept of a
flexibility constant for the supporting beam horizontal line representing the Us value and the curve for
Flexibility constant for one foot width of the roof Cp = 0.
deck (s =
1.0)
User Note: The ponding deflection contributed by a metal
For trusses and steel JOIsts, the moment of inertia deck is usually such a small part of the total ponding
deflection of a roof panel that it is sufficient merely to limit
Is shall be decreased 15 percent when used in the above
its moment of inertia per meter of width normal to its span
equation. A steel deck shall be considered a secondary
member when it is directly supported by the primary to 3940l4mm4/m.
members.
For roof framing consisting of metal deck spanning between
A-2.2 Improved Design for Ponding beams supported on columns, the stiffness shall be
evaluated as follows. Employ Figure A-2-1 or A-2-2 using
The provisions given below are permitted to be used when a as Cs the flexibility constant for a I m width of the roof
more exact determination of framing stiffness is needed deck (S = 1.0).
than that given in Section A-2.1.
For primary members, the stress index shall be
U
p
::;:;0 (0.8Fy
fo
- fo) p
(A-2-3)
For secondary members, the stress index shall be

34
I- t- - -- APPENDIX A-3
3.2
3.0
- DESIGN FOR FATIGUE
28
- -
1/
-
tf A-3.1 General Provisions
2.6
2.4
111--
.-j-- The provisions of this Appendix apply to stresses calculated
2.2 ~ on the basis of service loads. The maximum permitted stress
Q.
::5 20 due to unfactored loads is O. 66F y'
><
{g II
It
$ 1.8 17-
OJ Stress range is defined as the magnitude of the change in
OJ 1.6
~ l- stress due to the application or removal of the service live
U) 1.4 V load. In the case of a stress reversal, the stress range shall be
12 computed as the numerical sum of maximum repeated
IV
1.0 1/ <.>V
tensile and compressive stresses or the numerical sum of
7~ maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at the
0.8
712 point of probable crack initiation.
0.6 ., -
0.4
In the case of complete-joint-penetration groove welds, the
maximum allowable design stress range calculated by Eq.
A-3-1 applies only to welds with internal soundness
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 06 0.7
meeting the acceptance requirements of Section 6.12.2 or
Upper Limit of Flexibility Constant Cp
6.13.2 of AWS Dl.l.
Figure A-2-1. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the live
primary systems.
load stress range is less than the threshold stress range,
3.4 FTH. See Table A-3-1.
3.2 ~ II
3.0
-- f-t-
II
No evaluation of fatigue resistance is required if the number
of cycles of application of live load is less than 20,000.
2.8 I~
-
2.6
II The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of
?c
24
IL
this Appendix is applicable to. structures wi.lh suitable
2.2 h corrosion protection 0.1' subject only to mildly corrosive
~ -,- f--
g 2.0
II atmospheres, such as normal atmospheric conditions.
II
j 1.8
.'. The cyclic load resistance determined by the provisions of
'"'"~ 1.6 - \'l1
r--':
this Appendix is applicable only to. structures subject to
Vi 1,4 1/ 1/ - temperatures not exceeding 300"F (ISO°C)
()
1.2
1.0 The engineer-of-record shall provide oi tiler complete details
V fj
0,8
including weld sizes or shall specify the planned cycle life
1/
and the maximum range of moments, shears and reactions
0.6
f- for the connections.
04 k v
I-" l- I-
0.2
I-" A-3.2 Calculation of Maximum Stresses and Stress
Ranges
0.1 0.2 0.3 OA 0.5 0.6 0.7
Upper Limit of Flexibilfty Constant Cs

Calculated stresses shall be based upon elastic analysis.
Stresses shall not be amplified by stress concentration
Figure A-2-2. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the
factors for geometrical discontinuities.
secondary systems
For bolts and threaded rods subject to axial tension, the
calculated stresses shall include the effects of prying action,
if any. In the case of axial stress combined with bending,

the maximum stresses, of each kind, shall be those 3. For tension-loaded plate elements connected at their
determined for concurrent arrangements of the applied load. end by cruciform, T, or corner details with complete-
joint-penetration (CIP) groove welds or partial joint-
For members having symmetric cross sections, the fasteners penetration (PIP) groove welds, fillet welds, or
and welds shall be arranged symmetrically about the axis of combinations of the preceding, transverse to the
the member, or the total stresses including those due to direction of stress, the design stress range on the cross
eccentricity shall be included in the calculation of the stress section of the tension-loaded plate element at the toe of
range. the weld shall be determined as follows:
For axially loaded angle members where the center of a. Based upon crack initiation from the toe of the weld on
gravity of the connecting welds lies between the line of the the tension loaded plate element the design stress range,
center of gravity of the angle cross section and the center of F SR, shall be determined by Eq. A-3-3, for stress
the connected leg, the effects of eccentricity shall be category C which is equal to
ignored. If the center of gravity of the connecting welds lies
outside this zone, the total stresses, including those due to
14.4 X 1011)°.333
joint eccentricity, shall be included in the calculation of
stress range.
FSR =( N ;::::68.9 (A-3-3)
A-3.3 Design Stress Range b. Based upon crack initiation from the root of the weld
the design stress range, F SR, on the tension loaded
The range of stress at service loads shall not exceed the plate element using transverse PIP groove welds, with
design stress range computed as follows. or without reinforcing or contouring fillet welds, the
design stress range on the cross section at the toe of the
I. For stress categories A, B, B_, C, D, E and E_ the weld shall be determined by Eq. A-3-4, stress category
design stress range, F SR, shall be determined by C' as follows:
Eq. A-3-1.
14.4 X 1011)°.333
cf X 329)°·333
(A-3-1)
FSR = RpJP ( N
FSR = ( . N ;::::FTH
(A-3-4)
where where
design stress range, MPa RpJP is the reduction factor for reinforced or nonreinforced
constant from Table A-3-1 for the category transverse PJP groove welds determined as follows:
number of stress range fluctuations in
design life
number of stress range fluctuations per day
x 365 x years of design life
1.12 - 1. 01 (~:) + 1.24 (~))
threshold fatigue stress range, maximum RpJP = to.167 s 1.0
( p
stress range for indefinite design life from
Table A-3-1, MPa
If RpJP = 1.0, use stress category C.
2. For stress category F, the design stress range, F SR,
shall be determined by Eq. A-3-2. 2a = the length of the nonwelded root face in the
direction of the thickness of the tension-loaded
plate, mm
w the leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if
(A-3-2) any, in the direction of the thickness of the tension-
loaded plate, mm
thickness of tension loaded plate, mm

c. Based upon crack initiation from the roots of a pair of For joints in which the material within the grip is not
transverse fillet welds on opposite sides of the tension limited to steel or joints which are not tensioned to the
loaded plate element the design stress range, requirements of Table 510.3.1, all axial load and moment
F SR, on the cross section at the toe of the welds shall applied to the joint plus effects of any prying action shall be
be determined by Eq. A-3-5, stress category C as assumed to be carried exclusively by the bolts or rods.
follows:
For joints in which the material within the grip is limited to
14.4 X 1011)°.333 (A-3-5)
steel and which are tensioned to the requirements of
Table 510.3.1, an analysis of the relative stiffness of the
FSR=RFlL ( N
connected parts and bolts shall be permitted to be used to
determine the tensile stress range in the pretensioned bolts
where
due to the total service live load and moment plus effects of
any prying action. Alternatively, the stress range in the bolts
RFlL is the reduction factor for joints using a pair of shall be assumed to be equal to the stress on the net tensile
transverse fillet welds only. area due to 20 percent of the absolute value of the service
load axial load and moment from dead, live and other loads.
+ 1. 24( W Itp))·
RFIL (
.
0.10
0.167
t,)
s 1. ° A-3.S Special Fabrication and Erection Requirements
ongitudinal backing b~HS are permitted to remain in place,

and if used, shall be continuous. If splicing is necessary for
If RFIL = 1.0, use stress category C. long joints the bar shall be joined with complete
penetration butt joints and the reinforcement ground prior to
A-3.4 Bolts and Threaded Parts assembly in the joint.
The range of stress at service loads shall not exceed the In transverse joints subject to tension, backing bars, if used,
stress range computed as follows. shall be removed and the joint back gouged and welded.
1. For mechanically fastened connections loaded in shear,

In transverse complete-joint-penetration T and comer joints,
the maximum range of stress in the connected material
a reinforcing fillet weld, not less than 6 mm in size shall be
at service loads shall not exceed the design stress range
added at re-entrant comers.
computed using Eq. A-3-1 where Cf and FTH are
taken from Section 2 of Table A-3.1. The surface roughness 'of flame cut edges subject to
significant cyclic tensile stress ranges shall not exceed
2. For high-strength bolts, common bolts, and threaded 25 um, where ASME B46.l is the reference standard.
anchor rods with cut, ground or rolled threads, the
maximum range of tensile stress on the net tensile area Reentrant corners at cuts, copes and weld access holes shall
from applied axial load and moment plus load due to form a radius of not less than 10 mm by predrilling or
prying action shall not exceed the design stress range subpunching and reaming a hole, or by thermal cutting to
computed using Eq. A-3-1. form the radius of the cut. If the radius portion is formed by
thermal cutting, the cut surface shall be ground to a bright
The factor Cf shall be taken as 3. 9 X 108 (as for metal surface.
stress category E'). The threshold stress, F TH shall be
taken as 48 MPa (as for stress category D). The net For transverse butt joints in regions of high tensile stress,
tensile area is given by Eq. A-3-6. run-off tabs shall be used to provide for cascading the weld
termination outside the finished joint. End dams shall not be
used. Run-off tabs shall be removed and the end of the weld
(A-3-6) finished flush with the edge of the member.
See Section 510.2.2b for requirements for end returns on

where
certain fillet welds subject to cyclic service loading.
pitch, mm per thread
the nominal diameter (body or shank diameter), mm
threads per mm

Table A-3.1 Fatigue Design Parameters.
Constant Threshold Potential Crack

Description Stress Category
C, FTHMPa Initiation Point
SECTION 1 - PLAIN MATERIAL AWAY FROM ANY WELDING
1.1 Base metal, except non-coated weathering steel,
with rolled or cleaned surface. Flame-cut edges with Away from all welds or
A 250 x 108 165
surface roughness value of 25 urn or less, but without structural connections
reentrant comers.
1.2 Non-coated weathering steel base metal with
rolled or cleaned surface. Flame-cut edges with Away from all welds or
B 120 x 108 liD
surface roughness value of 25 urn or less, but without structural connections
reentrant comers.
1.3 Member with drilled or reamed holes. Member
with reentrant comers at copes, cuts, block-outs or
At any external edge or
other geometrical discontinuities made to B 120 X 108 110
at hole perimeter
requirements of Appendix 3.5, except weld access
holes.
1.4 Rolled cross sections with weld access holes made At reentrant comer of
to requirements of Section 510.1.6 and Appendix A- weld access hole or at
3.5. Members with drilled or reamed holes containing C 44 X 108 69 any small hole (may
bolts for attachment of light bracing where there is a contain bolt for minor
small longitudinal component of brace force. connections)
SECTION 2 - CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1 Gross area of base metal in lap joints connected by
Through gross section
high-strength bolts in joints satisfying all requireme_nts B 120 X 108 no near hole
for slip-critical connections.
2.2 Base metal at net section of high-strength bolted
In net section
joints, designed on the basis of bearing resistance, but
B 120 X 108 110 originating at side of
fabricated and installed to all requirements for slip-
hole
critical connections.
In net section
2.3 Base metal at the net section of other mechanically
D 22 X 108 48 originating at side of
fastened joints except eye bars and pin plates
hole
In net section
2.4 Base metal at net section of eyebar head or pin
E 11 X 108 31 originating at side of
plate.
hole

Table A-3.1 (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters
Illustrative Typical Examples

SECTION 1 - PLAIN 'lATERlAL AWAY FROM ANY W , LDJNG
1.1 and 1.2

(
1.3
(a)~ (b)~ (C)~
1.4
(a)~
SECTION 2 - CONNECTED MATERIAL IN MECHANICALLY FASTENED JOINTS
2.1
~~4p-
...........
(8)
~~~
. (e) [ill
2.2
(c) GJ
2.3
(a)
2.4


Cf FTHMPa Initiation Point
SECTION 3 - WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1 Base metal and weld metal in members without From surface or
attachments built-up of plates or shapes connected by internal
continuous longitudinal complete-joint-penetration groove B 120 x 108 110 discontinuities in weld
welds, back gouged and welded from second side, or by away from end of
continuous fillet welds. weld
3.2 Base metal and weld metal in members without - From surface or
attachments built-up of plates or shapes, connected by internal
continuous longitudinal complete-joint-penetration groove Bf 61 x 108 83 discontinuities in
welds with backing bars not removed, or by continuous weld, including weld
partial-joint-penetration groove welds. attaching backing bars
From the weld
3.3 Base metal and weld metal termination of longitudinal
D 22 X 108 48 termination into the
welds at weld access holes in connected built-up members.
web or flange
In connected material
3.4 Base metal at ends of longitudinal intermittent fillet at start and stop
E 11 x 108 31
weld segments. locations of any weld
deposit
3.5 Base metal at ends of partial length welded coverplates In flange at toe of end
narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends, weld or in flange at
with or without welds across the ends of coverplates wider termination of
than the flange with welds across the ends. longitudinal weld or
Flange thickness s; 20 mm E 11 X 108 31 in edge of flange with
wide coverplates
Flanlije thickness> 20mm Ef 3.9 x 10 8 18
3.6 Base metal at ends of the partial length welded In edge of flange at
coverplates wider than the flange without welds across the E' 3.9 x 108 18 end of coverplate
ends. weld
SECTION 4 - LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTIONS
4.1 Base metal at junction of axially loaded members with Initiating from end of
longitudinally welded end connections. Welds shall be on . any weld termination
each side of the axis of the member to balance weld extending into the
stresses. base metal
t :0:::; 20mm E 11 X 108 31
t > 20mm E' 3.9 x 108 18

Table A-3.! (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters

SECTION 3 - WELDED JOINTS JOINING COMPONENTS OF BUILT-UP MEMBERS
3.1
(c)
(b)
3.2
(a)
3.3
(a) ~ (b)~
3.4
&::..c- (b~ (C~
(a) ~ ~ ~
3.5
C ~
~
(a) (b) (c)
3.6
(a) NoWe.\1
~
SECTION 4 - LONGITUDINAL FILLET WELDED END CONNECTlONS
4.1
(b)

!

Cf FTH MPa Initiation Point
SECTION 5 - WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1 Base metal and weld metal in adjacent to complete- From internal
joint-penetration groove welded splices in rolled or discontinuities in filler
B 120 X lOB 110
welded cross sections with welds ground essentially metal or along the
parallel to the direction of stress. fusion boundary
5.2 Base metal and weld metal in or adjacent to complete-
joint-penetration groove welded splices with welds ground From internal
essentially parallel to the direction of stress at transitions discontinuities in filler
in thickness or width made on a slope no greater than 8 to metal or along fusion
20% boundary or at start of
transition when
Fy < 620Mpa B 120 X lOB 110
Fy ~ 620MPa
Fy ~ 620Mpa B' 61 X 108 83
5.3 Base metal with Fy equal to or greater than 620 MPa
From internal
and weld metal III or adjacent to complete-joint-
discontinuities in filler
penetration groove welded splices with welds ground
B 120 X 108 110 metal or discontinuities
essentially parallel to the direction of stress at transitions
along the fusion
in width made on a radius of not less than 600mm with the
boundary
'p_ointof tangency at the end of the groove weld.
5.4 Base metal and weld metal in or adjacent to the toe of From surface
complete-joint-penetration T or comer joints or splices,
with or without transitions in thickness having slopes no
. C 44 x 108 69
discontinuity at toe of
weld extending into
greater than 8 to 20%, when weld reinforcement is not base metal or along
removed. fusion boundary.
5.5 Base metal and weld metal at transverse end Initiating from
connections of tension-loaded plate elements using partial- geometrical
joint- penetration butt or T or comer joints, with discontinuity at toe of
reinforcing or contouring fillets, F SR shall be the smaller weld extending into
of the toe crack or root crack stress range. base metal or,
initiating at weld root
Crack initiating from weld toe: C 44 x 108 69 subject to tension
Eqn. None extending up and then
Crack initiating from weld root: C'
A-3-4 provided out through weld

SECTION 5 - WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS
5.1
(a) i f}
(b)
5.2
Fy ~9OkI1 (620 MPa)

Cat,B'
m (d)
5.3 / R ~ 2'-0' (800 rrm)
CJP'FInIal,
Fy ~90 kal (820 MPa)

f !1i
(b)
+1+
(c)
Cat.B'
5.4
{Ii(d)
CF?
5.5 ClIO to( polOnllaJ Otllok
fnlUII110n
clue 10 bendlnll
~IenF--l"'-
~(e)

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5-139 II

SECTION 5 - WELDED JOINTS TRANSVERSE TO DIRECTION OF STRESS (cont'd)
5.6 Base metal and filler metal at transverse end Initiating from
connections of tension-loaded plate elements using a pair geometrical
of fillet welds on opposite sides of the plate F SR shall be discontinuity at toe of
the smaller of the toe crack or root crack stress range. weld extending into
base metal or,
Crack initiating from weld toe: c 44 X 108 69
initiating at weld root
Crack initiating from weld root: subject to tension
["
Eqn. None
extending up and then
A-3-5 provided
out through weld
S.7 Base metal of tension-loaded plate elements and on
I From geometrical
girders and rolled beam webs or flanges at toe of discontinuity at toe of
transverse fillet welds adjacent to welded transverse c 44 x 108 69
fillet extending into
stiffeners.
base metal
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS
6.1 Base metal at details attached by complete-joint-
penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal loading
only when the detail embodies a transition radius R with
the weld termination ground smooth.
R ;?: 600 mm B 120 X 108 110 Near point of tangency
of radius at edge of
600mm> R ;?: 150mm c 44 x 10 8 69 member
IS0mm> R ;?:SOmm D 22 X 108 48
50mm> R E 11 X 108 31

Illustrative Typical Exolnples
5.6
5.7
(a)
SECTJON 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS

6.1
(0)

Table A-3.! (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters

SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (cont'd)
6.2 Base metal at details of equal thickness attached by
complete-joint-penetration groove welds subject to
transverse loading with or without longitudinal loading
when the detail embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth:
When weld reinforcement is removed:
R ~ 600 mm B 120 X 108 110 Near points of

tangency of radius or
600 mm > R ~ 150 mm C 44 x 108 69 in the weld or at fusion
150 mm > R ~ 50 mm D 22 x 108 48 boundary or member
or attachment
50mm> R E 11 x 108 31
When weld reinforcement is not removed:
R ~ 600mm C 44 x 108 69 At toe of the weld

either along edge of
600 mm > R ~ 150 mm C 44 x 108 69
member or the
ISO mm > R ~ 50 mm D 22 x 108 48 attachment
50mm> R E 11 x 108 31
6.3 Base metal at details of unequal thickness attached by
,
complete-joint- penetration groove welds subject to
transverse loading with or without longitudinal loading
when the detail embodies a transition radius R with the
weld termination ground smooth.
When weld reinforcement is removed:
At toe of weld along
R > 50mm D 48 edge of thinner
R s 50mm E 31 material in weld
termination in small
radius
When weld reinforcement is not removed:
Any radius E 31 At toe of weld along

edge of thinner
material

6.2
(c)
~~
(d)
(e)
6.3
(c)
(d)

Stress Threshold FTH Potential Crack

Description
Category
Constant Cf
MPa Initiation Point
SECTION 6 - BASE METAL AT WELDED TRANSVERSE MEMBER CONNECTIONS (cont'd
6.4 Base metal subject to longitudinal stress at transverse
members, with or without transverse stress, attached by
fillet or partial penetration groove welds parallel to
In weld termination
direction of stress when the detail embodies a transition or from the toe of
radius, R, with the weld termination ground smooth: the weld extending
into member
R >SOmm D 22 x 108 48
R :0; SOmm £ 11 X 108 31

SECTION 7 - BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS'
7.1 Base metal subject to longitudinal loading at details
attached by fillet welds parallel or transverse to the
direction of stress where the detail embodies no transition
radius and with detail length in direction of stress, a, and
attachment height normal to the surface of the member, b:
a < 50 mm C 44 x 108 69
SO mm s; a:O; 12b D 22 x 108 48 In the member at the

end of the weld
or 100 mm
a> 12b or IOOmm £ 11 x 108 31
when b is :0; 25 mm
a> 12b or IOOmm £' 3.9 x 108 18
when b is > 25 mm
7.2 Base metal subject to longitudinal stress at details
attached by fillet or partial-joint-penetration groove welds,
with or without transverse load on detail, when the detail
In weld termination
embodies a transition, R, with weld termination ground
. extending into
smooth:
member
R >SOmm D 22 x 108 48
R :O;SOmm e 11 x 108 31
I "Attachments" as used herein, is defined as any steel detail welded to a member which, by its mere presence and independent of its
loading, causes a discontinuity in the stress flow in the member and thus reduces the fatigue resistance.

Table A-3.l (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters
(c)
(a)
SECTION 7 - BASE METAL AT SHORT ATTACHMENTS

7.1
(d)
(b)
7.2

Table A-3.l (cont.) Fatigue Design Parameters

C, FTHMPa Initiation Point
SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Base metal at stud-type shear connectors attached by At toe of weld in base
fillet or electric stud welding. C 44 x lOB 69 metal
8.2 Shear on throat of continuous or intermittent 150 x 1010

F 55 In throat of weld
longitudinal or transverse fillet welds. (Eq. A-3-2)
At end of weld in base
8.3 Base metal at plug or slot welds. E 11 X lOB 31 metal
150 x 1010
8.4 Shear on plug or slot welds. F 55 At faying surface
(Eq. A-3-2)
8.5 Not fully tightened high-strength bolts, common bolts,

At the root of the
threaded anchor rods and hanger rods with cut, ground or
£' 3.9 x 108 48 threads extending into
rolled threads. Stress range on tensile stress area due to
the tensile stress area.
live load plus prying action when applicable.


SECTION 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
8.1
(a) (b)
8.2
8.3
~ ~ ....
... ... ....
(a)
8.4
(a)
8.5
.. .
. ~.' ~. - .' ~-- - .. .
-
-' "

CHAPTER 5·- Structural Stf7el 5-147
APPENDIX A-4 5 nominal snow load

T nominal forces and deformations due to the
STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE design-basis fire defined in Section A-4.2.1
CONDITIONS
A lateral notional load, Ni =
0.002Yi, as defined in
A-4.1 General Provisions Appendix A-7.2, where Ni =
notional lateral load applied
at framing level i and Yi =
gravity load from combination
See Definitions. A-4-1 acting on framing level i, shall be applied in
combination with the loads stipulated in Eq. A-4-1. Unless
A-4.1.1 Performance Objective otherwise stipulated by the authority having jurisdiction, D,
Land 5 shall be the nominal loads specified in ASCE 7.
Structural components, members and building frame
systems shall be designed so as to maintain their load-
A-4.2 Structural Design for Fire Conditions by
bearing function during the design-basis fire and to satisfy
Analysis
other performance requirements specified for the building
occupancy.
It is permitted to design structural members, components
and building frames for elevated temperatures in accordance
Deformation criteria shall be applied where the means of
with the requirements of this section.
providing structural fire resistance, or the design criteria for
fire barriers, requires consideration of the deformation of
A-4.2.1 Design-Basis Fire
the load-carrying structure.
A design-basis fire shall be identified to describe the
Within the compartment of fire origin, forces and
heating conditions for the structure. These heating
deformations from the design-basis fire shall not cause a
conditions shall relate to the fuel commodities and
breach of horizontal or vertical compartmentation.
compartment characteristics present in the assumed fire
area. The fuel load density based on the occupancy of the
A-4.1.2 Design by Engineering Analysis
space shall be considered when determining the total fuel
load. Heating conditions shall be specified either in terms of
The analysis methods in Section A-4.2 are permitted to be
a heat flux or temperature of the upper gas layer created by
used to document the anticipated performance of steel
the fire. The variation of the heating conditions with time
framing when subjected to design-basis fire scenarios.
shall be determined for the duration of the fire.
Methods in Section A-4.2 provide evidence of compliance
with performance objectives established in Section A-4.1.1.
When the analysis methods in Section A-4.2 are used to
demonstrate an equivalency as an alternative material or
The analysis methods in Section A-4.2 are permitted to be
method as permitted by a building code, the design-basis
used to demonstrate an equivalency for an alternative
fire shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E119.
material or method, as permitted by the building code.
Table A-4.2.1 Properties of Steel at Elevated Temperatures
A-4.1.3 Design by Qualification Testing
Steel
The qualification testing methods in Section A-4.3 are Temperature kE = ErniE ky = FymlFy ku = FurnlFy
°C
permitted to be used to document the fire resistance of steel
framing subject to the standardized fire testing protocols
20 * * *
required by building codes.
93 1.00 * *
204 0.90 * *
316 0.78 * *
A-4.1.4 Load Combinations and Required Strength 399 0.70 1.00 1.00
427 0.67 0.94 0.94
The required strength of the structure and its elements shall 538 0.49 0.66 0.66
be determined from the following gravity load combination: 649 0.22 0.35 0.35
760 0.11 0.16 0.16
[0.9 or 1. 2]D + T + O.5L + 0.25 (A-4-1) 871 0.07 0.07 0.07
982 0.05 0.04 0.04
where 1093 0.02 0.02 0.02
1204 0.00 0.00 0.00
D nominal dead load
* Use ambient properties.
L nominal occupancy live load

A-4.2.1.1 Localized Fire A-4.2.2 Temperatures in Structural Systems

under Fire Conditions
Where the heat release rate front [he fire is insu fticient to
cause flashover, a localized fire exposure shall be assumed. Temperatures within structural members, components and
In such cases, U1C fuel com posi lion arrangement o f the fuel frames due to the heating conditions posed by the design-
array and Boor area occupied by the fuel shall be used to basis fire shall be determined by a heat transfer analysis.
determine the radiant heat flux from th flame and smoke
plume to the structure, Table A-4.2.2 Properties of Concrete at Elevated
Temperatures
A-4.2.1.2 Post-Flashover Compartment Fires Concrete Ecu(%)
kc = f~m/f~
Temp r"lUre Ecm/Ec
Where the heat release rate from the fire is sufficient to
DC NWC LWC LWC
cause flashover. a post-flashover compartment tire shall be 20 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.25
assumed. The determination of the temperature versus lime 93 0.95 1.00 0.93 0.34
profile resulting frorn the fire shall include 'thel load, 204 0.90 1.00 0.75 0.46
ventilation characteristics 10 the space (natural and 288 0,86 1.00 0.61 0.58
mechanical) eompartment dimensions and thermal 316 0.83 0.98 0.57 0.62
characteristics of the compartment boundary. 427 0,71 0.85 0.38 0.80
538 0.54 0.71 0.20 1.06
A-4.2.1.3 Fire Duration 649 0.38 0.58 0.092 1.32
760 0,21 0.45 0.073 1.43
The fire duration in a particular area shall be determined by 871 0.10 0.31 0.055 1.49
considering the total combustible mass, in other words, fuel 982 0.05 0.18 0.036 1.50
load available in the space. li1 the case 0-1' either a localized 1093 0,01 0.05 0.018 1.50
fire 01' a post-flashover compartment fire, the time Iuration 1204 0.00 0.00 0.00
shall be determined as the total combustible mass divided
by the mass loss rare, except where determined from For lightweight concrete (LWC), values of Ecu shall be
Section A-4,2.1 ,2. obtained from tests.
A-4.2.1.4 Exterior Fires A-4.2.3 Material Strengths at Elevated

Temperatures
The exposure of exteri-or structure to flames projecting from
windows or other wall openings as a result of a post- Material properties at elevated temperatures shall be
flashover compartment fire shall be considered along with determined from test data. In the absence of such data, it is
the radiation from the interior fire through the opening, The permitted to use the material properties stipulated in this
shape and length of the flame projection shall be used along section. These relationships do not apply for steels with a
with the distance between the flame and the exterior yield strength in excess of 448MPa or concretes with
steelwork to determine the heal flux to the steel. The specified compression strength in excess of 55 MPa.
method ,identified in Section A-4.2. J.2 shall be used for
describing the characteristics or
the interior compartment A-4.2.3.1 Thermal Elongation
fire.
Thermal expansion of structural and reinforcing steels: For
A-4.2.1.5 Active Fire Protection Systems
calculations at temperatures above 65°C, the coefficient of
thermal expansion shall be 1.4 X 10-5 j0c.
The effects of active fire protection systems shall be
considered when describing the design-basis fire.
Thermal expansion of normal weight concrete: For
Where automatic smoke and heat vents are installed in non- calculations at temperatures above 65°C, the coefficient of
sprinklered spaces, the resulting smoke temperature shall be thermal expansion shall be 1.8 X 10-5 j0c.
determined from calculation.
Thermal expansion of lightweight concrete: For calculations
at temperatures above 65°C, the coefficient of thermal
expansion shall be 7.9 X 10-6 j0c.

A-4.2.3.2 Mechanical Properties at Elevated A-4.2.4.3 Methods of Analysis

Temperatures
A-4.2.4.3a Advanced Methods of Analysis
The deterioration in strength and stiffness of structural
members, components, and systems shall be taken into The methods of analysis in this section are permitted for the
account in the structural analysis of the frame. design of all steel building structures for fire conditions.
The design-basis fire exposure shall be that determined in
The values Fym, Fum, Em, f~m' Eem, and E::euat elevated Section A-4.2.1. The analysis shall include both a thermal
temperature to be used in structural analysis, expressed as response and the mechanical response to the design-basis
the ratio with respect to the property at ambient, assumed to fire.
be 20°C, shall be defined as in Tables A-4.2.1 and A-4.2.2.
It is permitted to interpolate between these values. The thermal response shall produce a temperature field in
each structural element as a result of the design-basis fire
A-4.2.4 Structural Design Requirements and shall incorporate temperature dependent thermal
properties of the structural elements and fire-resistive
A-4.2.4.1 General Structural Integrity materials as per Section A-4.2.2.
The structural frame shall be capable of providing adequate The mechanical response results in forces and deflections in
strength and deformation capacity to withstand, as a system, the structural system subjected to the thermal response
the structural actions developed during the fire within the calculated from the design-basis fire. The mechanical
prescribed limits of deformation. The structural system shall response shall take into account explicitly the deterioration
be designed to sustain local damage with the structural in strength and stiffness with increasing temperature, the
system as a whole remaining stable. effects of thermal expansions and large deformations. ; I
Boundary conditions and connection fixity must represent

Continuous load paths shall be provided to transfer all the proposed structural design. Material properties shall be
forces from the exposed region to the final point of defined as per Section A-4.2.3.
resistance. The foundation shall be designed to resist the
forces and to accommodate the deformations developed The resulting analysis shall consider all relevant limit states,
during the design-basis fire. such as excessive deflections, connection fractures, and
overall or local buckling.
A-4.2.4.2 Strength Requirements and Deformation
Limits A-4.2.4.3b Simple Methods of Analysis
Conformance of the structural system to these requirements The methods of analysis in this section are applicable for
shall be demonstrated by constructing a mathematical the evaluation of the performance of individual members at
model of the structure based on principles of structural elevated temperatures during exposure to fire.
mechanics and evaluating this model for the internal forces
and deformations in the members of the structure developed The support and restraint conditions (forces, moments and
by the temperatures from the design-basis fire. boundary conditions) applicable at normal temperatures
may be assumed to remain unchanged throughout the fire
Individual members shall be provided with adequate exposure.
strength to resist the shears, axial forces and moments
determined in accordance with these provisions. 1. Tension members
Connections shall develop the strength of the connected It is permitted to model the thermal response of a
members or the forces indicated above. Where the means of tension element using a one-dimensional heat transfer
providing fire resistance requires the consideration of equation with heat input as directed by the design-basis
deformation criteria, the deformation of the structural fire defined in Section A-4.2.1.
system, or members thereof, under the design-basis fire The design strength of a tension member shall be
shall not exceed the prescribed limits. determined using the provisions of Section 504, with
steel properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3 and
assuming a uniform temperature over the cross section
using the temperature equal to the maximum steel
temperature.

2. Compression members A-4.3 Design by Qualification Testing
It is permitted to model the thermal response of a A-4.3.1 Qualification Standards

compression element using a one-dimensional heat
transfer equation with heat input as directed by the Structural members and components in reel buildings shall
design-basis fire defined in Section A-4.2.1. be qualified tor the raling period in conformance with
ASTM E J 19. It shall be permitted to demonstrate
The design strength of a compression member shall be compliance with these requirements using (he procedures
determined using the provisions of Section 505 with specified for steel eonstructlon in Section 5 of AS E/SFp·
steel properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3. 29.
3. Flexural members A-4.3.2 Restrained Construction
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural For floor and roof assemblies and individual beams ill
elements using a one-dimensional heat transfer buildings, a restrained condition exists when the
equation to calculate bottom flange temperature and to surrounding or supporting structure is capable of resisting
assume that this bottom flange temperature is constant actions caused by thermal expansion throughout (he range
over the depth of the member. of anticipated elevated temperatures.
The design strength of a flexural member shall be Steel beams, girders and frames supporting concrete slabs
determined using the provisions of Section 506 with that are welded or bolted to integral framing members (in
steel properties as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3. other words, columns, girders) shall be considered
restrained construction.
4. Composite floor members
A-4.3.3 Unrestrained Construction
It is permitted to model the thermal response of flexural
elements supporting a concrete slab using a one- Steel beams, girders and frames that do not. support a
dimensional heat transfer equation to calculate bottom concrete slab shalf be considered unrestrained unless the
flange temperature. That temperature shall be taken as members arc bolted or welded to surrounding construction
constant between the bottom flange and mid-depth of (hot bas been specifically designed and detailed to resist
the web and shall decrease linearly by no more than 25 actions caused by thermal expansion.
percent from the mid-depth of the web to the top flange
of the beam. A steel member bearing on a wall in a single span or at the
end span of multiple spans shall be considered unrestrained
The design strength of a composite flexural member unless the wall has been designed and detailed to resist
shall be determined using the provisions of Section effects of thermal expansion.
509, with reduced yield stresses in the steel consistent
with the temperature variation described under thermal
response.
A-4.2.4.4 Design Strength
The design strength shall be determined as in Section

502.3.3. The nominal strength, Rn, shall be calculated using
material properties, as stipulated in Section A-4.2.3, at the
temperature developed by the design-basis fire.

CHAPTER 5 StrLlctul-al Steel 5-151
APPENDIX A-5 A-S.2.4 Base Metal Notch Toughness
EVALUATION OF EXISTING Where welded tension splices in heavy shapes and plates as
STRUCTURES defined in Section 501.3.1 d are critical to the performance
of the structure, the Charpy V-Notch toughness shall be
A-S.I General Provisions determined in accordance with the provisions of Section
501.3.ld. If the notch toughness so determined does not
These provisions shall be applicable when the evaluation of meet the provisions of Section 501.3.1d, the engineer-of-
an existing steel structure is specified for (a) verification of record shall determine if remedial actions are required.
a specific set of design loadings or (b) determination of the
available strength of a load resisting member or system. The A-S.2.S Weld Metal
evaluation shall be performed by structural analysis
(Section A-5.3), by load tests (Section A-5A), or by a Where structural performance is dependent on existmg
combination of structural analysis and load tests, as welded connections, representative samples of weld metal
specified in the contract documents. Where load tests are shall be obtained. Chemical analysis and mechanical tests
used, the engineer-of-record shall first analyze the structure, shall be made to characterize the weld metal. A
prepare a testing plan, and develop a written procedure to determination shall be made of the magnitude and
prevent excessive permanent deformation or catastrophic consequences of imperfections. If the requirements of AWS
collapse during testing. Dl.l are not met, the engineer-of-record shall determine if
remedial actions are required.
A-S.2 Material Properties
A-S.2.6 Bolts and Rivets
A-S.2.I Determination of Required Tests
Representative samples of bolts shall be inspected to
The Engineer-of-Record shall determine the specific tests determine markings and classifications. Where bolts cannot
that are required from Section A-5.2.2 through A-5.2.6 and be properly identified visually, representative samples shall
specify the locations where they are required. Where be removed and tested to determine tensile strength in
available, the use of applicable project records shall be accordance with ASTM F606 or ASTM F606M and the bolt
permitted to reduce or eliminate the need for testing. classified accordingly. Alternatively, the assumption that
the bolts are ASTM A307 shall be permitted. Rivets shall be
A-S.2.2 Tensile Properties assumed to be ASTM A502, Grade I, unless a higher grade
is established through documentation or testing.
Tensile properties of members shall be considered in
evaluation by structural analysis (Section A-5.3) or load A-S.3 Evaluation by Structural Analysis
tests (Section A-5A). Such properties shall include the yield
stress, tensile strength and percent elongation. Where A-S.3.1 Dimensional Data
available, certified mill test reports or certified reports of
tests made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in All dimensions used in the evaluation, such as spans,
accordance with ASTM A6/A6M or A568/A568M, as column heights, member spacings, bracing locations, cross
applicable, shall be permitted for this purpose. Otherwise, section dimensions, thicknesses and connection details,
tensile tests shall be conducted in accordance with shall be determined from a field survey. Alternatively, when
ASTMA370 from samples cut from components of the available, it shall be permitted to determine such
structure. dimensions from applicable project design or shop drawings
with field verification of critical values.
A-S.2.3 Chemical Composition
A-S.3.2 Strength Evaluation
Where welding is anticipated for repair or modification of
existing structures, the chemical composition of the steel Forces (load effects) in members and connections shall be
shall be determined for use in preparing a welding determined by structural analysis applicable to the type of
procedure specification (WPS). Where available, results structure evaluated. The load effects shall be determined for
from certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests the loads and factored load combinations stipulated in
made by the fabricator or a testing laboratory in accordance Section 502.2. The available strength of members and
with ASTM procedures shall be permitted for this purpose. connections shall be determined from applicable provisions
Otherwise, analyses shall be conducted in accordance with of Sections 502 through 511 of this Specification.
ASTM A751 from the samples used to determine tensile
properties, or from samples taken from the same locations.

A-S.3.3 Serviceability Evaluation A-S.4.2 Serviceability Evaluation
Where required, the deformations at service loads shall be When load tests are prescribed, the structure shall be loaded
calculated and reported. incrementally to the service load level. Dcformntiens shall
be monitored for II period or one hour. . he structure shall
A-S.4 Evaluation by Load Tests then be unloaded and the deformation recorded.
A-S.4.1 Determination of Load Rating by Testing A-S.S Evaluation Report
To determine the load rating of an existing floor or roof After the evaluation of an exisnug structure has been
structure by testing, a test load shall be applied completed, the engineer-of-record shall prepare a report
incrementally in accordance with the engineer of record's documenting the evaluation. The report shall indicate
plan. The structure shall be visually inspected for signs of whether the evaluation was performed by structural
distress or imminent failure at each load level. Appropriate analysis, by loud testing or by a combination or structural
measures shall be taken if these or any other unusual analysis and load testing. Furthermore, when testing is
conditions are encountered. performed, the report shall include the loads and load
combination used and the load-deforrnetion and time-
The tested strength of the structure shall be taken as the deformation relationships observed. An relevant
maximum applied test load plus the in-situ dead load. The information obtained from design drawings, mill test reports
live load rating of a floor structure shall be determined by and auxiliary material testing shall also be-reported. Finally,
setting the tested strength equal to 1. 2D + 1.6L, where the report shall indicate whether the structure, including all
D is the nominal dead load and L is the nominal live load members and connections, is adequate to withstand the load
rating for the structure. effects.
The nominal live load rating of the floor structure shall not
exceed that which can be calculated using applicable
provisions of the specification. For roof structures, L; ' S,
or R as defined in the Symbols, shall be substituted for L.
More severe load combinations shall be used where
required by this code. Periodic unloading shall be
considered once the service load level is attained and after
the onset of inelastic structural behavior is identified to
document the amount of permanent set and the magnitude
of the inelastic deformations. Deformations of the structure,
such as member deflections, shall be monitored at critical
locations during the test, referenced to the initial position
before loading. It shall be demonstrated, while maintaining
maximum test load for one hour that the deformation of the
structure does not increase by more than 10 percent above
that at the beginning of the holding period. It is permissible
to repeat the sequence if necessary to demonstrate
compliance.
Deformations of the structure shall also be recorded 24

hours after the test loading is removed to determine the
amount of permanent set. Because the amount of acceptable
permanent deformation depends on the specific structure, no
limit is specified for permanent deformation at maximum
loading. Where it is not feasible to load test the entire
structure, a segment or zone of not less than one complete
bay, representative of the most critical conditions, shall be
selected.

APPENDIXA-6 For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
STABILITY BRACING FOR

p = required axial compressive strength using LRFD
COLUMNS AND BEAMS r load combinations, N
A-6.1 General Provisions For design according to Section 5023.4 (ASD)
Bracing is assumed to be perpendicular to the members to

be braced; for inclined or diagonal bracing, the brace p = required axial compressive strength using ASD load
strength (force or moment) and stiffness (force per unit r combinations, N
displacement or moment per unit rotation) shall be adjusted
for the angle of inclination. The evaluation of the stiffness A-6.3.2 Nodal Bracing
furnished by a brace shall include its member and geometric
properties, as well as the effects of connections and The required brace strength is
anchoring details.
(A-6-3)
Two general types of bracing systems are considered,
relative and nodal. A relative brace controls the movement The required brace stiffness is
of the brace point with respect to adjacent braced points. A
nodal brace controls the movement at the braced point
Pbr = cP1(8P
without direct interaction with adjacent braced points. The r
available strength and stiffness of the bracing shall equal or 4) (LRFD) Pbr = n (8~r) (ASD)
exceed the required limits unless analysis indicates that
smaller values are justified by analysis. (A-6-4)
A second-order analysis that includes an initial out-of- cP = O. 7S(LRFD) n= 2. OO(ASD)

straightness of the member to obtain brace strength and
stiffness is permitted in lieu of the requirements of this
appendix. For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
A-6.2 Column Bracing p r = required axial compressive strength using LRFD

load combinations, N
It is permitted to brace an individual column at end and
intermediate points along its length by either relative or For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
nodal bracing systems. It is assumed that nodal braces are
equally spaced along the column. pr = required axial compressive strength using ASD load
combinations, N
A-6.2.1 Relative Bracing
A-6.3 Beams Bracing
The required brace strength is
At points of support for beams, girders and trusses, restraint
against rotation about their longitudinal axis shall be
(A-6-1)
provided. Beam bracing shall prevent the relative
displacement of the top and bottom flanges, in other words,
The required brace stiffness is twist of the section. Lateral stability of beams shall be
provided by lateral bracing, torsional bracing or a
Pbr = cP1 (2Pr)

combination of the two. In members subjected to double
4 (LRFD) Pbr = n (2~r) (ASD)
curvature bending, the inflection point shall not be
considered a brace point.
(A-6-2)
where
cP = O.7S(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD)
Lb = distance between braces, mm

A-6.3.1 Lateral Bracing where
Bracing shall be attached near the compression flange, cp = O. 7S(LRFD) n= 2. OO(ASD)

except for a cantilevered member, where an end brace shall
be attached near the top (tension) flange. Lateral bracing For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD)
shall be attached to both flanges at the brace point nearest
the inflection point for beams subjected to double curvature M = required flexural strength using LRFD load
bending along the length to be braced. r combinations, N-mm
A-6.3.1.1.1 Relative Bracing For design according to Section 502.3.4 (ASD)
The required brace strength is M = required flexural strength using ASD load
r combinations, N-mm
(A-6-5)
When Lb is less than Lq, the maximum unbraced length for
The required brace stiffness is
Mn then Lb in
Eq. A-6-8 shall be permitted to be taken equal to Lq.
A-6.3.2 Torsional Bracing
where II is permitted to provide either nodal 0.1' continuous

torsional bracing along the beam length. TLis permitted to
cp = O. 7S(LRFD) n = 2. OO(ASD) . attach the bracing at any cross-sectional location and it need
not be attached near the compression flange, The
connection between a torsional brace and the beam shall be
ho distance between flange centroids, mm
able to support the required moment given below.
Cd 1.0 for bending in single curvature; 2.0 for double
curvature; Cd = 2.0 only applies to the brace A-6.3.2.2.1 Nodal Bracing
closest to the inflection point
Lb = laterally unbraced length, mm The required bracing moment is

(A-6-9)
Mr = required flexural strength using LRFD load
combinations, N-mm
The required cross-frame or diaphragm bracing stiffness is
Pr
Mr = required flexural strength usmg ASD load PrB = ( 1--Pr) (A-6-1O)
combinations, N-mm e.;
where
A-6.3.1.1.2 Nodal Bracing
The required brace strength is Pr = -cp 1 (2. 4LM;) 2 (LRFD) Pr = n (2.4LM;)

. 2 (ASD)
nElyCb nElyC b
(A-6-7) (A-6-11)
The required brace stiffness is

P sec
_ 3. (1.
- h
3E Shot!
12 +
tsb~)
12
(A-6-12)
o
10MrCd)
= A:1 (10M C) r d
Pbr L h (LRFD) Pbr = n( L h (ASD) where
." b 0 . b 0
(A-6-8) cp = O.7S(LRFD) n = 3. OO(ASD)

User Note: n = 1. 52/cJ> = 3.00 in Eq. A-6-11 because A-6.4 Beaam-Column Bracing
the moment term is squared.
For bracing of beam-columns, the required strength and
L == span length, mrn stiffness for the axial force shall be determine as specified
n number of nodal braced points within the span in Section 6.2, and the required strength and stiffness for the
E modulus of elasticity of steel = 200,000 MPa flexure shall be determined as specified in Section 6.3. The
out-of-plane moment of inertia, mm4 values so determine shall be combines as follows:
Iy
Cb modification factor defined in Section 506
a. When relative lateral bracing is used, the required
tw beam web thickness, mm
strength shall be taken as the sum of the values
ts web stiffener thickness, mm determined using Eq. A-6-1 and A-6-5, and the
bs stiffener width for one-sided stiffeners (use twice required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the
the individual stiffener width for pairs of values determined using Eqs. A-6-2 and A-6-6.
stiffeners), mm
PT brace stiffness excluding web distortion, b. When nodal lateral bracing is used, the required
N-mmlradian strength shall be taken as the sum of the values
«; web distortional stiffness, including the effect of
web transverse stiffeners, if any, N-mm/radian
determined using Eqs. A-6-3 and A-6-7, and the
required stiffness shall be taken as the sum of the
values determined using Eqs A-6-4 and A-6-8. In Eqs.
For design according to Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) A-6-4 and A-6-8, Lb for beam-columns shall be taken
as the actual unbraced length; the provisions in Section
Mr = required flexural strength using LRFD load 6.2.2 and 6.3.1 b that Lb need not be taken less than the
combinations, N-mm
maximum permitted effective length based upon P r
and Mr shall not be applied.
c. When torsional bracing is provided for flexure in

Mr required flexural strength using ASD load
combination with relative or nodal bracing for axial
combinations, N-mm
force, the required strength and stiffness shall be
combined or distributed in a manner that is consistent
If Psec < PT, Eq. A-6-10 is negative, which indicates that with the resistance provided by the element(s) of the
torsional beam bracing will not be effective due to actual bracing details.
inadequate web distortional stiffness.
When required, the web stiffener shall extend the full depth
of the braced member and shall be attached to the flange if
the torsional brace is also attached to the flange.
Alternatively, it shall be permissible to stop the stiffener
short by a distance equal to 4tw from any beam flange that
is not directly attached to the torsional brace. When Lb is
less than Lq , then Lb in Eq. A-6-9 shall be permitted to be
taken equal to Lq-
A-6.3.1.2.2 Continuous Torsional Bracing
For continuous bracing, use Eqs. A-6-9, A-6-10 and A-6-13

with Lin taken as l.0 and Lb taken as Lq; the bracing
moment and stiffness are given per unit span length. The
distortional stiffness for an un stiffened web is
3.3Et!
(A-6-13)
Psec = 12ho

5-156 CHAPTER 5 -- Structural Steel
where
APPENDIXA-7
DIRECT ANALYSIS METHOD required axial compressive strength under
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N
A-7.1 General Requirements rrzEl/LZ, evaluated in the plane of bending
and a = 1. O(LRF D) a = 1. 6(ASD)

Members shall satisfy the provisions of Section 508.1 with
the nominal column strengths, P n' determined using 2. A notional load, Ni = O.002Yi' applied
K = 1. O. The required strengths for members, independently in two orthogonal directions, shall be
connections and other structural elements shall be applied as a lateral load in all load combinations. This
determined using a second order elastic analysis with the load shall be in addition to other lateral loads, if any,
constraints presented in Section A-7.3.
where
All component and connection deformations that contribute
to the lateral displacement of the structure shall be
notional lateral load applied at level i , N
considered in the analysis. gravity load from the LRFD load combination
or 1.6 times the ASD load combination
A-7.2 Notional Loads
applied at level i, N
Notional loads shall be applied to the lateral framing system
The notional load coefficient of 0.002 is based on an
to account for the effects of geometric imperfections,
assumed initial story out-of-plumbness ratio of 11500.
inelasticity, or both. Notional loads are lateral loads that are
Where a smaller assumed out-of-plumbness is justified,
applied at each framing level and specified in terms of the
the notional load coefficient may be adjusted
gravity loads applied at that level. The gravity load used to
proportionally.
determine the notional load shall be equal to or greater than
the gravity load associated with the load combination being
For frames where the ratio of second-order drift to first-
evaluated. Notional loads shall be applied in the direction
order drift is equal to or less than 1.5, it is permissible
that adds to the destabilizing effects under the specified load
combination. to apply the notional load, N i» as a minimum lateral
load for the gravity-only load combinations and not in
combination with other lateral loads.
A-7.3 Design-Analysis Constraints
For all cases, it is permissible to use the assumed out-
1. The second-order analysis shall consider both P - 0
of-plumbness geometry in the analysis of the structure
and P - L1 effects. It is permitted to perform the in lieu of applying a notional load or a minimum lateral
analysis using any general second-order analysis load as defined above.
method, or by the amplified first-order analysis method
of Section 503.2, provided that the B1 and Bz factors User Note: The unreduced stiffnesses (El and AE) are
are based on the reduced stiffnesses defined in used in the above calculations. The ratio of second-
Eqs. A-7-2 and A-7-3. Analyses shall be conducted
order drift to first-order drift can be represented by Bz,
according to the design and loading requirements
as calculated using Eq. 503.2-3. Alternatively, the ratio
specified in either Section 502.3.3 (LRFD) or Section
can be calculated by comparing the results of a second-
502.3.4 (ASD). For ASD, the second-order analysis
order analysis to the results of a first-order analysis,
shall be carried out under 1.6 times the ASD load
where the analyses are conducted either under LRFD
combinations and the results shall be divided by 1.6 to
load combinations directly or under ASD load
obtain the required strengths.
combinations with a 1.6 factor applied to the ASD
gravity loads.
Methods of analysis that neglect the effects of P - li
on the lateral displacement of the structure are
permitted where the axial loads in all members whose
flexural stiffnesses are considered to contribute to the
lateral stability of the structure satisfy the following
limit:
(A-7-1)

3. A reduced flexural stiffness, E I", PART2A

(A-7-2)
SEISMIC PROVISION FOR
STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
shall be used for all members whose flexural stiffness is
considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the SYMBOL
structure,
Cross-sectional area of a horizontal boundary
where element (HBE), mrrr'
Cross-sectional area of a vertical boundary
1 moment of inertia about the axis of bending, element (VB E), mm2
mm" Flange area, mrrr'
Tb 1.0foraPr/Py:50.5 Gross area, mm"
4[aPr/Py(1- aPr/Py)]for Area of the yielding segment of steel core,
aPr/Py:5 0.5 mrrr'
Pr required axial compressive strength under Minimum area of tie reinforcement, mm'
LRFD or ASD load combinations, N Horizontal area of the steel plate in
Py AF y , member yield strength, N composite shear wall, mm'
Area oflink stiffener, mrrr'
and a = 1.0(LRFD) a= 1.6(ASD) Link web area, mrrr'
Ratio of required strength to available
strength
In lieu of using Tb < 1.0 where aPr/Py:5 0: 5, Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness
Tb = 1.0 may be used for all members, provided that and curvature
an additive notional load of O.OOlfi is added to the Deflection amplification
notional load required in (2). Parameter used for determining the
approximate fundamental period
4. A reduced axial stiffness, EA *, D Dead load due to the weight of the structural
elements and permanent features on the
EA" = O.SEA (A-7-3) building
D Outside diameter of round HSS, mm
shall be used for members whose axial stiffness is E Earthquake load
considered to contribute to the lateral stability of the E Effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake-
structure, where A is the cross-sectional member area. induced loads
E Modulus of elasticity of steel, 200,000 MPa
EI Flexural elastic stiffness of the chord
members of the special segment, N-mm2
Specified minimum yield stress of the type
of steel to be used, MPa. As used in the
Specification, "yield stress" denotes either
the minimum specified yield point (for
those steels that have a yield point) or the
specified yield strength (for those steels that
do not have a yield point)
F y of a beam, MPa
F y of a column, MPa
Specified minimum yield stress of the ties,
MPa
Fysc Specified minimum yield stress of the steel
core, or actual yield stress of the steel core as
determined from a coupon test, MPa
Specified minimum tensile strength, MPa

H Height of story, which may be taken as the Required axial strength of a column using
distance between the centerline of floor ASD load combinations, N
framing at each of the levels above and Required compressive strength using ASD
below, or the distance between the top of load combinations, N
floor slabs at each of the levels above and Required strength of lateral brace at ends of
below, mm the link, N
Moment of inertia, mm4 Avai lable axial strength of a column, N
Moment of inertia of a vertical boundary Nominal axial strength of a column, N
element (VBE) taken perpendicular to the Nominal compressive strength of the
direction of the web plate line, mm4 composite column calculated in accordance
K Effective length factor for prismatic member with the Specification, N
L Live load due to occupancy and moveable Nominal axial compressive strength of
equipment, kN diagonal members of the special segment, N
Span length of the truss, mm Nominal axial tensile strength of diagonal
Distance between VBE centerlines, mm members of the special segment, N
Length between points which are either Nominal axial strength of a composite
braced against lateral displacement of column at zero eccentricity, N
compression flange or braced against twist of Required compressive strength, N
the cross section, mm Required axial strength of a column or a link
Link length, mm using LRFD load combinations, N
Clear distance between VBE flanges, mm Required axial strength of a composite
column, N
Distance between plastic hinge locations, mm
Required compressive strength using LRFD
Limiting laterally unbraced length for full load combinations, N
plastic flexural strength, uniform moment Nominal axial yield strength of a member,
case, mm
equal to F y Ag, N
Limiting laterally unbraced length for plastic
analysis, mm Axial yield strength of steel core, N
Length of the special segment, mm Maximum unbalanced vertical load effect
Required flexural strength, using ASD load applied to a beam by the braces, N
combinations, N-mm Axial forces and moments generated by at
Additional moment due to shear least 1.25 times the expected nominal shear
amplification from the location of the plastic strength of the link
hinge to the column centerline based on ASD Seismicresponse modification coefficient
load combinations, N-mm Nominal strength, N
Nominal flexural strength, N-mm Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the
Nominal flexural strength of the chord specified minimum tensile strength F u> as
member of the special segment, N-mm related to over strength in material yield
Nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm stress
Nominal plastic flexural strength modified by Ry
axial load, N-mm Required strength
Nominal plastic flexural strength of the Panel zone nominal shear strength
beam, N-mm Ratio of the expected yield stress to the
Expected plastic moment, N-mm
Mp,exp specified minimum yield stress, F y
Mpc Nominal plastic flexural strength of the Required shear strength using ASD load
column, N-mm combinations, N
Expected flexural strength, N-mm Nominal shear strength of a member, N
Additional moment due to shear Expected vertical shear strength of the
amplification from the location of the plastic special segment, N
hinge to the column centerline based on Nominal shear strength of the steel plate in a
LRFD load combinations, N-mm composite plate shear wall, N
Required flexural strength, using LRFD load Nominal shear strength of an active link, N
combinations, N-mm
Nominal shear strength of an active link
Mu,exp Expected required flexural strength, N-mm
modified by the axial load magnitude, N

Required shear strength using LRFD load t Thickness of element, mm
combinations, N t Thickness of column web or doubler plate,
Yeon Distance from top of steel beam to top of mm
concrele slab or encasement, mm Thickness of beam flange, mm
YPNA Maximum distance from the maximum
Thickness of column flange, mrn
concrete compression fiber to the plastic
neutral axis, mm Thickness of flange, mill
Plastic section modulus of a member, 111m3 Minimum wall thickness of concrete-filled
Plastic section modulus of the beam, mnr' rectangular HSS, mm
Plastic section modulus of the column, mrrr' Thickness of panel zone including doubler
plates, mrn
Plastic section modulus x-axis, mrrr'
Thickness of web, mm
Minimum plastic section modulus at the
Width of panel zone between column
reduced beam section, mm'
flanges, mm
b Width of compression element as defined in
x Parameter used for determining the
Specification Section502.4.!, mm
approximate fundamental period (I-R2)
Width of column flange, mm
Minimum plastic section modulus at the
Flange width, mm reduced beam section.mrn'
Width of the concrete cross-section minus the Moment at beam and column centerline
width of the structural shape measured determined by projecting the sum of the
perpendicular to the direction of shear, mrn nominal column plastic moment strength,
Nominal fastener diameter, mrn reduced by the axial stress Puel Ag, from the
Overall beam depth, mrn top and bottom of the beam moment
Overall column depth, mm connection
Overall panel zone depth between continuity . Moment at the intersection of the beam and
plates, mm column centerlines determined by projecting
e EBF link length, mm the beam maximum developed moments
Specified compressive strength of concrete, from the column face. Maximum developed
f'e
MPa moments shall be determined from test
h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet results
Compression strength adjustment factor
or corner radius for rolled shapes; and for P
built-up sections, the distance between Ll Design story drift
adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear Deformation quantity used to control loading
LIb
distance between flanges when welds are of test specimen (total brace end rotation for
used; for tees, the overall depth; and for the subassemblage test specimen; total brace
rectangular HSS, the clear distance between axial Deformation for the brace test
the flanges less the inside corner radius on specimen)
each side, mm Value of deformation quantity,
h Distance between horizontal boundary corresponding to the design story drift
element centerlines, mm
Value of deformation quantity, LIb, at first
Cross-sectional dimension of the confined
significant yield of test specimen
core region in composite columns measured
Safety factor
center-to-center of the transverse
reinforcement, mm Safety factor for flexure = 1.67
Distance between flange centroids, mm Safety factor for compression = 1.67
Unbraced length between stitches of built-up Horizontal seismic overstrength factor
bracing members, mm Safety factor for shear strength of panel zone
1 Unbraced length of compression or bracing of beam-to-column connections
member, mm a Angle of diagonal members with the
Governing radius of gyration, mm horizontal
Radius of gyration about y-axis, mm a Angle of web yielding in radians, as
measured relative to the vertical
Spacing of transverse reinforcement
Deformation quantity used to control loading
measured along the longitudinal axis of the
of test specimen
structural composite member, mm
Thickness of connected part, mm Value of deformation quantity Ii at first
t
significant yield of test specimen

pi Ratio of required axial force P u to required PART2B

shear strength V u of a link
Limiting slenderness parameter for compact
SECTION 514
element STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDING
Resistance factor PROVISIONS
({J b Resistance factor for flexure
({Jc Resistance factor for compression 514.1 Scope
({Jv Resistance factor for shear strength of panel
zone of beam- to-column connections The Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings,
({Jv Resistance factor for shear hereinafter referred to as these Provisions, shall govern the
({Jv Resistance factor for the shear strength of a design, fabrication and erection of structural steel members
composite column and connections in the seismic load resisting systems
(J Interstory drift angle, radians (SLRS) and splices in columns that are not part of the
Link rotation angle SLRS, in buildings and other structures, where other
Ytotal
Strain hardening adjustment factor structures are defined as those structures designed,
W
fabricated and erected in a manner similar to buildings, with
building-like vertical and lateral load-resisting-elements.
These Provisions shall apply when the seismic response
modification coefficient, R, (as specified in the NSCP code)
is taken greater than 3, regardless of the seismic design
category. When the seismic response modification
coefficient, R, is taken as 3 or less, the structure is not
required to satisfy these Provisions, unless specifically
required by the NSCP code.
These Provisions shall be applied in conjunction with

Chapter 5 Steel and Metal, hereinafter referred to as the
Specification. Members and connections of the SLRS shall
satisfy the requirements of the NSCP code, the
Specification, and these Provisions.
Wherever these provisions refer to the NSCP code and there

is no local building code, the loads, load combinations,
system limitations and general design requirements shall be
those in SEIIASCE 7.
User Note: The NSCP code generally restricts buildings

designed with an R factor of 3 or less to seismic design
categories (SDC) A, B or C; however, some systems such as
cantilever columns that have R factors less than 3 are
permitted in SDC D and above and these Provisions apply.
See the NSCP code for specific system limitations.
Part 2A includes a Glossary that is specifically applicable to

this Part, and Section B-1, B-2, B-3, B-4, B-5, B-6 and B-7

SECTION 515 SECTION 516

REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS" GENERAL SEISMIC DESI~N
CODES, ANn STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS
The documents referenced in these Provisions shall include The required strength and other seismic provisions for
those listed in Specification Section 501.2 with the seismic Zones 2 and 4 including limitations on height and
following additions and modifications: irregularity shall be as specified in the NSCP code.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) The design story drift shall be determined as required in the
NSCP code.
Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ANSIIAISC
360-05 Prequalified Connections for Special and
Intermediate Steel Moment Frames for Seismic
Applications, ANSIIAISC 358-05
American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
Recommended Practice for the Training and Testing of

Nondestructive Testing Personnel, ASNT SNT TC-la-2001
Standard for the Qualification and Certification of

Nondestructive Testing Personnel, ANSVASNT CP-189-
2001
American Welding Society (AWS)
Standard Methods for Determination of the Diffusible

Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic
Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding, AWS A4.3-
93R
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds-U.S.

Customary, ANSI/ AWS B4.0-98
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds-Metric

Only, ANSVA WS B4.0M:2000
Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors, AWS

B5.1:2003
Describing Oxygen-Cut Surfaces, AWS C4.1
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel

Moment-Frame Buildings, FEMA 350, July 2000
DAO 07:2008 Mandatory PNS for Equal Leg Angle Beams
DAO 05:2002 Mandatory PNS for Steel Bars
..

LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS
AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP
DRAWINGS,AND ERECTION
517.1 Loads and Load Combinations
DRAWINGS
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by
the NS .P code, Where arnpli fled seismic loads al'e required 518.1 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications
by these Provisions, the horizontal portion Clf the earthquake
load E' (as defined in the NSCP code) shall be rnultlplied by Structural design drawings and specifications shall show the
work to be performed, and include items required by the
the overstrength factor, !la, prescribed by the NSCP code.
Specification and the following, as applicable:
517.2 Nominal Strength
1. Designation of the seismic load resisting system
(SLRS)
The nominal strength of systems, members and connections
shall comply with the Specification, except as modified
2. Designation of the members and connections that are
throughout these Section.
part of the SLRS
3. Configuration of the connections
4. Connection material specifications and sizes
5. Locations of demand critical welds
6. Lowest anticipated service temperature (LAST) of the

steel structure, if the structure is not enclosed and
maintained at a temperature of 10°C or higher
7. Locations and dimensions of protected zones
8. Locations where gusset plates are to be detailed to

accommodate inelastic rotation
9. Welding requirements as specified In Section B-6,

Section B-6.2.
Use r Note: These Previsions should be consistent with the

Code of Standatd Practice, asdesignated in:Sectkul $01 A of
the SpeOifieatian, There ma)" be specific connections and
appltcatiens for wll,e)l details are not speeifically addressed
by the PH)yislOl]~. II' such a condition exists, the contract
documents £,liIould include appropriate requirements f9t
those ·appli:cyltiotls. These may include nendestructive
testing requiremeots beyond those in SeC.tioll·B-~, bolt hole
fabrication requirements beyond ,those pernti.t(e~. by the
Specification, bolting ('cqll lremenrs oth~r than those in the
Research .Council on, Structural Connections ,CReSG)
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts, or welding requirements other than those in
Section B-6.

518.2 Shop Drawings

SECTION 519
Shop drawings shall include items required by the MATERIALS
Specification and the following, as applicable:
1. Designation of the members and connections that are 519.1 Material Specifications
part of the SLRS
Structural steel used in the seismic load resisting system
2. Connection material specifications (SLRS) shall meet the requirements of Specification Section
3. Locations of demand critical shop welds 501.3.1.1, except as modified in these Provisions. The
specified minimum yield stress of steel to be used for
4. Locations and dimensions of protected zones members in which inelastic behavior is expected shall not
5. Gusset plates drawn to scale when they are detailed to exceed 345 MPa for systems defined in Sections 522, 523,
accommodate inelastic rotation 525, 526, 528, 529, and 530 nor 380 MPa for systems
defined in Sections 524 and 527, unless the suitability of the
6. Welding requirements as specified in Section B-6, material is determined by testing or other rational criteria.
Section B-2.2. This limitation does not apply to columns for which the
only expected inelastic behavior is yielding at the column
User Note: There may be specific connections and base.
applications for which details are not specifically addressed
by the section. If such a condition exists, the shop drawings The structural steel used in the SLRS described in Sections
should include appropriate requirements for that 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527, 528, 529 and 530 shall meet
application. These may include bolt hole fabrication one of the following ASTM Specifications: A361 A36M,
requirements beyond those permitted by the Specification, A53/A53M, A500 (Grade B or C), A501, A529/A529M,
bolting requirements other than those in the RCSC A572/A572M [Grade 42 (290 Mpa), 50 (345 Mpa) or 55
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325· or (380 Mpa)], A588/A588M, A913/A913M [Grade 50 (345
A490 Bolts, and welding requirements other than those in Mpa), 60 (415 Mpa) or 65 (450 Mpa)], A992/A992M, or
Section B-6. See Section 513 of the Specification for AlOII HSLAS Grade 55 (380 Mpa). The structural steel
additional provisions on shop drawings. used for column base plates shall meet one of the preceding
ASTM specifications or ASTM A283/A283M Grade D.
518.3 Erection Drawings
Other steels and non-steel materials in buckling-restrained
Erection drawings shall include items required by the braced frames are permitted to be used subject to the
Specification and the following, as applicable: requirements of Section 529 and Section B-5.
I. Designation of the members and connections that are
part of the SLRS User Note: This section only covers material properties for
structural steel used in the SLRS and included in the
2. Field connection material specifications and sizes definition of structural steel given in Section 2.1 of the
3. Locations of demand critical field welds AISC Code of Standard Practice. Other steel, such as cables
for permanent bracing is not included.
4. Locations and dimensions of protected zones
5. Locations of pre tensioned bolts 519.2 Material Properties for Determination of'
Required Strength of Members and
6. Field welding requirements as specified in Section B-6, Connections
Section B-2.3
When required in these Provisions, the required strength of
User Note: There may be specific connections and an element (a member or a connection) shall be determined
applications for which details are not specifically addressed from the expected yield stress, RyF y, of an adjoining
by the Provisions. If such a condition exists, the erection
member, where F y is the specified minimum yield stress of
drawings should include appropriate requirements for that
application. These may include bolting requirements other the grade of steel to be used in the adjoining members and
than those in the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Ry is the ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, and welding minimum yield stress, F y, of that material.
requirements other than those in Section B-6. See Section
MI of the Specification for additional provisions on
erection drawings.

Table 519-1 Ry and Rt Values for 519.3 Heavy Section CVN Requirements
Different Member Types
For structural steel in the SLRS, in addition to the
Application Ry Rt requirements of Specification Section 501.3.lc, hot rolled
Hot-rolled structural shapes and bars: shapes with flanges 38 mm thick and thicker shall have a
• ASTM A36/36M 1.5 1.2 minimum Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) at
• ASTM A572/572M Grade 290 1.3 1.1 70 OF (21°C), tested in the alternate core location as
• ASTM A572/572M Grade 345 1.1 1.1 described in ASTM A6 Supplementary Requirement S30.
or 380 Plates 50 mm thick and thicker shall have a minimum
ASTM A913/A913M Grade Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-lb (27 J) at 70 OF
345,415,450 (21°C), measured at any location permitted by ASTM
ASTM A588/A588M A673, where the plate is used in the following:
ASTM A9921 A992M, AIOll
HSLAS Grade 380 1. Members built-up from plate
1.2 1.2
• ASTM A529 Grade 345 1.1 1.2
• ASTM A529 Grade 380 2. Connection plates where inelastic strain under seismic
Hollow structural sections (HSS) loading is expected
• ASTM A500 (Grade B or C), 1.4 1.3
ASTMA501 3. At the steel core of buckling-restrained braces
Pipe
• ASTM A531 A53M 1.6 1.2 User Note: Examples of connection plates where inelastic
Plates behavior is expected include, but are not limited to, gusset
plates intended to function as a hinge and allow out-of-
• ASTM A361 A36M 1.3 1.2
plane buckling of braces, some bolted flange plates for
• ASTM A572/A572M Grade 345 1.1 1.2
ASTM A588/A588M moment connections, some end plates for bolted moment
connections, and some column base plates designed as a pin
The available strength of the element, tpRn for LRFD and
Rnl n for ASD, shall be equal to or greater than the
required strength, where Rn is the nominal strength of the
connection. The expected tensile strength, RtF wand the
expected yield stress, RyF y' are permitted to be used in lieu
of F u and F y' respectively, in determining the nominal
strength, Rn, of rupture and yielding limit states within the
same member for which the required strength is determined.
User Note: In several instances a member, or a connection

limit state within that member, is required to be designed
for forces corresponding to the expected strength of the
member itself. Such cases include brace fracture limit states
(block shear rupture and net section fracture in the brace in
SCBF), the design of the beam outside of the link in EBF,
etc. In such cases it is permitted to use the expected material
strength in the determination of available member strength.
For connecting elements and for other members, specified
material strength should be used.
The values of Ry and Rt for various steels are given in

Table 519-1. Other values of Ry and R, shall be permitted
if the values are determined by testing of specimens similar
in size and source conducted in accordance with the
requirements for the specified grade of steel.

CHAP] EI~ 5
Structural Steel 5-165
SECTIONS20 User Note: A member force, such as '<1 •

br!lC
"Ii:
" • I I>.
aX11l reree
must be resisted at the connection enlitely by;.. ~ ~ f'
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND ..
jomt C'm ot h er wor d's, eit herer enti
entirely by b011s orr"nl.': [ ba
• I',tYfll:
.. I' I b en II Y Y
FASTENERS we Jd)s. A connection in w 11~ \ olrs resis~u fQrde UUlt is
normal to the force resisted by welds such as -a "\
. . hi h Id d fl" - "OJitlenL
520.1 Scope connection m w IC we e • anges transmu f:lexllre oM a
bolted web transmits shear, is not cliln,sideredle be. sharin
Connections, joints and fasteners that are part of the seismic the force. g
load resisting system (SLRS) shall comply with
Specification Section 510, and with the additional 520.3 Welded Joints
requirements of this Section.
Welding shall be performed in accordance with Section 8-
The design of connections for a member that is a part of the 6. Welding shall be performed in accordance with a welding
SLRS shall be configured such that a ductile limit state in procedure specification (WPS) as required in AWS D 1.1
either the connection or the member controls the design. and approved by the engineer-of-record. The WPS variables
shall be within the parameters established by the filler metal
User Note: An example of a ductile limit state is tension manufacturer.
yielding. It is unacceptable to design connections for
members that are part of the SLRS such that the strength 520.3.1 General Requirements
limit state is governed by non-ductile or brittle limit states,
such as fracture, in either the connection or the member. All welds used in members and connections in the SLRS
shall be made with a filler metal that can produce welds that
520.2 Bolted Joints have a minimum Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft-Ib
(27 J) at 0 OF (minus 18°C), as determined by the
All bolts shall be pretensioned high strength bolts and shall appropriate AWS A5 classification test method or
meet the requirements for slip-critical faying surfaces in manufacturer certification. This requirement for notch
accordance with Specification Section 510.1.8 with a Class toughness shall also apply in other cases as required in these
A surface. 801ts shall be installed in standard holes or in Provisions.
short-slotted holes perpendicular to the applied load. For
brace diagonals, oversized holes shall be permitted when 520.3.2 Demand Critical Welds
the connection is designed as a slip-critical joint, and the
oversized hole is in one ply only. Alternative hole types are Where welds are designated as demand critical, they shall
permitted if designated in the Prequalified Connections for be made with a ftller metal capable of providing a minimum
Special and Intermediate Moment Frames for Seismic Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness of 27 J at 29°C as
Applications (ANSIIAISC 358), or if otherwise determined determined by the appropriate AWS classification test
in a connection prequalification in accordance with Section method or manufacturer certification, and 54 J at 21°C as
8-1, or if determined in a program of qualification testing in determined by Section 8-7 or other approved method, when
accordance with Section 8-4 or 8-5. The available shear the steel frame is normally enclosed and maintained at a
strength of bolted joints using standard holes shall be temperature of 10°C or higher. For structures with service
calculated as that for bearing-type joints in accordance with temperatures lower than 10°C, the qualification
Specification Sections 510.1.3 and 510.1.1 0, except that the temperature for Section 8-7 shall be 11 °C above the lowest
nominal bearing strength at bolt holes shall not be taken anticipated service temperature, or at a lower temperature.
greater than 2. 4dtFu.
SMA W electrodes classified in A WS A5.1 as E7018 or
Exception: E7018-X, SMAW electrodes classified in AWS A5.5 as
E70 18-C3 L or E80 18-C3, and GMA W solid electrodes are
The faying surfaces for end plate moment connections are exempted from production lot testing when the CVN
permitted to be coated with coatings not tested for slip toughness of the electrode equals or exceeds 27 J at a
resistance or with coatings with a slip coefficient less than temperature not exceeding 29°C as determined by AWS
that of a Class A faying surface. classification test methods. The manufacturer's certificate
of compliance shall be considered sufficient evidence of
Bolts and welds shall not be designed to share force in a meeting this requirement.
joint or the same force component in a connection.
User Note: Welds designated demand critical are
specifically identified in the Provisions in the section
applicable to the designated SLRS.
National Structural Code oj the Philippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

There may be specific welds similar LO those designated as. 3. Welded, bolted, screwed or shot-in attachments for
demand critical by these Provisions that have n-01 been perimeter edge angles, exterior facades, partitions, duct
specifically identified as demand critical by these work, piping or other construction shall not be placed
Provisions that warrant such designati n. Consideration of within the protected zone.
[he demand critical designation for such welds should be
based upon the inelastic strain demand and the consequence Exception:
of failure, oruplete-jcint-penetrauon (C.lP) groove welds
Welded shear studs and other connections shall be
bel ween columns and base plates should be considered
permitted l1ihiu dru'ignot¢d In (he Pl'equa/{fled Connections
demand critical similar to column splice welds, when CJP
[or Special and INtermediate Momenl Frames for Sel'smir;
groove welds used f r column splices in (he designated
Applications (ANSI/AlB 358), OJ' as otherwise determined
SLRS have been designated demand critical.
in accordance with a connection prequaltfication in
accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a
For special and intermediate moment frames, typical
program of qualification testing in accordance with Section
examples of demand critical welds include the following
B-4.
CJP groove welds:
Outside the protected zone, calculations based upon the
1. Welds of beam flanges to columns
expected moment shall be made to demonstrate the
adequacy of the member net section when connectors that
2. Welds of single plate shear connections to columns
penetrate the member are used.
3. Welds of beam webs to columns

520.5 Continuity Plates and Stiffeners
4. Column splice welds, including column bases

Corners of continuity plates and stiffeners placed in the
webs of rolled shapes shall be clipped as described below.
For ordinary moment frames, typical examples include CJP
Along the web, the clip shall be detailed so that the clip
groove welds in items I, 2, and 3 above. extends a distance of at least 38 mm beyond the published k
detail dimension for the rolled shape. Along the flange, the
For Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF), typical examples clip shall be detailed so that the clip does not exceed a
of demand critical welds incl ude eJP groove welds between distance of 12 mm beyond the published kl detail
link beams and 'columns. Other welds such as those Joining dimension. The clip shall be detailed to facilitate suitable
the web plate to flange plates in built-up EBF link beams, weld terminations for both the flange weld and the web
and eolurnn splice welds when made uslng CJP groove weld. If a curved clip is used, it shall have a minimum
welds, should be considered for designation as demand radius of 12 mm.
critical welds.
At the end of the weld adjacent to the column weblflange
520.3.3 Recommended Joint juncture, weld tabs for continuity plates shall not be used,
except when permitted by the engineer-of-record. Unless
The use of Type I welded joints is not allowed in seismic specified by the engineer-of-record that they be removed,
Zone 4. Type II joints are recommended as in the use of weld tabs shall not be removed when used in this location.
Proprietary Welded Joint.
520.4 Protected Zone
Where a protected zone is designated by these Provisions or

ANSIIAISC 358, it shall comply with the following:
1. Wfthin the protected zone, di continuities created by

fabrication or erection operations, such as tack welds,
erection aids; air-arc gouging and thermal cutting shall
be repaired as required by the engineer-of-record.
2. Welded shear studs and decking attachments that

penetrate the beam flange shall not be placed on beam
flanges within the protected zone. Decking arc spot
welds as required to secure decking shall be permitted.
Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, lnc. (ASEP)

SECTION 521
MEMBERS
521.1 Scope
Members in the seismic load resisting system (SLRS) shall

comply with the Specification and Section 521. For
columns that are not part of the SLRS, see Section 52l.l.2.
521.2 Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
521.2.1 Compact
When required by these Provisions, members of the SLRS

shall have flanges continuously connected to the web or
webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression
elements shall not exceed the limiting width-thickness
ratios, ...lp, from Specification Table 502.4.1.
521.2.2 Seismically Compact
When required by these Provisions, members of the SLRS

must have flanges continuously connected to the web. or
webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression
elements shall not exceed the limiting width-thickness
ratios, ...lps, from Provisions Table 521-1.
Table 521-1 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements

Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios
Width - Thickness
Description of Element Aps
Ratio
Seismically Compact
Flexure in flanges of rolled or built-up I-shaped sections
.
[aj,[ c],[ e],[gj,[h j bit 0.30JEIFy
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled or built-up 1-
shaped sections [b],[h j bit 0.30jEIFy
en
Uniform compression in flanges of rolled or built-up 1-
15 shaped sections [dj bit 0.38JEIFy
(\)
8
(\)
Uniform compression in flanges of channels, outstanding
~ legs of pairs of angles in continuous contact, and braces bit 0.30 JEIFy
"0 [c],[g]
(\)
c
~ Uniform compression in flanges of Il-pile sections
~en bit 0.45p,
8 Flat Bars [f] bit 2.5
Uniform compression in legs of single angles, legs of
double angle members with separators, or flanges of tees bit 0.30 JEIFy
_[g]
Uniform compression in stems of tees [gj
bit 0.30JEIFy
Webs in flexural compression in beams in SMF, Section
522,unless noted otherwise hltw 2.45JEIFy
"0 en
~ ~ Webs in flexural compression or combined flexure and
._
~ 8 axial compression [a],[cj,[gj,[h],[i],[jj
(\)
For C a ~ 0.125[kj
tl~ hltw
3.14p, (1-1.54Ca)

For C a s 0.125 [k]
h/tw 1.14~(2.33Ca);::: 1.49 F0_

Round HSS in axial and/or flexural compression [c],[g]
D/t 0.044JE/F;
Rectangular HSS in axial and/or flexural compression
[c],[g] bit or h/tw 0.64JE/~
Webs ofH-Pile sections
h/tw 0.94JE/Fy
faJ Required for beams in SMF ScotiQn 522 and SPSW S""I;ol1 530
[b] Required for columns in SMF Section 522. unless the ratios from Eq.522-3 are greater than 2.0 where it is permitted to use Ap in specification Table 502.4.1
[c] Required for braces and columns in SCBF Section 526 and braces in OCBF Section 527
[d] It is permitted to use Ap in Specification Table 502.4.1 for columns in STMF Section 522 and columns in EBF Section 528
Required for link in EBF Section 528 except it is permitted to use Ap in Table 502.4.l of the specification for flanges of links of length 1. 6Mp/Vp
[e]
are defined in Section 528
[I] Diagonal web members within the special segment ofSTMF Section 525
[g] Chord members of STMF Section 525
[hI Required for beams and columns in BRBF Section 529
[i] Required for columns in SPSW Section 530
For columns in STMF Section 522 columns in SMF, if the ratios from Eq. 522-J are greater than 2.0; for columns in EBF Section 528; or EBF webs of links
[j]
oflength Mp/V por less, it is permitted to use the following for Ap
1.6
For C O.125,Ap = 3. 76,jE/Fy (1- 2. 75Ca)
Q ::;
ForCa> O.125,Ap = 3. 76,jE/Fy (2.33 -Ca);:: 1. 49JE/Fy

[k] for LRFD, c, = (Pu/t/lbPy)
for ASD,Ca = (nbPa/py)
where
P a = required compressive strength (ASD). N
P u = required compressive strength (LRFD), N
P y = axial yield strength, N
"'b = 0.90
n, = 1.67

521.3 Column Strength 2. The available strength for each flange splice shall be at
least equal to O. 5RyFyAf(LRFD) or
When Pu/4>Pn(LRFD) > 0.4 or ficPa/Pn(ASD) > (0.5/1.5)RyFyAf(ASD), as appropriate, where
0.4, as appropriate, without consideration of the amplified
seismic load, RyF y is the expected yield stress of the column
material and Af is the flange area of the smaller
where column connected.
4>c = 0.90(LRFD) fic = 1.67(ASD) Beveled transitions are not required when changes in
Pa required axial strength of a column using ASD Load thickness and width of flanges and webs occur in column
combinations, N splices where P1P groove welded joints are used.
Pn nominal axial strength of a column, N
Pu required axial strength of a column using LRFD Column web splices shall be either bolted or welded, or
load combinations, N welded to one column and bolted to the other. In moment
frames using bolted splices, plates or channels shall be used
The following requirement shall be met on both sides of the column web.
'I
I. The required axial compressive and tensile strength, The centerline of column splices made with fillet welds or
considered in the absence of any applied moment, shall partial-joint-penetration groove welds shall be located 1.2 m
be determined using the load combinations stipulated or more away from the beam-to-column connections. When
by the NSCP code including the amplified seismic load the column clear height between beam-to-column
connections is less than 2.4 m, splices shall be at half the
2. The required axial compressive and tensile strength clear height.
"
shall not exceed either of the following: II

a. The maximum load transferred to the column 521.4.2 Columns Not Part of the Seismic Load
considering Resisting System
1.IRy (LRFD)or(I.I/I. 5)Ry(ASD),as
Splices of columns that are not a part of the SLRS shall
appropriate, times the nominal strengths of the
satisfy the following:
connecting beam or brace elements of the building.
I. Splices shall be located 1.2 m or more away from the
b. The limit as determined from the resistance of the
beam-to-column connections. When the column clear
foundation to overturning uplift.
height between beam-to-column connections is less
than 2.4 m, splices shall be at half the clear height.
521.4 Column Splices
2. The required shear strength of column splices with
521.4.1 General
respect to both orthogonal axes of the column shall be
Mpc/H(LRFD) or Mpc/l.5H(ASD), as
The required strength of column splices in the seismic load
resisting system (SLRS) shall equal the required strength of appropriate, where M pc is the lesser nominal plastic
the columns, including that determined from Sections 521.3, flexural strength of the column sections for the
522.9, 523.9, 524.9, 526.5 and 529.5.2. direction in question, and H is the storey height.
In addition, welded column splices that are subject to a 521.5 Column Bases
calculated net tensile load effect determined using the load
combinations stipulated by the NSCP code including the The required strength of column bases shall be calculated in
amplified seismic load, shall satisfy both of the following accordance with Sections 521.5.1, 521.5.2, and 521.5.3. The
requirements: available strength of anchor rods shall be determined m
accordance with Specification Section 510.3.
J. The available strength of partial-joint-penetration (PJP)
groove welded joints, if used, shall be at least equal to The available strength of concrete elements at the column
200 percent of the required strength. base, including anchor rod embedment and reinforcing
steel, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Appendix D.

User Note: When using concrete reinforcing steel as part of 521.5.2 Required Flexural Strength
the anchorage embedment design, it is important to
understand the anchor failure modes and provide The required flexural strength of column bases, including
reinforcement that is developed on both sides of the their attachment to the foundation, shall be the summation
expected failure surface. See ACI 318, Appendix D, Figure of the required strengths of the steel elements that are
RDA.l and Section DA.2.1, including Commentary for connected to the column base as follows:
additional information.
l, For diagonal bracing, the required flexural strength
Exception: shall be at least equal to the required strength of
bracing connections for the SLRS.
The special requirements in ACI 318, Appendix D, for
"regions of moderate or high seismic risk, or for structures 2. For columns, the required flexural strength shall be at
assigned to intermediate or high seismic performance or least equal to the lesser of the following:
design categories" need not be applied.
a. 1.lRyFyZ(LRFD)or
521.5.1 Required Axial Strength
(1. 1/1. 5)RyFyZ(ASD) as appropriate, of the
column or
The required axial strength of column bases, including their
attachment to the foundation, shall be the summation of the
b. the moment calculated using the load combinations
vertical components of the required strengths of the steel
of the NSCP code, including the amplified seismic
elements that are connected to the column base.
load.
521.5.2 Required Shear Strength
521.6 H-Piles
The required shear strength of column bases, including their
521.6.1 Design of H-Piles
attachments to the foundations, shall be the summation of
the horizontal component of the required strengths of the
Design of H-piles shall comply with the provisions of the
steel elements that are connected to the column base as
follows: Specification regarding design of members subjected to
combined loads. H-piles shall meet the requirements of
Section 521.2.2.
I. For diagonal bracing, the horizontal component shall be
determined from the required strength of bracing
connections for the seismic load resisting system 521.6.2 Battered H-Piles
(SLRS).
If battered (sloped) and vertical piles are used in a pile
2. For columns, the horizontal component shall be at least group, the vertical piles shall be designed to support the
equal to the lesser of the following: combined effects of the dead and live loads without the
participation of the battered piles.
a. 2RyFyZxlH (LRFD) or (2/1.5) RyFyZxl
521.6.3 Tension in H-Pile
H (ASD), as appropriate of the column.
Where Tension in each pile shall be transferred to the pile cap by
mechanical means such as shear keys, reinforcing bars or
H height of storey, which may be taken studs welded to the embedded portion of the pile. Directly
as the distance between the centerline below the bottom of the pile cap, each pile shall be free of
of floor framing at each of the levels attachments and welds for a length at least equal to the
above and below, or the distance depth of the pile cross section.
between the top of floor slabs at each
of the levels above and below, mm
b. The shear calculated using the load combinations

of the NSCP code, including the amplified seismic
load.

CHAPTER h Structural Steel S 171
SECTION 522 522.2.2 Conformance Demonstration
SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF) ,I

Beam-to-column connections used in the SLRS shall satisfy
the requirements of Section 522.2 by one of the following:
522.1 Scope
1. Use of SMF connections designed in accordance with
Special moment frames (SMF) are expected to withstand ANSIIAISC 358.
significant inelastic deformations when subjected to the
forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. 2. Use of a connection prequalified for SMF In
SMF shall satisfy the requirements in this Section. accordance with Section B-1.
522.2 Beam-to-Column Connections 3. Provision of qualifying cyclic test results in accordance

with Section B-4. Results of at least two cyclic
522.2.1 Requirements connection tests shall be provided and are permitted to
be based on one of the following:
Beam-to-column connections used in the seismic load
resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the following three a. Tests reported in the research literature or
requirements: documented tests performed for other projects that
represent the project conditions, within the limits
1. The connection shall be capable of sustaining an specified in Section B-4.
interstory drift angle of at least 0.04 radians.
b. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project
2. The measured flexural resistance of the connection, and are representative of project member sizes,
determined at the column face, shall equal at le,ast material strengths, connection configurations, and
0.80 Mp of the connected beam at an interstory drift matching connection processes, within the limits
angle of 0.04 radians. specified in Section B-4.
3. The required shear strength of the connection shall be 522.2.3 Welds

determined using the following quantity for the
earthquake load effect E: Unless otherwise designated by ANSIIAISC 358, or
otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
(522-1) accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4,
complete-joint-penetration groove welds of beam flanges,
where
shear plates, and beam webs to columns shall be demand
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2.
ratio of the expected yield stress to the
specified minimum yield stress, F y User Note: For the designation of demand critical welds,
nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm standards such as ANSI! AISC 358 and tests addressing
distance between plastic hinge locations, mm specific connections and joints should be used in lieu of the
more general terms of these Provisions. Where these
Provisions indicate that a particular weld is designated
When E as defined in Eq. 522-1 is used in ASD load
demand critical, but the more specific standard or test does
combinations that are additive with other transient
not make such a designation, the more specific standard or
loads and that are based on SEIIASCE 7, the 0.75
test should govern. Likewise, these standards and tests may
combination factor for transient loads shall not be
designate welds as demand critical that are not identified as
applied to E.
such by these Provisions.
Connections that accommodate the required interstory
drift angle within the connection elements and provide
the measured flexural resistance and shear strengths
specified above are permitted. In addition to satisfying
the requirements noted above, the design shall
demonstrate that any additional drift due to connection
deformation can be accommodated by the structure.
The design shall include analysis for stability effects of
the overall frame, including second-order effects.

522.2.4 Protected Zones Alternatively, when local buckling of the column web and
doubler plate is prevented by using plug welds joining them,
The region at each end of the beam subject to inelastic the total panel zone thickness shall satisfy Eq. 522-2.
straining shall be designated as a protected zone, and shall
meet the requirements of Section 520.4. The extent of the 522.3.3 Panel Zone Doubler Plates
protected zone shall be as designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or
as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges using
accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program either a complete joint-penetration groove-welded or fillet-
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4. welded joint that develops the available shear strength of
the full doubler plate thickness. When doubler plates are
User Note: The plastic hinging zones at the ends of SMF placed against the column web, they shall be welded across
beams should be treated as protected zones. The plastic the top and bottom edges to develop the proportion of the
hinging zones should be established as part of a total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate. When
prequalification or qualification program for the connection, doubler plates are placed away from the column web, they
per Section 522.2.2. In general, for unreinforced shall be placed symmetrically in pairs and welded to
connections, the protected zone will extend from the face of continuity plates to develop the proportion of the total force
the column to one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic that is transmitted to the doubler plate.
hinge point.
522.4 Beam and Column Limitations
522.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections
(Beam Web Parallel to Column Web) The requirements of Section 521 shall be satisfied, in
addition to the following.
522.3.1. Shear Strength
522.4.1 Width-Thickness Limitations
The required thickness of the panel zone shall be
determined in accordance with the method used in Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of
proportioning the panel zone of the tested or prequalified Section 521.2.2, unless otherwise qualified by tests.
connection. As a minimum, the required shear strength of
the panel zone shall be determined from the summation of 522.4.2 Beam Flanges
the moments at the column faces as determined by
projecting the expected moments at the plastic hinge points Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not permitted in
to the column faces. plastic hinge regions. The drilling of flange holes or
trimming of beam flange width is permitted if testing or
The design shear strength shall be (/JvRv and the allowable qualification demonstrates that the resulting configuration
shear strength shall be Rv/fiv where can develop stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be
consistent with a prequalified connection designated in
(/Jv = 1.0 (LRFD) n, = 1. 50(ASD) ANSI/AISC 358, or as otherwise determined in a
connection prequalification in accordance with Section B-1,
or in a program of qualification testing in accordance with
and the nominal shear strength, Rv, according to the limit
Section B-4.
state of shear yielding, is determined as specified in
Specification Section 510.10.6.
522.5 Continuity Plates
522.3.2 Panel Zone Thickness
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the prequalified
connection designated in ANSI! AISC 358, or as otherwise
The individual thicknesses, t, of column webs and doubler
determined in a connection prequalification in accordance
plates, if used, shall conform to the following requirement:
with Section B-1, or as determined in a program of
qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
(522-2)
where
t thickness of column web or doubler plate, mm
dz panel zone depth between continuity plates, mm
wz panel zone width between column flanges, mm

522.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio required compressive strength using ASD load
combinations, (a positive number) N
The following relationship shall be satisfied at beam-to- required compressive strength using LRFD load
column connections: combinations, (a positive number) N
plastic section modulus of the beam, mrrr'
plastic section modulus of the column, mm'
LMpC) > 1.0 (522-3)
( minimum plastic section modulus at the reduced
LMpb
beam section, mrrr'
where
Exception:
the sum of the moments in the column above and
below the joint at the intersection of the beam
This requirement does not apply if either of the following
two conditions is satisfied:
and column centerlines. L Mpc is determined by
summing the projections of the nominal flexural
1. Columns with P TC < O. 3P cfor all load combinations
strengths of the columns (including haunches
other than those determined using the amplified seismic
where used) above and below the joint to the
load that satisfy either of the following:
beam centerline with a reduction for the axial
force in the column. It is permitted to take
a. Columns used in a one-story building or the top
LMpc story of a multistory building.
LZc(Fyc - Puc/Ag)(LRFD) or
L Zc[(F yc/1. 5) P ac/ Ag](ASD), b. Columns where: (1) the sum of the available shear
as appropriate. When the centerlines of opposing strengths of all exempted columns in the story is
beams in the same joint do not coincide, the mid- less than 20 percent of the sum of the available
line between centerlines shall be used shear strengths of all momentframe columns in the
the sum of the moments in the beams at the story acting in the same direction; and (2) the sum
intersection of the beam and column centerlines. of the available shear strengths of all exempted
columns on each moment frame column line within
L Mpb is determined by summing the that story is less than 33 percent of the available
projections of the expected flexural strengths of
shear strength of all moment frame columns on
the beams at the plastic hinge locations to the
that column line. For the purpose of this exception,
column centerline. It is permitted to take a column line is defined as a single line of columns
LMpb = or parallel lines of columns located within 10
(l.lRyFybZb + Muv) (LRFD) or percent of. the plan dimension perpendicular to the
line of columns.
L[(l.l/l. 5)RyFybZb + Mav] (ASD) as
appropriate. Alternatively, it is permitted to
where
determine L Mpb consistent with a prequalified
connection design as designated in ANSI! AISC For design according to Specification Section
358, or as otherwise determined in a connection 502.3.3 (LRFD),
prequalification in accordance with Section B-.l,
or in a program of qualification testing 111
FycAg, N
accordance with Section B-4. When connections
with reduced beam sections are used, it is Puc, required compressive strength,
permitted to take using LRFD load combinations, N.
LMpb = L(l.lRyFyb ZRBS + For design according to Specification Section
Muv) (LRFD) or 502.3.4 (ASD),
L[(1.1/1.5)RyFyb ZRBS +
Mav] (ASD) appropriate FycAg/l. 5, N
gross area of column, mm
2 P ac. required compressive strength,
using ASD load combinations, N
- specified minimum yield stress of column, MPa
the additional moment due to shear amplification
2. Columns in any story that has a ratio of available shear
from the location of the plastic hinge to the
strength to required shear strength that is 50 percent
column centerline, based on ASD load
greater than the story above.
combinations, N-mm.

:'i-'114 CI-IAVrET~ !'i - Struc(ur,~1Steel
522.7 Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column application of the beam flange force specified in
Connections Section 522.7.2 in addition to the second-order moment
due to the resulting column flange displacement.
522.7.1 Braced Connections
522.8 Lateral Bracing of Beams
Column flanges at beam-to-column connections require
lateral bracing only at the level of the top flanges of the Both flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
beams, when the webs of the beams and column are maximum spacing of Lb = O.061'yE/Fy. Braces shall
coplanar, and a column is shown to remain elastic outside of meet the provisions or
::.'15. A-I-7 and A-I-8 of Appendix
the panel zone. It shall be permitted to assume that the
column remains elastic when the ratio calculated using
A-1.6 of the Specification, where M,. = M11 =
RyZFyCLRFD) or M = M,. ::;:-RyZFy /1. 5 CASD),
Eq. 522-3 is greater than 2.0. "
as appropriate, of'the beam and Cd = 1. O.
When a column cannot be shown to remain elastic outside
of the panel zone, the following requirements shall apply: In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated
forces, changes in cross-section, and other locations where
The column flanges shall be laterally braced at the levels of analysis indicates that a plastic binge will form during
both the top and bottom beam flanges. Lateral bracing shall inelastic deformatlons of the SMF. The placement of lateral
be either direct or indirect. bracing shall be consistent with that documented for a
prequalified connection designated in ANSI/AJSC 358, or
User Note: Direct lateral support (bracing) of the column as otherwise determined in a connection prequalifieation in
flange is achieved through use of braces or other members, accordance with Section 8-1 or in a program 01
deck and slab, attached to the column flange at or near the qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
desired bracing point to resist lateral buckling. Indirect
lateral support refers to bracing that is achieved through the The required strength oflateral bracing provided adjacent to
stiffness of members and connections that are not directly plastic hinges shall be P11 = 0,06 Mt,/ho (LRFD) 0,1'
attached to the column flanges, out rather act through the P a = O. 06Mn / Ito (ASD),as appropriate, where ho is
column web or stiffener plates. the distance between flange centroids; and the required
stiffness shall meet the provisions ofEq. A-I-8 of Appendix
I. Each column-flange lateral brace shall be designed for A-l.6 of the Speci fication.
a required strength that is equal to 2 percent of the
available beam flange strength Fybftbf(LRFD) or 522.9 Column Splices
Fybftbf/l.5 (ASD), as appropriate.
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of
Section 521.4.l. Where groove welds are used to make the
522.7.2 Unbraced Connections
splice, they shall be complete-joint-penetration groove
welds that meet the requirements of Section 520..3.2. Weld
A column containing a beam-to-column connection with no
tabs shall be removed. When column splices are not made
lateral bracing transverse to the seismic frame at the
with groove welds, they shall have a required flexural
connection shall be designed using the distance between
strength that is at least equal to RyFyZ:cCLRFD) or
adjacent lateral braces as the column height for buckling
transverse to the seismic frame and shall conform to RyFyZx/l.5 (ASD) as appropriate, of the smaller
Specification 508, except that: column. The required shear strength of column web splices
shall be at least equal to l.M1JC/ H (LRF D) or
1. The required column strength shall be determined from
the appropriate load combinations in the NSCP code, L Mpcl1. SH (ASD), as appropriate, where L Mpc is the
except that E shall be taken as the lesser of: sum of the nominal plastic flexural strengths of the columns
above and below the splice.
a. The amplified seismic load.
b. 125 percent of the frame available strength based Exception:
upon either the beam available t1exural strength or The required strength of the column splice considering
panel zone available shear strength. appropriate stress concentration factors or fracture
mechanics stress intensity factors need not exceed that
2. The slenderness LIT for the column shall not exceed
determined by inelastic analyses
60.
3. The column required flexural strength transverse to the
seismic frame shall include that moment caused by the

SECTION 523 User Note: For the designation of demand critical welds,
standards such as ANSI! AISC 358 and tests addressing
INTERMEDIATE MOMENT FRAMES specific connections and joints should be used in lieu of the
(IMF) more general terms of these Provisions. Where these
Provisions indicate that a particular weld is designated
523.1 Scope demand critical, but the more specific standard or test does
not make such a designation, the more specific standard or
Intermediate moment frames (IMF) are expected to test should govern. Likewise, these standards and tests may
withstand limited inelastic deformations in their members designate welds as demand critical that are not identified as
and connections when subjected to the forces resulting from such by these Provisions.
the motions of the design earthquake. IMF shall meet the
requirements in this Section. 523.2.4 Protected Zone
523.2 Beam-to-Column Connections The region at each end of the beam subject to inelastic
straining shall be treated as a protected zone, and shall meet
523.2.1 Requirements the requirements of Section 520.4. The extent of the
protected zone shall be as designated in ANSIIAISC 358, or
Beam-to-column connections used in the seismic load as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
resisting system (SLRS) shall satisfy the requirements of accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program
Section 522.2, with the following exceptions: of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
I. The required interstory drift angle shall be a minimum User Note: The plastic hinging zones at the ends of IMF
of 0.02 radian. beams should be treated as protected zones. The plastic
hinging zones should be established as part of a
2. The required strength in shear shall be determined' as prequalification or qualification program for the connection.
specified in Section 522.2.1, except that a lesser value In general, for unreinforced connections, the protected zone
will extend from the face of the column to one half of the
of V u or Va, as appropriate, is permitted if justified by
beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point.
analysis. The required shear strength need not exceed
the shear resulting from the application of appropriate
load combinations in the NSCP code using the 523.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections
amplified seismic load. (Beam Web Parallel to Column Web)
No additional req~irements beyond the Specification.

523.2.2 Conformance Demonstration
523.4 Beam and Column Limitations.

Conformance demonstration shall be as described in Section
522.2.2 to satisfy the requirements of Section 523.2.1 for
IMF, except that a connection prequalified for IMF in The requirements of Section 521.1 shall be satisfied, III
accordance with ANSIIAISC 358, or as otherwise addition to the following.

determined in a connection prequalification in accordance
with Section B-1, or as determined in a program of 523.4.1 Width-Thickness Limitations
qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of
523.2.3 Welds Section 521.2.1, unless otherwise qualified by tests.
Unless otherwise designated by ANSIIAISC 358, or 523.4.2 Beam Flanges

otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program Abrupt changes in beam flange area are not permitted in
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4, plastic hinge regions. Drilling of flange holes or trimming
complete joint-penetration groove welds of beam flanges, of beam flange width is permitted if testing or qualification
shear plates, and beam webs to columns shall be demand demonstrates that the resulting configuration can develop
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2. stable plastic hinges. The configuration shall be consistent
with a prequalified connection designated in ANSIIAISC
358, or as otherwise determined in a connection
prequalification in accordance with Section B-1, or in a
program of qualification testing in accordance with Section
B-4.

523.5 Continuity Plates SECTION 524

Continuity plates shall be provided to be consistent with the ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES
prequalified connections designated in ANSI! AISC 358, or (OMF)
as otherwise determined in a connection prequalification in
accordance with Section B-1, or as determined in a program 524.1 Scope
of qualification testing in accordance with Section B-4.
Ordinary moment frames (OMF) are expected to withstand
523.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio minimal inelastic deformations in their members and
connections when subjected to the forces resulting from the
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. motions of the design earthquake. OMF shall meet the
Lateral Bracing at beam-to-column connections no requirements of this Section. Connections in conformance
additional requirements beyond the Specification. Lateral with Sections 522.2.2 and 522.5 or Sections 523.2.2 and
bracing of beams both flanges shall be laterally braced 523.5 shall be permitted for use in OMF without meeting
directly or indirectly. The unbraced length between lateral the requirements of Sections 524.2.1, 524.2.1, and 524.5.
braces shall not exceed 0.17 Ry E / F y' Braces shall meet
the provisions of Eqs. A-I-7 and A-I-8 of Appendix A-1.6 User Note: While these provisions for OMF were primarily
of the Specification, where Mr = Mu = RyZFy (LRFD) developed for use with wide flange shapes, with judgment,
they may also be applied to other shapes such as channels,
or Mr = Mu = RyZFy/l. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, of
built-up sections, and hollow structural sections (HSS).
the beam, and Cd = 1. O.
524.2 Beam-to-Column
In addition, lateral braces shall be placed near concentrated
loads, changes in cross-section and other locations where Connections beam-to-column connections shall be made
analysis indicates that a plastic hinge will form during with welds and/or high-strength bolts. Connections are
inelastic deformations of the IMF. Where the design is permitted to be fully restrained (FR) or partially restrained
based upon assemblies tested in accordance with (PR) moment connections as follows.
Section B-4, the placement of lateral bracing for the beams
shall be consistent with that used in the tests or as required
524.2.1 Requirements for FR Moment Connections
for prequalification in Section B-1. The required strength of
lateral bracing provided adjacent to plastic hinges shall be
FR moment connections that are part of the seismic load
Pu=O.06Mu/ho(LRFD) or Pa = O.06Ma/ resisting system (SLRS) shall be designed for a required
ho (ASD), as appropriate, where ho = distance between flexural strength that is .equal to 1.1 Ry Mp(LRFD) or
flange centroids; and the required stiffness shall meet the
provisions of Eq. A-I-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the
(1.1/1. 5)RyMp(ASD), as appropriate, of the beam or
Specification. Column Splices Column splices shall comply girder, or the maximum moment that can be developed by
with the requirements of Section 521.4.1. Where groove the system, whichever is less.
welds are used to make the splice, they shall be complete-
joint-penetration groove welds that meet the requirements FR connections shall meet the following requirements.
of Section 520.3.2.
I. Where steel backing is used in connections with
Complete-joint-Penetration (CJP) beam flange groove
welds, steel backing and tabs shall be removed, except
that top-flange backing attached to the column by a
continuous fillet weld on the edge below the CJP
groove weld need not be removed. Removal of steel
backing and tabs shall be as follows: .
a. Following the removal of backing, the root pass

shall be back gouged to sound weld metal and back
welded with a reinforcing fillet. The reinforcing
fillet shall have a minimum leg size of 8 mm.

b. Weld tab removal shall extend to within 3 mm of

the base metal surface, except at continuity plates
where removal to within 6 mm of the plate edge is
acceptable. Edges of the weld tab shall be finished
to a surface roughness value of 13 11m or better.
Grinding to a flush condition is not required.
Gouges and notches are not permitted. The
transitional slope of any area where gouges and
notches have been removed shall not exceed 1:5.
Material removed by grinding that extends more
than 2 mm below the surface of the base metal
shall be filled with weld metal. The contour of the
weld at the ends shall provide a smooth transition,
free of notches and sharp corners.
2. Where weld access holes are provided, they shall be as

A
shown in Figure 524-1. The weld access hole shall have v
a surface roughness value not to exceed 13 11m, and

shall be free of notches and gouges. Notches and 0
gouges shall be repaired as required by the engineer-of-
record. Weld access holes are prohibited in the beam
web adjacent to the end-plate in bolted moment end-
0
I7\'
<C~
plate connections.
.> 0 J3/..- ...
3. The required strength of double-sided partial-joint- ~ till

penetration groove welds and double-sided fillet welds
that resist tensile forces in connections shall be
1.lRyFyAg (LRFD) or ~
o
(1. 1/1. 5) RyF yAg (ASD), as appropriate, of the
User Note:
connected element or part. Single-sided partial-joint-
penetration groove welds and single-sided fillet welds 1. Bevel as required for selected groove weld
shall not be used to resist tensile forces in the 2. Larger of tbf or ~ in (Plus ~ tbf or minus ~ tbf
,2 2 4
connections.
3. ~tbf to tbf'~ in minimum (±;in) (±6 mm.)
4. For FR moment connections, the required shear 4. ~ in minimum radius (plus not limited, minus 0)
strength, V u or Va, as appropriate, of the connection
shall be determined using the following quantity for the 5. 3tbf (±iin) (±13 mrn)
earthquake load effect E:
Tolerance shall not accumulate to the extent that the angle of the access
hole cut to the flange surface exceeds 25°
(524-1)
Figure 524-1 Weld-Access Hole Detail (from FEMA 350,
Where this E is used in ASD load combinations that "Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel
are additive with other transient loads and that are Moment-Frame Buildings")
based on SEIIASCE 7, the 0.75 combination factor for
transient loads shall not be applied to E. 524.2.2 Requirements for PR Moment Connections
PR moment connections are permitted when the following

Alternatively, a lesser value of V u or Va is permitted if
requirements are met:
justified by analysis. The required shear strength need
not exceed the shear resulting from the application of
appropriate load combinations in the NSCP code using 1. Such connections shall be designed for the required
the amplified seismic load. strength as specified in Section 524.2.labove.
2. The nominal flexural strength of the connection, M n,

shall be no less than 50 percent of Mp of the connected
beam or column, whichever is less.

3. The stiffness and strength of the PR moment The welded joints of the continuity plates to the column
connections shall be considered in the design, including flanges shall be made with either complete-joint-penetration
the effect on overall frame stability. groove welds, two-sided partial-joint penetration groove
welds combined with reinforcing fillet welds, or two-sided
4. For PR moment connections, V u or V u, as appropriate, fillet welds. The required strength of these joints shall not
shall be determined from the load combination above be less than the available strength of the contact area of the
plus the shear resulting from the maximum end plate with the column flange. The required strength of the
moment that the connection is capable of resisting. welded joints of the continuity plates to the column web
shall be the least of the following:
524.2.3 Welds
a. The sum of the available strengths at the
Complete-joint-penetration groove welds of beam flanges, connections of the continuity plate to the column
shear plates, and beam webs to columns shall be demand flanges.
critical welds as described in Section 520.3.2.
The available shear strength of the contact area of
524.3 Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections the plate with the column web.
(Beam Web Parallel To Column Web)
b. The weld available strength that develops the
No additional requirements beyond the Specification. available shear strength of the column panel zone.
524.4 Beam and Column Limitations c. The actual force transmitted by the stiffener.
No requirements beyond Section 521.1. 524.6 Column-Beam Moment Ratio
524.5 Continuity Plates No additional requirements beyond the specification
When FR moment connections are made by means of welds 524.7 Lateral Bracing at Beam-to-Column
of beam flanges or beam-flange connection plates directly Connections
to column flanges, continuity plates shall be provided in
accordance with Section 510 of the Specification. No additional requirements beyond the Specification.
Continuity plates shall also be required when:
524.8 Lateral Bracing of Beams
No additional requirements beyond the Specification.

or when
524.9 Column Splices
Column splices shall comply with the requirements of

Where continuity plates are required, the thickness of the Section 521.4.1.
plates shall be determined as follows:
1. For one-sided connections, continuity plate thickness

shall be at least one half of the thickness of the beam
flange.
2. For two-sided connections the continuity plates shall be

at least equal in thickness to the thicker of the beam
flanges.

CHAr) II:J~ :5 Structural Steel 5-179
SECTION 525 525.3 Strength of Special Segment Members
SPECIAL TRUSS MOMENT FRAMES The available shear strength of the special segment shall be
(STMF) calculated as the sum of the available shear strength of the
chord members through flexure, and the shear strength
525.1 Scope corresponding to the available tensile strength and 0.3 times
the available compressive strength of the diagonal members,
Special truss moment frames (STMF) are expected to when they are used. The top and bottom chord members in
withstand significant inelastic deformation within a the special segment shall be made of identical sections and
specially designed segment of the truss when subjected to shall provide at least 25 percent of the required vertical
the forces from the motions of the design earthquake. STMF shear strength. The required axial strength in the chord
shall be limited to span lengths between columns not to members, determined according to the limit state of tensile
exceed 20 m and overall depth not to exceed 1.8 m. The yielding, shall not exceed 0.45 times lfJPn (LRFD) or
columns and truss segments outside of the special segments Pn/n (ASD), as appropriate,
shall be designed to remain elastic under the forces that can
be generated by the fully yielded and strain-hardened lfJ = 0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67(ASD)
special segment. STMF shall meet the requirements in this
Section. where
525.2 Special Segment
Each horizontal truss that is part of the seismic load The end connection of diagonal web members in the special
resisting system (SLRS) shall have a special segment that is segment shall have a required strength that is at least equal
located between the quarter points of the span of the truss. to the expected yield strength, in tension, of the web
The length of the special segment shall be between 0.1 and member, RyFyAg (LRFD) or RyFyAg/l. 5 (ASD), as
0.5 times the truss span length. The length-to-depth ratio of appropriate.
any panel in the special segment shall neither exceed 1.5
nor be less than 0.67. 525.4 Strength of Non-Special Segment RS
Panels within a special segment shall either be all Members and connections of STMF, except those in the
Vierendeel panels or all X-braced panels; neither a special segment specified in Section 525.2, shall have a
combination thereof nor the use of other truss diagonal required strength based on the appropriate load
configurations is permitted, Where diagonal members are combinations in -the NSCP code, replacing the earthquake
used in the special segment, they shall be arranged in an X
load term E with the lateral loads necessary to develop the
pattem separated by vertical members. Such diagonal
expected vertical shear strength of the special segment
members shall be interconnected at points where they cross.
V ne (LRFD) or V ne/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, at mid-
The interconnection shall have a required strength equal to
length, given as:
0.25 times the nominal tensile strength of the diagonal
member. Bolted connections shall not be used for web
members within the special segment. Diagonal web 3.75RyMnc (L - Ly)
members within the special segment shall be made of flat
V ne = + O. 075El 3
Ls Lc
bars of identical sections.
+ Ry(P nt + O. 3P nc) sin a
(525-1)
Splicing of chord members is not permitted within the
where
special segment, nor within one-half the panel length from
the ends of the special segment. The required axial strength
M nc nominal flexural strength of a chord member of the
=
of the diagonal web members in the special segment due to
special segment, N-mm
dead and live loads within the special segment
El flexural elastic segment of a chord member of the
shall not exceed O. 03FyAg (LRFD) or (0.03/ special segment, N-mm2
1.5) F yAg (ASD), as appropriate. L span length of the truss, mm
Ls '" length of the special segment, in
The special segment shall be a protected zone meeting the P nt nominal tensile strength of a diagonal member of
requirements of Section 520.4. the special segment, kips (N)
P nc nominal compressive strength of a diagonal
member of the special segment, kips, N

a angle of diagonal members with the horizontal SECTION 526

525.5 Width-Thickness Limitations
SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY
BRACED FRAMES SCD ~
Chord members and diagonal web members within the
special segment shall meet the requirements of Section 526.1 Scope
521.2.2.
Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) are expected
525.6 Lateral Bracing to withstand significant inelastic deformations when
subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the
The top and bottom chords of the trusses shall be laterally design earthquake. SCBF shall meet the requirements in this
braced at the ends of the special segment, and at intervals Section.
not to exceed Lp according to Specification Section 506,
along the entire length of the truss. The required strength of User Note: Section 527 (OCBF) should be used for the
each lateral brace at the ends of and within the special design oftension-only bracing.
segment shall be
526.2 Members
r; = O. 06RyPne(LRFD) or
526.2.1 Slenderness
Pa = (0.06/1. 5)RyPne(ASD), as appropriate.

Bracing members shall have Kllr s 4 ".}Fy
(I.
where
Exception:
P ne = is the nominal compressive strength of the special
segment chord member Braces with 4.JE/Fy < Kllr:s; 200 are permitted in
frames in which the available strength of the column is at
Lateral braces outside of the special segment shall have a least equal to the maximum load transferred to the column
required strength of considering Ry (LRFD) or (1/1.5)Ry(ASD), as
appropriate, times the nominal strengths of the connecting
brace elements of the building. Column forces need not
exceed those determined by inelastic analysis, nor the
Pa = (0.02/1. 5)RyPne(ASD), as appropriate. maximum load effects that can be developed by the system.
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of 526.2.2 Required Strength
Eq. A-I-4 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Specification, where
Where the effective net area of bracing members is less than
the gross area, the required tensile strength of the brace
based upon the limit state of fracture in the net section shall
be greater than the lesser of the following:
P r = P a = RyP nell. 5 (ASD), as appropriate.
1. The expected yield strength, in tension, of the bracing
member, determined as RyFyAg (LRFD) or
RyF yAg/l. 5 (ASD), as appropriate.
2. The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that

can be transferred to the brace by the system.
User Note: This provision applies to bracing members

where the section is reduced. A typical case is a slotted HSS
brace at the gusset plate connection.

526.2.3 Lateral Force Distribution RyF yAg/l. 5 (AS D), as appropriate.

Along any line of bracing, braces shall be deployed in 2. The maximum load effect, indicated by analysis that
alternate directions such that, for either direction of force can be transferred to the brace by the system.
parallel to the bracing, at least 30 percent but no more than
70 percent of the total horizontal force along that line is 526.3.2 Required Flexural Strength
resisted by braces in tension, unless the available strength of
each brace in compression is larger than the required The required flexural strength of bracing connections
strength resulting from the application of the appropriate
shall be equal to 1.lRy Mp (LRFD) or (1.1/
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code including
the amplified seismic load. For the purposes of this 1.5) RyMp (ASD), as appropriate, of the brace about the
provision, a line of bracing is defined as a single line or critical buckling axis.
parallel lines with a plan offset of 10 percent or less of the
building dimension perpendicular to the line of bracing. Exception:
Braced connections that meet the requirements of Section
526.2.4 Width- Thickness Limitations 526.3.1 and can accommodate the inelastic rotations
associated with braced post-buckling deformations need not
Column and brace members shall meet the requirements of meet this requirement.
Section 521.2.2.
User Note: Accommodation of inelastic rotation is typically
User Note: HSS walls may be stiffened to comply with this accomplished by means of a single gusset plate with the
requirement. brace terminating before the line of restraint. The detailing
requirements for such a connection are described in the
526.2.5 Built-up Members AISC commentary.
The spacing of stitches shall be such that the slenderness 526.3.3 Required Compressive Strength
ratio llr of individual elements between the stitches does
not exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness ratio of the Bracing connections shall be designed for a required
built-up member. compressive strength based on buckling limit
states that is at least equal to 1. lRyP n (LRFD) or
The sum of the available shear strengths of the stitches shall
(1.1/1.5) RyPn (ASD), as appropriate, where Pn is the
equal or exceed the available tensile strength of each
element. The spacing of stitches shall be uniform. Not less nominal compressive strength of the brace.
than two stitches shall be used in a built-up member. Bolted
stitches shall not be located within the middle one-fourth of 526.4 Special Bracing Configuration Requirements
the clear brace length.
526.4.1 V-Type and Inverted V-Type Bracing.
Exception:
V-type and inverted V-type SCBF shall meet the following
Where the buckling of braces about their critical buckling requirements:
axis does not cause shear in the stitches, the spacing of the
stitches shall be such that the slenderness ratio llr of the 1. The required strength of beams intersected by braces,
individual elements between the stitches does not exceed their connections, and supporting members shall be
0.75 times the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up determined based on the load combinations of the
member. NSCP code assuming that the braces provide no
support for dead and live loads. For load combinations
526.3 Required Strength of Bracing Connections that include earthquake effects, the earthquake effect,
E, on the beam shall be determined as follows:
526.3.1 Required Tensile Strength
a. The forces in all braces in tension shall be assumed
The required tensile strength of bracing connections to be equal to RyF yAg.
(including beam-to-column connections if part of the
bracing system) shall be the lesser of the following: b. The forces in all adjoining braces in compression
shall be assumed to be equal to O. 3P n-
I. The expected yield strength, in tension, of the bracing
member, determined as RyF yAg (LRF D) or

2. Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both SECTION 527

flanges of beams shall be laterally braced, with a
maximum spacing of Lb = Lpd, as specified by ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY
Eq. A-l.l-7 and A-l.l-8 of Appendix A-lof the BRACED FRAMES (OCBF)
Specification. Lateral braces shall meet the provisions
of Eqs. A-1.6-7 and A-1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.60f the 527.1 Scope
Specification, where Mr = Mu = RyZFy (LRFD)
or Mr = Mu = RyZFy /1. 5 (ASD), as Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF) are expected
to withstand limited inelastic deformations in their members
appropriate, of the beam and Cd = 1. o.
and connections when subjected to the forces resulting from
the motions of the design earthquake. DeBF shall meet the
As a minimum, one set of lateral braces is required at requirements in this section. D I3F above (he isolation
the point of intersection of the V-type (or inverted V- system in eismically isolated structures shall meet lhe
type) bracing, unless the beam has sufficient out-of- requirements of Sections 527.4and 527.5aJ1d need. not meet.
plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between the requirements of Sections 527.2aad 527 .3,
adjacent brace points.
527.2 Bracing Members
User Note: One method of demonstrating sufficient
ut-of-plane strength and stiffness of the beam is to
Bracing members shall meet the requirements of Section
apply the bracing force defined in Eq. A-1.6-7 of
521.2.2.
Appendix A-I.G of tbe S-pceitication to each flange so
as to· form a: torsienal couple; thls loading should be in
Exception:
conjunction with the flexural forces defined in item (1)
above. The stiffness of the beam (and its restraints) HSS braces that are filled with concrete need not comply
with respect to this torsional loading should be with this provision.
sufficient to satisfy Eq. A-l.6-8.
Bracing members in K, V, or inverted V-type configurations
526.4.2 K- Type shall have Kl/r :5 4jEIFy
Bracing K-type braced frames are not permitted for SCBF.
User Note: Bracing members tha'~ are designed as ten ion
oo'ly (lha.! is" neglecting theij· strength in compression) 'are
526.5 Column Splices no appropriate fer K. V, and Inverted V configuratiens.
Such braces may be used in other configurations and are 'not'
In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 52[.4, required to satisfy this provision, 80(')11 members may
column splices in SCBF shall be designed to develop 50 include slender angles, plate, or cable bracing, which are not
percent of the lesser available tl exliraI strength of the excluded by Section 519.1.
connected members. Tile required shear strength
shall be IMpelH (LRFD) or IMpel1. 5H (ASD), as 527.3 Special Bracing Configuration
appropriate, where L Mpe, is the sum ofthe nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the columns above and below the Requirements Beams in V~type and inverted V-type 0 BF
splice. and columns in K-!.ype 0 . BF shall be continuous at bracing
connections away from the bearn-to-eolurnn connection and
526.6 Protected Zone shall meet the following requirements:
The protected zone of bracing members in SCBF shall 1. The required strength shall be determined based on the
include the center one-quarter of the brace length, and a load combinations of the NSCP code assuming that the
zone adjacent to each connection equal to the brace depth in braces provide no support of dead and live loads. For
the plane of buckling. The protected zone of SCBF shall load combinations that include earthquake effects, the
include elements that connect braces to beams and columns earthquake effect, E, on the member shall be
and shall satisfy the requirements of Section 520.4. determined as follows:
a. The forces in braces in tension shall be assumed to

be equal to RyF yAg. For V-type and inverted V-
type OCBF, the forces in braces in tension need
not exceed the maximum force that can be
developed by the system.

b. The forces in braces in compression shall be 527.5 OCBF above Seismic Isolation Systems
assumed to be equal to O. 3P n-
527.5.1 Bracing Members
2. Both flanges shall be laterally braced, with a maximum
spacing of Lb = Lpd, as specified by Eqs. A-1.7-7 and Bracing members shall meet the requirements of Section
A-1.8-8 of Appendix A-I of the Specification. Lateral 521.2.2 and shall have
braces shall meet the provisions of Eqs. A-1.6-7 and A-
1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Specification,
Kilr::; 4jE/Fy
where Mr = Mu =RyZFy (LRFD) or
Mr = Mu = RyZFy /1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate,
527.5.2 K-Type Bracing
of the beam and Cd = 1. O. As a minimum, one set of
lateral braces is required at the point of intersection of
K-type braced frames are not permitted.
the bracing, unless the member has sufficient out-of-
plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability between
527.5.3 V-Type and Inverted-V-Type Bracing.
adjacent brace points.
Beams in V-type and inverted V-type bracing shall be

User Note: See User Note in Section 526.4 for a
continuous between columns.
method of establishing sufficient out-of-plane strength
and stiffness of the beam.
527.4 Bracing Connections
The required strength of bracing connections shall be

determined as follows.
J. For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of

bracing connections shall be that determined using the
load combinations stipulated by the NSCP code, not
including the amplified seismic load.
2. For other limit states, the required strength of bracing

connections is the expected yield strength, in tension,
of the brace, determined as RyFyAg(LRFD) or
RyFyAg/l.5 (ASD), as appropriate.
Exception:
The required strength of the brace connection need not
exceed either of the following:
1. The maximum force that can be developed by the
system
2. A load effect based upon using the amplified
seismic load

SEC110N 528 r;« 0.15Py (LRFD) or

ECCENTRICALLY BRACED
FRAMES (EBF) P a :::; (0.15/1. 5)Py (ASD), as appropriate.
where
528.1 Scope
Pu = required axial strength .using LRFD load
Eccentrically braced frames (EBFs) are expected to combinations, N
withstand significant inelastic deformations in the links Pa required axial strength using ASD load
when subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of combinations, N
the design earthquake. The diagonal braces, columns, and
Py nominal axial yield strength = FyAg , N
beam segments outside of the links shall be designed to
remain essentially elastic under the maximum forces that
can be generated by the fully yielded and strain-hardened If e; > 0.15Py (LRFD) or
links, except where permitted in this Section. In buildings
P a> (0.15/1.5) Py (ASD), as appropriate, the
exceeding five stories in height, the upper story of an EBF
system is permitted to be designed as an OCBF or a SCBF following additional requirements shall be met:
and still be considered to be part of an EBF system for the
purposes of determining system factors in the NSCP code. 1. The available shear strength of the link shall be the
EBF shall meet the requirements in this section. lesser of (/JvVpa and 2(/JvMpa/e (LRFD) or
Vpa/.nv and 2 (Mpa/e)/.nv (ASD), as appropriate,
528.2 Links
where
528.2.1 Limitations
(/Jv = 0.90 (LRFD)!2v 1.67 (ASD)
Links shall meet the requirements of Section 521.2.2.
(528-1)
The web of a link shall be single thickness. Doubler-plate
reinforcement and web penetrations are not permitted. Mpa = 1. 18Mp (528-2)
528.2.2. Shear Strength

P; = Pu (LRFD) or
Except as limited below, the link design shear strength,

P a (ASD), as appropriate
(/JvV n. and the allowable shear strength, V n/ .nv, according
to the limit state of shear yielding shall be determined as
follows: r, = Py(LRFD)orPy/l.5(ASD),as
appropriate
Vn = nominal shear strength of the link, equal to the
2. The length of the link shall not exceed:
lesser of V p or 2M p/ e ,N
a.
(/Jv = 0.90(LRFD) a; = 1.67 (ASD)
where (528-3)
FyZ,N-mm nor
0.6FyAw,N
link length, mm b. 1.6Mp/Vp
(d-Zt,)tw
When p'(Aw/Ag) < 0.3 (528-4)
The effect of axial force on the link available shear strength
need not be considered if where

CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5·185
meeting the requirements of (a) and (b) above.
where 4. Intermediate web stiffeners are not required in links of

V" Vu(LRFD) or Va(ASD), as appropriate lengths greater than SMp/Vp.
Vu required shear strength based on LRFD
load combinations, N 5. Intermediate web stiffeners shall be full depth. For
Va required shear strength based on ASD links that are less than 635 rnm in depth, stiffeners are
load combinations, N required on only one side of the link web. The
thickness of one-sided stiffeners shall not be less than
528.2.3 Link Rotation Angle tw or 10 mm, whichever is larger, and the width shall
be not less than (bl/2) - two For links that are
The link rotation angle is the inelastic angle between the 635 mm in depth or greater, similar intermediate
link and the beam outside of the link when the total story stiffeners are required on both sides of the web.
II
drift is equal to the design story drift, 11. The link rotation
angle shall not exceed the following values: The required strength of fillet welds connecting
a link stiffener to the link web is AstF y (LRFD) or
1. 0.08 radians for links oflength 1. 6Mp/V p or less. AstFy/ 1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, where Ast is the area
of the stiffener. The required strength
2. 0.02 radians for links of length 2. 6Mp/V p or greater. of fillet welds connecting the stiffener to the link flanges is
AstFy/ 4(LRFD) or AstFy/ 4(1. 5) (ASD).
3. The value determined by linear interpolation between
the above values for links of length between 528.4 Link-to-Column Connections
1. 6M p/V p and 2. 6M p/V p-
Link-to-column connections must be capable of sustaining
528.3 Link Stiffeners the maximum link rotation angle based on the length of the
link, as specified in Section 528.2.3. The strength of the
Full-depth web stiffeners shall be provided on both sides of connection measured at the column face shall equal at least
the link web at the diagonal brace ends of the link. These the nominal shear strength of the link, V n, as specified in
stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than Section 528.2.2 at the maximum link rotation angle. Link-
(bl - 2tw) and a thickness not less than O.7Stw or 10 to-column connections shall satisfy the above requirements
mm, by one of the following:
1. Use a connection prequalified for EBF in accordance

Whichever is larger, where bland tw are the link flange
with Section B-1.
width and link web thickness respectively.
2. Provide qualifying cyclic test results in accordance with
Links shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners as
Section B-4. Results of at least two cyclic connection
follows:
tests shall be provided and are permitted to be based on
one of the following:
1. Links of lengths 1. 6M p/V p or less shall be provided
with intermediate web stiffeners spaced at intervals not a. Tests reported in research literature or documented
exceeding (30tw - diS) for a link rotation angle of tests performed for other projects that are
0.08 radian or (S2tw - d/S)for link rotation angles of representative of project conditions, within the
0.02 radian or less. Linear interpolation shall be used limits specified in Section B-4.
for values between 0.08 and 0.02 radian.
b. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project
and are representative of project member sizes,
2. Links of length greater than 2. 6M p/V p and less than
material strengths, connection configurations, and
SMp/Vp shall be provided with intermediate web matching connection processes, within the limits
stiffeners placed at a distance of 1.5 times bf from each specified in Section B-4.
end of the link.
3. Links of length between 1.6Mp/Vp and 2.6Mp/Vp

shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners

Exception: 528.6.2 Beam Outside Link

Where reinforcement at the beam-to-column connection at
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the
the link end precludes yielding of the beam over the
beam outside of the link shall be determined based on load
reinforced length, the link is permitted to be the beam
combinations stipulated by the NSCP code. For load
segment from the end of the reinforcement to the brace
connection. Where such links are used and the link length combinations including seismic effects, a load Ql shall be
does not exceed 1. 6Mpp/V P' cyclic testing of the reinforced substituted for the term E where Q 1 is defined as the forces
connection is not required if the available strength of the generated by at least 1.1 times the expected nominal shear
reinforced section and the connection equals or exceeds the strength of the link, RyV n- where V n is as defined in
required strength calculated based upon the strain- Section 528.2.2. The available strength of the beam outside
hardened link as described in Section 528.8. Full depth of the link shall be determined by the Specification,
stiffeners as required in Section 528.2.3shall be placed at multiplied by Ry.
the link-to-reinforcement interface.
User Note: The diagonal brace and beam segment outside
528.5 Lateral Bracing of Link of the link are intended to remain essentially elastic under
the forces generated by the fully yielded and strain hardened
Lateral bracing shall be provided at both the top and bottom link. Both the diagonal brace and beam segment outside of
link flanges at the ends of the link. The required strength of the link are typically subject to a combination of large axial
each lateral brace at the ends of the link shall force and bending moment, and therefore should be treated
be Pb = 0.06 Mr/ho, where ho is the distance as beam-columns in design, where the available strength is
between flange centroids in mm. defined by Section 508 of the Specification.
For design according to Specification Section 502.3.3 At the connection between the diagonal brace and the beam
(LRFD) at the link end of the brace, the intersection of the brace and
beam centerlines shall be at the end of the link or in the link.
For design according to Specification Section B3.4 (ASD) 528.6.3 Bracing Connections
The required strength of the diagonal brace connections, at

Mr = Mw exp/1. 5
both ends of the braces, shall be at least equal to the
required strength of the diagonal brace, as defined in
The required brace stiffness shall meet the provisions of
Section 528.6.1. The diagonal brace connections shall also
Eq. A-1.6-8 of the Specification, where Mr is defined
satisfy the requirements of Section 526.3.3.
above, Cd =
1, and Lb is the link length.
No part of the diagonal brace connection at the link end of
528.6 Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link the brace shall extend over the link length. If the brace is
designed to resist a portion of the link end moment, then the
528.6.1 Diagonal Brace diagonal brace connection at the link end of the brace shall
be designed as a fully-restrained moment connection.
The required combined axial and flexural strength of the
diagonal brace shall be determined based on load 528.7 Beam-to-Column Connections
combinations stipulated by the NSCP code. For load
combinations including seismic effects, a load Q 1 shall be If the EBF system factors in the NSCP code require moment
substituted for the term E, where Ql is defined as the axial resisting connections away from the link, then the beam-to-
forces and moments generated by at least 1.25 times the column connections away from the link shall meet the
expected nominal shear strength of the link Ry V n- where requirements for beam-to-column connections for OMF
V n is as defined in Section 528.2.2. The available strength specified in Sections 11.2 and 11.5.
of the diagonal brace shall comply with Specification
Section 508. If the EBF system factors in the NSCP code do not require
moment resisting connections away from the link, then the
Brace members shall meet the requirements of Section beam-to-column connections away from the link are
521.2.1. permitted to be designed as pinned in the plane of the web.

528.8 Required Strength of Columns SECTION 529

In addition to the requirements in Section 521.3, the BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED
required strength of columns shall be determined from load FRAMES (BRBF)
combinations as stipulated by the NSCP code, except that
the seismic load E shall be the forces generated by 1.1 times 529.1 Scope
the expected nominal shear strength of all links above the
level under consideration. The expected nominal shear Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF) are expected to
strength of a link is RyV n, where V n is as defined in withstand significant inelastic deformations when subjected
Section 528.2.2. to the forces resulting from the motions of the design
earthquake. BRBF shall meet the requirements in this
Column members shall meet the requirements of Section Section. Where the NSCP code does not contain design
521.2.2. coefficients for BRBF, the provisions of Section B-3 shall
apply.
528.9 Protected Zone
529.2 Bracing Members
Links in EBFs are a protected zone, and shall satisfy the
requirements of Section 520.4. Welding on links is Bracing members shall be composed of a structural steel
permitted for attachment of link stiffeners, as required in core and a system that restrains the steel core from
Section 528.3. buckling.
528.10 Demand Critical Welds 529.2.1 Steel Core
Complete-joint-penetration groove welds attaching the link The steel core shall be designed to resist the entire axial
flanges and the link web to the column are demand critical force in the brace.
welds, and shall satisfy the requirements of Section 520.3.2.
The brace design axial strength, tpPysc (LRFD), and the
brace allowable axial strength, Pysc In (ASD), in tension
and compression, according to the limit state of yielding,
P y~c = F ysc Asc (529-1)
0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)

where
Fysc specified minimum yield stress of the steel core,

or actual yield stress of the steel core as
determined from a coupon test, MPa
net area of steel core, mrrr'
Plates used in the steel core that are 50 mm thick or greater

shall satisfy the minimum notch toughness requirements of
Section 519.3.
Splices in the steel core are not permitted.
529.2.2 Buckling-Restraining System
The buckling-restraining system shall consist of the casing

for the steel core. In stability calculations, beams, columns,
and gussets connecting the core shall be considered parts of
this system.

The buckling-restraining system shall limit local and overall The compression strength adjustment factor, fJ, shall be
buckling of the steel core for deformations corresponding to calculated as the ratio of the maximum compression force to
2.0 times the design story drift. The buckling-restraining the maximum tension force of the test specimen measured
system shall not be permitted to buckle within deformations from the qualification tests specified in Section B-5, Section
corresponding to 2.0 times the design story drift. B-5.6.3for the range of deformations corresponding to 2.0
times the design story drift. The larger value of ~ from the
User Note: Conformance to this provision is demonstrated two required brace qualification tests shall be used. In no
by means of testing as described in Section 529.2.3. case shall ~ be taken as less than 1.0.
529.2.3 Testing The strain hardening adjustment factor, 0), shall be

calculated as the ratio of the maximum tension force
The design of braces shall be based upon results from measured from the qualification tests specified in
qualifying cyclic tests in accordance with the procedures Section B-5, Section B-5.6.3 (for the range of deformations
and acceptance criteria of Section B-5. Qualifying test corresponding to 2.0 times the design story drift) to F ysc of
results shall consist of at least two successful cyclic tests:
the test specimen. The larger value of w from the two
one is required to be a test of a brace subassemblage that required qualification tests shall be used. Where the tested
includes brace connection rotational demands complying
steel core material does not match that of the prototype, 0)
with Section B-5, Section B-5.4 and the other shall be either
shall be based on coupon testing of the prototype material.
a uniaxial or a subassemblage test complying with Section
529.3. Bracing Connections.
B-5, Section B-5.5. Both test types are permitted to be
based upon one of the following:
529.3 Bracing Connections
1. Tests reported in research or documented tests
performed for other projects.
The required strength of bracing connections in tension and

2. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project.
compression (including beam-to-column connections if part
of the bracing system) shall be 1.1 times the adjusted brace
Interpolation or extrapolation of test results for
strength in compression (LRFD) or 1.111.5 times the
different member sizes shall be justified by rational
adjusted brace strength in compression (ASD).
analysis that demonstrates stress distributions and
magnitudes of internal strains consistent with or less
severe than the tested assemblies and that considers the 529.3.2 Gusset Plates
adverse effects of variations in material properties.
Extrapolation of test results shall be based upon similar The design of connections shall include considerations of
combinations of steel core and buckling-restraining local and overall buckling. Bracing consistent with that used
system sizes. Tests shall be permitted to qualify a in the tests upon which the design is based is required.
design when the provisions of Section B-5 are met.
User Note: This provision may be met by designing the
529.2.4 Adjusted Brace Strength gusset plate for a transverse force consistent with transverse
bracing forces determined from testing, by adding a
stiffener to it to resist this force, or by providing a brace to
Where required by these Provisions, bracing connections
and adjoining members shall be designed to resist forces the gusset plate or to the brace itself. Where the supporting
calculated based on the adjusted brace strength. tests did not include transverse bracing, no such bracing is
required. Any attachment of bracing to the steel core must
be included in the qualification testing.
The adjusted brace strength in compression shall be
fJ wRyP ysc- The adjusted brace strength in tension shall be
O)RyPysc·
Exception:
The factor Ry need not be applied if P ysc is established

using yield stress determinedfrom a coupon test.

529.4 Special Requirements 529.5.2 Required Strength
Related to Bracing Configuration. V-type and inverted-V- The required strength of beams and columns in BRBF shall
type braced frames shall meet the following requirements: be determined from load combinations as stipulated in the
NSCP code. For load combinations that include earthquake
1. The required strength of beams intersected by braces, effects, the earthquake effect, E, shall be determined from
their connections, and supporting members shall be the adjusted brace strengths in tension and compression.
determined based on the load combinations of the
NSCP code assuming that the braces provide no The required strength of beams and columns need not
support for dead and live loads. For load combinations exceed the maximum force that can be developed by the
that include earthquake effects, the vertical and system.
horizontal earthquake effect, E, on the beam shall be
determined from the adjusted brace strengths in tension User Note: Load effects calculated based on adjusted brace
and compression. strengths should not be amplified by the overstrength factor,
flo·
Beams shall be continuous between columns. Both
flanges of beams shall be laterally braced. Lateral 529.5.3 Splices
braces shall meet the provisions of Eqs. A-l.6-7 and
A-1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Specification, In addition to meeting the requirements in Section 521.4,
where Mr = Mu = Ry ZFy (LRFD) or Mr = Mu = column splices in BRBF shall be designed to develop 50
Ry ZFy 11. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the beam and percent of the lesser available flexural strength' of the
connected members, determined based on the
Cd = 1. O. As a minimum, one set of lateral braces is
limit state of yielding. The required shear
required at the point of intersection of the V-type (or
inverted V-type) bracing, unless the beam has sufficient strength shall be f.MpclH (LRFD) or
out-of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability f.Mpc/l. 5H (ASD), as appropriate, where f.Mpc is the
between adjacent brace points. sum of the nominal plastic flexural strengths of the columns
above and below the splice.
User Note: The beam has sufficient out-of-plane strength
and stiffness if the beam bent in the horizontal plane meets 529.6 Protected Zone
the required brace strength and required brace stiffuess for
column nodal bracing as prescribed in the Specification. P u The protected zone shall include the steel core of bracing
may be taken as the required compressive strength of the members and elements that connect the steel core to beams
brace. and columns, and shall satisfy the requirements of Section
520.4.
For purposes of brace design and testing, the calculated
maximum deformation of braces shall be increased by
including the effect of the vertical deflection of the beam
under the loading defined in Section 529.4.
K-type braced frames are not permitted for BRBF.
529.5 Beams and Columns
Beams and columns in BRBF shall meet the following

requirements.
529.5.1 Width- Thickness Limitations
Beam and column members shall meet the requirements of

Section 521.2.2.

530.2.2 Panel Aspect Ratio

SECTION 530
SPECIAL PLATE SHEAR WALLS The ratio of panel length to height, L/h, shall be limited to
(SPSW) 0.8 < u« s 2.5.
530.1 Scope 530.2.3 Openings in Webs
Special plate shear walls (SPSW) are expected to withstand Openings in webs shall be bounded on all sides by HBE and
signi llcan l inelastic defonnati ons in the webs when VBE extending the full width and height of the panel,
subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the respectively, unless otherwise justified by testing and
design earthquake. The horizontal boundary elements analysis.
(HBEs) aud vertical boundary elements {VBEs} adjacent 10
the webs shall be designed 10 remain essentially elastic 530.3 Connections of Webs to Boundary Elements
under the maximum forces lbal can be generated by the
fully Yielded webs except that plastic lunging at the ends of The required strength of web connections to the surrounding
HBEs is permitted. SPSW shall meet the requirements of HBE and VBE shall equal the expected yield strength, in
this Section. Wh.ere the NSCP code does not contain design tension, of the web calculated at an angle u, defined by
coefficients for SPSW. the provisions of Section B-3 shall Eq.530-2.
apply.
530.4 Horizontal and Vertical Boundary Elements
530.2 Webs
530.2.1 Shear Strength
In addition to the requirements of Section 521.3, the
The panel design shear strength, qJVn (LRFD), and the required strength of VBE shall be based upon the forces
allowable shear strength, Vn/U (ASD), according to the corresponding to the expected yield strength, in tension, of
limit state of shear yielding, shall be determined as follows: the web calculated at an angle u.
The required strength of HB£ shall be the greater of the

forces corresponding to the expected yield strength, in
qJ = 0.90 (LRFD)U = 1.67 (ASD) tension of tbe web calculated at an angle a or that
determined from the load combinations in the NSCP code
where assuming the web provides no support for gravity loads.
thickness of the web, mm The beam-column moment ratio provisions in Section 522.6
clear distance between VBE flanges, mm shall be met for all HBE/VBE intersections without
consideration of the effects of the webs.
u is the angle of web yielding in radians, as measured
relative to the vertical, and it is given by: 530.4.2 HBE-to- VBE Connections
HBE-to- VBE connections shall satisfy the requirements of

(530-2) ection 524.2. The required shear strength, Vw of a J-IBE-
to-VBE COnn ction shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of Section 524.2, except that the required
shear strength shall not be less than the shear correspending
distance between HBE centerlines, mm to moments at each end equal to 1.1RyMp (LRFD) or
cross-sectional area of a HBE, mrrr' (1.1/1.5) RyMp (ASD), as appropriate, together with
cross-sectional area of a VBE, rnm" the shear resulting from the expected yield strength in
moment of inertia of a VBE taken perpendicular to tension of the webs yielding at an angle u.
the direction of the web plate line, rnm"
L distance between VBE centerlines, mm 530.4.3 Width-Thickness Limitations
HBE and VBE members shall meet the requirements of

Section 521.2.2.

530.4.4 Lateral Bracing SECTIONS31

HBE shall be laterally braced at all intersections with VBE I~UALI'FYASSuaANCE PLM
and at a spacing not to exceed O. 086 RyE I F y' Both
531.1 Scope
flanges of HBE shall be braced either directly or indirectly.
The required strength of lateral bracing shall be at least 2
When required by the NSCP code or the engineer-of-record
percent of the HBE flange nominal strength, Fybftf. The
a quality assurance plan shall be provided. The quality
required stiffness of all lateral bracing shall be determined assurance plan shall include the requirements of
in accordance with Eq. A-1.6-8 of Appendix A-1.6 of the Section B-2.
Specification. In these equations, Mr shall be
computed as RyZFy (LRFD) or Mr shall be User Note: The quality assurance plan in Section B-2 is
computed as RyZFy 11.5 (ASD), as appropriate, and considered adequate and effective for most seismic load
c, = 1. O. 530. 4. 5. VBE Splices. VBE splices shall resisting systems and is strongly encouraged for use without
modification. While the NSCP code requires use of a
comply with the requirements of Section 521.4.
quality assurance plan based on the seismic design category,
use of the quality assurance plan for any seismic load
530.4.5 Panel Zones
resisting system with an R greater than 3 is strongly
The VBE panel zone next to the top and base HBE of the encouraged independent of the seismic design category. Use
SPSW shall comply with the requirements in Section 522.3. of a response modification factor of 3 or more indicates an
assumption of system, element, and connection ductility to
530.4.6 Stiffness of Vertical Boundary Elements reduce design forces. The quality assurance plan is intended
to ensure that the seismic load resisting system is
The VBE shall have moments of inertia about an axis taken significantly free of defects that would greatly reduce the
II
ductility of the system. There may be cases (for example,
perpendicular to the plane of the web, Ie, not less than
non-redundant major transfer members, or where work is
o. 00307twh41 L. performed in a location that is difficult to access) where
supplemental testing - might be advisable. Additionally,
where the contractor's quality control program has
demonstrated the capability to perform some tasks this plan
has assigned to quality assurance, modification of the plan
could be considered.

APPENDICES B-1. Section B-1.3 Testing Requirements
PREQUALIFICATION OF"BEAM- Data used to support connection prequalification shall be

COLUMN AND LINK-TO-COLUMN based en tests conducted in accordance with Section B-4.
The PRP shall determine the number of tests and the
CONNECTIONS variables considered by the tests for connection
prequalification.
Appendix B-1.1 Scope
The CPR]) shall also provide the same inforrnati n when
This appendix contains mmimum requirements for
limits are to be changed the connection has the ability and
prequalification of beam to-column moment connections in
reliabil ily to undergo the required interstory drift angle for
special moment frames (SMF), intermediate moment frames
SMF and rMF find the required link rotation angle for EBP,
(IMF), and link-to-column connections in eccentrically
where the link is adjacent to column. The limits on
braced frames (EBF). Prequalified connections are
member sizes for preq uali fication shall not exceed lhe limits
permitted to be used, within the applicable limits of specified in Section B-4, Section B-2.5.2.
prequalification, without the need for further qualifying
cyclic tests. When the limits of prequalification or design
B-1.4 Pre qualification Variables
requirements for prequalified connections conflict with the
requirements of these Provisions. the limits of
In order to be prequalified, the effect of the following
prequalification and design requirements for prequalified
variables on connection performance shall be considered.
connections shall govern.
Limits on the permissible" values 00,' each variable shall be
established by the CPRP for the prequalified connection.
B-1.2 General Requirements
I. Beam or link parameters:
B-1.2.1 Basis for Prequalification
a. Cross-section shape: wide flange, box, or other
Connections shall be prequalified based on test data
b. Cross-section fabrication method: (rolled shape,
satisfying Section B-l.3, supported by analytical studies and
welded shape, or other)
design models. The combined body of evidence for
prequalification must be sufficient to assure that the c. Depth
connection can supply the required interstory drift angle for
d. Weight per foot
SMF and IMF systems, or the required link rotation angle
for EBF, on a consistent and reliable basis within the e. Flange thickness
specified limits of prequalification. All applicable limit
f. Material specification
states for the connection that affect the stiffness, strength
and deformation capacity of the connection and the Seismic g. Span-to-depth ratio (for SMF or IMF), or link
Load Resisting System (SLRS) must be identified. These length (for EBF)
include fracture related limit states, stability related limit
h. Width thickness ratio of cross-section elements
states, and all other limit states pertinent for the connection
under consideration. The effect of design variables listed in 1. Lateral bracing
Section B-l.4 shall be addressed for connection
prequalification. J. Other parameters pertinent to the specific
connection under consideration
B-1.2.2 Authority for Prequalification
2, Column parameters:
Prequalification of a connection and the associated limits of a. Cross-section shape: wide flange, box, or other
prequalification shall be established by a Connection
Prequalification Review Panel (CPRP) approved by the b. Cross-section fabrication method: (rolled shape,
authority having jurisdiction. welded shape, or other)
c. Column orientation with respect to beam or link:
(beam or link is connected to column flange, beam
or link is connected to column web, beams or links
are connected to both the column flange and web,
or other)
d. Depth

e. Weight per foot 7. Workmanship: All workmanship parameters that

exceed AISC, RCSC and A WS requirements, pertinent
f. Flange thickness
to the specific connection under consideration, such as:
g. Material specification
a. Surface roughness of thermal cut or ground edges
h. Width-thickness ratio of cross-section elements
b. Cutting tolerances
1. Lateral bracing
c. Weld reinforcement or contouring
J. Other parameters pertinent to the specific
connection under consideration d. Presence of holes, fasteners or welds for
attachments
3. Beam (or link) column relations:
8. Additional connection details: All variables pertinent to
a. Panel zone strength
the specific connection under consideration, as
b. Doubler plate attachment details established by the CPRP
c. Column-beam (or link) moment ratio
B-1.5 Design Procedure
4. Continuity plates:
A comprehensive design procedure must be available for a
a. Identification of conditions under which continuity prequalified connection. The design procedure must address
plates are required all applicable limit states within the limits of
prequalification.
b. Thickness, width and depth
c. Attachment details B-1.6 Prequalification Record
5. Welds: A prequalified connection shall be provided with a written

prequalification record with the following information:
fl. Location, extent (including returns), type (CJP,
PJP, fillet, etc.) and any reinforcement or
1. General description of the prequalified connection and
contouring required
drawings that clearly identify key features and
b. Filler metal classification strength and notch components of the connection
toughness
2. Description of the expected behavior of the connection
c. Details and treatment of weld backing and weld in the elastic and inelastic ranges of behavior, intended
tabs location(s) of inelastic action, and a description oflimit
states controlling the strength and deformation capacity
d. Weld access holes: size, geometry and finish
of the connection
e. Welding quality control and quality assurance
3. Listing of systems for which connection is prequalified:
beyond that described in Section 18, including the
SMF, IMF, or EBF
Non Destructive Testing (NDT) method,
inspection frequency, acceptance criteria and 4. Listing of limits for all prequalification variables listed
documentation requirements in Section B-IA.
5. Listing of demand critical welds
6. Bolts:
6. Definition of the region of the connection that
a. Bolt diameter comprises the protected zone
b. Bolt grade: ASTM A325, A490, or other 7. Detailed description of the design procedure for the
c. Installation requirements: pretensioned, snug-tight, connection, as required in Section B-1.5.
or other
8. List of references of test reports, research reports and
d. Hole type: standard, oversize, short-slot, long-slot, other publications that provided the basis for
or other prequalification
e. Hole fabrication method: drilling, punching, sub- 9. Summary of quality control and quality assurance
punching and reaming, or other procedures
f. Other parameters pertinent to the specific

connection under consideration

The following documents shall be available for review by

B-2. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
the engineer-of-record or designee prior to fabrication or
erection, as applicable, unless specified to be submitted:
B-2.1 Scope
I. Material test reports for structural steel, bolts, shear
Quality Control (QC) and Quality Assurance (QA) shall be
connectors, and welding materials
provided as specified in this Section.
2. Inspection procedures
Visual welding inspection and Non Destructive Testing
(NDT) shall be conducted in accordance with a written
3. Nonconformance procedure
practice by personnel qualified in accordance with Section
B-6.
4. Material control procedure
User Note: Section B-6, Section B-6.3 contains items to be
considered in determining the qualification requirements for 5. Bolt installation procedure
welding inspectors and NDT technicians.
6. Welder Performance Qualification Records (WPQR),
B-2.2 Inspection and Nondestructive Testing Personnel including any supplemental testing requirements
Bolting inspection shall be conducted in accordance with a 7. QC Inspector qualifications

written practice by qualified personnel.
B-2.4 Quality Assurance Agency Documents
B-2.3 Contractor Documents
The agency responsible for quality assurance shall submit
The following documents shall be submitted for review by . the following documents to the authority having
the engineer-of-record or designee, prior to fabrication or jurisdiction, the engineer-of-record, and the owner or
erection, as applicable: owner's designee:
1. Shop drawings 1. QA agency's written practices for the monitoring and

2. Erection drawings control of the agency's operations. The written practice
shall include:
3. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS), which shall
specify all applicable essential variables of A WS Dl.l a. The agency's procedures for the selection and
and the following, as applicable administration of inspection personnel, describing
a. power source (constant current or constant voltage) the trammg, experience and examination
requirements for qualification and certification of
b. for demand critical welds, electrode manufacturer inspection personnel, and
and trade name
4. Copies of the manufacturer's typical certificate of b. The agency's inspection procedures, including
conformance for all electrodes, fluxes and shielding general inspection, material controls, and visual
gasses to be used. Certificates of conformance shall welding inspection
satisfy the applicable AWS A5 requirements.
2. Qualifications of management and QA personnel
5. For demand critical welds, applicable manufacturer's designated for the project
certifications that the filler metal meets the
supplemental notch toughness requirements, as 3. Qualification records for Inspectors and NDT
applicable. Should the filler metal manufacturer not technicians designated for the project
supply such supplemental certifications, the contractor
shall have the necessary testing performed and provide 4. NDT procedures and equipment calibration records for
the applicable test reports. NDT to be performed and equipment to be used for the
6. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog data for project
SMA W, FCA Wand GMA W composite (cored) filler
metals to be used. The data sheets shall describe the 5. Daily or weekly inspection reports
product, limitations of use, recommended or typical
welding parameters, and storage and exposure 6. Non-conformance reports
requirements, including baking, if applicable.

CH/\I·'Tl:.T< 5 Structural Steel 5-195
B-2.S Inspection Points and Frequencies Magnetic particle testing shall be performed by QA
according to the procedures prescribed in Section B-6,
Inspection points and frequencies of Quality Control (QC) Section B-6.2.
and Quality Assurance (QA) tasks and documentation for
the Seismic Load Resisting System (SLRS) shall be as 2. Required NDT
provided in the following tables.
a. k-Area NDT
The following entries are used in the tables:
When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates,
Observe (0) - The inspector shall observe these functions or stiffeners has been performed in the k-area, the
on a random, daily basis. Welding operations need not be web shall be tested for cracks using Magnetic
delayed pending observations. Particle Testing (MT). The MT inspection area
shall include the k-area base metal within 75 mm
Perform (P) - These inspections shall be performed prior to of the weld.
the final acceptance of the item. Where a task is noted to be
performed by both QC and QA, it shall be permitted to b. CJP Groove Weld NDT
coordinate the inspection function between QC and QA so
that the inspection functions need be performed by only one Ultrasonic testing shall be performed on 100
party. Where QA is to rely upon inspection functions percent of CJP groove welds in materials 8 mm
performed by QC, the approval of the engineer-of-record thick or greater. Ultrasonic testing in materials less
and the authority having jurisdiction is required. than 8 mm thick is not required. Magnetic particle
testing shall be performed on 25 percent of all
Document (D) - The inspector shall prepare reports beam-to-column CJP groove welds.
indicating that the work has been performed in accordance
with the contract documents. The report need not provide c. Base Metal NDT for Lamellar Tearing and
detailed measurements for joint fit-up, WPS settings, Laminations 1
completed welds, or other individual items listed in the 1.1
Tables in Sections B-2.5.1, B-2.5.3, or B-2.5.4. For shop After joint completion, base metal thicker than 38
fabrication, the report shall indicate the piece mark of the mm loaded in tension in the through thickness
piece inspected. For field work, the report shall indicate the direction in tee and comer joints, where the
reference grid lines and floor or elevation inspected. Work connected material is greater than 19 mm and
not in compliance with the contract documents and whether contains CJP groove welds, shall be ultrasonically
the noncompliance has been satisfactorily repaired shall be tested for discontinuities behind and adjacent to the
noted in the inspection report. fusion line of such welds. Any base metal
discontinuities found within t/4 of the steel
B-2.S.1 Visual Welding Inspection surface shall be accepted or rejected on the basis of
criteria of AWS D 1.1 Table 6.2, where t is the
Visual inspection of welding shall be the primary method thickness of the part subjected to the through-
used to confirm that the procedures, materials, and thickness strain.
workmanship incorporated in construction are those that
have been specified and approved for the project. As a d. Beam Cope and Access Hole NDT
minimum, tasks shall be as follows:
At welded splices and connections, thermally cut
B-2.S.2 Nondestructive Testing (NDT) of Welds surfaces of beam copes and access holes shall be
tested using magnetic particle testing or penetrant
Nondestructive testing of welds shall be performed by testing, when the flange thickness exceeds 38 mm
quality assurance personnel. for rolled shapes, or when the web thickness
exceeds 38 mm for built-up shapes.
1. Procedures
Ultrasonic testing shall be performed by QA according

to the procedures prescribed in Section B-6, Section B-
6.1.

e. Reduced Beam Section Repair NDT

Visual Inspection Task QC QA
Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on Before Welding Task Doc. Task Doc.
any weld and adjacent area of the reduced beam Material identification 0 - 0 -
section (RBS) plastic hinge region tba~ has been (T1'2_c/Grade)
repaired by welding or on the base metal of the Fit-up of Groove Welds
RBS plastic hinge region if a sharp notch has been (including_ioint _g_eometry)
removed by grinding. - Joint_pr~aration
- Dimensions (alignment,
f. Weld Tab Removal Sites root opening, root face, P/O** - 0 -
bevel)
Magnetic particle testing shall be performed on the - Cleanliness (condition of
end of welds from which the weld tabs have been steel surface~
removed, except for continuity plate weld tabs. - Tacking (tack weld
qua liLy and location)
g. Reduction of Percentage of Ultrasonic Testing - Backing type and fit (if P/O** - 0 -
aEElicable)
The amount of ultrasonic testing is permitted to be Configuration and finish of 0 - 0 -
reduced if approved by the engineer-of-record and access holes
the authority having jurisdiction. The Fit-up of Fillet Welds
nondestructive testing rate for an individual welder - Dimensions 9 alignment,
or welding operator may be reduced to 25 percent, gaps at root)
provided Uje reject nIle ill demonstrated to be 5 - Cleanliness 9 condition of P/O** - 0 -
percent or less of tile welds tested for the welder or steel surfaces)
welding operator. A sampling of at least 4'0 - Tacking (tack weld
completed welds for a job shall be made for such quality and location)
reduction evaluation. Reject nile is the number of **Following performance of this inspection task for ten
welds containing rejectable defects divided by the welds to be made by a given welder, with the welder
number of welds completed. For evaluating the demonstrating adequate understanding of requirements and
reject rate of continuous welds over 1 m in length possession of skills and tools to verify these items, the
where the effective throat thickness is 25 mm or Perform designation of this task shall be reduce to Observe,
less, each 300 mm increment or fraction thereof and the welder shall perform this task, the task shall be
shall be considered as one weld. For evaluating the returned to Perform until such time as the Inspector has
reject rate on continuous welds over 1 m in length reestablished adequate assurance that the welder will
where the effective throat thickness is greater than perform the inspection tasks listed.
25 mm, each 150 mm of length or fraction thereof
shall be considered one weld.
h. Reduction of Percentage of Magnetic Particle

Testing
The amount of MT on CJP groove welds is

permitted to be reduced if approved by the
engineer-of-record and the authority having
jurisdiction. The MT rate for an indi vidual welder
or welding 'operator may be reduced to 10 percent,
provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be 5
percent or less of the welds tested for the welder 01'
welding operator. A sampling of at least 20
completed welds for a job shall be made for such
reduction evaluation. Reject rate is the number of
welds containing rejectable defects divided by the
number of welds completed. This reduction is not
permitted on welds in the k-area, at repair sites,
weld tab and backing removal sites and access
holes.

Visual Inspection Task QC QA Visual Inspection Task QC QA

During Welding Task Doc. Task Doc. After Welding Task Doc. Task Doc.
WPS followed Welds cleaned 0 - 0 -
- Setting on welding Welder identification
equipment legible
0 - 0 -
- Travel speed Verify size, length, and
- Selected welding location of welds
0 - 0 -
materials Visually inspect welds to
- Shielding gas typelflow acceptance criteria
rate 0 - 0 - - Crack porhibition
- Preheat applied - Weld/base-metal fusion
- Interpass temperature - Crater cross-section p D P D
maintained (min.lmax.) - Weld profiles
- Proper position (F, V,R, - Weld size
OR) - Undercut
- Intermix of filler metals - Porosity
avoided unless approved Placement of reinforcement .
Use of qualified welders 0 - 0 - P D P D
fillets
Control and handling of Backing bars removed and
welding consumables weld tabs removed and
P D P D
- Packaging
0 - 0 - finished (if required)
- Exposure control Repair activities P - P D
Environmental conditions
- Wind speed within limits 0 - 0 -
QC QA
- Precipitation and Inspection Task Prior to
temperature Bolting Task Doc. Task Doc.
Welding techniques Proper bolts selected for
0 - 0 -
- Interpass and final 0 - 0 - the joint detail
Proper bolting procedure
cleaning 0 - 0 -
- Each pass within profile selected for joint detail
Imitations Connecting elements are
- Each pass meets quality
0 - 0 - fabricated properly,
requirements including the appropriate
No welding over cracked faying surface condition 0 - 0 -
0 - 0 _.
tacks and hole preparation, if
specified, meets applicable
requirements
Pre-installation verification
testing conducted for P D 0 D
fastener assemblies and
method used
Proper storage provided for
bolts, nuts, washers, and 0 - 0 -
other fastener components

Inspection Task During QC QA B-2.S.4 Other Inspections

Bolting Task Doc. Task Doc.
Fastener assemblies placed Where applicable, the following inspection shall be
in all holes and washers (if performed:
required) are properly
0 - 0 -
positioned Other Inspection Task QC QA
Joint brought to the snug Task Doc. Task Doc.
tight condition prior to thw 0 - 0 - Reduce beam section
pretensioning oEeration (RBS) requirements, if
Fastener components not applicable P D P D
returnes by the wrench 0 - 0 - - contour and finish
prevented from rotating - dimensional tolerances
Bolts are pretensioned Protected zone no holes
progress systematically and unapproved
from most rigid point
0 - 0 - attachments made by
P D P D
toward free edges contractor
Inspection Task After QC QA

Bolting Task Doc. Task Doc.
Document accepted and p D P D
rejected connections
3. Documentation
All NDT performed shall be documented. For shop

fabrication, the NDT report shall identify the tested weld by
piece mark and location in the piece. For field work, the
NDT report shall identify the tested weld by location in the
structure, piece mark, and location in the piece.
B-2.S.3 Inspection of Bolting
Observation of bolting operations shall be the primary

method used to confirm that the procedures, materials, and
workmanship incorporated in construction are those that
have been specified and approved for the project. As a
minimum, the tasks shall be as follows:

CHAI::l-rEI~ 5 StructulClI Steel 5-199
B-3. SEISMIC DESIGN User Note: The design coefficients and parameters
presented in this appendix are taken from the 2003 NEHRP
COEFFICIENTS AND Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New
APPROXIMATE PERIOD Buildings and Other Structures. This appendix will be
deleted from these Provisions once SET!ASCE 7 and this
PARAMETERS codes add the BRBF and SPSW to their list of acceptable
structural systems. It is expected that such parameters will
B-3.1 Scope
be included in an appendix to SEJI ASCE 7 which is
expected to be published in mid to late 2005.
This appendix contains design coefficients, system
limitations and design parameters for Seismic Load
B-3.2 Symbols
Resisting Systems (SLRS) that are included in these
Provisions but not yet defined in this code for Buckling-
The following symbols are used in this appendix.
Restrained Braced Frames (BRBF) and Special Plate Shear
Walls (SPSW). The values presented in Tables B-3-1 and
Cd Deflection amplification factor
B-3-2 in this appendix shall only be used where neither the
NSCP code nor SEIIASCE 7 contain such values. Cn X Parameters used for determining the approximate
fundamental period
llo System overstrength factor
R Response modification coefficient
Table B-3.1 Design Coefficients and Factors for Basic Seismic Load Resisting Systems
System Height Limit

Response Deflection
Basic Seismic Over Seismic Design Category
Modification Amplification
Load Resisting Strength
Coefficient Factor B&C E F
System Factor D
R Cd (Zone 2) (Zone 4) (Zone 4)
nil
Building Frame Systems
Buckling-Restrained Braced
Frames, non-moment-
7 2 5 112 160 160
resisting beam-column NL 160
connections
Special Plate Shear Walls 7 2 6 NL 160 160 100
Buckl ing-Restrained Braced
Frames, moment-resistmg 8 2112 5 NL 160 160 100
beam-column connections
Dual Systems with Special Moment Frames Capable of Resisting at Least 25% of the Prescribed Seismic Forces
Buckling-Restrained Braced
8 2 1/2 5 NL NL NL NL
Frame
SjJ_ecialPlate Shear Walls 8 2112 61/2 NL NL NL NL
NL=Not Limited)

B-4. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS Inelastic rotation. The permanent or plastic portion of the
rotation angle between a beam and the column or between a
OF BEAM-TO-COLUMN AND LINK- link and the column of the test specimen, measured in
TO-COLUMN CONNECTIONS radians. The inelastic rotation shall be computed based 011
an analysis of test specimen deformations. Sources of
B-4.1 Scope inelastic rotation include yielding of members, yielding of
connection elements and connectors, and slip between
This appendix includes requirements for qualifying cyclic members and connection elements. For beam-to-column
tests of beam-to-column moment connections in special and moment connections in special and intermediate moment
intermediate moment frames and link-to-column frames, inelastic rotation is computed based upon the
connections in eccentrically braced frames, when required assumption that inelastic action is concentrated at a single
in these Provisions. The purpose of the testing described in point located at the intersection of the centerline of the
this appendix is to provide evidence that a beam-to-column beam with thecenterline of the column For link-to-column
connection or a link-to-column connection satisfies the connections in eccentrically braced frames, inelastic
requirements for strength and interstory drift angle or link rotation shall be computed based upon the assumption that
rotation angle in these Provisions. Alternative testing inelastic action is concentrated at a single point located at
requirements are permitted when approved by the Engineer- the intersection of the centerline of the link with the face of
of-Record and the authority having jurisdiction. the column.
This appendix provides minimum recommendations for Prototype. The connections, member sizes, steel properties,
simplified test conditions. and other design, detailing, and construction features to be
used in the actual building frame.
Table B-4.1 Values of Approximate Period Parameters
Test specimen. A portion of a frame used for laboratory
C; and X
testing, intended to model the prototype.
Structure Type C r X
Buckling-Restrained Braced Frames 0.03 0.75 Test setup. The supporting fixtures, loading equipment, and
Special Plate Shear Walls 0.02 0.75 lateral bracing used to support and load the test specimen.
Values of Approximate Period Parameters from (AISC ) Test subassemblage. The combination of the test specimen
and pertinent portions of the test setup.
User Note: The values in this table are intended to be used
in the same ways as those in Table 9.5.2.2 of SEll ASCE 7. Total link rotation angle. The relative displacement of one
end of the link with respect to the other end (measured
B-4.2 Symbols transverse to the longitudinal axis of the undeforrned link),
divided by the link length. The total link rotation angle shall
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol include both elastic and inelastic components of
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first deformation of the link and the members attached to the link
used. ends.
(J Interstory drift angle (Section B-4.6) B-4.4 Test Subassemblage Requirements

y total Total link rotation angle (Section B-4.6)
The test subassemblage shall replicate as closely as is
practical the conditions that will occur in the prototype
B-4.3 Definitions
during earthquake loading. The test subassemblage shall
include the following features:
Complete loading cycle. A cycle of rotation taken from
zero force to zero force, including one positive and one
1. The test specimen shall consist of at least a single
negative peak.
column with beams or links attached to one or both
sides of the column.
Interstory drift angle. Interstory displacement divided by
story height, radians.
2. Points of inflection in the test assemblage shall
coincide approximately with the anticipated points of
inflection in the Prototype under earthquake loading.

CHAPTF:R 5 Structural Steel 5-201
3. Lateral bracing of the test subassemblage is permitted B-4.5.3 Connection Details

near load application or reaction points as needed to
provide lateral stability of the test subassemblage. The connection details used in the test specimen shall
Additional lateral bracing of the test subassemblage is represent the prototype connection detai Is as closely as
not permitted, unless it replicates lateral bracing to be possible. The connection elements used in the test specimen
used in the prototype. shall be a full-scale representation of the connection
elements used in the prototype, for the member sizes being
B-4.5 Essential Test Varia bles tested.
The test specimen shall replicate as closely as is practical B-4.5.4 Continuity Plates
the pertinent design, detailing, construction features, and
material properties of the prototype. The following variables The size and connection details of continuity plates used in
shall be replicated in the test specimen. the test specimen shall be proportioned to match the size
and connection details of continuity plates used in the
B-4.5.1 Sources of Inelastic Rotation prototype connection as closely as possible.
Inelastic rotation shall be developed in the test specimen by Design Coefficients and Factors for basic Seismic Load
inelastic action in the same members and connection Resisting Systems From (AISC)
elements as anticipated in the prototype (in other words, in
the beam or link, in the column panel zone, in the column B-4.5.5 Material Strength
outside of the panel zone, or in connection elements) within
the limits described below. The percentage of the total The following additional requirements shall be satisfied for
inelastic rotation in the test specimen that is developed in each member or connection element of the test specimen
each member or connection element shall be within 25 that supplies inelastic rotation by yielding:
percent of the anticipated percentage of the total inelastic
rotation in the prototype that is developed in the '1. The yield stress shall be determined by material tests on
corresponding member or connection element. the actual materials used for the test specimen, as
specified in Section B-4.8. The use of yield stress
B-4.5.2 Size of Members values that are reported on certified mill test reports are
not permitted to be used for purposes of this Section.
The size of the beam or link used in the test specimen shall
be within the following limits: 2. The yield stress of the beam shall not be more than 15
percent below RyF y for the grade of steel to be used
I. The depth of the test beam or link shall be no less than for the corresponding elements of the prototype.
90 percent of the depth of the prototype beam or link. Columns and connection elements with a tested yield
stress shall not be more than 15 percent above or below
2. The weight per foot of the test beam or link shall be no RyF y for the grade of steel to be used for the
less than 75 percent of the weight per foot of the
corresponding elements of the prototype. RyF y shall
prototype beam or link.
be determined in accordance with Section 519.2.
The size of the column used in the test specimen shall
properly represent the inelastic action in the column, as B-4.5.6 Welds
per the requirements in Section B-4.5.1. In addition, the
depth of the test column shall be no less than 90 percent Welds on the test specimen shall satisfy the following
of the depth of the prototype column. req uiremen ts:
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this 1. Welding shall be performed in strict conformance with
Section shall be permitted subject to qualified peer Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) as required in
review and approval by the authority having AWS D 1.1. The WPS essential variables shall meet the
jurisdiction. requirements in A WS D 1.1 and shall be within the
parameters established by the filler-metal manufacturer.
The tensile strength of the welds used in the tested
assembly and the Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness
used in the tested assembly shall be determined by
material tests as specified in Section B-4.8.3. The use
of tensile strength and CVN toughness values that are

reported on the manufacturer's typical certificate of

conformance is not permitted to be used for purposes of
this section, unless the report includes results specific 3. When inelastic rotation is to be developed either by
to Section B-7 requirements. yielding or by slip within a bolted portion of the
connection, the method used to make the bolt holes
2. The specified minimum tensile strength of the filler (drilling, sub-punching and reaming, or other) in the
metal used for the test specimen shall be the same as test specimen shall be the same as that to be used in the
that to be used for the corresponding prototype welds. corresponding bolt holes in the prototype.
The tested tensile strength of the test specimen weld
shall not be more than 125 MPa above the tensile 4. Bolts in the test specimen shall have the same
strength classification of the filler metal specification installation (pretensioned or other) and faying surface
specified for the prototype. preparation (no specified slip resistance, Class A or B
slip resistance, or other) as that to be used for the
3. The specified minimum CVN toughness of the filler corresponding bolts in the prototype.
metal used for the test specimen shall not exceed the
specified minimum CVN toughness of the filler metal B-4.6 Loading History
to be used for the corresponding prototype welds. The
tested CVN toughness of the test specimen weld shall B-4.6.1 General Requirements
not be more than 50 percent, nor 34 kl, whichever is
greater, above the minimum CVN toughness that will The test specimen shall be SUbjected to cyclic loads
be specified for the prototype. according to the requirements prescribed in Section Section
B-4.2 for beam-to-column moment connections in special
4. The welding positions used to make the welds on the and intermediate moment frames, and according to the
test specimen shall be the same as those to be used for requirements prescribed in Section Section B-4.3 for link-
the prototype welds. to-column connections in eccentrically braced frames.
5. Details of weld backing, weld tabs, access holes, and Loading sequences other than those specified in Sections
similar items used for the test specimen welds shall be Section B-4.2 and Section B-4.3 may be used when they are
the same as those to be used for the corresponding demonstrated to be of equivalent or greater severity.
prototype welds. Weld backing and weld tabs shall not
be removed from the test specimen welds unless the B-4.6.2 Loading Sequence for Beam-to-Column
corresponding weld backing and weld tabs are removed Moment Connections
from the prototype welds.
Qualifying cyclic tests of beam-to-column moment
6. Methods of inspection and nondestructive testing and connections in special and intermediate moment frames
standards of acceptance used for test specimen welds shall be conducted by controlling the inrerstory drift angle,
shall be the same as those to be used for the prototype (J, imposed on the test specimen, as specified below:
welds.
I. 6 cycles at e = 0.00375 rad
B-4.S.7 Bolts
2. 6 cycles at e = 0.005 rad
The bolted portions of the test specimen shall replicate the
bolted portions of the prototype connection as closely as 3. 6 cycles at e =0.0075 fad
possible. Additionally, bolted. portions of the test specimen
shall satisfy the following requirements: 4. 4 cycles at e = 0.01 fad
1. The bolt grade (for example, ASTM A325, A325M, 5. 2 cycles at e = 0.015 rad
ASTM A490, A490M, ASTM F1852) used in the test
specimen shall be the same as that to be used for the 2 cycles at e = 0.02 rad
6.
prototype, except that ASTM A325 bolts may be
substituted for ASTM F1852 bolts, and vice versa.
2. The type and orientation of bolt holes (standard,
oversize, short slot, long slot, or other) used in the test
specimen shall be the same as those to be used for the
corresponding bolt holes in the prototype.

CHAf'TI,::r~ !j Stn IclL 1I'i'i I Steel 5-203
based upon testing that IS conducted 111 accordance with

Continue loading al increments of (J = 0.01 radian, with Section B-4.S.2.
two cycles of loading at each step.
Tension testing shall be conducted and reported for the
B-4.6.3 Loading Sequence for Link-to-Column following portions of the test specimen:
Connections
I. Flange(s) and web(s) of beams and columns at standard
Qualifying cyclic tests of link-to-column moment locations.
connections in eccentrically braced frames shall be
conducted by controlling the total link rotation angle, 2. Any element of the connection that supplies inelastic
Y total, imposed on the test specimen, as follows: rotation by yielding.
I. 6 cycles at Y total = 0.00375 rad B-4.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing for Structural
Steel
2. 6 cycles at Y total = 0.005 rad
Tension testing shall be conducted in accordance with
ASTM A6/A6M, ASTM A370, and ASTM ES, with the
3. 6 cycles at Ytotal = 0.0075 rad following exceptions:
4. 6 cycles at Y total = 0.01 rad

I. • The yield stress, F y' that is reported from the test shall
be based upon the yield strength definition in ASTM
5. 4 cycles at Ytotal = 0.015 rad A370, using the offset method at 0.002 strain.
6. 4 cycles at Y total = 0.02 rad 2. The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as
closely as practical, the loading rate to be used for the
7. 2 cycles at Y total = 0.03 rad test specimen.
S. 1 cycle at Ytotal = 0.04 rad B-4.8.3 Weld Metal Testing Requirements
9. 1 cycle at Ytotal = 0.05 rad The tensile strength of the welds used in the tested assembly
and the CVN toughness used in the tested assembly shall be
determined by material tests as specified in Section B-7.
10. 1 cycle at Ytotal = 0.07 rad
The use of tensile strength and CVN toughness values that
are reported on the manufacturer's typical certificate of
11. 1 cycle at Ytotal = 0.09 rad
conformance is not permitted to be used for purposes of this
section, unless that report includes results specific to
Continue loading at increments of Y total 0.02 radian, Section B-7 requirements.
with one cycle ofloading at each step.
A single test plate may be used if the WPS for the test
B-4.7 Instrumentation specimen welds is within plus/minus O.S kJ/mm of the WPS
for the test plate.
Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test
specimen to permit measurement or calculation of the Tensile specimens and CVN specimens shall be prepared in
quantities listed in Section B-4.9. accordance with ANSI! A WS B4.0 Standard Methods for
Mechanical Testing of Welds. ·'i
B-4.8 Materials Testing Requirements
B-4.9 Test Reporting Requirements
B-4.8.1 Tension Testing Requirements for
Structural Steel For each test specimen, a written test report meeting the
requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and the
Tension testing shall be conducted on samples of steel taken requirements of this Section shall be prepared. The report
from the material adjacent to each test specimen. Tension- shall thoroughly document all key features and results of the
test results from certified mill test reports shall be reported test. The report shall include the following information:
but are not permitted to be used in place of specimen testing
for the purposes of this Section. Tension-test results shall be I. A drawing or clear description of the test
subassemblage, including key dimensions, boundary

conditions at loading and reaction points, and location welding inspection reports.
oflateral braces.
Additional drawings, data, and discussion of the test
2. A drawing of the connection detail showing member specimen or test results are permitted to be included in the
sizes, grades of steel, the sizes of all connection report.
elements, welding details including filler metal, the size
and location of bolt holes, the size and grade of bolts, B-4.10 Acceptance Criteria
and all other pertinent details of the connection.
The test specimen must satisfy the strength and inters tory
3. A listing of all other essential variables for the test drift angle or link rotation angle requirements of these
specimen, as listed in Section B-4. Provisions for the special moment frame, intermediate
moment frame, or eccentrically braced frame connection, as
4. A listing or plot showing the applied load or applicable. The test specimen must sustain the required
displacement history of the test specimen. interstory drift angle or link rotation angle for at least one
complete loading cycle.
5. A listing of all demand critical welds.
6. Definition of the region of the connection that

comprises the protected zones.
7. A plot of the applied toad versus the displacement of

LIte test specimen. The displacement reported in this
plot shall be measured at Of near the point of load
application. The ioceuens on ~he test specimen where
the loads and displacements were measured shall be
clearly indicated.
8. A plot of beam moment versus interstory drift angle for

beam-to-column moment connections; or a plot of link
shear force versus link rotation angle for link-to-
column connections. For beam-to-column connections,
the beam moment and the interstory drift angle shall be
computed with respect to the centerline of the column.
9. The interstory drift angle and the total inelastic rotation

developed by the test speci men. The components of the
test specimen contributing to the total inelastic rotation
due to yielding or slip shall be identified. The portion
of the total inelastic rotation contributed by each
component of the test specimen shall be reported. The
method used to compute inelastic rotations shall be
clearly shown.
10. A chronological listing of significant test observations,

including observations of yielding, slip, instability, and
fracture of any portion of the test specimen as
applicable.
11. The controlling failure mode for the test specimen. If

the test is terminated prior to failure, the reason for
terminating the test shall be clearly indicated.
12. The results of the material tests specified in Section B-

4.8.
13. The Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and

CHAPTE"R 5 Structural Steel 5-205
B-5. QUALIFYING CYCLIC TESTS B-S.3 Definitions
OF BUCKLING-RESTRAINED See Section for definitions.

BRACES
B-S.4 Subassemblage Test Specimen
B-S.l Scope
The subassemblage test specimen shall satisfy the following
This appendix includes requirements for qualifying cyclic requirements:
tests of individual buckling-restrained braces and buckling-
restrained brace subassemblages, when required in these L The mechanism for accommodating inelastic rotation in
provisions. The purpose of the testing of individual braces is the subassemblage test specimen brace shall be the
to provide evidence that a buckling-restrained brace same as that of the prototype. The rotational
satisfies the requirements for strength and inelastic deformation demands on the subassemblage test
deformation by these provisions; it also permits the specimen brace shall be equal to or greater than those
determination of maximum brace forces for design of of the prototype.
adjoining elements. The purpose of testing of the brace
subassemblage is to provide evidence that the brace-design 2. The axial yield strength of the steel core, P ysc- of the
can satisfactorily accommodate the deformation and brace in the subassemblage test specimen shall not be
rotational demands associated with the design. Further, the less than that of the prototype where both strengths are
subassemblage test is intended to demonstrate that the based on the core area, Aw multiplied by the yield
hysteretic behavior of the brace in the subassemblage is strength as determined from a coupon test.
consistent with that of the individual brace elements tested
uniaxially. 3. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel
core projection of the subassemblage test specimen
Alternative testing requirements are permitted when brace shall be the same as that of the brace in the
approved by the engineer-of-record and the authority having prototype.
jurisdiction.
4. The same documented design methodology shall be
This appendix provides only minimum recommendations used for design of the subassemblage as used for the
for simplified test conditions. prototype, to allow comparison of the rotational
deformation demands on the subassemblage brace to
B-S.2 Symbols the prototype. In stability calculations, beams, columns,
and gussets connecting the core shall be considered
The numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol parts of this system.
refers to the Section number in which the symbol is first
used. S. The calculated margins of safety for the prototype
connection design, steel core projection stability,
I1b Deformation quantity used to control loading of overall buckling and other relevant subassemblage test
the test specimen (total brace end rotation for the specimen brace construction details, excluding the
subassemblage test specimen; total brace axial gusset plate, for the prototype, shall equal or exceed
deformation for the brace test specimen) (Section those of the subassemblage test specimen construction.
B-S.6).
Value of deformation quantity, I1b' corresponding 6. Lateral bracing of the subassemblage test specimen
to the design story drift (Section B-S.6). shall replicate the lateral bracing in the prototype.
Value of deformation quantity, I1b' at first
significant yield of test specimen (Section B-S.6). 7. The brace test specimen and the' prototype shall be
manufactured in accordance with the same quality
control and assurance processes and procedures.
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this

section shall be permitted subject to qualified peer
review and approval by the authority having
jurisdiction.

B-S.S Brace Test Specimen B-S.S.4 Connection Details
The brace test specimen shall replicate as closely as is The connection details used in the brace test specimen shall
practical the pertinent design, detailing, construction represent the prototype connection details as closely as
features, and material properties of the prototype. practical.
B-S.S.l Design of Brace Test Specimen B-S.S.S Materials
The same documented design methodology shall be used for I. Steel core: The following requirements shall be
the brace test specimen and the prototype. The design satisfied for the steel core of the brace test specimen:
calculations shall demonstrate, at a minimum, the following
requirements: a. The specified minimum yield stress of the brace
test specimen steel core shall be the same as that of
1. The calculated margin of safety for stability against the prototype.
overall buckling for the prototype shall equal or exceed
that of the brace test specimen. b. The measured yield stress of the material of the
steel core in the brace test specimen shall be at
2. The calculated margins of safety for the brace test least 90 percent of that of the prototype as
specimen and the prototype shall account for determined from coupon tests.
differences in material properties, including yield and
ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and toughness. c. The specified minimum ultimate stress and strain
of the brace test specimen steel core shall not
B-S.S.2 Manufacture of Brace Test Specimen exceed those of the prototype.
The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be 2. Buckling-restraining mechanism
manufactured in accordance with the same quality control
and assurance processes and procedures. Materials used in the buckling-restraining mechanism
of the brace test specimen shall be the same as those
B-S.S.3 Similarity of Brace Test Specimen and used in the prototype.
Prototype
B-S.S.6 Connections
The brace test specimen shall meet the following
requirements: The welded, bolted, and pinned joints on the test specimen
shall replicate those on the prototype as close as practical.
1. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel
core shall be the same as that of the prototype. B-S.6 Loading History
2. The axial yield strength of the steel core, P ysc» of the B-S.6.1 General Requirements
brace test specimen shall not vary by more than 50
percent from that of the prototype where both strengths The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loads
are based on the core area, Asco multiplied by the yield according to the requirements prescribed in Sections B-
strength as determined from a coupon test. 5.6.2 and B-5.6.3. Additional increments of loading beyond
those described in Section B-56.3 are permitted. Each cycle
3. The material for, and method of, separation between shall include a full tension and full compression excursion
the steel core and the buckling restraining mechanism to the prescribed deformation.
in the brace test specimen shall be the same as that in
the prototype. B-S.6.2 Test Control
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this section The test shall be conducted by controlling the level of axial
shall be permitted subject to qualified peer review and or rotational deformation, Ab, imposed on the test
approval by the authority having jurisdiction. specimen. As an alternate, the maximum rotational
deformation may be applied and maintained as the protocol
is followed for axial deformation.

CHAPlT:r~ :-;
B-5.6.3 Loading Sequence B-5.8.2 Methods of Tension Testing
Loads shall be applied to the test specimen to produce the Tension testing shall be conducted in accordance with
following deformations, where the deformation is the steel ASTM A6, ASTM A370, and ASTM E8, with the following
core axial deformation for the test specimen and the exceptions:
rotational deformation demand for the subassemblage test
specimen brace: 1. The yield stress that is reported from the test shall be
based upon the yield strength definition in ASTM
I. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to A370, using the offset method of 0.002 strain.
a, = Llby
2. The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as
2. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to closely as is practical, the loading rate used for the test
Lib = O.50Llbm specimen.
3. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to 3. The coupon shall be machined so that its longitudinal
axis is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the steel core.
Llb = 1L1bm
4. 2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to B-5.9 Test Reporting Requirements
Llb = 1. 5Llbm For each test specimen, a written test report meeting the
requirements of this Section shall be prepared. The report
5. 2 cycles ofloading at the deformation corresponding to
shall thoroughly document all key features and results of the
a, = 2. OLlbm test. The report shall include the following information:
6. Additional complete cycles of loading at the l. A drawing or clear description of the test specimen,
deformation corresponding to Llb =1.5L1bm as including key dimensions, boundary conditions at
required for the brace test specimen to achieve a loading and reaction points, and location of lateral
cumulative inelastic axial deformation of at least 200 bracing, if any.
times the yield deformation (not required for the
subassemblage test specimen). 2. A drawing of the connection details showing member
sizes, grades of steel, the sizes of all connection
The design story drift shall not be taken as less than elements, welding details including filler metal, the size
0.01 times the story height for the purposes of and location of bolt or pin holes, the size and grade of
calculating Llbm. Other loading sequences are connectors, and all other pertinent details of the
permitted to be used to qualify the test specimen when connections.
they are demonstrated to be of equal or greater severity
in terms of maximum and cumulative inelastic 3. A listing of all other essential variables as listed III
deformation. Section B-5.4 or B-5.5, as appropriate.
B-5.7 Instrumentation 4. A listing or plot showing the applied load or

displacement history.
Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test
specimen to permit measurement or calculation of the 5. A plot of the applied load versus the deformation, Ab,
quantities listed in Section B-5.9. The method used to determine the deformations shall
be clearly shown. The locations on the test specimen
B-5.8 Materials Testing Requirements where the loads and deformations were measured shall
be clearly identified.
B-5.8.1 Tension Testing Requirements
6. A chronological listing of significant test observations,
Tension testing shall be conducted on samples of steel taken including observations of yielding, slip, instability,
from the same material as that used to manufacture the steel transverse displacement along the test specimen and
core. Tension test results from certified mill test reports fracture of any portion of the test specimen and
shall be reported but are not permitted to be used in place of connections, as applicable.
specimen testing for the purposes of this Section. Tension-
test results shall be based upon testing that is conducted in 7. The results of the material tests specified in Section B-
accordance with Section B-5.8.2. 5.8.

8. The manufacturing quality control and quality B-6. WELDING PROVISIONS

assurance plans used for the fabrication of the test
specimen. These shall be included with the welding
B-6.1 Scope
procedure specifications and welding inspection
reports.
This appendix provides additional details regarding welding
and welding inspection, and is included on an interim basis
Additional drawings, data, and discussion of the test
pending adoption of such criteria by AWS or other
specimen or test results are permitted to be included in the
accredited organization.
report.
B-6.2 Structural Design Drawings and Specifications,
B-S.I0 Acceptance Criteria
Shop Drawings, and Erection Drawings
At least one subassemblage test that satisfies the
B-6.2.1 Structural Design Drawings and
requirements of Section 8-5.4 shall be performed. At least
Specifications
one brace test that satisfies the requirements of Section 8-
4.5 shall be performed. Within the required protocol range
Structural design drawings and specifications shall include,
all tests shall satisfy the following requirements:
as a minimum, the following information:
1. The plot showing the applied load vs. displacement
I. Locations where backup bars are required to be
history shall exhibit stable, repeatable behavior with
removed.
positive incremental stiffness.
2. Locations where supplemental fillet welds are required
2. There shall be no fracture, brace instability or brace end
when backing is permitted to remain.
connection failure.
3. Locations where fillet welds are used to reinforce
3. For brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than
groove welds or to improve connection geometry.
Llby the maximum tension and compression forces
shall not be less than the nominal strength of the core. 4. Locations where weld tabs are required to be removed.
4. For brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than 5. Splice locations where tapered transitions are required.
Llby the ratio of the maximum compression force to
the maximum tension force shall not exceed 1.3. User Note: 8utt splices subject to tension greater than 33
percent of the expected yield strength under any load
Other acceptance criteria may be adopted for the brace test combination should have tapered transitions. The stress
specimen or subassemblage test specimen subject to concentration at a nontapered transition, based upon a 90°
qualified peer review and approval by the authority having comer, could cause local yielding when the tensile stress
jurisdiction. exceeds 33 percent of yield. Lower levels of stress would be
acceptable with the stress concentration from a nontapered
transition.
6. The shape of weld access holes, if a special shape is

required.
7. Joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly

order, welding sequence, welding technique or other
special precautions are required.

B-6.2.2 Shop Drawings B-6.3.3 Nondestructive Testing Technicians
Shop drawings shall include, as a minimum, the following NDT technicians shall be qualified as follows:
information:
I. In accordance with their employer's written practice
1. Access hole dimensions, surface profile and finish which shall meet or exceed the criteria of the American
requirements. Society for Nondestructive Testing, Inc. SNT TC-1A
Recommended Practice for the Training and Testing of
2. Locations where backing bars are to be removed. Nondestructive Personnel, or of ANSI!ASNT CP-189,
Standard for the Qualification and Certification of
3. Locations where weld tabs are to be removed. Nondestructive Testing Personnel.
4. NOT to be performed by the fabricator, if any. 2. Ultrasonic Testing for QA may be performed only by
UT technicians certified as ASNT Level III through
B-6.2.3 Erection Drawings examination by the ASNT, or certified as Level II by
their employer for flaw detection. If the engineer-of-
Erection drawings shall include, as a minimum, the record approves the use of flaw sizing techniques, UT
following information: technicians shall also be qualified and certified by their
employer for flaw sizing.
1. Locations where backing bars to be removed.
3. Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) and Dye Penetrant
2. Locations where supplemental fillets are required when Testing (PT) for QA may be performed only by
backing is permitted to remain. technicians certified as Level Il by their employer, or
certified as ASNT Level III through examination by the
3. Locations where weld tabs are to be removed. ASNT and certified by their employer.
4. Those joints or groups of joints in which a specific B-6.4 Nondestructive Testing Procedures
assembly order, welding sequence, welding technique
or other special precautions are required. B-6.4.1 Ultrasonic Testing
B-6.3 Personnel Ultrasonic Testing shall be performed according to the

procedures prescribed in AWS D 1.1 Section 6, Part F
B-6.3.1 QC Welding Inspectors following a written procedure containing the elements
prescribed in paragraph K3 of Annex K. Section 6, Part F
QC welding inspection personnel shall be associate welding procedures shall be qualified using weld mock-ups having
inspectors (AWl) or higher, as defined in AWS BS.l 1.5 mm-diameter side drilled holes similar to Annex K,
Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors, or Figure K-3.
otherwise qualified under the provisions of AWS Dl.l
Section 6.1.4 and to the satisfaction of the contractor's QC B-6.4.2 Magnetic Particle
plan by the fabricator/erector.
Magnetic particle testing shall be performed according to
B-6.3.2 QA Welding Inspectors procedures prescribed in AWS D1.1, following a written
procedure utilizing the Yoke Method that conforms to
QA welding inspectors shall be welding inspectors (WI), or ASTME709.
senior welding inspectors (SWI), as defined in AWS BS.l,
except AWls may be used under the direct supervision of
WIs, on site and available when weld inspection is being
conducted.

B-6.5 Additional Welding Provisions B-6.5.5 Weld Tabs
B-6.5.1 Intermixed Filler Metals Where practicable, weld tabs shall extend beyond the edge
or the jointa minimum of one inch or the thickness of the
When PCA W-S filler metals are used in combination with part, whichever is greater. Extensions need not exceed
filler metals of other processes, including PCA W-G, a test 50 mrn.
specimen shall be prepared and mechanical testing shall be
conducted to verify that the notch toughness of the Where used, weld tabs shall be removed to within 3 mm of
combined materials in the intermixed region of the weld the base metal surface, except at continuity plates where
meets the notch toughness requirements of Section 520.3.1 removal to within 6 mm of the plate edge is acceptable, and
and, if required, the notch toughness requirements for the end of the weld finished. Removal shall be by air carbon
demand critical welds of Section 520.3.2. arc CUlling 'A -A), grinding, chipping or thermal cutting.
The process shall be controlled La minimize ClT!l11l gouging,
B-6.5.2 Filler Metal Diffusible Hydrogen he edges where weld labs have been removed shall be
finished to a surface roughness of 13 I'm or better.
Welding electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall Grinding to. a flush condition is not required. The COIl.lOlU· of
meet the requirements IbrHI6 (16 rnl, maximum diffusible the vveld end shall provide a smooth transition, free of
hydrogen per 100 grains deposited weld metal) as tested in notches and sharp corners. At T-joints, a minimum radius in
accordance with A WS A4.3 tandard Methods tor the corne r need no! be provided. The weld end sha' I be free
Determination f the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of of gouges and notches. Weld defects not greater than 2 mm
Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel 'Weld MeUlI deep shall be faired to a slope not greater than I :5. Other
Produced by Me Welding. (Exception: GMAW solid weld defects shall be excavated and repaired by welding in
eleorrodes.) The manufacturer's typical certificate of accordance with an applicable WPS.
con form ance shall be considered adequate proof that the
supplied electrode or electrode-nux combination meets this B-6.5.6 Bottom Flange Welding Sequence
requirement, No testing of filler metal samples or of
production welds shall be required, When using weld access holes to facilitate CJP groove
welds of beam bottom flanges to column flanges or
B-6.5.3 Gas-Shielded Welding Processes continuity plates, the groove weld shall be sequenced as
follows:
GMAW and F A W"G shall not be performed in winds
exceeding 5 km/hr. Windscreens or other shelters may be I. As far as is practicable, starts and stops shall not be
used 10 shield the welding operation from excessive wind. placed directly under the beam web.
2. Each layer shall be completed across the full width of

B-6.5.4 Maximum Interpass Temperatures the flange before beginning the next layer.
Maximum interpass temperatures shall not exceed 290 °C, 3. For each layer, the weld starts and stops shall be on the
measured at a distance not exceeding 75 mm from the start opposite side of the beam web, as compared to the
of the weld pass. The maximum interpass temperature may previous layer.
be increased by qualification testing that includes weld
metal and base metal CVN testing using A WS D 1.1 B-6.6 Additional Welding Provisions for Demand
Annex III. The steel used for the qualification testing shall Critical Welds Only
be of the same type and grade as will be used in production.
B-6.6.1 Welding Processes
The maximum heat input to be used ·in production shall be
used in the: qualification testing. The qualified maximum SMA W, GMA W (except short circuit transfer F A Wand
interpass temperature shall be the lowest interpass SAW may be used to fabricate and erect members governed
temperature used for any pass during qualificati 11 testing. by this sped flcation, Other processes may be used provided
Both weld metal and HAZ shall be tested. The weld metal that one or more of the fbllowing criteria is met:
hall meet all the mechanical properties required by
Section 5203. I or those for demand critical welds of I. The process is part of the prequalified connection
Section 520.3.2, <1& applieable. The heal affected zone VN details, as listed in Section B-1,
toughness shall meet a minimum requirement of 27 J at
21 0 with specimens taken at both I and 5 mm from the 2. The process was used to perform a connection
fusion line. qualification test in accordance with Section B-4, or

3. The process is approved by the engineer-of-record.

B-7 WELD METALIWELDING
B-6.6.2 Filler Metal Packaging PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
NOTCH TOUGHNESS
Electrodes shall be provided in packaging that limits the
ability of the electrode to absorb moisture. Electrode from
VERIFICATION TEST
packaging that has been punctured or torn shall be dried in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or This appendix provides a procedure for qualifying the weld
shall not be used for demand critical welds. ' metal.toughness and is included on an interim basis pending
ado~tlOn of such a procedure by the American Welding
Society (AWS) or other accredited organization.
Modification or lubrication of the electrode after
manufacture is prohibited, except that drying is permitted as
B-7.1 Scope
recommended by the manufacturer.
This appendix provides a standard method for qualification

B-6.6.3 Exposure Limitations on FCA W Electrodes
testing of weld filler metals required to have specified notch
toughness for service in joints designated as demand
After removal from protective packaging, the permissible
critical.
atmospheric exposure time of FCA W electrodes shall be
limited as follows:
Testing of weld metal to be used in production shall be
performed by filler metal manufacturer's production lot, as
I. Exposure shall not exceed the electrode manufacturer's
defined in AWS A5.0 1, Filler Metal Procurement
guidelines.
Guidelines, as follows:
2. In the absence of manufacturer's recommendations the
1. Class C3 for SMA W electrodes,
total accumulated exposure time for FCA W electrodes
shall not exceed 72 hours. When the electrodes are not
2. Class S2 for GMA W-S and SAW electrodes,
in use, they ni.ay be stored in protective packaging or a
cabinet. Storage time shall not be included in the
3. Class T4 for FCAW and GMAW-C, or
accumulated exposure time. Electrodes that have been
exposed to the atmosphere for periods exceeding the
above time limits shall be dried in accordance with the 4. Class F2 for SAW fluxes.
electrode manufacturer's recommendations, or shall not
be used for demand critical welds. The electrode Filler metals produced by manufacturers audited and
manufacturer's recommendations shall include time, approved by 'one or more of the following agencies shall be
temperature, and number of drying cycles permitted. exempt from these production lot testing requirements,
provided a minimum of 3 production lots of material, as
defined above, are tested in accordance with the provisions
B-6.6.4 Tack Welds
of this appendix:
Tack welds attaching backing bars and weld tabs shall be
placed where they will be incorporated into a final weld. 1. American Bureau of Shipping (ABS),
2. Lloyds Register of Shipping,
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME),
4. ISO 9000,
5. US Department of Defense, or
6. A quality assurance program acceptable to the

engineer-of-record.
Under this exemption from production lot testing, the

filler metal manufacturer shall repeat the testing
prescribed in this appendix at least every three years on
a random production lot.

B-7.2 Test Conditions The test assembly shall be tack welded and heated to the
specified preheat temperature, measured by temperature
Tests shall be conducted at lhe range of heat inputs for indicating crayons or surface temperature thermometers one
which the weld filler metal wm
be qualified under the inch from the center of the groove at the location shown in
Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). It is recommended the figures cited above. Welding shall continue until the
that tests be conducted at the low heat input level and high assembly has reached the interpass temperature prescribed
heat input level indicated in Table B-7.2-1. in Table B-7.2-1. The interpass temperature shall be
maintained for the remainder of the weld. Should it be
Table B-7.2-1 WPS Toughness Verification Test necessary to interrupt welding, the assembly shall be
Welding and Preheat Conditions allowed to cool in air. The assembly shall then be heated to
the prescribed interpass temperature before welding is
Cooling Preheat OF Interpass OF
Heat Input resumed.
Rate (0C) CCC)
Low heat 30 kJ/in. 200±50 No thermal treatment of weldment or test specimens is

70±25
input test (1.2kJ/mm) (21±14) permitted, except that machined tensile test specimens may
(21+14)
be aged at 200 OF (93°C) to 220 OF (104°C) for up to 48
High heat 80 kJ/in. 300±25 500±50 hours, then cooled to room temperature before testing.
input test (1.2kJ/mm) (149+ 14) (260+28)
B-7.4 Acceptance Criteria
A lternatively, the filler
metal manufaoturer Or contractor
may elect to rest ,8 wider OJ' narrower range of heat inputs The lowest and highest Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness
and in erpass temperatures. The range of heal inputs and values obtained from the five specimens from a single test
in erpass temperatures tested shall be clearly stated 011 the plate shall be disregarded. Two of the remaining three
te t reports and user data sheets. Regardless of the method . values shall equal, or exceed, the specified toughness of 54
of selecting test heat input, the lifE'S, as 'Used by the J energy level at the testing temperature. One of the three
contractor, shall fall withlu the range of heat inputs and may be lower, but not lower than 41 J, and the average of
interpass temperatures tested. the three shall not be less than the required 54 J energy
level, All test samples shall meet the notch toughness
B-7.3 Test Specimens requirements for the electrodes as provided in Section
520.3.2.
wo test plates one for each heat input, shall be welded
following Table 6-7.2-1. Five VN specimens and one For filler metals classified as E70, materials shall provide a
tensile specimen shall be prepared per plate. Each plate minimum yield stress of 58 ksi, a minimum tensile strength
shall be steel, of any AlSC-I,isted 'structural grade. The test of 70 ksi, and a minimum elongation of 22 percent. For
plate shall be .19 mm thick with a 13 mrn root opening and filler metals classified as E80, materials shall provide a
45° included groove angle. The test plate ami specimens minimum yield stress of 68 ksi, a minimum tensile strength
shall be as shown in Figure 2A in A WS A5.20, or as in of 80 ksi, and a minimum elongation of 19 percent.
Figure 5 in A WS A5.29. Except for the root pass, a
minimum of two passes per layer shall be used to fill the
width.
All test specimens shall be taken from ncar the centerline-of

the weld !ll the mid-thickness location, in order to minimize
dilution effects. CVN and tensile specimens shall be
prepared in accordance ,witll AWS B4.0, Standard Methods
for Mechanical Testing of We· Ids. The lest assembly shall be
restrained during welding, or preset at approximately 5° to
prevent warpage in excess of ):0. A welded test assembly
that has warped more than SO shall be discarded. Welded
test assemblies shall not be straightened.

CI-IAPT[F~ !i ;,.,1
ru ctu rill SIRel !)-21 ~3
PART2B SECTION 533

COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL STEEL REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS,
AND REINFORCED CONCRETE CODES, AND STANDARDS
BUILDINGS
The documents referenced in these provisions shall include
those listed in Part 2A Section 515 with the following
SECTION 532 additions:
SCOPE
American Society of Civil Engineers Standard for the
These Provisions shall govern the design, fabrication, and Structural Design of Composite Slabs, ASCE 3-91
erection of composite structural steel and reinforced
concrete members and connections in the Seismic Load American Welding Society Structural Welding Code-
Resisting Systems (SLRS) in buildings and other structures, Reinforcing Steel, AWS D 1.4-98
where other structures are defined as those designed,
fabricated, and erected in a manner similar to buildings,
with building-like vertical and lateral load-resisting
systems. These provisions shall apply when the seismic
response modification coefficient, R, (as specified in the
NSCP code) is taken greater than 3.
When the seismic response modification coefficient, R, is

taken as 3 or less, the structure is not required to satisfy
these provisions unless required by the NSCP code.
The requirements of Part 2B modify and supplement the

requirements of Part 2A and form these Provisions. They
shall be applied in conjunction with the AlSC Specification
for Structural Steel Buildings, ANSI/AISC 360, hereinafter
referred to as the Specification. The applicable requirements
of the Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
and Commentary, ACI 318, as modified in these Provisions
shall be used for the design of reinforced concrete
components in composite SLRS.
For seismic load resisting systems incorporating reinforced

concrete components designed according to ACI 318, the
requirements for load and resistance factor design as
specified in Section 502.3 of the Specification shall be used.
When the design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffness

properties of the component members of composite systems
shall reflect their condition at the onset of significant
yielding of the structure.
Wherever these Provisions refer to the NSCP code and there

is no local building code, the loads, load combinations,
system limitations and general design requirements shall be
those in SEIIASCE 7.
Part 2B includes a Glossary which is specifically applicable

to this Part. The Part 2A Glossary is also applicable to Part
2B.


GENERAL SEISMIC DESIGN LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS,
REQUIREMENTS ANDNO~ITNALSTRENGT S
The required strength and other provrsrens for Seismic 535.1 Loads and Load Combinations
Design Categories (SDCs) and seismic lise groups and the
limitations on height and irreg\Jlal'ilY shall be as specified in Where amplified seismic 'loads are required by these
the NSCP code. Provisions, the horizontal portion of the earthquake load E
(as defined in the NSCP code) shall be multiplied by the
The design story drift and story drift limits shall be overstrength factor flo prescribed by the NSCP code,
determined as required in the NSCP code.
For the Seismic Load Resisting System (SLRS)
incorporating reinforced concrete components designed
according to ACI 318, the requirements of Secti n 502.3 of
the Specification shall be used.
Uter Note: When not de-tined inthe NSCP code, no should

be taketl :from SEl/ASeE 7.
535.2 Nominal Strength
The nominal strength of'sysrems, members, and connections

shalf. be determined in accordance with the requirements of
the Specification, except as modified throughout these
Provisions.


MATERIALS COMPOSITE MEMBERS
536.1 Structural Steel 537.1 Scope
Structural steel members and connections used in composite The design of composite members in the SLRS described in
Seismic Load Resisting Systems (SLRS) shall meet the Sections 539 through 548 shall meet the requirements of
requirements of Specification Section 501.3. Structural steel this Section and the material requirements of Section 536.
used in the composite SLRS described in Sections 539, 540,
543, 545, 547 and 548 shall also meet the requirements in 537.2 Composite Floor and Roof Slabs
Part 2A Sections 519 and 520.
The design of composite floor and roof slabs shall meet the
536.2 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement requirements of ASCE 3. Composite slab diaphragms shall
meet the requirements in this Section.
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite
components in composite SLRS shall meet the requirements 537.2.1 Load Transfer
of ACI 318, Sections 21.2.4 through 21.2.8.
Details shall be designed so as to transfer loads between the
Exception:
diaphragm and boundary members, collector elements, and
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in the composite elements of the horizontal framing system.
ordinary seismic systems described in Sections 542, 544,
and 546 shall meet the requirements of Section 509 and ACI 537.2.2 Nominal Shear Strength
318, excluding Chapter 21.
The nominal shear strength of composite diaphragms and
concrete-filled steel deck diaphragms shall be taken as the
nominal shear strength of the reinforced concrete above the
top of the steel deck ribs in accordance with ACI 318
excluding Chapter 22. Alternatively, the composite
diaphragm nominal shear strength shall be determined by
in-plane shear tests of concrete-filled diaphragms.
537.3 Compos.ite Beams
Composite beams shall meet the requirements of Section

509. Composite beams that are part of Composite-Special
Moment Frames (C-SMF) shall also meet the requirements
of Section 540.3.
537.4 Encased Composite Columns
This section is applicable to columns that:
I. Consist of reinforced-concrete encased shapes with a

structural steel area that comprises at least I percent of
the total composite column cross section; and.
2. Meet the additional limitations of Specification Section

509.2.1. Such columns shall meet the requirements of
Specification Section 509, except as modified in this
Section. Additional requirements, as specified for
intermediate and special seismic systems in
Sections 537.4.2 and 537.4.3 shall apply as required in
the descriptions of the composite seismic systems in
Sections 539 through 548.

Columns that consist of reinforced-concrete-encased shapes 4. Load-carrying reinforcement shall meet [he detailing
shall meet the requirements for reinforced concrete columns and splice requirements ofA' 1 318 Sections 7.8.1 ami
of ACI 318 except as modified for: 12.17, Lend-carrying reinfcrcementshall be provided
at every comer of a rectangular cross-section. Til
I. The structural steel section shear connectors in Section maximum spacing of other load carrying or restrainlng
537.4.2. longitudinal reinforcement shall be one-half of the least
side dimensions of the composite member.
2. The contribution of the reinforced-concrete-encased
shape to the strength of the column as provided in ACI 5. Splices and end beating details for encased composite
318. columns in ordinary seismic systems shall meet the
requirements of tbe Specification and A I 318 Section
3. The seisnuc requirements for reinforced concrete 7.8.2'. The design shall comply with A I 3'18 Sections
columns as specified in the description of the 2.1..2.6,21.2.7 and 21.10. The design shall consider any
composite seismic systems in Sections 539 through adverse behavioral effects due 10 abrupt changes in
548. either the member stiffness or the nominal tensile
strength. Such locations shall include transitions to
537.4.1 Ordinary Seismic System Requirements reinforced concrete sections without embedded
structural steel members, transitions to bare structural
The following requirements for encased composite columns steel sections, and column bases.
are applicable to all composite systems, including ordinary
seismic systems: 537.4.2 Intermediate Seismic System Requirements
1. The available shea I' strength of the e lumn shall be Encased composite columns in intermediate seismic
determined in accordance with Specification Section systems shall meet the following requirements in addition to
509.2,1.1 d. The uoruinal shear strength of the tie those of Section 537.4.1:
reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with
ACl 318 Sections I 1.5.6.2 through 11.5.6.9. In ACl 1. The maximum spacing of transverse bars at the top and
31'8 Sections 11.5.6.5 and 1L.5.6.9, the dimension bw bottom shall be the least ofthe following:
shall equal the width of the concrete cross-section
minus the width of the structural shape measured a. one-half the least dimension of the section
perpendicular to the direction of shear.
b. 8 longitudinal bar diameters
2. Composite columns designed to share the applied loads
between the structural steel section and the reinforced c. 24 tie bar diameters
concrete encasement shalt have shear connectors that
meet the requ irernen ts of Speei fication Section 509.1.1. d. 300mm
3. The maximum spacing of transverse ties shall meet the These spacings shall be maintained over a vertical
requirements of Specification Section 509.2.1. distance equal to the greatest of the following lengths,
measured from each joint face and on both sides of any
Transverse ties shall be located vertically wirhin one-half of section where flexural yielding is expected to occur:
Ihe tie spacing above the (01' of the (boling or lowest beam
or slab in any story and shall be spaced as provided herein' a. one-sixth the vertical clear height of the column
within one-half of the lie spacing below the lowest beam or
slab framing into the column. b. the maximum cross-sectional dimension
Transverse bars shall have a diameter that is 110t less than c. 450mm
one-fiftieth of the greatest side dimension flf the composite
member, except that ties shall not be smaller than Diameter 2. Tie spacing over the remaining column length shall not
lOmm bars and need not be larger than Diameter ]6 mill exceed twice the spacing defined above.
bars. Alternatively, welded wire fabric of equivalent area is
permitted as transverse reinforcement except when 3. Welded wire fabric is not permitted as transverse
prohibited for intermediate and special seismic systems. reinforcement in intermediate seismic systems.

CHAPTER 5 Structural Stool 5-21/
537.4.3 Special Seismic System Requirements c. When specified in Sections 537.4.3(4), 537.4.3 (5)
or 537.4.3 (6), the maximum spacing of transverse
Encased composite columns in special seismic systems shall reinforcement shall be the lesser of one-fourth the
meet the following requirements in addition to those of least member dimension or 100 mm, For this
Sections 537.4.1 and 537.4.2: reinforcement, cross ties, legs of overlapping
hoops, and other confining reinforcement shall be
1. The required axial strength for encased composite spaced not more than 350 mm on center in the
columns and splice details shall meet the requirements transverse direction.
in Part 2A Section 521.3.
4. Encased composite columns in braced frames with
2. Longitudinal load-carrying reinforcement shall meet nominal compressive loads that are larger than 0.2
the requirements of ACI 318 Section 21.4.3. times P n shall have transverse reinforcement as
specified in Section 537.4.3 (3)(iii) over the total
3. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoop reinforcement element length. This requirement need not be satisfied
as defined in ACI 318 Chapter 21 and shall meet the if the nominal strength of the reinforced-concrete-
following requirements: encased steel section alone is greater than the load
effect from a load combination of 1. OD + O. SL.
a. The minimum area of tie reinforcement Ash shall
meet the following: 5. Composite columns supporting reactions from
discontinued stiff members, such as walls or braced
frames, shall have transverse reinforcement as specified
in Section 537.4.3 (3)(iii) over the full length beneath
the level at which the discontinuity occurs if the
(537-1) nominal compressive load exceeds 0.1 times P n-
where Transverse reinforcement shall extend into the
discontinued member for at least the length required to
hcc = cross-dectional dimension of the develop full yielding in the reinforced-concrete-encased
confined core measured center-to-center shape and longitudinal reinforcement. This requirement
of the tie reinforcement, mm need not be satisfied if the nominal strength of the
s = spacing of transverse reinforcement reinforced-concrete encased structural steel section
measured along the longitudinal axis of alone is greater than the load effect from a load
the structural member, mm combination of 1. OD + O. SL.
specified minimum yield stress of the
structural steel core, MPa 6. Encased composite columns used m a C-SMF shall
cross-sectional area of the structural meet the following requirements:
core, mm"
nominal compressive strength of the a. Transverse reinforcement shall meet the
composite column calculated 111 requirements in Section 537.4.3 (3)(c) at the top
accordance with the Specification, N and bottom of the column over the region specified
f~ specified compressive strength of in Section 537.4.2.
concrete, MPa
specified minimum yield stress of the b. The strong - column / weak - beam design
ties, MPa requirements in Section 540.5 shall be satisfied.
Column bases shall be detailed to sustain inelastic
Eq. 537-1 need not be satisfied if the nominal flexural hinging.
strength of the reinforced-concrete-encased
structural steel section alone is greater than the c. The required shear strength of the column shall
load effect from a load combination of 1. 0 D + meet the requirements of ACI 318 Section
O.SL. 21.4.5.1.
b. The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement

along the length of the column shall be the lesser
of six longitudinal load-carrying bar diameters or
150 mm.

5-218 CHAPTER 5 -- Structural Steel
7. When the column terminates on a footing or mat SECTION 538

foundation, the transverse reinforcement as specified in
this section shall extend into the footing or mat at least COMPOSITE CONNECTIONS
300 mm. When the column terminates on a wall, the
transverse reinforcement shall extend into the wall for 538.1 Scope
at least the length required to develop full yielding in
the reinforced-concrete-encased shape and longitudinal This Section is applicable to connections in buildings that
reinforcement. utilize composite or dual steel and concrete systems wherein
seism ic load is transferred between structural steel and
8. Welded wire fabric is not permitted as transverse reinforced concrete components.
reinforcement for special seismic systems.
Composite connections shall be demonstrated to have
537.5 Filled Composite Columns strength, ductility and toughness comparable to that
exhibited by similar structural steel or reinforced concrete
This Section is applicable to columns that meet the connections that meet the requirements of Part 2A and ACI
limitations of Specification Section 509.2.2. Such columns 318, respectively. Methods for calculating the connection
shall be designed to meet the requirements of Specification strength shall meet the requirements in this Section.
Section 509, except as modified in this Section.
538.2 General Requirements
I. The nominal shear strength of the composite column
shall be the nominal shear strength of the structural Connections shall have adequate deformation capacity to
steel section alone, based on its effective shear area. resist the required strength at the design story drift.
The concrete shear capacity may be used in conjunction Additionally, connections that are required for the lateral
with the shear strength from the steel shape provided stability of the building under seismic loads shall meet the
the design includes an appropriate load transferring requirements in Sections 539 through 548 based upon the
mechanism. specific system in which the connection is used. When the
available strength of the connected members is based upon
2. In addition to the requirements of Section 537.5(1), in nominal material strengths and nominal dimensions, the
the special seismic systems described in Sections 540, determination of the available strength of the connection
543 and 545, the design loads and column splices for shall account for any effects that result from the increase in
filled composite columns shall also meet the the actual nominal strength of the connected member.
requirements of Part 2a Section 521.
538.3 Nominal Strength of Connections
3. Filled composite columns used in C-SMF shall meet
the following requirements in addition to those of The nominal strength of connections in composite structural
Sections 6.5(1) and 6.5(2): systems shall be determined on the basis of rational models
that satisfy both equilibrium of internal forces and the
a. The minimum required shear strength of the strength limitation of component materials and elements
column shall meet the requirements in ACI 318 based upon potential limit states. Unless the connection
Section 21.4.5.1. strength is determined by analysis and testing, the models
used for analysis of connections shall meet the requirements
b. The strong-column/weak-beam design of Sections 538.3(1) through 538.3(5).
requirements in Section 521. 5 shall be met.
Column bases shall be designed to sustain inelastic I. When required, force shall be transferred between
flexural hinging. structural steel and reinforced concrete through
(a) direct bearing of headed shear studs or suitable
c. The minimum wall thickness of concrete-filled alternative devices; (b) by other mechanical means;
rectangular HSS shall be: (c) by shear friction with the necessary clamping force
provided by reinforcement normal to the plane of shear
transfer; or (d) by a combination of these means. Any
tmin = ~Fy/2E (537-2) potential bond strength between structural steel and
reinforced concrete shall be ignored for the purpose of
the connection force transfer mechanism. The
for the flat width b of each face, where b is as contribution of different mechanisms can be combined
defined in Specification Table 502.4.1. only if the stiffness and deformation capacity of the
mechanisms are compatible.

The nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths shall b.1 Structural steel sections framing into the
meet the requirements of ACI 318 Chapters 10 and connections are considered to provide
II. Unless a higher strength is substantiated by cyclic confinement over a width equal to that of face
testing, the nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths bearing plates welded to the beams between the
shall be reduced by 25 percent for the composite flanges.
seismic systems described in Sections 540, 543, 545,
547, and 548. b.2 Lap splices are permitted for perimeter ties when
confinement of the splice is provided by face
2. The available strength of structural steel components in bearing plates or other means that prevents
composite connections shall be determined in spalling of the concrete cover in the systems
accordance with Part 2A ·and the Specification. described in Sections 541, 542, 543 and 546.
Structural steel elements that are encased in confined
reinforced concrete are permitted to be considered to be b.3 The longitudinal bar sizes and layout in
braced against out-of-plane buckling. Face bearing reinforced concrete and composite columns shall
plates consisting of stiffeners between the flanges of be detailed to minimize slippage of the bars
steel beams are required when beams are embedded in through the beam-to-column connection due to
reinforced concrete columns or walls. high force transfer associated with the change in
column moments over the height of the
3. The nominal shear strength of reinforced-concrete- connection.
encased steel panel-zones in beam-to-column
connections shall be calculated as the sum of the
nominal strengths of the structural steel and confined
reinforced concrete shear elements as determined in
Part 2A Section 540.3 and ACI 318 Section 21.5,
respectively.
4. Reinforcement shall be provided to resist all tensile

forces in reinforced concrete components of the
connections. Additionally, the concrete shall be
confined with transverse reinforcement. All
reinforcement shall be fully developed in tension or
compression, as appropriate, beyond the point at which
it is no longer required to resist the forces.
Development lengths shall be determined in accordance
with ACI 318 Chapter 12. Additionally, development
lengths for the systems described in Sections 540, 543,
545, 547, and 548 shall meet the requirements of ACI
318 Section 21.5.4.
5. Connections shall meet the following additional

requirements:
a. When the slab transfers horizontal diaphragm

forces, the slab reinforcement shall be designed
and anchored to carry the in-plane tensile forces at
all critical sections in the slab, including
connections to collector beams, columns, braces,
and walls.
b. For connections between structural steel or

composite beams and reinforced concrete or
encased composite columns, transverse hoop
reinforcement shall be provided in the connection
region of the column to meet the requirements of
ACI 318 Section 21.5, except for the following
modifications:


COMPOSITE PARTIALLY COMPOSITE SPECIAL MOMENT
RESTRAINED (PR) MOMENT FRAMES (C-SMF)
FRAMES (C-PRMF)
540.1 Scope
539.1 Scope
This sec ion is applicable to m ment frames that consist of
This section is appl lcable to frames that consist of S 1111 crura I either composite or reinforced concrete columns and either
steel columns and composite beams that are connected with structural steel or composite beams. Composite special
partially restrained (PR) moment connections that meet the moment frames ( 1-SMF) shall be designed assuming that
requirements in Specification Section 502.3,6b (b). significant inelastic deformations will OCCIII' under the
Composite partially restrained moment frames (C-PRMF) design earthquake. primarily in the beams. but with limited
inelastic deformarions in the column fmd/or connections,
shall be designed so that under earthquake loading yielding
occurs in the ductile components of the composite PR
beam-to-column 1110mCJlt connections, Limited yielding is 540.2 Columns
permitted at other locations, such as column base
connections. Connection flexibility and composite beam Composite columns shall meet the requirements for special
action shall be accounted for in determining 'the dynamic seismic systems of Sections 537.4 or 537,5, as appropriate.
characteristics, strength and drift ofC-PRMF, Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements of
ACI 318 Chapter 21, excluding Section 21.1 0,
539.2 Columns
540.3 Beams
Structural steel columns shall meet the requirements of .
Section 519 and 521 and the specification, Composite beams that are part of C-SMF shall also meet the
following requirements:
539.3 Composite Beams
1. The distance from the maximum concrete compression
Composite beams shall be unencased, fully composite and fiber to the plastic neutral axis shall not exceed,
shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 509.
For purpose of analysis, the sriffuess of the beams shall be Yeon + db
determined with all effective moment of inertia of the
composite section.
YPNA
= .1+ (1700F) .Y
(540-1 )
E
539.4 Moment Connections where
The required strength of the beam-to-column PR moment Yeon distance from the top of the steel beam to
connections shall be determined considering the effects of the top of concrete, mrn
connection flexibility and second-order moments, In depth of the steel beam, mm
addition, composite connections shall have a nominal specified minimum yield stress of the steel
strength that is at least equal to 50 percent of Mp' where beam, MPa
E elastic modulus of the steel beam, MPa
M p is the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connected
structural steel beam ignoring composite action,
2. Beam flanges shall meet the requirements of Part 2A
Connections shall meet the requirements. of Section 520 and
Section 540.4, except when reinforced-con crete-
shall have a total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radians that is
encased compression elements have a reinforced
substantiated by cyclic testing as described in Section
concrete cover of at least 50 mm and confinement is
522,2b,
provided by hoop reinforcement in regions where
plastic hinges are expected to occur under seismic
deformations. Hoop reinforcement shall meet the
requirements of ACI 318 Section 21.3.3.

Neither structural steel nor composite trusses are

SECTIONS41
permitted as flexural members to resist seismic loads in
C-SMF unless it is demonstrated by testing and COMPOSITE INTERMEDIATE
analysis that the particular system provides adequate MOMENT FRAMES (C-IMF)
ductility and energy dissipation capacity.
541.1 Scope
540.4 Moment Connections
This Section is applicable to moment frames that consist of
The required strength of beam-to-column moment either composite or reinforced concrete columns and either
connections shall be determined from the shear and flexure structural steel or composite beams. Composite intermediate
associated with the expected flexural strength, moment frames (C-IMF) shall be designed assuming that
RyMn (LRFD) or RyMn/1. 5 (ASD), as appropriate, inelastic deformation under the design earthquake will
of the beams framing into the connection. The nominal occur primarily in the beams, but with moderate inelastic
strength of the connection shall meet the requirements in deformation in the columns and/or connections.
Section 538. In addition, the connections shall be capable of
sustaining a total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radian. When 541.2 Columns
beam flanges are interrupted at the connection, the
connections shall demonstrate an interstory drift angle of at Composite columns shall meet the requirements for
least 0.04 radian in cyclic tests that is substantiated by intermediate seismic systems of Section 537.4 or 537.5.
cyclic testing as described in Part 2ASection 540.2.(b). For Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements of
connections to reinforced concrete columns with a beam ACI 318 Section 21.12.
that is continuous through the column so that welded joints
are not required in the flanges and the connection is not 541.3 Beams
otherwise susceptible to premature fractures, the inelastic
rotation capacity shall be demonstrated by testing or other Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the
substantiating data. requirements of the Specification.
540.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio 541.4 Moment Connections
The design of reinforced concrete columns shall meet the The nominal strength of the connections shall meet the
requirements of ACI 318 Section 2l.4.2. The column-to- requirements of Section 538. The required strength of
beam moment ratio of composite columns shall meet the beam-to-column connections shall meet one of the
requirements of Part 2A Section 522.6 with the following following requirements:
modifications:
I. The required strength of the connection shall be based
L The available flexural strength of the composite column on the forces associated with plastic hinging of the
shall meet the requirements of Specification Section beams adjacent to the connection.
509 with consideration of the required axial strength,
Prc· 2. Connections shall meet the requirements of Section 538
and shall demonstrate a total interstory drift angle of at
2. The force limit for Exception (a) in Part 2A Section least 0.03 radian in cyclic tests.
522.6 shall be P rc < O. lP c-
3. Composite columns exempted by the minimum flexural

strength requirement in Part 2A Section 522.6(a) shall
have transverse reinforcement that meets the
requirements in Section 537.4.3(3).

SECTIONS42 SECTIONS43
COMPOSITE ORDINARY MOMENT COMPOSITE SPECIAL
FRAMES CONCENTRICALLY BRACED
(C-OMF) FRAMES (C-CBF)
542.1 Scope 543.1 Scope
This Section is applicable to moment frames that consist of This Section is applicable to braced frames that consist of
either composite or reinforced concrete columns and concentrically connected members. Minor eccentricities are
structural steel or composite beams. Composite ordinary permitted if they are accounted for in the design. Columns
moment frames (C-OMF) shall be designed assuming that shall be structural steel, composite structural steel, or
limited inelastic action will occur under the design reinforced concrete. Beams and braces shall be either
earthquake in the beams, columns and/or connections. structural steel or composite structural steel. Composite
special concentrically braced frames (C-SCBF) shall be
542.2 Columns designed assuming that inelastic action under the design
earthquake will occur primarily through tension yielding
Composite columns shall meet the requirements for and/or buckling of braces.
ordinary seismic systems in Section 537.4 or 537.5, as
appropriate. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the 543.2 Columns
requirements of ACI 318, excluding Chapter 21.
Structural steel columns shall meet the requirements of Part
542.3 Beams 2A Sections 537 and 539. Composite columns shall meet
the requirements for special seismic systems of Section
Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the 537.4 or 537.5. Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the
requirements of the Specification. requirements for structural truss elements of ACI 318
Chapter 21.
542.4 Moment Connections
543.3 Beams
Connections shall be designed for the load combinations in
accordance with Specification Sections 502.3.3 and 502.3.4, Structural steel beams shall meet the requirements for
and the available strength of the connections shall meet the special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) of Part 2A
requirements in Section 520 and Section 524.2 of Part 2A. Section 526. Composite beams shall meet the requirements
of the Specification Section 509 and the requirements for
special concentrically braced frames (SCBF) of Part 2A
Section 526.
543.4 Braces
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for SCBF

of Part 2A Section 526. Composite braces shall meet the
requirements for composite columns of Section 543.2.
543.5 Connections
Bracing connections shall meet the requirements of Section

538 and Part 2A Section 526.

CHAPTER !) Structural Steel 5-223

COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED COMPOSITE ECCENTRICALLY
FRAMES (C-OBF) BRACED FRAMES (C-EBF)
544.1 Scope 545.1 Scope
This Section is applicable to concentrically braced frame This Section is applicable to braced frames for which one
systems that consist of composite or reinforced concrete end of each brace intersects a beam at an eccentricity from
columns, structural steel or composite beams, and structural the intersection of the centerlines of the beam and column,
steel or composite braces. Composite ordinary braced or intersects a beam at an eccentricity from the intersection
frames (C-OBF) shall be designed assuming that limited of the centerlines of the beam and an adjacent brace.
inelastic action under the design earthquake will occur in Composite eccentrically braced frames (C-EBF) shall be
the beams, columns, braces, and/or connections. designed so that inelastic deformations under the design
earthquake will occur only as shear yielding in the links.
544.2 Columns
Diagonal braces, columns, and beam segments outside of
Encased composite columns shall meet the requirements for the link shall be designed to remain essentially elastic under
ordinary seismic systems of Sections 537.4. Filled the maximum forces that can be generated by the fully
composite columns shall meet the requirements of Section yielded and strain-hardened link. Columns shall be either
537.5 for ordinary seismic systems. Reinforced concrete composite or reinforced concrete. Braces shall be structural
columns shall meet the requirements of ACI 318 excluding steel. Links shall be structural steel as described in this
Chapter 21. Section. The available strength of members shall meet the
requirements in the Specification, except as modified in this
544.3 Beams Section. C-EBF shall meet the requirements of Part 2A
Section 528, except as modified in this Section.
Structural steel and composite beams shall meet the
requirements of the Specification. 545.2 Columns
544.4 Braces Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements

for structural truss elements of ACI 318 Chapter 21.
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements of the Composite columns shall meet the requirements for special
Specification. Composite braces shall meet the requirements seismic systems of Sections 537.4 or 537.5. Additionally,
for composite columns of Sections 537.4a, 537.5, and where a link is adjacent to a reinforced concrete column or
544.2. encased composite column, transverse column
reinforcement meeting the requirements of ACI 318
544.5 Connections Section 21.4.4 (or Section 537.4c(6) a for composite
columns) shall be provided above and below the link
Connections shall be designed for the load combinations in connection. All columns shall meet the requirements of Part
accordance with Specification Sections 502.3.3 and 502.3.4, 2A Section 528.10.
and the available strength of the connections shall meet the
requirements in Section 538. 545.3 Links
Links shall be unencased structural steel and shall meet the

requirement for eccentrically braced frame (EBF) links in
Part 2A Section 528. It is permitted to encase the portion of
the beam outside of the link in reinforced concrete. Beams
containing the link are permitted to act compositely with the
floor slab using shear connectors along all or any portion of
the beam if the composite action is considered when
determining the nominal strength of the link.

545.4 Braces SECTION 546

Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for EBF ORDINARY REINFORCED
of Part 2A Section 528. CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS
545.5 Connections
COMPOSITE WITH STRUCTURAL
STEEL ELEMENTS (C-ORCW)
Tn addition to the requirements for EBF of Part 2A
Section 528, connections shall meet the requirements of 546.1 Scope
Section 520.
The requirements in this Section apply when reinforced
concrete walls arc c mposite with suucrural steel elements,
either as infil] panels, such as reinforced concrete walls in
structural steel frames with uncncased or reiofcreed-
concrete encased structural steel sections that act as
boundary members, or as structural steel coupling beams
that connect two adjacent reinforced concrete walls.
Reinforced concrete walls shall meet the requirements of
ACI 318 excluding Chapter 21.
546.2 Boundary Members
Boundary members shall meet the requirements of this

, Section:
I. When unencased structural steel sections function as

boundary members in reinforced concrete infill panels,
lite structural steel sections shall meet the requirements
of the Speci fication, Tim required axial strength of the
boundary member shall be determined assuming that
the shear forces are carried by the reinforced concrete
wall and the entire gravity and eveuurning forces are
carried by the boundary members in conjunction wi h
the shear wall. The reinforced concrete wall shall meet
the requirements of ACI3' I 8 excluding Chapter 2 'I.
2. When reinforced-concrete-encased shapes function as

boundary members in reinforced concrete infill panels,
the analysis shall be based upon II transformed concrete
section using elastic material properties. The wall shall
meet the requirements ,of A 1 318 excluding
Chapter 21. When the reinforced-concrete-encased
structural steel boundary member qualifies as a
composite column as defined ill Specification Section
509, it shall be designed to meet the ordinary seismic
system requirements of Section 537 An .. Otherwise, it
shall be designed as a composite colnrnn to meet the
requirements of ACJ 3 La Section 10.16 and
Section 509 anile Speciflcatlon.
3. Headed shear studs or welded reinforcement anchors

shall be provided to transfer vertical shear forces
between the structural steel and reinforced concrete.
Headed shear studs, if used shall meet the
requirements of Speei fi,cati0l1' Section 509. Welded
reinforcement anchors, ,j f used, shall meet the

CHAP'rEr~ 5 Structural Steel 5-225
requirements of A WS 0104. SECTION 547

546.3 Steel Coupling Beams SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE
SHEAR WALLS COMPOSITE WITH
Structural steel coupling beams that are used between two
adjacent reinforced concrete walls shall meet the
STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS
requirements of the Specification and this Section: (C-SRCW)
1. Coupling beams shall have an embedment length into 547.1 Scope
the reinforced concrete wall that is sufficient to develop
the maximum possible combination of moment and Special reinforced concrete shear walls composite with
shear that can be generated by the nominal bending and structural steel elements (C-SRCW) systems shall meet the
shear strength of the coupling beam. The embedment requirements of Section 15 for C-ORCW and the shear-wall
length shall be considered to begin inside the first layer requirement of ACI 318 including Chapter 21, except as
of confining reinforcement in the wall boundary modified in this Section.
member. Connection strength for the transfer of loads
between the coupling beam and the wall shall meet the 547.2 Boundary Members
Tn addition to the requirements of Section 547.2(1),
2. Vertical wall reinforcement with nominal axial strength unencased structural steel columns shall meet the
equal to the nominal shear strength of the coupling requirements of Part 2A Sections 519 and 521.
beam shall be placed over the embedment length of the
beam with two-thirds of the steel located over the first In addition to the requirements of Section 15.2(2), the
half of the embedment length. This wall reinforcement requirements in this Section shall apply to walls with
shall extend a distance of at least one tension reinforced-concrete-encased structural steel boundary
development length above and below the flanges of the members. The wall shall meet the requirements of ACI 318
coupling beam. It is permitted to use vertical including Chapter 21. Reinforced-concrete-encased
reinforcement placed for other purposes, such as for structural steel boundary members that qualify as composite
vertical boundary members, as part of the required columns in Specification Section 509 shall meet the special
vertical reinforcement. seismic system requirements of Section 53704. Otherwise,
such members shall be designed as composite compression
546.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams members to meet the requirements of ACI 318
Section 10.16 including the special seismic requirements for
Encased composite sections serving as coupling beams shall boundary members in ACI 318 Section 21.7.6. Transverse
meet the requirements of Section 546.3 as modified in this reinforcement for confinement of the composite boundary
Section: member shall extend a distance of 2h into the wall, where h
is the overall depth of the boundary member in the plane of
1. Coupling beams shall have an embedment length into the wall. Headed shear studs or welded reinforcing bar
the reinforced concrete wall that is sufficient to develop anchors shall be provided as specified in Section 546.2(3).
the maximum possible combination of moment and For connection to unencased structural steel sections, the
shear capacities of the encased composite steel nominal strength of welded reinforcing bar anchors shall be
coupling beam. reduced by 25 percent from their static yield strength.
2. The nominal shear capacity of the encased composite • I

"
steel coupling beam shall be used to meet the

requirement in Section 546.3(1).
3. The stiffness of the encased composite steel coupling

beams shall be used for calculating the required
strength of the shear wall and coupling beam.

547.3 Steel Coupling Beams SECTION 548

In addition to U1C requirements of Section 546.3. structural COMPOSITE STEEL PLATE SHEAR
steel coupling beams shall meet the requirements of Part 2A WALLS (C-SPW)
actions 528.2 and 518.3. When required in Part 2A Section
528.3, the coupling rotation shall be assumed as 0.08 radian 548.1 Scope
unless a smaller value is justified by rational analysis of the
inelastic deformations that arc expected under [he design This Section is applicable to structural walls consisting of
earthquake. Face bearing plates shall be provided on both steel plates with reinforced concrete encasement on one or
sides of the coupling beams at the face of the reinforced both sides of the plate and structural steel or composite
concrete wall. These stiffeners shall meet the detailing boundary members.
requirements of Part 2A Section 528.3.
548.2 Wall Elements
Vertical wall reinforcement as specified in Section 528.3(2)
shall be confined by transverse reinforcement that meets the
The available shear strength shall be cpVns (LRFD) or
requirements for boundary members of Acr 318
V nsff1 (ASD), as appropriate, according to the limit state
Section 21.7 .6.
of shear yielding of composite steel plate shear walls
(C-SPW) with a stiffened plate conforming to
547.4 Encased Composite Coupling Beams
Section 530.2(1) shall be
Encased composite sections serving as coupling beams shall

meet the requirements of Section 546.3, except the
requirements .of Part 2A Section 528.3 need not be met.
cp = 0.90 (LRFD) n= 1.67 (ASD)
V ns nominal shear strength of the steel plate, N

Asp horizontal area of stiffened steel plate, mm'
Fy specified minimum yield stress of the plate, MPa
The available shear strength of C-SPW with a plate that

does not meet the stiffening requirements in Section
530.2(1) shall be based upon the strength of the plate,
excluding the strength "Ofthe reinforced concrete, and meet
the requirements of the Specification Sections 507.2 and
507.3.
1. The steel plate shall be adequately stiffened by

encasement or attachment to the reinforced concrete if
it can be demonstrated with an elastic plate buckling
analysis that the composite wall can resist a nominal
shear force equal to V ns- The concrete thickness shall
be a minimum of 100 mm on each side when concrete
is provided on both sides of the steel plate and 200 mm
when concrete is provided on one side of the steel plate.
Headed shear stud connectors or other mechanical
connectors shall be provided to prevent local buckling
and separation of the plate and reinforced concrete.
Horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be provided
in the concrete encasement to meet or exceed the
detailing requirements in ACI 318 Section 14.3. The
reinforcement ratio in both directions shall not be less
than 0.0025; the maximum spacing between bars shall
not exceed 450 mm.

I
CHAPTER 5 Structural Steel 5-;;;/7 ,I.,
Seismic forces acting perpendicular to the plane of the SECTION 549

wall as specified by this code shall be considered ill the
design of the composite wall system. STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS
AND SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP
2. The steel plate shall be continuously connected on all
edges to structural steel framing and boundary
DRAWINGS, AND ERECTION
members with welds and/or slip-critical high-strength DRAWINGS
bolts to develop the nominal shear strength of the plate.
The design of welded and bolted connectors shall meet Structural design drawings and specifications, shop
the additional requirements of Part 2A Section 520. drawings, and erection drawings for composite steel and
steel building construction shall meet the requirements of
548.3 Boundary Members Part 2A Section 518.
Structural steel and composite boundary members shall be For reinforced concrete and composite steel building
designed to resist the shear capacity of plate and any construction, the contract documents, shop drawings, and
reinforced concrete portions of the wall active at the design erection drawings shall also indicate the following:
story drift. Composite and reinforced concrete boundary
members shall also meet the requirements of Section 547.2. !. Bar placement, cutoffs, lap and mechanical splices,
Steel boundary members shall also meet the requirements of hooks and mechanical anchorages.
Part 2A, Section 530.
2. Tolerance for placement of ties and other transverse
548.4 Openings reinforcement.
Boundary members shall be provided around openings as 3. Provisions for dimensional changes resulting from
required by analysis. . temperature changes, creep and shrinkage.
4. Location, magnitude, and sequencing of any

prestresssing or post-tensioning present.
5. If concrete floor slabs or slabs on grade serve as

diaphragms, connection details between the diaphragm
and the main lateral-load resisting system shall be
clearly identified,
User Note: For reinforced concrete and composite steel

building construction, the provisions of the following
documents may also apply: ACI 315-04 (Details and
Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement), ACI 315R-94
(Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for
Reinforced Concrete Structures), and ACI SP-66 (ACI
Detailing Manua!), including modifications required by
Chapter 21 of ACI 318-02 and ACI 352 (Monolithic Joints
in Concrete Structures).

SECTION 550 PART 3

QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN DESIGN OF COLD-FORMED STEEL
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
When required by this code or the engineer-of-record, a
quality assurance plan shall be provided. For the steel
portion of the construction, the provisions of Part 2A, SYMBOLS
Section 531 apply.
A Full unreduced cross-sectional area of
User Note: For the reinforced concrete portion, the member
provisions of ACI 121R~98 (Quality Management Systems A Area of directly connected elements or gross
for Concrete Construction), ACI 309.3R~97 (Guide to area
Consolidation of Concrete in Congested Areas and Difficult bl t + As, for bearing stiffener at interior
Placing Conditions), ACI 311.1R-Ol (ACI Manual of support and or under concentrated load,
Concrete Inspection) and ACI 311.4R-OO (Guide for and bzt + Asr for bearing stiffeners at end
Concrete Inspection) may apply. support
Gross cross-sectional area of bolt
18tZ + As1' for bearing stiffener at
interior support or under concentrated load,
and 10tZ + Ashfor bearing stiffeners at
end support
Effective area at stress F n
Effective net area
Cross-sectional area of compression flange
plus edge stiffener
Ag Gross area of element including stiffeners
Ag Gross area of section
Agv Gross area subject to shear
Ant Net area subject to tension
Anv Net area subject to shear
An Net area of cross-section
Ad Reduced 'area due to local buckling
Ap Gross-sectional area of roof panel per unit
width
Cross-sectional area of bearing stiffener
Gross area of stiffener
Gross area of shear stiffener
Net tensile area
Area of web
Net web area
Shear panel length of unreinforced web
element, or distance between shear stiffeners
of reinforced web elements
a Intermediate fastener or spot weld spacing
a Fastener distance from or outside web edge
a Length of bracing interval
Be Term for determining tensile yield point of
comers
b Effective design width of compression
element
b Flange width
bd Effective width for deflection calculation

Effective width of elements, located at D Dead load

centroid of element including stiffeners Dz,D3 Lip dimension
Effective width Depth of section
d
Effective width determined either by section Nominal screw diameter
d
552.4 or Section 552.5.1 depending on Flat depth oflip defined in Figure 552-9
d
stiffness of stiffeners
d Width of arc seam weld
Total flat width of stiffened element
d Visible diameter of outer surface of arc spot
Total flat width of edge stiffened element
weld
Largest sub-element flat width Diameter of bolt
Effective widths Average diameter of arc spot weld at mid-
=: Effective widths of bearing stiffeners thickness of t
For compression members, ratio of total Average width of seam weld
comer cross-sectional area to total cross- Nominal diameter (body or shank diameter)
sectional area of full section; for flexural Effective diameter of fused area
members, ratio of total comer cross-sectional
Effective width of arc seam weld at fused
area of controlling flange to full cross-
surfaces
sectional area of controlling flange
Diameter of hole
Coefficient
Depth of hole
Bearing factor
Diameter of standard hole
=< Bending coefficient dependent on moment
gradient Distance along roof slope between the ith
'" Constant from Table 557.1 purlin line and the lh anchorage device
Web slenderness coefficient Reduced effective width of stiffener
End moment coefficient III interaction Depth of stiffener
formula Effective width of stiffener calculated
c.; End moment coefficient III interaction according to Section 552.3
Screw head or washer diameter
formula
=: End moment coefficient III interaction Larger value of screw head or washer
formula diameter
Bearing length coefficient E Modulus of elasticity of steel, 203,000 Mpa,
Correction factor or 2,070,000 kg/cnr'
E Live load due to earthquake
Inside bend radius coefficient
Twist of stud from initial, ideal, unbuckled
Coefficient for lateral-torsional buckling
shape
='- End moment coefficient in interaction
E* Reduced modulus of elasticity for flexural
formula
and axial stiffness in second-order analysis
Cv =< Shear stiffener coefficient
e Distance measured in line of force from
Cw Torsional warping constant of cross-section center of a standard hole to nearest edge of an
Cwl Torsional warping constant of flange adjacent hole or to end of connected part
Cy Compression strain factor toward which the force is directed
e Distance measured in line of force from
c..c.. =: Axial buckling coefficients
center of a standard hole to nearest end of
C3 connected part
C1 to C6 Coefficients tabulated III Tables 554-3 to
Minimum allowable distance measured in
554-5 line of force from centerline of a weld to
= Calibration coefficient
nearest edge of an adjacent weld or to end of
"" Strip of flat width adjacent to hole connected part toward which the force is
Distance directed
Amount of curling displacement Eccentricities of load components measured
== Horizontal distance from edge of element to from the shear center and in the x and y
centerline of stiffener directions, respectively
Outside diameter of cylindrical tube Yield strain = F y/ E
D
Overall depth oflip Fabrication factor
D
D Shear stiffener coefficient Design stress range

FTH Threshold fatigue stress range Computed compressive stress in element

Fe Critical buckling stress being considered. Calculations are based on
Plate elastic buckling stress effective section at load for which deflections
Fer
Elastic distortional buckling stress are determined
Fd
Elastic buckling stress Computed stresses {1 and {z in unstiffened
Fe element, as defined in Figures 552-5 to
Fm Mean value of fabrication factor
552-8. Calculations are based on effective
Fn Nominal buckling stress
section at load for which serviceability is
Fn Nominal strength resistance of bolts determined
r; Nominal tensile strength resistance of bolts
{v Required shear stress on a bolt
r.; Nominal shear strength resistance of bolts
r.r. Stresses on un stiffened element defined by
r: Nominal tensile strength resistance for bolts Figures 552-6 to 552-8
subject to combination of shear and tension {1,{Z Stresses at the opposite ends of web
Yield stress as specified in Section 551.2.1, G Shear modulus of steel, 78,000 Mpa or
551.2.2, 551.2.3 795,000 kg/ern'
Nominal tensile stress in flat sheet g Vertical distance between two rows of
Tensile strength as specified in Section connections nearest to top and bottom flanges
55l.1.1,551.2.2, or 551.2.3 g Transverse center-to-center spacing between
Tensile strength of virgin steel specified by fastener gage lines
Section 551.2 or established in accordance g Gauge, spacing of fastener perpendicular to
with Section 556.3.3 force
Lower value of F y for beam web or F ys for H A permanent load due to lateral earth
bearing stiffeners pressure, including groundwater
Tensile strength of electrode classification h Depth of flat portion of web measured along
Tensile strength of members in contact with plane of web
screw head h Width of elements adjoining stiffened
Tensile strength of member not in contact element
with screw head h Lip height as defined in Figures 555-15 to
Nominal shear stress 555-18
Overall depth of unstiffened C-section
Yield stress used for design, not to exceed
member as defined in Figure 552-8
specified yield stress or established in
Depth of soil supported by the structure
accordance with Section 556, or as increased
for cold work of forming in Section 55l.7.2 Coped flat web depth
or as reduced for low ductility steels in x distance from the centroid of flange to the
section flange / web junction
Average yield stress of section Importance factor for earthquake
Tensile yield stress of comers Importance factor for wind
Adequate moment of inertial of stiffener, so
Weighted average tensile yield stress of flat
that each component element will behave as a
portions
stiffened element
Yield stress of stiffener steel
Effective moment of inertia
Tensile yield stress of virgin steel specified
Gross moment of inertia
by Section 551.2 or established in accordance
with Section 556.3.3 Actual moment of inertia of full stiffener
{ Stress in compression element computed on about its own centroidal axis parallel to
basis of effective design width element to be stiffened
r; Average computed stress in full unreduced
flange width
Ismin Minimum moment of inertia of shear
stiffener(s) with respect to an axis in plane of
Stress at service load in cover plate or sheet web
{e
Normal stress due to bending alone at the Moment of inertia of stiffener about
{bending
maximum normal on the cross section due to centerline of flat portion of element
combined bending and torsion Ix,ly Moment of inertia of full unreduced section
Normal stress due to torsion alone at the about principal axis
{torsion
maximum normal stress on the cross section x-axis moment of inertia of the flange
due to combined bending and torsion Product of inertia of full unreduced section
about major and minor centroidal axes

CHAPTER S 3trLlcturai Steel 5-·231
Product of inertia of flange about major and L Length of longitudinal welds

minor centroidal axes L Length of seam weld not including circular
Moment of inertia of compression portion of ends
section about centroidal axis of entire section L Length of connection
parallel to web using unreduced section L Unbraced length of member
y-axis moment of inertia of flange Overall length
L
Index of stiffener L Live load
Index of each purl in line L Minimum of Ler and Lm
I Saint-Venant torsion constant Distance between braces on one compression
Lb
Saint- Venant torsion constant of compression member
If flange plus edge stiffener about an x-y axis Unsupported length between brace points or
located at the centroid of the flange other restraints which restrict distortional
j Section property for torsional-flexural buckling of element
buckling Summation of critical path lengths of each
j Index for each anchorage device segment
K Effective length factor Critical unbraced length of distortional
K' A constant buckling
Lateral stiffness of anchorage device Gross failure path length parallel to force
Ka
Parameter for determining axial strength of Length of hole
Kaf
Z-Section member having one flange Distance between discrete restraints that
fastened to sheating restrict distortional buckling
Effective lateral stiffness of t'" anchorage Net failure path length parallel to force
device with respect to ith purlin Overhang length measured from the edge of
Required stiffness bearing to the end of member
Length at which local buckling stress equals
Lateral stiffness of roof system, neglecting
flexural buckling stress
anchorage devices
Net failure path length inclined to force
Kt Effective length factor for torsion
Length of bearing stiffener
Ktotali Effective lateral stiffness of all elements
Unbraced length of compression member for
resisting force
torsion
Effective length factor for buckling about x-
Net failure path length normal to force due to
axis
direct tension
Effective length factor for buckling about y-
Limit of unbraced length below which
axis
lateral-torsional buckling is not considered
Plate buckling coefficient
Un braced length of compression member for
Plate buckling coefficient for distortional
bending about x-axis
buckling
Unbraced length of compression member for
Plate buckling coefficient for local sub-
bending about y-axis
element buckling
I Distance from concentrated load to a brace
Shear buckling coefficient
M Required allowable flexural strength, ASD
Rotational stiffness
M Bending moment
Elastic rotational stiffness provided by the
Merd Distortional buckling moment
flange to the flange/web juncture
Mere Overall buckling moment
Geometric rotational stiffness demanded by
the flange from the flange /web juncture Merl Local buckling moment
Md Nominal moment with consideration of
Elastic rotational stiffness provided by the deflection
web to the flange/web juncture Mf Factored moment
Geometric rotational stiffness demanded by M f xr M fy = Moments due to factored loads with respect
the web from the flange/web juncture to centroidal axes
L Full span for simple beams, distance between Mm Mean value of material factor
inflection point for continuous beams, twice Mmax Absolute value of moment III unbraced
member length for cantilever beams segment
L Span length used for determining C b
L Length of weld
National Structural Code of the Pililippines Volume I, 7th Edition, 2015

= Nominal llexural strength Number of bolt holes

Nominal flexural strength for distortional Number of compression flange stiffeners
buckling Number of web stiffeners and/or folds
== Nominal flexural strength for overall Number of tension flange stiffeners
buckling Required allowable strength for concentrated
Mll1 Nominal flexural strength for local buckling load reaction in presence of bending moment
MlIx, Nominal flexural strengrbs about for ASD
Mny Section 553. P Required allowable strength (nominal force)
Nominal flexural strengths [resistance] about transmitted by weld for ASD
Mnxo,
centroidal axes determined in accordance P Required allowable compressive axial
Mnyo strength for ASD
with Section 553.1 excluding provisions of
Section 553.1.1.b P Professional factor
Mn.'l:t, Nominal flexural strength about centroidal P Required concentrated load (factored load)
Mnyl axes determined using gross, unreduced within a distance of O.3a on each side of a
cross-section properties brace, plus 1.4(1- lfa) times each
Mx,My Required allowable flexural strength with required concentrated load located farther
respect: to centroids! axes for ASD than 0, 3a but not farther than 1, Oa from the
Mu Required Ilexural strength with respect to brace
M,ry = Centroidal axes forLRFD P Required nominal brace strength resistance
My moment causiag maximum strain ey for a single compression member
Elastic buckling strengths resistance
My =
Yield moment ( S,F y)
Smaller end moment in an unbraced segment Lateral bracing forces
Ml
M2 Larger and moment in an unbraced segment Lateral force to be resisted by the I":
jij "" Required flexural strength factored moment anchorage device
u;», Required flexural strength factored m.oment Perd

Perl
Distortional buckling load
Local buckling load
Mz Torsional moment of required load P about
shear center r.: Overall buckling load
Pf Axial force due to factored loads
m Degrees of freedom
Term for determining tensile yield point of Pf Concentrated load or reaction due to factored
m
comers loads
Distance from shear center of one C-section Lateral force introduced into the system at
m
to mid-plane of web the ith purlin
Modification factor for type of bearing Mean value of the tested-to-predicted load
connection ratios
N Actual length of bearing Nominal web crippling strength
N Number of stress range fluctuations in design Nominal axial strength resistance of member
life Nominal axial strength resistance of bearing
Number of anchorage devices along a line of stiffener
anchorage Nominal strength resistance of connection
Notional lateral load applied at level i component
Number of purlin lines on roof slope Nominal bearing strength
Coefficient Nominal tensile strength resistance of welded
Number of stiffeners member
Nominal bolt strength
Number of holes
Nominal web crippling strength resistance of
Number of tests
C- or Z-Section with overhang(s)
Number of equally spaced intermediate brace
Nominal axial strength for distortional
locations
buckling
n Number of anchors in test assembly with
Nominal axial strength for overall buckling
same tributary area (for anchor failure), or
Nominal axial strength for local buckling
number of panels with identical spans and
loading to failed span (for non-anchor Nominal axial strength resistance of member
failure) determined in accordance with Section
n Number of threads per inch 553.3.4 with Fn = Fy

CHAPTER [i Structural Steel 5-233
Pnot Nominal pull-out strength resistance per Nominal strength

screw Nominal block shear rupture strength
r.: Nominal pull-over strength resistance per
screw
Average value of all test results
Reduction factor
Nominal shear strength resistance per screw Required strength for LRFD
Nominal tension strength resistance per Correction factor
screw Least radius of gyration of full unreduced
Required axial compressive strength cross-section,
resistance Centerline bend radius,
Concentrated load or reaction Minimum radius of gyration of full
Nominal shear strength resistance of screw as unreduced cross-section
reported by manufacturer or determined by Polar radius of gyration of cross-section
independent laboratory testing about shear center
Nominal tension strength [resistance] of Radius of gyration of cross-section about
screw as reported by manufacturer or centroidal principal axis
determined by independent laboratory testing s l,28,)E/I
Required axial strength for LRFD
Factored force required strength transmitted
s Variable load due to snow, including ice and
associated rain or rain
by weld, for LRFD Elastic section modulus of effective section
Required strength for concentrated load calculated relative to extreme compression
reaction in presence of bending moment for
fiber at Fe
LRFD
Elastic section modulus of effective section
Pwc Nominal web crippling strength resistance for
calculated relative to extreme compression or
C-Section flexural member
tension fiber at F y
Components of required load P parallel to x
and y axis, respectively Elastic section modulus of full unreduced
Member yield strength section relative to extreme compression fiber
Section modulus of full unreduced section
Required strength for concentrated load or relative to extreme tension fiber about
reaction concentrated load reaction due to appropriate axis
factored loads III presence of bending Elastic section modulus of full unreduced
moment section relative to extreme fiber in first yield
P Required compressive axial strength In-plane diaphragm nominal shear strength
P Pitch (mm per thread for SI units and ern per resistance
thread for MKS units) S Center-to-center hole spacing
Required allowable shear strength of Spacing in line of stress of welds, rivets, or
S
connection bolts connecting a compression cover plate or
Required shear strength (factored shear sheet to a non-integral stiffener or other
force) of connection element
Load effect Sheet width divided by number of bolt holes
S
Design load in plane of web in cross-section being analyzed
Reduction factor S Weld spacing
Required allowable strength for ASD S Pitch, spacing of fastener parallel to force
Modification factor Sf Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of any
Reduction factor consecutive holes
Reduction factor determined from uplift tests Clear distance from the, hole at ends of
in accordance with AISI S908 member
Coefficient Maximum permissible longitudinal spacing
Inside bend radius of welds or other connectors joining two C-
sections to form an I-section
Radius of outside bend surface
T Required allowable tensile axial strength for
Isla s 1 ASD
Allowable design strength Required allowable tension strength of
T
Reduction factor connection
Reduction factor T Load due to contraction or expansion caused
Effect of factored loads by temperature changes
National Structural Code of the Philippines Volume I, lth Edition, 2015

Tension due to factored loads for LSD Width of flange projection beyond web for
Factored tensile force of connection for LSD I-beams and similar sections; or half
distance between webs for box or U-type
Design strength factored resistance
sections
connection in tension
Required distributed gravity load supported
Required tensile axial strength for LRFD
by the ith purl in per unit length
Required tension strength of connection for
ut..to-out width
LRFD
Required tensile axial strength factored Leg of weld
tensile force Leg of weld
Required tension strength of connection Non-dimensional fastener location
factored tensile force Nearest distance between web hole and edge
t Base steel thickness of any element or of bearing
section Distance from shear center to centroid along
Thickness of coped web principal x-axis
Total thickness of two welded sheets Distance from flange/web junction to the
Thickness ofthinnest connected part centroid of the flange
Distance from flange or web junction to the
Lesser of depth of penetration and tz
centroid of the flange
Effective throat dimension of groove weld
x Distance from shear plane to centroid of
Thickness of uncompressed glass fiber
cross-section
blanket insulation
y Yield point of web steel divided by yield
Thickness of stiffener
point of stiffener steel
Effective throat of weld
Gravity load from the LRFD or 1,6 times the
Based thickness connected with fillet weld
ASD load combinations applied at level i
Thickness of member in contact with screw
Yo y distance from centroid of flange to shear
head
center of flange
Thickness of member not in contact with
a Coefficient for purlin directions
screw head
Reduction coefficient a Coefficient for conversion of units
a Load factor
Required allowable strength for ASD
a Coefficient for strength resistance increase
Coefficient of variation of fabrication factor
due to overhang
Shear force due to factored loads for LSD
a Coefficient accounts for the benefit of an
Factored shear force of connection for LSD
unbraced length, Lm, shorter than LeT
Coefficient of variation of material factor
Magnification factors
Nominal shear strength
Coefficient
Coefficient of variation of tested-to-
A value accounting for moment gradient
predicted load ratios
Coefficient of variation of load effect Required brace stiffness for a single
compression member
Required shear strength for LRFD
Target reliability index
Required shear strength of connection for
LRFD Lateral displacement of purlin top flange at
the line restraint
if Required shear strength factored shear
Ii,lii, y, Yi, W, Wi == Coefficient
w Wind load, a variable load due to wind
{web Stress gradient in web
w Required strength from critical load
Yi Load factor
combinations for ASD, LRFD, or LSD
Total required vertical load supported by 9 Angle between web and bearing surface >
I"111 III a smg
• 1 e bay 45° but no more than 90°
"It h: put
.
(} Angle between vertical and plane of web of
Components of required strength W
Z-section, degrees
Flat width of element exclusive of radii 92,93 Angle of segment of complex lip
Flat width of beam flange which contacts A,Ae Slenderness factors
bearing plate Parameters used in determining compression
.Ill, .11.2
w Flat width of narrowest unstiffened .11.3,.11.4 strain Factor
compression element tributary to Slenderness factor
connections At
Ad Slenderness factor

Poisson's ration for steel = 0.30

SECTION 551
Reduction factor
GENERAL PROVISIONS
(n2E)/(KxLx/r x)Z
(n2E) / (Lx/r x)2 551.1 Scope, Applicability and Definitions
(n2E)/(KyLy/r y)Z
551.1.1 Scope
(n2E)/(Ly/r y)Z
Torsional buckling stress This specification applies to the design of structural
Resistance factor members cold-formed to shape from carbon or low-alloy
Resistance factor bending steel sheet, strip, plate, or bar not more than 25 mm in
Resistance factor for concentrically loaded thickness and used for load-carrying purposes in
compression strength
Resistance factor for diaphragms I. Buildings; and
Resistance factor for tensile strength
2. Structures other than buildings provided allowances are
Resistance factor for fracture on net section
made for dynamic effects.
Resistance factor for shear strength
Resistance factor for web crippling strength 551.1.2 Applicability
IIz/tll
Parameter for reduced stiffness using second- This Specification includes Symbols and Definitions,
order analysis Section 551 through Section 557, Section C-I, to Section C-
Safety factor 3 that shall apply as follows:
Safety factor for bending strength
Safety factor for concentrically loaded Section C-I Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
compression strength Members Using Direct Design Strength
Safety factor for diaphragms Method
Safety factor for tension strength Section C-2 Second-Order analysis.
Section C-3 Additional Provisions
Safety factor for shear strength
Safety factor for web crippling strength
This Specification includes design provisions for
1. Allowable Str~ngth Design (ASD), and

2. Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
The nominal strength and stiffuess of cold-formed steel

elements, members, assemblies, connections, and details
shall be determined in accordance with the provisions in
Section 552 to Section 557, Section C-I to Section C-3 of
the Specification.
Where the composition or configuration of such
components is such that calculation of strength and/or
stiffness cannot be made in accordance with those
provisions, structural performance shall be established from
either of the following:
1. Available strength or stiffness by tests, undertaken and

evaluated in accordance with Section 556,
2. Available strength or stiffness by rational engineering

analysis based on appropriate theory, related testing if
data is available, and engineering judgment.
Specifically, the available strength is determined from
the calculated nominal strength by applying the
following safety factors or resistance factors:

For Members ASTM A606, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and
Strip, High-Strength, Low- Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
n= 2.00 (ASD) 0.80 (LRFD) Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
For Connections ASTM A 653M/A653M (SS 230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa,
340 MPa Class 1, Class 3 and Class 4, and 380 MPa;
n= 2.50 (ASD) 0.65 (LRFD) HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 275 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa Class
1 and 2, 410 MPa , & 480 MPa and 550 MPa , Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
551.1.3 Definitions
Zinc -Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Process
In this Specification, "shall" is used to express a mandatory
requirement, i.e., a provisions that the user is obliged to
satisfy in order to comply with the Specification; and "shall ASTM A792/A792M. (230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa, and
be permitted" is used it express an option or that which is 340 MPa Class 1 and Class 4), Standard Specification for
permissible within the limits of the Specification. Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-
Dip Process.
551.1.4 Units of Symbols and Terms
ASTM A847/A847M, Standard Specification for Cold-
Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy
The unit systems considered in those sections is SI units.
Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion
Resistance
551.2 Material
ASTM A875/A875M (SS 230 MPa, 255 MPa, 275 MPa,
551.2.1 Applicable Steels
and 340 MPa Class I and 3; HSLAS and HSLAS-F, 340
MPa, 410 MPa, 480 MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard
This Specification requires the use of steels intended for
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-
structural applications as defined in general by the
Coated by the Hot -Dip Process
specifications of the American Society for Testi?g Materials
listed in this section. The term SS shall designate sheet
ASTM AI003/AI003M (ST 340 MPa H, 275 MPa H, 255
material and the terms HSLAS and HSLAS-F shall
MPa H, 230 MPa H), Standard Specification for Steel
designate high- strength low-alloy steels.
Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-
Formed Framing Members
ASTM A361A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon
Structural Steel
ASTM AI008/Al008M (SS 170 MPa, 205 MPa, 230 MPa
Types 1 and 2, and 275 MPa Types 1 and 2; HSLAS
ASTM A2421 A242M, Standard Specification for High-
Classes 1 and 2, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa, 410 MPa,
Strength Low- Alloy Structural Steel
450 MPa, and 480 MPa; HSLAS-F 340 MPa, 410 MPa, 480
MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard Specification for Steel,
ASTM A283/A283M, Standard Specification for Low and
Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
ASTM A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
ASTM A1Oli/A101IM (SS 205 MPa, 230 MPa, 250 MPa
Rounds and Shapes
Types 1 and 2,275 MPa, 310 MPa, 340 MPa, and 380 MPa
; HSLAS Classes 1 and 2,310 MPa, 340 MPa, 380 MPa,
ASTM A5291A529M, Standard Specification for High -
410 MPa, 450 MPa, and 480 MPa ;HSLAS-F 340MPa, 410
Strength Carbon- Manganese Steel of Structural Quality
MPa, 480 MPa, and 550MPa), Standard Specification for
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
ASTM A572/A572M, Standard Specification for High- High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low- Alloy
Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel with Improved Formability
ASTM A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-

Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 345 MPa
Minimum Yield Point to 100mm thick

CHAPTr:;;R 5 Strllctural Steel 5-237
ASTM Al 0391 Al 039M (SS 275 MPa, 340 MPa, 3S0MPa, 551.2.3.2 Steels
410 MPa, 4S0 MPa, and 550 MPa), Standard Specification
for Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and Steels conforming to ASTM A653/A653M SS (550 MPa),
Structural, Produced by the Twin-Roll Casting Process. AIOOSI AIOOSM SS (550 Mpa), A792/A792M (550 Mpa),
Thicknesses of 3S0 MPa and higher that do not meet the AS751 AS75M SS (550 Mpa), thicknesses of ASTM AI039
minimum 10% elongation requirement are limited per Grades (3S0Mpa), (410 MPa) , (4S0 MPa), and (550M Pa )
Section 551.2.3.2. that do not meet the minimum 10 percent elongation
requirement in Section 551.2.3.1, and other steels that do
551.2.2 Other Steels not meet the provisions of Section 551.2.3.1 shall be
permitted for concentrically loaded closed box section
See Section 551.2.2 of Section C-3 compression members as given in Exception 2 below and
for multiple-web configurations such as roofing, siding, and
551.2.3 Ductility floor decking as given in Exception 1 provided that:
Steels not listed in Section 551.2.1 and used for structural 1. The yield stress, F y' used for determining nominal
members and connections in accordance with Section strength nominal resistance in Sections 551 to Section
551.2.2 shall comply with ductility requirements in either is taken as 75 percent of the specified minimum
Section 551.2.3.1 or Section 551.2.3.2: yield stress or 410 MPa, whichever is less, and
551.2.3.1 General 2. The tensile strength, F Uo used for determining nominal

strength nominal resistance in Section 555 is taken as
The ratio of tensile strength to yield stress shall not be less 75 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength or
than I.OS, and the total elongation shall not be less than 427 MPa, whichever is less.
10 percent for a 50 mrn gauge length or 7 percent for a 200
mm gauge length standard specimen tested in accordance Alternatively, the suitability of such steels for any multi-
with ASTM A370. If these requirements cannot be met, the web configuration shall be demonstrated by loads tests in
following criteria shall be satisfied: accordance with the provisions of Section 556. Available
strengths based on these tests shall not exceed the available
1. Local elongation in a 12.7 mm gauge length across the strengths calculated in accordance with Section 552 through
fracture shall not be less than 20 percent, and Section 557, Section C-I to Section C-3, using the specified
minimum yield stress, F sy, and the specified minimum
2. Uniform elongation outside the fracture shall not be
tensile strength, F U"
less than 3 percent. When material ductility is
determined on the basis of the local and uniform
Exception 1:
elongation criteria, the use of such material shall be
restricted to the design of puriins, girts, and curtain wall For multiple-web configurations, a reduced specified
studs in accordance with Sections 553.3.1 (a), Section minimum yield stress, RbF sy' shall be permitted for
553.3.2, Section 554.6.1, Section 554.6.2, Section determining the nominal flexural strength in Section
554.6.2a, and requirements given in Section C-3.2.1 of
553.3.1a, for which the reduction factor, Rb, shall be
the Section C-3. For purlins, girts, and curtain wall
determined in accordance with (a) or (b):
studs subject to combined axial load and bending
moment (Section 553.3.5) DcP I P n shall not exceed a. For stiffened and partially stiffened compression
0.15 for ASD, Pul c/JcPn shall not exceed 0.15 for flanges
LRFD, P f I c/J cP n shall not exceed 0.15 for LSD.
(551.2-1)
For wit s: O. 067E I Fsy
For O. 067E I F sy < wit < 0.974EIFsy

4
Rb = 1- O.26[(wFsyl(tE)) - O.067t
For 0.974 EIFsy::::; wit::::; 500

CHAPTEI::'; 5 Structllral SIP-AI 5-241
ASTM A500-03a, Standard Specification for Cold ASTM Al039/ Al039M-04, Standard Specification for
Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Steel, Sheet, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial and
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes Structural, Produced by the Twin-Roll-Casting Process
ASTM A529/A529M-05, Standard Specification for ASTM EI592-01, Standard Test Method for Structural
High Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding System
Quality by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM A563-04, Standard Specification for Carbon ASTM F436-04, Standard Specification for Hardened
and Alloy Steel Nuts Steel Washers
ASTM A563M-04, Standard Specification for Carbon ASTM F436M-04, Standard Specification for
and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric] Hardened Steel Washer [Metric]
ASTM A572/A572M-06, Standard Specification for ASTM F844-04, Standard Specification for Washers,
High -Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
Structural Steel
ASTM F959-05a, Standard Specification for
ASTM A588 / A588M-05, Standard Specification for Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
High- Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi for Use with Structural Fasteners
[345 MPa] Minimun Yield Point to 4-in. [IOOmm]
Thick ASTM F959M-04, Standard Specification for
Compressible Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
ASTM A606-04, Standard Specification for Steel, for Use with Structural Fasteners [Metric]
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low alloy, Hot- Rolled
and Cold- Rolled, with Improved Atmospheric 4. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers:CEGS-07416, Guide
Corrosion Resistance Specification for Military Construction, Structural
Standing Seam Metal Roof (SSSMR) System, 1995
ASTM A653/ A653M-06, Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 5. Factory Mutual, Corporate Offices, 1301 Atwood
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process Avenue, P.O. Box 7500,Johnston, RI 02919: FM 4471,
Approval Standard for Class 1 Metal Roofs, 1995
ASTM A847 / A847M-05, Standard Specification for
Cold Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength,
Low alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
ASTM A875 / A875M-05, Standard Specification for

Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy- Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM AI003/ A1003M-05, Standard Specification for

Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Non Metallic-
Coated for Cold Formed Framing Members
ASTM AI008/ AI008M-05b, Standard Specification

for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High- Strength Low Alloy, High- Strength Low Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and
Bake Hardenable
ASTM AlOlliA10llM-05a, Standard Specification for

Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low Alloy and High Strength Low alloy
with Improved Formability

Untitled

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Untitled

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NSCP C101-15

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc.

Tel. No : (+632) 410-0483

2. Changes and Developments

This NSCP 7th edition is referenced from the following:

b. International Building Code rsC-2009

c. American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI 7-10

d. American Concrete Institute AC131S-l4M

f. American Iron and Steel Institute AISI S 100-2007

g. Reinforced Masonry Engineering Handbook of America

h. Concrete Masonry Handbook, 6th Edition

1. American National Standard Institute ANSI EIArrIA-222-G-I-2007

j. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards

Significant revisions are summarized as follows:

The changes made in this chapter are the following:

a.I Section 102 - Definition of Failure

a.2 Section 103 - Classification of Structures

ASSOCiationof Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

b. Chapter 2 - Minimum Design Loads

The changes made in this chapter are the following:

b.1 Section 203 - Combination of Loads

b.2 Section 205 - Live Loads

b.3 Section 207 - Wind Loads

• directional procedure for buildings of all heights,

bA Section 208 - Earthquake Loads

ASCE/SEI 7-10, using spectral acceleration, is recognized as an alternative procedure in the

c. Chapter 3- Earthworks and Foundations

The revisions made in this chapter are the following:

c.9 Provisions pertaining to minimum dimensions of ditches have been modified;

d. Chapter 4 - Structural Concrete

d.2 Section 402: Notation and Terminology

d.3 Section 403: Referenced Standards

The following referenced specifications have been added to Section 403.2.4:

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

• AS/NZS 4671: 2001, Steel Reinforcing Materials

The following referenced specifications have been deleted:

d.4 Section 404: Structural System Requirements

d.5 Section 405: Loads

d.6 Section 406: Structural Analysis

The following new item has been added in Sub-section 406.6.2.3:

d.7 Section 40S: Two-Way Slabs

d.S Section 409: Beams

d.9 Section 412: Diaphragms

(a). Diaphragms that are cast-in-place slabs

(b). Diaphragms that comprise a cast-in-place topping slab on precast elements

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

(d). Diaphragms of interconnected precast elements without cast-in-place concrete

d.IO Section 418: Earthquake-Resistant Structures

d.ll Section 419: Concrete: Design and Durability Requirements

d.12 Section 420: Steel Reinforcement Propertles, Durability and Embedments

Sub-section 420.2.2.5 requires "Deformed non-prestressed longitudinal reinforcement resistmg earthquake

(a). ASTM A 706M, Grade 420

(b). ASTM A615M, Grade 280

d.13 Section 422: Sectional Strength

The following are the changes in Section 422:

d.14 Section 425: Reinforcement Details

d.LS Section 426: Construction Documents and Inspection

426.1.1 This Sub-section addresses (a) through (c):

Association of Structural Engineers of the Philippines, Inc. (ASEP)

2. Section 422, Structural Plain Concrete, now Section 414.

3. Section 423, Anchoring to Concrete, is now Section 417, with no significant

4. Section 421, Earthquake-Resistant Structures, now Section 418.

5. Section 427, Strut-and-Tie Models is now Section 423, with no significant

6. Section 420, Strength Evaluation of Existing Structures, is now Section 427.